DesignBuilderPrintableManualv4 5A4

DesignBuilder EnergyPlus Simulation
Documentation
for DesignBuilder v4.5
DesignBuilder No part of the manual is to be copied or reproduced in any form without

the express agreement of DesignBuilder Software Ltd
Contents
Learn About DesignBuilder ...................................................................................... 12
Keeping Up-to-date ................................................................................................... 13
DesignBuilder Tips ................................................................................................... 13
Capabilities ............................................................................................................... 13
Recent Files (Opening Screen) ................................................................................ 14
User Interface........................................................................................................... 15
Edit Screen............................................................................................................... 15
Licensing & Activation .............................................................................................. 16
Core Concepts ........................................................................................................... 35
Model Data Hierarchy & Data Inheritance ............................................................... 35
Templates And Components ................................................................................... 37
Blocks Introduction ................................................................................................... 37
Navigating Building Models ...................................................................................... 39
Customising Model Options ..................................................................................... 40
Building Models ......................................................................................................... 41
Create New Site ....................................................................................................... 41
Building Geometry ................................................................................................... 41
Combined Constructions .......................................................................................... 97
Building Block.......................................................................................................... 100
Outline Block............................................................................................................ 101
Using Outline Blocks To Create A Dormer Window .............................................. 102
Component Block .................................................................................................... 105
Standard Component Block ................................................................................... 106
Ground Component Block ...................................................................................... 107
Adiabatic Component Blocks ................................................................................. 108
Extruded Block Form .............................................................................................. 109
Sloped Wall Block Form ......................................................................................... 110
Pitched Roof Block Form ........................................................................................ 111
Pitched Roof Drawing Options ............................................................................... 112
Automatic Pitched Roof Geometry......................................................................... 113
Dome Block Form .................................................................................................... 117
General Block Form ................................................................................................ 117
Model Data ............................................................................................................. 169
Semi-Exposed ........................................................................................................ 202
Floors ..................................................................................................................... 202
Zone Statistics........................................................................................................ 203
Fixed Surface Thicknesses .................................................................................... 207
Considerations For Parametric Analysis And Optimisation ................................... 208
Void Depths ............................................................................................................ 209
Special Conditions ................................................................................................. 209
Geometry Convention Examples ........................................................................... 210
Curtain Glazing - Example ..................................................................................... 210
Psi Values Including Metal Cladding ..................................................................... 217
Psi Values NOT Including Metal Cladding ............................................................. 218
Photovoltaic Options .............................................................................................. 221
PV Generator - Simple ............................................................................................. 221
PV Solar Collector Performance - Equivalent One Diode ................................... 222
Current ................................................................................................................... 224
Voltage ................................................................................................................... 224
Nominal Operating Cell Temperature .................................................................... 224
Calculated Natural Ventilation ................................................................................ 226
Scheduled Natural Ventilation + Heating And Cooling Design Calculations ......... 228
Reveal .................................................................................................................... 231
Frame Data ............................................................................................................ 235
Dividers .................................................................................................................. 236
Window Shading ...................................................................................................... 238
Limitations .............................................................................................................. 241
Local Shading .......................................................................................................... 241
Operation ............................................................................................................... 243

Free Aperture ......................................................................................................... 244
Scheduled Natural Ventilation ................................................................................ 245
Reveal .................................................................................................................... 247
Frame Data ............................................................................................................ 250
Dividers .................................................................................................................. 251
Operation ............................................................................................................... 253
Free Aperture ......................................................................................................... 254
Reveal .................................................................................................................... 257
Frame And Dividers ................................................................................................. 260
Frame Data ............................................................................................................ 261
Dividers .................................................................................................................. 262
Window Shading ...................................................................................................... 264
Limitations .............................................................................................................. 267
Operation ............................................................................................................... 268
Free Aperture ......................................................................................................... 268
Calculated Natural Ventilation................................................................................ 270
Calculated Natural Ventilation ................................................................................ 273
NCM Setting ........................................................................................................... 283
Separate Fans And Pumps Setting ....................................................................... 283
1-Room Ventilation ................................................................................................ 284
2-Ideal Loads ......................................................................................................... 284
Heating Capacity .................................................................................................... 287
Heating Plant.......................................................................................................... 287
Local Heating Units ................................................................................................ 288
1-Convective .......................................................................................................... 288
2-Radiant/Convective Units ................................................................................... 288
Operation ............................................................................................................... 289
Supply Air Conditions ............................................................................................. 289
Cooling Plant .......................................................................................................... 289
Operation ............................................................................................................... 290
Humidification......................................................................................................... 290
Dehumidification..................................................................................................... 291
FCU Ventilation ........................................................................................................ 293
FCU Heating ............................................................................................................. 295
Operation ............................................................................................................... 295
FCU Cooling ............................................................................................................. 295
Operation ............................................................................................................... 296
Unitary Single Zone ............................................................................................... 296
Unitary Multizone ................................................................................................... 297
Unitary Ventilation ................................................................................................... 299
Mechanical Ventilation ........................................................................................... 299
Unitary Fans ............................................................................................................. 301
Unitary Heat Recovery ............................................................................................ 301
Unitary Economisers ............................................................................................... 302
Unitary Heating ........................................................................................................ 303
Heating Plant.......................................................................................................... 304
Radiator/Baseboard Heating (Disabled In V3) ....................................................... 304
Operation ............................................................................................................... 305
Unitary Cooling ........................................................................................................ 305
Cooling Plant .......................................................................................................... 306
Operation ............................................................................................................... 307
Unitary Humidity Control ........................................................................................ 307
Humidification......................................................................................................... 307
De-Humidification ................................................................................................... 307
VAV Systems ......................................................................................................... 308

CAV Systems ......................................................................................................... 309
VAV & CAV Ventilation ............................................................................................ 311
Mechanical Ventilation ........................................................................................... 311
Outside Air ............................................................................................................. 311
Outside Air Mixing .................................................................................................. 312
VAV & CAV Fans ...................................................................................................... 314
VAV & CAV Economisers ....................................................................................... 315
VAV & CAV Heat Recovery ..................................................................................... 316
VAV Zone Terminal Units ........................................................................................ 317
VAV & CAV Heating ................................................................................................. 318
Heating Plant (Building Level) ................................................................................ 319
Outside Air Preheat Coils (Building Level) ............................................................. 319
AHU Heating (Building Level) ................................................................................ 319
VAV Terminal Reheat Coils (Zone Level) .............................................................. 320
Radiator/Baseboard Heating (Zone Level) (Disabled In V3) ................................. 321
Local Heating Control (Zone Level) ....................................................................... 321
VAV & CAV Cooling ................................................................................................. 321
Cooling Plant (Building Level) ................................................................................ 322
VAV Central Cooling Coils (Building Level) ........................................................... 322
Operation (Zone Data) ........................................................................................... 323
VAV & CAV Humidity Control ................................................................................. 323
Humidification......................................................................................................... 324
De-Humidification ................................................................................................... 324
VAV & CAV Night Cycle Control ............................................................................ 324
Natural Ventilation .................................................................................................. 329
Operation ............................................................................................................... 329
Outdoor Temperature Limits .................................................................................. 329
Delta T Limits ......................................................................................................... 330
Delta T And Wind Speed Coefficients ................................................................... 331
Summary Of Scheduled Natural Ventilation Operation Rules ............................... 332
Internal Windows, Doors And Vents ...................................................................... 332
Wind And Rain ....................................................................................................... 336
Temperature Control .............................................................................................. 337
Enthalpy Control..................................................................................................... 337
Dewpoint Control.................................................................................................... 337
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 337
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 349
Custom Diffuser Coefficients ................................................................................. 350
Height Settings ....................................................................................................... 350
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 351
Custom Diffuser Coefficients ................................................................................. 352
Height Settings ....................................................................................................... 352
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 353
Heat Gain To Zone ................................................................................................ 365
Simple Options ....................................................................................................... 365
Heat Gain To Zone ................................................................................................ 367
Battery Storage ...................................................................................................... 367
Battery Life ............................................................................................................. 368
General .................................................................................................................. 369
Simple .................................................................................................................... 369
Heat Gains To Zone ............................................................................................... 370
General .................................................................................................................. 370
Function Of Power ................................................................................................. 370
General .................................................................................................................. 371
Lookup Table ......................................................................................................... 372
Efficiency At Nominal Voltage ................................................................................ 372
Tariff ....................................................................................................................... 375

Schedules .............................................................................................................. 376
Other Settings ........................................................................................................ 378
Charge Selection.................................................................................................... 380
Charge : Simple ..................................................................................................... 380
Charge : Block........................................................................................................ 381
Variables Used ....................................................................................................... 387
Variable N Settings ................................................................................................ 387
January Through December Values ...................................................................... 387
Line Item N Inputs .................................................................................................. 390
Discount Settings ................................................................................................... 393
Dates For Study ..................................................................................................... 395
Other Settings ........................................................................................................ 396
Recurring Cost N Settings ..................................................................................... 397
Non-Recurring Cost N Settings .............................................................................. 399
Use Price Escalation N Settings ............................................................................ 400
Escalation Data ...................................................................................................... 401
Adjustment N Settings ........................................................................................... 401
Adjustment Data..................................................................................................... 402
Detailed HVAC ....................................................................................................... 417
General .................................................................................................................. 473
Operation ............................................................................................................... 473
Night Cycle (Common To All AHUs) ...................................................................... 473
Extract Fan ............................................................................................................. 474
Mixed Mode............................................................................................................ 474
Air Handling Unit Outdoor Air System (Common To All AHUs) ............................. 474
Recirculation .......................................................................................................... 475
Economiser ............................................................................................................ 475
Outdoor Air Schedules ........................................................................................... 477
Demand Controlled Ventilation .............................................................................. 479
Heat Recovery (Common To All AHUs) ................................................................ 480
Pre-treatment ......................................................................................................... 486
General .................................................................................................................. 487
Operation ............................................................................................................... 487
Supply Air Temperature ......................................................................................... 487
Supply Air Flow Rates ............................................................................................ 487
Supply Fan ............................................................................................................. 488
Extract Fan ............................................................................................................. 488
Thermostat Location .............................................................................................. 488
Night Cycle ............................................................................................................. 489
Mixed Mode............................................................................................................ 489
Outdoor Air System ................................................................................................ 489
General .................................................................................................................. 490
Operation ............................................................................................................... 490
Supply Fan ............................................................................................................. 490
Extract Fan ............................................................................................................. 491
Thermostat Location .............................................................................................. 491
Supplemental Heater ............................................................................................. 491
Night Cycle ............................................................................................................. 492
Mixed Mode............................................................................................................ 492
Outdoor Air System ................................................................................................ 492
General .................................................................................................................. 492
Water Temperatures .............................................................................................. 493
Air Temperatures ................................................................................................... 494
Operation ............................................................................................................... 494
Controller ................................................................................................................ 494
Heating Coil - Water Outputs ................................................................................. 495
General .................................................................................................................. 495

Operation ............................................................................................................... 496
Heating Coil - Electric Outputs ............................................................................... 496
Part Load Performance .......................................................................................... 497
Operation ............................................................................................................... 497
General .................................................................................................................. 498
Compressor............................................................................................................ 498
Defrost.................................................................................................................... 499
Performance Curves .............................................................................................. 499
Crankcase Heater .................................................................................................. 500
Operation ............................................................................................................... 501
Heating Coil - DX Outputs ...................................................................................... 501
General .................................................................................................................. 502
Operation ............................................................................................................... 503
Controller ................................................................................................................ 503
Cooling Coil - Water Outputs ................................................................................. 504
General .................................................................................................................. 506
Operation ............................................................................................................... 506
Latent Capacity Degradation ................................................................................. 507
Condenser.............................................................................................................. 508
Evaporative Condenser ......................................................................................... 508
Basin Heater .......................................................................................................... 510
Run Settings ........................................................................................................... 510
DX Cooling Coil Outputs ........................................................................................ 510
General .................................................................................................................. 512
Operation ............................................................................................................... 513
Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance ............................................................... 513
Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance ........................................................... 513
Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1 Coil Performance ............................................. 513
Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1+2 Coil Performance ......................................... 513
Basin Heater .......................................................................................................... 513
Run Settings ........................................................................................................... 514
DX Cooling Coil Outputs ........................................................................................ 514
General .................................................................................................................. 515
Flow Rates ............................................................................................................. 516
Motor ...................................................................................................................... 516
Operation ............................................................................................................... 516
Algorithm ................................................................................................................ 516
Fan - Constant Volume Outputs ............................................................................ 517
General .................................................................................................................. 517
Flow Rates ............................................................................................................. 518
Motor ...................................................................................................................... 519
Fan Coefficients ..................................................................................................... 519
Operation ............................................................................................................... 519
Algorithm ................................................................................................................ 519
Fan - Variable Volume Ouputs............................................................................... 520
Operation ............................................................................................................... 521
Algorithm ................................................................................................................ 522
Fan - On/Off Outputs ............................................................................................. 522
Fan Data ................................................................................................................ 524
Operation ............................................................................................................... 525
General .................................................................................................................. 530
Settings .................................................................................................................. 530
Operation ............................................................................................................... 530
General .................................................................................................................. 530
Settings .................................................................................................................. 530
Blowdown ............................................................................................................... 531
Operation ............................................................................................................... 531

General .................................................................................................................. 533
Settings .................................................................................................................. 533
Secondary Fan ....................................................................................................... 533
Operation ............................................................................................................... 533
General .................................................................................................................. 535
Settings .................................................................................................................. 535
Secondary Fan ....................................................................................................... 535
Blowdown ............................................................................................................... 535
Operation ............................................................................................................... 536
General .................................................................................................................. 536
Settings .................................................................................................................. 536
Secondary Fan ....................................................................................................... 536
Blowdown ............................................................................................................... 537
Operation ............................................................................................................... 537
General .................................................................................................................. 612
Condenser.............................................................................................................. 613
Flow Rates ............................................................................................................. 614
Basin Heater .......................................................................................................... 614
Generic Chiller Outputs .......................................................................................... 614
General .................................................................................................................. 618
Condenser.............................................................................................................. 619
Temperatures ......................................................................................................... 619
Flow Rates ............................................................................................................. 620
Part Load Settings ................................................................................................. 621
Generic Chiller Outputs .......................................................................................... 622
Chiller Electric EIR Outputs ................................................................................... 625
Chiller:Electric:EIR Technical Description ........................................................... 626
Overview ................................................................................................................ 626
Model Description .................................................................................................. 626
General .................................................................................................................. 635
Pump Settings ........................................................................................................ 635
Pump - Constant Speed Outputs ........................................................................... 635
General .................................................................................................................. 636
Pump Settings ........................................................................................................ 636
Pump Coefficients .................................................................................................. 637
Pump - Variable Speed Outputs ............................................................................ 637
General .................................................................................................................. 640
Ground Heat Exchanger - Vertical ......................................................................... 640
Flow Rate ............................................................................................................... 640
Borehole And Pipe Geometry ................................................................................ 640
G Function Data Pairs ............................................................................................ 641
Sizing Vertical Ground Heat Exchangers .............................................................. 642
General .................................................................................................................. 646
Ground Heat Exchanger - Pond............................................................................. 646
General .................................................................................................................. 648
Ground Heat Exchanger - Surface......................................................................... 648
General .................................................................................................................. 649
Control .................................................................................................................... 650
Piping ..................................................................................................................... 650
Compressor............................................................................................................ 652
Defrost.................................................................................................................... 652
Condenser.............................................................................................................. 653
General .................................................................................................................. 654
Cooling Capacity Ratio Modifier Function Of Temperature Curves ....................... 655
Cooling Energy Input Ratio (EIR) Modifier Function Of Temperature Curves ....... 655
Other Curves .......................................................................................................... 656
General .................................................................................................................. 657
Heating Capacity Ratio Modifier Function Of Temperature Curves ...................... 658
Heating Energy Input Ratio (EIR) Modifier Function Of Temperature Curves ...... 658
Heating Energy Input Ratio Modifier Function Of Part-Load Ratio Curves ........... 659
Other Curves .......................................................................................................... 659
General .................................................................................................................. 660
Cooling ................................................................................................................... 660
Heating ................................................................................................................... 661
General .................................................................................................................. 664
Operation ............................................................................................................... 664
General .................................................................................................................. 665
Heating Coil............................................................................................................ 665
Operation ............................................................................................................... 665
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 665
General .................................................................................................................. 666
Air Flow .................................................................................................................. 667
Heating Coil............................................................................................................ 668
Outdoor Air ............................................................................................................. 668
Operation ............................................................................................................... 669
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 669
General .................................................................................................................. 669
Air Flow .................................................................................................................. 670
Heating Coil............................................................................................................ 670
Operation ............................................................................................................... 670
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 670
General .................................................................................................................. 671
Outdoor Air ............................................................................................................. 671
Operation ............................................................................................................... 672
General .................................................................................................................. 672
Air Flow .................................................................................................................. 672
Heating Coil............................................................................................................ 673
Operation ............................................................................................................... 673
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 673
General .................................................................................................................. 674
Heating Coil............................................................................................................ 674
Operation ............................................................................................................... 674
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 675
General .................................................................................................................. 675
Heating Coil............................................................................................................ 676
Cooling Coil ............................................................................................................ 676
Operation ............................................................................................................... 676
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 676
General .................................................................................................................. 677
Operation ............................................................................................................... 677
General .................................................................................................................. 677
Operation ............................................................................................................... 678
General .................................................................................................................. 680
Performance Parameters ....................................................................................... 681
Operation ............................................................................................................... 682
General .................................................................................................................. 685
Tube Settings ......................................................................................................... 686
Flow Settings.......................................................................................................... 686
Pump Settings ........................................................................................................ 686
Control .................................................................................................................... 687
Operation ............................................................................................................... 688
Tube Settings ......................................................................................................... 688
Flow Settings.......................................................................................................... 689
Control .................................................................................................................... 689
Operation ............................................................................................................... 690
General .................................................................................................................. 694
Tube Settings ......................................................................................................... 694
Flow Settings.......................................................................................................... 695

Pump Settings ........................................................................................................ 695
Control .................................................................................................................... 695
Condensation Control ............................................................................................ 696
Operation ............................................................................................................... 697
General .................................................................................................................. 697
Tube Settings ......................................................................................................... 698
Flow Settings.......................................................................................................... 698
Control .................................................................................................................... 698
Condensation Control ............................................................................................ 699
Operation ............................................................................................................... 700
General .................................................................................................................. 701
Operation ............................................................................................................... 701
Operation ............................................................................................................... 702
General .................................................................................................................. 702
Operation ............................................................................................................... 703
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 703
General .................................................................................................................. 704
Operation ............................................................................................................... 704
Outdoor Air Supply ................................................................................................. 707
Cooling Coil ............................................................................................................ 707
Heating Coil............................................................................................................ 707
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 707
Fan Coil Unit - Four Pipe Outputs .......................................................................... 708
Fan ......................................................................................................................... 710
Compressor............................................................................................................ 712
Supplemental Heater ............................................................................................. 712
Operation ............................................................................................................... 712
Advanced ............................................................................................................... 712
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Outputs ............................................................... 713
Fan ......................................................................................................................... 716
Outdoor Air ............................................................................................................. 717
Operation ............................................................................................................... 718
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Outputs ......................................................... 718
General .................................................................................................................. 721
Operation ............................................................................................................... 721
Parasitic Electric Energy ........................................................................................ 721
Supply Fan ............................................................................................................. 722
Model Options ........................................................................................................ 727
Components ............................................................................................................. 793
Construction Components ..................................................................................... 794
Glazing Components ............................................................................................. 805
Materials ................................................................................................................. 808
Pane Components ................................................................................................. 826
Schedules .............................................................................................................. 831
Simulation Hourly Weather Data ............................................................................ 838
Profiles ................................................................................................................... 848
Textures ................................................................................................................. 849
Window Gas ........................................................................................................... 849
Metabolic Rates ..................................................................................................... 851
Local Shading Components ................................................................................... 851
Window Blinds........................................................................................................ 855
Vent Components .................................................................................................. 862
Holiday Schedule ................................................................................................... 863
Ground Domain ...................................................................................................... 864

Templates ................................................................................................................. 871
Activity Templates .................................................................................................. 872
Construction Templates ......................................................................................... 874
Glazing Templates ................................................................................................. 875
Facade Templates (Types) .................................................................................... 876
Lighting Templates ................................................................................................. 877
HVAC Templates ................................................................................................... 879
Location Templates ................................................................................................ 880
Crack Templates .................................................................................................... 881
Legislative Region Templates ................................................................................ 882
Energy Code Templates ........................................................................................ 884
Sector Templates ................................................................................................... 884
Times Zone Templates .......................................................................................... 885
Wind Pressure Coefficient Templates ................................................................... 885
Visualisation............................................................................................................. 887
Visualisation Controls ............................................................................................ 888
Creating Movies ..................................................................................................... 895
Calculations ............................................................................................................. 897
Heating Design Calculation .................................................................................... 897
Cooling Design Calculation .................................................................................... 902
Simulation Using Real Weather Data .................................................................... 909
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) ................................................................... 948
Daylighting Calculations ....................................................................................... 1001
Cost And Carbon.................................................................................................. 1016
Reporting ................................................................................................................ 1019
Export Data .......................................................................................................... 1019
Report Topics ....................................................................................................... 1020
Compile Reports .................................................................................................. 1020
Export CSV Report .............................................................................................. 1021
Program Options ................................................................................................... 1023
Program Options - User Interface ........................................................................ 1023
Program Options - Dialogs ................................................................................... 1025
Program Options - Files ....................................................................................... 1027
Program Options - EnergyPlus ............................................................................ 1027
Program Options - Limits ..................................................................................... 1032
Program Options - International ........................................................................... 1032
Library Management ............................................................................................. 1035
Opening Screen - Component Libraries .............................................................. 1035
Template Library Management ............................................................................ 1037
Import Components/Templates............................................................................ 1038
Export Components/Templates ........................................................................... 1038
Backup Component/Template Libraries .............................................................. 1040
Restore Component/Template Libraries .............................................................. 1040
Menu ....................................................................................................................... 1041
File Menu ............................................................................................................. 1041
Edit Menu ............................................................................................................. 1042
Go Menu .............................................................................................................. 1043
View Menu ........................................................................................................... 1043
Tools Menu .......................................................................................................... 1043
Help Menu ............................................................................................................ 1044
Modelling Advice ................................................................................................... 1045
Working With Large Models ................................................................................. 1045
ASHRAE 90.1 Modelling ...................................................................................... 1047
Natural Ventilation Modelling ............................................................................... 1050
DCV Modelling ..................................................................................................... 1053
Ground Modelling ................................................................................................. 1055
Adjacent Buildings ............................................................................................... 1060
Electrochromic Glazing ........................................................................................ 1060
Trombe Walls ....................................................................................................... 1061
Double Skin Facades ........................................................................................... 1064

Autosizing Heating And Cooling Equipment ........................................................ 1066
Daylight Saving And Local Time .......................................................................... 1067
Solar Radiation Distribution ................................................................................. 1067
Warehouse With Office ........................................................................................ 1073
Start Up And Pre-conditioning ............................................................................. 1076
Energy Management System (EMS) .................................................................... 1076
EMS Program Dialog ........................................................................................... 1079
DesignBuilder Erl ................................................................................................. 1082
DesignBuilder Files, Location And Extensions .................................................... 1133
Hardware Requirements ...................................................................................... 1135
Results Viewer ..................................................................................................... 1137
Diagnostics ........................................................................................................... 1145
Surface Types ...................................................................................................... 1145
Calculation Of Air Density .................................................................................... 1151
Pitched Roof Geometry - Technical Description .................................................. 1151
Calculation Of HVAC Energy Consumption From EnergyPlus Loads ................. 1154
Limitations ............................................................................................................ 1155
Component Blocks Used For Local Shading ....................................................... 1155
Data Recovery ..................................................................................................... 1157
Standards Used In DesignBuilder ........................................................................ 1158
O Thermal Comfort Calculator ............................................................................. 1158
EPC Process In Scotland ..................................................................................... 1160
Calculating Fan Pressure Rise ............................................................................ 1161
Importing Custom Templates And Components .................................................. 1162
Lock/Unlock Model ............................................................................................... 1163
EnergyPlus Background Information .................................................................. 1165
EnergyPlus Documentation ................................................................................. 1165
Exporting IDF Files .............................................................................................. 1165
EnergyPlus Version Compatibility ........................................................................ 1166
EnergyPlus IDF Window Dimensions .................................................................. 1167
Calculation Of DesignBuilder Output From EnergyPlus Report Variables .......... 1167
EnergyPlus Errors And Warnings ........................................................................ 1175
EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations ........................................................................ 1179
EnergyPlus Thermal Comfort ............................................................................... 1180
EnergyPlus Date Definition .................................................................................. 1184
When DesignBuilder Output Is Different From Unprocessed EnergyPlus Output1185
Custom EnergyPlus Reports ................................................................................ 1186
EnergyPlus Daylight Map Output ......................................................................... 1189
Support - Getting Help .......................................................................................... 1191
Tutorials ............................................................................................................... 1191
Frequently Asked Questions ................................................................................ 1192
Welcome to DesignBuilder v4.5

DesignBuilder is a user-friendly modelling environment where you can
work (and play) with virtual building models. It provides a range of
environmental performance data such as: energy consumption,
carbon emissions, comfort conditions, daylight illuminance, maximum
summertime temperatures and HVAC component sizes.
Some typical uses of DesignBuilder are:
Calculating building energy consumption.

Evaluating faade options for overheating and visual
appearance.
Thermal simulation of naturally ventilated buildings.
Reporting savings in electric lighting due to use of natural
daylight.
Prediction of natural daylight distribution through Radiance
simulations
Visualisation of site layouts and solar shading.
Calculating heating and cooling equipment sizes.
Detailed simulation and design of HVAC and natural ventilation
systems including the impact of supply air distribution on
temperature and velocity distribution within a room using CFD
ASHRAE 90.1 and LEED energy models
Economic analysis based on construction costs, utility costs
and life cycle costs (LCC)
UK, Ireland, France and Portugal Building regulations and
certification reports
Design optimisation with multiple objectives, constraints and
design variables
Communication aid at design meetings.
An educational tool for teaching building simulation to
architectural and engineering students.
DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus dynamic simulation engine to

generate performance data.
Learn About DesignBuilder

If you're new to DesignBuilder you are probably keen to start using the program right away, but there's a few
things you should do before you dive in:
Watch the Getting Started Tutorials.

Read Important tips about software use.
A few minutes spent with these resources will be time well spent.
- 12 -
Keeping Up-to-date
There is a range of other freely available learning resources on the Learn DesignBuilder section of the
website.
Where you see this icon in the Help documents there is a Video Tutorial providing extra information on the
topic. Note that you can also work through all of the DesignBuilder Tutorials in a structured way.
Keeping Up-to-date
Visit www.designbuilder.co.uk for upgrades, new products and news about DesignBuilder.
DESIGNBUILDER TIPS
Miscellaneous information you should know before starting 'serious work' with DesignBuilder:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Buildings are put together by drawing blocks. Block creation and edit operations take place at the
building level.
Blocks can be subdivided into more than one zone by drawing partitions. Partitioning takes place at the
block level.
Default data is inherited from the level above, so blocks inherit their data from the building level, zones
inherit their data from blocks, surfaces from zones and openings from surfaces. It is therefore possible
to make global changes to the model by changing data at building level. It is possible to override
default by editing the data. So for example, you could change the external wall construction for a whole
block.
Data templates are the source of default data in DesignBuilder. They can also be used for loading data
to the model en masse. For example you can load the 'Energy code - heavyweight' construction
template at the building level to change the construction of the entire building to thermally heavyweight
elements which comply with local energy codes/building regulations.
You can clear non-default data (i.e. data that has been explicitly entered) to its default state by using
the Clear to default command.
When drawing a block which touches another block, you should use the shift key to lock the base
perimeter to the correct plane before drawing. You can release the shift key once you have placed the
first point of the perimeter.
Use the snap points - DesignBuilder block geometry is quite easy to work with but you must use the
positioning tools provided to ensure that blocks connect exactly. The only way to do this is to use snaps
- do not position blocks and partitions relative to each other 'by eye'.
Large building models can take a long time to simulate. You should familiarise yourself with the
Working with Large Models help topic before creating a large/complex DesignBuilder model.
DesignBuilder dsb files are already compressed so there is no need to 'Zip' them when attaching to emails or support forums.
Understand DesignBuilder constructions, in particular the way floors and ceilings are defined.
Name your zones. Do this by clicking twice (not double-clicking) on the name in the Navigator and
typing the name. This is especially useful when merging zones and when checking adjacencies of
individual surfaces in the Navigator.
If you are exporting IDF data for use outside DesignBuilder please read the Exporting EnergyPlus IDF
Files topic.
CAPABILITIES
Environmental performance data is displayed without needing to run external modules and import data
and any simulations required to generate the data are started automatically.
EnergyPlus Compact HVAC descriptions provide an easy way into detailed analysis of commonly
used heating and cooling systems.
Natural ventilation can be modelled with the option for windows to open based on a ventilation set point
temperature.
Daylighting - models lighting control systems and calculates savings in electric lighting.
Shading by louvres, overhangs and sidefins as well as internal and mid pane blinds.
- 13 -
A comprehensive range of simulation data can be shown in annual, monthly, daily, hourly or sub-hourly
intervals:
Energy consumption broken down by fuel and end-use.
Internal temperatures
Weather data
Heat transmission through building fabric including walls, roofs, infiltration, ventilation etc.
Heating and cooling loads.
CO2 generation.
Heating and cooling plant sizes can be calculated using design weather data.
Parametric analysis screens allow you to investigate the effect of variations in design parameters on a
range of performance criteria.
Generate EnergyPlus IDF files and work with these outside DesignBuilder to access EnergyPlus
system functionality not provided by DesignBuilder.
RECENT FILES (OPENING SCREEN)
The Recent Files Opening Screen has a list of the files used in your previous DesignBuilder modelling
sessions. To access one of these files again you can double-click on it in the grid, or single click in the grid to
select it and then 'Open selected site' from the Info Panel on the Toolbar.
You can also:
Create a new file (site) from this screen.

Open existing dsb file from the DesignBuilder Data folder. This is located beneath the main
Documents by default.
- 14 -
Keeping Up-to-date
USER INTERFACE
The DesignBuilder user interface has been designed from first principles for ease of use. Each screen has a
specific purpose which is described in the Info panel on the right of the screen along with context sensitive
commands and other relevant information.
The Info panel is only displayed in Learning mode. If you would prefer to have simultaneous access to the
Model Data and the Edit View you can switch Learning mode off from the Program Options dialog from the
Tools menu.
The user interface is described for each group of screens:
Opening Screen - Recent Files

Opening Screen - Component Libraries
Opening Screen - Template Libraries
Edit Screen
Visualisation Screen
See also the Introducing DesignBuilder User Interface Tutorial
EDIT SCREEN
The diagrams below illustrate the various components of the DesignBuilder Edit Screen with Learning Mode
switched on and off.
Learning Mode On
With Learning mode switched on the Edit screen will look similar to the screenshot below.
Use the Model data tabs to access Activity, Construction, Openings, Lighting and HVAC model data.
- 15 -
You can find information on using the Info | Data tab to view component and template data in the Opening
Screen - Templates help topic.
Learning Mode Off

The screenshot below shows the same model but with Learning mode Off. Edit Screen and Model data are
visible simultaneously and there is no Info Panel..
LICENSING & ACTIVATION

Help menu > Licence
DesignBuilder consists of a modelling Graphical User Interface (GUI) connected to a number of modules each
providing a particular functionality. Modules include Simulation, Visualisation, HVAC, CFD etc. You will need a
license for each of the modules you intend to use. If you require more than one module then the most
convenient way to obtain DesignBuilder licences is usually to purchase a DesignBuilder package. Each
package consists of 2 or more module licences, each module giving access to a particular aspect of
DesignBuilder functionality.
There are various types of licence and ways of licensing all accessed from the Licence Manager dialog (Help
> Licence menu option). The types of licence are:
Single user licence which allows you install DesignBuilder onto a maximum of 2 computers for
personal use, for example one on a desktop and one on a laptop. If you need to use the software on a
third computer then you must first deactivate one of the other 2 computers. When you purchase a
DesignBuilder single user license, you will receive an 8-character activation code. To use this enter it in
the License dialog. This will cause DesignBuilder to automatically download licences for all modules
associated with the activation code and activate them. You will then be able to use the software and
run functionality associated with each activated license.
- 16 -
Keeping Up-to-date
Site network licence where a site license server is installed on one computer on the network and
provides module licenses on demand to DesignBuilder users on the network. With a site license you
purchase individual DesignBuilder modules in quantities sufficient to support your concurrent use
requirements.
Pay as you go credits, currently only available for Certification licences, this is a low cost of entry
license for occasional certification users or for organisations with many affiliated energy assessors. Pay
as you go license allows the certification module to be used on any number of computers. Each time an
SBEM calculation is run to generate a new EPC or Part-L calculation, a pre-purchased credit is
deducted.
For details on how to licence the software please read on.

Evaluation
When you first install DesignBuilder you can request an evaluation license to be sent by email. To do this
open the Licence Manager dialog and click on the Evaluate button (this button will only be enabled if no other
licences are loaded on the machine).
This takes you to a new dialog where you can enter your user details including an email address.
- 17 -
You will then be sent an email with an activation code. Copy the activation code from the email and return to
the Licence Manager dialog, pressing the Licence button to open the Licence Manager Wizard.
Here select the Activation code option, confirm your user details and press Next. On the next page paste
your activation code into the text box.
- 18 -
Keeping Up-to-date
Evaluation licences are valid for 30 days from the date of request and allow you to try out a fully functional
version of the software to check that it meets your needs and is compatible with your computer. You can read
about restrictions with evaluation licences on the main website.
Activation
When you purchase single user licences to use DesignBuilder, you are sent an e-mail containing an an 8character code. You should copy (Ctrl-C) the activation code from the e-mail and follow these steps in
DesignBuilder:
Open the Licence Manager dialog (Help > Licence). Click on the Licence button to open the Licence
Manager Wizard.
- 19 -
Here select the Activation code option and press Next.
- 20 -
Keeping Up-to-date
Enter your user details including a valid email address and press Next.
On the next page paste your activation code into the text box and press Next.
- 21 -
You should see a message to say that the various modules have been activated.
- 22 -
Keeping Up-to-date
When you press Finish, if the activation was successful, you will be shown the Modules Licence tab displaying
the licence status of each module.
- 23 -
Note 1: If you purchased a Single User Licence then you will be able to activate the code up to 2 computers. If
you find that DesignBuilder is being used on these 2 computers simultaneously then you should purchase an
extra licence.
Note 2: You must be connected to the Internet to activate and deactivate DesignBuilder licenses. If your
network has a strict firewall policy then you should ensure that DesignBuilder.exe is allowed to access the
www.designbuilder.co.uk website.
Licence file
You may have been supplied with a licence file with extension .lic containing your licence or extended
evaluation. Typical reasons for using a .lic file are when on a training course where you may not have access
to the Internet for activation or for customers who have purchased licences but either do not have Internet
access or have strict firewall policies preventing the standard web-based activation from working.
To activate DesignBuilder modules using a .lic file follow the instructions below. Before starting make sure the
lic file you received has been saved to a place where you can access it, e.g. desktop, a pen drive, documents
folder etc. The location does not have to be permanent as DesignBuilder will store a copy of the lic file in a
safe place on the local machine.
Manager Wizard.
- 24 -
Keeping Up-to-date
Select the Licence file option and press Next.
- 25 -
Click on the browse button, select the Licence file and press Next.
Press the Finish button to complete the action.

Site Network Licensing (client side)
With site network licenses each client computer on the network can "check out" licenses from the license
server application which manages the allocation of licenses. The system is designed to provide a maximum
number of concurrent users according to the number of seats purchased. For example if you purchased a site
licence with 10 seats for the EnergyPlus module then the software can be installed on any number of
computers but only a maximum of 10 people will be able to access DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulations at
any one time. If an eleventh person on the network tries to check out an EnergyPlus license (by starting
DesignBuilder with EnergyPlus selected in the License dialog) then they will receive a message to say that the
seats are all in use and to wait until one becomes available.
DesignBuilder site licensing requires a simple server application to run on the network to provide licenses.
Each client computer has a setting to tell the software to run in site license mode and where to find the
Licence Server on the network. The site licensing system is quite straightforward but does require a network
administrator with adequate IT skills to set it up.
To set up site network licensing on a client computer (i.e. the computer that is to run DesignBuilder) follow the
instructions below.
Manager Wizard.
- 26 -
Keeping Up-to-date
Select the Site network licence option and press Next.
- 27 -
On the second page enter:

a.
Either the name of the server or its IP address.
You can find the IP address of your server by typing ipconfig in the Windows Command box on the
server machine.
- 28 -
Keeping Up-to-date
b.
The port number which will usually be 5303.
When you click the Finish button the connection to the License Server is established based on the port
number and IP address you provided on the dialog.
If the site network licence connection was successful you will be shown the Modules Licence tab displaying
the licence status of each module.
- 29 -
Once back to the main License Manager dialog you can check out or check back in module licenses through
the check boxes in the Use column for each module.
If the server host name or IP address was incorrect, if that server is not running or if the Licence Server
service isn't running then the licences will not be accessed and error messages are displayed.
More Detailed Information on Licensing
Setting up a Licence Server for Site network licenses
Single User Licences

A single user licence allows you install DesignBuilder onto a maximum of 2 computers for personal use, for
example one on a desktop and one on a laptop. If you need to use the software on a third computer then you
must first deactivate one of the other 2 computers.
When you purchase a DesignBuilder single user license, you will receive an 8-digit activation code. To use
this enter it in the License dialog accessed from the Help menu within DesignBuilder and press the Activate
button. This will cause DesignBuilder to automatically download licences for all modules associated with the
activation code and activate them. You will then be able to use the software and run functionality associated
with each activated license.
Setting up a Licence Server for Site Network Licenses

Site network licenses require a license server application to be installed and run on a server on the network.
DesignBuilder runs on the client machines on the same Windows network and obtains licences from the
license server on a concurrent basis.
Summary of Process
In summary, the steps to set up DesignBuilder Site Licenses are:
1.
2.
Download the designb_rlm.zip file from the Downloads > Software area of the DesignBuilder website
Extract the files in the designb_rlm.zip file to the folder on the server to be used to store DesignBuilder
site license files (e.g. c:\RLMSERVER)
- 30 -
Keeping Up-to-date
3.
4.
5.
Obtain the License file by clicking on activate.cmd, following instructions on the webpage and saving
the license file to the site license folder.
Run the RLM server as a service and start the service.
On client machines which are to run the DesignBuilder software, open the Licence Manager dialog
(Help > License menu option) and enter the ip address or hostname of site license server host.
The above steps are detailed below.
Detailed Steps
Obtain your License File
With Site Network Licenses the License file is obtained through the activation code you received when
ordering the software.
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Before you run the rlm server you will need to obtain your license file and save it into the rlm installation
folder. That's the folder containing rlm.exe and other files listed above.
You should have received an activation code from your site license purchase. This is an 8-digit number
and is needed to activate the license.
Open the rlm installation folder in Windows Explorer and double click on activate.cmd
This loads a web page at www.designbuilder.co.uk with a form for you to enter your activation code.
Other values in the form such as Hostid are automatically filled in for you. After entering your activation
code click Activate License and if successful you will be presented with a download link for your
activated license file.
Download the license file and save in your rlm installation folder.
If your server cannot access the Internet

If your server computer has no internet connection then activate.cmd will not be able to connect a browser
window to the designbuilder.co.uk web server and you will have to activate manually by following these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Obtain your server hostid by running the command rlmutil rlmhostid -q 32

Obtain the ip address using the command rlmutil rlmhostid -q internet
Obtain the hostname with command rlmutil rlmhostid -q host
Make a note of the hostid, ip address, hostname and your DesignBuilder activation code and go to
a computer with internet connection and run:
http://www.designbuilder.co.uk/license/activate_site.php
5.
Enter your details in to the form and download the resulting .lic file.
- 31 -
6.
Place a copy of the .lic file in the site license installation folder on your host server.
Running the RLM Server

The server can be run directly by double clicking rlm.exe. This runs a command window and logs activity to
the window. This is useful when you first run the license server as you'll be able to see the license server
starting up correctly and loading the license file as well as DesignBuilder clients obtaining licenses from the
server.
Running RLM as a Service

It is best to set rlm up to run as a Windows service rather than in the command window, otherwise you'll need
to remember to manually restart the license server when the computer reboots.
If you are running rlm in a command window you should close that before starting up rlm as a service.
To create the Windows service to run rlm automatically double click on service_install.cmd or use Manage
Windows Service in the admin interface.
Note: The service will be added to Windows services but not started.
Use Control Panel > Services to start DesignBuilder License Server.
- 32 -
Keeping Up-to-date
Once started in this way the service will restart automatically if the computer is rebooted. By default the
service will write a log file designb_rlm.log into the rlm installation folder. If you want this in a different
location you can use the admin interface (above) to set up the service then you can specify the service name
and the log file location.
You may experience problems with permissions when setting up the service. You can either disable the UAC
or try right clicking service_install.cmd and choosing "Run as administrator".
Even this doesn't always give you access to the Service Control Manager. You can check this by running a
cmd prompt, changing folder to the license server installation folder and running the rlm install service
command (below).
If you edit service_install.cmd you'll see the command being executed is:
rlm -install_service -dlog "%CD%\designb_rlm.log" -service_name "DesignBuilder License Server" -c "%CD%"
If you see this error returned "Error: Access to Service Control Manager denied" you can get over this by
running cmd as administrator and then run the install command. To do this right click Command Prompt on
the start menu and run as administrator. Change folder to the license manager installation folder and run the
rlm.exe -install_service command given above and it should work.
- 33 -
More on this in the License Manager FAQs at http://www.reprisesoftware.com/support/faq.php
RLM Server Admin Interface

RLM provides a browser-based administration interface to the license server. To run this, double click on the
admin_interface.cmd file in the RLM folder using Windows Explorer.
Refer to the RLM End User Manual (double click online_manual.cmd) for more details on using the admin
interface.
Note: DesignBuilder does not use the Activation page of the admin interface.
Reprise Software, developers of the RLM licensing system, always maintains a current version of the RLM
End User's Manual here:
www.reprisesoftware.com/RLM_Enduser.html
Adding a lic file for extra seats

If you purchase additional seats for a site network license system, the new licenses are provided in the form of
a lic file download. The process of obtaining the additional lic file is the same as described above under
Obtaining your License File. The new lic file does not replace the existing lic files, but is used in addition to the
existing licenses. The license server reads these multiple lic files, licenses from multiple lic files adding to give
the total number of seats of concurrent use that are allowed.
Setting up Client Machines

This steps involved in pointing client machines to the License Server is described on the main Licensing &
Activation page. From DesignBuilder you can check out or check back in module licenses using the License
Manager which can be accessed from the Help menu.
- 34 -
Core Concepts
Core Concepts
Some core concepts you should be familiar with before attempting to use DesignBuilder on a real project are:
Model data hierarchy and data inheritance

Templates and components
Blocks
Navigating building models
Customising model detail
MODEL DATA HIERARCHY & DATA INHERITANCE

DesignBuilder models are organised in a simple hierarchy:
Default data is inherited from the level above in the hierarchy, so block data is inherited from building level,
zone data is inherited from block data and surface data from zone data. This arrangement allows you to make
settings at building level which can becomes active throughout the whole building; or make settings at block
level to change data for all zones/surfaces in the block. So for example, if the External wall construction is set
to 'Wall 1' at building level, then this will be the default External wall for all blocks in the building. It is possible
to change the inherited defaults in any of these blocks by making an explicit selection (say 'Wall 2'). All the
zones in the block whose external wall construction was set to 'Wall 2' have that default External wall
construction.
The construction and opening defaults are inherited down to surface level where the data is actually used in
the calculations. For example it is the External wall construction model data at the surface level that defines
the actual construction used for that external wall. The External wall model data set at zone, block and
building level has no effect on the model (other than by providing the default data for the level below in the
hierarchy).
To assist in identifying where data is inherited from DesignBuilder uses a colour code. Data set at building
level or user defined data hard set at any level below will appear in red. All data inherited at levels below will
be in blue (see below).
- 35 -
The simplest way of determining where data is inherited from is to start at the lowest level, a surface or
opening, and go up through the levels until the data turns red. This then is the level from which the data has
been inherited.
The DesignBuilder hierarchy mechanism is a fast way of setting data globally in a building model, but you
must take care to enter the minimum amount of data to get the most from the inheritance system. For
example if all zones in a particular block have the same activity called say 'Office work', you should set the
activity at block level and not multiple times at zone level. Equally if all the blocks in the building have the
same activity, you should set the data at the building level and allow the blocks to inherit the data from the
building. By keeping the amount of user data to a minimum, you will find it quicker to make changes at a later
date. Clearly it is much faster to change a few Model data items at building and block level than it is to make
multiple changes at zone or surface levels.
When entering construction data, you could set the construction for each surface in the model but in practice
this would be an extremely inefficient process. It is faster and less error-prone to set the construction as high
up in the hierarchy as possible, possibly at building level (if all external walls in the building have that external
wall construction), or at block level if all walls in that block have the construction (and other blocks don't).
Most data at the building level is 'user data' as buildings do not inherit their data from the site level.
To undo user defined hard set data run the Edit > Clear to default menu command and select All data or
Custom openings and specify level (block, zone or surface) down to which the data is to be cleared.
Defaults
In short the rules are:
Construction and Openings data is used at the surface level, i.e. all construction and opening data at
building, block and zone level is default data and only data at surface level is actually used to define
the model.
Activity, Lighting, HVAC, Equipment data is used at the zone level, i.e. all Activity, Lighting, HVAC,
Equipment data at building and block level is default data. The exception is AHU data for Compact
HVAC systems which is set at building level.
A common question is "Why do I see Pitched roof constructions at building/block/zone level on the
Constructions tab when my building/block/zone doesn't have a pitched roof"?
The answer is that the Pitched roof construction setting at building, block and zone levels should be thought of
as the default setting for any pitched roofs that may (or may not) exist in the model further down in the
hierarchy. If there are no pitched roofs in the model then the data is simply not used.
Custom openings
When custom openings have been created at surface level these override the facade layout Model data for
the surface.
- 36 -
Core Concepts
Openings
Although openings (windows, vents, doors etc) appear in the DesignBuilder hierarchy, there is no way in
version 1 to change data at the opening level. All openings inherit their data from the surface level. It is
therefore not possible to have different glazing types on a particular surface. If you click on an opening in the
Navigator you are actually taken to the surface containing the openings.
Component blocks
Component blocks inherit their data from building level.
Partition data inheritance

There are 2 types of partition surface:
Partitions separating zones within a single block. These partitions within a block inherit their data from
the block level. Why? They can't inherit from zone level because there are 2 zones adjacent to the
partition so they inherit from the next level up in the hierarchy - blocks.
Inter-block partitions which separate zones in 2 different blocks have 2 parent blocks and so it is not
possible for the data to inherit from block level for these surfaces so data inherits directly from building
level.
TEMPLATES AND COMPONENTS
Templates are databases of typical generic data.

Components are databases of individual data items (e.g. a construction type, material, window pane) .
DesignBuilder allows you to build up your own libraries of templates and components. Note that each user on
a computer maintains their own database of templates and components.
Template and component libraries are loaded into your model at the time it is created and new custom data
from other computers can be imported at any time.
BLOCKS INTRODUCTION
Blocks are the basic geometric shapes that you use to assemble a DesignBuilder model. The idea of blocks is
to provide fairly simple objects that you can easily move around in 3-D space in a similar fashion to that of
building a physical model using bricks from a construction set. Blocks are created by drawing 2-D perimeters
on horizontal or vertical planes and then extruding these perimeters to form 3-D shapes:
- 37 -
Blocks are versatile objects and once created can easily be modified by moving their surfaces, by stretching
them and even by cutting them using arbitrary planes. Typically, you might use a block to represent an entire
building storey:
Or a particular building design might lend itself to an obvious division into blocks:
You can model an entire building as a single block:
And then cut the block into storeys:
- 38 -
Core Concepts
Once the overall geometry of a model has been established with blocks, you can go 'into' a block and subdivide it into a number of rooms or zones using partitions:
If you sub-divide a block internally using partitions, you can still modify the block by stretching, cutting,
rotating, etc. and where possible the internal geometry will be kept.
Also blocks can have boolean geometry operations applied such as Union, where 2 blocks are combined into
a single new block, Difference (subtract), in which one block is subtracted from the other to form a single new
block and Intersection, where a new block is formed where the 2 original blocks intersect.
NAVIGATING BUILDING MODELS
There are various ways of navigating (moving around) DesignBuilder models:

Single clicking the appropriate entry in the Navigator panel is the most versatile way because every
object in the building has an entry in the Navigation panel.
Double-clicking on the appropriate object in the Edit Screen takes you do it.
Single-clicking on the appropriate object in the Edit Screen then mouse right mouse clicking on the
object and selecting the 'Go to menu option at the top.
- 39 -
Go to the level up in the hierarchy by pressing <F3> or by right mouse clicking in the Edit Screen and
selecting the 'Go up... menu option.
The Next <F5> and Back <F4> Navigation buttons allows you to move sequentially through the model
(avoiding surfaces). This approach can be slow but can be useful when it is necessary to methodically
work through the model for any reason.
The Figure below shows how to either click on the Navigator entry or double-click on the Edit Screen to go to
'Zone 1' from 'Block 1'.
See also HVAC Component Hierarchy and Navigation.
CUSTOMISING MODEL OPTIONS

DesignBuilder models can be customised to allow you to enter the level of detail which is appropriate to your
building design or modelling project. In early-stage design work you will generally want to use generic
selections for most Model Data and so would choose the corresponding 'low data requirement' model options.
As the building design firms up, more information becomes available and you can change the model options
to use more specific data tailored to the project and less generic data.
The 'standard' Model Option set is loaded at the point the building is created and you should generally keep
these options unless you have specific reason to change.
Model Options are set in the Model Options dialog from the Edit menu.
- 40 -
Building Models
Building Models
The process for creating a new building model typically follows a sequence:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Create new site.

Create new building.
Draw and manipulate building blocks to create building geometry.
Partition building into thermal zones.
Set Model Data.
Add any 'custom openings' (windows, doors etc) by drawing up the surface level.
Size heating and cooling systems.
Check design by carrying out summer and winter simulations displaying hourly data.
Once model has been checked over short periods, you can use it with confidence for annual
simulations.
CREATE NEW SITE
You can create a new site (dsb file) from the Opening screen. In DesignBuilder, 'Site' is synonymous with the
file because each file can only contain one site. When you request a new site, the Add New Site dialog is
opened which allows you to select the location and a template:
Location
Template
See also the Creating a model and Starting a New Project Tutorials
Create new site - Location

Select the Location Template as a source of location and weather data for the site.
The Location defines the geographical location and weather data for all buildings on this site. You will be able
to load data from other location templates or override the default data from the Location Model Data tab at
Site level.
Create New Site - Template

You can either select 'Blank' to create a clean site, or select a template to base your site on an existing site.
If you have a DesignBuilder file you would like to use as a template for future sites save or copy it to the
'Templates' folder (accessed from the File | Folders | Template projects menu command).
BUILDING GEOMETRY
This section describes the various facilities within DesignBuilder to create and edit model geometry.
View Controls in Edit Mode

A number of view controls are provided to allow you to change the point of view for the model:
View Rotation
Orbit
Zoom
Fit view
Pan view
Zoom window
- 41 -
View tools can be activated at any time during operation of the drawing tools and control returned to the
active drawing tool after completing the view process. For example to draw a block perimeter adjacent to an
existing cylindrical block:
To continue drawing the perimeter around the other side of the cylindrical block, click on the 'Orbit' tool and
orbit the model to reveal the other side and then pan to centre the model:
You can then return to the drawing process either by pressing the ESC key or selecting 'Cancel Pan' from the
right-click menu:
View Rotation
DesignBuilder provides several pre-defined standard view rotations:
- 42 -
Building Models
You can select one of these standard views from the view rotation drop list:
The default 'Axonometric' setting is designed to provide a good general 3-D view of the various components at
each model level.
Orbit
The orbit tool is used to rotate the view around the model. To orbit the model click on the 'Orbit' tool and then
press the left mouse button and keep the button pressed as you move the mouse cursor, the view will orbit
around the model.
Zoom Dynamic
To zoom in and out from the current model point of view, click on the 'Zoom' tool, then press the left mouse
button and keep the button pressed as you move the mouse cursor, the view will zoom in as you move the
mouse cursor down and out as you move it up.
Zoom Window
- 43 -
The 'Zoom window' tool is used to zoom in on a specific area of your model. To create a window on an area of
the model, click on the 'Zoom window' tool and move the mouse cursor to a corner of the window you want to
create, then press the left mouse button and keep the mouse button pressed as you drag the window, when
you release the mouse button, the view will zoom to the extents of the defined window.
Fit view
The 'Fit view' tool is used to zoom your view to a distance which will enable the whole model to be made
visible and centred in the 'Edit' window.
Pan view
The 'Pan' tool is used to move the model point of view vertically and horizontally across the plane of the
screen. To pan the view, click on the 'Pan' tool, then press the left mouse button and keep the button pressed
as you move the mouse cursor, the point of view will pan horizontally as you move the mouse cursor left and
right and vertically as you move it up and down.
Normal View
At the surface level, The Normal button in the top right-hand corner of the screen can be used to rotate the
point of view to be normal to the surface and to automatically zoom in so that the extents of the surface fill the
view.
The Default surface normal view program option allows you to control the behaviour of this command.
Perimeter Drawing Options

Blocks, courtyards and surface openings are all created using perimeters. When any of these element
drawing tools are activated, perimeter options can be accessed from the 'Drawing Options' data panel, for
example when the Draw window tool is active at the surface level:
- 44 -
Building Models
Shape
Three perimeter shapes are provided to enable specific perimeter topologies for blocks and surface openings
to be drawn efficiently:
1-Polygon
2-Rectangle
3-Circle
Polygon
The 1-Polygon is generally the most useful shape and can be used to draw block and opening perimeters of
any topology. The 1-Polygon shape also allows you to change the line type from a straight line to an arc. To
draw a perimeter using the 1-Polygon shape, start drawing the first line by clicking anywhere in the active
drawing plane to place the starting point, then move the mouse cursor and click to place the line end-point,
you can use the snaps and the protractor to help with alignment. Continue placing perimeter lines in the same
way. If at any time you want to cancel the last line that you placed, you can press the ESC key or select the
Undo last point option from the right-click menu. If you want to incorporate an arc within the perimeter, you
can change the line type to 2-Arc and then place the centre-point of the arc:
To complete the perimeter, move the mouse cursor to the beginning of the first perimeter line, which activates
the end-point snap and click on it to connect the lines:
- 45 -
Rectangle
The 2-Rectangle shape allows you to draw perimeters by placing diagonally opposite corners of a rectangle:
Circle
The 3-Circle shape is used to draw circular perimeters by placing the circle centre and then setting the radius
by placing a second point:
The associated Segments option allows you to control the accuracy of the circle. In DesignBuilder geometry,
circles are actually composed of polygons and the accuracy of the representation can be controlled by
defining the number of segments (or lines) used in generating the polygon. Generally speaking, the greater
- 46 -
Building Models
the number of segments used will result in more memory usage and processing time and so, particularly in the
case of blocks, it's advisable to use the default number of segments where possible.
More information on using the Circle shape can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 9 Tutorial
Line Type
When the perimeter shape is set to 1-Polygon, you can set the perimeter Line type to one of:
1-Straight line or
2-Arc
Straight line
When the line type is set to 1-Straight line, a perimeter is drawn by placing the origin and then a series of line
end-points:
Arc
To incorporate an arc within a perimeter, set the line type to 2-Arc. An arc is defined using the sweep angle
and number of segments:
A negative sweep angle can be used to create an arc in an anti-clockwise direction. In DesignBuilder
geometry, arcs are created using a number of segments or straight lines and the accuracy of the
representation can be controlled by defining the number of segments. Generally speaking, the greater the
number of segments used will result in more memory usage and processing time and so, particularly in the
case of blocks, it's advisable to use the default number of segments where possible.
- 47 -
To draw the arc, place the arc centre:
More information on using the Arc line type can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 9 Tutorial
Snaps, drawing guides & protractor

A number of drawing aids are provided to enable block perimeter lines, partitions, etc. to be drawn precisely:
Protractor
Direction Snaps
Point Snaps
Drawing Guides
These items are made available when the various drawing tools are used, such as the Draw window tool at
the zone surface:
Direction snaps
When drawing perimeter lines, block partitions or surface openings direction snaps can be used to draw lines:
Parallel with the active drawing plane axes (Axis snap),

- 48 -
Building Models
Parallel with existing elements (Parallel snap) or

Perpendicular to existing elements (Normal snap).
Axis Snap
The axis snap check boxes are displayed under 'Direction snaps' in the 'Drawing Options' data panel when the
various drawing commands are active. The axis snap is used to draw lines parallel with the major axes of the
active drawing plane.
As you move the cursor around to draw a line, the line will change colour and 'stick slightly as it becomes
parallel with one of the major axes:
You can use axis snap to draw block perimeters on planes of any orientation. If the plane is non-horizontal,
the axis snap applies to the local coordinate system of the plane as if it were rotated to the horizontal:
If the axis snap is operating on a horizontal plane, the perimeter line will change colour to red if the line is
snapped to the X-axis or green if it's snapped to the Y-axis. However if the active drawing plane is not
horizontal, the line will change colour to orange for the X-axis and purple for the Y-axis.
- 49 -
At the building level, when the active drawing plane is horizontal, you can also snap block perimeters and
construction lines to the Z-axis:
which allows you to draw horizontally extruded blocks, this process is explained under Adding Blocks
See also the Creating a model Tutorial
Parallel Snap
The parallel snap is used draw lines parallel with the edges of existing objects. The parallel snap check box is
displayed under 'Direction snaps' in the 'Drawing Options' data panel when the various drawing commands
are active. To draw a block perimeter line to be parallel with an existing block edge, switch the parallel snap
on and move the mouse cursor to touch the edge with which the current perimeter line is to be parallel:
- 50 -
Building Models
This will enable the active perimeter line to infer a direction from the selected edge and you can lock this
inference by pressing the SHIFT key to prevent a parallel inference being picked up from an unwanted edge.
So press the SHIFT key and move the mouse cursor to a position approximately parallel with the edge, the
cursor will 'stick' when the parallel snap operates and the perimeter line will change colour to cyan:
When the parallel snap is in operation, intersections are automatically calculated with drawing guides to allow
the two to be combined, so you can snap to the intersection of the two.
Normal (Perpendicular) Snap

The normal snap is used to draw lines perpendicular to the edges of existing objects. The normal snap check
box is displayed under 'Direction snaps' in the 'Drawing Options' data panel when the various drawing
commands are active. When the normal snap is switched on and you draw a line string, each line will
automatically snap to be perpendicular with it's predecessor if it exists:
- 51 -
To draw a block perimeter line to be perpendicular with the edge of an existing block, move the mouse cursor
to touch the edge and then move it to be approximately perpendicular to it, the cursor will automatically snap
to a line which is exactly perpendicular.
You can lock the perpendicular snap by pressing the SHIFT key which will prevent the cursor from picking up
an unwanted direction inference. In this case, a construction line has been placed parallel with the block edge
to help in positioning the new block. The perimeter line locks to a perpendicular from the construction line:
- 52 -
Building Models
When the normal snap is in operation, intersections are automatically calculated with drawing guides, allowing
you to snap to the intersection:
- 53 -
Offset Snap
The offset snap is used to draw partitions and voids parallel to existing walls and partitions at a fixed offset
distance. This help topic describes the use of offset snap for drawing partitions, but the information is equally
applicable to drawing voids at a fixed offset from the perimeter.
The offset snap check box is displayed under Direction snaps in the Drawing Options data panel when the
Draw partitions command is active.
The offset snap can be used whenever a string of partitions is to be located at a fixed offset from a perimeter,
but can be specifically applied to dividing large open plan spaces up into perimeter and core zones for
thermal simulation.
When the offset snap is switched on, an additional Distance item will be displayed under the offset snap
check box which allows you to define the offset distance. When you first switch on the offset snap, having
clicked on the Draw partition icon, you will see offset snap indicators displayed as you move the cursor within
the snap range of an existing wall or partition:
The offset snap works in conjunction with the other snaps and so, for example, you can start an offset partition
at a fixed distance from the beginning of an existing wall using the edge snap in combination with the
increment snap:
- 54 -
Building Models
After placing the beginning of the partition, the rubber-banded partition will be automatically snapped to the
offset from the selected wall and as you move the cursor to the next connected wall segment, the offset snap
indicator will appear again:
As you move the cursor, you will see that the offset snap interacts with other snaps allowing you to position
partitions accurately. If you find that the other snaps are interfering with the offset snap, you can switch them
off by pressing the SHIFT key.
- 55 -
Completed perimeter:
Point Snaps
When the various point snaps are switched on, a coloured indicator is displayed when the mouse cursor is
close to a key-point on an existing element allowing a perimeter or partition line end-point to be positioned
precisely at the selected key-point.
The following point snaps are available:
End-point snap
- 56 -
Building Models
mid-point snap
Edge snap
DXF snap
Snap To Lower Perimeters
Increment snap
Note: In some cases Snaps can interfere with attempts to draw to a particular point and in this case you can
temporarily switch off the appropriate snap(s) using the check boxes in the Drawing options panel in the
bottom left of the screen.
End-point Snap
This snap allows you to snap lines to the end-point of an existing edge. A green indicator is displayed when
the mouse cursor is within the snap range of an end-point:
For example, to snap the starting point of a new block perimeter to the end-point of an existing block edge,
move the mouse cursor onto the background and press SHIFT to lock the drawing plane to the ground plane.
Keep the SHIFT key pressed and move the mouse cursor close to the required edge marker to activate the
end-point snap:
Similarly to snap the starting point of a new block partition to the end-point of an existing partition, make sure
that the 'End-point' snap is switched on and move the mouse cursor close to the partition end-point to activate
the snap:
- 57 -
Mid-point Snap
For details of using the 'Mid-point' snap, please refer to the End-point snap.
Edge Snap
The edge snap allows you to snap to any point on the edge of an existing object. The edge snap can be used
in conjunction with the increment snap to enable a point to be located along an edge by moving it in defined
increments. A red indicator is displayed when the mouse cursor is within the snap range of an edge and
distance indicators are also displayed to help in locating a point a specific distance from either end of the
edge:
By switching the increment snap on, the point can be moved along the edge in defined increments. For
example, if you wanted to start a block perimeter line at 6.0 metres from the end of the block, after switching
on the increment snap, you could set the snap increment to say 0.5m and then move the mouse cursor to
snap to the edge at a distance of 6.0 metres from the end-point:
If you wanted to locate the beginning of the perimeter line at a specific distance from the other end of the
edge, you can switch the end of the edge from which the increment snap operates by toggling the 'Switch
snap increment direction' switch:
- 58 -
Building Models
DXF Snap
The DXF snap only applies when DXF data has been imported from an external file. The DXF snap enables
you to snap to the end-points of DXF lines:
Note: You should generally switch DXF snap off when drawing partitions at block level and simply use the
DXF lines as a visual guide. This ensures that partitions correctly snap to perimeters instead of snapping to
DXF lines which may be very close to the perimeter but not actually touching.
Snap To Lower Perimeters

This snap allows you to snap to adjacent lower block perimeters and partitions. This snap is switched on by
default but it can be useful sometimes to switch it off to avoid snapping to partitions in the block below.
Increment Snap
The increment snap applies to any process that involves moving a point or a surface in a particular direction.
Such processes include drawing block partitions or perimeter lines which have an active direction snap or
dragging the surface of a block normal to the original surface position. The increment snap allows you to move
a point in a particular direction by defined increments. You can think of the increment snap acting in the same
way as a conventional CAD drawing grid and in fact if you were just to use the axis snaps it would have the
same effect, however the increment snap is more powerful in that it provides this type of incremental snap
along any defined vector not just the axis vectors.
- 59 -
See also the Basic Drawing Tools 2 Tutorial

The increment snap may be particularly useful during early stage design when you want to place geometry
with reasonable accuracy but don't want to be constantly keying-in distances.
Note: the increment snap will only come into operation when you are drawing a line or moving a surface along
a defined vector. For example if you are drawing a block perimeter parallel with an existing block edge, the
increment snap will operate when the parallel snap is active and in this case you would be able to move the
mouse cursor along the parallel vector in increments of 0.5m:
The increment snap also works in conjunction with the Protractor:
You can use the increment snap to control the location of block faces when you extrude a block on creation or
drag faces during an edit or stretch operation:
- 60 -
Building Models
The increment snap also comes into operation when an edge snap is active, allowing you to snap to the edge
by increments from either end, please see edge snap for details.
Switch snap increment direction

Increment snap provides increments between the 2 end points of the reference line and increments can only
be generated from one end point at a time. You can reverse the direction so that increments are generated
from the other end of the reference line by checking the Switch snap increment direction drawing option.
This option is found immediately below the Increment snap option (screenshot above).
Drawing guides
Drawing guides are invisible lines that are automatically generated as soon as a drawing plane becomes
active during a drawing operation. Drawing guides are parallel with the active drawing plane X and Y axes
and run through all end-points and mid-points of existing object edges, which lie in the same plane as the
drawing plane. As you move the cursor in the vicinity of a drawing guide, it will become visible and you can
then snap the cursor to any point on the guide. When drawing guides are used in conjunction with Direction
Snaps or the Protractor they offer a powerful mechanism for locating perimeter lines in relation to existing
object edges.
For example to create a triangular window in a surface with the same height as an existing opening, first click
on the Draw window tool and check that the perimeter shape is set to 'Polygon', switch the protractor on and
then move the cursor to align approximately with the lower edge of the existing window which will
automatically snap the cursor to the required drawing guide:
- 61 -
Click to place the window origin and move the cursor to snap to the drawing guide associated with the existing
window upper edge, the protractor angle lock will automatically combine with the drawing guide:
Click to place the apex of the window and then place the next point in a similar fashion:
Completing the window perimeter:

- 62 -
Building Models
Note: In some cases Drawing guides can interfere with attempts to draw to a particular point and in this case
you can temporarily switch off Drawing guides using the check boxes in the Drawing Options panel in the
bottom left of the screen.
Protractor tool
The protractor tool is used to draw perimeter lines and partitions at specified angles in relation to the current
drawing plane. The protractor can be activated from the Drawing options data panel, which is displayed when
any of the drawing tools are used. For example, to create an offshoot projecting from an existing block with a
roof slope of 30, move the cursor over the existing block surface, press the SHIFT key to lock the drawing
plane and draw the first perimeter line, snapping to the base edge using end-point snap:
Draw the second perimeter line to connect to the mid-point of the block edge and then activate the protractor:
- 63 -
The protractor will automatically snap to the current drawing plane and as you move the mouse cursor, the
perimeter line will snap to the protractor in angular increments, which can be set in the Drawing options data
panel. The rotation angle is displayed at the centre of the protractor. Move the cursor until the displayed angle
is 30 and then move the snapped line towards the upper block edge. When the line end-point nears the
edge, it will stick to the edge and the edge snap marker will be displayed:
Click to accept the point and complete the perimeter by snapping to the block face vertices using the endpoint snap:
Drag the perimeter to complete the offshoot:
- 64 -
Building Models
Construction Lines
Construction lines can be used to help in the creation of precise geometry. You can draw construction lines
using the snaps and the protractor to lie at defined locations and then use these lines as a framework from
which or to which various object geometries can be projected or attached.
At the building level, construction lines can also be snapped to the Z-axis to form vertical planes from which
block geometry can be extruded.
Construction line snap points can be picked up at all levels regardless of the level at which they were drawn.
For example all of these operations are possible:
Draw construction lines at building level and pick up snap points for these at surface level for accurate
drawing of openings etc.
Draw construction lines at block level and access them at zone and surface levels for positioning
openings, lighting sensors, CFD fans and assemblies.
Draw construction lines at surface level to indicate the position of a shading device relative to windows
and use snap points to draw and position a component block at building level.
Drawing Construction Lines
Construction lines are drawn in the form of line strings. To draw a construction line, click on the Place
construction line tool and start drawing the first line by clicking anywhere in the active drawing plane then
move the mouse cursor and click to place the line end-point, you can use point snaps, direction snaps,
drawing guides and the protractor to help with alignment. Continue placing construction lines in this way. If at
any time you want to cancel the last line that you placed, you can press the ESC key or select 'Undo last point'
from the right-click menu.
- 65 -
Construction lines have numerous applications in forming temporary attachment points during the creation of
precise geometry. As a simple example, if you want to place a block at a precise distance from the angled wall
of an existing block, you could switch the Normal snap on, click on the Place construction line tool and draw
a perpendicular line a precise distance from the wall. To draw the perpendicular line, place the first point at an
end-point of the wall baseline, move the mouse cursor to touch the baseline and press SHIFT to lock the
direction inference, then move the mouse cursor to activate the perpendicular lock and key-in the required
distance:
You could then place a second construction line normal to the first line and key-in the required length:
- 66 -
Building Models
You can then snap to the construction line to draw the new block perimeter:
The finished block:
You can also snap to the intersection of construction lines:
- 67 -
At the building level, construction lines can be snapped to the Z-axis in order to create vertical planes to which
block geometry can be attached. To draw construction lines in a vertical plane, switch the Z-axis snap on, click
on the 'Place construction line' tool and place the first point on the ground plane or any other horizontal plane.
Move the mouse cursor to snap the current line to the Z-axis:
You can then use the protractor to place the next line in order to accurately define a plane:
- 68 -
Building Models
After placing the second line, the two construction lines form a vertical plane that can be used for extruding
blocks or as a plane to be used as a cutting plane.
Removing Construction Lines

You can remove construction lines individually by selecting and deleting or you can remove all construction
lines from the model by selecting 'Remove all construction lines' from the 'Edit' menu.
General operations
This section describes general geometric operations:
Select
Move
Clone (copy)
Rotate
Stretch
Delete
- 69 -
Select
To select an object, click on the 'Select' tool or select 'Select' from the right-click menu, then move the mouse
cursor to the object to be selected and click the mouse to select. To select multiple objects you can either
press the CTRL key while clicking on objects or drag a selection rectangle by pressing the left mouse button
and keeping it pressed as you drag a window across the required selection, when you release the mouse
button, the objects inside the window will be selected.
Move
You can use the Move command to move blocks, partitions, courtyards and openings. You can also use Move
to set the position of daylight sensors. To move an object, first select it and then click on the Move tool or
select 'Move' from the right-click menu. If you want, you can move several objects at the same time by doing a
multiple selection. You then need to define a 'handle point' for the move operation, the handle point can be
any point on a model surface or ground plane but more usually will be a vertex on the object that you want to
move, so make sure that the end-point snap is switched on, move the mouse cursor to the required object
vertex and snap to it:
When you release the mouse button, you will be able to move the object to any required location. As you
move the object, a displacement line is displayed to show how far the object has been moved, the
displacement line can be snapped to the axes or the Protractor. When a direction snap is active the increment
snap can also be used:
- 70 -
Building Models
You can then click the mouse button to place the object.
At the building level, blocks can be moved in three dimensions onto any existing block face in the model. As
you move the block around the model, each block face will highlight in blue as the block handle point is moved
across it, indicating that the face has become the active drawing plane.
You can lock the active drawing plane by pressing the SHIFT key to position the block:
- 71 -
Clone (Copy)
For details of using the 'Clone' tool, please refer to the Move tool.
Rotate
You can rotate blocks, partitions, courtyards and openings. To rotate an object, first select it and then click on
the 'Rotate' tool or select 'Rotate' from the right-click menu. If you want, you can rotate several objects at the
same time by doing a multiple selection. As you move the cursor back into the Edit screen, the Protractor will
be displayed at the cursor position. At the building level, you can rotate a block around an axis point defined
on any plane and as you move the cursor from surface to surface in the model, each surface will highlight in
blue to show that it's the active drawing plane and the protractor will automatically rotate into the same plane:
- 72 -
Building Models
You define the rotation axis about which the object will be rotated by clicking the mouse when the mouse
cursor is in the required location, you can use the various snaps and drawing guides to locate the axis point.
After placing the axis point, you can then rotate the object around the axis:
In the case of partitions and courtyards at the block level, the active drawing plane for rotation is always the
plane of the block floor and in the case of surface openings, the active drawing plane is always the surface
plane:
- 73 -
Stretch
Building and outline blocks can be stretched (or scaled) at the building level. To stretch a block, first select it
and then click on the 'Stretch' tool or select 'Stretch' from the right-click menu. You can only stretch one block
at a time. When you activate the 'Stretch' tool, a wire frame is displayed around the extent of the block and as
you move the cursor across the faces of this frame, each face will highlight in the colour of the axis to which
the face is normal:
If you then click on one of these highlighted faces, you can then stretch the block along the axis normal to the
face. If the increment snap is switched on, the block can be stretched in increments:
- 74 -
Building Models
In the case of the Z-axis, the stretch operation will only operate along the positive Z-axis:
Tip: You can also key in the new dimension using the keyboard. Note the difference to the Drag face tool
where the increment in the extrusion is keyed in
Delete
To delete an object, first select the object you want to delete and then click on the 'Delete' tool or select
'Delete' from the right-click menu. If you want, you can delete several objects at the same time by doing a
multiple selection.
Tip: It is usually quicker however to simply press the <Delete> key on the keyboard.
- 75 -
Measure
The measure tool allows you measure distance, angles and areas on single planes in the model. To use the
tool, navigate to the part of the model you wish to measure, click on the Measure toolbar icon, select the type
of measurement to be made in the Display options panel on the left of the screen. The options are:
1-Distance - Click twice on a plane to define the length between the 2 points.
2-Angle - Click three times on a plane to define the area between the 2 lines.
3-Distance - Draw an enclosed polygon by clicking with the mouse on a single plane.
4-Perimeter - Draw an enclosed polygon by clicking with the mouse on a single plane.
The requested data is displayed highlighted in the Drawing Options panel.
Importing Geometric Data

There are 2 ways to import geometric data into DesignBuilder:
Importing floor plans where 2-D floor plan data is imported either from CAD or scanned paper
drawings.
Import 3-D CAD/BIM data through the gbXML data format.
Import Floor Plans

DXF and other bitmap-type drawing data formats can be imported in the form of 2-D floor plan layouts. These
can be used to trace block perimeters and partitions as a fast way to enter the model geometry. A typical
process might go like this:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Create new dsb site file, select location etc.

Import floor plan data (described below).
Go to block level and draw partitions by tracing over the drawing data.
Import other DXF floor plans for other stories if necessary.
More information on Importing floor plans can be found in the Importing 2-D Floor Plans - Basic Drawing
Tools 10 Tutorial
Import Drawing File Wizard

You can import 2-D DXF floor plan files created in AutoCAD or other CAD programs or the other bitmapbased drawing formats listed below. To start the process click on the Files > Import > Import 2-D drawing
file menu command. This starts a the Import Drawing File Wizard.
With the import wizard open, select the File type to import. You can select from:
1-DXF - 2-D CAD data. This option allows you to snap to the end-points of the DXF line segments, the
other bitmap-based formats below do not allow snapping.
2-PDF - PDF drawing file (single page)
3-BMP - Bitmap drawing file.
4-JPG - JPEG drawing file.
5-PNG - Portable Network Graphic drawing file.
- 76 -
Building Models
6-GIF - GIF drawing file.

7-TIFF - TIFF drawing file.
When you have selected the file type then select the file by clicking into the 'Filename' control. Click on the
ellipsis button to open the file browser dialogue box.
Once the floor plan has been imported you can add blocks by tracing over the external perimeter
corners of the floor plan.
DXF File types

While on the Import drawing file wizard, if you selected a DXF file you must then select the units used in the
DXF file from the Units drop list. You should be able to find this out from the creator of the CAD model - you
are likely to get 'out of range' errors if you get it wrong. For example the CAD drawing may have been defined
in millimetres and if you have selected metres as the units, when DesignBuilder tries to read the floor plan
- 77 -
everything is 1000x too big and meters become kilometres! The DesignBuilder modeller has a range of
several hundred metres and if any data falls outside this, the 'out of range' error occurs.
You must also set the attachment height at which the 2-D DXF floor plan will be attached in the DesignBuilder
model. The DXF data can be moved around the model once it is imported, so you do not need to know the
exact attachment height at this stage - you can import the DXF data at zero height and move it to the correct
location using the Move command. Click on the 'Next' button to set up layer visibility:
You can use these controls to switch off unnecessary layers in the DXF data. As you check/uncheck the
checkboxes you will see the effect of the change in the Edit view under the Wizard. Click on the 'Finish' button
to import the data:
- 78 -
Building Models
At the building level, you can select, move and delete DXF data. When you select DXF data, you may need
to zoom in to make the selection. You can move DXF file in 3-D and snap the data to the edges of blocks or
end-points of construction lines:
Move the DXF data on top of the existing block and snap to an edge end-point:
- 79 -
When you have imported the DXF data you can use the Measure tool to check that the dimensions are
correct.
Import DXF floor plans for other stories if necessary. Note that only one set of DXF data can be imported at a
time. Once the CAD data has been imported into the model, the source DXF file is no longer needed by
DesignBuilder and can be moved or deleted.
Editing DXF data

Once the DXF data has been imported to the model, it must be selected to allow these operations:
Move - move the DXF data

Delete - delete the DXF data (not the source file itself).
Also the Set X-axis for imported DXF and Scale DXF drawing menu commands are available from the Edit
menu when DXF data is loaded.
Set X-axis For Imported DXF

When the command is started click twice to define the end points of a line in the direction of the X-axis on the
imported DXF data. After the operation the DXF data is rotated to align with the DesignBuilder X-axis.
Normally DXF data will already be orientated to the grid and this command is not required.
Scale DXF Drawing

This command allows you to scale the DXF data to be larger or smaller. This may be necessary if the scale of
the DXF data was unknown at the import stage. When the command is started click twice to define the end
points of a reference line on the DXF data of known length (e.g. a dimension arrow or known length on a
building wall). Then either move the cursor to define the new length of the reference line and click again or
type in the dimension of the reference line. So a typical sequence might be:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start Edit > Scale DXF drawing command.

Single click on one end of a large dimension line.
Single click on the other end of the dimension line.
Type in the dimension in m or ft (depending on the international units setting) followed by <Enter>.
- 80 -
Building Models
Bitmap-based File Types

When the file type is one of the bitmap based formats (PDF, BMP, JPG, PNG, GIF, TIFF collectively referred
to here as 'bitmap') the next page of the Wizard provides a preview of the drawing and some options.
Invert Bitmap
Check this option if you wish the colours in the bitmap to be inverted. For example if the picture is white on a
black background then it will generally be best to invert these for use in DesignBuilder.
Auto Scale Bitmap After Loading Drawing

If you wish the 'scale bitmap' command to be automatically started when the Import Drawing File Wizard in
closed then check this option.
Quality Slider
By reducing the number of pixels in the bitmap it is possible to significantly reduce the size of the imported
drawing data and hence speed subsequent drawing 'scale' and 'rotate' operations. The default Quality setting
of 0.5 gives a good trade-off between image size and readability but if the drawing file is particularly large you
may decide to reduce the quality to reduce the memory overhead or, if the drawing is difficult to read you
could increase Quality.
Transparency Slider
You can control the transparency of the drawing data from 0 to 1, the default is 0.5.
- 81 -
Bitmap-based files may be used for:

1.
2.
Existing buildings having paper floor plans that have been scanned into electronic format or,
Early stage design sketch ideas are available only in bitmap form.
Note: bitmap drawings do not allow end-point snap like DXF but can be an equally effective option for rapid
geometry entry in DesignBuilder.
Editing Bitmap data

Once the floor plan data has been imported to the model, it must be selected to allow these operations:
Move - move the bitmap data.

Delete - delete the bitmap data.
- 82 -
Building Models
Also the Set X-axis for imported bitmap and Scale bitmap drawing commands are available from the Edit
menu when bitmap data is loaded.
Set X-axis For Imported Bitmap

Sometimes scanned bitmap files are not exactly aligned to the X-axis and you can use this command to reorientate the drawing. When the command is started click twice to define the end points of a line in the
direction of the X-axis on the imported bitmap data. After the operation the bitmap data is rotated to align with
the DesignBuilder X-axis.
Scale Bitmap Drawing

This command allows you to scale the bitmap data to the correct size using a known dimension in the bitmap
image.
When the command is started click twice to define the end points of a reference line on the bitmap data of
known length (e.g. a dimension arrow or known length on a building wall). Then either move the cursor to
define the new length of the reference line and click again or type in the dimension of the reference line. So a
typical sequence might be:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Start Edit > Scale bitmap drawing command.

Single click on one end of a large dimension line.
Single click on the other end of the dimension line.
Type in the dimension in m or ft (depending on the international units setting) followed by <Enter>.
Important Note: This process will always be necessary for bitmap drawing formats as the scale is not defined
at the import stage.
Partitions
You can also use the imported floor plan data to draw internal partitions. To do this go to block level and draw
partitions by tracing over using the floor plan partition data. You should take care to connect partitions to the
external perimeters. A common mistake is to snap partitions to DXF data lying very close to the external
perimeter but not close enough to create a connection with the external perimeter.
Tip: It is generally best to switch off DXF snap in the Drawing options panel when drawing partitions
at block level to avoid this problem. Be sure to switch it back on again when you have finished drawing
partitions.
Import 3-D BIM Data

DesignBuilder provides interoperability with BIM models through its gbXML import capability. This allows you
to import 3-D architectural models created in Revit, ArchiCAD or Microstation and other BIM systems
supporting gbXML data exchange.
To import gbXML data you should first create a building with no blocks, then click on File > Import > Import
BIM/gbXML model. This opens the Import 3-D CAD Model dialog.
Unlike the 2-D floor plan import which provides only a set of lines for tracing over, importing 3-D CAD data
imports the full geometry as blocks with zones, windows, doors and shading surfaces.
- 83 -
Example gbXML imported from Revit into DesignBuilder
Example gbXML imported from ArchiCAD into DesignBuilder
Import 3-D CAD Model dialog

This dialog has two pages. On the first page you can select the xml file to import. Once you have selected the
model, press the Next button to move to the second page. For large models there will be a delay at this point
while the xml data is loaded. The second page shows a simple thumbnail view of the gbXML data along with
some simple controls to control the way the import is to be carried out.
- 84 -
Building Models
View
You can display the thumbnail of the gbXML data from various viewpoints. Select from:
Plan,
Left,
Right,
Back,
Axonometric (3-D view).
Adjacency Tolerance
The is the maximum gap between neighbouring parallel gbXML surfaces that will be interpreted as being an
adjacency between 2 spaces. You might enter a value higher than the default 0.01m if the gbXML spaces are
separated by large gaps due to thick partitions or ceiling /floor voids being excluded from the gbXML. For
- 85 -
example if the largest gap in the between spaces that are to be modelled as adjacent is 0.3m then enter 0.3m
here.
The Adjacency tolerance can also be updated after the import from the Advanced tab of the Model options
dialog.
Import As Building Blocks

By default this option is selected and the geometric space data will be imported as building blocks ready for
use in DesignBuilder modelling.
You can instead import BIM space geometry as outline blocks by unchecking this option. The outline blocks
give an exact representation of the gbXML spaces in the gbXML and this can be useful for diagnosing
problems with poor gbXML, For example if any part of a space intersects with another space then it would not
created as a building block but it could be created as an outline block.
Import Thermal Properties

If this option is selected then DesignBuilder will any load materials, constructions and glazing system thermal
properties present in the BIM model and assign them to surfaces and windows in the model.
Import Shading Surfaces

Shading surfaces are specially marked in gbXML data and so can be treated separately if required. You can
choose to import shading surfaces as part of the import or not using this control. Shading surfaces imported
through gbXML will be 2-D flat shading surfaces.
Merge Co-planar Surfaces

If the above Import shading surfaces option is selected then you can choose to either merge any such coplanar surfaces or not.
BIM Surfaces (not Required in v4.3.0.115 and later)

You can select which of the various categories of gbXML surface objects should be applied to the model.
Selected surface types will be listed in the Navigator, displayed on the Edit screen as planes of various
colours, rendered on the Visualisation screen and included in Radiance daylighting and EnergyPlus
simulations as shading surfaces.
Surface types that are not selected are still imported and can be displayed by changing selections on the
Drawing tools tab of the Model options dialog after the import if required.
Note: The Component block shades and reflects option on the Constructions tab can be unchecked to
prevent particular planes from being included in the EnergyPlus simulations.
How does DesignBuilder gbXML Import Work?

The geometric information contained in gbXML includes a collection of surface and space objects which
represent the outer and inner volumes of rooms in the parent BIM model respectively. The surface objects are
derived from corresponding wall, ceiling, floor etc elements in the BIM and also contain openings for windows
and doors. The space objects arent native to the BIM system but are identified by users through a manual or
semi-automatic process. The result of the spatial identification process is a collection of spaces that are
separated by gaps that would be filled in the parent BIM model by the BIM primitives such as partitions, slabs,
etc.
- 86 -
Building Models
Internally DesignBuilder includes 2 different ways to import gbXML data:
Surfaces where the gbXML surfaces are used to define the block geometry. In well constructed gbXML
data sources this data is used to define the outer block geometry. It avoids the need to see gaps
between the blocks caused by partition and internal floor thickness. However if surfaces are missing
you may end up with surfaces also missing in the DesignBuilder model leading to open manifold blocks
which can't be simulated in daylighting and CFD.
Spaces where surface data is not available the spaces are used as the source of the block geometry.
The DesignBuilder gbXML import works by simply mapping the gbXML space surface geometry to building
blocks, one block per zone.
Depending on the method used to identify the block geometry they represent:
In the normal case where DB was able to use surfaces to define the block the External
measurements, internal zone geometry Geometry convention template is applied to give realistic
thickness for all block surfaces based on the overall thickness of the surface constructions defined in
the gbXML if this option was selected.
Alternatively if DB wasn't able to find enough surface data to define the block but full space data is
available then it uses the space inner geometry and applies the Simple Geometry convention template
to give zero thickness for all block surfaces. In this case the building will be made up of a set of blocks
defined based on the gbXML inner spaces with gaps between them due to the partitions and internal
floors.
Note: It is important to understand that in both cases the success of the BIM to DesignBuilder data transfer
process depends on how well the spatial identification process has been conducted in the BIM system. If there
are intersecting or missing spaces in the BIM model then the model imported into DesignBuilder will also have
problems.
The adjacency between neighbouring surfaces is calculated within DesignBuilder based on the Separation
tolerance setting.
Constructions and glazing systems are assigned to surfaces in the gbXML and when the Import thermal
properties option is selected in the import dialog the constructions assigned in the BIM program will be
assigned at surface level within the imported model.
Shading surfaces in the gbXML are retained and displayed in the imported model. Other surface objects aren't
normally required and are hidden after the import has been completed but can be activated as shading
surfaces from the Model options dialog, Drawing tools tab.
The Revit DesignBuilder Workflow
There is a DesignBuilder plugin for the most recent versions of Revit, which can help to ease the workflow
when transferring BIM models from Revit to DesignBuilder. This is installed with DesignBuilder. The version of
Revit you wish to use must be installed at the time you install DesignBuilder.
You can read how to get the most from the Revit to DesignBuilder link in DesignBuilder Revit gbXML
Tutorial.
- 87 -
Exporting Geometric Data

The model geometric data can be exported in formats:
3-D DXF
Exporting 3-D DXF

You can export the geometry of the current building model in 3-D DXF format using the Export 3-D DXF model
command from the File > Export menu. This opens the 3-D DXF Export dialog:
Choose one of two options:
1-Whole model with details - The entire building model is exported including 3-D details such as
window frames, 3-D building elements etc. This option can be useful for exporting for visualisation and
further processing in other software such as SketchUp (image below)
2-Zones - The building model is exported showing only zones. This option can be useful for visualising
the geometry of the model used in simulations.
Example 3-D DXF Output - Whole model with details
- 88 -
Building Models
The above model was created in DesignBuilder, exported in DXF format using the Whole model with details
option and Imported into SketchUp where details such as textures, trees and people were added.
Note: when importing DXF files into SketchUp be sure to set the scale options on the Open dialog.
Working with Buildings (Site Level)

At the site level you can:
Add new buildings,

Copy, delete and change the position of existing buildings.
Change the site orientation.
Enter site model Data including information on the site location, weather data etc.
Add New Building
You can add one or more new buildings from the site level. Each building has its own set of Model options
and is simulated separately but shares site Model data with the other buildings on the site.
When you select the Add new building option you are presented with the Add new building dialog which
allows you to make some basic settings:
Building - basic setting for the building model

Default Data - defaults for Construction, Activity, Glazing, Lighting and HVAC
When you press OK to close the dialog the building is created with the various selected settings and in most
cases starts you in Draw block mode so you can start adding geometry straight away. If you are not ready to
do this simply press the <Esc> key or right click and select Cancel.
Add New Building - Building Tab

Model Type
Type
Select the type of building model you wish to create from the list of options. Your selection will depend on
what you want to do with the building model and the amount of data available. Some typical options are:
Draw building + standard data - Recommended for general-purpose modelling.

Detailed design with HVAC - If you plan to use Detailed HVAC then select this option.
Architect early stage design - Early design stage analysis of building components, facade and
cooling options.
ASHRAE 90.1 - the template to be used for ASHRAE 90.1 models which sets Detailed HVAC and
other appropriate model options. This selection is forced for ASHRAE 90.1 models.
Parametric building + standard data - Buildings of standard form (rectangular, L-shaped or
courtyard).
Single zone + simplified data - Early design stage analysis of building components, facade and
cooling options in a single zone selected from a whole building model.
You can fine tune the Model options later using the Model options dialog.
Geometry convention template

Select the geometry convention template to be used for this building model. You can easily change this at any
level in the model on the Constructions tab under the Geometry, Areas and Volumes header.
- 89 -
ASHRAE 90.1 building type

If this is an ASHRAE 90.1 model then you can select whether it is a proposed or baseline model. In most
cases you will start be creating a proposed model and create the baseline model from this. Options are:
1-Proposed and
2-Baseline.
Add New Building - Default Data Tab

This tab allows you to define the templates used to populate the new building:with default Model Data.
Construction
Select the construction template to use as a source of default fabric data for the building.
Activity
Select the activity template to use as a source of default activity-related data for the building.
This will set the following default data:
Occupancy levels and timing, holidays etc

Metabolic rates
Levels of equipment use
Heating and cooling temperature setpoints
Illuminance requirements
Fresh air requirements
Glazing
The glazing template is used as a source of default window, shading and percentage glazing data for the
building.
Lighting
The lighting template is used as a source of default lighting and lighting control data for the building.
HVAC
The HVAC template is used as a source of default data for the HVAC equipment to heat and cool the building.
Working at Building Level - Blocks and Solar Collectors

At building level you can:
Add Blocks - Building blocks, Component blocks and Outline blocks.

Edit Block geometry using a range of different block editing tools.
Add Solar collectors - PV and solar hot water.
The rest of this topic about adding various types of block.

Blocks are the basic elements used to create a 3-D DesignBuilder model. Three types of block can be added
to the building:
Building Blocks are the mechanism used in DesignBuilder to create 3-D building volumes. They are
often referred to in simply as Blocks and are composed of building elements such as walls, floor slabs
and roofs . Building blocks may be partitioned internally to form a number of zones.
Outline Blocks are used to help in the creation of more complex building block geometry.
Component Blocks are used to create visual, ground and shading structures which do not contain
zones.
Blocks of all types are created at the Building Level in the same way and are drawn using perimeters which
can be extruded either horizontally, vertically, or in any other direction.
This section describes the various operations involved in creating and editing blocks at the building level.
- 90 -
Building Models
To create or edit a block you must first go to the building level and you can do this by clicking on the building
entry in the navigator or if you're at the site level and you want to edit an existing building, you can doubleclick on the building in the 'Edit' screen.
Either operation will take you to the building level:
Adding Blocks
To add or create a new block, first go to the building level (if you are not already there) and click on the Add
new block tool. If you've just created a new building, the Add new block tool is automatically activated. A
block is created by drawing the base perimeter of the block using one of the perimeter shapes such as a
polygon. The dimensions of the block are those measured from the outside, the height of the block is the floorfloor height.
- 91 -

Please refer to perimeter shapes for details of drawing perimeters. After drawing a perimeter, a block will be
automatically extruded by the Height entry in the Drawing options settings or if the Auto-complete block
setting is switched off, the perimeter can be dragged to form the extrusion. To help in setting the correct
extrusion height, the increment snap setting can be used which enables the drag movement to jump by any
defined increment. Alternatively, you can simply type in an extrusion height and press the enter key:
When a block has been placed, additional blocks can be drawn onto any surface of the block to form more
complex aggregate blocks. As you move the mouse cursor across the faces of an existing block, each face
will change colour from grey to blue to indicate the active drawing plane. You can lock the active drawing
plane by pressing the SHIFT key, which allows you to move the cursor off the current face while keeping the
plane active. You can also lock the active drawing plane to the ground plane by moving the cursor over the
background area and pressing the SHIFT key, this is particularly helpful in avoiding the selection of the wrong
plane when drawing a vertically extruded block adjacent to an existing block. Once youve clicked the first data
point into the active drawing plane, it becomes locked regardless of whether or not the SHIFT key is pressed
until the perimeter has been completed or the tool is cancelled. In the example below the vertical plane shown
in blue has been selected, the shape of the block will be drawn in this plane and the volume created by
extruding normal to it.
- 92 -
Building Models
When a block is added to the surface of another block, a geometric link is automatically created between the
two blocks:
A hole can be added to the mating surface of this link (the inter-block partition) in order to form one contiguous
space:
- 93 -
Note: the Merge zones connected by holes Model option must be set if you wish the two zones in the 2 blocks
to be treated as one zone in the thermal calculations.
As already illustrated, a block perimeter can be drawn on the ground plane or onto the surface of an existing
block in which case the perimeter is extruded normal to the surface on which it is drawn.
Avoiding Indents
If the perimeter includes indents in such a way that the requested wall thickness is physically impossible and
the wall thickness cannot be accommodated then DesignBuilder will still allow the block to be created but the
wall thickness is reset to a small value (typically 0.025m). See the wall thickness topic for more on this.
Drawing In A Vertical Plane Without Reference To An Existing Block

To create horizontal extrusions from a vertical plane, the first perimeter line can be aligned with the Z-axis
using the axis snap:
The protractor can be used to place the second line in order to accurately define the orientation of the plane
relative to the base or ground plane:
- 94 -
Building Models
Alternatively, the orientation of the plane can be defined using the first line:
Snapping the second line to the Z-axis then forms the horizontal extrusion:
Once a vertical plane has been defined it will be remembered until the Add new block command is
cancelled, so the perimeter can be unwound using the ESC key or the right-click menu Undo last point entry
and any perimeter shape drawn into the stored plane:
- 95 -
After drawing the last perimeter line to connect to the perimeter start point, the perimeter can then be dragged
to create a horizontally extruded block:
Block Creation options

The block creation options enable you to control the way a block is drawn:
Block type
Form
Height
Auto-complete block
These options are accessed through the Drawing options data panel, which is displayed when you click on
the Add new block tool:
- 96 -
Building Models
Block And Zone Dimensions

WARNING: THIS TOPIC REFERS TO V3 AND HAS NOT YET BEEN UPDATED FOR V4
See: Geometry Areas and Volumes
COMBINED CONSTRUCTIONS
The diagram below illustrates how blocks should be defined and how zone volumes and surface dimensions
are derived from the parent block when using the default Combined constructions model option. Note that
there are 2 alternative dimensioning protocols:
UK NCM Convention which should always be used when using DesignBuilder for assessing buildings
through the UK National Calculation Methodology, i.e. for Part-L and Section 6 Building Regulations
checks and EPC/BER calculations.
Simulation and General Design Convention which should generally be used for all other applications
where an NCM calculation is not required.
- 97 -
The main differences between the 2 conventions are:

1.
UK NCM Convention - For ground and intermediate floors, the block height is defined as "top of floor
to top of floor" and for top floor blocks with a flat roof the block height is "top of floor to soffit/underside
of roof slab". Details on defining building geometry for other less common geometries when using the
NCM can be found in the Non Domestic EPC Conventions for England & Wales document.
2.
Simulation and General Design Convention - For ground floors the block height is "top of floor to
bottom of floor". For intermediate floors, the block height is defined as "bottom of floor to bottom of
floor" and for top floor blocks with a flat roof the block height is "bottom of floor to soffit/underside of
roof slab".
The important points to note for both conventions are:

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
The length/width dimensions of the block are measured from the outside of external walls.
Zone height is always the same as block height, i.e. it is unaffected by block wall thickness or thickness
of floor constructions.
Wall surfaces extend the full height of the block.
Flat roofs are placed on top of the block, so when drawing a block with a flat roof you should exclude
the roof construction in the height.
External floors are placed under the block, so when drawing a block with an external floor you should
exclude the external floor construction thickness in the height.
Zone surface dimensions (shown in green dotted lines above) are measured from inner edges of outer
walls and the centre line of partitions.
Floor surfaces extend horizontally to the inner surface of external walls and to the centre line of
partitions. See below for more on zone/surface dimensions.
Show diagram for Separate Constructions
- 98 -
Building Models
For Separate constructions the volume of the zone is calculated as the floor area x the block height. The
volume of any floor and ceiling voids and associated constructions can be subtracted if the relevant model
options are checked.
The zone volume used in ventilation calculations is the actual inside volume (shown in yellow in the diagram
above). These inside zone surface dimensions are used to define surface heat transfer areas in simulations
and other calculations.
Zone perimeter (plan view)
Other related information

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
See Combined Constructions for information on the meaning of the Construction Model data.
Also see Constructions for how to edit the construction configuration.
Block wall thickness for information on how zone inner volumes are created from external block
dimensions
Construction and glazing model options for details of volume calculations with the options to
include/exclude floor and ceiling volumes from the zone volume used in the energy calculations.
And the Model Geometry Example section for a detailed worked example illustrating how surface areas
and volumes are calculated.
The Creating a model Tutorial
Block Types
Three types of block are available:
Building Blocks are used to draw the model or a section of the model.
Outline Blocks are used to help in the creation of building block geometry and do not affect the model.
Component Blocks are used to create visual and shading structures which do not contain zones.
- 99 -
Building Block
A building block represents the outer shell of the model or part of the model. A finished block comprises a set
of building elements, which may include external walls, roofs and floor slabs, the constructions of which are
determined from the current building construction model data. Similarly, using opening model data, block
facades are automatically created with the required configuration of windows, doors, vents and solar shading
devices:
Solar shading devices are displayed in the visualisation screen:
A block may be divided internally into any number of zones by drawing partitions and where needed, voids or
courtyards can also be incorporated:
- 100 -
Outline Block
Custom openings (windows, doors, etc.) can be added to block facades by going to the surface level and
using the 'Draw window' family of commands:
Blocks can be moved, copied and rotated. Blocks can also be cut or stretched and block faces can be
dragged to different positions.
Outline Block
An outline block is created and edited in exactly the same way as a building block but is just a 3-D shape
without associated building elements such as walls, floors, roofs, etc.
Note: Because Outline blocks are not part of the model they do not appear in the Navigator panel.
Outline blocks are very useful in the creation of more complicated models. Because they are relatively simple
objects, they are much faster to create, copy, move, etc. than conventional building blocks and can be
- 101 -
manipulated freely without worrying about intersections. Once the required geometry has been established,
outline blocks can be converted to conventional blocks.
Outline blocks can also be used as a temporary device to create drawing planes from which building blocks or
other outline blocks can be extruded.
You can remove all outline blocks from a model by selecting Remove all outlines from the Edit menu.
Basic use of outline blocks is covered in the Basic Drawing Tools 5 Tutorial
USING OUTLINE BLOCKS TO CREATE A DORMER WINDOW

For example, to create a dormer window, first set the Block type to 2-Outline block and lock the active
drawing plane to the front surface of the first floor block by selecting it and pressing the SHIFT key, then draw
the base line of the dormer face perimeter:
Create the angle of the dormer pitch using the Protractor:
and then complete the perimeter:
- 102 -
Outline Block
Now drag the dormer perimeter all the way through the main roof block:
Select the dormer block and click on the Cut block tool, making sure that the Cutting method on the Drawing
options data panel is set to 2-Select plane and click on the forward facing plane of the main roof block to
create a cut in the dormer block in the plane of the roof:
- 103 -
Click again to finish the cut and then select the section of the dormer block that is not required and delete it:
:
Select the dormer outline block and click on the Convert outline block tool to complete the process:
- 104 -
Component Block
The finished block after adding openings:
Drawing dormer roofs is also illustrated in the Dormer Roof Tutorial

Note: Sometimes when converting outline blocks to component or building blocks you will notice that the new
block has a very slightly different size to the original outline block. This can happen when DesignBuilder needs
to slightly adjust the size in order to generate a viable zone with 3-D slab surfaces. It is therefore advisable
when using outline blocks to create complex geometries to draw and convert the outline blocks individually.
This avoids adjacencies between touching outline blocks from getting 'broken' when they are converted 'enmasse'.
Component Block
There are 3 types of component block:
1-Standard - used for shading, reflection and visualisation.

2-Ground - used for setting ground adjacency, shading, reflection and visualisation.
3-Adiabatic - used for setting adiabatic adjacency for modelling adjacent buildings at similar
conditions, shading, reflection and visualisation.
- 105 -
Component blocks are drawn in the same way as Building blocks but selecting the Block type in the Drawing
Options panel to be 3-Component block.
Each Component block has its own Component block material, transmittance schedule and shade/not shade
model data. To edit this you must first go to the component block itself by double-clicking on it in the model
edit screen or clicking on the entry in the Navigator. Alternatively, component blocks inherit default model data
from the building level so if you leave the component block model data in its default state (blue) you can
change all model data in one go by making the edit at the building level.
All component blocks cast shadows in Visualisations. In Radiance daylighting calculations component blocks
both cast shadows and provide diffuse reflection.
More information on component blocks can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 8 Tutorial
STANDARD COMPONENT BLOCK

Sometimes it can be useful to create structures such as pillars, shading obstructions and balconies which do
not contain zones. Standard component blocks can be used for modelling such structures as they are
treated simply as shading/reflection surfaces in simulations without any zones.
Standard component blocks are visible in Visualisations, using the texture associated with the Component
block material as set on the Constructions tab under the Component Block header. They can be used to cast
shadows and reflect solar radiation and light in EnergyPlus simulations by checking the Component block
shades and reflects model data under Component Blocks on the Constructions tab.
Note: In EnergyPlus simulations, component blocks do not shade ground reflected solar radiation and light
unless the Model reflections and shading of ground reflected solar calculation option is used.
The image below shows some typical uses of Standard component blocks.
Important Note: Component blocks do not absorb or conduct heat in any way - their only effect on
building surfaces in simulations is related to the shading and reflection of short-wave solar radiation and light.
Component blocks are a flexible way to apply shading to any part of the building and can be used to model
more complex window shading systems not catered for by the in-built local shading systems that can be
selected on the Openings tab. However there are some issues that should be considered when using
- 106 -
Component Block
component block in this way and these are discussed in the Component blocks used for local shading
reference page.
Use of standard component blocks for shading is also covered in the Solar Shading Tutorial
GROUND COMPONENT BLOCK

Ground component blocks can be used as a convenient way to set the adjacency of any touching building
block surfaces as being 'adjacent to ground'. In the model below the Ground block (shown in green) has been
positioned in contact with the building block to create a ground adjacency in the part of the Building block
surface in contact with the Ground block.
Ground component blocks are visible in Visualisations, using the texture associated with the Component block
material as set on the Constructions tab under the Component Block header. They can be used to cast
shadows and reflect solar radiation and light in simulations by checking the Component block shades and
reflects model data under Component Blocks on the Constructions tab.
Note: It is important to understand that the ground component block is used only to modify the adjacency of
the surfaces touching it to be 'adjacent to ground'. The areas of the zone surfaces that do touch the ground
component block are treated as being adjacent to the monthly ground temperatures defined for the site. The
material associated with the ground component block and the thickness of the block are not used in
any way to modify the conduction path of heat from the building to the ground. To modify the properties
of the ground heat transfer, edit the ground construction.
Surfaces with any openings which touch a ground component block will have those openings removed when
the component block is placed. Also it is not be possible to add openings in parts of a zone surface that touch
a ground component block. This applies to sub-surfaces as well as windows, doors, vents and holes.
View from building level
- 107 -
View from zone level

Ground component blocks are displayed in the visualisation screen using the Ground texture as set at the site
level.
More information on ground modelling can be found in the Ground Modelling topic.
Note: The adjacencies established by contact with ground blocks can be overridden by making settings under
Adjacency in Constructions model data at the surface level.
ADIABATIC COMPONENT BLOCKS

Adiabatic component blocks can be used as a convenient way to set the adjacency of any touching building
block surfaces to 'adiabatic'. Adiabatic surfaces do not transfer heat beyond their outer surface and are often
used for modelling boundaries with other spaces that can be considered to be at roughly the same
temperature as the zone. In the model below the Adiabatic block (shown in red) has been positioned in
contact with half of the South facade of the building to model the effect of an adjacent building which does not
form part of the DesignBuilder model. The touching adiabatic component block creates an adiabatic
adjacency in the part of the Building block surface in contact with the Adiabatic block.
Adiabatic component blocks are visible in Visualisations, using the texture associated with the Component
block material as set on the Constructions tab under the Component Block header. They can be used to cast
shadows and reflect solar radiation and light in simulations by checking the Component block shades and
reflects model data under Component Blocks on the Constructions tab.
- 108 -
Extruded Block Form
View from building level
View from zone level

Note: While no heat is conducted across the outer side of adiabatic surfaces, these surface will still allow the
flow of heat at the inside surface into the structure and so act to provide thermal mass to the connected zone.
Therefore simulation results will show heat transfer for adiabatic surfaces. In thermally massive
constructions (e.g. concrete floors) these heat flows can be quite significant over the period of hours and
days,but usually less so over monthly intervals.
Block Forms
While drawing a block perimeter, you can select the block form from the Drawing options data panel in the
bottom left of the screen. The standard block forms are provided to facilitate the creation of blocks
representing specific building geometries. You can select from options 1-4 below:
1-Extruded
2-Sloped wall
3-Pitched roof
4-Dome
(5-General)
The 5-General block form is not selectable but rather is defined internally by DesignBuilder following block
geometry operations such as Cut block, Horizontal block extrusion, Drag face and Boolean geometry
operation.
Once a block has been created, it is possible in most cases to change to a new form by navigating to the
block and opening the Model options dialog. When at block level the Model options dialog opens at the Block
tab and there the Block form can in most cases be changed.
Extruded Block Form

The Extruded block form is the most commonly used geometry. You create an extruded block by drawing a
perimeter using a number of pre-defined shapes and then extruding the perimeter by whatever distance is
required. If you use the polygon perimeter shape you can create extrusions in both horizontal and vertical
planes (or even in sloped planes).
- 109 -
The various methods of drawing general extrusions are explained under Adding Blocks. Circular and
rectangular perimeter shapes are used to create cylindrical and rectilinear prismatic extrusions from horizontal
planes:
Sloped Wall Block Form

The Sloped wall block form is used to create blocks on horizontal planes with uniformly sloping walls. Sloped
wall blocks can be created using any perimeter shape (polygon, rectangle or circle):
- 110 -
Pitched Roof Block Form
The wall angle is defined using the Slope setting in the Drawing options panel and the blocks are
automatically truncated by the Height setting:

The pitched roof block form automatically generates a pitched roof from a perimeter drawn on a horizontal
plane. Pitched roof blocks can be created using any perimeter shape (polygon, rectangle or circle):
The slope of the roof is defined using the Roof slope setting in the Drawing options data panel. A pitched roof
can be created with hips or gable ends using the Gable roof setting:
- 111 -
If you draw a pitched roof on top of an existing block, you can control the overhang or the depth of the roof
eaves using the Roof overhang setting:
Voids
Where roofs are to be created on top of conventional blocks that contain voids and the voids are to be
automatically incorporated within the pitched roof, the Automatically include voids from lower blocks Model
options switch must be switched on before drawing the roof perimeter.
PITCHED ROOF DRAWING OPTIONS

Gable roof
Check this option if the roof is to have vertical gable ends (see above). If this option is not checked then the
roof geometry will be a 'hip roof'.
Roof overhang
The extent to which the roof forms an overhang over the zones below. if the Auto-calculate pitched roof
thickness option is checked then the overhang displayed in the model and also the overhang modelled in the
simulation will be exactly the value of Roof overhang entered here.
- 112 -
Roof slope
The slope of the roof to be generated measured from horizontal.
Roofspace occupied
If the roofspace is flagged as being unoccupied (this option is left unchecked) then a series of changes are
made to the block attributes:
Any glazing that would otherwise have been included on the gable end walls is removed.
Zone type is set to 2-Semi-exterior unconditioned.
Infiltration in the roofspace has a default value of 1 ac/h when using Scheduled natural ventilation or
'Very poor' sealing quality when using Calculated natural ventilation.
AUTOMATIC PITCHED ROOF GEOMETRY

This section describes the automatic DesignBuilder pitched roof geometry generation with reference to an
example roof created by drawing a rectangular perimeter with a roof overhang of 0.3m and a roof slab
thickness of 0.2m:
Roof perimeters are drawn using the perimeters of lower adjacent blocks:
- 113 -
The software first creates the roof zone (this would be the zone written to the EnergyPlus IDF file) by first
identifying the wall thickness of the adjacent lower block and then deflating the drawn perimeter by this
thickness to obtain the basic roof zone perimeter. The resulting roof zone perimeter is then guaranteed to
coincide with the lower adjacent zone perimeter(s) in the absence of a roof overhang:
If a roof overhang is specified, the basic roof zone perimeter is then inflated by the roof overhang:
- 114 -
The roof zone is then completed by identifying the skeleton of the perimeter and applying the specified slope
to the resulting segments. The base of the roof zone now overlaps the lower adjacent zone(s) by the specified
roof overhang:
Note: In the case where a roof perimeter is drawn on top of several blocks having different wall thicknesses,
the software identifies the wall thickness having the longest perimeter and uses that thickness to derive the
roof zone perimeter. You should be aware that in this case the specified roof overhang will only be guaranteed
where the roof overlaps blocks having the same wall thickness as that identified for the roof zone perimeter.
The roof building block slabs are then created by extruding the roof zone surfaces outward along a normal to
the surfaces by a distance specified using the Roof Thickness setting.
- 115 -
The perimeter of the resulting roof block will extend beyond the roof zone perimeter by a distance (d in the
illustration) determined by the specified roof thickness:
Note: The overhang created by the formation of the roof slabs (d in the above illustration) is only noticeable in
the Edit and Visualisation views and will not be written to the IDF file i.e. unlike the roof zone overlap, it has no
effect on the EnergyPlus shading calculations.
Gable roofs
If the Gable roof option is selected, all gable end roof segments (isosceles triangles) are generated to fit flush
with the lower adjacent block surface:
If the specified gable wall thickness is different to the wall thickness of the lower adjacent block, an overlap will
be created between the roof zone and the lower adjacent zone, which may affect shading calculations in
EnergyPlus:
- 116 -
Dome Block Form
Note: Pitched roof form blocks are automatically configured so that the external walls are not shown on the
Edit screen when at block level. This can help when drawing partitions, positioning assembly blocks etc. The
option can be reversed using the Display external walls Block display model option if required.
Dome Block Form

The dome block form is used to create hemispherical blocks and can only be created using the circular
perimeter shape:
More information on using the Dome block form can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 9 Tutorial
General Block Form

When a block is edited in such a way that it no longer fits with one of the standard block forms (Extruded,
Sloped wall, Pitched roof or Dome), it is labelled by DesignBuilder with the 5-General block form.
Blocks having the General block form can still be transformed back to have the Sloped wall or Pitched roof
form (but not the Extruded form) on the Block tab of the Model options dialog.
Note: General form blocks are automatically configured so that the external walls are not shown on the Edit
screen when at block level. This can help when drawing partitions, positioning assembly blocks etc. The
option can be reversed using the Display external walls Block display model option if required.
Height
After drawing a vertically extruded block perimeter on a horizontal plane, the block will be automatically
extruded using the Height setting, if the Auto-Complete Block option is switched on or the View Rotation has
been set to 'Plan'.
Auto-Complete Block
After drawing a vertically extruded block perimeter on a horizontal plane, the block will be automatically
extruded by the Height setting if the Auto-Complete Block option is switched on or the View Rotation has
been set to 'Plan'. With this option switched off (or in the case of a non-horizontal drawing plane), the
perimeter can be dragged along an axis normal to the perimeter to obtain the required extrusion.
- 117 -
Edit blocks
The geometry and other attributes of blocks can be modified using the following tools:
Drag block face

Divide block using cutting tool
Boolean Geometry Operations
Edit Block Geometry Dialog
Convert Outline Block
Transfer Blocks
Drag block face
The topology of a block can be edited using the 'Drag face' tool which allows you to select a block surface and
drag it along an axis, normal to the surface. To edit a block topology first go to the building level, select the
block that you want to modify and click on the 'Drag face' tool. Then move the mouse cursor to the surface
that you want to move. As you move the cursor across the block surfaces, each surface will highlight to help in
selecting the required surface. When the mouse cursor is over the required surface, click to start dragging it:
Drag the surface using the mouse or key-in the distance to shift the surface by the required amount:
- 118 -
General Block Form
Divide block Using Cutting Tool
Blocks can be cut (i.e. divided into 2) using the Divide (Cut) Block Tool. To cut or divide a block first go to the
building level, select the block that you want to modify and click on the Divide block toolbar icon. Blocks are
divided using a plane which can be defined using one of 2 methods:
1-Draw plane - you define the plane by clicking on 3 points.

2-Select plane - you define the plane by selecting an existing plane in the model.
Draw Plane Method

The Draw plane cutting method involves drawing two lines which define the plane. For example to cut a
pitched roof to fit flush with a rotunda:
- 119 -
Because the geometry is fairly complicated, it's advisable to use an outline block to generate the intermediate
geometry and then convert the block to a building block after the editing process is complete. So, from the
building level, click on the Add new block tool, select 2-Outline block as the block type, set the perimeter
shape to 1-Polygon and the Height to the same height as the rotunda, then draw a conventional vertical
extrusion to fit flush to the rotunda. In order to trace round the base of the rotunda, it's probably easier to set
the view rotation to 'Plan', click on to the ground plane and press SHIFT to lock the plane before placing the
first perimeter point:
When tracing around a perimeter by snapping from end-point to end-point, it can be helpful to switch off the
direction snaps and the drawing guides to prevent them from interfering with the point snaps. Completing the
perimeter:
- 120 -
General Block Form
Click on the outline block to select it and then click on the 'Divide block' tool and make sure that the 'Cutting
method' is set to 1-Draw plane in the Drawing Options data panel. Switch the protractor on and move the
cursor over the end face of the selected block, the surface will highlight to indicate that it's become the active
drawing plane. Press the SHIFT key to lock the drawing plane and then locate the cursor 4m from the base of
the block using edge snap:
Click to place the beginning of the first cutting plane line, then place the end of the line to intersect the face
edge with a pitch angle of 30:
- 121 -
Orbit to make the back face of the block visible. Move the mouse cursor over the back face and when it
highlights, press the SHIFT key to lock the plane. Place the second cutting plane line to snap to the local Xaxis of the back face:
Click to complete the cutting plane. The blocks that will be produced by the cut are displayed in red and
green, depending on which side of the cutting plane they lie. At this point, you can choose to cancel the cut by
pressing the ESC key or selecting 'Cancel Cut' from the right-click menu.
- 122 -
General Block Form
Click again to complete the cut and then select and delete the block that isn't needed:
Go through a similar process to create the other pitch. You may need to switch off the drawing guides and
mid-point snap to prevent them from interfering with the protractor and edge snap:
- 123 -
Click to create the cutting plane:
Click again to make the final cut and then select and delete the block that isn't part of the finished structure:
- 124 -
General Block Form
The outline block can then be selected and converted to a building block:
Select Plane Method

The Select plane method of cutting a block uses an existing plane to define the cutting plane. It can be
demonstrated by modelling a roof offshoot:
- 125 -
Click on the Add new block tool, select 2-Outline block as the block type and set the perimeter shape to 1Polygon. Switch the protractor on and move the mouse cursor to the back face of the offshoot. When the
cursor is over the back face, press the <Shift> key to lock the drawing plane and snap the protractor to the
upper edge end-point:
Draw the first perimeter line at a 45 pitch and move the cursor to intersect with the back face upper edge
mid-point drawing guide and click to set the end-point:
- 126 -
General Block Form
Move the cursor to snap to the other end-point of the back face upper edge and then complete the perimeter:
Now drag the outline block face through the main roof block:
- 127 -
Select the offshoot outline block and click on the Cut block along plane tool, making sure that the Cutting
method on the Drawing options data panel is set to 'Select plane and click on the forward facing plane of the
main roof block to create a cut in the offshoot block in the plane of the roof:
Click again to finish the cut and then select the section of the offshoot roof block that is not required and
delete it:
- 128 -
General Block Form
Select the roof offshoot block and click on the 'Convert selected outline blocks to building blocks' tool to
complete the process:
Note: In some circumstances, resulting blocks may not be able to be converted to building blocks due to
geometrical limitations. In this case, the block will be displayed in a sepia colour to indicate that it cannot be
converted.
Boolean Geometry Operations

DesignBuilder provides some powerful modelling tools for combining blocks in various ways to create new
more complex geometric forms. Boolean geometry (otherwise know as Constructive Solid Geometry or CSG)
provides these functions:
1-Union, where 2 blocks are combined into a single new block.

2-Intersection, where a new block is formed where the 2 original blocks intersect.
3-Subtraction, in which one block is subtracted from the other to form a single new block.
- 129 -
The boolean process works in 4 stages:

1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the 2 blocks involved. The union operation can be applied to any block including building blocks,
component blocks and outlines blocks but the Subtraction and Intersection operations can only be
applied to outline blocks as they require intersection of the 2 primary blocks. The 2 blocks must both
either be of the same type (building block /component block /outline block) or must involve an outline
block. They must touch in the case of the Union operation and intersect in the case of the Subtraction
and Intersection operations.
Click on the Boolean operations toolbar icon. This opens the Drawing options dialog in the bottom left
of the screen.
Select the operation type in the Drawing options panel in the bottom left of the screen. In the case of 2
building blocks Union is the only option so the drop list is greyed out. The 2 blocks are both shown in
purple for the Union and Intersection operations, or one in purple and the other in green for the
Subtraction operation. For the Subtraction operation the green block will be used to subtract space
from the purple block.
Left-mouse click a final time on the model to complete the operation.
Using the Boolean Operations - Subtraction Example - Nested Glazed Ellipsoids

Step 1 Draw 4 construction lines starting from origin to create a cross centred on the origin 20 x 10m
Step 2 Draw a dome 20m radius centred on the origin, then use the Stretch tool to reduce it's y and z
dimensions by 50%. The dimensions should be 40m in the x-direction, 20m in the y-direction and 10m height
(z-direction).
Step 3 Draw a similar but 2x smaller ellipsoid 10m x 5m x 5m. Move the large ellipsoid on top of the smaller
one with the centre of each over the origin as shown below.
- 130 -
General Block Form
Step 4 Use the selection tool to rubber band a selection over both blocks, click on the Boolean operations
toolbar icon and select the Subtraction option in Drawing options. If necessary click on the Switch subtraction
block checkbox to ensure that the smaller inner block is in green (i,e. it is to be used to subtract volume from
the larger block). After the Subtraction operation you should see the blocks as below.
and with the smaller inner block moved out of the way:
- 131 -
Step 5 Draw a small rectangular outline block aligned with the x and y axes to give you a vertical plane to
allow rotation operations to create the lower blocks. Then copy the larger outer block and rotate the copy by
180 using a vertical plane as the rotation plane. Repeat these steps for the smaller inner outline block.
Step 6 Position and Union the 2 small inner blocks together to create an egg shaped inner block.
- 132 -
General Block Form
Step 7 Move the inner outline block into place.
- 133 -
Step 8 Convert the outline blocks to building blocks
Step 9 Move the lower outer block into position.
- 134 -
General Block Form
Step 10 if necessary, move the entire set of 4 blocks above ground by selecting all 3 blocks (rubber band
selection) and using the base point of the lower outer block as the reference point and moving it the origin.
Step 11 Set 100% glazing for exterior, interior and roof glazing.
- 135 -
Step 12 Draw 2 holes in the floor of the outer top block. Note it is not possible to union the 2 outer blocks as
there would be problem maintaining the inner blocks in this case.
- 136 -
General Block Form
Step 13 Visualise and simulate.
Using the Boolean Operations - Union Blocks Example

The first step in using the Boolean operations is to go to building level and select the 2 blocks to which the
command is to apply.
- 137 -
The 2 blocks to be combined are shown above before the operation is started- a 3.5 m height L-shaped block
and a tall sports hall block.
When the 2 blocks are both selected the screen looks as above with the Boolean operations toolbar icon
enabled.
Pressing on the toolbar icon at this stage starts the command and the Display options panel is displayed in
the bottom left of the screen. On this panel there is a drop list with the 3 Boolean functions available for
selection. In the case where 2 building or component blocks are selected, only the Union operation is allowed.
This is because building blocks cannot intersect and the Subtraction and Intersection options do not apply as
they require blocks to intersect.
- 138 -
General Block Form
Once the command has been started the 2 blocks will become purple. To complete the operation, left-click
once more on the edit screen with the mouse.
After the final click, the 2 blocks are joined into a single block (above).
This can be a very useful way to simplify building geometry avoiding use of multiple blocks and easing the
creation of zones that may span what were multiple blocks.
- 139 -
Edit block Options
You can edit certain aspects of a building block geometry by clicking on the 'Building model options' icon while
at the block level. This opens the Model Options dialog box:
At the block level, the Block tab on the Model Options data dialogue box is enabled and allows you to change
the Form of the block and to modify pitched roof assignment.
To change the form of the current block, make a selection from the 'Form' drop list. When you change the
form of a block from an 'Extruded' form to 'Pitched Roof' or 'Sloping Walls' the original form will be
remembered so that even if you have edited the block by cutting it or dragging a face, when you convert the
form back to 'Extruded', the original form will be restored.
The Pitched Roof/Wall Construction Transition settings allow you to control which elements within a block
will be assigned pitched roof construction, either by disallowing pitched roof construction altogether or by
adjusting the element slope to determine which elements should be identified as pitched roofs. The 'Roof-wall
transition angle' is the angle from the horizontal below which the element will be considered a roof.
Convert Outline Block
To convert an Outline block to a Building block, or Component block select the blocks that you want to convert
and then click on the Convert selected outline block tool. This opens the Convert Outline Block Options
dialog below.
- 140 -
General Block Form
Select the type of block to convert to:
Building block
Component block
When converting to a Building block you can also enter the Wall thickness of the block.
Transfer Blocks
You can move blocks from one building to another using the Transfer blocks command accessed from the
Edit menu when the site contains more than 1 building. This menu option opens the Transfer blocks dialog
below. Select the building containing the blocks to be copied and the building to receive the blocks and Press
OK. All blocks in the source building will be moved to the destination building.
Tip: If you would like to transfer only selected blocks then you could first clone the source building, remove the
blocks that are not required from the copy then transfer the remaining blocks to the destination building.
Note: You should check before starting the block transfer that none of the source blocks overlap with blocks in
the destination building. Even a small overlap will cause the whole process to fail.
A Transfer block operation cannot be undone and it clears any existing undo/redo information.
Adding Solar Collectors
- 141 -
To add or create a new Solar collector follow these steps:

1. First go to the building level (if you are not already there) and click on the Draw solar collector toolbar
icon.
2. Select the type of collector from pop-up menu. For example to add a PV panel, select the Add solar
collector - Photovoltaic option.
3. Position and draw the Solar collector in the way that you would a block when using the 2-Rectangle shape.
The first click defines one corner (the bottom right say), the second click defines the diagonally opposite
corner (top left say) and completes the placement.
The panel is effectively defined in 2-D, i.e. there is no option to define its depth.
You can draw the panel on an existing building block, component block or outline block surface or directly on
the ground.
Note that in cases where a solar collector is placed on a building surface (e.g. on a pitched roof surface) it is
not modelled as being fully coupled with the underlying surface, however it does cast a shadow as would any
other block or shading surface.
4. You can edit the properties of the solar collector by first navigating to the Solar collector object by either
double-clicking on the graphical object in the Layout screen or single-clicking on the item in the Navigator. For
PV solar collectors you can define the panel performance and other properties on the Construction tab under
the Solar Collector header.
5. The electrical side of the Photovoltaic collectors operation is defined on the HVAC tab under On Site
Electricity Generation header.
The hot water, operation and control of Solar hot water collectors is defined with the Detailed HVAC data.
Note: PV systems can be modelled when using either Simple or Detailed HVAC but Solar hot water systems
require Detailed HVAC.
Working at Block Level

This section describes the various operations involved in partitioning a block to create zones and adding
courtyards to blocks. Before you start to draw partitions or courtyards, you first need to go to the block that
you want to edit and you can do this by clicking on the block entry in the navigator or by double-clicking on the
block in the 'Edit' screen, if you're at the building level.
- 142 -
General Block Form
Go to block level
Either of these operations will take you to the block:
Zone Block by Drawing partitions
Building blocks can be divided into any number of zones by drawing partitions inside the block. To start
drawing partitions, click on the 'Draw partitions' tool. You can place partitions freely within a block either freestanding or snapped to an external block wall or existing partition. Partitions can be positioned using the
snaps, drawing guides and protractor. A partition doesn't need to be snapped to a wall element, you can drag
a partition across a wall and when you click the end-point, it will be automatically trimmed to the wall.
You can enter the thickness of the first partition drawn in the block and subsequent partitions take on the
same thickness as the first.
- 143 -
Note For Partitioning Large Models

By default, blocks are automatically re-zoned as soon as complete zone perimeters are formed by
drawing partitions. In order to speed up the process of adding partitions, particularly in the case of large
and complex blocks, the block zoning process can be postponed until partitioning has been completed.
To do this, open the Model options dialog and switch off the Automatic block zoning option under the
Miscellaneous Edit header on the Drawing Tools tab. When partitioning has been completed, the block
can be manually re-zoned by selecting the Rezone block command from the Tools menu. Partitions
drawn with the Automatic block zoning option switched off are called Outline partitions and are shown
in blue.
Click the partition end-point on the outside of the wall and it's automatically trimmed:
- 144 -
General Block Form
When you draw a partition or a series of partitions (stream), you can undo the last point placed by pressing
the ESC key or selecting 'Undo last point' from the right-click menu.
You can also terminate a partition stream anywhere by selecting 'End stream' from the right-click menu (or by
pressing the ENTER key):
When partitions or partition streams are placed that don't connect with anything at either or both ends, they
are called hanging partitions and can be used to add thermal mass to zones:
- 145 -
Once you've placed partitions that divide existing zones within a block, the block is re-zoned automatically:
When you partition complex blocks rather than simple vertical extrusions, partitions are automatically cut to fit
within the block:
- 146 -
General Block Form
Tip: If the display of the block outer walls prevents you from drawing partitions (for example in a pitched roof
block) then you can switch off the display of external walls.
Advanced Topic
In some cases, if the geometry is complex, it can be possible to create a zone that comprises several
geometric bodies which are physically separated from each other. For example, in the case of a horizontally
extruded 'C' shape:
If a partition is drawn as shown:
- 147 -
The partition and resulting zone will be cut to form what appears to be two partitions and two zones:
However the two resulting zones are in fact two geometric bodies within one zone:
- 148 -
General Block Form
While this geometry is perfectly acceptable for the default EnergyPlus solar calculations (see Model Options),
it cannot be processed by the more rigourous Full exterior and interior solar distribution option. If this latter
option is required, you can either model the geometry as two separate blocks or cut the block.
Hanging and Outline Partitions

Hanging partitions are partitions that do not create zones because they do not connect at both ends with other
walls/partitions. Hanging partitions are created in the same way as ordinary partitions using the Draw partition
tool, but are finished by pressing <Enter> (or the End partition stream command from the right click menu) to
define the end of a partition stream. They are shown in blue (below).
Hanging partitions are modelled non-geometrically in EnergyPlus as Internal thermal mass.
Outline Partitions
Also if Automatic block zoning is switched off, all new partitions are treated as outline partitions (shown in blue
and do not create zones) until converted to standard partitions by using the Rezone block command from the
Tools menu.
- 149 -
Virtual Partitions
A virtual partition is a partition between 2 zones which exists purely to sub-divide the space up and has no
corresponding wall in the actual building.
Virtual partitions are commonly used for separating perimeter zones from core zones when there is to be
different HVAC provision or when carrying out daylighting or solar overheating studies in situations where a
large open plan space is subject to a high level of solar gain around the perimeter. Virtual partitions can be
placed to create separate perimeter and core zones so that the local effect of the solar gain in the perimeter
zone may be calculated. In the absence of virtual partitions, the risk of overheating could be underestimated
due to the distribution of solar gain throughout the open plan space.
When drawing partitions you can set the Partition type in the Drawing option panel to 1-Standard (the default
for a standard partition) or to 2-Virtual to create a virtual partition.
For partitions that have already been created you can navigate to the partition (click on the appropriate item in
the Navigator or double-click on the partition object from either zone or block level) and change the partition
type between 1-Standard and 2-Virtual using the Partition type Drawing option control.
Note: Virtual partitions are modelled using a hole that fills the whole surface area so you cannot draw custom
openings on a virtual partition. For details on how DesignBuilder EnergyPlus models virtual partitions see
information on holes. The model options for controlling the effect of holes apply equally to virtual partitions.
See also:
Merge zones connected by holes

How airflow through holes (and virtual partitions) is modelled
Natural ventilation options
Creating Voids (Courtyard spaces) Within Blocks
To create an external courtyard within a block, go to the required block by clicking on the navigator entry or
double-clicking the block in the 'Edit' screen and then click on the 'Draw void perimeter' tool. You can the
select a perimeter shape and set the required wall thickness in the 'Drawing Options' data panel:
After completing the perimeter, a courtyard is automatically generated within the block:
- 150 -
General Block Form
Important note: the void space is modelled as being exterior to the building and not as any sort of zone. If
you need to create an atrium space whose temperature and other conditions are calculated then avoid use of
the Draw void tool and instead model it like any other zone within the block using partitions.
If you would like DesignBuilder to automatically punch voids through new blocks drawn on top of existing
blocks having voids, then use the Automatically include voids from lower blocks model option which can be
set on the Miscellaneous Edit tab of the model options dialog.
Restriction: The void perimeter lines you draw to create a void cannot touch any other external or internal
wall, so you can't for example use the void command to take chunks out of the external wall - the void must be
wholly contained within the block.
Restriction: You can't create any other objects within a void - the void space is reserved and you will get
intersection errors if you try to draw a block in the void space.
Working within Zones (Zone Level)

This section describes the operations involved in placing light sensors within zones. To place light sensors
within a zone, you first need to go to the zone that you want to modify. You can do this from the block level
either by clicking on the navigator entry or double-clicking on the zone floor in the 'Edit' screen if you're at the
block level.
- 151 -
Go to zone level
Either of these operations will take you to the zone:
Placing Light Sensors

If you switch zone Lighting Control on, a light sensor will be displayed as a blue rectangle with the number '1'
inside it indicating 'Light sensor 1'. By default Light sensor 1 is positioned in the geometric centre of the zone.
If you now switch on the Second Lighting Area, a second light sensor will be displayed with a number '2' inside
it:
- 152 -
General Block Form
To move a light sensor to a different location, move the mouse cursor over the required sensor and click on it
to select it and then Move it to wherever you want within the floor perimeter:
Note: You can set the height of the working plane to define the desk height (and hence the z-position of the
lighting sensor) on the Advanced tab of the Model options dialog.
Working with Surfaces (Surface Level)

This section describes the operations involved in creating surface openings and sub-surfaces. To create
openings and sub-surfaces in a zone surface, you first need to go to the surface that you want to modify. You
can do this from the zone level either by clicking on the navigator entry or double-clicking on the zone surface
in the 'Edit' screen, if you're at the zone level.
- 153 -
Go to surface level
Either of these operations will take you to the surface:
When working with surfaces, switching to Normal view rotation can be helpful in orientating openings and subsurfaces:
- 154 -
General Block Form
Openings
You can draw, move, clone (copy), rotate and delete the following types of opening:
Window
Sub-surface
Hole
Door
Vent
Note that custom openings that have been drawn by hand or copied are displayed in bright colours to
differentiate them from (grey) default openings:
Yellow - windows
Blue - sub-surfaces
Green - holes
Cyan - doors
Magenta - vents
See also the Drawing Openings on Surfaces Tutorial
Draw Window
Before activating the Draw window tool, you are given the option of keeping any default surface openings
through a check box in the Display options dialog. If you choose to keep these openings, they will be
converted to custom openings and so will not be subsequently affected by any changes to the facade attribute
data and must be deleted or edited manually, or cleared back to default openings.
See the Drawing Openings on Surfaces Tutorial
To add a window to a surface, click on the 'Draw window' tool. If you have opted to keep the default openings,
they will be converted to custom openings:
- 155 -
On the other hand, if you un-check the 'Keep default openings' option, all default openings will be removed.
Select the perimeter shape that you require and then move the mouse cursor to place the window origin. As
you move the mouse cursor over the surface, distance guides will be displayed from each of the surface
vertices to help in placing the window origin. If the increment snap is switched on, the origin will snap in
increments from the vertex that's nearest to the mouse cursor:
You can lock the origin to a particular vertex by moving the mouse cursor close to the vertex and pressing the
SHIFT key and keeping it pressed until you actually place the origin. This can be helpful if you want to place a
window relative to a vertex at the other end of the surface:
- 156 -
General Block Form
Having placed the window origin, you can then draw the window using the selected perimeter drawing mode,
for details of drawing perimeters please refer to the Perimeters section.
Using Key Ins To Create Openings

You can type in the precise dimensions and offset from the origin of your window using 'Key Ins'. The
procedure is:
1. Start the 'Draw window' command as described above.
2. Define the window position relative to an origin by first moving the mouse cursor to define the origin
(typically the bottom left corner of the surface)
3. Then type in the offset of the window origin (bottom left corner of the window in this example) in the format
x y. Note that there is no comma between the x and the y coordinates.
The coordinates that you type in will appear under the 'Key In' header in Drawing Options panel. The
convention used when positioning and drawing openings at surface level is that x increases from left to right
and y increases from bottom to top. This is true whether viewing the surface from inside or from outside.
- 157 -
4. Then press <Enter> to define the window origin.

5. Next type in the window width followed by a space followed by the window height. Again the coordinates
you type in are shown in the Drawing Options panel. In the example below a window is being defined having
width 2m and height 1m.
6. Press enter to create the window:
- 158 -
General Block Form
You can use the mouse in conjunction with Key Ins if you prefer. So you could use the mouse to define the
window offset from the origin and then use Key Ins to define the window dimensions or vice versa.
Tip: You can also enter negative x and y values when keying in offset and coordinates.
Draw Sub-Surface
For details of using the Draw sub-surface tool, please refer to the Draw window tool.
See the Sub-Surface Construction topic for information on the construction data used for sub-surfaces and
other details.
Draw Door
For details of using the Draw door tool, please refer to the Draw window tool.
Note: In EnergyPlus doors must be rectangular
Draw Hole
For details of using the Draw hole tool, please refer to the Draw window tool.
Holes are usually used for two purposes:
1.
For merging zones together. Note that the Merge zones connected by holes option must be selected
for this to work.
- 159 -
2.
If adjacent zones aren't merged then holes between them allow air and radiation to pass. See below for
details on this.
Holes can also be added in exterior surfaces to allow air and radiation to pass.
Tip: It is possible to draw large holes in surfaces to give the effect of the surface having being removed. This
can be a useful technique for creating atrium-type spaces, connecting gable roof blocks to the main roof block
and generally merging zones in different blocks.
More information on Drawing holes can be found in the Basic Drawing Tools 7 Tutorial
The way holes are modelled in EnergyPlus depends on the model options selected:
Airflow
The way that airflow through holes (and virtual partitions) is modelled depends on the Natural ventilation
model option selection. The rules are as follows.
Scheduled Natural Ventilation and Heating and Cooling
design calculations
Holes positioned on internal partition walls are used to
mix the air between the two adjacent zones, but only
when using Model airflow through openings model
option. In this case the airflow through internal holes is
calculated based on the Airflow rate per opening area
data.
Simulations with Calculated Natural Ventilation

Holes simply represent a constant air flow path in the
fabric and air flow through them is unaffected by natural
ventilation setpoints.
The airflow through holes is calculated (using the

EnergyPlus Airflow network) based the pressure
difference across the opening and a coefficient of
External holes have no effect on airflow. This is because discharge of 0.65.
scheduled natural ventilation has no way to calculate the
airflow through an external hole which would in reality
require knowledge of wind speed and direction and other
pressure-related data.
Radiation And Conduction Heat Transfer

The way that radiation and conduction of heat through holes (and virtual partitions) is modelled depends on
the solar distribution setting, the solution algorithm and the calculation type as described below.
All exterior holes and when Solar
distribution algorithm is Full interior and
exterior
Internal holes in simulations when using CTF

solution algorithm
Modelled as "windows" with "perfectly

clear" glazing and so they transmit solar
radiation and conduct heat.
Modelled as Infrared Transparent surfaces in

EnergyPlus. The hole will participate in the
transfer of visible and solar radiation by doing a
"wavelength transformation", making all short
wave length radiation that is incident on the
surface into long wave length radiation and
having it participate in the long wavelength
radiant exchange.
- 160 -
Internal holes in
heating design and
cooling design or
when using Finite
difference solution
algorithm
Modelled as an
opaque subsurfaces with a
standard "Holes
and vents"
construction, so no
radiation transfer
takes place
between the 2
zones, only
conduction plus any
airflow.
General Block Form
Draw Vent
For details of using the Draw vent tool, please refer to the Draw window tool.
Add CFD Boundary
When at surface level you can add a CFD boundary in much the same way as a window or any other opening
. Please refer to the instructions for the Draw window tool for details on the process of drawing the CFD
boundary.
Note: There is one important difference with CFD boundaries compared with openings such as windows,
which is that the edges of supply/extract boundaries must not coincide with parent surface edges. The CFD
boundary should be separated from the surface edges by a distance of at least 0.1 m.
After selecting the Add CFD boundary tool, the boundary settings are displayed on the Drawing options data
panel. You can select the required boundary type from the Boundary type drop list. The following boundary
types are available for surfaces of all orientations:
- 161 -
1Supply (general purpose HVAC supply diffuser)

4Extract (HVAC extract grille)
5Temperature (surface temperature patch)
6Flux (surface heat flux patch)
The following additional boundary types for multi-directional diffusers will appear for ceiling and other
downward-facing surfaces only:
2Four-way (four-way supply diffuser)

3Two-way (two-way supply diffuser)
Various settings are available depending on the boundary type:
1-Supply :
Boundary temperature - the temperature of the air entering the space.

Flow rate - the supply volume flow rate.
X-discharge angle () - the discharge angle between the local surface X-axis and an inward facing
normal to the surface. At the surface level, taking a normal view from the inside of the zone to the
surface, the X-axis discharge angle is positive between the normal and the positive X-axis (i.e. the axis
pointing towards the right) and negative between the normal and the negative X-axis (i.e. the axis
pointing towards the left). For example to define a discharge angle of 45 pointing towards the left of
the centre of a diffuser, looking at it from the inside of the zone, you would enter 45. On the other
hand, to define a discharge angle of 45 pointing towards the right of the centre, you would enter 45:
Y-discharge angle () - the discharge angle between the local surface Y-axis and an inward facing
normal to the surface. At the surface level, taking a normal view from the inside of the zone to the
surface, the Y-axis discharge angle is positive between the normal and the positive Y-axis (i.e. the axis
pointing upwards) and negative between the normal and the negative Y-axis (i.e. the axis pointing
downwards). For example to define a discharge angle of 45 pointing downwards from the centre of a
diffuser, looking at it from the inside of the zone, you would enter 45. On the other hand, to define a
discharge angle of 45, pointing upwards from the centre, you would enter 45:
- 162 -
General Block Form
Minimum discharge velocity is the minimum required velocity at the face of the diffuser. If the
minimum discharge velocity cannot be achieved by combining the specified flow rate with the face area
of the diffuser as drawn, supply diffusers are created using a number of elements, the areas of which
are determined by combining the specified volume flow rate together with the minimum discharge
velocity. The maximum linear dimension of each component element is currently 'hard-set' at 0.2m. If
the minimum discharge velocity is set to a very small value (e.g. 0.01m/s), a single element will be
created spanning the entire area of the diffuser as drawn and the actual discharge velocity will be
determined from the geometry of the diffuser face and the supply volume (i.e. v=V/A for orthogonal
diffusers) - the actual discharge velocity is displayed for diffusers on the CFD data tab at the opening
level.
Note 1: the minimum discharge velocity is an important setting in that the diffuser supply velocity in
conjunction with the diffuser discharge angle(s) can determine the flow pattern in a space.
Note 2: DesignBuilder CFD can only guarantee minimum discharge velocities for supply diffusers that
are located on orthogonal surfaces, that is surfaces that are parallel to the one of the 3 grid axes.
2Four-way
Boundary temperature - temperature of the air entering the space.

Flow rate - the supply flow rate.
Multi-way diffuser discharge angle () - the discharge angle is the angle between the downward
pointing normal and the diffuser jet.
Minimum discharge velocity - the minimum required velocity at the face of the diffuser. Four-way
diffusers are created using four separate elements, one located at each edge of the diffuser, the area
of each being determined by combining the specified volume flow rate together with the minimum
discharge velocity.
- 163 -
3Two-way
Boundary temperature - the temperature of the air entering the space.

Flow rate - enter the supply flow rate.
Multi-way diffuser discharge angle () - the angle between the downward pointing normal and the
diffuser jet (see illustration in Four-way section).
2-way diffuser discharge direction - the local surface axis along which the diffuser is to discharge.
Minimum discharge velocity - the minimum required velocity at the face of the diffuser. Two-way
diffusers are created using two separate elements, one on either side of the diffuser along the
discharge axis, the area of each being determined by combining the specified volume flow rate together
with the minimum discharge velocity.
- 164 -
General Block Form
4Extract
Flow rate - the extract flow rate.
5Temperature
Boundary temperature - temperature for the patch.
6 Flux
Heat flux - heat flux for the patch.
Note: Generally, you should ensure that there are at least three grid cells between a supply boundary and an
obstruction (such as a wall, component or assembly), otherwise, during simulation, the flow can lock and you
will see the mass residual plot forms a flat line with no convergence
Edit surfaces
At the surface level, you can select custom openings and move, clone (copy), delete and rotate them.
Note: Default openings cannot be selected and manipulated in this way.
You can also clear custom openings their default state using the Clear Data to Default command.
- 165 -
Editing Openings at the Building Level

Building block faade openings can be selected at the building level and subsequently moved, copied or
deleted. In order to edit openings at the building level you first need to select the openings either clicking on
them using the Select tool or by dragging a selection window around them:
The selected openings are highlighted:
When you have selected an opening, you will see that the Move selected object(s), Clone selected object(s)
and Delete selected object(s) icons are active and you can select one of these commands. As an example,
the arched openings and doorway are to be copied onto the angled faade of the leftmost block. To begin
with, you need to delete the existing opening on the angled faade by selecting it and clicking on the Delete
selected object(s) icon:
- 166 -
General Block Form
Opening removed:
All opening edit operations at the building level automatically convert default openings to custom openings,
which is why you need to remove the existing opening.
Then in order to copy the openings, you need to select a handle point and you can do this by first clicking on
the Clone selected object(s) command icon and then clicking on the required handle point - the endpoint snap
will help in selecting the handle point.
- 167 -
First select the handle point, and then position the copy using the various snaps:
As you move the copied openings across each block faade you will see them automatically snap into the
faade plane and after positioning the openings, you can then click on the mouse key to add the openings in
the required position:
- 168 -
General Block Form
You will see that any copies that wont fit into the selected location are automatically discarded.
Note: You can select openings on multiple planes but in this case the openings can only be deleted, not
moved or copied.
Undo/Redo
Undo/Redo commands accessed from Edit menu
To undo a geometric operation, select Undo from the 'Edit' menu (or press <Control-Z>) and similarly to redo
a geometric operation, select Redo (or press <Control-R>). Because many of the geometric operations are
dependent on specific model levels, you may need to undo or redo navigation operations before you get to the
required geometric operation, e.g. 'Undo - Go to surface', etc.
Note that Undo/Redo applies only to geometric operations and changes to Model Data cannot be undone.
Rebuild
Rebuild command accessed from Tools menu
Sometimes the adjacencies within DesignBuilder models can become corrupt. The Rebuild command
recalculates the zone, surface and adjacency geometry from the base building elements.
Rezone Block
Rezone block command accessed from Tools menu
Use the Rezone block command to refresh the zoning in the current block. The command converts any outline
partitions in a block to standard partitions and updates zones due to any partitions that may have deleted. The
command should be used when the Automatic block zoning model option is switched off. When the option is
switched on (and it has always been switched on during the life of a model) then you will not need to use this
command.
MODEL DATA
Model Data is the data for the site on the tabs:
Location
Legislative region and insulation standards
and data for building model on the tabs:
Activity (usage)
- 169 -
Constructions
Openings (windows, doors, vents, holes, sub-surfaces)
Lighting
HVAC
The Model Data tabs are shown in the Edit Screen - User Interface help topic.
At the point of the building is created, building model default data is initially loaded at the building level from
templates. This is inherited from the building to blocks to zones to surfaces and to openings. This default
model data can be overwritten by making edits on the Model Data tabs on the Edit screen.
See the Model Data Overview Tutorial
Site data
The site data represents information about the site including its location, the conditions of the ground,
weather, the legislative region and the maximum allowed U-values for new buildings. All buildings on the site
use the same site model data.
To edit site model data, go to site level and click on the Location or Region tabs (below).
You can easily change the location of the site by making a selection for the Location template on the Location
tab or by using the Load data from template command.
Alternatively you can open up the headers on the Location and Region tabs to edit the data.
Location
Location tab on model data at Site level
Use this screen to edit the location of the site, its weather data, the daylight savings and energy codes which
apply.
You can load a location from the database by clicking on Template line under the Location Template header
then on the '...' at the right of the line.
- 170 -
General Block Form
When you make a selection from the list of location templates data from selected template will be loaded to
the model.
Alternatively you can use the Load data from template tool.
You can enter data on:
Site location,
Site details,
Time and daylight saving,
Simulation weather,
Winter design weather and
Summer design weather.
Site location
You can set the latitude/longitude of the site for cooling design calculations as well as a number of site
characteristics.
Latitude
The latitude (in degrees) of the site. By convention, North Latitude is represented as positive; South Latitude
as negative. Minutes should be represented in decimal fractions of 60. (15 is 15/60 or .25)
Longitude
The longitude (in degrees) of the site. By convention, East Longitude is represented as positive; West
Longitude as negative. Minutes should be represented in decimal fractions of 60. (15 is 15/60 or .25).
Note: the latitude and longitude location data will only affect cooling design calculations. For simulations, the
position of the sun is defined by the location in the hourly weather file.
ASHRAE Climate Zone

The climate zone as defined by ASHRAE and loaded from the Location template can be overridden by
selecting from this dropdown list This allows you to deal with situations where the default climate zone does
not agree with the value in ASHRAE 90.1 Standard Appendix D. This is an important setting for ASHRAE 90.1
models as it defines the baseline constructions, glazing etc. to be used for the building.
Site details
Elevation above sea level

This data are defines the elevation of the site relative to sea level (in m or ft) and is passed directly to
EnergyPlus for use in pressure-related calculations. It is also used to calculate air density within DesignBuilder
when calculating volumetric flow rates from cooling loads.
Site orientation
The site orientation is the angle of the site plan view relative to North. For example enter 45 to rotate the
building(s) clockwise by 45.relative to North (screenshot example below). This is the quickest and most
reliable way to rotate all the buildings on the site relative to North and allows you to keep your x and y axes
aligned with the building.
- 171 -
North is indicated by the direction of the North arrow in the sketch plan view (above).
Warning: Rotating the building(s) is also possible but once this has been done it is more difficult to make
further geometric edits because, for rotations other than 90, 180 or 270, the x and y axes will be out of
alignment with the building. Also major rotations can increase the risk of geometric issues in the
model.Exposure to wind
The exposure to wind model data affects the pressure coefficients used when the Calculated Natural
ventilation option is set. It also affects the calculation of U-values (though these are not used in EnergyPlus
simulations).
When the wind exposure setting is changed, the U-value for each construction in the Constructions database
is recalculated because the wind exposure affects the external heat transfer coefficient. This is necessary to
ensure that the info panel data remains up to date and for local calculations such as SBEM which rely on Uvalues being up to date.
Ground
Ground texture
The texture used to represent the ground in the rendered view on the Visualisation screen.
Surface solar and visible reflectance

This is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the average reflectivity of the
ground throughout the year. Ground reflectance data is used to calculate the ground reflected solar radiation.
This fractional amount is used in the following equation:
GroundReflectedSolar = (BeamSolar x COS(SunZenithAngle) + DiffuseSolar) x GroundReflectance
- 172 -
General Block Form
Reproduced from the IBPSA BEM Book.

Important Note: Reflection from the ground is calculated even if the Reflections option is not used, but if
reflections are not calculated the ground plane is considered unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of the ground
by the building itself or by component blocks is ignored. Shadowing of the ground-reflected radiation by
component blocks is only taken into account if the Reflections option is used. Conclusion: Switch
Reflections on for accurate shading calculations.
The ground surface reflectance is also used to quantify the reflection of visible light in the Daylighting
calculations.
Some typical ground reflectance values are shown for various surface types below.
Surface Type
Surface Reflectance
Water (large angle of incidences)
0.07
Coniferous forest (winter)
0.07
Bituminous and gravel roof
0.13
Dry bare ground
0.20
Weathered concrete
0.22
Green grass
0.26
Dry grassland
0.2 to 0.3
Desert sand
0.4
Light building surfaces
0.6
Ground Reflectance of Foreground Surfaces from ASHRAE 2009 HOF, Source: Adapted from
Thevenard and Haddad (2006).
The default ground reflectance is 0.2.
Snow reflected solar modifier

A number between 0.0 and 10.0 which is used to modify the basic ground surface reflectance when snow is
on the ground. Note that the value of GroundReflectanceUsed (below) must be <=1.
GroundReflectanceUsed = GroundReflectance x ModifierSnow
During simulations, the ground is considered to be snow-covered when the SnowDepth data in the hourly
weather file is > 0.
From the IBPSA BEM Book:
- 173 -
Site exposure
Typical city centre
Typical urban site
Typical rural site
Isolated rural site
Reflectance of snow-covered ground

0.2
0.4
0.5
0.7
The default modifier is 2 for both solar and daylight radiation, giving an overall default reflectance for snow
covered ground of 0.2 x 2 = 0.4, suitable for a typical urban site.
Snow reflected daylight modifier

on the ground. Note that the value of DaylightingGroundReflectance Used (below) must be <=1.
DaylightingGroundReflectanceUsed = GroundReflectance x ModifierSnow
Ground monthly temperatures

There are 12 fields allowing you to represent the mean ground temperature for each month of the year. These
temperatures are used as the outside surface temperature for all surfaces adjacent to ground.
Note that the depth at which these temperatures apply depends on the thickness of the ground construction
(see above) added to the main floor/wall construction.
Caution: It is generally not appropriate to use the "undisturbed" ground temperatures calculated by the
weather converter and listed in EnergyPlus hourly weather files as these values are too extreme for the soil
under typical conditioned buildings. A reasonable default value of 2C less than the average monthly
indoor building temperature is appropriate for large buildings. For smaller buildings, the ground
temperatures will be somewhere between that value and undisturbed ground temperatures.
More information about determining appropriate ground temperatures is given in Ground Modelling and in the
EnergyPlus Auxiliary Programs document.
Ground deep temperatures

There are 12 fields allowing you to represent the deep ground temperature for each month of the year. These
temperatures are only used when the 1-Deep Reference ground temperature option is used in a 15-Follow
ground temperature Setpoint manager.
Ground shallow temperatures

There are 12 fields allowing you to represent the shallow ground temperature for each month of the year.
These temperatures are only used when the 1-Shallow Reference ground temperature option is used in a 15Follow ground temperature Setpoint manager.
FCFactor ground temperatures

There are 2 ways to define the ground temperatures for F-factor and C-factor calculations which are defined
through making one of the settings for the FCFactorMethod ground temperature source:
1-Hourly weather file where the monthly values of ground temperature come from the header of the
.epw hourly weather file. Note if this option is selected then the epw file header must include the
monthly FCFactor ground temperatures.
2-Model data in which case the 12 monthly temperatures are defined below.
Ground domain
Check the Include ground domains checkbox to activate the ground domain model. This reveals an option
to select the number of ground domain objects to use in the study. The number entered here will enable the
display of that number of ground domain objects as shown below.
- 174 -
General Block Form
You will normally need to define new site domain objects to define the exact situation for your model. The
domain objects defined and selected here will be available for selection at surface level for any surface that
has any contact with the ground. Wall surfaces that are underground can be selected as basements and any
floor that has any ground contact can be defined as having either slab or basement contact.
Water Mains Temperature

The Water Mains Temperature data is used to calculate water temperatures delivered by underground water
main pipes. It is only required when using Detailed HVAC. The mains temperatures are used as default,
make-up water temperature inputs for the Water heater. The mains temperatures are also used in the water
systems objects to model the temperature of cold water supplies.
Water mains temperatures are a function of outdoor climate conditions and vary with time of year. A
correlation has been formulated to predict water mains temperatures based on two weather inputs:
Average annual outdoor dry-bulb air temperature.
Maximum difference in monthly average outdoor air temperatures.
These values can be easily calculated from annual weather data using a spreadsheet or from the ".stat" file
available with the EnergyPlus weather files at www.energyplus.gov. Monthly statistics for dry-bulb
temperatures are shown with daily averages. The daily averages are averaged to obtain the annual average.
The maximum and minimum daily average are subtracted to obtain the maximum difference. For more
information on the water mains temperatures correlation, see the EnergyPlus Engineering Document.
Alternatively, the water mains temperatures can come from a schedule. This is useful for measured data or
when water comes from a source other than buried pipes, e.g., a river or lake.
Calculation method
Select from the options:
1-Schedule where the water mains temperature is scheduled.

2-Correlation where the water mains temperature is calculated from the average outdoor air
temperature and range of monthly outdoor air temperatures.
Schedule
If the Calculation method is 1-Schedule, the water mains temperatures are read from the schedule referenced
by this field. Note that the schedule temperatures must be in C even when using IP units.
Annual average outdoor air temperature

If the Calculation method is 2-Correlation, this field is used in the calculation as the annual average outdoor
dry-bulb air temperature (in C or F).
Maximum difference In monthly average outdoor air temperatures

If the calculation method is 2-Correlation, this field is used in the calculation as the maximum difference in
monthly average outdoor air temperatures (in K or F).
Precipitation
The Site precipitation data is used to describe the amount of precipitation on all Green roof surfaces over the
course of the simulation. Precipitation includes both rain and the equivalent water content of snow.
Precipitation is not yet described well enough in the usual building weather data file. So this object is used to
- 175 -
provide the data using Schedule objects that define rates of precipitation in meters per hour. A set of
schedules for site precipitation have been developed for USA weather locations and are provided with
EnergyPlus in the data set called PrecipitationSchedulesUSA.idf. The user can develop schedules however
they want. The schedules in the data set were developed using EnergyPlus weather file (EPW) observations
and the average monthly precipitation for the closest weather site provided by NOAA. EPW files for the USA
that were based on TMY or TMY2 include weather observations for Light/Moderate/Heavy rainfall, however
most international locations do not include these observations. The values were modeled by taking the middle
of the ranges quoted in the EPW data dictionary. The assumed piecewise function is shown below.
Amount
m/h
Light
0.0125
Medium
0.052
Heavy
0.1
The values were inserted on hour by hour basis for the month based on the observations. Then each month
was rescaled to meet the average precipitation for the month based on the 30-year average (1971-2000)
provided by the NOAA/NCDC. Therefore, the flags in the EPW file match the precipitation schedules for the
USA. Note that summing the average monthly precipitation values will not give you the average yearly
precipitation. The resulting value may be lower or higher than the average yearly value. Once the typical
rainfall pattern and rates are scheduled, the Site Precipitation data provides a method of shifting the total
rainfall up or down for design purposes. Wetter or drier conditions can be modelled by changing the Design
Annual Precipitation although the timing of precipitation throughout the year will not be changed.
Design annual precipitation

Magnitude of total precipitation for an annual period to be used in the model. Value selected by the user to
correspond with the amount of precipitation expected or being assumed for design purposes. The units are in
meters. This field works with the following two fields to allow easily shifting the amounts without having to
generate new schedules. Units are m/yr or ft/yr
Precipitation schedule
The schedule that describes the rate of precipitation. The precipitation rate schedule is analogous to weather
file data. However, weather files for building simulation do not currently contain adequate data for such
calculations. Therefore, EnergyPlus schedules are used to enter the pattern of precipitation events. The
values in this schedule are the average rate of precipitation in meters per hour. The integration of these
values over an annual schedule should equal the nominal annual precipitation.
Nominal annual precipitation

Magnitude of annual precipitation associated with the rate schedule. This value is used to normalize the
precipitation.
Site Green Roof Irrigation

The Site Roof irrigation data is used to describe the amount of irrigation on all Green roof surfaces over the
course of the simulation. You can define time-varying irrigation data using a maximum irrigation value and a
schedule. There is also an option to apply some intelligence to the irrigation system to avoid over-watering the
green roof.
Irrigation type
Defines the way irrigation water is supplied. Select from:
1-Scheduled - water is proved using the maximum irrigation rate and schedule modifier (below).
2-Smart - as Scheduled but overrides the irrigation to be off when the earth is 30% or more saturated
with water.
Max irrigation rate

Maximum rate of irrigation per hour. Units are m/h or ft/h.
Irrigation schedule
The schedule defining the operation of the irrigation system. A schedule value of zero means the irrigation is
switched off and a value of 1 means that the Max irrigation rate is used.
- 176 -
General Block Form
Outdoor Air CO2 And Contaminants

The Outdoor air CO2 and generic contaminants data at site level provides a way to select which contaminant
types will be simulated. Although carbon dioxide is not normally considered to be an indoor contaminant it is
used as an indicator of indoor air quality in buildings. From the simulation point of view EnergyPlus treats
carbon dioxide as a type of contaminant. In addition to carbon dioxide, a generic contaminant type model is
available.
These options should be selected if you wish to model CO2 or contaminant concentration levels in the
simulation, either to monitor zone air quality or if DCV control is being used.
Note: DesignBuilder automatically selects the CO2 concentration and Generic contaminant concentration
options below as appropriate if you have one of the IAQP DCV systems requiring CO2 or generic contaminant
tracking selected in a Detailed HVAC model.
CO2 concentration
Check this option if simulation of CO2 concentration levels are to be performed.
CO2 concentration schedule

Select the schedule that defines outdoor air carbon dioxide level values in units of ppm.
Generic contaminant concentration

Check this option if simulation of generic contaminant concentration levels are to be performed.
Generic contaminant schedule

Select the schedule that defines outdoor air generic contaminant level values in units of ppm.
Time and daylight saving

Select the Time zone for the site location. The time zone defines both the standard time meridian and
information on daylight saving. Generally you should leave this as the default for the location.
You can override daylight savings to be off by unchecking the Use daylight saving model data.
DesignBuilder models the effect of daylight saving time where the clocks are moved forward one hour in the
summer months in most non-equatorial countries. The timing of this is handled automatically using the Time
zones database when you load data from one of the Location templates supplied with the program.
There are some factors you should be aware of:
In EnergyPlus, summer Daylight saving works by adding the number of hours specified in the Time
zone data (usually 1 hour) to the local mean time to get the time to determine schedule operation.
Because Simulation results are displayed in local mean time, during the summer when daylight saving
time is in use, occupancy and equipment etc will appear to start 1 hour earlier in the day than it does in
the winter. To help you pinpoint this, DesignBuilder prints the times when daylight saving starts and
ends on the graph.
When comparing results with and without Daylight saving you will notice:
Solar radiation data has exactly the same timing with and without daylight saving.
Occupancy, equipment (and other aspects of building operation controlled by schedules) will
start 1 hour earlier with daylight saving.
Visualisations use local mean time when setting the position of the sun for site shading analysis. Again
you can account for daylight saving time by adding 1 hour to the time during summer months to see
shading for local clock time.
Simulation weather data

- 177 -
DesignBuilder uses EnergyPlus epw format hourly weather data for simulations (heating and cooling design
calculations use much simpler design weather data).
You can review, edit and convert weather using the Edit hourly weather data dialog.
You can also add your own hourly weather data.
Winter design weather data

You can select the 'confidence' of the design data, i.e. the probability that the design data will be at the very
extreme of conditions encountered over recent years. Select either 99.6 or 99% confidence (i.e. 0.4 or 1%
chance of more extreme winter weather occurring).
The weather data used in heating design calculations
Minimum outside dry-bulb temperature - the winter design outside air temperature
Co-incident Wind speed and Wind direction - only the speed of the wind is used for winter design
conditions but both speed and direction are used when autosizing heating systems in Calculated
natural ventilation models.
Summer design weather data

You can select the 'confidence' of the design data, i.e. the probability that the design data will be at the very
extreme of conditions encountered over recent years. This risk can be specified based on dry or wet-bulb
temperatures, for 99.6, 99 and 98% confidence (i.e. 0.4, 1 or 2% chance of more extreme weather occurring).
The weather data used in cooling design calculations:
Maximum outside dry-bulb temperature - the maximum dry bulb air temperature over the day
Minimum outside dry-bulb temperature - the minimum dry bulb air temperature (night time)
Wet-bulb temperature at the time of the maximum dry-bulb temperature.
Temperature Range Modifiers

The daily temperature profile used in the cooling design calculations is calculated from the maximum and
minimum values using a modified sinusoidal curve and assuming that the maximum temperature occurs at
15:00 and the minimum at 5:00. You can change this behaviour by using the data described below.
Dry-bulb temperature range modifier type

The options are:
1-Default multipliers - where EnergyPlus automatically generates the outside dry-bulb temperature
profile based on the data provided in ASHRAE 2009 HOF.
2-Multiplier schedule - where you can define a day schedule that specifies a multiplier applied to the
daily temperature range to create the proper dry-bulb temperature range profile for your design day.
This works as described below.
- 178 -
General Block Form
When using the 1-Default multipliers option, the multipliers are taken from the ASHRAE 2009 HOF. More
specifically, EnergyPlus creates an air temperature for each timestep by using the entered maximum dry-bulb
temperature in conjunction with the entered daily range and the above multiplier values. The actual equation
used is shown below:
Tcurrent = Tmax - Trange x Tmultiplier
where:
Tcurrent = Air temperature of current hour of day
TMax = User supplied Max Dry-bulb Temperature
Trange = The daily temperature range (Tmax - Tmin)
TMultiplier = Range multiplier as shown on the above graph
The range multiplier values represent typical conditions of diurnal temperatures (i.e. the low temperature for
the day occurring about 5:00 AM and the maximum temperature for the day occurring about 15:00. Note that
EnergyPlus does not shift the profile based on the time of solar noon as is optionally allowed in ASHRAE
procedures.
ASHRAE research indicates that dry-bulb and wet-bulb temperatures typically follow the same profile, so
EnergyPlus can use the default profile to generate humidity conditions.
Dry-bulb temperature range modifier schedule

If you would like to override the default ASHRAE profile you can select the 2-Multiplier schedule option for
the Dry-bulb temperature range modifier type setting. This shows allows a Day schedule to be selected to
define the range multipliers for each time of the cooling design day.
Cooling Design Solar Radiation Model

DesignBuilder uses the ASHRAE Clear Sky model described in ASHRAE HOF 2005 Chapter 31 for
calculating the direct and diffuse solar radiation for each hour in the cooling design day. The details of this are
described in the EnergyPlus Engineering reference guide.
Legislative Region and Insulation Standards

Region tab on model data at Site level
The data on the tab is related to the Legislative Region and associated insulation standards of the site.
Legislative Region
A Legislative region in DesignBuilder is typically a whole country or a region, province or state within a country
which has its own building control powers. The legislative region contains information on:
Local energy codes and building regulations

- 179 -
Carbon dioxide emission factors for a range of fuels.
Energy codes/insulation standards

Region tab on model data at Site level
You can select the Mandatory energy code in force as well as three additional levels of reference insulation
standards to represent buildings with 'Uninsulated', 'Stock average' and 'Best practice' construction standards.
This data is used:
To identify the mandatory energy code in force in the region. When one of the ASHRAE 90.1 codes are
selected this has a significant knock on impact on the rest of the model as described in the ASHRAE
90.1 Modelling section.
To set the insulation levels used when the 'Pre-design' Construction and glazing Model option is
selected.
When calculating asset ratings.
Note: If you change any of this data, the insulation standards of the constructions in the <System> category
will be automatically updated.
Building Model Data

Building Model Data can be entered at building, block, zone and surface levels (but not at site level). The set
of data shown will depend on the level in the hierarchy (building, block etc) and on the Model options selected.
Building Model Data is laid out on the tabs:
Activity
Construction
Openings
Lighting
HVAC
On Site Electricity Generation Data
Economics
Options
CFD
Detailed Equipment
Each of these categories of data has a template selection at the top of the tab allowing rapid loading of the
data from template.
Model data colour

Default data is inherited from the level above in the hierarchy and is shown in blue, while 'user data', i.e. data
you have explicitly set (or loaded from template) is shown in red. You can clear user data back to its default
state so it inherits from the level above using the Clear data to default command.
See also Component and Template list item colours codes
Tip: Use DesignBuilder defaults wisely! Take care to enter the minimum amount of data to get the
most from the inheritance system. For example if all zones in a particular block have the same activity
called say 'Office work', you should set the activity at block level and not multiple times at zone level. Equally
if all the blocks in the building have the same activity, you should set the data at the building level and allow
the blocks to inherit the data from the building. By keeping the amount of user data to a minimum, you will find
it quicker to make changes at a later date. Clearly it is much faster to change a few Model Data items at
building and block level than it is to make multiple changes at zone or surface levels.
See also section on Model Data Hierarchy & Data Inheritance.
- 180 -
General Block Form
Activity Model data

Activity tab in model data
Data on the Activity tab allows you to define the activity (usage) of the zones including information on:
Zone Type (block and zone level only)

Zone Multiplier
Include zone_Ref1347058261
Total Building Floor Areas (building level only)
Occupancy
Metabolic rates
Holidays (building level only)
Environmental control
Domestic Hot Water (DHW)
Computer gains
Office equipment gains
Miscellaneous gains
Catering gains
Process gains
You can load generic activity data by clicking on the Template option under Activity Template and then by
clicking on the '...' at the right of the line (below).
When you make a selection from the list of Activity templates, data from selected template will be loaded to
the model.
Alternatively you can use the Load data from template tool.
Note that the appropriate Sector is loaded with the activity (screenshot above).
All Activity data (apart from Holidays) is used to generate simulation data at the Zone level. Holiday data is
used at Building level.
See the Activity Data Tutorial
Zone Type
Activity tab in model data under Activity Template header
The zone type can be set at block or zone level on the Activity tab and can be one of:
1-Standard - the zone is within the main envelope and is usually (but not necessarily) occupied and
heated and/or cooled. This zone type also covers zones within the main building envelope that are
unoccupied and not directly heated or cooled such as offices that are temporarily unoccupied may
come into this category.
2-Semi-exterior unconditioned - the zone is unoccupied and is neither heated nor cooled and lies
outside the main building envelope. Examples of unconditioned spaces are roofspaces, sunspaces,
crawlspaces, car parks etc.
3-Cavity - the zone is a cavity such as the glazed cavity within a double faade or a Trombe wall. This
algorithm correctly calculates the convection coefficients for a narrow sealed vertical cavity based on
the ISO 15099 standard.
- 181 -
4-Plenum - the zone is a plenum which is unoccupied and has no heating, cooling, or mechanical
ventilation (though of course air will flow through it to meet the needs of the zones it serves).
5-Semiheated - the zone is heated to a low level only. This option is only available for ASHRAE
90.1 models. In exceptional cases where an ASHRAE 90.1 model has been converted to nonASHRAE 90.1 model, any zones with the 5-Semiheated zone type are treated is if 1-Standard had
been selected.
Zone types are also described in the Basic Drawing Tools 6 Tutorial
2-Semi-exterior unconditioned
When the Zone type is set to 2-Semi-exterior unconditioned, the program asks you 'Do you want to load
default unconditioned data including Activity, Lighting and HVAC templates?' If you reply 'Yes' then the zone is
set as unoccupied by loading <None> Activity, HVAC and Lighting template data.
Also Semi-exposed constructions will be used instead of standard partitions for adjacencies with
'Unconditioned' zones. For example the wall between an occupied office and a car park would use the Semiexposed construction, whereas the wall between two occupied offices would use Internal partition
construction.
Also roofspace insulation is applied in the floor of a Semi-exterior unconditioned space when it is above a
Standard space, if 'Floor fitted above floor slab' option is checked.
3-Cavity
When the Zone type is set to 3-Cavity, the program asks you 'Do you want to load default 'Glazed cavity' data
including appropriate convection coefficients, calculation options and Activity, HVAC and Construction
templates'. If you reply 'Yes' then the following changes are made:
The zone is set as unoccupied by loading <None> Activity, HVAC and Lighting template data.
Suspended floors and ceilings are switched off.
The 5-Cavity Inside convection algorithm is set for Cooling design, Heating design and simulation
calculations.
The 3-Full interior and exterior Solar distribution algorithm is set for Cooling design and simulation
calculations.
You can find out more about Trombe wall simulations in the Modelling Issues section.
4-Plenum
When the Zone type is set to 4-Plenum, the program asks you 'Do you want to load default plenum data
including appropriate convection coefficients, calculation options and Activity and HVAC templates?'. If you
reply 'Yes' then the following changes are made:
Suspended floors and ceilings are switched off.
The 4-Ceiling diffuser Inside convection algorithm is set for Cooling design, Heating design and
simulation calculations.
You can find out more about modelling plenums under HVAC.
Unconditioned zone ventilation

In ASHRAE 90.1 models, when the 2-Unconditioned Zone type is selected you must define whether the
unconditioned zone is ventilated or unventilated. Options are:
1-Unventilated for unconditioned zones having normal levels of airtightness.

2-Ventilated for zones outside the main envelope such as attics, crawlspaces and car parking which
are unsealed and have no provision for airtightness.
Zone Multiplier
- 182 -
General Block Form
The Zone multiplier data allows you to reduce the size of your model in cases where there are similar zones
by specifying that certain zones are repeated and so only need to be simulated once. A typical use is for multistorey buildings with identical (or very similar) floors. The image below is taken from the Zone Multiplier
Example.dsb file and illustrates how the zone multiplier mechanism works.
The basic 7 storey building on the left doesn't use the zone multiplier and, as each storey has one zone, the
whole building contains 7 zones. The equivalent building on the right has been simplified by using the zone
multiplier. The single mid-storey zone has a zone multiplier of 5 which means that during the simulation the
zone is treated as if there were 5 of them. In particular the energy consumption and HVAC airflow rates are
multiplied by 5 so the results for the reduced building match approximately with that of the non-reduced
model.
The top floor and ground floor zones cannot be combined using the zone multiplier of course because they
have roof and ground adjacencies respectively and so must be retained in the reduced model. However the 5
mid-floor zones all have the same operation and adjacencies and so can be combined.
Adiabatic Component Blocks

Note the use of the adiabatic component blocks. These have various functions:
Set the adjacency to be adiabatic for the underside of the top floor zone, the top and underside of the
mid-floor zone and the top of the ground floor zone.
Help to position the mid-floor representative zone in a reasonable representative position to ensure that
a good average wind speed will be applied.
Ensures correct shading in a more complex model. Shadows will be correctly cast by 'missing zones'
and also shading received by the representative mid-floor zone will be representative of the shading
received by all of the actual mid-floor zones.
Improves the look of the reduced model to match that of the full model.
For other ways to simplify models see Simplification on the Advanced tab of the Model options.
- 183 -
Include Zone
Include zone in thermal calculations

By default zones are included in the heating and cooling design calculations and simulations but they can be
excluded. You may wish to exclude a zone or series of zones from the analysis to focus on a smaller part of
the building for example a single shop within a mall and in this case you should uncheck this option on the
Activity tab for zones as appropriate.
Tip: In large models it is sometimes easiest to uncheck this option at building level and just include the
zone(s) of interest.
Note: Surfaces between included and excluded zones are modelled as being adiabatic, i.e .heat is
transferred into the wall mass as if the temperature of the excluded zone is the same as the included zone.
Include zone in daylighting calculations

Zones which are not regularly occupied, or which for any other reason should not be included, can be
excluded from daylighting calculations by unchecking this option. This option can be used when carrying out a
LEED, BREEAM or Green Star daylighting credit calculation to avoid including zones that are not regularly
occupied in the building assessment.
From the LEED 3 documentation:
Regularly occupied spaces in commercial buildings are areas where people sit or stand as they work. In
residential applications these spaces include all living and family rooms and exclude bathrooms, closets, or
other storage or utility areas. In schools, they are areas where students, teachers, or administrators are
seated or standing as they work or study.
Total Building Floor Areas

Activity tab in model data at building level only
Total building floor areas for occupied and unoccupied zones is provided at building level towards the top of
the Activity tab.
Occupied floor area

The total building occupied floor area is provided (in m2 or ft2). This is the sum of the floor areas for zones
having 1-Standard Zone type.
Unoccupied floor area

The total building unoccupied floor area is provided (in m2 or ft2). This is the sum of the floor areas for zones
not having 1-Standard Zone type.
Occupancy
The Occupancy model data defines the number people in the space and the times of occupancy. This data is
used in Simulations and Cooling design calculations together with the Metabolic heat output of the occupants
and Holidays to calculate the heat input to the building.
The Occupancy schedule setting (Typical workday or Schedule) may also be used to control internal gains
and/or HVAC systems if the appropriate Model options are set.
Occupancy density
Set the number of people per unit floor area. It is usually most convenient to load this data from the Activity
template.
Timing
and the occupancy times. Occupancy time definition depends on the Timing model data option:
- 184 -
General Block Form
Typical workday timing model option

When the Typical workday Timing model option is set, the occupancy times are controlled by setting On and
Off values and the number of days in the working week.
In above example there are 0.2 people per m2 between 8am and 6pm and there are no people outside these
times and at weekends.
Note: The Occupancy Days / week is set at the building level only and is used for all other Typical workday
schedules in the model apart from Mechanical ventilation, and Heating and Cooling operation which have their
own Days / week data.
Schedule timing model option
When the Schedule Timing model option is set, the occupancy times are controlled by a Schedule . The
metabolic gains for the zone are multiplied by the value of the Schedule at each time step in the simulation so
you can define periods of part-occupancy using Schedule values less than 1. Use values of 0 to indicate that
the space in unoccupied.
In above example number of people per m2 is calculated as 0.2 xSchedule value.
Latent fraction
Occupancy latent gains account for moisture from people in the building due to both perspiration (sweating)
and from exhaled moisture. The way that latent gains are calculated depends on the Occupancy latent gains
model option.
When this option is set to 2-Fixed fraction then you can enter the latent fraction here. A typical default value
is 0.5. Alternatively if this setting is left as the default 1-Dynamic calculation option then the latent fraction is
calculated within EnergyPlus at runtime based on internal temperatures and metabolic rate and no additional
setting is required here.
Metabolic
Activity tab in model data under Occupancy header
Select the level of activity by selecting a metabolic rate component based on the level of activity of people
using the space.
The metabolic rate determines the amount of heat gain per person in the zone under design conditions. This
value is modified during simulations based on a correlation to account for variations in space temperature.
This should be borne in mind when analysing occupant sensible heat output in the Cooling design and
Simulation results screens. Metabolic rate has units Watts per person and represents the total heat gain per
person including convective, radiant, and latent heat. An internal algorithm is used to determine what fraction
of the total is sensible and what fraction is latent. Then, the sensible portion is divided into radiant and
convective portions based on the assumption of 50% radiant fraction.
- 185 -
Metabolic rate data can be found in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 8, Table 5.
DesignBuilder data is derived from this data and is for adult males having typical surface area of 1.8m2. For
women multiply the adult male value by 0.85 and for children multiply by 0.75.
The metabolic factor accounts for people of various sizes. Enter 1.00 for men, 0.85 for women, 0.75 for
children or you can use an average value if there is a mix of sizes.
Background
Heat is generated in the human body by oxidation at a rate called the metabolic rate. This heat is dissipated
from the body surface and respiratory tract by a combination of radiation, convection and evaporation. The
relative proportions of sensible and latent heat from people is a complex function of the metabolic rate and the
environmental conditions.
EnergyPlus uses a polynomial function to divide the heat gain into sensible and latent portions. More details
can be found in the EnergyPlus EngineeringDoc.pdf documentation.
Note: If the Occupancy latent gains model option is set to Dynamic calculation then the sensible/latent split
for occupancy gains is affected by the internal temperature and relative humidity. With high internal
temperatures, people cool themselves largely by evaporation (sweating) and sensible occupancy gains can
be very low or even zero as the internal temperature approaches that of the human body.
Clothing
You can define the clothing levels of the occupants for summer and winter periods. This data is used when
generating comfort output.
Clothing reduces the body's heat loss and is classified according to its insulation value. The unit normally
used for measuring clothing's insulation is the Clo unit. The more technical unit is mC/W is also used
frequently (1 Clo = 0.155 m2C/W). The Clo value can be calculated by adding the Clo value of each
individual garment. The insulation value for individual garments can be found in ISO 7730.
Clo-Values for Different Items of Clothing and Ensembles
Clothing
Naked
Briefs
T-shirt
Bra and panties
Long underwear
upper
lower
Shirt
White, short sleeve
heavy, long sleeve
Add 5% for tie or turtleneck
Skirt
Trousers
Sweater
Socks
Light summer outfit
Working clothes
Typical indoor winter clothing
combination
Heavy business suit
Clo-Value
0.0
0.06
0.09
0.05
0.35
0.35
0.14
0.29
0.22-0.70
0.26-0.32
0.20-0.37
0.04-0.10
0.3
0.8
1.0
1.5
Note 1: Clo-values are additive, so one can calculate the clo-value for a person wearing a T-shirt and light
socks (0.09 + 0.04) = 0.13. (Adapted from ASHRAE Fundamentals and "Technical Review of Thermal
Comfort," Bruel and Kjaer, No. 2, 1982.)
Note 2: for equatorial regions where there is no clear 'summer/winter' weather pattern you should generally
use a 'summer' value for both summer and winter clo factors.
- 186 -
General Block Form
Holidays
Activity tab in model data (building level only)
You can define the dates of holidays to include the effect of building shutdown during certain periods of the
year. Do this by selecting the Holidays option under the Holidays header on the Activity tab at building level.
Holidays defined at building level in this way are used for the whole simulation. The holiday data is used for
Simulations only (not Heating/Cooling Design Calculations) and allows you to set the Holiday Schedule and
the number of days of holiday per year. The possible holiday dates are defined in the Holiday schedule and
the actual holidays to be used in the simulation are selected from the top of the list based on the Holidays per
year data entered.
Note that you must have at least as many days defined in the holiday schedules as you request here.
If there are insufficient holidays in the holiday schedule you will receive an error message to this
effect prior to a simulation.
With the data in the above screenshot there will be 5 holidays and the dates are given by the first 5 holiday
dates set in the 'Typical UK' Holiday schedule.
See also the Timing, Schedules, Profiles and Holidays Tutorial
The way holiday definition works depends on the Timing model option:
Compact Schedules
When the Timing model option is Schedules you can use Compact schedules to define holiday dates and
schedule values. The value of Compact schedule output during holidays can be defined explicitly using the
Holidays day type following For:.
For example:
SCHEDULE:COMPACT,
Bedroom_Cool,
Temperature,
Through: 31 Dec,
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay,
Until: 05:00, 0.5,
Until: 09:00, 1,
Until: 24:00, 0.5,
For: Weekends,
Until: 05:00, 0.5,
Until: 24:00, 1,
For: Holidays AllOtherdays,
Until: 24:00, 0;
The Holiday data in this Compact schedule indicates that the cooling is switched off on holidays.
- 187 -
7/12 Schedules
Holiday operation is not defined explicitly and holidays use the same data as Sundays
Typical Workday
Holidays use the same data as Sundays
Environmental control
The heating and cooling setpoint temperatures, minimum fresh air per person and illuminance requirements
are related to the Activity or Usage of the zone and are accessed by opening the Environmental Comfort
group header.
Heating and Cooling Setpoint Temperatures
Heating Setpoint Temperatures

Heating setpoint temperature
Defines the ideal temperature (i.e. the setting of the heating thermostat) in the space when heating is
required. Its meaning depends on the Temperature control calculation option. When using 1-Air temperature
control the Heating setpoint temperature corresponds to the air temperature in the space and when it is set
to set to 2-Operative temperature it is the operative temperature (MAT+MRT)/2.
Heating setback setpoint temperature

Some buildings require a low level of heating during unoccupied periods to avoid condensation/frost damage
or to prevent the building becoming too cold and to reduce peak heating requirements at startup. Enter the
setpoint temperature to be used at night-time, weekends and other holidays during the heating season. Its
meaning depends on the Temperature control calculation option (above).
Note: when using the Typical workday timing option, this setback temperature set point is only applied
during unoccupied periods such as night-time and holidays during the heating season. It is not applied during
the summer (if heating is switched off during the summer.)
Note: if the setback temperature set does not appear to affect results when using a Compact schedule, this
may be because the Zone setpoint heating schedule selected uses only 0 and 1, not the 0.5 required to
access setback temperature. See Defining setpoint temperature schedules for more on this.
Cooling Setpoint Temperatures

Cooling setpoint temperature
Defines the ideal temperature (i.e. the setting of the cooling thermostat) in the space when cooling is required.
Its meaning depends on the Temperature control calculation option. When using 1-Air temperature control
the Cooling setpoint temperature corresponds to the air temperature in the space and when it is set to set to
2-Operative temperature it is the operative temperature (MAT+MRT)/2.
Note: the cooling setpoint temperature must be higher than the heating setpoint temperature.
- 188 -
General Block Form
Cooling setback setpoint temperature

Some buildings require a low level of cooling during unoccupied periods to prevent the building becoming too
hot and to reduce the startup cooling load the next morning. Enter the setpoint temperature to be used at
night-time, weekends and other holidays during the cooling season. Its meaning depends on the Temperature
control calculation option (above).
Note: when using the Typical workday timing option, this setback temperature set point is only applied
during unoccupied periods such as night-time and holidays during the cooling season. It is not applied during
the winter (if cooling is switched off during the winter.)
Note: if the setback temperature set does not appear to affect results when using a Compact schedule, this
may be because the Zone setpoint cooling schedule selected uses only 0 and 1, not the 0.5 required to
access setback temperature. See Defining setpoint temperature schedules for more on this.
Humidity Setpoint Temperatures
Humidity Setpoint Temperatures

When using VAV, CAV and unitary Compact HVAC systems you can control humidity. More specifically, in the
case of AHU-type systems the humidity in a control zone is actually controlled. The humidification and
dehumidification setpoints can be defined here
RH Humidification setpoint
The zone humidistat relative humidity setpoint for humidification (0 to 100%).
RH Dehumidification setpoint
The zone humidistat relative humidity setpoint for dehumidification (0 to 100%).
Comfort PMV Setpoints
Comfort PMV Setpoints

When using Detailed HVAC and the Temperature control option is set to 4-Fanger comfort and the Detailed
HVAC Activity data option is set to 1-Simple HVAC, the zones are heated and cooled using the Fanger PMV
heating and cooling comfort setpoints defined below as setpoints. When using the 2-Detailed HVACDetailed
HVAC Activity data option, schedules of Fanger PMV comfort are defined on the HVAC zone dialog instead.
The Thermal comfort calculator tool can be used to derive PMV values based on the known environmental
conditions.
Heating PMV setpoint

The PMV used as the heating setpoint when the heating operation schedule on the HVAC tab has value 1.
Heating PMV setback

The PMV used as the heating setback when the heating operation schedule on the HVAC tab has value 0.5.
- 189 -
Cooling PMV setpoint

The PMV used as the cooling setpoint when the cooling operation schedule on the HVAC tab has value 1.
Cooling PMV setback

The PMV used as the cooling setback when the cooling operation schedule on the HVAC tab has value 0.5.
Ventilation Setpoint Temperatures
Ventilation Setpoint Temperatures

Natural ventilation indoor min temperature control
If you wish to use natural ventilation to cool the building/block/zone down to a particular setpoint temperature
and then shut off when the temperature goes below that setpoint then check this box. This allows you to
define the Natural ventilation cooling setpoint temperature described below.
Natural ventilation min temperature control applies to both Calculated and Scheduled natural ventilation.
Tip: To ensure that natural ventilation occurs regardless of internal temperature (e.g. to use nat vent provide
fresh air) then uncheck this option.
Min temperature definition

There are 2 ways to define the Natural ventilation min temperature:
1-By value - use this option when the setpoint does not change with time in which case you can
enter a fixed setpoint temperature.
2-By schedule - use this option when the setpoint changes with time in which case you can
select a schedule of time-varying temperature setpoints.
Natural ventilation min temperature

This is the fixed indoor temperature (in C or F) below which ventilation is shut off. The control is
visible when the 1-By value option is selected for Min temperature definition. It can be thought of as
the cooling setpoint temperature which controls the activation of natural ventilation. If the inside air
temperature is greater than this setpoint temperature (and the natural ventilation operation schedule is
on) then natural ventilation can take place. The way this works depends on the Natural ventilation
model option.
Note that when using the Calculated natural ventilation model option windows and vents are only
opened when:
The inside air temperature is above this cooling setpoint temperature, and
The inside air temperature is greater than the outside air temperature, and
The operation schedule allows ventilation.
Also, the data under the Calculated Natural Ventilation header on the Advanced tab of the Model
Options dialog can modify ventilation control behaviour.
When using the Scheduled natural ventilation model option the Natural ventilation delta T (below)
can prevent natural ventilation from occurring if the outside air temperature is too high.
- 190 -
General Block Form
Natural ventilation min temperature schedule

The schedule which defines the time-varying indoor temperature (in C) below which ventilation is shut
off. The control is visible when the 2-By schedule option is selected for Min temperature definition. It
can be thought of as the time-varying cooling setpoint temperature which controls the activation of
natural ventilation.
See also Defining setpoint temperature schedules.
Natural ventilation indoor max temperature control

If there is a maximum zone air temperature above which the natural ventilation should shut off then check this
option. This upper temperature limit is intended to avoid overheating a space and/or unnecessarily increasing
cooling loads.
Normally when using natural ventilation for cooling this option will be left unchecked as it would be unusual to
place an upper limit on the zone temperature for operation of such a system.
Indoor max temperature control option is used only with Scheduled natural ventilation and is not available for
Calculated natural ventilation.
Max temperature definition

There are 2 ways to define the Natural ventilation max temperature:
Natural ventilation max temperature

This is the fixed indoor temperature (in C or F) above which ventilation is shut off. The control is
visible when the 1-By value option is selected for Max temperature definition.
Natural ventilation max temperature schedule

The schedule which defines the time-varying indoor temperature (in C) above which ventilation is shut
off. The control is visible when the 2-By schedule option is selected for Max temperature definition.
Mechanical ventilation control

The mechanical ventilation cooling setpoint temperature and delta T values described below control the
activation of mechanical ventilation when using Simple HVAC together with the 1-Room ventilation
Mechanical ventilation method.
Mechanical ventilation cooling setpoint temperature

The mechanical ventilation cooling setpoint temperature controls the activation of mechanical
ventilation when using Simple HVAC together with the 1-Room ventilation Mechanical ventilation
method. If the inside air temperature is greater than this setpoint temperature (and the mechanical
ventilation operation schedule is on) then mechanical ventilation can take place.
This data and the corresponding delta T data described below are not used in simulations when
working with the Simple HVAC 2-Ideal loads option or with Detailed HVAC and are never used in
Heating and Cooling design calculations.
Mechanical ventilation max natural ventilation in-out delta T

The mechanical ventilation Max int-out temp difference is used for Scheduled mechanical
ventilationonly and is the temperature difference between the indoor and outdoor air dry bulb
temperatures below which ventilation is shut off. This is to allow ventilation to be stopped if the
temperature outside is too warm and could potentially heat the space. It is not related to preventing
drafts.
- 191 -
For example, if you specify a maximum delta temperature of 2C, ventilation is assumed to be available
if the outside air temperature is at least 2C cooler than the zone air temperature. If the outside air dry
bulb temperature is less than 2C cooler or warmer than the indoor dry bulb temperature, then
ventilation is automatically turned off. The values for this field can include negative numbers. This
allows ventilation to occur even if the outdoor temperature is above the indoor temperature. The Delta
Temperature control works in the code in the following way:
if (IndoorTemp - OutdoorTemp) < Max ventilation in-out delta T then ventilation is not allowed.
For example:
Value of Mechanical ventilation Max in-out delta T
0
-50
2
Effect
Mechanical ventilation only operates when
OutdoorTemp < IndoorTemp
Mechanical ventilation unrestricted by Inside-Outside
delta T
Mechanical ventilation only operates when
OutdoorTemp + 2 < IndoorTemp
Tip: Enter a large negative number to allow ventilation even if the outdoor temperature is greater than
the indoor temperature. This useful for uncontrolled mechanical ventilation or as a way to estimate the
effect of required ventilation air for load calculations.
Minimum Fresh Air
Minimum Fresh Air

Minimum fresh air data is defined on the Activity tab because the fresh air requirement of the people in the
zone depends on the activity (use) of the space.
Fresh air
The Minimum fresh air per person defines the fresh air requirements of each person in the zone and is used
to generate appropriate mechanical outside air distribution rates when the mechanical ventilation Outside air
definition methods on the HVAC tab is set to any of:
2-Min fresh air per person where the fresh air flow rate is calculated as the Fresh air (l/s//person) x
People / m2 x Zone floor area (m2)
4-Min fresh air (Sum per person + per area) where the fresh air flow rate is the sum of 'per person'
and 'per area' fresh air requirements
5-Min fresh air (Max per person and per area) where the fresh air flow rate based on 'per person' is
compared with 'per area' and the maximum is used.
This data is also used to calculate natural ventilation outside air flow rates into the zone when the natural
ventilation Flow type on the HVAC tab is set to 2-Min fresh air per person.
Mech vent per area

The Mech vent per area data defines the fresh air requirements of the zone per floor area and is used to
calculate mechanical outside air distribution rates when the mechanical ventilation Outside air definition
methods on the HVAC tab is set to any of:
3-Min fresh air (Per area), where the fresh air flow rate is calculated as the Mech vent per floor area
(l/s/m2) x Zone floor area (m2)
- 192 -
General Block Form
4-Min fresh air (Sum per person + per area),

5-Min fresh air (Max per person and per area).
This data is not currently used for natural ventilation and is only used if one of the above mechanical
ventilation Outside air definition methods has been used.
CO2/Contaminant Setpoints
CO2/Contaminant Setpoints
If the zone has its fresh air delivery controlled using the 3-IAQP DCV method and the 1-Simple HVAC
Detailed HVAC Activity data model option is set then you must enter the CO2 setpoint and minimum setting
here on the Activity tab. Likewise if the 5-IAQP generic contaminant option is selected then the generic
contaminant setpoint and minimum setting must be entered here.
If the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option is set then this data is entered on the HVAC
Zone dialog using schedules.
CO2 concentration Setpoint

Enter the constant CO2 concentration setpoint in ppm.
Min CO2 concentration

Enter the minimum allowed CO2 concentration in ppm.
Generic contaminant concentration setpoint

Enter the constant generic contaminant concentration setpoint in ppm. The value should be between 0 and 1.
Lighting
Lighting
Target illuminance
The desired lighting level (in lux) at the first daylighting sensor. This is also the lighting level that would be
produced at this sensor position at night if the overhead electric General lighting were operating at full input
power. Recommended values depend on type of activity; they may be found, for example, in the Lighting
Handbook of the Illuminating Engineering Society of North America and in CIBSE A Guide. A typical value for
general office work (excluding computer terminals) is 500 lux.
Default display lighting density

This data allows you to define the typical density of display lighting for the activity. The value is used as a
default on the Lighting tab for the Task and Display lighting density to ensure that the display lighting density
is appropriate for the activity of the zone. It is only used when a lighting template is loaded.
Domestic Hot Water (DHW)

DHW Consumption rate

In DesignBuilder the amount of DHW consumed is considered to be a function of the activity in the zone. For
example, there is a demand assumed to arise from the occupants of an office for activities such as washing
hands and washing up cups. This demand is associated with the office rather than the toilet or tea room. Thus
the demand from each space needs to be assigned to a DHW system even if the system itself is not present
in the space.
The effect of hot water consumption (hot water taps, showers etc) on building energy use can be included in
your thermal model by switching on DHW on the HVAC tab.
- 193 -
The data on this tab defines the hot water consumption rate in each zone as l/day/m2 data (gal/day/ft in IP
units). The DHW consumption data is only used if DHW is selected on the HVAC tab.
See the HVAC "Domestic Hot Water" on page 345 topic for details on how to adjust this value to account for
various types of DHW operation schedule.
Note: If you have DHW consumption data in l/person/day format you can convert to the l/m2-day format
used in DesignBuilder by multiplying it by occupant density (people/m2).
With Simple and Compact HVAC, the hot water generation system is defined under DHW on the HVAC tab.
Note: This DHW consumption data is also used in Detailed HVAC with the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed
HVAC Activity data setting.
Computer gains
Set the thermal gains due to computers and other related IT equipment per unit floor area. The fuel is
assumed to be electricity, all gains are assumed to be emitted to the space and
Radiant Fraction
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of long-wave
radiant heat being given off by computer equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by the
total energy consumed by electric equipment and (1-Fraction lost) to give the amount of long wavelength
radiation gain from computer equipment in a zone. A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely
convective in which case all the heat is transferred to the air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the
gain is entirely radiative in which case all the heat is distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is
somewhere between 0.1 and 0.2.
If the Internal gains operate with occupancy model option is not selected you can also set the operation
schedule.
Tip: Some spaces like IT suites and dealing rooms have very high computer gain densities and you may need
to Switch off the slider controls from the Program options dialog to enter these high values.
Office equipment gains

Set the thermal gains due to office equipment per unit floor area. The fuel is assumed to be electricity, all
gains are assumed to be emitted to the space.
Radiant Fraction
radiant heat being given off by office equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by the total
energy consumed by electric equipment to give the amount of long wavelength radiation gain from office
equipment in a zone.
A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely convective in which case all the heat is transferred to the
air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the gain is entirely radiative in which case all the heat is
distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is somewhere between 0.1 and 0.4.
schedule.
Miscellaneous gains
- 194 -
General Block Form
Gain
Set the design level of energy consumption due to miscellaneous equipment per unit floor area. The actual
heat gain to the space may be reduced through the Fraction lost data (below).
The Gain, entered in Watts/m2 (or Watts/ft2), is typically used to represent the maximum fuel consumption of
miscellaneous equipment in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (below). This is slightly more
flexible in that the design level could be a 'diversity factor' applied to a schedule of real numbers. Note that
while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the design level field is constant.
Fuel
The fuel can be selected from a drop down list. Note that these fuels are currently mapped to a shorter list in
the results as follows:
Fuel in Model Data

1-Electricity from grid
2-Natural gas
Mapped to Fuel in Output

Electricity
Gas
Fraction lost
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of 'lost' heat being
given off by the equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total energy
consumed by equipment to give the amount of heat which is 'lost' and does not impact the zone energy
balances. This might correspond to electrical energy converted to mechanical work or heat that is vented to
the atmosphere.
Latent fraction
This field is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterize the amount of latent heat
given off by miscellaneous equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the
total energy consumed to give the amount of latent energy produced by the miscellaneous equipment. This
latent energy affects the moisture balance within the zone.
Radiant Fraction
radiant heat being given off by miscellaneous equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by
the total energy consumed by electric equipment and (1-Fraction lost) to give the amount of long wavelength
radiation gain from miscellaneous equipment in a zone. A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely
convective in which case all the heat is transferred to the air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the
gain is entirely radiative in which case all the heat is distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is
somewhere between 0.1 and 0.5.
schedule.
CO2 generation rate

This numeric input field, available only when the fuel is selected as 2-Natural gas, specifies carbon dioxide
generation rate with units of m3/s-W or (ft3/min)/(Btu/hr). The default value of 0.0 assumes the equipment is
fully vented to outdoors.
In the absence of better information, a value of 3.45E-8 m3/s-W can be used which assumes the equipment is
not vented to outdoors. This value is converted from natural gas CO2 emission rate at 11.7 lbs CO2 per
therm, the CO2 emission rate provided by U.S. Energy Information Administration. The maximum value for
this input field is 3.45E-7 m3/s-W.
Calculation
The fuel input to the equipment ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads. In the simulation
this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are given by the input fields Latent fraction,
- 195 -
Radiant fraction and Fraction lost. The convected fraction, defined as the fraction of the heat from electric
equipment convected to the zone air, is calculated by the program as:
Fconvected = 1.0 (Latent fraction + Radiant fraction + Fraction lost)
You will get an error message if Fraction Latent + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Lost exceeds 1.0.
Catering gains
Set the thermal gains due to cooking and other catering activities per unit floor area.
Gain
Set the design level of energy consumption due to catering equipment per unit floor area. The actual heat gain
to the space may be reduced through the Fraction lost data (below).
catering equipment in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (below). This is slightly more
flexible in that the design level could be a 'diversity factor' applied to a schedule of real numbers. Note that
while the schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the design level field is constant.
Tip: Kitchens can have very high process gain densities and you may need to Switch off the slider controls
from the Program options dialog to enter these high values.
Fuel
Fuel in Model Data

2-Natural gas

Electricity
Gas
Fraction lost
given off by the catering equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total
energy consumed by equipment to give the amount of heat which is 'lost' and does not impact the zone
energy balances. This might correspond to cooker heat that is vented to the atmosphere through an extract
hood.
Latent fraction
given off by catering equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total
energy consumed to give the amount of latent energy produced by the catering equipment. This latent energy
affects the moisture balance within the zone.
Radiant fraction
radiant heat being given off by catering equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by the total
energy consumed by electric equipment and (1-Fraction lost) to give the amount of long wavelength radiation
gain from catering equipment in a zone. A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely convective in
which case all the heat is transferred to the air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the gain is
entirely radiative in which case all the heat is distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is somewhere
between 0.1 and 0.5.
schedule.
- 196 -
General Block Form
CO2 generation rate

Calculation
Process gains
Set the thermal gains due to process heat per unit floor area.
Gain
Set the design level of energy consumption due to process activity per unit floor area. Process heat is the heat
from any manufacturing or industrial process which is part of the business activity. The actual heat gain to the
space may be reduced through the Fraction lost data (below).
process equipment in a zone that is then multiplied by a schedule fraction (below). This is slightly more flexible
in that the design level could be a 'diversity factor' applied to a schedule of real numbers. Note that while the
schedule value can vary from hour to hour, the design level field is constant.
Tip: Spaces such as industrial units can have very high process gain densities and you may need to
Switch off the slider controls from the Program options dialog to enter these high values.
Tip: You can enter negative process gains for modelling the cooling effect from refrigeration units such as
those found in supermarkets where the refrigerator doors may open and cool air may enter the zone.Note that
Negative process gains are modelled in EnergyPlus using 'Other equipment' data instead of the usual
'Electrical equipment' data. The energy from negative process gains is calculated in the same way as for
positive gains.
Fuel
Fuel in Model Data

2-Natural gas

Electricity
Gas
Fraction lost
given off by the process equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total
energy consumed by equipment to give the amount of heat which is 'lost' and does not impact the zone
energy balances. This might correspond to electrical energy converted to mechanical work or heat that is
vented to the atmosphere.
- 197 -
Latent fraction
given off by process equipment in a zone. The number specified in this field will be multiplied by the total
energy consumed to give the amount of latent energy produced by the process equipment. This latent energy
affects the moisture balance within the zone.
Radiant fraction
This is a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0 and is used to characterise the amount of long-wave radiant
heat being given off by process equipment in a zone. The radiant fraction will be multiplied by the total energy
consumed by electric equipment and (1-Fraction lost) to give the amount of long wavelength radiation gain
from process equipment in a zone. A value of zero means that the heat gain is entirely convective in which
case all the heat is transferred to the air node in simulations. A value of 1 means that the gain is entirely
radiative in which case all the heat is distributed to the inside surfaces. a typical value is somewhere between
0.1 and 0.5.
schedule.
CO2 generation rate

Calculation
Construction Model Data

Construction tab in model data
DesignBuilder uses construction components to model the conduction of heat through walls, roofs, ground
and other opaque parts of the building envelope . Constructions can be selected on the Constructions model
data tab to define the thermophysical and visual properties of the various internal and external surface
elements in the building. From the Construction model data tab, you can access data on:
Construction and
Airtightness
Open the headers to enter construction details where they are different from those loaded from the template.
Any changes you make that are different from the template data originally loaded shown in bold red.
See the Constructions 1 and Constructions 2 Model Data Tutorials
- 198 -
General Block Form
Templates
General Construction And Glazing
When you have the General Construction and glazing model option set, you can load generic Construction
data by clicking on the Template option under Construction Template and then by clicking on the '...' at the
right of the line (below).
When you make a selection from the list of Construction templates data from selected template is loaded to
the model.
Pre-design Construction And Glazing

Alternatively if you have the Pre-design Construction and glazing model option set, generic constructions can
be loaded using the sliders shown below. In this case you are restricted to the 4x3 construction templates
from the <System> Construction templates category identified by the combination of Insulation and Thermal
mass selected on the sliders. For example in the screenshot shown below data will be loaded from the
'Energy code - Mediumweight' template.
Or in either case you can use the Load data from template tool.
Constructions
From the Construction tab, you can open the group header boxes to edit detailed makeup of the construction
of walls, roofs, floors, ceilings, partitions etc. used in the building.
The default/inheritance system used in DesignBuilder allows you to define building constructions quickly and
easily by loading data from templates and by making global settings at building, block and zone levels.
Construction data:
Sub-Surface Construction - construction details of sub-surfaces (opaque surfaces within surfaces)

Internal Thermal Mass - how to define additional thermal mass
Adjacency - defining special adjacency conditions
Geometry Areas and Volumes
- 199 -
Surface Convection - defining special surface convection options

Component Block - construction and surface properties of component blocks
Linear Thermal Bridges at Junctions
Baffle
Solar Collector
"Ground Domain" on page 225
Note: data on the Openings tab can be used to define the layout of the facade.
View/Edit construction details

To inspect the details of a selected construction, click on the icon to the left of the appropriate data entry box
(Learning mode only). Alternatively double-click the icon to view/edit the data in a dialog.
Note: Please be aware that all settings made on the Constructions Model data tab are defaults, (unless
you are working at the surface level). Model data at the surface level (inherited from the zone above or
directly set) defines the thermal and visual characteristics of the surface in the model.
'Combined' Constructions
Construction tab in model data under Construction header
When the Floor/slab/ceiling representation model option is set to Combined wall, floor and roof constructions
are all defined using simple constructions as shown in the diagram below.
Note that if you are using the NCM for EPCs or Part-L/Section 6 calculations you should refer to the
Block and Zone Dimensions page for a more detailed definition of block heights.
The diagram shows:
The location/definition of the various categories of construction

Block and zone dimension definitions
Schematic Diagram Showing 'Combined' Floor/Slab/Ceiling

Constructions
The schematic below shows the locations of the surface types and the constructions that will be applied to
them.
- 200 -
General Block Form
External walls
The external wall construction defines the construction of walls adjacent to outside. The definition of walls is
given by the roof-wall transition angle model option. In cold climates this construction will generally include an
insulating layer.
Below grade walls

Introduced in v3.2, the Below grade wall construction is used for walls that are adjacent to ground. If there are
no below grade (underground) walls in the model then just ignore this data.
Flat roof
Flat roof constructions apply to external horizontal surfaces. The construction used to represent the flat roof
should include any slabs, insulation and suspended ceiling layers. If there are no flat roof surfaces, just ignore
this data.
Pitched roof (occupied)

The Pitched roof (occupied) construction applies to external sloped surfaces when they appear in occupied
zones. In cold climates this construction will generally include an insulating layer. If there are no pitched roof
surfaces, just ignore this data.
The definition of 'pitched roof' is given by the roof-wall transition angle model option.
Pitched roof (unoccupied)

The Pitched roof (unoccupied) construction applies to external sloped surfaces when they appear in Semi
exterior unconditioned zones. This construction will generally not include any insulation layers. If there are no
pitched roof surfaces, just ignore this data.
The definition of 'pitched roof' is given by the roof-wall transition angle model option.
- 201 -
Internal partitions
The internal partition construction defines the construction of internal partitions (walls used to divide blocks
into zones) and inter-block partitions (internal walls shared with other blocks). Internal partitions are used
where both zones are occupied. When one of the zones is occupied and the other is not the Semi-exposed
walls construction data is used (below). If there are no partitions just ignore this data.
The construction for the partition should represent all the layers in the actual internal wall. There is only one
element representing the partition between the zones and all it's layers should be defined in the same
construction.
Changes in model data settings at the surface level are reflected as equivalent changes in data for the
partition on the surface representing other side.
Note: this data is not available at zone level to avoid ambiguity when different settings are made in adjacent
zones.
SEMI-EXPOSED
Semi-exposed walls
The semi-exposed wall construction applies to walls between fully occupied zones and Semi-exterior
unconditioned zones. They will normally include some insulation. DesignBuilder determines which of the
zones is relatively 'outside' and uses this information to correctly order the material layers in the wall. The
material layer defined in the construction as being 'outermost' (first-in list) will be the one adjacent to the
semi-exterior unconditioned zone. If there are no semi-exposed wall surfaces, just ignore this data.
Note: this data is not available at zone level to avoid ambiguity when different settings are made in adjacent
zones.
Semi-exposed roof
The semi-exposed roof construction is used between occupied zones and Semi-exterior unconditioned zones
(such as roofspace/attic/loft spaces) above. The construction should include any slabs, insulation and
suspended ceiling layers. DesignBuilder determines which of the zones is relatively 'outside' and uses this
information to correctly order the material layers in the roof. If there are no semi-exposed roof surfaces, just
ignore this data.
Semi-exposed floor
The semi-exposed floor construction is used between occupied zones and Semi-exterior unconditioned
spaces below. The construction should include any slabs, insulation and raised floor layers. If there are no
semi-exposed floor surfaces, just ignore this data.
FLOORS
Ground floor
The ground floor construction is used between all internal zones and the ground and can be optionally
combined with additional ground constructions layer(s) as shown in diagram above. The site ground
temperatures are applied to the outside of all surfaces adjacent to ground. If there are no ground wall
surfaces, just ignore this data.
External floor
External floors are floors that are adjacent to outside air, e.g. the floor of a cantilevered part of the building or
where for any other reason there is no ground or other zone below. The External floor construction should
include any slabs, insulation and raised floor layers. If there are no external floor surfaces, just ignore this
data.
Internal floor
The internal floor construction defines the makeup of floors between occupied zones including any slabs, air
gaps, raised floors and suspended ceilings. It will not usually contain insulation. Where the zone above is
- 202 -
General Block Form
unoccupied the Semi-exposed roof construction is used instead. Likewise where the zone below is
unoccupied the Semi-exposed floor construction is used instead. If there are no internal floor surfaces, just
ignore this data.
ZONE STATISTICS
Zone Volume
The zone volume is calculated for all zone geometries and by default, the volume is the actual air volume of
the space excluding the volume of floor and ceiling constructions but including half the volume of partition
walls. The volume of the floor constructions can be optionally subtracted from the zone volume by using the
Zone volume calculation Model options.
Other related information

1.
2.
3.
Block and Zone Dimensions is an introductory section explaining how to enter blocks and the
relationship with zones.
Also see Constructions for how to edit the construction configuration.
And the Model Geometry Example section for a detailed worked example illustrating how surface areas
and volumes are calculated.
Sub-Surface Constructions
Sub-surfaces are used to define areas of a surface having a different construction to that of the main surface
construction. Typical examples include cold-bridging elements such as window lintels and opaque panels in a
lightweight facade. You can define different sub-surface construction types for external walls, internal
partitions and pitched roofs. This makes it easier to set up defaults at building, block or zone level.
Sub-surfaces are modelled in the same detail as standard surfaces including the effect of thermal mass but
not including any 2-D or 3-D heat conduction effects due to the interface between the sub-surface and the
background parent surface.
To add a sub-surface, go to the surface you wish to work on, click on the Layout tab and select the Draw subsurface command.
You can also define default constructions for doors.
Walls
Any opaque sub-surfaces created in a wall will have this construction.
Internal
Any opaque sub-surfaces created in any inside surface (partitons, internal floor etc) will have this construction.
Roof
Any opaque sub-surfaces created in any pitched roof will have this construction.
External door
Defines the construction of external doors.
Internal door
Defines the construction of internal doors.
Internal Thermal Mass

- 203 -
DesignBuilder uses the thermal characteristics of the constructions for each of the walls, floors, roofs,
partitions etc in each zone and accounts for the thermal mass in the simulations. You can also include
additional thermal mass to account for partitions within a zone, furniture and any other mass which will affect
the dynamic thermal response of the zone. There are two ways you can define additional internal thermal
mass in DesignBuilder:
1.
2.
Drawing hanging partitions (i.e. partitions which do not meet other walls at both ends),
Entering a non-zero internal thermal mass exposed area on the Constructions tab under the Internal
Thermal Mass header at zone level.
Construction
Thermal mass defined using these methods is lumped together for each zone and modelled in EnergyPlus in
a 'non-geometric' way. In both cases, the construction is defined under the Internal Thermal Mass header on
the Constructions tab.
Internal thermal mass defined in this way is used to specify the construction and area of items within the
space that are important to heat transfer calculations but not necessarily important geometrically. For
example, furniture within the space particularly for large spaces. It can also be used for internal walls that
are not needed for solar distribution, when Solar distribution is set to 3-Full interior and exterior or to
represent all interior walls when solar is distributed to the floors only with Solar distribution set to 2-Full
exterior.
Example
When zoning an office building, five west-facing offices have been combined into one zone. All of the offices
have interior walls made of the same materials. As shown in the figure below, this zone may be described with
5 exterior walls and 11 internal walls or 1 exterior wall and 1 internal mass. Note that fewer surfaces will speed
up the EnergyPlus calculations.
Example
A five-story building has the same ceiling/floor construction separating each of the levels. Zones that are on
floors 2 through 4 may be described using a single piece of internal mass to represent both the floor and
ceiling. The construction for this internal mass would be identical to the ceiling/floor construction that would be
used to describe separate surfaces.
Exposed Area
The exposed area is the surface area of the internal mass. The area that is specified must be the entire
surface area that is exposed to the zone. If both sides of a wall are completely within the same zone, then the
area of both sides must be included when describing that internal wall.
Zone capacitance multiplier

This data can be used at building level only to control the effective storage capacity of the air in all zones in
the building. Capacitance multipliers of 1.0 indicate the capacitance is that of the (moist) air in the volume of
the specified zone. This multiplier can be increased if the zone air capacitance needs to be increased for
stability of the simulation or to allow modelling higher or lower levels of damping of behaviour over time. The
multipliers are applied to the base value corresponding to the total capacitance for the zones volume of air at
current zone (moist) conditions.
- 204 -
General Block Form
It is also possible to use the Zone capacitance multiplier to model the increase of air capacity due to
lightweight thermal mass which could be considered to be mixed with the air. Examples include furniture,
papers and any other items which might increase the effective thermal mass of the building zone response.
Adjacency
The adjacency of individual surfaces can be set to be either adjacent to ground or adiabatic. The adjacency
data is used at the surface level, though defaults can be set at a block and zone level as well if all surfaces in
a block or zone have the same adjacency.
The available options are:
1-Auto - the adjacency of the surface is determined automatically by DesignBuilder based on its
position. This is the default setting where external surfaces below the ground plane are considered to
be adjacent to ground and external surfaces above the ground plane are considered to be adjacent to
outside conditions.
2-Not adjacent to ground - the surface is not adjacent to ground even if it is situated below the ground
plane.
3-Adjacent to ground - the surface is adjacent to ground even if it is above the ground plane or it is an
internal surface.
4-Adiabatic - the surface is adiabatic. This means that heat is not transferred across in its external
surface. Adiabatic surfaces are frequently used in thermal modelling to represent surfaces which are
between two zones at substantially similar conditions. Note that thermal mass is still modelled in
Adiabatic surfaces because heat can still be transferred into the mass through the internal surface.
Adiabatic surfaces are often used for modelling the boundary between the actual building model and
any adjacent buildings which are not to be modelled.
You can determine which surfaces are adiabatic or adjacent to ground by looking for the corresponding
surface adjacency markers in the Edit Screen at zone and surface levels:
Note that the recommended way to set ground and adiabatic adjacencies is to use component blocks.
Adiabatic surfaces use internal constructions:
Adiabatic external floors use Internal floor construction.

Adiabatic flat roofs use reversed Internal floor construction.
Adiabatic external wall surfaces use Internal partition construction.
You can find out the construction that will be used for each adiabatic surface by looking at data
on the Construction tab at surface level.
Note that in the current version of DesignBuilder the Visualisations shows adiabatic surfaces
using external surfaces properties but internal surfaces (Internal floor and partition
constructions) are used in calculations as described above.
Exclude this surface area from total zone floor area?

When modelling situations such as offices space within large warehouse zones where the ceiling at the top of
the offices is not usable floor area in the warehouse it may be useful to exclude the area of any unused floor
surfaces from the floor area of the zone above. An example of this situation is shown on the Warehouse with
Office page.
- 205 -
For internal floors such as the unused 'floor' on top of the office space you can check the surface level
Exclude this surface area from total zone floor area? checkbox to ensure the floor is not used in the
calculation of zone and building floor area and in the calculation of internal gains where defined per m2 or per
ft2.
Note this surface setting should not be made for the floor of office zone itself, which of course is usable floor
area, but for the 'floor' of the zone above (typically a warehouse or other large volume space) which is not
usable floor area.
Another situation where this option can be used is where holes have been cut in a floor surface to remove it,
so upper and lower zones can be merged. In this case, any small remaining border in the cut floor surface
should ideally be removed from the floor area calculation for the combined zone.
Geometry Areas And Volumes

DesignBuilder provides a great deal of flexibility in the way that block and zone geometry is defined. There are
various options including building blocks drawn using external measurements while providing correct internal
zone geometry for floor area and zone volume calculations derived from actual surface thickness.
It is also possible to use a simpler approach where the block and zone dimensions drawn are exactly the ones
used in calculations.
Geometry convention template

Select the template which best fits the way you would like to define the building geometry. The templates
provided are:
Simple - where zone surfaces, floor areas and volumes are all derived directly from the block and zone
dimensions and calculations use the geometry as drawn. If blocks are drawn using internal
measurements then the model would be considered to be using an internal convention and if blocks
are drawn using outer dimensions then the model would be using the external convention. Likewise to
obtain a centre-line convention simply draw blocks to the centre-line between inner and outer
dimensions. This is the only option provided in most other energy simulation tools.
External measurements - the default option for simulation where blocks are drawn using outer
dimensions and the surfaces used in thermal calculations are derived from the zone outer geometry
and air volumes and floor areas are derived from the zone inner geometry. Note that this option works
well for EnergyPlus simulations but is not compatible with the UK NCM which requires internal surface
dimensions to be used in heat transfer calculations.
External measurements to top of roof - like External measurements but zone geometry extends to
the top of flat roofs.
DesignBuilder pre-v4 compatibility - surfaces are derived in the same way as in v3 where a single
"Block wall thickness" was used to define the thickness of all external wall surfaces in the block. For v3
models loaded to v4 and later the old "Block wall thickness" attribute is used to set the External wall
thickness at block level.
External measurements, internal zone geometry - blocks are defined using external measurements
and surfaces dimensions, zone volume and floors areas are all derived from the inner zone geometry.
The usual inheritance mechanism applies so loading the required template at building level defines the
geometry convention for the whole building. Settings can be made at building level only but Fixed surface
thicknesses can be defined down to surface level and Void depths can be defined down to Zone level.
The Geometry convention template can also selected when creating a new building.
Tip: After making any changes to the model which could affect the geometry including construction type
selection as well as the settings described on this page you should manually refresh the Navigator by pressing
the Refresh
Navigator toolbar icon. This will ensure that the Navigator is synchronised with the model.
- 206 -
General Block Form
Zone geometry and surface areas

This setting defines whether the geometric surface data used in the calculation (heat transfer etc) is based on
the inner or outer zone volume dimensions. Options are:
1-Inner volume - where the surface dimensions and areas used in thermal calculations are derived
from the zone inner volume. This is derived from the outer zone volume and "deflated" by the thickness
of each surface. For each type of surface the thickness is derived either a) from the construction
thickness or b) by an overriding value defined under Fixed Surface Thickness header.
2-Outer volume - where the surface dimensions and areas used in thermal calculations are derived
from the zone outer volume which for a single zone block is exactly equal to the block outer
dimensions.
Note: In cases where the 1-Inner volume option is selected and non-zero surface thickness settings are
being used, any component block shading devices placed adjacent to the block at building level will not be
exactly adjacent to the corresponding zone inner surfaces used in the simulations which are offset inwards
from the block outer geometry. The resultant gap will allow solar radiation to pass into the windows which will
not be apparent by looking at the model at building level or on the visualisation screen. You are therefore
advised to avoid using the combination of 1-Inner volume geometry, non-zero surface thickness and external
component blocks used as local shading devices. This issue does not arise with the local shading mechanism
which ensures that overhangs, sidefins and louvre blades are offset with the window.
Zone volume calculation method

This setting dictates whether internal or external measurements are used to calculate the zone volume is
required to calculate air volumes etc.
1-Inner volume - where the zone volume used in thermal calculations is derived from the zone inner
volume.
2-Outer volume - where the zone volume used in thermal calculations is derived from the zone outer
volume.
Note: The 1-Inner volume setting should generally be used for calculating zone volume.
Zone floor area calculation method

This setting dictates whether internal or external measurements are used to calculate the zone floor area. This
is required to calculate per m2 values such as occupancy and other internal gains etc. as well as floor area
values for general reporting.
1-Inner volume - where the zone volume used in thermal calculations is derived from the zone inner
volume.
2-Outer volume - where the zone volume used in thermal calculations is derived from the zone outer
volume.
Note: The 1-Inner volume setting should generally be used for calculating zone floor area.
FIXED SURFACE THICKNESSES

Each surface can have its geometric thickness calculated from the construction selected but only when the
checkbox for the associated surface type (list below) is unchecked. If the thickness is to be overridden then
check the appropriate checkbox and enter the fixed surface thickness. Settings can be made from building
level right down to surface level giving considerable flexibility over the model geometry.
In most cases you should simply select the Geometry convention template - you shouldn't normally need to
override the surface thickness settings below.
Note: The surface thickness does not affect the thermal properties of the wall/floor/roof etc (U-value, thermal
mass etc). Surface thermal properties are based purely on the construction data specified for the surface.
- 207 -
External wall
If the external wall surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness) then
check the checkbox and enter the wall thickness (in m or in).
Below grade wall

If the below grade wall surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness) then
check the checkbox and enter the wall thickness (in m or in).
Internal partition
If the partition surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness) then check
the checkbox and enter the wall thickness (in m or in).
Ground floor
If the ground floor surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness) then
check the checkbox and enter the floor thickness (in m or in).
Note: In most cases ground floor blocks are measured from ground level and the ground slab construction is
not included in the volume of the building so this setting is normally overridden to be zero.
Basement ground floor

The basement ground floor is the construction used for underground ground floors (i.e. the floor is located at a
height lower than z=0). If the basement ground floor surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived
from construction thickness) then check the checkbox and enter the floor thickness (in m or in).
External floor
If the external floor surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness) then
Internal floor
If the internal floor surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness) then
Semi-exposed wall
If the semi-exposed wall surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness)
then check the checkbox and enter the wall thickness (in m or in).
Semi-exposed floor
If the semi-exposed floor surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness)
then check the checkbox and enter the floor thickness (in m or in).
Semi-exposed ceiling
If the semi-exposed ceiling surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness)
then check the checkbox and enter the ceiling thickness (in m or in).
Flat roof
If the flat roof surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness) then check
the checkbox and enter the flat roof thickness (in m or in).
Pitched roof
If the pitched roof surface thickness is to be overridden (i.e. not derived from construction thickness) then
check the checkbox and enter the pitched roof thickness (in m or in).
CONSIDERATIONS FOR PARAMETRIC ANALYSIS AND OPTIMISATION

When running parametric or optimisation studies in which wall or other surface thickness are changed as part
of the parametric variations, there can be other significant knock-on impacts on the model geometry including
varying floor area (and so internal gains, ventilation etc) and zone volume (and so ventilation and infiltration
changes). To avoid running into these issues you can fix surface thickness for the relevant part of the model.
- 208 -
General Block Form
For example if wall insulation thickness is being varied in a parametric analysis and you don't wish these
changes to impact on zone floor area and volume then you could apply a constant External wall thickness.
Tip: the easiest way to avoid any such issues would be to use the "Simple" Geometry conventions template at
the outset.
VOID DEPTHS
Ceiling void depth
The depth of the ceiling void (in m or in). This is used, in addition to any surface thickness applied to the
ceiling/roof surface to reduce the size of the zone inner volume and surfaces areas to account for the ceiling
void.
Note: If the ceiling/roof construction already includes an air gap to define the ceiling void and its thickness is
being used to define the inner volume then you should enter 0 here. Likewise, if the ceiling void is already
modelled using its own zone then enter 0.
Floor void depth

The depth of the floor void (in m or in). This is used, in addition to any surface thickness applied to the floor
surface to reduce the size of the zone inner volume and surfaces areas to account for the floor void.
Note: If the floor construction already includes an air gap for the floor void and its thickness is being used to
define the inner volume then you should enter 0 here. Likewise, if the floor void is already modelled using its
own zone then enter 0.
SPECIAL CONDITIONS
Certain block geometries can prevent an inner zone volume being generated from the outer geometry
resulting in the outer geometry being used instead (even if the 1-Inner volume Zone geometry and surface
areas option has been set). This can happen when:
Zones where one or more zone outer geometry vertex has 4 or more surfaces adjacent, or,
Cases where it is physically impossible to create the inner geometry from the outer geometry due to the
surface thickness being too great. Examples of this situation include small kinks in the surface
geometry with dimension of 2 x the surface thickness or less (image below) and zones where there are
acute angle corners and thick wall constructions.
In both the above cases the zone outer geometry is used for all zone thermal surfaces. However although
DesignBuilder is unable to generate full inner zone geometry for these zones it can still calculate zone inner
volumes and floor areas fairly accurately using a simpler algorithm based on the outer zone geometry and
surface thicknesses.
- 209 -
GEOMETRY CONVENTION EXAMPLES
External measurements, perspective view
External measurements, section view
CURTAIN GLAZING - EXAMPLE

When modelling continuous glazing for curtain walls, atria, greenhouses etc. it is often necessary to model
glazing joining at the corners. It is not possible for windows to literally meet in this way because EnergyPlus
requires all openings (windows, doors etc) to be placed on a parent surface with at least a small gap between
the opening and the parent surface edge. But by using a low value of wall surface thickness you can give the
appearance of adjacent windows as shown below.
A small wall thickness, below, allows the glazing to cover most of the wall giving good results (below).
- 210 -
General Block Form
A larger wall thickness, below, requires more area to cater for the walls joining at the corners and the glazing
does not meet 'round the corner' giving poor results (below).
Surface Convection
You can select the inside and outside surface convection algorithms in the Model data on the Construction tab
under the Surface Convection header. This allows you to make different selections in different parts of the
building. Further details of the algorithms are provided in the EnergyPlus Engineering reference document.
Tip: You can override the inside and outside convection algorithm selection described below by setting fixed
values on the Surface tab of the Construction component dialog.
Inside convection algorithm

You can select from 6 main EnergyPlus inside convection algorithms for calculating the convection between
internal zone surfaces and the rest of the zone air in the simulation calculations. Unless you have good
reason to do so you are advised to use the default TARP convection algorithm:
1-AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm -This advanced option provides a dynamic selection of convection

models based on conditions. Beausoleil-Morrison (2000, 2002) developed a methodology for
dynamically managing the selection of hc equations called adaptive convection algorithm. The algorithm
is used to select among the available hcequations for the one that is most appropriate for a given
surface at a given time. As Beausoleil-Morrison notes, the adaptive convection algorithm is intended to
be expanded and altered to reflect different classification schemes and/or new h cequations. The
adaptive convection algorithm implemented in EnergyPlus for the inside face has a total of 45 different
categories for surfaces and 29 different options for hc equation selections. The tables provided in the
Engineering document summarise the categories and the default assignments for h c equations.
- 211 -
2-Simple - The simple convection model uses constant coefficients for different heat transfer
configurations, using the criteria to determine reduced and enhanced convection. The coefficients are
taken directly from Walton (1983). Walton derived his coefficients from the surface conductances for
=0.90 found in the ASHRAE Handbook (1985) in Table 1 on p. 23.2. The radiative heat transfer
component was estimated at 1.02 * 0.9 = 0.918 BTU/h-ft2-F and then subtracted off. Finally the
coefficients were converted to SI units to yield the values below. For a vertical surface: h c = 3.076 For a
horizontal surface with reduced convection: hc = 0.948 For a horizontal surface with enhanced
convection: hc = 4.040 For a tilted surface with reduced convection: hc = 2.281 For a tilted surface with
enhanced convection: hc = 3.870.
3-CIBSE - applies constant heat transfer coefficient derived from traditional CIBSE values.
4-Ceiling diffuser - a mixed and forced convection model for ceiling diffuser configurations. The model
correlates the heat transfer coefficient to the air change rate for ceilings, walls and floors. The ceiling
diffuser algorithm is based on empirical correlations developed by Fisher and Pedersen (1997). The
correlation was reformulated to use the room outlet temperature as the reference temperature. The
correlations are shown below. For Floors: hc = 3.873 + 0.082 x ACH ^ 0.98, For ceilings: hc = 2.234 +
4.099 x ACH ^ 0.503 and for Walls: hc = 1.208 + 1.012 ACH ^ 0.604.
5-Cavity - This algorithm was developed to model convection in a "Trombe wall zone", i.e. the air
space between the storage wall surface and the exterior glazing. (See the later sections on Passive
and Active Trombe Walls below for more information about Trombe walls.) The algorithm is identical to
the convection model (based on ISO 15099) used in Window5 for convection between glazing layers in
multi-pane window systems. The use of the algorithm for modelling an unvented Trombe wall has been
validated against experimental data by Ellis (2003).This algorithm gives the convection coefficients for
air in a narrow vertical cavity that is sealed and not ventilated. This applies both to the air gap in
between panes of a window or to the air gap between the Trombe wall glazing and the inner surface
(often a selective surface). These convection coefficients are really the only difference between a
normal zone and a Trombe zone. See also note below.
6-TARP - based on variable natural convection based on temperature difference from ASHRAE
algorithms. This is the same as the old "Detailed" Inside convection algorithm provided in earlier
versions of DesignBuilder. It is the default option for new models in v3.0.0.085 and later.
The 5-Cavity Inside convection algorithm is not available at the surface level.
Paraphrased note from EnergyPlus developers on the 5-Cavity option: "The Trombe wall convection
coefficients only make sense for a zone. They are specific coefficients calculated for a narrow enclosed
space. The two major walls of a Trombe wall zone are so close together that the convection patterns for the
two walls actually interact. If they are close enough they can fight each other and totally stagnate the
convection cell in the space. This is not free-boundary convection such as that found in a typical room.
Therefore, it does not make sense to apply these coefficients to a single surface. The algorithm analyses the
zone to figure out which are the two major surfaces and then sets the coefficients on those surfaces. The
other minor surfaces receive negligible convection."
The following inside convection options are also available for advanced users:
7-ASHRAEVerticalWall
8-WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt
9-WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt
10-FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserWalls
11-FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserCeiling
12-FisherPedersenCeilingDiffuserFloor
13-AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal
14-AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal
15-AlamdariHammondVerticalWall
16-KhalifaEq3WallAwayFromHeat
17-KhalifaEq4CeilingAwayFromHeat
18-KhalifaEq5WallNearHeat
19-KhalifaEq6NonHeatedWalls
20-KhalifaEq7Ceiling
21-AwbiHattonHeatedFloor
22-AwbiHattonHeatedWall
23-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedAssistedWall
24-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedOpposingWall
25-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableFloor
- 212 -
General Block Form
26-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableFloor
27-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedStableCeiling
28-BeausoleilMorrisonMixedUnstableCeiling
29-FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall
30-KaradagChilledCeiling
31-ISO15099Windows
32-GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWindow
33-GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserWalls
34-GoldsteinNovoselacCeilingDiffuserFloor
To avoid discontinuities in surface heat transfer rate calculations, all correlations are extrapolated beyond the
lower limit of the data set (3 ACH) to a natural convection limit which is applied during the hours when the
system is off. These models are explained in greater detail in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference
Document.
Outside convection algorithm

Substantial research has gone into the formulation of models for estimating the exterior convection coefficient.
Since the 1930's there have been many different methods published for calculating this coefficient, with much
disparity between them (Cole and Sturrock 1977; Yazdanian and Klems 1994).Unless you have good reason
to do so you are advised to use the default DOE-2 convection algorithm You can select from 7 main outside
convection algorithms:
1-AdaptiveConvectionAlgorithm - This advanced convection algorithm provides a dynamic selection

of convection models based on conditions. This algorithm has a structure that allows for finer control
over the models used for particular surfaces. The algorithm for the outside face was developed for
EnergyPlus but it borrows concepts and its name from the research done by Beausoleil-Morrison
(2000, 2002) for convection at the inside face (see above). The adaptive convection algorithm
implemented in EnergyPlus for the outside face is much simpler than that for the inside face. The
surface classification system has a total of 4 different categories for surfaces that depend on current
wind direction and heat flow directions. However in other ways it is more complex in that the h cequation
is split into two parts and there are separate model equation selections for forced and natural
convection.
2-SimpleCombined - The simple algorithm uses surface roughness and local surface wind speed to
calculate the exterior heat transfer coefficient. This is a combined heat transfer coefficient that includes
radiation to sky, ground, and air. The correlation is based on Figure 1, Page 25.1 (Thermal and Water
Vapor Transmission Data), 2001 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
Note: selecting the SimpleCombined option at building level on the Constructions tab under Surface
Convection or on the Calculation options or Model options dialogs has a special meaning. In this case
the outside convective selection covers both convection and radiation combined. This means for
example that any hard-set outside convective heat transfer coefficients set on the Surface properties
tab of the Construction dialog will actually be used as a combined outside convective plus radiation
coefficient.
3-CIBSE - applies constant heat transfer coefficients depending on orientation, derived from traditional
CIBSE values.
4-ASHRAEVerticalWall - Identical to the DOE-2 option.
5-TARP - TARP, or Thermal Analysis Research Program, is an important predecessor of EnergyPlus
(Walton 1983). Walton developed a comprehensive model for exterior convection by blending
correlations from ASHRAE and flat plate experiments by Sparrow et. al. In older versions of
EnergyPlus, prior to version 6, the TARP model was called Detailed. The model was reimplemented in version 6 to use Area and Perimeter values for the group of surfaces that make up a
facade or roof, rather than the single surface being modelled.
6-DOE-2 - The DOE-2 convection model is a combination of the MoWiTT and BLAST Detailed
convection models (LBL 1994). It is the default option for new models in v3.0.0.085 and later.
7-MoWiTT - The MoWiTT model is based on measurements taken at the Mobile Window Thermal Test
(MoWiTT) facility (Yazdanian and Klems 1994). The correlation applies to very smooth, vertical
surfaces (e.g. window glass) in low-rise buildings. The MoWiTT algorithm may not be appropriate for
rough surfaces, high-rise surfaces, or surfaces that employ movable insulation.
The following outside convection options are also available for more advanced users:
8-WaltonUnstableHorizontalOrTilt
- 213 -
9-WaltonStableHorizontalOrTilt
10-AlamdariHammondStableHorizontal
11-AlamdariHammondUnstableHorizontal
12-FohannoPolidoriVerticalWall
13-NusseltJurges
14-McAdams
15-Mitchell
16-BlockenWindard
17-Emmel
18-ClearRoof
Note: When the surface is wet (i.e. it is raining and the surface is exposed to wind) then the convection
coefficient appears in results as a very large number (1000) and the surface is exposed to the Outdoor Wet
Bulb Temperature rather than the Outdoor Dry Bulb Temperature.
As well as being able to define convection options on the Model data on Construction tab under the Surface
Convection header as described above, building level inside and outside convection algorithm settings can be
made on:
Model options dialog (Heating design, Cooling design, Simulation tabs)

Calculation options dialogs (Heating design, Cooling design, Simulation
You cannot make changes to individual surface convection settings where the surface is an internal partition.
All of the above algorithms are described fully in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference.
Note: the equivalent inside and outside surface convection options in the Calculation and Model options
dialogs control building default values (equivalent of making a setting in Model data at building level) and
any changes made at block, zone or surface levels in the Model data will override these default settings.
Component Block
Component blocks can be used to include shading and reflection effects of objects such as local shading
devices, awnings, adjacent buildings and trees. They can also be used to define ground and adiabatic
adjacencies. The component block model data allows you to define the component block type, whether the
component block shades and reflects in simulations, transmittance of the shading material and also a
schedule for modelling variations in transmittance at different times of the day, seasons etc. For example they
can be used for modelling deciduous trees which shade more in the summer when they have leaves than they
do in winter when the leaves have fallen.
Component block type

You can change the type of the component block. Select from:
1-Standard - used for shading, reflection and visualisation.

2-Ground - used for setting ground adjacency, shading, reflection and visualisation.
3-Adiabatic - used for setting adiabatic adjacency, shading, reflection and visualisation.
For more information on the Component block types see Component Block under Working with Blocks
(Building Level)
Component block shades and reflects

Switch this option on to include the component block as a shading/reflection surfaces in the simulations.
Shading surfaces have the following effects:
Shade direct beam solar radiation.
- 214 -
General Block Form
Reflect solar radiation onto the building (if you select Model reflections and shading of ground reflected
solar in the calculation options).
Shade diffuse solar and long-wave radiation from the sky.
Shade diffuse solar radiation from the ground (if you select Model reflections in the calculation options).
Note: Solar and light reflection from the ground is included even if the solar Model reflections option is not
used, but if reflections are not calculated the ground plane is considered unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of
the ground by the building itself or by component blocks is ignored. Shadowing of the ground by component
blocks is only taken into account if the Model reflections option is used. Conclusion: Switch Model reflections
on for the most accurate shading calculations.
Note: all component block types cast shadows in the visualisations.
Material
The component block material is used to define the solar and visible reflectance of the block surfaces in
Cooling design calculations and Simulations using real weather data when the model reflections calculation
option is selected.
Important Note: Component blocks do not absorb or conduct heat in any way - their only effect on
building surfaces in simulations is related to the shading and reflection of short-wave solar radiation and light.
In cases where the component block touches the building, the material associated with the component block
and the thickness of the block are not used in any way to modify the conduction of heat.
Note: Although component blocks are displayed in DesignBuilder as solid objects, non-flat component blocks
are modelled in EnergyPlus as a group of surfaces and it is the reflectance and transmission of each of these
surfaces that is being described here. The solar flux incident upon a building facade will be attenuated by
each successive shading object located on a path between the facade and the sun position.
Maximum Transmittance
This is the maximum solar transmittance of the entire component block to be used in EnergyPlus
simulations.The transmittance of the component block during the simulation is calculated by multiplying the
maximum transmittance by the time varying schedule value:
Transmittance = Max Transmittance x Schedule value
You will generally want component blocks to provide 100% shading for 100% of the time. In this case you can
leave the Maximum transmittance and Transmittance schedule in their default states of 0 and On
respectively. If you wish the component block to transmit solar and visible radiation you can define the extent
and timing of the transmission. The component block transmittance is calculated during the simulations as the
Maximum transmittance multiplied by the value of the transmittance schedule below. The maximum
transmittance can have any value between 0 and 1. Note that if the component block is flat (i.e. it consists of 2
large surfaces and several smaller 'edge' surfaces) the block is represented in the simulations by a single
shading surface. In this case the surface used will depend on the value of the Flat component block surface
selection model option.
Tip: If your component block has a constant transmittance you can set the transmittance schedule below to
On and set the constant transmittance for the block here.
- 215 -
For non-flat component blocks every surface is included in the simulation as a shading surface and the solar
flux incident upon a building facade will be attenuated by each successive shading object located on a path
between the facade and the sun position. The shading transmittance schedule you define is therefore
modified to ensure that the overall transmittance of the block is the Maximum Transmittance value multiplied
by the schedule you selected. This is done assuming that the component block is convex and that therefore
solar rays can only pass through a maximum of 2 surfaces. The transmittance of each non-flat component
block surface is set to square root of the value you defined to achieve this.
Note: non-convex, non-flat component blocks will provide more shading than you specified during times
when solar rays pass through more than 2 surfaces.
Note: Component blocks do not provide any transmission for Radiance daylighting calculations and so this
value and the transmittance schedule below are ignored when preparing inputs for Radiance.
Transmittance schedule
The component block transmittance schedule defines any time-varying transmittance of the component block
surfaces (for EnergyPlus simulations only). By default, the component block is fully opaque for the whole year.
The transmittance schedule can contain any value between 0 and 1. The transmittance schedule can be
used to allow for seasonal transmittance change, such as deciduous trees that have a higher transmittance in
winter than in summer. The table "Modifying Characteristics of Various Species of Trees" in "Landscape
Architectural Graphic Standards" by Leonard J. Hopper, 2007 contains some data on tree solar
transmission.
Transmittance based on time of day can also be used - a movable awning, for example, where the
transmittance is some value less than 1.0 when the awning is in place and is 1.0 when the awning is retracted.
The following assumptions are made in the shading surface transmittance calculation:
Both sides of the shading surface have the same transmittance properties.
The transmittance is the same for both beam and diffuse solar radiation.
Beam solar transmittance is independent of angle of incidence on the shading surface.
Beam radiation incident on a shading surface is transmitted as beam radiation with no change in
direction, i.e., there is no beam-to-diffuse component.
If two shading surfaces with non-zero transmittance overlap, the net transmittance is the product of the
individual transmittances. Inter-reflection between the shading
surfaces (and between the shading surfaces and the building) is ignored.
For the daylighting calculation the shading surfaces visible transmittance is assumed to be the same
as its solar transmittance.
Shading devices are assumed to be opaque to long-wave radiation no matter what the solar
transmittance value is.
Note: Shading devices only shade solar radiation when the sun is up, which is automatically determined by
EnergyPlus from latitude, time of year, etc. So you only need to account for the time-varying transmittance of
- 216 -
General Block Form
the shading device in the transmittance schedule,for times whether the sun is up. In other words for times
when the sun is not up, it doesn't matter what value of transmittance is contained in the schedule.
Linear Thermal Bridges At Junctions

You can model linear thermal bridging at junction such as wall to wall corners, wall to floor edges etc using the
settings under the Linear Thermal Bridges at Junctions header on the Construction tab. These settings are
used at zone level and apply to all surface junctions in the zone. Defaults are provided at building and block
levels.
Specify Psi Values

If you would like to include the effect of thermal bridging in the zone/block/building then check this option and
enter the Psi values in the cells below.
PSI VALUES INCLUDING METAL CLADDING

The Psi values under this header are linear transmittances for junctions where there is metal cladding in a
construction on one or more sides of the junction. Metal cladding is important for thermal bridging calculations
as junctions involving it tend to create a higher heat flow than those without.
Units are W/m-K or Btu-in/h-ft2-F, i.e. heat flux per length of junction per unit difference in inside to outside
temperature.
Definition of Metal cladding
Constructions involving metal cladding are roof or wall systems where metal forms an integral part of the
construction, such as metal twin skin systems where the insulation is located between the metal skins and
where the metal skins are typically in the range 0.4 mm to 1.2 mm. Cladding with z-spacers would come into
this category as would composite metal panel systems.
If the metal is simply used as an external shield against weather, such as a rainscreen, this is not classed, for
the purposes of calculations as "metal cladding".
Metal cladding systems are divided into two broad categories, these being:
- 217 -
a.
b.
built up metal cladding systems involving rail and bracket or z-spacer systems with insulation within the
panels
composite panel metal cladding systems with insulation inside the panels
You can define whether a construction includes metal cladding on the Constructions dialog.
Junction type
Roof-Wall
Wall-Ground floor
Wall-Wall (corner)
Wall-Floor (not ground floor)
Lintel above window or door
Sill below window
Jamb at window or door
Description
The average Psi value for junctions between external walls and roofs
The average Psi value for junctions between external walls and ground floors
The average Psi value for external wall corners
The average Psi value for junctions between external walls and internal floors
The linear transmittance created by lintels above windows and doors
The linear transmittance created by sills below windows
The linear transmittance created by window and door jambs
PSI VALUES NOT INCLUDING METAL CLADDING

Definitions for Psi values not including metal cladding are as above.
How it Works
DesignBuilder calculates a total linear bridging transmittance for each zone by summing the length for each of
the above 14 bridging categories and multiplies each by the Psi value entered for that category. The total
transmittance for the zone is modelled in EnergyPlus using a single standard "WallExterior" surface type per
zone with no film resistance applied. These surfaces are located below the building to avoid interfering with
shading calculations.
The linear bridging defined by these Psi values is used in Simulations, Heating design and Cooling design
calculations,
Baffle
You can model a multi-skin exterior heat transfer surface by making settings on the Constructions tab under
the Baffle header at surface level. Baffle components consist of an outside baffle surface which is slightly
detached from the main wall or roof forming a cavity which exchanges air with the outside environment.
Baffles are typically used to model naturally ventilated rainscreens and/or solar shading of exterior surfaces.
The constructions used to define the underlying wall/roof should reflect the construction of just the underlying
surface. The data described here is used to describe the decoupled baffle layer and the characteristics of the
cavity and openings for natural ventilation.
Tip: If the baffle covers only part of a surface, then surfaces without the baffle can be modelled as subsurfaces which do not have natural vented cavities.
Tip: You can enter corresponding data for natural vented cavities on the Construction template dialog. If you
need to apply settings to a large number of surfaces you may find the fasted way to do this is to use the Load
data from template dialog, selecting the surfaces which have a baffle on the Target tab and selecting the
Construction template with the appropriate natural vented cavity and construction settings.
Technical Notes
1.
2.
3.
The corresponding EnergyPlus object is SurfaceProperty:ExteriorNaturalVentedCavity.

The heat capacity of the outer baffle is ignored in the simulation since it is much lower than that of the
underlying mass surface.
The model involves predicting the rates that ambient air moves in and out of the cavity. Accurate
modelling of these air flows would be extremely challenging and so the models provided through this
object are simplistic engineering models based on discharge coefficients that are sensitive to wind and
- 218 -
General Block Form
buoyancy effects. The accuracy depends on the values for, and applicability of, the discharge
coefficients and unfortunately little research is available to help characterize these. The models should
be considered rudimentary and the user is encouraged to explore different values for the coefficients in
attempts to bound the importance of natural ventilation for the cavities. See the Engineering Reference
for more details.
Area fraction of openings

This field is used to enter an area fraction for what part of the baffle consists of openings. The area of the
openings will set to the product of this field and the sum of the area of the underlying surfaces.
Thermal emissivity of exterior baffle material

This field is used to enter the thermal emissivity of the baffler. This surface property is for longwave infrared
radiation. The property is used for both sides of collector. Most painted materials have an emissivity of 0.9.
Solar absorptivity of exterior baffle

This field is used to enter the solar absorbtivity of the baffle. This surface property is for shortwave, solar
radiation. The property is used for the front side of the baffle that faces the environment. Darker colors have a
higher absorptivity. While black is the highest performance, other colors might be used to match the colour
scheme of the rest of the faade.
Height Scale for buoyancy-driven ventilation

This field is used to enter a nominal height scale (m) for prediction of ventilation induced by buoyancy. This
value ( ) is defined as the height from the midpoint of the lower opening to the neutral pressure level.
Increasing the value will increase the ventilation rate due to buoyancy.
Effective thickness of cavity

This field is used to enter a nominal gap thickness (m) for the collector. If the baffle is corrugated, use the
average depth. This distance value is only used when the collector is near horizontal to determine a length
scale in the vertical direction for buoyancy calculations. For example, if the collector is mounted on a flat roof,
its tilt-adjusted height is zero and the program will use this gap thickness as a length scale rather than the
height from the previous field.
Ratio of actual to projected surface area

This field is used to enter a factor that accounts for the extra surface area resulting from and uneven baffle
surface. Corrugations may be present to help stiffen the baffle or ventilated roofing tiles may have more
surface are for convection heat transfer than the underlying surface. The projected surface area is obtained by
the program from the (flat) underlying surfaces. If the baffle is flat then this ratio is 1.0. If the baffle is
corrugated, then this ratio will be greater than one with a typical value might be 1.165.
Roughness of exterior surface

This field is used to describe the relative roughness of the baffle material which influences the the exterior
convection coefficient. Select from:
1-Very rough
2-Rough
3-Medium rough
4-Medium smooth
5-Smooth
6-Very smooth
Effectiveness for perforations with respect to wind

This field is used to enter a value for the coefficient used to determine natural air exchanges from wind. Wind will cause exterior air to move in and out of the cavity. Cv is
an arbitrary coefficient used to model the effectiveness of openings and depends on opening geometry and the orientation with respect to the wind. Cv should probably
be in the range 0.05 to 0.65. Increasing Cv will increase the amount of natural ventilation. The following equation shows how Cv is used in the program to predict the
volumetric flow rate due to wind:
- 219 -
Discharge coefficient for openings with respect to buoyancy driven flow

This field is used to enter a value for the coefficient used to determine natural air exchanges from buoyancy.
Stack or buoyancy effects will cause exterior air to move in and out of the cavity. Cd is an arbitrary discharge
coefficient that depends on the geometry of the opening. Cd should probably be in the range 0.1 to 1.0.
Increasing Cd will increase the amount of natural ventilation. The following equations show how Cd is used in
the program to predict the volume flow rate due to buoyancy:
where
is the value input into the field above for the height scale for buoyancy-driven ventilation.
Solar Collector Model Data

Construction tab in model data under Solar Collector header
Once a solar collector surface has been placed you can define its properties on the Constructions tab under
the Solar Collector header.
Solar collector type

You can change the type of solar collector using the drop list. Choose from:
1-Solar hot water,

2-Photovoltaic (PV)
Depending on the type of solar collector selected you will see different data below. For Solar hot water
collectors the only data that can be edited here is the material used to represent the panel in rendered views
on the Visualisation tab. All of the rest of the data is defined with the HVAC Solar collector component and its
host loop.
When the 2-Photovoltaic option is selected further configuration and performance data for the PV panels can
be entered as shown in the screenshot below.
Cost
You can define the cost of the collector per area. The units will be the unit of currency currently selected on
the Program options dialog per area (e.g. GBP/m2 or USD/ft2).
Costs for the electric distribution can be included separately on the Load centre dialog.
- 220 -
PV Generator - Simple
PHOTOVOLTAIC OPTIONS
Performance type
Select from:
1-Simple, and
2-Equivalent One-Diode.
Depending on the selection you will be able to select from either a simple or equivalent one-diode definition of
the panel.
Tip: PV panels are included in the electrical generation side of the model by specifying them on the Generator
list tab of the Electric load centre dialog when one of the d.c. Buss types is selected.
Performance model
Choose the component to be used to define the performance of the collector. When the 1-Simple
performance type is selected, select from the list of previously defined Simple Photovoltaic components, or
when 2-Equivalent One-Diode is selected then choose from one of the Equivalent One-Diode components.
Heat transfer integration mode

The PV model allows for different ways of integrating with other EnergyPlus heat transfer surfaces and models
and calculating cell temperature. Choose from:
1-Decoupled, where the cell temperature of modules in the array is computed based on an energy
balance relative to NOCT conditions.
2-Decoupled Ulleberg Dynamic, where the cell temperature is calculated based on a dynamic model
developed by Ulleberg12.
Note: The above decoupled PV solar panels shade solar radiation from any other building surfaces below so
they can be used to model PV shading, awning and the reduced solar gain on roofs where there is a
ventilated cavity below the panel. They will be less accurate from the thermal point of view for building
integrated PV panels where there is a significant thermal solar gain through the panel and into the building
fabric.
Modules in parallel
This field is the number of series-wired strings of PV modules that are in parallel to form the PV array. The
product of this field and the next field should equal the total number of modules in the array.
The Modules in parallel and Modules in series data are only used for 2-Equivalent One-Diode PV arrays.
Modules in series
This field is the number of modules wired in series (on each string) to form the PV array. The product of this
field and the previous field should equal the total number of modules in the array.
Material
This material is used only to define the texture to represent the Solar collector in rendered views on the
Visualisation screen.
PV Generator - Simple
PV Generator Simple component describes a simple model of PV panels that may be useful for early phase
design analysis. It provides direct access to the efficiency with which PV panels convert incident solar
radiation to electricity and does not require arrays of specific modules to be defined. The full geometric model
for solar radiation is used, including shading and reflections to determine the incident solar on the panel. This
model is intended to be useful for design purposes to quickly get an idea of the levels for annual production
and peak power. The model can also accept arbitrary conversion efficiencies and does not require actual
production units be tested to obtain performance coefficients.
- 221 -
Name
This field is the name of the PV array. The name is only used as an identifier.
Fraction of surface area with active solar cells

This field is the user defined fraction for the area of surface named in the parent PV object that will have active
PV cells on it. The area actually covered with solar cells will be the net area of the surface (gross area less
any sub-surfaces like windows) times the fraction entered here. This fraction includes the difference between
PV module area and active cells within it and any losses for how closely packed modules can be arranged on
surface. The value should be between 0.0 and 1.0.
Conversion efficiency input mode

This field is used to determine how the thermal efficiency is input. There are two choices
1-Fixed where a constant value for PV electrical conversion efficiency is used.

2-Scheduled where the PV electrical conversion efficiency values are defined in a schedule.
Value for cell efficiency if fixed

This field specifies the efficiency with which solar incident energy is converted to electricity. Efficiency =
(electrical power generated [W])/(power of incident solar[W]). These efficiency values are dimensionless and
should be between 0.0 and 1.0.
Efficiency schedule
Select the schedule which specifies dimensionless efficiency values between 0.0 and 1.0. This could be used
for example to vary the efficiency to match results computed with more detailed models.
Rated electric power

This numeric field contains the nominal electric power output to be requested from the panel. It is normally
equal to the rated power output of the generator (in W or Btu/hr). This value is used only for supervisory
control and generator dispatch; the actual power output for each time step is determined by the generator
models. This value affects how much a generator is loaded (i.e., requested electric power output) and can
also impact the operation of an electric storage unit if one is connected to the associated Electric load centre.
For more details regarding this input field and its relationship with electric storage refer to Electrical Storage in
the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference.
Availability schedule
Select the generator availability schedule. A schedule value of 0 indicates the generator is not available, while
a schedule value > 0 indicates that the generator is available to operate.
PV Solar Collector Performance - Equivalent One Diode

This object describes the performance characteristics of Photovoltaic (PV) modules to be modelled using an
equivalent one-diode circuit. This model is also known at the 4- or 5-parameter TRNSYS model for
photovoltaics.
Note: The number series and parallel-wired of Equivalent One Diode modules to be included in the model are
defined on the Constructions tab under the Solar Collector header.
Technical
Mathematically speaking, the EnergyPlus PV module employs equations for an empirical equivalent circuit
model to predict the current-voltage characteristics of a single module. This circuit consists of a DC current
source, diode, and either one or two resistors. The strength of the current source is dependent on solar
radiation and the IV characteristics of the diode are temperature-dependent. The results for a single module
equivalent circuit are extrapolated to predict the performance of a multi-module array.
The module employs a four-parameter equivalent circuit to model crystalline (both mono and poly) PV
modules developed at the University of Wisconsin Madison [2]. The values of these parameters cannot
- 222 -
normally be obtained directly from manufacturers catalogs. However, the PV module will automatically
calculate them from commonly available data. The PV module also includes an optional incidence angle
modifier correlation to calculate how the reflectance of the PV module surface varies with the angle of
incidence of solar radiation.
Equivalent circuit in the four parameter model

More detailed technical information can be found in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference.
Name
This field contains the unique name for the photovoltaic module performance data. The name is used as an
identifier.
Cell type
This field is used to describe the type of technology used in the PV module. There are two options available:
1- Crystalline silicon and

2-Amorphous silicon.
Cells in series
The number of individual cells wired in series to make up a single module. The typical number for a 12V
crystalline silicon PV module is 36.
Active area
This field is the active area of the PV module in (m2 or ft2).
Transmittance absorptance product

This field indicates the transmittance-absorptance product at normal incidence angles for the PV modules. If
the . product is positive, that value will be used for all angles of incidence. If the value specified is negative,
then the magnitude of the given value will be used for normal incidence and the IAM modifier correlation will
be used for all other angles.
Semiconductor bandgap
This field is the semiconductor bandgap for the PV material. The bandgap for silicon is 1.12eV (electron volts).
Shunt resistance
This field is the shunt (parallel) resistance (in ) in the single diode electrical model of the PV. The shunt
resistance is effectively infinite for crystalline silicon based PV modules and is finite for thin film and exotic
metal modules.
Reference temperature
This field is the ambient temperature (in K or F) at reference conditions. The value is usually 298K
Reference Insolation
This field is the radiation level (in W/m2 or Btu/h-ft2-F) at reference conditions. The value is usually 1000
W/m2.
Module heat loss coefficient

This field is the heat loss coefficient (in W/m2.K or Btu/h-ft2-F) for the array. The heat loss coefficient is
dependent upon measures taken to actively or passively promote airflow over the array surface. The heat loss
- 223 -
coefficient value is used only if the Integration and Cell Temperature Mode is set to Decoupled Ulleberg
Dynamic.
Total heat capacity

This field is the heat capacity (in J/m2.K or Btu/ft2-F) of the modules in the array. It describes the modules
ability to store incident solar radiation internally. Such energy storage is manifested as a temperature increase
in the modules that is considered to be undesirable. The total heat capacity value is used only if the
Integration and Cell Temperature Mode is set to 2-Decoupled Ulleberg Dynamic.
Rated electric power

This numeric field contains the nominal electric power output to be requested from the panel. It is normally
equal to the rated power output of the generator (in W or Btu/hr). This value is used only for supervisory
control and generator dispatch; the actual power output for each time step is determined by the generator
models. This value affects how much a generator is loaded (i.e., requested electric power output) and can
also impact the operation of an electric storage unit if one is connected to the associated Electric load centre.
For more details regarding this input field and its relationship with electric storage refer to Electrical Storage in
the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference.
Select the generator availability schedule. A schedule value of 0 indicates the generator is not available, while
a schedule value > 0 indicates that the generator is available to operate.
CURRENT
Short circuit current
This field is the short circuit current (in A) for an individual module in the PV array at reference conditions.
Module current at maximum power

This field is module current (in A) at the maximum power point and reference conditions.
Temperature coefficient of short circuit current

This field accounts for the fact that the module short circuit current is temperature dependent. The coefficient
is given in A/K.
VOLTAGE
Open circuit voltage
This field is the open circuit voltage (in V) for an individual module in the PV array at reference conditions.
Module voltage at maximum power

This field is module voltage (in V) at the maximum power point and reference conditions.
Temperature coefficient of open circuit voltage

This field accounts for the fact that the module open circuit voltage is temperature dependent. The coefficient
is given in V/K.
NOMINAL OPERATING CELL TEMPERATURE

Nominal operating cell temperature test ambient temperature
This field is the ambient temperature (in K or F) from the Nominal Operating Cell Temperature (NOCT) test.
The value is usually 293 K
Nominal operating cell temperature test cell temperature

This field is the cell temperature (in K or F) from the Nominal Operating Cell Temperature (NOCT) test.
- 224 -
Nominal operating cell temperature test insolation

This field is the insolation level (in W/m2 or Btu/h-ft2) from the Nominal Operating Cell Temperature (NOCT)
test. The value is usually 800 W/m2.
Ground Domain
If the site level include ground domains checkbox was ticked then an option will be available on the
Constructions tab for surfaces in contact with the ground.
Define ground domain

Select the type of ground domain that the surface is in contact with from the list:
1-No ground domain - the surface is not in contact with a ground domain. Instead the conditions on
the other side of the surface are defined using the default ground temperature mechanism using
Ground monthly temperatures.
2-Slab - the horizontal surface is in contact with a slab ground domain object.
3-Basement - the underground surface is in contact with a basement ground domain object.
Ground domain
Select the ground domain in contact with this surface from the drop list.
Airtightness
There are two ways of defining air tightness depending on the Natural ventilation model option:
Scheduled
Calculated
In both cases infiltration can be switched off at building, block or zone level.
Airtightness (Scheduled Natural Ventilation)

Construction tab in model data under Airtightness header
Model infiltration
Infiltration is included by default but you can switch infiltration off by unchecking the Model infiltration
checkbox.
Infiltration rate
With the Scheduled natural ventilation option set the design infiltration rate (rate of entry of unintentional air
from outside through cracks, holes and through the porosity of the fabric) is assumed to be constant
throughout the simulation though it can vary with time through a schedule. The design infiltration rate can be
set in one of 4 different units depending on the setting of the Infiltration units model option:
1.
2.
3.
4.
ac/h - the default option where infiltration is defined in air changes per hour (ac/h), i.e. zone volume per
hour under standard operating pressures.
m3/h-m2 at 50 Pa infiltration is defined as flow rate in m3/h per unit exposed surface area, when the
pressure difference between inside and outside is 50 Pa. Unit commonly used in the UK.
m3/h-m2 at 4 Pa infiltration is defined as flow rate in m3/h per unit exposed surface area, when the
pressure difference between inside and outside is 4 Pa. Units commonly used in France and Belgium.
n50 - ac/h at 50 Pa - infiltration is defined in air changes per hour (ac/h), i.e. zone volume per hour,
when the pressure difference between inside and outside is 50 Pa. Unit commonly used in Europe.
- 225 -
The air flow rate in m3/s at standard pressure is calculated from the ac/h data using:
m3/s = ac/h * ZoneVolume / 3600
where ZoneVolume is the total air volume of the space including the volume of floor and ceiling constructions
and any raised floor and suspended ceiling voids (if selected in Separate constructions) and including half the
volume of partition walls.
Note: this total zone volume value may be different from the value used for calculating air flow rates for
natural ventilation and mechanical ventilation which have model options for excluding floor/ceiling
constructions.
The ac/h at standard pressure is calculated from other units using formulae in EN12831 and the m3/s
calculated using the above formula.
Schedule
The schedule that modifies the design infiltration rate. The schedule should contain fractions between 0.0 and
1.0 and is used for Cooling design and Simulations (when the Scheduled natural ventilation option is set) but
not for Heating design calculations which use the constant design infiltration rate.
Note: Both the Infiltration rate and Schedule are only used in Simulations when the Scheduled natural
ventilation model option is set. However this data is still used when Calculated natural ventilation is set for
Cooling design calculations and Heating design calculations (Infiltration rate only).
Airtightness (Calculated Natural Ventilation)

Construction tab in model data under Airtightness header
Model infiltration
Infiltration is included by default but you can switch infiltration off by unchecking the Model infiltration
checkbox. This may be useful if you are carrying out a calculated natural ventilation summertime simulation of
a large building to reduce the number of cracks in the model and so speed simulations.
Note: if you switch off infiltration when Calculated natural ventilation is active, you should make sure that the
Natural ventilation option on the HVAC tab is switched on to ensure that sufficient flow paths exist. Otherwise
EnergyPlus may generate errors.
CALCULATED NATURAL VENTILATION

When Calculated natural ventilation is active, the Airtightness is defined through a crack template. Depending
on the Airtightness method model option there are 2 different ways to define the airtightness of the building:
1-Template slider.
2-Crack template.
These options are used as follows.
Template slider
Airtightness is defined through a five point scale:
- 226 -
The five settings correspond to 5 pre-defined Crack templates.
Crack template
When the 2-Crack template Airtightness method is used, airtightness is defined through a specific selection
of a template which can be user-defined. With this method it is still possible to select the pre-defined crack
templates referred to by the Template slider method.
Infiltration airflow calculations

When using Calculated natural ventilation there are 2 main categories of uncontrolled infiltration airflow:
Airflow through the surface itself which could be caused by cracks or by general fabric porosity.
Cracks between windows, vents and doors and the main wall or roof surface.
The data that allows DesignBuilder to generate these airflow paths is stored in Crack templates. For example,
take a 20m2 external wall with a single 2m x 1m window. If the Good crack template is selected for the
surface then the flow paths used in the simulations will be as follows:
1.
2.
Main surface infiltration 0.000040 kg/s.m2 @ 1Pa, which for the 18m2 (20m2 - 2m2) wall = 0.0072 kg/s
@ 1Pa.
In the Good Crack template, cracks between windows and walls have infiltration 0.000060 kg/s.m @
1Pa. Our window has perimeter 6m so the overall crack property used in the simulation would be
0.00036 kg/s @ 1Pa.
The screenshots below indicate the source of the above Crack template values.
External window crack data in Crack template dialog
- 227 -
External wall crack data in Crack template dialog

Note: As well as being included in standard simulations, infiltration from Calculated natural ventilation is also
included in Detailed HVAC autosizing calculations and also in Simple HVAC sizing when using the 2EnergyPlus Simple HVAC autosizing method.
SCHEDULED NATURAL VENTILATION + HEATING AND COOLING DESIGN

CALCULATIONS
Constant rate
Enter the maximum rate of infiltration, which is modified by the multiplier fraction factors in the Schedule select
below. The units for the infiltration depend on the Infiltration units Model data setting. This value and the
associated schedule below are used for Cooling design calculations as well as simulations when using
Scheduled natural ventilation.
Schedule
Select the schedule which defines any time-varying of the infiltration. The default schedule is On giving a
constant infiltration rate based on the Constant rate entered as described above.
Openings Model data (Windows, doors, vents, holes, sub-surfaces)

Openings tab in model data
The term opening is used in DesignBuilder to describe any opening in the main building fabric. These are
modelled as exceptions to the main surface construction. There are five types of opening:
Windows
- 228 -
Sub-surfaces ( i.e. opaque elements within the surface that have different properties from the main
construction. For example lintels and lightweight panels can be defined as sub-surfaces. Data for these
is held on the Construction tab)
Holes
Doors
Vents
The layout, operation and construction data for these (apart from sub-surfaces) can be set on the Openings
tab.
See also the Openings Model Data Tutorial
Templates
You can load generic Opening data by clicking on the Template option under Glazing Template and then by
clicking on the '...' at the right of the line (below).
When you make a selection from the list of Glazing templates, data from selected template will be loaded to
the model.
You can also open the:
External Glazing
Internal Glazing
Roof Glazing
Doors
Vents
headers to enter opening details where they are different from those loaded from the template.
Note: Once you have created custom openings on any particular surface, changes made to facade layout on
this tab will not affect the layout for the surface.
All Openings data is used to generate simulation data at the Surface level.
You can also override default Pressure Coefficient data when the Calculated Natural ventilation option is set
and you are at surface level.
External glazing
The data under the External Glazing header applies to all glazing lying on external walls. You can enter
information on:
Dimensions
Frame
Shading
Operation
- 229 -
Dimensions
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing and Internal Glazing headers
You can use the Window to wall % (WWR) data and Window height, Window spacing and Sill height to
easily change the amount of glazing and its layout on the walls. The way this data is used for each facade
type is described below.
Facade types
There are a number of standard facade types:
0-None - there is no glazing.

1-Continuous horizontal - glazing is generated in a continuous horizontal strip using Sill height,
Window spacing and Percentage glazing.
2-Fixed height - glazing is generated with a fixed height at the specified Sill height and Window
spacing, and width is calculated based on the Percentage glazing. This option uses Window to wall %
but prioritises window height.
3-Preferred height - glazing is generated using the window height data and the Percentage glazing,
but the Window height may be adjusted to achieve the required Window to wall %. This option uses
Window height, Window spacing and Sill height but prioritises Window to wall %.
4-Fixed width and height - windows have fixed width and height. This option uses Window to wall %
but prioritises Window Width, Height, Spacing and Sill height.
5-Fill surface (100%) - the entire surface is filled with glazing and there is no frame.
Window to Wall %
Often referred to as the Window to Wall Ratio (WWR) this setting can be used to change the amount of
glazing for all openings at or below the current level in the building hierarchy. For example changing the WWR
at building level changes the size of all windows in the model not overridden by other settings lower in the
hierarchy.
When using the 2-Outer volume Zone geometry and surface areas option (typically one of the "External
measurements " convention templates) it is important to understand that the reference surface area used
when calculating the window area from the % value supplied is still based on the inner volume surface. This
might seem surprising at first but the window dimensions must make physical sense and must be punched
through both the inner and outer volume surfaces.
The image below illustrates a wall in a model using the "External measurements" template where a window
has been created using the 3-Preferred height facade option with a 10% glazing ratio. You can see the black
outline showing the available area where the window could possibly be sited. Areas outside this outline to the
left and right are taken up by corners with adjacent walls. The % glazing calculation uses the black outline
area as the reference area. In an extreme case where 100% glazing is specified the whole of this area would
be filled with window, but of course the sides of the surface where there is a corner with an adjacent surface
cannot contain a window and so do not take part in the calculation - even though they will form part of the
surface used in the simulation.
- 230 -
Tip: If you need to ensure that the % window areas used in the simulation exactly match the % you define
here then you should consider using the "Simple" convention template which ensures that 100% of all
surfaces are available for containing windows by using zero surface thickness for all surfaces.
Window spacing
The spacing between the each window on the facade (in m or ft). The window spacing is the centre to centre
spacing between windows, not the gap between windows.
Sill height
This is the height of the base of the window from the base of the block (in m).
Note 1: You can control the makeup of the building facades in greater detail by drawing individual windows at
the surface level or by copying previously drawn windows at building level. In either of these cases glazing,
vent and door facade layout model data is ignored.
Note 2: Flat roofs do not have default glazing set up using Roof glazing layout model data. To create
openings on a flat roof you should go to the surface level and add them there.
Note 3: When the surface is non-rectangular, even with the 2 Facade type options that prioritise Window to
wall % (3-Preferred height and 1-Continuous horizontal), the Window to wall % will not be perfectly
maintained. For these surfaces, DesignBuilder calculates a rectangle that can accept the windows and starts
from one end of the rectangle adding windows using the Window spacing data until no more fit into the
rectangle. This results in an approximately correct looking facade but only prioritises Window to wall % in the
rectangle, not accounting for the areas outside the bounding rectangle. For relatively large values of Window
spacing on non-rectangular surfaces, no glazing may be generated. For example you may find that gable
window surfaces have no default windows generated and it is often easiest to draw a window in this case.
REVEAL
Reveal surfaces are associated with the setback of the glazing from the outside and/or inside surface of the
parent wall. If the depth and solar absorptance of these surfaces are specified, the program will calculate the
- 231 -
reflection of beam solar radiation from these surfaces. The program also calculates the shadowing (onto the
window) of beam and diffuse solar radiation by outside reveal surfaces.
The following fields specify the properties of the window reveal surfaces (reveals occur when the window is
not in the same plane as the base surface). From this information and from the geometry of the window and
the sun position, the program calculates beam solar radiation absorbed and reflected by the top, bottom, right
and left sides of outside and inside window reveal surfaces. In doing this calculation, the shadowing on a
reveal surface by other reveal surfaces is determined using the orientation of the reveal surfaces and the sun
position.
It is assumed that:
The window is an exterior window (EnergyPlus does not consider reveals for interior windows).
The reveal surfaces are perpendicular to the window plane.
If an exterior shade, screen or blind is in place it shades exterior and interior reveal surfaces so that in
this case there is no beam solar on these surfaces.
If an interior shade or blind is in place it shades the interior reveal surfaces so that in this case there is
no beam solar on these surfaces.
The possible shadowing on inside reveal surfaces by a window divider is ignored.
The outside reveal surfaces (top, bottom, left, right) have the same solar absorptance and depth. This
depth is not input here but is automatically determined by the programfrom window and wall vertices-as the distance between the plane of the outside face of the glazing and plane of the outside face of
the parent wall.
The inside reveal surfaces are divided into two categories: (1) the bottom reveal surface, called here
the "inside sill;" and (2) the other reveal surfaces (left, right and top).
The left, right and top inside reveal surfaces have the same depth and solar absorptance. The inside
sill is allowed to have depth and solar absorptance values that are different from the corresponding
values for the other inside reveal surfaces.
The inside sill depth is required to be greater than or equal to the depth of the other inside reveal
surfaces. If the inside sill depth is greater than zero the depth of the other inside reveal surfaces is
required to be greater than zero.
The reflection of beam solar radiation from all reveal surfaces is assumed to be isotropic diffuse; there
is no specular component.
Half of the beam solar reflected from outside reveal surfaces is goes towards the window; the other half
goes back to the exterior environment (i.e., reflection of this outward-going component from other
outside reveal surfaces is not considered).
The half that goes towards the window is added to the other solar radiation incident on the window.
Correspondingly, half of the beam solar reflected from inside reveal surfaces goes towards the window,
with the other half going into the zone. The portion going towards the window that is not reflected is
absorbed in the glazing or is transmitted back out into the exterior environment.
The beam solar that is absorbed by outside reveal surfaces is added to the solar absorbed by the
outside surface of the window's parent wall; similarly, the beam solar absorbed by the inside reveal
surfaces is added to the solar absorbed by the inside surface of the parent wall.
The net effect of beam solar reflected from outside reveal surfaces is to increase the heat gain to the
zone, whereas the effect of beam solar reflected from inside reveal surfaces is to decrease the heat
gain to the zone since part of this reflected solar is transmitted back out the window.
If the window has a frame, the absorption of reflected beam solar by the inside and outside surfaces of
the frame is considered. The shadowing of the frame onto interior reveal surfaces is also considered.
The schematics below show how DesignBuilder reveal data is used to describe real glazing systems.
- 232 -
FAQ: Why does DesignBuilder require both Inside and Outside reveal depth data when wall thickness
is available to calculate one reveal depth from the other?
Although it is possible for inside reveal depth to be calculated from the outside reveal depth and the wall
thickness, DesignBuilder allows both Inside and Outside reveal depths to be defined giving greater flexibility
for situations where it is not possible to enter the wall thickness as accurately as one might like. For example
the wall thickness may be entered as zero for simplified modelling. In such cases having direct control over
the reveal depth data is an advantage.
Outside reveal depth

The outside reveal depth gives the extent to which the glazing is offset into the wall. As shown in the above
diagram it is the distance from the exterior surface of the wall to the glazing outer surface (in m or ft).
Note: The outside reveal depth is used in EnergyPlus, Visualisations and Daylighting calculations.
Note: EnergyPlus models outside reveals through the co-ordinates of the window, which are offset into the
zone so the window and the base surface don't lie on the same plane. DesignBuilder provides window coordinates to EnergyPlus in this way and there is no specific data item in the IDF data to define it.
Inside reveal depth

The inside reveal depth is the distance (in m or ft) from the innermost surface of the window to the interior
wall surface as shown in the diagram above.
- 233 -
Inside sill depth

The inside sill depth is the distance (in m or ft) from the innermost surface of the window to the innermost
end of the sill as shown in the diagram above.
EnergyPlus window dimensions - technical information
The FenestrationSurface:Detailed window data written to the EnergyPlus IDF input file will usually have a
slightly smaller area to the area defined in DesignBuilder. This is to account for the frame which is included in
the window area defined in DesignBuilder but excluded from the IDF window area. In cases where the frame
option is switched off in DesignBuilder the frame area in the IDF data will exactly match the area set in
DesignBuilder.
Frame And Dividers

Openings tab in model data under External Glazing, Internal Glazing and Roof Glazing headers
Frames are applied to all rectangular windows (default and custom) but not to other shaped windows and not
when using the Fill surface (100%) facade type.
A frame surrounds the glazing in a window (schematics below). It is assumed that all frame characteristics,
such as width, conductance and solar absorptance, are the same for the top, bottom and side elements of the
frame. If the frame elements are not the same then you should enter area-weighted average values for the
frame characteristics.
If the glazing does not have a frame or dividers, uncheck the Has a frame? box. If Has a frame? is checked
and then you can enter:
The construction of the frame and dividers,

The number of horizontal dividers and vertical dividers,
Frame width and divider with (see diagrams below for definition).

For external windows on walls the following dimensions in the direction of the glazing normal can also be
entered:
- 234 -

Inside reveal depth
Inside sill depth
Outside divider projection
Inside divider projection
Outside frame projection
Inside frame projection
Divider glass edge-centre conduction ratio
Frame glass edge-centre conduction ratio
Divider type
The definition of the above dimensions is shown in the diagrams.
FRAME DATA
Frame construction
Select the construction used to define the thermal properties of both the frame and dividers. In particular the
frame construction is used to derive these EnergyPlus frame-related fields:
Frame conductance
The effective thermal conductance of the frame (in W/m2-K or Btu/h-ft2-F) measured from inside to
outside frame surface excluding surface air films and taking frame and window geometry as associated
2-D conduction effects into account. Ideally the frame conductance should be obtained from THERM or
some other 2-D calculation. DesignBuilder calculates the surface to surface conductance simply based
on the material layers in the Frame construction. If you need to include particular 2-D conduction
effects for the frame conductance then you should adjust the thickness or material properties of the
layers of the frame construction.
Note: For metal frame windows DesignBuilder will calculate a very high surface to surface U-value for
the frame construction, but the value that will be provided to EnergyPlus is limited to an maximum value
of 500 W/m2k. This is in line with the limits used in the LBNL WINDOW program. This will have
negligible difference on simulation as the corresponding thermal resistance is effectively zero in both
cases (relative to the inside and outside film resistances).
Frame solar absorptance

The solar absorptance of the frame is derived from the surface properties of the outermost material
layer. The value is assumed by EnergyPlus to be the same on the inside and outside of the frame and
to be independent of angle of incidence of solar radiation. If solar reflectance (or reflectivity) data is
available, then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque materials).
Frame visible absorptance

The visible absorptance of the frame is derived from the surface properties of the outermost material
layer. The value is assumed to be the same on the inside and outside of the frame and to be
independent of angle of incidence of solar radiation. If visible reflectance (or reflectivity) data is
Frame thermal hemispherical emissivity

The thermal emissivity of the frame is derived from the surface properties of the outermost material
layer and is assumed the same on the inside and outside.
Frame width
The width of the frame elements when projected onto the plane of the window (in m or ft). It is assumed that
the top, bottom and side elements of the frame have the same width. If not, an average frame width should be
entered such that the projected frame area calculated using the average value equals the sum of the areas of
the frame elements.
- 235 -
Frame outside projection

The amount by which the frame projects outward from the outside surface of the window glazing (in m or ft). If
the outer surface of the frame is flush with the glazing then enter 0. This value is used to calculate shadowing
of frame onto glass, solar absorbed by frame, IR emitted and absorbed by frame, and convection from frame.
Frame inside projection

The amount by which the frame projects inward from the inside surface of the window glazing (in m or ft). If
the inner surface of the frame is flush with the glazing then enter 0. This value is used to calculate solar
absorbed by frame, IR emitted and absorbed by frame, and convection from frame.
Frame conductance
The effective thermal conductance of the frame measured from inside to outside frame surface (no air films)
and taking 2-D conduction effects into account. Obtained from WINDOW or other 2-D calculation.
Frame glass edge centre conduction ratio

The glass conductance near the frame (excluding air films) divided by the glass conductance at the centre of
the glazing (excluding air films). Used only for multi-pane glazing constructions. This ratio is greater than 1.0
because of thermal bridging from the glazing across the frame and across the spacer that separates the glass
panes. Values can be obtained from WINDOW for the user-selected glazing construction and frame
characteristics.
DIVIDERS
Dividers split the glazing up into separate lites. It is assumed that all divider elements have the same
characteristics. If not, area-weighted average values should be used.
The schematic below show how DesignBuilder divider data is used to describe real glazing systems.
Divider type
The type of divider can be selected from these options:
1-Divided lite means that the divider elements project out from the outside and inside surfaces of the
glazing and divide the glazing into individual lites. For multi-pane glazing, this type of divider also has
between-glass elements that separate the panes.
2-Suspended is applicable only to multi-pane glazing. It means that the divider is suspended between
the panes. (If there are more than two glass layers, the divider is assumed to be placed between the
two outermost layers.)
- 236 -
Divider width
The width of the divider elements when projected onto the plane of the window (in m or ft). It is assumed that
the horizontal and vertical divider elements have the same width. If not, an average divider width should be
entered such that the projected divider area calculated using the average value equals the sum of the areas of
the divider elements.
Horizontal dividers
The number of divider elements parallel to the top and bottom of the window.
Vertical dividers
The number of divider elements parallel to the sides of the window.
Divider outside projection

The amount by which the divider projects out from the outside surface of the window glazing (in m or ft). For
Divider Type = Suspended, Divider Projection = 0.0. Used to calculate shadowing of divider onto glass, solar
absorbed by divider, IR emitted and absorbed by divider, and convection from divider.
Divider inside projection

The amount by which the divider projects inward from the inside surface of the window glazing (in m or ft). If
the inner surface of the divider is flush with the glazing, enter 0.0. Used to calculate solar absorbed by divider,
IR emitted and absorbed by divider, and convection from divider.
Ratio of Divider-Edge Glass Conductance to Centre-Of-Glass

Conductance
The glass conductance near the divider (excluding air films) divided by the glass conductance at the centre of
because of thermal bridging from the glazing across the divider and across the spacer that separates the
glass panes. Values can be obtained from WINDOW 6 for the user-selected glazing construction and divider
characteristics.
Divider properties defined by the Frame construction

The Frame construction is used to define the thermal properties of both the frame and dividers. In particular
the frame construction is used to derive these EnergyPlus divider-related fields:
Divider conductance
The effective thermal conductance of the divider (in W/m2-K or Btu/h-ft2-F) measured from inside to
outside divider surface excluding surface air films and taking 2-D conduction effects into account.
Obtained from WINDOW 6 or other 2-D calculation. DesignBuilder calculates the surface to surface
conductance simply based on the material layers. If you need to include particular 2-D conduction
effects for the frame/divider conductance then you should adjust the thickness or material properties of
the layers of the frame construction.
Divider solar absorptance

The solar absorptance of the divider is derived from the surface properties of the outermost material
layer. The value is assumed to be the same on the inside and outside of the divider and to be
independent of angle of incidence of solar radiation. If solar reflectance (or reflectivity) data is available,
then absorptance is equal to 1.0 minus reflectance (for opaque materials).
- 237 -
Divider visible absorptance

The visible absorptance of the divider is derived from the surface properties of the outermost material
Divider thermal hemispherical emissivity

The thermal emissivity of the divider, assumed to be the same on the inside and outside.
Note 1: If you do not wish to model the shading/reflection effect of the reveal/frame/divider then simply set the
projection/depth to zero.
Note 2: In the case where a window blind is applied mid-pane, any dividers that may have been specified for
the window will not be applied in the model. EnergyPlus will generate a warning to this effect.
Shading
You can select two types of shading for external windows:
Window shading (blinds, curtains etc walls and roofs).

Local shading (overhangs, louvres, sidefins on external walls only)
These types of shading can be used individually or combined.

Other shading mechanisms supported by DesignBuilder are:
Component blocks
Assemblies
Window and Local shading are both covered in the Solar Shading Tutorial
Window Shading
Window shading can be included to reduce solar gains and increase resistance to heat conduction through
windows. To include blinds, transparent insulation or electrochromic glazing check the Window shading
checkbox. Then select the window blind component, the position of the shading device relative to the window
and the way that the window shading is controlled.
Note: Window shading is not included in Heating design calculations
Type
Select the Window blind component type. There are 4 categories of window blinds:
Slat
Shade
Transparent insulation
Electrochromic switching (if you select a blind of this category the position must be 'Switchable'.
Position
The window shading devices can be positioned in one of four ways:
- 238 -
Window Shading
1-Inside - the window shading devices is positioned inside the zone.

2-Mid-pane - the window shading device is positioned between the inner pane and the second pane.
3-Outside - the shading devices positioned outside.
4-Switchable - select this option for electrochromic glazing in which case the outer pane is switched
based on the shading control (below).
Note: When selecting the 2-Mid-pane position option you must ensure that there is sufficient gap between the
innermost and second pane in the Glazing window gas layer to accommodate the blind Slat width.
Control type
Control data specifies how the shading device is controlled. It determines whether the shading device is on
or off. For blinds and shades, when the device is on it is assumed to cover all of the window except its
frame; when the device is off it is assumed to cover none of the window (whether on or off the shading
device is assumed to cover none of the wall that the window is on). For switchable glazing, on means that
the glazing is in the fully-switched state and off means that it is in the unswitched state; for example, for
electrochromic glazing, on means the glazing is in its darkest state and "off means it is in its lightest state.
The choices for Shading control type are the following. Equivalent EnergyPlus control types are shown in
italics. If a setpoint is applicable its units are shown in parentheses.
1-Always on (AlwaysOn) - Shading devices are always activated.
The following six control types are used primarily to reduce zone cooling load due to window solar
gain.
2-Daylight (MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint) - Used only with Position = 4-Switchable in zones with

daylighting controls. In this case the transmittance of the glazing is adjusted to meet the daylight
illuminance set point for the main photoelectric sensor used to control electric lighting according to
daylight availability. This type of control assures that there is just enough daylight transmitted through
windows with electrochromic shading to meet the daylighting requirements in a zone, and no more,
thus reducing the cooling load. Note that the daylight illuminance set point is specified under
Environmental Control on the Activity tab and that there is no option to apply separate setpoints for
electrochromic shading and electric lighting control.
3-Schedule - Shading operation is defined by a time only through a schedule. When the schedule has
value 1 then shading operates, otherwise it does not.
4-Solar (OnIfHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is active if beam plus diffuse solar radiation incident on
the window exceeds the Solar setpoint.
5-Glare (OnIfHighGlare) - Shading is on if the total daylight glare index at the zones first daylighting
sensor from all of the exterior windows in the zone exceeds the maximum glare index specified in the
daylighting input for zone.
Note: Glare control requires Lighting control to be switched on in the zone.
6-Outside air temp (OnIfHighOutsideAirTemp) - Shading is on if outside air temperature exceeds

Outside air temperature setpoint.
- 239 -
7-Inside air temp (OnIfHighZoneAirTemp) - Shading is on if zone air temperature in the previous time
step exceeds the Inside air temperature setpoint.
8-Cooling (OnIfHighZoneCooling) - Shading is on if zone cooling rate in the previous time step is nonzero.
The following two control types can be used to reduce zone cooling load. They are applicable to any
Shading type but are most appropriate for interior or exterior blinds, interior or exterior shades with
low insulating value, or switchable glazing.
9-Day cooling and solar + night (OnNight/OnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is on

at night. Shading is on during the day when the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds the
Solar setpoint and the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
10-Day cooling and solar (OffNight/OnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is off at night.

Shading is on during the day when the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds the Solar
setpoint and if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
The following three control types can be used to reduce zone heating load during the winter by
reducing window conductive heat loss at night and leaving the window unshaded during the day to
maximize solar gain. They are applicable to any Shading type but are most appropriate for interior or
exterior shades with high insulating value ("movable insulation"). Night means the sun is down and
day means the sun is up.
11-Night outside low air temp (OnNightIfLowOutsideTemp/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the

outside air temperature is less than Outside air temperature setpoint and schedule, if specified, allows
shading. Shading is off during the day.
12-Night inside low air temp (OnNightIfLowInsideTemp/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the zone air
temperature in the previous time step is less than the Inside air temperature setpoint and schedule, if
specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day.
13-Night heating (OnNightIfHeating/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the
previous time step is greater than zero and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during
the day.
The following two control types can be used to reduce zone heating and cooling load. They are
applicable to any Shading type but are most appropriate for translucent interior or exterior shades
with high insulating value ("translucent movable insulation").
14-Night outside low air temp + day cooling (OnNightIfLowOutsideTemp/OnDayIfCooling) - Shading

is on at night if the outside air temperature is less than the Outside air temperature setpoint. Shading is
on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
15-Night heating + day cooling (OnNightIfHeating/OnDayIfCooling) - Shading is on at night if the
zone heating rate in the previous time step is non-zero. Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling
rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
16-Horizontal solar (OnIfHighHorizontalSolar) - Shading is on if total (beam plus diffuse) horizontal

solar irradiance exceeds the Solar setpoint and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
17-Outdoor air temp + Solar on window (OnIfHighOutdoorAirTempAndHighSolarOnWindow) Shading is on if the outside air temperature exceeds the Outside air temperature setpoint and if if the
solar radiation incident on the window exceeds the Solar setpoint.
18-Outdoor air temp + Horizontal solar (OnIfHighOutdoorAirTempAndHighHorizontalSolar) Shading is on if the outside air temperature exceeds the Outside air temperature setpoint and if if the
horizontal solar radiation on the window exceeds the Solar setpoint.
Solar setpoint
The solar setpoint can be defined when one of these shading control types has been selected:
4-Solar
9-Day cooling and solar + night
- 240 -
Local Shading
10-Day cooling and solar

16-Horizontal solar
17-Outdoor air temp + Solar on window
18-Outdoor air temp + Horizontal solar
When the solar radiation (in W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2) is higher than the setpoint entered here and any other
required condition are met (control types 9, 10, 17 and 18) and the schedule allows shading operation then
the window shading is activated.
Inside air temperature setpoint

The Inside air temperature setpoint can be defined when one of these shading control types has been
selected:
7-Inside air temp

12-Night inside low air temp
For cooling control types, when the inside air temperature (in C or F) is higher than the setpoint entered here
and the schedule allows shading operation, the window shading is activated. For heating control types the
logic is reversed and shading is activated when the temperature is below this setpoint.
Outside air temperature setpoint

The Outside air temperature setpoint can be defined when one of these shading control types has been
selected:
6-Outside air temp

11-Night outside low air temp
14-Night outside low air temp + day cooling
When the outside air temperature (in C or F) is higher than the setpoint entered here and the schedule
allows shading operation, the window shading is activated.
Operation schedule
For all shading control options apart from Glare and Always on, the shading can only be active when this
schedule value is 1. Select the schedule On if the blind is always activated or if the only control is one of the
others listed above.
LIMITATIONS
If two daylit zones share an interior window, neither zone can have an exterior window whose shading
device does glare control (i.e. Control type is 5-Glare).
If two daylit zones share an interior window, neither zone can have an exterior window with daylight
control (i.e. Control type is 2-Daylight).
Local Shading
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing headers
To include overhangs, sidefins and/or louvres check the Local shading checkbox. This shows the Local
shading component data. DesignBuilder comes with a small database of Local shading devices, but if you
cannot find a suitable component for your model, you can create a custom local shading component. by
clicking on the Add new button from the Selection dialog or from the info panel when using Learning mode.
Note: the DesignBuilder Local shading devices allow a range of different overhangs, side fins and louvres to
be defined, but if you need to model a shading device not covered by the standard mechanism, you can draw
custom shading devices using Component blocks or Assembly blocks.
- 241 -
Airflow Windows
Openings tab in model data under External Glazing header
Airflow windows can be modelled by checking the Airflow windows option on the Openings tab. This option
can be used to specify the control mechanism for windows in which forced air flows in the gap between
adjacent layers of glass. Such windows are called airflow windows. They are also known as heat-extract
windows or climate windows.
A common application is to reduce the zone load by exhausting indoor air through the window. In the cooling
season this picks up and expels some of the solar heat absorbed by the window glass (and by the betweenglass shade or blind, if present). In the heating season this warms the window, reducing the heat loss from the
window. A side benefit is increased thermal comfort. This is because the inside surface of the window will
generally be cooler in summer and warmer in winter.
Limitations
Windows must have two or three glass layers, i.e., double or triple-glazing. For triple-glazing the airflow
is assumed to be between the two inner glass layers.
An error will result if the gas in the airflow gap is other than air.
If an airflow window has a between-glass shade or blind, the gas in the gap on either side of the shade
or blind must be air.
The surface output variable Surface Window Gap Convective Heat Transfer Rate gives the heat picked up
(or lost) by the gap airflow.
Gap airflow configurations for airflow windows:

(a) Air exhaust window: Airflow Source = 1-Indoor Air, Airflow Destination = 2-Outdoor air;
(b) Indoor air curtain window: Airflow Source = 1-Indoor air, Airflow Destination = 1-Indoor air;
(c) Air supply window: Airflow Source = 2-Outdoor air, Airflow Destination = 1-Indoor air;
(d) Outdoor air curtain window: Airflow Source = 2-Outdoor air, Airflow Destination = 2-Outdoor air;
(e) Airflow to Return Air: Airflow Source = 1-Indoor air, Airflow Destination = 3-Return air.
Based on Active facades Version no. 1, Belgian Building Research Institute, June 2002.
Airflow control
Check this option to include airflow control for external windows.
Airflow source
The source of the gap airflow. The choices are:
1-Indoor air - Indoor air from the windows zone is passed through the window.
2-Outdoor air - Outdoor air is passed through the window.
Airflow Destination
This is where the gap air goes after passing through the window. The choices are:
- 242 -
Local Shading
1-Indoor air - the gap air goes to the indoor air of the windows zone.
2-Outdoor air - the gap air goes to the outside air.
3-Return-air- the gap air goes to the return air for the windows zone. This choice is allowed only if
Airflow Source = 1-Indoor air. If the return air flow is zero, the gap air goes to the indoor air of the
windows zone. If the sum of the gap airflow for all of the windows in a zone with Airflow destination =
3-Return air exceeds the return airflow, then the difference between this sum and the return airflow
goes to the indoor air.
The diagram above shows the allowed combinations of Airflow source and Airflow destination. The allowed
combinations of Airflow source and Airflow destination are:
IndoorAir to OutdoorAir
IndoorAir to IndoorAir
IndoorAir to ReturnAir
OutdoorAir to IndoorAir
OutdoorAir to OutdoorAir
Maximum flow rate

The maximum value of the airflow (in m3/s per m of glazing width or ft3/min-ft). The value is typically 0.006 to
0.009 m3/s-m (4 to 6 ft3/min-ft). The airflow can be modulated through the Airflow multiplier schedule (below).
The fan energy used to move the air through the gap is generally very small and so is ignored.
Airflow multiplier schedule

The name of a schedule with values between 0.0 and 1.0. The timestep value of the airflow is Maximum flow
rate times the schedule value.
Window Operation
OPERATION
The operation of windows can be defined by entering data under the Operation header. This data is only
shown:
a.
b.
When Natural ventilation is activated on the HVAC tab at the current level and Calculated natural
ventilation is selected, or,
For Internal glazing or both Calculated and Scheduled natural ventilation.
Control option (internal windows only)

The control option allows you to define how internal windows behave in natural ventilation systems and
whether they operate purely based on a schedule or, when using Calculated natural ventilation, whether they
are linked to the main natural ventilation controllers defined on the HVAC tab. This data is not available for
external windows. The options are:
For Calculated natural ventilation:
1-Control by schedule - the internal windows are controlled entirely by schedule and are not affected
by any of the natural ventilation controls on the HVAC tab.
2-Control with external windows/vents - the internal windows are controlled using exactly the same
natural ventilation controls as external windows and vents through controls on the HVAC tab as well as
the operation schedule described below.
For Scheduled natural ventilation:
- 243 -
2-Closed - the internal windows are always closed and do not allow any airflow to be exchanged.
Operation schedule
The schedule that specifies when window venting is available. A zero or negative schedule value means
window venting is not allowed. A value greater than zero means venting can occur if other venting control
conditions (specified by natural ventilation Control Mode) are satisfied.
This schedule allows you to turn off venting at certain times of the day (at night, for example), of the week (on
weekends, for example), or of the year (during the winter, for example).
If used with natural ventilation Control Mode = 4-Constant, the ventilation rate is constant only when this
schedule allows venting; otherwise the ventilation rate is set to zero. If Ventilation Control Mode = 1-NoVent,
this schedule has no effect.
The windows are 'open' when:
Tzone_air > Tsetpoint AND Tzone_air > Toutside_air AND the schedule value = 1
The ventilation rate is calculated based on the pressure difference across the opening calculated from wind
and stack pressure effects using equations described in Natural Ventilation Modelling.
FREE APERTURE
The size and position of windows can be defined by entering data under the Free Aperture header. This is
data is used in both:
a.
b.
EnergyPlus Calculated natural ventilation Airflow network simulations and

CFD simulations
Note: While free aperture data is shown when the Scheduled natural ventilation model option is selected, this
data is not used in EnergyPlus simulations - in this case the data is only shown to allow it to be used for CFD
boundary conditions.
Opening position
The position of the opening in the window can be selected from
1-Top - the aperture is in the top of the window. Air flow in and out will flow through the top of the
window.
2-Bottom - the aperture is in the bottom of the window. Air flow in and out will flow through the bottom
of the window.
3-Left - the aperture is in the left of the window (looking from outside). Air flow in and out will flow
through the left of the window.
4-Right - the aperture is in the right of the window (looking from outside). Air flow in and out will flow
through the right of the window.
Windows must be rectangular to have an airflow opening in them and the position of the opening on the
window can be defined by selecting from the above list. Options 3-Left and 4-Right will give identical results
as the EnergyPlus Airflow Network only accounts for the z-position of openings.
% Glazing area opens

The % Glazing area opens data allows you to define the openable window area as a percentage of the total
window area. For example enter 20 if 20% of the window area can open.
Note: if modulation is switched on (it isn't by default) the glazing opening areas defined here are multiplied by
a factor to account for external conditions in EnergyPlus Airflow Network simulations when using Calculated
- 244 -
Local Shading
Tip: In some cases it is best to switch off the Lump similar windows on surface model option when using
Calculated natural ventilation. Particular cases where this is important are a) when there are windows of the
same size and type but different % Glazing area opens values on the same surface and b) where the air flow
rate through individual windows is required, e.g. when preparing boundary conditions for a linked EnergyPlus
CFD study.
SCHEDULED NATURAL VENTILATION

Airflow through individual external windows, vents, doors and holes are not modelled explicitly with Scheduled
natural ventilation because the natural ventilation airflow from outside is defined using the total natural
ventilation flow rate and operation on the HVAC tab. No operation data or free aperture needs to be entered
on the Openings tab for external windows in this case.
Note: Natural Ventilation can be overridden to be off on the HVAC tab for both Calculated and Scheduled
model options.
Internal glazing
The data under the Internal Glazing header applies to all glazing lying on internal partition walls. You can
enter information on:
Dimensions
Frame
Operation
The data is as described previously for External glazing except that shading is not permitted for internal
glazing.
Dimensions
Facade types

Window to Wall %
hierarchy.
- 245 -
Window spacing
Sill height
- 246 -
Local Shading
REVEAL
position.
It is assumed that:
the parent wall.
- 247 -

- 248 -
Local Shading
Inside reveal depth

Inside sill depth

DesignBuilder.
Frame And Dividers


- 249 -

entered:

Inside reveal depth
Inside sill depth
Divider type
FRAME DATA
Frame construction
Frame conductance
- 250 -
Local Shading



Frame width
the frame elements.


Frame conductance

characteristics.
DIVIDERS
- 251 -
Divider type
Divider width
Horizontal dividers
Vertical dividers

- 252 -
Local Shading


Conductance
characteristics.

Divider conductance



Window Operation
OPERATION
shown:
a.
- 253 -
b.

Operation schedule
FREE APERTURE
a.
b.

CFD simulations
Opening position
window.
of the window.
- 254 -
Local Shading

CFD study.

model options.
Roof glazing
The data under the Roof Glazing header applies to all glazing lying on external roof surfaces. You can enter
information on:
Dimensions
Frame
Shading
Operation
Note: flat roofs do not have default glazing set up using Roof glazing layout model data. To create openings
on a flat roof you should go to the surface level and add them there.
Dimensions
Facade types
- 255 -

Window to Wall %
hierarchy.
- 256 -
Local Shading
Window spacing
Sill height
REVEAL
- 257 -
position.
It is assumed that:
the parent wall.
- 258 -
Local Shading

Inside reveal depth

- 259 -
Inside sill depth

DesignBuilder.
Roof Shading
Openings tab in model data under Roof Glazing headers
You can select one type of shading for external roof windows:
Window shading (blinds, curtains etc walls and roofs).
Frame And Dividers


- 260 -
Frame And Dividers

entered:

Inside reveal depth
Inside sill depth
Divider type
FRAME DATA
Frame construction
Frame conductance
- 261 -



Frame width
the frame elements.


Frame conductance

characteristics.
DIVIDERS
- 262 -
Frame And Dividers
Divider type
Divider width
Horizontal dividers
Vertical dividers

- 263 -


Conductance
characteristics.

Divider conductance



Window Shading
Window shading can be included to reduce solar gains and increase resistance to heat conduction through
windows. To include blinds, transparent insulation or electrochromic glazing check the Window shading
checkbox. Then select the window blind component, the position of the shading device relative to the window
and the way that the window shading is controlled.
Note: Window shading is not included in Heating design calculations
- 264 -
Window Shading
Type
Select the Window blind component type. There are 4 categories of window blinds:
Slat
Shade
Transparent insulation
Electrochromic switching (if you select a blind of this category the position must be 'Switchable'.
Position
The window shading devices can be positioned in one of four ways:
1-Inside - the window shading devices is positioned inside the zone.

2-Mid-pane - the window shading device is positioned between the inner pane and the second pane.
3-Outside - the shading devices positioned outside.
4-Switchable - select this option for electrochromic glazing in which case the outer pane is switched
based on the shading control (below).
Note: When selecting the 2-Mid-pane position option you must ensure that there is sufficient gap between the
innermost and second pane in the Glazing window gas layer to accommodate the blind Slat width.
Control type
Control data specifies how the shading device is controlled. It determines whether the shading device is on
or off. For blinds and shades, when the device is on it is assumed to cover all of the window except its
frame; when the device is off it is assumed to cover none of the window (whether on or off the shading
device is assumed to cover none of the wall that the window is on). For switchable glazing, on means that
the glazing is in the fully-switched state and off means that it is in the unswitched state; for example, for
electrochromic glazing, on means the glazing is in its darkest state and "off means it is in its lightest state.
The choices for Shading control type are the following. Equivalent EnergyPlus control types are shown in
italics. If a setpoint is applicable its units are shown in parentheses.
1-Always on (AlwaysOn) - Shading devices are always activated.
The following six control types are used primarily to reduce zone cooling load due to window solar
gain.
2-Daylight (MeetDaylightIlluminanceSetpoint) - Used only with Position = 4-Switchable in zones with

daylighting controls. In this case the transmittance of the glazing is adjusted to meet the daylight
illuminance set point for the main photoelectric sensor used to control electric lighting according to
daylight availability. This type of control assures that there is just enough daylight transmitted through
windows with electrochromic shading to meet the daylighting requirements in a zone, and no more,
thus reducing the cooling load. Note that the daylight illuminance set point is specified under
Environmental Control on the Activity tab and that there is no option to apply separate setpoints for
electrochromic shading and electric lighting control.
3-Schedule - Shading operation is defined by a time only through a schedule. When the schedule has
value 1 then shading operates, otherwise it does not.
- 265 -
4-Solar (OnIfHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is active if beam plus diffuse solar radiation incident on
the window exceeds the Solar setpoint.
5-Glare (OnIfHighGlare) - Shading is on if the total daylight glare index at the zones first daylighting
sensor from all of the exterior windows in the zone exceeds the maximum glare index specified in the
daylighting input for zone.
Note: Glare control requires Lighting control to be switched on in the zone.
6-Outside air temp (OnIfHighOutsideAirTemp) - Shading is on if outside air temperature exceeds

Outside air temperature setpoint.
7-Inside air temp (OnIfHighZoneAirTemp) - Shading is on if zone air temperature in the previous time
step exceeds the Inside air temperature setpoint.
8-Cooling (OnIfHighZoneCooling) - Shading is on if zone cooling rate in the previous time step is nonzero.
The following two control types can be used to reduce zone cooling load. They are applicable to any
Shading type but are most appropriate for interior or exterior blinds, interior or exterior shades with
low insulating value, or switchable glazing.
9-Day cooling and solar + night (OnNight/OnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is on

at night. Shading is on during the day when the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds the
Solar setpoint and the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
10-Day cooling and solar (OffNight/OnDayIfCoolingAndHighSolarOnWindow) - Shading is off at night.

Shading is on during the day when the solar radiation incident on the window exceeds the Solar
setpoint and if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
The following three control types can be used to reduce zone heating load during the winter by
reducing window conductive heat loss at night and leaving the window unshaded during the day to
maximize solar gain. They are applicable to any Shading type but are most appropriate for interior or
exterior shades with high insulating value ("movable insulation"). Night means the sun is down and
day means the sun is up.
11-Night outside low air temp (OnNightIfLowOutsideTemp/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the

outside air temperature is less than Outside air temperature setpoint and schedule, if specified, allows
shading. Shading is off during the day.
12-Night inside low air temp (OnNightIfLowInsideTemp/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the zone air
temperature in the previous time step is less than the Inside air temperature setpoint and schedule, if
specified, allows shading. Shading is off during the day.
13-Night heating (OnNightIfHeating/OffDay) - Shading is on at night if the zone heating rate in the
previous time step is greater than zero and schedule, if specified, allows shading. Shading is off during
the day.
The following two control types can be used to reduce zone heating and cooling load. They are
applicable to any Shading type but are most appropriate for translucent interior or exterior shades
with high insulating value ("translucent movable insulation").
14-Night outside low air temp + day cooling (OnNightIfLowOutsideTemp/OnDayIfCooling) - Shading

is on at night if the outside air temperature is less than the Outside air temperature setpoint. Shading is
on during the day if the zone cooling rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
15-Night heating + day cooling (OnNightIfHeating/OnDayIfCooling) - Shading is on at night if the
zone heating rate in the previous time step is non-zero. Shading is on during the day if the zone cooling
rate in the previous time step is non-zero.
16-Horizontal solar (OnIfHighHorizontalSolar) - Shading is on if total (beam plus diffuse) horizontal
solar irradiance exceeds the Solar setpoint and schedule, if specified, allows shading.
- 266 -
Window Shading
17-Outdoor air temp + Solar on window (OnIfHighOutdoorAirTempAndHighSolarOnWindow) Shading is on if the outside air temperature exceeds the Outside air temperature setpoint and if if the
solar radiation incident on the window exceeds the Solar setpoint.
18-Outdoor air temp + Horizontal solar (OnIfHighOutdoorAirTempAndHighHorizontalSolar) Shading is on if the outside air temperature exceeds the Outside air temperature setpoint and if if the
horizontal solar radiation on the window exceeds the Solar setpoint.
Solar setpoint
The solar setpoint can be defined when one of these shading control types has been selected:
4-Solar
9-Day cooling and solar + night
10-Day cooling and solar
16-Horizontal solar
When the solar radiation (in W/m2 or BTU/h-ft2) is higher than the setpoint entered here and any other
required condition are met (control types 9, 10, 17 and 18) and the schedule allows shading operation then
the window shading is activated.
Inside air temperature setpoint

The Inside air temperature setpoint can be defined when one of these shading control types has been
selected:
7-Inside air temp

12-Night inside low air temp
For cooling control types, when the inside air temperature (in C or F) is higher than the setpoint entered here
and the schedule allows shading operation, the window shading is activated. For heating control types the
logic is reversed and shading is activated when the temperature is below this setpoint.
Outside air temperature setpoint

The Outside air temperature setpoint can be defined when one of these shading control types has been
selected:
6-Outside air temp

11-Night outside low air temp
14-Night outside low air temp + day cooling
When the outside air temperature (in C or F) is higher than the setpoint entered here and the schedule
allows shading operation, the window shading is activated.
Operation schedule
For all shading control options apart from Glare and Always on, the shading can only be active when this
schedule value is 1. Select the schedule On if the blind is always activated or if the only control is one of the
others listed above.
LIMITATIONS
If two daylit zones share an interior window, neither zone can have an exterior window whose shading
device does glare control (i.e. Control type is 5-Glare).
If two daylit zones share an interior window, neither zone can have an exterior window with daylight
control (i.e. Control type is 2-Daylight).
- 267 -
Window Operation
OPERATION
shown:
a.
b.

Operation schedule
FREE APERTURE
a.
b.

CFD simulations
- 268 -
Window Shading
Opening position
window.
of the window.

CFD study.

model options.
Doors
DesignBuilder doors are opaque and are added to the model by navigating to the appropriate surface and
checking the Door fitted option. This adds a single door replacing one of the windows. Alternatively, for more
control over the placement position of the doors, you can go to surface level and draw the doors using the
Draw Door command. On surfaces where custom openings have been defined, any changes to door layout
model data on the Opening tab is ignored.
Door Placement
Door Operation
Note: if you have drawn custom doors at the surface level then these will be used even if the Doors fitted
checkbox is not checked. The Doors fitted checkbox only controls the automatic generation of doors, not
their use in the calculations.
- 269 -
Note: Doors positioned on external walls only have an effect on airflow in Simulation calculations when the
Natural ventilation building model option is set to Calculated. They have no effect on airflow in Heating and
Cooling Design calculations. Doors positioned on internal partition walls are used to mix the air between the
two adjacent zones when the Scheduled Natural ventilation building model option is set. They also provide an
air flow path when the Calculated option is set.
Glazed doors
Exterior doors that have glazing should be modelled using windows. If only a portion of the door is glazed then
the door could be modelled as part door and part window.
Door Placement
Openings tab in model data under Doors
On surfaces where no custom openings have been defined, you can create doors simply by checking the
'Doors fitted?' options under the External and Internal Doors headers. In this case a single door is positioned
on each surface in place of one of the windows in the automatically generated facade layout.
Door Operation
Openings tab in model data under Doors
The operation of doors can be defined by entering data under Operation headers:
% Area door opens - defines the area of the door which opens relative to the total area to give an
approximation of the actual opening size and,
% Time door is open - defines the average time the door is in the open position. Accounts for the fact
that during occupied periods the door may open and close repeatedly. The average effect
The way this data is used depends on the Natural ventilation model option set but in both cases the concept
of doors frequently opening and closing is approximated by reducing the size of the door opening area to
account for the fact that the door is closed for much of the time:

The average door opening size used in the simulation is calculated by multiplying the % Area door opens by
the % Time the door is open by the gross door area. The ventilation rate through the door opening is
calculated at each time step based on the wind + stack pressure difference across the opening at the time.
Operation schedule
The Operation schedule is used to control timing of the door opening. Note that the schedule should have
values of 0 and 1 only and intermediate fractional values do not indicate partial opening.

External door opening is not modelled explicitly with the Scheduled natural ventilation model data setting.
Instead, the total natural ventilation flow rate and operation is defined for each zone on the HVAC tab. No
operation data is entered on the Openings tab for external doors.
Internal doors are modelled using the EnergyPlus ZoneMixing object which mixes air between the two
adjacent zones. DesignBuilder uses an approximate empirical relationship to calculate the mixing flow:
Flow (m3/s) = Door area (m2) * % area door opens * % time door is open * FAirflowRatePerOpeningArea
where FAirflowRatePerOpeningArea is a factor used to obtain the mixing flow from the opening area. The
value of this factor can be defined on the Model options dialog on the Advanced tab under Natural ventilation.
The default value is 0.1 m3/s-m2.
- 270 -
Window Shading
A schedule can be applied to control timing of the mixing flow.

Note: The Airflow through internal openings model option must be checked to obtain airflow through internal
doors when using Scheduled natural ventilation.
Operation schedule
The Operation schedule is used to control timing of the mixing flow. Note that the schedule should have
Note: For both Scheduled and Calculated natural ventilation options, door opening is controlled entirely by
schedule and is not affected by natural ventilation controls.
Vents and Holes

Vents
DesignBuilder vents are used for modelling airflow through openings and can be easily added to the model by
navigating to the appropriate surface and checking the Vents fitted option. This adds a single vent under each
of the windows (if the vent spacing is the same as the window spacing). Alternatively, for more control over
the placement position of the vents, you can go to surface level and draw the vents using the Draw vent
command. On surfaces where custom openings have been defined, any changes to vent layout model data
on the Opening tab is ignored.
Vent Placement
Vent Operation
Note: if you have drawn custom vents at the surface level then these will be used even if the Vents fitted
checkbox is not checked. The Vents fitted checkbox only controls the automatic generation of vents, not their
use in the calculations.
The properties of the vent are defined by the selection of the vent type:
Holes
Holes are modelled in a similar way to vents with some exceptions:
Holes must be drawn at surface level

Airflow through holes is uncontrolled, i.e. the airflow path is active all the time.
Drawing holes can be used as a way to merge two zones when the Merge zones connected by holes
Model option is set.
Holes are used internally with DesignBuilder to model the heat transfer and airflow through Virtual
partitions.
Discharge coefficient of 0.65 is used whereas with vents the vent component defines the discharge
coefficient.
- 271 -
Vent Modelling
Calculated Natural Ventilation (Simulations only)
Each vent is modelled using:
An EnergyPlus Door. The heat conduction through the vent Door component is displayed in results as
Internal Natural vent and External Natural vent.
An EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening and other associated
AirflowNetwork components, providing a controllable flow path. You can define Vent operation.
Scheduled Natural Ventilation (and Heating and Cooling Design Calculations)

Each vent is modelled using:
An EnergyPlus Door. The heat conduction through the vent Door component is displayed in results as
Internal Natural vent and External Natural vent.
Internal vents also have an EnergyPlus ZoneMixing object using parameters set in the Model options
dialog. External vents do not exchange air explicitly with Scheduled natural ventilation.
Hole Modelling
Calculated Natural Ventilation (Simulations only)
Each hole is modelled using a sub-surface and an airflow connection:
Sub-surface:
If using 1-Minimum shadowing or 2-Full exterior solar distribution the hole is represented using
an EnergyPlus 'Door'. In this case the heat conduction through the vent Door component is
displayed in results as Internal Natural vent and External Natural vent.
If the 3-Full interior and exterior solar distribution Model option is set then the hole is modelled
using a 'perfectly clear' window which transmits solar radiation and visible light.
EnergyPlus AirflowNetwork:MultiZone:Component:DetailedOpening and other associated
AirflowNetwork components, providing a controllable flow path. You can define Vent operation.
Scheduled Natural Ventilation (and Heating and Cooling Design Calculations)

Each hole is modelled using a sub-surface and a 'mixing' flow:
Sub-surface:
If using 1-Minimum shadowing or 2-Full exterior solar distribution the hole is represented using
an EnergyPlus Door. In this case the heat conduction through the vent Door component is
displayed in results as Internal Natural vent and External Natural vent.
If the 3-Full interior and exterior solar distribution Model option is set then the hole is modelled
using a 'perfectly clear' window which transmits solar radiation and visible light.
Internal holes have an EnergyPlus ZoneMixing object using parameters set in the Model options
dialog. External holes do not exchange air explicitly with Scheduled natural ventilation.
Vent Placement
Openings tab in model data under Vents
On surfaces where no custom openings have been defined, you can create vents simply by checking the
Auto generate options under the External and Internal Vents headers. In this case vents are positioned on
each surface using Vent spacing and Vent height above floor in the automatically generated facade layout.
Typically, a single vent is positioned under each of the windows (if the vent spacing is the same as the window
spacing).
- 272 -
Window Shading
Note: It is often more convenient to place vents manually by drawing them at surface level or by copying
previously drawn vents at building level.
Vent area
Enter the area of the area of each vent (in m2 or ft2).
Vent spacing
The spacing between the each vent on the facade (in m or ft). In many cases this will be the same as the
window spacing if auto generated windows are also being used. The window spacing is the centre to centre
spacing between vents, not the gap between vents.
Vent height above floor

The height of the vent centre above the zone floor level (in m or ft).
Vent Operation
Openings tab in model data under Vents
The operation of vents can be defined by entering timing data under Operation headers.
Control option (internal vents only)

The control option allows you to define how internal vents behave in natural ventilation systems and whether
they operate purely based on a schedule or, when using Calculated natural ventilation, whether they are
linked to the main natural ventilation controllers defined on the HVAC tab. This data is not available for
external vents. The options are:
1-Control by schedule - the internal vents are controlled entirely by schedule and are not affected by
any of the natural ventilation controls on the HVAC tab.
2-Control with external windows/vents - the internal vents are controlled using exactly the same
1-Control by schedule - the internal vents are controlled entirely by schedule and are not affected by
any of the natural ventilation controls on the HVAC tab.
2-Closed - the internal vents are always closed and do not allow any airflow to be exchanged.
The way this data is used depends on the Natural ventilation model option set:

The ventilation rate through the vent is calculated based on the wind and stack pressure calculated at each
time step in the simulation.
Operation schedule
The Operation schedule is used to control timing of the vent opening availability. Note that the schedule
should have values of 0 and 1 only and intermediate fractional values do not indicate partial opening.

External vent opening is not modelled explicitly with the Scheduled natural ventilation model data setting.
Instead, the total natural ventilation flow rate and operation is defined for each zone on the HVAC tab. No
operation data is entered on the Openings tab for external vents.
- 273 -
Internal vents are modelled using the EnergyPlus ZoneMixing object which mixes air between the two
adjacent zones. DesignBuilder uses an approximate empirical relationship to calculate the mixing flow:
Flow (m3/s) = Door area (m2) * % area door opens * % time door is open * FAirflowRatePerOpeningArea
where FAirflowRatePerOpeningArea is a factor used to obtain the mixing flow from the opening area. The
value of this factor can be defined on the Model options dialog on the Advanced tab under Natural ventilation.
The default value is 0.1 m3/s-m2.
A schedule can be applied to control timing of the mixing flow.
Note: The Airflow through internal openings model option must be checked to obtain airflow through internal
vents when using Scheduled natural ventilation.
Operation schedule
The Operation schedule is used to control timing of the mixing flow. Note that the schedule should have
Wind Pressure Coefficients

You can enter Wind pressure coefficients (WPC) for wind incidence angles in 45 increments for each surface
in the model. DesignBuilder automatically sets up default WPC data as surfaces are created using published
Wind Pressure Coefficient template data
Note: the wind incidence angles are relative to the surface normal for each surface.
Lighting Model data

Lighting tab in model data
Templates
You can load generic Lighting data by clicking on the Template option under Lighting Template and then by
clicking on the '...' at the right of the line.
When you make a selection from the list of Lighting templates, data from selected template will be loaded to
the model.
With Early gains, the lighting gains in the space are separated into Task and General lighting.
You can also open these headers to enter lighting details where they are different from those loaded from the
template:
General Lighting
Task Lighting
Lighting Control
Exterior Lighting
When you load lighting data from template, the actual general lighting internal gain is calculated by dividing
the W/m2/100 lux data in the template by the required illuminance level as set on the Activity tab.
Consequently you should make sure the correct activity data has been loaded in each zone before loading
lighting templates. Also, you may need to explicitly load data in each zone by checking each zone in the
Target tab of the 'Load data from template' dialog.
Lighting data generates simulation data at the Zone level.
- 274 -
Window Shading
See also the Lighting Model Data Tutorial
General lighting
General lighting accounts for the main lighting in the room. It is assumed to be able to be replaced by daylight
through lighting control, if this option is selected.
Normalised power density

There are two ways to define the lighting energy use in a zone depending on the Lighting gain units setting
made in model options:
1.
2.
Watts per m2 - where the maximum lighting gains are defined as W/m2 independent of the required
illuminance level.
Watts per m2 per 100lux - where the maximum lighting gains are defined as W/m2-100lux and the
actual lighting energy used for the zone in the simulation is based on this value plus floor area and
illuminance requirements as follows:
Max Lighting power (W) = Lighting energy (W/m2-100lux) x Zone floor area (m2) x Zone Illuminance
requirement / 100
Example to calculate W/m2/100lux: For a lighting system emitting 40 W/m2 and providing 500 lux,
the value to enter is 40/5 = 8W/m2-100lux
For both the above 2 options, the lighting energy should be the maximum electrical power input to lighting in a
zone, including ballasts, if present. This value is multiplied by a schedule fraction during the simulation to get
the lighting power in a particular time step.
Note: When loading lighting data from template and using the W/m2 option, the actual lighting W/m2 gain to
be loaded is calculated by dividing the W/m2/100lux data in the template by the required illuminance level as
currently set on the Activity tab. Once the lighting template has been loaded, the W/m2 value can be
overridden at zone level. Also if you select a new Activity with different illuminance level requirements, the
Lighting tab does not automatically update the W/m2 unless you reapply the lighting template.
The electrical input to lighting ultimately appears as heat that contributes to zone loads or to return air heat
gains. In EnergyPlus this heat is divided into four different fractions. Three of these are given by the input
fields Return Air Fraction, Fraction Radiant and Fraction Visible. A fourth, defined as the fraction of the heat
from lights convected to the zone air, is calculated by EnergyPlus as:
Convected Fraction = 1.0 (Return Air Fraction + Radiant Fraction + Visible Fraction)
You will get an error message if Return Air Fraction + Radiant Fraction + Visible Fraction exceeds 1.0. These
fractions depend on the type of lamp and luminaire, whether the luminaire is vented to the return air, etc.
Luminaire type
Select from:
- 275 -
When you select using the drop-down list an appropriate set of defaults for the luminaire type is loaded
according to the table below, assuming fluorescent lighting.
Data
Return Air
Fraction
Radiant
Fraction
Visible Fraction
Convected
Fraction
1-Suspended
2-Surface
Mount
3-Recessed
4-Luminous
and Recessed
Ceiling
5-Return-air
Ducted
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.0
0.54
0.42
0.72
0.37
0.37
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.18
0.40
0.10
0.45
0.45
0.10
Approximate values of Return Air Fraction, Radiant Fraction and Visible Fraction for overhead fluorescent
lighting for different luminaire configurations. These values assume that no light heat goes into an adjacent
zone. Source: Lighting Handbook: Reference & Application, 8th Edition, Illuminating Engineering Society of
North America, New York, 1993, p. 355.
Return air fraction

For Return Air Ducted luminaires this is the fraction of the heat from lights that is convected out of the room
and into the zone return air (normally into a return plenum). If the return air flow is zero or the zone has no
return air system, the program will put this fraction into the zone air. Return Air Fraction is only visible on the
screen for 5-Return-air ducted luminaires.
Radiant fraction
The fraction of heat from lights that goes into the zone as long-wave (thermal) radiation. The program
calculates how much of this radiation is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the zone according the area times
thermal absorptance product of these surfaces.
Fraction visible
The fraction of heat from lights that goes into the zone as visible (short-wave) radiation. The program
calculates how much of this radiation is absorbed by the inside surfaces of the zone according the area times
solar absorptance product of these surfaces.
Note: selecting an option from the Luminaire type drop-down list loads default Return Air Fraction, Radiant
Fraction and Visible Fraction data from the table above.
Fraction convected
The fraction of the heat from lights convected to the zone air is calculated from:
Fraction convected = 1.0 (Return Air Fraction + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Visible)
You will get an error message if Return Air Fraction + Fraction Radiant + Fraction Visible exceeds 1.0.
This data is provided on screen for information purposes.
Operation
If 'Internal gains operate with occupancy' under model options is not set General lighting has a specific
operation schedule set under General Lighting, otherwise these gains are synchronised with occupancy.
Task and Display lighting

Task and Display Lighting accounts for lighting used for specific tasks (e.g. desk lamps) or for displaying items
(e.g. display lighting for goods in shops).
Note: Task and Display Lighting is not offset by lighting control.
- 276 -
Window Shading
The following other data is assumed:

Data
Radiant fraction
Visible fraction
Return air fraction
Value
0.42
0.18
0
Internal gain
Note that when you load lighting data from template, the actual lighting casual gain is calculated by dividing
the W/m2/100 lux data in the template by the required illuminance level as set on the Activity tab.
Operation
If 'Internal gains operate with occupancy' under model options is not set Task lighting has a specific operation
schedule set under Task Lighting, otherwise these gains are synchronised with occupancy.
Lighting control
You can control the electric lights according to the availability of natural daylight. When Lighting control is
switched on, illuminance levels are calculated at every time step during the simulation and then used to
determine how much the electric lighting can be reduced. The daylight illuminance level in a zone depends on
many factors, including sky condition, sun position, photocell sensor positions, location, size, and glass
transmittance of windows, window shades and reflectance of interior surfaces. Reduction of electric lighting
depends on daylight illuminance level, illuminance set point, fraction of zone controlled and type of lighting
control.
Note: You should not use daylight control in zones without any windows - this will generate errors preventing
calculations from running. You should therefore use the building and block level lighting control setting with
care, checking for any zones without windows and switching off lighting control at the zone level.
Lighting control is available for General lighting but not for Task and display lighting. If no general lighting is
specified then lighting control won't be applied.
See also the Lighting and Daylight Control Tutorial
Lighting Areas
When lighting control is switched on, by default all of the lights in the zone are controlled by the first (main)
lighting sensor and % Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 1 has value 100%. Some larger spaces may have
2 Lighting Areas, each area having its own lighting sensor and covering its own area of the zone. The area is
not defined geometrically in DesignBuilder - it simply reflects the fraction of the total General overhead electric
lighting that can be dimmed by its lighting sensor.
You may wish to use 2 Lighting Areas for these situations:
1.
2.
A large zone may need more than one sensor if the output from main sensor does not represent the
daylight available in other parts of the zone. For example a zone having facades in both South and
East directions would need 2 sensors (and 2 Lighting Areas), one on each facade.
The zone has 2 different activity areas which have been lumped into a single zone for convenience.
The 2 activities have different visual illuminance requirements and the Lighting Areas for both can
benefit from daylighting through daylighting control. An example would be a zone having both office
and recreational space. The office space may have a lighting requirement of 500 lux and the
recreational space may need 300 lux.
Note 1: if the zone has a different sensor for the back half (for example) you should check the Second light
sensor option.
- 277 -
Note 2: if the zone has perimeter and core areas, perimeter lights having daylight control and core lights not,
then you only need to use a single lighting sensor. The fact that the core lights are not controlled can be
modelled using % Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 1. If 60% of the lights in the zone are located in the
core zone and do not have daylight control then set % Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 1 to 40.
Perimeter Area
A typical perimeter area would be the areas of the zone that are close to a window. By convention perimeter
areas are defined as the area within a fixed distance from a normal to the perimeter. In the UK NCM the fixed
distance is 6m.
If you wish to create a separate thermal zone to model the different lighting and solar conditions in the
perimeter area, you can use the Offset snap option to draw Virtual partitions.
Daylight illuminance on the 'working plane' is calculated for up to two locations in each zone during the
simulation and illuminance setpoints are maintained where necessary by electric lighting. The sensor is
always located in the working plane which, by default, is 0.8m above the floor. By default, when lighting
control is switched on, a single photo sensor monitors the daylight illuminance at the first sensor location and
controls the lights for the whole of the zone. You can however set up 2 Lighting Areas in each zone, by
checking the Second lighting area check box. In this case you can set a target illuminance for the second
lighting area separately and also define the percentage of the zone covered by Lighting Area 2.
Note 1: the floor area covered by the 2 sensors does not need to add to 100%. The lights in the remaining
floor area operate without daylight control.
Note 2: the target illuminance for Lighting Area 1 is set on the Activity tab under Environmental Control.
If there is only one lighting area then a percentage equal to
100 - (%Zone covered by Lighting Area 1)
is assumed to have no lighting control..
% Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 2

The fraction of the zone floor-area whose electric lighting is controlled by the daylight illuminance on the
second sensor. This data is required if Lighting Area 2 is being used. A percentage equal to
100 [%Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 1] - [%Zone Controlled by Lighting Area 2]
is assumed to have no lighting control (i.e. in this uncontrolled area of the space, the lights operate purely
according to the schedule without any dimming/switching).
Procedure
The procedure for introducing the lighting control is:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Check the Lighting Control On checkbox (at building level if all zones are to have lighting control).
Enter the working plane height which should normally be the height of the lighting control sensor above
the top of the floor surface of the zone.
Select the type of control as described below.
Position the first sensor in each zone having lighting control. The z-position is set by the Working plane
height on the Advanced tab of the Model options dialog.
Set the % Zone covered by Lighting Area 1. If all the lights in the zone are in Lighting Area 1 (i.e.
they are controlled by the 1st (main) lighting sensor then enter 100%.
If there are two lighting areas then position the second sensor.
Set the % Zone covered by Lighting Area 2. If all the lights in the zone are in Lighting Area 2 (i.e.
they are controlled by the 2nd lighting sensor) then enter 100 - %Zone covered by Lighting Area 1.
- 278 -
Window Shading
Note: by default the main lighting sensor is positioned in the geometric centre of the zone. It is important that
you check the position of all lighting sensors to obtain accurate results. For example, if the lighting sensor is
positioned right next to a window receiving large amounts of daylight, the lighting sensor will signal 'enough
daylight' even if the rest of the zone is only dimly lit and electric lighting energy will be under-estimated
(daylight savings over-estimated).
Linear Control
With Linear control, the overhead lights dim continuously and linearly from maximum electric power,
maximum light output to minimum electric power, minimum light output as the daylight illuminance increases.
The lights stay at the minimum point with further increase in the daylight illuminance.
The Minimum input power fraction for Linear control type is the lowest power the lighting system can dim
down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum input power. For Linear/off lighting control, this is the power
fraction reached just before the lights switch off completely.
The Minimum output fraction for Linear control type, is the lowest lighting output the lighting system can
dim down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum light output. This is the fractional light output that the
system produces at minimum input power. For Linear/off lighting control, this is the light output fraction
reached just before the lights switch off completely.
Note: Linear control provides an idealised lighting control mechanism which can be useful for calculating
upper limits on the potential for savings when using natural daylight to offset electric lighting.
Linear/Off Control
Linear/off control is the same as Linear control except that the lights switch off completely when the minimum
dimming point is reached.
Stepped Control
Stepped control allows you to switch lighting on/off according to the availability of natural daylight in discrete
steps. Whereas the Linear control described above provides precisely controlled illuminance by dimming the
lights, the stepped control models blocks of lights switching on/off according to the electric lighting
requirement.
The electric power input and light output vary in discreet, equally spaced steps. The number of steps can be
set.
Example of a Stepped Lighting Control System with 3 Steps:
Fraction
Daylight illuminance
of lights
- 279 -
that are
on
0-200
1.0
200-400
2/3
400-600
1/3
600 and above
0.0
Graphical representation of above example:
See also EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations.
Glare
Maximum allowable glare index
If a daylit zone has windows with Window shading devices, the shades will be deployed if the daylight glare at
sensor 1 exceeds the value of Maximum allowable glare index. To get this type of glare control you have to
specify Shading control type as 5-Glare for one or more windows in the zone (see Window Shading Control).
Recommended Values of Maximum Allowable Discomfort Glare Index:
Maximum Allowable
Activity or zone type
Discomfort Glare Index*
Art Galleries
16
Factories
Rough work
28
Engine assembly
26
Fine assembly
24
Instrument assembly
22
Hospital wards
18
Laboratories
22
Museums
20
Offices
22
School classrooms
20
*Source EnergyPlus documentation
View angle relative to y-axis

Daylight glare from a window depends on occupant view direction. It is highest when you look directly at a
window and decreases as you look away from a window. This field specifies the view direction for calculating
glare. It is the angle, measured clockwise in the horizontal plane, between the positive y-axis and the
occupant view direction, i.e. it is the bearing of the persons line of sight. For example, with Site orientation = 0,
in the Northern Hemisphere, 90 = Facing East, 180 = Facing South etc).
- 280 -
Window Shading
Algorithms
By default, DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus Daylighting:Detailed object to model the control of electric
lighting according to daylight illumination levels. You can find more information on the algorithms used in the
EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations section.
Output
For any zone simulated with daylighting controls, an illuminance map can be output with a 10 x 10 grid of
additional daylighting reference points. The resulting map is output as a comma delimited text file called
eplusmap.csv in the EnergyPlus folder. This file can be imported into a spreadsheet program for rapid
visualisation of the daylighting illuminance patterns in a zone. To generate this file, at least one zone must
have daylight control and the Daylight map output selection on the Output tab of the Simulation output options
dialog must be made.
Setting The Position Of Daylight Sensors

Working plane height
You can set the height of the working plane (otherwise known as desk height) to define the z-position of the
lighting sensor. The x-y coordinate is set by moving the lighting sensor marker(s) at zone level.
The Working plane height is used for EnergyPlus daylighting simulations only and is not used in Radiance
daylighting where a separate value is defined on the Daylighting calculation options dialog.
Horizontal Position
By default DesignBuilder positions the daylight sensor in the centre of the zone. You can move the sensor by
following these steps:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Move to the zone level on the layout tab.

Select the sensor you wish to move. This enables the Move toolbar icon. You will only see the daylight
sensor if lighting control is active in the current zone.
Click on the Move toolbar icon to start the move process.
Click once to define the reference or 'handle' position and click again to define the new position for the
sensor.
If the second sensor is enabled in the zone then you will be able to position that in the same way.
See also: Placing Light Sensors
Exterior Lighting
Exterior lighting allows you to account for the energy consumption of lights used to illuminate the exterior of
the building. Options are available for scheduled operation and nighttime switching.
Operation schedule
The schedule allows the exterior lights consumption to be operationally different, hour to hour as well as
seasonally. Fractional values in the basic schedule are applied to the design level data below.
Design level
This data is normally used to represent the maximum electrical input to exterior lighting fixtures that is then
multiplied by a schedule fraction (see previous field). Alternatively, the lighting design level could be a
diversity factor applied to a schedule of real numbers.
- 281 -
Control Option
This data is used to determine how the exterior lights are controlled. There are currently two options:
Schedule only where the exterior lights always follow the operation schedule.
Schedule + override off on daytime where the exterior lights will not run when the sun is up, no
matter what the schedule indicates. Using this option makes it simple to model exterior lights that are
controlled by a photocell or other controller that ensures that outdoor lights will not run during the
daytime. However, this control works off of the position of the sun and therefore does not operate
exactly like a photocell. During the night, the schedule values are still applied in the usual way.
HVAC Model data

HVAC tab in model data
Templates
You can load generic HVAC data by clicking on the Template option under HVAC Template and then by
clicking on the '...' at the right of the line.
When you make a selection from the list of HVAC templates, data from selected template will be loaded to the
model.
The rest of this HVAC section is split into 3 main sections for each of the 3 HVAC model options:
Simple HVAC
Compact HVAC
Detailed HVAC
Also, independent of HVAC model options:
Natural Ventilation
Earth Tubes
Domestic Hot Water
Air Temperature Distribution
See also the HVAC Model Data Tutorial
Simple HVAC
HVAC tab in model data - Simple HVAC
Simple HVAC is suitable for use at early design stages or for other analyses where detailed treatment of
heating, cooling and mechanical ventilation systems is required.
You can also open headers to enter HVAC details where they are different from those loaded from the
template:
Auxiliary Energy
Mechanical Ventilation
Fans
Outside Air
Heating
Cooling
See Simple HVAC Tutorial
- 282 -
Window Shading
Auxiliary Energy
When using Simple HVAC, this data is used to calculate the electric energy consumption due to fans and
pumps, control gear and any other HVAC-related equipment not accounted for elsewhere. The data used for
this calculation depends on the Simple HVAC Auxiliary model options setting.
NCM SETTING
When the NCM Simple HVAC auxiliary option is set, only one data item is required to define the auxiliary
energy consumption. This data is used at the zone level and the auxiliary energy consumption for the building
is displayed at building level in the Simulation results as System Misc energy.
Auxiliary energy
The total annual Auxiliary energy consumption can be entered as kWh/m2 (SI units) or Btu/ft2 (IP units).
Auxiliary energy accounts for any additional energy consumption due to fans, pumps, control gear etc. It is
specified per floor area and is modelled as being consumed 24/7 during the simulation. Note that when using
the NCM option, auxiliary energy consumption will not vary according to mechanical ventilation flow rates or
any other settings - it is a very basic way to account for auxiliary energy consumption.
The default auxiliary energy data provided in the HVAC templates is based on data published in the UK
National Calculation Methodology (NCM).
The energy consumption related to Auxiliary energy is shown at building level in the results screen.
SEPARATE FANS AND PUMPS SETTING

When the Separate fans and pumps Simple HVAC auxiliary option is set, the auxiliary energy calculations
are carried out separately for fans and pumps and their respective energy consumption values are displayed
separately in the simulation results.
Fan energy is calculated based on fan pressure rise and efficiency values as defined under
Mechanical ventilation > Fans. The fan energy consumption data is displayed in simulation results as
Fan energy and will depend on the actual mechanical ventilation flow rates applied in the simulation.
Pump, control and any other electrical energy associated with the HVAC system is calculated using a
power density value (W/m2 or W/ft2) plus a schedule to define time/seasonal variations.
Pump etc energy

The pump energy can be defined as a power density (W/m2 or W/ft2) and this is multiplied by the value of the
associated schedule (below) to calculate the pump energy for each zone at any time in the simulation. The
data is used at the zone level and the total energy consumption for the building is displayed at building level in
the Simulation results as Pump energy.
Schedule
Select the schedule defining the time variation of the pump energy consumption.
Mechanical Ventilation
Check the mechanical ventilation checkbox to indicate that outside air and/or re-circulated air is delivered to
the zone. You can use this setting to define mechanical ventilation and air delivered through centrally ducted
air conditioning systems or local fresh air systems.
The specification of outside air delivery rates is the same for both options as described in the Outside air
section.
- 283 -
The way that mechanical ventilation is modelled in Simple HVAC depends on the Mechanical ventilation
method model option:
1-Room ventilation where mechanical ventilation is modelled using the EnergyPlus

ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate data separate from the main HVAC system. This allows fan energy
and heat pick up to be modelled and also more sophisticated zone temperature controlled mechanical
ventilation. Heat recovery, economiser and humidity controls are not available with this option though.
2-Ideal loads where mechanical ventilation is modelled using the EnergyPlus
ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem data, allowing the effects of heat recovery, economiser and humidity
control to be modelled but not fan energy and heat pickup.
1-ROOM VENTILATION
With the Mechanical ventilation method model option the introduction of outside air through fans is achieved
using the EnergyPlus ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate data separate from the main HVAC system. Energy
consumption and heat pick up from fans is included as described below.
Fan Type
When using Simple HVAC, enter the type of fan. Select from:
1-Supply - fan blows outside air into the zone and the zone receives heat from the fan if Fan in air
(below) > 0
2-Extract - fan exhausts air from the zone. In this case there is no fan heat pickup. It is assumed that
makeup air comes from outside.
Note that in Simple HVAC the Auxiliary energy data accounts for all electric fan and pump distribution energy
plus controls and any other electrical energy use associated with HVAC that is not already accounted for
elsewhere.
Fan pressure rise

Enter the pressure rise at full flow and standard conditions. Standard conditions are considered 20C at sea
level, 101325 Pa.
See also Calculating Fan Pressure Rise.
Fan total efficiency (%)

Enter the product of the fan motor and impeller efficiency of the supply fan. This is the ratio of the power
delivered to the air to the electrical input power at maximum flow expressed as a percentage. The motor
efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the motor. The fan
efficiency is power delivered to the air divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to the fluid is the mass
flow rate of the air multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. Must be greater than 0 and less
than or equal to 100.
Fan power and temperature pick up calculations

The calculations for fan power and airflow temperature pick up are detailed in the EnergyPlus Engineering
Document. A summary is shown below:
Total Fan Power = Mass flow rate. DeltaP / (Total fan efficiency . Air density)
Shaft Fan Power = Motor efficiency . Total Fan Power
Heat to air = Shaft Fan Power + (Total Fan Power - Shaft Fan Power) . Motor in air fraction
2-IDEAL LOADS
With the Ideal loads option, Mechanical ventilation is modelled with heating and cooling using the EnergyPlus
ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem data. In this case there are options to include the effects of heat recovery,
economiser, humidification and dehumidification.
Note: With the Ideal loads option, fan energy and heat pickup are not included in the simulation. In this case
you can approximate fan energy using auxiliary energy data but if you need more detailed fan modelling you
should use either the Room ventilation option or Detailed HVAC model options.
- 284 -
Window Shading
Economiser
Economisers are used to provide cooling when the outdoor temperature is lower than the indoor temperature.
An economiser is a damper opening that draws up to 100% outside air when the outside air is cooler than the
temperature inside the building, thereby providing free cooling. An outdoor air economy cycle can reduce
cooling energy requirements by some 20% to 30%, or around 5% of the air conditioning energy use and are
often required by energy codes for larger air conditioning units.
Choose from 3 options:
1-None where no economiser operation will be simulated and outside fresh air is based purely on the
Mechanical ventilation Outside air rate and associated operation schedule.
2-Differential dry bulb the economiser increases the outdoor air flow rate above the minimum outdoor
air flow when there is a cooling load and the outdoor air temperature or enthalpy is below the zone
exhaust air temperature.
3-Differential enthalpy the economiser increases the outdoor air flow rate above the minimum outdoor
air flow when there is a cooling load and the outdoor air enthalpy is below that of the zone exhaust air.
Max outdoor air rate when economiser operates

The upper limit of outside airflow when the economiser is working in ac/h. The default is 15 ac/h. This value is
not used when the HVAC Autosize model option is Adequate.
Heat recovery
When heat recovery is active you can choose the type of heat recovery. Select from:
1-Sensible which provides sensible heat recovery whenever the zone exhaust air temperature is more
favourable than the outdoor air temperature.
2-Enthalpy where latent and sensible heat recovery are provided whenever the zone exhaust air
enthalpy is more favourable than the outdoor air enthalpy.
With the EnergyPlus Ideal loads system used in Simple HVAC heat recovery heating is only available when a
zone is heated, i.e. when the Heated checkbox is checked on the HVAC tab. Likewise cooling heat recovery
will only be available if the Cooled checkbox is checked. That is not to say that heat recovery isn't available
for zones with heating at times when the heating system is not operating - heat recovery heating is available
at any time in this case when the outside air is cooler than zone exhaust air, regardless of whether heating is
operating or not. If you need to model heat recovery for systems without heating then you should use Detailed
HVAC which is more flexible.
Sensible heat recovery effectiveness

The sensible heat recovery effectiveness, where effectiveness is defined as the change in supply temperature
divided by the difference in entering supply and relief air temperatures. The default is 0.70.
Latent heat recovery effectiveness

The latent heat recovery effectiveness, where effectiveness is defined as the change in supply humidity ratio
divided by the difference in entering supply and relief air humidity ratios. The default is 0.65.
Outside Air
HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Simple HVAC
You can set the amount, timing and control of outside air delivery through the HVAC air distribution system on
the HVAC tab.
Outside air requirement data is set at the zone level on the HVAC tab for all HVAC configurations and
options.
The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration ouput data can be displayed on the Heating design, Cooling design
and Simulation screens when you select 1-All or 3-Comfort data. This is the sum of fresh air delivered
through the HVAC system, infiltration and natural ventilation outside airflow in air changes per hour (ac/h) and
- 285 -
when used together with the other environmental output it can be very useful in checking for occupant
discomfort.
Outside air definition method

Defines the method used to set the maximum outside air delivery rate. The actual outside air flow rate during
simulation is modified by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule described below. The options
are:
1-By zone - enter the zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour in the control directly
below. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated from the ac/h data using:
m3/s = ac/h x ZoneVolume / 3600
where ZoneVolume is the actual air volume of the space calculated according to Model options for
excluding floor/ceiling constructions.
Note: this zone volume may be slightly different from the value used for the purposes of calculating air
flow rates for infiltration which uses the total zone volume.
2-Min fresh air (Per person) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air
requirements per person as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as:
m3/s = MinFreshAir x NumberPeople / 1000
NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2).
MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person or CFM).
3-Min fresh air (Per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air
requirements as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as:
m3/s = l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000
where ZoneFloorArea is the actual floor area of the space.
MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per floor area (l/s-m2 or CFM/ft2).
4-Min fresh air (Sum per person + per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using
Minimum fresh air requirements for both as set on the Activity tab. The air flow rate in m3/s is
calculated as:
m3/s = (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea + MinFreshAir x NumberPeople)/ 1000
5-Min fresh air (Max per person and per area) - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using
calculated as:
m3/s = Maximum of (l/s-m2 x ZoneFloorArea / 1000) and (MinFreshAir x
NumberPeople/ 1000)
Outside air flow rate

Enter the minimum zone outside air delivery rate in air changes per hour when Outside air definition
method (above) is 1-By zone.
- 286 -
Window Shading
The actual minimum amount of outside air entering the AHU can be modified by the Minimum AHU outside
air requirement schedule (below).
Note however that this value is used unmodified by any schedules for Heating design calculations when
mechanical ventilation is switched on and included in the analysis.
Heating
The data required to define the heating system will depend on whether the HVAC model option is set to
Simple or Compact and if set to Compact the type of Compact HVAC system selected.
HEATING CAPACITY
The heating capacity can either be entered by hand or can be Autosized using the Heating Design
Calculations. By default, if immediately prior to a Simulation the heating capacity has not been entered
(neither by hand nor from a previous Heating design calculation) then a Heating design autosizing simulation
is started to calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works.
You can change heating capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model
Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to '2Manual' to avoid this happening.
If the HVAC system is Unitary multizone then the central heating coil capacity is calculated as the sum of the
individual zone heating energy requirements.
HEATING PLANT
Heating fuel
Select the type of fuel used to generate the heating energy - choose from:
Interface Fuel Name
2-Natural Gas
3-Oil
4-Coal
5-LPG
6-Biogas
7-Anthracite
8-Smokeless Fuel (inc Coke)
9-Dual Fuel Appliances (Mineral + Wood)
10-Biomass
11-Waste Heat
Fuel in results
Electricity
Gas
Oil
Solid fuel
Bottled gas
Bottled gas
Solid fuel
Solid fuel
Other
Other
Other
You should select 1-Electricity from grid you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those
calculated by EnergyPlus directly for District heating and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation
screen.
Heating system CoP

The heating system Coefficient of Performance is used to calculate the fuel consumption required to meet
heating demand. The value represents the total seasonal efficiency of the entire heating system and should
include the effect of all energy consumption associated with building heating such as any boiler fan energy,
boiler inefficiency, control equipment etc. It does not include energy involved in air or water distribution (fans
or pumps) or control gear, which is accounted for in the Auxiliary energy.
- 287 -
Heating system CoP data is specified by zone so you can model different heating efficiencies in each zone.
But generally you should access this data from the building level and allow zones to take on building default.
LOCAL HEATING UNITS

Heating type
There are two heating types available:
1-Convective - the space is heated by an air system and controlled to the air temperature set point.
The system is modelled using the EnergyPlus "Ideal Loads" system.
2-Radiative/convective units - used for modelling general systems where a radiant heat is a factor.
Allows modelling of convective systems, hot water radiator systems, underfloor heating systems,
baseboard heating etc. using EnergyPlus 'High Temp Radiant System'.
1-CONVECTIVE
When using Simple HVAC you can specify the heating supply air conditions of the air.
Maximum supply air delivery temperature

The maximum dry-bulb air temperature of the air supplied for heating the zone (in C or F).
Maximum supply air humidity ratio

The constant humidity ratio (mass of water per mass of dry air) of the warm supply air to be delivered
when heating is required. The default humidity ratio is 0.0156. You should be careful to enter a value
that is a valid condition, i.e. it is under the 100% saturation line on the Psychrometric Chart.
2-RADIANT/CONVECTIVE UNITS
When the Simple HVAC, 1-Room ventilation Mechanical ventilation and 1-DesignBuilder Simple
HVAC autosizing method model options are set you can model radiant heating systems. Set the
heating system type as 2-Radiant/convective units (above) and enter the heating radiant fraction and
the way radiant heat is distributed through the space.
Important: Recent versions of EnergyPlus no longer support the radiant/convective option combined
with Simple HVAC cooling systems, so if you need radiant heating and cooling in the same zone then
you should switch to Detailed HVAC.
Heating radiant fraction

The fraction of the power input to the radiant heater that is actually radiant heat transfer. The fraction
should be between 0 and 1. In conjunction with the Radiant distribution option, it defines the breakdown
of how the power input to the heater is distributed to the rest of the zone.
Radiant distribution
The Radiant distribution allows you to control how the radiant heat from the Radiant unit is distributed
around the room. Options are:
1-Uniform - radiant heat is distributed uniformly around the zone.

2-Floor - heat is distributed uniformly across all floors in the zone. Use this for modelling floor
heating systems.
Technical Note
DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus 'HIGH TEMP RADIANT SYSTEM' to model radiant
heating systems when in Simple HVAC mode. This system type is intended for modelling
'high-temperature' radiant sources but it can equally well be used for low temperature
radiant sources.
Note: for all Simple HVAC systems, heating setpoint temperatures are defined on the Activity tab.
- 288 -
Window Shading
OPERATION
Heating operation schedule
This schedule data is used in conjunction with the heating setpoint temperatures on the Activity tab to define
the time-varying heating setpoint schedule in the zone. The operation schedule defines the times when full
and setback setpoints should be met and the setpoint data on the Activity tab define the actual setpoint
values. See Defining setpoint temperature schedules for more on this.
Note: the zone heating operation schedule is also used in Detailed HVAC with the default 1-Simple HVAC
Detailed HVAC Activity data setting.
Cooling
You can enter details on the cooling system including the maximum capacity (at zone level).
Cooling system
This item is shown with a green background as it is used in Cooling design calculations only. The data is
normally used to group zones together that are served by the same AHU. This allows the cooling capacity of
the AHU to be calculated on the Cooling design screen.
By default DesignBuilder provides a single Cooling system called Default and all zones are allocated to it.
You can create new Cooling systems and select them in the same that any other component such as a
glazing system would be created and selected. Cooling systems have no data other than a name.
Cooling capacity
The Cooling capacity can either be entered by hand or can be Autosized using the Cooling Design
Calculations. If, immediately prior to a Simulation the Cooling capacity has not been entered (neither by hand
nor from a previous Cooling Design Calculation) then a Cooling design autosizing simulation is started to
calculate the capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works.
You can change cooling capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, by default, if Model
SUPPLY AIR CONDITIONS

When using Simple HVAC you can specify the cooling supply air conditions of the air. This data is used for
simulations only - cooling design calculations have a specific equivalent setting on the Cooling design
calculation options .
Minimum supply air delivery temperature

The minimum dry-bulb air temperature of the air supplied for cooling the zone (in C or F).
Minimum supply air humidity ratio

The minimum humidity ratio (kg of water per kg of dry air) of the cool supply air. The default is 0.0077 kgH2O/kg-air which corresponds to a 10C (50F) dew point. You should be careful to enter a value that is a valid
condition, i.e. it is under the 100% saturation line on the Psychrometric Chart.
COOLING PLANT
Cooling fuel
Select the type of fuel used to generate the cooling energy - choose from:
Interface Fuel Name
Fuel in results
- 289 -

2-Natural Gas
3-Oil
4-Coal
5-LPG
6-Biogas
7-Anthracite
10-Biomass
11-Waste Heat
Electricity
Gas
Oil
Solid fuel
Bottled gas
Bottled gas
Solid fuel
Solid fuel
Other
Other
Other
calculated by EnergyPlus directly for District cooling and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation
screen.
Cooling system CoP

The cooling system coefficient of performance is used to calculate the fuel consumption required to meet
cooling demand. The value represents the total seasonal efficiency of the entire cooling system and should
include the effect of all energy consumption associated with building cooling such as fan and pump energy,
chiller inefficiency, control equipment etc.
Cooling system CoP data is specified by zone so you can model different cooling efficiencies in each zone.
But generally you should access this data from the building level and allow zones to take on building default.
Note: for all systems, cooling setpoint temperatures are defined on the Activity tab.
OPERATION
Cooling operation schedule
This schedule data is used in conjunction with the cooling setpoint temperatures on the Activity tab to define
the time-varying cooling setpoint schedule in the zone. The operation schedule defines the times when full
Note: the zone cooling operation schedule is also used in Detailed HVAC with the default 1-Simple HVAC
Detailed HVAC Activity data setting.
Humidity Control
When using the Ideal loads Mechanical ventilation method you have the option to control humidity by
checking the Humidification and/or Dehumidification checkboxes on the HVAC tab.
Note: In real HVAC systems humidity control can require considerable energy consumption to achieve. If you
require an accurate assessment of this energy then you should consider using Detailed HVAC humidity
control which allows you to track energy flows in more detail.
HUMIDIFICATION
Humidification control type
When humidification is selected there are 2 further options:
1-Constant supply humidity ratio means that during heating the supply air will always be at the
Maximum heating supply humidity ratio.
- 290 -
Window Shading
2-Humidistat means that the humidity in the zone is controlled using the Humidification setpoint
defined on the Activity tab. The ideal loads system will attempt to meet the humidistat request, i.e. it will
humidify according to the setpoint.
DEHUMIDIFICATION
Dehumidification control type
When dehumidification is selected there are 3 further options:
1-Constant supply humidity ratio means that during cooling the supply air will always be at the
Minimum cooling supply humidity ratio.
2-Humidistat means that the humidity in the zone is controlled using the Dehumidification setpoint
defined on the Activity tab. The ideal loads system will attempt to meet the humidistat request, i.e. it will
dehumidify according to the setpoint.
3-Constant sensible heat ratio. means that the ideal loads system will be controlled to meet the
sensible cooling load, and the latent cooling rate will be computed using the constant sensible heat
ratio (SHR) defined below.
For 3-Constant sensible heat ratio and 2-Humidistat options, if the mixed air humidity ratio is less than the
target humidity ratio, then the mixed air humidity ratio will be used. For all options, the supply air humidity ratio
will never be allowed to exceed saturation at the supply dry bulb temperature. The selected dehumidification
control type is always applied when the unit is in cooling mode. If the unit is in deadband mode (not actively
heating the supply air) control type Humidistat will be active. If the unit is in heating mode, control type
Humidistat will be active if the Humidification Control Type field below is set to Humidistat or None. This allows
the ideal loads system to heat and dehumidify at the same time.
Cooling sensible heat ratio

When the Dehumidification control type above is set to 3-Constant sensible heat ratio the ideal loads
system will be controlled to meet the sensible cooling load, and the latent cooling rate will be computed using
the value of Cooling Sensible Heat Ratio (SHR), where SHR = Sensible Cooling divided by Total Cooling
(sensible plus latent). The default is 0.7.
Compact HVAC
HVAC tab in model data - Compact HVAC
Important Note: Now that Detailed HVAC is available in v3 and later we strongly recommend this in
preference to Compact HVAC as it provides much more control over the HVAC simulation without a lot of
extra work being required to set up the data. Compact HVAC is now a deprecated feature and may not be
supported in future releases.
Compact HVAC systems are used when the HVAC model option is set to Compact and can be a useful entry
route into EnergyPlus HVAC modelling allowing you to model HVAC systems in quite some detail without the
need to draw an air flow network and deal with the complexities of control systems and node connections. You
can model many common HVAC systems including VAV with terminal reheat, VAV with PIU, Constant
volume, Fan coil units, Packaged DX units and Mechanical ventilation.
Compact HVAC is intermediate in detail between the Simple and Detailed HVAC model options. The
heating/cooling systems defined in DesignBuilder using Compact HVAC descriptions are automatically
expanded into detailed HVAC definitions behind the scenes and modelled in EnergyPlus including
components such as boiler, chiller, coils, pump, cooling tower and fan part-load characteristics.
EnergyPlus simulations are carried out on the detailed HVAC component models generated by DesignBuilder
from the compact descriptions.
When the HVAC model option is set to Compact, there are 5 HVAC system types:
Fan Coil Units_Ref-1142106010

Unitary single zone
Unitary multizone
VAV
- 291 -
CAV
System type
When using Compact HVAC data, the HVAC Type is displayed beneath the Template. This cannot be edited
directly - if you want to choose a different HVAC system type you should do this by selecting an appropriate
template.
System availability
When using Compact HVAC data, the system availability schedule can be defined to control the overall
operation of the HVAC system, including heating, cooling and ventilation. This schedule is used at the building
level for 2-Unitary multizone, 3-VAV and 5-CAV systems and at the zone level for 1-Unitary single zone
and 5-Fan coil.
System availability schedule

The System availability schedule defines the operation of the air system fans. For Compact Unitary systems
the Fan operation mode can be set to 2-Cycling in which case air distribution only occurs when there is
heating or cooling demand.
Rules
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Only one CAV, VAV or Unitary multizone system can be defined per building.
If you select Unitary multizone, CAV or VAV at zone level, then the same selection must be made at
building level.
You can enter Fan coil and Unitary single zone systems in any zone without concern for the selection
at building level.
Pumps are modelled using typical default data.
Unitary multizone and Fan coil units cannot be used in same building.
Fan coil units are incompatible with Calculated natural ventilation.
HVAC Components
While most Compact HVAC data is entered directly on the HVAC model data tab, the following HVAC
components are used in Compact HVAC:
Boilers
Chillers
Performance Curves
Fan Coil Units

The Fan coil unit Compact HVAC option simulates a 4 pipe fan coil unit with hot water heating coil, chilled
water cooling coil, and an outside air mixer. The fan coil units are zone equipment units which are assembled
from other components. Fan coils contain an outdoor air mixer, a fan, a simple heating coil and a cooling coil.
The fan coil unit is connected to a hot water loop (demand side) through its hot water coil and to a chilled
water loop (demand side) through its cooling coil. The unit is controlled to meet the zone (remaining) heating
or cooling demand. If there is a heating demand, the cooling coil is off and the hot water flow through the
heating coil is throttled to meet the demand. If there is a cooling demand from the zone, the hot water coil is
off and the chilled water flow through the cooling coil is throttled to meet the load.
You can model Fan coil unit systems with or without outside air. If you include Mechanical ventilation with
your Fan coil unit system then heating and cooling will only operate when the Mechanical ventilation
operation schedule is on.
If you do not want to include outside air in your system, you should uncheck the Mechanical ventilation 'On'
check box. In this case heating/cooling availability is determined entirely from the heating/cooling operation
schedules under the Heating and Cooling headers.
Unlike the Unitary multizone and CAV and VAV Compact HVAC types, Fan coil unit zone systems take all
their data from the zone level.
- 292 -
FCU Ventilation
Note 1: EnergyPlus fan coil supply fans run continuously at full speed whenever the availability schedules are
> 0 so fan coil outside air flow can be 'fully on' or 'fully off' but cannot reduce to fractional values in between.
You may therefore get higher outside air delivery rates than with other
System availability
The system availability schedule can be defined to control the overall operation of the HVAC system, including
heating, cooling and ventilation. This schedule is used at the zone level for Fan coil units.
template:
FCU Ventilation
FCU Heating
FCU Cooling
FCU Ventilation
HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header - Compact HVAC
the HVAC tab.
Outside air requirement data is set at the zone level on the HVAC tab.
The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration data is displayed on the Heating design, Cooling design and
Simulation screens when you select 1-All or 3-Comfort data. This is the sum of fresh air delivered through the
HVAC system, infiltration and natural ventilation outside airflow in air changes per hour (ac/h) and when used
together with the other environmental output it can be very useful in checking for occupant discomfort.
- 293 -

are:
calculated as:
calculated as:
NumberPeople/ 1000)

method (above) is 1-By zone. The actual minimum amount of outside air entering the AHU can be modified
by the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule (below).
- 294 -
FCU Heating
Maximum supply air flow rate

The maximum supply air flow rate is the total flow rate of air entering the zone (not necessarily all fresh air).
It can be defined at the zone level when using Compact HVAC or it can be left in the default state (Auto), in
which case the maximum supply air flow rate is calculated based only on the maximum heating and cooling
capacities.
This data is available at the zone level when using Unitary single zone, Unitary multizone or VAV Compact
HVAC and the plant sizing options Autosize when not set or Manual.
Note: To model systems with no outside air you should switch on Mechanical ventilation, select the 1-By
zone Outside air definition method and set the air change rate to 0 ac/h.
FCU Heating
HVAC tab in model data HVAC tab - Compact HVAC
The data required to define the heating system will depend on whether the HVAC model option is set to
Simple or Compact and if set to Compact the type of Compact HVAC system selected.
Heating capacity
Boiler
At building level you can select the boiler to be used to provide hot water to FCU heating coils. Only one boiler
can be specified for the whole building, i.e. there is only a single hot water circuit served by one boiler in
Compact HVAC simulations.
OPERATION
FCU Cooling
- 295 -
Cooling capacity
Chiller
At building level select the chiller to be used to provide cold water to cooling coils. Only one chiller can be
specified for the whole building in Compact HVAC, i.e. there is only a single cold water circuit served by one
chiller in Compact HVAC simulations.
Chilled water setpoint temperature

At building level enter the chilled water setpoint temperature to be used for sizing the chilled water loop and
associated equipment.
Condenser water setpoint temperature

At building level enter the condenser water temperature to be used for sizing the condenser loop and
associated equipment.
Cooling tower type

Select from:
1-Single speed
2- Two speed
The EnergyPlus equipment object types which are used are CoolingTower:SingleSpeed or
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed.
OPERATION
Unitary Systems
DesignBuilder Compact HVAC provides 2 types of unitary system:
Unitary Single Zone
Unitary Multizone
These are described below.
UNITARY SINGLE ZONE

The Unitary single zone option allows you to model simple single constant volume direct-expansion (DX)
based HVAC configurations with several different heating options. Direct expansion includes single packaged
rooftop systems commonly seen in commercial buildings and split systems commonly seen in residential
buildings. In this system, local cooling coils are used to condition air which is supplied to the zone through a
local air delivery system. Air delivery can be set up to ensure minimum fresh air supply and there are options
for economisers to provide free cooling and heat recovery.
- 296 -
FCU Cooling
Note: With Unitary single zone systems each zone has its own 'AHU' and so, unlike the Unitary multizone,
CAV and VAV Compact HVAC types, Unitary single zone systems take all their data from the zone level.
System availability
You can model unitary single zone systems with or without outside air. If you include Air distribution with your
Unitary single zone system then heating and cooling will only operate when the Air distribution operation
schedule is on.
If you do not want to include outside air in your system, you should uncheck the Mechanical ventilation 'On'
check box. In this case heating/cooling availability is determined entirely from the heating/cooling operation
schedules under the Heating and Cooling headers.
UNITARY MULTIZONE
The Unitary multizone option allows you to model constant volume direct-expansion (DX) based HVAC
configurations with several different heating options. Direct expansion (DX) includes single packaged rooftop
systems commonly seen in commercial buildings and split systems commonly seen in residential buildings. In
this system, central heating and cooling coils are used to condition air which is delivered to the each of the
zones in the system through an air delivery system. Air delivery can be set up to ensure minimum fresh air
supply and there are options for economisers to provide free cooling and heat recovery.
For a multizone system, only one zone is specified as the control zone. The thermostat is located in this
control zone as set by the Thermostatic control zone for unitary system at the top of the HVAC tab at zone
level. So when using this system you should be careful to locate the thermostat in a zone which will have a
representative temperature for the whole building, otherwise some zones may become over/under
heated/cooled.
Only one Unitary multizone system can be defined per building.
- 297 -
Note
The Compact HVAC type must be set to Unitary multizone at building level and in all zones which are part of
the system. Other zones can have HVAC type Unitary single zone or Fan coil units but not VAV or CAV.
Technical EnergyPlus
For both single and multi zone unitary systems, EnergyPlus needs both the heating coil and cooling DX coil to
be defined so even if heating or cooling is not selected in the input, DesignBuilder will include both coils in the
IDF data supplied to EnergyPlus and schedule the appropriate coil to be off.
System type
template.
System availability
level for 2-Unitary multizone systems and at the zone level for 5-Fan coil.

the Fan operation mode can be set to 2-Cycling in which case air distribution only occurs when there is
heating or cooling demand.
template:
Unitary Outside Air

Unitary Fans
Unitary Heat Recovery
- 298 -
Unitary Ventilation
Unitary Economisers
Unitary Heating
Unitary Cooling
Unitary Humidity Control
Unitary Ventilation
MECHANICAL VENTILATION
Check the mechanical ventilation checkbox to indicate that outside air and/or re-circulated air is delivered to
the zone. You can use this setting to define mechanical ventilation and air delivered through centrally ducted
air conditioning systems.
Note that Mechanical Ventilation data refers to the fan-powered air delivery through the main HVAC system
and not a separate mechanical ventilation system.
the HVAC tab.
Outside air requirement data is set at the zone level on the HVAC tab for all HVAC configurations
and options.
Outside air flow control through the AHU when using 2-Unitary multizone calculated set at
building level based on the sum of the individual zones connected to the system.
The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration data can be displayed on the Heating design, Cooling design and
together with the other environmental output it can be useful in checking for occupant discomfort.

are:
- 299 -

calculated as:
calculated as:
NumberPeople/ 1000)

Note: in Compact HVAC systems, the total mixed air flow rate into the zone is calculated by EnergyPlus and
will often be higher than the outside air flow rate due to the mixing of recirculated air to provide enough airflow
to delivery any additional heating/cooling.
Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule

You can modify the total outside airflow using the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule.
Whatever the outside air flow would have been without the schedule is multiplied by the current schedule
value. So, for example, if you select a schedule which is always 0.5, then the system will supply half the
outside air flow at all times vs. the same run without the schedule. You can also use this schedule to switch off
outside air during unoccupied periods.

It can be defined at the zone level when using Compact HVAC or it can be left in the default state (Auto), in
which case the maximum supply air flow rate is calculated based only on the maximum heating and cooling
capacities.

the Fan operation mode (below) can be set to 2-Cycling in which case air distribution only occurs when there
is heating or cooling demand.
- 300 -
Unitary Fans
Outside air sizing

When the Outside air definition method is 2-Min fresh air per person, sizing for minimum Outside air (OA)
flow rate is done using the 'Number of People' value (see above) with no regard for the schedules. The total
OA requirement for each zone on the air handler is summed and used to set the minimum OA flow rate for the
air handler. The OA controller sets an OA flow rate for the air handler each time step. After that, each zone
receives a pro-rated share of the total OA flow proportioned by the current supply flow rate to each zone.
There is no further zone-by-zone allocation of OA quantities, which is what happens in a real system.
Unitary Fans
Fan operation mode

In Compact Unitary HVAC systems the supply fan has two different possible operating modes. The choices for
this field are:
1-Continuous - fan operates using air distribution availability schedule (above)

2-Cycling - fan operates when heating or cooling is delivered.
For most commercial buildings, continuous fan operation will continue to supply outside air to the zones as
typically required by code. For continuous fan operation, the System Availability Schedule is the supply fan
operating schedule. For systems where the supply fan only runs when either cooling or heating needs to be
supplied to the zone such as for many residential systems, cycling should be specified.
Fan pressure rise

level, 101325 Pa.

Fan motor in air (%)

Enter the percentage of the motor heat that is added to the air stream. A value of 0 means that the motor is
completely outside the air stream. A value of 100 means that all of the motor heat will go into the air stream
and act to cause a temperature rise. Must be between 0 and 100.

Document. A summary is provided below:
Unitary Heat Recovery

With Compact HVAC, you can specify air-to-air heat recovery which is available between the relief air stream
and the outside air inlet stream. Heat recovery is selected for Unitary multizone systems by checking Heat
Recovery On under the Mechanical Ventilation header at building level. For Unitary single zone make the
selection at the zone level.
- 301 -
Heat recovery type

Enter the type of air-to-air heat recovery. The choices are:
1-Sensible - recovers sensible heat

2-Enthalpy - recovers sensible and latent heat.

Enter the sensible heat recovery effectiveness. This is applied as a constant effectiveness at all conditions.
The valid range is from 0.0 to 1.0, and the default is 0.70.

Enter the latent heat recovery effectiveness if Heat Recovery Type is Enthalpy. This is applied as a constant
effectiveness at all conditions. The valid range is from 0.0 to 1.0, and the default is 0.65.
Heat recovery heating setpoint temperature

When no economiser is selected this data defines the heating setpoint temperature of the heat recovery
device. Note that the single value is applied throughout the year. For example enter 15C to model a system
which heats outside air up to 15C and no higher. A high setpoint value will provide optimal heating but this
may add to cooling loads in the summer.
Heat recovery operation schedule

Use this schedule to define the availability of the heat recovery device. Schedule values of 1 mean that heat
recovery is available and values of 0 mean that it is not available and that the bypass is opened. You may
want to use this control to bypass heat recovery in the summer for example.
Heat recovery + economizer

If an economiser (free cooling option) is selected, the heat recovery is bypassed whenever the economiser
operates and the heat recovery is always bypassed if economiser operation would be beneficial.
The heat recovery will operate when:
Heat recovery is switched on at the building level for unitary multizone systems and at zone level for
Unitary single zone systems AND
The heat recovery schedule has a value of 1 AND
When economiser operation is off.
You can have heat recovery and no Economiser action by switching on Heat recovery and setting economiser
to 1-None. In this case the heat recovery units heats outside air using the Heat recovery heating setpoint
temperature above. It also cools outside air when return air temperature is lower than outside air
temperature.
If the economiser is selected together with heat recovery then the Heat recovery heating setpoint
temperature data is not shown and the effective heat recovery setpoint temperature is given by the lower
economiser limit temperature.
Unitary Economisers
Economisers are used to provide cooling when the outdoor temperature is lower than the indoor temperature.
An economizer is a damper opening that draws up to 100% outside air when the outside air is cooler than the
temperature inside the building, thereby providing free cooling. An outdoor air economy cycle can reduce
cooling energy requirements by some 20% to 30%, or around 5% of the air conditioning energy use and are
often required by energy codes for larger air conditioning units.
See under Heat recovery for information about how economisers interact with heat recovery.
Note: Economiser operation applies to the overall HVAC system and so for Unitary multizone systems its
data is set at building level. For Unitary single zone systems the data at zone level is used.
- 302 -
Unitary Heating
There are four options:
1-None where no economizer operation will be simulated and outside fresh air is based purely on the
2-Differential dry bulb the economizer increases the outdoor air flow rate above the minimum outdoor
air flow when there is a cooling load and the outdoor air temperature or enthalpy is below the zone
exhaust air temperature.
3-Differential enthalpy the economizer increases the outdoor air flow rate above the minimum outdoor
air flow when there is a cooling load and the outdoor air enthalpy is below that of the zone exhaust air.
4-Differential dry bulb and enthalpy - where both the above limit controls are in operation, i.e. both
temperature or enthalpy limits are used so that when either the temperature or the enthalpy of the air
entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air temperature/enthalpy, the
outside airflow rate is set to the minimum.
In addition to the above checks, the economiser can also have absolute limits on temperature and enthalpy of
the outside air. When the outside air conditions go beyond these limits the EnergyPlus economiser switches to
minimum outside air mode, i.e. the outside air damper is closed to its minimum position and heat recovery will
be enabled if available.
Economiser upper temperature limit

Enter the outside air temperature high limit for economizer operation. If the outside air temperature is above
this limit, the outside air flow rate will be set to the minimum.
Economiser lower temperature limit

Enter the outside air temperature low limit for economizer operation. If the outside air temperature is below
Economiser upper enthalpy limit

Enter the outside air upper enthalpy limit for economizer operation. If the outside air enthalpy is above this
value, the outside air flow rate will be set to the minimum.
Lockout
Unitary systems can also have lockout control:
1-No lockout - default option.

2-Lockout with heating - when the packaged unit is in heating mode, the economiser is locked out
i.e., the economiser dampers are closed and there is minimum outside air flow.
3-Lockout with compressor - in addition to locking out the economizer when the unit is in heating
mode the economizer is locked out when the DX unit compressor is on. In other words, when the DX
coil is off, the economizer must meet the entire cooling load it isnt allowed to operate in conjunction
with the DX cooling coil. Similarly, when the DX coil is operating, the economizer is not allowed to
operate. The Lockout with compressor option is sometimes called a 'non-integrated economizer'.
Unitary Heating
HEATING CAPACITY
This data is only visible at zone level and only when the Manual sizing model option is selected. The heating
capacity can either be entered by hand or can be autosized using the Heating Design Calculations. By default,
if immediately prior to a Simulation the heating capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a
previous Heating design calculation) then a Heating design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the
capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works.
Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to 2Manual to avoid this happening.
- 303 -
HEATING PLANT
A single set of heating plant data is required per building and all unitary zones in the building refer to this data
when plant fuel consumption is calculated.
Unitary heating fuel

This data is only visible at building level (even for Unitary single zone systems), that is all unitary heating
systems in the building must use the same fuel. Select the type of fuel used to generate the heating energy choose from:
Interface Fuel Name
2-Natural Gas
3-Oil
4-Coal
5-LPG
6-Biogas
7-Anthracite
10-Biomass
11-Waste Heat
Fuel in results
Electricity
Gas
Oil
Solid fuel
Bottled gas
Bottled gas
Solid fuel
Solid fuel
Other
Other
Other
calculated by EnergyPlus directly and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
Heating coil CoP

This data is only visible at building level, that is all Unitary heating systems have the same CoP. The CoP can
only be entered for non-electric heating coils. Electric heating coils are assumed to a have a CoP of 1.
The Unitary heating system Coefficient of Performance is only used to calculate the fuel consumption required
to meet heating demand. The value represents the total seasonal efficiency of the entire heating system and
should include the effect of all energy consumption associated with building heating such as any boiler fan
energy, boiler inefficiency, control equipment etc.
You should enter a value of 1 if you wish the results displayed in DesignBuilder to agree with those calculated
by EnergyPlus directly and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
Unitary distribution loss

This data is only visible at building level, that is all unitary heating systems have the same distribution loss.
The distribution loss is an additional loss accounting for the loss of heat to outside due to distribution of hot
fluids through the building. It acts in combination with the CoP to increase the fuel consumption based on the
heating load.
RADIATOR/BASEBOARD HEATING (DISABLED IN V3)

Radiator/baseboard heating is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other equipment in the
zone that have higher heating priority.Radiators/baseboards operate according to the same set of time varying
zone heating temperature setpoints as the main heating system.
With unitary single zone system you have the option for the radiator/baseboard heating to either supplement
the main heating coil or to replace it. With the other system types the radiators/baseboard heater always
supplements the main heating though you can operate the system without terminal reheat and/or AHU heating
coils and heat purely by baseboard heating.
- 304 -
Unitary Cooling
To use radiant/baseboard heating switch on the option under the Heating header on the HVAC tab and enter
information on:
Type
Choose between:
1-Hot water - where the radiator/baseboard coils are served by hot water from the main heating
system. In this case you can also enter a radiant fraction to model radiant heat (more below).
2-Electric - where the radiator/baseboard coils are heated by electricity and heating is
considered to be entirely convective.
Mode
This option is only available for single zone unitary systems:
1-Supplements main heating - where the radiator/baseboard coils provide additional backup
heating in cases where the heating setpoint temperature has not been satisfied by the main
heating system.
2-Replaces main heating - where the radiator/baseboard coils are used instead of the main
unitary single zone heating coils.This option allows you to model radiant heating systems.
Radiant fraction
Radiant fraction specifies what fraction of the power input to the radiator/baseboard heater is actually
transferred to the space as radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of
the total power that is modelled as radiant, the remaining energy is added to the zone as convective
heat transfer. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the baseboard heater is distributed to people
and specific surfaces using the remaining fields.
This option is only available for hot-water radiator/baseboard systems.
Technical Notes
1. Entering a value greater than zero will cause a the EnergyPlus
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water system to be used instead of the default
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric system as a post-process to the idf data.
2. The radiant heat is transferred to the floor, or if the floor is smaller than 1m2, then to the
largest other surface in the zone.
3. A default of 10% of the radiant heat is assumed to fall directly on the zone occupants and
this is subsequently convected into the zone.
Unitary Multizone
When using the 2-Unitary multizone system type, the operating schedule for the central heating coils is set
under the AHU Heating Coil Operation header at building level.
Note: only one set of zone thermostatic control data is used per Unitary multizone system - this is the zone for
which Thermostatic control zone for unitary system is selected.
Unitary Single zone

Heating operation schedules are set at zone level and there is no central plant apart from the boiler.
OPERATION
Unitary Cooling
- 305 -
Cooling capacity
This data is only visible at zone level and only when the Manual sizing model option is selected. The Cooling
capacity can either be entered by hand or can be autosized using the Cooling Design Calculations. If,
immediately prior to a Simulation the Cooling capacity has not been entered (neither by hand nor from a
previous Cooling Design Calculation) then a Cooling design autosizing simulation is started to calculate the
capacity. The Plant sizing building model option controls the way this works.
Options change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the Plant sizing model option to 2Manual to avoid this happening.
COOLING PLANT
A single set of cooling plant data is required per building and all unitary zones in the building refer to this data
when plant fuel consumption is calculated.
Unitary cooling fuel

This data is only visible at building level (even for Unitary single zone systems), that is all unitary cooling
systems in the building must use the same fuel. Select the type of fuel used to generate the heating energy choose from:
Interface Fuel Name
1-Electricity from grid <default value>
2-Natural Gas
3-Oil
4-Coal
5-LPG
6-Biogas
7-Anthracite
10-Biomass
11-Waste Heat
Fuel in results
Electricity
Gas
Oil
Solid fuel
Bottled gas
Bottled gas
Solid fuel
Solid fuel
Other
Other
Other
calculated by EnergyPlus directly and displayed on the Summary tab of the Simulation screen.
Unitary Cooling system CoP

This data is only visible at building level, that is all Unitary cooling systems have the same CoP. The cooling
system coefficient of performance is used to calculate the fuel consumption required to meet cooling demand.
The value represents the total seasonal efficiency of the entire cooling system and should include the effect of
all energy consumption associated with building cooling such as fan and pump energy, chiller inefficiency,
control equipment etc.
Unitary distribution loss

This data is only visible at building level, that is all Unitary cooling systems have the same distribution loss. An
additional loss accounting for the loss of cooling to outside due to distribution of chilled fluids through the
building. It acts in combination with the CoP to increase the fuel consumption based on the cooling load.
- 306 -
OPERATION

When using Unitary Compact HVAC you can control humidity in zones by including separate humidification
and/or dehumidification equipment and controls. Both humidification and dehumidification require settings at
building level for Unitary multizone systems or at zone level for Single zone unitary systems (of course in the
latter case defaults can be set at building level).
HUMIDIFICATION
To include humidification check the Humidification checkbox and make further settings. The humidifier is
electric powered and the data required is: availability schedule, rated capacity and water supply rate. The
humidification setpoint is defined on the Activity tab.
For Unitary multizone systems you must also define the humidification control zone.
Humidification availability schedule

Select the schedule that defines the availability of humidification. The schedule values denote whether the
humidifier can run during a given time period. A schedule value of 1.0 indicates that the humidifier can be on
during a given time period. A value of zero denotes that the humidifier cannot be used during that time period.
Humidifier Rated Capacity

Enter the rated moisture output rate in m3/s or CFM. The humidifier does not currently autosize, so the default
is very large to allow for adequate capacity. The default is 0.000001 m3/s.
DE-HUMIDIFICATION
To include dehumidification check the Dehumidification checkbox and make further settings. The
dehumidification setpoint is defined on the Activity tab.
For Unitary multizone systems you must also define the humidification control zone.
Control type
For unitary systems, there are two dehumidification control type options available:
1-Cool-Reheat Heating Coil cools beyond the dry-bulb setpoint as required to meet the humidity
setpoint if the system is capable of doing so. Reheat is provided as required by the heating coil. In the
simulation, two instances of the heating coil are modelled, one for heating, and one for reheat. The two
coil objects represent the same physical coil and never operate simultaneously.
2-Cool-Reheat Desuperheater cools beyond the dry-bulb setpoint as required to meet the humidity
setpoint if the system is capable of doing so. Reheat is provided by a desuperheater coil.
For Unitary multizone systems you must also define the dehumidification control zone.
Note that dehumidification will result in simultaneous heating and cooling to achieve reduced humidity of the
zone air.
- 307 -
Note: EnergyPlus autosizing does not yet account for dehumidification so in many cases you will have to
increase the Compact HVAC sizing factor above the default of 1.2 to a value up to 10 to obtain adequate
cooling coil sizes, depending on latent loads and the dehumidification setpoint.
Note: If you use one of the reheat dehumidifiers you must have reheat available to heat during times when
dehumidification is required. In practice this normally means having reheat available all year.
Note: You may need to use shorter timesteps for accurate humidity control. We recommend 10 per hour.
VAV + CAV
VAV (variable air volume) and CAV (constant volume) system types are both based on the EnergyPlus VAV
system type and so have similar common data entry.
VAV SYSTEMS
The VAV option allows you to model Variable Air Volume (VAV) HVAC configuration with optional preheat, air
handling unit heating and cooling coils and reheat and several different heating coil options. You can select
series or parallel fan powered terminal units (also known as powered induction units or PIU). There are
options to control the air distribution system in various ways including the ability to ensure minimum fresh air
delivery to each zone, set VAV box minimum flow fraction and various outside air options including an
economiser to provide free cooling when appropriate and heat recovery. You can also model heating and
cooling coil temperature reset.
Only one VAV system can be defined per building.
Note: the Compact HVAC type must be set to VAV at building level and in all zones which are part of the VAV
system. Other zones can have HVAC type Unitary single zone or Fan coil units but not Unitary multizone
or CAV.
- 308 -
CAV SYSTEMS
The CAV option allows you to model Constant Air Volume HVAC configuration with optional preheat, main
AHU heating coils and zone terminal reheat and several different heating coil options. There are options to
control the air distribution system in various ways including the ability to ensure minimum fresh air delivery to
each zone, set various outside air options including an economiser to provide free cooling when appropriate
and heating and cooling coil temperature reset .
Only one CAV system can be defined per building.
Note: the Compact HVAC type must be set to CAV at building level and in all zones which are part of the CAV
system. Other zones can have HVAC type Unitary single zone or Fan coil units but not Unitary multizone
or VAV.
- 309 -
System type
template.
System availability
level for VAV and CAV systems.
The rest of this section covers both VAV and CAV with differences pointed out where appropriate.
template:
VAV & CAV Ventilation

VAV & CAV Fans
VAV & CAV Economisers
VAV & CAV Heat Recovery
VAV Zone Terminal Units
VAV & CAV Heating
VAV & CAV Cooling
VAV & CAV Humidity Control
Mixed Mode
- 310 -

MECHANICAL VENTILATION
The mechanical ventilation checkbox must be checked for VAV and CAV systems. You can use this setting to
define mechanical ventilation and air delivered through centrally ducted air conditioning systems.
Note that Mechanical Ventilation data refers to the fan-powered air delivery through the main HVAC system
and not a separate mechanical ventilation system.
OUTSIDE AIR
the HVAC tab.
Outside air requirement data is set at the zone level on the HVAC tab for all HVAC configurations
and options.
Outside air flow control through the AHU is calculated at building from the sum of the outside air
requirements of each zone connected to the system.
The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration data can be displayed on the Heating design, Cooling design and
together with the other environmental output it can be very useful in checking for occupant discomfort.

are:
- 311 -
calculated as:
calculated as:
NumberPeople/ 1000)

Note: in Compact HVAC systems, the total mixed air flow rate into the zone is calculated by EnergyPlus and
will often be higher than the outside air flow rate due to the mixing of recirculated air to provide enough airflow
to delivery any additional heating/cooling.
Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule

You can modify the total outside airflow using the Minimum AHU outside air requirement schedule.
Whatever the outside air flow would have been without the schedule is multiplied by the current schedule
value. So, for example, if you select a schedule which is always 0.5, then the system will supply half the
outside air flow at all times vs. the same run without the schedule. You can also use this schedule to switch off
outside air during unoccupied periods.

It can be defined at the zone level or it can be left in the default state (Auto), in which case the maximum
supply air flow rate is calculated based only on the maximum heating and cooling capacities.

The System availability schedule defines the operation of the air system fans.
OUTSIDE AIR MIXING

This data is defined for CAV/VAV air handling units (AHU) at building level.
Outside air mixing

Select the way outside air is used:
- 312 -
1-Recirculation - the outside airflow supply to the AHU is mixed with recirculated return air from the
zones. This is done to save energy often in conjunction with an economiser to ensure that optimal use
is made of outside air. When heat recovery is used with the 1-Recirculation outside air mixing option,
the economiser must be selected in the interface for the heat recovery to be by-passed.
2-Full fresh air - the airflow into the AHU is 100% outside air, without any recirculation. This is
modelled in EnergyPlus by setting the supply airflow rate to the outside air flow rate. Note that when
using this option, fixing the supply air flow rate to the outside air rate will in many cases mean that the
system will not be capable of meeting the design cooling load. To increase the maximum cooling
capacity of a Full fresh air VAV/CAV system you can increase the outside air flow rate (such systems
could be very inefficient in energy use without heat recovery). When heat recovery is used with the 2Full fresh air outside air mixing option, the heat recovery is by-passed when this is advantageous in
reducing AHU cooling coil loads. The heat recovery also operates when the outside air temperature is
less than 12C.
Note: for Full fresh air systems, to ensure that a) there is no recirculation and b) that the requested
fresh air flow rate is provided, you must set the HVAC sizing factor to 1 (the default is 1.2)
Outside air control minimum flow type

This option allows you to specify the way minimum outside air flow rate is controlled for 3-VAV and 5-CAV
Compact HVAC types when the Outside air mixing type (above) is 1-Recirculation:
1-Fixed - the minimum outside air flow rate is fixed as set above no matter what the actual system flow
rate is. In practice even with 'Fixed' outside air control minimum it is possible for the outside air flow
rate into individual zones to be slightly different from the requested value. This is because the minimum
outside air is controlled at the AHU level to ensure that the total fresh air entering the AHU is the total
required for the building (the sum of the individual zone outside air requirements). But depending on
the heating/cooling loads in each zone, some zones will require more supply air to meet the load than
others. So the total fresh air entering the building will be correctly set as the sum of all the zone
minimum fresh air requirements as specified but the distribution around the building may not be
perfectly maintained.
2-Proportional - the minimum outside air flow rate varies in proportion to the total system air flow rate.
The minimum outside air flow rate through the AHU outside air inlet is automatically calculated as the sum of
the individual zone ventilation requirements. This is the 'design minimum'. During the simulation, 'minimum'
and 'maximum' represent the limits for economizer operation. If there is no economizer, then the minimum
flow of outside air is delivered. If 1-Fixed is selected, then this value will remain fixed (unless the total VAV
system flow rate falls below this value, in which case, the system will deliver 100% outside air at whatever the
system flow rate is). If, 2-Proportional is specified, then the operating minimum falls as system flow rate falls.
This simulates a typical system with a fixed lower stop on the outside air supply damper. Delivering 1-Fixed
requires enhanced control systems.
Note: To ensure minimum outside air is delivered to all zones you should use 1-Fixed.
If you select 2-Manual HVAC sizing you can enter the Outside air control minimum flow rate manually at
building level.
Outside air sizing

When the Outside air definition method is 2-Min fresh air per person, sizing for minimum Outside air (OA)
flow rate is done using the 'Number of People' value (see above) with no regard for the schedules.
The total OA requirement for each zone on the air handler is summed and used to set the minimum OA flow
rate for the air handler. The OA controller sets an OA flow rate for the air handler each time step. After that,
each zone receives a pro-rated share of the total OA flow proportioned by the current supply flow rate to each
zone. There is no further zone-by-zone allocation of OA quantities, which is what happens in a real system.
- 313 -
VAV & CAV Fans

HVAC tab in model data under Mechanical Ventilation header- Compact HVAC
Fan pressure rise

level, 101325 Pa.

Fan motor in air (%)

Enter the percentage of the motor heat that is added to the air stream. A value of 0 means that the motor is
completely outside the air stream. A value of 100 means that all of the motor heat will go into the air stream
and act to cause a temperature rise. Must be between 0 and 100.
Fan placement
Enter the supply fan placement type. There are two choices:
1-Draw through models a system where the supply air fan is after the cooling and heating coils.
2-Blow through where the supply air fan is before the cooling and heating coils.
The default is 1-Draw through.
Fan part-load power coefficients

Select the set of generic pre-defined coefficients to use for the supply fan part-load power consumption.
Choices are:
1-Inlet Vane Dampers - provides reduced power and wear on heavy duty fans. The inlet vane
dampers pre-spin the air entering the fan system, reducing energy consumption by the fan motors and
increasing efficiency.
2-Outlet Dampers - control flow by adding resistance.
3-Variable Speed Motor - the most efficient way to control flow rate.
4-ASHRAE 90.1-2004 Appendix G - predefined flow characteristics from ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G.
The resulting power curves are shown in the graph below. The ASHRAE 90.1-2004 Appendix G coefficients
are from TABLE G3.1.3.15, Method 2. The other sets of coefficients are from the EnergyPlus Input Output
Reference, Fan Coefficient Values table.
- 314 -

Document. A summary is provided below:

HVAC Economisers are useful for facilities which require some cooling even when the outdoor temperature is
lower than the indoor temperature. An economizer is a damper opening that draws up to 100% outside air
when the outside air is cooler than the temperature inside the building, thereby providing free cooling. An
outdoor air economy cycle can reduce cooling energy requirements by some 20% to 30%, or around 5% of
the air conditioning energy use and are often required by energy codes for larger air conditioning units.
See under Heat recovery for information about how economisers interact with heat recovery.
Economiser operation applies to the overall HVAC system and so for CAV and VAV systems its data is set at
building level.
There are four options:
1-None where no economizer operation will be simulated and outside fresh air is based on the
2-Differential dry bulb establishes a limit control on the return air temperature so that when the
temperature of the air entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air
temperature the outside airflow rate is set to the minimum.
- 315 -
3-Differential enthalpy establishes a limit control on the return air enthalpy so that when the enthalpy
of air entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air enthalpy the outside airflow
rate is set to the minimum.
4-Differential dry bulb and enthalpy - where both the above limit controls are in operation, i.e. both
temperature or enthalpy limits are used so that when either the temperature or the enthalpy of the air
entering the mixer on the outside air side is greater than the return air temperature/enthalpy, the
outside airflow rate is set to the minimum.
In addition to the above checks, the economiser can also have absolute limits on temperature and enthalpy of
the outside air. When the outside air conditions go beyond these limits the EnergyPlus economiser switches to
minimum outside air mode, i.e. the outside air damper is closed to its minimum position and heat recovery will
be enabled if available.
Economiser upper temperature limit

Enter the outside air temperature high limit for economizer operation. If the outside air temperature is above
Economiser lower temperature limit

Enter the outside air temperature low limit for economizer operation. If the outside air temperature is below
Economiser upper enthalpy limit

Enter the outside air upper enthalpy limit for economizer operation. If the outside air enthalpy is above this
value, the outside air flow rate will be set to the minimum.
VAV & CAV Heat Recovery

With Compact HVAC, you can specify air-to-air heat recovery which is available between the relief air stream
and the outside air inlet stream. Heat recovery is selected for CAV and VAV systems by checking Heat
Recovery On under the Mechanical Ventilation header at building level.
Heat recovery type

Enter the type of air-to-air heat recovery. The choices are:
1-Sensible - recovers sensible heat

2-Enthalpy - recovers sensible and latent heat.

Enter the sensible heat recovery effectiveness. This is applied as a constant effectiveness at all conditions.
The valid range is from 0.0 to 1.0, and the default is 0.70.

Enter the latent heat recovery effectiveness if Heat Recovery Type is Enthalpy. This is applied as a constant
effectiveness at all conditions. The valid range is from 0.0 to 1.0, and the default is 0.65.
Heat recovery schedule

Use this schedule to define the availability of the heat recovery device. Schedule values of 1 mean that heat
recovery is available and values of 0 mean that it is not available and that the bypass is opened. You may
want to use this control to bypass heat recovery in the summer for example.
Heat recovery + economizer

If an economiser (free cooling) option is selected, the heat recovery is bypassed whenever the economiser
operates and the heat recovery is always bypassed if economiser operation would be beneficial.
The heat recovery will operate when:
- 316 -
Heat recovery is switched on at the building level AND

The heat recovery schedule has a value of 1 AND
When economiser operation is off.
You can have heat recovery and no Economiser action by switching on Heat recovery and setting economiser
to 1-None. In this case the heat recovery units heats outside air using the Heat recovery heating setpoint
temperature above. It also cools outside air when return air temperature is lower than outside air
temperature.
When heat recovery is used with the 2-Full fresh air outside air mixing option the heat recovery is by-passed
when this is advantageous in reducing AHU heating/cooling coil loads. Otherwise, when using the 1Recirculation option, the economiser must be selected in the interface for the heat recovery to be by-passed
in this way.

Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry bulb temperature inside a zone by varying the supply air
volume instead of the air temperature. At full cooling the VAV terminal unit damper is fully open supplying the
specified maximum design air flow rate. As the cooling load decreases, the damper closes until it reaches the
minimum stop specified by the turndown ratio (zone minimum air flow fraction). If the supply flow rate is at its
minimum value and zone temperature would still go below the heating setpoint temperature then the reheat
coil is activated to ensure comfort levels are maintained.
VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system, air temperature control,
and reheating devices. Heating is provided by use of reheat coils.
Note: Zone Terminal unit data is used at the zone level.
Turndown ratio (supply air minimum flow fraction)

The fraction that the zone VAV box can reduce to based on the supply air maximum flow rate. The minimum
flow rate to the zone while the system is operating is specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate. The
turndown ratio is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants.
The reheat coil operates only when the damper is at this minimum flow rate when Zone damper heating
action is set to 1-Normal (the default).
A value of 0 means the VAV box can completely shut off flow into the zone and a value of 1.0 means that the
VAV box cannot reduce supply air at all (i.e. it is a constant volume system). For CAV systems this data is
fixed at 1 and is not available for edit.
Turndown ratio is typically in range 0.3 - 0.5. Minimum is 0 and maximum is 1.
VAV terminal unit type

DesignBuilder provides 3 different VAV zone terminal unit types:
1-Standard - The VAV terminal unit contains a damper and optionally a reheat coil. During heating the
VAV unit can either work in Normal mode where the supply air flow into the zone is the minimum air
flow rate of the VAV system, essentially acting like a constant volume system or in Reverse action
mode the air flow rate through the VAV box may increase above the minimum air flow when the heating
demand cannot otherwise be satisfied. This is also the terminal type used for CAV systems.
2-Series PIU - The Series Powered Induction Unit is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying
amounts of secondary (recirculated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a fixed flow of
air to a zone. The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for
heating the mixed secondary and primary air. The fan runs at a constant volume flow rate whenever the
unit is on. The fan is downstream of the primary and secondary air inlets. The variable mixing is
accomplished by a damper in the units primary air supply inlet duct. This damper can move from fully
open (100% primary air. 0% secondary air) to a minimum stop that can be specified in the input
description. At full cooling the damper will be fully open. At minimum cooling and for heating the
damper will be at the minimum stop and the secondary air flow will be at its maximum. It uses the
EnergyPlus SINGLE DUCT:SERIES PIU:REHEAT data.
- 317 -
3-Parallel PIU - The Parallel Powered Induction Unit is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying
amounts of secondary (recirculated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a variable total
flow of air to a zone. The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating
coil for heating the mixed secondary and primary air. The secondary and primary air streams enter the
unit in parallel. The fan sits in the secondary air stream and runs only when secondary air is needed.
The primary air inlet contains a damper that can move from fully open (maximum primary air) to a
minimum stop (minimum primary air). At full cooling load the primary air damper is fully open and the
fan is off. The primary air flow is at maximum and there is little or no secondary air flow. As the cooling
load decreases, the primary air damper gradually closes and the secondary air flow remains close to
zero. At some point, usually when the primary air flow has reached the minimum, the fan switches on
and secondary air is induced. The heating coil will switch on as needed to meet any heating demand. It
uses the EnergyPlus SINGLE DUCT:PARALLEL PIU:REHEAT data.
See VAV for a schematic diagram showing the 3 Zone terminal unit types connected to an air distribution
system.
Parallel fan on flow fraction

For parallel PIUs, this data specifies the fraction of the primary air flow at which fan turns on. In the parallel
PIU the fan operation is intermittent. If the primary air flow is above this fraction of the maximum, the fan is off.
Otherwise it is on.
This data is available when using VAV Compact HVAC with the Parallel PIU VAV terminal unit type and the
plant sizing options Autosize when not set or Manual.
Terminal Unit Fans

When using fan powered terminal units (PIU) you can specify the characteristics of the terminal unit fans.
Terminal Unit Fan Total Efficiency

Enter the total efficiency of the zone induction fan. This is the ratio of the power delivered to the air to the
electrical input power at maximum flow. This is also the product of the fan motor efficiency and fan (impeller)
efficiency. The motor efficiency is the power delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the
motor. The fan efficiency is the power delivered to the air divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to
the fluid is the mass
than or equal to 1.
Terminal Unit Fan Delta Pressure

Enter the pressure rise of the zone induction fan in Pa at full flow and standard conditions. Standard
conditions are considered 20C at sea level, 101325 Pa.
VAV & CAV Heating

Heating in VAV and CAV systems can be provided through any or all of: AHU heating, zone reheat and
radiators/baseboards
HEATING CAPACITY
- 318 -
VAV & CAV Heating
HEATING PLANT (BUILDING LEVEL)

Boiler
At building level you can select the boiler to be used to provide hot water to all heating coils. Only one boiler
can be specified for the whole building, i.e. there is only a single hot water circuit served by one boiler in
Compact HVAC simulations.
OUTSIDE AIR PREHEAT COILS (BUILDING LEVEL)

AHU preheat data is specified for the whole building and is not accessible at zone level.
Coil type
The preheat coil is located in the outside air stream, upstream of the outside air mixing box and tempers the
outside air. If no preheat coil is used in the VAV system, then the option 1-None should be specified here.
Otherwise this indicates the type of preheat coil. It is unlikely that both a heating coil and a preheat coil would
be used at the same time. The options are:
1-None - no preheat.
2-Electric - preheat coils powered by electricity (assumed 100% efficient, 0 distribution loss).
3-Gas - gas-fired preheat coils (assumed 80% efficient, 0 distribution loss).
Off-coil air temperature set point

When preheat is specified, this data defines the temperature of the air coming off the preheat coils assuming
idealised control. Preheat coils are automatically sized by EnergyPlus before the simulation to provide this off
coil temperature given the flow rates in the air handling unit.
AHU HEATING (BUILDING LEVEL)

The central AHU heating data is specified for the whole building and is not accessible at zone level.
Coil type
The main central heating coil is located in the supply air stream, upstream of the cooling coil and after the
outside air mixing box. If no central heating coil is used in the VAV system, then the option 1-None should be
specified here. Otherwise this indicates the type of heating coil. It is unlikely that both a heating coil and a
preheat coil would be used at the same time. The options are:
1-None - no heating.
2-Electric - heating coils powered by electricity (assumed 80% efficient, 0 distribution loss).
3-Hot water - heating coils supplied with hot water generated by a boiler.
4-Gas - gas-fired heating coils (assumed 80% efficient, 0 distribution loss).
If you select 3-Hot water main heating coils, the program generates data to simulate the boiler and the pumps
required to serve the heating coil.
Heating coil setpoint reset type

Select the type of automatic reset control for the central heating supply air temperature for CAV and VAV
system. The choices are:
1-None no reset, use the Off-coil air temperature set point in conjunction with the Zone setpoint
schedule.
2-Outdoor air temperature reset reset the heating supply air temperature to be lower than the
design value when the outdoor temperature is milder according to the conditions defined below.
The default is 1-None.

Take care when using 2-Outdoor air temperature reset as the resultant heating off coil temperature may
sometimes be higher than the cooling coil temperature in which case simultaneous heating and cooling can
occur if both are switched on at the time. This will not be obvious from looking at the heating and cooling offcoil temperature set points in the interface. In particular, if you also have an AHU cooling coil you must make
- 319 -
sure that it does not operate simultaneously with the AHU heating coil by settings the appropriate AHU coil
operation schedules.
Design off-coil set point temperature

When AHU heating coils are specified, this data defines the design temperature of the air coming off the coils
assuming idealised control. Heating coils are automatically sized by EnergyPlus before the simulation to
provide this off coil temperature given the flow rates in the air handling unit.
You should make sure that this value is lower than the AHU cooling coil off-coil temperature at all times to
avoid simultaneous heating and cooling.
Corresponding outdoor low temperature

When using Outdoor air temperature reset, this is the low outdoor temperature at and below which the Design
off-coil set point temperature is applied.
Min off-coil set point temperature

Required when using Outdoor air temperature reset, this data defines the temperature of the air coming off the
coils when the outdoor temperature is at or above the outdoor high temperature below. This value should be
lower than the Design off-coil set point temperature.
Corresponding outdoor high temperature

Required when using Outdoor air temperature reset, this data is the high outdoor temperature at and above
which the Min off-coil set point temperature is applied.
VAV TERMINAL REHEAT COILS (ZONE LEVEL)

Reheat data is specified for individual zones.
Coil type
Use this data to either switch reheat off or select either electric or hot water reheat coils. The options are:
1-None - no heating.
2-Electric - heating coils powered by electricity (assumed 100% efficient, 0 distribution loss).
3-Hot water - heating coils supplied with hot water generated by a boiler.
If you select 3-Hot water main heating coils, DesignBuilder generates data to simulate the boiler and the
pumps required to serve the reheat coil.
Zone damper heating action

During heating operation, there are two control options for the damper controlling the air flow in the VAV
terminal unit as the zone moves above or below the zone setpoint. With both control options, the damper is at
the minimum air flow rate whenever the zone temperature is between the cooling and heating setpoints.
1-Normal - the damper will remain at the minimum air flow rate during heating operation. As the
heating load increases, the water flow rate in the reheat coil will be increased to maintain temperature
in the zone until the maximum water flow rate is reached. The system essentially acts like a constant
volume system during heating.
2-Reverse - the air flow rate through the VAV box may increase above the minimum air flow when the
heating demand cannot be satisfied unless greater air flow is provided. As the heating load increases,
the unit starts at minimum air flow and minimum hot water flow. The hot water flow is increased until it
reaches maximum flow, then the air damper starts to open to meet the load. This option is used if the
minimum air flow rate is not adequate to serve the peak heating load.
Note: you should switch heating 'on' if you want the zone to be heated to the heating setpoint temperature
specified on the Activity tab.
- 320 -
VAV & CAV Cooling
RADIATOR/BASEBOARD HEATING (ZONE LEVEL) (DISABLED IN V3)

Radiator/baseboard heating is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other equipment in the
zone that have higher heating priority.Radiators/baseboards operate according to the same set of time varying
zone heating temperature setpoints as the main heating system.
To use radiant/baseboard heating switch on the option under the Heating header on the HVAC tab and enter
information on:
Type
Choose between:
1-Hot water - where the radiator/baseboard coils are served by hot water from the main heating
system. In this case you can also enter a radiant fraction to model radiant heat (more below).
2-Electric - where the radiator/baseboard coils are heated by electricity and heating is
considered to be entirely convective.
Radiant fraction
Radiant fraction specifies what fraction of the power input to the radiator/baseboard heater is actually
transferred to the space as radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of
the total power that is modelled as radiant, the remaining energy is added to the zone as convective
heat transfer. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the baseboard heater is distributed to people
and specific surfaces using the remaining fields.
This option is only available for hot-water radiator/baseboard systems.
Technical Notes
1. Entering a value greater than zero will cause a the EnergyPlus
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:RadiantConvective:Water system to be used instead of the default
ZoneHVAC:Baseboard:Convective:Electric system as a post-process to the idf data.
2. The radiant heat is transferred to the floor, or if the floor is smaller than 1m2, then to the largest
other surface in the zone.
3. A default of 10% of the radiant heat is assumed to fall directly on the zone occupants and this is
subsequently convected into the zone.
LOCAL HEATING CONTROL (ZONE LEVEL)

VAV & CAV Cooling

Cooling capacity
- 321 -
COOLING PLANT (BUILDING LEVEL)

Chiller
Select the chiller to be used to provide cold water to cooling coils. Only one chiller can be specified for the
whole building in Compact HVAC, i.e. there is only a single cold water circuit served by one chiller in Compact
HVAC simulations.
Chilled water setpoint temperature

Enter the chilled water setpoint temperature to be used for sizing the chilled water loop and associated
equipment.
Condenser water setpoint temperature

Enter the condenser water temperature to be used for sizing the condenser loop and associated equipment.
Cooling tower type

Select from:
1-Single speed
2- Two speed
The EnergyPlus equipment object types which are used are CoolingTower:SingleSpeed or
CoolingTower:TwoSpeed.
VAV CENTRAL COOLING COILS (BUILDING LEVEL)

The central AHU cooling coil data is specified for the whole building and is not accessible at zone level.
Cooling coil type

The cooling coil must be one of:
1-None i.e. there is no cooling coil

2-Chilled water to model a chilled water coil.
The default is 2-Chilled water.

Note: you can achieve 'free cooling' without a cooling coil by selecting 1-None but you will only get the cooling
effect of the HVAC air on the zone if the outside air + any fan pickup is cooler than the zone air temperature.
The difference between switching cooling off altogether (by unchecking the Cooled checkbox) and setting
cooling coil type to 1-None is that in the latter case controlled free cooling is possible due to relatively cool
outside air being introduced to the building but when cooling is switched off altogether there is no possibility of
controlled cooling through the HVAC system.
Design off-coil set point temperature

This data defines the temperature of the air coming off the AHU cooling coils assuming idealised control.
Cooling coils are automatically sized by EnergyPlus before the simulation to provide this off coil temperature
given the flow rates in the air handling unit.
Cooling coil setpoint reset type

Select the type of automatic reset control for the central cooling supply air temperature. The choices are:
1-None no reset, use the Off-coil air temperature set point in conjunction with the Zone setpoint
schedule.
2-Outdoor air temperature reset reset the cooling supply air temperature based on the following
default rules. When the outdoor dry bulb temperature (ODB) is at or below 15.6C the setpoint is 18C.
When the ODB is at or above 26.7C the setpoint is the Off-coil air temperature set point. In
between, the setpoint is varied linearly. These control parameters are from ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G
par. G3.1.3.12. The specific off-coil temperature profile can be edited using the data below.
- 322 -
3-Warmest - reset the cooling supply air temperature to the highest supply air temperature that will
meet the cooling requirements of all the zones (i.e. according to the cooling demand of the warmest
zone). The minimum setpoint allowed is the Off-coil air temperature set point (above). The maximum
setpoint allowed is defaulted to 18C but can be overriden using controls below. For each zone in the
system at each system time step the EnergyPlus set-point manager calculates a supply air temperature
that will meet the zone cooling load at the maximum zone supply air flow rate. The lowest of the
possible supply air temperatures becomes the new supply air temperature set point, subject to
minimum and maximum supply air temperature constraints. The resulting temperature set point is the
highest supply air temperature that will meet the cooling requirements of all the zones. When compared
to a fixed cooling supply air temperature set point, this strategy minimizes zone reheat coil energy (or
overcooling) and central chiller energy consumption (if the chilled water temperature is also reset) at
the cost of possible increased fan energy.
The 2003 ASHRAE Applications Handbook discusses warmest reset control for constant volume
systems (p.41.27) and calls it "Supply Air Temperature Reset for Constant Air Volume (CAV)". A
requirement is set out in ASHRAE Std 90.1-2004, Appendix G, paragraph G3.1.3.12: Supply air
temperature shall be reset based on zone demand from the design temperature difference to a 10F
temperature difference under minimum load conditions. Design air flow rates shall be sized for the reset
supply air temperature, i.e., a 10F temperature difference.
Tip: using Warmest or Outside air temperature cooling coil setpoint reset can drastically improve energy
efficiency by reducing the cooling energy delivered to the airstream to the minimum required for occupant
comfort.
The DesignBuilder HVAC template default is Warmest for constant volume systems and None for other
system types.
Corresponding outdoor high temperature

When using Outdoor air temperature reset, this is the high outdoor temperature at and above which the
Design off-coil set point temperature is applied.
Max off-coil set point temperature

Required when using Outdoor air temperature reset and Warmest options, above. When using Outdoor air
temperature this data defines the temperature of the air coming off the coils when the outdoor temperature is
at or below the outdoor high temperature below.
When using Warmest reset, this is the upper limit on off-coil cooling set point temperature.
In both cases, this value should be higher than the Design off-coil set point temperature.
Corresponding outdoor low temperature

Required when using Outdoor air temperature reset, this data is the low outdoor temperature at and below
which the Min off-coil set point temperature is applied.
OPERATION (ZONE DATA)


With VAV and CAV Compact HVAC systems, you can control humidity in zones by including separate
humidification and/or dehumidification equipment and controls. Both humidification and dehumidification
require settings at building level.
- 323 -
HUMIDIFICATION
To include humidification check the Humidification checkbox and make further settings. The humidifier is
electric powered and the data required is: availability schedule, rated capacity and water supply rate. The
humidification setpoint is defined on the Activity tab for each zone.
You must also define the humidification control zone.
Humidification availability schedule

Select the schedule that defines the availability of humidification. The schedule values denote whether the
humidifier can run during a given time period. A schedule value of 1.0 indicates that the humidifier can be on
during a given time period. A value of zero denotes that the humidifier cannot be used during that time period.
Humidifier Rated Capacity

Enter the rated moisture output rate in m3/s or CFM. The humidifier does not currently autosize, so the default
is very large to allow for adequate capacity. The default is 0.000001 m3/s.
Humidification control zone

The control zone to be used to control humidification.
DE-HUMIDIFICATION
To include dehumidification check the Dehumidification checkbox and make further settings. The
dehumidification setpoint is defined on the Activity tab.
You must also define the de-humidification control zone.
Control type
For VAV and CAV only one option is available:
1-Cool Reheat cools beyond the dry-bulb setpoint as required to meet the humidity setpoint if the
system is capable of doing so. Reheat is provided as required by the terminal unit reheat coils if
available.
Dehumidification control zone

The control zone to be used to control dehumidification.
Note that dehumidification will result in simultaneous heating and cooling to achieve reduced humidity of the
zone air.
Note: EnergyPlus autosizing does not yet account for dehumidification so in many cases you will have to
increase the Compact HVAC sizing factor above the default of 1.2 to a value up to 10 to obtain adequate
cooling coil sizes, depending on latent loads and the dehumidification setpoint.
Note: If you use one of the reheat dehumidifiers you must have reheat available to heat during times when
dehumidification is required. In practice this normally means having reheat available all year.
Note: You may need to use shorter timesteps for accurate humidity control. We recommend 10 per hour.
VAV & CAV Night Cycle Control

Night cycle control (VAV/CAV)
The Night cycle control manager is used for cycling on CAV and VAV air systems when one or more zones
become too hot or too cold. The usual situation is that the central air handler is turned off at night. However if
the building gets too cold there might be condensation on the walls and other damage. Thus the control
system is usually programmed to turn the system on if one control thermostat or any thermostat shows a zone
temperature of less than a night time set point. Similarly there might be a concern about a building getting too
- 324 -
hot. Again the control system is programmed to turn the air handler back on if one or any zone temperature
exceeds a night time cooling set point. This data gives the user flexibility in determining how the night time
on/off decision will be made. The manager can look at the temperature in one Night cycle control zone or it
can sample all the zones connected to the air handler (Cycle on any).
Enter the system behavior during times when the System availability schedule (above) is zero (off). The
possible inputs are:
Stay Off - the system will remain off, no matter how hot or cold the zones may be.
Cycle on any - if any zone served by this system has an air temperature outside the cooling or heating
set points the central fan will turn on even though the System availability schedule indicates the fan is
off.
Cycle on control zone - same as Cycle on any except the availability manager looks at the
temperature in only the zone specified by the Night cycle control zone. Note that when using this
option you must select one zone as being the Night cycle control zone. Do this by checking the
option at zone level in the zone used as the control zone (below).
The default is 1-Stay off.

The On cycle period is the time for which the system will run after it has cycled on. This is hard-set to 1 hour.
HVAC Control Zones

When using some Compact HVAC options you may need to specify a zone to be the control zone, i.e. the
conditions in this single zone will be used to decide the operation of the HVAC system as a whole. The control
zone checkboxes are only visible at zone level and for certain system types.
To define which zone is the control zone for one of the 4 system types requiring this setting, you should
navigate to the zone in question and check the check box as described below.
Thermostatic control zone for unitary system

Check this if the current zone provides the conditions used to control the operation of the Unitary multizone
system. You should normally select a zone which is representative in terms of building temperature. In a
dwelling, the central circulation area (hall/landing) is often a good location for the thermostat. However it is
also important to note that if the zone selected as thermostatic control has no cooling selected then cooling for
the whole building will not operate. The same applies to heating. So the zone selected here should also be
representative in terms of the HVAC systems used to serve it.
Humidification control zone

The zone to be used to control humidification in Compact VAV, CAV and Unitary multizone systems.
Dehumidification control zone

The zone to be used to control dehumidification in Compact VAV, CAV and Unitary multizone systems.
It is now possible to use the same zone for humidification and dehumidification.
Mixed mode control zone

The zone to be used to control the operation of the change over mixed mode system.
- 325 -
Plenums
Note: this topic relates to Compact HVAC. You can find out about plenums in Detailed HVAC in the Add
Supply Plenum Add Return Plenum Tool topic.
A plenum is an air compartment or chamber including uninhabited crawl spaces, areas above ceilings or
below a floor, including air spaces below raised floors of computer/data processing centers, or attic spaces, to
which one or more ducts are connected and which forms part of either the supply air, return air or exhaust air
system, other than the occupied space being conditioned.
DesignBuilder Compact HVAC Unitary multizone, Unitary single zone, VAV and CAV systems can have air
supplied and returned via plenums. The system supply and return plenums in the diagram below serve each
of the 3 zones.
There are 4 types of plenum:

1.
2.
3.
4.
System supply plenum - a supply air plenum serving all zones in 3-VAV and 2-Unitary multizone
system. If any zone supply plenums have been specified, the outlet from the system supply plenum will
flow through the zone supply plenum to the zone terminal unit. The system supply plenum is defined at
building level on the HVAC tab under the Plenums header and only one is allowed per simulation.
System return plenum - return air plenums serving all zones in 3-VAV and 2-Unitary multizone
systems. If any zone return plenums have been specified, the return air from the zone will flow through
the zone return plenum and then into the system return plenum. The system return plenum is defined at
building level on the HVAC tab under the Plenums header and only one is allowed per simulation.
Zone supply plenum - a supply air plenum serving only this zone in 3-VAV, 2-Unitary multizone and 1Unitary single zone systems. The plenum zone is added to the supply air path after the system splitter
or system-level supply plenum and before the zone terminal unit. The zone supply plenum is defined at
zone level on the HVAC tab under the Plenums header. A zone supply plenum can serve only one
zone.
Zone return plenum - return air plenums serving only this zone in 3-VAV, 2-Unitary multizone and 1Unitary single zone systems. The plenum zone is added to the return air path immediately after the
zone and before the system mixer or system-level return plenum. The zone supply plenum is defined at
zone level on the HVAC tab under the Plenums header. A zone return plenum can serve only one
zone.
- 326 -
When specifying a system or zone supply or return plenum you should enter a unique zone name. The zone
does not need to be in the same block. The zone name you enter is checked just prior to the simulation and
not before so you should enter the names with care to avoid mistakes.
Plenum modelling
Maximum of 1 system supply plenum allowed per simulation

Maximum of 1 system return plenum allowed per simulation
Each zone plenum can only serve one zone
Set the Zone type of any plenum zones to 4-Plenum. This makes the necessary changes (remaining
requirements and recommendations in bullet list)
Plenum zones cannot be controlled. Use the HVAC template <None> to switch off heating, cooling
and mechanical ventilation in all plenum zones.
Remember to ensure plenum zones have no internal gains, occupancy, lighting etc.
We recommend using the 4-Ceiling diffuser interior convection heat transfer coefficient for plenum
zones to model the effect of fast moving air on surface heat transfer.
You will probably find it easiest to use the Combined method for Floor/slab/ceiling definition for models
using plenums as each surface element in the model has just a single construction and you don't have
the confusion of Model data referring to 'raised floors' and 'suspended ceilings'.
The floor of a ceiling plenum is the ceiling of the zone below so you will often define the plenum floor as
'Ceiling tiles' construction or similar.
If the building you are modelling has more than one plenum zone, each serving multiple zones you should use
zone plenums. Use virtual partitions to partition the large plenum zones (which in reality serve multiple zones)
into multiple plenum zones, each serving a single zone. See image below.
Red lines show the 5 zones of the occupied space. Each zone has its own return-air ceiling plenum.
This technique is also illustrated in the example file supplied with DesignBuilder Zone vs System Plenums
Example.dsb.
Note 1: when modelling plenums in DesignBuilder there is no need to add holes between the plenum and
occupied space to represent supply diffusers or extracts. These are included in the model by EnergyPlus
albeit as part of the system network.
Note 2: it is not possible in DesignBuilder v2 to use the suspended ceiling/floor (as set on the Constructions
tab when using Separate constructions) as a plenum - the plenum must be a completely separate zone.
Detailed HVAC
HVAC tab in model data - Detailed HVAC
When the Detailed HVAC model option is selected, the HVAC tab is used to define:
- 327 -
Operation/setpoint schedules (under the Heating and Cooling headers),
Note: With Detailed HVAC simulations the Heating on and Cooling on settings have no effect on
simulations, other than to show/hide the schedule data. They are always used in Heating and Cooling design
calculations though.
Outdoor air ventilation requirement (under the Mechanical Ventilation header)

Natural ventilation and
Air temperature distribution settings.
Note: For heating and cooling design calculations the humidity and temperature setpoints and ventilation
requirement data comes from the Activity and HVAC tabs as described under the 1-Simple HVAC column in
the table under Detailed HVAC Activity data, regardless of the Detailed HVAC Activity Data setting.
The main HVAC data is entered by clicking on the <HVAC System> navigator node.
Further details of Detailed HVAC are provided in a separate section.
Natural Ventilation
You can control the operation of natural ventilation using the data under the Natural Ventilation header on the
HVAC tab. When using Calculated natural ventilation model option there is additional data on the Openings
tab to control the timing and extent of operation of openings.
Note: the Natural ventilation checkbox must be ticked here on the HVAC tab to allow window, vent and door
operation to be defined on the Openings tab.
The data shown under Natural ventilation on the HVAC tab depends on whether you are using the Scheduled
or Calculated Natural ventilation setting in Model options.
Scheduled Natural Ventilation Data

Calculated Natural Ventilation Data
Both Scheduled and Calculated Natural ventilation options are available with Simple, Compact and Detailed
HVAC options.
Scheduled Natural Ventilation Data

See the Tutorial on Scheduled Natural ventilation.
Summary of Scheduled Natural Ventilation data definition
When the Natural ventilation model option is set to Scheduled,and for heating and cooling design
calculations, natural ventilation is defined as follows:
Check the On checkbox under the Natural Ventilation header.

Select the Outside air definition method
Set the maximum zone natural ventilation rate in air changes per hour (if flow type is 1-By zone).
Select the operation schedule.
Enter the relevant control parameters on the HVAC tab and on the Activity tab.
- 328 -
Find out more about Natural Ventilation Modelling under Modelling Advice.
NATURAL VENTILATION
Natural ventilation On
Check the On checkbox under the Natural Ventilation header to activate natural ventilation. This causes all of
the natural ventilation data on the HVAC tab to be accessible.

The Outside air definition method allows you to select the method to be used to set the maximum outside air
natural ventilation rate. The options are:
1-By zone - enter the zone natural ventilation rate in air changes per hour in the control directly below.
The design air flow rate is calculated from the ac/h data using:
Vdesign = ac/h x ZoneVolume / 3600
where ZoneVolume is the actual air volume of the space calculated according to options for optionally
Note: this zone volume may be different from the value used for the purposes of calculating air flow
rates for infiltration which uses the total zone volume.
2-Min fresh air per person - maximum natural ventilation rate is defined using Minimum fresh air
requirements as set on the Activity tab. The design air flow rate in m3/s is calculated as:
Vdesign = MinFreshAir x NumberPeople / 1000
NumberPeople = Occupancy density (people / m2) * Zone floor area (m2)
MinFreshAir is the minimum fresh air rate per person (l/s/person)
The actual ventilation rate in m3/s is calculated at each time step of the simulation using the equation below:
Ventilation = Vdesign Fschedule [A + B (Tin - Tout) + C . Wind Speed + D (Wind Speed 2)]
Each of the parameters A-D in the equation above are explained below under Delta T and Wind Speed
Coefficients.
Fschedule is described below under Operation > Schedule.
OPERATION
Schedule
Select the schedule used to modify the maximum design natural volume flow rate (Vdesign) (see Design Flow
Rate Calculation Method field and related subsequent fields). This fraction between 0.0 and 1.0 is included as
Fschedule in the above equation.
OUTDOOR TEMPERATURE LIMITS

Outdoor min temperature control
Check this checkbox if you wish to define a restriction on natural ventilation operation when outdoor
temperature drops below a setpoint temperature. Use this option to help avoid over-cooling a space, which
could result in a heating load.
Min temperature definition

There are 2 ways to define the outdoor min temperature:
- 329 -
Outdoor min temperature

This is the fixed outdoor temperature (in C or F) below which ventilation is shut off. This control is
visible when the 1-By value option is selected for Min temperature definition.
Outdoor min temperature schedule

This is the schedule of outdoor temperatures (in C) below which ventilation is shut off. This control is
visible when the 1-By schedule option is selected for Min temperature definition.
Outdoor max temperature control

Check this checkbox if you wish to define a restriction on natural ventilation operation when outdoor
temperature rises above a setpoint temperature. Use this option to help avoid over-heating a space, which
could result in a cooling load.
Max temperature definition

There are 2 ways to define the outdoor max temperature:
Outdoor max temperature

This is the fixed outdoor temperature (in C or F) above which ventilation is shut off. This control is
visible when the 1-By value option is selected for Max temperature definition.
Outdoor max temperature schedule

This is the schedule of outdoor temperatures (in C) above which ventilation is shut off. This control is
visible when the 1-By schedule option is selected for Max temperature definition.
DELTA T LIMITS
Delta T limit control
Check this option to limit natural ventilation operation based on the temperature difference between the indoor
and outdoor air dry-bulb temperature. It allows ventilation to be stopped if the temperature outside is too warm
and could potentially heat the space.
Uncheck this option to keep the ventilation on even if the outdoor temperature is greater than the indoor
temperature. This is useful for uncontrolled natural ventilation (open windows) or as a way to estimate the
effect of required ventilation air for load calculations.
Delta T definition
There are 2 ways to define the Delta T to be used in temperature difference control:
1-By value - use this option when the Delta T does not change with time in which case you can
enter a fixed value.
2-By schedule - use this option when the Delta T changes with time in which case you can
select a schedule of time-varying Delta T values.
- 330 -
Delta T
This is the temperature difference (in C or F) between the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb
temperatures below which ventilation is shut off. This field allows ventilation to be stopped if the
temperature outside is too warm and could potentially heat the space. For example, if the user specifies
a delta temperature of 2C, ventilation is assumed to be available if the outside air temperature is at
least 2C cooler than the zone air temperature. If the outside air dry-bulb temperature is less than 2C
cooler than the indoor dry-bulb temperature, then ventilation is automatically turned off. The values for
this field can include negative numbers. This allows ventilation to occur even if the outdoor temperature
is above the indoor temperature.
The Delta Temperature is used in the code in the following way:
IF ((IndoorTemp - OutdoorTemp) < DeltaTemperature) Then ventilation is not allowed.
For example:
Value of Natural ventilation delta T
Effect
Natural ventilation only operates when OutdoorTemp
< IndoorTemp
Natural ventilation unrestricted by Inside-Outside
delta T
Natural ventilation only operates when OutdoorTemp
+ 2 < IndoorTemp
0
-100
2
Delta T schedule
This is the schedule of temperature difference values (in C) between the indoor and outdoor air drybulb temperatures below which ventilation is shut off. See above Delta T description for more details.
DELTA T AND WIND SPEED COEFFICIENTS

The coefficients below can be used to set up inside to outside Delta T and wind speed dependency of the
Scheduled natural ventilation rates using the equation at the end of the Outside air definition method section.
Technical
The question of typical values for these coefficients is subject to debate. Ideally, one should do a detailed
analysis of the ventilation situation and then determine a custom set of coefficients using methods such as
those laid out in Chapter 26 of the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals. The defaults are 1,0,0,0 which give
a constant volume flow of ventilation under all conditions.
The equation must always yield a non-negative results; negative values are set to 0.0. BLAST (one of the
EnergyPlus predecessors) used the following values as defaults: 0.606, 0.03636, 0.1177, 0. These
coefficients produce a value of 1.0 at 0C deltaT and 3.35 m/s (7.5mph) wind speed, which corresponds to a
typical summer condition. At a winter condition of 40C deltaT and 6 m/s (13.4 mph) wind speed, these
coefficients would increase the ventilation rate by a factor of 2.75.
In DOE-2 (the other EnergyPlus predecessor), the air change method defaults are (adjusted to SI units) 0, 0,
0.224 (wind speed), 0. With these coefficients, the summer conditions above would give a factor of 0.75, and
the winter conditions would give 1.34. A wind speed of 4.47 m/s (10 mph) gives a factor of 1.0.
The source of the BLAST defaults is noted in the BLAST documentation as: "Empirical equation and the
coefficient default were determined from ASHRAE journal articles and other data on the effects of outdoor
weather conditions." The source of the DOE-2 defaults is based on examining the infiltration relationships
described in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals.
The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature used in the above basic equation (T out) is typically a function of the
height of the zone centroid above ground. The local outdoor dry-bulb temperature calculation procedure is
described in the Local Outdoor Air Temperature Calculation section of the Engineering Reference.
The local outdoor wind speed used in the above basic equation (Wind Speed) is also a function of the height
of the zone centroid above ground. The local outdoor wind speed calculation procedure is described in the
Local Wind Speed Calculation section of the Engineering Reference.
- 331 -
Constant
This constant term coefficient is the A parameter in the above ventilation equation. It is part of the user
specified modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter, however, is a
constant under all conditions and is not modified by any environmental effect. As a result, it is dimensionless.
Temperature
The temperature term coefficient is the B parameter in the above ventilation equation. It is part of the user
specified modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by the
temperature difference between the outdoor and indoor air dry-bulb temperatures. The units for this parameter
are inverse Celsius.
Velocity
The velocity term coefficient is the C parameter in the above ventilation equation. It is part of the user
specified modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by the
speed of wind being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are s/m.
Velocity squared
The velocity squared term coefficient is the D parameter in the above ventilation equation. It is part of the
user specified modifying parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified
by square of the speed of wind being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are
s2/m2.
SUMMARY OF SCHEDULED NATURAL VENTILATION OPERATION RULES

Scheduled natural ventilation is active at any time in the simulation based on the rules in the table below.
Condition
Rule
If Natural ventilation indoor min temperature control

checked
If Natural ventilation indoor max temperature control
checked
If Outdoor min temperature control checked
If Outdoor max temperature control checked
If Delta T control checked
Operation schedule has value > 0 AND

Tin > Natural ventilation min temperature
AND
Tin < Natural ventilation max temperature
AND
Tout > Outdoor min temperature AND
Tout < Outdoor min temperature AND
Tin - Tout > Delta T
Data
Location
HVAC tab
Activity tab
Activity tab
HVAC tab
HVAC tab
HVAC tab
Where:
Tin is the inside dry bulb air temperature
Tout is the outside dry bulb air temperature
Tip: To ensure that natural ventilation operates regardless of temperature inside and outside you should
uncheck all of the checkbox options listed on the "Condition" column in the above table.
INTERNAL WINDOWS, DOORS AND VENTS

Airflow through external windows, vents, doors and holes are not modelled with Scheduled natural ventilation
because the natural ventilation airflow from outside is explicitly defined (above). Internal windows, vents,
doors and holes cause air to be exchanged between the two adjacent zones using the EnergyPlus
ZoneMixing object. The way this works can be defined on the Advanced tab of the Model options dialog
under the Natural Ventilation > Scheduled headers.
In addition, you can override operation of internal windows, vents and doors to be off as follows:
Window, Vent, Door position
Internal windows and vents
Doors
Override Off Action

Use the Internal Window and Vent Operation Control
option data, selecting 2-Closed.
Set the door Operation schedule to Off
- 332 -
Calculated Natural Ventilation Data

See the Tutorial on Calculated Natural ventilation.
When the Natural ventilation model option is set to Calculated, natural ventilation data is set up using the
following procedure:
Check the On checkbox under the Natural Ventilation header.

On the Openings tab by setting window, door and vent opening sizes and operation times.
You can override the operation of windows, vents and door to be off as follows:
Window or Vent position
External
Internal adjacent to unconditioned semi-exterior
Other internal windows and vents
Doors
Override Off Action

Switch off the Natural ventilation On checkbox
Switch off the Natural ventilation On checkbox in the
occupied zone
Use the Internal Window and Vent Operation Control
option data, selecting 1-Control by schedule and
set the schedule to Off.
Set the door Operation schedule to Off
Note that even when operation is switched off as described above, windows, vents and doors still provide a
small flow path through the crack between the opening and the surrounding surface if the Model infiltration
option is checked.
Note 1: For Cooling design calculations, natural ventilation is always handled as Scheduled even when the
Natural ventilation model option is set to Calculated. In this case you can still enter natural ventilation air
change rates and operation schedule data on the HVAC tab but it is used only for design simulations. The
captions for data used for design calculations only is displayed with a green background in the interface.
Note 2: With both the Scheduled and Calculated options, natural ventilation can be overridden to be off in
Heating and Cooling design calculations. In Heating design calculations natural ventilation is switched off by
default because it is considered to be a cooling mechanism - windows and vents will normally be closed
during the coldest winter periods.
Wind Factor
When carrying out conservative design simulations you may prefer to exclude (or reduce) the effects of wind
from Calculated natural ventilation. To exclude wind-driven airflow from the analysis altogether set the Wind
factor to 0. For full treatment of wind effects set it to 1 and for intermediate treatment of wind set to a number
between 0 and 1.
Control mode
For calculated natural ventilation the control mode defines the way that the openings are opened and closed
based on air temperatures or enthalpy. The data can be entered at building, block or zone level.
In the descriptions that follow:
Tout is the outdoor air temperature,
Tzone is the previous time steps zone air temperature,
Tadjcacent zone is the previous time steps air temperature for the adjacent zone for interior surfaces,
Tset is the zone natural ventilation setpoint temperature,
Hzone is the specific enthalpy of zone air from the previous time step, and
Hout is the specific enthalpy of outdoor air.
The allowed choices for natural ventilation Control mode are:
- 333 -
1-NoVent - all of the zones openable windows and doors are closed at all times independent of indoor
or outdoor conditions. The operation schedule is ignored in this case.
2-Temperature - all of the zones openable windows and doors are opened if T zone > Tout and Tzone >
Tset and operation schedule allows venting.
3-Enthalpy - All of the zones openable windows and doors are opened if H zone > Hout and Tzone > Tset
and operation schedule allows venting.
4-Constant - Whenever an opening's operation schedule allows venting, all of the zones openable
windows and doors are open, independent of indoor or outdoor conditions. Note that Constant here
means that the size of each opening is fixed while venting; the air flow through each opening can, of
course, vary from time step to time step. This option allows modelling of a window that is opened for
fresh air regardless of inside/outside temperature/enthalpy.
5-Adjacent temperature cooling - applies to interior surfaces only. All of the zones openable
windows and doors are opened if T zone > Tadjacent zone and Tzone > Tset and operation schedule allows
venting.
6-Adjacent temperature heating - applies to interior surfaces only. All of the zones openable
windows and doors are opened if T zone < Tadjacent zone and Tzone > Tset and operation schedule allows
venting. This option is a basic attempt to get round the EnergyPlus assumption that natural ventilation
is always used for cooling and allow it to heat a zone as well. Note however that the zone setpoint is
still used to switch off ventilation if the temperature goes too low (rather than too high as might be
expected for a heating control).
Both of the Adjacent temperature control options (5 and 6) revert to 2-Temperature when applied to exterior
surfaces. This allows these options to be set at building level.
Identifying which zone is "more occupied"
For interior openings the zone temperature and setpoint used to control operation is that of the "more
occupied" of the 2 adjacent zones. The rules for establishing which zone is "more occupied" are as follows:
Zone is more occupied if:
If zone is occupied and adjacent zone is Unconditioned, or, if the 2 zones have the same zone type then the
assessment is made based on:
Zone is more occupied if:
It is heated and adjacent zone is not, or otherwise,
if both zones are heated then if it has a higher setpoint temperature, or otherwise,
It is cooled and adjacent zone is not, or otherwise,
if both zones are cooled then if it has a lower setpoint temperature.
If both zones have identical zone type and heating and cooling setpoints then the assignment is made
Modulation of Openings
You can modulate the window/door openings when using Calculated natural ventilation by making appropriate
settings to:
Modulate opening areas - switch on modulation by checking this option.

Limit value of opening modulation factor - gives the reduction on opening area for low outside air
temperatures.
Lower value of Tin-Tout - lower value on inside/outside temperature difference for modulating the
venting open factor.
Upper value of Tin-Tout - upper value on inside/outside temperature difference for modulating the
venting open factor (defines 'low outside air temperatures')
This data is used within EnergyPlus to calculate a factor between 0 and 1 that multiplies the opening factor of
each window and door in the building. Modulation of the openings can reduce the large temperature swings
that can occur if the windows/doors are too far open when they are venting, especially when there is a large
inside-outside temperature difference. This can avoid discomfort due to introduction of cold air and/or prevent
heating system operation in summer when not really required.
- 334 -
Temperature difference (Tin - Tout)

Tin - Tout <= [Lower value of Tin - Tout]
[Lower value of Tin - Tout] < Tin - Tout < [Upper value of Tin Tout]
Tin - Tout >= [Upper Value of Tin - Tout]
Opening Multiplier
1.0
Factor varies linearly from 1.0 to
Limit value of Opening modulation
factor.
Factor = Limit value of opening
modulation factor.
For example if the Lower value of Tin - Tout is 0, the Upper value is 15 and the Limit value of opening
modulation factor is 0.05, the windows and doors are only opened 5% of their full opening area when the
outside air is 15K colder than inside.When the inside and outside temperatures are the same the windows are
open to their maximum opening area and when the temperature difference is 7.5K the windows are opened
halfway between these extremes.
Important Notes
1.
The purpose of the Modulate option is to prevent discomfort due to very cold air being
introduced into the zone. You should keep in mind though that because this control will also
prevent ventilation when the temperature in the space is very hot and the outside air is not
particularly cold because of the large temperature difference between inside and outside.
For example if the upper modulation temperature difference is 15K and the limiting modulation
factor is 0.05 then the maximum window and vent opening area will be reduced to 5% of their
normal size if the temperature in the zone is 35C and the temperature outside is 20C. In this
case the natural ventilation through the 'almost closed' openings would probably not be
adequate to cool the zone back down again. So you should not use this option if you wish
natural ventilation to occur when the temperature inside is very high.
2.
With Modulation active, openings will be completely closed if the difference between inside and
outside air temperatures is greater than Upper value of Tin-Tout.
3.
While the modulation graph above shows the opening factor to be 1 when the inside
temperature is greater than outside temperature, by default the natural ventilation openings will
all be closed in this case based on the 2-Temperature control mode.
This modulation data can also be accessed from the HVAC tab under the Natural Ventilation > Options
headers.
Tip: Although basic DesignBuilder natural ventilation options don't allow controls based on absolute outdoor
air temperature, it is possible to apply upper and/or lower outdoor air temperature limits for natural ventilation
through use of the mixed mode Temperature control schedule and the Mixed mode minimum and maximum
temperatures.
- 335 -
Mixed Mode Zone Equipment

You can include mixed mode natural ventilation and HVAC change-over control for zone equipment by
checking the Mixed mode checkbox on the HVAC tab under the Natural ventilation header.
The mixed mode control serves two purposes:
1.
2.
Prevents simultaneous natural ventilation and HVAC system cooling operation, and,
Allows you to test various ventilation strategies to maximize natural ventilation in order to reduce
heating/cooling loads.
The mixed mode change-over controller links the associated HVAC system with the operable windows and
vents in the zones served by the HVAC system. The controller overrides the natural ventilation controls for
windows and vent openings, closing these openings under when conditions are unfavourable for natural
ventilation and allowing the HVAC system to operate. If the controller determines that conditions are
favourable for natural ventilation, then the HVAC system is disabled and the openings are able to operate
based on the standard natural ventilation control mechanism (natural ventilation setpoint, maximum opening
area, modulation etc).
Mixed mode controls can be used when using either Calculated or Scheduled natural ventilation, Simple,
Compact or Detailed HVAC.
Note: Mixed model data on the HVAC tab is used for a) Simple HVAC and b) zone equipment such as FCU,
PTAC when using Detailed HVAC. This data is not used to control Detailed HVAC AHUs. The AHU mixed
mode controls are on the Air Handling Unit dialog.
See also the Summary of Mixed mode modelling for background information.
Mixed mode control zones

When using Compact HVAC and Detailed HVAC air systems a control zone is required to represent the zone
conditions for all zones served by the AHU. The control zone conditions are fed into the HVAC mixed mode
controller. The control zone is defined on the AHU dialog for Detailed HVAC and on the HVAC tab for
Compact HVAC. More detailed information is provided below for Compact HVAC.
Compact HVAC
When using Compact HVAC, you must select a control zone to define which zone conditions are used by the
mixed mode controller for the HVAC system. Do this by going to the zone level and checking the Mixed mode
control zone checkbox located near the top of the data on HVAC tab. You must select just one control zone
per AHU. The selected mixed-mode control zone should generally have conditions representative of all of the
zones served by the HVAC system.
WIND AND RAIN

Opening factor function of wind speed curve
Select a Linear or Quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation of opening factor as a
function of outdoor wind speed. The output of this curve is multiplied by the opening factor of opening objects
to give the final openness. This field only works with the AirflowNetwork (Calculated natural ventilation)
opening objects.
Close windows and vents when raining

Indicates whether the rain indicator in the hourly weather data is used to shut off natural ventilation. This can
help simulate conditions where one would normally close windows to avoid rain penetration in a space. Any
possible rain getting into a space will not be counted as a zone load.
- 336 -
Maximum wind speed

The wind speed (in m/s or ft/min) above which natural ventilation is shut off. This can help simulate conditions
where one would normally close windows to avoid wind problems in a space (papers blowing around, etc).
TEMPERATURE CONTROL
Minimum outdoor temperature
The outdoor temperature (in C or F) below which the entire mixed mode ventilation system is shut off when
the control mode schedule value = 1 (Temperature). This lower temperature limit is intended to avoid
overcooling a space, which could result in a heating load.
Maximum outdoor temperature

The outdoor temperature (in C or F) above which the entire mixed mode ventilation system is shut off when
the control mode schedule value = 1 (Temperature). This upper temperature limit is intended to avoid
overheating a space, which could result in a cooling load.
ENTHALPY CONTROL
Minimum outdoor enthalpy
The outdoor enthalpy (in J/kg or Btu/lb) below which the entire mixed mode ventilation system is shut off when
the control mode schedule value = 2 (Enthalpy).
Maximum outdoor enthalpy

The outdoor enthalpy (in J/kg or Btu/lb) above which the entire mixed mode ventilation system is shut off when
the control mode schedule value = 2 (Enthalpy).
DEWPOINT CONTROL
Minimum outdoor dewpoint
The outdoor dew point temperature (in C or F) below which the entire mixed mode ventilation system is shut
off when the control mode schedule value = 3 (Dew point). This lower dew point temperature limit is intended
to avoid dehumidifying a space.
Maximum outdoor dewpoint

The outdoor dew point temperature (in C or F) above which the entire mixed mode ventilation system is shut
off when the control mode schedule value = 3 (Dew point). This upper dew point temperature limit is intended
to avoid humidifying a space.
ADVANCED
Control mode schedule
This schedule determines whether or not for a given time the mixed mode ventilation control is to be applied.
Schedule values equal to zero indicate no ventilation control, resulting in natural ventilation and HVAC system
operation being performed based on their own controls. Schedule values equal to one denote temperature
control for either cooling or heating, which is determined internally based on thermostat set point. The
temperature control is restricted between the minimum and maximum outdoor temperatures provided in two
additional input fields (below). Schedule values equal to two denote enthalpy control, which is restricted
between minimum and maximum outdoor enthalpy values given in two additional input fields (below).
Schedule values equal to three denote dew point control for either dehumidification or humidification.
Schedule values equal to four represent outdoor ventilation air control.
Tip: The standard Calculated DesignBuilder natural ventilation options don't allow controls based on absolute
outdoor air temperature, but it is possible to apply upper and/or lower outdoor air temperature limits for
calculated natural ventilation through use of the Temperature control schedule mixed mode and the Mixed
mode minimum and maximum temperatures.
- 337 -
Schedule value Operation mode

0
No mixed mode control - HVAC and natural ventilation operate separately according to their
own controls.
1
Temperature control for either cooling or heating - temperature control is restricted between
minimum and maximum outdoor temperatures. When the outside air temperature falls below
the minimum value or goes above the maximum value the openings are closed and the
HVAC system operates.
2
Enthalpy control, outside enthalpy is restricted between minimum and maximum outdoor
enthalpy values.
3
Dew point control, outside dew point temperature is restricted between minimum and
maximum outdoor dew point values.
4
The minimum outdoor ventilation air for a given time in ac/h. The program calculates the
natural (outdoor) ventilation in the controlled zone first and compares the amount of outdoor
(Calculated
air brought by opening windows or doors and other small openings to this minimum value. If
natural
the amount of outdoor air from natural ventilation is less than the minimum value, the natural
ventilation only) ventilation is shut off (i.e., the window or door openings are closed) and the HVAC system
may operate if needed. Otherwise, the natural ventilation is on and the HVAC system is shut
off. The amount of outdoor ventilation air entering the controlled zone is determined as air
from outdoors and not from other adjacent zones. Therefore, this option is only applied to a
zone having a window or door exposed to outdoors.
Minimum outdoor ventilation air schedule

The schedule is only used if Ventilation Control Mode = 4 (Outdoor Ventilation Air Control). This schedule
determines the minimum outdoor ventilation air for a given time in the units of air change per hour (ac/h). The
program calculates the natural (outdoor) ventilation in the controlled zone first and compares the amount of
outdoor air introduced by opening windows or doors and other small openings to this minimum value. If the
amount of outdoor air from natural ventilation is less than the minimum value, the natural ventilation is shut off
(i.e., the window or door openings are closed) and the HVAC system may operate if needed. Otherwise, the
natural ventilation is on and the HVAC system is shut off. The amount of outdoor ventilation air entering the
controlled zone is determined as air from outdoors and not from other adjacent zones. Therefore, this option is
only applied to a zone having a window or door exposed to outdoors.
AirflowNetwork control type schedule

This schedule is available when Calculated natural ventilation is set. It determines for a given simulation
timestep how the openings respond to the mixed mode ventilation control. Schedule values equal to 0 indicate
individual ventilation control based on the control requirements specified for each individual AirflowNetwork
opening object. Schedule values equal to 1 denote group control. The opening objects exposed to outdoors
in the controlled zone served by the primary air loop will be considered as a master to provide group control.
Simple airflow control type schedule

This schedule is available when the Scheduled natural ventilation model option is set. It works with
ZoneVentilation:* and ZoneMixing objects only. This schedule determines for a given simulation timestep how
the ZoneVentilation:* and ZoneMixing objects respond to the hybrid ventilation control when the hybrid
ventilation control allows the objects to operate.
Schedule values equal to zero indicate the individual ventilation control based on the control requirements
from their own objects. Schedule values equal to one denote group control. The ZoneVentilation:* and
ZoneMixing objects in the zones served by the primary air loop are controlled by a single object, whose name
is provided in the following input field.
Mixed Mode Cooling

In mixed mode buildings natural ventilation is used as the primary means of providing cooling and, when this
is inadequate to provide comfort conditions, active cooling is introduced.
Definition of a mixed mode building:
"It is a building in which occupants can open windows, and which is designed with effective
passive strategies for limiting the effects of the external climate. The passively designed
building is utilised to provide acceptable conditions for the majority of the year, and is
- 338 -
supplemented by a mechanical system, either on an as and when required basis, or on a

seasonal basis."
Source: Cooper, V.A., Occupancy Comfort and Energy Consumption in Naturally Ventilated and
Mixed Mode Office Buildings, PhD thesis, UMIST, 1998
Mixed-mode refers to a hybrid approach to space conditioning that uses a combination of

natural ventilation from operable windows (either manually or automatically controlled), and
mechanical systems that include air distribution equipment and refrigeration equipment for
cooling. A well-designed mixed-mode building begins with intelligent facade design to
minimize cooling loads. It then integrates the use of air-conditioning when and where it is
necessary, with the use of natural ventilation whenever it is feasible or desirable, to
maximize comfort while avoiding the significant energy use and operating costs of yearround air conditioning."
Source: Mixed mode page on Center for Built Environment website, contains background, case
studies
and a database of 150 mixed mode buildings.
Some useful background documents on mixed mode design and simulation:
1.
2.
www.cbe.berkeley.edu/mixedmode
www.ibpsa.org/proceedings/BS1999/BS99_D-07.pdf
DesignBuilder can model all three types of mixed mode system defined by CBE in the above reference.
1.
2.
3.
Concurrent (Same space, same time)

Concurrent mixed-mode operation is the most prevalent design strategy in practice today, in which the
air-conditioning system and operable windows operate in the same space and at the same time. The
HVAC system may serve as supplemental or background ventilation and cooling while occupants are
free to open windows based on individual preference. Typical examples include open-plan office space
with standard VAV air-conditioning systems and operable windows, where perhaps perimeter VAV
zones may go to minimum air when sensor indicates that a window has been opened.
Change-over (Same space, different times)
Change-over designs are becoming increasingly common, where the building changes-over between
natural ventilation and air-conditioning on a seasonal or even daily basis. The building automation
system may determine the mode of operating based on outdoor temperature, an occupancy sensor, a
window (open or closed) sensor, or based on operator commands. Typical examples include individual
offices with operable windows and personal air conditioning units that shut down for a given office
anytime a sensor indicates that a window has been opened; or a building envelope where automatic
louvers open to provide natural ventilation when the HVAC system is in economizer mode, and then
close when the system is in cooling or heating mode.
Zoned (Different spaces, same time)
Zoned systems are also common, where different zones within the building have different conditioning
strategies. Typical examples include naturally ventilated office buildings with operable windows and a
ducted heating/ventilation system, or supplemental mechanical cooling provided only to conference
rooms. For many mixed-mode buildings, operating conditions sometimes deviate somewhat from their
original design intent (e.g., a building originally designed for seasonal changeover between airconditioning and natural ventilation may, in practice, operate both systems concurrently).
Note: Concurrent and Zoned systems can be modelled simply by including natural ventilation with HVAC
systems without using DesignBuilder mixed mode control. In DesignBuilder "mixed mode" specifically refers to
Change-over systems where the HVAC and the natural ventilation do not take place at the same time.
- 339 -
DesignBuilder supports mixed mode in all combinations of natural ventilation and HVAC model options.
The steps to setting up a change-over mixed mode model in DesignBuilder are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Include active cooling and natural ventilation by switching on the Natural ventilation on and Cooled
options on the HVAC tab.
Also, include mechanical ventilation if there is outside air introduced through the HVAC system.
Ensure that the setpoints for natural ventilation and cooling operation are correct. The natural
ventilation (window/vent opening) setpoint should ideally be 2C lower than the cooling setpoint to
ensure maximum use of natural ventilation and to avoid the active cooling system being used
unnecessarily and also 2C higher than the heating .temperature. Typical values might be heating
setpoint temperature = 21C, natural ventilation setpoint temperature = 23C, cooling setpoint
temperature = 25C. Heating should ideally be switched off in the summer to avoid unnecessary
heating caused by natural ventilation overcooling the space.
See the mixed mode section on the HVAC help for detailed information on the data that can be set,
including conditions that require windows and vents to be closed such as rain, wind and low outside air
temperature.
Note: "Mixed mode" means the same as the term "Hybrid ventilation" used in the EnergyPlus documentation.
Earth Tubes
An earth tube is a long, underground metal or plastic pipe through which air is drawn. During the cooling
season, as air travels through the pipe, it gives up some of its heat to the surrounding soil and enters the room
as cooler air. Similarly, during heating season, as air travels through the pipe, it receives some of its heat from
the soil and enters the room as warmer air. Simple earth tubes in EnergyPlus can be controlled by a schedule
and through the specification of minimum, maximum, and delta temperatures as described below. As with
- 340 -
infiltration and ventilation, the actual flow rate of air through the earth tube can be modified by the temperature
difference between the inside and outside environment and the wind speed. See equation below.
Note: Earth tubes are only available when using the Scheduled natural ventilation model option.
CalcSoilSurfTemp Auxiliary Programs Document
The CalcSoilSurfTemp program is simple and requires only two input fields : soil condition and soil surface
condition in addition to a valid weather file. For soil condition, the user should select the number
corresponding to the actual condition of the soil surrounding the earth tube from the four following options: 1.
HEAVY AND SATURATED, 2. HEAVY AND DAMP, 3. HEAVY AND DRY and 4. LIGHT AND DRY. This
determines the thermal diffusivity and thermal conductivity of the surrounding soil. For soil surface conditions,
the user should select the number corresponding to the actual condition of the ground surface above the earth
tube from the eight following options: 1. BARE AND WET, 2. BARE AND MOIST, 3. BARE AND ARID, 4.
BARE AND DRY, 5. COVERED AND WET, 6. COVERED AND MOIST, 7. COVERED AND ARID and 8.
COVERED AND DRY. This determines the absorption coefficient and the fraction of evaporation rate of the
ground surface.
From this information and an analysis of the weather for the location selected, the CalcSoilSurfTemp
program (ref. Auxiliary Programs document) calculates the three parameters listed above. The user must then
add these parameters as input into EnergyPlus. The full input description of an earth tube is given below.
Include earth tubes

Check this option to include zone air delivery through earth tubes.

You can set the amount, timing and control of outside air delivery through the earth tubes in the same way as
for Mechanical ventilation. Refer to the Outside air section for details of how this works.
The outside air definition data is used to calculate the the maximum amount of air mass flow rate of the earth
tube expected at design conditions (Edesign in the above equation in units of m3/s. The design value is modified
by the schedule fraction (see next field) and user specified coefficients (last four fields).
Operation
Schedule
Select the schedule that modifies the maximum design volume flow rate (see previous field). The fraction in
the schedules should vary between 0.0 and 1.0 and is referred to as Fschedule in the above equation.
Control
Minimum zone temperature when cooling
This is the indoor temperature (in C or F) below which the earth tube is shut off. This lower temperature limit
is intended to avoid overcooling a space and thus result in a heating load. For example, if the user specifies a
minimum temperature of 20C, earth tube is assumed to be available if the zone air temperature is above
20C. If the zone air temperature drops below 20C, then earth tube is automatically turned off.
Maximum zone temperature when heating

This is the indoor temperature (in C or F) above which the earth tube is shut off. This higher temperature
limit is intended to avoid overheating a space and thus result in a cooling load. For example, if the user
specifies a maximum temperature of 20C, earth tube is assumed to be available if the zone air temperature is
below 20C. If the zone air temperature rises above 20C, then earth tube is automatically turned off.
Delta temperature
This is the temperature difference (in C or F) between the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb temperatures
below which the earth tube is shut off. This is to allow the earth tube to be stopped either if the temperature
- 341 -
outside is too warm and could potentially heat the space or if the temperature outside is too cold and could
potentially cool the space. For example, if the user specifies a delta temperature of 2C, earth tube is
assumed to be available if the temperature difference between indoor and outdoor temperature is at least 2C.
If the outside air dry-bulb temperature is less than 2C cooler or warmer than the indoor dry-bulb temperature,
then the earth tube is automatically turned off.
Fan Electric Consumption Configuration

Earth tube type
This alpha character string defines the type of earth tube as one of the following options:
1-Natural which is assumed to be air movement/exchange that will not consume any fan energy or is
the result of natural air flow through the tube and into the building. Values for fan pressure and
efficiency for a natural flow earth tube are ignored. The conditions of the air entering the space are
assumed to be equivalent to the air which is cooled or heated by passing along the pipe.
2-Exhaust where values for fan pressure and efficiency define the fan electric consumption.
3-Intake where values for fan pressure and efficiency define the fan electric consumption and an
appropriate amount of fan heat is added to the air stream.
Fan pressure rise

This is the pressure rise experienced across the fan (in Pascals (N/m2) or psi). This is a function of the fan
and plays a role in determining the amount of energy consumed by the fan. This value is only entered for fandriven earth tubes.
Fan total efficiency

This is the total fan efficiency (a decimal number between 0.0 and 1.0). This is a function of the fan and plays
a role in determining the amount of energy consumed by the fan. This value is only entered for fan-driven
earth tubes.
Pipe Specifications
Pipe radius
This is the radius of the earth tube/pipe (in m or ft). This plays a role in determining the amount of heat
transferred from the surrounding soil to the air passing along the pipe. If the pipe has non-circular cross
section, user can use the concept of hydraulic diameter as follows.
D = 4 . A / Perimeter
However, since this field requires the pipe radius, hydraulic diameter should be divided by two.
Pipe thickness
This is the thickness of the pipe wall (in m or ft). This plays a role in determining the amount of heat
transferred from the surrounding soil to the air passing along the pipe.
Pipe length
This is the total length of the pipe (in m or ft). This plays a role in determining the amount of heat transferred
from the surrounding soil to the air passing along the pipe. As the length of the pipe becomes longer, the
amount of the heat transfer becomes larger.
Pipe thermal conductivity

This is the thermal conductivity of the pipe (in W/mC or Btu-in/h-ft2-F). This plays a role in determining the
amount of heat transferred from the surrounding soil to the air passing along the pipe.
Pipe depth under ground surface

This is the depth of the pipe under the ground surface (in m or ft). This plays a role in determining the
temperature of the soil surrounding the pipe.
- 342 -
Soil Heat Transfer Calculations

Soil condition
This alpha character string defines the actual condition of the soil surrounding the earth tube and can be one
of any of the following options:
1-Heavy and Saturated

2-Heavy and Damp,
3-Heavy and dry or
4-Light and Dry.
This determines the thermal diffusivity and thermal conductivity of the surrounding soil, which play a role in
determining the amount of heat transferred from the surrounding soil to the air passing along the pipe.
Average soil surface temperature

This is the annual average soil surface temperature straight above the earth tube, which plays a role in
determining the temperature of the soil surrounding the pipe. This field should be calculated in advance using
the separate CalcSoilSurfTemp program.
Amplitude of soil surface temperature

This is the amplitude of soil surface temperature above the earth tube, which plays a role in determining the
temperature of the soil surrounding the pipe. This is the difference between the maximum and minimum soil
surface temperature for the whole year divided by two. This field should be calculated in advance using the
separate CalcSoilSurfTemp program. It is a Delta temperature value.
Phase constant of soil surface temperature

This is the phase constant of the soil surface temperature straight above the earth tube, which play a role in
determining the temperature of the soil surrounding the pipe at particular time. This is the time elapsed from
the beginning of the year until the soil surface temperature reaches the minimum value of the year. This field
should be calculated in advance using the separate CalcSoilSurfTemp program.
Flow Term Coefficients

The basic equation used to calculate air flow rate of earth tube in EnergyPlus is:
EarthTubeFlowRate = Edesign Fschedule(A + B . abs(Tzoneair - Todb) + C . WindSpeed + D . WindSpeed2)
Constant term flow coefficient

This number is the A parameter in the above earth tube equation. It is part of the user specified modifying
parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter, however, is a constant under all
conditions and is not modified by any environmental effect. As a result, it is dimensionless.
Temperature term flow coefficient

This number is the B parameter in the above earth tube equation. It is part of the user specified modifying
parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by the temperature
difference between the outdoor and indoor air dry-bulb temperatures. The units for this parameter are inverse
Celsius.
Velocity term flow coefficient

This number is the C parameter in the above earth tube equation. It is part of the user specified modifying
parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by the speed of wind
being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are s/m.
Velocity squared term flow coefficient

This number is the D parameter in the above earth tube equation. It is part of the user specified modifying
parameters that are a function of environmental factors. This parameter is modified by square of the speed of
wind being experienced outside the building. The units for this parameter are s2/m2.
- 343 -
Outputs
Note: Airflow introduced into zones by Earth tubes is included in the Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration ac/h
output. Also the heating/cooling effect of Earth tubes on the zone is included in the Zone Vent heat balance
output. If you would like to see further details on the impact of the Earth tubes in your results then you should
include one or more of the output variables below to an external idf file, "include" it in the main IDF file
generated by DesignBuilder and view results in the Results Viewer.
Current Earth Tube output variables:
HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Air Flow Volume [m3]
HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]
HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Air Flow Mass [kg]
HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC,Sum,Earth Tube Fan Electric Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Fan Electric Power [W]
HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Zone Inlet Air Temperature [C]
HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Ground Interface Temperature [C]
HVAC,Average,Earth Tube Outdoor Air Heat Transfer Rate [W]
Earth Tube Zone Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

Earth Tube Zone Sensible Cooling Rate [W]
These are the energy and rate associated with the zone cooling provided by the air from the earth tube. This
occurs when the earth tube outlet air temperature is less than zone air temperature.
Earth Tube Zone Sensible Heating Energy [J]

Earth Tube Zone Sensible Heating Rate [W]
These are the energy and rate associated with the zone heating provided by the air from the earth tube. This
occurs when the earth tube outlet air temperature is greater than the zone air temperature.
Earth Tube Air Flow Volume [m3]

The volume flow of air through the earth tube.
Earth Tube Air Volume Flow Rate [m3/s]

The volume flow rate of air through the earth tube.
Earth Tube Air Flow Mass [kg]

The mass flow of air through the earth tube.
Earth Tube Air Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]

The mass flow rate of air through the earth tube.
Earth Tube Fan Electric Energy [J]

Earth Tube Fan Electric Power [W]
These are the fan electricity consumption and power for intake or exhaust earth tube types.
- 344 -
Earth Tube Zone Inlet Air Temperature [C]

This is the temperature of the air entering the zone after passing through the earth tube [C]. This temperature
includes the cooling or heating of outdoor air as it passes along the pipe. When intake fan assist is used, then
the additional heat due to the fan is included in the inlet air temperature.
Earth Tube Ground Interface Temperature [C]

This is the average temperature of the ground along the outer surface of the earth tube [C].
Earth Tube Outdoor Air Heat Transfer Rate [W]

This is the rate of heat transfer from the earth tube to the outdoor air [W]. Positive values indicate the rate at
which outdoor air is preheated; negative values indicate the rate of precooling.
Domestic Hot Water

HVAC tab in model data Simple and Compact HVAC
The effect of hot water consumption (hot water taps, showers etc) on building energy use can be included in
your thermal model by switching on DHW on the HVAC tab.
When using Simple and Compact HVAC, Domestic Hot Water (DHW) is modelled in DesignBuilder by using
hot water consumption rates based on the activity in each zone. DHW hot water consumption is defined on
the Activity tab and the definition of the hot water generating equipment is described below) is defined on the
HVAC tab.
Type
Three types of DHW are available:
1-Boiler - heat is supplied by the same boiler used for heating the building
2-Gas - gas-fired hot water system
3-Electric - electric immersion heater
Delivery hot water temperature

The temperature of the water supplied to the taps.
Mains supply temperature

The temperature of the water delivered to the building. This can be approximated to the annual average
outside air temperature.
Operation
The operation schedules define the timing of the hot water draw off when the Timing HVAC + natural
ventilation operates with occupancy option model option is not selected. The profile of hot water consumption
in the EnergyPlus simulation is calculated from l/m2-day data (gal/ft2-day in IP units) entered on the Activity
tab by first estimating a typical number of hours per day. When typical workday schedules are used, this is
simply the number of hours occupied during the working day. When 7/12 schedules are used the typical
occupancy hours per day is determined from January Monday data.
Note: When using a Compact schedule to define DHW operation DesignBuilder assumes a fixed 8 hours per
day operation when calculating the maximum m3/s hot water draw off for passing to EnergyPlus.
Example: Consider a case where the DHW consumption rate is set to 0.2 l/m2-day on the Activity tab for the
zone and the DHW schedule is set to operate at 50% for 12 hours and 100% for 12 hours, this is equivalent to
100% for 18 hrs. DesignBuilder assumes that the schedule runs at 100% for 8 hours when calculating the
maximum flow rate, so it is necessary to multiply the l/m2-day DHW consumption rate on the Activity tab by
8/18 when using this schedule = 0.2 x 8 / 18 = 0.0889 l/m2-day.
DHW volumetric consumption supplied to EnergyPlus is calculated as:
DHW (m3/s) = DHW (l/m2-day) x 0.001 x m2 / (Typical hours per day x 3600)
Note: the zone DHW operation schedule is also used in Detailed HVAC when the default 1-Simple HVAC
Detailed HVAC Activity data setting is made.
- 345 -
DHW Type
A range of DHW types can be selected but note that different types of DHW system do not affect results in
EnergyPlus simulations, apart from 1- Same as HVAC which causes heating CoP and fuel to be taken from
the heating system. Other options all give the same results.
1- Same as HVAC
2- Dedicated DHW boiler
3- Stand alone water heater
4- Instantaneous DHW only
5- Instantaneous Combi
6- Direct (or off-peak) electricity
7- Heat pump
Air Temperature Distribution

By default EnergyPlus assumes that air temperature within a zone is completely uniform (i.e. the air is fully
mixed). However a number of other modelling options are provided to account for non-uniform room air
temperatures that may occur within the interior air volume of a zone.
Although there are many types of analyses (comfort, indoor air quality, etc.) that might benefit from localized
modelling of how room air varies across space, only the temperature distribution of room air within the zone is
currently addressed in EnergyPlus. This allows surface heat transfer and air system heat balance calculations
to be made taking into account natural thermal stratification of air and different types of intentional air
distribution designs such as under-floor and side-wall displacement ventilation that purport to extract room air
at higher-than-mean temperatures. Note that EnergyPlus does not have completely general methods of
modelling room air that are applicable to every conceivable type of airflow that might occur in a zone. Such
models (e.g. RANS-CFD) are too computationally expensive to use with EnergyPlus for the foreseeable
future. The models that are available in EnergyPlus offer only limited modelling capabilities for select room
airflow configurations. Also note that because the complete mixing model for room air has long been the
standard in building energy simulation, there is not currently a consensus on how to best model non-uniform
air temperatures in buildings. Therefore, it is up to the user to have a good understanding of when, where, and
how to apply the room air models available in EnergyPlus. The rest of this section provides some guidance in
the way of examples and further discussion of the models available in EnergyPlus.
The following room air temperature distribution models are provided:
1-Mixed the default option where the air temperature is modelled as being uniform through the zone.
2-Dynamic gradient which allows air temperature stratification within a zone to be modelled by setting
up a temperature gradient which varies dynamically depending on any of: outside temperature, inside
temperature, inside-outside temperature difference, heating load or cooling load.
3-Three node displacement ventilation which uses 3 nodes to model spaces that are served by a low
velocity floor-level displacement ventilation air distribution system and the dominant sources of heat
gain are from people and other localized sources located in the occupied part of the room.
4-Underfloor air distribution interior which uses upper and a lower sub-zone nodes to model interior
spaces that are served by an underfloor air distribution system and the dominant sources of heat gain
are from people, equipment, and other localized sources located in the occupied part of the room.
5-Underfloor air distribution exterior which uses upper and a lower sub-zone nodes to model
exterior spaces that are served by an underfloor air distribution system. The dominant sources of heat
gain should be from people, equipment, and other localized sources located in the occupied part of the
room, as well as convective gain coming from a warm window.
Air Temperature Distribution - Dynamic Gradient

The Dynamic Gradient Air Distribution model data allows you to model stratification within a zone by setting
up a temperature gradient which varies dynamically depending on:
Outside temperature.
Inside temperature.
- 346 -
Inside-outside temperature difference.

Heating load.
Cooling load.
How it works
Changing the Distribution mode to 2-Dynamic gradient reveals the air temperature distribution data. By
default the Interpolation mode is 2-Inside-outside DeltaT. This means that the temperature gradient within
the space is modelled as varying according to the inside-outside temperature difference. The Upper conditions
define the most extreme temperature gradient, typically under design conditions. By default, the upper
temperature difference is 10 C and the corresponding temperature gradient is 4 C/m. This means that when
the temperature difference between inside and outside is 10 C or more the internal temperature gradient is 4
C/m. The Lower conditions data shows that when the temperature difference between inside and outside is
zero there is no temperature gradient, i.e. the air is fully mixed. EnergyPlus calculates the temperature
gradient for other inside-outside temperature differences by linear interpolation.
Operation schedule
The operation schedule defines the times when air temperature distribution is to be calculated. When the
value of the schedule is 1, the distribution calculations take place, when the value is 0, the zone air
temperature is fully mixed.
Thermostat height
Thermostat height specifies the distance above the floor where the thermostat for HVAC control is situated.
This height is used by the model to determine the thermostat temperature relative to the mean air temperature
by applying the gradient.
Return air height

Return air height specifies the distance above the floor where the air leaves the zone and returns to the air
system. This height is used by the model to determine the return air temperature relative to the mean air
temperature by applying the gradient.
Range of applicability
The air temperature distribution within the zone is used as follows:
1.
2.
3.
To calculate boundary conditions for conduction through surfaces (walls, roofs, glazing etc).
To include the effects of extracting relatively warmer air at the ceiling level when using Compact HVAC.
To include the vertical position of the thermostat sensor for HVAC control.
Limitations
The air temperature distribution mechanism does not include:
1.
2.
The effects of extracting relatively warmer air at the ceiling level when using Scheduled and Calculated
The vertical position of the sensor for ventilation control.
Air Temperature Distribution - Three Node Displacement Ventilation

This model is applicable to spaces that are served by a low velocity floor-level displacement ventilation air
distribution system. Furthermore, the dominant sources of heat gain should be from people and other
localized sources located in the occupied part of the room. The model should be used with caution in zones
which have large heat gains or losses through exterior walls or windows or which have considerable direct
solar gain. The model predicts three temperatures in the room:
A foot level temperature (TFLOOR). The floor region is 0.2 meters deep and T FLOOR represents the
temperature at the mid-point of the region.
An occupied sub-zone temperature (TOC), representing the temperature in the region between the floor
layer and the upper, mixed layer.
- 347 -
An upper node representing the mixed-layer/outflow temperature (TMX) essential for overall energy
budget calculations and for modelling comfort effects of the upper layer temperature.
The following fields are used to define the Three node displacement ventilation room air temperature
distribution.
Gain distribution schedule

Select the schedule defining the fractions of the convective portion of the internal gains in the occupied
subzone that remain in the occupied subzone. The remainder of the convective portion of the internal gains in
the occupied subzone enters the plumes and is carried to the upper subzone. The types of internal gains that
are assumed to be located in the occupied subzone are:
people
task lights
electric equipment
gas equipment
hot water equipment
steam equipment
other equipment
baseboard heat
Types of internal gains that are assumed to be in the upper subzone are:
general lights
tubular daylighting devices
high temperature radiant heaters
The schedule values should be between 0 and 1. A value of 1 means that all the convection gains from
equipment, task lights and people are dispersed in the lower occupied subzone. Conversely a value of 0 puts
all the lower subzone convective gains into the plumes rising into the upper well-mixed subzone.
Number of plumes per occupant

This field specifies number of plumes per occupant. Plumes are associated with localized sources of
convective heat gain from people and equipment. For example, a value of 2.0 would be used if each occupant
has a computer that generates a separate plume that does not merge with the plume from the occupant in the
lower, occupied, subzone.
Thermostat height
This field is the height (in m or ft) of the thermostat/temperature control sensor above the floor.
- 348 -
Comfort height
The height (in m or ft) above the floor at which air temperature is calculated for comfort purposes. The air
temperature at this height is used in calculating the available measures of comfort: Fanger, Pierce or KSU.
The default is 1.1m.
ADVANCED
Temperature difference threshold for reporting
This field specifies a minimum temperature difference between the upper mixed subzone and the occupied
subzone that will be used to trigger whether or not the displacement ventilation auxiliary outputs will be
calculated. These outputs are Room Air Zone Transition Height, Room Air Zone Recommended Minimum
Flow Fraction, Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient and Room Air Zone Maximum Temperature
Gradient. They are set to negative values when the temperature difference is less than the threshold and the
output Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status is set to 1.
The value should be greater than or equal to zero and is in units of Delta C or Delta F. The default value is
0.4C.
Air Temperature Distribution - Under Floor Interior

This model is applicable to interior spaces that are served by an underfloor air distribution (UFAD) system.
The dominant sources of heat gain should be from people, equipment, and other localized sources located in
the occupied part of the room. The model should be used with caution in zones which have large heat gains
or losses through exterior walls or windows or which have considerable direct solar gain.
The model predicts two temperatures in the room:
An occupied subzone temperature (TOC), representing the temperature in the region between the floor
and the boundary of the upper subzone.
An upper subzone temperature (TMX) essential for overall energy budget calculations and for modelling
comfort effects of the upper layer temperature.
The following fields are used to define the Under Floor Air Distribution (UFAD) Interior data.
Number of diffusers
The total number of diffusers in this zone. This field can allowed to Autocalculate (in which case it is set to
the design occupancy level; i.e., number of people). If the design occupancy is low or zero but there are still
heat sources that could generate buoyancy driven plumes, the user should input a value based on the design
supply air flow rate of the zone and the design flow rate of an individual diffuser. In the absence of any other
information, divide the zone area by 100 ft2. The default for this field is Autocalculate.
Power per plume

The power in watts incorporated in a buoyancy driven thermal plume. Normally we assume all the loads of a
workstation create a single plume so that this represents the convective heat gain from a workstation 1
person, 1 computer terminal, plus any task lighting. A typical value would be 220 W. However, the model
assumes an equivalent plume derived from the zone extraction rate normalized to the number of
workstations/occupants. This field should normally be allowed to default the program will calculate a value
based upon the occupancy and the extraction rate. The default is Autocalculate.
Design effective area of diffuser

This is the design air flow opening area in square meters of a single diffuser. The default value depends on
the diffuser type. For swirl diffusers it is 0075 m2, for variable area diffusers 0.035 m2, for horizontal swirl
diffusers 0.006 m2, and for linear bar grilles 0.03 m2. The default is Autocalculate..
- 349 -
Diffuser slot angle from vertical

This input describes the angle at which air emerges from the diffusers. It should be the angle in degrees
between the vertical and the diffuser slots. The default is Autocalculate in which case the setting depends on
the diffuser type: for swirl diffusers it is 28, for variable area diffusers 45, for DV diffusers 73, and for linear
bar grilles 15.
Diffuser type
The choices for this alpha field are:
1-Swirl - a fixed area diffuser

2-Variable area maintain an approximately constant exit velocity
3-Horizontal swirl - fixed area diffuser
4-Linear bar grille - fixed area diffusers normally used in exterior zones.
5-Custom - the coefficients A to E should be entered to define the performance of the diffuser (below)
rather than let the program set the coefficients based on diffuser type.
The swirl and displacement diffusers are fixed area diffusers. The variable area diffusers maintain an
approximately constant exit velocity. Linear bar grilles are normally used in exterior zones and are fixed area
diffusers. Custom is used to signify that the user intends to input the coefficients A E (see below) rather than
let the program set the coefficients based on diffuser type. The default is 1-Swirl.
CUSTOM DIFFUSER COEFFICIENTS

When the diffuser type is set to 5-Custom the coefficients A to E should be entered to define the performance
of the diffuser. The coefficients are used in the equation:
Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2.
Gamma is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. K c is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients in the
formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type.
Coefficient A
The coefficient A in the above formula.
Coefficient B
The coefficient B in the above formula.
Coefficient C
The coefficient C in the above formula.
Coefficient D
The coefficient D in the above formula.
Coefficient E
The coefficient E in the above formula.
HEIGHT SETTINGS
Thermostat height
This field is the height (in m or ft) of the thermostat/temperature control sensor above the floor. The default is
1.2m.
Comfort height
- 350 -
Set transition height

If you would like to define the Transition height (below) then check this check box.
Transition height
An optional field to allow the transition height (in m or ft above floor) to be defined rather than have the
program calculate it. The default is 1.7m.
ADVANCED
This field specifies a minimum temperature difference between the upper subzone and the occupied subzone
that will be used to trigger whether or not the UFAD auxiliary outputs will be calculated. These outputs are
Room Air Zone Transition Height and Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient. They are set to zero
when the temperature difference is less than the threshold and the output Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status is
set to 1.
0.4C.
Air Temperature Distribution - Under Floor Exterior

This model is applicable to exterior spaces that are served by an underfloor air distribution system. The
dominant sources of heat gain should be from people, equipment, and other localized sources located in the
occupied part of the room, as well as convective gain coming from a warm window. The model predicts two
temperatures in the room:
An occupied subzone temperature (TOC), representing the temperature in the region between the floor
and the boundary of the upper subzone..
An upper subzone temperature (TMX) essential for overall energy budget calculations and for modeling
comfort effects of the upper layer temperature.
The following fields are used to define the Under Floor Air Distribution (UFAD) Exterior data.
Number of diffusers
The total number of diffusers in this zone. This field can allowed to Autocalculate (in which case it is set to
the design occupancy level; i.e., number of people). If the design occupancy is low or zero but there are still
heat sources that could generate buoyancy driven plumes, the user should input a value based on the design
supply air flow rate of the zone and the design flow rate of an individual diffuser. In the absence of any other
information, divide the zone area by 100 ft2. The default for this field is Autocalculate.
Power per plume

The power in watts incorporated in a buoyancy driven thermal plume. Normally we assume all the loads of a
workstation create a single plume so that this represents the convective heat gain from a workstation 1
person, 1 computer terminal, plus any task lighting. A typical value would be 220 W. However, the model
assumes an equivalent plume derived from the zone extraction rate normalized to the number of
workstations/occupants. This field should normally be allowed to default the program will calculate a value
based upon the occupancy and the extraction rate. The default is Autocalculate.
Design effective area of diffuser

This is the design air flow opening area in square meters of a single diffuser. The default value depends on
the diffuser type. For swirl diffusers it is 0075 m2, for variable area diffusers 0.035 m2, for horizontal swirl
diffusers 0.006 m2, and for linear bar grilles 0.03 m2. The default is Autocalculate..
Diffuser slot angle from vertical

This input describes the angle at which air emerges from the diffusers. It should be the angle in degrees
between the vertical and the diffuser slots. The default is Autocalculate in which case the setting depends on
- 351 -
the diffuser type: for swirl diffusers it is 28, for variable area diffusers 45, for DV diffusers 73, and for linear
bar grilles 15.
Diffuser type
The choices for this alpha field are:
1-Swirl - a fixed area diffuser

2-Variable area maintain an approximately constant exit velocity
3-Horizontal swirl - fixed area diffuser
4-Linear bar grille - fixed area diffusers normally used in exterior zones.
5-Custom - the coefficients A to E should be entered to define the performance of the diffuser (below)
rather than let the program set the coefficients based on diffuser type.
The swirl and displacement diffusers are fixed area diffusers. The variable area diffusers maintain an
approximately constant exit velocity. Linear bar grilles are normally used in exterior zones and are fixed area
diffusers. Custom is used to signify that the user intends to input the coefficients A E (see below) rather than
let the program set the coefficients based on diffuser type. The default is 1-Swirl.
CUSTOM DIFFUSER COEFFICIENTS

When the diffuser type is set to 5-Custom the coefficients A to E should be entered to define the performance
of the diffuser. The coefficients are used in the equation:
Kc = A*Gamma**B + C + D*Gamma + E*Gamma**2.
Gamma is a variable that characterizes the amount of stratification in a UFAD zone. K c is the fraction of the
total internal convective heat gain that is assigned to the lower (occupied) subzone. The coefficients in the
formula are defaulted based upon diffuser type.
Coefficient A
The coefficient A in the above formula.
Coefficient B
The coefficient B in the above formula.
Coefficient C
The coefficient C in the above formula.
Coefficient D
The coefficient D in the above formula.
Coefficient E
The coefficient E in the above formula.
HEIGHT SETTINGS
Thermostat height
This field is the height (in m or ft) of the thermostat/temperature control sensor above the floor. The default is
1.2m.
Comfort height
Set transition height

If you would like to define the Transition height (below) then check this check box.
- 352 -
Transition height
An optional field to allow the transition height (in m or ft above floor) to be defined rather than have the
program calculate it. The default is 1.7m.
ADVANCED
This field specifies a minimum temperature difference between the upper subzone and the occupied subzone
that will be used to trigger whether or not the UFAD auxiliary outputs will be calculated. These outputs are
Room Air Zone Transition Height and Room Air Zone Average Temperature Gradient. They are set to zero
when the temperature difference is less than the threshold and the output Room Air Zone Is Mixed Status is
set to 1.
0.4C.
On Site Electricity Generation

Generation tab in model data
EnergyPlus provides a range of different on site electricity generation options and these are coordinated
during the simulation through use of one or more Electric load centres. These define how the various
generation components are operated and coordinated together.
DesignBuilder currently supports 2 types of electric generator:
Photovoltaic (PV) solar collectors, and,

Wind turbines.
Settings for electricity generation are made at Building level on the Generation tab under the On Site
Electricity Generation header.
Note: The order of the Electric load centre objects selected on the HVAC tab is significant and is used to
structure how generators are dispatched, the first load centres and generators being managed before the later
ones. Therefore in the above example, Load centre 1 effectively has a higher priority than Load centre 2 etc.
A certain amount of caution is needed to avoid conflicting operating schemes.
Photovoltaic (PV) Systems

How To Model A PV Solar System - Summary
You can include PV panels in your model by following the instructions below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Position and size PV panels by following instructions in the Adding Solar Collectors topic.
To access the properties of the PV panel first navigate to the solar collector object by double-clicking
on the graphical object from building level or single-click on the solar collector item in the Navigator.
Once at the Solar collector object, define the performance and other panel properties on the
Constructions tab under the Solar Collector header.
Define the electric side of the PV system at building level on the Generation tab under the On Site
Electricity Generation header:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
Check the Include electric load centres check box.

Add an Electric load centre and edit the details of the system.
Select one of the DC buss types.
Select the Inverter type.
If using electrical storage define the Storage type.
Select the building solar collector on the Generator list tab.
- 353 -
g.
5.
Make sure that having defined a new Electric load centre that the correct one is selected on the
Generation tab.
When the simulation is finished you can view solar PV contributions on the Analysis and Summary
tabs:
Electric Load Centre

Electric load centres are components used to include on-site electricity generators in a simulation. The electric
load centre dispatches generators according to operation schemes and tracks and reports the amount of
electricity generated and purchased. When using on-site generators, the program provides a net report
where the total electricity used is reduced by the amount generated on site. Electrical demand tracking is done
by the internal or custom meters used by EnergyPlus for reporting. The dispatching of different generators is
based on expectations based on their nominal/rated electric power output. If the current conditions are such
that the generator model determines that generation was higher or lower, then the results of the dispatch may
differ from expectations.
Up to 5 different Electric load centre components can be included in simulations by making selections on the
On Site Electricity Generation tab. A great deal of flexibility is available by mixing different load centres and
operating schemes. If multiple load centres are used, the supervisory control will dispatch generators
sequentially across the load centres.
Electric load centres effectively serve as a load to the generators and supply power to the rest of the
building. The internal meters used by EnergyPlus for reporting do all of the demand tracking. The electric load
centre manager sums all of the building and system electric loads and provides operating schemes for the
generators. What is not provided by the on-site generation equipment, and electric storage units if specified, is
met by (purchasing) off-site electricity.
The electricity produced from photovoltaic arrays is reported in the electricity produced output variable and will
reduce the demand that the generators will try to meet for that timestep.
Load centres can include both power conditioning and storage. Separate inverter models are used to
condition DC power from photovoltaic panels into AC power for the building and utility. Load centres serving
PV need to be specified with a direct current (d.c.) buss. The other generators may have inverters inside the
devices but these are already embedded in the generator models.
- 354 -
General
Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the electric load centre.
Generator operation scheme type

Select the type of operating scheme for the generator set. The various operating schemes affect how loads
are dispatched to the generators, in effect telling the generators whether or not to run and requesting power
levels. The available operating schemes are:
1-Baseload operates the generators at their rated (requested) electric power output when the
generator is scheduled on. The Baseload scheme requests all generators scheduled on (available) to
operate, even if the amount of electric power generated exceeds the total facility electric power
demand.
2-Demand limit - limits the amount of purchased electrical from the utility to an amount specified. The
Demand limit scheme tries to have the generators meet all of the demand above the purchased electric
limit.
3-Track electrical tries to have the generators meet all of the electrical demand for the building.
4-Track schedule tries to have the generators meet all of the electrical demand determined in a userdefined schedule.
The 2-Demand limit, 3-Track electrical and 4-Track schedule schemes will sequentially load the available
generators. All demand not met by available generator capacity will be met by purchased electrical. Therefore,
if 2-Demand limit, 3-Track electrical, or 4-Track schedule is used and the available generators are not able
to meet demand, then purchased electricity will by used to offset the difference. If a generator is needed in the
simulation for a small load and it is less than the minimum part load ratio the generator will operate at the
minimum part load ratio and the excess will either reduce demand or the excess energy will be available for
returning to the electric grid.
If the load centre includes electrical storage, then the choice of operating schemes will also affect how storage
is managed.
Technical
For all operating schemes except 1-Baseload, a total electric load reduction target (or thermal load converted
to electrical equivalent) is established for the load centre based on the specific operating scheme. The load
centre then requests that its generators operate, one-by-one in the order specified, until the target is met or
exceeded. Generators that are not scheduled as available for the simulation time step are not called to
operate. The requested power demand to be met by each generator is the smaller of the nominal rated
electric power output (as specified in the Generators object) or the remaining total electric load reduction
target for the load centre. After each electric generator is requested to operate, the actual electric power
delivered by the generator, which may be greater than or less than the requested amount due to inputs
specified in the generator performance model, is used to update the remaining total electric power target for
the other generators associated with this load centre.
Most of the operating schemes will sequentially load the available electric load centres and generators.
EnergyPlus can accept multiple Electric load centres with different operating schemes. Because of this, there
are two levels of reporting, one for the whole building and a second for each load centre. The whole-building
results are managed with the internal meters for the entire model. The individual load-centre results are
summed for those generators connected to a particular load centre. The total electricity purchased is reported
both in power and energy units. This value is positive when the amount of energy is purchased from the utility.
This value can be negative when the total electricity produced is greater than the facility electrical needs. The
excess will either be available for storage or to sell back to the electric utility company.
Demand Limit Scheme Purchased Electric Demand Limit

The demand limit above which the generators will try and meet the entire electrical load on the building minus
the photovoltaic array if available (in W).
- 355 -
Track schedule
When the 4-Track schedule option is used then you should select a schedule containing values for the
demand loads placed on the generator(s). The schedule values should be in Watts.
Electrical buss type

This alpha field is used to describe how the electric load centre is configured with respect to any power
conditioning and/or storage equipment. There are five configurations for load centres available by using one of
these keywords:
1-Alternating current
2-Alternating current with storage
3-Direct current with inverter
4-Direct current with inverter DC storage
5-Direct current with inverter AC storage
All the generators connected to a specific load centre need to be of the same type (all AC or all DC). If the
generators are DC, then an inverter is needed to convert the DC to AC.
Alternating Current
The most basic configuration is selected with the keyword Alternating Current for the Electrical Buss Type,
shown in the following diagram.
The Alternating current load centres have AC generators with no storage and behave in the following way. All
electric demand not met by the sum of the electrical power produced by the available generators will be met
by purchased electricity. If a generator is needed in the simulation for a small load and the load is less than
the generators minimum part load ratio, the generator will operate at the minimum part load ratio and the
excess will either reduce demand or the excess energy will be exported back to the electric utility company.
The purchased electrical demand limit is the user input for the demand limit above which the generators will
try and meet the entire electrical load on the building. It is possible to prescribe a set of
ElectricLoadCenter:Distribution objects with inconsistent or conflicting operating schemes, so users need to
be careful.
- 356 -
Alternating current with storage

A configuration with AC generators with on-site electrical storage is selected using the 2-Alternating current
with storage Electrical buss type and is shown in the following diagram.
The Alternating current with storage load centres attempt to augment the generator electricity production so
that the power requests are met. Storage control logic is discussed below under Electrical Storage.
Direct current with inverter

The basic configuration for photovoltaic generators is selected using the 3-Direct current with inverter
electrical buss type and is shown in the following diagram.
- 357 -
The Direct current with inverter load centres collect DC power from various PV arrays, run the DC power
through an inverter and produce AC power. The PV arrays produce DC power based on the availability of
sunshine and do not respond to load requests made by the electric load centre. The AC output from the
inverter is what is recorded as electricity production.
Direct current with inverter DC storage

If the PV-based load centre is equipped with DC electrical storage that is connected before the inverter, then
the buss type should be 4-Direct current with inverter DC Storage and is shown in the following diagram.
The Direct current with inverter DC storage load centres charge or draw DC power to meet the requested
electrical load.
Direct current with inverter AC storage

If the PV-based load centre is equipped with AC electrical storage that is connected after the inverter, then the
buss type should be 5-Direct current with inverter AC storage and is shown in the following diagram.
- 358 -
Inverter
The inverter selection option is only used if the Electrical buss type is set to 3-Direct current with inverter
and it allows you to select the inverter connected to this load centre (if any). There are three types of inverter
models available:
Simple,
Look up table, or
Function of Power.
Storage
The storage selection option is used to identify the electrical storage connected to this load centre (if any). It is
only used if the Electrical Buss Type is set to 4-Direct current with inverter DC storage or 5-Direct current
with inverter AC storage.
Cost
Distribution and electrical cost
Enter the cost of the electrical power distribution and any other related costs here.
The cost of the panels themselves is entered on the Constructions tab under the Solar Collectors header.
Generator List
On the Generator List tab you can define up to 30 generators per Electric load centre. Set the number of
generators and select the generator to be used for each. For DC Electric load centres the generators will all
be PV solar collectors and for AC centres the generators will all be Wind turbines.
- 359 -
Tip: To model multiple PV panels without the need to draw all of the building panels you can reference the
same panel multiple times on the Generator list tab. You should only do this if all of the panels have the same
shading and if the shading cast by the panels does not impact on the building.
Wind Turbine Systems

How To Model A Wind Turbine System - Summary
You can include one or more wind turbines in your model by following the instructions below.
1.
First define the electric side of the wind turbine system at building level on the Generation tab under
the On Site Electricity Generation header:
a.
b.
c.
d.
e.
f.
2.
Check the Include electric load centres check box.

Add an Electric load centre and edit the details of the system.
Use one of the AC buss types.
If using storage define the Storage type.
Select the wind turbine on the Generator list tab.
Make sure that having defined a new Electric load centre that the correct one is selected on the
HVAC tab.
When the simulation is finished you can view wind turbine contributions in absolute and % terms on the
Summary tab:
Wind Turbines
Wind turbines convert the kinetic energy of the surrounding air-stream into electricity. The EnergyPlus wind
turbine model calculates the electrical power produced based on the characteristics of the turbine itself as well
local environmental conditions such as wind speed and density of air at the height of the systems. The model
obtains the weather information from the simulation weather data file and then determines the wind speed and
air density at the specific height of the system. It also requires the user to input the annual average wind
- 360 -
speed measured at the local site and the height of the measurement so that it factors in differences between
the weather file wind data and the local wind data.
Tip: Wind turbines are included in the model by specifying them on the Generator list tab of the Electric load
centre dialog when one of the a.c. Buss types is selected.
Technical
The model employs the general kinetic energy equation to calculate the performance characteristics of the
horizontal axis wind turbine (HAWT) systems. It provides a simple approximation algorithm when the power
coefficient, Cp, is available which represents the efficiency of the wind turbine in the wind power extraction
from the ambient air stream. It also allows the user to input experimental constants so that the power
coefficient can precisely be determined according to the characteristic of the airfoil of the system. As for the
vertical axis wind turbine (VAWT) systems, it employs the general mathematical equations for straight-bladed
Darrieus-type VAWT systems, which are common to VAWT systems. Various types of VAWT systems such
as the Savonius-type and the curved-blade (or egg-beater) type may be simulated with this same model. It
includes two different types of dynamic power control: Fixed Speed Fixed Pitch (FSFP) and Variable Speed
Fixed Pitch (VSFP). Currently, it does not include an algorithm for modelling pitch control such as Fixed
Speed Variable Pitch (FSVP) and Variable Speed Variable Pitch (VSVP). The model also has the ability to
account for transient losses associated with the power produced during dynamic control by a user-specified
fraction.
The model does not include detailed algorithms for generators and inverters due to concerns for
computational convergence, time, and usability. Instead, all conversion losses of these subsystems are
included by applying a user-supplied total system efficiency to the maximum power extraction of the wind
turbine. The field of the total system efficiency must be specified by the user.
Name
A unique user assigned name for a particular wind turbine system. Any reference to this unit by another object
will use this name.
The schedule selected here defines the times when the wind turbine system can run. A schedule value
greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the time period. A value less than or
equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is off and will not operate for the time period.
Rotor type
This field is the type of axis of the wind turbine. Select from 2 types
1-Horizontal axis or
2-Vertical axis.
A different algorithm is used in the calculation of the electrical power output of the wind turbine depending on
the Rotor type.
Power control
This field is the type of rotor control for the wind turbine. This protects the system against the overloading for a
system with no speed or pitch control and also to maximize the energy yield for the system. Four different
control types are classified in the literature:
1-Fixed Speed Fixed Pitch (FSFP),

2-Fixed Speed Variable Pitch (FSVP),
3-Variable Speed Fixed Pitch (VSFP), and
4-Variable Speed Variable Pitch (VSVP).
Currently, FSFP and VSFP types can be modelled in EnergyPlus. The other two types will be modelled as
VSFP. If the first FSFP control type is chosen, the model assumes the maximum power at a fixed rotor speed
when the power output predicted is greater than the maximum until the rotor speed reaches the maximum
wind speed (see next field). If one of the last three control options is chosen, the model assumes that the
system produces a constant power at the rated wind speed when the wind speed is between the rated wind
speed and cut-out wind speed. The default value is 3-Variable Speed Fixed Pitch (VSFP).
- 361 -
Rated rotor speed

This field is the maximum rotational speed of the rotor at the rated power of the wind turbine in rev/min
(revolution per minute). It is used to determine the tip speed ratio of the rotor and relative flow velocity incident
on a single blade of the VAWT systems.
Rotor diameter
This field is the diameter of the rotor (in m or ft). Note that this field is not the height of the blade, but the
diameter of the perpendicular circle from the vertical pole in the VAWT systems. It determines the swept area
of the rotor of the HAWT systems and the chordal velocity of the VAWT systems.
Overall height
This field is the height of the hub of the HAWT system, or of the pole of the VAWT system (in m or ft). It is
necessary to estimate local air density and the wind speed at this particular height where the wind turbine
system is installed.
Number of blades
This field is the number of blades of the wind turbine. The azimuth angle of the rotor of the VAWT system is
determined by dividing 360 degree by this field so that the model determines the chordal velocity component
and the normal velocity component of the system. The default value is 3.
Rated power
This field is the nominal power output of the wind turbine system at the rated wind speed (in W or Btu/hr).
Note that the maximum power of the system should be entered with no control, i.e. FSFP control type, can
physically produce. Manufacturer data sometimes describes this as peak power or rated capacity. If the
local wind speed is greater than the rated wind speed, the model assumes constant power output of this field.
Rated wind speed

This field is the wind speed that the wind turbine system indicates the peak in the power curve (in m/s or
ft/min). The system produces the maximum power at this speed and the speed of the rotor is managed based
on this wind speed.
Cut in wind speed

This field is the lowest wind speed where the wind turbine system can be operated (in m/s or ft/min). No power
generation is achieved as long as the ambient wind speed is lower than this speed.
Cut out wind speed

This field is the greatest wind speed (in m/s or ft/min). When the wind speed exceeds this value, the wind
turbine system needs to be stopped because of inefficiencies in the system. All systems that have either pitch
or speed control must be stopped when the ambient wind speed exceeds this speed. Note that the user
should input a wind speed above which physical damage to the system might be caused in the case of a
FSFP system. It appears as extreme/survival/design wind speed in the literature. The system will be turned
off when the ambient wind speed is over this speed.
Fraction system efficiency

This field is the overall system efficiency of the wind turbine system. It includes all the conversion losses as
well as transient losses during the dynamic control when the ambient wind speed is between the rated wind
speed and cut-out wind speed (see previous fields).
The user also has the ability to specify delivery losses from the system to the local area. If the user does not
enter a fraction, the model assumes the default value of 0.835. Note that the fraction must be between zero
and one.
Maximum tip speed ratio

This field is the maximum tip speed ratio between the rotor velocity and ambient wind velocity. The rotor
speed varies with this ratio to maximize the power output when the rotor control types are variable speed
ones. This field allows the user to adjust the power output from the particular system or to find the optimal tip
speed ratio of the system. Optimal tip speed ratio is dependent on the number of blades. It is typically about 6,
5, and 3 for two-bladed, three-bladed, and four-bladed rotor, respectively. For the vertical axis wind turbine, it
is smaller than horizontal axis wind turbine, and varies with the chord area. The default and maximum values
are 5.0 and 12.0.
- 362 -
Power calculation method

There are 2 models to choose from:
1-Simple - simple approximation model employs the general kinetic energy equation and a Maximum
power coefficient to calculate power extraction from the wind.
2-Analytical - The power output of the turbine is calculated from the Power coefficient equation using 6
parameters C1-6.
Maximum power coefficient

This is the maximum fraction of power extraction possible from the ambient wind and is required only when
the 1-Simple Simulation method is selected. This value can be calculated from the power curve published in
most manufacturers' specifications by using the kinetic energy equation as:
where:
P = power production at the rated wind speed [W]
= density of air [kg/m3]
A = swept area of rotor [m2]
V = rated wind speed [m/s]
Cp = power coefficient
The maximum and default coefficient values are 0.59 and 0.35 respectively.
Annual local average wind speed

This is the local annual average wind speed that represents a representative wind profile at the location of the
system (in m/s or ft/min). It is used to factor the difference in wind speed between the weather file wind data
and the locally measured wind data so that the model minimizes uncertainties caused by improper wind data
at the particular location. Considerable differences between the weather file wind data and the local wind data
typically appear so it is important to consider this carefully in order to use accurate local wind data in the
simulation. The model internally determines a multiplier and it is multiplied by the weather file wind data
adjusted at the height of the system.
Height for local average wind speed

This is the height that the local wind speed is measured (in m or ft). The annual average wind speed (see
previous field) input by the user is internally recalculated by existing EnergyPlus functions at the height of the
local station. This modified wind speed is then factored and applied to the weather file wind data. The
minimum and default values are zero and 50m.
Vertical Axis
For vertical axis turbines you can enter details on the Blade chord area, drag coefficient and lift coefficient on
the Vertical Axis tab.
Blade chord area

This is the blade chord area of a single blade of VAWT system in (m2 or ft2). It is necessary to determine the
net tangential and normal forces of a single blade.
Blade drag coefficient

This is the blade drag coefficient for a specific blade. It is for determining the tangential and normal force
coefficients with the blade lift coefficient (below) so that the model can calculate the power output from the
system. The user should be able to obtain this parameter for a specific blade from the manufacturers data.
This field is only required for VAWT systems.
- 363 -
Blade lift coefficient

This field is the blade lift coefficient for a specific blade. It is for determining the tangential and normal force
coefficients with the blade drag coefficient (above) so that the model can calculate the power output from the
system. The user should also be able to obtain it for a specific blade from the manufacturers data. This field is
only required for VAWT systems.
Power Coefficients
For horizontal axis turbines using the 2-Analytical Power calculation method the Power coefficients can be
entered on the Power Coefficients tab.
Power coefficient parameters C1-C6

These six fields are the parameters for the power coefficient equation shown below. These fields are used to
determine the power coefficient of the system. The analytical approximation model of the power coefficient in
EnergyPlus is:
where:
Cp = power coefficient
C1- 6 = empirical power coefficient parameters
= tip speed ratio (often known as TSR)
i = tip speed ratio at ith time step
= azimuth angle of the pitch, 0 [degree]
The default values are given in the table below.
C1
0.5176
C2
116
C3
0.4
C4
0.0
C5
5.0
C6
21
Electrical Storage
Electrical energy provided by generators such as PV panels and wind turbines can be stored on site for later
use using Storage components.
Tip: Electric storage devices are included in the model by specifying them on the Electrical load centre dialog
when one of the storage Electrical buss types has been selected.
There are 2 ways to model the define the performance of the electrical storage device:
1-Simple storage - simple definition of the performance of the storage device that is not intended to
represent any specific type of storage technology.
2-Battery - more detailed performance definition of a battery using the kinetic battery model.
The type of storage device is defined by selecting the appropriate Category option on the Storage dialog.
- 364 -
Simple Storage
The Simple storage option is accessed by selecting the Simple storage category on the Storage dialog. The
Simple type of Electrical storage component is used to model storage of electricity in an Electric load centre. It
is a simple model that does not attempt to represent any of the detailed performance characteristics of a real
storage device such as a battery. The type of power, AC or DC, depends on the configuration chosen as the
Electrical buss type in the Electric load centre.
Name
This field contains a unique name for the electric storage device.
Category
There are 2 categories to choose from:
Simple storage for a simple definition of the performance of batteries or other storage device.
Battery for a more detailed performance definition of a battery
The Category selected affects the type of model used and the data to be entered on the Storage dialog.
This schedule describes the times when the storage device is available. If storage is not available, by
scheduling a value of 0, then no electrical energy can be stored or drawn from the device. Any non-zero
schedule value means the devices is available. If this field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time
periods.
HEAT GAIN TO ZONE

Attach to a zone
If the losses from the storage device should be represented as heat gains to a zone then check this box and
select the zone in the next field.
Zone
This field contains the name of the thermal zone where the storage device is located. The selected zone will
receive the storage losses as heat gains.
Radiative fraction for zone heat gains

This field contains the fraction of storage losses that enter the zone as long-wave thermal radiation. This
should be a factor between 0.0 and 1.0. The balance of the losses are convective. This field is only used
when a zone is attached.
SIMPLE OPTIONS
Nominal energetic efficiency for charging
This field contains the charging efficiency. This is the energetic efficiency of storing electrical energy in the
storage device. A value of 1.0 means the device does not lose any energy when charging.
Nominal discharging energetic efficiency

This field contains the discharging efficiency. This is the energetic efficiency of drawing electrical energy from
the storage device. A value of 1.0 means the device does not lose any energy when drawing power.
Maximum storage capacity

This field describes the maximum amount of energy that can be stored in the device in Joules. Once the
storage device is full, no additional energy can be stored in it.
Maximum power for discharging

This field describes the maximum rate at which electrical power can be discharged from the storage device (in
W).
- 365 -
Maximum power for charging

This field describes the maximum rate at which electrical power can be stored in the device (in W).
Initial state of charge

This field describes the value for the initial state of charge in Joules. This is used to model the storage device
as having some amount of stored energy at the beginning of the simulation period.
Battery
Warning: Due to a bug in the EnergyPlus v8 ElectricLoadCenter:Storage:Battery object the DesignBuilder
Battery option causes simulations to fail in models where the solar PV system is unable to meet the entire
building electric load. EnergyPlus developers have been informed of the problem and we expect it to be fixed
in a future version. In the meantime you are advised to use the Simple storage option.
The Battery option is accessed by selecting the Battery category on the Storage dialog. Batteries can be used
to store charge in an Electric load centre. The battery bank is a collection of one or more individual battery
modules. Given the surplus or deficit power from the electrical system and the state of charge from the
previous time step, this object can model the voltage, current, and energy losses with charging and
discharging during each time step. The cumulative battery damage can be also modelled and reported at the
end of each simulation run.
The battery component allows both Lead-Acid and Nickel Cadmium batteries to be simulated. With input
parameters derived from specific battery tests, the object is expected to support other battery types such as
Lithium-ion batteries.
The kinetic battery model assumes that part of the batterys energy storage capacity is immediately available
in discharging or charging while the rest is chemically bound. As a function of constant current, the battery
capacity is related to three parameters: the maximum capacity at infinitesimal current, the capacity ratio of
available charges, and the conversion ratio between available charges and bound charges. These parameters
are usually obtained via curve fitting based on battery data sheets or test data.
Each individual battery module is modelled as a voltage source in series with an electrical resistance. KiBaM
assumes that the internal resistance is constant and the open circuit voltage varies with the electric current,
the state of charge and the operation mode (charging or discharging). For an individual battery module, the
open circuit voltage at any time is correlated to the voltage at fully charged/discharged state and three other
regression coefficients. These regression coefficients are usually obtained via curve fitting based on battery
test data.
The object offers user the option to perform battery life calculation. If battery life is modelled, the user needs to
provide a group of coefficients for the correlation between the number of cycles for battery failure and the
corresponding cycle range. More detailed information can be found in the Engineering Reference.
Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the battery bank.
Category
There are 2 categories of electrical storage device to choose from:
Simple storage for a simple definition of the performance of batteries or other storage device.
Battery for a more detailed performance definition of a battery
The Category selected affects the type of model used and the data to be entered on the Storage dialog.
This alpha field contains the schedule name (ref. Schedule) that describes when the battery is available. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that electrical energy can be stored or drawn from
- 366 -
the battery. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the battery is not available. If this
field is blank, the schedule has values of 1 for all time periods.
HEAT GAIN TO ZONE

Attach to a zone
If the losses from the storage device should be represented as heat gains to a zone then check this box and
select the zone in the next field.
Zone
This field contains the name of the thermal zone where the battery is located. Entering a valid name of zone
here will direct EnergyPlus to include the energy storage losses as heat gains to the named thermal zone. If
the battery is not within a thermal zone, this field can be left blank and the thermal energy associated with
storage losses is removed from the building model.
Radiative fraction for zone heat gains

This field contains the fraction of storage losses that enter the zone as long-wave thermal radiation. This
numeric filed should have a value between 0.0 and 1.0. The balance of the losses is convective. This data is
only required when the Attach to a zone option is checked.
BATTERY STORAGE
Number of battery modules in parallel
This field defines the number of modules connected in parallel in the battery bank.
Number of battery modules in series

This field defines the number of modules connected in series in the battery bank. The total number of modules
in a battery bank is equal to the number of modules in parallel times the number of modules in series.
Maximum module capacity

This field indicates the maximum capacity of one battery module. It is evaluated as the total Amp-hours
available when a full battery is discharged at infinitesimal current. This capacity is for an individual battery
module, not for the whole battery bank. The maximum capacity can be found from manufactures data or
derived from test data by curve fitting.
Initial fractional state of charge

This field describes the initial state of charge in terms of the fraction of maximum capacity as defined in the
previous field.
Fraction of available charge capacity

The kinetic battery model assumes that battery is a two-tank electrical energy storage device: an available
tank and a bound tank. The available tank can be immediately charged or discharged, while the bound tank
can only be charged or discharged via the available tank.
This field specifies the fraction of total charge in the battery that is part of the available tank. The ratio of
available charge capacity to total capacity is a parameter usually derived from test data by curve fitting.
Change rate from bound charge to available charge

This field specifies the rate at which the charge flows between the available tank and the bound tank. It is a
parameter used to calculate the conversion between available charge and chemically bound charge when
charging and discharging the battery. This parameter is usually derived from test data by curve fitting.
Fully charged module open circuit voltage

This field indicates the open circuit voltage for a fully charged battery module. It can be found from
manufactures data or battery tests.
- 367 -
Fully discharged module open circuit voltage

This field indicates the open circuit voltage for a fully discharged battery module. It can be found from
manufactures data or battery tests.
Voltage change curve for charging

This field specifies the name of a Rectangular Hyperbola 2 performance curve that determines the change of
open circuit voltage (E ) as a function of the battery state of charge in charging. The change of open circuit
voltage is relative to a fully discharged battery. The curve has the following form:
where X is the battery charge divided by the maximum capacity at a given current. More details can be found
from the Engineering Reference.
Voltage change curve for discharging

This field specifies the name of a Rectangular Hyperbola 2 performance curve that determines the change of
open circuit voltage (E ) as a function of the battery state of charge in discharging. The change of open
circuit voltage is relative to a fully charged battery. The curve has the following form:
where X is the removed charge divided by the maximum capacity at a given current. More details can be
found from the Engineering Reference.
Module internal electrical resistance

This field specifies the battery internal resistance in ohms. In theory, the electrical resistance within the battery
varies with the state of charge and depends on whether it is in charging or discharging. In the kinetic battery
model, the internal resistance is assumed as constant and the terminal voltage varies with current and state of
charge. The internal resistance may be obtained from the battery manufacture or battery test data. Note that
the field is for an individual module, not for the whole battery bank.
Maximum module discharging current

This field indicates the maximum current at which the battery can be discharged continuously. The limit on
discharge current is usually defined by the battery manufacture to avoid battery damage. The limit is for an
individual battery module.
Module cut-off voltage

This field specifies the minimum allowable voltage, below which the battery is generally regarded as empty.
The cut-off voltage is usually defined by the battery manufacture and it is for an individual battery module.
Module charge rate limit

This field specifies the limit on charging current relative to the remaining charge until the battery is full. This
limit reflects the common practice that the charge rate is reduced as the battery gets more charged.
BATTERY LIFE
Battery life calculation
This checkbox indicates whether the battery life model is activated in the simulation. If the battery life model is
activated, the following 2 inputs are required.
Number of cycle bins

This field specifies the number of equally ranged cycle bins in battery life simulation. If 10 bins are used, the
cycle ranges will include 10%, 20%, , 100%.
- 368 -
Battery cycle life curve

This field specifies the Double Exponential Decay Curve that correlates the cycles of battery failure (CF) and
fractional depth of discharge (R). The curve is:
Inverters
Inverters are used to model conversion from Direct Current (DC) to Alternating Current (AC) in an electric load
centre that contains photovoltaic modules. Such a load centre has an array of photovoltaic modules that feed
an inverter with DC power and the inverter produces AC power.
Tip: Electric inverters can be included in the model by selecting them on the Generator List tab of the
Electrical load centre dialog when one of the d.c. Electrical buss types has been selected.
Three types of inverter can be defined:
Simple - fixed conversion efficiency.

Function of Power - conversion efficiency depends on power and is defined using a performance
curve.
Lookup table - conversion efficiency depends on power and is defined using a look up table.
The type of inverter can be selected using the Category option on the Inverter dialog.
Inverter - Simple
Simple inverters use a single fixed conversion efficiency value.
GENERAL
Name
The name of the inverter entered here must also be unique across all other inverters in the model.
Category
Select the type of inverter from the options below:

curve.
The schedule that describes when the inverter is available. If the inverter is scheduled to not be available, by
scheduling a value of 0, then it cannot produce AC power and will not consume ancillary power during
standby. Any non-zero schedule value means the inverter is available to produce AC power and consume
ancillary power during standby. If the Inverter is scheduled to be unavailable but it is being supplied with DC
power anyway, then the energy is dissipated as heat.
SIMPLE
Inverter efficiency
This field contains the value for inverter efficiency. In the simple model, efficiency is a constant. This is the socalled 1-term model. Input data for different types of inverters is available at:
http://www.gosolarcalifornia.org/equipment/inverter_tests/summaries
- 369 -
The CEC Efficiency would be the value to enter here.
HEAT GAINS TO ZONE

Attach to a zone
If the inverters losses are to be modelled as heat gains to a zone in the building thermal model then check
this option. Otherwise inverter losses are considered to be lost to outside.
Zone
When including inverter losses and heat gains to a zone select the building zone where the inverter is located.
Radiative fraction
This field contains the fraction of inverter thermal losses that enter the zone as long-wave thermal radiation.
This should be a factor between 0.0 and 1.0. The balance of the losses is convective. This data is only
required when including inverter losses and gains to a zone.
Inverter - Function Of Power

Function of Power inverters use a function of normalized power to calculate the efficiency of conversion from
DC to AC.
GENERAL
Name
Category

curve.
FUNCTION OF POWER
Efficiency function of power curve
This is the curve representing the relationship between DC power input into the inverter and the efficiency with
which that power is converted to AC. The curve can be of type Linear, Quadratic, or Cubic. The curves x
value is DC power input normalized by the Maximum continuous input power (below). The result of the
curve should be power conversion efficiency expressed as a fraction between 0.0 and 1.0.
Rated maximum continuous input power

This field contains the rated power input (in W). This is value used to normalize input power for use with the
curve named in the previous field. This is DC power from the PV arrays going into the inverter.
- 370 -
Minimum efficiency
This field contains a minimum bound on the inverter efficiency. This value will be used as a limit on the curves
result.
Maximum efficiency
This field contains a maximum bound on the inverter efficiency. This value will be used as a
limit on the curves result.
Minimum power output

This field contains a lower limit on the AC power produced by the inverter (in W). If the resulting power output
would be below this level, then the inverter is assumed to not produce any power and is in stand by mode. All
DC power input is lost (unless it is going into storage).
Maximum power
This field contains an upper limit on the AC power produced by the inverter (in W). If the resulting power
output would be above this level, then the power produced is capped at this level with the rest of input power
converted to losses (unless it is going into storage).
Ancillary power consumed In standby

This field contains the ancillary power (in W) used by the inverter when not producing AC power. This is AC
electricity consumed in standby mode. Standby mode occurs when the inverter is scheduled to be available
but the incoming DC power is too low.
HEAT GAINS TO ZONE

Attach to a zone
Zone
Radiative fraction
Inverters - Lookup Table

Lookup Table inverters model DC to AC power conversion efficiency by interpolating values from a look up
table. The data structure has been designed to be used with data contained in the Inverter Performance Test
Summaries available at:
http://www.gosolarcalifornia.org/equipment/inverter_tests/summaries
All of the data needed for this object can be found there by make and model of inverter. The core of the data
set is a 3x6 matrix of efficiency at different voltage and power levels. These form the look up table used in the
model. Note that EnergyPlus PV models currently model only power and not the voltage and current situation.
Therefore, only the nominal voltage data are used. This is the middle row of data in the Go Solar summaries.
GENERAL
Name
- 371 -
Category

curve.
LOOKUP TABLE
Rated maximum continuous output power
This field contains the rated maximum continuous output power (in W).
Night tare loss power

This field contains the night tare loss (in W). This is modelled as ancillary power consumed during standby.
Nominal voltage input

This field contains the nominal DC input voltage (in V). This is Vnom in the Go Solar test summaries.
EFFICIENCY AT NOMINAL VOLTAGE

At 10% Power
The fractional efficiency at nominal voltage and 10% power.
At 20% Power
At 30% Power
At 50% Power
At 75% Power
At 100% Power
HEAT GAINS TO ZONE

Attach to a zone
Zone
- 372 -
Radiative fraction
Economics
Economics tab in model data
When using Detailed HVAC you can define 3 aspects of building economics on the Economics tab at building
level:
Tariff analysis - to calculate the costs of the building utility usage.

Construction costs - include construction cost in simulation inputs.
Life-cycle cost - (LCC) to calculate the whole building life-cycle cost.
Note: You must have Economics and HVAC licence modules to work with the data on this tab. HVAC is
required to provide access to Detailed HVAC with its selection of EnergyPlus fuel types. Simple HVAC cannot
access tariff analysis (and hence LCC) as it uses ideal loads HVAC systems rather than EnergyPlus fuels .
Tariff Analysis
To calculate the costs of the utilities, fuels etc use the tariff analysis section of the Economics tab.
Include Tariff Analysis

To include a tariff analysis check the Include tariff analysis checkbox.
Number Of Tariffs
Enter the number of tariffs to be included in the simulation. You will be able to select a Tariff analysis
component for each.
Tariff 1, 2 Etc
Select the Tariff analysis component describing the characteristics of each tariff to be included. Up to 5
different tariffs can be selected depending on the Number of tariffs selected above.
Construction Costs
Include Construction Cost In Simulation Inputs
To include the construction cost of the building in the simulation you should check this checkbox. This must be
done to include construction cost in a Life cycle cost calculation.
Construction Cost
Select the Construction cost component.
- 373 -
Life Cycle Cost

Include Life Cycle Cost Analysis
To include a life cycle cost analysis check this check box.
Life Cycle Cost

Select the Life cycle cost component defining the analysis to be included in the simulation.
Tariff Analysis
Monthly utility bills are often directly related to monthly energy consumption and monthly peak demand. The
approach of tariff analysis is to allow you to model the individual component charges that make up the utility
bill and report the results on a monthly basis. The calculation is organized in hierarchy for economics charges
illustrated below.
Any charges included in the EnergyCharges category are added together at the first step. The
EnergyCharges, DemandCharges and ServiceCharges are added together to form the Basis.The Basis,
Adjustments and Surcharges are added together to form the Subtotal. And finally the Total is obtained from
the summation of Subtotal and Taxes, where the Total represents the total monthly charges on that tariff for
the energy source used. In addition, each category name is usually used as a source variable when setting
charges and doing tariff calculation.
In detail, this module consists of the name of the tariff, the type of tariff, and other details about the overall
tariff. The objects such as Tariff, Charge (either Simple or Block), Qualify, Ratchet stayed in the same tariff
package will perform tariff calculation with tariff name being given on Tariff tab.
Multiple Tariff objects can be modelled, and it is common that electric and gas utilities have more than one
rate that may be used. However, only one Tariff for each Output Meter object and Group Name is shown in
the Economics Summary Report. The one that is shown in the report is chosen by first eliminating Tariff
objects that are not qualified due to their Qualify objects. If more than one Tariff object remains, the one that
has the lowest cost for a combination of an Output Meter and Group Name will be selected. If the Group
Name field is not checked, then the lowest cost Tariff object is chosen for each Meter.
There are 5 tabs on the Tariffs dialog:
Tariff
Charge
Qualify
Ratchet
User Variables
- 374 -
Tariff Analysis - Tariff

Tariff tab on Tariff Analysis dialog
TARIFF
Tariff name
The field gives the name of the tariff to be modelled. Tariffs are sometimes called rates. The name is used in
identifying the output results and in associating all of the charges and other objects that make up a tariff.
Description
Enter a description for the tariff.
Category
Select a category for the tariff from:
Electricity tariffs
Gas tariffs
Other tariffs
Output meter name

The name of any relevant meter defined by EnergyPlus but normally set to one of:
1-Electricity:Facility,
2-Gas:Facility,
3-ElectricityPurchased:Facility,
4-ElectricitySurplusSold:Facility,
5-ElectricityNet:Facility,
6-Other Defined Meter
This output meter name must point to a valid meter, otherwise it will lead to unexpected results.
Usually, the Electricity:Facility meter or the ElectricityPurchased:Facility is selected when the buyFromUtility
option is used, the ElectricitySurplusSold:Facility meter is selected when the sellToUtility option is used and
the ElectricityNet:Facility meter is selected when the netMetering option is used.
To calculate energy cost for specific energy use, the corresponding output meter name must be used (if input
manually, it should be typed exactly as EnergyPlus defined). For example, if your utility cost calculation is
intended for lighting electricity only, the InteriorLights:Electricity output meter name should be used here.
Conversion factor choice

A choice that allows several different predefined conversion factors to be used; otherwise, user defined
conversion factors are used as defined in the next two fields.
The choices are:
1-UserDefined
2-kWh
3-Therm
4-MMBtu
5-MJ
6-KBtu
7-MCF
8-CCF
The following table shows the conversion factors when specifying one of the predefined choices:
- 375 -
Energy conversion factor

This field will be used only if Conversion factor choice is set to 1-UserDefined. It defines a multiplier used to
convert energy into the units specified by the utility in their tariff. If no conversion is required, input 1 here. This
is also used for all objects (such as Charge, Qualify) used in the same tariff.
Demand conversion factor

This field will be used only if Conversion Factor Choice is set to 1-UserDefined. It defines a multiplier used to
convert demand into the units specified by the utility in their tariff. If no conversion is required, input 1 here.
This is also used for all objects (such as Charge, Qualify) used in the same tariff.
SCHEDULES
Use 'Time of use period schedule'?
Check this check box if you would like to include a time of use period schedule.
Time of use period schedule

Select the schedule that defines the time-of-use periods that occur each day. The period schedule is used to
determine which variables are defined. The values for the different variables are:
1 is Peak
2 is Shoulder
3 is OffPeak
4 is MidPeak
- 376 -
Note: Different utilities use different terms to describe their rates. Sometimes the "shoulder" and the term
"midpeak" both mean basically the same thing. To define a time of use period schedule, you do not need
always use all of these terms. For terms Shoulder and MidPeak, in DesignBuilder/EnergyPlus you can use
either term as long as you use them consistently throughout the description of the utility tariff. Of course, you
can use them both if the utility has four levels though it is very unusual.
The following variables are created automatically if these different periods are used in the schedule and
include:
peakEnergy
peakDemand
shoulderEnergy
shoulderDemand
offPeakEnergy
offPeakDemand
midPeakEnergy
midPeakDemand
Some special variables are created that include only demand from one period that exceeds the demand from
another period. For other months that do not exceed, the values are zero. These variables are seldom used
but are available for the occasional rate that includes a clause looking at demands during one period that
exceed another period.
PeakExceedsOffPeak
OffPeakExceedsPeak
PeakExceedsMidPeak
MidPeakExceedsPeak
PeakExceedsShoulder
ShoulderExceedsPeak
If no Period Schedule is specified then no variables mentioned above will be created.
Use 'Season schedule'?

Check this check box if you would like to include a season schedule.
Season schedule
Select the schedule that defines the seasons. The seasons are:
1 is Winter
2 is Spring
3 is Summer
4 is Autumn
The change in the season schedule must occur at the same time as the change in the Monthly Schedule. In
other words, a season must end at the same time as a billing month. Variables are automatically created if a
season schedule is used. These variables are set to 1 within the season and 0 for the months that are not in
the season. The variables are:
isWinter
isNotWinter
isSpring
isNotSpring
isSummer
isNotSummer
isAutumn
isNotAutumn
Use 'month schedule'?

Check this check box if you would like to include a month schedule.
- 377 -
Month schedule
Select the schedule that defines the billing periods of the year. Normally this entry is allowed to default and a
schedule will be internally used that has the breaks between billing periods occurring at the same time as the
breaks between months, i.e., at midnight prior to the first day of the month. If other billing periods are used
such as two month cycles or a single bill for an entire season, such as some natural gas companies do in the
summer, then the month schedule may be used to redefine it. Make sure that the month schedule and season
schedule are consistent, otherwise an error will be issued.
1 is the first month, usually January

2 is the second month, usually February
3 is the third month, usually March
4 is the fourth month, usually April
5 is the fifth month, usually May
6 is the sixth month, usually June
7 is the seventh month, usually July
8 is the eighth month, usually August
9 is the ninth month, usually September
10 is the tenth month, usually October
11 is the eleventh month, usually November
12 is the twelfth month, usually December
Thus, the schedule that represents this would look like the following. If no schedule is specified the following
Month Schedule is used which defines the months of the year as the normal calendar months.
The use of the Month Schedule Name field is not usually required. Most utility tariffs have monthly bills and so
this field would not need to be used. Specifically, if you have bills every two months, you would define a
schedule to use in this field that had the value of 1 for January and February, the value of 2 for March and
April, the value of 3 for May and June, etc. See below:
Schedule:Compact, TwoMonthBilling, number,
Through: 2/28, For: AllDays, Until: 24:00, 1,
Through: 12/31, For: AllDays, Until: 24:00, 6;
For other cases, some natural gas utilities define a single billing period for the summer months. In this case
you would define a schedule that was 1 for January, 2 for February, 3 for March, 4 for April, 5 for May June
July and August, 6 for September, 7 for October, 8 for November, 9 for December.
Schedule:Compact, SingleSummerBilling, number,
Through: 12/31, For: AllDays, Until: 24:00, 9;
OTHER SETTINGS
Demand window length
The determination of demand can vary by utility. Some utilities use the peak instantaneous demand measured
but most use a fifteen minute average demand or a one hour average demand. Some gas utilities measure
demand as the use during the peak day or peak week.
The choices for demand window are:
QuarterHour
- 378 -
HalfHour
FullHour
Day
Week
This field is defaulted to the shortest QuarterHour.

Note: The choice may be overridden based on the value of simulation time step so that they are consistent,
i.e. demand window length should be exact multiples of simulation time step length in minute. For example, if
the time step is 6, i.e. 10 minutes time step, then QuarterHour is not used and instead HalfHour is used. Or if
time step is 3, i.e. 20 minutes time step, then QuarterHour and HalfHour are not used and instead FullHour is
used.
Use 'Real time pricing charge schedule'?

Check this checkbox if you would like to use a real time pricing schedule (below).
Real time pricing charge schedule

This field is used with real time pricing rates. The schedule contains the cost of energy for that particular time
period of the year. Real time rates can be modelled using a charge schedule with the actual real time prices
entered. The charges should be consistent with the conversion factor specified in the tariff.
When this option is enabled, the Time of Use Period, Season and Month schedules are not needed unless
Charge objects are used in defining other charges which involve these schedules.
Use 'Customer baseline load schedule'?

Check this checkbox if you would like to use a Customer baseline load schedule (below).
Customer baseline load schedule

Customer baseline load (CBL) schedule is used with real time pricing rates. This field provides the name of a
schedule that contains the baseline energy use for the customer. Many real time rates apply the charges as a
credit or debit only to the difference between the baseline use and the actual use. The baseline use is
established between the customer and the utility using a contract.
If this field is used the baseline totalEnergy and totalDemand is calculated, then compared to the metered
value and therefore the real time rate charge based on the difference is calculated using the values defined in
real time pricing charge schedule, which is either added or subtracted to the utility cost.
If this field is not used, the real time charge schedule applies to all energy from the meter and totalEnergy and
totalDemand is based on metered value as usual.
Use 'Group name'?

Check this checkbox if you would like to use a Group name (below).
Group name
This field defines the group name of the tariff such as distribution, transmission, supplier, etc. If more than one
tariff with the same group name is present and qualifies, only the lowest cost tariff is used. Usually the group
name field is left blank which results in all tariffs using the same meter variable being compared and the
lowest cost one being selected.
Monthly service charge

This gives a fixed monthly service charge that many utilities have. The entry may be numeric and gets added
to the ServiceCharges variable. The entry can also be a variable name, where the values for each month will
be used (this variable must be defined on User Variables tab).
Minimum monthly charge

The minimum total charge for the tariff or if a variable name is entered here, its values for each month are
used (the variable must be defined on User Variables tab). The sum of the Subtotal and Taxes usually equals
the total unless you have specified the minimum monthly charge and it is greater than the sum of the Subtotal
and Taxes.
- 379 -
Buy or sell
It sets whether the tariff is used for buying, selling or both to the utility. This should be allowed to default to
BuyFromUtility unless a power generation system is included in the building that may generate more power
than the building needs during the year.
The choices are:
BuyFromUtility The values from the metered variable are used and are shown as being purchases
from the utility.
SellToUtility The values from the metered variable are used for a sell back rate to the utility. The
charges in the rate should be expressed as negative values.
NetMetering Negative values are used to reduce any positive values during the specific period on the
tariff when negative values occur (sell back to utility).
A warning will be issued if the selection of this field does not match the type of meter (please refer to Output
Meter Name field for more details).
Tariff Analysis - Charge Tab

Charge tab on Tariff Analysis dialog
CHARGE SELECTION
Number of charges
The number of charges applied in this tariff can be selected from this dropdown list.
Simple or Block?
Select the charge type according to utility rate settings from:
1-Simple is used to compute energy and demand charges that are very simple. It may also be used for
taxes, surcharges and any other charges that occur on a utility bill. As many Simple Charge objects as
needed may be defined for a single tariff and they will be added together.
2-Block is used to compute energy and demand charges that are structured in blocks of charges. It
may also be used for Taxes, Surcharges and any other charges that occur on a utility bill but those are
more commonly simple flat charges so Simple Charge is more commonly used for those functions. As
many Block Charge objects as needed may be defined for a single tariff and they will be added
together. Blocks are a structure used by almost all utilities for calculating energy and demand charges
and they allow the utility to charge more or less per unit of energy or demand if more units are used.
CHARGE : SIMPLE
Charge variable name
This is the name associated with the Simple charge object and will appear in the report, which is also used to
store the results of the Simple charge calculation. Spaces are not significant in Charge variable names. They
are removed during the utility bill calculation process.
Source variable
This is the name of the source used by the Simple charge. This is usually the name of the variable holding the
energy or demand but may also be the name of any variable including the Subtotal or Basis if other charges
are based on those. This should be typed exact as defined.
Season
This is the name (or number) of a season for which the Simple charge is calculated. If this is set to Annual, the
calculations are performed for the entire year (all months), otherwise they are calculated only for the months in
the season defined. The season is defined by the Season Schedule on the Tariff tab.
The choices for seasons are the following names:
- 380 -
Annual
Winter
Spring
Summer
Fall (Autumn)
Category variable name

Charges are added in the hierarchy as described on Tariff Analysis page. This field shows where the charge
should be added. The reason for entering this field appropriately is to get the charge reported in a reasonable
category. The charge automatically gets added to the variable named after this category. The choices for this
field are limited to:
EnergyCharges
DemandCharges
ServiceCharges
Basis
Adjustment
Surcharge
Subtotal
Taxes
Total
NotIncluded
Cost per unit value or variable name

This field contains either a single number or the name of a variable. The number is multiplied with all of the
energy or demand or other source that is specified in the source field. If a variable is used, then the monthly
values of the variable are multiplied against the variable specified in the source field (the variable should be
defined on the User variables tab). If no value or variable is entered, a zero is assumed. For SellToUtility
tariffs, the values in this field are usually expressed as negative numbers.
CHARGE : BLOCK
Charge variable name
This is the name associated with the Block charge object and will appear in the report, which is also used to
store the results of the Block charge calculation. Spaces are not significant in Charge variable names. They
are removed during the utility bill calculation process.
Source variable
This is the name of the source used by the Block charge. This is usually the name of the variable holding the
energy or demand but may also be the name of any variable including the Subtotal or Basis if other charges
are based on those. This should be typed exact as defined.
Season
This is the name (or number) of a season for which the Block charge is calculated. If this is set to Annual, the
calculations are performed for the entire year (all months), otherwise they are calculated only for the months in
the season defined. The season is defined by the Season schedule on the Tariff tab.
The choices for seasons are the following names:
Annual
Winter
Spring
Summer
Fall (Autumn)
Category variable name

Charges are added in the hierarchy as described on Tariff Analysis page. This field shows where the charge
should be added. The reason for entering this field appropriately is to get the charge reported in a reasonable
- 381 -
category. The charge automatically gets added to the variable named after this category. The choices for this
field are limited to:
EnergyCharges
DemandCharges
ServiceCharges
Basis
Adjustment
Surcharge
Subtotal
Taxes
Total
NotIncluded
Cost per unit value or variable name

This field contains either a single number or the name of a variable. The number is multiplied with all of the
energy or demand or other source that is specified in the source field. If a variable is used, then the monthly
values of the variable are multiplied against the variable specified in the source field (the variable should be
defined on User Variables tab). If no value or variable is entered, a zero is assumed. For SellToUtility tariffs,
the values in this field are usually expressed as negative numbers.
Remaining into variable

If the blocks do not use all of the energy or demand from the source, some energy and demand remains, then
the remaining amount should be assigned to a variable. If no variable is assigned and some amount of energy
or demand is not used in the block structure a warning will be issued.
Number of blocks
This field gives number of blocks needed for this Block charge setting.
Block size multiplier value or variable name

The sizes of the blocks are usually used directly but if a value or a variable is entered here, the block sizes
entered in the rest of the charge are first multiplied by the entered value prior to being used. This is common
for rates that are kWh/kW rates and in that case the variable that holds the monthly total electric demand
would be entered. If no value is entered, a default value of one is assumed so that the block sizes remain
exactly as entered.
Block size 1 value

The size of the first block of the charges is entered here. For most rates that use multiple blocks, this will be
the value for the first block size. Additional block sizes are entered with every other field
Block 1 cost per unit value

The cost per unit value of the first block is entered here. This value is also repeated for every other field in the
charge when required. As many blocks may be entered as are needed. For SellToUtility tariffs, the values in
this field are usually expressed as negative numbers.
Note: The above two fields run as a group can be repeated many times up to the number defined in Number
of blocks field. For the last pair of the two, a default variable named remaining contains a large value may be
used when the remaining amount should be included in that block. This remaining is EnergyPlus reserved
keyword, which should not be altered or if manual input is required, this variable should be typed exactly.
Tariff Analysis Qualify

Qualify tab on Tariff Analysis dialog
Many utilities provide a large number of tariffs and separate their customers by the amount of energy use they
have or by the amount of demand. The Qualify object allows only certain tariffs that are modelled to be used.
If the results of the simulation fall outside of the range of qualifications, that tariff is still calculated but in the
results the Qualified entry will say No and the Qualify object that caused its exclusion is shown. Multiple
- 382 -
tariffs from the same utility can be modelled and only one of them should be used, make sure that the
qualifiers are consistent especially within the same Group name (defined on the Tariff tab). Multiple Qualify
objects can appear for a specific rate and they can be based on any variable.
The energy used and demands for each month vary. Since it is possible that they vary across the minimum
and maximum values defined by this object, a choice in how to treat the thresholds is necessary. The utility
probably has very specific requirements about which months or consecutive months can be above or below a
threshold to qualify for the rate.
Number of qualify checks

The number of qualify checks for this tariff is defined here.
Name
The name used for the Qualify object and displayed if the tariff qualify or does not qualify. It is also treated as
a variable and contains:
1 for each month that does qualify,

0 for months that do not qualify, and
-1 for months that are not part of the season selected.
Variable name
The name of the variable used. For energy and demand, the automatically created variables, totalEnergy and
totalDemand should be used, respectively.
Qualify type
This defines criteria for checking tariffs qualification, the options can be either Minimum or Maximum.
Threshold value or variable name

This is the minimum or maximum value set for the qualify check. If the variable has values that are less than
this value when the qualify type is minimum then the tariff may be disqualified. If the variable has values that
are greater than this value when the qualify type is maximum then the tariff may be disqualified. Depending on
the threshold test entry (see below) this threshold value applies to all months, some of the months or just a
single month. If a variable that contains this threshold values is used, it should be defined on User Variables
tab.
Season
If the UtilityCost:Qualify only applies to a season, enter the season name from the following list:
Annual
Winter
Spring
Summer
Fall (Autumn)
It defaults to Annual.
Threshold test
The Number of months (below) is used in one of two different ways depending on this setting. Select from:
1-Count where the qualification is based on the count of the total number of months per year.
2-Consecutive where the qualification is based on a consecutive number of months.
Input Number of months

Check this checkbox if you would like to enter the number of months.
Number of months
A number is used here from 1 to 12. If Input Number of months is not checked, 12 is assumed when the
qualify type is minimum and 1 when the qualify type is maximum. This is the number of months that the
threshold test applies to determine if the rate qualifies or not. If the season is less than 12 months (if it is not
annual) then the value is automatically reduced to the number of months of the season.
- 383 -
Tariff Analysis - Ratchet

Ratchet tab on Tariff Analysis dialog
The Ratchet object allows the modelling of tariffs that include some type of seasonal ratcheting. Ratchets are
most common when used with electric demand charges. A ratchet is when a utility requires that the demand
charge for a month with a low demand may be increased to be more consistent with a month that set a higher
demand charge.
Example: A utility has a single ratchet that says that the billing demand for each month of the year is
the higher value of the actual demand or 60% of the peak summer demand.
DesignBuilder input:
EnergyPlus idf:
If multiple ratchets occur in the same tariff, they be chained together with the Baseline source variable
replaced with the Ratchet variable name of the previous Ratchet.
Ratchet variable name

This entry defines the name of the ratchet and the variable that stores the result of this ratchet. The ratchet
variable name should be used wherever the ratchet should be applied and is often the source variable for
Simple or Block charge objects.
Baseline source variable

The name of the variable used as the baseline value. When the ratcheted value exceeds the baseline value
for a month the ratcheted value is used but when the baseline value is greater than the ratcheted value the
- 384 -
baseline value is used. Usually the electric demand charge is used. The baseline source variable can be the
results of another ratchet object. This allows utility tariffs that have multiple ratchets to be modelled.
Adjustment source variable

This field defines the variable that the ratchet is calculated from. It is often but not always the same as the
baseline source variable. The ratcheting calculations using offset and multiplier are using the values from the
adjustment source variable. See the bottom of this section for how ratchet works.
Season from
This is the name of the season that is being examined. The maximum value for all of the months in the named
season is what is used with the multiplier and offset. This is most commonly Summer or Annual. When
Monthly is used, the adjustment source variable is used directly for all months.
The choices are:
Annual
Winter
Spring
Summer
Fall (Autumn)
Monthly
Season to
This is the name of the season when the ratchet would apply. This is most commonly Winter. The ratchet only
is applied to the months in the named season. The resulting variable for months not in the Season To
selection will contain the values as appear in the baseline source variable. The choices are:
Annual
Winter
Spring
Summer
Fall (Autumn)
Multiplier value or variable name

Often the ratchet has a clause such as the current month demand or 90% of the summer month demand.
For this case a value of 0.9 would be entered here as the multiplier. This value may be given as one if no
multiplier is needed. This can also be a variable name, which should be defined on User variables tab.
Offset value or variable name

A less common strategy is to say that the ratchet must be all demand greater than a value, in this case an
offset that is added to the demand may be entered here. If entered, it is common for the offset value to be
negative representing that the demand be reduced. The value can be zero if not offset is needed in the
ratchet. This can also be a variable name, which should be defined on User variables tab.
Detailed step taken for ratchet calculation
AdjSeasonal contains either:

o When SeasonFrom is not set to Monthly, the maximum for all months in Season From in the
Adjustment Source Variable. This is a single value.
o When SeasonFrom is set to Monthly, the monthly values of the Adjustment Source Variable.
AdjPeak = (AdjSeasonal + Offset) * Multiplier
MaxAdjBase = maximum value of either AdjPeak or Baseline Source Variable
The resulting Ratchet Variable contains:
o For months not in SeasonTo, the values of Baseline Source Variable
o For months in SeasonTo, the values of MaxAdjBase
- 385 -
For a simple typical case using totalDemand for both Baseline source variable and Adjustment source
variable, please see the example at the top of this page.
Tariff Analysis - User Variables

User variables tab on Tariff Analysis dialog
This tab defines and stores any user defined variables required for selection on other tabs of this dialog. Direct
entry of monthly values can be entered for each variable.
Note: Variables are defined using a text name which must be entered exactly on the previous tabs to match
with the variable defined here.
The places on the other Tariff analysis dialog tabs where a variable can be entered are:
Tariff tab
Monthly service charge variable name

Minimum monthly charge variable name
Charge tab
Charge variable name (Simple Charge setting)

Charge variable name (Block Charge setting)
Qualify tab
Threshold variable name
Ratchet tab
Multiplier variable name

Offset variable name
- 386 -
VARIABLES USED
Number of variables used
Enter the number of variables to be defined.
VARIABLE N SETTINGS
For each variable enter the following data.
Name
This field defines the name of the variable.
Variable type
This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the variable. It is used by IDF Editor
to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the January through December values. The available options are
shown below. If none of these options are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit
conversion.
Energy
Demand
Currency
Dimensionless
JANUARY THROUGH DECEMBER VALUES

January value
February value
...
December value
Each field contains an entry of the monthly values of the variable. Normally 12 months are used for most utility
rates and so 12 values should be entered.
Construction Costs
Component cost modelling provides an early design stage estimate of the initial construction costs associated
with the building and HVAC system being modelled. The construction costs input to the EnergyPlus costing
calculations are derived from the cost outputs on the Cost and Carbon tab. Initially, the idea of EnergyPlus
construction costs is to ensure that cost estimates are consistent with the EnergyPlus model and allow using
results calculated during a simulation such as equipment sizes and surface areas.
The DesignBuilder EnergyPlus cost estimating capabilities are intended for early stage estimation and do not
cover all the types of analyses included in more detailed cost estimating software.
The usual reason for including component costs in an EnergyPlus simulation will to as part of a larger
investment analysis such as life-cycle costing.
Note: The term "component cost" is used almost synonymously with "construction cost" in the DesignBuilder
documentation. The "component cost" terminology comes from the EnergyPlus ComponentCost:LineItem,
ComponentCost:Adjustments and ComponentCost:Reference data used to include construction costs in the
simulation.
To understand how to include cost estimates in EnergyPlus inputs, it may be helpful to first define some
terminology and provide an overview of the process used in EnergyPlus. There are three broad steps involved
in the EnergyPlus component cost calculations.
1.
2.
3.
Construction costs calculated by summing individual line items".

Project costs calculated by adjusting construction costs to account for other factors such as profit or
design fees.
Finally the current simulation results are compared with equivalent results for a reference case so that
marginal alterations can be calculated.
- 387 -
Each of above steps involves using one of the three Component cost data sets described below. These 3
steps are organized by corresponding tabs on the Construction costs dialog:
Line Item
Adjustments
Reference
The results can be included in the Construction Cost Estimate Summary table by checking the Component
Cost Economics Summary output option under the Summary Annual Reports header.
Example
The construction cost calculation example below shows the Component Cost Economics Summary output
and how this is used as the basis for a comparison with a reference case with adjustment factors applied.
Corresponding Adjustment and Reference Inputs:
- 388 -
Construction Costs - Line Item

Line item tab on Construction cost Dialog
Name
Enter the name of this Component cost component.
Description
Enter the name of this Component cost component.
Category
The category cannot be changed on the dialog.
The way line item data is entered depends on which of these 2 categories is selected:
DesignBuilder - Line item data is read automatically from the current results on the Cost and Carbon
tab when opening the dialog, If the cost calculations are updated then data on this dialog must also be
updated by re-opening the dialog and saving it again.
User defined - Up to 10 line item data items can be entered manually.
Number of line items

Enter the number of line items to be inputs up to a maximum of 10. The number is fixed at 8 for cost data from
the DesignBuilder category.
- 389 -
LINE ITEM N INPUTS

Each line item entered creates a cost line item in the EnergyPlus input and contributes to the total building
cost estimate.
When using the DesignBuilder cost estimate, all Line items are obtained by first running the Cost and Carbon
calculation. The line items are obtained from the sub totals in this output:
Structure costs
HVAC costs
Lighting costs
Sub-structure costs
Super structure costs
Glazing costs
Renewables costs
Surface finish costs
For details on how these costs are calculated, refer to the Cost and Carbon calculation section.
Alternatively, you can use your own line item data (as opposed to those calculated by DesignBuilder) by
selecting a Component cost component from the User defined folder. Data from this folder has all fields
editable.
Line items are reported by EnergyPlus and displayed in tabular form on the Summary tab of the Simulation
screen:
Line item type

The only option in the version is 1-General.
Item name
This field is used to refer to a specific instance of an object.
Cost per each

This field is used to enter cost information on per-each basis. The unit is local currency.
Quantity
This field is used to directly enter the line item quantity. The units should correspond to what is used in the Per
Each field.
Construction Costs - Adjustments

Adjustments tab on Construction cost Dialog
Data on the Adjustments tab can be used to perform various modifications to the construction costs to arrive
at an estimate for total project costs. It allows the line item model to be extended so that the overall costs of
the project will reflect various profit and fees.
- 390 -
Miscellaneous cost per conditioned area

This optional field can be used to enter a cost model for miscellaneous project costs that are not included in
the line item modelling. Miscellaneous costs are entered in cost (local currency) per conditioned floor area.
This field allows including the costs of project elements that go beyond what can be modelled using Line item
objects. The value input in this field will be multiplied by the conditioned floor area and will be listed in the
Construction Cost Estimate Summary table.
Regional adjustment factor

This field can be used to enter an adjustment factor to account for regional differences in construction costs.
The factor will be applied to the modelled and miscellaneous construction costs to determine an amount that
should be added, or subtracted, to account for local variations in construction costs. The default factor is 1.0,
which means no regional adjustment. The additive adjustment is calculated by subtracting 1.0 from the value
entered in this field. This field is useful for using national average data in the line item and miscellaneous
construction cost models and then altering the results based on regional differences.
The total base costs calculated by applying the regional adjustment factor to be modelled and miscellaneous
construction costs will be used for calculating other additional costs in terms of multiplying the fractions in the
following five fields.
Design and engineering fees

This field can be used to enter a fraction of total base costs that should be added to account for design and
engineering fees. Note it is not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Contractor fee
This field can be used to enter a fraction of total base costs that should be added to account for Contractor
fees. Note it is not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Contingency
This field can be used to enter a fraction of total base costs that should be added for contingency. Note that is
not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Permits, bonding and insurance

This field can be used to enter a fraction of total base costs that should be added to account for permitting,
bonding, and insurance costs to the project. Note that is not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Commissioning fee
This field can be used to enter a fraction of total based and miscellaneous construction costs that should be
added to account for commissioning services. Note that is not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Construction Costs - Reference

Reference tab on Construction cost Dialog
Data on this tab can be used to compare the current cost estimate with the results of a previously calculated
reference building. It parallels the data on the Adjustment tab but adds a field for entering the cost line item
model result for the reference building.
All the various adjustments to the project cost estimate are available here as factors that differ between the
current and the reference building models to be applied. The factors entered here are applied to the reference
building while the factors listed in the Adjustment object are applied to the current building model cost
estimate. The results are included in the Construction Cost Estimate Summary table by checking the
Component Cost Economics Summary output option.
Reference line item costs

This field is used to enter a cost representing the total for the reference building to be compared to the line
item cost model for the current building model. A typical source of data for this would be the Line Item
Subtotal from a previous simulation.
- 391 -
Reference miscellaneous cost per conditioned area

This field can be used to enter a cost model for miscellaneous project costs that are not included in the line
item modelling. Miscellaneous costs are entered in cost (local currency) per conditioned floor area. This field
allows including the costs of project elements that go beyond what can be modelled using Line item objects.
The value input in this field will be multiplied by the conditioned floor area and listed in the Construction Cost
Estimate Summary table.
Reference regional adjustment factor

This field can be used to enter an adjustment factor to account for regional differences in construction costs.
The factor will be applied to the modelled and miscellaneous construction costs to determine an amount that
should be added, or subtracted, to account for local variations in construction costs. The default factor is 1.0,
which means no regional adjustment. The additive adjustment is calculated by subtracting 1.0 from the value
entered in this field (e.g. 1.05 means a 5% increase).
This field is useful for using national average data in the line item and miscellaneous construction cost models
and then altering the results based on regional differences.
The total base costs calculated by applying regional adjustment factor to modelled and miscellaneous
construction costs will be used for calculating other additional costs in terms of multiplying the fractions in the
following five fields.
Reference design and engineering fees

This field can be used to enter a fraction of total base costs that should be added to account for design and
engineering fees. Note that it is not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Reference contractor fee

This field can be used to enter a fraction of total base costs that should be added to account for Contractor
fees. Note that it is not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Reference contingency
This field can be used to enter a fraction of total base costs that should be added for contingency. Note that it
is not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Reference permits, bonding and insurance

This field can be used to enter a fraction of total base costs that should be added to account for permitting,
bonding, and insurance costs to the project. Note that it is not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Reference commissioning fee

This field can be used to enter a fraction of total base costs that should be added to account for
commissioning services. Note that it is not the same as a fraction of the total cost estimate.
Life Cycle Cost

Life-cycle costing (LCC) is used with building energy simulation in order to justify energy efficiency upgrades.
Many alternative building technologies that result in energy savings cost more initially, or may cost more to
maintain, than traditional solutions. In order to justify selecting these energy savings technologies, it is
essential to combine both initial and future costs in the decision process. Using life-cycle costs provides a
framework to combine initial costs and future costs into a single combined measure, called the present
value. Present value is a metric that combines all costs and reduces (or discounts) those costs that occur in
the future. Discounting future costs is based on the principal of the time value of money.
The calculations are based on discounting the future values according to normal life-cycle costing techniques
as described in NIST Handbook 135 Life-Cycle Costing Manual for the Federal Energy Management
Program.
The following is a list of life-cycle costing related data that provide a way to describe the parameters and costs
associated with the life-cycle of a building or building system. These objects are organized by tabs on the Life
Cycle Cost dialog:
Parameters
Recurring costs
Non-recurring costs
- 392 -
Use price escalation

Use adjustment
The utility costs and first costs are used along with other current and future costs input using the Recurring
costs and Non-recurring cost data and these are combined into the present value life-cycle cost metric. The
Parameters object establishes the set of assumptions for the analysis along with Use price escalation (often
from databases) and Use adjustment objects.
Note 1: It is important to understand that the comparison of different simulation results and their present
values is not performed by EnergyPlus. Instead, EnergyPlus provides the present value calculations for a
specific simulation combining the energy costs, first costs, and future costs and you need to make the
comparison between the results of multiple simulations when needed.
Note 2: Life-Cycle Costing (LCC) should not be confused with Life Cycle Analysis (LCA). With LCC the result
is an economic evaluation of current and future expenditures in order to make a decision on alternative
investments. In LCA, the environmental impact such as equivalent CO2 production involved in the materials,
delivery, manufacturing, and construction are combined with environmental impacts of the building in
operation and the eventual removal of the building and is used to understand the overall environmental impact
or embodied energy.
Output
The results of using the LCC analysis are included automatically in the Summary report under Life Cycle Cost
Report. This report shows the costs and the timing of costs, often called cash flows, along with the present
value in several different tables. The tabular results show the present value of all current and future costs.
Life Cycle Cost - Parameters

Parameters tab on Life Cycle Cost Dialog
Provides inputs related to the overall life-cycle cost analysis. It establishes many of the assumptions used in
computing the present value. It is important that when comparing the results of multiple simulations that the
fields in the Parameters objects are the same for all the simulations. To help check this is the case, the first
table in the Life-Cycle Cost Report shows the inputs to this object.
Name
An identifying name this LCC analysis.
DISCOUNT SETTINGS
Discounting convention
The field specifies if the discounting of future costs should be computed as occurring at the end, the middle or
the beginning of each year. The most common discounting convention uses the end of each year, therefore
without a specific reason, the end of year should be used. The year being used starts with the base year and
month (see below) and repeats every full year.
All costs assumed to occur during that duration are accumulated and shown as an expense either at the
beginning, middle or end of the year. The options are:
1-BeginningOfYear
2-MidYear
3-EndOfYear
Note: Specifically, some military projects may require using the middle of each year.
- 393 -
Inflation approach
This field is used to determine if the analysis should use constant dollars or current dollars which is related to
how inflation is treated. The two options are:
1-ConstantDollar (Default option)

2-CurrentDollar
If 1-ConstantDollar is selected, then the Real discount rate input (see below) is used and it excludes the rate
of inflation. If 2-CurrentDollar is selected, then the Nominal discount rate (see below) input is used and it
includes the rate of inflation. For most analyses, using the 1-ConstantDollar option will be easier since the
effect of inflation may be ignored.
Reference: From NIST Handbook 135: The constant dollar approach has the advantage of avoiding the need
to project future rates of inflation or deflation. The price of a good or service stated in constant dollars is not
affected by the rate of general inflation. For example, if the price of a piece of equipment is $1,000 today and
$1,050 at the end of a year in which prices in general have risen at an annual rate of 5 percent, the price
stated in constant dollars is still $1,000; no inflation adjustment is necessary. In contrast, if cash flows are
stated in current dollars, future amounts include general inflation, and an adjustment is necessary to convert
the current dollar estimate to its constant-dollar equivalent. This adjustment is important because constantand current-dollar amounts must not be combined in an LCCA.
Real discount rate

Enter the real discount rate as a decimal, e.g. for a 3% rate, enter the value 0.03. This input is used when the
Inflation approach is 1-ConstantDollar. The real discount rate reflects the interest rates needed to make
current and future expenditures have comparable equivalent values when general inflation is ignored. When
the Inflation approach is set to 2-CurrentDollar this input is ignored.
Nominal discount rate

Enter the nominal discount rate as a decimal, e.g. for a 5% rate, enter the value 0.05. This input is used when
the Inflation approach is 2-CurrentDollar. The nominal discount rate reflects the interest rates needed to
make current and future expenditures have comparable equivalent values when general inflation is included.
When Inflation approach is set to 1-ConstantDollar this input is ignored.
Inflation rate
Enter the rate of inflation for general goods and services as a decimal, e.g. for a 2% rate, enter the value 0.02.
When Inflation approach is set to 1-ConstantDollar this input is ignored.
Example: Below is an example from the NIST Handbook 135 1995 edition.
- 394 -
DATES FOR STUDY

Base date month
Enter the month that is the beginning of study period, also known as the beginning of the base period. The
options are:
1-January (default)
2-February
3-March
4-April
5-May
6-June
7-July
8-August
9-September
10-October
11-November
12-December
Reference: According to NIST 135 the base date is the point in time to which all project related costs are
discounted in an LCCA [life cycle cost analysis]. The base date is usually the first day of the study period for
the project, which in turn is usually the date that the LCCA is performed. In a constant dollar analysis, the
base date usually defines the time reference for the constant dollars (e.g. 1995 constant dollars). It is essential
that you use the same base date and constant-dollar year for all of the project alternatives to be compared. If
you set the base date to the date that the LCCA is performed, then the constant dollar basis for the analysis
will be the current date, and you can use actual costs as of that date without adjusting for general inflation.
- 395 -
Base date year

Enter the four digit year that is the beginning of study period, such as a year expressed in four digits like
2011. The study period is also known as the base period. See more details in the previous field.
Service date month

Enter the month that is the beginning of building occupancy. Energy costs computed by EnergyPlus are
assumed to occur during the year following the service date. The service date must not be earlier than the
Base date. The options are:
1-January (default)
2-February
3-March
4-April
5-May
6-June
7-July
8-August
9-September
10-October
11-November
12-December
Service date year

Enter the four digit year that is the beginning of occupancy, such as two years after the previously entered
year expressed in four digits so example is like 2013.
Reference: According to NIST Handbook 135: The service date is the date on which the project is expected
to be implemented; operating and maintenance costs (including energy- and water-related costs) are
generally incurred after this date, not before.
OTHER SETTINGS
Length of study period in years
Enter the number of years of the study period. It is the number of years that the study continues based on the
start at the base date.
The default value is 25 years, and only integers are allowed that indicate whole years.
Reference: According to NIST Handbook 135, the study period for an LCCA is the time over which the costs
and benefits related to a capital investment decision are of interest to the decision maker. Thus, the study
period begins with the base date and includes both the planning/construction period (if any) and the relevant
service period for the project. The service period begins with the service date and extends to the end of the
study period.
Tax rate
Enter the overall marginal tax rate for the project costs. This does not include energy or water taxes. The
single tax rate entered here is not intended to be a replacement of the complex calculations necessary to
compute personal or corporate taxes; instead it is an approximate that may be used for a simple analysis
assuming a constant tax rate is applied on all costs. The tax rate entered should be based on the marginal tax
rate for the entity and not the average tax rate. Enter the tax rate results in present value calculations after
taxes. Most analyses do not factor in the impact of taxes and assume that all options under consideration
have roughly the same tax impact. Due to this, many times the tax rate can be left to default to zero and the
present value results before taxes are used to make decisions. The value should be entered as a decimal
value, e.g. for 15% enter 0.15. For an analysis that does not include tax impacts, enter 0.0. The default is 0.
Depreciation method
For an analysis that includes income tax impacts, this entry describes how capital costs are depreciated. Only
one depreciation method may be used for an analysis and is applied to all capital expenditures. Only analyses
that include tax impacts need to select a depreciation method. The options are:
- 396 -
1-ModifiedAcceleratedCostRecoverySystem-3year
7-StraightLine-27year
11-None (default)
Depreciation allowances reduce the actual/nominal tax dollars paid by the owner. Thus, analyses using
depreciation should be conducted in nominal dollars. For an analysis that does not include tax effects, 11None should be selected.
Note: For more details about depreciation methods and which one to choose, refer to IRS Publication 946
How to Depreciate Property. It states that "Depreciation is an annual income tax deduction that allows you to
recover the cost or other basis of certain property over the time you use the property. It is an allowance for
Fair market value the wear and tear, deterioration, or obsolescence of the Intangible property. Details on
which depreciation method to choose depends on the property being depreciated, IRS Publication 946 and
your accountant will be the best sources of information in determining which depreciation method to choose.
Life Cycle Cost - Recurring Costs

Recurring costs tab on Life Cycle Cost Dialog
Recurring costs are costs that repeat over time on a regular schedule during the study period. If costs
associated with equipment do repeat but not on a regular schedule, use the Non-recurring costs tab instead.
Number of recurring costs

The number of recurring costs applied in this life-cycle cost can be selected from the dropdown list. For each
recurring cost the following data must be entered.
RECURRING COST N SETTINGS

Name
The identifier used for this recurring cost. The name is used in identifying the cash flow equivalent in the
output results in the Life-Cycle Cost Report.
Category
Enter the category of the recurring costs. Choose the closest category. The options include:
1-EnergyCosts
2-WaterCosts
3-Maintenance
4-Repair
5-Operation
6-Replacement
7-MinorOverhaul
8-MajorOverhaul
9-OtherOperational
The default value is 3-Maintenance.

Note: For recommendations on estimating other operational costs, see NIST 135 Section 4.6.3.
- 397 -
Cost
Enter the cost (local currency) for the recurring costs. Enter the cost for each time it occurs. For example, if
the annual maintenance cost is $500, enter 500 here.
Start of costs
Enter when the costs start. The First year of cost is based on the number of years past the Start of costs. For
most maintenance costs, the Start of costs should be 1-ServicePeriod. The options are:
1-ServicePeriod
2-BasePeriod
The default value is 1-ServicePeriod.
Years from start

This field and Months from start (below) together represent the time from either the start of the Service
period, on the service month and year, or start of the base period, on the base month and year (depending on
selection from the Start of costs field) that the costs start to occur. Normally, for most maintenance costs that
begin in the first year that the equipment is in service the Start of costs is the service period and the Years
from start will be 0. Only integers should be entered representing whole years. The default value is 0.
Months from start

This field and Years from start (above) together represent the time from either the start of the Service period,
on the service month and year, or start of the base period, on the base month and year (depending on the
Start of costs field) that the costs start to occur. Normally, for most maintenance costs the Start of costs is
the Service period and the Months from start will be 0. Only integers should be entered representing whole
months. The Years from start (times 12) and Months from start are added together. The default value is 0.
Repeat period years

This field and Repeat period months (below) indicate how much time elapses between re-occurrences of the
cost. For costs that occur every year, such as annual maintenance costs, the Repeat period years should be
1 and Repeat period months should be 0. Only integers should be entered representing whole years. The
default value is 1.
Repeat period months

This field and Repeat period years (above) indicate how much time elapses between re occurrences of the
cost. For costs that occur every year the Repeat period years should be 1 and Repeat period months
should be 0. For, costs that occur every eighteen months, the Repeat period years should be 1 and the
Repeat period months should be 6. Only integers should be entered representing whole years. The Repeat
period years (times 12) and Repeat period months are added together. The default value is 0.
Annual escalation rate

Enter the annual escalation rate as a decimal. For a 1% rate, enter the value 0.01. This input is used only
when the Inflation approach is 2-CurrentDollar. The default value is 0.
Life Cycle Cost - Non-Recurring Costs

Non-Recurring costs tab on Life Cycle Cost Dialog
A non-recurring cost happens only once during the study period. For costs that occur more than once during
the study period on a regular schedule, use the Recurring costs tab.
Number of non-recurring costs

The number of non-recurring costs applied in this life-cycle cost can be selected from this dropdown list. For
each non-recurring cost the following data must be entered.
- 398 -
NON-RECURRING COST N SETTINGS

Name
The identifier used for the object. The name is used in identifying the cash flow equivalent in the output results
in the Life-Cycle Cost Report.
Category
Enter the category of the non-recurring costs. Choose the closest category. The options include:
1-Construction
2-Salvage
3-OtherCapital
The default is 1-Construction.

Reference: For recommendations on estimating capital and salvage (residual) costs, see NIST 135 Section
4.5.
Cost
Enter the non-recurring cost value. For construction and other capital costs the value entered is typically a
positive value. For salvage costs, the value entered is typically a negative value which represents the money
paid to the investor for the equipment at the end of the study period.
Start of costs
Enter when the costs start. The first year of cost is based on the number of years past the Start of costs. For
most non-recurring costs the Start of costs should be base period which begins at the base month and year.
The options are:
1-ServicePeriod
2-BasePeriod
The default value is 2-BasePeriod.
Years from start

This field and Months from start (below) together represent the time from either the start of the service
period, on the service month and year, or start of the base period, on the base month and year (depending on
the Start of cost field) that the costs start to occur. Normally, for most capital costs the Start of costs is the
base period and the Years from Start will be 0. These would be first costs for the building equipment or
system. Salvage costs are usually shown as happening in the last year of the analysis. Only integers should
be entered representing whole years. The default value is 0.
Months from start

This field and Years From start (above) together represent the time from either the start of the service period,
on the service month and year, or start of the base period, on the base month and year (depending on the
Start of cost field) that the costs start to occur. Normally, for most capital costs the Start of costs is the base
period and the Months from start will be 0. Only integers should be entered representing whole months. The
Years From start (times 12) and Months from start are added together. The default value is 0.
Life Cycle Cost - Use Price Escalation

Use price escalation tab on Life Cycle Cost Dialog
The Use price escalation data will commonly be part of a dataset on life cycle costs.
Reference: The values for this object may be found in the annual supplement to NIST Handbook 135 in
Tables Ca-1 to Ca-5. A dataset file comes with EnergyPlus in the DataSet directory and includes the
- 399 -
LCCusePriceEscalationDataSetXXXX.idf file which includes the value for the supplement to NIST 135 from
the year indicated. The object provides inputs for the escalations of energy and water costs assuming that
they change differently than inflation. According to the NIST 135 supplement the values are present projected
fuel price indices for the four Census regions and for the United States. These indices, when multiplied by
annual energy costs computed at base-date prices provide estimates of future-year costs in constant basedate dollars. Constant-dollar cost estimates are needed when discounting is performed with a real discount
rate (i.e., a rate that does not include general price inflation).
The LCCusePriceEscalationDataSetXXXX.idf is periodically updated by the EnergyPlus development team
using data available from NIST along with a spreadsheet to convert that data into an IDF dataset file. The
NIST 135 annual supplement is available from NIST or through US DOE FEMP program.
http://www1.eere.energy.gov/femp/program/lifecycle.html
If requested, NIST personnel will provide a file called ENCOSTxx.TXT which contains the data used to create
Table Ca-1 to Table Ca-5 in the supplement. To convert the data in the ENCOSTxx.TXT file to an IDF file,
open the ENCOSTxx.TXT file in a text editor and copy the entire contents into the first tab called Step 1 of
the conversion spreadsheet. The conversion spreadsheet file named
ConvertENCOSTtoEnergyPlusLifeCycleCost.xls is available upon request from the EnergyPlus
development team. The Step 2 tab separates the data into columns. The Step 3 tab computes ratios that
are the same as Table Ca-1 to Table C1-6 in the supplement. Checking these values against what appears in
the printed supplement is recommended. The Step 4 and Step 5 tabs rearrange the data and the Step 6
tab shows the data in a format that can be easily copied and pasted into a new idf dataset file. The final step
requires using your text editor to replace the fuel names with those used by EnergyPlus. The replacement
names are listed on the FuelNameConversion tab.
Number of escalations used

The number of price escalations applied in this life-cycle cost can be selected from this dropdown list. The
following fields can be repeated up to the number selected in this field.
USE PRICE ESCALATION N SETTINGS

Name
The identifier used for this escalation. The name usually identifies the location (such as the state, region,
country or census area) that the escalations apply to. In addition the name should identify the building class
such as residential, commercial, or industrial and the use type such as electricity, natural gas, or water.
Resource
Select the resource from:
1-Electricity
2-FuelOil#1
3-NaturalGas
4-PropaneGas
5-FuelOil#2
6-Coal
7-Steam
8-Gasoline
9-Diesel
10-Water
Escalation start year

This field and the Escalation start month define the time that corresponds to Year 1 Escalation such as a
year expressed in four digits like 2013, when the escalation rates are applied. This field and the Escalation
start month define the time that escalation begins.
Escalation start month

This field and the Escalation start year define the time that corresponds to Year 1 Escalation such as a
year expressed in four digits such as 2013, when the escalation rates are applied. This field and the
Escalation start year define the time that escalation begins. The options are:
- 400 -
1-January (default)
2-February
3-March
4-April
5-May
6-June
7-July
8-August
9-September
10-October
11-November
12-December
Number of years of escalation

This number can be selected by the dropdown list. Often 25 to 50 years of projected values are required.
ESCALATION DATA
Year 1 escalation
The escalation in price of the energy or water use for the first year expressed as a decimal.
Year n escalation
The escalation in price of the energy or water use for the n-th year expressed as a decimal. As mentioned
above, normally 25 to 50 years data is used.
Note: If the number of years of escalation is less than the number of years in the analysis period, the
remaining years will assume no escalation, therefore normal inflation will be the only affect for these years.
Life Cycle Cost - Use Adjustment

Used by advanced users to adjust the energy or water use costs for future years. This should not be used for
compensating for inflation but should only be used to increase the costs of energy or water based on
assumed changes to the actual use of water or energy, such as due to changes in the future function of the
building or the impact of future adjacent buildings on energy use. This object is not commonly used and
should be used with caution. The adjustments begin at the start of the service period.
Number of adjustments used

The number of adjustments applied in this life-cycle cost can be selected from this dropdown list. The
following fields can be repeated up to the number selected in this field.
ADJUSTMENT N SETTINGS
Name
The identifier used for this use adjustment data.
Resource
Select the resource from:
1-Electricity
2-FuelOil#1
3-NaturalGas
4-PropaneGas
5-FuelOil#2
6-Coal
7-Steam
- 401 -
8-Gasoline
9-Diesel
10-Water
Number of years of adjustment

This number can be selected by the dropdown list. Often 25 to 50 years of values are required.
ADJUSTMENT DATA
Year 1 multiplier
The multiplier to be applied to the end use cost for the first year in the service period. The total utility costs for
the selected end use is multiplied by this value. For no change enter 1.0.
Year n multiplier
The multiplier to be applied to the end use cost for each following year. The total utility costs for the selected
end use is multiplied by this value. For no change enter 1.0.
Note: If the number of years of Use price escalation is less than the number of years in the analysis period,
the remaining years will assume no escalation, therefore normal inflation will be the only affect for these years.
Options
Options tab in model data
You can control the output data that is generated in the design calculations and simulations by making
selections on the Options model data tab.
Heating Design Output Options

Cooling Design Output Options
Simulation Output Options

Options model data tab
Heating design output options apply to the whole building and are only visible at building level.
Include unoccupied zones in block and building averages and totals

By default, data for unoccupied zones is excluded from block and building totals and averages. Check this
option to include data for unoccupied zones.
This option can also be accessed from the Heating Design tab of the Model options dialog and on the Output
tab of the Heating Design Calculation Options dialog.
Store surface output

Causes the following output to be stored for all walls, floors, roofs, ceilings, partitions etc:
Inside Surface Temperature

Outside Surface Temperature
Glazing Heat Loss
Internal Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient
External Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient
Store opening output

Only visible when the Store surface output option is selected, this option causes the following data to be
stored for windows vents, doors, holes, sub-surfaces:

- 402 -

Glazing Heat Loss
Warning: Use these options with caution on large models as, when selected, they will cause large amounts of
data to be stored.

Cooling design output options apply to the whole building and are only visible at building level.
Include unoccupied zones in block and building averages and totals

This option can also be accessed from the Cooling Design tab of the Model options dialog and on the Output
tab of the Cooling Design Calculation Options dialog.

Causes the following output to be stored for all walls, floors, roofs, ceilings, partitions etc:
Surface Heat Gain
Solar Incident
External Sunlit Fraction
Store opening output

Only visible when the Store surface output option is selected, this option causes the following data to be
stored for windows vents, doors, holes, sub-surfaces:

Glazing Heat Gain
Solar Incident
Solar Transmitted
External Sunlit Fraction
Warning: Use these options with caution on large models as, when selected, they will cause large amounts of
data to be stored.
Simulation Design Output Options

Name in last EnergyPlus calculation

This read-only information tells you the name used by DesignBuilder to refer to the current zone, surface or
opening in the last EnergyPlus simulation. It can be useful for setting up custom report requests or to help
identify DesignBuilder data objects in an IDF file.
- 403 -
Output options
Simulation output options can be accessed at building, block, zone, surface and opening levels giving you
control of the elements in the model for which output data will be generated.
The following options are available at building level only and the same options can also be accessed from the
Simulation tab of the Model options dialog and on the Output tab of the Simulation Calculation Options dialog:
Include unoccupied zones in block and building averages and total

Building and block output of zone data
Report
Surface heat transfer incl solar
Environmental
Comfort
Internal gains
Energy, HVAC
Temperature distribution
Daylight map output. When this option is selected it is possible to enter the number of grid cells in x and
y directions. EnergyPlus is limited in the number daylight map outputs it can generate and if you
request too many EnergyPlus may crash. You may be able to obtain more map outputs by reducing the
size of the grids.
DXF model output
Construction and surface details
RDD file

To obtain data for a particular surface or opening you should first navigate to that surface or opening and
switch on the Store surface output option. This causes a table of results to be stored for that surface or
opening but does not yet select any results. To do this select one or more of these options:
Store opening/sub-surface output - at surface level and above in the model hierarchy, this is a
default value for openings and sub-surfaces. It much be selected for a particular opening if any data for
that opening or sub-surface is to be generated.
Inside Surface Temperature - for surfaces and openings.
Outside Surface Temperature - for surfaces and openings.
Surface Heat Gain - for surfaces.
Glazing Heat Gain - for openings.
Solar Incident - for surfaces and openings.
Solar Transmitted - for window openings.
External Sunlit Fraction - for surfaces and openings.
Internal Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient - for surfaces and openings.
External Convective Heat Transfer Coefficient - for surfaces and openings.
Airflow - data is available at both surface and opening level. At surface level the data includes only
infiltration through the opaque part of the parent surface and does any flow through the openings
contained on the surface. At opening level the flow includes both natural ventilation through the main
opening and also infiltration through gaps. Window infiltration is defined by the selected crack template.
Positive flow is flow into the zone and negative airflow is flow out. This is true for both red and blue
Airflow data.
Warning: Use these surface and opening options with caution on large models as, when selected, they will
cause large amounts of data to be generated and stored. Select only the data you need for the building
elements of interest.
CFD
CFD tab of model options
This tab allows you set various types of boundary condition for CFD calculations.
If you have previously loaded simulation results as boundary conditions using the CFD Boundary Conditions
Edit dialog then this data will be displayed at surface and opening levels.
- 404 -
The attributes that can be set on this tab are shown with the boundary condition type to which they apply.
Note that all attributes are displayed at zone level and above in the hierarchy because these act as defaults,
but at surface and opening level only the data applicable to the current object is displayed.
Note: Data specified on this tab does not affect EnergyPlus simulations
Inside Surface Temperature (internal Surfaces)

Applies to: Internal surfaces, doors and sub-surfaces
Default inside surface temperature for internal surfaces (partitions, internal floors and ceilings). It can be set
for all levels in the model hierarchy from building level down.
Inside Surface Temperature (external Surfaces)

Applies to: External surfaces, doors and sub-surfaces
Default inside surface temperature for external surfaces (walls, roofs, external floors etc). It can be set for all
levels in the model hierarchy from building level down.
Inside Surface Window Temperature

Applies to: Internal and external windows
Default inside surface temperature for window surfaces. It can be set for all levels in the model hierarchy from
building level down.
Average Zone Air Temperature

Applies to: Zone
Average zone temperatures are stored at zone level. These aren't used yet in CFD calculations yet but will be
used in checks in a future version to ensure equal convective heat gains are considered in the CFD and
EnergyPlus simulations.
Incoming Air Temperature

Applies to: Supply diffusers (types 1-3) and windows, vents, doors and holes
Temperature of air entering the space through windows, vents, doors and holes.
Component Blocks, Assemblies And Boundary Condition Patchs

Data on this tab is also used for entering boundary conditions for component blocks, assemblies and for
boundary condition patches drawn onto zone or component block surfaces. For details see:
Component Blocks and Assemblies as CFD Boundaries

- 405 -
Boundary Conditions for Internal CFD Analyses
See also:
CFD Boundary Conditions Editor

Preparing Simulations to Generate CFD Boundary Conditions
CFD Boundary Conditions Editor

The CFD Boundary Conditions Editor allows you to view and edit all of the boundary conditions in the selected
domain in one place. In particular you can:
Check and set the airflow rate through each supply and extract boundary condition and also through
each window, vent, door and hole in the selected domain.
Check that total flow in balances with total flow out (a key requirement for the CFD calculations). If
flows do not balance there are options to automatically apply a correction flow to one of the existing
openings to ensure balance.
Check and set the temperatures of each boundary condition where temperature is defined (surfaces,
supply flow, windows, temperature boundary conditions).
Import surface and opening boundary conditions for a specific time/date from a previous EnergyPlus
simulation.
CFD Analysis Domain

You can select the CFD Analysis domain from previously defined CFD Analyses - this defines the extent of
the model that is displayed and checked for flow balance. If you have more than one analysis then you must
make sure to select the correct one here before starting. Alternatively you can select the whole building or the
current block or zone. This selection does not limit the EnergyPlus simulation data that is imported, it only
defines the boundary condition data that is displayed on the dialog and the domain for airflow balance checks.
Group
The Group options allows you to group boundary condition data by one of:
1-None - each boundary condition is displayed in a simple list without any grouping.
2-Boundary types - boundary conditions are displayed groups according to type (extract, supply,
temperature, window etc). See screenshot above.
3-Zones and surfaces - the boundary conditions are grouped by zone and then by surface.
Under some circumstances the display can be erratic when using the 2-Boundary type grouping and in this
case you may find it better to use one of the other grouping options.
- 406 -
You can edit the flow in and flow out airflow rates and temperatures as appropriate on the dialog and the
changes are only saved to the model when you press the OK button. No changes are made if you press
Cancel.
Edit Boundary Conditions

Airflow
The Zone, Surface, Boundary and Boundary Type columns indicate the local of the boundary condition and
it's type. You can edit the flow rates in the Flow In and Flow Out columns for windows, vents, doors and holes
and the Flow In for supply diffusers and Flow Out for extracts.
If flows do not already balance this will be indicated in red on the Info panel to the right and you can select
one of the openings in the dialog and click on the Correct balance using selected opening link. A flow is
added or subtracted as appropriate to get flows to balance.
Temperature
You can edit the temperature for all temperature-related boundary conditions. There are 2 temperature
columns, one for surface temperatures and the other for air temperature. The air temperature column is only
relevant for openings and supply diffusers and is the temperature of the air entering the space. Openings such
as windows, vents and doors can have different surface and air temperatures defined. If the airflow rate
through the opening is zero then you will not be able to edit the data in the air temperature column.
Import EnergyPlus Boundary Conditions

You can import data that have been calculated in a previous EnergyPlus simulation as boundary conditions
for the CFD simulation. The data that can be imported is:
Surface inside temperatures of walls, floors, roofs, partitions, ceilings, windows, doors and subsurfaces.
Flow in and flow out of windows, vents, doors and holes (only when using the Calculated natural
ventilation model option).
To import simulation data click on the Import button in the Boundary Conditions Editor (above).
Import Dialog
The Import data dialog allows you to select boundary conditions for a particular snapshot in time from the
simulation results.
Interval
Only Hourly interval data can be loaded from the simulation.
Time, Day, Month

Select the time and date to use for the import. The date must lie between the simulation start and end periods
for the last simulation carried our.
- 407 -
Press OK to import the results to the CFD Boundary Conditions Editor.

Note: all available opening airflow and inside surface temperature results from the most recent EnergyPlus
simulation will be imported. That is the imported results are not restricted to the current CFD domain or zone
(if this is a subset of the whole building).
Preparing Simulations to Generate CFD Boundary Conditions

You can use DesignBuilder simulations to generate boundary conditions for the CFD calculations. EnergyPlus
simulations calculate the overall thermal behaviour of the building in terms of inside surface temperatures and
natural ventilation flow rates then CFD allows you to 'zoom in' on the details of the temperature and flow
distribution within the space for a particular snapshot in the simulation.
The simulation data that can be used as boundary conditions in CFD calculations are:
Surface inside temperatures

Natural ventilation airflow rates through external windows, doors, vents and holes.
To obtain access to the above data the simulation must generate inside surface temperatures and any natural
ventilation airflow rates to be included in the CFD calculations. Before starting you should decide on the extent
of the CFD domain and the time period you wish to analyse. Then only generate simulation data for these
areas and time periods.Otherwise, for large models you might generate an impractical amount of data and
overload the software.
The steps required to generate boundary condition data from simulation are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
If the CFD simulation is to use natural ventilation airflows through windows calculated by EnergyPlus
then you must use the Calculated natural ventilation model option. Scheduled natural ventilation does
not calculate airflows through individual windows.
Because CFD calculations do not use infiltration flows you may want to switch off Infiltration treatment
on the Constructions model data tab. This will help ensure that the flow balance with little or no need for
extra correction flows to be introduced on the CFD Boundary Conditions dialog. It also speeds up
simulations by reducing the complexity of the Airflow network in EnergyPlus.
Switch off the Lump similar windows on surface model option to ensure that all windows are modelled
individually.
Prepare the simulation model data and carry out test simulations to check that the model is behaving
as expected during the period of interest (e.g. summer design conditions). Look at hourly results.
Navigate to the level in the model covering the CFD domain. If you are modelling a single zone in the
CFD simulation, then navigate to that zone, if you are modelling a block then go that block or if you are
modelling the whole building then go to building level. Then on the Options model data tab select the
following output options:
Store opening output - ensure that data for windows, vents, doors, holes and sub-surfaces is
included in the output.
Inside Surface Temperature - to store inside surface temperatures for all surfaces and
openings in the domain.
- 408 -
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Airflow in - to record the flow in through windows, vents, doors and hole (natural ventilation
calculations only).
Airflow out - to record the flow out through windows, vents, doors and hole (natural ventilation
calculations only).
Once the model is prepared, click on the Simulation tab and request hourly or sub-hourly results and
run the simulation.
Check the simulation results by examining hourly results before feeding them into the CFD calculations.
Check that airflow through windows is in the expected direction based on wind direction and expected
wind pressures etc.
Start the CFD Boundary Conditions Editor and follow instructions for importing the simulation hourly or
sub-hourly results
Add any assemblies or component blocks with any further boundary conditions needed to represent
heat, temperature and flow boundaries imposed by HVAC, lighting and other equipment and
occupants.
Make sure you have the same total convective heat from your internal gains in the CFD model as you
had in the EnergyPlus simulation.
Check that CFD results correspond with the boundary conditions provided by the simulation.
Note: It is not currently possible to set flow boundary conditions on internal openings. So although
EnergyPlus calculates flow rates through interior openings, DesignBuilder CFD will ignore these flows
and re-calculate them using a more detailed method taking into account distributed air velocities and
pressures.This means that the flows through internal openings calculated by the CFD won't match
exactly with the flows calculated by the EnergyPlus Airflow network. EnergyPlus flow rates through
exterior openings are always respected by DesignBuilder CFD when used as boundary conditions.
Note: Infiltration airflow is not modelled in CFD and if you are looking at summer time natural
ventilation you may wish to switch Infiltration off in simulations. Winter time simulation may need
infiltration included if it is significant.
Infiltration in CFD
DesignBuilder CFD doesn't include the concept of infiltration as cracks cannot be graphically defined and
there can be no porous airflow through CFD surfaces as there can in EnergyPlus. Because airflow through
cracks in simulations using Calculated natural ventilation can be significant, importing EnergyPlus opening
airflows from simulations that include crack leakage can sometimes cause flow balance problems, especially
in zones with only a single opening. It is therefore usually advisable to exclude the effects of infiltration from
simulations that are to be used for setting boundary conditions for CFD. A warning message to this effect is
given if you attempt to import simulation data generated using Calculated natural ventilation and infiltration.
Another reason for excluding infiltration from simulations to be used for setting up CFD boundary conditions is
that the flow is likely to balance much more easily without the need to add large balancing flows to one or
more openings.
Assembly Library
DesignBuilder is provided with an assembly library which contains a small database of typical components
that may be useful in defining a CFD model. Some assemblies in the library include thermal gains while others
simply provide an obstruction to airflow.
You can add your own assemblies to the library by selecting one or more component blocks and then using
the Add assembly to library toolbar command (or Edit > Add assembly to library menu option).
The assembly library data can be exported for use in other projects using the File > Export > Export
assembly library menu command.
The exported assembly library asl file can be loaded into other projects using the File > Import > Import
assembly library menu command.
Detailed Equipment
Equipment tab in model data (zone level only)
- 409 -
Warning: This option is intended for modelling existing buildings where individual items of equipment have
been recorded as part of a detailed survey and is not intended for general design or assessment simulation
work.
When the Gains model option is set to Detailed you can enter data on individual items of equipment in each
zone.
Details on editing Equipment data
Note: For other modelling applications you should use the Early gains model option because data can be set
at the building level and/or loaded from template with much less effort.
Edit Detailed Equipment

You can model time-varying internal gains and energy consumption of individual items of equipment in each
zone by adding equipment data at the zone level on the Equipment tab. To add an item of equipment click on
the Add toolbar icon, or if you are running DesignBuilder in Learning mode you can use the link in the Info
panel to the right of the screen. This opens the Edit Equipment dialog.
You can define the category of internal gain (below), the number of items of equipment, the rated power per
item of equipment as well as the operational schedule.
The Radiant fraction is the fraction of heat emitted by the device as long-wave radiation. The rest of the heat
is considered to be convective i.e. it is modelled as heating up the zone air directly.
The Latent fraction is the fraction of the rated power which is converted to latent energy and affects the
moisture balance in the zone instead of the sensible heat balance.
A number of categories of gains are available. These are listed below together with the output data with
which they are associated:
Fluorescent lights - General lighting

Tungsten lights - Task lighting
Office equipment - Computer + equipment
Computers - Computer + equipment
Computer accessories - Computer + equipment
Telecoms - Computer + equipment
Lifts - Miscellaneous
Catering - Catering
Small power - Miscellaneous
Heating - Miscellaneous
Cooling - Miscellaneous
Pumps - Miscellaneous
- 410 -
Fans - Miscellaneous
DHW - Miscellaneous.
Process - Miscellaneous
External lighting - Task lighting
Other external - Miscellaneous
Miscellaneous - Miscellaneous
Note that all of the above gains are modelled as scheduled gains in the zone and the data is reported as such
in the program output. So for example categorising an item of equipment as DHW does not affect in any way
DHW modelling as defined on the HVAC tab. Likewise data for Heating, Cooling, Pumps and Fans is simply
modelled as a scheduled gain in the zone, completely unconnected with HVAC modelling.
Model Data management

Tools are provided to help manage the building model:
Load data from template - load predefined data sets to the model from a template
Clear data to default - clear data back to default values inherited from level above in model hierarchy)
Merge Zones dialog - control merging of zones from one dialog
Load whole building infiltration - load measured results from pressurisation tests
Load Data from Template

Model Data Management
Access the Load Data from Template from:

1.
2.
3.
The Toolbar
The Edit menu
Mouse right-click in the Model Data.
Use it to load template data into the model. You can select one or more data sources from the following
template libraries:
Construction
Glazing
Facade
Activity
Lighting
HVAC
When you select one of the above templates as a source of data you must also set the template from which to
load:
- 411 -
Target Object(s)
On the Target tab you can select the way you want to set data and, where appropriate, which model objects to
load to.
1-Selected object(s) - choose this option if you want to load the same data to one or more building,
block, zone or surface. Check the boxes next to the target objects to select them as targets.
2-Reload templates - reloads template data for the current building and all its blocks, zones, surfaces
and openings. Data is only loaded if the template selection is non-default. If the template inherits from
the hierarchical level above, data is not loaded. See also Reload Templates.
3-Search & replace - allows you to search the model for particular data and replace with data from a
template.
Selection tools are available to allow you to control the selection of building objects:
Select all.
Select all down to zone level.
Select none.
Making Global Lighting Settings

When you load lighting data from template you should consider that DesignBuilder sets the lighting output
from the lights based on:
a) Lighting system efficiency (W/m2/100 lux) using data from the lighting template and,
b) Illuminance levels required in the zone as set on the Activity tab.
If you have many types of activity in the building you can load lighting data for each zone taking into account
the required illuminance level in the zone by selecting the appropriate zones in the Target tab.
Save Data to Template
Reload Templates
The Reload templates option provides a quick way to reload template data for the current building and all its
blocks, zones, surfaces and openings. Data is only reloaded if the template selection is non-default. If the
template inherits from the hierarchical level above, data is not loaded. This ensures that any model data that
was manually overriden reverts back to template settings. After running this command you should not see any
model data shown in red bold.
The command opens the Load data from template dialog with the option 2-Reload templates selected and all
model data tabs selected for updating. You can modify these settings, for example if you only wish to reload
data on certain model data tabs.
This option is accessed from the Edit menu.
Clear data to default

- 412 -
The Clear Data to Default dialog allows you to:
Clear Model Data

Clear custom openings and revert back to default facades.
'Clearing to default' removes any 'user data' (shown in red) from the current object and instead default data is
passed from the 'parent' object in the hierarchy (Model Data shown in blue).
You can control the extent of the 'clearance' by setting the 'Clear Down to' data at the bottom. Leave this data
as 'Surface level' if you want all data in the currently selected model object (including child objects) to be
returned to a default state.
Merging Zones
Merging zones is the process whereby zones that are identified as being separate in the model can be
merged together with other zones in simulations. This can help to simplify models and speed subsequent
calculations.
The Merge Zones dialog can be accessed from the Tools menu when on the Edit screen. It provides
convenient access to the 3 ways of merging zones in DesignBuilder:
1.
2.
3.
Merge zones of same activity model option.

Merge zones connected by holes model option.
Selective zone merging
These zone merging mechanisms are described below. They can also be accessed from the Model options
dialog, though this does provide the controls for selective merging that are available from the Merge Zones
dialog. Note that Selective zone merging is generally the preferred way to merge zones.
Merge Zones Of Same Activity

This option is a quick and easy way to reduce the number of zones, by merging all zones having the same
activity template selection. It should be used with care as it could lead to a very crude zone merging with
many zones lumped together.
Merge Zones Connected By Holes

Use this option to merge zones that are connected by holes drawn at surface level (not the holes used to
represent the airflow path in virtual partitions). You can merge one or more zones within the same block or
across multiple blocks.
Where holes have been cut in a floor surface to remove it so upper and lower zones can be merged, any
small remaining border in the cut floor surface should ideally be removed from the floor area calculation for the
combined zone. To do this, you should navigate to the floor surface and tick the option to Exclude this surface
area from the total zone floor area in the Adjacency section of the Construction tab.
- 413 -
A tutorial illustrates the Merge zone connected by holes model option.

Note: when merging 2 or more stacked zones using holes in the floor and the Merge zones connected by
holes option, you should be aware that the combined floor area used to calculate internal gains in the
simulations will exclude the area of any holes in the floor. In this case, if you require gains to be calculated
using the total upper and lower floor area you should either ensure that the area of the hole is very small or
else use the selective zone merging option instead and avoid using holes.
Selective zone merging

Selective merging controls can be used to merge zones irrespective of their activities or any connection by
holes. This is done by assigning a parent zone for each zone group and then assigning one or more child
zones to the parent to merge them with it. Note that once merged, zones can easily be un-merged again by
making appropriate selections on this dialog.
Once the merge has been applied, the parent zone will control the activity, lighting, HVAC and all other zonebased selections for the entire zone group. Constructions and glazing can still be applied to the child zones
though.
- 414 -
Creation Of The Parent Zone

One zone must be selected to become the parent of the zone group. This zone must not already be either a
parent zone or a member of an existing zone group. Selecting a suitable zone in the right hand pane will
enable the Make Parent button located beneath the right hand pane of the dialog. Clicking this button will
create a new entry for the parent zone in the left hand pane (The new zone in the left hand pane will be
selected and highlighted).
Merging Zones
With a zone selected in the left hand pane it is now possible to select zones in the right hand pane to become
members of the zone group. Zones to be merged cannot already be merged members of an existing group,
however the parent of an existing group can be merged. Selecting a valid zone to be merged will enable the
Merge button located between the two panes of the dialog. Clicking on this button carries out the merge and
the newly merged zone will be shown on the tree in the left hand pane. If the parent of an existing zone group
is selected and merged then the parent and all of its children become members of the merged zone group.
Unmerging Zones
A single child zone can be removed from a zone group by selecting it in the left hand pane, then using the
Unmerge button located beneath the pane. Selecting the parent of a zone group then using the Unmerge
button will remove all the child zones from the group but will not remove the parent itself If a parent zone
having no children is selected, the text of the unmerge button changes to Remove Parent, and the parent
zone can be removed from the tree in the left hand pane. Updating DesignBuilder Any changes made to zone
merging settings are only applied when the dialog is closed using the OK button. Closing the dialog with the
Cancel button discards any changes.
Merging zones
When zones are merged using one of the above methods, combined merged zones are treated as a single
zone in thermal calculations. When zones are merged, one of the zones is marked as being the 'parent' zone,
and the other zones are 'child' zones. The child zones are marked in blue in the Navigator together with the
parent zone they have been merged into as shown below.
This screenshot of the Navigation list shows the First floor zone, Second floor zone and Roof zones all
merged into the Atrium zone.
The parent zone is the zone that is used for defining Activity, HVAC, Lighting (and all other zone related data)
for itself and all it's child zones. You therefore cannot access this zone-related Model data for merged child
zones. You must go to the parent zone to edit the Model data for the combined zone. The internal gains are
calculated based on the data set on the Activity tab for the parent zone but using the combined total floor area
of all of the merged zones.
Constructions, glazing and other surface level data can be defined separately in each of the parent and child
zones in the normal way.
- 415 -
Why Merge Zones?

You may want to merge zones for various reasons:
Speed up simulations.
A geometrically complex space in the actual building is to be modelled using more than one block in
DesignBuilder (e.g. dormer windows, atria).
To reduce the number of zones and simplify HVAC system descriptions when exporting EnergyPlus
IDF data for use outside DesignBuilder.
If you have created a tall merged zone, you may want to use the Air distribution model data on the
HVAC tab to create a dynamic vertical temperature gradient. This approach to modelling tall spaces is
preferred over connecting a number of horizontal slices with air flow openings, because it does not rely
on getting correct airflow conductances between the horizontal slices.
Technical note
Disadvantages Of Merging
If done without consideration of the issues, merging zones can reduce cooling load peaks resulting in an
underestimate of cooling equipment sizes required to condition the building (and associated energy
consumption in a simulation). To understand this, consider a building in the Northern hemisphere with two
zones, a North zone and a South zone connected to each other along the E-W axis. When solar gains are
highest, the South zone may experience a cooling load and the North Zone not. Now imagine the same 2
spaces merged into a single zone. The combined single zone will now almost certainly have a lower cooling
load than the load in the original South zone because the air and surfaces on the South side of the merged
space is cooled by the shaded North side.
As simple guide, where the temperatures, internal/solar gains, ventilation, HVAC system and other operational
parameters in the actual separate zones are about the same as each other then the merging process should
not affect simulation accuracy unduly, however, when merging zones which have different conditions and/or
load profiles, the merging will reduce accuracy.
In most cases, merging zones will speed up simulations but occasionally simulations can slow down,
especially at the initialisation stage. This may be because any very large zones generated through merging
can have many windows which can slow down solar and daylighting initialisation.
Merging Rules
1.
2.
3.
When merging zones using the Merge zones of same activity or Merge zones connected by holes,
zones connected by the merge option are lumped together into a single 'parent' zone. In a vertical stack
of zones the parent will be the lowest zone in the stack.
The zone surfaces in merged child zones are generated in exactly the same way as they would have
been without the merging but are associated with the parent zone rather than the original child zone.
In child merged zones, you can access Constructions and Openings surface-based Model data but not
space related data such as Activity, Lighting, HVAC. This is accessed from the parent zone only.
When generating data for the calculations, surfaces between zones are defined twice, once from each side. Surfaces
between 2 zones that have been merged are called Surfaces within zone. By default these are modelled in the same way
as standard surfaces but with both sides adjacent to the same zone. If the Surfaces within zone treated as adiabatic
option is set, the 'other side' in each of the 2 surfaces is modelled as adiabatic.
- 416 -
Effect Of Merging Zones On EnergyPlus Simulations

EnergyPlus IDF input files are generated without entries for child merged zones (they are not included in the
simulation), but their surfaces, windows, doors are included and are associated with the zone description of
the parent zone. So in a merged zone model, simulation results are not available for the child zone separately
but are available for the overall merged zone. Results for the merged zone can be obtained from the
simulation, cooling design and heating design screens either by clicking on the parent zone in the navigator,
or by clicking on one of the child zones - the same data for the merged zone is displayed in either case.
Note: for buildings with any zone merging set, heating and cooling design and simulation results are not
shown at block level.
Potential Problem When Merging

One problem users can run into with merged models is related to the Calculated natural ventilation option. For
windows placed in zones which are merged child zones where the child zone has the natural ventilation option
on the HVAC tab switched off the Operation data on the Openings tab will be hidden. In order to make sure
that the natural ventilation is activated for the zone you must temporarily switch off merging, switch on natural
ventilation on the HVAC tab for the child zone then switch merging back on again. You should now find that
the Operation data is shown.
Merging Buildings
You can also 'merge' 2 existing buildings (including component blocks) using the Transfer blocks command
from the Edit menu.
See also Zone multiplier for a manual way to reduce models having similar zones and Boolean operations for
how to combine blocks geometrically.
Load Whole Building Infiltration

The Load Infiltration dialog allows whole building infiltration data obtained from pressurisation tests also
referred to as "blower door" tests to be entered and the appropriate infiltration rate is set in model data based
on the infiltration data entry options selected. The whole building infiltration value must be entered in m3/s at
50 Pa pressure difference (even if you have selected IP units). This flow rate is applied over the whole
building and depending on whether the option to "Apportion infiltration to zones based on surface area" is
selected, the infiltration flow is either simply set at building level (if the option is unchecked) or is applied
differently to each zone depending on the amount of external exposed surface area (if it is checked).
The infiltration flow rates are calculated from the entered whole building value using equations described in
EN 12831 including consideration of the exposed area of surfaces in each zone, building height, wind
exposure index and the infiltration units selected in model options.
DETAILED HVAC
This section describes the graphical interface provided by DesignBuilder for the assembly of component
based HVAC systems which may be combined with building models for energy simulation using EnergyPlus.
- 417 -
Overview
HVAC system models in DesignBuilder are assembled by placing a number of pre-defined air and water
distribution loops together with groups of zones which are then connected to form complete systems.
See the Detailed HVAC Overview Tutorial
The air and water loops incorporate a number of HVAC components connected together by pipes or ducts to
form distribution systems. These loops can be modified to incorporate any additionally required components
and then connected to associated components in other loops or to heating, cooling and ventilation equipment
located in zones to form complete systems.
Zones are placed in the form of zone groups which enable a number of zones having the same HVAC
equipment to be grouped together. Each zone in the group can different equipment ratings. The zone group
mechanism greatly simplifies the HVAC schematic assembly in that only one set of equipment and
- 418 -
connections needs to be defined for the group while maintaining the flexibility of changing equipment
properties for individual zones within the group.
The pre-defined loops incorporate setpoint managers which enable the loop to run without any additional
control. However, additional setpoint managers can be added to the various loops to customise the control of
the system.
Data associated with all loops, zones and associated components can be edited via dialogs for specific
system requirements.
After placing loops, zone groups and setpoint managers and completing the required loop connections to
associated equipment, an EnergyPlus simulation can be conducted for the combined building and HVAC
system model.
Accessing Detailed HVAC

To access detailed HVAC, you first need to select the Detailed HVAC option under the HVAC header on the
Model Options dialog. After closing the Model Options dialog, a new <HVAC System> node will appear in the
Navigator tree list:
Click on this <HVAC System> node to access the HVAC edit screen.
Detailed HVAC Contents

o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
o
Understanding HVAC Loops

Air Loops
Plant and Condenser Loops
Understanding HVAC Zone Groups
HVAC Component Hierarchy and Navigation
HVAC System Control - Setpoint Managers
Autosizing HVAC Components
Working at HVAC System Level (Templates, Loops, Zone Groups)
Working at Sub Loop Level
Working at HVAC Zone Group Level
Working at HVAC Zone Level
Working at Component Level
HVAC Components
Humidity Control
Detailed HVAC Terminology

The following points on HVAC terminology may help when referring to the documentation.
The word "supply air" refers to the air being supplied to the zone. So for example the "supply air flow
rate" is the rate of air delivered to the zone. It is not necessarily the fresh air delivery rate (though if
there is no recirculation then it will be).
- 419 -
HVAC Loops
An HVAC loop is used to model air and water distribution systems such as mechanical ventilation systems,
hot and chilled water piped distribution systems and condenser water distribution systems. A loop is divided
into two sub-loops, a demand sub-loop and a supply sub-loop.
See the HVAC Loops Introduction Tutorial
At its simplest, a sub-loop comprises an inlet connection (pipe or duct) which is connected in series via a
number of components to an outlet connection. The inlet connection of each loop sub-loop connects with the
outlet connection of the other loop sub-loop:
The demand sub-loop is typically that section of a loop from which energy is extracted from a system and the
supply sub-loop is that section of a loop to which energy is supplied by the system.
Consequently, supply sub-loops incorporate equipment such as boilers in the case of heating systems or
chillers in the case of cooling systems, the supply sub-loop of an air system incorporates items such as
heating and cooling coils. The supply sub-loop also contains circulating equipment such as pumps and fans.
Similarly, the demand sub-loop of a heating system includes items such as air conditioning heating coils or
zone equipment such as hot water radiators, fan-coil unit heating coils, under-floor heating, etc. and similarly a
chilled water demand sub-loop contains equipment such as air condition cooling coils, zone cooled beams,
chilled ceilings, etc. The sub-loop of an air loop typically incorporates zone air distribution equipment such as
VAV boxes, etc.
There are 4 main types of loop:
Plant loops (hot and chilled water loops),

Condenser loops,
- 420 -
VRF loops,
Air loops.
Plant and condenser sub-loops incorporate a flow splitter and a flow mixer which allow a number of parallel
branches to be defined. Each parallel branch would normally comprise an inlet connection from the splitter, a
component and an outlet connection to the mixer. A by-pass parallel branch (without a component) is also
included to ensure flow continuity.
The supply sub-loops for single duct air loops on the other hand generally comprise a single branch which
incorporates an inlet connection connected to various components in series including an outdoor air mixer,
fans, cooling coils, heating coils, etc. which are in turn connected to an outlet connection. Air loop supply subloops do not contain flow splitters or mixers. Demand sub-loops for single duct air loops incorporate the
supply path connections to zone air distribution equipment and zone return air path connections. Air loop
demand sub-loops also incorporate a flow splitter and a flow mixer allowing air distribution equipment in a
number of zones to be connected to the supply and return paths:
- 421 -
The outdoor air mixer and fan components in DesignBuilder HVAC are incorporated within an air handling unit
component. Optionally, additional components such as heat recovery, heating coils, cooling coils, humidifiers
and outdoor air pre-treatment coils can also be added to air handling units:
- 422 -
Air supply sub-loops for dual duct systems incorporate two outlet connections, one for the hot duct and one
for the cold duct; dual duct supply sub-loops also incorporate a single air splitter to split the flow between the
hot and cold ducts:
The demand sub-loops for dual duct air loops similarly contain two inlet connections for hot and cold ducts
which can then be connected to zone dual duct air distribution terminals via air splitters and a mixer.
There are various pre-defined loops in DesignBuilder HVAC, 4 air loops, 5 plant loops a VRF loop and a
condenser loop.
Air Loops
Air loops are used by EnergyPlus to distribute mechanically driven air to zones. In the Air loops provided by
DesignBuilder, the air flow supplied into the zones is the same as the flow out. In other words air leakage is
not accounted for.
There are four pre-defined air loops provided by detailed HVAC:
Generic single duct air loop

Generic dual duct air loop
Unitary heat pump air loop
Unitary heat/cool air loop
Generic single duct air loop

This air loop incorporates a Generic air handling unit (AHU) component in the supply sub-loop to which may
be added various sub-components including pre-treatment coils (heating and cooling), heat recovery,
recirculation with economiser, heating and cooling coils and a humidifier. The air handling unit automatically
includes supply and extract fans. The demand sub-loop incorporates a flow splitter and a flow mixer to enable
the loop to be connected up to zone equipment. The loop incorporates a single scheduled setpoint manager
which by default is pre-defined to maintain a supply temperature.
- 423 -
See Generic Air Loop Tutorial

The image below shows a single duct air loop connected to 2 Zone groups.
See also Air Loop Data
Generic dual duct air loop

This air loop is similar to the Generic single duct air loop but includes two outlet connections for the hot and
cold ducts in the supply-sub loop together with associated heating and cooling coils. The loop also
incorporates a Warmest setpoint manager to control the cold duct temperature and a Coldest setpoint
manager to control the hot duct temperature.
The image below shows a dual duct air loop connected to a Zone group.
- 424 -
Unitary heat/Cool air loop

This air loop is similar to the Generic single duct air loop but instead of a Generic air handling unit, the supply
sub-loop contains a Packaged air conditioner component which incorporates DX heating and DX cooling coils
consequently does not require any plant or condenser loops to be defined.
The image below shows a unitary heat cool air loop connected to a Zone group.
Unitary heat pump air loop

This air loop is similar to the Generic single duct air loop but instead of a Generic air handling unit, the supply
sub-loop contains a Packaged unitary heat pump component which incorporates DX heating and DX cooling
- 425 -
coils together with a supplementary electric heating coil and consequently does not require any plant or
condenser loops to be defined.
The image below shows a unitary heat pump air loop connected to a Zone group.
Plant and Condenser Loops

There are 4 pre-defined plant loops provided by Detailed HVAC:
Hot water plant loop

Chilled water plant loop
Primary/secondary chilled water plant loop
Domestic hot water/solar plant loop
"Solar and Auxiliary Heating Loops" on page 430
A single condenser loop is provided:
Condenser loop
A plant equipment operation facility is included to provide plant and condenser loops with a mechanism for
controlling the operation of the loop and to specify which equipment is available under what conditions. This
allows you to model scheduled sequencing of plant equipment depending on time-varying load requirements.
For example you may want to model a multiple chiller system and schedule low load chillers to handle loads
up to a certain magnitude and then switch in higher load chillers as the cooling load increases. This feature is
available through the plant/condenser loop Plant Equipment Operation tab.
Hot Water Plant Loop

The hot water plant supply sub-loop incorporates a one or more boilers connected in series or parallel, flow
splitter and flow mixer together with a circulating pump.
The sub-loop also includes a scheduled temperature setpoint manager which is set up by default to control
the off-plant temperature at a constant 80C.
The demand sub-loop incorporates a flow splitter and flow mixer in order that the loop can be connected to
heating plant components. The image below shows a hot water plant loop connected to 2 water heating coils.
- 426 -
Chilled Water Plant Loop

The chilled water plant supply sub-loop incorporates one or more chillers connected in either series or parallel,
flow splitter and flow mixer together with a circulating pump.
By default, the chiller has a water cooled condenser and connections are included to enable the condenser to
be connected up to a condenser loop. Air cooled chillers can also be selected.
the off-plant temperature at a constant 6.0C.
cooling plant components. The image below shows a chilled water loop connected to a water cooling coil.
- 427 -
Primary/Secondary Chilled Water Plant Loop

The primary/secondary chilled water plant loop uses the EnergyPlus Common Pipe Simulation mechanism to
represent a chilled water circuit comprising both primary and secondary pumped sub-loops. The primary subloop incorporates one or more chillers connected in either series or parallel, flow splitter and flow mixer
together with a circulating pump.
By default, the chiller has a water cooled condenser and connections are included to enable the condenser to
be connected up to a condenser loop. Air cooled chillers can also be selected.
The primary sub-loop also includes a scheduled temperature setpoint manager which is set up by default to
control the sub-loop outlet temperature at a constant 6C.
The secondary sub-loop includes a scheduled temperature setpoint manager which is pre-defined to control
the sub-loop inlet temperature at a constant 6C but the schedule defining this temperature can be replaced
with any required alternative. The secondary sub-loop also incorporates a flow splitter and flow mixer in order
that the loop can be connected to cooling plant components.
- 428 -
Domestic Hot Water Plant Loop

The domestic hot water (DHW) plant supply sub-loop incorporates one or more water heaters connected in
series or parallel, flow splitter and flow mixer together with a circulating pump.
the off-plant temperature at a constant 55C.
hot water outlets.
The image below shows a DHW hot water plant loop connected to a water outlet group.
- 429 -
Solar and Auxiliary Heating Loops

A solar heating system can be constructed using the solar loop which comprises a combination of solar
collectors, pumps, water tanks and water heaters. Solar collectors are connected on the demand side of the
plant loop. Multiple collector modules can be combined in series and parallel. The supply side of the solar
plant loop contains a water heater, circulation pump and setpoint manager to control the loop setpoint. A solar
loop can be connected directly to domestic hot water (DHW) loop outlets by first deleting the water heater
from the supply side of the DHW plant loop and then connecting the solar water heater to the DHW supply
side splitter and mixer:
- 430 -
In order to realise energy savings with a solar heating system, it is best to use a two-tank system with a
storage tank and an auxiliary water heater. The storage tank gathers heat directly from the solar collectors
and stores it for later use. The auxiliary water heater is positioned downstream of the storage tank on the
supply side of the DHW plant loop. The auxiliary water heater, or booster water heater, provides additional
heat if the storage tank water is not hot enough. The auxiliary water heater can be modelled as an
instantaneous/tankless water heater or as a standard tanked water heater with heating source (see Water
Heater component):
- 431 -
Another strategy to consider for solar heating systems is to allow the storage tank to reach a much higher
temperature than necessary for the end use. This allows the tank to store more energy from the solar
collectors, when it is available. However, for applications such as domestic hot water, it is undesirable and
unsafe to supply excessive hot water temperatures at the point of demand. To take advantage of higher
storage temperatures, yet still avoid scalding temperatures at the tap, the hot water leaving the storage tank
can be tempered with cold water using a three-way valve (tempering valve) to achieve the target temperature.
An additional auxiliary DHW heating loop is provided by DesignBuilder HVAC which incorporates this
arrangement. A solar loop water heater can be directly connected to the supply side splitter and mixer of an
auxiliary heating loop:
Another common solar hot water loop arrangement similar to above but this time with auxiliary heating from a
hot water loop with boiler:
- 432 -
This arrangement of components and loops models a typical solar heating system with 2 tanks: a solar tank
with water at potentially high temperatures and an auxiliary tank containing water at temperatures that can be
used by heating and/or DHW purposes. The Solar Assisted DHW HVAC template provides this functionality.
More information on how to configure and control Solar and Auxiliary heating loops can be found on the Solar
Hot Water help page.
Why is the solar collector on the demand side of the loop?
The demand is the loop demand rather than a component demand, i.e. the demand is created by the need to
satisfy the setpoint on the solar loop supply sub-loop outlet. In other words, the more the outlet temperature
from the water heater element drops below the setpoint, the higher the demand on the collectors.
Condenser Loop
The condenser supply sub-loop incorporates one or more cooling towers connected in series or parallel, flow
splitter and flow mixer together with a circulating pump. The default sub-loop also includes a scheduled
temperature setpoint manager which is pre-defined to control the off-plant temperature at a constant 29C.
condenser components such as a water cooled chiller.
- 433 -
The graph below (reproduced with permission from CIBSE) illustrates the vapour compression cycle. The
condenser process takes the fluid from saturated vapour (point 5) to saturated liquid (point 6) on the graph
below.
CIBSE Guide B Figures 4.8 and 4.9
VRF Loops
VRF loops are not like other loops in DesignBuilder HVAC. They consist simply of a single VRF outdoor unit
connected to one or more VRF indoor units through a dotted line.
VRF indoor units are placed within HVAC zones like other zone forced air units.
- 434 -
There is no data associated with the VRF loop itself - it mainly serves as a container for the VRF outdoor unit
and the connections to the indoor units.
HVAC Zones and Zone Groups

HVAC zone groups are used to simplify HVAC layouts by grouping together zones that have identical
configurations of HVAC equipment but not necessarily the same equipment ratings. Consequently, only a
single set of equipment items needs to be added to the group and only one set of connections between
air/plant loops and zone group equipment need to be established.
As an example, consider a building model where five ground floor zones are to be cooled and ventilated using
a VAV box without reheat supplied by a single AHU and the zones are to be heated using radiators supplied
by the same heating circuit. A single zone group can be used to incorporate the equipment for the five zones
within the HVAC layout.
See the Detailed HVAC Activity Data and Zone Groups Tutorial
From HVAC System level, a zone group can be placed and then edited to include the ground floor zones:
- 435 -
After adding the zones, the zone group becomes active and you can navigate down to it, either by doubleclicking on the graphic in the Edit screen or by selecting it from the navigator. At the zone group level, you can
see all of the zones added to the group:
You can then navigate down to any one of the zones to add the required equipment:
- 436 -
Now when you move back up to the zone group level, you will notice that the zone equipment has
automatically been added to all zones in the group:
You can now navigate down to equipment in any zone to change the equipment default settings:
- 437 -
At the system level, only one set of connections is required to connect the equipment in all of the constituent
zones up to the air and plant loops:
When data is written to the EnergyPlus IDF file prior to simulation, all constituent zones, zone equipment and
zone equipment connections are written out separately.
HVAC Component Hierarchy and Navigation

HVAC systems are structured using a similar hierarchical system to that used by the DesignBuilder building
model:
- 438 -
Methods of navigating the HVAC system are the similar to those used for navigating the building model (see
Navigating Building Models for further information). To move down to an object lower down in the hierarchy,
you can either select the object graphically on the Edit screen and double-click on it or alternatively, just select
it from the navigator tree list at the left of the screen. To move up a level, you can either press the F2 key, or
select the required level object from the Navigator.
After moving down to an object, only that object and any related components in other objects will be active, all
other objects in the hierarchy will become inactive and displayed in grey on the Edit screen.
Note: DesignBuilder HVAC does not use the same hierarchical data inheritance system as the building model.
In particular HVAC zone groups are used to define default data for newly added HVAC zones but their data is
not inherited down to its HVAC zones.
HVAC System Control - Setpoint Managers

The setpoint manager is the main mechanism through which the behaviour of HVAC system loops is
controlled. All HVAC loops require at least one setpoint manager to specify the supply sub-loop outlet
temperature and these are automatically included in all pre-defined HVAC loops. Setpoint managers will place
a calculated or scheduled setpoint value at the point or connection in the loop at which the setpoint manager
control line has been placed. No two setpoint managers should be located on the same connection for like
control types otherwise an error message will be displayed and the simulation aborted.
There 15 different types of setpoint manager available. However only certain types of setpoint manager are
available for different types of air loops and plant/condenser loops:
1-Scheduled (All loops).

2-Warmest (Generic and dual duct air loops only).
3-Coldest (Generic and dual duct air loops only).
4-Multi-zone minimum humidity average (Air loops only).
5-Multi-zone maximum humidity average (Air loops only).
6-Multi-zone humidity minimum (Air loops only).
7-Multi-zone humidity maximum (Air loops only).
8-Single zone humidity minimum (Air loops only).
9-Single zone humidity maximum (Air loops only).
10-Outdoor air reset (Generic and dual duct air loops, plant and condenser loops).
- 439 -
11-Single zone heating (Air loops only).

12-Single zone cooling (Air loops only).
13-Multi-zone cooling average (Air loops only).
14- Multi-zone heating average (Air loops only).
15-Follow ground temperature (Condenser loops only)
Refer to the Setpoint manager section for information regarding specific setpoint manager types.
Setpoint Manager used with Draw-Through Fans

Adjusting setpoints for fan pickup
When placing Setpoint managers on a node upstream of a draw-through fan you may need to manually adjust
the setpoint to take into account the temperature rise that will take place as the air flows across the fan.
Mixed air Setpoint Managers

The Mixed Air Setpoint Manager is a special type of setpoint manager which is automatically added to air
handling units that incorporate coils located before the supply fan and where no setpoint manager has been
added explicitly before the fan. This type of setpoint manager works in conjunction with the AHU outdoor air
controller (see Air Handling Unit Outdoor Air System). The Mixed Air Setpoint Manager is used to establish a
temperature setpoint at the mixed air node. The AHU outdoor air controller then operates the outdoor air
damper to attempt to meet this setpoint. The main function of the Mixed Air Setpoint Manager is to pick up a
temperature setpoint provided by a setpoint manager located downstream of the supply fan and then set this
value as the off-coil setpoint, having first subtracted the calculated temperature rise across the supply fan.
Note: A Mixed Air Setpoint manager is only included in systems that incorporate draw-through coils. Also, if a
setpoint manager is added in front of a draw-through fan, the Mixed Air Setpoint manager is omitted.
Working at HVAC System Level

The HVAC system level is at the top of the hierarchy of the building HVAC data. At HVAC system level, you
can:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Use the Load HVAC template dialog to load a fully connected HVAC system. When there are no HVAC
loops or HVAC zone groups defined already and you navigate to the HVAC system level, this dialog is
opened automatically.
Use the Save HVAC Template tool to save the currently defined system as a template for future use.
Add and edit air, plant and condenser loops.
Add and edit zone groups.
Delete one or more existing HVAC components. Either select the component(s) for deletion and use
the Delete toolbar icon or, to delete all components, use the Delete tool with no components selected.
Load HVAC Template Dialog
You can use the Load HVAC Template dialog to load a fully connected HVAC system to the model either in
addition to any system data already defined or to replace it. To load an HVAC template, first go to the HVAC
System level then click on the Load HVAC Template tool.
Note: When there are no HVAC loops or HVAC zone groups defined already and you navigate to the HVAC
system level, this dialog is opened automatically.
Select the HVAC System Template

The first page on the Load HVAC Template dialog allows you to select the predefined HVAC system you
would like to load. The thumbnail image shows an image of the system layout currently selected.
- 440 -
To select a different HVAC system, click on the Detailed HVAC template browse item to reveal the browse
button and click on the browse button to bring up a list of available templates. With this list open simply select
the HVAC system you would like and press the OK button.
- 441 -
Once you have the right HVAC system selected click on the Next button in the Load HVAC Template dialog.
Select Building Zones

On the second page you can select the building zones to be served by the selected HVAC template. By
default all zones that are currently not already served are selected. You will normally want to unselect any
unoccupied zones or other zones that are not served by this system.
- 442 -
Replace All Existing HVAC Systems

On this page of the dialog you can choose to Replace all existing HVAC systems which as the name
suggests removes any existing HVAC components before placing the selected HVAC system and allows all
zones in the building to be selected as being served by the selected HVAC template.
Override Template Defaults

This option allows you to override the default settings saved with the template using your own values on
further pages on this dialog.
Air System Data

If the HVAC template includes an air system and you chose to override template defaults then on this page
you get the opportunity to provide key settings for the air system.
- 443 -
Hot Water System Data

If the HVAC template includes a hot water system and you chose to override template defaults then on this
page you get the opportunity to provide key settings for the hot water system.
- 444 -
Chilled Water System Data

If the HVAC template includes a chilled water system and you chose to override template defaults then on this
page you get the opportunity to provide key settings for the chilled water system.
- 445 -
Loading the Template

When you have entered all of the necessary data click on the Finish button. If there is no existing HVAC data
or you chose to replace all existing HVAC data then the components associated with the HVAC template are
placed automatically for you. Alternatively,if the HVAC template is being used to add components to an
existing system then you should use the mouse to position the new components away from the existing ones
and click with the mouse to actually place them. You may need to zoom out to find a free area to place the
new components.
Note: If you click on an area where the new HVAC components would overlap with any that already exist then
the load is cancelled.
Save HVAC Template
Use the Save HVAC Template tool if you would like to save the HVAC system defined in your current model
for loading to this or other models in the future. To save an HVAC template, first go to the HVAC System level
then click on the Save HVAC Template tool.
- 446 -
The dialog that opens allows you to name the HVAC template and provides a summary of the sub-systems
that will included with the saved template.
If you press the OK button to save the template the HVAC data is stored in the template library.
Note: The whole HVAC system as seen at HVAC system level is saved and there is no way to selectively
save particular parts of the system.
Using the saved template

Any HVAC systems saved as a template in this way will be available for loading using the Load HVAC
Template dialog. The HVAC template library is global to the program and so any HVAC templates that you
save will automatically be available in other projects. However you can export your HVAC template library in
DDF form exactly like any other type of template or component. This is the most secure method to store your
HVAC templates as the DDF file can be loaded to other machines and in future installations.
Add Zone Group Tool
To place an HVAC zone group, first go to the HVAC System level and click on the Add zone group tool. To
place a zone group, simply move the cursor to the required position on the Edit screen and click the mouse
button to place the zone group.
Add Loop Tool
To place an HVAC loop, first go to the HVAC System level and click on the Add loop tool which will display a
drop-menu of available pre-defined loops. You can then select whichever loop you require from the menu. To
place a loop, move the cursor to the required position on the Edit screen and click the mouse button to place
the loop.
Working at Sub-Loop Level

At the sub-loop level, you can:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Add and Edit boilers (heating plant supply sub-loop).

Add and Edit chillers (chilled water plant supply sub-loop).
Add and Edit cooling towers (condenser supply sub-loop).
Add and Edit water heaters (domestic hot water plant supply sub-loop).
Add and Edit pumps (all plant and condenser supply sub-loops).
Add and Edit heating coils (dual-duct air loop supply sub-loop)
Add and Edit cooling coils (dual-duct air loop supply sub-loop)
Add and Edit humidifiers (dual-duct air loop supply sub-loop)
Add and Edit setpoint managers (all supply sub-loops).
- 447 -
10.
11.
12.
Add mixers and splitters (all sub-loops).

Connect components (all sub-loops).
Edit air handling units (air loop supply sub-loop).
Note: Sub loops have no attribute data of their own so there is no sub-loop dialog.
Add Boiler Tool
Boilers can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of hot water plant loops so you first need to go to
the supply sub-loop of the hot water plant loop to which the boiler is to be added. The Add boiler tool icon will
then appear on the toolbar. To place a boiler, click on the Add boiler tool and then move the mouse cursor to
the required position and click the mouse button to place the boiler.
Add Chiller Tool
Chillers can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of chilled water plant loops so you first need to
go to the supply sub-loop of the chilled water plant loop to which the chiller is to be added. The Add chiller tool
icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a chiller, click on the Add chiller tool and then move the mouse
cursor to the required position and click the mouse button to place the chiller.
Add Cooling Tower Tool
Cooling towers can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of condenser loops so you first need to
go to the supply sub-loop of the condenser loop to which the cooling tower is to be added. The Add Cooling
Tower tool icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a cooling tower, click on the Add Cooling Tower tool
and then move the mouse cursor to the required position and click the mouse button to place the cooling
tower.
Add Water Heater Tool
Water heaters can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of domestic hot water plant loops so you
first need to go to the supply sub-loop of the domestic hot water plant loop to which the water heater is to be
added. The Add Water Heater tool icon will then appear on the toolbar. To place a water heater, click on the
Add Water Heater tool and then move the mouse cursor to the required position and click the mouse button to
place the water heater.
- 448 -
Add Pump Tool
Pumps can only be included in the supply sub-loops of plant and condenser loops. EnergyPlus requires that
the pump must be the first component in the sub-loop. Consequently, a pump must be connected directly to
the sub-loop inlet node. Only one pump can be added to each plant/condenser supply sub-loop and so the
tool will only appear on the toolbar at the plant/condenser sub-loop level if you delete the existing pump in
order to change its orientation.
To place a pump, click on the Add pump tool and click the mouse button when the pump is at the required
location. After clicking the mouse button, you can then rotate the pump by moving the mouse in a circular
direction around the centre of the pump to obtain the required orientation:
Add Heating Coil Tool
Heating coils can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of air loops so you first need to go to the
supply sub-loop of the air loop to which the coil is to be added. The Add heating coil tool icon will then appear
on the toolbar. To place a heating coil, click on the Add heating coil tool.
Heating coils can be placed anywhere in the sub-loop but are more commonly incorporated within an air
handling unit. To add a heating coil to an air handling unit, after clicking on the Add heating coil tool, move the
cursor (with the coil attached to it) into the supply section of the air handling unit and click the mouse button to
place the coil at the required location. Coils may be placed in front of the supply fan for a draw-through
configuration or after the fan for a blow-through configuration:
- 449 -
Add Cooling Coil Tool
Cooling coils can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of air loops so you first need to go to the
supply sub-loop of the air loop to which the coil is to be added. The Add cooling coil tool icon will then appear
on the toolbar. To place a cooling coil, click on the Add cooling coil tool and then select the required coil from
the drop-list.
Cooling coils can be placed anywhere in the sub-loop but are more commonly incorporated within an air
handling unit. To add a cooling coil to an air handling unit, after clicking on the Add cooling coil tool, move the
cursor (with the coil attached to it) into the supply section of the air handling unit and click the mouse button to
place the coil at the required location. Coils may be placed in front of the supply fan for a draw-through
configuration or after the fan for a blow-through configuration:
Add Humidifier Tool
Humidifiers can only be incorporated within the supply sub-loops of air loops so you first need to go to the
supply sub-loop of the air loop to which the humidifier is to be added. The Add humidifier tool icon will then
appear on the toolbar. To place a humidifier, click on the Add humidifier tool.
Humidifiers can be placed anywhere in the sub-loop but are more commonly incorporated within an air
handling unit. To add a humidifier to an air handling unit, after clicking on the Add humidifier tool, move the
cursor (with the humidifier attached to it) into the supply section of the air handling unit and click the mouse
button to place the humidifier at the required location. Humidifiers may be placed in front of the supply fan for
a draw-through configuration or after the fan for a blow-through configuration:
- 450 -
Add Splitter/Add Mixer Tool
Splitter and mixers are used in HVAC in order to connect multiple items of equipment to a sub-loop by means
of parallel branches:
Note: Only one splitter and one mixer can be incorporated within both the supply and demand sub-loops of
plant and condenser loops and consequently the Add splitter and Add mixer tool will only appear on the
toolbar if an existing splitter and mixer have been removed.
Air loops are slightly different in that air supply sub-loops comprise series component connections and
consequently do not require any splitter or mixer with the exception of dual-duct systems which incorporate a
single splitter to enable the flow to be split between hot and cold ducts. Air demand sub-loops are similar to
plant and condenser sub-loops in that they can only contain a single mixer but can incorporate an additional
splitter to cater for dual duct systems.
To place a splitter or mixer, click on the Add splitter or Add mixer tool and click the mouse button when the
splitter/mixer is at the required location. After clicking the mouse button, you can then rotate the splitter/mixer
by moving the mouse in a circular direction around the centre of the component to obtain the required
orientation:
Add Supply/Return Plenum Tool
- 451 -
Plenums may be used to model building features such as ceiling or floor voids which are used to supply or
return centrally conditioned air. Supply and return plenums are essentially uncontrolled building zones
incorporated within the supply and return paths of air loop demand side sub-loops. Plenums can account for
building side heat balance, that is they can transfer heat with other zones through surfaces, but they cannot
incorporate HVAC equipment.
HVAC air plenums are special types of component since there is a heat balance connection and building
description and a system airflow connection that transfers the airflow directly from a supply plenum to a
controlled zone or from a controlled zone to a return plenum in the system air simulation.
Placing Plenums
When an air loop is first placed, a splitter and mixer component is automatically included on the supply and
return sides respectively. The normal way to place a supply plenum is to first delete the original splitter
component and replace it with a supply plenum component. Likewise to include a return plenum, first delete
the original mixer component and replace it with a return plenum component.
To place a supply or return plenum, click on the Add supply plenum or Add return plenum tool and click the
mouse button when the plenum is at the required location. After clicking the mouse button, you can then
rotate the plenum to its final orientation by moving the mouse in a circular direction around the centre of the
component:
Connecting Plenums
When you first place a plenum it will be shown on the HVAC layout diagram in light grey indicating that it does
not yet have a building zone allocated to it and so cannot yet be connected up. So the first thing to do having
placed a supply or return plenum is to assign a building zone to the Plenum component.
- 452 -
Finished system with supply and return plenums

Note: Each air loop demand sub-loop can contain a single return plenum but can incorporate an additional
supply plenum to cater for dual duct systems.
Connect Components Tool
The Connect components tool is used to create connections between the inlets and outlets of both air-side
and water-side components. The tool can only be used at the sub-loop level. HVAC connections are created
in the form of a number of segments or steps, each segment snapped to the X or Y axis. To create a
connection between two components, first click on the Connect components tool and move the cursor to the
required component inlet/outlet. When the cursor is over the required inlet/outlet, a green connection marker
will be displayed to indicate that the beginning of the connection can be snapped to the inlet/outlet:
- 453 -
You can then click the mouse button to start the connection. Having snapped the beginning of the first
connection segment to the required inlet/outlet, as you move the mouse cursor away, the cursor will
automatically snap to the X or Y axis depending on the position of the cursor relative to the connection point.
As you move the cursor across the screen, drawing guides are displayed to indicate that the current cursor
position has been automatically snapped to align with existing connections in the X and Y axes:
When the cursor snaps to a required drawing guide, you can then click the mouse button to place the end
point of the current connection segment. Finally, as you move the cursor towards the component inlet/outlet to
which the connection is to be created, a green connection marker will again be displayed to indicate that the
end of the connection can be snapped into position by clicking the mouse cursor button.
Working at HVAC Zone Group Level

When at the HVAC zone group level, you can edit the current zone group if no HVAC zones are selected by
clicking on the Edit icon in the toolbar. Alternatively you can edit HVAC Zone data by selecting the HVAC zone
in the Edit screen - it will be highlighted in red. Then right-click and in the menu select the Edit option.
Edit HVAC zone data.
Working at HVAC Zone Level

When at the HVAC zone level, if no zone components are selected, you can edit the current HVAC zone by
clicking on the Edit icon in the toolbar. Also, at the HVAC zone level, you can:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Add and edit air distribution units (VAV boxes, chilled beams etc.).
Add and edit forced air units (fan-coil units, etc.).
Add and edit heated floors
Add and edit chilled ceilings.
Add and edit radiators/convectors.
- 454 -
6.
Add a zone extract.
Add Zone Air Distribution Unit Tool
Zone air distribution units are placed at the zone level. To place an ADU, click on the Add air distribution unit
tool and then select the required unit from the drop-list and then making sure that the cursor is inside the
boundary of the zone, just click the mouse button to place the ADU. The ADU will be automatically positioned
at the top left of the zone:
You should make sure to add a distribution unit that is compatible with the type of air loop you plan to connect
to. Constant volume ADUs can only connect to CAV air loops and Variable volume ADUs can only connect to
VAV air loops.
Note You must also add a zone extract unit to a zone that contains an ADU in order to connect up the air
return path from the zone.
Add Zone Forced Air Unit Tool
Forced air units are placed at the zone level. To place a forced air unit, click on the Add forced air unit tool and
then select the required unit from the drop-list and then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of
the required zone, just click the mouse button to place the unit. The unit will be automatically positioned at the
bottom left of the zone:
- 455 -
Add Zone Heated Floor Tool
Heated floors are placed at the zone level. To place a heated floor, click on the Add heated floor tool and then
making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the required zone; just click the mouse button to place
the heated floor. The heated floor will be automatically positioned at the bottom of the zone:
Add Zone Chilled Ceiling Tool
Chilled ceilings are placed at the zone level. To place a chilled ceiling, click on the Add chilled ceiling tool and
then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the required zone, just click the mouse button to
place the chilled ceiling. The chilled ceiling will be automatically positioned at the top of the zone:
- 456 -
Note: Where chilled ceilings are added to zones with internal ceilings, the floor surface of the associated
adjacent upper zone must have a construction with an internal source to represent the embedded piping
system of the chilled ceiling. Similarly, in the case of zones with external flat roofs, the roof construction must
contain an internal source. Refer to the documentation on Constructions for further information on defining
internal sources for constructions.
Add Zone Radiative-Convective Unit Tool
Radiators and convectors are placed at the zone level. To place a radiator or convector, click on the Add
radiative-convective unit tool and then select the required unit from the drop-list and then making sure that the
cursor is inside the boundary of the required zone, just click the mouse button to place the radiator/convector.
The unit will be automatically positioned at the bottom centre of the zone:
- 457 -
Add Zone Extract Tool
Zone extracts are placed at the HVAC zone level and are used to return air back to the AHU. To place an
extract, click on the Add zone extract tool and then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the
zone just click the mouse button to place the extract. The extract will be automatically positioned near the top
right of the zone:
Note: A zone extract is required in an HVAC Zone if an ADU has been placed.
The Zone extract does not require any data to be entered and so does not appear on the Navigator list. It is
not to be confused with the Zone exhaust fan which is used to extract air direct to outside and can be linked to
the Airflow Network.
Add Zone Exhaust Fan Tool
Zone exhaust are placed at the HVAC zone level and are used to extract air to outside. To place an extract,
click on the Add zone exhaust fan tool and then making sure that the cursor is inside the boundary of the
zone just click the mouse button to place the extract. The exhaust fan will be automatically positioned at the
top right of the HVAC zone:
Note: A zone exhaust fan can be added in addition an extract in an HVAC Zone if an ADU has been placed.
Alternatively it can included without an ADU and extract.
- 458 -
Data for the zone exhaust fan data can be entered on the Zone exhaust fan dialog. It is not to be confused
with the Zone extract which is used to return air back to the AHU.
Working at Component Level

Many components in DesignBuilder HVAC are composite components and are themselves composed of a
number of sub-components. Examples of composite components include air handling units and various items
of zone equipment such as forced air units (fan-coil units, etc.) and air distribution units (VAV terminal boxes
with reheat, etc.). In order to access and edit the data associated with each sub-component of a composite
component you first need to go to the component level (by selecting it from the navigator or double-clicking on
it with the mouse) and then you can select and edit any of the appropriate sub-components:
HVAC Components
A range of component types are available with Detailed HVAC:
Air Loop Data

Plant and Condenser Loop Data
Air Handling Units (AHU) Data
- 459 -
Heating Coil Data

Cooling Coil Data
Evaporative Cooler
Fan Data
Pump Data
Humidifier - Steam Electric
Chiller Data
Boiler Data
Water to Water Heat Pump / GSHP Data
Ground Heat Exchanger Data
Cooling Tower Data
Performance Curve Data
Zone Group Data
HVAC Zone Data
Air Distribution Units (ADU) Data
Zone Forced Air Unit Data
Radiative Convective Unit Data
Chilled Ceiling Data
Heated Floor Data
Setpoint Manager Data
Plenum Data
DHW
Loop Data
There are 3 plant and air loop dialogs:
"Editing Air Loop " below

"Plant and Condenser Loop Edit Dialog" on page 463
"Solar Loop Data" on page 467
Editing Air Loop

The air loop edit dialog allows you to control the way that the air system is sized and in particular in how the
design supply and outside air flow rates as well as heating and cooling capacities are calculated.
General
Name
This is the name of the loop. If the supplied loop name is found to already exist, the software will automatically
append an integer to create a unique name.
Sizing
The rest of the Air loop dialog provides the sizing inputs needed to perform a central forced air system design
air flow, heating capacity, and cooling capacity calculation for a system serving one or more zones. The
information needed consists of the outside environmental conditions and the design supply air temperatures,
outdoor air flow rate, and minimum system air flow ratio.
The outside conditions come from the design days in the input. A system sizing calculation is performed for
the design day defined in the input file and the resulting maximum heating and cooling air flow rates and
capacities are used in the component sizing calculations.
- 460 -
Supply air conditions are specified by inputting a supply air temperature for cooling, a supply air temperature
for heating, and a preheat temperature. The system sizing calculation sums the zone design air flow rates to
obtain a system supply air flow rate. The design conditions and the outdoor air flow rate are used to calculate
a design mixed air temperature. The temperature plus the design supply air temperatures allows the
calculation of system design heating and cooling capacities.
Note: Detailed HVAC autosizing calculations are not to be confused with Heating and Cooling design
calculations, which use separate simpler data entry from the HVAC tab. No Detailed HVAC data is used for
Heating and Cooling design calculations, which are based on the EnergyPlus Ideal loads system.
Design outdoor air flow rate

The design outdoor air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). Generally this should be the minimum outdoor air flow. It
is used for both heating and cooling design calculations. The assumption for cooling is that any outdoor air
economizer will be closed. If Autosize is input the Design outdoor air flow rate will be taken from the sum of
the zone outdoor air flow rates based on the Sizing option below.
Note that the Design supply air flow rate is defined in the AHU dialog contained within the Air loop.
Minimum system air flow ratio

This ratio is used in calculating the central system heating capacity and is only required when the Fan type of
the attached AHU is 2-Variable volume. It should be set to the expected system flow rate when maximum
heating demand occurs. Thus if the system is VAV with the zone VAV dampers held at minimum flow when
there is a zone heating demand, this ratio should be set to the minimum flow ratio. If the zone VAV dampers
are reverse action and can open to full flow to meet heating demand, this ratio should be set to 1.
The value entered must be between 0 and 1.
Sizing option
This value is read-only and set to as follows:
1-Non-coincident where the central system air flow rate will be sized on the sum of the non-coincident
zone air flow rates. This option is used for CAV systems.
2-Coincident where the central system air flow rate will be sized on the sum of the coincident zone air
flow rates. This option is used for VAV systems,
Type of load to size on

For CAV air loops you can define the way the central system supply air flow rate is sized. The choices are:
1-Sensible means that the central system supply air flow rate will be determined by combining the
zone design air flow rates, which have been calculated to meet the zone sensible loads from the design
days.
2-Ventilation requirement means that the central system supply air flow rate will be determined by the
system ventilation requirement.
For VAV systems you should use the default 1-Sensible for Type of load to size on.
Important Note: For CAV air loops used to model a dedicated outdoor air system (DOAS), you must set the
Type of load to size on to 2-Ventilation requirement. This is true even if the air is being pre-heated and/or
pre-cooled to temper it before delivery.
System outdoor air method

The method used to calculate the system minimum outdoor air flow. The two choices are:
1-Zone sum which sums the outdoor air flows across all zones served by the system
2-Ventilation Rate Procedure (VRP) which uses the multi-zone equations defined in 62.1-2007 to
calculate the system outdoor air flow. VRP considers zone air distribution effectiveness and zone
diversification of outdoor air fractions.
- 461 -
Zone maximum outdoor air fraction

For an air loop, when a zone requires outdoor air higher than the user specified Zone maximum outdoor air
fraction, the zone supply air flow will be capped at the maximum value. This allows the system level outdoor
air flow to be reduced while the total supply air flow increases. Valid values are from 0 to 1.0. Default is 1.0
which indicates zones can have 100% outdoor air maintaining backward compatibility. This inputs work for
constant volume air systems, single and dual duct VAV systems.
Heating
Preheat design temperature
This is the design air temperature exiting the preheat coil (C or F).
Preheat design humidity ratio

This is the design humidity ratio exiting the preheat coil (in kg/kg).
Central heating design supply air temperature

This is the design supply air temperature for heating (C or F). This can be either the reset temperature for a
single duct system or the actual hot duct supply air temperature for dual duct systems. It should be the
temperature at the exit of the main heating coil.
The default value for newly added air loops is 16C corresponding to a reheat-type system where the zone
temperature control is provided through local reheat terminal units. Other system types without reheat will
need a much higher value (typically 35-50C).
100% Outdoor air in heating

This data is set as follows:
1-No for systems with recirculation set in the AHU, the system will be sized for heating using minimum
outside air.
2-Yes for systems without recirculation set in the AHU, the system will be sized for heating using 100%
outdoor air.
Central heating design supply air humidity ratio

This is the design humidity ratio at the exit of the central heating coil (in kg/kg) . The default is 0.008.
Heating design air flow method

The input must be either:
1-Design day which means the program will calculate the system design heating air flow rate using
the System Sizing input data and a design day simulation.
2-Flow/System which means that the program will use the input of the field Heating Design Air Flow
Rate as the system design heating air flow rate.
The default method is 1-Design day, i.e., the program uses the calculated design values.
Heating design air flow rate

This is the design system heating air flow rate (m 3/s or ft3/min). This input is an alternative to using the
program calculated value. This input is used if Heating design air flow method is 2-Flow/System. This value
will not be multiplied by any sizing factor or by zone multipliers. If using zone multipliers, this value must be
large enough to serve the multiplied zones.
- 462 -
Cooling
Pre-cool design temperature
This is the design air temperature exiting the pre-cooling coil (C or F).
Pre-cool design humidity ratio

This is the design humidity ratio exiting the pre-cooling coil (kg/kg).
Central cooling design supply air temperature

This is the design supply air temperature for cooling (in C or F). This should be the temperature of the air
exiting the central cooling coil.
This value should typically be lower than the Central heating design supply air temperature.
100% Outdoor air in cooling

This data is set as follows:
1-No for systems with recirculation set in the AHU, the system will be sized for cooling using minimum
outside air
2-Yes for systems without recirculation set in the AHU, the system will be sized for cooling using 100%
outdoor air.
Central cooling design supply air humidity ratio

This is the design humidity ratio at the exit of the central cooling coil (in kg/kg). The default is 0.008.
Cooling design air flow method

The input must be either:
1-Design Day which means that EnergyPlus will calculate the system design cooling air flow rate
using the System Sizing input data and a design day simulation.
2-Flow/System where the Cooling design air flow rate below is used as the system design cooling air
flow rate.
The default method is 1-Design Day, i.e. the program uses the calculated design values.
Cooling design air flow rate

This is the design system cooling air flow rate (m 3/s or ft3/min). This input is an alternative to using the
program calculated value. This input is used if Cooling design air flow method is 2-Flow/System. This value
will not be multiplied by any sizing factor or by zone multipliers. If using zone multipliers, this value must be
large enough to serve the multiplied zones.
Schedule values greater than zero (usually 1 is used) indicate that the system is on. Schedule values less
than or equal to zero (usually 0 is used) denote that the system is off. This schedule overrides the air loop fan
schedules for determining whether the fans are on.
Plant and Condenser Loop Edit Dialog

The plant and condenser loop edit dialog incorporates two tabs, the first tab is General and incorporates loop
characteristic and sizing data, the second tab covers Plant Equipment Operation allowing you to set up
various equipment operation schemes for the loop.
See the Hot Water Loop Tutorial and the Condenser Loop Tutorial
- 463 -
General
Name
If the supplied loop name is found to already exist, the software will automatically append an integer to create
a unique name.
Fluid type
You can define the type of fluid used in the loop as a mixture of water and glycol along with the particular
concentration being used. EnergyPlus will accurately model the thermal properties of the fluid based on glycol
concentration and fluid temperature at each time step of the simulation.
Select the fluid type from 3 options:
1-Water.
2-EthyleneGlycol.
3-PropyleneGlycol.
Glycol concentration
When one of the glycol fluid types is selected above then you can enter the concentration of glycol in the loop
fluid here. It should be entered as a decimal fraction between 0.0 and 1.0. A concentration of 0.0 refers to
pure water. A concentration of 1.0 would denote 100% of the fluid referenced in the Fluid type input above.
Plant loop volume

This is the volume of the plant loop (in m 3 or gal). This is the loop volume for the entire loop, i.e. both the
demand side and the supply side. This is used for the loop capacitance calculation which updates the loop
temperature from one time-step to the next and introduces some time delay between the supply and demand
sides of the loop. The loop volume could be calculated from pipe size data but this is not usually known. If
zero volume is specified the demand inlet temperature is set to the supply outlet temperature at the previous
system time-step. If a very large capacitance is specified unrealistic time delay may result and there may be
poor response to changes in loop setpoint temperature. If the loop volume is auto-calculated, the EnergyPlus
provided calculation gives reasonable values for most system sizes. This calculation is described in the
EnergyPlus Engineering Reference manual.
Flow Type
Plant loop flow type
Two options are available:
1-Constant flow, for constant flow plant loops. In this case a constant speed pump will automatically
be specified.
2-Variable flow for variable flow plant loops. In this case a variable speed pump will automatically be
specified.
The flow type is fixed as 1-Constant flow for DHW and condenser loops
Temperatures
Maximum loop temperature
This is the maximum allowable temperature (in C or F) for this loop.
Minimum loop temperature

This is the minimum allowable temperature (in C or F) for this loop.
- 464 -
Flow Rates
Maximum loop flow rate
This is the maximum loop flow rate (in m3/sec or ft3/min). This parameter is also used when the user chooses
to auto-calculate the loop volume. See the Plant loop volume above and the EnergyPlus Engineering Manual
for more details.
Note: This value is generally autosizable but only when the condenser loop does not contain any Vertical
ground heat exchanger components. In cases where a vertical ground heat exchanger is included the
Maximum loop flow rate should normally take the same value as entered on the ground heat exchanger
dialog for Maximum flow rate and Design flow rate. The Condenser loop Maximum loop flow rate can be
entered as higher than the ground heat exchanger flow rate but in this case it will be limited to that value
during the simulation.
Minimum loop flow rate

This is the minimum loop flow rate (in m3/sec or ft3/min).
Load distribution scheme

The Load distribution scheme selects the algorithm used to sequence equipment operation in order to meet
the plant loop demand. Currently, 3 schemes are functional:
1-Sequential uses each piece of equipment to its maximum part load ratio and will operate the last
required piece of equipment between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the
loop demand.
2-Optimal operates each piece of equipment at its optimal part load ratio and will operate the last
component between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the loop demand.
3-Uniform evenly distributes the loop demand amongst all available components on the equipment list
for a given load range.
Plant loop demand calculation scheme

There is currently only one plant loop demand calculation scheme which is the 1-SingleSetPoint scheme. In
this scheme the Plant loop requires that a Setpoint manager set a single setpoint value. The Plant loop
demand calculation scheme determines the amount of heating or cooling necessary to bring the
temperature of the Plant loop to its setpoint. When this value is determined then the Load distribution
scheme explained in the previous section takes this value and distributes the load to the appropriate
equipment. The demand calculation scheme determines how the load is calculated. See more information in
the EnergyPlus Engineering Document.
Sizing
Design loop exit temperature
The water temperature (in C or F) at the exit of the supply side of the plant loop, Thus this is the temperature
of the water supplied to the inlet of chilled or hot water coils in the case of plant loops or chiller condensers in
the case of condenser loops.
Loop design temperature difference

This is the design temperature rise (for cooling or condenser loops) or fall (for heating loops) (in C or F)
across the demand side of a plant or condenser loop.
- 465 -
Operation
This is the schedule that determines whether or not the Plant loop is available during the simulation. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the device can be on for the timestep. A value
less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the device must be off.
Outside temperature operation

If you select this option you can define the external temperatures below and above which, the plant or
condenser loop will turn off as a deadband. The definition is different depending on the type of plant loop as
shown below.
Loop type
Hot water plant loops
Chilled water and
condenser plant loops
External cut-in temperature

The temperature (in C or F) below which
the plant is on.
The temperature (in C or F) is the
temperature above which the plant is on.
External cut-out temperature

The temperature (in C or F) above
which the plant is off.
The temperature(in C or F) below
which the plant is OFF.
Plant Equipment Operation

Plant and condenser loops have a mechanism for controlling the operation of the loop to allow control over
which equipment is available under what conditions. Since there may be multiple control schemes that are
assigned various priorities associated with each loop, an overall operation scheme must be defined. Each
operation scheme must have the type of operation scheme together with the name of the scheme and the
schedule that defines its availability.
Note: The order in which the individual operation schemes appear in this list defines its priority relative to the
others with the same scheduled availability. The first scheme appearing in the list is given the highest priority;
the second scheme has second highest priority, etc. In other words, if according to its schedule, the first
operation scheme is available, then it is used by the simulation to define how the plant or condenser loop
operates. If it is not available, the second operation scheme in the list is checked to see if it is available until
the highest priority scheme that is also available is found. To allow for simultaneous heating and cooling, there
is one configuration where multiple operation schemes are available at a given timestep. This is allowed if a
user inputs both a heating range based operation and a cooling range based operation with overlapping
schedules. The simulation will look at the current loop demand to determine if the cooling scheme should be
used or the heating scheme. In other cases, if two schemes overlap (are available at the same time),
EnergyPlus will raise an error and the simulation will be aborted.
Number of schemes
This is the number of operational schemes that are to be associated with the plant or condenser loop. A
maximum of ten schemes are allowed for each loop. After setting the required number of schemes, the dialog
will be automatically populated with sections for each scheme, the settings for each operation scheme being
described below.
Scheme
Scheme operation type
This is the type of control scheme used. The available options will depend on the current loop type. For
condenser and chilled water plant loops, the options are:
1-Uncontrolled and
2-Cooling load
for heating and domestic hot water plant loops, the options are:
- 466 -
1-Uncontrolled and
3-Heating load.
Uncontrolled loop operation simply specifies a group of equipment that runs uncontrolled. If the loop runs,
this equipment will run also, unless turned off by the loop flow resolver to maintain continuity in the fluid loop.
The 2-Cooling load and 3-Heating load options allow different load ranges to be defined and which items of
equipment will operate for each range. If either of these options is selected, at least one operational range
must be defined. For each range, there is a lower limit for the load range, an upper limit for the load range,
and a list of the equipment items that will operate in this range.
Scheme equipment
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme operation type is set to 1-Uncontrolled. A list of valid items of
plant or condenser equipment is displayed together with check boxes allowing you to define which items of
equipment will be turned on for this scheme.
Scheme schedule
This is the schedule for the control scheme. This schedule consists of weeks and days, with the days
containing 0 or 1 for each hour of the day. This binary schedule (0 for off, 1 for on) determines if the control
scheme is operating for that hour of the day or not.
Number of ranges
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme Operation Type is set to 2-Cooling load or 3-Heating load and is
used to define the number of ranges required for the heating or cooling load scheme.
Range
Range lower limit
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme Operation Type is set to 2-Cooling load or 3-Heating load. This
is the lower demand range (W) for the equipment defined for the current range. If demand is below this value,
then the equipment will not turn on to meet the demand.
Range upper limit

is the upper demand range (W) for the equipment defined for the current range. If demand is above this value,
Range Equipment
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme Operation Type is set to 2-Cooling load or 3-Heating load. A list
of valid items of plant or condenser equipment is displayed together with check boxes allowing you to define
which items of equipment will be turned on for this range.
Note: A priority drop-list associated with each item of equipment allows you to define the order in which
equipment will be turned on when the loop demand is within this range.
Solar Loop Data

The Solar loop edit dialog incorporates two tabs, the first tab is General and incorporates loop characteristic
and sizing data, the second tab covers Plant Equipment Operation allowing you to set up various equipment
operation schemes for the loop.
- 467 -
General
Name
If the supplied loop name is found to already exist, the software will automatically append an integer to create
a unique name.
Fluid type
There is currently only one fluid type available which is 1-Water.
Plant loop volume

This is the volume of the plant loop (in m 3 or gal). This is the loop volume for the entire loop, i.e. both the
demand side and the supply side. This is used for the loop capacitance calculation which updates the loop
temperature from one time-step to the next and introduces some time delay between the supply and demand
sides of the loop. The loop volume could be calculated from pipe size data but this is not usually known. If
zero volume is specified the demand inlet temperature is set to the supply outlet temperature at the previous
system time-step. If a very large capacitance is specified unrealistic time delay may result and there may be
poor response to changes in loop setpoint temperature. If the loop volume is auto-calculated, the EnergyPlus
provided calculation gives reasonable values for most system sizes. This calculation is described in the
EnergyPlus Engineering Reference manual.
Flow Type
Plant loop flow type
Two options are available:
1-Constant flow, for constant flow plant loops. In this case a constant speed pump will automatically
be specified.
2-Variable flow for variable flow plant loops. In this case a variable speed pump will automatically be
specified.
Temperatures
Maximum loop temperature
This is the maximum allowable temperature (in C or F) for this loop.
Minimum loop temperature

This is the minimum allowable temperature (in C or F) for this loop.
Flow Rates
Maximum loop flow rate
This is the maximum loop flow rate (in m3/sec or ft3/min). This parameter is also used when the user chooses
to auto-calculate the loop volume. See the Plant loop volume above and the EnergyPlus Engineering Manual
for more details.
This value is autosizable.
Minimum loop flow rate

This is the minimum loop flow rate (in m3/sec or ft3/min).
- 468 -
Load distribution scheme

The Load distribution scheme selects the algorithm used to sequence equipment operation in order to meet
the plant loop demand. Currently, 3 schemes are functional:
1-Sequential uses each piece of equipment to its maximum part load ratio and will operate the last
required piece of equipment between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the
loop demand.
2-Optimal operates each piece of equipment at its optimal part load ratio and will operate the last
component between its minimum and maximum part load ratio in order to meet the loop demand.
3-Uniform evenly distributes the loop demand amongst all available components on the equipment list
for a given load range.
Plant loop demand calculation scheme

There is currently only one plant loop demand calculation scheme which is the 1-SingleSetPoint scheme. In
this scheme the Plant loop requires that a Setpoint manager set a single setpoint value. The Plant loop
demand calculation scheme determines the amount of heating or cooling necessary to bring the
temperature of the Plant loop to its setpoint. When this value is determined then the Load distribution
scheme explained in the previous section takes this value and distributes the load to the appropriate
equipment. The demand calculation scheme determines how the load is calculated. See more information in
the EnergyPlus Engineering Document.
Temperature Protection
Low temperature protection
Check this option to obtain low temperature protection.
Temperature below which system is on

Trigger temperature...
High temperature protection

Temperature above which system is off
Differential Thermostat
The differential thermostat settings allow an availability manager to be set up to switch the loop on or off
depending on the temperature differential between a collector outlet and the outlet from the water heater. A
differential sensor check box on the solar collector dialog allows you to define the collector to used by the
differential sensor (where there are more than one solar collector on the loop).
This prevents the water heater from being supplied with inadequately heated water by the solar collector.
Differential thermostat
Check this option to use a differential thermostat on the Solar HW loop.
Temperature difference to turn system on

The temperature (in C or F) above which the loop can operate.
Temperature difference to turn system off

The temperature (in C or F) below which the loop will be shut off.
- 469 -
Sizing
Design loop exit temperature
The water temperature (in C or F) at the exit of the supply side of the plant loop, Thus this is the temperature
of the water supplied to the inlet of chilled or hot water coils in the case of plant loops or chiller condensers in
the case of condenser loops.
Loop design temperature difference

This is the design temperature rise (for cooling or condenser loops) or fall (for heating loops) (in C or F)
across the demand side of a plant or condenser loop.
Operation
This is the schedule that determines whether or not the Plant loop is available during the simulation. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the device can be on for the timestep. A value
less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the device must be off.
Outside temperature operation

If you select this option you can define the external temperatures below and above which, the plant or
condenser loop will turn off as a deadband. The definition is different depending on the type of plant loop as
shown below.
Loop type
Hot water plant loops
Chilled water and
condenser plant loops
External cut-in temperature

The temperature (in C or F) below which
the plant is on.
The temperature (in C or F) is the
temperature above which the plant is on.
External cut-out temperature

The temperature (in C or F) above
which the plant is off.
The temperature(in C or F) below
which the plant is OFF.
Plant Equipment Operation

Plants and condenser loops have a mechanism for controlling the operation of the loop to allow control over
which equipment is available under what conditions. Since there may be multiple control schemes that are
assigned various priorities associated with each loop, an overall operation scheme must be defined. Each
operation scheme must have the type of operation scheme together with the name of the scheme and the
schedule that defines its availability.
Note: The order in which the individual operation schemes appear in this list defines its priority relative to the
others with the same scheduled availability. The first scheme appearing in the list is given the highest priority;
the second scheme has second highest priority, etc. In other words, if according to its schedule, the first
operation scheme is available, then it is used by the simulation to define how the plant or condenser loop
operates. If it is not available, the second operation scheme in the list is checked to see if it is available until
the highest priority scheme that is also available is found. To allow for simultaneous heating and cooling, there
is one configuration where multiple operation schemes are available at a given timestep. This is allowed if a
user inputs both a heating range based operation and a cooling range based operation with overlapping
schedules. The simulation will look at the current loop demand to determine if the cooling scheme should be
used or the heating scheme. In other cases, if two schemes overlap (are available at the same time),
EnergyPlus will raise an error and the simulation will be aborted.
Number of schemes
This is the number of operational schemes that are to be associated with the plant or condenser loop. A
maximum of ten schemes are allowed for each loop. After setting the required number of schemes, the dialog
will be automatically populated with sections for each scheme, the settings for each operation scheme being
described below.
- 470 -
Scheme
Scheme operation type
This is the type of control scheme used. The available options will depend on the current loop type. For
condenser and chilled water plant loops, the options are:
1-Uncontrolled and
2-Cooling load
for heating and domestic hot water plant loops, the options are:
1-Uncontrolled and
3-Heating load.
Uncontrolled loop operation simply specifies a group of equipment that runs uncontrolled. If the loop runs,
this equipment will run also, unless turned off by the loop flow resolver to maintain continuity in the fluid loop.
The 2-Cooling load and 3-Heating load options allow different load ranges to be defined and which items of
equipment will operate for each range. If either of these options is selected, at least one operational range
must be defined. For each range, there is a lower limit for the load range, an upper limit for the load range,
and a list of the equipment items that will operate in this range.
Scheme equipment
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme operation type is set to 1-Uncontrolled. A list of valid items of
plant or condenser equipment is displayed together with check boxes allowing you to define which items of
equipment will be turned on for this scheme.
Scheme schedule
This is the schedule for the control scheme. This schedule consists of weeks and days, with the days
containing 0 or 1 for each hour of the day. This binary schedule (0 for off, 1 for on) determines if the control
scheme is operating for that hour of the day or not.
Number of ranges
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme Operation Type is set to 2-Cooling load or 3-Heating load and is
used to define the number of ranges required for the heating or cooling load scheme.
Range
Range lower limit
is the lower demand range (W) for the equipment defined for the current range. If demand is below this value,
Range upper limit

is the upper demand range (W) for the equipment defined for the current range. If demand is above this value,
Range Equipment
This setting is only displayed if the Scheme Operation Type is set to 2-Cooling load or 3-Heating load. A list
of valid items of plant or condenser equipment is displayed together with check boxes allowing you to define
which items of equipment will be turned on for this range.
Note: A priority drop-list associated with each item of equipment allows you to define the order in which
equipment will be turned on when the loop demand is within this range.
- 471 -
Air Loop Components

The following air loop components can be placed on the supply side of an air loop:
"Air Handling Units" below

"Heating Coils " on page 492
"Cooling Coils Detailed HVAC" on page 502
"Plenum Data" on page 514
"Fans" on page 515
"Humidifier - Steam Electric" on page 526
"Evaporative Cooler Data" on page 528
Air Handling Units

Air handling units (AHUs) are components that are automatically included in the supply sub-loops of all air
loops. AHUs are composite units incorporating all of the components that comprise central air handling plant
such as outdoor air mixers, fans, heating/ cooling coils and humidifiers. There are two main types of AHU in
DesignBuilder HVAC, generic and unitary AHUs. The main difference between the two units is that unitary
AHUs incorporate an EnergyPlus unitary system such as air-to-air heat pump or heat/cool unit.
To edit the data associated with an AHU, you first need to be at the supply sub loop level of the Air loop.
Select the AHU component by moving the mouse cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it.
You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component
option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the toolbar.
These AHU types are available:
Generic AHU
Unitary Heat Cool AHU
Unitary Heat Pump AHU
Generic Air Handling Unit (AHU)

The basic generic AHU incorporates an outdoor air system and a supply fan. There are also options for night
cycle operation, a heat recovery system, an economiser, pre-heat and pre-cool coils and an extract fan.
Additional components such as heating coils, cooling coils and humidifiers may also be added to generic
AHUs.
See the Generic Air Loops Tutorial
- 472 -
GENERAL
Name
This is the name that you assign to the AHU which should be unique. If the supplied name is not unique, the
software will automatically append a backslash and integer to ensure that there are no duplicate names.
Fan type
This setting is used to indicate a Constant Air Volume (CAV) or Variable Air Volume (VAV) system. It can take
one of two values:
1-Constant volume or
2-Variable volume.
Note 1: Once an air loop has been connected to a zone ADU, the Fan type setting is fixed (greyed out)
preventing an invalid connection and remains greyed out until the air loop is disconnected from all ADUs. So
to change an air loop from VAV to CAV or vice-versa using this control you must first disconnect the demand
side of the air loop from all zone ADUs. You can do this by deleting connecting branches.
Note 2: Once the AHU fan type has been set, the air loop containing the AHU can only be connected to valid
zone air distribution units (ADU), i.e. CAV air loops can only be connected to CAV ADUs and similarly VAV
systems can only be connected to VAV ADUs.
Design supply air flow rate

This is the air loop primary air design volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is auto-sizeable.
OPERATION
This is the schedule that contains information on the availability of the heat pump for operation. A schedule
value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the hour. A value less than or
equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the hour.
NIGHT CYCLE (COMMON TO ALL AHUS)

This setting may be used to enable cycling of an air system when one or more zones become too hot or too
cold. A common requirement for this mechanism is where the AHU is turned off at night. However if the
building gets too cold there might be condensation on the walls and other damage. Thus the control system is
usually programmed to turn the system on either if a specified control thermostat or any thermostat shows a
zone temperature of less than a night time set point. Similarly, there might be a concern about a building
getting too hot. Again the control system is programmed to turn the AHU back on if one or any zone
temperature exceeds a night time cooling set point.
This mechanism offers considerable flexibility in determining how the night time on/off decision will be made.
The temperature in one specific zone may be used or the temperatures in all the zones connected to the AHU
may be sampled. You can specify a temperature tolerance and a run time for the system once it switches on.
There is also an applicability schedule for scheduling when this mechanism may be applied.
Applicability schedule (night cycle)

This schedule determines whether or not for a given time period this mechanism is to be applied. Schedule
values greater than zero (usually 1 is used) indicate the night cycle mechanism is to be applied, whereas
schedule values less than or equal to zero (usually 0 is used) denote that it is not used for this time period.
Control type
The possible inputs are:
1-Stay off means the night cycle mechanism will have no effect AHU on/off will be determined by the
fan schedule
- 473 -
2-Cycle on any means that if any zone served by the air loop incorporating this AHU has an air
temperature outside the cooling or heating set points the central fan will turn on even though the fan
schedule indicates the fan is off.
3-Cycle on control zone means the same thing except that the temperature in only the specified
control zone is used.
4-Cycle on any zone fans only is the same as 2-Cycle on any except that only the zone fans are
cycled on and the AHU fan is left off.
Important Note: Plant loops and any required zone units must be available during the night cycle by
amending the availability schedules appropriately. The night cycle availability manager only automatically
overrides the air loop fan schedule.
Thermostat tolerance
This is the amount (in C or F) by which the zone temperature must exceed the cooling set point or fall below
the heating set point in order for the night cycle mechanism to signal that the system should turn on.
Cycling run time

The time in seconds for which the system will run after it has cycled on. The default is 3600 seconds (1 hour).
Control zone
For the Control Type option 3-Cycle on control zone select the control zone.
EXTRACT FAN
Include extract fan
An extract fan is included within all AHUs by default. This setting may be used to remove the extract fan from
the AHU.
Note: If the AHU is connected to a zone that incorporates a Variable Air Volume with Reheat and Variable
Speed Fan ADU, the AHU extract fan should be omitted otherwise EnergyPlus will raise an error and the
simulation will be aborted.
MIXED MODE
You can set up Mixed mode controls for the AHU to model optimal interaction between the natural ventilation
system (Scheduled or Calculated) and the AHU.
Refer to the main HVAC tab Mixed Mode section for details on the options available.
AIR HANDLING UNIT OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM (COMMON TO ALL AHUS)

The outdoor air system incorporates an air mixer, an optional pre-cool coil, an optional pre-heat coil, an
optional heat recovery device and an outdoor air controller. The purpose of the outdoor air controller is to
provide outdoor air for ventilation and also provide free cooling (through additional outdoor air and/or
bypassing an air-to-air heat exchanger) whenever possible. The outdoor air controller includes a number of
user-selectable limit controls. If any of the selected limits are exceeded, the outdoor airflow rate is set to the
minimum.
If all the limits are satisfied, the outdoor air controller does the following for continuous air flow systems: if the
outdoor air temperature is greater than or equal to the mixed air temperature setpoint, the outdoor air flow rate
is set to the maximum; if the outdoor air temperature is less than the mixed air temperature setpoint, the
outdoor air controller will modulate the outdoor air flow so that the mixed air temperature will match the mixed
air setpoint temperature.
A time-of-day schedule may also be used to simulate an increase in outdoor air flow rate for push-button
type economiser applications. When the schedule permits (i.e., schedule values are greater than 0), the
outdoor air flow rate is increased to the user-specified maximum outdoor air flow rate.
- 474 -
The outdoor air controller can also account for changes in the outdoor air flow rate during times when indoor
humidity levels are high. A zone humidistat must be used with this control option. During high indoor humidity,
the outdoor air flow rate is modified in response to a high indoor humidity condition. If high humidity control is
based on the outdoor air humidity ratio and the outdoor humidity ratio is greater than the indoor humidity ratio,
high humidity control is terminated. When the economiser is used in conjunction with the high humidity control
option, high humidity control has priority and controls the change in air flow rates. If the AHU Night Cycle
option is switched on, it has priority over high humidity control and will use the controllers maximum outdoor
air flow rate when the Night Cycle mechanism cycles the fan on.
Optional pre-cool coil, pre-heat coil and heat recovery may be specified upstream of the mixer. When this is
the case, any modulation will be determined by the conditions at the inlet node of the mixer rather than the
outdoor air. This means that the controller will account for the heat recovery device or pre-heating/pre-cooling
coils that may modify the condition of outdoor air before it reaches the mixer. If all the limits are satisfied, the
outdoor air controller does the following for cycling fan systems: the outdoor air flow rate is set to the
maximum when the fan cycles on. If the limits are not satisfied, the outdoor air flow rate is at the minimum
when the fan cycles on.
Name
This is a read-only label that is automatically generated by the software and which incorporates the name of
the air loop in which the AHU is located.
RECIRCULATION
If this option is checked, the AHU will re-circulate a proportion of the air delivered by the AHU, otherwise the
system will operate as a full fresh air system.
Outdoor air flow rate

This is the minimum outdoor air flow rate for the system (in m 3/s).
Minimum limit type

Choices for this field are:
1-Proportional minimum which means the minimum outdoor airflow rate varies in proportion to the
total system air flow rate
2-Fixed minimum which means that the minimum outdoor airflow rate is fixed no matter what the
actual system flow rate is.
ECONOMISER
Options for an economiser are:
1-No Economiser - the economiser will not operate and the outdoor airflow rate will be at the minimum
for the entire simulation.
2-Fixed Dry-Bulb - the economiser will set the outdoor airflow rate at minimum if the outdoor air
temperature is higher than a specified dry-bulb temperature limit.
3-Differential Dry-Bulb - will trigger the outdoor airflow to minimum when the dry-bulb temperature of
outdoor air is higher than the dry-bulb temperature of the return air.
4-Fixed Enthalpy - checks the upper limit of the enthalpy given as a field input against the enthalpy
content of outdoor air and will set the outdoor airflow rate to minimum if the latter is greater than the
former.
5-Differential Enthalpy does the same as 4-Fixed Enthalpy but compares the return air enthalpy with
the enthalpy of outdoor air. When the enthalpy of outdoor air is greater than the enthalpy of the return
air, the outdoor air flow rate is set to minimum.
6-Electronic Enthalpy enables the simulation to calculate the humidity ratio limit of outdoor air based
on the dry-bulb temperature of outdoor air and a quadratic/cubic curve, and compare it to the actual
outdoor air humidity ratio. If the actual outdoor humidity ratio is greater than the calculated humidity
ratio limit, then the outdoor airflow rate is set to minimum.
7-Fixed Dew-Point and Dry-Bulb compares both the outdoor dew-point temperature and the outdoor
dry-bulb temperature to their specified high limit values. If either outdoor temperature exceeds the high
limit value, the outdoor airflow rate is set to minimum.
8-Differential Dry-Bulb and Enthalpy enables the control strategy to be based on both the 3Differential Dry Bulb and 5-Differential Enthalpy economiser control strategies.
- 475 -
In addition to all economiser control types listed above, each control type checks for user-entered values for
the upper limit of dry-bulb temperature, enthalpy limit, humidity ratio limit and dew-point limit. The outdoor air
flow rate is set to minimum if any of these entered limits are exceeded.
Note: A setpoint manager must be included on the supply side of the air loop when an economiser is selected.
This will typically be downstream of the AHU.
Maximum outdoor air flow rate

This is the maximum outdoor air flow rate for the system (in m3/s or ft3/min).
Economiser control action type

There are two choices:
1-Modulate flow which means that the outdoor air flow rate will be increased to meet the mixed air
setpoint temperature, subject to the limits imposed via other inputs for this object (e.g., Economizer
Maximum Limit Dry-Bulb Temperature, Maximum Outdoor Air Flow Rate, etc.).
2-Minimum flow with bypass, which is only available if Heat Recovery is selected. This option is used
in conjunction with a heat recovery device for providing free cooling operation in the absence of a
conventional air-side economizer (i.e., when outdoor air flow rate is not increased during economizer
mode). It forces the outdoor air flow rate to always remain at the minimum. However, when high
humidity control is used, the outdoor air flow rate is set to the product of the maximum outdoor air flow
rate multiplied by the high humidity outdoor air flow ratio. The heat exchanger uses the limit checking in
the outdoor air controller to decide whether or not to bypass the outdoor air around the heat exchanger
or turn off the wheel motor in the case of a rotary heat exchanger. Heat exchange is also suspended
when high humidity control is active. When 2-Minimum flow with bypass is used and the Time of day
economizer control schedule value is 0, then the flow is set to the minimum. If the time of day schedule
is not used, then flow is always at minimum. If there is no economizer, the flow is always at minimum. If
there is an economizer, this data either maintains flow at minimum when bypassing or not.
Lockout type
This option is only available for Unitary Heat Cool or Unitary Heat Pump AHUs. Choices for this setting are:
1-No lockout,
2-Lockout with heating, which means that if the packaged unit is in heating mode, the economiser is
locked out i.e. the economizer dampers are closed and there is minimum outdoor air flow.
3-Lockout with compressor. This setting only applies to unitary systems with DX coils and means
that in addition to locking out the economiser when the unit is in heating mode the economiser is locked
out when the DX unit compressor is operating to provide cooling. In other words, the economiser must
meet the entire cooling load it isnt allowed to operate in conjunction with the DX cooling coil. The
3-Lockout with compressor option is sometimes called a non-integrated economiser.
Economiser minimum limit dry-bulb temperature

This is an optional outdoor air temperature low limit (in C or F) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air
temperature is below this limit, the outdoor airflow rate will be set to the minimum. This limit applies to the
conditions at the Actuator Node regardless of whether or not there are any other components in the outdoor
air path upstream of the mixer.
Economiser maximum limit dry-bulb temperature

This is an optional outdoor air temperature high limit (in C or F) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air
temperature is above this limit, the outdoor airflow rate will be set to the minimum. This limit applies to the
conditions at the Actuator Node regardless of whether or not there are any other components in the outdoor
air path upstream of the mixer.
Economiser maximum limit enthalpy

This is an optional outdoor air enthalpy limit (in J/kg or Btu/lb) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air
enthalpy is above this value, the outdoor airflow rate will be set to the minimum. This field is required if the
Economiser type is set to 4-Fixed enthalpy. This limit applies to the conditions at the Actuator Node
regardless of whether or not there are any other components in the outdoor air path upstream of the mixer.
- 476 -
Economiser maximum limit dew-point temperature

This is an optional outdoor air dew-point limit (in C or F) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air dewpoint temperature is above this value, the outdoor airflow rate will be set to the minimum. This limit applies to
the conditions at the Actuator Node regardless of whether or not there are any other components in the
outdoor air path upstream of the mixer.
Electronic enthalpy limit curve

This is an optional Quadratic or Cubic curve which provides the maximum outdoor air humidity ratio (function
of outdoor air dry-bulb temperature) for economiser operation. If the outdoor air humidity ratio is greater than
the curves maximum humidity ratio (evaluated at the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature), the outdoor air flow
rate will be set to the minimum. This limit applies to the conditions at the Actuator node regardless of whether
or not there are any other components in the outdoor air path upstream of the mixer.
Time of day economiser control schedule

This is an optional schedule which controls the outdoor air flow rate based on a time-of-day economiser.
Schedule values equal to 0 disable this feature. A schedule value of greater than 0 causes the outdoor air flow
rate to increase to the maximum. When an economiser is used in conjunction with the high humidity control
option, high humidity control has priority.
High humidity control

This setting establishes whether or not the outdoor air flow rate is modified in response to high indoor relative
humidity. If 2-Yes is selected, the outdoor air flow rate may be modified when the indoor relative humidity is
above the humidistat setpoint. If 1-No is selected, this option is disabled and the following three settings are
not displayed.
Humidistat Control Zone

This is the zone name where the humidistat is located. This setting is only required when the High Humidity
Control is set to 2-Yes.
High humidity outdoor air flow ratio

This is the ratio of the modified outdoor air flow rate to the maximum outdoor air flow rate. When the high
humidity control algorithm determines that the outdoor air flow rate will be changed (i.e. increased or
decreased), the operating outdoor air flow rate is equal to the maximum outdoor air flow rate multiplied by this
ratio. The minimum value for this setting is 0. This setting is only required when the High humidity control is
set to 2-Yes. When an economiser is used in conjunction with the high humidity control option, high humidity
control has priority.
Control high indoor humidity based on outdoor humidity ratio

This setting determines if high humidity control is activated based on high indoor relative humidity alone or is
activated only when the indoor relative humidity is above the humidistat setpoint and the indoor humidity ratio
is greater than the outdoor humidity ratio. Valid choices are 1-Yes and 2-No. If 2-No is selected, high humidity
control is active any time the zone humidistat senses a moisture load. If 1-Yes is selected, the model also
verifies that the outdoor humidity ratio is less than the humidistats zone air humidity ratio. This setting is only
required when the High Humidity Control is set to 2-Yes.
Note: While conditions may be favourable for economizer operation, it does not guarantee that the air-side
economizer has increased outdoor air flow above the minimum level since the actual outdoor air flow rate is
also governed by other controls (e.g., mixed air set point temperature, time of day economizer control,
maximum humidity setpoint, etc).
OUTDOOR AIR SCHEDULES

Apply minimum outdoor air schedule
If the minimum outdoor air flow rate is to be scheduled then check this option to reveal 2 further sub-options
which are controlled using radio buttons:
Apply minimum outdoor air schedule - to apply a schedule whose values are multiplied by the
minimum outdoor air flow rate to calculate the outdoor fresh air rate at any time during the simulation.
In this case you can select the Minimum outdoor air schedule below.
- 477 -
Apply minimum fraction of outdoor air schedule - to apply a schedule whose values are multiplied
by the total (design) air flow rate to calculate the outdoor fresh air rate at any time during the simulation.
In this case you can select the Minimum fraction of outdoor air schedule below.
The screenshot below shows how to change the AHU Outdoor Air Schedule settings to obtain outdoor air
varying between the maximum value defined on the HVAC tab and zero based on occupancy schedule
"Office_OpenOff_Occ", in the same way as it does with Simple HVAC.
When outdoor air delivery to zones is to be controlled accurately as described above it is necessary to make 2
further settings:
1.
2.
When using the VAV with Reheat and VAV with no Reheat terminal units in the way described above
then it is also necessary to select the Control on outdoor air flow option in these 2 dialogs.
It is also necessary to use the 2-Fixed minimum Minimum limit type on the AHU dialog.
It is important to understand that even with the above settings you won't generally obtain exact specified
outdoor air flow rates to individual zones, however the total fresh air supply rate provided through the
AHU should be correctly calculated as the sum of the minimum fresh requirements of all zones served by the
AHU. This is because the total outdoor air requirement for each zone on the air handler is summed and used
to set the minimum total outdoor air flow rate for the air handler. The outdoor air controller sets an outdoor air
flow rate for the air handler at each time step during the simulation. After that, each zone receives a pro-rated
share of the total outdoor air flow proportioned by the current supply flow rate to each zone, but the exact
supply flow rate to each zone will be calculated based on cooling or heating demand not fresh air
requirements and there is no further zone-by-zone allocation of outdoor air quantities - which is what happens
in a real system.
Minimum outdoor air schedule

When the Apply minimum outdoor air schedule radio button is checked you can select this optional
schedule which uses decimal values (0.0 1.0). These values are multiplied by the minimum outdoor air flow
rate. This schedule is useful for reducing the outdoor air flow rate to zero during unoccupied or start up hours.
If this schedule option is not used, the minimum outdoor air flow rate either remains constant during the
simulation period (Minimum limit type = 2-Fixed minimum) or varies in proportion to the supply air flow rate
(Minimum limit type = 1-Proportional minimum).
Minimum fraction of outdoor air schedule

When the Apply minimum fraction of outdoor air schedule radio button is checked you can select this
optional schedule which uses decimal values (0.0 1.0). These values are multiplied by the total (design) air
flow rate. This is an alternate method for specifying the minimum outdoor air amount. The other method is the
Minimum outdoor air schedule described above.
Note: This setting overrides Outdoor air flow rate.
Apply maximum fraction of outdoor air schedule

Check this option to limit the maximum outdoor air flow rate.
Maximum fraction of outdoor air schedule

When the above Apply maximum fraction of outdoor air schedule option is selected you can also select
the corresponding schedule which has fractional values in the range 0.0-1.0. This schedule effectively enables
you to limit the maximum amount of outdoor air into the system.
- 478 -
DEMAND CONTROLLED VENTILATION

Ventilation standards provide guidance on appropriate levels of outdoor ventilation air required for acceptable
indoor air quality. For example the Ventilation Rate Procedure (VRP) of ASHRAE Standard 62.1-2007/2010
requires outdoor ventilation rates to be determined based on the floor area of each occupied zone plus the
number of people in each zone and considers the zone air distribution effectiveness and system ventilation
efficiency. The outdoor air ventilation rate can be reset dynamically as operating conditions change (e.g.
variations in occupancy).
The VRP option can be used for calculating these outdoor air ventilation requirements and resetting them
based on varying occupancy levels and zone diversification. This is particularly useful for large air distribution
systems that serve a number of different zone types with varying occupancy levels.
DCV control can also be used to model the Indoor Air Quality Procedure (IAQP) as defined in Standard 62.1
Demand controlled ventilation

Check this option to include DCV controls for this AHU.
System outdoor air method

Select the method to be used to calculate the system minimum outdoor air flow. 5 choices are available:
1-Zone sum which sums the outdoor air flows across all zones served by the system.
2-Ventilation Rate Procedure (VRP) uses the multi-zone equations defined in 62.1-2007 to calculate
the system outdoor air flow. VRP considers zone air distribution effectiveness and zone diversification
of outdoor air fractions.
3-Indoor Air Quality Procedure (IAQP) is the other procedure defined in ASHRAE Standard 62.12007 for calculating the amount of outdoor air necessary to maintain the levels of indoor air carbon
dioxide at or below a setpoint. Setpoints are defined on the Activity tab (Simple HVAC activity data
option) or on the HVAC zone dialog (Detailed HVAC activity data option). Outdoor air intake and other
system design parameters are based on an analysis of contaminant sources, and contaminant
concentration targets. EnergyPlus uses the IAQP to control carbon dioxide and allows credit to be
taken for controls that can be demonstrated to result in indoor carbon dioxide and generic contaminant
concentrations equal to or lower that those achieved using the VRP. The IAQP may also be used
where the design is intended to attain specific target carbon dioxide and generic contaminant levels.
4-Proportional control described in Appendix A of the ASHRAE 62.1-2010 users manual discusses
another method for implementing CO2-based DCV in a single zone system where the required outdoor
air flow rate varies in proportion to the percentage of the CO2 signal range.
5-Indoor Air Quality Procedure (IAQP) generic contaminant calculates the amount of outdoor air
necessary to maintain the levels of indoor air generic contaminant at or below the setpoint defined on
the Activity tab (Simple HVAC activity data option) or on the HVAC zone dialog (Detailed HVAC activity
data option).
Note: If either of the IAQ methods are selected then the CO2 and contaminant option must be selected for at
least one HVAC zone connected to the AHU.
Warning: When using EnergyPlus v8.1, with the IAQP System outdoor air methods the AHU must be
connected to at least 2 zones. In single zone systems the outdoor air provision is not controlled correctly
according to DCV settings. This problem is fixed in EnergyPlus v8.3.
A summary guide on the steps required to model DCV is provided in the Modelling advice section.
For more details on how DCV is simulated in EnergyPlus see the DCV page in the EnergyPlus Engineering
Reference Guide.
Zone maximum outdoor air fraction

For VAV systems, when a zone requires outdoor air higher than the user specified Zone Maximum Outdoor
Air Fraction, the zone supply air flow will be increased (if damper not fully open yet) to cap the outdoor air
fraction at the maximum value. This allows the system level outdoor air flow to be reduced while the total
supply air flow increases to meet zone outdoor air requirement. Valid values are from 0 to 1.0. Default is 1.0
- 479 -
which indicates zones can have 100% outdoor air maintaining backward compatibility. This inputs work for
single and dual duct VAV systems.
Select the schedule which defines when DCV should operate. If the schedules value is 0.0, then mechanical
ventilation is not available and flow will not be requested. If the schedules value is > 0.0 (usually 1 is used),
mechanical ventilation is available.
Tip: This schedule can be useful for purging the building of contaminants prior to occupancy (i.e., ventilation
rate per unit floor area will be provided even if the occupancy is zero).
Interaction with normal outdoor air control

The minimum quantity of outdoor air delivered via the mixed air box will be the greater of:
The minimum outdoor air flow rate calculated by the normal (non-DCV) outdoor air method based on
the settings on the HVAC and Activity tabs, and,
The outdoor air flow rate calculated by the DCV
The actual outdoor air flow rate may be higher than the minimum if free cooling is available. Regardless, the
outdoor air flow rate will not exceed the Maximum outdoor air flow rate
HEAT RECOVERY (COMMON TO ALL AHUS)

If this option is checked, the AHU will incorporate a sensible and latent air-to-air heat recovery device capable
of both heating and cooling the supply air stream using waste energy from the exhaust side.
Heat exchanger performance can be specified to transfer sensible energy, latent energy or both between the
supply and exhaust air streams. The input requires no geometric data. Performance is defined by specifying
sensible and/or latent effectiveness at 75% and 100% of the nominal (rated) supply air flow rate at two
operating conditions as shown in the following table:
- 480 -
Operating Conditions for Defining Heat Exchanger Performance.

Note: Conditions consistent with the Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institutes (ARI) Standard 1060-2001
Heat exchange between the supply and exhaust air streams occurs whenever the unit is scheduled to be
available (Availability schedule) and supply/exhaust air flow is present. Heat recovery can be used in
conjunction with a conventional air-side economiser (select 1-Modulate flow for the Economiser control
action type), whereby heat exchange is suspended whenever the air-side economiser (or high humidity
control) is active (i.e. air flow is fully by-passed around a fixed-plate heat exchanger or the rotation of a rotary
heat exchanger is stopped). It is also possible to suspend heat exchange for the purpose of providing free
cooling operation in the absence of a conventional air-side economizer (i.e. specify 2-Minimum flow with
bypass for the Economiser control action type). During winter weather, humid exhaust air entering the heat
exchanger can form frost on the cold heat exchanger surfaces, which can reduce air flow and the amount of
energy recovery. Several methods are used to control or eliminate frost formation, and the following types can
be modelled for this heat exchanger object: supply air pre-heat, minimum exhaust air temperature, exhaust air
recirculation and exhaust only. For preheat frost control, the Pre-heat Coil option must be checked under the
Pre-Treatment header. The other frost control types may be selected using the Frost control type drop-list.
Air-to-air heat exchangers are sometimes controlled to maintain a fixed supply air outlet temperature to avoid
overheating. DesignBuilder provides an option to model this control in EnergyPlus by automatically including a
Setpoint manager to establish a temperature set point at the supply air outlet node of the heat exchanger.
Wheel speed modulation or plate supply air bypass is used to control the supply air exiting conditions to this
set point. The set point for supply air temperature control should be set at the minimum economizer
temperature set point if an air-side economizer is also being used by the air system. If frost control and supply
air outlet temperature control are used, frost control takes precedence over supply air temperature control
(e.g. Control defrost time fraction is determined as if wheel speed modulation or plate supply air bypass is not
used).
Heat recovery control tips
The 4 methods listed below are can be used to help control heat recovery systems.
Note: Although an economiser is included in some methods, its main purpose is to provide control of the heat
recovery and not free cooling. If effective free cooling is required then you should consider using the
1-Modulate flow economiser option.
Control method 1: Scheduled heat recovery heating setpoint: When using heat recovery with Supply air
outlet temperature control and without an economiser the heat recovery unit heats the outside air up to the
heat recovery setpoint and no higher while the outside air temperature is below the setpoint. The heat
recovery unit is bypassed when the temperature setpoint is satisfied. When the outside air temperature rises
above the heat recovery setpoint the heat exchanger is not bypassed running at full capacity and heating the
air as much as possible. This can lead to high supply temperatures when it is warm outside. Overall this
control method works well for lower outdoor air temperatures but not so well in summer.
Control method 2: Fixed heating setpoint with economiser: To avoid the overheating caused by Control
method 1 an economiser can be introduced with the following settings:
- Economiser control type = 2-Fixed dry bulb
- Outdoor dry-bulb temperature low limit control = On
- 481 -
- Economiser maximum limit dry-bulb temperature = Fixed heat recovery setpoint temperature, e.g. 12C.
- Economiser control action type = 2-Minimum flow with bypass
- Heat recovery bypass control type = 1-Bypass when within economiser limits
- Heat recovery Supply air outlet temperature control = 2-Yes
This works well reducing overheating relative to method 1, but it only provides a single fixed heat recovery
setpoint temperature for the year which makes it difficult to achieve optimal control.
Control method 3: Heat recovery outdoor air temperature setpoint: Another approach to controlling heat
recovery is to use the heat exchanger only when the outside air temperature is below a setpoint, and for
warmer outside conditions bypass the heat recovery unit. The following settings achieve this:
- Economiser control type = 2-Fixed dry bulb
- Outdoor dry-bulb temperature low limit control = On
- Economiser maximum limit dry-bulb temperature = Fixed heat recovery setpoint temperature, e.g. 12C.
- Economiser maximum limit dry-bulb temperature = 50 (high value to avoid heat recovery operation during
warm conditions)
- Economiser control action type = 2-Minimum flow with bypass
- Heat recovery bypass control type = 1-Bypass when within economiser limits
- Heat recovery Supply air outlet temperature control = 1-No
Control method 4: Use EMS. An EMS program can be written to control the heat recovery unit in a more
optimal way. An example script is shown below which is based on Control method 1 but overrides the HR
setpoint temperature and/or availability schedules to simulate a control system which provides the full benefit
of HR in winter and bypasses the heat exchanger in warmer conditions when HR is not required:
!- EMS Program: HR Optimal Control Strategy 2 - Stepped HR Setpoint + Zone Temp Sensing
EnergyManagementSystem:Sensor,
Toa,
Environment,
Site Outdoor Air Drybulb Temperature;
EnergyManagementSystem:Sensor,
TempBlock1Zone1, ! Name
Block1:Zone1 , ! Zone name
Zone Mean Air Temperature ; ! Output:Variable or Output:Meter Name
EnergyManagementSystem:Actuator,
OverrideHRAvailability, !- Name
HR Availability Schedule, !- Actuated Component Unique Name
Schedule:Compact, !- Actuated Component Type
Schedule Value; !- Actuated Component Control Type
EnergyManagementSystem:Actuator,
OverrideHRSetpointTemp, !- Name
HR Setpoint Schedule, !- Actuated Component Unique Name
Schedule:Compact, !- Actuated Component Type
Schedule Value; !- Actuated Component Control Type
EnergyManagementSystem:ProgramCallingManager,
Optimise HR , !- Name
BeginTimestepBeforePredictor, !- EnergyPlus Model Calling Point
CalcHRSetpoint; !- Program Name
EnergyManagementSystem:Program,
CalcHRSetpoint,
! Stepped control of HR setpoint temp depending on outside air temp
IF Toa < 8,
Set OverrideHRSetpointTemp = 20.0,
ELSEIF Toa < 12,
ELSE,
ENDIF,
IF Toa > OverrideHRSetpointTemp,
Set OverrideHRAvailability = 0, ! Avoid E+ HR control quirk
ELSEIF TempBlock1Zone1 > 23,
Set OverrideHRAvailability = 0, ! avoid HR when room temp > 23
ELSE,
Set OverrideHRAvailability = 1, ! Otherwise HR is available
ENDIF;
Other possibilities include checking for zone heating and/or cooling loads to help ensure optimal HR setpoints.
- 482 -
Nominal supply air flow rate

The nominal primary side (supply) air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). The actual supply and exhaust air flow
rates must be between 50% and 130% of this value or a warning will be issued.
Nominal electric power

This is the electric consumption rate of the device (W). Electric power is considered constant whenever the
unit operates. This numeric input can be used to model electric power consumption by controls (transformers,
relays, etc.) and/or a motor for a rotary heat exchanger. None of this electric power contributes thermal load to
the supply or exhaust air streams. The default value for this field is 0.
Heat recovery bypass control type

This selection determines whether specialized control is to be used to optimise the use of heat recovery.
Options are:
1-Bypass when within economizer limits - The default option where heat recovery is disabled any
time the controller determines that the economizer is active (i.e. all economiser controls are within
limits). Note that in cases where the economiser is selected but no economiser limits are defined then
the heat recovery will always be bypassed.
2-Bypass when OA flow greater than minimum - EnergyPlus checks whether the economizer is
active and also whether the outdoor air flow rate is greater than the minimum, if so heat recovery is
disabled. This means that heat recovery is active any time the outdoor air flow rate is equal to the
minimum even when the economizer requests free cooling. For this case, the use of Supply air outlet
temperature control for the heat exchanger is recommended (see below).
Supply air outlet temperature control

This data determines if the heat exchangers supply air outlet is controlled to a temperature set point. The
choices for this input field are 1-Yes or 2-No, with the default being 2-No. When supply air outlet temperature
control is used, the wheel rotational speed modulates or supply air is bypassed around the plate heat
exchanger to maintain the desired setpoint temperature.
When 1-Yes is selected you can enter the setpoint temperature to be used in the next text box below. In this
case DesignBuilder automatically adds a scheduled Setpoint manager at the heat recovery supply air outlet
node using the entered set point temperature. When an air-side economizer is also being modelled for this air
system, the set point for the supply air outlet temperature control is forced to be equal to the Economizer
minimum limit dry-bulb temperature.
Supply air setpoint temperature

When 1-Yes is selected for Supply air outlet temperature control you can enter the setpoint temperature to be
used for controlling the heat recovery unit as described above.
Heat exchanger type

This setting is used to define the type of heat exchanger being modelled. The options are:
1-Plate (e.g., fixed plate) or

2-Rotary (e.g., rotating cylinder or wheel).
Plate heat exchangers can be either sensible only when plates are made of a non-porous material such as
aluminium, or they can also exchange latent heat when the plates are made of a porous material.
The heat exchanger type affects the modelling of frost control options and supply air outlet temperature
control. For rotary heat exchangers, rotational speed is varied to control frost formation or the supply air outlet
temperature. For plate exchangers, air bypass around the heat exchanger is used to obtain the desired effect.
Economiser lockout
This input denotes whether the heat exchanger unit is locked out (bypassed for plate type heat exchangers or
the rotation is suspended for rotary type heat exchangers) when the air-side economiser is operating. Both the
economiser and High Humidity Control activate the heat exchanger lockout as specified by this input. The
input choices are 1-Yes (meaning locked out) or 2-No.
- 483 -
Sensible effectiveness at 100% heating air flow

The sensible heat exchange effectiveness at the heating condition defined in the Table above with both the
supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to 100% of the nominal supply air flow rate specified in the
previous input field. The default value for this field is 0.
Latent effectiveness at 100% heating air flow

The latent heat exchange effectiveness at the heating condition defined in the Operating Conditions for
Defining Heat Exchanger Performance table with both the supply and exhaust air volume flow rates equal to
100% of the nominal supply air flow rate. Specify this value as 0.0 if the heat exchanger does not transfer
latent energy. The default value for this field is 0.
Sensible effectiveness at 75% heating air flow

The sensible heat exchange effectiveness at the heating condition defined in the Operating Conditions for
75% of the nominal supply air flow rate. The default value for this field is 0.
Latent effectiveness at 75% heating air flow

The latent heat exchange effectiveness at the heating condition defined in the Operating Conditions for
75% of the nominal supply air flow rate. Specify this value as 0.0 if the heat exchanger does not transfer latent
energy. The default value for this field is 0.
Sensible effectiveness at 100% cooling air flow

The sensible heat exchange effectiveness at the cooling condition defined in the Operating Conditions for
100% of the nominal supply air flow rate. The default value for this setting is 0.
Latent effectiveness at 100% cooling air flow

The latent heat exchange effectiveness at the cooling condition defined in the Operating Conditions for
100% of the nominal supply air flow rate. Specify this value as 0.0 if the heat exchanger does not transfer
latent energy. The default value for this setting is 0.
Sensible effectiveness at 75% cooling air flow

The sensible heat exchange effectiveness at the cooling condition defined in the Operating Conditions for
75% of the nominal supply air flow rate. The default value for this setting is 0.
Latent effectiveness at 75% cooling air flow

The latent heat exchange effectiveness at the cooling condition defined in the Operating Conditions for
75% of the nominal supply air flow rate. Specify this value as 0.0 if the heat exchanger does not transfer latent
energy. The default value for this field is 0.
Frost control type

There are four options for frost control:
1-None,
2-Exhaust air recirculation, dampers are used to direct exhaust air back into the zone through the
supply side of the heat exchanger when the supply (outdoor) air inlet temperature falls below a
threshold temperature (defined in the next input field). The fraction of time that exhaust air is circulated
through the supply side of the heat exchanger is dependent on the supply (outdoor) air inlet
temperature with respect to the threshold temperature, the initial defrost time fraction, and the rate of
change of defrost time fraction (see Rate of defrost time fraction increase). When exhaust air is being
re-circulated, no supply (outdoor ventilation) air is being provided through the heat exchanger unit
(which may or may not be acceptable regarding ventilation for occupants).
3-Exhaust only (supply air bypass): this control cycles off the supply air flow through the heat
exchanger for a certain period of time while the exhaust air continues to flow through the exhaust side
of the heat exchanger. The fraction of time that the supply flow through the heat exchanger is cycled off
is dependent on the supply (outdoor) air inlet temperature with respect to the threshold temperature,
- 484 -
the initial defrost time fraction, and the rate of change of defrost time fraction (see Rate of defrost time
fraction increase). When implemented in real applications, provisions are usually made to avoid
building depressurization when this frost control is operating (automatic or pressure-operated dampers,
or a bypass air damper around the supply side of the heat exchanger). For this frost control type, it is
assumed that the supply air is bypassed around the heat exchanger during frost control operation, i.e.
the total supply flow is not reduced during defrost, but merely bypassed around the heat exchanger.
4-Minimum exhaust temperature where the temperature of the exhaust air leaving the heat
exchanger is monitored and the heat exchanger effectiveness is decreased (by slowing heat exchanger
rotation or bypassing supply air around the plate exchanger) to keep the exhaust air from falling below
the threshold temperature.
If a pre-heat frost control coil is specified, this setting is automatically set to 1-None and disabled.
Threshold temperature
This numeric field defines the dry-bulb temperature of air which is used to initiate frost control (in C or F).
The default value is 1.7C. If 2-Exhaust air recirculation or 3-Exhaust only options are selected the Frost
control type, the threshold temperature defines the supply (outdoor) air inlet temperature below which frost
control is active. For 4-Minimum exhaust temperature frost control, heat exchanger effectiveness is
controlled to keep the exhaust air outlet temperature from falling below this threshold temperature value.
The appropriate threshold temperature varies with exhaust (inlet) air temperature and humidity, frost control
type, heat exchanger type, and whether the heat exchanger transfers sensible energy alone or both sensible
and latent energy (enthalpy). Typical threshold temperatures are provided in the table below. However, it is
recommended that the user consult manufacturers information for the specific air-to-air heat exchanger being
modelled.
Typical Threshold Temperatures

Source: Indoor Humidity Assessment Tool, U.S. Environmental Protection Agency,
** To model preheat frost control, specify frost control type as 1-None and select a pre-heat coil for the AHU
controlled to the keep the air temperature above the frost threshold temperature.
Initial defrost time fraction

This is the fraction of the simulation timestep when frost control will be invoked when the threshold
temperature is reached. This setting is only used for the 2-Exhaust air recirculation and 3-Exhaust only
frost control types. The value for this setting must be 0 and 1. The default time fraction is 0.083 (e.g., 5
min / 60 min) which is typical for Exhaust air recirculation frost control. Higher initial defrost time fractions
(e.g., 0.167 = 10 min / 60 min) are typically required for Exhaust only frost control. For best results, you should
obtain this information from the manufacturer.
- 485 -
Rate of defrost time fraction increase

This is the rate of increase in the defrost time fraction as the supply (outdoor) air inlet temperature falls below
the threshold temperature. This field is only used for the 2-Exhaust air recirculation and 3-Exhaust only
frost control types. The value for this setting must be 0. The default value is 0.012 (e.g., 0.72 min / 60 min
per degree C temperature difference) which is typical for Exhaust air recirculation frost control. Higher values
(e.g. 0.024 = 1.44 min / 60 min per C temperature difference) are typically required for Exhaust only frost
control. For best results, you should obtain this information from the manufacturer.
The total defrost time fraction is determined as follows:
Total defrost time fraction = Initial Defrost Time Fraction + Rate of Defrost Time Fraction Increase * (T threshold
Tsupply air inlet)
The model does not allow the total defrost time fraction to exceed 1.0 or be less than 0.
This is the schedule that determines whether or not the heat recovery device is available for each timestep of
the simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the device can be on. A
value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the device must be off.
PRE-TREATMENT
Pre-heat coil
This setting allows you to add any type of heating coil to precondition the outside air before it enters the air
handling unit.
Pre-heat coil setpoint temperature

The schedule value for each time period is the setpoint for the off-coil temperature (in C only).
Pre-cool coil
This setting allows you to add a water cooling coil to precondition the outside air before it enters the air
handling unit.
Pre-cool coil setpoint temperature

The schedule value for each time period is the setpoint for the off-coil temperature (in C only).
Evaporative cooler
This setting allows you to add any type of evaporative cooler coil to precondition the outside air before it
enters the air handling unit.
Unitary Heat Cool AHU

The unitary heat cool AHU incorporates an EnergyPlus unitary heat cool component, an outdoor air system
(see Air Handling Unit Outdoor Air System), optional night cycle operation, an optional heat recovery system
(see Heat Recovery), optional pre-heat and pre-cool coils and an optional extract fan. The unitary heat cool
component itself comprises a supply fan, a DX cooling coil component and an electric heating coil component.
If dehumidification control is selected, an electric reheat coil is automatically included.
- 486 -
GENERAL
Name
OPERATION
When this unit is unavailable (schedule values of 0) then all equipment contained within this AHU will also be
switched off.
SUPPLY AIR TEMPERATURE

Maximum supply air temperature
This is the design operating air outlet temperature (in C or F) when the unitary system is heating.
SUPPLY AIR FLOW RATES

Design air flow rate
Cooling operation air flow rate

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX cooling
coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is auto-sizable.
Heating operation air flow rate

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX heating
coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is auto-sizable.
- 487 -
Supply air flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither cooling
nor heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the supply air fan operates). This
setting is only used when the heat pump operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation (see Supply
Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule). Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is auto-sizable.
If the heat pump operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero or this
field is left blank, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is
equal to the supply air flow rate when the compressor was last operating (for cooling operation or heating
operation).
SUPPLY FAN
Fan type
Two fan types are available for selection in this AHU:
1-Constant volume where the fan delivers a constant flow rate through the unit regardless of whether
the unit is heating, cooling and/or providing fresh air. Constant volume fans don't use the Supply air fan
operating mode schedule (below). When this option is selected an extract fan can optionally also be
included in the AHU.
3-On/Off where the Supply air fan operating mode schedule (below) determines the flow regime. In this
case an extract fan cannot be selected.
Supply fan placement

There are two options:
1-Blow through where the supply air fan is before the DX cooling/heating coil.
2-Draw through where the supply air fan is after the DX cooling/heating coil.
Supply air fan operating mode schedule

The supply air fan operating mode schedule can only be selected for On/Off fan types. The supply air fan
operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season. Schedule
values of 0 indicate that the unitary system supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off
together to meet the heating or cooling load (sometimes referred to as an "AUTO" fan). Schedule values other
than 0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
The default schedule is "Fan operation mode - Continuous" with a constant value of 1, i.e. that the supply fan
runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load at all times. To obtain the AUTO fan
configuration, select the "Fan operation mode - Cycling" schedule which has a constant value of 0.
EXTRACT FAN
Include extract fan
the AHU.
Note: This option is only available for Constant volume fan types. On/Off fans do not allow an extract fan to
be included in the AHU and when this fan type is selected the Include extract fan check box will be disabled.
THERMOSTAT LOCATION
Controlling zone or thermostat location
While the unitary heat cool AHU may be configured to serve multiple zones, system operation is controlled by
a thermostat located in a single control zone. Click on the <Select zone> label and then click on the
displayed ellipsis button to bring up the zone selector dialog. Select the zone supplied by the AHU where the
thermostat controlling the unitary heat cool AHU is located.
- 488 -
DEHUMIDIFICATION
There are two options for dehumidification control:
1-None - meet sensible load only, no active de-humidification control;
2-Cool Reheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high humidity
setpoint.
Note: If 2-Cool Reheat is used, a humidistat must be defined in one of the zones supplied by the AHU.
More information on controlling humidity is available in the Humidity control section.
NIGHT CYCLE
See Night cycle description for Generic AHU
MIXED MODE
Refer to the main HVAC tab Mixed Mode section for details on the available options.
OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM

See Outdoor air system description for Generic AHU
Unitary Heat Pump AHU

The unitary air-to-air heat pump AHU incorporates an EnergyPlus unitary air-to-air heat pump component, an
outdoor air system (see Air Handling Unit Outdoor Air System), optional night cycle operation, an optional heat
recovery system (see Heat Recovery), optional pre-heat and pre-cool coils and an optional extract fan. The
unitary air-to-air heat pump component itself comprises a supply fan, a DX cooling coil component, a DX
heating coil component, and an electric supplementary heating coil component.
Tip: The Unitary Heat Cool AHU can be used to model ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G System 4 PSZ-HP.
- 489 -
A detailed description of how the Unitary heat pump works is provided in the EnergyPlus Engineering
Reference.
GENERAL
Name
OPERATION
When this unit is unavailable (schedule values of 0) then all equipment contained within this AHU will also be
switched off.

Cooling operation air flow rate

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX cooling
coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is auto-sizable.
Heating operation air flow rate

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX heating
coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is auto-sizable.

This setting defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither cooling
nor heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the supply air fan operates). This
setting is only used when the heat pump operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation (see Supply
Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule). Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is auto-sizable.
If the heat pump operating mode is specified as continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero or this
equal to the supply air flow rate when the compressor was last operating (for cooling operation or heating
operation).
SUPPLY FAN
Fan type
Two fan types are available for selection in this AHU:
operating mode schedule (below). When this option is selected an extract fan can optionally also be
included in the AHU.
3-On/Off where the Supply air fan operating mode schedule (below) determines the flow regime. In this
case an extract fan cannot be selected.
Supply fan placement

There are two options:
- 490 -
1-Blow through where the supply air fan is before the DX cooling/heating coil and the supplementary
heating coil.
2-Draw through where the supply air fan is between the DX cooling/heating coil and the
supplementary heating coil.

The supply air fan operating mode schedule can only be selected for On/Off fan types. The supply air fan
operating mode may vary during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season. Schedule
values of 0 indicate that the unitary system supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off
together to meet the heating or cooling load (sometimes referred to as an "AUTO" fan). Schedule values other
than 0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
EXTRACT FAN
Include extract fan
the AHU.
Note: This option is only available for Constant volume fan types. On/Off fans do not allow an extract fan to
be included in the AHU and when this fan type is selected the Include extract fan check box will be disabled.
THERMOSTAT LOCATION
Controlling zone or thermostat location
While the heat pump may be configured to serve multiple zones, system operation is controlled by a
thermostat located in a single control zone. Click on the <Select zone> label and then click on the displayed
ellipsis button to bring up the zone selector dialog. Select the zone supplied by the AHU where the thermostat
controlling the heat pump is located.
DEHUMIDIFICATION
There are two options for dehumidification control:
1-None - meet sensible load only, no active de-humidification control;
2-Cool Reheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb temperature set point as required to meet the high humidity
setpoint.
Note: If 2-Cool Reheat is used, a humidistat must be defined in one of the zones supplied by the AHU.
Tip: To provide humidification, a humidifier should be added to the AHU and a setpoint manager added
downstream of the AHU with one of the "minimum humidity" control options.
SUPPLEMENTAL HEATER
If the heat pumps DX heating coil output at full load is insufficient to meet the entire heating load, the part
load ratio is set equal to 1.0 (compressor and fan are not cycling) and the remaining heating load is passed to
the supplemental heating coil. If the outdoor air temperature is below the minimum outdoor air temperature for
compressor operation, the compressor is turned off and the entire heating load is passed to the supplemental
gas or electric heating coil.
- 491 -
Maximum supply air temperature from supplemental heater

This setting defines the maximum allowed supply air temperature exiting the heat pump supplemental heating
coil.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for supplemental heater

operation
This setting defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature above which the heat pump supplemental heating
coil is disabled. The temperature for this input field must be less than or equal to 21C.
NIGHT CYCLE
See Night cycle description for Generic AHU
MIXED MODE
Refer to the main HVAC tab Mixed Mode section for details on the available options.
OUTDOOR AIR SYSTEM

See Outdoor air system description for Generic AHU
Heating Coils
These heating coil types are available within Detailed HVAC:
Heating Coil - Water

Heating Coil - Electric
Heating Coil - Gas
Heating Coil - DX
"Heating Coil - VRF - DX" on page 502
Heating Coil - Water
Coil:Heating:Water
Used in:
Air Handling Units

Demand loops of Dual duct systems
Air Distribution Units
The simple water heating coil model provides sensible heating of the air. The calculations use the
Effectiveness-NTU algorithm and assume a cross-flow heat exchanger.
GENERAL
Name
An auto-generated name for the heating coil.
Type
The type of a hot water coil must be:
- 492 -
1-Water
In all cases it will also be possible to select 2-Electric in which case the Electric heating coil is used or 3-Gas
where the Gas heating coil is used instead.
Performance input method

The user can choose one of:
1-Nominal capacity, or,

2-UA and Design water flow rate.
If the 2-UA and Design water flow rate option is selected, you must input values for UA of the Coil and Max
water flow rate of the Coil. If 1-Nominal capacity is chosen you must input a Rated capacity and UA of the
Coil.
Rated capacity is defined as the heating capacity in watts of the coil at the rating points (i.e. the rated inlet and
outlet water/air temperatures defined below). The rated capacity is used to calculate a water mass flow rate
and a UA for the coil. The default is 1-Nominal capacity.
To autosize the capacity, choose 2-UA and Design water flow rate and use autosize as the inputs for UA,
Maximum water flow rate, and Rated capacity. EnergyPlus will use the Sizing inputs to size the coil. The
rated temperatures (see below) are not used in autosizing. These are used only when the user is specifying
coil performance using the 1-Nominal capacity input method.
Maximum water flow rate

The maximum possible water flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the coil. This field is used when
Performance input method = 2-UA and Design water flow rate. This field is autosizable.
UA (U-Factor x Area)
Enter the UA value for the coil needed for the Effectiveness-NTU heat exchanger model. An estimate of the
UA can be obtained from:
where:
q is the heat transferred from water to the air in W;
Twater, avg is the average water temperature in C; and
Tair, avg is the average air temperature in C. Or the LMTD temperature difference can be used. This field is
only used when Performance input method = 2-UA and Design water flow rate
This field is autosizable.
Rated capacity
The heating capacity of the coil (in W or Btu/h) at the rated inlet and outlet air and water temperatures. This
field is used when the Performance input method = 1-Nominal capacity. This field is autosizable. The rating
points are given in the four subsequent input fields.
WATER TEMPERATURES
Rated inlet water temperature
The inlet water temperature (C or F) corresponding to the rated heating capacity. The default is 82.2C
(180F).
Rated outlet water temperature

The outlet water temperature (C or F) corresponding to the rated heating capacity. The default is 71.1C
(160F)
- 493 -
AIR TEMPERATURES
Rated inlet air temperature
The inlet air temperature (C or F) corresponding to the rated heating capacity. The default is 16.6C (60F)..
Rated outlet air temperature

The outlet air temperature (C or F) corresponding to the nominal heating capacity. The default is 32.2C
(90F).
OPERATION
Schedule that defines when the coil is available, i.e. whether the coil can run during a given time period. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during a given time period.
A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is off.
CONTROLLER
Control variable
The Control variable defines how the coil is controlled. Temperature control is currently the only option.
1-Temperature control is used for air temperature control and is normally specified for the coils outlet
air node.
Action
The Action determines how the controlled variable (e.g. mass flow rate through a water coil) is changed based
on the control signal. In a heating coil where water mass flow rate is to be controlled, the mass flow rate
through the coil is increased when more heating is required, which increases the value of heat transfer from
the water to the air stream. So this is considered a "normal" action controller and so the value of this field is
fixed as 1-Normal.
Actuator variable
This was again meant to be more generic but currently has only been used to control the water mass flow rate
of a heating or cooling coil. This actuator variable is fixed as 1-Flow to control the water mass flow rate.
Controller convergence tolerance

The coil is controlled by knowing the outlet temperature and/or humidity ratio specified by the setpoint
managers, and setting the outlet conditions from the coil to meet these setpoints. The hot water coils use
complex models that cannot be inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate the
models are inverted numerically using an iterative procedure. The iterative solution uses an interval-halving
routine and needs a termination criteria that is set here.
The convergence tolerance is the maximum difference between the actual temperature at the setpoint node
and the setpoint temperature. This control offset is typically set to a small temperature difference, such as
0.01C. The default is Autosize.
Maximum actuated flow

This is the maximum water flow (m3/sec or gal/min) through the coil. Set to the maximum design water flow
for the coil.
Minimum actuated flow

Set to the minimum design water flow (m3/sec or gal/min) for the water coil, normally a shut off valve that is
set to zero.
Rated ratio for air and water convection

This is the ratio of convective heat transfers between air side and water side of the heating coil at the rated
operating conditions. The default is 0.5. This ratio describes the geometry and the design of the coil and is
defined by:
- 494 -
where
is the fin efficiency
h is the surface convection heat transfer coefficient
A is the surface area
HEATING COIL - WATER OUTPUTS

HVAC,Sum, Total Water Heating Coil Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Total Water Heating Coil Rate[W]
HVAC,Average,Water Heating Coil U-factor Times Area [W]
Total Water Heating Coil Energy (J)

Total Water Heating Coil Energy is the total amount of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating
conditions.
Total Water Heating Coil Rate (W)

Total Water Heating Coil Rate is the Rate of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions.
The units are (J/sec) or Watts.
Water Heating Coil U-factor Times Area (W/K)

This characterizes the overall heat transfer UA value, or U-factor times Area. The simple heating coil model
adjusts UA value based on inlet temperatures and flow rates and this
Heating Coil - Electric
Coil:Heating:Electric
Used in:
Air Handling Units

PTAC
PTHP
Unitary Heat Cool
Unitary Heat Pump
The electric heating coil is a simple capacity model with a user-defined efficiency. In most cases, the efficiency
for the electric coil will be 100%. Depending on where it is used this coil may be either temperature or capacity
controlled. If used in the air loop simulation it will be controlled to a specified temperature scheduled from the
Setpoint Manager. If it is used in zone equipment, it will be controlled from the zone thermostat by meeting the
zone demand.
GENERAL
Name
A unique auto-generated name for the coil.
Type
The type is fixed as:
2-Electric.
In Generic AHUs and ADUs it will also be possible to select 1-Hot water or 3-Gas as the heating coil type, in
which case a Water heating coil or Gas heating coil is used instead.
- 495 -
Efficiency
This is user-inputted efficiency (fraction, not percent) and can account for any loss. In most cases for the
electric coil, this will be 100% (enter a value of 1).
Nominal capacity
This is the maximum capacity of the coil (in W). This controlled coil will only provide the needed capacity to
meet the control criteria whether it is temperature or capacity controlled. This field is autosizable.
OPERATION
Available schedule
The schedule that denotes whether the heating coil can run during a given time period. A schedule value
greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the coil can be on during a given time period. A value less
than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the coil must be off.
HEATING COIL - ELECTRIC OUTPUTS

HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Heating Coil Electric Consumption [J]
HVAC,Average,Heating Coil Electric Power [W]
Heating Coil Energy (J)

Heating Coil Energy is the total amount of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions.
Heating Coil Rate[W]

Heating Coil Rate is the Rate of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions. The units are
(J/sec) or Watts.
Heating Coil Electric Consumption [J]

Heating Coil electric consumption after the efficiency of the coil has been taken into account in Joules for the
timestep reported.
Heating Coil Electric Power [W]

This field is the average Heating Coil electric power after the efficiency of the coil has been taken into account
in Watts for the timestep reported.
Heating Coil - Gas
Coil:Heating:Gas
Used in:
Air Handling Units

The gas heating coil is a simple capacity model with a user inputted gas burner efficiency. The default for the
gas burner efficiency is 80%. The coil can be used in the air loop simulation or in the zone equipment as a
reheat coil. Depending on where it is used determines if this coil is temperature or capacity controlled. If used
in the air loop simulation it will be controlled to a specified temperature scheduled from the Setpoint manager.
If it is used in zone equipment, it will be controlled from the zone thermostat by meeting the zone demand.
Name
A unique identifying name for each coil.
- 496 -
Type
The type of a gas coil must be:
3-Gas
In all cases it will also be possible to select 2-Electric in which case the Electric heating coil is used or 1Water where the Water heating coil is used instead.
Efficiency
This is user inputted gas burner efficiency (decimal, not percent) and is defaulted to 0.8 (80%).
Parasitic electric load

This is the parasitic electric load associated with the gas coil operation, such as an inducer fan, etc.. This will
be modified by the PLR (or coil runtime fraction if a part-load fraction correlation is provided in the next input
field) to reflect the time of operation in a simulation timestep.
Parasitic gas load

This numeric field is the parasitic gas load associated with the gas coils operation (in W), such as a standing
pilot light. The model assumes that this parasitic load is consumed only for the portion of the simulation
timestep where the gas heating coil is not operating.
Nominal capacity
This is the maximum capacity of the coil (in W). This controlled coil will only provide the needed capacity to
meet
PART LOAD PERFORMANCE

Part load fraction correlation
Check this option if a part load fraction correlation is to be applied.
Part load fraction correlation curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve selected here parameterises the variation of gas consumption rate
by the heating coil as a function of the part load ratio (PLR, sensible heating load/nominal capacity of the
heating coil). For any simulation timestep, the nominal gas consumption rate (heating load/burner efficiency) is
divided by the part-load fraction (PLF) if a part-load curve has been defined. The part-load curve accounts for
efficiency losses due to transient coil operation.
The part-load fraction correlation should be normalized to a value of 1.0 when the part load ratio equals 1.0
(i.e., no efficiency losses when the heating coil runs continuously for the simulation timestep). For PLR values
between 0 and 1 ( 0 <= PLR < 1), the following rules apply:
PLF >= 0.7 and PLF >= PLR If PLF < 0.7 a warning message is issued, the program resets the PLF value to
0.7, and the simulation proceeds. The runtime fraction of the heating coil is defined a PLR/PLF. If PLF < PLR,
then a warning message is issues and the runtime fraction of the coil is limited to 1.0.
A typical part load fraction correlation for a conventional gas heating coil (e.g., residential
furnace) would be:
PLF = 0.8 + 0.2(PLR)
OPERATION
Available schedule
Schedule that defines when the coil is available.
- 497 -
Heating Coil - DX
Used in:
Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed
PTAC,
PTHP,
Unitary Heat Cool,
Unitary Heat Pump
The single speed heating DX coil model uses performance information at rated conditions along with curve fits
for variations in total capacity, energy input ratio and part load fraction to determine performance at part-load
conditions. The impacts of various defrost strategies (reverse cycle, resistive, timed or on-demand) are
modelled based on a combination of user inputs and empirical models taken from the air-to-air heat pump
algorithms in DOE-2.1E.
GENERAL
Name
This alpha field defines a unique user-assigned name for an instance of a DX heating coil. Any reference to
this DX heating coil by another object will use this name.
Rated total heating capacity

This numeric field defines the total, full load heating capacity (in W or Btu/h) of the DX coil unit at rated
conditions (outdoor air dry-bulb temperature of 8.33C, outdoor air wet-bulb temperature of 6.11C, heating
coil entering air dry-bulb temperature of 21.11C, heating coil entering air wet-bulb temperature of 15.55C,
and a heating coil air flow rate defined by field rated air flow volume below). The value entered here must be
greater than 0. Capacity should not include supply air fan heat. Rated total heating capacity should be within
20% of the Rated total cooling capacity, otherwise a warning message is issued.
Rated air flow rate

This numeric field defines the volume air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min), across the DX heating coil at rated
conditions. The value entered here must be greater than 0. The rated air volume flow rate should be between
0.00004027 m3/s and 0.00006041 m3/s per watt of rated total heating capacity. The Rated total heating
capacity and Rated COP should be performance information for the unit with outdoor air dry-bulb
temperature of 8.33C, outdoor air wet-bulb temperature of 6.11C, heating coil entering air dry-bulb
temperature of 21.11C, heating coil entering air wet-bulb temperature of 15.55C, and the rated air volume
flow rate defined here.
Rated COP
This numeric field defines the coefficient of performance (COP=heating power output in watts divided by
electrical power input in watts) of the DX heating coil unit at rated conditions (outdoor air dry-bulb temperature
of 8.33C, outdoor air wet-bulb temperature of 6.11C, coil entering air dry-bulb temperature of 21.11C, coil
entering air wet-bulb temperature of 15.55C, and a heating coil air flow rate defined by field rated air flow
volume rate below). The value entered here must be greater than 0. The input power includes power for the
compressor(s) and outdoor fan(s) but does not include the power consumption of the indoor supply air fan.
The heating power output is the value entered above in the field Rated total heating capacity.
COMPRESSOR
Minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for compressor operation
This numeric field defines the minimum outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) where the heating coil
compressor turns off. The temperature for this input field must be greater than or equal to 20C. The default
value is -8C.
- 498 -
DEFROST
Defrost strategy
Choose from two options:
1-Reverse-cycle or
2-Resistive.
If the reverse-cycle strategy is selected, the heating cycle is reversed periodically to provide heat to melt frost
accumulated on the outdoor coil. If a resistive defrost strategy is selected, the frost is melted using an electric
resistance heater. The default defrost strategy is reverse-cycle.
Defrost control
Choose from two options:
1-Timed or
2-On-demand.
If timed control is selected, the defrost time period is calculated based on a fixed value or compressor runtime
whether or not frost has actually accumulated. For timed defrost control, the fractional amount of time the unit
is in defrost is entered in the input field Defrost time period fraction described below. If on-demand defrost
control is selected, the defrost time period is calculated based on outdoor weather (humidity ratio) conditions.
Regardless of which defrost control is selected, defrost does not occur above the user specified outdoor
temperature entered in the input field Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for defrost operation described
above.
Defrost time period fraction

This numeric field defines the fraction of compressor runtime when the defrost cycle is active, and only applies
to timed defrost (see Defrost Control input field above). For example, if the defrost cycle is active for 3.5
minutes for every 60 minutes of compressor runtime, then the user should enter 3.5/60 = 0.058333. The value
for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0. The default value is 0.058333.
Resistive defrost heater capacity

This numeric field defines the capacity of the resistive defrost heating element (in W). This input field is used
only when the selected defrost strategy is resistive (see input field Defrost strategy above). The value for
this input field must be greater than or equal to 0.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for defrost operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) above which outdoor coil
defrosting is disabled. The temperature for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0 C and less than
or equal to 7.22C. The default value is 5C.
PERFORMANCE CURVES
The DX Cooling coil requires up to 6 curves be selected from the Curves database to define coil performance
depending on the defrost strategy selected.
Total heating capacity function of temperature curve

The Bi-quadratic, Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the total heating
capacity as a function of the both the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb temperature or just the outdoor air drybulb temperature depending on the type of curve selected. The bi-quadratic curve is recommended if sufficient
manufacturer data is available as it provides sensitivity to the indoor air dry-bulb temperature and a more
realistic output. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated total heating capacity to give the total
heating capacity at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at an indoor air dry-bulb temperature or
outdoor air dry-bulb temperature different from the rating point temperature). The curve is normalised to have
the value of 1.0 at the rating point.
Total heating capacity function of flow fraction curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of total heating capacity as a
function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the heating coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full
- 499 -
load flow). The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated total heating capacity and the total heating
capacity modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the total heating capacity at the specific temperature
and air flow conditions at which the coil is operating. The curve is normalised to have the value of 1.0 when
the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate.
Energy input ratio function of temperature curve

The Bi-quadratic, Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input
ratio (EIR) as a function of the both the indoor and outdoor air dry-bulb temperature or just the outdoor air drybulb temperature depending on the type of curve selected. The bi-quadratic curve is recommended if sufficient
manufacturer data is available as it provides sensitivity to the indoor air dry-bulb temperature and a more
realistic output. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR
(inverse of rated COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at an indoor air drybulb temperature or outdoor air dry-bulb temperature different from the rating point temperature). The curve is
normalised to have the value of 1.0 at the rating point.
Energy input ratio function of flow fraction curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as
a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the heating coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full
load flow). The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR and the
EIR modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the EIR at the specific temperature and air flow conditions
at which the coil is operating. This curve is normalised to a value of 1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals
the rated air flow rate.

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of electrical power input to the DX
unit as a function of the part load ratio (PLR, sensible heating load/steady-state sensible heating capacity).
The product of the rated EIR and EIR modifier curves is divided by the output of this curve to give the
effective EIR for a given simulation timestep. The part load fraction (PLF) correlation accounts for efficiency
losses due to compressor cycling.
The 2 important rules to be followed when setting up this curve are:
1.
The part load fraction correlation curve coefficients need to be defined so that the output of the curve
equals 1.0 when the PLR is 1.0, e.g.
PLF=0.85+0.15(PLR)
So the associated quadratic would have Coefficient 1 = 0.85 and Coefficient 2 = 0.15 with a maximum x
= 1.0.
2.
When 0.0 <= PLR < 1.0, the PLF must be >= 0.7 which is guaranteed as long as Coefficient 1 of the
PLF curve is > 0.7. Also, in this PLR range, the PLF must be less than the PLR which is also
guaranteed as long as the coil capacity is always greater than the demand. If the demand is greater
than the coil capacity and PLF becomes greater than PLR, the software automatically limits the runtime
fraction (PLR/PLF) to 1.0.
Defrost energy input ratio function of temperature curve

The Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) during
reverse-cycle defrost periods as a function of the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature and the wet-bulb
temperature of the air entering the indoor coil. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is
multiplied by the coil capacity, the fractional defrost time period and the runtime fraction of the heating coil to
give the defrost power at the specific temperatures at which the indoor and outdoor coils are operating. This
curve is only required when a reverse-cycle defrost strategy is selected. The curve is normalised to a value of
1.0 at the rating point conditions.
CRANKCASE HEATER
Crankcase heater capacity
This numeric field defines the crankcase heater capacity (in W). When the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is
below the value specified in the input field Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for crankcase heater
operation (described below), the crankcase heater is enabled during the time that the compressor is not
- 500 -
running. If this heating coil is used as part of an air-to-air heat pump (Ref. UnitarySystem:HeatPump:AirToAir
or PackageTerminal: HeatPump:AirToAir), the crankcase heater defined for this DX heating coil is enabled
during the time that the compressor is not running for either heating or cooling (and the crankcase heater
power defined in the DX cooling coil object is disregarded in this case). The value for this input field must be
greater than or equal to 0. The default value is 0. To simulate a unit without a crankcase heater, enter a value
of 0.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for crankcase heater operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) above which the compressors
crankcase heater is disabled. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0.0 C.
OPERATION
Availability schedule name
The schedule that denotes whether the DX heating coil can run during a given time period. A schedule value
greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during a given time period. A value less
than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off.
HEATING COIL - DX OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,DX Coil Total Heating Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Coil Total Heating Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,DX Heating Coil Electric Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Heating Coil Electric Consumption[J]
HVAC,Average,DX Heating Coil Electric Defrost Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Heating Coil Electric Defrost Consumption[J]
HVAC,Average,DX Heating Coil Crankcase Heater Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Heating Coil Crankcase Heater Consumption[J]
HVAC,Average,DX Heating Coil Runtime Fraction
DX Coil Total Heating Rate [W]

This field is the total heating rate output of the DX coil in Watts. This is determined by the coil inlet and outlet
air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Total Heating Energy[J]

This is the total heating output of the DX coil in Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by
the coil inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil. This output is also added to a
report meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key = CoolingCoils, Group Key = System (ref.
Report Meter).
DX Heating Coil Electric Power[W]

This output is the electricity consumption rate of the DX coil compressor and outdoor fan(s) in Watts. This rate
is applicable when the unit is providing heating to the conditioned zone(s), and excludes periods when the unit
is in reverse-cycle defrost mode.
DX Heating Coil Electric Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil compressor and condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep
being reported. This consumption is applicable when the unit is providing heating to the conditioned zone(s),
and excludes periods when the unit is in reverse-cycle defrost mode. This output is also added to a report
meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key = Cooling, Group Key = System (ref. Report Meter).
DX Heating Coil Electric Defrost Power[W]

This is the electricity consumption rate of the DX coil unit in Watts when the unit is in defrost mode (reversecycle or resistive).
DX Heating Coil Electric Defrost Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil unit in Joules for the timestep being reported. This
consumption is applicable when the unit is in defrost mode (reverse-cycle or resistive).
- 501 -
DX Heating Coil Crankcase Heater Power[W]

This is the average electricity consumption rate of the DX coil compressors crankcase heater in Watts for the
timestep being reported.
DX Heating Coil Crankcase Heater Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil compressors crankcase heater in Joules for the timestep
being reported. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key =
Miscellaneous, Group Key = System (ref. Report Meter).
DX Heating Coil Runtime Fraction

This is the runtime fraction of the DX heating coil compressor and outdoor fan(s) for the timestep being
reported.
Heating Coil - VRF - DX
Cooling Coils Detailed HVAC

These cooling coil types are available within Detailed HVAC:
Cooling Coil - Water

Cooling Coil - Single Speed DX
Cooling Coil - Two Stage with Humidity Control DX
"Cooling Coil - VRF - DX" on page 514
Cooling Coil - Water
Used in:
Coil:Cooling:Water
Air Handling Units,

Four-Pipe Air Distribution Units
The water cooling coil provides detailed output with simplified inputs without the need for complex coil
geometry definition. Instead the coil is sized in terms of auto-sizeable thermodynamic inputs such as
temperatures, mass flow rates and humidity ratios.
Coil heat transfer (UA) values are calculated from the design conditions. A rough estimate of the coil area is
provided along with percentage of surface wet and/or dry. This model uses the NTU-effectiveness approach to
model heat transfer and has two types of flow arrangements cross-flow or counter-flow.
See the Chilled Water Loop and FCU Tutorial
See section Cooling Coil Model in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document for further details on this model.
GENERAL
Name
A unique name for an instance of a cooling coil which is predetermined by DesignBuilder.
- 502 -
Design water flow rate

The maximum possible water volume flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the coil. This value is autosizable
and the default is Autosize.

The maximum possible air volume flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) through the coil. This value is autosizable and
the default is Autosize.
Design inlet water temperature

The inlet water temperature for the design flow (C or F). This value is autosizable and the default is
Autosize.
Design inlet air temperature

The inlet air temperature for the design flow (C or F). This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Design outlet air temperature

The outlet air condition desired for design flow (C or F). This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Design inlet air humidity ratio

The highest value of humidity ratio possible for the Design inlet air stream. This value is autosizable and the
default is Autosize.
Design outlet air humidity ratio

The value of humidity ratio for the Design outlet air stream. This value is autosizable and the default is
Autosize.
Type of analysis
The coil has two modes of operation:
1-Simple analysis
2-Detailed analysis
The difference between the two modes being, the simple mode reports the value of surface area fraction wet
of the coil as dry or wet. The detailed mode give the exact value, however the execution time in detailed mode
is noticeably higher.
Heat exchanger configuration

The coil is operable in two modes:
1-Cross flow for general A/C applications and

2- Counter flow mode.
Air-conditioning systems generally use cross flow heat exchangers, hence the default is set to 1-Cross flow.
OPERATION
Schedule that defines when the coil is available, i.e. whether the coil can run during a given time period. A
A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is off.
CONTROLLER
The controller allows the flow of water through the coil to be controlled based on temperature and/or humidity
ratio typically downstream of the coil.
Control variable
The Control variable defines how the coil is controlled. Select one of:
- 503 -
1-Temperature control is used for air temperature control and is normally specified for the coils outlet
air node
2-Humidity ratio control is used for humidity control and would normally be specified for a dehumidifier
outlet node
3-Temperature and humidity ratio control is used for controlling both air temperature and high
humidity levels, and is normally specified for a cooling coils outlet air node.
Options 2 and 3 (the control variables involving humidity ratio) both have these requirements:
Humidistat must be selected on the HVAC zone dialog and
One of the "Maximum humidity" setpoint managers must be associated with the cooling coil.
More information is available in the Humidity control section.
Action
The Action determines how the controlled variable (mass flow rate through a water coil) is changed based on
the control signal. In a coil where water mass flow rate is to be controlled, the mass flow rate through the coil
is increased when more cooling is requested. In a cooling coil, an increase in water mass flow rate through the
coil decreases the value of heat transfer from the water to the air stream (absolute value increases, but since
cooling is traditionally described as a negative number, an increase in absolute value results in a decrease in
the actual heat transfer value). Thus the cooling coil controller has Reverse action since an increase in flow
rate results in a decrease in heat transfer.
Actuator variable
The actuator variable must currently be use the keyword 1-Flow to control the water mass flow rate.
Controller convergence tolerance

The coil is controlled by knowing the outlet temperature and/or humidity ratio specified by the setpoint
managers, and setting the outlet conditions from the coil to meet these setpoints. The chilled water coils use
complex models that cannot be inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate for the
cold water the models are inverted numerically using an iterative procedure. The iterative solution uses an
interval-halving routine and needs a termination criteria that is set here.
The convergence tolerance is the maximum difference between the actual temperature at the setpoint node
and the setpoint temperature. This control offset is typically set to a small temperature difference, such as
0.01C.
This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Maximum actuated flow

This is the maximum water flow (m3/sec or gal/min) through the coil. Set to the maximum design water flow
for the coil.
This value is autosizable and the default is Autosize.
Minimum actuated flow

Set to the minimum design water flow (m3/sec or gal/min) for the water coil, normally a shut off valve that is
set to zero.
COOLING COIL - WATER OUTPUTS

Following are the list of possible output report variables from this coil model:
HVAC,Sum,Total Water Cooling Coil Energy[J]
HVAC,Sum,Sensible Water Cooling Coil Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Total Water Cooling Coil Rate[W]
HVAC,Average,Sensible Water Cooling Coil Rate[W]
HVAC,Average,Cooling Coil Area Wet Fraction
HVAC,Average,Cooling Coil Condensate Volumetric Flow Rate [m3/s]
Zone,Meter,OnSiteWater:Facility [m3]
Zone,Meter,OnSiteWater:HVAC [m3]
Zone,Meter,Condensate:OnSiteWater [m3]
- 504 -
HVAC,Sum,Cooling Coil Condensate Volume [m3]
Total Water Cooling Coil Energy (J)

Total Water Cooling Coil Energy is the total amount of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating
conditions.
Sensible Water Cooling Coil Energy (J)

Sensible Water Cooling Coil Energy is the total amount of Sensible heat transfer taking place in the coil at the
operating conditions. It only takes into account temperature difference in the inlet and outlet air streams at
operating conditions.
Total Water Cooling Coil Rate (W)

Total Water Cooling Coil Rate is the Rate of heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating conditions.
The units are (J/sec) or Watts.
Sensible Water Cooling Coil Rate (W)

Sensible Water Cooling Coil Rate is the Rate of Sensible heat transfer taking place in the coil at the operating
conditions.
Cooling Coil Area Wet Fraction

It defines the fraction of total surface area of coil which is wet due to moisture condensation
on the surface of the coil. Value varies between 0.0 and 1.0. I
n addition, if a Water Storage Tank is used to collect coil condensate, then the following outputs will be
available.
Cooling Coil Condensate Volumetric Flow Rate [m3/s]

Cooling Coil Condensate Volume [m3]
These reports provide the rate and amount of condensate from the coil. Condensate is water condensed out
of the air as a result of cooling. The condensate volume is also reported on the meter for OnSiteWater.
Single Speed DX Cooling Coil
Used in:
Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed
PTAC,
PTHP,
Unitary Heat Cool,
Unitary Heat Pump
The DX single speed cooling coil model and data are quite different from that for the heating and cooling
water coils. The simple water coils use an NTU-effectiveness heat exchanger model. The single speed DX coil
model uses performance information at rated conditions along with curve fits for variations in total capacity,
energy input ratio and part-load fraction to determine performance at part-load conditions. Sensible/latent
capacity splits are determined by the rated sensible heat ratio (SHR) and the apparatus dewpoint/bypass
factor (ADP/BF) approach. This approach is analogous to the NTU-effectiveness calculations used for
sensible-only heat exchanger calculations, extended to a cooling and dehumidifying coil.
This DX cooling coil input requires an availability schedule, the rated total cooling capacity, the rated SHR, the
rated COP, and the rated air volume flow rate. The latter 4 inputs determine the coil performance at the rating
point (air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb and air entering the outdoor condenser
coil at 35C dry-bulb/23.9C wet-bulb). The rated air volume flow rate should be between .00004027 m3/s and
.00006041 m3/s per watt of rated total cooling capacity (300 to 450 cfm/ton).
See section DX Cooling Coil Model in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document for further details regarding
this model.
- 505 -
GENERAL
Name
A unique auto-assigned name for an instance of a DX cooling coil. Any reference to this DX coil by another
object will use this name.
Rated total cooling capacity

The total, full load cooling capacity (sensible plus latent) (in W or Btu/h) of the DX coil unit at rated conditions.
These are: air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb, air entering the outdoor condenser
coil at 35C dry-bulb/23.9C wet-bulb (The 23.9C wet-bulb temperature condition is not applicable for aircooled condensers which do not evaporate condensate), and a cooling coil air flow rate fan heat is NOT
included. When used in a heat pump, the rated total cooling capacity should be within 20% of the rated total
heating capacity, otherwise a warning message is issued.
Rated sensible heat ratio

The sensible heat ratio (SHR=sensible capacity divided by total cooling capacity) of the DX cooling coil at
rated conditions (air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb, air entering the outdoor
condenser coil at 35C dry-bulb/23.9C wet-bulb, and a cooling coil air flow rate defined by field rated air
volume flow rate below). Both the sensible and total cooling capacities used to define the Rated SHR should
be gross (i.e., supply air fan heat is NOT included).
Rated COP
The coefficient of performance (cooling power output in watts divided by electrical power input in watts) of the
DX cooling coil unit at rated conditions (air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb, air
entering the outdoor condenser coil at 35C dry-bulb/ 23.9C wet-bulb, and a cooling coil air flow rate defined
by field rated air volume flow rate below). The input power includes electric power for the compressor(s) and
condenser fan(s) but does not include the power consumption of the supply air fan. The cooling power output
is the value entered above in the field Rated Total Cooling Capacity (gross).
Rated air flow rate

The air volume flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min), across the DX cooling coil at rated conditions. The rated air
volume flow rate should be between 0.00004027 m3/s and 0.00006041 m3/s per watt of rated total cooling
capacity (300 to 450 cfm/ton). The rated total cooling capacity, rated SHR and rated COP should be
performance information for the unit with air entering the cooling coil at 26.7C dry-bulb/19.4C wet-bulb, air
entering the outdoor condenser coil at 35C dry-bulb/23.9C wet-bulb, and the rated air volume flow rate
defined here.
Rated evaporator fan power per volume flow rate

This field is the electric power for the evaporator (cooling coil) fan per air volume flow rate through the coil at
the rated conditions (in W/(m3/s) or W/(ft3/min)). The default value is 773.3 W/(m3/s) (365 W/1000 cfm). The
value must be >= 0.0 and <= 1250 W/(m3/s). This value is only used to calculate Seasonal Energy Efficiency
Ratio (SEER), Energy Efficiency Ratio (EER), Integrated Energy Efficiency Ratio (IEER) and the Standard
Rating (Net) Cooling Capacity which will be outputs in the EnergyPlus eio file (ref. EnergyPlus Engineering
Reference, Single Speed DX Cooling Coil, Standard Ratings). This value is not used for modelling the
evaporator (cooling coil) fan during simulations; instead, it is used for calculating SEER, EER, IEER and
Standard Rating Cooling Capacity to assist the user in verifying their inputs for modelling this type of
equipment.
OPERATION
The name of the schedule that denotes whether the DX cooling coil can run during a given time period. A
A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off.
PERFORMANCE CURVES
The DX Cooling coil requires 5 curves be selected from the Curves database to define coil performance:
- 506 -
Total cooling capacity function of temperature curve

The Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the total cooling capacity as a function
of the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the cooling coil, and the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering
the air-cooled condenser coil (wet-bulb temperature if modelling an evaporative-cooled condenser). The
output of this curve is multiplied by the rated total cooling capacity to give the total cooling capacity at specific
temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the rating point temperatures). The curve
is normalized to have the value of 1.0 at the rating point.
Total cooling capacity function of flow fraction curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of total cooling capacity as a
function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the cooling coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full
load flow). The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated total cooling capacity and the total cooling
capacity modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the total cooling capacity at the specific temperature
and air flow conditions at which the coil is operating. The curve is normalized to have the value of 1.0 when
the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate.
Energy input ratio function of temperature curve

The Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a
function of the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the cooling coil, and the dry-bulb temperature of the air
entering the air-cooled condenser coil (wet-bulb temperature if modelling an evaporative-cooled condenser).
The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR (inverse of rated
COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the
rating point temperatures). The curve is normalized to a value of 1.0 at the rating point.
Energy input ratio function of flow fraction curve

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as
a function of the ratio of actual air flow rate across the cooling coil to the rated air flow rate (i.e., fraction of full
load flow). The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the rated EIR and the
EIR modifier curve (function of temperature) to give the EIR at the specific temperature and air flow conditions
at which the cooling coil is operating. This curve is normalized to a value of
1.0 when the actual air flow rate equals the rated air flow rate.

The Quadratic or Cubic performance curve that parameterises the variation of electrical power input to the DX
unit as a function of the part load ratio (PLR, sensible cooling load/steady-state sensible cooling capacity).
The product of the rated EIR and EIR modifier curves is divided by the output of this curve to give the
effective EIR for a given simulation timestep. The part load fraction (PLF) correlation accounts for efficiency
losses due to compressor cycling.
The 2 important rules to be followed when setting up this curve are:
1.
The part load fraction correlation curve coefficients need to be defined so that the output of the curve
equals 1.0 when the PLR is 1.0, e.g.
PLF=0.85 + 0.15(PLR)
So the associated quadratic would have Coefficient 1 = 0.85 and the Coefficient 2 = 0.15 with a
maximum x = 1.0.
2.
When 0.0 <= PLR < 1.0, the PLF must be >= 0.7 which is guaranteed as long as the Coefficient 1 of
the PLF curve is > 0.7. Also, in this PLR range, the PLF must be less than the PLR which is also
guaranteed as long as the coil capacity is always greater than the demand. If the demand is greater
than the coil capacity and PLF becomes greater than PLR, the software automatically limits the runtime
fraction (PLR/PLF) to 1.0.
LATENT CAPACITY DEGRADATION

Latent capacity degradation
Check this option if the degradation of latent cooling capacity is to be modelled. In this case the following four
input fields are shown allowing you to enter data relating to the degradation of latent cooling capacity when
- 507 -
the supply air fan operates continuously while the cooling coil/compressor cycle on and off to meet the cooling
load.
The fan operating mode is determined in the parent object and is considered to either be constant (e.g.
AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled (e.g. AirLoopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool). When scheduled,
the schedule value must be greater than 0 to calculate degradation of latent cooling capacity. At times when
the parent objects supply air fan operating mode schedule is 0, latent degradation will be ignored. When
modelling latent capacity degradation, these next four input fields must all have positive values.
Nominal time for condensate removal to begin

The nominal time (in seconds) after startup for condensate to begin leaving the coil's condensate drain line at
the coil's rated airflow and temperature conditions, starting with a dry coil. Nominal time is equal to the ratio of
the energy of the coil's maximum condensate holding capacity (J) to the coil's steady-state latent capacity (W).
Suggested value is 1000; zero value means the latent degradation model is disabled. The default value for
this field is zero. The supply air fan operating mode must be continuous (i.e., the supply air fan operating
mode may be specified in other parent objects and is assumed continuous in some objects (e.g.,
AirloopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled in other objects [e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool]),
and this field as well as the next three input fields for this object must have positive values in order to model
latent capacity degradation.
Ratio of initial moisture evaporation rate and steady state latent capacity
The ratio of the initial moisture evaporation rate from the cooling coil (when the compressor first turns off (in
W) and the coil's steady-state latent capacity (W) at rated airflow and temperature conditions. Suggested
value is 1.5; zero value means the latent degradation model is disabled. The default value for this field is zero.
The supply air fan operating mode must be continuous (i.e., the supply air fan operating mode may be
specified in other parent objects and is assumed continuous in some objects (e.g.,
AirloopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled in other objects [e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool]);
and this field, the previous field and the next two fields must have positive values in order to model latent
capacity degradation.
Maximum cycling rate

The maximum on-off cycling rate for the compressor (cycles per hour), which occurs at 50% run time fraction.
Suggested value is 3; zero value means latent degradation model is disabled. The default value for this field is
zero. The supply air fan operating mode must be continuous (i.e., the supply air fan operating mode may be
specified in other parent objects and is assumed continuous in some objects (e.g.,
AirloopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled in other objects [e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool]);
and this field, the previous two fields and the next field must have positive values in order to model latent
capacity degradation.
Latent capacity time constant

Time constant (in seconds) for the cooling coil's latent capacity to reach steady state after startup. Suggested
value is 45. The supply air fan operating mode must be continuous (i.e., the supply air fan operating mode
may be specified in other parent objects and is assumed continuous in some objects (e.g.,
AirloopHVAC:UnitaryCoolOnly) or can be scheduled in other objects [e.g., AirloopHVAC:UnitaryHeatCool]),
and this field as well as the previous three input fields for this object must have positive values in order to
model latent capacity degradation.
CONDENSER
Condenser type
The type of condenser used by the DX cooling coil. Valid choices for this input field are:
1-Air cooled, or
2-Evaporatively cooled.
The default Condenser type is is 1-Air cooled.
EVAPORATIVE CONDENSER
The data below is required only for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled.
- 508 -
Evaporative condenser effectiveness

The effectiveness of the evaporative condenser, which is used to determine the temperature of the air
entering the outdoor condenser coil as follows:
Tcond inlet = Twbo + (1 - EvapCondEffectiveness) (T dbo - Twbo)
where:
Tcond inlet = the temperature of the air entering the condenser coil (C)
Twbo = the wet-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
Tdbo = the dry-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
The resulting condenser inlet air temperature is used by the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve
(function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature). The
default value for this field is 0.9, although valid entries can range from 0.0 to 1.0. This field is not used when
Condenser Type = Air Cooled.
If the user wants to model an air-cooled condenser, they should simply specify an air cooled Condenser Type.
In this case, the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Energy Input
Ratio Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should reference performance
curves that are a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperature.
If you wish to model an evaporative-cooled condenser AND have performance curves that are a function of
the wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil, then you should specify Condenser Type =
Evaporatively cooled and the evaporative condenser effectiveness value should be entered as 1.0. In this
case, the Total Cooling Capacity Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio
Modifier Curve (function of temperature) input fields for this object should reference performance curves
that are a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil.
If you wish to model an air-cooled condenser that has evaporative media placed in front of it to cool the air
entering the condenser coil, then you should specify Condenser Type = Evaporatively cooled. You must also
enter the appropriate evaporative effectiveness for the media. In this case, the Total Cooling Capacity
Modifier Curve (function of temperature) and the Energy Input Ratio Modifier Curve (function of
temperature) input fields for this object should reference performance curves that are a function of outdoor
dry-bulb temperature. Be aware that the evaporative media will significantly reduce the dry-bulb temperature
of the air entering the condenser coil, so the Total Cooling Capacity and EIR Modifier Curves must be valid for
the expected range of dry-bulb temperatures that will be entering the condenser coil.
Evaporative condenser air flow rate

The air volume flow rate, (in m3/s or ft3/min), entering the evaporative condenser. This value is used to
calculate the amount of water used to evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The minimum value for this
field must be greater than zero, and this input field is autosizable (equivalent to 0.000144 m3/s per watt of
rated total cooling capacity [850 cfm/ton]). This field is not shown for Air cooled condensers.
Evaporative condenser pump rated power consumption

The rated power of the evaporative condenser water pump (in W or Btu/h). This value is used to calculate the
power required to pump the water used to evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The default value for this
input field is zero, but it is autosizable (equivalent to 0.004266 W per watt [15 W/ton] of rated total cooling
capacity). This field is not shown for Air cooled condensers.
CRANKCASE HEATER
below the value specified in the input field Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater
Operation (described below), the crankcase heater is enabled during the time that the compressor is not
running. If this cooling coil is used as part of an air-to-air heat pump (Ref. UnitarySystem:HeatPump:AirToAir
or PackageTerminal: HeatPump:AirToAir), the crankcase heater defined for this DX cooling coil is ignored and
the crankcase heater power defined for the DX heating coil (Ref. Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed) is enabled
during the time that the compressor is not running for either heating or cooling. The value for this input field
- 509 -
must be greater than or equal to 0, and the default value is 0. To simulate a DX cooling coil without a
crankcase heater, enter a value of 0.

crankcase heater is disabled. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0.0C, and the
default value is 10C.
BASIN HEATER
Basin heater capacity
This numeric field contains the capacity of the DX coils electric evaporative cooler basin heater in (W/K or
Btu/h-F). This field only applies for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled. This field is used in conjunction
with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature described in the following field. The basin heater electric power is
equal to this field multiplied by the difference between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor
dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the DX coil is off, regardless of the basin heater
schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero.
Basin heater setpoint temperature

This numeric field contains the set point temperature (in C or F) for the basin heater described in the
previous field. This field only applies for Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled. The basin heater is active
when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as the DX coil is off.
This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2C.
Basin heater operating schedule

This alpha field contains the name of the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies for
Condenser type = Evaporatively cooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be an on/off
schedule and the heater is available to operate any time the schedule value is greater than 0. The basin
heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below the set point
temperature described in the previous field. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater can only operate
when the DX coil is off.
RUN SETTINGS
For DX cooling coils located in a unitary system the run settings can be controlled.
Run on sensible load only

Check this option if the coil will operate to meet a sensible load as determined by the inlet node dry-bulb
temperature and the dry-bulb temperature setpoint on the control node. When this option is checked the unit
will run if there is a sensible load, otherwise the unit will not run if there is only a sensible load.
Run on latent load only

Check this option if the coil will operate to meet a latent load as determined by the inlet node humidity ratio
and the max humidity setpoint on the control node. When this option is checked the coil will operate if there is
a latent load. If both sensible and latent loads exist, the system will operate to maintain the temperature set
point. When only a latent load exists, the system will operate to meet the humidity ratio set point and requires
the use of a heating coil and heating coil outlet air temperature set point manager downstream of this cooling
coil to maintain the temperature set point. If this option is not checked then this coil will not run if there is only
a latent load.
DX COOLING COIL OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,DX Coil Total Cooling Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Coil Total Cooling Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,DX Coil Sensible Cooling Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Coil Sensible Cooling Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,DX Coil Latent Cooling Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Coil Latent Cooling Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Electric Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Electric Consumption[J]
- 510 -
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Runtime Fraction

If not part of UnitarySystem:HeatPump:AirToAir:
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Crankcase Heater Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Crankcase Heater Consumption[J]
Evaporative-cooled condenser:
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Condenser Inlet Temp[C]
HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Evap Condenser Water Consumption[m3]
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Evap Condenser Pump Electric Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Evap Condenser Pump Electric Consumption[J]
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Basin Heater Electric Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,DX Cooling Coil Basin Heater Electric Consumption[J]
Additional variables for Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode
only:
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Stage 2 Runtime Fraction
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Dehumidification Mode
HVAC,Average,DX Cooling Coil Condensate Volumetric Flow Rate [m3/s]
Zone,Meter,Condensate:OnSiteWater [m3]
DX Coil Total Cooling Rate [W]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) cooling rate output of the DX coil in Watts. This is determined by the
coil inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Total Cooling Energy [J]

This is the total (sensible plus latent) cooling output of the DX coil in Joules over the timestep being reported.
This is determined by the coil inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil. This
output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = EnergyTransfer, End Use Key = CoolingCoils,
Group Key = System (Ref. Report Meter).
DX Coil Sensible Cooling Rate [W]

This output is the moist air sensible cooling rate output of the DX coil in Watts. This is determined by the inlet
and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Sensible Cooling Energy [J]

This is the moist air sensible cooling output of the DX coil in Joules for the timestep being reported. This is
determined by the inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Latent Cooling Rate [W]

This is the latent cooling rate output of the DX coil in Watts. This is determined by the inlet and outlet air
conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Coil Latent Cooling Energy [J]

This is the latent cooling output of the DX coil in Joules for the timestep being reported. This is determined by
the inlet and outlet air conditions and the air mass flow rate through the coil.
DX Cooling Coil Electric Power [W]

This output is the electricity consumption rate of the DX coil compressor and condenser fan(s) in Watts. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep, and the results are averaged for the timestep being
reported.
DX Cooling Coil Electric Consumption [J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil compressor and condenser fan(s) in Joules for the timestep
Cooling, Group Key = System (Ref. Report Meter).
DX Cooling Coil Runtime Fraction

This is the runtime fraction of the DX coil compressor and condenser fan(s) for the timestep being reported.
- 511 -
DX Cooling Coil Crankcase Heater Power[W]

This is the average electricity consumption rate of the DX coil compressors crankcase heater in Watts for the
DX Cooling Coil Crankcase Heater Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption of the DX coil compressors crankcase heater in Joules for the timestep
Cooling, Group Key = System (ref. Report Meter).
Cooling Coil - Two Stage With Humidity Control DX
Used in:
Coil:Cooling:DX:TwoStageWithHumidityControlMode
CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling
DX cooling coils in Air handling

units when Two stage with
dehumidification option used
The multimode DX coil is functionally equivalent to the single-speed DX cooling coil but with multiple
performance modes available. It is capable of modelling two-stage DX units and units with an enhanced
dehumidification mode such as coil bypass or subcool reheat. It can have up to 4 performance modes to
accommodate a 2-stage 2-mode unit.
GENERAL
Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a DX cooling coil. Any reference to this DX coil by another
object will use this name. This name is fixed and cannot be changed by the user.
Number of capacity stages

The value for this input defines the number of capacity stages and must be 1 or 2. The default value is 1.
Larger DX units often have two capacity stages, which are often two completely independent compressor/coil
circuits with the evaporator coils arranged in parallel in the supply air stream. Two-stage operation affects
cycling losses and latent degradation due to re-evaporation of moisture with continuous fan operation.
Enhanced dehumidification mode

Check this option if the DX coil provides enhanced dehumidification to increase dehumidification based on a
humidistat signal.

Defines the type of dehumidification control. The following options are valid for this field:
1-None - meet sensible load only, no active dehumidification control

2-Multi mode - activate enhanced dehumidification mode as needed and meet sensible load. This
option is used to model DX equipment with a switchable option such as subcool reheat.
3-Cool reheat - cool beyond the dry-bulb setpoint as required to meet the humidity setpoint.
The default is 1-None. For all dehumidification controls, the max humidity setpoint on the control node is used.
This must be set using a Zone humidistat and a downstream setpoint manager of type:
5-Multi zone maximum humidity average, or,

7-Multi zone humidity maximum, or,
9-Single zone humidity maximum
When extra dehumidification is required, the equipment may not be able to meet the humidity setpoint if its full
capacity is not adequate.
- 512 -
OPERATION
The name of the schedule that denotes whether the DX cooling coil can run during a given time period. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the coil can be on during a given time period.
A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the coil must be off.
NORMAL MODE STAGE 1 COIL PERFORMANCE

The data under this header defines the DX coil performance for stage 1 operation without enhanced
dehumidification (normal mode).
The data items for Normal Mode Stage 1 Coil Performance are described under Cooling Coil - Single Speed
DX coils.
NORMAL MODE STAGE 1+2 COIL PERFORMANCE

The data under this header defines the DX coil performance for stage 1+2 operation (both stages active)
without enhanced dehumidification (normal mode).
The data items for Normal Mode Stage 1+2 Coil Performance are described under Cooling Coil - Single
Speed DX coils.
DEHUMIDIFICATION MODE 1 STAGE 1 COIL PERFORMANCE

The data under this header defines the DX coil performance for stage 1 operation with enhanced
dehumidification active.
The data items for Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1 Coil Performance are described under Cooling Coil Single Speed DX coils.
DEHUMIDIFICATION MODE 1 STAGE 1+2 COIL PERFORMANCE

The data under this header defines the DX coil performance for stage 1+2 operation (both stages active) with
enhanced dehumidification active. An EnergyPlus CoilPerformance:DX:Cooling object is generated based
on these inputs.
The data items for Dehumidification Mode 1 Stage 1+2 Coil Performance are described under Cooling Coil
- Single Speed DX coils.
CRANKCASE HEATER
below the value specified in the input field Maximum Outdoor Dry-bulb Temperature for Crankcase Heater
Operation (described below), the crankcase heater is enabled during the time that the compressor is not
running. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0, and the default value is 0. To
simulate a DX cooling coil without a crankcase heater, enter a value of 0.

crankcase heater is disabled. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0C, and the
BASIN HEATER
This numeric field contains the capacity of the DX coils electric evaporative cooler basin heater (in W/K or
- 513 -
dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the DX coil is off, regardless of the basin heater

when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as the DX coil is off.

when the DX coil is off.
RUN SETTINGS
For DX cooling coils located in a unitary system the run settings can be controlled.
Run on sensible load only

Check this option if the coil will operate to meet a sensible load as determined by the inlet node dry-bulb
temperature and the dry-bulb temperature setpoint on the control node. When this option is checked the unit
will run if there is a sensible load, otherwise if this option is unchecked then the unit will not run if there is only
a sensible load.
Run on latent load only

Check this option if the coil will operate to meet a latent load as determined by the inlet node humidity ratio
and the max humidity setpoint on the control node. When this option is checked the coil will operate if there is
a latent load. If both sensible and latent loads exist, the system will operate to maintain the temperature set
point. When only a latent load exists, the system will operate to meet the humidity ratio set point and requires
the use of a heating coil and heating coil outlet air temperature set point manager downstream of this cooling
coil to maintain the temperature set point. If this option is not checked then this coil will not run if there is only
a latent load.
DX COOLING COIL OUTPUTS

See Outputs section under Cooling Coil - Single Speed DX coils.
Cooling Coil - VRF - DX

Plenum Data
Supply and Extract plenums are HVAC components much like Splitters and Mixers but they can be associated
with a building zone which is used as the supply or extract plenum.
- 514 -
The only item of data required for an HVAC plenum is the name of the associated building zone.
Zone name
If no zone has previously been allocated to the plenum, click on the ellipsis button adjacent to the <Select
zone> text to bring up a zone selection control. Only zones that have not already been associated with zone
groups or other plenums are available for selection.
See also Add Supply Plenum Add Return Plenum Tool
Fans
The following fan types are available when using Detailed HVAC:
Fan - Constant Volume

Fan - Variable Volume
Fan - On/Off
Fan - Zone Exhaust
Fan - Constant Volume
Fan:ConstantVolume
Used in:
Supply
Air Handling Unit (Constant Volume)

Fan Coil Unit
PTAC,
PTHP,
Unitary Heat Cool,
Unitary Heat Pump
Extract
This object models a constant air volume fan that is intended to operate continuously based on a time
schedule. This fan will not cycle on and off based on cooling/heating load or other control signals (Ref:
Fan:OnOff).
GENERAL
Name
A unique auto-assigned name for the Fan. Any reference to this fan by another object will use this name.
Type
The type of the constant volume fan is fixed as:
2-Constant volume
- 515 -
To change from constant volume to variable volume you most open the parent AHU dialog and change the
Fan type to 1-Variable volume.

This is the overall efficiency of the fan, i.e. the ratio of the power delivered to the fluid to the electrical input
power. It is the product of the motor efficiency and the impeller efficiency. The motor efficiency is the power
delivered to the shaft divided by the electrical power input to the motor. The impeller efficiency is the power
delivered to the air divided by the shaft power. The power delivered to the air is the mass flow rate of the air
multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. This efficiency must be between 0 and 1.
Pressure rise
The pressure rise (in Pascals or inH2O) at full flow and standard (sea level) conditions (20C and 101325 Pa).
The required pressure rise across an AHU fan is dependent on the duct network supplied by the AHU. For
example, if a duct network was sized using a constant pressure loss of 1 Pa/m and the index run of the
network (route of highest pressure drop) was say 300 m and the fitting losses were say an additional 20%, the
required pressure rise across the fan would be 300 x 1 x 1.2= 360 Pa.
End-use subcategory
Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., "Central System", etc. A new meter for
reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Report Meter). Subcategories are also reported in the
ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the fan will be assigned to the "General" end-use subcategory.
FLOW RATES
Maximum flow rate
The full load air volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) at standard temperature and pressure (dry air at 20C
dry-bulb). EnergyPlus uses local barometric pressure to account for altitude using equation for "standard
atmospheric" pressure on p 6.1 of the ASHRAE 1997 HOF (SI edition) to initialize the air systems being
simulated.
p=101325*(1-2.25577E-05*Z)**5.2559
where p=pressure in Pa and Z=altitude in m
MOTOR
Motor efficiency
The shaft power divided by the electrical power consumed. Must be between 0 and 1.
Motor in airstream fraction

The fraction of the motor heat that is added to the air stream. A value of 0 means that the motor is completely
outside the air stream. A value of 1 means that all of the motor heat loss will go into the air stream and act to
cause a temperature rise. Must be between 0 and 1.
OPERATION
Select the Schedule that defines whether the fan can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater
than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan can be on during a given time period. A value less than or
equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the fan is off.
ALGORITHM
The way that fan and motor efficiency values affect the condition of the air at the fan outlet is given by the
following equations:
Qtot = m.P / (etot. air)
Qshaft = emotor.Qtot
- 516 -
Qtoair = Qshaft + (Qtot - Qshaft).fmotortoair

hout = hin + Qtoair / m
wout = win
Tout = PsyTdbFnHW(hout,wout)
Nomenclature:
fmotortoair is the fraction of motor heat generated passed into the air stream
Qtot is fan power in W
m is mass flow in kg/s
P is the design pressure increase
etot is fan total efficiency
emotor is the motor efficiency
air is air density at standard conditions (kg/m3)
Qshaft is the fan shaft power in W
Qtoair is the power entering the air in W
hout,hin are the outlet and inlet specific enthalpies in J/kg
wout,win are the inlet and outlet air stream humidity ratios
PsyTdbFnHW is the EnergyPlus psychrometric routine relating enthalpy and humidity ratio to
temperature.
FAN - CONSTANT VOLUME OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Fan Electric Power[W]
HVAC,Average,Fan Delta Temp[C]
HVAC,Sum,Fan Electric Consumption[J]
Fan Electric Power [W]

This output field contains the average electricity consumption rate for the fan in Watts for the timestep being
reported.
Fan Delta Temp [C]

This output field contains the average rise in air temperature across the fan (outlet air temperature minus inlet
air temperature) (in C or F)elsius for the timestep being reported.
Fan Electric Consumption [J]

This output field contains the electricity consumption of the fan in Joules for the timestep being reported. This
output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = Electricity, End Use Key= Fans, Group Key=
System (ref. Report Meter).
Fan - Variable Volume
Fan:VariableVolume
Used in:
Air Handling Unit (Variable Volume)
Supply
Extract
GENERAL
Name
A unique auto-generated name for the fan. Any reference to this fan by another object will use this name.
- 517 -
Type
The type of the variable volume fan is fixed as:
2-Variable volume
To change from variable volume to constant volume you most open the parent AHU dialog and change the
Fan type to 1-Constant volume.

Pressure rise
End-use subcategory
FLOW RATES
Fan minimum flow rate input method for fan power
This field is a key/choice field that tells which of the next two fields is filled and is descriptive of how the
minimum flow rate is specified for calculating the fan power. The key/choices are:
1-Fraction where the fan power will be calculated using the value specified in the Minimum flow
fraction for fan power below.
2-Fixed flow rate where the fan power is calculated using the value specified in the Minimum air flow
rate for fan power below.
Minimum flow fraction for fan power

The minimum air volumetric flow rate for fan power, specified as a fraction of maximum system air flow rate.
Must be between 0 and 1. Note that this field is only used to calculate the fan power. This field does not
enforce the system air flow rate during simulation.
Minimum air flow rate for fan power

The minimum air volumetric flow rate for fan power, specified as a constant minimum air flow rate (m3/sec or
ft3/min). Note that this field is only used to calculate the fan power. This field does not enforce the system air
flow rate during simulation.
Maximum flow rate

dry-bulb). The program does use local barometric pressure to account for altitude using equation for "standard
simulated.
p=101325*(1-2.25577E-05*Z)
5.2559
- 518 -
Minimum flow rate

The minimum air volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) for the fan at standard temperature and pressure
(see Maximum Flow Rate field above for details).
MOTOR
Motor efficiency

FAN COEFFICIENTS
Fan coefficient data under this header provides the coefficients C2 to C5 in the fourth order polynomial curve giving the fraction of full load power (PLF) as a function of
flow fraction (FF). Flow fraction is the air mass flow rate divided by the maximum air mass flow rate.
2
PLF = C1 + C2. FF + C3 FF + C4.FF + C5. FF
Fan coefficient 1
The constant coefficient C1 in the above curve
Fan coefficient 2
The linear coefficient C2 in the above curve
Fan coefficient 3
The quadratic coefficient C3 in the above curve
Fan coefficient 4
The cubic coefficient C4 in the above curve
Fan Coefficient 5
The coefficient C5 in the above curve
OPERATION
Schedule that defines whether the fan can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0
(usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0
(usually 0 is used) denotes that the fan is off.
ALGORITHM
The algorithm used to calculate energy consumption and air outlet conditions in variable flow fans are as
follows.
fflow = m / mmax
fpl = c1 + c2.fflow + c3.fflow2 + c4.fflow3 + c5.fflow4
Qtot = fpl.m.P/(etot.air)
wout = win
Nomenclature:
- 519 -
fflow is the flow fraction of design or maximum flow

fpl is the part load factor
temperature.
FAN - VARIABLE VOLUME OUPUTS


reported.
Fan Delta Temp [C]


Fan - On/Off
Used in:
Fan:OnOff
Fan Coil Unit

PTAC,
PTHP,
Unitary Heat Cool,
Unitary Heat Pump
The On/off fan models a constant air volume fan that is intended to cycle on and off in tandem with a cooling
or heating system (i.e., AUTO fan control mode). The fan can also operate continuously like a Constant
volume fan. If modelling continuous operation and this object is used as part of a system that utilizes
Coil:Heating:Gas, Coil:Cooling:DX:SingleSpeed or Coil:Heating:DX:SingleSpeed, the user should confirm
proper air flow rates (coil and fan max load fraction is less than or equal to 1 for all values of coil part-load
ratio).
Multi-speed fan operation can also be modelled when the On/off fan is included as part of a compound object
that allows multiple fan speeds (e.g.,Unitary Heat Cool, PTAC, etc.). In this case, the ratio of the compound
object air flow rate to the fans maximum air flow rate is used to determine the power at alternate fan speeds.
The input for Fan Power Ratio Function of Speed Ratio Curve Name must be entered to model multi-speed
fan operation. An optional fan total efficiency ratio curve is also available to model efficiency differences at
alternate fan speeds.
- 520 -
Name
A unique system assigned name for an instance of an On/off fan. Any reference to this fan by another object
will use this name.

Pressure rise
End-use subcategory
Maximum flow rate

dry-bulb). EnergyPlus uses local barometric pressure to account for altitude using equation for "standard
simulated.
p=101325*(1-2.25577E-05*Z)**5.2559
Motor efficiency

Fan power ratio function of speed ratio curve

Select an Exponent Performance curve. This curve is used to simulate multi-speed fan motors, representing
the ratio of actual fan power to rated fan power when a change in fan speed occurs.
Fan efficiency ratio function of speed ratio curve

Enter the name of a Quadratic or Cubic Performance curve. This curve is used to simulate multi-speed fan
motors, representing the ratio of actual fan total efficiency to rated fan total efficiency when a change in fan
speed occurs.
OPERATION
Select the Schedule that defines whether the fan can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater
than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan can be on during a given time period. A value less than or
equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the fan is off.
- 521 -
ALGORITHM
The on/off fan model is similar to the simple constant volume fan model with the exception that the on/off fan
may cycle on and off during a simulation time step. The cycling rate of the fan is known as the run time
fraction. The calculation of run time fraction accounts for the part-load losses of other equipment used in the
HVAC system. A part-load factor (a.k.a. part-load ratio) is first calculated for the fan as the ratio of the actual
operating mass flow rate to the maximum fan mass flow rate. The run time fraction is then calculated as the
part-load factor divided by the part-load fraction. The part-load fraction is determined by other HVAC
equipment in the simulation.
fflow = m / mmax
RTF = fflow / PLF
The total fan power is then calculated as the maximum fan power multiplied by the run time fraction.
Qtot = RTF.[m.P/(etot.air)]
wout = win
Nomenclature:
fflow is the flow fraction or part load ratio
mmax is the maximum or design mass flow in kg/s
RTF is runtime fraction
PLF is part load factor
temperature.
FAN - ON/OFF OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,On/Off Fan Runtime Fraction

reported.
Fan Delta Temp [C]


On/Off Fan Runtime Fraction

This output field contains the fraction of time that this fan operated for the timestep being reported
- 522 -
Fan - Zone Exhaust
The zone exhaust fan provides a way to extract zone air to outside. It is a standalone component and unlike
the other Detailed HVAC fans it does not link in with the main Air loop. It can also impact air flows in central air
handlers by decreasing the flow of return air and sometimes increasing the outdoor air flow rate.
There are several control options available for the exhaust fan including an on/off availability schedule,
interaction with system availability managers, minimum zone air temperature control limits and a variable flow
fraction schedule. The way in which the exhaust fan impacts central air system can be controlled by declaring
what portion of the flow has been balanced by simple airflow from infiltration, ventilation, or mixing. However
it is important to note that presence of an exhaust fan does not by itself drive any simple airflow such as
infiltration, ventilation, or zone mixing.
Note: When used with Calculated natural ventilation, Zone exhaust fans can take part in the Airflow Network
causing a negative pressure in the zone which can be balanced by flows into the zone through other openings
and cracks. In this case a single corresponding vent from the Zone Exhaust Fans category must be placed
on an external surface of the building zone.
To obtain balancing when using Scheduled natural ventilation the main natural ventilation airflow must be
coordinated with the flows defined for the exhaust fan as there is no comprehensive automatic mass
balancing between air system flows, exhaust flows, and the separate simple airflows.
Zone exhaust fans differ from the other fans in EnergyPlus HVAC in that they can stand on their own in a zone
rather than serving as one part of an HVAC air system.
Summary of zone exhaust fan data entry
A zone exhaust fan is defined differently depending on whether the Calculated natural ventilation model option
is selected or not.
When not using Calculated natural ventilation simply add an Exhaust fan to the HVAC zone and
make any settings on the dialog.
When using Calculated natural ventilation then as well as the Exhaust fan in the HVAC zone you
must also include a single external vent from the Zone Exhaust Fans category somewhere in the zone
by drawing it at surface level on an exterior surface. The purpose of the vent is to include the zone
exhaust fan as an airflow path in the EnergyPlus Airflow Network. The numbered steps that follow refer
to the screenshot below. Having drawn the vent object at surface level:
1. Navigate to the vent object.
2. Select the vent type model data on the Openings tab.
3. Select the pre-defined "Zone Exhaust Fan" vent component.
4. Alternatively create a new vent component and set its category to Zone Exhaust Fans.
- 523 -
The end result should be that each zone with an HVAC Exhaust fan has exactly 1 vent from the Zone
Exhaust Fans category placed on an exterior surface.
Name
A unique user-assigned name for an instance of a zone exhaust fan. Any reference to this fan by another
object will use this name.
End-Use subcategory
Allows you to specify a user-defined end-use subcategory, e.g., "Kitchen Exhaust", "Fume Hoods", etc. A new
meter for reporting is created for each unique subcategory (ref: Output:Meter object). Subcategories are also
reported in the ABUPS table. If this field is omitted or blank, the fan will be assigned to the "General" end-use
subcategory.
FAN DATA
multiplied by the pressure rise divided by the air density. This efficiency must be between 0 and 1. The default
is 0.6.
Pressure rise
Maximum flow rate

The full load air volumetric flow rate (in m3/sec or ft3/min) at standard temperature and pressure (dry air at
20C drybulb). The program does use local barometric pressure to account for altitude using equation for
- 524 -
"standard atmospheric" pressure on p 6.1 of the ASHRAE 1997 HOF (SI edition) to initialize the air systems
being simulated.
p=101325*(1-2.25577E-05*Z)**5.2559
System availability manager coupling mode

This setting can be used to control whether the exhaust fan should operate independently or not. For
example, when a night cycle availability manager turns on the central air system for freeze protection, this field
can be used to control if the zone exhaust fans should also run at the same time or not. The options are:
1-Coupled which indicates that the exhaust fan should be integrated with the system availability
manager so that the fan runs when the air system is forced to run.
2-Decoupled which indicates that the exhaust fan should operate on its own and ignore the system
availability managers requests so that the exhaust fan can remain off when the air system runs.
The default is 1-Coupled.
Apply minimum zone temperature limit schedule

If you would like to define a minimum zone temperature limit schedule (below) then check this option.
Minimum zone temperature limit schedule

This field is optional. If it is not used then there will be no temperature-related control over the operation of the
exhaust fan. If the option is used, then enter the name of a schedule with values for zone temperature values
(in C). The fans control will be based on a comparison between the current zone air temperature and the
schedule values. If the zone is warmer than the scheduled limit, then the fan will operate. When balancing with
Scheduled natural ventilation, this feature can be used to coordinate exhaust fan operation with the main
natural ventilation controls for minimum indoor temperature.
Apply balanced exhaust fraction schedule

If you would like to define a balanced exhaust fraction schedule (below) then check this option.
Balanced exhaust fraction schedule

This field is optional. If it is not used, then all the exhaust air flow is assumed to be unbalanced by any simple
airflows, such as infiltration, ventilation, or zone mixing. Unbalanced exhaust is then modelled as being
provided by the outdoor air system in the central air system. The modelling of unbalanced will reduce the flow
rates at the zones return air node by the flow rate that is being exhausted and will insure that the outdoor air
flow rate is sufficient to serve the exhaust. If this field is used, then enter the name of a schedule with
fractional values between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive. This fraction is applied to the exhaust fan flow rate and the
model tracks the portion of the exhaust that is balanced. Balanced exhaust is then modelled as being
provided by simple airflows and does not impact the central air system return air or outdoor air flow rates. For
example, if a kitchen zone with an exhaust fan is designed to draw half of its make up air from a neighbouring
dining room and the other half from the outdoor air system, then a schedule value of 0.5 could be used here.
OPERATION
The availability schedule denotes whether the fan can run during a given time period. A schedule value of 0
indicates that the fan is off for that time period. A schedule value greater than 0 indicates that the fan can
operate during the time period.
Apply flow fraction schedule

If you would like to define a Flow fraction schedule (below) then check this option.
Flow fraction schedule

This field is optional. If it is not used then the fan operates at the maximum flow rate. If a schedule is selected
here, then it should contain fractional values between 0.0 and 1.0, inclusive. During the simulation the flow
rate provided by the fan will be this fraction times the maximum flow rate. This allows a variable speed
exhaust fan to be modelled according to a schedule.
- 525 -
Humidifier - Steam Electric

Humidifier:Steam:Electric
Used in:
Air Handling Units
The electric steam humidifier is a component that represents an electrically heated, self contained steam
humidifier. The component uses electrical energy to convert ordinary tap water to steam which it then injects
into the supply air stream by means of a blower fan. The actual unit might be an electrode-type humidifier or a
resistance-type humidifier.
The humidifier model includes local control of the humidifier unit to meet a humidity ratio setpoint on its air
outlet node.
Note: To ensure that the humidifier will add moisture to meet the humidity ratio setpoint, a Minimum humidity
Setpoint manager must be added immediately downstream of the Humidifier (4-Multi-zone minimum
humidity average or 6-Multi-zone humidity minimum or 8-Single zone humidity minimum).
General
Name
A unique system assigned name for a particular humidifier unit. Any reference to this unit by another object
will use this name.
Rated capacity
The nominal full output water addition rate of the unit (in m3/sec or gal/min of water at 5.05C).
Note: The Rated capacity cannot be autosized in current versions of EnergyPlus, but if you are not sure of the
correct value to use, it is possible to enter a very high value (e.g. 1m3/s) to ensure that humidification loads
can always be met.
Rated power
The nominal full output power consumption of the unit (in W), exclusive of the blower fan power consumption
and any standby power. This field can be autosized. When it is autosized, the calculations are based on the
rated capacity and the enthalpy rise of the feed water from the reference temperature of liquid water at 20C
to a saturated steam at 100C.
Rated fan power

The nominal full output power consumption of the blower fan (in W).
Standby power
The standby power consumption (in W). This amount of power will be consumed whenever the unit is
available (as defined by the availability schedule).
- 526 -
Operation
Schedule that defines whether the unit can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater than 0
(usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan can be on during a given time period. A value less than or equal to 0
(usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is off.
Humidifier - Steam Electric Outputs

HVAC,Average,Humidifier Water Consumption Rate[m3/s]
HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Water Consumption[m3]
HVAC,Average,Humidifier Electric Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Electric Consumption[J]
Zone,Meter,Humidifier:Water [m3]
Zone,Meter,Humidifier:Electricity [J]
HVAC,Average,Humidifier Water From Storage Tank Rate [m3/s]
HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Water From Storage Tank [m3]
HVAC,Average,Humidifier Water Starved By Storage Tank Rate [m3/s]
HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Water Starved By Storage Tank [m3]
Zone,Meter,Humidifier:MainsWater [m3]
HVAC,Sum,Humidifier Water Mains Draw [m3]
Humidifier Water Consumption Rate[m3/s]

This field reports the water consumption rate of the steam humidifier in cubic meters of water per second.
Humidifier Water Consumption[m3]

This ouput is the cubic meters of water consumed by the steam humidifier over the timestep being reported.
Humidifier Electric Power[W]

This output is the electricity consumption rate in Watts of the steam humidifier.
Humidifier Electric Consumption[J]

This is the electricity consumption in Joules of the steam humidifier over the timestep being reported.
Humidifier:Water [m3]
This meter output contains the sum of the water consumed (in cubic neters of water during the report
timestep) by all the steam humidifiers at the HVAC level in the simulation.
Humidifier:Electricity [J]
This meter output contains the sum of the electricity consumed (in Joules during the report timestep) by all the
steam humidifiers at the HVAC level in the simulation.
Humidifier Water From Storage Tank Rate [m3/s]

Humidifier Water From Storage Tank [m3]
These outputs contain the rate and volume of water obtained from water storage tank. These are only present
if the humidifier is connected to a Water Storage Tank for its water supply.
Humidifier Water Starved By Storage Tank Rate [m3/s]

Humidifier Water Starved By Storage Tank [m3]
These outputs contain the rate and volume of water that could not be obtained from the water storage tank.
The component will still operate as if it did get all the water with the balance obtained directly from the mains
Humidifier Water Mains Draw [m3]

This output contains the volume of water obtained from the mains.
- 527 -
Evaporative Cooler Data

Evaporative cooler components can be placed within AHUs in much the same way that water and DX cooling
coils are placed. They can also be selected as outdoor air pretreatment components within the AHU dialogs.
An evaporative cooler provides cooling to an air stream purely through the evaporation of water. Evaporative
cooling differs from typical air conditioning systems which use vapour-compression or absorption refrigeration
cycles. Evaporative cooling works by employing water's large enthalpy of vaporisation. The temperature of dry
air can be dropped significantly through the phase transition of liquid water to water vapour, which requires
much less energy than refrigeration. In dry climates, it also has the added benefit of conditioning the air with
more moisture for the comfort of occupants. Unlike refrigeration, it requires a water source, and must
continually consume water to operate.
As water is evaporated, energy is lost from the air, reducing its temperature. The lowest temperature that an
evaporative cooler can cool to is the incoming air wet-bulb temperature.
Two types of evaporative cooler are supported by DesignBuilder EnergyPlus: direct and indirect systems.
Direct evaporative cooling (open circuit) is used to lower the temperature of air by using latent heat of
evaporation, changing liquid water to water vapour. In this process, the energy in the air does not
change. Warm dry air is changed to cool moist air. The heat of the outside air is used to evaporate
water.
Indirect evaporative cooling (closed circuit) is similar to direct evaporative cooling, but uses some type
of heat exchanger. The cooled moist air never comes in direct contact with the conditioned
environment.
EnergyPlus provides 5 types of evaporative coolers any of which can be selected when placing the
component or from the Evaporative cooler dialog:
1-Direct CelDekPad
2-Direct Research Special
3-Indirect CelDekPad
4-Indirect Wet Coil
5-Indirect Research Special
Direct CelDekPad
The direct stage, shown in the figure below, consists of a rigid media evaporative pad, with water recirculated
from a reservoir. The water is pumped from the reservoir to a water distribution header, for water feed by
gravity from above the media. The evaporative pad provides the area for the adiabatic saturation of the air.
While the process provides a lower dry-bulb temperature, the moisture content of the leaving air is higher than
the entering condition. The direct stage is used for comfort cooling in a building where adding humidity to the
air can be tolerated.
- 528 -
Direct Stage Evaporative Cooler

The thermodynamic process is a simultaneous heat and mass transfer, or adiabatic cooling, and follows a
constant enthalpy line on the psychrometric chart, it is shown in the figure below as a process from A to B.
Since the deviation of the constant wet-bulb line and the constant enthalpy line is small, it is assumed that the
wet-bulb temperature is constant across the direct evaporative stage.
Psychrometric Chart - Constant Enthalpy
- 529 -
If the direct evaporative process were 100% efficient, the leaving dry-bulb temperature would equal the
entering wet-bulb temperature. The efficiency of the direct evaporative process is less than 100% and by
defining saturation efficiency (se) for the direct stage or evaporative pad, the leaving dry-bulb temperature can
be expressed by the following equation.
GENERAL
Name
A unique name for an instance of an evaporative cooler which is predetermined by DesignBuilder.
SETTINGS
Direct pad area
The face area of the evaporative pad (in m2 or ft2). With the area and mass flow rate, the air velocity is
calculated and is used to determine the saturation efficiency.
Direct pad depth

The depth of the evaporative pad (in m or in). The pad depth is used to determine the saturation efficiency.
Recirculating water pump power consumption

This field is used to specify the power consumed by the evaporative cooler recirculating pump (in W).
OPERATION
Schedule that defines when the coil is available, i.e. whether the evaporative cooler can run during a given
time period. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during a
given time period. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is off.
Direct Research Special

This cooler is similar in principal to the Direct CelDekPad. The model differs in that it gives the user a simple
way of specify the cooler effectiveness. Using the Research Special input object also allows the cooler to
control the amount of cooling based on node setpoints, controlled by Setpoint managers. This avoids
problems from over cooling when conditions are such that loads are low and cooling power is high. Water
pump power is assumed to vary linearly when the cooler is operating at less than full capacity.
GENERAL
Name
SETTINGS
Cooler effectiveness
This field specifies the effectiveness that is applied to the wet-bulb depression to determine the conditions
leaving the cooler. This model assumes that the effectiveness is constant.
- 530 -
Drift loss fraction

This field is optional and can be used to model additional water consumed by the cooler from drift. Drift is
water that leaves the cooling media as droplets and does not evaporate into the process air stream. For
example, water may get blown off the evaporative media by winds and escape the air system. The value
entered here is a simple fraction of the water consumed by the cooler for normal process evaporation. The
amount of drift is this fraction times the water evaporated for the normal cooling process. This field can be left
blank and then there will be no added water consumption from drift.

This field is used to specify the power consumed by the water pump that circulates water (in W).
BLOWDOWN
Blowdown On
Select this option to model additional water consumed by the cooler from blowdown. Blowdown is water that is
intentionally drained from the coolers sump to offset the build up of solids in the water that would otherwise
occur because of evaporation.
Blowdown concentration ratio

The value entered here is dimensionless. It can be characterized as the ratio of solids in the blowdown water
to solids in the make up water. Typical values are 3 to 5. The default is 3.0.
OPERATION
Indirect CelDekPad
The dry coil indirect evaporative cooler, shown in the figure below, has a rigid media pad, similar to the direct
evaporative stage, where the adiabatic cooling takes place. The secondary air leaves the rigid media pad and
enters an air to air heat exchanger where it cools the supply air flowing through the heat exchanger tubes.
The moist secondary air is then exhausted to the environment. The secondary air stream has its own fan and
consists of a rigid media evaporative pad, with water recirculated from a reservoir. The water is pumped from
the reservoir to a water distribution header, for water feed by gravity from above the media. The evaporative
pad provides the area for the adiabatic saturation of the air.
- 531 -
The process that the secondary air goes through, A to C to D, is shown by the dashed lines in the following
figure. Process A to C is adiabatic cooling in the rigid media pad. Then the air enters the shell side of the heat
exchanger and is sensibly heated from C to D by the warm supply air passing through the tube side. The
secondary air inlet is modeled as a separate stream of outdoor air and the user has the option of defining the
name of an outdoor air node.
The advantage of the dry coil heat exchanger is that the heat exchanger does not have the evaporation taking
place on the outside of the tubes, thus no mineral deposits are left on the heat exchange surface to reduce
the efficiency of the heat exchanger. The rigid media pads are designed to flush the mineral deposits to the
sump, so the saturation efficiency of the pad stays relatively constant.
- 532 -
GENERAL
Name
SETTINGS
Direct pad area
The face area of the evaporative pad (in m2 or ft2). With the area and mass flow rate, the air velocity is
calculated and is used to determine the saturation efficiency on the secondary side of the evaporative cooler.
Direct pad depth

The depth of the evaporative pad in meters. The pad depth is used to determine the saturation efficiency on
the secondary side of the evaporative cooler.

This field is used to specify the power consumed by the evaporative cooler recirculating pump (in W).
SECONDARY FAN
Secondary fan flow rate
This field is used to specify the secondary fan flow rate and is specified in m3/s or ft3/min.
Secondary fan efficiency

This field is used to specify the total efficiency of the fan and is used to calculate the power consumed by the
evaporative cooler secondary fan. Input values should be between 0 and 1.
Secondary fan delta pressure

This field is used to specify the delta pressure across the secondary stage of the evaporative cooler (in Pa or
in H2O).
Indirect heat exchanger effectiveness

This field is used to specify the effectiveness of the indirect heat exchanger between the primary and
secondary air flow.
OPERATION
Indirect Wet Coil

The wetted coil evaporative cooler shown in the figure below, has water sprayed directly on the tubes of the
heat exchanger where latent cooling takes place. The vaporization of the water on the outside of the heat
exchanger tubes allows the simultaneous heat and mass transfer which removes heat from the supply air on
the tube side. Then the moist secondary air is exhausted. The secondary air stream has its own fan.
- 533 -
Evaporative Cooler Indirect Wet Coil

The process that the secondary air goes through, A to C on the following figure, is a path of simultaneous heat
and mass transfer, but it does not follow a line of constant enthalpy as in the direct stage. The process is not
adiabatic due to the heat gain from the supply air flowing through the tubes of the heat exchanger.
Secondary Air Process Indirect Wet Coil Evaporative Cooler
- 534 -
GENERAL
Name
SETTINGS
Coil maximum efficiency
The maximum efficiency of the stage is a combination of the efficiency due to the simultaneous heat and mass
transfer on the outside of the tube and the efficiency of the heat exchanger. This value can be higher than the
dry coil overall efficiency since the convective coefficients on the outside of the tube are larger.
Coil flow ratio

The Coil flow ratio is determined from performance data. The Coil Flow Ratio tells how quickly the efficiency of
the stage would decrease with a mismatch of the supply and secondary flows.
Drift loss fraction

Indirect heat exchanger effectiveness

This field is used to specify the effectiveness of the indirect heat exchanger between the primary and
secondary air flow.

This field is used to specify the power consumed by the water pump that circulates water (in W).
SECONDARY FAN


in H2O).
BLOWDOWN
Blowdown On

- 535 -
OPERATION
Indirect Research Special

This cooler is similar in principal to the Indirect CelDekPad and Indirect WetCoil Evaporative coolers. The
model differs in that it gives the user more flexibility to specify the source of secondary air. The cooler
effectiveness with respect to wet-bulb depression is allowed to go beyond 1. Using the Research Special
option also allows the cooler to control the amount of cooling based on node setpoints, controlled by Setpoint
managers. This avoids problems from over cooling when conditions are such that loads are low and cooling
power is high. Fan power is assumed to vary linearly when the cooler is operating at less than full capacity.
GENERAL
Name
SETTINGS
Cooler maximum effectiveness
This field specifies the maximum effectiveness that is applied to the wet-bulb depression to determine the
conditions leaving the cooler. This effectiveness is a complicated function of the efficiency with which heat and
mass are transferred on the secondary side and the efficiency of heat exchange between the secondary and
primary flows. The model assumes that the effectiveness is constant.
Dew-point effectiveness factor

This field specifies an effectiveness that is applied to the dew-point depression to determine a bound for the
conditions leaving the cooler. The model uses the warmer of the two temperatures determined from wet-bulb
depression and dew-point depression.
Drift loss fraction


This field is used to specify the power consumed by the water pump that circulates water (in W). The pump
power and energy consumption is reduced by cycling when the amount of cooling needs to be restricted for
control purposes.
SECONDARY FAN

- 536 -

in H2O).
BLOWDOWN
Blowdown On

OPERATION
Water to Water Heat Pumps / Ground Source Heat Pumps (GSHP)

One single physical water to water heat pump could provide either heating only, cooling only or both heating
and cooling. These configurations can be represented in DesignBuilder using Heat pump - heating and heat
pump - cooling components connected to hot and chilled water plant loops respectively. Where both heating
and cooling are provided by the same physical heat pump both heating and cooling heat pumps must be
included in the HVAC layout and the data entry for the heat pumps (especially flow rates), must be
coordinated.
The Supply side of the heat pump is usually connected to a Ground Heat Exchanger. The schematic diagram
below shows the layout and piping diagram of the water-to-water heat pump.
- 537 -
GSHP Loops
Ground source heat pumps systems are essentially made up of two loops (heating or cooling only cases) or
three loops (combined heating and cooling). In this case these 3 loops are required to represent the heat
pump system:
HW loop (for heating applications) - Hot water loop (Water-to-water heat pump heating)
CHW loop (for cooling applications) - Chilled water loop (Water-to-water heat pump cooling)
Condenser loop - Ground heat exchanger loop (exchanges heat with ground via either surface, pond or
vertical borehole types)
In addition to the above mandatory loops, the system may also require extra loops such as air loops for
specific room/block applications.
Tip: You are advised to work through the GSHP Case Study before attempting to model these systems for the
first time.
- 538 -
Example Layouts
Heating only
Cooling only
Heating and cooling
Component descriptions:
Water to Water Heat Pump - Heating

Water to Water Heat Pump - Cooling
Configuring GSHPs in DesignBuilder

Because GSHPs cannot be autosized in EnergyPlus some care is required in setting up these systems. This
section describes a process which ensures correct sizing and provides for correct interaction between the
various components involved. The process is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Run DesignBuilder Heating design and Cooling design calculations in order to get the maximum
heating and cooling loads for the system.
Choose/load a correctly sized water-to-water heat pump model from DesignBuilder database by
matching the peak heating/cooling loads with heat pumps Rated heating/cooling capacity. Or
alternatively, creating and applying your own heat pump data if its catalogue data is available (using
procedure described in the ).
Select ground heat exchanger (vertical) borehole numbers from that quick/simple sizing table; set flow
rate equal to the sum of Rated source side flow rate of heat pumps connecting to it, or use your own
tool to generate (and apply) a vertical ground heat exchanger case for specific conditions or
detailed/precise sizing.
Condenser loop: set flow rate equal to or greater than the flow rate of ground heat exchanger (vertical)
calculated above.
For more detail on these processes see the GSHP Case Study.
What about the EnergyPlus ParameterEstimation model?
The EnergyPlus ParameterEstimation model limits the refrigerant used to R22 and the compressor to the
reciprocating compressor type. However almost all water-to-water heat pumps presently on the market use
refrigerants other than R22 (R22 has of course been phased out recently for environmental reasons) and
equipped with scroll and other compressor types. So catalogue data is no longer available for the
ParameterEstimation model.
Also EnergyPlus strongly recommend using the EquationFit model instead of ParameterEstimation for
efficient and reliable modelling,
For these reasons DesignBuilder currently only provides the EquationFit water-to-water heat pump model.
Equation Fit Heat Pumps Technical
The Equation Fit model uses four non-dimensional equations or curves to predict the heat pump performance.
The same method is used in both cooling and heating modes.
The performance data used in the Equation Fit method is derived from manufacturers data through a preprocess step in which the generalized least square method is used to generate a set of performance
coefficients from manufacturer's catalogue data at indicated reference conditions. This is done in an
EnergyPlus spreadsheet. Then the calculated coefficients and indicated reference conditions are entered on
the heat pump dialog in the model to simulate the heat pump performance. A library of templates containing
pre-defined manufacturers heat pump data is provided to allow an early stage analysis to be carried out
without specific project equipment being specified.
The variables that influence the water-to-water heat pump performance include load side entering water
temperature, source side entering water temperature, source side water flow rate and load side water flow
rate. The governing equations for the cooling and heating modes are as follows:
- 539 -
Cooling Mode
Heating Mode:
Assuming no losses, the source side heat transfer rate for cooling and heating mode is calculated as:
Qsource,c = Qc + Powerc
Qsource,h = Qh - Powerh
Where:
A1-D5 EquationFit coefficients for the cooling and heating mode
Tref Reference temperature (using fixed 283.15K)
TL,in Load side entering water temperature (K)
TS,in Source side entering water temperature (K)
V L Load side volumetric flow rate (m3/s)
V S Source side volumetric flow rate (m3/s)
VL,ref Reference load side volumetric flow rate (m3/s)
V S,ref Reference source side volumetric flow rate (m3/s)
Qc Load side heat transfer rate (cooling mode) (W)
Powerc Power consumption (cooling mode) (W)
Qsource,c Source side heat transfer rate (cooling mode) (W)
Qh Load side heat transfer rate (heating mode) (W)
Qh,ref Reference load side heat transfer rate (heating mode) (W)
Powerh Power consumption (heating mode) (W)
Powerh,ref Reference power consumption (heating mode) (W)
Qsource,h Source side heat transfer rate (heating mode) (W)
Water to Water Heat Pump heating

General
Name
This alpha field contains the unique identifying name for the water to water heat pump.
Template
You can use this control to load data to the dialog from a pre-defined heat pump template as a starting point
for your particular heat pump component. A sample list of manufacturers data is provided in the templates and
instructions on how to create your own templates from manufacturers data.
Heat pumps are usually selected using their Rated heating capacity.
- 540 -
Type
DesignBuilder provides the EnergyPlus Equation Fit water to water heat pump model. EnergyPlus also
provides the Parameter Estimation model but this only supports R22 refrigerant which is no longer permitted
in new designs. Because of this and other technical limitations in the model, DesignBuilder have now removed
this option so the Type control is currently disabled and is fixed as 1-Equation fit.
Rated load side flow rate

This numeric field contains the rated volumetric flow rate on the load side of the heat pump in (m3/s or
gal/min). This corresponds to the highest load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalogue data.
Rated source side flow rate

This numeric field contains the rated volumetric flow rate on the source side of the heat pump in (m3/s or
Rated heating capacity

This numeric field contains the rated heating capacity of the heat pump in W. This corresponds to the highest
load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalogue data.
Rated heating power consumption

This numeric field contains the rated power consumption of the heat pump in W. This corresponds to the
highest load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalogue data.
Heating Capacity Coefficients

Five fields are used to describe the coefficients for the Heating capacity curve. More details on how these
coefficients are used are provided in the technical section of the Water to water heat pumps page and in the
Engineering Reference.
Heating capacity coefficient 1-5

These numeric fields contain the five coefficients for the heat pump capacity.
Heating Compressor Power Coefficients

Five fields are used to describe the coefficients for the Heating compressor power consumption curve. More
details on how these coefficients are used are provided in the technical section of the Water to water heat
pumps page and in the Engineering Reference.
Heating compressor power coefficient 1-5

These numeric fields contain the five coefficients for the heat pump power consumption.
Advanced
Cycle time
The full on and off cycle time of the heat pump unit in hours. You are advised to leave this data at the default
value of 0.0161 hours (1 minute) which is also the minimum value. The maximum allowed value is 0.1 hours
(6 minutes) but note that using values higher than the default can prevent correct operation of the heat pump.
- 541 -
Recommendation For Efficient Use

The highest supply water temperature provided in catalogue data for heating heat pumps is normally between
50C-60C. This is not generally hot enough to supply hot water radiators and heating coils. However,
EneryPlus does not limit the output water temperature to the catalogue maximum, so in practice, if setpoints
allow it, supply water temperatures can achieve the typical hot water radiator/baseboard temperature levels of
75C-80C.
The figure below uses Carrier model 50PSW036 (highest leaving water temperature 51.8C) heating as an
example to show the impact of using heat pumps outside their intended operation regime. Extrapolation of
catalogue data is not normally recommended however a simple trend line (following red coloured line) shows
that the COP of the heat pump will be much reduced at ~1.38 when output water temperature reaches 80C.
So this sort of system configuration is clearly not as energy efficient as a low temperature system such as a
heated floor which require supply temperatures around 35C and give COPs of over 4 at this leaving water
temperature. Underfloor heating is therefore recommended for use with GSHP.
Water to Water Heat Pump Cooling

General
Name
This alpha field contains the unique identifying name for the water to water heat pump.
Template
You can use this control to load data to the dialog from a pre-defined heat pump template as a starting point
for your particular heat pump component. A sample list of manufacturers data is provided in the templates and
instructions on how to create your own templates from manufacturers data.
- 542 -
Type
DesignBuilder provides the EnergyPlus Equation Fit water to water heat pump model. EnergyPlus also
provides the Parameter Estimation model but this only supports R22 refrigerant which is no longer permitted
in new designs. Because of this and other technical limitations in the model, DesignBuilder have now removed
this option so the Type control is currently disabled and is fixed as 1-Equation fit.
Rated load side flow rate

This numeric field contains the rated volumetric flow rate on the load side of the heat pump in (m3/s or
Rated source side flow rate

This numeric field contains the rated volumetric flow rate on the source side of the heat pump in (m3/s or
Rated cooling capacity

This numeric field contains the rated cooling capacity of the heat pump in W. This corresponds to the highest
load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalogue data.
Rated cooling power consumption

This numeric field contains the rated power consumption of the heat pump in W. This corresponds to the
highest load side heat transfer rate listed in the catalogue data.
Cooling Capacity Coefficients

Five fields are used to describe the coefficients for the Cooling Capacity curve. More details on how these
coefficients are used are provided in the technical section of the Water to water heat pumps page and in the
Engineering Reference.
Cooling capacity coefficient 1-5

These numeric fields contain the five coefficients for the heat pump capacity.
Cooling Compressor Power Coefficients

Five fields are used to describe the coefficients for the Cooling Compressor Power consumption curve. More
details on how these coefficients are used are provided in the technical section of the Water to water heat
pumps page and in the Engineering Reference.
Cooling compressor power coefficient 1-5

These numeric fields contain the five coefficients for the heat pump power consumption.
Advanced
Cycle time
The full on and off cycle time of the heat pump unit in hours. You are advised to leave this data at the default
value of 0.0161 hours (1 minute) which is also the minimum value. The maximum allowed value is 0.1 hours
(6 minutes) but note that using values higher than the default can prevent correct operation of the heat pump.
Generating Heat Pump Coefficients from Manufacturers Data

In order to allow manufacturer's heat pump catalogue data to be used, EnergyPlus provides spreadsheets to
generate heating/cooling capacity coefficients (1 to 5) and compressor power coefficients (1 to 5) for each
heat pump model. The spreadsheets and relevant documents from EnergyPlus,
HeatPumpWatertoWaterWatertoAirSpreadsheets and Docs, can be accessed at:
- 543 -
http://energyplus.helpserve.com/Knowledgebase/Article/View/83/39/heatpump-watertowater-watertoairspreadsheets-and-docs
Processing Catalogue Data

The following briefly introduces how to use spreadsheets mentioned above to generate datasets in the
required formats from manufacturers catalogue data.
Manufacturers catalogues normally provides more data points than are needed to generate coefficients for
the EnergyPlus heat pumps. The EnergyPlus spreadsheet only requires 7 fields:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
i.e., source side entering water temperature (EWT),

source side flow rate,
load side EWT
load side flow rate,
output (heating/cooling output),
input (compressor power input) and
heat of extraction (HE in heating mode)/heat of rejection (HR in cooling mode).
These seven fields must be rearranged as columns in the order specified by the EnergyPlus spreadsheet
before attempting to generate the relevant coefficients.
The more data points used, the more accurate the calculation of the coefficients. As EnergyPlus states, the
minimum data points for EF based model are 5. However, the data points must involve various inlet conditions
(e.g. water flow rates, inlet water temperatures, etc.) that cover the entire range of the heat pump operating
conditions.
Some catalogue data is in IP units, however the EnergyPlus spreadsheets can take data in either SI or IP
units (data in IP units will be converted to SI units after a button is clicked in the spreadsheets). All processing
is carried out using SI units.
The figure below shows how the relevant catalogue data is rearranged to the format EnergyPlus spreadsheets
require and how the links between the two are established starting with the manufacturer's table on the right
table and copying relevant data to the spreadsheet shown on the left). The example is based on a Carrier
heat pump model 50PSW180 heating mode .
- 544 -
Reference Condition Explanation And EquationFit Functionality

Verification
Using Carrier water-to-water heat pump model 50PSW036 (heating) sample data as an example, the figure
below describes where the reference data used in equations is allocated. Applying coefficients and referenced
data into equations, the heating output and power (electric) input figures can be calculated (two columns at
the bottom of the figure). These calculated figures show a good consistency with original catalogue data,
proving a working functionality of EquationFit model.
- 545 -
Recommendation for efficient use when heating

The highest supply water temperature provided in catalogue data is normally between 50C-60C. This is not
normally hot enough to supply hot water radiators and heating coils and you are advised not to connect to
water radiators to these systems. However, EneryPlus does not limit the output water temperature to the
catalogue maximum, so in practice, if setpoints allow it, supply water temperatures can achieve the typical hot
water radiator/baseboard temperature levels of 75C-80C. The figure below uses Carrier model 50PSW036
(highest leaving water temperature 51.8C) heating as an example to show the impact of using heat pumps in
this way. Extrapolation of catalogue data is not normally recommended however the trend line (following red
coloured line) shows its COP value is much reduced at 1.38 when output water temperature reaches 80C. So
this sort of system configuration is clearly not nearly as energy efficient as a low temperature system such as
a heated floor which require supply temperatures around 35C. Underfloor heating is therefore recommended
for use with GSHP.
- 546 -
GSHP Case Study

Create a building model first then follow the steps below to set up a round source heat pump (GSHP) system
using vertical boreholes to provide both heating through heated floors and cooling through chilled beams.
1. Run DesignBuilder Heating design calculation, obtain peak heating

load.
In this case, peak heating load is 85 kW.
2. Run DesignBuilder Cooling design calculation, obtain peak cooling

load.
- 547 -
In this case, (coincidently) the peak cooling load is also 85 kW.
3. Create detailed HVAC system of ground source heat pump model.

The layout below shows a typical heating and cooling application. This was loaded from the GSHP - Heated
Floor and Chilled Beams HVAC template but you can create a similar layout from scratch to suit your
particular configuration.
4. Set heat pump heating component data.

Load an appropriate heat pump model from template using the heat pump Rated heating capacity data to
match the heat pump with the design heating load calculated in step 1. You can see in the example below a
heat pump having 104.6 kW has been selected to meet the peak heating load of 85 kW giving some spare
capacity.
- 548 -
Alternatively you can create your own heating capacity coefficients and heating compressor power coefficients
together with rated flow rates, rated heating capacity and rated heating power consumption from catalogue
data.
Note that the rated load side flow rate for the selected heat pump is 0.00442 m3/s.
5. Set heat pump cooling component data.

Load an appropriate heat pump model from template using the heat pump Rated cooling capacity data to
match the heat pump with the design cooling load calculated in step 2. You can see in the example below a
heat pump having 102 kW has been selected to meet the peak cooling load of 85 kW giving some spare
capacity.
Alternatively you can create your own cooling capacity coefficients and cooling compressor power coefficients
together with rated flow rates, rated heating capacity and rated cooling power consumption from catalogue
data.
Note that the rated load side flow rate for the selected heat pump is 0.00442 m3/s.
- 549 -
6. Set ground heat exchanger data.

Open the Ground heat exchanger dialog and use the quick sizing table to decide which template to load.
Rounding up design heating and cooling loads from 85 kW to 90 kW you can see that 40 boreholes are
required to meet this combination of loads.
Change both Design flow rate and Maximum flow rate to 0.00884 which is the sum of 0.00442 + 0.00442
for the heat pump heating and heat pump cooling components respectively. Refer to steps 4 and 5. If you
have used your own specific heat pump heating/cooling data generated from catalogue data you should alter
this flow rate figure accordingly.
- 550 -
7. Set condenser loop flow rate.

Change Maximum loop flow rate from Autosize to 0.00884, the same as (or greater than) ground heat
exchanger flow rate, derived in step 6.
Important note: You must not use Autosize for condensers connected to GSHPs.
- 551 -
8. Turn on ground floors internal source in order to apply underfloor

heating system.
Edit any Ground floor, Internal floor or External floor constructions where the underfloor heating applies to
ensure that an internal source is included in the construction.
To ensure the best heat transfer from the embedded hot water pipes to the room occupied region, the
innermost layer (top layer) of the construction should have a relatively small thickness using thermally
conductive timber flooring or tiles rather than a more insulating material such as carpet.
On the Internal source tab, check the Internal source option and assign the position of the internal source
within the construction layers. The internal source layer should normally be placed at one layer below (inside)
innermost layer.
- 552 -
9. Run simulation and check the results.

(1) Summer modelling results:
- 553 -
During occupied hours each day in summer, room air temperature was controlled well at 24C (cooling
setpoint temperature is 24C).
(2) Winter modelling results:
During occupied hours each day in winter, room air temperature was controlled at about 23C (heating
setpoint temperature is 22C).
Performance Curves
Curve:Linear
Used in many HVAC components as well as electrical storage
Curve:Quadratic
devices
Curve:Cubic
Curve:Quartic
Curve:Exponent
Curve:Bicubic
Curve:Biquadratic
Curve:RectangularHyperbola2
Curve:DoubleExponentialDecay
This group of objects primarily consists of polynomial curves that are used to characterize the performance of
HVAC equipment. Several other non-polynomial curves are also included to characterize the performance of
pumps and fans. All of the curves are input, stored, and evaluated entirely within the EnergyPlus Curve
Manager module. The curves are usually derived from fits or regressions to data covering a limited range.
Results for independent variable values outside this range are likely to be invalid, so curve input always
- 554 -
contains a range of validity (maximum and minimum permitted values) for each independent variable and can
optionally have limits on the curve output. No error or warning message is issued if an independent variable is
outside the range. Instead, the Curve Manager uses the minimum value if an independent variable is less
than the minimum, and the maximum if a variable exceeds the maximum. Similarly, no error or warning
message is issued if the curve output is outside the range of the optional minimum and maximum curve output
limits. Instead, the Curve Manager uses the minimum and maximum curve limits to cap the output of the
performance curve.
The curve data follow a similar pattern and all have the same first 4 data items:
Name
A user assigned unique name for a curve. When a curve is used, it is referenced by this name.
Note
Specific information about the curve.
Source
Where the curve was derived from (usually either EnergyPlus, meaning it comes from the EnergyPlus curves
database, which is largely derived from the DOE-2 database, or DesignBuilder meaning that the curve is
provided by DesignBuilder Software)
Category
The category can be one of:
Linear
Quadratic
Cubic
Exponent
Bi-Quadratic
Bi-Cubic
Quartic
Rectangular Hyperbola 2
Double Exponential Decay
The rest of the data depends on the category as described below.
Linear
Input for the linear curve consists of a curve name, the two coefficients, and the maximum and minimum valid
independent variable values. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the output
of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the linear curve is:
y = C 1 + C2 * x
Coefficient 1 Constant
The constant coefficient (C1) in the equation.
- 555 -
Coefficient 2 X
The linear coefficient (C2) in the equation.
Minimum Value Of X
The minimum allowable value of x. Values of x less than the minimum will be replaced by the minimum.
Maximum Value Of X
The maximum allowable value of x. Values of x greater than the maximum will be replaced by the maximum.
Minimum Curve Output

The minimum allowable value of the evaluated curve. Values less than the minimum will be replaced by the
minimum.
Maximum Curve Output

The maximum allowable value of the evaluated curve. Values greater than the maximum will be replaced by
the maximum.
Input Unit Type For X

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the x values. It is used by editor to
display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of X and Maximum Value of x. The unit
conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these options
are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion.
Dimensionless
Temperature
VolumetricFlow
MassFlow
Distance
Power
Output Unit Type

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the output values. It is used by IDF
Editor to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Curve Output and Maximum Curve Output.
The unit conversion is not applied to the coefficients. The available options are shown below. If none of these
options are appropriate, select Dimensionless which will have no unit conversion.
Dimensionless
Capacity
Power
- 556 -
Quadratic
Input for a quadratic curve consists of the curve name, the three coefficients, and the maximum and minimum
valid independent variable values. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the
output of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the quadratic curve is:
2
y = C 1 + C2 * x + C 3 * x
Coefficient 2 X
Coefficient 3 X 2
The quadratic coefficient (C3) in the equation.
Minimum Value Of X
Maximum Value Of X

minimum.

the maximum.

display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of x and Maximum Value of x. The unit
- 557 -
Dimensionless
Temperature
VolumetricFlow
MassFlow
Distance
Power
Output Unit Type

Dimensionless
Capacity
Power
Cubic
Input for a cubic curve consists of the curve name, the 4 coefficients, and the maximum and minimum valid
independent variable values. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the output
of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the cubic curve is:
2
3
y = C 1 + C2 * x + C 3 * x + C 4 * x
Coefficient 2 X
Coefficient 3 X 2
Coefficient 4 X 3
Minimum Value Of X
- 558 -
Maximum Value Of X

minimum.

the maximum.

Dimensionless
Temperature
VolumetricFlow
MassFlow
Distance
Power
Output Unit Type

Dimensionless
Capacity
Power
Exponent
Input for a exponent curve consists of the curve name, the 3 coefficients, and the maximum and minimum
valid independent variable values. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the
output of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation represented by the exponent curve is:
C3
y = C 1 + C2 * x
- 559 -
The exponent coefficient (C3) in the equation.
Minimum Value Of X
Maximum Value Of X

minimum.

the maximum.

Dimensionless
Temperature
VolumetricFlow
MassFlow
Distance
Power
Output Unit Type

- 560 -
Dimensionless
Capacity
Power
Bi-quadratic
This curve is a function of two independent variables. Input consists of the curve name, the six coefficients,
and min and max values for each of the independent variables. Optional inputs for curve minimum and
maximum may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g. limit extrapolation). The equation
represented by the biquadratic curve is:
2
2
z = C1 + C2 * x + C3 * x + C4* y + C5 * y + C6*xy
Coefficient 2 X
Coefficient 3 X 2
Coefficient 4 Y
The coefficient C4 in the equation.
Coefficient 5 Y 2
Coefficient 6 Xy
Minimum Value Of X
Maximum Value Of X
- 561 -
Minimum Value Of Y
The minimum allowable value of y. Values of y less than the minimum will be replaced by the minimum.
Maximum Value Of Y
The maximum allowable value of y. Values of y greater than the maximum will be replaced by the maximum.

minimum.

the maximum.

Dimensionless
Temperature
VolumetricFlow
MassFlow
Distance
Power
Input Unit Type For Y

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the y values. It is used by editor to
display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of y and Maximum Value of y. The unit
Dimensionless
Temperature
VolumetricFlow
MassFlow
Distance
Power
- 562 -
Output Unit Type

1.
2.
3.
Dimensionless
Capacity
Power
Bi-cubic
This curve type is a function of two independent variables. Input consists of the curve name, the ten
coefficients, and the minimum and maximum values for each of the independent variables. Optional inputs for
curve minimum and maximum may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g. limit
extrapolation). The equation represented by the bicubic curve is:
2
2
3+
3
2
2
z = C1 + C2 * x + C3* x + C4* y + C5 * y + C6*xy + C7* x C8* y + C9 * x y + C10 * xy
Coefficient 2 X
Coefficient 3 X 2
Coefficient 4 Y
Coefficient 5 Y 2
Coefficient 6 Xy
Coefficient 7 X 3
- 563 -
Coefficient 8 Y 3
Coefficient 9 X 2 Y
Coefficient 10 Xy 2
Minimum Value Of X
Maximum Value Of X
Minimum Value Of Y
The minimum allowable value of y. Values of y less than the minimum will be replaced by the minimum.
Maximum Value Of Y
The maximum allowable value of y. Values of y greater than the maximum will be replaced by the maximum.

minimum.

the maximum.
- 564 -

display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of X and Maximum Value of x. The unit
Dimensionless
Temperature
VolumetricFlow
MassFlow
Distance
Power
Input Unit Type For Y

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the y values. It is used by editor to
display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of y and Maximum Value of y. The unit
Dimensionless
Temperature
VolumetricFlow
MassFlow
Distance
Power
Output Unit Type

Dimensionless
Capacity
Power
Quartic
Input for a Quartic (fourth order polynomial) curve consists of the curve name, the five coefficients, and the
maximum and minimum valid independent variable values. Optional inputs for curve minimum and maximum
may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g., limit extrapolation). The equation represented
by the quartic curve is:
2
y = C1 + C2 * x + C3 * x + C4 * x + C5 * x
- 565 -
Coefficient 2 X
Coefficient 3 X 2
Coefficient 4 X 3
The cubic coefficient (C4) in the equation.
Coefficient 5 X 4
The fourth-order coefficient (C5) in the equation.
Minimum Value Of X
Maximum Value Of X

minimum.
Maximum Value Of X
the maximum.

This field is used to indicate the kind of units that may be associated with the x values. It is used by IDF Editor
to display the appropriate SI and IP units for the Minimum Value of X and Maximum Value of x. The unit
Dimensionless
Temperature
- 566 -
VolumetricFlow
MassFlow
Distance
Power
Output Unit Type

Dimensionless
Capacity
Power
Rectangular Hyperbola 2
Input for the single rectangular hyperbola type 2 curve consists of the curve name, the three coefficients, and
the maximum and minimum valid independent variable values. Optional inputs for the curve minimum and
maximum may be used to limit the output of the performance curve (e.g., limit extrapolation). The equation is:
y = (C1* x) / (C2 + x) + C3* x
Coefficient 1 C 1
The required numeric constant coefficient C1 in the equation.
Coefficient 2 C 2
Coefficient 3 C 3
Minimum Value Of X
The required numeric minimum allowable value of x. Values of x less than the minimum will b e replaced by
the minimum.
Maximum Value Of X
The required numeric maximum allowable value of x. Values of x greater than the maximum will be replaced
by the maximum.
- 567 -

The optional numeric minimum allowable value of the evaluated curve. Values less than the minimum will be
replaced by the minimum.

The optional numeric maximum allowable value of the evaluated curve. Values greater than the maximum will
be replaced by the maximum.

This optional field is provided for future purposes so that DesignBuilder could display the appropriate SI or IP
units for the Minimum Value of x and Maximum Value of x (currently dimensionless). At this time, only the
Dimensionless option is provided so that no unit conversion is used for this curve.
Output Unit Type

This optional field is provided for future purposes so that DesignBuilder could display the appropriate SI or IP
units for the Minimum Curve Output and Maximum Curve Output (currently dimensionless). At this time, only
the Dimensionless option is provided so that no unit conversion is used for this curve.
Double Exponential Decay

Input for the double exponential decay curve consists of the curve name, the five coefficients, and the
maximum and minimum valid independent variable values. Optional inputs for the curve include the minimum
and maximum output of the performance curve. The equation is:
y = C1 + C2 exp( C3 x) + C4 exp(C5 x)
Coefficient 1 C 1
Coefficient 2 C 2
Coefficient 3 C 3
Coefficient 4 C 4
- 568 -
Coefficient 5 C 5
Minimum Value Of X
The required numeric minimum allowable value of x. Values of x less than the minimum will be replaced by
the minimum
Maximum Value Of X
The required numeric maximum allowable value of x. Values of x greater than the maximum will be replaced
by the maximum

The optional numeric minimum allowable value of the evaluated curve. Values less than the minimum will be
replaced by the minimum

The optional numeric maximum allowable value of the evaluated curve. Values greater than the maximum will
be replaced by the maximum.

The optional field is provided for future purposes so that DesignBuilder could display the appropriate SI or IP
units for the Minimum and Maximum Value of x. Currently, only Dimensionless option is provided so that no
unit conversion is used for this curve
Output Unit Type

The optional field is provided for future purposes so that DesignBuilder could display the appropriate SI or IP
units for the Minimum and Maximum Curve Ouput. Currently, only Dimensionless option is provided so that no
unit conversion is used for this curve.
Editing Zone Group Data

Zone group data can be accessed as follows:
General tab, where the building zones to be included in the zone group are selected.
Heating and Cooling Sequence tab where the order of simulation is defined for each item of zone
equipment.
Zone defaults tab which is hidden by default but can be displayed when the Show HVAC zone default
data on the HVAC zone group dialog Program option is selected.
- 569 -
See also Understanding HVAC Zone Groups.
General Tab
Title
This is the name that you assign to the zone group. The name must be unique and if a duplicate name is
entered, the software will automatically append an integer in order to ensure a unique name.
Zones In Group
This is a tree control with checkboxes that you can use to define which building zones are to be added to the
zone group. Only zones that have not already been assigned to other zone groups or plenums are made
available for selection.
Tip: You can use the checkboxes at building and block levels as a fast way to select/deselect all of the
available zones in the building or block.
Heating and Cooling Calculation Sequence Tab

Heating and cooling sequences are used to specify the order in which items of equipment are simulated by
EnergyPlus in order to satisfy a heating or cooling load. Select a value of 1 against the system that should be
simulated first. In the example below for a DOAS air system and a FCU, the Direct air ADU has been set up to
be calculated before the FCU to ensure that any loads introduced by the fresh air can be met by the FCU.
- 570 -
If the calculation sequence had been set up the other way round then the FCU is unlikely to have been able to
accurately meet heating and cooling setpoints since it would not be accounting for the load introduced by the
ADU.
Note 1: The heating and cooling calculation sequence can only be assigned after equipment has been added
to one of the constituent HVAC zones.
Note 2: When a Zone group includes both heating and/or cooling zone equipment with an ADU providing
ventilation air, DesignBuilder will by default set up the calculation sequence so that the air system is simulated
first and other zone equipment after that. This will generally be the correct setting as mentioned above, it
ensures that any air load resulting from the supply of centrally delivered air to the zone can be met by the
other zone equipment. However you can change that behaviour manually by selecting zone equipment to
simulate first.
Zone defaults
When the Show HVAC zone default data on the HVAC zone group dialog Program option is selected you can
enter default settings which will be used to initialise any HVAC zones subsequently added to this HVAC zone
group. Making changes to these zone defaults values do not affect HVAC zones once they have been
created.
Tip: The most important application of HVAC zone group default data is when saving HVAC templates where
specific HVAC zone settings are required. Any HVAC zone settings made in the source model are not saved
with an HVAC template, but the settings on the HVAC zone group are saved and applied to zones added to
the HVAC zone group when the template is subsequently loaded in the destination model.
Editing HVAC Zone Data

Zone data is divided using two tabs:
General
Target
The first tab which is the General tab is used to define temperature and humidity control together with zone
sizing information (Cooling Sizing, Heating Sizing and Outdoor Air Sizing). The Cooling sizing and Heating
sizing information provides the data needed to perform a zone design air flow calculation for a single zone.
This calculation assumes a variable amount of supply air at a fixed temperature and humidity. The information
needed consists of the zone inlet supply air conditions: temperature and humidity ratio for heating and cooling.
The calculation is done for every design day included in the input. The maximum cooling load and air flow and
the maximum heating load and air flow are then saved for the system level design calculations and for the
component automatic sizing calculations. The Outdoor air sizing information is used to define the design
outdoor air flow rate. This can be specified in a number of ways as described under Outdoor air method. This
data is then used in the EnergyPlus system sizing calculation for sizing zone components that use outside air.
You can also place limits on the heating and design cooling air flow rates. See Heating design air flow method
and Cooling design air flow method and the explanations of the various heating and cooling flow input fields.
See also the section on Autosizing HVAC Components
The second Target tab is used to specify which other zones in the zone group the changes will be applied to.
Edit HVAC Zone Data - General Tab

Data on this tab is used for controlling the zone internal conditions during the simulation and also for
autosizing heating, cooling and outside air equipment related to the zone.
- 571 -
General
Name
This is the name of the building zone with which the current HVAC zone is linked.
Thermostat Schedules
Detailed HVAC Activity data set to 2-Detailed HVAC
If the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option is set then you can select schedules
defining zone heating and cooling setpoint temperatures on this dialog. Otherwise, if the 1-Simple HVAC
option is selected then zone setpoint temperatures and schedules are defined on the Activity and HVAC
model data tabs respectively and the Thermostat schedule data is not displayed on this dialog.
Note: The temperatures defined in these schedules must be in C regardless of whether you are using IP or
SI units in the interface.
Thermostat heating setpoint schedule

This is the zone heating temperature schedule. Values in the schedule are temperatures (in C).
Thermostat cooling setpoint schedule

This is the zone cooling temperature schedule. Values in the schedule are temperatures (in C).
Comfort PMV Setpoint Schedules

Detailed HVAC Activity data set to 2-Detailed HVAC
If the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option is set then you can select schedules which
define zone heating and cooling setpoint PMV values on this dialog. Otherwise, if the 1-Simple HVAC option
is selected then zone setpoint PMV values and schedules are defined on the Activity and HVAC model data
tabs respectively and the Thermostat schedule data is not displayed on this dialog.
The Thermal comfort calculator tool can be used to derive PMV values based on perhaps more familiar
parameters.
Heating PMV setpoint schedule

This is the zone heating PMV schedule. Values in the schedule are PMV indices, typically in the range -3 to 3.
Thermostat cooling setpoint schedule

This is the zone cooling PMV schedule. Values in the schedule are PMV indices, typically in the range -3 to 3.
Humidistat Control
Humidistat control
This check-box is used to specify whether or not the zone has humidity control.
Detailed HVAC Activity data is 1-Simple HVAC
- 572 -
If the 1-Simple HVAC option is selected then zone RH setpoints on the Activity tab are used and the
demand schedule data on this dialog defines the times when these setpoints operate.
Humidifying demand schedule

This is a schedule that defines the times when humidification may be required. The schedule should
have only values of 0 (for times when no humidification is required) or 1 (when humidification to the
humidification setpoint defined on the Activity tab is required).
Dehumidifying demand schedule

This is a schedule that defines the times when dehumidification may be required. The schedule should
have only values of 0 (for times when no dehumidification is required) or 1 (when dehumidification to
the dehumidification setpoint defined on the Activity tab is required).
Detailed HVAC Activity data is 2-Detailed HVAC
defining zone relative humidity setpoints on this dialog.
Humidifying RH setpoint schedule

This is a schedule that defines the humidifying relative humidity setpoint, expressed as a percentage
(0-100), for each timestep of the simulation.
Dehumidifying RH setpoint schedule

This is a schedule that defines the dehumidifying relative humidity setpoint, expressed as a percentage
(0-100), for each timestep of the simulation.
The rest of the General tab of the HVAC Zone dialog is related to Detailed HVAC autosizing calculations only.
CO2 And Contaminant Control

CO2 and contaminant control
This check-box is used to specify whether or not the zone has CO2 or contaminant control. This must be
selected if the zone is to have maximum CO2 or generic contaminant concentration controlled through one of
the IAQP DCV methods.
Note: For AHUs with IAQP control at least one connected HVAC zone must have this option selected. This
option should not be selected for other types of DCV control.
Detailed HVAC Activity data is 1-Simple HVAC
If the 1-Simple HVAC option is selected then fixed contaminant setpoints from the Activity tab are used
and no further data needs to be entered here.
Detailed HVAC Activity data is 2-Detailed HVAC
defining time-varying CO2 and contaminant setpoints on this dialog.
CO2 control availability schedule

This is a schedule that defines the availability of CO2 control for each timestep of the simulation.
CO2 setpoint schedule

This is a schedule that defines the CO2 setpoint in ppm, for each timestep of the simulation.
Minimum CO2 concentration schedule

This is a schedule that defines the minimum concentration of CO2 in ppm, for each timestep of the
simulation.
- 573 -
Generic contaminant control availability schedule

This is a schedule that defines the availability of Generic contaminant control for each timestep of the
simulation.
Generic contaminant setpoint schedule

This is a schedule that defines the Generic contaminant setpoint in ppm, for each timestep of the
simulation. Enter values between 0 and 1.
More information on DCV is available in the DCV control section of the AHU help page.
The rest of the General tab of the HVAC Zone dialog is related to Detailed HVAC autosizing calculations only.
Cooling Sizing
Cooling design supply air temperature
This is the supply air temperature (in C or F) for the zone cooling air flow rate calculation. Air is supplied to
the zone at this temperature during the cooling design day simulation; the zone load is met by varying the
zone air flow rate. The maximum zone flow rate is used as the zone cooling design air flow rate.
Cooling design supply air humidity ratio

This is the humidity ratio in kilograms of water per kilogram of dry air of the supply air in the zone cooling
autosizing air flow rate calculation.
Cooling minimum air flow fraction

This is the minimum zone design cooling volumetric flow rate expressed as a fraction of the zone design
cooling volumetric flow rate for VAV systems only. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Cooling
minimum flow per zone floor area, Cooling minimum air flow, and Cooling minimum air flow fraction is used to
set a minimum supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is zero. This input is currently
used in sizing the fan minimum flow rate. It does not affect other component auto-sizing.
Note: This value is only used when the zone is connected to a VAV Air loop, in which case this data is used
for sizing and not for the simulation itself.
Zone cooling sizing factor

This is the zone level cooling sizing ratio. The zone design cooling air flow rates and loads will be multiplied by
the number input in this field. The default value comes from the Zone group dialog whose default Zone
cooling sizing factor is the ASHRAE recommended cooling oversizing factor of 1.15.
Cooling design air flow method
1-Design day means the program will calculate the zone design cooling air flow rate using the zone
cooling sizing information and a design day simulation without imposing any limits other than those set
by the minimum outside air requirements.
2-Flow/zone means that the program will use the Cooling design air flow rate as the zone design
cooling air flow rate.
3-Design day with limit means that the maximum from Cooling minimum flow per zone floor area and
Cooling minimum air flow will set a lower limit on the design maximum cooling air flow rate.
Cooling design air flow rate

This is the design zone cooling air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is only required if Cooling design
air flow method is specified as 2-Flow/zone. This value will be multiplied by the global or zone sizing factor
and by zone multipliers.
Cooling minimum flow per zone floor area

This is the minimum zone cooling volumetric flow rate per square meter (units are m 3/s-m2). This setting is
only required if the Cooling design air flow method is specified as 3-Design day with limit. In this case it sets
a lower bound on the zone design cooling air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Cooling
- 574 -
minimum flow per zone floor area, Cooling minimum air flow, and Cooling minimum air flow fraction is used to
set a minimum supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.000762 m 3/s-m2,
corresponding to 0.15 cfm/ft2. The applicable sizing factor is not applied to this value.
Cooling minimum air flow

This is the minimum zone cooling volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s). This field is used when Cooling design air flow
method is specified as 3-Design day with limit. In this case it sets a lower bound on the zone design cooling
air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Cooling minimum flow per zone floor area, Cooling
minimum air flow, and Cooling minimum air flow fraction is used to set a minimum supply air flow rate for the
zone for VAV systems. The default is zero. The applicable sizing factor is not applied to this value.
Heating Sizing
Heating design supply air temperature
This is the supply air temperature (in C or F) for the zone heating design air flow rate calculation. Air is
supplied to the zone at this temperature during the heating design day simulation, The zone load is met by
varying the zone air flow rate. The maximum zone flow rate is used as the zone heating design air flow rate.
Heating design supply air humidity ratio

This is the humidity ratio in kilograms of water per kilogram of dry air of the supply air in the zone heating
design air flow rate calculation.
Zone heating sizing factor

This is the zone level heating sizing ratio. The zone design heating air flow rates and loads will be multiplied
by the number input in this field. The default value comes from the Zone group dialog whose default Zone
heating sizing factor is the ASHRAE recommended heating oversizing factor of 1.25.
Heating design air flow method

There are three options;
1-Design day means the program will calculate the zone design heating air flow rate using the zone
heating sizing information and a design day simulation without imposing any limits other than those set
by the minimum outside air requirements.
2-Flow/zone means that the program will use the Heating design air flow rate as the zone design
heating air flow rate.
3-Design day with limit means that the maximum from Heating maximum flow per zone floor area and
Heating maximum air flow will set a lower limit on the design maximum heating air flow rate.
Heating design air flow rate

This is the design zone heating air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is only required if Heating design
air flow method is specified as 2-Flow/zone. This value will be multiplied by the global or zone sizing factor
and by zone multipliers.
Heating maximum flow per zone floor area

This is the maximum zone heating volumetric flow rate per square metre (units are m 3/s-m2). This setting is
only required if the Heating design air flow method is specified as 3-DesignDayWithLimit. In this case it sets
an upper bound on the zone design heating air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Heating
maximum flow per zone floor area, Heating maximum air flow, and Heating maximum air flow fraction is used
to set a maximum heating supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.002032 m 3/s-m2,
corresponding to .40 cfm/ft2. This input is not currently used for auto-sizing any of the components.
Heating maximum air flow

This is the maximum zone heating volumetric flow rate in m 3/s. This setting is only required if the Heating
design air flow method is specified as 3-Design day with limit. In this case it sets an upper bound on the
zone design heating air flow rate. In all cases the maximum flow derived from Heating maximum flow per zone
floor area, Heating maximum air flow, and Heating maximum air flow fraction is used to set a maximum
heating supply air flow rate for the zone for VAV systems. The default is 0.14158 m 3/s, corresponding to 300
cfm. This input is not currently used for auto-sizing any of the components.
- 575 -
Outdoor Air Sizing

When the Detailed HVAC Activity data is set to 1-Simple HVAC then all data under the Outdoor Air Sizing
header is disabled and the outdoor air requirement settings are copied from the corresponding building zones'
Activity and/or HVAC model data as described below.
When the Detailed HVAC Activity data is set to 2-Detailed HVAC then the outdoor air requirement is defined
here on the HVAC zone dialog.
Outdoor air method

There are five options:
1-Flow/Zone, means that the program will use the Outdoor air flow per zone as the zone design
outdoor air flow rate.
2-Flow/Person, means the program will use the input from the field Outdoor air flow per person and
the maximum occupancy to calculate a zone design outdoor air flow rate.
3-Flow/Area, means that the flows calculated from the fields Outdoor air flow per zone floor area used
to obtain the zone design outdoor air flow rate.
4-Sum, means that the flows calculated from the fields Outdoor air flow per person, Outdoor air flow
per zone floor area and Outdoor air flow per zone will be added to obtain the zone design outdoor air
flow rate.
5-Maximum means that the maximum flow derived from Outdoor air flow per person, Outdoor air flow
per zone floor area and Outdoor air flow per zone will be used for the zone design outdoor air flow rate.
Note: If the Detailed HVAC Activity data is set to 1-Simple HVAC then this option is disabled and the
Outdoor air method is copied from the corresponding building zones' HVAC model data.
Outdoor air flow per person

This is the design outdoor air flow rate per person for this zone (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is only
required if either one of the 2-Flow/person, 4-Sum, or 5-Maximum options have been selected for the
Outdoor air method. The default is 0.00944 m3/s (20 cfm per person). An outdoor air flow rate is calculated
based on the total number of people assigned to the zone. Occupancy schedule values are not applied.
Note: If the Detailed HVAC Activity data is set to 1-Simple HVAC then this option is disabled and the
Outdoor air flow per person is copied from Outdoor air flow per person from the corresponding building
zones' Activity model data.
Outdoor air flow per zone floor area

This is the design outside air volumetric flow rate per square meter of floor area (in m 3/s-m2). This setting is
only required if either one of the 3-Flow/area, 4-Sum, or 5-Maximum options have been selected for the
Outdoor air method. This value is multiplied by the zone floor area to obtain a flow rate.
Note: If the Detailed HVAC Activity data is set to 1-Simple HVAC then this option is disabled and the Outdoor
air flow per zone floor area data is copied from the corresponding building zones' Activity model data.
Outdoor air flow per zone

This is the design outdoor air flow rate for this zone (in m3/s or ft3/min). This setting is only used if either one
of the 1-Flow/zone, 4-Sum, or 5-Maximum options have been selected for the Outdoor air method.
Note: If the Detailed HVAC Activity data is set to 1-Simple HVAC then this option is disabled and the flow per
zone is calculated from the ac/h value set on the HVAC model data tab and displayed here.
Edit HVAC Zone Data - Target

By default any edits made to the HVAC Zone dialog will apply only to the current HVAC Zone. However it is
often convenient to make the same changes to one or more other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. In
- 576 -
this case ensure that the Save changes to which HVAC Zones option is set to 2-Multiple HVAC Zones and
select the HVAC zones that are also to be targets for the changes.
Note: If you would like to change the default behaviour so that the equivalent objects in other HVAC zones in
the same group are all ticked when dialogs are first opened then you should check the Target all HVAC zones
in group by default Program option.
Setpoint Manager
To edit the data associated with a setpoint manager, you first need to select it by moving the mouse cursor
over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the
mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component
tool from the toolbar.
Name
This is the name that you assign to the setpoint manager which should be unique. If the supplied name is not
unique, the software will automatically append a backslash and number to ensure that there are no duplicate
names.
Type
There several different types of setpoint manager available. However only certain types of setpoint manager
are available for different types of loop:
1-Scheduled (All loops).

2-Warmest (Generic and dual duct air loops only).
3-Coldest (Generic and dual duct air loops only).
4-Multi-zone minimum humidity average (Air loops only).
5-Multi-zone maximum humidity average (Air loops only).
6-Multi-zone humidity minimum (Air loops only).
7-Multi-zone humidity maximum (Air loops only).
8-Single zone humidity minimum (Air loops only).
9-Single zone humidity maximum (Air loops only).
10-Outdoor air reset (Generic and dual duct air loops, plant and condenser loops).
- 577 -
11-Single zone heating (Air loops only).

12-Single zone cooling (Air loops only).
13-Multi-zone cooling average (Air loops only).
14- Multi-zone heating average (Air loops only).
15-Follow ground temperature (Condenser loops only)
1-Scheduled Setpoint Manager

Scheduled setpoint managers are the simplest type of setpoint manager and work by placing a scheduled
setpoint value at the point or connection in the loop at which the setpoint manager control line has been
placed. This allows you to specify either a constant, a seasonal, or other time-varying scheduled reset control
strategy.
Control Variable
The control variable can be one of:
1-Temperature - defines temperature of fluid at node (C)

2-Maximum temperature - defines the maximum temperature of fluid at node (C)
3-Minimum temperature - defines minimum temperature of fluid at node (C)
4-Humidity ratio - defines the humidity ratio of fluid at node (kg water/ kg dry air)
5-Maximum humidity ratio - defines maximum humidity ratio of fluid at node (kg water/ kg dry air)
6-Minimum humidity ratio - defines minimum humidity ratio of fluid at node (kg water/ kg dry air)
7-Mass flow rate - defines mass flow rate of fluid at node (kg/s)
8-Maximum mass flow rate - defines maximum mass flow rate of fluid at node (kg/s)
9-Minimum mass flow rate - defines minimum mass flow rate of fluid at node (kg/s)
Setpoint Variable Schedule

Select a schedule whose values are to be used as setpoints on the node or node list. The schedule value for
each time period is the setpoint for this type of setpoint manager. The schedule must have values that are in
the appropriate units as defined in the previous field.
2-Warmest Setpoint Manager

Warmest setpoint managers are available only in Generic and Dual Duct air loops. The warmest setpoint
manager resets the cooling supply air temperature of a central forced air HVAC system according to the
cooling demand of the warmest zone. For each zone in the system at each system timestep, the manager
calculates a supply air temperature that will meet the zone cooling load at the maximum zone supply air flow
rate. The lowest of the possible supply air temperatures becomes the new supply air temperature setpoint,
subject to minimum and maximum supply air temperature constraints. The resulting temperature setpoint is
the highest supply air temperature that will meet the cooling requirements of all the zones. When compared to
a fixed cooling supply air temperature setpoint, this strategy minimises zone reheat coil energy (or
overcooling) and central chiller energy consumption (if the chilled water temperature is also reset) at the cost
of possible increased fan energy.
Control Variable
The type of variable that will be controlled. There is only one choice for this type of setpoint manager: 1Temperature.
Minimum Setpoint Temperature

This is the minimum allowed setpoint temperature (in C or F). If the calculated setpoint temperature is less
than this minimum, the setpoint is set to the minimum.
- 578 -
Maximum Setpoint Temperature

This is the maximum allowed setpoint temperature (in C or F). If the calculated setpoint is greater than this
value the setpoint is set to the maximum. This value is also used as the setpoint temperature when none of
the zones have a cooling load.
3-Coldest Setpoint Manager

Coldest setpoint managers are available only in Generic and Dual Duct air loops. The coldest setpoint
manager is used in dual duct systems to reset the setpoint temperature of the air in the heating supply duct.
Usually it is used in conjunction with a Warmest Setpoint Manager resetting the temperature of the air in the
cooling supply duct. For each zone in the system at each system timestep, the manager calculates a supply
air temperature that will meet the zone heating load at the maximum zone supply air flow rate. The highest of
the possible supply air temperatures becomes the new supply air temperature setpoint, subject to minimum
and maximum supply air temperature constraints. The resulting temperature setpoint is the lowest supply air
temperature that will meet the heating requirements of all the zones. When compared to a fixed heating
supply air temperature setpoint, this strategy minimises central boiler energy consumption (if the hot water
temperature is also reset or there are variable speed pumps) at the cost of possible increased fan energy (if
there is variable volume control in the air system).
Control Variable

This is the minimum allowed setpoint temperature (in C or F). If the calculated setpoint temperature is less
than this minimum, the setpoint is set to the minimum. This value is also used as the setpoint temperature
when none of the zones have a heating load.

This is the maximum allowed setpoint temperature (in C or F). If the calculated setpoint is greater than this
value the setpoint is set to the maximum.
4-Multi-Zone Minimum Humidity Average Setpoint Manager

This setpoint manager allows for controlling the minimum humidity level in multiple zones served by a central
forced air HVAC system (air loop). This setpoint manager, together with humidistats which must be defined for
the controlled zones, detects the air humidity level in multiple controlled zones served by the HVAC air loop
and uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate an average supply air humidity ratio needed to maintain the
zone relative humidity levels near their respective humidifying setpoints. The calculated humidity ratio is then
used as the minimum humidity ratio setpoint for the designated setpoint node(s). A humidification component
(e.g. humidifier) placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the minimum humidity ratio setpoint to
control humidification rate.
Note: This setpoint manager requires that humidistats are specified for the controlled zones.
Minimum Setpoint Humidity Ratio

This is the minimum humidity ratio (kg/kg) that is allowed by this setpoint manager. If the calculated setpoint
humidity ratio is less than this value, then the setpoint is set to this minimum value.
- 579 -
Maximum Setpoint Humidity Ratio

This is the maximum humidity ratio (kg/kg) that is allowed by this setpoint manager. If the calculated setpoint
humidity ratio is greater than this value, then the setpoint is set to this maximum value.
5-Multi-Zone Maximum Humidity Average Setpoint Manager

This setpoint manager allows for controlling the maximum humidity level in multiple zones served by a central
and uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate an average supply air humidity ratio needed to maintain the
zone relative humidity levels near their respective dehumidifying setpoints. The calculated humidity ratio is
then used as the maximum humidity ratio setpoint for the designated setpoint node(s). A dehumidification
component (e.g. water cooling coil) placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the maximum humidity
ratio setpoint to control its moisture removal rate.
In the case of a chilled water coil which is used for both temperature and high humidity control, this setpoint
manager works in conjunction with the coil controller to determine the supply air temperature required to meet
both the temperature (sensible) and humidity (latent) load in the control zone.


This is the maximum humidity ratio (in kg/kg) that is allowed by this set point manager. If the calculated
setpoint humidity ratio is greater than this value, then the setpoint is set to this maximum value.
6-Multi-Zone Humidity Minimum Setpoint Manager

This setpoint manager allows for controlling the minimum humidity level in multiple zones served by a central
and uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate a supply air minimum humidity ratio based on a zone with
the critical humidification requirement (i.e., a zone with the highest humidity ratio setpoint) to maintain the
zone relative humidity levels near their respective humidifying setpoints. The calculated humidity ratio is then
used as the minimum humidity ratio setpoint for the designated setpoint node(s). A humidification component
(e.g. humidifier) placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the minimum humidity ratio setpoint to
control humidification rate. If a humidistat is defined for only one of the zones served by the air loop then this
setpoint manager behaves in the same way as the Single Zone Humidity Minimum setpoint manager.

- 580 -

This is the maximum humidity ratio (kg/kg) that is allowed by this setpoint manager. If the calculated setpoint
humidity ratio is greater than this value, then the setpoint is set to this maximum value.
7-Multi-Zone Humidity Maximum Setpoint Manager

This setpoint manager allows for controlling the maximum humidity level in multiple zones served by a central
forced air HVAC system (air loop). This setpoint manager, used in conjunction with one or more Zone
humidistat objects, detects the air humidity level in multiple controlled zones served by the HVAC air loop and
uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate the maximum supply air humidity ratio based on a zone with the
critical dehumidification requirement (i.e., a zone with the lowest humidity ratio setpoint) to maintain the zone
relative humidity levels near their respective dehumidifying setpoints. The calculated humidity ratio is then
used as the maximum humidity ratio setpoint for the designated setpoint node(s). A dehumidification
component (e.g., desiccant dehumidifier) placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the maximum
humidity ratio setpoint to control its moisture removal rate.
The use of this object requires that a Zone Humidistat object be specified with a dehumidifying relative
humidity schedule for one or more controlled zones served by the HVAC air loop. If the Zone Humidistat is
defined for only one of the zones served by the air loop then this Setpoint Manager performs as a Single zone
humidity maximum setpoint manager.
manager works in conjunction with a the controller associated with the Cooling coil - water object to determine
the supply air temperature required to meet both the temperature (sensible) and dehumidification (latent) load
in the control zone.
See object Controller:WaterCoil in the EnergyPlus Engineering Reference for a detailed discussion of how this
is achieved.

The minimum humidity ratio (in kg/kg) that is allowed by this setpoint manager. If the calculated setpoint
humidity ratio is less than this value, then the setpoint is set to this minimum value. The default value is 0.008
kg/kg.

The maximum humidity ratio (in kg/kg) that is allowed by this set point manager. If the calculated setpoint
humidity ratio is greater than this value, then the setpoint is set to this maximum value. The default value is
0.015 kg/kg.
8-Single Zone Humidity Minimum Setpoint Manager

The Single Zone Minimum Humidity Setpoint Manager allows the control of a single zone minimum humidity
level. This setpoint manager detects the humidity level in a control zone and, using air and moisture mass
balance, calculates the supply air humidity ratio needed to maintain the zone relative humidity at or above a
given setpoint. The calculated supply air humidity ratio is then used as the setpoint for the designated setpoint
node. A humidifier component placed upstream of the setpoint node can then use the humidity ratio setpoint
to control its moisture addition rate.
Note: This setpoint manager requires that a humidistat be specified for the controlled zone.
- 581 -
Control Zone
Click on the <Select zone> label and then click on the displayed ellipsis button to bring up the zone selector
dialog. Select the zone for humidity control.
9-Single Zone Humidity Maximum Setpoint Manager

The Single Zone Maximum Humidity Setpoint Manager allows the control of a single zone maximum humidity
level. This setpoint manager, together with a humidistat which must be defined for the controlled zone, detects
the air humidity level in a single control zone and uses air/moisture mass balances to calculate the supply air
humidity ratio needed to maintain the zone relative humidity at or below a given setpoint. The calculated
supply air humidity ratio is then used as the setpoint for the designated setpoint node. A dehumidification
component placed upstream of this node can then use the humidity ratio setpoint to control its moisture
removal rate (e.g. water cooling coil).
manager works in conjunction with the coil controller to determine the minimum supply air temperature
required to meet both the temperature (sensible) and humidity (latent) load in the control zone.
Note: This setpoint manager requires that a humidistat be specified for the controlled zone.
Control Zone
dialog. Select the zone for humidity control.
10-Outdoor Air Reset Setpoint Manager

The Outdoor Air Reset Setpoint Manager sets the supply air temperature according to the outdoor air
temperature using a reset rule. The reset rule is determined by 2 points: the supply air setpoint temperature at
the outdoor high temperature (SATOH) and the supply air setpoint temperature at the outdoor low
temperature (SATOL). If the outdoor temperature is above the outdoor high temperature, the supply air
temperature is set to SATOH. If the outdoor temperature is below the outdoor low temperature, the supply air
temperature is set to SATOL. If the outdoor temperature is between the outdoor high and outdoor low
temperatures, the supply air temperature is linearly interpolated between SATOH and SATOL.
An optional second reset rule may be defined.
The default Outdoor air reset settings for various loop types are:
Loop Type
Air loop
Hot water
loop
Chilled water
loop
Condenser
loop
DHW loop
Setpoint for
Outdoor High Setpoint for Outdoor
Outdoor Low Temp
Comment
Temp (C)
High Temp (C)
(C)
16
15
12
80
15
60
15.56
12.22
26.67
6.67
33
15
29
60
15
50
Outdoor Low
Temp (C)
ASHRAE 90.1
Appendix G
Control Variable
- 582 -
Setpoint At Outdoor Low Temperature

This is the setpoint (C or F) at the outdoor low temperature for the first reset rule.
Outdoor Low Temperature

This is the outdoor air low temperature (C or F) for the first supply air temperature reset rule. Generally, at
this outdoor air temperature the supply temperature is at its maximum.
Setpoint At Outdoor High Temperature

This is the setpoint temperature (C or F) at the outdoor high temperature for the first reset rule.
Outdoor High Temperature

This is the outdoor air high temperature (C or F) for the first supply air temperature reset rule. Generally, at
this outdoor air temperature the supply temperature is at its minimum.
Second Reset Rule

This check-box allows you to define a second reset rule.
Second Reset Schedule

This is the schedule whose values indicate which reset rule to use. Schedule values of 1 indicate that the first
reset rule will be used. Schedule values of 2 select the second reset rule.
Second Reset Rule Setpoint At Outdoor Low Temperature

This is the setpoint temperature (C or F) at the outdoor low temperature for the second reset rule.
Second Reset Rule Outdoor Low Temperature

This is the outdoor air low temperature (C) for the second supply air temperature reset rule. Generally, at this
outdoor air temperature the supply temperature is at its maximum.
Second Reset Rule Setpoint At Outdoor High Temperature

This is the setpoint temperature (C or F) at the outdoor high temperature for the second reset rule.
- 583 -
Second Reset Rule Outdoor High Temperature

This is the outdoor air high temperature (C) for the second supply air temperature reset rule. Generally, at
this outdoor air temperature the supply temperature is at its minimum.
11-Single Zone Heating Setpoint Manager

The Single Zone Heating Setpoint Manager allows a component to be controlled based on the load required
to meet the zone heating setpoint. This setpoint manager detects the control zone load to meet the current
heating setpoint, zone inlet node flow rate, and zone node temperature, and calculates a setpoint temperature
for the supply air that will satisfy the zone heating load for the control zone. This setpoint manager creates a
variable temperature system.
Control Variable
Minimum Supply Air Temperature

The minimum supply air temperature (in C or F) that is allowed for this system (as set by this setpoint
manager).
Maximum Supply Air Temperature

The maximum supply air temperature (in C or F) that is allowed for this system (as set by this setpoint
manager)
Control Zone
dialog. Select the zone for single zone heating control.
Combining 11-Single Zone Heating And 12-Single Zone Cooling Setpoint

Managers
Note: A variable temperature heating and cooling system can be simulated by combining a 11-Single Zone
Heating Setpoint Manager with a 12-Single Zone Cooling Setpoint Manager together on the supply side of
a loop. The way this is done depends on whether the AHU has a blow-through or draw-through fan
configuration.
Blow-through: When the fan is placed upstream of the heating and cooling coils in the AHU then the 11Single Zone Heating Setpoint Manager is placed directly after the heating coil, between the heating coil and
the cooling coil and the 12-Single Zone Cooling Setpoint Manager is placed downstream of the AHU.
Draw-through: When the fan is placed downstream of the heating and cooling coils in the AHU then both the
11-Single Zone Heating Setpoint Manager and 12-Single Zone Cooling Setpoint Manager are placed
downstream of the AHU.
- 584 -
12-Single Zone Cooling Setpoint Manager

The Single Zone Cooling Setpoint Manager allows a component to be controlled based on the load required to
meet the zone cooling setpoint. This setpoint manager detects the control zone load to meet the current
cooling setpoint, zone inlet node flow rate, and zone node temperature, and calculates a setpoint temperature
for the supply air that will satisfy the zone cooling load for the control zone. This setpoint manager creates a
variable temperature system.
Note: See also note above on Combining 11-Single Zone Heating and 12-Single Zone Cooling Setpoint
Managers.
Control Variable
Minimum Supply Air Temperature

The minimum supply air temperature (in C or F) that is allowed for this system (as set by this setpoint
manager).
Maximum Supply Air Temperature

The maximum supply air temperature (in C or F) that is allowed for this system (as set by this setpoint
manager).
Control Zone
dialog. Select the zone for single zone cooling control.
13-Multi Zone Cooling Average Setpoint Manager

This setpoint manager is used to establish a supply air temperature setpoint for a central forced air HVAC
system (air loop) based on the predicted sensible cooling loads and actual supply air mass flow rates for all
zones served by the system. For all controlled zones in the air loop (i.e., zones with a thermostat object), the
setpoint manager calculates an average supply air temperature that will meet the zone cooling loads based on
the actual zone supply air mass flow rates (lagged by one time step). The calculated setpoint temperature is
subject to the minimum and maximum setpoint temperature constraints specified by the user. When compared
to a fixed cooling supply air temperature setpoint, this strategy may reduce zone reheat coil energy (or
overcooling) and central chiller energy consumption (if the chilled water temperature is also reset) at the cost
of possible increased fan energy.
Control Variable
- 585 -

The minimum supply air temperature (in C or F) that is allowed for this system. If the calculated setpoint
temperature is less than this minimum, the setpoint is set to the minimum. The default value is 12C.

The maximum supply air temperature (in C or F) that is allowed for this system. If the calculated setpoint
temperature is greater than this value, the setpoint is set to this maximum value. The default value is 18C.
Note: The same notes for combining single zone heating and cooling SPMs apply to the multizone
equivalents. See Combining 11-Single Zone Heating and 12-Single Zone Cooling Setpoint Managers.
14-Multi Zone Heating Average Setpoint Manager

This setpoint manager is used to establish a supply air temperature setpoint for a central forced air HVAC
system (air loop) based on the predicted sensible heating loads and actual supply air mass flow rates for all
zones served by the system. For all controlled zones in the air loop (i.e., zones with a thermostat object), the
setpoint manager calculates an average supply air temperature that will meet the zone heating loads based
on the actual zone supply air mass flow rates (lagged by one time step). The calculated setpoint temperature
is subject to the minimum and maximum setpoint temperature constraints specified by the user. When
compared to a fixed heating supply air temperature setpoint, this strategy may reduce central boiler energy
consumption (if the hot water temperature is also reset or there are variable speed pumps) at the cost of
possible increased fan energy (if there is variable volume control for the air system).
Control Variable


Note: The same notes for combining single zone heating and cooling SPMs apply to the multizone
equivalents. See Combining 11-Single Zone Heating and 12-Single Zone Cooling Setpoint Managers.
15-Follow Ground Temperature

This setpoint manager provides a temperature setpoint on a system node that is derived from a current
ground temperature. The ground temperatures are specified in at site level and used during the simulation.
This setpoint manager is primarily intended for condenser or plant loops using some type of ground heat
exchanger.
When this SPM is selected the following other fields should be defined.
- 586 -
Control Variable


Reference Ground Temperature

This setting specifies the type of ground temperature to be used by the setpoint manager. There are four
options:
1-Deep - uses the Deep monthly temperatures defined at site level.
2-Shallow - uses the Shallow monthly temperatures defined at site level.
3-Building surface - uses the Monthly temperatures defined at site level.
Generally the deep ground temperatures are the most useful for a plant loop serving a vertical borehole
ground heat exchanger.
Offset Temperature Difference

This data provides a temperature offset that will be applied to the value of the ground temperature. If this
value is zero, and the limits are met, then the resulting setpoint will be exactly the same as the ground
temperature. The sign convention is that a positive value here will increase the resulting setpoint to higher
than the ground temperature.
DHW
Domestic Hot Water (DHW) is provided in DesignBuilder Detailed HVAC through DHW loops, Water outlet
groups and Water outlet components.
DHW loops are added at the HVAC System level. On the demand side of the DHW sub loops, Water outlet
groups can be added. However a default Water outlet group is provided with the initial DHW loop so in many
cases you will not need to add a new Water outlet group. Instead simply navigate to the default Water outlet
group and add one or more Water outlet components to define hot water consumption and any heat transfer
to a building zone.
If you are working with the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option then simply
associate the zones to be connected on the Zones served tab of the dialog. In many cases this would be all
occupied zones in the building. In this case the amount of DHW consumed is calculated as a function of the
activity in the zone. For example, there is a demand assumed to arise from the occupants of an office for
activities such as washing hands and washing up cups. This demand is associated with the office rather than
- 587 -
the toilet or tea room. So the demand from each space needs to be assigned to a DHW system even if the
DHW delivery (tap, shower etc) is not present in the space.
On the other hand, when using the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data model option it would
normally make more sense to model the actual water draw off rates in the rooms where hot water is
consumed (toilet, tea room, shower room etc).
Tip: For consistency with Simple and Compact HVAC use the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity
data model option then create a single DHW loop, use the default Water outlet group and Water outlet
provided with the DHW loop and select all zones in the building on the Zones served tab of the Water outlet.
The DHW-related Detailed HVAC components are:
Water Outlet Group

Water Outlet
Water Heater Data
Water Outlet Group

The Water outlet group component is used to group Water outlet components and connect them to a Water
heater. Water outlet groups are placed on the demand sub loop of a DHW loop as shown in the screenshot
above.
To add new Water outlets to a Water outlet group first navigate to the Water outlet group and then use the
Add water outlet toolbar option. You can edit the details for each Water outlet by right clicking on it in the
Water outlet group screen image and selecting the Edit drop down menu option.
Drain Water Heat Exchanger

Drain water heat exchanger type
The heat exchanger type to be used for drain water heat recovery. The options are:
1-None indicating no heat recovery is to be simulated.
2-Ideal sets a heat exchanger effectiveness of 1.0.
3-Counter flow where effectiveness is calculated dynamically
4-Cross flow where effectiveness is calculated dynamically.
One popular type of drain water heat exchanger is the Gravity-Film Heat Exchanger (GFX). The GFX is most
closely approximated with the 3-Counter flow option, but keep in mind that the UA varies more with flow rate
for the GFX than for most traditional heat exchangers.
Drain water heat exchanger destination

The heat exchanger configuration to be used for drain water heat recovery. The configuration determines
where the heat will be used after it is recovered. The options are:
- 588 -
1-Plant which indicates that the all of the recovered heat will be sent to the return flow at the outlet
node of the Water outlets to preheat the make-up cold water from the water mains.
2-Equipment, indicating that the all of the recovered heat will be used to preheat the cold water flow
side of the Water outlets listed in this Water outlet group
3-Plant and Equipment, indicating that the recovered heat will be divided between the plant and the
Water outlets, as described above. This is the only option where the flow rates are equal in the drain
and the heat exchanger.
Drain water heat exchanger UA

The UA is the heat transfer coefficient (in W/K or Btu/h-F) for the heat exchanger. It is the product of U, the
overall heat transfer coefficient, and A, the heat exchanger surface area.
Water Outlet
The Water outlet component defines hot water consumption, delivery temperatures as well as any heat
conduction and latent gains to zones. One or more Water outlets can be associated with a previously defined
Water outlet group.
The way that Water outlets works in very different depending on whether you are using the Simple or Detailed
HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data setting.
Simple HVAC Activity data
When using Simple HVAC activity data one Water outlet component can be used to serve multiple zones very
easily simply by selecting the zones on the Zones served tab. In this case DHW demand data from Activity
and HVAC model data tabs is used to define the total hot water flow rate and schedule of consumption for the
zones referenced in the Zones served tab.
Detailed HVAC Activity data
When using Detailed HVAC activity data option the Water outlet hot water consumption peak flow rate and
time varying schedule are defined independently of any model data DHW settings and you must provide the
peak hot water flow rate and schedule of operation for the Water outlet. This gives you the flexibility to define
DHW consumption is various ways:
Use one Water outlet for multiple zones. This approach can be used in cases where the usage
pattern (schedule) is the same in each of the zones. In this case the total peak hot water flow rate for all
the zones to be included can be calculated in a spreadsheet (for example) and the peak flow for all
zones entered here on the Water outlet dialog.
Use one Water outlet for each zone. This approach might be preferred when either the patterns of
usage (schedules) for each zone is different and needs to be defined separately or when you prefer a
more explicit separation of zones for a clearer representation in the model, rather than lumping all flows
into a single Water outlet.
Use one Water outlet for each physical water outlet in the building, e.g. one Water outlet for each
hot water tap, shower etc. In this case you would need to calculate expected peak flow and schedules
of usage for each outlet.
In all of the above cases it is usually more work to set up DHW input data when using the Detailed HVAC
activity data than for the Simple HVAC activity alternative.
General
Name
Enter a unique name for the water outlet.
Target temperature schedule

Select a schedule defining the temperature of the water delivered from taps etc.
- 589 -
Flow Rate
Note: The data under the Flow Rate header is only shown when using the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC
Activity data setting.
Peak flow rate

The peak demanded hot water flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min). This value is multiplied by the Flow rate fraction
schedule (below) to determine the actual volumetric flow rate at any time in the simulation. This value is only
required when using the Detailed HVAC data model option.
Flow rate fraction schedule

Select the schedule specifying the flow rate fraction relative to the Peak flow rate (above). This value is only
required when using the Detailed HVAC data model option.
Heat Gain To Zone

Heat gain to zone
Check this option if you wish to model sensible and/or latent heat transfer from the Water outlet to a zone in
the building model.
Zone
Select the zone to receive sensible and/or latent loads from this water outlet.
Sensible Fraction Schedule Name

Select the schedule specifying the fraction of the maximum possible sensible heat gain (based on inlet water
conditions and ambient zone conditions) that is added to the zone. Select schedule Off for no sensible load.
Latent Fraction Schedule Name

Select the schedule specifying the fraction of the maximum possible latent heat gain (based on inlet water
conditions and ambient zone conditions) that is added to the zone. Select schedule Off for no latent load.
Zones Served
The Zones served tab on the Water outlet dialog is only visible when using the default 1-Simple HVAC
Detailed HVAC Activity data setting. It allows you to select the zones served by this Water outlet. For these
zones the actual hot water consumption rates used in the simulation are generated based on the DHW
consumption rate set on the Activity tab and the DHW Operation schedule on the HVAC tab in the same way
as for Simple and Compact HVAC.
Check the boxes of the zones to be served by this Water outlet as shown below.
- 590 -
Tip: You can use the checkboxes at building and block levels as a fast way to select/deselect all of the
available zones in the building or block.
Note: Any zones selected on the Zones served tab will not consume hot water in the simulation if their DHW
consumption rate is 0. This means that you can select all zones in a building without concern for generating
DHW demand for unoccupied zones.
Water Heater
Used in:
WaterHeater:Mixed
WaterHeater:Sizing
Supply side of DHW Loops
The Water heater simulates a well-mixed, single-node water tank. It can be used for simulating many types of
water heaters and storage tanks, including gas and electric residential water heaters, and a variety of large
commercial water heaters. It models stand-alone operation, on- and off-cycle parasitic loads and thermal
losses to the zone, instantaneous/tankless water heaters
The Water heater analytically solves the differential equation governing the energy balance of the water tank.
Within a timestep, conditions are solved separately for when the heater element or burner is "on" (on-cycle)
and when it is "off" (off-cycle). This approach allows ambient losses and parasitic loads to be divided into oncycle and off-cycle effects and accounted for in detail.
For losses to the ambient environment, the ambient air temperature can be taken from a schedule, a zone, or
the exterior. When used with a zone, a fraction of the skin losses can be added to the zone heat balance as
internal heat gains.
Control options allow the heater to cycle or modulate to meet the load. When cycling, the heater element or
burner is either on or off. The heater remains fully on while heating the tank up to the setpoint temperature.
When the setpoint is reached, the heater turns off. The heater remains off until the tank temperature falls
below the "cut-in" temperature, i.e., the setpoint temperature minus the deadband temperature difference. The
heater continuously cycles on and off to maintain the tank temperature within the deadband. Most storagetank water heaters cycle.
When modulating, the heater power varies between the maximum and minimum heater capacities. The heater
stays on as long as the required total demand is above the minimum capacity. Below the minimum capacity,
the heater will begin to cycle on and off based on the deadband temperature difference. Equipment is usually
designed and rated to avoid this condition. Most tankless/instantaneous water heaters modulate.
- 591 -
General
Name
The name of the Water heater object.
Tank volume
The volume of the storage tank (in m3 or ft3). This field is autosizable based on the Sizing data. Although this
field is allowed to go down to zero, even so-called "tankless" water heaters have some volume of water that is
maintained around the heating elements or in the heat exchanger, typically around 0.00379 m3 (1 gallon).
External Heating Plant Connection

External heating plant connection
Check this option if the water heater is to be supplied with heat from a Hot water loop. In this case inlet and
outlet connections are included on the bottom of the water heater allowing the connection to be made to the
demand side of the Hot water plant loop.
Indirect water heating recovery time

This field is only required when the External heating plant option is checked, i.e. when the water heater is
connected to the demand side of a plant loop. It is used to provide a design parameter for autosizing design
flow rates The recovery time is expressed in hours. This is the time that the entire volume of the tank can be
heated from 14.4C to 57.2C (58F to 135F) with an inlet temperature defined as the exit temperature in the
associated Plant Sizing object. The default is 1.5 hours. The calculation is based on log-mean temperature
difference (LMTD) and includes the heat transfer effectiveness factor entered above.
Temperature Settings
Setpoint temperature schedule
Select the Schedule that defines the hot water temperature setpoint in C. Also known as the "cut-out"
temperature.
Deadband temperature difference

The delta temperature difference (in C or F) between the setpoint and the "cut-in" temperature at which
the heater will turn on. In other words, the "cut-in" temperature is Setpoint Deadband.
Maximum temperature limit

The temperature (in C or F) at which the tank water becomes dangerously hot and is vented through boiling
or an automatic safety. The tank temperature will never exceed the maximum. Any extra heat added to the
tank is immediately vented. Note: The maximum temperature must be greater than the setpoint temperature at
all times.
Ambient Temperature Settings

Ambient temperature indicator
The Ambient temperature indicator specifies how the temperature of the air surrounding the Water heater is to
be defined. These options are available:
1-Schedule where the Ambient temperature schedule field defines the ambient temperature.
2-Zone where the zone air temperature of the zone specified by Ambient temperature zone, below,
provides the ambient temperature
- 592 -
3-Outdoors where the outdoor dry-bulb air temperature provides the ambient temperature for the water
heater.
Ambient temperature schedule

Select the schedule specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin losses. This field is only
required if Ambient temperature indicator is 1-Schedule.
Ambient temperature zone

The building zone specifying the ambient air temperature around the tank for skin losses. This field is only
required if Ambient temperature indicator is 2-Zone.
On-Cycle loss coefficient to ambient temperature

The loss coefficient (in W/K or Btu/h-F) to the ambient air temperature. Often this coefficient is identical to the
"UA" for skin losses. If the loss effects of the flue are being modelled in the Off-Cycle Loss Coefficient, than
this field would have a different value accounting only for the skin losses.
Off-Cycle loss coefficient to ambient temperature

The loss coefficient (in W/K or Btu/h-F) to the ambient air temperature. Often this coefficient is identical to the
"UA" for skin losses. However, it can also be used to model the loss effects of the flue in a combustion water
heater, in addition to the skin losses.
On-Cycle loss fraction to zone

If the Ambient temperature indicator is 2-Zone, this field adds the specified fraction of the on-cycle losses to
the zone heat balance as an internal gain.
Off-Cycle loss fraction to zone

If the Ambient temperature indicator is 2-Zone, this field adds the specified fraction of the off-cycle losses to
the zone heat balance as an internal gain.
Heater Settings
Heater control type
The control type can be one of:
1-Cycle for most storage tank water heaters, or,

2-Modulate for most instantaneous, tank-less water heaters.
Heater maximum capacity

The maximum heat rate (in W or btu/h) that can be supplied to the water and typically the same as the
"nominal" capacity.
Note: This field is autosizable however auto-sizing of the heating element will generally only work when the
tank sizing Design mode is set to 1-Peak draw and the water heater has significant capacity. In this case, the
element should be sized using the tank capacity in conjunction with the Time for tank recovery setting. In a
situation where there is an external plant connection, the Nominal tank volume for autosizing plant
connections setting is also used.
Heater minimum capacity

The minimum heat rate (in W or btu/h) that can be supplied to the water. This field is only used when the
Heater control type is 2-Modulate. If the total demand rate for heating is less than the minimum, even a
modulating water heater will begin to cycle.
Heater fuel type

The type of fuel used for heating. The fuel type can be one of:
1-Electricity,
- 593 -
2-Natural gas,
3-Propane gas,
4-Fuel oil #1,
5-Fuel oil #2,
6-Coal,
7-Diesel,
8-Gasoline,
9-Steam,
10-District heating.
11-Other fuel 1
12-Other fuel 2
11-Other fuel 1 and 12-Other fuel 2 can be used for representing biofuels such as biomass and biogas for
example.
Heater thermal efficiency

The thermal conversion efficiency from fuel energy to heat energy for the heater element or burner. This is not
the same as the overall efficiency of the water heater.
Heater part load factor curve

Select the Quadratic or Cubic curve that relates the overall efficiency of the water heater to the runtime
fraction (if Control Type 1-Cycle) or part load ratio (if Control type is 2-Modulate). This is an additional
multiplier applied to the Heater thermal efficiency above, to compute fuel energy use. The Part load factor
curve should not have a value less than 0.1 in the domain from 0 to 1.
Note: If the curve accounts for ambient losses and/or parasitic fuel consumption, these effects should not also
be input into the related fields in this object as that would result in double-counting.
On-Cycle Settings
On-Cycle parasitic fuel consumption rate
On-cycle parasitics include parts of the water heater that consume fuel when the heater is on, for example, an
induction fan, or stand-by electronic control circuits. The fuel consumption rate (in W or Btu/h) is the total fuel
that is consumed by all of the on-cycle parasitics.
On-Cycle parasitic fuel type

The type of fuel used by the on-cycle parasitics. The fuel type can be
1-Electricity,
2-Natural gas,
3-Propane gas,
4-Fuel oil #1,
5-Fuel oil #2,
6-Coal,
7-Diesel,
8-Gasoline,
9-Steam, or
The fuel type can be the same or different from the Heater Fuel Type.
On-Cycle parasitic heat fraction to tank

The fraction of on-cycle parasitic fuel energy that is converted to heat energy that ends up in the tank water.
For example, an induction fan might (maybe) deliver a small fraction of its energy to the tank water for a value
of 0.05. Electronic control circuits, on the other hand, do not add any heat to the tank and should be 0.
- 594 -
Off-Cycle Settings
Off-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Consumption Rate
Off-cycle parasitics include parts of the water heater that consume fuel when the heater is off, for example, a
pilot light, or stand-by electronic control circuits. The fuel consumption rate (in W or Btu/h) is strictly the total
fuel that is consumed by all of the off-cycle parasitics.
Off-Cycle Parasitic Fuel Type

The type of fuel used by the off-cycle parasitics. The fuel type can be one of
1-Electricity,
2-Natural gas,
3-Propane gas,
4-Fuel oil #1,
5-Fuel oil #2,
6-Coal,
7-Diesel,
8-Gasoline,
9-Steam, or
The fuel type can be the same or different from the Heater fuel type.
Off-Cycle parasitic heat fraction to tank

The fraction of off-cycle parasitic fuel energy that is converted to heat energy that ends up in the tank water.
For example, a pilot light would deliver most of its heat to the tank water, as long as the thermal conversion
efficiency must be taken into account, so perhaps 0.80 is reasonable. Electronic control circuits, on the other
hand, do not add any heat to the tank and should be 0.
Use-Side Settings
Use side effectiveness
This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the use side water and the tank water. If the
effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the use side water
and the tank water. If the effectiveness is lower, then the use side outlet water temperature will not be as hot
as the tank water, simulating a heat exchanger.
Use side design flow rate

This field is optional and is used to specify the design flow rate through the Use Side of the water heater. The
volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3/s or gal/min. The field is needed when the Use side is connected
to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.
Source-Side Settings
Source side effectiveness
This field specifies the heat transfer effectiveness between the source side water and the tank water. If the
effectiveness is set to 1 then complete heat transfer occurs, simulating perfect mixing of the source side water
and the tank water. If the effectiveness is lower, then the source side outlet water temperature will not be as
hot as the tank water, simulating a heat exchanger.
- 595 -
Source side design flow rate

This field is optional and is used to specify the design flow rate through the Source Side of the water heater.
The volumetric design flow rate is specified in m3/s or gal/min. The field is needed when the Source Side is
connected to a plant loop. The field can be autosized. Sizing results are reported in the EIO file.
Sizing
The Water heater sizing data is entered on the Sizing tab.
Design mode
This field describes the method to be used for sizing the water heater. There are six choices:
1-Peak draw. This design method uses the design flow rates of all the different demands placed on the
water heater. The tank size is based on how long it can meet the demand and how quickly it can
recover. The user enters the time in hours that the water heater can meet the demands. Only the hot
water uses connected to an individual water heater are included in that water heaters peak draw.
2-Residential HUD-FHA minimum This design method is based on minimum permissible water heater
sizes (established by HUD-FHA in its Minimum Property Standards for One- and Two-Family Living
Units, No. 4900.1-1982). The user enters the number of bathrooms and bedrooms in this input object.
The smallest allowable water heater sizes are used.
3-Per person This design method scales sizes based on the total number of people in all zones in the
building. Each water heater in the model will be sized using the total (peak, design) number of people
for the entire model. The number of people is determined from People objects defined elsewhere in the
input file
4-Per floor area This design method scales sizes based on the total floor area in all the zones in the
building. Each water heater in the model will be sized using all the floor area in the model. The floor
areas are determined from the geometry input elsewhere in the input file.
5-Per unit This design method scales sizes based on an arbitrary number of units. This can be used,
for example, to size based on the number of rooms in a lodging building. The user provides the number
of units in an input field in this object.
6-Per solar collector area This design method scales tank volume based on the collector area for a
solar hot water collector. The collector area is summed for all the collectors in the model and each tank
is sized for the total. The collector area is determined from input for Solar Collectors defined elsewhere
in the input file.
Time storage can meet peak draw

This field provides the time, in hours, that the tanks volume can sustain a peak draw. It is used to size the
tanks volume which is the simple product of peak draw volume flow rate and the draw time. There is no
assurance that the water will be at the desired temperature for the entire draw. This field is only used if the
Design mode is 1-Peak draw. The water heater must be connected to a full plant loop and be on the supply
side.
Time for tank recovery

This field provides the time, in hours, that tanks heater needs to recover the volume of the tank. The
temperatures used to define recovery are a starting temperature of 14.4C (58F) and a final temperature of
57.2C (135F). Time for tank recovery data is only required if the Design mode is 1-Peak draw.
Nominal tank volume for autosizing plant connections

This field is used in case the water heater is indirectly heated by its source side connections and they are also
autosized. The units are m3 or ft3. Because of the complexity of such a water heater and the timing for when
sizing calculation happen inside EnergyPlus, the Source side connection flow rates need to be reported
before the tanks volume can be sized to meet Peak draw. This input field is used to provide a nominal tank
volume to use temporarily while the flow connections are sized. This field is only required if the Design mode
is 1-Peak draw and the water heater has autosized plant connections on the demand side.
Number of bedrooms
This field is used to enter the number of bedrooms in the model. It is only required if the Design mode is 2Residential HUD-FHA minimum.
- 596 -
Number of bathrooms
This field is used to enter the number of bathrooms in the model. It is only required if the Design mode is 2Residential HUD-FHA minimum.
Storage capacity per person

This field is used to enter the tanks storage volume on per-person basis. The units are m3/person or
ft3/person. The storage capacity per person is only required if the Design mode is 3-Per person.
Recovery capacity per person

This field is used to enter the recovery capacity per person in units of m3/person-hr or ft3/person-h. This is the
volume of water the heater can recover in one hour per person. Recovery is heating water from a starting
temperature of 14.4C (58F) to a final temperature of 57.2C (135F). The Recovery capacity per person is
only required if the Design mode is 3-Per person.
Storage capacity per floor area

This field is used to enter the tanks storage volume on a per-floor-area basis. The units are m3 /m2 or ft3/ft2.
The Recovery capacity per person is only required if the Design mode is 3-Per person.
Recovery capacity per floor area

This field is used to enter the recovery capacity per floor area in units of m3/h-m2 or ft3/h-ft2. This is the
volume water the heater can recover in an hour per floor area. Recovery is heating water from a starting
temperature of 14.4C (58F) to a final temperature of 57.2C (135F). The Recovery capacity per floor area is
only required if the Design mode is 4-Per floor area
Number of units
This field is used to enter the number of Units for use in sizing on per-Unit basis with the next two fields. The
Number of units data only required if the Design mode is 5-Per unit. This can be used to account for any
arbitrary item such as lodging rooms, desks, water fixtures, restrooms, etc.
Storage capacity per unit

This field is used to enter the tanks storage volume on per-Unit basis. The units are m3/h or ft3/h. The
number of Units is entered in the previous field. The Storage capacity per unit is only required if the Design
mode is 5-Per unit.
Recovery capacity per unit

This field is used to enter the recover capacity per Unit in units of m3/h or ft3/h. This is the volume of water the
heater can recover in an hour per Unit. Recovery is heating water from a starting temperature of 14.4C (58F)
to a final temperature of 57.2C (135F). This field is only required if the Design mode is 5-Per unit.
Storage capacity per collector area

This field is used to enter the tanks storage volume on per-solar-collector-area basis. The units are m3/m2 or
f3/m2. The Recovery capacity per unit is only required if the Design mode is 6-Per solar collector area.
Water Heater Outputs

The following Water heater output variables are available:
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Tank Temperature [C]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Final Tank Temperature [C]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Loss Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Loss Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Inlet Temperature [C]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Outlet Temperature [C]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Use Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Use Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Inlet Temperature [C]
- 597 -
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Outlet Temperature [C]

HVAC,Average,Water Heater Source Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Source Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Rate To Tank [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Energy To Tank [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Rate To Tank [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Energy To Tank [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Total Demand Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Total Demand Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Heating Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Heating Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Unmet Demand Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Unmet Demand Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Venting Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Venting Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Net Heat Tranfer Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Net Heat Tranfer Energy [J]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Cycle On Count []
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Runtime Fraction []
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Part Load Ratio []
HVAC,Average,Water Heater <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater <Fuel Type>Consumption [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Consumption [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic <Fuel Type> Consumption [J]
HVAC,Average,Water Heater Water Consumption Rate [m3/s]
HVAC,Sum,Water Heater Water Consumption [m3]
Water Heater Tank Temperature [C]

The average water tank temperature.
Water Heater Final Tank Temperature [C]

The final water tank temperature at the end of the system timestep. If reported at the "Detailed" interval, this
report variable can be used to verify an exact energy balance on the water heater. Also see the report
variable: Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Energy.
Water Heater Loss Rate [W]

The average heat loss rate due to the off- and on-cycle loss coefficients to the ambient temperature.
Water Heater Loss Energy [J]

The heat loss energy due to the off- and on-cycle loss coefficients to the ambient temperature.
Water Heater Use Flow Rate [kg/s]

The use side mass flow rate. If stand-alone, this is the scheduled use flow rate.
Water Heater Use Inlet Temperature [C]

The inlet temperature on the use side.
Water Heater Use Outlet Temperature [C]

The outlet temperature on the use side.
Water Heater Use Rate [W]

The average heat transfer rate between the use side water and the tank water.
Water Heater Use Energy [J]

The heat transfer energy between the use side water and the tank water.
Water Heater Source Flow Rate [kg/s]

The source side mass flow rate. If in stand-alone operation, this is 0.
- 598 -
Water Heater Source Inlet Temperature [C]

The inlet temperature on the source side.
Water Heater Source Outlet Temperature [C]

The outlet temperature on the source side.
Water Heater Source Rate [W]

The average heat transfer rate between the source side water and the tank water.
Water Heater Source Energy [J]

The heat transfer energy between the source side water and the tank water.
Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Rate To Tank [W]

The average heat gain rate to the tank water due to off-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater Off-Cycle Parasitic Heat Energy To Tank [J]

The heat gain energy to the tank water due to off-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Rate To Tank [W]

The average heat gain rate to the tank water due to on-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater On-Cycle Parasitic Heat Energy To Tank [J]

The heat gain energy to the tank water due to on-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater Total Demand Rate [W]

The average heating rate demanded to maintain the setpoint temperature.
Water Heater Total Demand Energy [J]

The heating energy demanded to maintain the setpoint temperature.
Water Heater Heating Rate [W]

The average heating rate supplied by the heater element or burner.
Water Heater Heating Energy [J]

The heating energy supplied by the heater element or burner.
Water Heater Unmet Demand Rate [W]

The average heating rate unmet by the heater element or burner. The difference between the Total Demand
Rate and the Heating Rate.
Water Heater Unmet Demand Energy [J]

The heating energy unmet by the heater element or burner. The difference between the Total Demand Energy
and the Heating Energy.
Water Heater Venting Rate [W]

The average venting rate to keep the tank below the Maximum Temperature Limit.
Water Heater Venting Energy [J]

The venting energy to keep the tank below the Maximum Temperature Limit.
Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Rate [W]

The average net heat transfer rate when considering all losses and gains.
Water Heater Net Heat Transfer Energy [J]

The net heat transfer energy when considering all losses and gains.
- 599 -
Water Heater Cycle On Count []

The number of times that the heater turned on in the time period.
Water Heater Runtime Fraction []

The fraction of the time period that the heater was running.
Water Heater Part Load Ratio []

The fraction of the Heater Maximum Capacity.
Water Heater <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate [W]

The average fuel consumption rate for the heater element or burner.
Water Heater <Fuel Type> Consumption Energy [J]

The fuel consumption energy for the heater element or burner.
Water Heater Off-Cycle <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate [W]

The average fuel consumption rate for the off-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater Off-Cycle <Fuel Type> Consumption Energy [J]

The fuel consumption energy for the off-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater On-Cycle <Fuel Type> Consumption Rate [W]

The average fuel consumption rate for the on-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater On-Cycle <Fuel Type> Consumption Energy [J]

The fuel consumption energy for the on-cycle parasitics.
Water Heater Water Consumption Rate [m3/s]

The water consumption rate for the use side, if in stand-alone operation.
Water Heater Water Consumption [m3]

The water consumption for the use side, if in stand-alone operation.
Solar Hot Water

Some typical solar hot water loop configurations are shown on the Solar and Auxiliary Heating Loops help
page. This page provides more information on how to configure and control solar hot water systems.
Solar Heating System Control

To provide control over the collector loop, a differential thermostat option is incorporated within the solar loop
dialog. The differential thermostat compares the temperature in the water heater to the temperature in a
collector so that the loop pump is only turned on when there is a useful heat gain.
- 600 -
There is an option on the solar collector dialog to allow you to select which collector will act as the sensor for
the thermostat. The outlet temperature from the water heater is used as the location for the other thermostat
sensor.
- 601 -
Note: If the two temperature differences on the solar collector dialog are too close, it is possible for the system
to turn on and off rapidly without much useful heat gain. This can also occur if the flow rate through the
collector is too high. Without flow the fluid in the collector heats up more quickly; when high flow is turned on,
all of the hot fluid is removed and the temperature drops, forcing the system off again.
Freeze Prevention
In climates with a cold season, the solar heating system must be designed to avoid the risk of fluid freezing in
the solar collector or exposed pipes and causing damage. There are several strategies that can minimise the
risk.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Seasonal schedule. The simplest strategy is to not use the system during the cold season. However,
this is problematic because it requires the collector to be manually drained of all fluid. The benefits of
the solar heating system are also lost during this time. This can be simulated using an appropriate
pump flow schedule for the collector system.
Antifreeze. The freezing point of the liquid is decreased by adding antifreeze (glycol) to the water or
using a different heat transfer liquid with a lower freezing point. This can be achieved by selecting a
glycol fluid for the loop fluid type on the solar loop dialog, this is the default setting.
Drain-back system. This strategy automatically empties the collector when the pump is not running.
This scenario is modelled by default in EnergPylus, although the extra pump energy required to start
the system is not taken into account.
Re-circulation system. This strategy automatically re-circulates warm liquid from the storage tank back
through the collector to maintain the system above the freezing point. There are system losses using
this method. This can be simulated by using the Low temperature protection setting on the solar loop
dialog to force the system to turn on when the outdoor air temperature or collector outlet temperature
falls below a specified minimum.
Additional Controls
In addition to freeze prevention, it is also necessary to prevent the system from becoming too hot. This is
usually a safety issue for the water heater. For this case it is important to have a high temperature cut-off to
- 602 -
stop the pump before damaging the water heater. This is accomplished using the High temperature protection
setting on the solar loop dialog (see above).
This ratio is the minimum system air flow rate divided by the maximum system air flow rate. The value must be
between 0 and 1. For constant volume systems the ratio should be set to 1. Note that this ratio should be set
to reflect what the user expects the system flow rate to be when maximum heating demand occurs. This ratio
is used in calculating the central system heating capacity. Thus if the system is VAV with the zone VAV
dampers held at minimum flow when there is a zone heating demand, this ratio should be set to the minimum
flow ratio. If the zone VAV dampers are reverse action and can open to full flow to meet heating demand, this
ratio should be set to 1.
Solar Collector Data

SolarCollector:FlatPlate:Water
Used in:
Solar hot water loop, demand side
Solar hot water collectors are thermal devices that convert solar energy into thermal energy by raising the
temperature of a circulating heat transfer fluid (which must be water in current versions of EnergyPlus). The
fluid is used to heat water for DHW usage and/or space heating. In EnergyPlus solar collectors are
components that are connected to a solar plant loop. A solar heating system can be constructed with a
combination of solar collectors, pumps, and hot water tanks.
The EnergyPlus model is based on the equations found in the ASHRAE standards and Duffie and Beckman
(1991). This model applies to glazed and unglazed flat-plate collectors, as well as banks of tubular, i.e.
evacuated tube, collectors.
The solar collector object references a solar collector surface which is defined in the building model and
defines the gross area, position, orientation and tilt of the collector allowing it to participate normally in detailed
solar and shading calculations if either of the 2-Full exterior or 3-Full interior and exterior Solar distribution
options are selected. Solar radiation incident on the collector surface includes beam and diffuse radiation, as
well as radiation reflected from the ground and adjacent surfaces. Shading of the collector by other surfaces,
such as nearby buildings or trees, is also taken into account. Likewise, the collector surface can shade other
surfaces, for example, reducing the incident radiation on the roof beneath it.
The thermal and optical properties of the collector module can be loaded from a Solar collector template.
General
Name
The unique name of the Solar hot water collector.
Maximum flow rate

The maximum flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min) allowed through the collector.
Solar Collector Surface

Solar collector surface
Select a building solar collector surface o define the gross area, position, orientation and tilt of the collector.
- 603 -
Control
Differential thermostat hot node sensor
Check this option to identify this Solar collector as the one to be used as a reference point for the differential
thermostat selected on the Solar loop dialog.
Performance
Solar collector performance template
A Solar collector performance template which defines the thermal and optical properties of the collector.
DesignBuilder provides a database of Solar collector templates containing the thermal and optical
performance parameters for a single collector module. These parameters are based on the testing
methodologies described in ASHRAE Standards 93 and 96. The Solar Rating and Certification Corporation
(SRCC) applies these standards in their rating procedures of solar collectors. The coefficients for the energy
conversion efficiency and incident angle modifier allow first order (linear) or second order (quadratic)
correlations. To use a first order correlation, the second order coefficient must be set to zero.
In order for the model to work correctly, the test conditions for which the performance coefficients were
measured must be specified in the fields: Test flow rate, and Test correlation type. Currently, only water is
allowed as the Test Fluid.
More detailed information about the performance coefficients, can be found in the EnergyPlus Engineering
Reference Document.
Gross area
The gross area of the collector module (in m2 or ft2). This value is mainly for reference. The area of
the associated solar collector surface is used in all calculations.
Test flow rate

The volumetric flow rate during testing (m3/s or gal/min). If the value is available as flow rate per unit
area, it is recommended to multiply by the Gross Area of the collector module, not the net aperture area.
Test correlation type

This field specifies type of temperature used to develop the correlation equations. The testing procedure is
based on an experimental correlation using either Inlet, Average or Outlet temperature. Enter one of these
choices. The ASHRAE Standards 93 and 96 always use Inlet temperature.
Coefficient 1 of efficiency equation

First coefficient of efficiency equation for energy conversion (dimensionless). This is the Y-intercept
term.

Second coefficient of efficiency equation for energy conversion (W/m2-K or Btu/h-ft2-F). This is the first order
term.

Third coefficient of efficiency equation for energy conversion (W/m2-K2 or Btu/h-ft2-F2). This is the secondorder term. If set to zero, a first-order linear correlation is used.
Coefficient 2 of incident angle modifier

Second coefficient of the incident angle modifier equation. This the first-order term. (There is no Coefficient 1
of Incident Angle Modifier because that number is always 1.0.)
- 604 -
Coefficient 3 of incident angle modifier

Third coefficient of the incident angle modifier equation. This is the second-order term. If set to zero, a first
order linear correlation is used.
Tempering Valve
A tempering valve may be used for cases where plant flow control is needed to make efficient use of thermal
storage and is required in solar hot water loops to prevent the DHW loop thermal storage tank from becoming
warmer than is necessary or allowable for safe use of the hot water. Although real installations of a tempering,
or anti-scald valve, would more commonly mix a new stream of mains water with the hot water to achieve a
desired outlet temperature, this is difficult to model directly within EnergyPlus because plant loops need to be
closed circuits. For installations where the water entering the splitter is directly from the mains, such as make
up water entering a water heater tank, the modelling provided with this object will be thermodynamically
equivalent.
The Tempering valve models a temperature-controlled diversion valve on a bypass pipe that can open to
divert flow around one or more plant components. It can only be used on one of two branches between a
Splitter and a Mixer. The figure below shows the use of the tempering valve with a Water heater component
on Stream 2. The tempering valve acts to divert flow through the branch it is on in order to adjust the
temperature at the outlet of the mixer. If the temperature at Stream 2 Source Node is warmer than the setpoint
and the inlet flow is cooler than the setpoint, then a controller determines how much flow should bypass the
storage tank to achieve the desired setpoint.
No data entry is required for tempering valves.
Plant and Condenser Loop Equipment Data

Plant equipment is used in plant and condenser loops:
"Boilers" on page 606

"Chillers" on page 612
"Cooling Tower" on page 627
"Pumps " on page 634
"Ground Heat Exchanger" on page 638
"VRF Outdoor Unit" on page 649
- 605 -
Boilers
Boiler:HotWater
Used in:
Hot water loop, supply side
Boilers provide hot water to hot water heating coils, hot water radiators, heated floors, baseboards etc. The
fuel consumed by the boiler is based on a nominal thermal efficiency value. A normalised efficiency
performance curve can additionally be used to more accurately represent the performance of non-electric
boilers, but is not a required input.
Boiler components are used in both Compact and Detailed HVAC:
When using the Compact HVAC model option, a boiler component can be selected at building level on
the HVAC tab when the main HVAC system type is VAV or CAV or if one or more zone in the model
has a fan coil unit.
When using the Detailed HVAC model option, boilers can be added only when you are currently
located in a hot water supply loop. Boilers can be placed using the Add Boiler tool.
To edit an existing boiler go to the Hot water supply loop (HVAC System > Hot water loop > Supply loop)
level where the boiler is placed, click on the boiler icon to highlight it then either right click and select the Edit
selected component menu option or, when using Learning mode, click on the Edit icon in at the top of the
info panel.
General
Name
The auto-generated name of the boiler can be edited.
Boiler template
Use this browse option to select a boiler from the EnergyPlus boilers database.
Fuel type
Select the type of fuel used by the boiler. The fuel type can be one of:
1-Electricity,
2-Natural gas,
3-Propane gas,
4-Fuel oil #1,
5-Fuel oil #2,
6-Coal,
7-Diesel,
8-Gasoline,
9-Other fuel 1
10-Other fuel 2
9-Other fuel 1 and 10-Other fuel 2 can be used for representing biofuels such as biomass and biogas for
example.
Nominal capacity
This numeric field contains the nominal operating capacity of the boiler (in W or Btu/h). The boiler nominal
capacity may be autosized.
- 606 -
Boiler flow mode

This choice field determines how the boiler operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through the device.
There are three choices:
1-Constant flow is the default option for constant volume chilled water loops and is useful for constant
speed pumping arrangements where the boilers request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall
loop flow.
2-Leaving setpoint modulated changes the boiler model to internally vary the flow rate so that the
temperature leaving the boiler matches a setpoint.
3-Not modulated is the default option for variable volume hot water loops and is useful for either
variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the boiler is passive in the sense that
although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate, it can operate at varying flow rates.
In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow through the boiler - for example
if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted and the requests cannot be met.
For variable flow chilled water loops these options are available:
2-Leaving setpoint modulated and

3-Not modulated.
For constant flow chilled water loops these options are available:
1-Constant flow and

3-Not modulated.
The type of loop (variable/constant flow) can be changed by modifying the Plant loop flow type on the Hot
water plant loop dialog.
Note: When the 2-Leaving setpoint modulated option is selected then you must add an extra Setpoint
manager immediately downstream of the boiler hot water outlet to define the temperature of the water
supplied.
Parasitic electric load

This optional numeric field contains the parasitic electric power (in W or Btu/h) consumed by a forced draft fan
or other electrical device associated with the boiler. This parasitic electric load is consumed whenever the
boiler is operating, and the model assumes that this parasitic power does not contribute to heating the water.
The minimum value for this field is 0.0.
Sizing factor
The sizing factor is used when the boiler design inputs are autosized. In this case the autosizing results are
multiplied by this additional sizing factor. The usual value to enter is 1.0.
The inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal capacity and Design water flow rate.
The most common use of the sizing factor is for sizing boilers to meet only part of the design load while
continuing to use the autosizing feature. For example when a set of boilers is chained together to supply hot
water to a plant loop, this sizing factor can be used to indicate the proportion of the load to be met by each
boiler.
Efficiency
Fuel use equation
The EnergyPlus boiler model is based the following two equations:
Theoretical Fuel Consumption = Boiler Load / Nominal Thermal Efficiency
- 607 -
Fuel Used = Theoretical Fuel Consumption / Normalised Boiler Efficiency Curve Output
Nominal thermal efficiency

This is the heating efficiency (as a fraction between 0 and 1) of the boilers burner relative to the higher
heating value (HHV) of fuel at a part load ratio of 1.0. Manufacturers typically specify the efficiency of a boiler
using the higher heating value of the fuel. For the rare occurrences when a manufacturers (or particular data
set) thermal efficiency is based on the lower heating value (LHV) of the fuel, multiply the thermal efficiency by
the lower-to-higher heating value ratio. For example, assume a fuels lower and higher heating values are
approximately 45,450 and 50,000 kJ/kg, respectively. For a manufacturers thermal efficiency rating of 0.90
(based on the LHV), the nominal thermal efficiency entered here is 0.82 (i.e. 0.9 multiplied by 45,450/50,000).
Note: The overall boiler efficiency used during the simulation will be the product of the Nominal thermal
efficiency and the output of Normalized boiler efficiency performance curve (below).
Efficiency curve temperature evaluation variable

This field is used to control which value for hot water temperature is used when evaluating the Normalized
boiler efficiency performance curve specified in the next field (if applicable). There are two options:
1-Leaving boiler which indicates that the efficiency curves will be evaluated using the temperature at
the boiler outlet.
2-Entering boiler which indicates that the efficiency curves will be evaluated using the temperature at
boiler inlet node
This field is only used if type of curve is one that uses temperature as a independent variable.
Normalized boiler efficiency performance curve

This field contains the Curve which describes the normalized heating efficiency (as a fraction of nominal
thermal efficiency) of the boilers burner. If the <None> linear curve is selected, the nominal thermal efficiency
is assumed to be constant (i.e., Fuel Used is equal to the Theoretical Fuel Use in the equation above). When
a boiler efficiency curve is used, the curve may be any valid curve with 1 (PLR) or 2 (PLR and boiler outlet
water temperature) independent variables. A tri-quadratic curve object is not allowed since it uses 3
independent variables. The linear, quadratic, and cubic curve types may be used when the boiler efficiency is
only a function of boiler part-load ratio (PLR). When this type of curve is used, the boiler should operate at (or
very near) the design boiler water outlet temperature. Other curve types may be used when the boiler
efficiency is a function of both PLR and boiler water temperature. Examples of valid single and dual
independent variable equations are shown below. For all curve types PLR is always the x independent
variable. When using 2 independent variables, the boiler outlet water temperature (T outlet) is always the y
independent variable.
Linear: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR
Quadratic: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR + A2*PLR2
Cubic: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR + A2*PLR2 + A3*PLR3
BiQuadratic: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR + A2*PLR2 + A3* Tw + A4* Tw 2 + A5*PLR* Tw
QuadraticLinear: Eff = A0 + A1*PLR + A2*PLR2 + A3* Tw + A4*PLR* Tw + A5*PLR2* Tw
BiCubic: Eff=A0+A1*PLR+A2*PLR2+A3*Tw+A4*Tw2+A5*PLR2+A6*Tw3+A7*PLR2* Tw+A8*PLR* Tw2
where:
Eff = normalized boiler efficiency
PLR = boiler part-load ratio
Tw = boiler (outlet) water temperature [C]
When using the normalized efficiency performance curve, if all coefficients are not required, simply set the
unused coefficients to 0. For example, an electric boiler could be modelled by setting the nominal thermal
efficiency to a value in the range of 0.96 to 1.0. Coefficient 0 in the normalized efficiency performance curve
would equal 1 and all other coefficients would be set to 0. Coefficients for other types of non-electric boilers
would set a combination of the available coefficients to non-zero values.
The graph below (reproduced with permission from CIBSE) illustrates the range of typical efficiency for
different types of boiler.
- 608 -
CIBSE Guide B Fig 1.4
Water Outlet

This numeric field contains the maximum design water volumetric flow rate (in m3/sec or gal/min). This should
be the largest flow rate than can be heated to the design outlet temperature. This field is autosizable.
- 609 -
Water outlet upper temperature limit

This numeric field contains the outlet temperature upper limit (in C or F). It is used to cap the output from the
boiler to avoid the boiler water outlet temperature from getting too high when the boiler is operating at less
than the design flow rate, or when the return water temperature is relatively high. It is similar to the Leaving
chilled water lower temperature limit for chillers.
Warning: The Water outlet upper temperature limit must be at least 5C higher than the design supply loop
outlet heating setpoint temperature to avoid the boiler cutting out during the simulation. Using temperatures
equal to the supply loop design outlet temperature typically prevents boiler operation completely. You are
advised to leave this setting at 100C even when supplying hot water at much lower temperatures.
Part Load Ratios

Minimum part load ratio
This numeric field contains the minimum part load ratio. If the ratio of demand to boiler nominal capacity is
less than the minimum part load ratio, then the Min PLR will determine the operating PLR. The expected
range is between 0 and 1.
Maximum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the maximum part load ratio. If the ratio of demand to boiler nominal capacity is
greater than the maximum part load ratio, then the Max PLR will determine the operating PLR. This value may
exceed 1, but the normal range is between 0 and 1.1.
Optimum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the optimum part load ratio, i.e. is the part load ratio at which the boiler performs at
its maximum efficiency. It is used in the load management calculations when the Plant loop Load distribution
scheme is set to 2-Optimal. A typical value will be 1, but for condensing gas boilers, the optimum part load
ratio is much lower at about 0.3.
Boiler Outputs
HVAC,Average,Boiler Heating Output Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler Heating Output Energy [J]
Zone,Meter,Boilers:EnergyTransfer [J]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Water Inlet Temp [C]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Water Outlet Temp [C]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Parasitic Electric Power [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler Parasitic Electric Consumption [J]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Part-Load Ratio
One of the following blocks will be applicable based on fuel type:
HVAC,Average,Boiler Electric Consumption Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler Electric Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter, Electricity:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Heating:Electricity [J]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Gas Consumption Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler Gas Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter,Gas:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Heating:Gas [J]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Propane Consumption Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler Propane Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter, Propane:Plant [J]
- 610 -
Zone,Meter,Heating:Propane [J]
HVAC,Average,Boiler FuelOil#1 Consumption Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler FuelOil#1 Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter, FuelOil#1:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Heating:FuelOil#1 [J]
HVAC,Average,Boiler FuelOil#2 Consumption Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler FuelOil#2 Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter, FuelOil#2:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Heating:FuelOil#2 [J]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Coal Consumption Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler Coal Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter,Coal:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Heating:Coal [J]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Diesel Consumption Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler Diesel Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter, Diesel:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Heating:Diesel [J]
HVAC,Average,Boiler Gasoline Consumption Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Boiler Gasoline Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter, Gasoline:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Heating:Gasoline [J]
Boiler Heating Output Rate [W]

Boiler Heating Output Energy [J]
These outputs are the heating output (load) of the boiler. Energy is metered on Boilers:EnergyTransfer,
EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Boiler Water Inlet Temp [C]

Boiler Water Outlet Temp [C]
Boiler Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the hot water inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for the boiler.
Boiler Part-Load Ratio

This output is the operating part-load ratio of the boiler. The part-load ratio is calculated as the boiler load
divided by the boiler nominal capacity. The part-load ratio is limited by the minimum and maximum part-load
ratio inputs specified by the user.
Boiler <FuelType> Consumption Rate [W] Boiler <FuelType>

Consumption [J]
These outputs are the energy input to the boiler. Valid fuel types are: Electric, Gas (natural gas), Propane,
FuelOil#1, FuelOil#2, Coal, Diesel, and Gasoline. Consumption is metered on Heating:<FuelType>,
<FuelType>:Plant, and <FuelType>:Facility.
Boiler Parasitic Electric Power [W] Boiler Parasitic Electric Consumption

[J]
These outputs are the parasitic electric power and parasitic electric consumption associated with the boiler.
Used when simulating a forced draft fan or other electric component. Consumption is metered on
Heating:Electricity and Electricity:Plant.
- 611 -
Chillers
Chiller:Electric:EIR
Used in:
Chilled water loop, supply side
Chillers provide chilled water to cooling coils, chilled beams and cooled ceilings. Chiller components
are used in both Compact and Detailed HVAC:
When using the Compact HVAC model option, a chiller component can be selected at building level on
the HVAC tab when the main HVAC system type is VAV or CAV or if one or more zone in the model
has a fan coil unit.
When using the Detailed HVAC model option, chiller can be added only when you are currently located
in a Chilled water supply loop. Chillers can be placed using the Add Chiller command.
When using Detailed HVAC, to edit an existing chiller go to the Chilled water supply loop (HVAC System >
Chilled water loop > Supply loop) level where the chiller is placed, click on the chiller icon to highlight it then
either right click and select the Edit selected component menu option or, when using Learning mode, click
on the Edit icon in at the top of the info panel.
These chiller types are available in Detailed HVAC:
Chiller - Constant CoP - a simple model with constant efficiency, i.e. not using performance
curves.
Chiller - EIR - a more detailed model using 3 performance curves to determine cooling capacity
and CoP from the chiller load and outside air temperature.
Chiller - Constant CoP
Chiller:ConstantCOP
Used in:
This chiller model is based on a simple, constant COP simulation of the chiller. In this case, performance does
not vary with chilled water temperature or condenser conditions. Such a model can be useful when detailed
performance data is not available.
GENERAL
Name
The auto-generated name of the chiller can be edited.
Chiller type
The type of chiller can be one of these options:
1-Constant CoP - the simple constant CoP model described on this page.
2-Chiller EIR - a more detailed model using 3 performance curves to determine cooling capacity
and CoP from the chiller load and outside air temperature.
- 612 -
The Chiller type cannot be edited directly. To use a different type you must add a new chiller, selecting
the appropriate type from the drop list.
Nominal capacity
This numeric field contains the nominal cooling capacity of the chiller (in W or Btu/h). Alternatively, this field
can be autosized.
Nominal COP
This numeric field contains the chillers coefficient of performance to be used for all operating conditions in the
simulation. Unlike Chiller EIR, the CoP entered for Constant CoP chillers should include the energy consumed
by the condenser fans for air and evaporatively cooled chillers.
Chiller flow mode

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through the
devices evaporator. There are three choices for specifying operating modes for the intended flow behaviour:
speed pumping arrangements where the chillers request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall
loop flow.
2-Leaving setpoint modulated is the default option for variable volume chilled water loops and
changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the chiller
matches a setpoint at the evaporator outlet.
3-Not modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller is passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate, it can
operate at varying flow rates.
In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow through the chiller - for
example if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted and the requests cannot be met.
For variable flow chilled water loops these options are available: 2-Leaving setpoint modulated and 3-Not
modulated.
For constant flow chilled water loops these options are available: 1-Constant flow and 3-Not modulated.
The type of loop (variable/constant flow) can be changed by modifying the Plant loop flow type on the Chilled
manager immediately downstream of the chiller chilled water outlet to define the temperature of the water
supplied.
Sizing factor
The sizing factor is used when the chiller design inputs are autosized. In this case the autosizing results are
The inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Nominal capacity, Design chilled water flow rate and
Design condenser water flow rate.
The most common use of the sizing factor is for sizing chillers to meet only part of the design load while
continuing to use the autosizing feature. For example when a set of chillers is chained together to supply
chilled water to a plant loop, this sizing factor can be used to indicate the proportion of the load to be met by
each chiller.
CONDENSER
Condenser type
The condenser type determines what type of condenser will be included with this chiller. Valid condenser
types are:
- 613 -
1-Air cooled,
2-Water cooled,
3-Evaporatively cooled
The default is 2-Water cooled which requires the full specification of the Condenser loop and its associated
equipment. 1-Air cooled and 3-Evaporatively cooled do not require a Condenser loop to be specified.
FLOW RATES
Design chilled water flow rate
For a variable flow chiller this is the maximum water flow rate and for a constant flow chiller this is the design
water flow rate through the chillers evaporator. The units are (in m3/s or gal/min). This numeric input field
must be greater than zero, or it can be autosized.
Design condenser fluid flow rate

This numeric field contains the chillers operating condenser water flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min). This field can
be autosized.
This field is not used Air cooled and Evaporatively cooled Condenser types.
BASIN HEATER
This numeric field contains the capacity of the DX coils electric evaporative cooler basin heater in (W/K or
dry-bulb temperature. The basin heater only operates when the chiller is off, regardless of the basin heater

when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as the chiller is off.

when the chiller is off.
GENERIC CHILLER OUTPUTS

Many output variable names are common across all chiller types. These generic chiller output names all begin
with the word "Chiller". Certain chiller types have additional output variables which are specific to that type of
chiller. Specific chiller output names begin with the chiller type, for example, "Gas Absorption Chiller Heating
Energy [J]." Chiller energy use is added to the appropriate plant-level meters as a cooling end-use.
HVAC,Average,Chiller Electric Power [W]
HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electric Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
- 614 -
HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Heat Trans Rate [W]

HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evap Heat Trans [J]
Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Water Inlet Temp [C]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Water Outlet Temp [C]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Cond Heat Trans Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Chiller Cond Heat Trans [J]
Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W]
The following output is applicable only for air-cooled or evap-cooled chillers:
HVAC,Average,Chiller Cond Air Inlet Temp [C]
The following outputs are applicable only for evap-cooled chillers:
HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electric Power [W]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electric Consumption [J]
The following three outputs are only available for water-cooled chillers:
HVAC,Average,Chiller
Cond Water Inlet Temp [C]

Cond Water Outlet Temp [C]
Cond Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
Shaft Power [W]
Chiller Electric Power [W]

Chiller Electric Consumption [J]
These outputs are the electric power input to the chiller. In the case of steam or fuel-powered chillers, this
repesents the internal chiller pumps and other electric power consumption. Consumption is metered on
Cooling:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.
Chiller Evap Heat Trans Rate [W]

Chiller Evap Heat Trans [J]
These outputs are the evaporator heat transfer which is the cooling delivered by the chiller. Chiller Evap Heat
Trans is metered on Chillers:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Chiller Evap Water Inlet Temp [C]

Chiller Evap Water Outlet Temp [C]
Chiller Evap Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the evaporator (chilled water) inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate.
Chiller COP [W/W]

This output is the coefficient of performance for the chiller during cooling operation. It is calculated as the
evaporator heat transfer rate (Chiller Evap Heat Trans Rate) divided by the fuel consumption rate by the
chiller. For the constant COP and electric chillers, the fuel is electricity so the divisor is Chiller Electric Power
[W]. For the absorption chiller, the fuel is steam so the divisor is Steam Consumption Rate [W].
For the engine driven chiller and combustion turbine chiller, the output variable is renamed as Chiller Fuel
COP to clarify that the primary energy input to the chiller is a gaseous or liquid fuel (natural gas, diesel,
gasoline, etc.). The divisor is the appropriate fuel consumption rate (Chiller [fuel type] Consumption Rate).
For the direct fired absorption chiller, this variable is renamed as Direct Fired Absorption Chiller Cooling Fuel
COP and the divisor is Direct Fired Absorption Chiller Cooling Gas Consumption Rate.
Note that this variable is reported as zero when the chiller is not operating. When reported for frequencies
longer than "detailed" (such as timestep, hourly, daily, monthly or environment), this output will only be
- 615 -
meaningful when the chiller is operating for the entire reporting period. To determine an average COP for a
longer time period, compute the COP based on total evaporator heat transfer divided by total electric or fuel
input over the desired period.
Chiller Part-Load Ratio

This output is the operating part-load ratio of the indirect absorption chiller. This output may fall below the
minimum part-load ratio specified in the input. For this case, the Chiller Cycling Fraction is used to further
define the performance of the indirect absorption chiller.
Chiller Cycling Fraction

This output is the fraction of the timestep the indirect absorption chiller operates. When the chiller operates
above the minimum part-load ratio, a chiller cycling fraction of 1 is reported. When the chiller operates below
the minimum part-load ratio, the chiller cycling fraction reports the fraction of the timestep the indirect
absorption chiller operates.
Chiller Cond Heat Trans Rate [W]

Chiller Cond Heat Trans [J]
These outputs are the condenser heat transfer which is the heat rejected from the chiller to either a condenser
water loop or through an air-cooled condenser. Chiller Cond Heat Trans is metered on
HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Chiller Cond Air Inlet Temp [C]

This output is the condenser (heat rejection) inlet temperature for air-cooled or evap-cooled chillers. For an
air-cooled chiller, this output would be the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the condenser coil. For an
evap-cooled chiller, this output would be the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the evaporatively-cooled
condenser coil.
Chiller Basin Heater Electric Power [W]

Chiller Basin Heater Electric Consumption [J]
These outputs are the electric power input to the chillers basin heater (for evaporativelycooled condenser
type). Consumption is metered on Chillers:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility
Chiller Cond Water Inlet Temp [C]

Chiller Cond Water Outlet Temp [C]
Chiller Cond Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the condenser (heat rejection) inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for water-cooled
chillers.
Chiller Shaft Power [W]

Chiller Shaft Energy [J]
For engine-driven and turbine-driven chillers, these outputs are the shaft power produced by the prime mover
and transferred to the chiller compressor.
- 616 -
Chiller Lube Heat Recovery Rate [W]

Chiller Lube Heat Recovery [J]
Chiller Jacket Heat Recovery Rate [W]
Chiller Jacket Heat Recovery [J]
Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery Rate [W]
Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery [J]
Chiller Total Heat Recovery Rate [W]
Chiller Total Heat Recovery [J]
For chillers with heat recovery, such as engine-driven chillers, these outputs are the components of
recoverable energy available. For a given chiller type, one or more of the following components may be
applicable: Lube (engine lubricant), Jacket (engine coolant), Exhaust (engine exhaust), and Total. Chiller Lube
Heat Recovery, Chiller Jacket Heat Recovery, and Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery are metered on
HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Chiller Exhaust Stack Temp [C]

This is the exhaust temperature leaving an engine chiller.
Chiller Heat Recovery Inlet Temp [C]

Chiller Heat Recovery Outlet Temp [C]
Chiller Heat Recovery Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the heat recovery inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for chillers with heat recovery
such as engine-driven and gas turbine chillers.
Chiller <FuelType> Consumption Rate [W]

Chiller <FuelType> Consumption [J]
Chiller <FuelType> Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
Chiller Gas Mass Consumption [kg] (Gas Turbine Chiller only)
These outputs are the steam or fuel input for steam or fuel-fired chillers. Valid fuel types depend on the type of
chiller. <FuelType> may be one of: Gas (natural gas), Steam, Propane, Diesel, Gasoline, FuelOil#1, and
FuelOil#2. Consumption is metered on Cooling:<FuelType>, <FuelType>:Plant, and <FuelType>:Facility.
Chiller EIR
Chiller:Electric:EIR
Used in:
This chiller model is the empirical model used in the DOE-2.1 building energy simulation program. It uses
performance information at reference conditions along with three curve fits for cooling capacity and efficiency
to determine chiller operation at off-reference conditions. Chiller performance curves can be generated by
fitting manufacturers catalog data or measured data. Performance curves for more than 300 chillers, including
the default DOE-2.1E reciprocating and centrifugal chillers, are provided as templates for selection within the
chiller dialog. This data comes from in the EnergyPlus Reference DataSets (Chillers.idf).
- 617 -

Note: Chiller:Electric:EIR objects and their associated performance curve objects are developed using
performance information for a specific chiller and should normally be used together for an EnergyPlus
simulation. Changing the object input values, or swapping performance curves between chillers, should be
done with caution.
GENERAL
Name
The auto-generated name of the chiller can be edited.
Chiller template
Use this browse option to select a chiller from the EnergyPlus chiller database whose performance data you
wish to copy to your chiller.
Chiller type
The type of chiller can be one of these options:
Chiller - Constant CoP - a simple model with constant efficiency, i.e. not using performance
curves.
Chiller - EIR - the more detailed model described on this page.
The Chiller type cannot be edited directly. To use a different type you must add a new chiller, selecting
the appropriate type from the drop list.
Reference capacity
This numeric field contains the reference cooling capacity of the chiller (in W or Btu/h). This should be the
capacity of the chiller at the reference temperatures and water flow rates defined below. Alternatively, this field
can be autosized.
Reference COP
This numeric field contains the chillers coefficient of performance which is multiplied by the output of the
chiller performance curves described below. This value should not include energy use due to pumps, evapcooled or air-cooled condenser fans, or cooling tower fans. This COP should be at the reference temperatures
and water flow rates defined below.
Compressor motor efficiency

This numeric input represents the fraction of compressor electrical energy consumption that must be rejected
by the condenser. Enter a value of 1.0 when modelling hermetic chillers. This value must be between 0.0 and
1.0, with a default value of 1.0.
Chiller flow mode

This choice field determines how the chiller operates with respect to the intended fluid flow through the
devices evaporator. There are three choices for specifying operating modes for the intended flow behaviour:
speed pumping arrangements where the chillers request for flow is stricter and can increase the overall
loop flow.
2-Leaving setpoint modulated is the default option for variable volume chilled water loops and
changes the chiller model to internally vary the flow rate so that the temperature leaving the chiller
matches a setpoint at the evaporator outlet.
3-Not modulated is useful for either variable or constant speed pumping arrangements where the
chiller is passive in the sense that although it makes a nominal request for its design flow rate, it can
operate at varying flow rates.
In all cases the operation of the external plant system can also impact the flow through the chiller - for
example if the relative sizes and operation are such that flow is restricted and the requests cannot be met.
- 618 -
For variable flow chilled water loops these options are available: 2-Leaving setpoint modulated and 3-Not
modulated.
For constant flow chilled water loops these options are available: 1-Constant flow and 3-Not modulated.
The type of loop (variable/constant flow) can be changed by modifying the Plant loop flow type on the Chilled
manager immediately downstream of the chiller chilled water outlet to define the temperature of the water
supplied.
Sizing factor
The sizing factor is used when the chiller design inputs are autosized. In this case the autosizing results are
The inputs that would be altered by the sizing factor are: Reference capacity, Reference chilled water flow
rate and Reference condenser water flow rate.
The most common use of the sizing factor is for sizing chillers to meet only part of the design load while
continuing to use the autosizing feature. For example when a set of chillers is chained together to supply
chilled water to a plant loop, this sizing factor can be used to indicate the proportion of the load to be met by
each chiller.
CONDENSER
Condenser type
The condenser type determines what type of condenser will be included with this chiller. Valid condenser
types are:
1-Air cooled,
2-Water cooled,
3-Evaporatively cooled
The default is 2-Water cooled which requires the full specification of the Condenser loop and its associated
equipment. 1-Air cooled and 3-Evaporatively cooled do not require a Condenser loop to be specified.
Note: Condenser type cannot be edited directly. To help you to ensure that appropriate performance curves
are used, load a chiller of the correct type from the Chiller template.
Condenser fan power ratio

This data is used to model condenser fan power associated with air-cooled or evaporatively cooled
condensers. Enter the ratio of the condenser fan power to the reference chiller cooling capacity in W/W.
During the simulation the condenser fan power for air-cooled or evaporatively cooled chillers is calculated as
total chiller power consumption multiplied by this ratio.
TEMPERATURES
Reference leaving chilled water temperature
This numeric field contains the chillers reference leaving chilled water temperature (in C or F). The default
value is 6.67C.
Reference entering condenser fluid temperature

This numeric field contains the chillers reference entering condenser fluid temperature (in C or F). The
default value is 29.4C. For water-cooled chillers this is the water temperature entering the condenser (e.g.,
leaving the cooling tower). For air- or evap-cooled condensers this is the entering outdoor air dry-bulb or wetbulb temperature, respectively.
- 619 -
Leaving chilled water lower temperature limit

This numeric field contains the lower limit for the leaving chilled water temperature (in C or F). This
temperature acts as a cut off for heat transfer in the evaporator, so that the fluid doesnt get too cold. The
Note: This input field is currently unused.
FLOW RATES
Reference chilled water flow rate
For a variable flow chiller this is the maximum water flow rate and for a constant flow chiller this is the
operating water flow rate through the chillers evaporator. The units are (in m3/s or gal/min). This numeric
input field must be greater than zero, or it can be autosized.
Reference condenser fluid flow rate

This numeric field contains the chillers operating condenser water flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min). This field can
be autosized.
PERFORMANCE CURVES
Cooling capacity function of temperature curve (CAPFT)
The name of a Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation of the cooling capacity as a
function of the leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser fluid temperature. The output of
this curve is multiplied by the reference capacity to give the cooling capacity at specific temperature operating
conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of
1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The bi-quadratic curve should be valid for
the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
Electric input to cooling output ratio function of temperature curve

(EIRFT)
The name of a Bi-quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation of the energy input to cooling
output ratio (EIR) as a function of the leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser fluid
temperature. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference EIR
(inverse of the reference COP) to give the EIR at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at
temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the
reference temperatures and flow rates specified above. The bi-quadratic curve should be valid for the range of
water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
Electric input to cooling output ratio function of part load ratio curve
(EIRPLR)
The name of a Quadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as
a function of the part-load ratio. The EIR is the inverse of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual cooling
load divided by the chillers available cooling capacity.
This curve is generated by dividing the operating electric input power by the available full-load capacity (do not
divide by load) at the specific operating temperatures. The curve output should decrease from 1 towards 0 as
part-load ratio decreases from 1 to 0. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference full-load EIR
(inverse of the reference COP) and the Electric input to cooling output ratio function of temperature curve
(EIRFT) to give the EIR at the specific temperatures and part-load ratio at which the chiller is operating. This
curve should have a value of 1.0 when the part-load ratio equals 1.0.
An ideal chiller with the same efficiency at all part-load ratios would use a performance curve that has a value
of 0 when the part-load
ratio equals 0 (i.;e., a line connecting 0,0 and 1,1 when plotted as EIR versus PLR), however, actual systems
can have part-load EIRs slightly above or below this line (i.e., part-load efficiency often differs from rated
efficiency). The quadratic curve should be valid for the range of part-load ratios anticipated for the simulation.
- 620 -
Tip: If you cannot obtain manufacturers data for this curve then a reasonable estimate can be obtained by
using a straight line from 0,0 to 1,1. That is for the quadratic curve, C 0 = 0, C1 = 1 and C2 = 0.
Advice on chiller performance curves

During the simulation the electric power consumption of the compressor is calculated using:
Qcompressor = (Qref / CoPref) * CAPFT * EIRFT * EIRPLR
Where CAPFT, EIRFT and EIRPLR are the outputs from the 3 curves above.
If you have manufacturers data you can generate the inputs for these 3 curves using the spreadsheet
provided free by EnergyPlus called Chiller_PerformanceCurve_Coefficients.xls. When using this
spreadsheet to generate inputs for EIRPLR note that the coefficients are read from the spreadsheet into the
DesignBuilder Quadratic Curve dialog as follows:
Of course the performance and capacity of a chiller depends on various factors, the most important of these
being part load and temperature chilled water and the Chiller EIR provides an accurate representation taking
these factors into account. However in some cases you may only have summary manufacturers data. For
example you may only have information on the variation of CoP with part load ratio. In this case you can
define the EIRPLR curve in the usual way using your summary manufacturers data and use constant values
for the CAPFT and EIRFT curves which both generate a constant value of 1.0. Because CAPFT and EIRFT
are both Bi-quadratic curves you cannot use a constant Linear curve here so you must choose inputs to a
special simple Bi-quadratic curve that generates an output of 1 regardless of inputs. To achieve this simply
create and select a new Bi-quadratic curve with Coefficient 1 = 1 and all other coefficients = 0 for CAPFT and
EIRFT.
PART LOAD SETTINGS

Minimum part load ratio
This numeric field contains the chillers minimum part-load ratio. The expected range is between 0 and 1.
Below this part-load ratio, the compressor cycles on and off to meet the cooling load. The Minimum part load
ratio must be less than or equal to the Maximum part load ratio. The default value is 0.1.
- 621 -
Note: Setting the Minimum part load ratio to zero for air cooled chillers, will cause the condenser fan to run
constantly even at zero load which is likely to lead to high chiller fan consumption. This happens because the
condenser fan cannot cycle off even at zero chiller load.
Maximum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the chillers maximum part-load ratio. This value may exceed 1, but the normal
range is between 0 and 1.0. The Maximum part load ratio must be greater than or equal to the Minimum
part load ratio. The default value is 1.0.
Optimum part load ratio

This numeric field contains the chillers optimum part-load ratio. This is the part-load ratio at which the chiller
performs at its maximum COP. The optimum part-load ratio must be greater than or equal to the Minimum
part load ratio, and less than or equal to the Maximum part load ratio. The default value is 1.0.
Minimum unloading ratio

This numeric field contains the chillers minimum unloading ratio. The expected range is between 0 and 1. The
minimum unloading ratio is where the chiller capacity can no longer be reduced by unloading and must be
false loaded to meet smaller cooling loads. A typical false loading strategy is hot-gas bypass. The minimum
unloading ratio must be greater than or equal to the Minimum part load ratio, and less than or equal to the
Maximum part load ratio. The default value is 0.2.
False loading
Different chiller types (reciprocating, centrifugal etc) have very different operating characteristics. The point at
which they switch off at low load (cycle on and off to meet small loads) will vary between about 0.25 for older
reciprocating chillers and 0.1 for modern centrifugal chillers which have much better part-load performance.
Sometimes a manufacturer or installer may need to introduce a mechanism to stop the chiller cycling on and
off too frequently (frequent cycling causes excessive wear and reduces the equipment life). To stop this
happening some of the hot gas from the compressor outlet can be re-injected back into the return side of the
compressor so that the compressor inlet senses a higher return gas temperature and is fooled into thinking
that there is a higher cooling load on the system than there actually is (this basically mimics a higher
evaporator leaving temperature) so it needs to work a little harder to meet the load and the load is therefore
maintained above the point at which the compressor would normally switch off. This strategy is called falseloading and it is clear that bypassing hot gas from the discharge to the suction side of the compressor results
in higher energy consumption so is generally not considered to be an acceptable control strategy and actually
contravenes some energy codes (e.g. Part L2 in UK). This strategy is sometimes used to overcome poor
design and control problems.
You can avoid false loading in your model by setting the Minimum unloading ratio equal to the Minimum
part load ratio, so when the chiller reaches its minimum part-load ratio it just switches off and false-loading
cannot occur.
GENERIC CHILLER OUTPUTS

Many output variable names are common across all chiller types. These generic chiller output names all begin
with the word "Chiller". Certain chiller types have additional output variables which are specific to that type of
chiller. Specific chiller output names begin with the chiller type, for example, "Gas Absorption Chiller Heating
Energy [J]." Chiller energy use is added to the appropriate plant-level meters as a cooling end-use.
HVAC,Average,Chiller Electric Power [W]
HVAC,Sum,Chiller Electric Consumption [J]
Zone,Meter,Electricity:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Cooling:Electricity [J]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Heat Trans Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Chiller Evap Heat Trans [J]
Zone,Meter,EnergyTransfer:Plant [J]
Zone,Meter,Chillers:EnergyTransfer [J]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Water Inlet Temp [C]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Water Outlet Temp [C]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Evap Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Cond Heat Trans Rate [W]
HVAC,Sum,Chiller Cond Heat Trans [J]
- 622 -
Zone,Meter,HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer [J]
HVAC,Average,Chiller COP [W/W]
The following output is applicable only for air-cooled or evap-cooled chillers:
HVAC,Average,Chiller Cond Air Inlet Temp [C]
The following outputs are applicable only for evap-cooled chillers:
HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electric Power [W]
HVAC,Average,Chiller Basin Heater Electric Consumption [J]
The following three outputs are only available for water-cooled chillers:
Cond Water Inlet Temp [C]

Cond Water Outlet Temp [C]
Cond Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
Shaft Power [W]
Chiller Electric Power [W]

Chiller Electric Consumption [J]
These outputs are the electric power input to the chiller. In the case of steam or fuel-powered chillers, this
repesents the internal chiller pumps and other electric power consumption. Consumption is metered on
Cooling:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.
Chiller Evap Heat Trans Rate [W]

Chiller Evap Heat Trans [J]
These outputs are the evaporator heat transfer which is the cooling delivered by the chiller. Chiller Evap Heat
Trans is metered on Chillers:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Chiller Evap Water Inlet Temp [C]

Chiller Evap Water Outlet Temp [C]
Chiller Evap Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the evaporator (chilled water) inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate.
Chiller COP [W/W]

This output is the coefficient of performance for the chiller during cooling operation. It is calculated as the
evaporator heat transfer rate (Chiller Evap Heat Trans Rate) divided by the fuel consumption rate by the
chiller. For the constant COP and electric chillers, the fuel is electricity so the divisor is Chiller Electric Power
[W]. For the absorption chiller, the fuel is steam so the divisor is Steam Consumption Rate [W].
For the engine driven chiller and combustion turbine chiller, the output variable is renamed as Chiller Fuel
COP to clarify that the primary energy input to the chiller is a gaseous or liquid fuel (natural gas, diesel,
gasoline, etc.). The divisor is the appropriate fuel consumption rate (Chiller [fuel type] Consumption Rate).
For the direct fired absorption chiller, this variable is renamed as Direct Fired Absorption Chiller Cooling Fuel
COP and the divisor is Direct Fired Absorption Chiller Cooling Gas Consumption Rate.
Note that this variable is reported as zero when the chiller is not operating. When reported for frequencies
longer than "detailed" (such as timestep, hourly, daily, monthly or environment), this output will only be
meaningful when the chiller is operating for the entire reporting period. To determine an average COP for a
longer time period, compute the COP based on total evaporator heat transfer divided by total electric or fuel
input over the desired period.
Chiller Part-Load Ratio

This output is the operating part-load ratio of the indirect absorption chiller. This output may fall below the
minimum part-load ratio specified in the input. For this case, the Chiller Cycling Fraction is used to further
define the performance of the indirect absorption chiller.
- 623 -
Chiller Cycling Fraction

This output is the fraction of the timestep the indirect absorption chiller operates. When the chiller operates
above the minimum part-load ratio, a chiller cycling fraction of 1 is reported. When the chiller operates below
the minimum part-load ratio, the chiller cycling fraction reports the fraction of the timestep the indirect
absorption chiller operates.
Chiller Cond Heat Trans Rate [W]

Chiller Cond Heat Trans [J]
These outputs are the condenser heat transfer which is the heat rejected from the chiller to either a condenser
water loop or through an air-cooled condenser. Chiller Cond Heat Trans is metered on
HeatRejection:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
Chiller Cond Air Inlet Temp [C]

This output is the condenser (heat rejection) inlet temperature for air-cooled or evap-cooled chillers. For an
air-cooled chiller, this output would be the dry-bulb temperature of the air entering the condenser coil. For an
evap-cooled chiller, this output would be the wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the evaporatively-cooled
condenser coil.
Chiller Basin Heater Electric Power [W]

Chiller Basin Heater Electric Consumption [J]
These outputs are the electric power input to the chillers basin heater (for evaporativelycooled condenser
type). Consumption is metered on Chillers:Electricity, Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility
Chiller Cond Water Inlet Temp [C]

Chiller Cond Water Outlet Temp [C]
Chiller Cond Water Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the condenser (heat rejection) inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for water-cooled
chillers.
Chiller Shaft Power [W]

Chiller Shaft Energy [J]
For engine-driven and turbine-driven chillers, these outputs are the shaft power produced by the prime mover
and transferred to the chiller compressor.
Chiller Lube Heat Recovery Rate [W]

Chiller Lube Heat Recovery [J]
Chiller Jacket Heat Recovery Rate [W]
Chiller Jacket Heat Recovery [J]
Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery Rate [W]
Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery [J]
Chiller Total Heat Recovery Rate [W]
Chiller Total Heat Recovery [J]
For chillers with heat recovery, such as engine-driven chillers, these outputs are the components of
recoverable energy available. For a given chiller type, one or more of the following components may be
applicable: Lube (engine lubricant), Jacket (engine coolant), Exhaust (engine exhaust), and Total. Chiller Lube
Heat Recovery, Chiller Jacket Heat Recovery, and Chiller Exhaust Heat Recovery are metered on
HeatRecovery:EnergyTransfer, EnergyTransfer:Plant, and EnergyTransfer:Facility.
- 624 -
Chiller Exhaust Stack Temp [C]

This is the exhaust temperature leaving an engine chiller.
Chiller Heat Recovery Inlet Temp [C]

Chiller Heat Recovery Outlet Temp [C]
Chiller Heat Recovery Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the heat recovery inlet and outlet temperatures and flow rate for chillers with heat recovery
such as engine-driven and gas turbine chillers.
Chiller <FuelType> Consumption Rate [W]

Chiller <FuelType> Consumption [J]
Chiller <FuelType> Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
Chiller Gas Mass Consumption [kg] (Gas Turbine Chiller only)
These outputs are the steam or fuel input for steam or fuel-fired chillers. Valid fuel types depend on the type of
chiller. <FuelType> may be one of: Gas (natural gas), Steam, Propane, Diesel, Gasoline, FuelOil#1, and
FuelOil#2. Consumption is metered on Cooling:<FuelType>, <FuelType>:Plant, and <FuelType>:Facility.
CHILLER ELECTRIC EIR OUTPUTS

These reports are available only for Electric EIR Chillers.
Chiller Condenser Fan Electric Power [W]

Chiller Condenser Fan Electric Consumption [J]
These outputs are for the electric power consumption of the chiller condenser fan and are applicable to air- or
evaporatively-cooled chillers. This output is also added to a report meter with Resource Type = Electricity,
End Use Key = Chillers, Group Key = Plant (Ref. Report Meter).
ChillerCapFTemp
This is the output of the curve object Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve.
ChillerEIRFTemp
This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve.
ChillerEIRFPLR
This is the output of the curve object Electric Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Curve.
Chiller Part Load Ratio

This output is the ratio of the evaporator heat transfer rate plus the false load heat transfer rate (if applicable)
to the available chiller capacity. This value is used to determine ChillerEIRFPLR.
Chiller Cycling Ratio

The cycling ratio is the amount of time the chiller operates during each simulation timestep. If the chiller partload ratio falls below the minimum part-load ratio, the chiller cycles on and off to meet the cooling load.
Chiller False Load Heat Trans Rate

Chiller False Load Heat Trans
These outputs are the heat transfer rate and total heat transfer due to false loading of the chiller. When the
chiller part-load ratio is below the minimum unloading ratio, the chiller false loads (e.g. hot-gas bypass) to
further reduce capacity. The false load heat transfer report variable is not metered.
- 625 -
Chiller:Electric:EIR Technical Description

Electric Chiller Model Based on Condenser Entering Temperature
OVERVIEW
This model (EnergyPlus name Chiller:Electric:EIR) simulates the performance of an electric liquid chiller.
The model is based on the compression chiller model (COMREF) in the DOE-2.1 building energy simulation
program. The EnergyPlus model contains all of the features of the DOE-2.1 chiller model, plus additional
abilities for modelling evaporatively-cooled condensers and heat recovery for water heating.
This model simulates the thermal performance of the chiller and the power consumption of the compressor(s).
It also models the power consumption of condenser fans if modelling an air-cooled or evaporatively-cooled
condenser. This model does not simulate the thermal performance or the power consumption of associated
pumps or cooling towers.
MODEL DESCRIPTION
The chiller model uses user-supplied performance information at reference conditions along with three
performance curves (curve objects) for cooling capacity and efficiency to determine chiller operation at offreference conditions. The three performance curves are:
1.
2.
3.
Cooling Capacity Function of Temperature Curve

Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve
Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Part Load Ratio Curve
Cooling capacity function of temperature curve

The cooling capacity function of temperature curve is a biquadratic performance curve with two independent
variables: the leaving chilled water temperature and the entering condenser fluid temperature. The output of
this curve is multiplied by the reference capacity to give the full-load cooling capacity at specific temperature
operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures). The curve should have
a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified in the input data file by the user. The
biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the simulation.
2
ChillerCapFTemp = a + b(Tcw,l) + c(Tcw,l) ,+ d(Tcond,e) + e(Tcond,e) + f(Tcw,l )(Tcond,e)

where:
ChillerCapFTemp = cooling capacity factor, equal to 1 at reference conditions
Tcw,l = leaving chilled water temperature, C
Tcond,e = entering condenser fluid temperature, C. For a water-cooled condenser this will be the water
temperature returning from the condenser loop (e.g., leaving the cooling tower). For air- or evap-cooled
condensers this will be the entering outdoor air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature, respectively.
Energy input to cooling output ratio function of temperature curve

The energy input to cooling output ratio function of temperature curve is a biquadratic performance curve that
parameterises the variation of the energy input to cooling output ratio (EIR) as a function of the leaving chilled
water temperature and the entering condenser fluid temperature. The EIR is the inverse of the COP. The
output of this curve is multiplied by the reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) to give the full-load EIR
at specific temperature operating conditions (i.e., at temperatures different from the reference temperatures).
The curve should have a value of 1.0 at the reference temperatures and flow rates specified in the input data
file by the user. The Biquadratic curve should be valid for the range of water temperatures anticipated for the
simulation.
2
ChillerEIRFTemp = a + b(Tcw,l) + c(Tcw,l) ,+ d(Tcond,e) + e(Tcond,e) + f(Tcw,l )(Tcond,e)

where:
ChillerEIRFTemp = energy input to cooling output factor, equal to 1 at reference conditions
Tcw,l = leaving chilled water temperature, C
Tcond,e = entering condenser fluid temperature, C. For a water-cooled condenser this will be the water
temperature returning from the condenser loop (e.g., leaving the cooling tower). For air- or evap-cooled
condensers this will be the entering outdoor air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature, respectively.
- 626 -
Energy input to cooling output ratio function of part-load ratio curve

The energy input to cooling output ratio function of part-load ratio curve is a quadratic performance curve that
parameterizes the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) as a function of the part-load ratio. The EIR is the
inverse of the COP, and the part-load ratio is the actual cooling load divided by the chillers available cooling
capacity. The output of this curve is multiplied by the reference EIR (inverse of the reference COP) and the
Energy Input to Cooling Output Ratio Function of Temperature Curve to give the EIR at the specific
temperatures and part-load ratio at which the chiller is operating. This curve should have a value of 1.0 when
the part-load ratio equals 1.0. The quadratic curve should be valid for the range of part-load ratios anticipated
for the simulation.
ChillerEIRFPLR = a + b PLR + c PLR
where:
ChillerEIRFPLR = energy input to cooling output factor, equal to 1 at reference conditions
PLR = part-load ratio = (cooling load) / (chillers available cooling capacity)
All three of the performance curves are accessed through EnergyPlus built-in performance curve equation
manager (curve:quadratic and curve:biquadratic). It is not imperative that the user utilize all coefficients in the
performance curve equations if their performance equation has fewer terms (e.g., if the users ChillerEIRFPLR
performance curve is linear instead of quadratic, simply enter the values for a and b, and set coefficient c
equal to zero).
Note: Chiller:Electric:EIR objects and their associated performance curve objects are developed using
performance information for a specific chiller and should normally be used together for an EnergyPlus
simulation. Changing the object input values, or swapping performance curves between chillers, should be
done with caution.
For any simulation time step, the chillers available cooling capacity is calculated as follows:
Qavail = Qref ChillerCapFTemp
where:
Qref = chiller capacity at reference conditions (reference temperatures and flow rates defined by the user), W
Q avail = available chiller capacity adjusted for current fluid temperatures, W
The model then calculates the evaporator heat transfer rate required to bring the entering chilled water
temperature down to the leaving chilled water setpoint temperature (established using a Setpoint manager
and referenced in the Plant loop). If this calculated heat transfer rate is greater than the heat transfer rate
being requested by the plant equipment operation scheme, then the evaporator heat transfer rate is reset to
the requested cooling rate.
The evaporator heat transfer rate is then compared to the available capacity. If the available chiller capacity is
sufficient to meet the evaporator heat transfer rate, the leaving chilled water temperature is set equal to the
chilled water setpoint temperature. If the requested evaporator heat transfer rate is larger than the available
capacity the chilled water leaving the evaporator is allowed to float upward. For this case, the exiting chilled
water temperature is calculated based on the water temperature entering the evaporator, the available cooling
capacity, and the evaporator mass flow rate.
Cooling Tower
- 627 -
Cooling towers are the main active component within condenser loops. The cooling tower is modelled as a
counter-flow heat exchanger with a single-speed fan (induced draft configuration) based on Merkels theory.
The user must define tower performance via one of two methods: design heat transfer coefficient-area product
(UA) and design water flow rate, or nominal tower capacity at a specific rating point. Regardless of which
method is chosen, the design airflow rate and corresponding fan power must be specified. The model will also
account for tower performance in the free convection regime, when the tower fan is off but the water pump
remains on and heat transfer still occurs (albeit at a low level). If the user wants the model to account for free
convection, they must specify the corresponding airflow rate and heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA),
or the nominal tower capacity during this mode of operation.
The Condenser Loop Tutorial includes a useful description of cooling tower operating principles and the
Cooling tower dialog
The cooling tower seeks to maintain the temperature of the water exiting the cooling tower at (or below) a set
point. The set point schedule value is defined by the condenser loop outlet setpoint manager:
The model first checks to determine the impact of free convection, if specified by the user, on the tower
exiting water temperature. If the exiting water temperature based on free convection is at or below the set
point, then the tower fan is not turned on. If the exiting water temperature based on free convection is below
the set point, the tower will operate in Fluid bypass mode whereby a portion of the water goes through the
tower media and gets cooled while the remaining water flow gets bypassed, two water flows then mix together
trying to meet the water setpoint temperature. If the exiting water temperature remains above the set point
after free convection is modelled, then the tower fan is turned on to reduce the exiting water temperature to
the set point. If the capacity control is 1-Fan cycling, the model assumes that part-load operation is
represented by a simple linear interpolation between two steady-state regimes (i.e. the tower fan is on for the
entire simulation time-step and the tower fan is off for the entire simulation time-step). Cyclic losses are not
taken into account. If the capacity control is 2-Fluid bypass, the model determines the fraction of water flow
to be bypassed while the remaining water goes through the tower cooling media and gets cooled, then the two
water flows mix to meet the setpoint temperature. In this case, the fan runs at full speed for the entire timestep.
Cooling towers here are wet and consume water through evaporation, drift, and blow-down. The model can
be used to predict water consumed by the towers.
For the operation of multi-cell towers, the first step is to determine the number of cells to operate based on the
cell control method, between the minimum number of cells subject to the maximum water flow rate fraction per
cell and maximum number of cells subject to the minimum water flow rate fraction per cell. If the calculated
cells do not meet the loads, additional cells will be operating to help meet the loads. Inside each cell, the
existing capacity controls still apply.
For multi-cell towers, the following inputs are assumed to be for the entire tower including all cells:
- 628 -
Design water flow rate; Design air flow rate; Fan power at design air flow rate;
Air flow rate in free convection regime; Nominal capacity; Free convection capacity
Basin heater a common basin is assumed
To edit the data associated with a cooling tower, you first need to select the component by moving the mouse
cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by rightclicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected
component tool from the toolbar.
The schematic diagrams below (reproduced with permission from CIBSE) illustrate the various types of Direct
& Indirect Heat Rejection used in cooling towers. The condenser process takes the fluid from saturated vapour
(point 5) to saturated liquid (point 6) on the graph below.
Direct & Indirect Heat Rejection (CIBSE Guide B Table 4.10)
- 629 -
Induced Draft Cooling Tower (CIBSE Guide B Table 4.22)
General
Name
This is the name that you assign to the cooling tower which should be unique. If the supplied name is not
unique, the software will automatically append a backslash and integer to ensure that there are no duplicate
names.

This numeric field contains the design air flow rate induced by the tower fan (in m 3/s or ft3/min). A value of
greater than zero must be defined regardless of the tower performance input method. Alternately, this field
can be autosized. If autosized, the design air flow rate is calculated as follows:
In which a fan pressure rise of 190 Pa and total fan efficiency of 0.5 are assumed.
Fan power at design air flow rate

This is the fan power (W) at the design air flow rate specified under Design air flow rate. A value of greater
than zero must be specified regardless of the tower performance input method, or alternatively, this field can
be autosized. If autosized, the fan power is calculated as follows:
If Performance input method is specified as 1-Nominal capacity, then the fan power is obtained from:
If Performance input method is specified as 2-UA and Design water flow rate, then the fan power is obtained
from:
- 630 -
Air flow rate in free convection regime

This is the air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the tower is in the free convection regime (water flow exists
but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less than the value specified for the field Design air flow rate.
This setting may be autosized, in which case it is set to 10% of the Design air flow rate. If the you do not wish
to model free convection and are using the Performance input method 2-UA and Design water flow rate
option, then this setting should be set to 0.0. If you specify the UA at free convection air flow rate or Free
convection capacity as a value greater than zero, then the free convection air flow rate must be specified
greater than 0.0.
Evaporation loss mode

This field is used to choose which method is used to model the amount of water evaporated by the cooling
tower. There are two options:
1-Saturated exit or
2-Loss factor.
The default is 1-Saturated exit. The user-defined loss factor is entered under Evaporation loss factor,
below. By assuming that the air leaving the tower is saturated, the evaporation can be directly calculated
using moist air engineering calculations with data available within the cooling tower model (and does not
require additional user input).
Evaporation loss factor

This field is used to specify the rate of water evaporated from the cooling tower and lost to the outside air (in
%/K or %/F). This field is only available if the Evaporation loss mode (above) is set to 2-Loss factor. The
evaporation loss is then calculated as a fraction of the circulating condenser water flow and varies with the
temperature change in the condenser water. The evaporation rate will equal this value times each degree
Kelvin of temperature drop in the condenser water. Typical values are from 0.15 to 0.27 (%/K). The default is
0.2.
Drift loss percent

This field is used to specify the rate of water lost to the exiting air as entrained droplets (%). The drift loss is a
percent of the condenser water flow. Typical values for towers with efficient drift eliminators are between
0.002 and 0.2% of the condenser water flow rate. The default value is 0.008%.
Sizing factor
This setting allows the user to specify a sizing factor for this component. The sizing factor is used when the
component design inputs are auto-sized. In this case the auto-sizing calculations are performed as usual and
the results are multiplied by the sizing factor. Sizing factor allows the user to size a component to meet part of
the design load while continuing to use the auto-sizing feature. For this component the inputs that would be
altered by the sizing factor are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Design water flow rate.

Design air flow rate.
Fan power at design air flow rate.
UA at design air flow rate.
Air flow rate in free convection regime.
UA at free convection air flow rate. Note that the U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate is
not multiplied by the Sizing Factor. Instead the design tower load is multiplied by the sizing factor and
the design UA then calculated as usual. The U-Factor Times Area Value at Free Convection Air Flow
Rate is set to 10% of the new design Tower UA.
- 631 -
Performance Input Method

Performance input method
This setting allows the method by which the user will specify tower performance to be selected. There are two
options:
1-Nominal Capacity or
2-UA and design water flow rate.

This is the design water flow rate through the tower (in m 3/s or gal/min). This value is the flow rate of the
condenser loop water being cooled by the tower (not the flow rate of water being sprayed on the outside of the
heat exchange coil). If the Performance input method is specified as 2-UA and design water flow rate, then
a water flow rate greater than zero must be defined or the item can be auto-sized. If auto-sized, the design
water flow rate is derived from the design load to be rejected by the condenser loop and the design loop
temperature difference. If Performance input method is specified as 1-Nominal capacity, then the model
automatically assumes a water flow rate of 5.382E-8 m3/s per W of tower capacity.
UA at design air flow rate

This is the heat transfer coefficient-area product (UA) (in W/K or Btu/h-F) corresponding to the design air and
water flow rates specified above. If the Performance Input Method is specified as 2-UA and design water
flow rate, then a UA value greater than zero but less than or equal to 300,000 W/K must be defined, or the
setting can be autosized. If autosized, the design tower UA value is derived from the design load to be
rejected by the condenser loop and the design loop delta T, assuming a tower water inlet temperature of 35C
and tower inlet air at 35C dry-bulb/25.6C wet-bulb.
UA at free convection air flow rate

This is the heat transfer coefficient-area product (W/K or Btu/h-F) when the tower is in the free convection
regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off). This value must be less than the value specified for the
field U-Factor Times Area Value at Design Air Flow Rate. This field may be autosized, in which case it is set to
10% of the UA at design air flow rate. If you do not wish to model free convection and are using the
Performance input method 2-UA and design water flow rate, then this setting should be set to 0.0. If
Performance input method is specified as 1-Nominal capacity, then EnergyPlus automatically calculates the
tower UA based on the tower capacity specified under the setting Free convection capacity.
Nominal capacity
This is the nominal heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower (in W or Btu/h), with entering water at 35C
(95F), leaving water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wet-bulb and 35C (95F) dry-bulb
temperatures. The design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3/s per watt of nominal capacity (3
gpm/ton). 125% of this nominal tower capacity gives the actual tower heat rejection at these operating
conditions (based on historical assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25W of compressor heat for every
watt of heat removed by the evaporator).
Free convection capacity

This is the nominal heat rejection capacity of the cooling tower (in W or Btu/h) when the tower is in the free
convection regime (water flow exists but tower fan is turned off), with entering water at 35C (95F), leaving
water at 29.4C (85F), entering air at 25.6C (78F) wet-bulb and 35C (95F) dry-bulb temperatures. The
design water flow rate is assumed to be 5.382E-8 m3/s per watt of nominal tower capacity (input field above).
125% of this free convection tower capacity gives the actual tower heat rejection at these operating conditions
(based on historical assumption that the tower must dissipate 0.25W of compressor heat for every watt of heat
removed by the evaporator). The value specified under this setting must be less than the value specified for
the field Nominal capacity. If you do not wish to model free convection, then this field should be set to 0.0. If
you specify a value greater than zero, then the Air flow rate in free convection regime setting must contain a
value greater than zero.
- 632 -
Basin Heater Settings

This is the capacity of the towers electric basin heater (in W/K or Btu/h-F). This field is used in conjunction
with the Basin Heater Setpoint Temperature. The basin heater electric power is equal to this setting multiplied
by the difference between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The
basin heater only operates when the tower fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower, regardless of
the basin heater schedule described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero,
with a default value of zero if this field is left blank.

This is the set point temperature (C or F) for the towers electric basin heater. The basin heater is active
when the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as the tower fan is off
and water is not flowing through the tower. This set point temperature must be greater than or equal to 2C,
and the default value is 2C if this field is left blank.

This is the basin heater operating schedule. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be an on/off
heater operates when scheduled on and the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below the Basin Heater
Setpoint Temperature. Regardless of this schedule, the basin heater may only operate when the cooling tower
fan is off and water is not flowing through the tower.
Blow-down calculation mode

This setting specifies which method is used to determine blow-down rates. There are two options:
1-Concentration ratio or
2-Scheduled rate.
The choice will determine which of the two models below is used. The default is 1-Concentration ratio.
Blowdown
Blow-down concentration ratio
This is used to dynamically adjust the rate of blow-down in the cooling tower as a function of the rate of
evaporation. Blow-down is water intentionally drained from the tower in order to offset the build up of solids in
the water that would otherwise occur because of evaporation. The value entered here is dimensionless. It can
be characterized as the ratio of solids in the blow-down water to solids in the make-up water. Typical values
for tower operation are 3 to 5. The default value is 3.
Blow-down makeup water usage schedule

This is the schedule used to define the amount of water (in m3/s only) flushed from the basin on a periodic
basis to purge the tower of mineral scale build-up and other contaminants. This schedule is only used if the
Blow-down Calculation Mode is set to 2-Scheduled rate. The amount of water used due to blow-down
depends on the makeup water quality and is specific to each geographical location. Typical values range from
0.0002 to 0.0013 m3/s (17.3 to 112.3 m3/day). This water usage is in addition to the amount of water lost to the
atmosphere due to evaporation and/or drift. Since blow-down occurs when the basin water contaminant
concentration is high, blow-down only occurs when the cooling tower is active and water is flowing through the
tower (regardless of the water usage defined by this schedule).
Capacity Control
Capacity control
This is the cooling capacity control for the cooling tower. Two choices are available:
- 633 -
1-Fan cycling and

2-Fluid bypass.
During part-load conditions, there are two ways to maintain the exiting water temperature at the setpoint:
either cycling the tower fan, or bypassing a portion of the tower water with a three-way valve. For 2-Fluid
bypass, the tower fan still runs at full speed for the entire time-step, but only a portion of the water flow goes
through the cooling tower media to get cooled while the remaining portion of the water flow gets bypassed,
consequently, two water flows then mix at the common water sump to meet the setpoint temperature.
Multi-Cell Tower Settings

Multi-cell tower
This setting is used to enable a multi-cell tower to be defined.
Number of cells
This is the number of cells in the multi-cell cooling tower.
Cell control
This specifies the method used to control the number of cells used to meet the load, the two choices are:
1-Minimal cell - the program will use the minimal number of cells needed, all other cells will be shut
down with no water flow. It will attempt to use as few cells as possible to cool the fluid. In no case,
however, will the flow per cell be allowed to exceed its maximum value defined by the Cell maximum
water flow rate fraction.
2-Maximal cell - as many cells as possible will be turned on. In no case, however, will the flow per cell
be allowed to drop below its minimum value specified by the Cell minimum water flow rate fraction.
Cell minimum water flow rate fraction

This is the allowable smallest fraction of the design water flow rate. Flows less than this value will commonly
result in fluid distribution problems; the pressure at each nozzle will be too weak for the fluid to be sprayed out
in the correct pattern, not all the fill would be wet. If this field is left blank, the default value is 0.33.
Cell maximum water flow rate fraction

This numeric field specifies the allowable largest fraction of the design water flow rate. If this field is left blank,
the default value is 2.5.
Pumps
These pump types are available within Detailed HVAC:
Pump - Constant Speed

Pump - Variable Speed
Pump - Constant Speed
Pump:ConstantSpeed
Used in:
Plant and Condenser loops
- 634 -
GENERAL
Name
The auto-generated name for the pump.
Type
The type of the variable speed pump is fixed as:
2-Constant speed
To change from constant speed to variable speed you most open the parent Plant or Condenser loop dialog
and change the Plant loop flow type to 1-Variable flow.
PUMP SETTINGS
Rated flow rate
This numeric field contains the pumps rated volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min).
Rated pump head

This numeric field contains the pumps rated head pressure (in Pascals or ftH2O).
Important Note: The default pump head provided by the Plant and Condenser Loop templates is 20,000 Pa.
This may be suitable for a small building, but it is important that you enter the correctly sized pump head if you
wish to simulate pump energy consumption accurately in your model.
Rated power consumption

This numeric field contains the pumps rated power consumption (in W). If the user is performing a pressure
simulation on the loop in which this pump is found, this value would only be used to estimate pump efficiency.
During reported calculations, the pump would use the loop pressure drop and current flow conditions along
with efficiency to calculate pump power dynamically.
Motor efficiency
This numeric field contains the pumps efficiency in decimal form (0 = 0%, 1 = 100%).
Fraction of motor inefficiencies to fluid stream

This is the pumps fraction of power loss to the fluid.
Pump control type

This is a choice field of
1-Continuous or
2-Intermittent.
The operation of a constant speed pump is fairly straightforward. If the user designates a constant speed
pump that is operating continuously, the pump will run regardless of whether or not there is a load. This may
have the net effect of adding heat to the loop if no equipment is turned on. If the pump is constant speed and
operates intermittently, the pump will run at its capacity if a load is sensed and will shut off if there is no load
on the loop.
PUMP - CONSTANT SPEED OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Pump Electric Power [W]
HVAC,Sum,Pump Electric Consumption [J]
HVAC,Average,Pump Shaft Power [W]
HVAC,Average,Pump Heat To Fluid [W]
HVAC,Sum,Pump Heat To Fluid Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Pump Outlet Temp [C]
HVAC,Average,Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
- 635 -
Pump Electric Power [W]

Pump Electric Consumption [J]
These outputs are the electric power input to the pump motor. Consumption is metered on Pumps:Electricity,
Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.
Pump Shaft Power [W]

This is the shaft power delivered from the motor to the pump.
Pump Heat To Fluid [W]

Pump Heat To Fluid Energy [J]
These outputs are the energy added to the fluid as heat. For the current algorithm, this is equal to Pump Shaft
Power, because the loops are closed and all energy added to the fluid will ultimately become heat due to
friction.
Pump Outlet Temp [C]

Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the water outlet temperature and mass flow rate.
Pump - Variable Speed
Pump:VariableSpeed
Used in:
Plant and Condenser loops
GENERAL
Name
The auto-generated name for the pump.
Type
The type of the variable speed pump is fixed as:
2-Variable speed
To change from variable speed to constant speed you most open the parent Plant or Condenser loop dialog
and change the Plant loop flow type to 1-Constant flow.
PUMP SETTINGS
Maximum flow rate
This numeric field contains the pumps rated volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min). This setting comes from
the AHU Design supply air flow rate and cannot be edited.
Rated pump head

This numeric field contains the pumps rated head pressure (in Pascals or ftH2O).
Important Note: The default pump head provided by the Plant and Condenser Loop templates is 20,000 Pa.
This may be suitable for a small building, but it is important that you enter the correctly sized pump head if you
wish to simulate pump energy consumption accurately in your model.
- 636 -

This numeric field contains the pumps rated power consumption (in W). If the user is performing a pressure
simulation on the loop in which this pump is found, this value would only be used to estimate pump efficiency.
During reported calculations, the pump would use the loop pressure drop and current flow conditions along
with efficiency to calculate pump power dynamically.
Motor efficiency
This numeric field contains the pumps efficiency in decimal form (0 = 0%, 1 = 100%).

This numeric field contains the pumps fraction of power loss to the fluid.
Pump control type

This is a choice field of:
1-Continuous or
2-Intermittent.
A variable speed pump is defined with maximum and minimum flow rates that are the physical limits of the
device. If there is no load on the loop and the pump is operating intermittently, then the pump can shutdown.
For any other condition such as the loop having a load and the pump is operating intermittently or the pump is
continuously operating (regardless of the loading condition), the pump will operate and select a flow
somewhere between the minimum and maximum limits. In these cases where the pump is running, it will try to
meet the flow request made by demand side components.
PUMP COEFFICIENTS
The fraction of full load power is determined during the simulation by the cubic equation:
2
FractionFullLoadPower = C1 + C2. PLR + C3 PLR + C4.PLR
where C1to C4are the coefficients described below and PLR is the Part Load Ratio.
Coefficient 1 of the part load performance curve

This numeric field contains the first coefficient, C1, in the part load ratio curve.

This numeric field contains the second coefficient, C2, in the part load ratio curve.

This numeric field contains the third coefficient, C3, in the part load ratio curve.

This numeric field contains the fourth coefficient, C4, in the part load ratio curve.
Minimum flow rate

This field contains the minimum volumetric flow rate while operating in variable flow capacity rate (in m3/s or
gal/min).
PUMP - VARIABLE SPEED OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Pump Electric Power [W]
HVAC,Sum,Pump Electric Consumption [J]
HVAC,Average,Pump Shaft Power [W]
HVAC,Average,Pump Heat To Fluid [W]
HVAC,Sum,Pump Heat To Fluid Energy [J]
HVAC,Average,Pump Outlet Temp [C]
HVAC,Average,Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
- 637 -
Pump Electric Power [W] Pump Electric Consumption [J]

These outputs are the electric power input to the pump motor. Consumption is metered on Pumps:Electricity,
Electricity:Plant, and Electricity:Facility.
Pump Shaft Power [W]

This is the shaft power delivered from the motor to the pump.
Pump Heat To Fluid [W]

Pump Heat To Fluid Energy [J]
These outputs are the energy added to the fluid as heat. For the current algorithm, this is equal to Pump Shaft
Power, because the loops are closed and all energy added to the fluid will ultimately become heat due to
friction.
Pump Outlet Temp [C]

Pump Mass Flow Rate [kg/s]
These outputs are the water outlet temperature and mass flow rate.
Ground Heat Exchanger

DesignBuilder provides 3 types of ground heat exchanger:
1-Vertical (boreholes),
2-Pond,
3-Surface.
The Drop down list on the DesignBuilder ground heat exchanger dialog allows you to select the ground heat
exchanger type.
Autosizing
The Ground Heat Exchanger components do not offer an autosize option and so flow rates and other sizing
information must be obtained using the method described in Step 6 of the GSHP Case Study. An inaccurately
sized heat exchanger component can cause GSHP systems to generate inaccurate results.
Tip: You are advised to work through the GSHP Case Study before attempting to model these systems for the
first time.
Ground Heat Exchanger - Vertical

Vertical ground heat exchangers typically use boreholes containing U-tubes as shown in the figure below.
- 638 -
The EnergyPlus Ground Heat Exchanger (GHE) is a condenser component serving the condenser supply side
alongside cooling towers and other condensing components.
Technical
The heat exchanger response is defined by a G-function. This is a non-dimensional function that is used to
calculate the response to square heat pulses of different duration. (This function is not the same as G-factors
referred to in the ASHRAE Applications Handbook).
This continuous function is specified by a series of data pairs (LNTTSi, GFNCi) where:
LNTTSi is the non-dimensional time: ln(T/Ts)

GFNCi is the G-function value
The G-function is different for each borehole field configuration (i.e. a 4x4 field has a different response than a
80x80 field) and the borehole thermal resistance. It is also dependant on the ratio of borehole spacing to
depth. G-function values, for accurate simulation, have to be calculated for each specific heat exchanger
design. This can be done using some commercial ground loop heat exchanger design tool and the like. A
reference data set, containing examples input data for 1x2, 4x4 and 8x8 configurations and for both standard
and thermally enhanced grout, have also been provided. These data are provided as examples
only.
Further details on the implementation of this model can be found in:
- 639 -
Murugappan, A. Implementing Ground Source Heat Pump and Ground Loop Heat Exchanger Models in the
EnergyPlus Simulation Environment. M.S. Thesis, Oklahoma State University, December 2002.
GENERAL
Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the ground heat exchanger.
Template
You can use this control to load data to the dialog from a pre-defined Ground heat exchanger template as a
starting point for your particular component.
Note: After loading a Ground heat exchanger template it is important to make sure to update the Design and
Maximum heat exchanger flow rates as the sum of connected heat pump rated flow rates.
Type
DesignBuilder provides 3 different ground heat exchanger types:
1-Vertical (boreholes)
2-Pond
3-Surface
The Type drop down list allows you to select the ground heat exchanger model to be used in this component.
GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER - VERTICAL

Ground temperature
This numeric field contains the far field temperature of the ground (in C or F).
FLOW RATE
Design flow rate
This numeric field contains the design volume flow rate of the GHE (in m3/s or gal/min). The Design flow rate
should normally have the same value as the Maximum flow rate below.
Maximum flow rate

This numeric field contains the GHE maximum design flow rate in cubic meters per second (in m3/s or
gal/min).
Note: The maximum flow rate for vertical ground heat exchangers should normally be set to the sum of rated
flow rates from all connected water to water heat pumps. Add rated flows for all heat pump - heating and
heat pump - cooling components that are connected to this heat exchanger.
BOREHOLE AND PIPE GEOMETRY

Number of bore holes
This numeric field contains the number of bore holes in the GHE installation.
Bore hole length

This numeric field contains the length of the borehole (in m or ft).
Bore hole radius

This numeric field contains the radius of the borehole (in m or in).
- 640 -
Ground thermal conductivity

This numeric field contains the thermal conductivity of the ground (in W/mK or Btu-in/h-ft2-F).
Ground thermal heat capacity

This numeric field contains the thermal heat capacity of the ground (in J/m3-K or Btu/ft3-F)
Grout thermal conductivity

This numeric field contains the thermal conductivity of the filler material (in W/mK or Btu-in/h-ft2-F).
Pipe thermal conductivity

This numeric field contains the thermal conductivity of the pipe in (in W/mK or Btu-in/h-ft2-F).
Pipe out diameter

This numeric field contains the outer diameter of the U-tube (pipe) (in m or in).
U-Tube distance
This numeric field contains the distance between the two legs of the U-tube (in m or in).
Pipe thickness
This numeric field contains the outer diameter of the U-tube (pipe) (in m or in).
Maximum length of simulation

This numeric field contains the maximum number of years of simulation to be carried out.
G-Function reference ratio

The G-Functions may be formulated slightly differently based on the program which generated them. The
raw G-Functions are based on an borehole radius to active length ratio of 0.0005. If the physical ratio is
different from this, a correction must be applied. EnergyPlus will apply the correction, based on the reference
ratio entered in this field. There are therefore two possible input configurations:
If the G-Functions have not had a correction applied, then the G-Functions are still based on a
reference of 0.0005, so use a value of 0.0005 in this field. EnergyPlus will adjust the G-Functions
internally to create the properly referenced G-Function.
If the correction has already been applied, then the input G-Functions are based on a reference to the
actual (physical) radius/length ratio, so enter the physical radius/length in this field. Entering the actual
value will nullify any internal corrections, which will avoid re-basing the G-Function set.
The software GLHEPRO has been making this pre-correction to the data sets since version 3.1 of that
software, so this input field should match the actual (physical) radius/length ratio.
G FUNCTION DATA PAIRS

The borehole response is defined by a non-dimensional G-function and the second tab includes a large text
box with a list of G-function data pairs. The list is specified as a series of data points giving values of nondimensional time vs G-function value (LNTTS1, GFUNC1), (LNTTS2, GFUNC2), (LNTTS3, GFUNC3) ..
(LNTTSn, GFUNCn)..
G-Function Ln(T/Ts) value <x>

This numeric field contains the natural log of time/steady state time: ln(T/Ts).
G-Function 'G' value <x>

This numeric field contains the G-function value of the corresponding LNTTS.
Example data:
- 641 -
SIZING VERTICAL GROUND HEAT EXCHANGERS

Quick/Simple Sizing
DesignBuilder provides a quick, approximate way to size vertical ground loop heat exchangers assuming
typical borehole layouts and ground properties. The procedure is to use DesignBuilder Heating design and
Cooling design calculations to obtain peak heating and cooling loads in kW, then use the table below to look
up the minimum number of boreholes for the model.
- 642 -
Then load the "U-Tube 76m xx-boreholes" vertical ground heat exchanger template with the corresponding
number of boreholes from the template library. These templates include parameters pre-calculated based on a
typical rectangular geometry and property settings (see left red-box in the figure below). Each includes a
corresponding set of g-function data. For very different a bolehole layouts or when any of the ground or other
parameter deviates significantly from these typical settings then you should use the Detailed design sizing
method described below.
- 643 -
Detailed design sizing

The net heating or cooling capacity of the ground over each season depends on the accumulated heat
rejection/extraction, and therefore on the building loads throughout the whole year (not only the peak loads
mentioned above), which might be available through simulation perhaps based on a simple HVAC setting in
DesignBuilder.
Ground loop heat exchanger tools such as GLHEPRO and GLD (which are not supplied by DesignBuilder or
EnergyPlus) are able to carry out a more detailed and accurate sizing calculation taking into account specific
borehole layouts and ground properties. These tools can export calculated G-function data in the form of IDF
files which can be loaded to the DesignBuilder Ground Heat Exchanger dialog as described below.
Import vertical ground heat exchanger data from a file

Data from a previously configured and sized vertical ground loop heat exchanger can be loaded by clicking on
the Import button at the bottom of the dialog or the Import vertical ground heat exchanger data link from
info panel (see figure below).
The corresponding g-function data will be loaded along with the rest of the data required on the dialog and
can be viewed on the G Function Data tab.
Ground Heat Exchanger - Pond

The pond heat exchanger model represents a shallow pond with submerged hydronic tubes through which the
heat transfer fluid is circulated. The model represents a "shallow" pond in that no attempt is made to model
any stratification effects that may be present in deeper ponds.
- 644 -
This type of heat exchanger is intended to be connected to the supply side of a condenser loop, and can be
used with any type of plant loop. The pond may be specified as the only heat exchanger on the condenser
loop (as shown in top figure below) or it may be connected in parallel with other condenser loop heat
exchangers (such as cooling towers, ground surface heat exchangers) as shown in the second figure below.
Pond heat exchanger as only heat exchanger on condenser loop
Pond heat exchanger with other heat exchangers on condenser loop

Technical
The pond model uses a lumped parameter method where the pond is represented by a single node with
thermal mass. The pond surface temperature is the same as the temperature at this node, i.e. the surface
temperature is the same as the bulk temperature. A first order differential equation is solved in the model to
calculate the pond temperature at each time step. This type of heat rejecter is modelled as several circuits
connected in parallel.
- 645 -
Heat transfer takes place by surface convection, long-wave radiation to the sky, absorption of solar energy,
ground heat transfer and heat exchange with the fluid. A heat exchanger analogy is used to calculate the heat
transfer between the heat transfer fluid and the pond.
GENERAL
Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the outside pond heat exchanger.
Template
starting point for your particular pond component.
Type
2-Pond
3-Surface
The Type drop down list allows you to select the ground heat exchanger model to be used in this component.
GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER - POND

Ground thermal conductivity
This numeric field contains the ground thermal conductivity (in W/mK or Btu-in/h-ft2-F).
Pond depth
This numeric field contains the pond depth (in m or ft).
Pond area
This numeric field contains the pond area (in m 2 or ft2).
Number of tubing circuits

This numeric field contains the number of hydronic tubing circuits, total in parallel in this pond.
Length of each tubing circuit

This numeric field contains length (in m or ft) of each hydronic tubing circuit.
Hydronic tubing inside diameter

This numeric field contains the hydronic tubing inside diameter (in m or in).
Hydronic tubing outside diameter

This numeric field contains the hydronic tubing outside diameter (in m or in).
Hydronic tubing thermal conductivity

This numeric field contains the hydronic tubing thermal conductivity (in W/mK or Btu-in/h-ft2-F).
Ground Heat Exchanger - Surface

Surface heat exchangers include pavement surfaces with embedded pipes for snow-melting or heat rejection
from hybrid ground source heat pump systems. The heat exchanger may be ground coupled or not and when
not ground coupled the bottom surface is exposed to the wind but not solar gains.
This type of heat exchanger is intended to be connected to the supply side of a condenser loop, and can be
used with any type of plant loop. The surface heat exchanger may be specified as the only heat exchanger on
- 646 -
the condenser loop (as shown in the first figure below) or it may be connected in parallel with other condenser
loop heat exchangers (such as cooling towers, ground surface heat exchangers) as shown in the second
figure below.
Surface Ground Heat Exchanger as only heat exchanger on condenser loop
Surface Ground Heat Exchanger with other heat exchangers on condenser loop
Technical description
The Surface ground heat exchanger model is based on the QTF (Quadratic Transfer Function) formulation of
heat transfer through building elements with embedded heat sources/sinks. The model uses a heat exchanger
analogy to relate the inlet fluid temperature to the net heat transfer rate and consequently outlet temperature.
The model is entirely passive, i.e. it does not set any flow rates or incorporate any controls. In order to deal
with the non-linear boundary conditions at the top surface due to the presence of ice/snow fluxes have to be
calculated by the QTF model and temperature calculated from the surface heat balance. This requires some
- 647 -
iteration. Note, top surface variables correspond to outside variables in standard CTF/QTF definition
(CTF=Conduction Transfer Functions). Bottom surface variables correspond to inside variables.
GENERAL
Name
This alpha field contains the identifying name for the outside panel heat exchanger.
Template
starting point for your particular pond component.
Type
2-Pond
3-Surface
GROUND HEAT EXCHANGER - SURFACE

Construction
The Construction selected here defines the layers of materials used to make the heat exchange surface.
Note: The construction must include an Internal Source to accommodate the heat exchange pipes.
If you select a construction with large thickness to represent the ground you may need to use the 2-Finite
difference Solution algorithm either for this construction only or for the whole model.
Lower Surface Environment

This alpha field expresses the lower surface exposure. Options are:
1-Exposed where the surface is exposed below to the ambient air, or

2-Ground where the surface is in contact with the ground below.
Surface length
This numeric field contains the surface length (in m or ft).
Surface width
This numeric field contains the surface width (in m or ft).
Number of tubing circuits

This numeric field contains the number of hydronic tubing circuits.
Hydronic tube spacing

This numeric field contains the hydronic tube spacing (in m or ft).

This numeric field contains the hydronic tubing inside diameter (in m or in).
- 648 -
VRF Outdoor Unit

AirConditioner:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Used in:
VRF Loop
This model simulates a variable-refrigerant-flow (or variable-refrigerant-volume) air-conditioning system. This

system type models direct-expansion cooling and/or heating coils configured in a zone indoor unit.
There are two common types of variable refrigerant flow (VRF) heat pump systems:
Cooling only or heating only air-conditioning systems (a.k.a. heat pump), or

Heat recovery systems that allow simultaneous cooling and heating
The VRF outdoor unit supports air-, evaporatively-, or water-cooled condenser equipment. Throughout this
section, the term condenser refers to the outdoor unit where the compressor is located.
Enter data on one of the 4 tabs:
General
Cooling
Heating
Heat Recovery
The EnergyPlus Engineering Guide includes a Detailed technical description of the way the VRF model
works.
VRF Outdoor Unit - General Tab

GENERAL
Note on terminology: The terms VRF "condenser", "outdoor unit" and "heat pump" are used interchangeably in
the this section. Likewise the terms VRF indoor unit and terminal unit are used interchangeably.
Name
Enter the name of the VRF outdoor unit.
VRF outdoor unit template

To load a pre-configured VRF outdoor unit dataset, select a template from the list.
Fuel type
This field determines the type of fuel that this variable refrigerant flow system uses. This field has seven
choices:
1-Natural gas,
2-Electricity,
3-Propane gas,
4-FuelOil#1,
5-FuelOil#2,
6-Coal,
7-Diesel,
8-Gasoline,
9-OtherFuel1,
- 649 -
10-OtherFuel2.
The default is 2-Electricity. The use of alternate fuel types assumes an engine drives the variable speed
compression system and also accounts for condenser air flow (i.e., a fan attached to the engine provides air
flow through the outdoor condenser.
Minimum heat pump part-load ratio

This numeric field specifies the minimum operating part-load ratio (PLR) of the heat pump. When the heat
pump operates at a PLR below this value, the heat pumps compressor will cycle to meet the cooling or
heating demand. Above this value, the heat pumps compressor operates the entire time step to meet the
cooling or heating demand. The minimum value for this field is 0. If this field is left blank, the default value is
0.15. When the heat pump compressor cycles, the heating part-load fraction correlation curve is used to
determine cycling losses.
Select the schedule that defines when the heat pump operates during a given time period. A schedule value
equal to 0 denotes that the heat pump must be off for that time period. A value other than 0 denotes that the
heat pump is available to operate during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely disable
the heat pump (and all of its terminal units) as required.
CONTROL
Master thermostat priority control type
This selection determines the logic used to simulate the master thermostat. Valid choices are:
1-Load priority where the total zone load is used to choose the operating mode as either cooling or
heating.
2-Zone priority where the number of zones requiring cooling or heating determines the operating
mode.
3-Thermostat offset priority, in which the zone farthest from the thermostat set point determines the
operating mode.
4-Master thermostat priority which operates the system according the zone load where the master
thermostat is located.
5-Scheduled where the heat pump is scheduled to operate in either cooling or heating mode.
Zone for master thermostat location

When the master thermostat priority control type is set to 3-Thermostat offset priority, or 4-Master
thermostat priority you must select the zone where the master thermostat is located. When the heat pump
is connected to multiple zone terminal units, one terminal unit must be selected as the master thermostat. The
remaining thermostats are slaves and can operate only in the same mode as the master thermostat.
Thermostat priority schedule

When the master thermostat priority control type is set to 5-Scheduled the schedule must be selected.
Schedule values of 0 denote cooling mode while values of 1 denote heating mode. Any other values will force
the system off.
PIPING
Equivalent piping length used for piping correction factor in cooling
mode
This field defines the equivalent pipe length (in m or ft) between the farthest terminal unit and the heat pump
condenser. It includes the gas refrigerant line length (for both horizontal and vertical distances), fitting losses,
pipe bends, and other connections that contribute to piping losses. This field is used to calculate the piping
correction factor in cooling mode. It defines the head losses due to the pipe length between the farthest
terminal unit and the heat pump condenser and impacts the maximum available capacity in cooling mode.
Vertical height used for piping correction factor

This field defines the vertical pipe height (in m or ft) between the highest or lowest terminal unit and the heat
pump condenser. It defines the gravitational losses due to a change in height between the highest (positive
- 650 -
value), or lowest (negative value) terminal unit and the heat pump condenser. The distance specified here is
applied to the piping correction factor calculation for both cooling and heating. If the distance between the
highest terminal unit above the heat pump condenser is greater than the distance between the lowest terminal
unit below the condenser enter the difference between the highest and lowest terminal units as a positive
distance, otherwise enter this difference as a negative distance.
For example, if the distance from the heat pump condenser to the highest terminal unit above the condenser
is 10 m and the distance from the heat pump condenser to the lowest terminal unit below the condenser is -15
m, then enter a value of -5 m in this field. This head loss impacts the maximum available capacity in cooling
mode.
Piping correction factor for height in cooling mode coefficient

Manufacturers may provide information for how the piping losses change with height of the VRF indoor unit
with respect to the outdoor unit. The piping correction factor for height in cooling mode can be calculated as a
quotient of correction factor decrease to unit height difference (in SI units) with a correct sign, i.e. correction
factor decreases (more losses) as height increases.
The figure below from a manufacturer provides this information in the tilted vertical lines on the chart, which
shows that the correction factor decreases by about 0.11 when the terminal unit is 110 m above the
condenser. This means that the correction factor for height is -0.11 / 110 m or -0.001.
Example manufacturers data
Equivalent piping length used for piping correction factor in heating

mode
This field defines the equivalent pipe length (in m or ft) between the farthest terminal unit and the heat pump
condenser. It includes the liquid refrigerant line length (for both horizontal and vertical distances), fitting
losses, pipe bends, and other connections that contribute to piping losses. This field is used to calculate the
piping correction factor in heating mode. It defines the head losses due to the pipe length between the farthest
terminal unit and the heat pump condenser and impacts the maximum available capacity in heating mode.
Piping correction factor for height in heating mode coefficient

See help above for Equivalent piping length used for piping correction factor in cooling mode
Piping correction factor for length in cooling mode curve

This field defines the linear, quadratic, or cubic curve used to calculate the piping correction factor for length in
cooling mode. Piping losses are a function of piping length. If sufficient piping loss information is available
where piping losses are also a function of combination ratio (i.e., in addition to length), a biquadratic
performance curve may be used.
Piping correction factor for length in heating mode

This field defines the linear, quadratic, or cubic curve used to calculate the piping correction factor for length in
heating mode. Piping losses are a function of piping length. If sufficient piping loss information is available
where piping losses are also a function of combination ratio (i.e., in addition to length), a biquadratic
performance curve may be used.
- 651 -
COMPRESSOR
Crankcase heater power per compressor
This numeric field defines the electrical power consumed by the crankcase heater (in W or Btu/h) for each
compressor. This crankcase heater power is consumed when the outdoor temperature is below the maximum
outdoor dry-bulb temperature for crankcase heater operation. The minimum value for this field is 0. Crankcase
heater electrical consumption is applied only when the compressor is off or is applied during the off cycle
when the compressor is cycling below the Minimum heat pump part-load ratio. This field is only used to
calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on heat pump performance.
Number of compressors
This field defines the number of compressors in the heat pump condensing unit and is used exclusively to
determine the operating characteristics of the crankcase heater. For example, if the number of compressors is
3, one crankcase heater will operate when the heat pump condensing units part-load ratio is less than or
equal to 0.67 (when the ratio of compressor size to total compressor capacity input is 0.33) and the outdoor
temperature is below the maximum outdoor temperature for crankcase heater operation. Similarly, two
crankcase heaters will operate when the heat pump condensing units PLR is less than or equal to 0.33 and
the outdoor temperature is below the maximum outdoor temperature for crankcase heater operation. If the
heat pump condensing unit is off, all 3 crankcase heaters will operate if the outdoor temperature is below the
maximum outdoor temperature for crankcase heater operation. The minimum value for this field is 1. This field
is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on heat pump performance.
Ratio of compressor size to total compressor capacity

This field defines the size of the first stage compressor to the total compressor capacity and is used
exclusively for calculating crankcase heater energy. When the number of compressors is greater than 2, the
2nd stage compressor and all additional compressors are assumed to be equally sized. This field is only used
to calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on heat pump performance.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for crankcase heater

This field defines the maximum outdoor temperature, (in C or F), below which the crankcase heater will
operate. This field is only used to calculate crankcase heater power and has no impact on heat pump
performance.
DEFROST
Defrost strategy
This alpha field has two choices:
1-Resistive where the frost is melted using an electric resistance heater.

2-Reverse-cycle where the heating cycle is reversed periodically to provide heat to melt frost
accumulated on the outdoor coil.
Defrost can be disabled by entering a resistive defrost strategy using a timed defrost control, a 0 defrost time
period fraction and a 0 resistive defrost heater capacity in the following inputs fields. This method is used
when the Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for defrost operation value is greater than the expected
minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature simulated in the weather file.
Defrost control
This field has two choices:
1-Timed where the defrost time period is calculated based on a fixed value of compressor runtime
whether or not frost has actually accumulated. For timed defrost control, the fractional amount of time
the unit is in defrost is entered in the input field Defrost time period fraction described below.
2-On-demand where the defrost time period is calculated based on outdoor weather (humidity ratio)
conditions.
Regardless of which defrost control is selected, defrost does not occur above the user specified outdoor
temperature entered in the Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for defrost operation.
- 652 -
Defrost energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of temperature curve

Available only when the reverse-cycle defrost strategy option is selected, this field defines the name of a biquadratic performance curve that parameterizes the variation of the energy input ratio (EIR) during reversecycle defrost periods as a function of the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature and the weighted average wet-bulb
temperature of the air entering the indoor terminal units. The output of this curve is multiplied by the coil
capacity, the fractional defrost time period and the runtime fraction of the heating coil to give the defrost power
at the specific temperatures at which the indoor and outdoor coils are operating. The curve is normalized to a
value of 1.0 at the rating point conditions.
Defrost time period fraction

This field defines the fraction of compressor runtime when the defrost cycle is active. For example, if the
defrost cycle is active for 3.5 minutes for every 60 minutes of compressor runtime, then the user should enter
3.5/60 = 0.058333. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0. If this input field is left
blank, the default value is 0.058333.
Resistive defrost heater capacity

This field defines the capacity of the resistive defrost heating element (in W or Btu/h). It is available only when
the selected defrost strategy is 1-Resistive. The value for this input field must be greater than or equal to 0.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for defrost operation

This field defines the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) above which outdoor coil defrosting is
disabled. Defrost can be completely eliminated by selecting a temperature lower than the minimum expected
outdoor temperature found in the weather file.
CONDENSER
Condenser type
This choice field defines the configuration of the heat pump condenser. Valid choices are:
1-Air cooled,
2-Evaporatively cooled, and
3-Water cooled.
For details on this field see below under Evaporative condenser effectiveness.
Water condenser volume flow rate

This autosizable numeric field defines the condenser water volume flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min) and is only
available for water-cooled systems.
Evaporative condenser effectiveness

The effectiveness of the evaporative condenser, which is used to determine the temperature of the air
entering the outdoor condenser coil as follows:
Tcond inlet = Twbo + (1 - EvapCondEffectiveness) (T dbo - Twbo)
where:
Tcond inlet = the temperature of the air entering the condenser coil (C)
Twbo = the wet-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
Tdbo = the dry-bulb temperature of the outdoor air (C)
The resulting condenser inlet air temperature is used by the Cooling capacity ratio modifier function of
temperature curve and the Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of temperature curve. The default
value for this field is 0.9, although valid entries can range from 0.0 to 1.0.
To model an air cooled condenser specify Condenser type = 1-Air cooled. In this case the Cooling capacity
ratio modifier function of temperature curve and the Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of
temperature curve should be defined as a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperature.
- 653 -
To model an evaporative-cooled condenser where you have performance curves that are a function of the
wet-bulb temperature of air entering the condenser coil, then you should specify Condenser type = 2Evaporatively cooled. In this case the evaporative condenser effectiveness value should be entered as 1.0
and the Cooling capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curve and the Cooling energy input ratio (EIR)
modifier function of temperature curve should both be defined as a function of the wet-bulb temperature of air
entering the condenser coil.
To model an air-cooled condenser that has evaporative media placed in front of it to cool the air entering the
condenser coil, specify Condenser type = 2-Evaporatively cooled and enter the appropriate evaporative
effectiveness for the media. In this case, the Cooling capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curve and
the Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of temperature curve should both be defined as function
of outdoor dry-bulb temperature. Be aware that the evaporative media will significantly reduce the dry-bulb
temperature of the air entering the condenser coil, so the Cooling Capacity and Cooling EIR Modifier Curves
must be valid for the expected range of dry-bulb temperatures that will be entering the condenser coil.
Evaporative condenser air flow rate

The air volume flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) entering the evaporative condenser. This value is used to
calculate the amount of water used to evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The minimum value for this
field must be greater than zero, and this input field is autosizable (equivalent to 0.000144 m3/s per watt of
Gross rated total cooling capacity [850 cfm/ton]). This field is not used when Condenser type = 1-Air cooled.
Evaporative condenser pump rated power consumption

The rated power of the evaporative condenser water pump (in W or Btu/h). This value is used to calculate the
power required to pump the water used to evaporatively cool the condenser inlet air. The default value for this
input field is zero, but it is autosizable (equivalent to 0.004266 W per watt [15 W/ton] of Gross rated total
cooling capacity). This field is not used when Condenser type = 1-Air cooled.

This field contains the capacity of the heat pumps electric basin heater (in W/K or Btu/h). This field only
applies for Condenser type = 2-Evaporatively cooled. This field is used in conjunction with the Basin heater
setpoint temperature described below. The basin heater electric power is equal to this field multiplied by the
difference between the basin heater set point temperature and the outdoor dry-bulb temperature. The basin
heater only operates when the heat pump compressor(s) is off, regardless of the basin heater schedule
described below. The basin heater capacity must be greater than or equal to zero.

This field contains the set point temperature (C or F) for the basin heater described above. This field only
applies for Condenser type = 2-Evaporatively cooled. The basin heater is active when the outdoor air drybulb temperature falls below this setpoint temperature, as long as the heat pump is off. This set point
temperature must be greater than or equal to 2C.

Select the basin heater operating schedule. This field only applies for Condenser type = 2-Evaporatively
cooled. The basin heater operating schedule is assumed to be an on/off schedule and the heater is available
to operate any time the schedule value is greater than 0. The basin heater operates when scheduled on and
the outdoor air dry-bulb temperature is below the set point temperature described above. Regardless of this
schedule, the basin heater may only operate when the heat pump is off.
VRF Outdoor Unit - Cooling Tab

GENERAL
Rated total cooling capacity
This field defines the total cooling capacity (sensible + latent) of the heat pump at rated conditions in W or
Btu/h. The cooling capacity must be greater than 0 or set to autosize.
When the VRF outdoor unit is not autosized, the sum of the VRF terminal unit coils (autosized or not) and the
VRF outdoor unit capacity are used to calculate the combination ratio for both cooling and heating. For a fully
- 654 -
autosized system, the combination ratio = 1, but when the system is not fully autosized, the resulting sizes of
the terminal unit coils and the outdoor unit are used to calculate a combination ratio.
Rated cooling COP

This field defines the cooling coefficient of performance at rated conditions. The cooling coefficient of
performance includes compressor power and condenser fan power. This COP value does not include impacts
due to the supply air fan.
Minimum outdoor temperature in cooling mode

This field defines the minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature allowed for cooling operation (in C or F). Below
this temperature, cooling is disabled.
Maximum outdoor temperature in cooling mode

This field defines the maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature allowed for cooling operation (in C or F).
Above this temperature, cooling is disabled.
COOLING CAPACITY RATIO MODIFIER FUNCTION OF TEMPERATURE CURVES

Use single or multiple curves
The way that the cooling capacity ratio modifier varies with temperature can be defined using either a single
curve (if the cooling capacity does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions) or by using
multiple (3) curves if the trend in cooling capacity changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes.
Select from:
1-Single where the whole relation is defined in a single cooling capacity ratio modifier function of
temperature curve, or,
2-Multiple.
Cooling capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curve

Available only when using a single cooling capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curve, this field
defines the cooling capacity ratio modifier at all outdoor dry-bulb temperatures. This curve is a bi-quadratic
equation using weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal units weighted
average inlet temperatures) and condenser entering air dry-bulb temperature as the independent variables.
Cooling capacity ratio modifier function of low temperature curve

Available only when using multiple cooling capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curves this field
defines the cooling capacity ratio modifier at low outdoor dry-bulb temperatures. This curve is a bi-quadratic
equation using weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal units weighted
average inlet temperatures) and condenser entering air dry-bulb temperature as the independent variables.
Cooling capacity ratio boundary curve

Available only when using multiple cooling capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curves, this curve
defines the cooling capacity ratio boundary. It is a linear, quadratic or cubic curve that defines a change in
cooling capacity at a specific condenser entering air dry-bulb temperature as a function of indoor air wet-bulb
temperature.
Cooling capacity ratio modifier function of high temperature curve

Available only when using multiple cooling capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curves, this field
defines the cooling capacity ratio modifier at high outdoor temperatures. This curve is a bi-quadratic equation
using weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature and condenser entering air dry-bulb temperature as the
independent variables.
COOLING ENERGY INPUT RATIO (EIR) MODIFIER FUNCTION OF TEMPERATURE

CURVES
The Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) modifier is a factor used to adjust the rated EIR (reciprocal of Rated
cooling COP) as outdoor temperature changes.
- 655 -

The way that the cooling EIR varies with temperature can be defined using either a single curve (if the cooling
EIR does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions) or by using multiple (3) curves if the
trend in cooling EIR changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. Select from:
1-Single where the whole relation is defined in a single cooling EIR function of temperature curve, or,
2-Multiple.
Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of temperature curve

Available only when using a single cooling capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curve, this field
defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier at all outdoor temperatures. This curve is a bi-quadratic
equation with a weighted average indoor wet-bulb temperature and condenser entering air dry-bulb
temperature as the independent variables.
Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of low temperature

curve
Available only when using multiple cooling EIR curves, this field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier
at low outdoor temperatures. This curve is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor wet-bulb
temperature and condenser entering air dry-bulb temperature as the independent variables.
Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) boundary curve

Available only when using multiple cooling EIR curves, the cooling energy input ratio boundary curve is a
linear, quadratic or cubic curve that defines a change in cooling energy at a specific condenser entering air
dry-bulb temperature as a function of indoor air wet-bulb temperature.
Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of high temperature

curve
Available only when using multiple cooling EIR curves, this field defines the cooling energy input ratio modifier
at high outdoor temperatures. This curve is a bi-quadratic equation with weighted average indoor wet-bulb
temperature and condenser entering air dry-bulb temperature as the independent variables.
Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of low part-load ratio
curve
This curve defines how the cooling EIR modifier varies as a function of part-load ratio when PLR is less than
or equal to 1. It is a linear, quadratic or cubic equation with cooling part-load ratio used as the independent
variable. The cooling energy input ratio modifier curve is normalized to 1 at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used
only when the operating part-load ratio is less than or equal to 1.
Cooling energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of high part-load ratio
curve
This curve defines how the cooling EIR modifier varies as a function of part-load ratio when PLR is greater
than 1. It is a linear, quadratic or cubic equation with cooling part-load ratio used as the independent variable.
The cooling energy input ratio modifier curve is normalized to 1 at a part-load ratio of 1 and is used only when
the operating part-load ratio is greater than 1.
OTHER CURVES
Cooling combination ratio correction factor curve
This field defines the cooling combination ratio (CR) correction factor curve for combination ratios greater than
or equal to 1. The combination ratio is defined as the total rated indoor terminal unit cooling capacity divided
by this heat pumps Rated total cooling capacity. The curve is a linear, quadratic or cubic equation and uses
the minimum value of x in the curve object to determine the maximum part-load ratio which is linearly
proportional to capacity (i.e., the minimum value of x [CR] in the curve object must be 1). The output of this
curve provides a multiplier (>1) which is applied to this heat pumps Rated total cooling capacity. Between a
combination ratio of 1 and the curves minimum value of x, the multiplier is linearly interpolated. For
combination ratios less than 1 (i.e., the total indoor terminal unit capacity is less than this heat pumps rated
total capacity), capacity is directly proportional to part-load ratio and this curve will not be used.
- 656 -
Cooling part-load fraction correlation curve

This field defines the cooling part-load fraction correlation curve. This curve is used to define the cycling
losses when the condensers compressors cycle on and off. The compressor cycles when the cooling partload ratio is less than the Minimum heat pump part-load ratio.
VRF Outdoor Unit - Heating Tab

GENERAL
Rated total heating capacity
This numeric field defines the total heat pump heating capacity at rated conditions in watts. The nominal heat
pump heating capacity must be greater than 0 or set to autosize.
Rated total heating capacity sizing ratio

This field defines the ratio of heating to cooling capacity of the Outdoor unit. This value must be greater than
or equal to 1. A similar input is available in the VRF indoor unit.
When the outdoor unit Rated total heating capacity (above) is autosized this ratio is used to scale the
heating capacity of the outdoor unit to the Rated total cooling capacity of the outdoor unit regardless of the
capacities of the DX heating coils in the indoor units.
The zone indoor units heating coils are also sized using this ratio unless they are hard-sized in the indoor unit.
When the VRF outdoor unit is not autosized, the sum of the VRF terminal unit coils (autosized or not) and the
VRF outdoor unit capacity are used to calculate the combination ratio for both cooling and heating. For a fully
autosized system, the combination ratio = 1, but when the system is not fully autosized, the resulting sizes of
the terminal unit coils and the outdoor unit are used to calculate a combination ratio.
Rated heating COP

This field defines the heating coefficient of performance at rated conditions. The heating coefficient of
performance includes compressor power and condenser fan power. This COP value does not include impacts
due to the supply air fan. The nominal heat pump heating COP must be greater than 0.
Minimum outdoor temperature in heating mode

This field defines the minimum outdoor temperature allowed for heating operation. Below this temperature,
heating is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is -20C.
Maximum outdoor temperature in heating mode

This field defines the maximum outdoor temperature allowed for heating operation. Above this temperature,
heating is disabled. If this field is left blank, the default value is 16C.
Heating performance curve outdoor temperature type

This choice field defines the outdoor temperature type used for all performance curves. The valid choices are:
1-Wet-bulb temperature.
2-Dry-bulb temperature and
The default value is 1-Wet-bulb temperature. Manufacturers will typically provide heating performance data
as a function of outdoor air wet-bulb temperatures. This means that the performance (e.g., capacity and
energy input ratio) curves will use outdoor wet-bulb temperature as one of the independent variables. At
times, manufacturers will only provide performance data as a function of outdoor dry-bulb temperatures. In
this case, all performance curves shall be developed using outdoor dry-bulb temperature and this field shall be
selected as 2-Dry-bulb temperature.
- 657 -
HEATING CAPACITY RATIO MODIFIER FUNCTION OF TEMPERATURE CURVES

The way that the heating capacity ratio modifier varies with temperature can be defined using either a single
curve (if the heating capacity does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions) or by using
multiple (3) curves if the trend in heating capacity changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes.
Select from:
1-Single where the whole relation is defined in a single heating capacity ratio modifier function of
temperature curve, or,
2-Multiple.
Heating capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curve

Available only when using single heating capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curve, this curve
defines the heating capacity ratio modifier at all outdoor temperatures. It is a bi-quadratic equation with a
weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal units weighted average inlet
temperatures) and condenser entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables.
Since manufacturers may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures,
either of these temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as specified in Heating
performance curve outdoor temperature type.
Heating capacity ratio modifier function of low temperature curve

Available only when using multiple heating capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curves this field
defines the heating capacity ratio modifier at low outdoor temperatures. This curve is a bi-quadratic equation
with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal units weighted average inlet
temperatures) and condenser entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables.
Since manufacturers may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures,
either of these temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as specified in Heating
performance curve outdoor temperature type.
Heating capacity ratio boundary curve

Available only when using multiple heating capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curves, this curve
defines the heating capacity ratio boundary. It is a quadratic or cubic curve that defines a change in heating
capacity at a specific condenser entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as a function of indoor air drybulb temperature. Since manufacturers may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wetbulb temperatures, either of these temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as
specified in Heating performance curve outdoor temperature type.
Heating capacity ratio modifier function of high temperature curve

Available only when using multiple heating capacity ratio modifier function of temperature curves, this curve
defines the heating capacity ratio modifier at high outdoor temperatures. It is a bi-quadratic equation with a
weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature and condenser entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature
as the independent variables. Since manufacturers may provide performance data using either outdoor drybulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of these temperature types may be used for heating performance curves
as specified in Heating performance curve outdoor temperature type.
HEATING ENERGY INPUT RATIO (EIR) MODIFIER FUNCTION OF TEMPERATURE

CURVES
The heating energy input ratio (EIR) modifier is a factor used to adjust the rated EIR (reciprocal of Rated
heating COP) as outdoor temperature changes.

The way that the heating EIR varies with temperature can be defined using either a single curve (if the heating
EIR does not change dramatically with changes in outdoor conditions) or by using multiple (3) curves if the
trend in heating EIR changes dramatically as outdoor temperature changes. Select from:
1-Single where the whole relation is defined in a single heating EIR function of temperature curve, or,
2-Multiple.
- 658 -
Heating energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of temperature curve

Available only when using a single heating EIR curve, this curve defines the heating EIR modifier at all
outdoor temperatures. It is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature and
condenser entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables. Since manufacturers
may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of these
temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as specified by Heating performance curve
outdoor temperature type.
Heating energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of low temperature

curve
Available only when using multiple heating EIR curves, this curve defines the heating EIR modifier at low
outdoor temperatures. It is a bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature and
condenser entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables. Since manufacturers
may provide performance data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of these
temperature types may be used for heating performance curves as specified by Heating performance curve
outdoor temperature type.
Heating energy input ratio (EIR) boundary curve

Available only when using multiple heating EIR curves, the heating EIR boundary curve is a quadratic or cubic
equation that defines a change in heating energy at a specific condenser entering air dry-bulb or wet-bulb
temperature as a function of indoor air wet-bulb temperature. Since manufacturers may provide performance
data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of these temperature types may be used
for heating performance curves as specified by Heating performance curve outdoor temperature type.
Heating energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of high temperature

curve
Available only when using multiple heating EIR curves, the heating EIR modifier at high temperature curve is a
bi-quadratic equation with a weighted average indoor dry-bulb temperature and condenser entering air drybulb or wet-bulb temperature as the independent variables. Since manufacturers may provide performance
data using either outdoor dry-bulb or wet-bulb temperatures, either of these temperature types may be used
for heating performance curves as specified by Heating performance curve outdoor temperature type.
HEATING ENERGY INPUT RATIO MODIFIER FUNCTION OF PART-LOAD RATIO CURVES

Heating energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of low part-load ratio
curve
This curve defines how the heating energy input ratio (EIR) modifier varies as a function of part-load ratio
when PLR is less than or equal to 1. It is a linear, quadratic, or cubic equation with heating part-load ratio
used as the independent variable. The heating energy input ratio modifier curve is normalized to 1 at a partload ratio of 1 and is used only when the part-load ratio is less than or equal to 1.
Heating energy input ratio (EIR) modifier function of high part-load ratio
curve
This curve defines how the heating energy input ratio (EIR) modifier varies as a function of part-load ratio
when PLR is greater than 1. It is a linear, quadratic, or cubic equation with heating part-load ratio used as the
independent variable. The heating energy input ratio modifier curve is normalized to 1 at a part-load ratio of 1
and is used only when the part-load ratio is greater than 1.
OTHER CURVES
Heating combination ratio correction factor curve
This field defines the heating combination ratio (CR) correction factor curve for combination ratios greater than
or equal to 1. The combination ratio is defined as the total rated indoor heating capacity divided by the rated
heat pump heating capacity. The curve is either quadratic or cubic and uses the minimum value of x in the
curve object to determine the maximum part-load ratio which is linearly proportional to capacity (i.e., the
minimum value of x in the curve object must be 1). The output of this curve provides a multiplier (>1) which is
applied to the Nominal Heat Pump Heating Capacity. Between a combination ratio of 1 and the curves
minimum value of x, the multiplier is linearly interpolated. For combination ratios less than 1, capacity is
- 659 -
directly proportional to part-load ratio and this curve will not be used. If this field is left blank, the Cooling
Combination Ratio Correction factor will be used.
Heating part-load fraction correlation curve

This field defines the heating part-load fraction correlation curve . This curve is used to define the cycling
losses when the condensers compressors cycle on and off. The compressor cycles when the indoor to
outdoor heating capacity ratio is less than the Minimum heat pump part-load ratio.
VRF Outdoor Unit - Heat Recovery Tab

Refer to the VRF heat pump model section in the engineering reference for details on the transition from
cooling only mode to heat recovery mode.
GENERAL
Heat pump waste heat recovery
Check this checkbox if heat recovery is to enabled and the heat pump can independently cool and heat
different zones. Otherwise the heat pump is only able to either cool or heat for any given time step.
All of the rest of the fields described below are only available when this checkbox is checked.
Tip: Refer to the VRF heat pump model section in the engineering reference for details on the transition from
cooling only/heating only mode to heat recovery mode.
Minimum outdoor temperature in heat recovery mode

This field defines the minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature allowed for heat recovery operation (in C or F).
Below this temperature, heat recovery is disabled. This input must be greater than the larger of the minimum
outdoor temperature in cooling or heating mode. This system may still operate in cooling or heating only mode
when outdoor temperatures are below the minimum outdoor temperature in heat recovery mode.
Maximum outdoor temperature in heat recovery mode

This field defines the maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature allowed for heat recovery operation (in C or
F). Above this temperature, heat recovery is disabled. This input must be less than the smaller of the
maximum outdoor temperature in cooling or heating mode. This system may still operate in cooling or heating
only mode when outdoor temperatures are above the maximum outdoor temperature in heat recovery mode.
COOLING
Initial heat recovery cooling capacity fraction
This field defines the fraction of cooling capacity available when the system transitions from cooling only
operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. It is common for the cooling capacity to decrease before the
system recovers. The default value is 0.5 which means that there is a 50% reduction in cooling capacity at the
start of heat recovery mode. The system will recover according to the time constant entered in Heat recovery
cooling capacity time constant. If the transition period is not to be modelled, this input field should be set to 1.
This input is only used when the system changes from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode.
Heat recovery cooling capacity time constant

This field defines the cooling capacity time constant, in hours, used to model the time it takes for the system to
change from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. Total response time is defined as 5
time constants. If the transition period will not be modelled, the Initial heat recovery cooling capacity fraction
field must be set to 1. This input is only used when the system changes from cooling only mode to heat
recovery mode.
Initial heat recovery cooling energy fraction

This field defines the fraction of cooling energy consumed when the system transitions from cooling only
operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. It is common for the cooling energy to drop before the system
- 660 -
recovers. The default value is 1 i.e. no change in energy at the start of heat recovery mode. If the transition
period is not to be modelled, this field must be set to 1. This input is only used when the system changes from
Heat recovery cooling energy time constant

This field defines the cooling energy time constant, in hours, used to model the time it takes for the system to
transition from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. Total response time is defined as 5
time constants. The default value is 0.0. If the transition period is not to be modelled, the Initial heat recovery
cooling capacity fraction field should be set to 1. This input is only used when the system changes from
Heat recovery cooling capacity modifier curve

This curve defines the way cooling capacity modifier varies when heat recovery mode is active. This modifier
is used as a multiplier for available cooling capacity, and when in heat recovery mode, it is usually less than 1.
This curve is either a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor temperature (i.e., the indoor
terminal units weighted average inlet temperatures) and condenser entering air temperature as the
independent variables or a cubic curve based on part-load ratio. This performance curve can be used to
describe the cooling capacity modifier as either a constant (e.g., temperature or part-load ratio term
coefficients are 0), a cooling modifier that varies with either indoor temperature and/or outdoor temperature, or
part-load ratio (e.g., one or more temperature or part-load ratio term coefficients are 0), or varies with both
indoor and outdoor temperatures or part-load ratio (e.g., all temperature or part-load ratio term coefficients are
non-zero).
This modifier is applied only when heat recovery mode is active and when the system changes from cooling
only mode to heat recovery mode.
Heat recovery cooling energy modifier curve

This curve defines the way cooling energy modifier varies when heat recovery mode is active. This modifier is
used as a multiplier for operating cooling energy, and when in heat recovery mode, it is usually greater than 1.
This curve is a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal
units weighted average inlet temperatures) and condenser entering air temperature as the independent
variables. This performance curve can be used to describe the cooling energy modifier as either a constant
(e.g., temperature term coefficients are 0), a cooling energy modifier that varies with indoor and/or outdoor
temperatures (e.g., one or more temperature term coefficients are 0), or varies with both indoor and outdoor
temperatures (e.g., temperature term coefficients are non-zero). This modifier is applied only when heat
recovery mode is active.
This input is only used when the system changes from cooling only mode to heat recovery mode.
HEATING
Initial heat recovery heating capacity fraction
This field defines the fraction of heating capacity available when the system changes from heating only
operation to simultaneous heating and cooling. It is common for the heating capacity to decrease before the
system recovers. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.5 is used (50% reduction in heating capacity at
the start of heat recovery mode). The system will recover according to the time constant entered in Heat
recovery heating capacity time constant below.
If the transition period will not be modelled, enter 1 here.
This input is only used when the system changes from heating only mode to heat recovery mode.
Heat recovery heating capacity time constant

This field defines the heating capacity time constant, in hours, used to model the time it takes for the system
to transition from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. Total response time is defined
as 5 time constants. If this field is left blank, a default value of 0.083 is used. If the transition period will not be
modeled, the Initial Heat Recovery Heating Capacity Fraction field must be set to 1.
- 661 -
Initial heat recovery heating energy fraction

This field defines the fraction of heating energy consumed when the system changes from heating only
operation to simultaneous heating and cooling. It is common for the heating energy to decrease before the
system recovers. The default setting is 0.5 which means that there is 50% reduction in heating energy at the
start of heat recovery mode. The system will recover according to the time constant entered in Heat recovery
heating capacity time constant (above).
If the transition period is not to be modelled, this input should be set to 1.
Heat recovery heating energy time constant

This field defines the heating energy time constant, in hours, used to model the time it takes for the system to
change from cooling only operation to simultaneous cooling and heating. Total response time is defined as 5
time constants. The default value is 0.0.
If the transition period is not to be modelled, the Initial heat recovery heating capacity fraction field must be set
to 1.
Heat recovery heating capacity modifier curve

This curve defines the heating capacity modifier when heat recovery mode is active. This modifier is used as a
multiplier for available heating capacity, and when in heat recovery mode, this modifier is usually less than 1.
This curve is a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal
variables. This performance curve can be used to describe the heating capacity modifier as either a constant
(e.g., temperature term coefficients are 0), a heating modifier that varies with indoor and/or outdoor
temperatures (e.g., temperature term coefficients are non-zero).
Heat recovery heating energy modifier curve

This curve defines the heating energy modifier when heat recovery mode is active. This modifier is used as a
multiplier for operating heating energy, and when in heat recovery mode, this modifier is usually greater than
1. This curve is a bi-quadratic equation using weighted average indoor temperature (i.e., the indoor terminal
variables. This performance curve can be used to describe the heating energy modifier as either a constant
(e.g., temperature term coefficients are 0), a heating energy modifier that varies with indoor and/or outdoor
temperatures (e.g., temperature term coefficients are non-zero).
This modifier is applied only when heat recovery mode is active and when the system changes from heating
only mode to heat recovery mode.
Zone Unit Data

The following categories of zone units can be entered:
"Air Distribution Units" below

"Heated Floor" on page 682
"Chilled Ceiling" on page 690
"Radiative-Convective Heater data" on page 700
"Zone Forced Air Units" on page 704

To edit the data associated with an air distribution unit (ADU), you first need to select it by moving the mouse
cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by rightclicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected
component tool from the toolbar.
- 662 -
These ADU types are available:
Direct Air ADU

Constant Air Volume with Reheat ADU
Variable Air Volume with Reheat ADU
Variable Air Volume with Reheat and Variable Speed Fan ADU
Variable Air Volume with No Reheat ADU
Series Powered Induction Unit with Reheat ADU
Parallel Powered Induction Unit with Reheat ADU
Four Pipe Induction Unit ADU
Dual Duct Constant Air Volume ADU
Dual Duct Variable Air Volume ADU
Cooled Beam
Target Tab
When editing the attributes associated with an ADU it is possible to apply the same changes to ADUs in other
zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the ADUs on the Target tab of the ADU edit dialog as
shown below.
Direct Air ADU

Central system air is usually supplied to a zone through a terminal unit such as a single duct VAV reheat box.
Sometimes, however, it is desirable to supply central system air directly to a zone without any zone level
control or tempering, e.g. when used in conjunction with a unitary packaged system.
The Direct Air ADU creates the capability of supplying central system air directly to a zone. The data required
for the unit consists of the unit name, availability (on/off) schedule, and a maximum flow rate.
- 663 -
For the units to work correctly, it is important in any systems including Direct Air ADUs for the sum of the
maximum zone air flow rates to be equal to the maximum central system flow rate. The central air system flow
rate is specified in the air loop AHU data.
GENERAL
Name
the zone in which the ADU is located.
Maximum air flow rate

The design maximum volume flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) specified for the Direct Air ADU. This field may be
auto-sized.
OPERATION
This is the schedule that determines whether or not the unit is available for each timestep of the simulation. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the timestep . A
value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the timestep .
Constant Air Volume With Reheat ADU

Generally, a constant volume with reheat system provides cooling by means of a cooling coil located in the air
supply sub-loop AHU that supplies cooling to the entire supply air volume. The cooling coil is controlled by a
controller setpoint specified for the cooling coil. Zone control is accomplished by heating (reheating) the
airflow into each zone as determined by the zone thermostat. Reheat can be supplied by an electric, gas or
hot water coil that tries to meet the zone demand.
The unit contains a single heating coil which can be edited to change the type to 1-Water, 2-Electric or 3Gas.
- 664 -
GENERAL
Name

The design maximum volume flow rate (in m 3/sec) specified for the ADU. This field may be auto-sized.
HEATING COIL
This section is visible only if the heating coil sub-component of this ADU has Type 1-Water.
Maximum hot water flow rate

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been
selected. This value may be auto-sized.
Minimum hot water flow rate

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s) through the units heating coil if a water coil has been
selected. This value may be auto-sized.
OPERATION
ADVANCED
Convergence tolerance
The coil is controlled by knowing the zone demand determined by the zone thermostat and setting the outlet
conditions to meet this demand. For the electric and gas coils, this is set exactly since the coil model solution
can be inverted. With the hot water coil that uses an effectiveness-NTU method, the solution cannot be
inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate for the hot water the solution is solved for
by iteration. The iterative solution uses an interval halving routine and needs a termination criterion that is set
with the Convergence Tolerance parameter. This control offset is set to a decimal fraction of the zone demand
as the criteria, i.e. 0.001. The default for the field is 0.001.
Variable Air Volume With Reheat ADU

Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone by varying the supply air
volume instead of the air temperature. At full cooling the VAV damper is fully open supplying the specified
maximum air flow rate. As the cooling load decreases, the damper closes until it reaches the minimum stop
specified by the zone minimum air flow fraction.
VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system, air temperature control,
and reheating devices. The VAV concept may vary according to the VAV box locations, air temperature
controls and types of heating elements. Heating can usually be provided by use of reheat coils or thermostatic
baseboard.
The unit contains a single heating coil which can be edited to change the type to 1-Water, 2-Electric or 3Gas.
- 665 -
GENERAL
Name
Damper heating action

The damper heating action determines the damper action in the terminal unit as the zone moves above or
below the zone setpoint. With both control options, the damper is at the minimum air flow rate whenever the
zone temperature is between the cooling and heating setpoints (deadband condition).
With 1-Normal (the default) action, the damper will remain at the minimum air flow rate during heating
operation. As the heating load increases, the water flow rate in the reheat coil will be increased to maintain
temperature in the zone until the maximum water flow rate is reached or the user-specified maximum reheat
air temperature is reached.. This is sometimes called the single maximum control logic as illustrated below.
Single Maximum Control Logic

With 2-Reverse, as the heating load increases, the unit starts at minimum air flow and minimum hot water
flow. The hot water flow is increased until it reaches maximum flow or the user-specified maximum reheat air
temperature is reached, then the air damper starts to open to meet the load. This option is used if the
minimum air flow rate is not adequate to serve the peak heating load. This is sometimes called the dual
maximum control logic as illustrated in the following figure. For an electric heating coil, the reverse action
works the same as the normal action always keeping the air flow at the minimum during heating.
- 666 -
Dual Maximum Control Logic
Maximum reheat temperature

This is the maximum supply air temperature (C) leaving the reheat coil in the VAV terminal unit during
heating operation.
AIR FLOW
The design maximum volume flow rate (m 3/sec) specified for the ADU. This field may be auto-sized.
Zone minimum air flow method

This is used to select how the software will determine the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is
operating. There are three choices for selecting how the minimum flow rate is specified:
1-Constant where the value entered for Constant minimum air flow fraction will be used.
2-Fixed flow rate, the value entered for Fixed minimum air flow rate is used.
3-Scheduled then the software will obtain the value for minimum flow fraction from the schedule
selected from Minimum air flow fraction schedule.
Air flow control for coil sizing

This item will only appear if 3-Scheduled is selected as the Zone minimum air flow method. It can be used
to control the air flow rate used to size the unit heating coil if the coil is a water coil and the water flow rate for
the coil is set to be auto-sized. The Air flow control for coil sizing drop-list contains three options:
1-None,
2-Constant minimum air flow fraction and
3-Fixed minimum air flow rate.
If 1-None is selected, then the air flow rates used for sizing normal-action reheat coils is the average of the
minimum and maximum values in this schedule. The air flow rate used for reheat coil sizing is reported with
other component sizing information as Reheat coil sizing air volume flow rate.
Constant minimum air flow fraction (Turndown ratio)

If 1-Constant is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then the turndown ratio is used to define
the minimum flow rate to the zone specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate while the system is
operating. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for
the occupants. The reheat coil operates only when the damper is at this minimum flow rate when Damper
heating action is set to 1-Normal (the default).
- 667 -
Fixed minimum air flow rate

If 2-Fixed flow rate is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the
minimum flow rate (m3/s) to the zone specified as a fixed air flow rate while the system is operating. The
minimum air flow rate is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the occupants.
The reheat coil operates only when the damper is at this minimum flow rate when Damper heating action is
set to 1-Normal (the default). This field is used if the Zone minimum air flow method field is set to 2-Fixed
flow rate.
Minimum air flow fraction schedule

If 3-Scheduled is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the
schedule that determines the value of the minimum air flow fraction. The schedule should contain fractions
from 0.0 to 1.0. These values will define the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating,
specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate. The reheat coil operates only when the damper is at this
minimum flow rate when Damper heating action is set to 1-Normal (the default).
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil
has been selected. This value may be auto-sized.

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil
Maximum flow control during reheat

This item is only available if the reheat coil is a water coil and the Damper heating action is set to 2-Reverse.
There are two available options:
1-None,
2-Maximum flow per zone floor area during reheat and
3-Maximum flow fraction during reheat.
These methods are used to calculate the maximum allowable air flow rate during reheat operation. If 1-None
is selected, the maximum flow will not be limited. If Control on outdoor air flow is selected, the limit
established through a 2-Maximum flow control during reheat option may be increased by the software to
meet the outdoor air flow rate requirement. At no time will the maximum flow rate calculated here exceed the
value for Maximum air flow rate.
This limit is active only when the zone thermostat requests heating and the VAV box damper is reverse acting.
Maximum flow per zone floor area during reheat

This factor (m3/s-m2) is multiplied by the zone area, to determine the maximum volume flow rate (m 3/s) allowed
during reheat operation (see detailed explanation above). This field may be auto-calculated by entering
autocalculate. If auto-calculated, the value is set to 0.002032 m 3/s-m2 (0.4 cfm/ft2).
Maximum flow fraction during reheat

This fraction is multiplied by the Maximum air flow rate to determine the maximum volume flow rate (m3/s)
allowed during reheat operation (see detailed explanation above). This field may be auto-calculated by
entering autocalculate. If auto-calculated, the value is set to 0.002032 m3/s-m2 (0.4 cfm/ft2) multiplied by the
zone floor area divided by the Maximum air flow rate.
OUTDOOR AIR
Control on outdoor air flow
If this option is selected, the terminal unit will increase flow as needed to meet the outdoor air requirement
specified on the HVAC zone dialog. If Outdoor air flow per person is non-zero, then the outdoor air
- 668 -
requirement will be calculated by the software based on the current number of occupants in the zone. At no
time will the supply air flow rate exceed the value for Maximum air flow rate. If this option is not selected,
then the terminal unit will not be controlled for outdoor air flow.
OPERATION
This is the schedule that determines whether or not the unit is available for each hour of the simulation. A
schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the hour. A value
less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the hour
ADVANCED
The coil is controlled by knowing the zone demand determined by the zone thermostat and setting the outlet
conditions to meet this demand. For the electric and gas coils, this is set exactly since the coil model solution
can be inverted. With the hot water coil that uses an effectiveness-NTU method, the solution cannot be
inverted directly. Therefore, to determine the correct mass flow rate for the hot water the solution is solved for
by iteration. The iterative solution uses an interval halving routine and needs a termination criterion that is set
with the Convergence tolerance parameter. This control offset is set to a decimal fraction of the zone
demand as the criteria, i.e. 0.001. The default for the field is 0.001.
Variable Air Volume With Reheat And Variable Speed Fan ADU
The VAV terminal unit with variable-speed fan and reheat coil is an air system terminal unit consisting of a
variable speed fan in series with a heating coil. These units are usually employed in under-floor air distribution
(UFAD) systems where the air is supplied at low static pressure through an under-floor plenum. The fan is
used to control the flow of conditioned air that enters the space. When the fan is off the plenum pressure
drives the minimum air flow through the terminal unit. At maximum cooling the fan runs at its maximum speed.
At full heating the fan runs at its heating maximum usually less than the cooling maximum flow rate. Thus
this unit has two separate maximum flow rates one for heating and one for cooling.
For cooling, control is maintained simply by varying the fan speed. For heating, the unit first tries to meet the
heating load by varying the heating coil output while keeping the air flow at minimum (fan off). If this is not
adequate the fan turns on and operates in variable flow mode up to the heating maximum flow rate. This unit
is modelled in EnergyPlus as a compound component a variable speed fan and a heating coil in series in
the air stream. The unit is blow through the fan is upstream of the heating coil.
The heating coil can be edited to change the type to 1-Water, 2-Electric or 3-Gas.
Note: When using the VAV with VS fan and reheat coil ADU, the associated AHU must have the extract fan
option switched OFF.
GENERAL
Name
- 669 -
AIR FLOW
Maximum cooling air flow rate
This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) through the unit when the thermostat is calling
for cooling. Normally this is the same as the units fan maximum volumetric flow rate.
Maximum heating air flow rate

This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) through the unit when the thermostat is calling
for heating.
Minimum air flow fraction

This is the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating, specified as a fraction of the
maximum air flow rate. For this unit this is the flow rate when the fan is off.
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil
OPERATION
ADVANCED
Heating convergence tolerance
This is the control tolerance for the unit heating output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the
zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The convergence
tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the
fraction:
Variable Air Volume With No Reheat ADU

Variable air volume (VAV) systems control the dry-bulb temperature inside a zone by varying the supply air
volume instead of the air temperature. At full cooling the VAV damper is fully open supplying the specified
maximum air flow rate. As the cooling load decreases, the damper closes until it reaches the minimum stop
specified by the zone minimum air flow fraction.
VAV systems can be used for interior or perimeter zones with a common fan system and air temperature
control. The VAV concept may vary according to the VAV box locations and air temperature controls. Heating
can be provided if necessary by use of baseboard.
- 670 -
GENERAL
Name

The design maximum volume flow rate (m 3/s or ft3/min) specified for VAV ADU. This is auto-sizable.
Zone minimum air flow method

This is used to select how the software will determine the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is
operating. There are 5 choices for selecting how the minimum flow rate is specified:
1-Constant where the value entered for Constant minimum air flow fraction will be used.
2-Fixed flow rate, the value entered for Fixed minimum air flow rate is used.
3-Scheduled then the software will obtain the value for minimum flow fraction from the schedule
selected from Minimum air flow fraction schedule.
4-Sum used to provide the summation of all entered inputs
5-Maximum used to either provide the maximum of all entered inputs
Constant minimum air flow fraction

If 1-Constant is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the
minimum flow rate to the zone specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate while the system is
operating. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for
the occupants.
Fixed minimum air flow rate

If 2-Fixed flow rate is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the
minimum flow rate (m3/s or ft3/min) to the zone specified as a fixed air flow rate while the system is operating.
The minimum air flow rate is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation requirement for the
occupants.
Minimum air flow fraction schedule

If 3-Scheduled is selected for the Zone minimum air flow method, then this setting is used to define the
schedule that determines the value of the minimum air flow fraction. The schedule should contain fractions
from 0.0 to 1.0. These values will define the minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating,
specified as a fraction of the maximum air flow rate.
OUTDOOR AIR
Control on outdoor air flow
If this option is selected, the terminal unit will increase flow as needed to meet the outdoor air requirement
specified on the HVAC zone dialog. If Outdoor air flow per person is non-zero, then the outdoor air
requirement will be calculated by the software based on the current number of occupants in the zone. At no
time will the supply air flow rate exceed the value for Maximum air flow rate. If this option is not selected,
then the terminal unit will not be controlled for outdoor air flow.
- 671 -
OPERATION
value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the timestep.
Series Powered Induction Unit With Reheat ADU

Powered Induction units (also known as fan-assisted terminal units) ensure that dumping of the supply air will
not occur. They contain a small fan which mixes the supply air with re-circulated room air to provide a
constant volume supply to the space. The mixing of the two streams is controlled to achieve an air
temperature that satisfies the cooling load for the zone being served. Induction units generally have higher
capital and maintenance costs and also the potential for increased noise levels.
The EnergyPlus series powered induction unit (PIU) is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying amounts
of secondary (re-circulated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a fixed flow of air to a zone.
The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for heating the mixed
secondary and primary air. The fan runs at a constant volume flow rate whenever the unit is on. The fan is
downstream of the primary and secondary air inlets. The variable mixing is accomplished by a damper in the
units primary air supply inlet duct. This damper can move from fully open (100% primary air, 0% secondary
air) to a minimum stop that is specified in the input description. At full cooling the damper will be fully open. At
minimum cooling and for heating the damper will be at the minimum stop and the secondary air flow will be at
its maximum.
The EnergyPlus model of the series PIU terminal unit is composed of three components: a zone mixer, a
constant volume fan, and a heating coil (water, electric, or gas).
GENERAL
Name
AIR FLOW
This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate through the unit (in m 3/s or ft3/min). Since this is a constant air
volume unit, this is also the design, rated air flow rate of the unit.
Maximum primary air flow rate

This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit (in m 3/s or ft3/min). This is the
primary air flow rate at full cooling load when the primary air damper is fully open. Usually this quantity is the
same as the total unit flow rate, but it can be less.
- 672 -
Minimum primary air flow fraction

The minimum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit expressed as a fraction of the maximum
volumetric air flow rate of primary air. This input can be 0.0.
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate in (m 3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate in (m3/s or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil
OPERATION
value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the timestep.
ADVANCED
zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output.
The convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure.
Basically this is the fraction:
Parallel Powered Induction Unit With Reheat ADU

Powered Induction units (also known as fan-assisted terminal units) ensure that dumping of the supply air will
not occur. They contain a small fan which mixes the supply air with re-circulated room air to provide a
constant volume supply to the space. The mixing of the two streams is controlled to achieve an air
temperature that satisfies the cooling load for the zone being served. Induction units generally have higher
capital and maintenance costs and also the potential for increased noise levels.
The EnergyPlus parallel powered induction unit (PIU) is an air system terminal unit that mixes varying
amounts of secondary (re-circulated) air and primary (conditioned supply) air to produce a variable total flow
of air to a zone. The unit contains a small fan that acts to induce the secondary air and a heating coil for
heating the mixed secondary and primary air. The secondary and primary air streams enter the unit in parallel.
The fan sits in the secondary air stream and runs only when secondary air is needed. The primary air inlet
contains a damper that can move from fully open (maximum primary air) to a minimum stop (minimum primary
air).
At full cooling load the primary air damper is fully open and the fan is off. The primary air flow is at maximum
and there is little or no secondary air flow. As the cooling load decreases, the primary air damper gradually
closes and the secondary air flow remains close to zero. At some point, usually when the primary air flow has
reached the minimum, the fan switches on and secondary air is induced. The heating coil will switch on as
needed to meet any heating demand.
- 673 -
The EnergyPlus model of the parallel PIU terminal unit is composed of three components: a constant volume
fan, a zone mixer, and a heating coil (water, electric or gas):
GENERAL
Name
Fan on flow fraction

This is the fraction of the primary air flow at which fan turns on. In the parallel PIU the fan operation is
intermittent. If the primary air flow is above this fraction of the maximum, the fan is off. Otherwise it is on.

Maximum primary air flow rate
This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit (in m 3/s or ft3/min). This is the
primary air flow rate at full cooling load when the primary air damper is fully open.
Maximum secondary air flow rate

This is the maximum volumetric air flow rate of secondary air through the unit (in m3/s or ft3/min). This flow
rate can be any amount but is commonly less than the maximum primary air flow rate.
Minimum primary air flow fraction

This is the minimum volumetric air flow rate of primary air through the unit expressed as a fraction of the
maximum volumetric air flow rate of primary air. This input can be 0.0.
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/sec or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m3/sec or gal/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil
OPERATION
- 674 -
ADVANCED
Four Pipe Induction Unit ADU

The four pipe induction terminal unit provides local hot water heating or chilled water cooling of induced zone
air which then mixes with centrally conditioned supply air. An air conditioning system consisting of these
terminal units is effectively a mixed central air/local hydronic system. The centrally conditioned air supplied to
the induction terminal units is constant volume at quite high pressure. The central air is discharged through a
nozzle in the terminal unit, inducing a flow of room air over a hydronic heating/cooling coil. The coil is
connected either to a single inlet and outlet pipe (2 pipe unit) or to 2 inlets and 2 outlets (4 pipe unit). The
heated or cooled induced air mixes with the centrally conditioned air before being discharged into the zone.
The terminal units are usually expected to do only sensible cooling any dehumidification is done by the
central air conditioning system.
The EnergyPlus model of the four pipe induction terminal unit is a compound component consisting of a hot
water heating coil, a chilled water cooling coil, and an air mixer. The unit has two inlet air streams: the
centrally conditioned supply air and the induced air from the zone. The induced air passes first through the
heating coil, then through the cooling coil and finally through the mixer. The central supply air goes directly
into the mixer. The water flow through the hot or cold water coil is varied to meet the zone air conditioning
requirement. Note that EnergyPlus models the four pipe induction terminal unit as having separate heating
and cooling coils whereas real units have only a single coil used for both heating and cooling. Note also that
the four pipe induction unit model can be used to model a two pipe unit by simply adjusting the heating and
cooling coil schedules so that the heating coil is off when the cooling coil is on and vice versa.
GENERAL
Name
Maximum total air flow rate

The maximum volumetric air flow rate discharged from the unit (in m3/s or ft3/min). Since this is a constant air
volume unit, this is also the design, rated air flow rate of the unit. Note that this is the total discharge flow rate
including both central supply and induced air.
Induction ratio
The ratio of induced air flow rate to primary supply air flow rate. The default is 1.0 the supply air induces an
equal amount of zone air.
- 675 -
HEATING COIL

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) through the units heating coil if a water coil
COOLING COIL
Maximum cold water flow rate
The maximum cold water volumetric flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) through the units cooling coil. This value
may be auto-sized.
Minimum cold water flow rate

The minimum cold water volumetric flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min) through the units cooling coil. This value may
be auto-sized.
OPERATION
ADVANCED
Cooling convergence tolerance

This is the control tolerance for the unit cooling output. The unit is controlled by matching the unit output to the
zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The convergence
fraction:
Dual Duct Constant Air Volume ADU

The dual duct constant air volume simulation or the typical multi-zone is described by this Air Distribution Unit
(ADU). Multi-zone systems condition all the air in a central apparatus and distribute it to the conditioned zones
through two parallel ducts. One duct carries cold air and the other warm air, providing air sources for both
- 676 -
heating and cooling at all times. In each conditioned zone, a mixing valve responsive to a room thermostat
mixes the warm and cold air in proper proportions to satisfy the prevailing heating or cooling load of the space.
The total airflow to each room is kept constant while the proportion of hot air to cold air is adjusted to maintain
the temperature in each zone at the desired level.
GENERAL
Name

The design constant volume flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) specified for the multi-zone ADU.
OPERATION
Dual Duct Variable Air Volume ADU

Dual duct variable air volume (DDVAV)) systems are used to obtain zone temperature control by mixing the
cold and warm air in various volume combinations. The fan is sized for the anticipated maximum coincident
hot or cold volume, not the sum of the instantaneous peaks. This system has an advantage of a true single
path VAV system, except for warm port leakage. When cold air is modulated for control before mixing, it
operates similar to the VAV induction when mixing occurs without hot deck reheat. It is similar to a reheat
system when mixing occurs while the hot deck is using the reheat coil. It uses more energy than a true VAV
system, but less than a constant volume dual duct system.
GENERAL
Name
- 677 -
Maximum damper air flow rate

The design maximum volume flow rate (in m 3/s or ft3/min) specified for the DDVAV ADU.
Zone minimum air flow fraction

The minimum flow rate to the zone while the system is operating specified as a fraction of the Maximum
Damper Air Flow Rate. The minimum zone fraction is normally specified to meet the minimum ventilation
requirement for the occupants.
OPERATION
Cooled Beam
Cooled beams are long rectangular finned tubes mounted at high level at regular intervals within a space.
They provide quiet draught-free cooling with capacities up to about 150 W/m2. As the cooled beams cool the
surrounding air, it falls into the occupied area below due its greater density. The beams are typically arranged
at regular intervals above, or partly below, a false ceiling. A relatively small ceiling void depth is required.
It is important to ensure good air flow and so any ceiling tiles positioned below beams must have openings
within the tiles equivalent to at least 50% of their area. In some cases beams are suspended below the
ceiling.
Cooled beam systems require a separate constant volume ventilation system to supply fresh air to the space.
The EnergyPlus Cooled Beam system is a mixed air-hydronic system.. A central constant volume air system
supplies conditioned ventilation air to the zones. Chilled water circulates through ceiling mounted cooled
beam units at a rate suitable for meeting the zone sensible cooling load. Any dehumidification is done by the
central ventilation air system. Heating is usually accomplished with hot water radiators/baseboards.
Thermodynamically, the cooled beam system resembles the four-pipe induction unit.
To model a typical cooled beam system a conventional central constant volume forced air system can be
used. This system will normally be 100% outside air delivered at a fixed supply temperature (which could be
reset by schedule or by outside air temperature). On the supply side of this air loop there will be the usual
central AC equipment: outside air mixer, fan, heating and cooling coil.
The cooled beam equipment in a zone is treated by the program as a single terminal unit, however the actual
installation will have multiple beams in each zone. EnergyPlus calculates how many beams of what length are
needed to meet the zone design load during its sizing calculation for the system.
The images below (reproduced with permission from CIBSE) illustrate the difference between the chilled
ceilings described here and cooled beams.
- 678 -
CIBSE KS03 Figure 12
- 679 -
CIBSE Guide H Fig 5.79

Important Note: If an air loop is exclusively supplying cooled beams, the Air loop Type of load to size on
setting should be set to 2-Ventilation requirement, otherwise the system air flow rate will be sized on the
zone sensible load and the resulting flow rate may be too high for the cooled beams to maintain the zone
setpoint temperatures.
Tip: A useful resource on chilled ceilings and cooled beams can be found at
http://www.feta.co.uk/uploaded_images/files/CBCA/Chilled%20Beams%20Brochure_Final%207%20%28web
%29.pdf
GENERAL
Name
Cooled beam type

Two types of units are modelled:
1-Active where primary air is supplied through the beam, inducing some secondary zone air into
contact with the coil. This unit acts as an active convector.
2-Passive in which is simply a passive, finned convector unit. Primary air is supplied through a normal
diffuser.
Supply air volumetric flow rate

This is the air flow rate of the supply air entering the zone (in m3/s or ft3/min). This input would normally be
autosized based on the zone ventilation requirement.
- 680 -
Maximum total chilled water volumetric flow rate

The maximum chilled water flow rate (in m3/s or gal/min) for the unit. This input would normally be autosized
based on the zone design load.
Number of beams
The number of individual cooled beam units in the zone. Normally this unit would be auto-sized by the
program based upon the previous field and the nominal flow rate for a single beam unit (set by the program to
0.07 kg/s).
Beam length
This is the length of an individual beam in metres. Normally this will be auto-sized by the program based upon
the number of beam units and the zone design sensible cooling load. 1 to 4 meters is a typical length range.
Design inlet water temperature

The nominal or design inlet water temperature (in C or F). The default is 15C.
Design outlet water temperature

The nominal or design outlet water temperature (in C or F). The default is 17C.
PERFORMANCE PARAMETERS
The following inputs are parameters used to characterize the performance of the chilled beam units. Values
for a given unit can be obtained from the manufacturer. The parameters are used in the following equations.
Pbeam = AKT
n1
n2
n3
K=T v
V =(qin/0)air
n
qin = K1T + Kinqpr
beam cooling output per unit length W/m

coil heat transfer coefficient W/(m2K)
room air mass flow rate across coil kg/(m2s)
volumetric flow rate across coil per unit length m3/(s-m)
Where:
T is the room air water temperature difference (average water temperature is used) in C.
is the water velocity in m/s.
qpr is the supply air flow rate per unit length m3/ (s-m)
Coil surface area per coil length

This is the surface area on the air side of the beam per unit beam length (in m2/m or ft2/ft). The default is
5.422. This is A in the equations above.
Coefficient of induction (Kin)

This is the coefficient of induction Kin in the equations above. The default is 2.0 for active beams and 0.0 for
passive beams.
Pipe inside diameter

This is the water pipe inside diameter (in m or in). The default is 0.0145.
Model parameter
This is in the above equations. The default is 15.3
Model parameter n1
This is n1 in the above equations. The default is 0.
Model parameter n2
This is n2 in the above equations. The default is 0.84.
Model parameter n3
This is n3 in the above equations. The default is 0.12.
- 681 -
Model parameter 0
This is 0 in the above equations. It is the free area of the coil in plan view (for the air flow) per unit beam
length. The units are square meters per meter. The default is 0.171.
Model parameter K1
This is K1 in the above equations. The default is 0.005.
Model parameter n
This is n in the above equations. The default is 0.4.
OPERATION
Heated Floor
Heated floors are low temperature radiant systems with hot water pipes embedded in the floor construction.
They use large surface area and relatively low surface temperature.
These systems typically use low flow temperatures of around 40-55C compared with around 80C for
traditional low temperature hot water heating systems using radiators and convectors. Lower return
temperatures enable more efficient operation using condensing boilers and heat pumps.
Two types of heated floor are available in DesignBuilder HVAC:
Constant flow and

Variable flow
Note one advantage of the EnergyPlus variable flow heated floor over the constant flow heated floor is that it
is fully autosizable.
When using the Detailed HVAC activity option, heated floors will only control based on the radiant system
controls defined for the component itself and not via the standard zone thermostat defined on the HVAC zone
dialog. If the radiant system is serving a zone with forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow the
priority order established by the zone thermostat but will still base its response on the controls defined by the
user for the radiant system.
When using the Simple HVAC activity option, heated floors are controlled using the usual HVAC zone heating
setpoint temperature controls.
Note: In zones in which heated floors are included, at least one floor construction must have a construction
with internal source defined, which incorporates details of the embedded tubing system. See Internal Source
under Constructions for further details.
Heated floor HVAC components are placed, edited and deleted at HVAC zone level. To edit the data
associated with a heated floor, you first need to select it by moving the mouse cursor over it and then clicking
- 682 -
the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and selecting
the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the toolbar.
Tip: Heated floors can be connected to hot water loops fed by either boiler or GSHP systems. Note that when
connected to GSHP systems heated floors can offer a very efficient system as the low delivery temperatures
they require (typically 35C) are well matched to the optimal operating conditions for GSHP systems.
Target Tab
When editing the attributes associated with a Heated floor component it is possible to apply the same
changes to units in other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the components on the
Target tab of the edit dialog as required.
Troubleshooting Heated Floors

DesignBuilder EnergyPlus can realistically model heated floor systems and so many of the issues that apply
to real systems such as slow response, floor mass, control, floor insulation, effect of different upper surface
materials can be investigated using DesignBuilder. However heated floors can take a little bit of care to set up
and to achieve good temperature control. If you are having trouble with this you may find the answer to the
problem is the list below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Missing Internal Source Error report. Each zone with a heated floor added to its HVAC zone must
include at least one floor surface (or floor sub-surface) having a construction with an internal source. If
no such internal source surface is found, DesignBuilder will generate an error message to this effect
before attempting to run the simulation.
Unresponsive control. Heated floor systems have relatively slow response times as the heating pipes
provide indirect heating via the floor surface. This can result in zone temperatures deviating from setpoint temperatures if the heating or cooling loads in the zone change quickly, through solar gain or
natural ventilation cooling for example. The slow response is due to the high thermal mass of the floor
causing heat to continue to be emitted even when the room thermostat has stopped calling for heating
and the pump has stopped moving hot water through the embedded pipes. Overheating in such high
mass heated floors can be a common problem on days where a high demand exists on a cold morning
(for example) but then high solar (or other) gains in the day add to the uncontrolled heat continuing to
be emitted from the floor.
Throttling range. Less of a factor than point 2 is variable flow heated floors work using a throttling
range to control flow of water through the embedded floor water pipes. This acts like a deadband and
means that even without the thermal mass lag issues, there will be a temperature control range rather
than a fixed zone temperature.
Underheating can also be a common issue with heated floors. Likely causes are listed below.
Large heat loss. A useful rule of thumb is that it is not usually possible to supply more than about 100
W/m2 of heating with heated floors due to the thermal resistance of floor surfaces and maximum
acceptable floor temperatures of around 29C, though higher surface temperatures are possible in
bathrooms. Typical maximum outputs are approximately 100 W/m2 for concrete, reducing to 70 W/m2
for timber floors and less for carpet and coverings with insulating properties. Zones having higher levels
of heat loss will require supplementary heating to achieve comfortable conditions. This is true of real
world systems and with DesignBuilder EnergyPlus heated floor models. The easiest way to check the
heat loss against this rule is by using the Normalise display option which shows results per floor area.
Intermittent heating. Running heated floors on an intermittent basis requires a higher design sizing
factor to be set for the HVAC zone. This is because of the thermal mass of the floor construction.
Consider a building unoccupied over a cold weekend which then needs to be heated to operating
temperatures on Monday morning. With the default sizing factor of 1.25 the heating system will have
been sized to achieve the heating setpoint under steady-state winter outdoor design condition plus a
margin of 25%. However this 25% margin will not be adequate if the heating is to switched on at say
6am and expected to raise the zone temperature to comfortable levels in time for occupancy a few
hours later. To deal with intermittent operation, either much higher design factors are required (e.g. 2)
or the system should be run continuously (perhaps at a lower level during unoccupied periods) to avoid
the need for a rapid warmup in the mornings. Of course if the heating is to be operated continuously the
building fabric will need to be very well insulated to avoid waste.
- 683 -
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Incorrect position of the source. A common error with setting up the heated floor definition is to
select the wrong position for the heated floor source (i.e. the hot water pipes). In a well designed
system the pipes will normally be buried just below the first construction layer. If you position the tubes
at the wrong side of the construction, then the wrong zone (or the ground or exterior) will be heated! A
tool is provided on the Constructions dialog to make it easy to position the source just below the
innermost layer.
Conductive upper layer. Heated floors provide the most efficient and responsive control when the
uppermost layer is low mass and conductive. While ceilings can be constructed using a thin metal layer
between source and the room, this is rarely possible for heated floors which are required to provide a
strong and comfortable surface to walk on as well as an efficient heat transfer path from heating pipes
to the zone. Clearly, if the top layer is an (insulating) thick pile carpet then the heated floor will struggle
to provide adequate heating to the room. More advice on floor coverings suitable for heated floors is
provided below.
Insulation. Without good insulation below the heated floor source, much of the heat will not find its way
into the intended zone. Instead the heat will be either lost to the zone below in an uncontrolled way, to
outside or to the ground. There will consequently be less heat available to heat the intended zone and
underheating will occur.
Sizing error (general HVAC modelling issue). It is important to consider heating and cooling sizing
when setting up schedules. In particular, a common mistake is to include internal gains in heating sizing
calculations. This has the effect of heating being undersized causing significant underheating (or no
heating).
When used in combination with a chilled ceiling in zone below, heated floors will cause EnergyPlus
to generate an error. This is because EnergyPlus only allows one "source" object per surface and so a
heated floor cannot be located in the same surface as a chilled ceiling. There are 2 possible
workarounds to this.
a. Export the DesignBuilder model to EnergyPlus and using the IDF Editor combine the heated
floor and chilled ceiling into a single source component.
b. Insert a very thin "dummy zone" between the heated floor above and the chilled ceiling below.
Include half of the true floor mass in the upper surface (heated floor in upper zone) and the other
half in the lower surface (chilled ceiling in lower zone).
You may need a separate high-grade heat generator for DHW if using a low-temperature heat source
for heating.
Tip: To help diagnose some of the above problems and to check that maximum temperatures are
compatible with the surface material (below) it can help to view hourly inside and outside surface
temperatures and heat fluxes by selecting these output options: Surface heat transfer incl. solar
(gives heat flux for floors) or Inside surface temperature (to check the surface temperature of the
heated floor).
Coverings Suitable For Heated Floors

The advice in this section has been adapted from www.nu-heat.co.uk.
Stone and ceramic surfaces

From the thermal point of view, the best floor coverings for use with underfloor heating are usually hard
surfaces such as stone and ceramic tile as they have the least thermal resistance allowing heat from the pipe
array to transfer quickly to the surface of the stone/tile.
Ceramic tiles - Due to their high thermal conductivity and slim profile, ceramic tiles are one of the best
floor finishes for use with underfloor heating.
Polished screed - Very conductive and good for use with underfloor heating.
Limestone - Stone is the most thermally conductive of all floor coverings allowing energy from the UFH
to transfer quickly to the room.
Slate - An extremely conductive natural finish, ideal for use with underfloor heating.
Flagstones - A thicker stone finish that exhibits very good thermal conductivity but beware of adding
too much thermal inertia.
Marble - An good heat conductor available in varying thicknesses.
- 684 -
Timber flooring and underfloor heating

Engineered timber is the best of the wooden floor options for use with underfloor heating as its structural
stability allows it to perform well with fluctuating temperatures. Solid hardwoods and soft woods also transfer
heat well but care should be taken when specifying board width and thickness.
Engineered timber - The best timber floor finish for use with heated floors, offering good heat transfer
and structural stablity.
Solid hardwood - Good heat transfer and best when specified in narrow board widths.
Softwood - Suitable only in narrow board widths to reduce movement
Parquet - Offers good heat transfer when securely glued to the sub-floor
Bamboo - Usually similar in construction to engineered timber, making it very suitable for UFH
Laminates, vinyl and rubber

Laminates and vinyl floor coverings also perform well with underfloor heating. It is advisable to check the
manufacturers recommended maximum floor surface temperature to ensure the product is suitable for use
with UFH. Most manufacturers state an upper limit of 27C, which equates to approximately 75W/m2 of heat
output, which is adequate in most situations. These products have low thermal mass so heat up and cool
down quickly in comparison to stone and timber.
Vinyl - good heat transfer, often subject to a recommended maximum surface temperature
Amtico - practical, high-quality finish that transfers heat well
Linoleum & Marmoleum - thin natural products that are suited to use with underfloor heating
Laminate tiles - Thin and thermally conductive making them perfect for use with UFH
Rubber - A relatively thermally conductive material that can successfully be used with underfloor
heating
Materials to avoid
While not ideal from the efficiency point of view, carpet and underlay with a combined Tog value of up to 2.5
can be used effectively with underfloor heating. Thicker carpets act as an insulator and stop sufficient heat
reaching the room.
Carpet - A maximum Tog value of 2.5 is recommended for carpet and underlay when used with
underfloor heating
Cork - A maximum thickness of 10mm is advised as cork is an efficient insulator
Coir - A natural product similar to carpet that is subject to a maximum recommended Tog value of 2.5
You should bear in mind that some flooring manufacturers stipulate a maximum floor temperature for their
product. Note also that EN 1264 states that underfloor heating should not operate at more than 29C.
Heated Floor - Constant Flow

The constant flow heated floor keeps flow rate constant via a local circulation pump and varies the water
temperature that is sent to the floor. This is accomplished with a mixing valve that is controlled by a sensor.
The constant flow heated floor type has a built-in local secondary loop, which re-circulates flow coming out of
the system and mixes this with flow from the loop to arrive at the desired inlet temperature to the floor (note
that this heated floor model has the temperature sensor after the local secondary pump to ensure proper inlet
temperature to the floor). The local loop also contains a pump which is assumed to be upstream of the
component and after the mixing valve. So, the local loop can have some recirculation. The flow from the main
loop may also bypass the component if more than enough flow is available and the main loop is also a
constant flow system.
GENERAL
Name
the zone in which the heated floor is located.
- 685 -
Type
There are two types of heated floor available:
1-Constant flow and

2-Variable flow
TUBE SETTINGS
This is the inside diameter of the tubes through which water is circulated (in m or in). The inside diameter is
used to determine the convective heat transfer from the water to the inside surface of the hydronic tubing.
Hydronic tubing length

This is the total length of embedded pipe (in m or ft). The length of the tube is used to determine the
effectiveness of heat transfer from the fluid being circulated through the tubes and the tube/surface. Longer
tubing lengths result in more heat that will be transferred to/from the radiant surface to the circulating fluid.
Note: With the constant flow heated floor, this length is not autosizable.
Number of circuits
This input allows you to choose between modelling each surface in the radiant system as a single hydronic
circuit or to allow the program to divide the surface into multiple parallel hydronic circuits based on the Circuit
length (below). The corresponding options are:
1-One per surface to model the system as a single circuit

2-Calculate from circuit length to model the system as multiple circuits
It is recommended that 2-Calculate from circuit length be chosen for new models. The default is 1-One per
surface for backward compatibility with older versions of DesignBuilder.
Circuit length
The length (in m or ft) of each parallel hydronic circuit in a surface. This data is only used when the Number
of circuits (above) is set to 2-Calculate from circuit length. The default is 106.7 meters (350 feet), which is
the maximum circuit length allowed in Title 24.
FLOW SETTINGS
Rated flow rate
This is the maximum flow rate of water through the heated floor (in m3/sec or gal/min). This flow rate is held
constant by the local component pump, but you have the option of varying this flow rate via a schedule (see
Pump Flow Rate Schedule). The constant flow system will accept this flow rate and control the inlet
temperature based on the control and water temperature schedules defined below.
PUMP SETTINGS
Pump flow rate schedule
This schedule modifies the maximum flow rate of water through the heated floor (in m 3/s only). Note that the
values for this schedule must be between zero and one.
Rated pump head

This is the pump rated head (Pa or ftH20).

This is the pump rated power consumption (W).
- 686 -
Motor efficiency
This is the pump efficiency in decimal form (0 = 0%, 1 = 100%).

This is the fraction of the pump power lost to the fluid.
CONTROL
Temperature control type
This option is only available when using the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data
Along with setpoint (control) and water schedules, this setting allows you to specify how the heated floor is to
be controlled. The temperature denoted in the setpoint schedule can refer to one of five different
temperatures: the zone mean air temperature, the zone mean radiant temperature, the zone operative
temperature, the outdoor dry-bulb temperature, or the outdoor wet-bulb temperature. The choice of
temperature is controlled by the temperature control type. The user must select from the following options:
1-Mean air temperature

2-Mean radiant temperature
3-Operative temperature
4-Outdoor dry bulb temperature ,
5-Outdoor wet bulb temperature
Operative temperature for heated floor controls is the average of Mean Air Temperature and Mean Radiant
Temperature. See the control temperature schedule settings below for more information.
Heating high water temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the high water temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of the constant
flow heated floor. Water and control temperatures for heating work together to provide a linear function that
determines the water temperature sent to the heated floor. The current control temperature (see Temperature
Control Type above) is compared to the high and low control temperatures at the current time. If the control
temperature is above the high temperature, then the system will be turned off and the water mass flow rate
will be zero. If the control temperature is below the low temperature, then the inlet water temperature is set to
the high water temperature. If the control temperature is between the high and low value, then the inlet water
temperature is linearly interpolated between the low and high water temperature values.
Heating low water temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the low water temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of the constant flow
heated floor. For more information on its interpretation, Heating high water temperature schedule above.
- 687 -
Heating high control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the high control temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow
heated floor. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating high water temperature schedule above.
Heating low control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the low control temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow
heated floor. For more information on its interpretation, see Heating high water temperature schedule above.
OPERATION
This is the schedule that denotes whether the component can run during a given timestep. A schedule value
greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit is available and can be on during the timestep. A
value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is not available and must be off for the
timestep.
Heated Floor - Variable Flow

Similar to the constant flow heated floor but control of the variable flow heated floor is accomplished by
throttling the hot water flow to the unit.
Note one big advantage of the EnergyPlus variable flow heated floor over the constant flow heated floor is
that it is fully autosizable.
Name
the zone in which the heated floor is located.
Type
There are two types of heated floor available:
1-Constant flow and

2-Variable flow.
TUBE SETTINGS
This is the inside diameter of the tubes through which water is circulated (in m or in). The inside diameter
should be entered in metres and is used to determine the convective heat transfer from the water to the inside
surface of the hydronic tubing.

This data is auto-sizable.
Number of circuits

- 688 -
Circuit length
FLOW SETTINGS
This is the maximum flow rate of hot water through the heated floor (in m 3/s or gal/min). The controls for the
floor will vary the flow rate of hot water through the surface(s) using zero flow and the maximum flow rate
specified in this field as the lower and upper bounds, respectively.
CONTROL
Along with setpoint (control) and water schedules, this setting allows you to specify how the heated floor is to
temperature is controlled by the temperature control type. The user must select from the following options:

Operative temperature for heated floor controls is the average of Mean Air Temperature and Mean Radiant
Temperature. See the control temperature schedule settings below for more information.
Heating control temperature schedule

The Heating control temperature schedule specifies the heating setpoint or control temperature for the heated
floor (in C only). Used in conjunction with the Throttling range, it will define whether or not the system is
running and the current flow rate. Water flow rate to the system is varied linearly around the setpoint
temperature based on the Throttling range and the Maximum heating flow rate parameters (see above). It
should be noted that this control schedule will allow different setpoint temperatures throughout the year for
heating. The control of the heated floor is based solely on the values in this schedule, and the Temperature
control type described above. The heated floor will not use the HVAC zone thermostat that might be used by
other systems serving the zone in which the component resides.
Throttling range
This is the range of temperature (C) which the heated floor throttles from zero flow rate up to the maximum
defined by the Maximum hot water flow rate described above. The throttling range parameter is used in
conjunction with the control temperature to define the response of the system to various zone conditions. The
heating control temperature schedule specifies the setpoint temperature where the flow rate to the system is
at half of the maximum flow rate. For example, if the heating control temperature setpoint is currently 15C
and the heating throttling range is 2C, the water flow rate to the system will be zero when the controlling
temperature (see Temperature Control Type below) is at or above 16C and the maximum flow rate when the
controlling temperature is at or below 14C. This represents a throttling range of 2C around the setpoint of
15C. In between 14C and 16C, the flow rate to the radiant system is varied linearly.
- 689 -
The minimum throttling range is 0.5C.
OPERATION
Availability Schedule
This is the schedule that determines whether or not the component is available for each timestep of the
simulation. A schedule value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit can be on during the
timestep. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the timestep.
Chilled Ceiling
Chilled ceilings are mounted within the ceiling to provide quiet, draft free cooling of the space below. Each unit
is made up of a small bore chilled water pipe arranged in an S-shape and attached to the upper surface of a
ceiling panel. Ceiling panels are typically of thin metallic construction but can simply be plasterboard. In some
systems the chilled water pipes are embedded within the ceiling panel.
During operation, the panel is cooled through contact with the chilled-water pipework allowing it to cool the
space through a combination of convective and radiant output (up to 40% radiant). An insulating mat is often
placed above the chilled water pipework and panel to minimise uncontrolled cooling of the area above. It is up
to the user to include any such insulation in the construction definition.
One advantage of chilled ceilings is that they can be placed in a shallow ceiling void enabling them to be used
in buildings with low floor to ceiling heights. However, their limited cooling output makes them unsuitable for
areas with moderate to high heat gains. The maximum capacity of chilled ceiling systems is in the order of 70
W/m2.
Chilled-ceiling systems require a separate ventilation system for fresh air supply.
Condensation of room air on and within the chilled ceiling can be avoided by shutting of chilled water flow
based on room dew point temperature.
Tip: Chilled ceilings can be connected to chilled water loops fed by either chillers or GSHP systems.
Chilled ceilings vs Cooled beams

The images below (reproduced with permission from CIBSE) illustrate the difference between the cooled
beams described here and chilled ceilings.
- 690 -
CIBSE KS03 Figure 12
- 691 -
CIBSE Guide H Fig 5.79

Two types of chilled ceiling are available in DesignBuilder HVAC:
Constant flow and,

Variable flow.
Note one advantage of the EnergyPlus variable flow chilled ceiling over the constant flow chilled ceiling is
When using the Detailed HVAC activity option, chilled ceilings will only control based on the radiant system
controls defined for the component and not via a zone thermostat such as is used for forced air systems. If the
radiant system is serving a zone with forced air equipment, the radiant system will follow the priority order
established by the zone thermostat but will still base its response on the controls defined by the user for the
radiant system.
When using the Simple HVAC activity option, chilled ceilings are controlled using the usual HVAC zone
cooling setpoint temperature controls.
Important Note: At least one ceiling/roof construction in zones in which chilled ceilings are included must
have a special internal source construction which incorporates details of the embedded tubing system. See
Internal Source under Constructions for further details.
Chilled ceiling HVAC components are placed, edited and deleted at HVAC zone level. To edit the data
associated with a chilled ceiling, you first need to select it by moving the mouse cursor over it and then
clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by right-clicking the mouse and
selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit selected component tool from the
toolbar.
- 692 -
Tip: A useful resource on chilled ceilings and cooled beams can be found at
http://www.feta.co.uk/uploaded_images/files/CBCA/Chilled%20Beams%20Brochure_Final%207%20%28web
%29.pdf
Target Tab
When editing the attributes associated with a Chilled ceiling it is possible to apply the same changes to units
in other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the components on the Target tab of the edit
dialog as required.
Troubleshooting Chilled Ceilings

The DesignBuilder EnergyPlus ceiling model is able to realistically model the operation of chilled ceiling
systems and many of the issues that apply to real systems such as intermittency, thermal mass, control,
ceiling insulation, effect of different interior surface materials can be investigated using DesignBuilder.
However chilled ceilings can take a little bit of care to set up and to achieve good temperature control. If you
are having trouble with this you may find the answer to the problem is the list below.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Missing Internal Source Error report. Each zone with a chilled ceiling added to its HVAC zone must
include at least one ceiling surface (or ceiling sub-surface) having a construction with an internal
source. If no internal source surface is found, DesignBuilder will provide an error message to this effect
before attempting to run the simulation.
Unresponsive control. Chilled ceilings in real buildings tend to give less responsive control than air or
other radiant systems. This is because the relatively high thermal mass of the ceiling causes zone heat
to continue to be absorbed even when the room thermostat has stopped calling for cooling and the
pump has stopped moving chilled water through the embedded pipes.
Throttling range. Less of a factor than point 2 is variable flow chilled ceilings work using a throttling
range to control flow of water through the embedded floor water pipes. This acts like a deadband and
means that even without the thermal mass lag issues, there will be a temperature control range rather
than a fixed zone temperature.
Inadequate cooling can also a common issue with chilled ceilings. Likely causes are listed below.
High levels of internal gains. A useful rule of thumb is that it is not usually possible to supply more
than about 70 W/m2 of cooling with chilled ceilings. Zones having higher levels of gains will require
supplementary cooling to achieve comfortable conditions. This is true of real world systems and with
DesignBuilder EnergyPlus chilled ceiling models. The easiest way to check the internal gains against
this rule is by using the Normalise display option which shows results per floor area.
Intermittent cooling. Running chilled ceilings on an intermittent basis can require a higher design
sizing factor to be set for the HVAC zone. This is because the thermal mass of the ceiling construction
causes a lag in cooling provided to the coils and cooling provided to the room. Consider a building
unoccupied over a warm weekend which then needs to be cooled to operating temperatures on
Monday morning. With the default sizing factor of 1.15 the cooling system will have been sized to
achieve the cooling setpoint under "periodic steady-state" summer design condition plus a margin of
15%. However this 15% margin will not be adequate if the cooling is to switched on at say 6am and
expected to lower the zone temperature to comfortable levels in time for occupancy a few hours later.
To deal with intermittent operation, either much higher design factors are required (e.g. 2) or the
system should be run continuously (perhaps at a lower level during unoccupied periods) to avoid the
need for a rapid cooling down in the mornings. Of course if the cooling is to be operated continuously
then the building fabric will need to be very well insulated to avoid waste.
Incorrect position of the source. A common error with setting up the chilled ceiling definition is to
select the wrong position for the chilled ceiling source (i.e. the chilled water pipes). In a well designed
system the pipes will normally be buried just below the first construction layer. If you position the tubes
at the wrong side of the construction, then the wrong zone (or the ground or exterior) will be cooled! A
tool is provided on the Constructions dialog to make it easy to position the source just above the
innermost layer.
Conductive lower layer. Chilled ceilings provide the most efficient and responsive control when the
uppermost layer is low mass and conductive. Chilled ceilings panels are often constructed using a thin
metal layer between source and the room to provide an efficient heat transfer path from cooling pipes
to the zone. Clearly, if the inside layer is an (insulating) ceiling tile for example then the chilled ceiling
will struggle to provide adequate cooling to the room.
- 693 -
9.
10.
Insulation. Without good insulation above the chilled ceiling source, much of the cooling will not find its
way into the intended zone. Instead the cooling will be either lost to the zone above in an uncontrolled
way, to outside or to the ground. There will consequently be less cooling available to cool the intended
zone and under-cooling will occur.
When used in combination with a heated floor in zone above, chilled ceilings will cause EnergyPlus
to generate an error. This is because EnergyPlus only allows one "source" object per surface and so a
chilled ceiling cannot be located in the same surface as a heated floor. There are 2 possible
workarounds to this.
a. Export the DesignBuilder model to EnergyPlus and using the IDF Editor combine the heated
floor and chilled ceiling into a single source component.
b. Insert a very thin "dummy zone" between the heated floor above and the chilled ceiling below.
Include half of the true floor mass in the upper surface (heated floor in upper zone) and the other
half in the lower surface (chilled ceiling in lower zone).
Tip: To help diagnose some of the above problems it can help to view hourly inside and outside
surface temperatures and heat fluxes by selecting these output options: Surface heat transfer incl.
solar (gives heat flux for floors) or Inside surface temperature (to check the surface temperature of the
chilled ceiling).
Chilled Ceiling - Constant Flow
Used in:
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
HVAC
Zone
s
The constant flow chilled ceiling keeps flow rate constant via a local circulation pump and varies the water
temperature that is sent to the ceiling. This is accomplished with a mixing valve that is controlled by a sensor.
The constant flow chilled ceiling type has a built-in local secondary loop. It will re-circulate flow coming out of
the system and mix this with flow from the loop to arrive at the desired inlet temperature to the ceiling (note
that this chilled ceiling model has the temperature sensor after the pump to ensure proper inlet temperature to
the ceiling). The local loop also contains a pump which is assumed to be upstream of the component and after
the mixing valve. So, the local loop can have some recirculation. The flow from the main loop may also bypass
the component if more than enough flow is available and the main loop is also a constant flow system.
GENERAL
Name
the zone in which the chilled ceiling is located.
Type
There are two types of chilled ceiling available:
1-Constant flow and

2-Variable flow
TUBE SETTINGS
This is the inside diameter (in m or in) of the tubes through which water is circulated. The inside diameter is
- 694 -

Note: With the constant flow chilled ceiling, this length is not autosizable.
Number of circuits

Circuit length
FLOW SETTINGS
Rated flow rate
This is the maximum flow rate of water through the chilled ceiling (in m 3/s or gal/min). This flow rate is held
constant by the local component pump, but you have the option of varying this flow rate via a schedule (see
Pump flow rate schedule below). The constant flow system will accept this flow rate and control the inlet
temperature based on the control and water temperature schedules defined below.
PUMP SETTINGS
Pump flow rate schedule
This schedule modifies the maximum flow rate of water through the chilled ceiling (in m 3/s only). Note that the
values for this schedule must be between zero and one.
Rated pump head

This is the pump rated head (Pa or ftH20).

This is the pump rated power consumption (W).
Motor efficiency
This is the pump efficiency in decimal form (0 = 0%, 1 = 100%).

This is the fraction of the pump power lost to the fluid.
CONTROL
Along with setpoint (control) and water schedules, this setting allows you to specify how the chilled ceiling is to
- 695 -
temperature is controlled by the temperature control type. Select from the following options:

Operative temperature for chilled ceiling controls is the average of Mean air temperature and Mean radiant
temperature. See the control temperature schedule settings below for more information.
Cooling high water temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the high water temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow
chilled ceiling. Water and control temperatures for cooling work together to provide a linear function that
determines the water temperature sent to the chilled ceiling. The current control temperature (see
Temperature control type above) is compared to the high and low control temperatures at the current time. If
the control temperature is above the high temperature, then the inlet water temperature is set to the low water
temperature. If the control temperature is below the low temperature, then system will be turned off and the
water mass flow rate will be zero. If the control temperature is between the high and low value, then the inlet
water temperature is linearly interpolated between the low and high water temperature values.
Cooling low water temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the low water temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of the constant flow
chilled ceiling. For more information on its interpretation, see Cooling high water temperature schedule above.
Cooling high control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the high control temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow
Cooling low control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the low control temperature (in C only) for the temperature control of a constant flow
CONDENSATION CONTROL
Condensation control type
With a chilled ceiling, there is the possibility that condensation will occur on the surface that is being cooled.
This is due to the fact that the surface temperature may drop below the dew-point temperature of the space.
When this occurs, condensation on the surface will occur. There are two options for handling this situation:
- 696 -
1-Simple Off and

2-Off.
If you choose the 2-Off option, EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when
condensation is predicted to occur. The simulation will simply proceed; no moisture will be removed from the
zone air and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the condensation. When the
1-Simple off option is selected, EnergyPlus will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the
chilled ceiling to avoid this situation. With this latter option, you also have the opportunity to adjust when the
system will shut down. This is specified with the Condensation Control Dew-point Offset, below.
Condensation control dew-point offset

This offset temperature (in C or F) is only valid with the 1-Simple off condensation handling algorithm (see
Condensation control type above). It establishes the difference between the calculated dew-point temperature
of the space and the allowed surface temperature to which the surface can drop before the chilled ceiling
shuts down. This setting can be any positive, negative, or zero value. When this parameter is zero, the chilled
ceiling will shut down when the surface temperature drops to the dew-point temperature or below.
When this parameter is positive, the radiant system will shut down when the surface is this value above the
dew-point temperature. This allows some extra safety to avoid condensation. When this parameter is
negative, the chilled ceiling will shut down when the surface temperature is this value below the dew-point
temperature. While not recommended, this strategy allows the user to simulate a situation where small
amounts of condensation are tolerable.
Note: This value is an offset not an absolute temperature. A typical value might be 0-2C.
OPERATION
This schedule that denotes whether the component can run during a given hour. A schedule value greater
than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the unit is available and can be on during the hour. A value less than
or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit is not available and must be off for the hour.
Chilled Ceiling - Variable Flow
Used in:
ZoneHVAC:LowTemperatureRadiant:VariableFlow
HVAC
Zone
s
Similar to the constant flow chilled ceiling but control of the variable flow chilled ceiling is accomplished by
throttling the chilled water flow to the unit.
Note one advantage of the EnergyPlus variable flow chilled ceiling over the constant flow chilled ceiling is
GENERAL
Name
the zone in which the chilled ceiling is located.
Type
There are two types of chilled ceiling available:
- 697 -
1-Constant flow and

2-Variable flow.
TUBE SETTINGS
This is the inside diameter of the tubes through which water is circulated (in m or in). The inside diameter is

This value is auto-sizable.
Number of circuits

Circuit length
FLOW SETTINGS
This is the maximum flow rate of cold water through the chilled ceiling (in m 3/s or gal/min). The controls for the
ceiling will vary the flow rate of hot water through the surface(s) using zero flow and the maximum flow rate
specified in this field as the lower and upper bounds, respectively. This value is auto-sizable.
CONTROL
Along with setpoint (control) and water schedules, this setting allows you to specify how the chilled ceiling is to
temperature is controlled by the temperature control type. Select from the following options:

Operative temperature for chilled ceiling controls is the average of Mean air temperature and Mean radiant
temperature. See the Throttling range and Cooling control temperature schedule settings for more information.
- 698 -
Cooling control temperature schedule

This schedule specifies the cooling setpoint or control temperature for the chilled ceiling (in C only). Used in
conjunction with the Throttling range, it will define whether or not the system is running and the current flow
rate. Water flow rate to the system is varied linearly around the setpoint temperature based on the Throttling
range and the Maximum cooling flow rate parameters (see above). This control schedule will allow different
setpoint temperatures throughout the year for cooling. The control of the chilled ceiling is based solely on the
temperature values in this schedule, and the Temperature control type listed above. The chilled ceiling will
not use any thermostats defined on the HVAC zone dialog that might be used by other systems serving the
zone in which the component resides.
Tip: Some users have found it helpful to give the chilled ceiling priority by setting slightly lower cooling
setpoint temperatures than the setpoints on the HVAC zone dialog used to control a supplementary air
system.
Throttling range
This is the range of temperature (in C or F) over which the chilled ceiling throttles from zero flow rate up to
the maximum defined by the Maximum Cold Water Flow Rate described above. The throttling range
parameter is used in conjunction with the control temperature to define the response of the system to various
zone conditions. The cooling control temperature schedule specifies the setpoint temperature where the flow
rate to the system is at half of the maximum flow rate. For example, if the cooling control temperature setpoint
is currently 25C and the cooling throttling range is 2C, the water flow rate to the radiant system will be zero
when the controlling temperature (see Temperature Control Type below) is at or below 24C and the
maximum flow rate when the controlling temperature is at or above 26C. This represents a throttling range of
2C around the setpoint of 25C. In between 24C and 26C, the flow rate to the radiant system is varied
linearly.
The minimum throttling range is 0.5C.
CONDENSATION CONTROL
Condensation control type
With a chilled ceiling, there is the possibility that condensation will occur on the surface that is being cooled.
This is due to the fact that the surface temperature may drop below the dew-point temperature of the space.
When this occurs, condensation on the surface will occur. There are two options for handling this situation:
1-Simple Off and

2-Off.
If you choose the 2-Off option, EnergyPlus will not do anything other than produce a warning message when
condensation is predicted to occur. The simulation will simply proceed; no moisture will be removed from the
zone air and there will be no adjustment of the surface temperature as a result of the condensation. When the
1-Simple off option is selected, EnergyPlus will predict cases where condensation will occur and shut-off the
- 699 -
chilled ceiling to avoid this situation. With this latter option, you also have the opportunity to adjust when the
system will shut down. This is specified with the Condensation Control Dew-point Offset, below.
Condensation control dew-point offset

This offset temperature (in C or F) is only available with the 1-Simple off condensation control type. It
establishes the difference between the calculated dew-point temperature of the space and the allowed surface
temperature to which the surface can drop before the chilled ceiling shuts down. This setting can be any
positive, negative, or zero value. When this parameter is zero, the chilled ceiling will shut down when the
surface temperature drops to the dew-point temperature or below.
When this parameter is positive, the radiant system will shut down when the surface is this value above the
dew-point temperature. This allows some extra safety to avoid condensation. When this parameter is
negative, the chilled ceiling will shut down when the surface temperature is this value below the dew-point
temperature. While not recommended, this strategy allows the user to simulate a situation where small
amounts of condensation are tolerable.
Note: This value is an offset not an absolute temperature. A typical value might be 0-2C.
OPERATION
This is the schedule that determines whether or not the component is available for each hour of the
hour. A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the unit must be off for the hour.
Radiative-Convective Heater data

To edit the data associated with a zone radiative-convective heater, you first need to select it by moving the
mouse cursor over it and then clicking the mouse button to select it. You can then access the edit dialog by
right-clicking the mouse and selecting the Edit selected component option or alternatively, select the Edit
selected component tool from the toolbar.
4 types of radiant-convective units are available:
Zone Hot Water Convector

Zone Electric Convector
Zone Hot Water Radiator
Zone Electric Radiator
See the HVAC Zone Equipment Tutorial
Target Tab
When editing the attributes associated with a Radiative-convective unit it is possible to apply the same
changes to units in other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the components on the
Target tab of the edit dialog as shown below.
- 700 -
Hot Water Convector

The hot water convector is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by any other item of equipment
in the zone that has a higher heating priority. The control is accomplished by throttling the hot water flow.
GENERAL
Name
the zone in which the convector is located.
U-Factor times area value

This is the overall heat transfer coefficient for the convector (in W/K or Btu/h-F) at design conditions. The UFactor Times Area Value (UA) is used in an NTU - effectiveness calculation. An estimate of the UA can be
obtained from:
Q = UA (Twater, avg - Tair, avg)
Where, q is the heat transferred from water to the air in watts ,T water, avg is the average water temperature (C)
and Tair, avg is the average air temperature (C). Or the LMTD temperature difference can be used.

This is the maximum hot water volumetric flow rate in (m 3/s or gal/min).
This is the control tolerance for the convector output. The convector is controlled by matching the convector
output to the zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The
convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically
this is the fraction:
The default is 0.001.
OPERATION
Electric Convector
The electric convector is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by any other item of equipment
in the zone that has a higher heating priority. The control is accomplished by taking the remaining zone load
and dividing by the efficiency of the baseboard.
- 701 -
The HVAC Zone Equipment Tutorial contains a description of how to use the Electric convector system
Name
the zone in which the convector is located.
Nominal capacity
This is the nominal or maximum capacity of the electric convector (in W).
Efficiency
This is the overall electrical efficiency of the convector. The zone load met by this unit is divided by the
electrical efficiency to obtain the total electric energy used.
OPERATION
Hot Water Radiator

The zone hot water radiator model calculates the convective and radiant heat transfer from the device to the
people and the surfaces within a zone so that surface heat balances can take into account the radiant heat
transfer to the surfaces and thus enhance the accuracy of thermal comfort predictions within the space. The
component is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other zone equipment.
GENERAL
Name
the zone in which the radiator is located.

This is the maximum water volumetric flow rate in (m 3/sec or gal/min). It can be auto-sized by EnergyPlus.
Rated average water temperature

This is the rated average water temperature for the radiator (in C or F). It typically ranges from 65C to
115C and the lowest allowable temperature is 32C. The default value is 75C. This information should be
provided by manufacturers literature.
- 702 -
Rated water mass flow rate

This is the rated standard water flow rate (in kg/s or lb/s) which should be provided by manufacturers
literature. It is used by the manufacturers when determining the rated capacity (see Rated capacity below).
The default value is 0.063kg/s
Rated capacity
This is the rated water radiator capacity (in W or Btu/h) at a rated water mass flow rate (see Rated water mass
flow rate above). Almost all publications from manufacturers indicate it as W/m (Btuh per linear foot). The user
thus must multiply it by the active length of the unit. The active length is available in the literature.
Manufacturers are required to publish the difference between active and total length of the unit. This field can
be auto-sized by EnergyPlus.
Fraction radiant
This field specifies what fraction of the power input to the radiator is actually transferred to the space as
radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of the total power that is modelled as
radiation. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the radiator is distributed to people and specific
surfaces using the remaining fields.
Fraction of radiant energy incident on people

This field specifies the fraction of radiant portion of heat transfer to the zone from the radiator that is incident
directly on people within the space. This has an impact on the predicted thermal comfort of the zone
occupants. Note that although this energy is radiant it is actually modeled in the zone heat balance as
convective energy (like an internal gain). The basic assumption here is that most radiant energy falling on
people will most likely be re-released to the zone air by convection. This is a simplification of reality, but it
maintains the overall energy balance.
Note: The remaining fraction is divided across all of the surfaces of the zone in which the radiator is located.
OPERATION
ADVANCED
This is the control tolerance for the radiator output. The radiator is controlled by matching the radiator output
to the zone demand. The model must be numerically inverted to obtain a specified output. The convergence
fraction:
The default is 0.001.
Electric Radiator
The zone electric radiator model calculates the convective and radiant heat transfer from the device to the
people and the surfaces within a zone so that surface heat balances can take into account the radiant heat
transfer to the surfaces and thus enhance the accuracy of thermal comfort predictions within the space. The
component is controlled to meet any remaining zone load not met by other zone equipment and the total
electric consumption of the radiator is calculated by dividing the load by the efficiency of the radiator.
- 703 -
GENERAL
Name
the zone in which the radiator is located.
Nominal capacity
This is the nominal or maximum capacity of the radiator (in W). This field may be auto-sized.
Efficiency
This is the overall electrical efficiency of the radiator. The zone load met by this unit is divided by the electrical
efficiency to obtain the total electric energy used.
Fraction radiant
This field specifies what fraction of the power input to the radiator is actually transferred to the space as
radiant heat. The fraction should be between 0 and 1. This is the portion of the total power that is modelled as
radiation. The portion that is radiant heat transfer from the radiator is distributed to people and specific
surfaces using the remaining fields.
Fraction of radiant energy incident on people

This field specifies the fraction of radiant portion of heat transfer to the zone from the radiator that is incident
directly on people within the space. This has an impact on the predicted thermal comfort of the zone
occupants. Note that although this energy is radiant it is actually modeled in the zone heat balance as
convective energy (like an internal gain). The basic assumption here is that most radiant energy falling on
people will most likely be re-released to the zone air by convection. This is a simplification of reality, but it
maintains the overall energy balance.
Note: The remaining fraction is divided across all of the surfaces of the zone in which the radiator is located.
OPERATION
Zone Forced Air Units

These zone forced air units are available within Detailed HVAC:
Fan Coil Unit - Four Pipe

Packaged Terminal Heat Pump
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner
"Zone Water To Air Heat Pump" on page 720
"VRF Indoor Unit" on page 720
- 704 -
Target Tab
When editing the attributes associated with a Zone forced air unit it is possible to apply the same changes to
units in other zones in the same HVAC Zone group. To do this select the components on the Target tab of the
edit dialog as shown below.
Fan Coil Unit - Four Pipe
ZoneHVAC:FourPipeFanCoil
Used in:
HVAC Zones
The EnergyPlus Fan coil unit (FCU) is an in-room forced-convection hydronic unit. Typically these units are
small (200 1200 cfm) and self-contained. They are mostly used in exterior zones, usually in hotels,
apartments, or offices. They may be connected to ducted outside air, or have a direct outside air vent, but they
do not have outside air economizers.
The heating or cooling output of the unit ventilator is controlled by varying the air flow rate, the water flow rate,
or both. Air flow rate can be controlled by cycling the fan on/off or with a variable speed fan drive. The most
common setup is a two or three speed fan with the speed selected by hand. The fan then cycles on/off to
control heating / cooling output. The controls are often a wall mounted thermostat with hand selection of
heating/cooling and fan speed (off/low/medium/high). These controls may also be mounted on the unit.
Fan coil units are objects made up of other components. Each FCU consists all of these fixed components:
Outdoor air mixer

Cooling coil - water
Heating coil - water
Constant volume supply air fan
Default settings are assigned to these components at the point the FCU is created and these can be
overridden by editing the individual component properties.
The fan coil unit is connected to a hot water loop (demand side) through its hot water coil and to a chilled
water loop (demand side) through its cooling coil.
Outdoor air mixer

An outdoor air mixer is one of the components of the FCU. See above under Outdoor Air Supply for details of
data entry.
- 705 -
Fan
A fan component is one of the components of a fan coil unit. See above under Fan type for details of fan types
that are used.
Terminology
Like many HVAC terms, fan coil unit is used rather loosely. Sometimes it is used for terminal units that would
be better described as powered induction units. Carrier and others use the term for the room side of
refrigerant-based split systems.
Real world fan coil units can be 4-pipe or 2-pipe. For 4-pipe units there are 2 supply pipes and 2 return pipes.
For 2-pipe units there is a single supply pipe and a single return pipe. Change-over systems enable you to
switch the supply between hot and chilled water depending on the season. DesignBuilder provides only a 4pipe unit, but the 4-pipe model can be used to model 2-pipe units simply by using the heating and cooling coil
availability schedules to make sure that either hot or chilled water is exclusively available.
Units with outside air economizers are marketed (in the United States) as unit ventilators. Unit ventilators are
typically bigger than fan coils and are widely used in classrooms or other applications where ventilation is a
priority. If a zonal unit with an outside economizer is required, ZoneHVAC:UnitVentilator should be used (not
yet implemented in DesignBuilder Detailed HVAC).
Name
A unique system-assigned name for an instance of a Fan Coil unit. Any reference to this Fan Coil unit by
another object will use this name.
Schedule that defines whether the fan coil unit can run during a given time period. A schedule value greater
than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the fan coil unit can be on during a given time period. A value less
than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the fan coil unit is off.
Capacity control method

This input denotes how the units output is controlled in order to meet zone heating or cooling requirement.
The choices are
1-Constant fan variable water flow - the fan speed is held constant to produce a fixed air flow rate
whenever the unit is scheduled on. The hot water or chilled flow rate is varied so that the unit output
matches the zone heating or cooling requirement. When this method is selected, the fan type can be
defined, see below.
2-Cycling fan - the fan speed is chosen so that the unit capacity is greater than or equal to the heating
/ cooling load and the fan is cycled to match unit output with the load. Cycling fans can have 3 speeds,
Low, Medium and High speed and the ratio of supply air to the maximum supply rate is defaulted to
0.33, 0.66 and 1.00 for these speeds respectively. Custom values can be entered in Low speed supply
air flow ratio and Medium speed supply air flow ratio described below.
3-Variable fan variable water flow where both air and water flow rates are varied to match the load.
4-Variable fan constant water flow where the water flow rate is at full flow and the fan speed varies to
meet the load.
Low speed supply air flow ratio

This is the ratio of the low speed supply air flow rate to the maximum supply air flow rate. Its value should be
less than Medium speed supply air flow ratio below. The default value is 0.33.
This data is only required if the capacity control method selected is 2-Cycling fan.
Medium speed supply air flow ratio

This is the ratio of the medium speed supply air flow rate to the maximum supply air flow rate. Its value should
be greater than the Low speed supply air flow ratio above, but less than 1. The default value is 0.66.
This data is only required if the capacity control method selected is 2-Cycling fan.
- 706 -
Fan type
When the Capacity control method is set to 1-Constant fan variable flow you can select the type of fan.
Choose from:
1-Constant volume fan

2-Off/off fan
For the other types of Capacity control method the fan type is fixed internally based on the method. For 2Cycling fan, an On/off fan is used and for 3-Variable fan variable flow or 4-Variable fan constant flow a
Variable volume fan will be used.

The maximum volumetric airflow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min) through the fan coil unit. This is also the design,
rated airflow rate of the unit.
OUTDOOR AIR SUPPLY

Outdoor air supply
Check this option if the fan coil unit includes an outdoor air supply.
Maximum outdoor air flow rate

If the fan coil unit uses outdoor air, this data specifies the outdoor air volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or ft3/min).
This flow rate should be less than or equal to the maximum airflow rate.
COOLING COIL
A cooling coil is another component of the fan coil unit. Only the standard water cooling coil type is available.

The maximum cold water volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the fan coil units cooling coil.
Minimum cold water flow rate

The minimum cold water volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the fan coil units cooling coil.
HEATING COIL
Heating coil component also make up part of the fan coil unit. Only the standard water heating coil type can
be used.

The maximum hot water volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the fan coil units heating coil.

The minimum hot water volumetric flow rate (m3/sec or gal/min) through the fan coil units heating coil.
ADVANCED
The convergence tolerance for the control of the unit cooling output can be defined. The unit is controlled by
matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be numerically
inverted to obtain a specified output. The cooling convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to
terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:
(Qfan coil out - Qzone load) / Qzone load <= Cooling Convergence Tolerance
- 707 -
Heating Convergence Tolerance

The convergence tolerance for the control of the unit heating output can be defined. The unit is controlled by
matching the unit output to the zone demand. For units with water coils, the model must be numerically
inverted to obtain a specified output. The heating convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to
terminate the numerical inversion procedure. Basically this is the fraction:
(Qfan coil out - Qzone load) / Qzone load <= Heating Convergence Tolerance
FAN COIL UNIT - FOUR PIPE OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Heating Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Heating Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Total Cooling Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Total Cooling Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Fan Coil Electric Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,Fan Coil Electric Consumption[J]
HVAC,Average,Fraction Of Timestep Fancoil is ON []
HVAC,Average,Fan Speed []
Fan Coil Heating Rate[W]

This field reports the dry air heating addition rate of the fan coil unit to the zone it is serving in Watts. This is
determined by outlet and zone air conditions and the mass flow rate through the unit.
Fan Coil Heating Energy[J]

This field is the dry air heat addition of the fan coil unit to the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep
being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow rate through the unit, and
the timestep.
Fan Coil Total Cooling Rate[W]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) heat extraction rate of the fan coil unit from the zone it is serving in
Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass flow rate through the unit.
Fan Coil Total Cooling Energy[J]

This field is the total (sensible and latent) heat extraction of the fan coil unit from the zone it is serving in
Joules over the timestep being reported. This is determined by outlet and zone air conditions, the mass flow
rate through the unit, and the timestep.
Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Rate[W]

This field reports the dry air sensible heat extraction rate of the fan coil unit from the zone it is serving in
Watts. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions and the mass flow rate through the unit.
Fan Coil Sensible Cooling Energy[J]

This field is the dry air sensible heat extraction of the fan coil unit from the zone it is serving in Joules over the
timestep being reported. This is determined by the outlet and zone conditions, the mass flow rate through the
unit, and the timestep.
Fan Coil Electric Power[W]

This field reports the electricity consumption rate of the fan coil unit in Watts.
Fan Coil Electric Consumption[J]

This field is the electricity consumption of the fan coil unit in Joules over the timestep being reported.
Fraction Of Timestep Fancoil is ON

This field is the fraction of the system timestep the fan coil unit is running for the CyclingFan capacity control
method. This variable is defined only for the CyclingFan capacity control method.
- 708 -
Fan Speed
This field is indicates the speed chosen for the fan in the CyclingFan capacity control method. A value of '0'
means that the unit is off, '1' the fan is running at its low speed, '2' medium speed, and '3' high speed
(maximum). This variable is defined only for the CyclingFan capacity control method.
Part Load Ratio

When the capacity control method is VariableFanVariableFlow or VariableFanConstantFlow, this report
variable reports the unit part load ratio (ratio of unit heating / cooling output to the maximum heating / cooling
output). This variable is defined only for VariableFanVariableFlow or VariableFanConstantFlow capacity
control methods.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump
Used in:
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalHeatPump
HVAC
Zones
The packaged terminal heat pump (PTHP) is a compound object made up of other components. Each PTHP
consists of these fixed components:
Outdoor air mixer,

DX cooling coil - single speed,
DX heating coil
Supplemental heating coil (electric), and,
Constant volume supply air fan.
Default settings are assigned to these components at the point the PTHP is created and these can be
The layout is illustrated below.
- 709 -
Schematic of a packaged terminal heat pump (draw through fan placement)

The packaged terminal heat pump coordinates the operation of these components and is modelled as a type
of zone equipment.
Note: The details of the DX cooling system including compressor, condenser, CoP, part-load performance etc
are entered on the DX cooling coil dialog.
The data that must be entered for the PTHP is as follows.
Name
A unique system-assigned name for an instance of a packaged terminal heat pump. Any reference to this heat
pump by another object will use this name.
FAN
A constant volume fan component is included as a component of the PTHP. Note that the fans maximum flow
rate should be greater than or equal to the maximum supply air flow rate for the PTHP.
Fan placement
There are 2 fan placement options:
1-Blow through where the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by a fan followed by the DX
coils and supplemental heating coil. The fan blows through the cooling and heating coils.
2-Draw through where the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by the DX coils followed by a
fan, with the supplemental heater located at the outlet of the fan. The fan draws air through the DX
coils.

This data specifies the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air fan operating mode may vary
during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season. Schedule values of 0 denote that the
supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off together to meet the heating or cooling load
(a.k.a. AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 denote that the supply fan runs continuously while the
heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
- 710 -
The default schedule is On with a constant value of 1, i.e. that the supply fan runs continuously while the
heating or cooling coil cycles to meet the load at all times. To obtain the AUTO fan configuration select the Off
schedule which has a constant value of 0.
To set up a time-varying fan operation mode, create and select a schedule with values of 0 and 1 to define the
way the fan operation mode varies in time.

Supply air flow rate during cooling operation
This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX
cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.
Supply air flow rate during heating operation

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX
heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is
autosizable.

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither
cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the supply air fan operates).
This field is only used when the heat pumps supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan
operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is autosizable.
If the heat pumps supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation and this value is
set to zero, then the model assumes that the supply air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal
to the supply air flow rate when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation or heating
operation).
OUTDOOR AIR SUPPLY

Outdoor air supply
If the PTAC provides outdoor air then check this option.
Outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX
cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable.
Note that the outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In
addition, the outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation cannot be greater than the heat pumps supply air
volumetric flow rate during cooling operation.
Outdoor air flow rate during heating operation

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX
heating coil and/or supplemental heater are operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field
is autosizable.
Note that the outdoor air flow rate during heating operation is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In
addition, the outdoor air flow rate during heating operation cannot be greater than the heat pumps supply air
volumetric flow rate during heating operation.
Outdoor air flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the heat pump (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither
cooling or heating is required (i.e., DX coils and supplemental heater are off but the supply air fan operates).
Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable.
Note that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is fixed; it cannot change during the
simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed cannot be greater than the
heat pumps supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed. This field is only used when
the heat pumps supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation. If the heat
- 711 -
pumps supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation and the field Supply air
volumetric flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed is set to zero or is left blank, then the model
assumes that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the outdoor air flow rate
when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation [i.e., Outdoor air flow rate during
cooling operation] or heating operation [i.e., Outdoor air flow rate during heating operation]) and this field is
not used.
COMPRESSOR
Minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for compressor operation
This numeric field defines the minimum outdoor dry-bulb temperature (in C or F)elsius for PTHP compressor
operation. The compressor will not operate (for DX heating or DX cooling) when outdoor dry-bulb
temperatures fall below this value. The minimum value must be greater than or equal to -20C. The default
value is -8C. This temperature should match the minimum compressor operating temperature specified for
the heat pumps DX heating coil (if they dont match, the highest of the two temperatures will be the cut-off
temperature for compressor operation).
SUPPLEMENTAL HEATER
The supplemental heating coil used by this PTHP is fixed as Electric. The supplemental heating coil default
settings can be overridden by editing the coil properties.
Maximum supply air temperature from supplemental heater

This numeric field defines the maximum supply air temperature (in C or F) exiting the heat pump
supplemental heater coil. The supplemental heater will be controlled so that its supply air temperature does
not exceed this value. This field is autosizable.
Maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature for supplemental heater

operation
This numeric field defines the maximum outdoor dry-bulb temperature (in C or F) for PTHP supplemental
heater operation. The supplemental heater will not operate when the outdoor dry-bulb temperature is above
this value. The maximum value must be less than or equal to 21C. The default value is 21C.
OPERATION
Select the Schedule that defines whether the heat pump operates during a given time period. A schedule
value equal to 0 denotes that the heat pump must be off for that time period. A value greater than 0 denotes
that the heat pump is available to operate during that time period. This schedule may be used to completely
disable the heat pump (all of its coils and the supply air fan) as required.
ADVANCED
This numeric field defines the convergence tolerance for the units cooling output. This field allows the user
some control over how closely the heat pump will control the air-side conditions. The relative size of this
parameter relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in this field will result in tight
control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large value in this field will result in looser
controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in zone air temperature. Initial experience with this
parameter lends to the recommendation of using 0.001 as the starting point.
The heat pump is controlled by matching its sensible (temperature) cooling output to the zone sensible load
(demand). Because the performance of the DX cooling coil is frequently nonlinear, the heat pump model must
call the DX cooling coil model several times (iterate) to determine the proper run time fraction to meet the
zone load. The cooling convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the iteration procedure
when the following equation is satisfied:
( Qzone load - Qheat pump out ) / Qzone load <= Cooling Convergence Tolerance
- 712 -
The maximum number of iterations is limited, with a warning message generated if the above equation is not
satisfied within the maximum number of iterations.

This numeric field defines the convergence tolerance for the units heating output. This field allows the user
some control over how closely the heat pump will control the air-side conditions. The relative size of this
parameter relates directly to the closeness of the control. A very small value in this field will result in tight
control and will probably result in larger numbers of iterations. A large value in this field will result in looser
controls and could result in unsatisfactory fluctuations in zone air temperature. Initial experience with this
parameter lends to the recommendation of using 0.001 as the starting point.
The heat pump is controlled by matching its sensible (temperature) heating output to the zone sensible load
(demand). Because the performance of the DX heating coil is frequently non-linear, the heat pump model
must call the DX heating coil model several times (iterate) to determine the proper run time fraction to meet
the zone load. The heating convergence tolerance is the error tolerance used to terminate the iteration
procedure when the following equation is satisfied:
( Qzone load - Qheat pump out) / Qzone load <= Heating Convergence Tolerance
The maximum number of iterations is limited, with a warning message generated if the above equation is not
satisfied within the maximum number of iterations.
PACKAGED TERMINAL HEAT PUMP OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Heating Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Heating Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Cooling Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Cooling Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Heating Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Heating Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Cooling Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Cooling Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Heating Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Heating Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Cooling Rate[W]
HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Cooling Energy[J]
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electric Power[W]
HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electric Consumption[J]
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Fan Part-Load Ratio
HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Compressor Part-Load Ratio
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is
serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air
streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are averaged for the timestep being
reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is
serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of
the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC
simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results
(enthalpy addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal heat pump from the zone
it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and
inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
- 713 -
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Total Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the packaged terminal heat pump from the zone it is
the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the heat pump, and the HVAC
simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results
(enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is serving
in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams
at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the sensible heat addition of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it is serving in
Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat
pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow rate through the heat
pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal heat pump from
the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the heat pump outlet
air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the heat pump. This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are
averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Sensible Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the packaged terminal heat pump from the
zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy
difference of the heat pump outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow rate
through the heat pump, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the packaged terminal heat pump to the
zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the
sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the packaged terminal heat pump to the zone it
is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference between the
total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged terminal
heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent
heat addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the packaged terminal heat pump from
the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the
sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Latent Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the packaged terminal heat pump from the
zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference
between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged
- 714 -
terminal heat pump. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results
(latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electric Power[W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the packaged terminal heat pump in Watts. The
consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply air
fan and the condenser fan), and the supplemental heating coil (if electric). This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Electric Consumption[J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the packaged terminal heat pump in Joules for the time
period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase
heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the supplemental heating coil (if electric). This
value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are summed for the
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Fan Part-Load Ratio

This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average supply air
mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply air mass flow rate
depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during the timestep. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
Packaged Terminal Heat Pump Compressor Part-Load Ratio

This output field is the part-load ratio of the compressor used by the DX coils (cooling and heating).
Compressor part-load ratio is defined as the total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity. This value
is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner
Used in:
ZoneHVAC:PackagedTerminalAirConditioner
HVAC
Zones
The packaged terminal air conditioner (PTAC) is a compound object made up of other components. Each
PTAC consists all of these fixed components:
Outdoor air mixer

DX cooling coil - single speed
Electric, water or gas heating coil
Constant volume supply air fan
To change the type of heating coil you should edit the heating coil component and select the required coil type
from the Heating coil dialog.
Note: The details of the DX cooling system including compressor, condenser, CoP, part-load performance etc
are entered on the DX cooling coil dialog.
Default settings are assigned to these components at the point the PTAC is created and these can be
- 715 -
While the figure below shows the PTAC with draw through fan placement, blow through fan placement can
also be modelled by positioning the supply air fan between the outdoor air mixer and the DX cooling coil. The
packaged terminal air conditioner coordinates the operation of these components and is modelled as a type of
zone equipment.
Schematic of a Packaged terminal air conditioner with draw through fan placement
Name
A unique system-assigned name for an instance of a packaged terminal air conditioner. Any reference to this
air conditioner by another object will use this name.
FAN
Fan placement
There are 2 fan placement options:
1-Blow through where the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by a fan followed by the DX
cooling coil and heating coil. The fan blows through the DX cooling coil and the heating coil.
2-Draw through where the unit consists of an outdoor air mixer followed by the DX cooling coil and
heating coil with the fan located at the outlet of the PTAC. The fan draws air through the DX cooling
coil and the heating coil.
Fan operating mode

Two fan operation modes are available for selection in PTAC units:
operating mode schedule (below).
2-Cycling where the Supply air fan operating mode schedule (below) determines the flow regime.

This data specifies the supply air fan operating mode schedule. The supply air fan operating mode may vary
during the simulation based on time-of-day or with a change of season. Schedule values of 0 denote that the
supply air fan and the heating or cooling coil cycle on and off together to meet the heating or cooling load (aka
- 716 -
AUTO fan). Schedule values other than 0 indicate that the supply fan runs continuously while the heating or
cooling coil cycles to meet the load.
To set up a time-varying fan operation mode, create and select a schedule with values of 0 and 1 to define the
way the fan operation mode varies in time.

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX
cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the
heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than 0 or this field is autosizable.

This numeric field defines the supply air flow rate leaving the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither
cooling nor heating is required (i.e., DX coil and heater are off but the supply air fan operates). This field is
only used when the air conditioners supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan
operation. Values must be greater than or equal to zero, or this field is autosizable. If the air conditioners
supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation and this value is set to zero or this
equal to the supply air flow rate when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation or
heating operation).
OUTDOOR AIR
Outdoor air supply
If the PTAC provides outdoor air then check this option.

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the DX
cooling coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the
outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the
outdoor air flow rate during cooling operation cannot be greater than the air conditioners supply air volumetric
flow rate during cooling operation.

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when the
heating coil is operating. Values must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable. Note that the
outdoor air flow rate during heating operation is fixed; it cannot change during the simulation. In addition, the
outdoor air flow rate during heating operation cannot be greater than the air conditioners supply air volumetric
flow rate during heating operation.

This numeric field defines the outdoor air flow rate through the air conditioner (in m3/s or ft3/min) when neither
cooling nor heating is required (i.e., cooling and heating coils are off but the supply air fan operates). Values
must be greater than or equal to 0, or this field is autosizable.
Note that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is fixed; it cannot change during the
simulation. In addition, the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed cannot be greater than the
air conditioners supply air volumetric flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed. This field is only used
when the air conditioners supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation. If the air
conditioners supply air fan operating mode schedule specifies continuous fan operation and the field Supply
air volumetric flow rate when no cooling or heating is needed is set to zero or is left blank, then the model
- 717 -
assumes that the outdoor air flow rate when no cooling/heating is needed is equal to the outdoor air flow rate
when the cooling or heating coil was last operating (for cooling operation [i.e., Outdoor air Flow rate during
cooling operation] or heating operation [i.e., Outdoor air flow rate during heating operation]) and this field is
not used.
OPERATION
Select the Schedule that defines whether the air conditioner can run during a given time period. A schedule
value greater than 0 (usually 1 is used) indicates that the air conditioner can be on during a given time period.
A value less than or equal to 0 (usually 0 is used) denotes that the air conditioner is off. This schedule may be
used to completely disable the air conditioner (all of its coils and the supply air fan) as required.
PACKAGED TERMINAL AIR CONDITIONER OUTPUTS

HVAC,Average,Packaged Terminal
HVAC,Sum,Packaged Terminal Air
Air Conditioner Total Zone Heating Rate[W]

Conditioner Total Zone Heating Energy[J]
Air Conditioner Total Zone Cooling Rate[W]
Conditioner Total Zone Cooling Energy[J]
Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Heating Rate[W]
Conditioner Sensible Zone Heating Energy[J]
Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Cooling Rate[W]
Conditioner Sensible Zone Cooling Energy[J]
Air Conditioner Latent Zone Heating Rate[W]
Conditioner Latent Zone Heating Energy[J]
Air Conditioner Latent Zone Cooling Rate[W]
Conditioner Latent Zone Cooling Energy[J]
Air Conditioner Electric Power[W]
Conditioner Electric Consumption[J]
Air Conditioner Fan Part-Load Ratio
Air Conditioner Part-Load Ratio
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it
is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and
inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy addition only) are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat addition of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is
the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner, and the
HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results (enthalpy addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner from the
zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air
and inlet air streams, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (enthalpy extraction only) are averaged for the
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Total Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field is the total (enthalpy) heat extraction of the packaged terminal air conditioner from the zone it
is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of
the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams, the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner, and the
HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results (enthalpy extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
- 718 -
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the sensible heat addition rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is
serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet
air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the air conditioner. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (heating only) are averaged for
the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the sensible heat addition of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone it is serving
in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air
conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow rate through the air
conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being
simulated, and the results (heating only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated using the enthalpy difference of the air conditioner
outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, and the air mass flow rate through the air
conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling
only) are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Sensible Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field reports the moist air sensible heat extraction of the packaged terminal air conditioner from the
zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated using the enthalpy
difference of the air conditioner outlet air and inlet air streams at a constant humidity ratio, the air mass flow
rate through the air conditioner, and the HVAC simulation timestep. This value is calculated for each HVAC
system timestep being simulated, and the results (cooling only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Zone Heating Rate[W]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the
zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate and the
sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each
HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat addition only) are averaged for the
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Zone Heating Energy[J]

This output field is the latent heat addition (humidification) of the packaged terminal air conditioner to the zone
it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference between the
total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged terminal air
conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent
heat addition only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Zone Cooling Rate[W]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner
from the zone it is serving in Watts. This value is calculated as the difference between the total energy rate
and the sensible energy rate provided by the packaged terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for
each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results (latent heat extraction only) are averaged for the
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Latent Zone Cooling Energy[J]

This output field is the latent heat extraction (dehumidification) of the packaged terminal air conditioner from
the zone it is serving in Joules over the timestep being reported. This value is calculated as the difference
between the total energy delivered to the zone and the sensible energy delivered to the zone by the packaged
terminal air conditioner. This value is calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the
results (latent heat extraction only) are summed for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Electric Power[W]

This output field is the electricity consumption rate of the packaged terminal air conditioner in Watts. The
consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase heater), fans (indoor supply air
fan and the condenser fan), and the heating coil (includes electricity consumption rate for electric heating coil
- 719 -
or parasitic electricity consumption rate for non-electric coils). This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Electric Consumption[J]

This output field is the electricity consumption of the packaged terminal air conditioner in Joules for the time
period being reported. The consumption includes electricity used by the compressor (including crankcase
heater), fans (indoor supply air fan and the condenser fan), and the heating coil (includes electricity
consumption for electric heating coil or parasitic electricity consumption for non-electric coils). This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are summed for the timestep
being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Fan Part-Load Ratio

This output field is the part-load ratio of the fan. The fan part-load ratio is defined as the average supply air
mass flow rate divided by the maximum supply air mass flow rate. The maximum supply air mass flow rate
depends on whether heating, cooling, or no heating or cooling is required during the timestep. This value is
calculated for each HVAC system timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep
being reported.
Packaged Terminal Air Conditioner Part-Load Ratio

This output field is the part-load ratio used by the coils (cooling and heating). Part-load ratio is defined as the
total coil load divided by the coil steady-state capacity. This value is calculated for each HVAC system
timestep being simulated, and the results are averaged for the timestep being reported.
Zone Water To Air Heat Pump
VRF Indoor Unit
ZoneHVAC:TerminalUnit:VariableRefrigerantFlow
Used in:
HVAC Zones
VRF Indoor units with variable refrigerant flow DX coils are used exclusively with variable refrigerant flow
(VRF) systems. Indoor units operate to satisfy a heating or cooling load in a zone based on a zone thermostat
temperature set point. Direct-expansion (DX) cooling and DX heating coils are specified and used depending
on the operating mode required. Although a DX cooling and a DX heating coil are included in the terminal unit,
only one may be used at any one time.
Outdoor ventilation air is modelled with the use of an optional outside air mixer object. Outside air can be
provided to the zone only when the coil is operating or can be supplied continuously even when the coil is not
operating. A supply air fan is also included and it can be modelled as either draw through or blow through.
The zone terminal unit will typically be the first equipment operating for both cooling and heating (i.e.,
Sequence = 1 on the Heating and Cooling Calculation Sequence tab of the HVAC zone group dialog). Other
Zone HVAC equipment may be used in the same zone and should be sequenced to operate after the zone
terminal units (i.e., sequence = 2 or higher).
- 720 -
GENERAL
Name
The name of the VRF indoor unit is defined internally and cannot be changed.
OPERATION
Select the schedule that defines when the terminal unit is able to operate. A schedule value equal to 0 means
that the unit is off at that time and a value greater than 0 denotes that the terminal unit is available to operate.
This schedule may be used to completely disable the terminal unit as required.

This numeric field defines the terminal units operating volumetric air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This
volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal unit is operating in cooling mode.

volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal unit is operating in heating mode.
Supply air flow rate when no cooling is needed

volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal units cooling coil is not operating and the previous mode
was cooling.
Supply air flow rate when no heating is needed

volumetric air flow rate is used when the terminal units heating coil is not operating and the previous mode
was heating.
OUTDOOR AIR SUPPLY

Outdoor air supply
Check this checkbox if the VRF indoor unit has its own supply of fresh air. Then enter the 3 flow rates
described below.

This autosizable field defines the outdoor air volumetric air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This volumetric air
flow rate is used when the terminal unit is operating in cooling mode.

This autosizable field defines the outdoor air volumetric air flow rate i(in m3/s or ft3/min). This volumetric air
flow rate is used when the terminal unit is operating in heating mode.

This autosizable field defines the outdoor air volumetric air flow rate (in m3/s or ft3/min). This volumetric air
flow rate is used when the terminal unit is not operating in cooling or heating mode.
PARASITIC ELECTRIC ENERGY

Zone terminal unit on parasitic electric energy use
This numeric field defines the parasitic electrical energy use of the zone terminal unit when either terminal unit
coil is operating. When in cooling mode, this electric energy use is reported in a zone terminal unit cooling
- 721 -
electric consumption output variable. When in heating mode, this electric energy use is reported in a zone
terminal unit heating electric consumption output variable. Units are W or Btu/hr.
Zone terminal unit off parasitic electric energy use

This numeric field defines the parasitic electrical energy use of the zone terminal unit when the terminal unit
coil(s) is not operating. When the previous mode was cooling, this electric energy use is reported in a zone
terminal unit cooling electric consumption output variable. When the previous mode was heating, this electric
energy use is reported in a zone terminal unit heating electric consumption output variable. Units are W or
Btu/hr.
SUPPLY FAN
Fan type
This choice field contains the identifying type of supply air fan specified for the furnace. Fan type must be
Fan:OnOff or Fan:ConstantVolume. Fan:ConstantVolume is used when the Supply Air Fan Operating Mode
Schedule values are never 0 and the fan operates continuously. Fan:OnOff is used when the fan cycles on
and off with the cooling or heating coil (i.e. Supply Air Fan Operating Mode Schedule values are at times 0).
Supply air fan placement

This alpha field has two choices:
1-Blow through which means that the unit consists of a fan followed by the DX coils. The fan blows
through the cooling and heating coils. If an outside air mixer is used, the fan inlet connects to the
outside air mixers mixed air node. If an outside air mixer is not used, the fan inlet connects to the zone
exhaust node. For this configuration, the fan outlet always connects to the DX cooling coil inlet node (or
if a DX cooling coil is not used, the DX heating coil inlet node).
2-Draw through. which means that the unit consists of the DX coil(s) followed by a fan. The fan draws
air through the DX coil(s). In this case the fan inlet always connects to the DX heating coil outlet node
(or if a DX heating coil is not use, the DX cooling coil outlet node) and the fan outlet node always
connects to the zone inlet node.

Schedule values equal to 0 denote cycling fan/cycling coil operation. All other schedule values denote
constant fan/cycling coil operation.
HEATING CAPACITY
Override outdoor unit rated total heating capacity sizing ratio
Check this option if you would like to override the Rated total heating capacity sizing ratio used for the
Outdoor unit.
Rated total heating capacity sizing ratio

This field defines the ratio of the heating coil to cooling coil size when DX heating coil capacity is autosized. It
must be greater than or equal to 1. The default value is 1.

In many cases, HVAC component sizes can be autosized by EnergyPlus. All settings that can be autosized
are displayed in dark blue on the component edit dialogs. The special keyword Autosize must typed into the
edit control on the component edit dialog if a setting is to be autosized.
For example, for a hot water coil, the Maximum water flow rate can be autosized:
- 722 -
Autosizing in EnergyPlus
EnergyPlus is able to automatically size many HVAC components based on user-specified building
configuration and external design external conditions.
DesignBuilder automatically provides information on 2 sizing periods, one for winter, the other for summer.
EnergyPlus uses this design day weather data to specify outside conditions when autosizing HVAC
components.
Information on how sizing is to be carried out can be entered for each zone (on the HVAC zone dialog) and for
each air system (on the Air loop dialog).
Other than zone thermostat setpoints, the sizing calculations generally know nothing about the system control
inputs defined on Setpoint managers and availability schedules. You must coordinate the sizing inputs on the
HVAC zone and air loop dialogs with the actual simulation control inputs.
The sizing calculations only recognize the presence of central heating and cooling coils, preheat and precool
coils and reheat coils. These are assumed to deliver the various supply temperatures specified in the Air loop
and HVAC Zone objects. The impact of their sub-components such as heat recovery, dehumidifiers, fans, and
pumps are not accounted for in the sizing calculations.
Note: The Detailed HVAC autosizing calculations referred to on this page are not to be confused with Heating
and Cooling design calculations which use separate simpler data entry from the HVAC tab. No Detailed
HVAC data is used for Heating and Cooling design calculations, which are based on the EnergyPlus
Ideal loads system.
Schedules and Sizing

Close attention should be paid to Schedules. When using 7/12 schedules you must make sure that the
appropriate Design day definition is made to ensure that they reflect appropriate summer and winter design
days respectively. Likewise Compact schedules provide the SummerDesignDay and WinterDesignDay day
types and these must be set up correctly.
Some commonly used applications of summer and winter design days in schedules are:
1.
2.
3.
Setting internal loads (lights, equipment, occupancy) to maximum all day for cooling and to zero all day
for heating;
Setting heating and cooling thermostat set points to constant values (no set up or set back);
Setting heating and cooling equipment to be always on for design days.
None of these applications are necessarily recommended but these and other uses of the special
summer/winter design day schedules may prove useful for specific situations.
- 723 -
Some examples of common mistakes with design day data in schedules are:
1.
2.
Using a schedule such as the predefined On schedule for operating internal gains equipment such as
computers or lights. Internal gains must not be included in heating sizing calculations because the size
of the heating equipment must be calculated without consideration of any contribution from internal
gains. Including such gains usually results in undersizing of heating zone equipment and/or plant.
Internal gains must of course be included in cooling sizing so should operate for the
SummerDesignDay.
Selecting a Heating operation schedule on the HVAC tab with options indicating the schedule to be off
for the WinterDesignDay. Or selecting a Cooling operation schedule on the HVAC tab with options
indicating the schedule to be off for the SummerDesignDay. Likewise when using the 2-Detailed
HVAC activity data model option the heating and cooling setpoint schedules selected on the HVAC
zone dialog must operate on their respective design day periods.
Sizing Factors
There are generally 2 areas of input where the user can impose sizing factors.
1.
2.
In HVAC zone sizing data, the user can specify heating and cooling sizing factors for a specific zone.
These factors are applied to the calculated zone design loads and air flow rates.
For some plant components (all central chillers, boilers and cooling towers) the user can specify a
sizing factor that modifies the autosized component capacity and flow rates. These factors are applied
after zone sizing factors. They are primarily used to split the design load between multiple components.
These sizing factors can change the autosizing of the associated loops and pumps. The following rules
define the effect of plant component sizing factors on loops and pumps.
a. For supply side branches, the sizing factors of all components in series on the branch are
summed and the result becomes the branch sizing factor. If there is a branch pump, its
autosized design flow rate is multiplied by the branch sizing factor.
b. For each loop, if the average of the branch sizing factors is less than 1, the loop sizing factor is
set equal to the sum of he branch sizing factors. If the average is greater than 1, the loop sizing
factor is set equal to the maximum of the branch sizing factors. The loop sizing factor is applied
to the loop design flow rate (if autosized) and to the loop pump flow rate (if autosized).
Mixing User-Specified and Autosized Inputs

Mixed user-specified and autosized inputs can be successfully used if the following points and suggestions
are followed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Each component is autosized independently. Thus user input for a flow rate in one component will have
no effect on other components autosized flow rates. For instance, specifying the chilled water loop
pumps rated flow rate will have no effect on the autosizing of the chillers design evaporator flow rate
or on the plant loops autosized maximum loop flow rate.
Within a component it is best to autosize all inputs or enter specified values for all inputs. For example,
in a chiller, if only the nominal capacity is user-specified, the autosized chilled water flow rate may not
be consistent with the specified capacity.
Sizing information flows only from the sizing data on the HVAC zone, Air loop and Plant loop dialogs to
the components. The sizing calculations have no knowledge of user-specified values in a component.
The only exception to this rule is that plant loop sizing will collect all component design water flow rates
whether autosized or user-specified.
To specify a particular zone or system air flow rate use the HVAC Zone and Air Loop data rather than
in the individual components.
The plant loop flow rates are sized from the total design demand of the components connected to each
loop. The components demanding water need not be autosized for the plant loop autosizing to work
successfully. So the user could specify all the air side components and autosize all the plant loops and
plant components. Or specify the chilled water loop flow rate, chilled water pump inputs and chiller
inputs and let the condenser loop and tower autosize.
Zone design flow rate inputs

In EnergyPlus the autosizing calculations start with a calculation of the zone design air flow rates using zone
by zone design day simulations. The resulting zone design air flow rates and daily air flow sequences are
used in the subsequent HVAC and central plant air and fluid flow design calculations and in the component
autosizing calculations. The user can override or change the calculated zone design air flow rates in various
ways.
- 724 -
1.
2.
The user can specify a separate zone level Zone sizing factor for heating and cooling for each HVAC
zone object.
For each zone the user can input a Cooling design air flow rate and/or a Heating design air flow rate
(and specify Cooling design air flow method = 1-Flow/Zone and Heating design air flow method = 1Flow/Zone). These user inputs override the calculated values. The program divides the user input
cooling or heating design air flow rate by the calculated values and uses the result as a zone sizing
factor to multiply all the elements in the design heating and cooling air flow and load sequences. From
this point the design calculations proceed as usual.
System design flow rate inputs

Using the results of the zone design air flow rate calculation (including any user input or altered flow rates)
EnergyPlus proceeds to calculate central air system flow rates and cooling and heating loads. The results of
this calculation can be overridden by setting the Air loop Cooling design air flow method to be 2-Flow/System
and input a value for Cooling design air flow rate. Similarly for heating specify the Heating design air flow
method to be 2-Flow/System and input a value for Heating design air flow rate.
HVAC Sizing Tips

To help achieve successful autosizing of HVAC equipment, note the following general guidelines:
Begin with everything fully autosized (no user-specified values) and get a working system before trying
to control any specifically sized components.
You must coordinate system controls with sizing inputs. For example, if the Air loop Central cooling
design supply air temperature is set to 13C, you must make sure that the corresponding setpoint
manager for the central cooling coil controls to the same 13C as design conditions. EnergyPlus does
not cross-check these inputs. The HVAC autosizing calculations use the sizing information in the Air
loop and HVAC zone data. The simulation uses the information in controllers and setpoint managers.
User-specified flow rates will only impact the sizing calculations if entered in the Air loop and HVAC
zone data. Sizing information flows only from the sizing objects to the components. The sizing
calculations have no knowledge of user specified values in a component. The only exception to this
rule is that plant loop sizing will collect all component design water flow rates whether autosized or user
specified.
The zone thermostat schedules determine the times at which design loads will be calculated. All zonelevel schedules (such as lights, electric equipment, infiltration) are active during the sizing calculations
(using the day type specified for the sizing period). System and plant schedules (such as availability
managers and component schedules) are unknown to the sizing calculations. To exclude certain times
of day from the sizing load calculations, use the thermostat setpoint schedules for SummerDesignDay
and/or WinterDesignDay. For example, setting the cooling setpoint schedule to 99C during nighttime
hours for the SummerDesignDay day type will turn off cooling during those hours.
Humidity Control
It is usually easiest to select an appropriate HVAC Template as the starting point when setting up humidity
control for Detailed HVAC systems. However in some cases you may need to define humidity control
manually and this page describes the steps involved.
The process depends on the base system type. The instructions below are for the Simple HVAC activity data
option. When the Detailed HVAC activity data is used the process is similar but humidistat setpoints come
from schedules defined on the HVAC zone dialog instead of setpoint values defined on the Activity tab and
demand schedules on the HVAC zone dialog.
VAV with Reheat

To add humidification/dehumidification control to a VAV system, follow these steps:
Humidification
1.
2.
3.
Add a humidifier to the AHU, typically as the rightmost component in the AHU (nearest to the supply
end).
Set any sizing and capacity parameters on the humidifier dialog.
On the supply loop level of the air loop add a setpoint manager immediately downstream of the
humidifier and edit the setpoint manager type to use one of the "humidity minimum" setpoint managers.
For example the 6-Multi-zone humidity minimum controller calculates the supply air minimum humidity
ratio based on the zone with the highest humidity ratio setpoint to maintain the zone RH levels near
- 725 -
their respective humidifying setpoints. Setting up the setpoint manager in this way ensures that air
leaving the humidifier has a minimum level of humidity required to meet the setpoint in the zone with
the lowest RH.The screenshot below illustrates the components involved.
4.
5.
When using one of the "humidity minimum" controllers you must switch on the humidistat option on the
HVAC zone dialog and define RH setpoint schedules. Humidistats can provide a fine degree of
humidification control within each zone. To define RH setpoint schedules enter the zone Humidification
setpoint model data and Humidifying demand schedule on the HVAC zone dialog (when using Simple
HVAC Activity Data) or the HVAC zone Humidifying RH setpoint schedule (when using Detailed HVAC
Activity Data).
An alternative approach which does not provide close control of zone humidity is to use a 1-Scheduled
Setpoint manager type and the 6-Minimum humidity ratio Control variable. This simply ensures that the
supply air has a minimum RH. In this case the HVAC zone humidifying setpoint settings are not used.
Dehumidification
1.
2.
3.
4.
On the AHU cooling coil dialog, to control both temperature and humidity set the Controller control
variable to 3-Temperature and Humidity Ratio, or if no temperature control is required, select the 2Humidity Ratio option.
Where a cooling coil is to conduct both temperature and humidity control the temperature and humidity
Setpoint managers must both be located on the same node. Assuming that the default temperature
Setpoint manager is already placed downstream of the AHU, add a new setpoint manager downstream
of the AHU and edit the setpoint manager Type to use one of the "humidity maximum" setpoint
managers. For example the 7-Multi-zone humidity maximum controller calculates the supply air
humidity ratio based on the zone with the lowest humidity ratio setpoint to maintain the zone RH levels
near their respective humidity setpoints. Setting up the setpoint manager in this way ensures that air
leaving the cooling coil has a maximum level of humidity, but on its own does not provide close control
humidity in the zones. The
To provide a finer degree of dehumidification control within each zone, you must switch on the
humidistat option on the HVAC zone dialog and define any time-varying demand schedules.
For all dehumidification systems currently supported by DesignBuilder it is essential to include some
form of zone reheat to ensure that "overcooled" air from the AHU does not cause the zone to be
overcooled. The zone reheat can be a standard reheat ADU or it can be some other form of zone
heater such as a convector or radiator.
Note: In cases where a VAV system uses a water cooling coil for dehumidification in the AHU , it is
sometimes not possible to control upper zone humidity levels accurately. This situation is more likely under
low load conditions when the VAV terminal box dampers are at minimum position and the water cooling coil
cannot drop the air stream temperature to the level required for high humidity control. In such cases you may
find that swapping the water coil for a Cooling Coil - Two Stage with Humidity Control DX helps because the
lower coil temperatures and humidity control capability of this DX coil allow it to drop out more moisture from
the air stream, helping to maintain the zone maximum humidity setpoint. Another possible solution to this
- 726 -
problem is to increase the minimum flow fraction for the ADU to a higher than normal value , e.g. 0.5. This
allows a greater volume of dry air from the AHU to be introduced into the zones, even when sensible loads are
low.
The Humidification and Dehumidification set ups described above can be used together to achieve full
humidity control.
CAV with Reheat

The procedure for setting up humidity control in CAV systems is very similar to that described for VAV
systems above, except that there is less likely to be issues with achieving dehumidification setpoints during
times of low sensible load. This is because there is no damper to reduce flow at the terminal unit so zones get
access to the full flow of air from the AHU.
Unitary Heat Cool and Unitary Heat Pump Humidity Control

To add humidification/dehumidification control to a unitary heat cool system, follow these steps:
1.
For each zone supplied by the unitary heat cool AHU, switch humidity control on by checking the
Humidistat control check box on the HVAC zone dialog and define any time-varying demand
schedules.
Dehumidification
1.
2.
Go down to the air loop supply sub-loop and edit the AHU, changing the Dehumidification control type
to 2-CoolReheat.
Add a Maximum humidity setpoint manager downstream of the AHU (5-Multi-zone maximum
humidity average or 7-Multi-zone humidity maximum or 9-Single zone humidity maximum).
Humidification
1.
2.
Add a Humidifier component to the AHU.

Add a Minimum humidity setpoint manager immediately downstream of the Humidifier (4-Multi-zone
minimum humidity average or 6-Multi-zone humidity minimum or 8-Single zone humidity
minimum).
MODEL OPTIONS
All Model Options are stored in the DesignBuilder dsb file and so any changes you make to the model
configuration will not affect other models.
You can open the Model Options dialog by:
Clicking on the spanner icon on the toolbar (above).

From the Edit menu.
Pressing F11.
All Model Options are stored in a single dialog but the options you can access depend on where you are in the
model hierarchy.
Some model options are stored at the site level:
Options on the Display and Drawing tools tabs
Most model options are stored at the building level:
Options on the Data, Advanced, Heating design, Cooling design, Simulation tabs
and some are stored at block level:

- 727 -
Options on the Block tab.
So if you open the Model Options dialog when you are at building level you will not be able to access the
Block Model Options. Likewise if you are at site level you will only be able to access the Display and Drawing
tools tabs.
Model Data Options (Building)

Data tab on Model Options dialog.
Use this dialog to customise the Model Data Options for the current building.
You can edit the amount of detail in various aspects of the model:
Model scope
Construction and Glazing
Gains
Timing
HVAC
Natural ventilation
The descriptions to the right of the sliders, taken together, provide a summary of the current model options.
Model scope
You can use the scope control to switch between whole building and single zone modes.
- 728 -
1.
Zone - only the current zone is modelled and all internal surfaces between this zone and other zones
are modelled as being adiabatic, i.e .heat is transferred into the wall mass as if the temperature of the
other zone is the same as the current zone.. This option is only allowed if you are at zone level
because the current zone is used to select the single zone to be analysed.
2.
Zone + Shading - as above but the surfaces of other zones are modelled as shading surfaces. This
option models a single zone but includes shading due to other parts of the building and its shading
devices. Note that if the single zone is part of a large complex building, simulations using this option are
often little or no quicker to complete than the full building simulation. This is because the shading
calculations required for the large number of shading elements used to model the rest of the building
are slow.
3.
Building - All zones and shading in the model are included in the simulations
To use one of the single-zone options make sure you are currently editing the zone you want to model.
Note 1: When using one of the zone scope options, the model data that you actually see in the model is taken
from the building level and not the zone level as you might expect. So for example having set this option, you
may find that the zone data for the single zone model is different to the values that were set for that zone
before the scope change.
Note 2: A more flexible way to achieve the same effect is to use the Include zone option which allows more
than one zone to be included in the cut-down model. Also in this case, the model data used is zone data
rather than building level data as expected.
Construction and glazing model Option

Construction And Glazing

The Construction and glazing model option controls the way construction templates are loaded on the
construction model data tab. When the option is set to Pre-design you can load construction templates using
the Insulation and Thermal mass slider controls. When set to General, templates are loaded by selection from
a list in the usual way.
Floor/slab/ceiling Representation
You can choose to model floors, ceilings and flat roofs each having a single construction or by combining
separate constructions for floor, slab and ceiling. The options are:
1-Combined - The construction of all wall, floor and roof surfaces is defined using a single construction
component. See the Combined Constructions section for more details.
With Combined constructions, the volume of the floor constructions can be included or excluded from
- 729 -
the zone air volume used in calculations by making the appropriate setting under Zone volume
calculations. By default the volume of floor constructions is included in the calculation of zone volume,
i.e. for a single zone rectangular box block the zone volume is:
Zone volume = Block height x (Block width - wall thickness) x (Block depth - wall thickness) - Floor area
x Floor construction Thickness.
When the floor constructions are not to be subtracted from the zone volume then the last term in the
above equation is not included and the zone volume is simply floor area x block height.
The 3 options (shown in the screenshot above) are:
Internal floor constructions not subtracted from zone volume - selected by default, this option
allows you to include/exclude the volume of the internal floors from the zone volume. Uncheck
this option if you wish internal floor constructions to be subtracted from zone volume.
External floor constructions not subtracted from zone volume - selected by default, this option
allows you to include/exclude the volume of the external floors from the zone volume. Uncheck this
option if you wish external floor constructions to be subtracted from zone volume.
Ground floor construction is below ground and is not subtracted from zone volume - selected by
default, this option allows you to include/exclude the volume of the ground floors from the zone volume.
Clear this option if you wish ground floor constructions to be considered as being within the zone and
subtracted from zone volume. Keep option selected if the ground construction is to be modelled as
being below ground level and not subtracted from the zone volume.
For more information on the effect of these options and also some limitations see the Model Geometry
Example section.
2-Separate - internal floors are defined in model data by selecting constructions for floor, slab and
ceiling with air gaps. Likewise flat roofs are defined by separately defining the ceiling and roof details
etc. This approach can be more economical in the number of different construction components
required, but requires more input model data and more careful planning. When using this option you
must first familiarise yourself with the meaning on the data as described in the Separate Constructions
section. Choosing this option configures constructions in the same way as DesignBuilder version 1.2
and earlier.
With Separate constructions, the volume of the floor constructions + floor void and ceiling constructions
+ ceiling void can be included or excluded from the zone air volume by making the appropriate setting
under Zone volume calculations.
Important Note: New users are advised not to use the Separate construction option. This is
because it can be confusing trying to understand how constructions are built up with this
option, especially if you do not check EnergyPlus idf data. The Separate Constructions model
option will not be supported in DesignBuilder v5
Note: the zone air volume referred to above is used for calculating air flow rates for natural ventilation,
mechanical ventilation and for infiltration.
See also:
Block and Zone Dimensions
Gains data model Option

Gains Data
There are three levels of gains model detail:
- 730 -
Lumped - all internal gains including occupancy, computer, office equipment, miscellaneous, catering
process and lighting gains are lumped together into a single value. Solar gains are still calculated in the
usual way.Note that with Lumped gains you cannot generate Temperature distribution and Comfort
simulation output data.
Note: When using the Lumped Gains model option, Comfort data is not generated because in
EnergyPlus the request for comfort calculations is made in the People statement and this is not
generated by DesignBuilder when Lumped gains is set.
Early - gains can be defined separately under various categories. This is the default and is normally the
preferred option for design and energy assessment work.
Detailed - gains are specified by defining each individual item of equipment in each zone on the
Equipment tab. If you select this option then DesignBuilder will automatically set the Timing model
option to Schedules. Note that this option was developed for creating very detailed models of existing
buildings based on survey data. Entering this data for a large building is very time-consuming and in
most cases you will be better served by the Early gains option above.
Important Note: The Detailed gains option is included for legacy models only and may be
discontinued in future versions of the software.
Lighting Gain Units
There are 2 ways to define General lighting gains in DesignBuilder:
1-Watts per m2 - this used to be the default value in versions pre v2.1, where the General lighting
gains are defined as W/m2 independent of the required illuminance level. This method has the
advantage that the level of gains can clearly be understood by looking at W/m2 values and floor area.
However it can cause problems when loading data from lighting templates (where lighting gains are
defined in W/m2/100lux) in that if the activity is changed subsequently with a different illuminance
requirement, the lighting W/m2 value is not updated. This led to the introduction of the second option.
2-Watts per m2 per 100lux - the default option in v2.1 and later. Although the units W/m2/100lux may
seem quite obscure, this method of defining lighting gains has advantages over using W/m2. Namely
that the actual lighting level is associated with the lighting system type without the need to refer to the
activity and hence illuminance requirement. So if a particular lighting system type is installed throughout
a building but the building has a range of activities, it will usually be possible to enter the lighting
W/m2/100lux value once only at building level, set the activity for each zone and still get realistic
lighting gains. See General lighting gains for details on the calculation of lighting gains from
W/m2/100lux, floor area and illuminance requirements.
Occupancy Latent Gains

There are 2 ways for the sensible-latent split of occupancy gains to be defined:
1-Dynamic calculation - where the latent fraction of occupancy gains is calculated within EnergyPlus
at runtime based on internal temperatures and metabolic rate. In this case the ratio of sensible to total
occupancy gain will reduce as the internal temperature in the zone increases and at temperatures
much above 30C all of the occupancy gain will be latent (occupants sweating).
2-Fixed fraction - where the latent fraction of occupancy gains is constant regardless of internal
conditions and defined on the Activity tab under the Occupancy header.
Note: The total occupancy gain (sensible + latent) is not affected by this option, only the split of sensible vs
latent gain.
Timing model Option

- 731 -
You can specify schedules in DesignBuilder using two approaches:
Typical workday - where the timing is defined by a start time, end time, working days per week and
seasonal variation. This approach is intended for easy early stage modelling of non-domestic buildings.
This option is not available when using Detailed HVAC or Detailed gains.
Schedules - where Schedules can either be defined for each day of the week and each month of the
year using daily Profiles or by using Compact Schedule format. Schedules are more flexible and can be
used in other projects but they take longer to set up.
Generally if you start to find the Typical workday timing mode too restrictive you should switch to Schedules
mode.
You can also request:
Timing HVAC + Natural Ventilation Operates With Occupancy

Select this option if all heating, cooling, natural ventilation and DHW operation follows occupancy.
This option is only available if Timing is set to Typical workday.
Note that HVAC operation data can modify the HVAC operation even when Timing HVAC + natural
ventilation operates with occupancy is set. For example:
Simple HVAC - Mechanical ventilation, Heating and Cooling operation have additional Days / week
and seasonal operation data. Heating operation also has Preheat hours and Cooling operation also has
Precool hours.
Compact HVAC:
Fan-coil units, Unitary single zone - Mechanical ventilation, Heating and Cooling operation
have additional Days / week and seasonal operation data. Heating operation also has Preheat
hours and Cooling operation also has Precool hours.
VAV/CAV/Unitary multizone - Min AHU outside air, AHU heating/cooling, Zone setpoint
schedules have additional Days / week and seasonal operation data. Heating operation also has
Preheat hours and Cooling operation also has Precool hours.
These differences are applied as 'modifiers' to the basic occupancy schedule because HVAC systems
generally switch on and off based on the occupancy time but with differences. e.g. Heating systems are often
switched off in summer, they may operate during weekends when the building is unoccupied and they will
often have a preheat period to get the building up to temperature before occupancy.
Internal Gains Operate With Occupancy

Select this option if lighting and other internal gains operation follows occupancy. If you wish to enter specific
schedules for lighting and/or other internal gains you should uncheck this option. For example there may be
low levels of emergency lighting and some IT equipment usage while the building is unoccupied.
Natural Ventilation and Infiltration model Options

- 732 -
Natural Ventilation
Natural ventilation (and infiltration) can either be 'Scheduled' or 'Calculated'.
Scheduled - the ventilation rates are predefined using a maximum air change rate modified by
operation schedules.
Calculated - the ventilation rates are calculated using wind and buoyancy-driven pressure, opening
sizes and operation, crack sizes etc. using the EnergyPlus Airflow Network.
You should generally use the 'Scheduled' natural ventilation model option because it is quicker and easier to
enter the related model data and also because the simulations run more quickly. However if you need to
calculate natural ventilation rates which can be achieved with a particular configuration then you should use
the 'Calculated' option.
Note: This natural ventilation setting also affects the way that infiltration is treated. It isn't possible to calculate
infiltration as a constant (or scheduled) value while using the EnergyPlus Airflow Network for Calculated
More on Natural Ventilation modelling.
Infiltration Units
There are 4 different ways to specify infiltration in calculations not using the AirflowNetwork (Heating and
Cooling design and Simulation with Scheduled natural ventilation):
1-ac/h - the default option where infiltration is defined in air changes per hour (ac/h), i.e. zone volume
per hour under normal operating pressures.
2-m3/h-m2 at 50 Pa infiltration is defined as flow rate per unit exposed surface area, when the
pressure difference between inside and outside is 50 Pa. Unit commonly used in the UK.
3-m3/h-m2 at 4 Pa infiltration is defined as flow rate per unit exposed surface area, when the pressure
difference between inside and outside is 4 Pa. Units commonly used in France and Belgium.
4-n50 (ac/h at 50 Pa)- infiltration is defined in air changes per hour (ac/h), i.e. zone volume per hour,
when the pressure difference between inside and outside is 50 Pa.
The selection made here will affect the units of the infiltration data prompted for on the Constructions tab
under Airtightness.
The infiltration defined when using options 2, 3 and 4 is converted to ac/h at standard operating pressure for
input to EnergyPlus. The conversion from these options to ac/h uses the methods described in EN 12831.
Airtightness Method
When the Calculated natural ventilation method is selected there are 2 ways to define the airtightness of the
building:
1-Template slider, where 5 predefined airtightness settings are available. This method is most suitable
for more early stage analysis.
2-Crack template, where custom crack templates can be defined and selected. This method provides
more control over the airtightness settings used.
HVAC model Options

- 733 -
HVAC Model Detail

HVAC systems can be defined in DesignBuilder using 3 different levels of detail:
Simple HVAC - the heating/cooling system is modelled using basic loads calculation algorithms. For
convective heating systems and all cooling systems the EnergyPlus ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem
system is used to calculate heating and cooling loads. This supplies hot/cold air to meet heating and
cooling loads. See topics on Heating and Cooling for more on defining the condition of the supply air.
Mechanical ventilation loads are calculated locally for each zone. When using the Radiant/convective
heating system type the EnergyPlus ZoneHVAC:HighTemperatureRadiant system type is used to
calculate heating loads. With Simple HVAC, heat generator (typically a boiler or heat pump) and chiller
fuel energy consumption is calculated from zone heating and cooling loads as a post-process using
efficiency factors.
See Simple HVAC Tutorial
Compact HVAC - the heating/cooling systems are defined in DesignBuilder using moderately basic
HVAC descriptions which are expanded into detailed HVAC definitions and modelled in EnergyPlus
including boiler, chiller and fan part-load characteristics.
Detailed HVAC - the HVAC system is modelled in full detail using EnergyPlus air and water-side
components linked together on a schematic layout drawing. In this case HVAC data is accessed by
clicking on the <HVAC System> navigator node.
Detailed HVAC Activity Data

This option controls how zone temperature and humidity setpoints as well as ventilation requirement and hot
water consumption data is defined in Detailed HVAC. Two options are available:
1-Simple HVAC Data where zone temperature and humidity setpoints, ventilation requirements and
hot water consumption rates for simulations are taken from the Activity and HVAC model data tabs.
The advantage of this option is that the Activity-related HVAC data will typically already be set up
correctly based on the activity selection and so a) there is less work involved in setting up the setpoints
etc and b) the simulation outputs will be more comparable with any previous Simple and Compact
HVAC simulations carried out. The downside is some loss of flexibility in setpoints (only 2 temperature
setpoints per zone can be used - Setpoint and Setback temperatures).
2-Detailed HVAC Data where the activity-related HVAC data is entered on Detailed HVAC dialogs.
This option will usually involve more work in setting up the setpoints etc, especially for large models,
but there is increased flexibility. For example it is possible to have a range of different heating and
cooling setpoint values set up using schedules for different times of the day or year. It is also possible
to apply different setpoints for Chilled ceilings and other cooling equipment and likewise for Heated
floors.
The tables below shows specifically where each item of Activity-related HVAC data is entered for the 2
options.
1-Simple HVAC Data

Activity Tab
HVAC Tab
Setpoints, Fresh Air Rates, DHW Consumption

Heating setpoint and setback temperatures
Cooling setpoint and setback temperatures
Humidification setpoint
Dehumidification setpoint
Setpoint timing / Operation

DHW operation schedule
- 734 -
Minimum fresh air per person

Minimum fresh air per floor area
DHW consumption rate per floor area
2-Detailed HVAC Data

HVAC Zone Dialog
Heating setpoint schedules
Cooling setpoint schedules
Humidifying setpoint schedules
Dehumidifying setpoint
schedules
Minimum fresh air per person
Minimum fresh air per floor area
Water Outlet Dialog Heated Floor Dialog

Flow rate fraction
schedule
Peak flow rate
Heating setpoint
schedules
Chilled Ceiling
Dialog
Cooling setpoint
schedules
Note: The tables above summarise the location of the various setpoints, fresh air, schedules etc for the 2
Detailed HVAC activity data options. For heating and cooling design calculations the humidity and
temperature setpoints and ventilation requirement data comes from the Activity and HVAC tabs as described
in the 1-Simple HVAC table, regardless of the Detailed HVAC Activity Data setting.
Specify Simple/Design HVAC Details

When using Simple HVAC, you can choose whether to specify some basic details on the system. If you
activate this option then you will be able to specify:
System type (convective or convective/radiant).

Supply air temperatures for simulation.
HVAC auxiliary data (below).
Mechanical ventilation method.
Humidity control, heat recovery and economiser (below).
If you switch this option off then any heating or cooling is assumed to be entirely convective.
This option might be switched off for early design stage architectural use to simplify the HVAC data entry.
This option is additionally available when using Detailed HVAC, in which case it has a similar effect to that for
Simple HVAC, but in this case it applies to data on the HVAC tab that is only used for Heating and Cooling
design calculations. When using Detailed HVAC you should only uncheck this option if you do not plan to use
Heating and Cooling design calculations.
Auxiliary Energy Calculations - Simple HVAC

When using Simple HVAC and you choose to specify Simple HVAC details (above), there are 3 options for
modelling fans, pumps and other auxiliary energy associated with the HVAC system:
0-None - Auxiliary energy is not calculated. This option is typically used at early design stages where
HVAC modelling may not be not required.
1-NCM - This option models auxiliary energy as a fixed annual energy consumption per floor area, with
default values stored in the HVAC templates coming from the UK NCM.
2-Separate fans and pumps - This option allows you to use the EnergyPlus fan energy consumption
calculation and a basic W/m2 + schedule approach to modelling pumps and control equipment.
- 735 -
Mechanical Ventilation Method - Simple HVAC

This option defines how mechanical ventilation is treated for Simple HVAC Simulation and Cooling design
calculations. Options are:
1-Room ventilation - Mechanical ventilation is modelled using EnergyPlus

ZoneVentilation:DesignFlowRate data separate from the main HVAC system. With this option the fan
energy consumption is included and the effect of heat pick up from fans in included in the zone heat
balance. No humidity control, economiser or heat recovery is possible with this option.
Radiant/convective heating is possible with this option. Mechanical ventilation outdoor air loads are
displayed separately from HVAC heating and cooling loads in heat balance results.
2-Ideal loads - Mechanical ventilation is modelled using the EnergyPlus
ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem data. In this case there are options to include the effects of heat
recovery, economiser, humidification and dehumidification. Fan energy and pickup is not included in
the simulation. Select this option if humidity control is required in Cooling design calculations.
Radiant/convective heating is not possible with this option. Mechanical ventilation outdoor air loads are
displayed combined with HVAC heating and cooling loads in heat balance results.
HVAC Sizing (Autosizing)

When using Simple and Compact HVAC, DesignBuilder can automatically calculate heating and cooling
capacity in each zone based on the output from the Heating and Cooling design calculations. The Plant sizing
model option provides control over how heating and cooling capacities are set for Simulations. Select from:
1-Adequate
2-Manual
3-Autosize
4-Autosize when not set
These HVAC sizing options are described below.

Note: In Heating and Cooling design calculations, heating and cooling loads are always met and so this
option does not apply - it only applies to Simulations.
Adequate
The effect of this option depends on the HVAC model option. When using Simple HVAC, equipment is
modelled as having unlimited capacity allowing it to meet any heating or cooling demand and setpoint
temperatures are always maintained. This option can cause extremely large peaks in heating and cooling
delivery to zones and will tend to over-predict heating and cooling energy and under predict discomfort hours.
When using Compact HVAC this option is equivalent to 3-Autosize and the Compact HVAC autosizing
mechanism is used to size the components and flow rates to ensure that the required comfort conditions are
met.
No heating and cooling sizing calculations are required in this case.
Manual
Heating and cooling capacity Model data must be entered manually. Choose this option if you have specific
heating and cooling capacity data you wish to use and do not want it to be overwritten when model data or
model options change.
- 736 -
Manual Capacity - Compact HVAC

If you would like DesignBuilder to calculate the heating and cooling sizes and also maximum supply flow if you
are using Compact HVAC you should follow this procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Switch to the 3-Autosize option.

Run heating and cooling design calculations.
If you are using Compact HVAC also run a simulation.
Switch to the 2-Manual option.
You should now see the heating and cooling sizes shown for each zone in the HVAC model data.
If you are using Compact HVAC then you can also copy the Maximum supply flow in m3/s from the
epluszsz.csv file. This can be found in the EnergyPlus folder straight after a Compact HVAC system
simulation. The Maximum supply flow data is the bottom row labelled 'Peak Vol Flow (m3/s)'.
If you are using the Manual sizing option together with Compact HVAC and wish to use different cooling sizes
to those obtained from looking at the output of previous EnergyPlus autosizing calculations (e.g . from
eplusout.eio) you will need to ensure that the maximum supply flow is changed accordingly. If you increase
the maximum cooling capacity but don't increase the Maximum supply flow rate (or even leave it as Auto) you
will get "Rated air volume flow rate per watt of rated total cooling capacity is out of range" errors in the
EnergyPlus simulation because the cooling capacity requested cannot be achieved with the specified air flow
rate. Also due to a quirk in EnergyPlus, the Auto Maximum supply flow rate option does not work well with
Manual sizing option and automatically calculated Maximum supply flow rates do not account for the 'higher
than autosized' cooling capacity requested.
Autosize
Autosize is the default option where heating and cooling capacities are always calculated prior to each
simulation and the heating and cooling capacity model data is not displayed. When using Simple HVAC the
heating and cooling design calculations will be run as required before the simulation to calculate the required
sizes. When using Compact HVAC the components and flow rates are sized using the EnergyPlus autosizing
mechanism to ensure that the required comfort conditions are met. In this case heating and cooling autosizing
calculations are done internally within EnergyPlus and no extra autosizing calculations are carried out by
DesignBuilder.
If the Autosize option is selected you can choose between 2 different autosizing methods using the Simple
HVAC autosizing method option.
Autosize When Not Set

In this case heating and cooling capacities are autosized and loaded into model data following heating and
cooling design simulations. If Capacity model data is not present before a simulation, it is generated by
automatically by carrying out heating and cooling design calculations and is written into the HVAC model data.
You should be aware that when using the 4-Autosize when not set option, the heating/cooling zone capacity
model data is not treated the same way as other calculated results. In general, calculated results are deleted
when any edit is made to the building model, but this is not the case for zone capacity model data. This is
only updated when:
1.
2.
3.
There is no heating/cooling capacity data (the value is either blank or zero when heating/cooling is
switched on) and a simulation is requested. In this case the appropriate design calculations are carried
out to fill in the capacity data, before the simulation.
The appropriate design calculation is carried out by clicking on the Heating/Cooling design tab.
Model Options change. In this case zone HVAC capacity is deleted.
If you always want the heating capacity to be kept up-to-date with your model and do not have any specific
capacity sizes you wish to use, you should consider using the 3-Autosize option. This will cause autosizing to
be carried out prior to every simulation.
- 737 -
You can change heating capacities by hand if you wish but you should bear in mind that, if Model options
change, all heating and cooling capacities are reset to zero. Set the option to 2-Manual to avoid this
happening.
Simple HVAC Autosizing Method

When using Simple HVAC with the 3-Autosize option, there are 2 ways to carry out HVAC autosizing
calculations:
1-EnergyPlus where EnergyPlus autosizing pre-simulations are carried out as part of the main
simulation using the EnergyPlus built-in autosizing function, in the same way as autosizing for
autosizing for Compact and Detailed HVAC. This is the default option.
2-DesignBuilder, where Heating design and Cooling design calculations are run first to calculate the
size of heating and cooling plant to use in the main simulation. This option involves 3 separate
simulations of the building: 2 for the autosizing design calculations plus 1 for the main simulation.
The 1-EnergyPlus option is recommended as the fastest way to carry out autosizing calculations. With this
option, simulation times tend to be much shorter, particularly for short simulation periods. However, one
advantage of the 2-DesignBuilder alternative option is that it provides the results of the 2 autosizing
simulations on the Heating design and Cooling design screens. These results will be consistent with the plant
sizes used in the simulation. With the 1-EnergyPlus option the autosizing simulation outputs are generated in
the EnergyPlus autosizing spreadsheet output files:
epluszsz.csv for zone outputs and

eplusssz.csv for system outputs.
Advanced concepts (Building)

Advanced tab on Model Options dialog.
Simplification - options to allow zones to be merged and for controlling lumping of similar windows,
openings and cracks and eliminating unnecessary zones and elements from the model.
Adjacency settings - options to control the way that DesignBuilder calculates the adjacency for
neighbouring surfaces.
Natural ventilation - options to control the operation of natural ventilation.
Lighting - options for lighting.
Filters - excluding elements from the model.
Component Blocks - options related to component blocks
This data applies to the current building.
Simplification
You can simplify and speed up simulations (sometimes quite significantly) by lumping zones, walls and
windows and/or eliminating unnecessary zones and elements from the model. The following options are
available:
Merge Zones Of Same Activity

This option reduces the number of zones by merging zones having the same activity.
- 738 -
Merge Zones Connected By Holes

This option merges zones which are connected by holes drawn at surface level (not the holes used to
represent the airflow path in virtual partitions). You can merge one or more zones within the same block or
across multiple blocks.
A tutorial illustrates the Merge zone connected by holes model option.
Merge Zone By Selection

Check this option if zones are to be merged by selection using the Merge zones dialog.
Lump Similar Windows On Surface

Causes all windows on a zone surface having the same area, construction, frame/dividers, shading etc to be
lumped into a single opening. Lumping only occurs in zones which have no lighting control. The EnergyPlus
Window Multiplier mechanism is used. For models having surfaces with many similar windows this option can
provide a worthwhile reduction in simulation times.
Note: With Calculated natural ventilation you should not use this option if you have repeated windows having
same size, glazing type and shading on a surface but different % Glazing opens and/or Operation schedule
because any differences in the natural ventilation settings are not accounted for when checking for similar
windows on a surface.
DesignBuilder does not allow a multiplier for windows to be used for zones with daylight lighting control or if
the 3-Full interior and exterior Solar distribution option is set. This is because for daylight control or Full
interior and exterior Solar distribution, EnergyPlus must know where each of the individual windows is
located to properly calculate the solar and visible light transmitted.
This is currently the only 'Simplification' option switched on by default for new models.
Lump Similar Cracks

This option causes all cracks in a zone which are facing the same direction and have similar height to be
lumped into a single crack. This option applies only when the natural ventilation model option is Calculated.
Lump Walls And Windows (developer Option)

Reduces the number of walls and windows. This is currently a research only tool because it has
undocumented restrictions. It is not available for general users
Generate Fully Enclosed Zones

Check the Generate fully enclosed zones checkbox to model Link surfaces. This has 2 main effects on the
model:
1.
Extra Link surfaces are generated to connect adjacent blocks together for both visual continuity and to
allow fully closed zones to be generated.
- 739 -
2.
The volume enclosed by the link surfaces and the inter-block partition is included in the zone volume.
This volume is essentially the thickness of the block wall x inter-block partition area).
Show Block Connection Surfaces In Navigator

When the Generate fully enclosed zones model option is selected you can choose to show the Link body
edge surfaces in the Navigator (or not) through this option. These surfaces are not shown by default.
Model 'Unconditioned' Zones As Simple R-value To Outside

Including complex roof structures in the model can sometimes cause simulations to run slowly for little benefit
in accuracy. This option allows you to exclude such spaces from the calculations adding in their place a single
R-value resistance to outside. The resistance can be used as a way to include the 'buffering' of the occupied
space by the semi-exterior zones without sacrificing simulation speeds.
Note: Any openings (window, doors, vents, sub-surfaces and holes) in semi-exposed surfaces do not include
the additional R-Value when this option is selected.
By default this option is off and roofspace zones (and all other semi-exterior unconditioned zones) are
modelled as separate zones in calculations.
R-Value To Outside
The R-value added to the outside of semi-exposed elements when Model 'Unconditioned' zones as simple
R-value to outside option (above) is set.
You can enter an R-Value of 0 if you don't want to include a resistance between semi-exposed elements and
outside. In this case it your responsibility to include the effect of the adjacent Unconditioned zone in the semiexposed constructions themselves.
Tip: You can calculate approximations for R-Value to outside by adjusting the R-Value until the results match
those of the equivalent simulation with Model 'Unconditioned' zones as simple R-value to outside
switched off.
Adjacency Settings
Adjacency Separation Tolerance

This is the maximum gap between neighbouring parallel (see Adjacency angular tolerance below) surfaces
that will be interpreted as being an adjacency between 2 objects. It is used to determine which elements are
adjacent to other spaces and which are adjacent to the exterior. It is also used to decide whether a
component block is adjacent to a block surface or not.
Note: By default in cases where a component block is positioned closer to an external wall than this tolerance,
windows on the external wall will be removed. If you would like to allow component blocks to be positioned
closer to the window than the default tolerance of 0.5m then enter a smaller value here.
- 740 -
This setting applies to all model geometry but is particularly important when importing BIM geometry which
often includes gaps between zones. You might enter a value higher than the default 0.5m if the adjacent
spaces are separated by very large gaps due to thick partitions or ceiling/floor voids being excluded from any
gbXML data imported. For example if the largest gap in the between spaces that are to be modelled as
adjacent is 0.6m then enter 0.6m here.
The Adjacency tolerance can also be set from the Import BIM/gbXML Model dialog before finalising the
import.
Adjacency Angular Tolerance

In order for 2 neighbouring surfaces to create an internal adjacency they should closer to each other than the
limit defined for the Adjacency separation tolerance (above) and the angle between them should be no more
than this tolerance. The default tolerance is 5, the minimum is 1 and the maximum is 10.
Standard Component Block Adjacencies

Ground and Adiabatic component blocks always have adjacencies with any neighbouring building blocks
(when closer than the Adjacency separation tolerance) and so will cause any openings to be lost on shared
adjacency surfaces when placed next to walls. By default Standard component blocks do not do this and they
can be placed close to (or touching) walls without windows etc being lost. However it is possible to cause
Standard component blocks to behave like other component blocks in this respect by checking this option.
Natural Ventilation Options

Model Holes (including Holes In Virtual Partitions)

You can optionally switch off all holes in the model including those holes generated by defining partitions as
virtual partitions. In this case the building is modelled as if no holes were defined.
Tip: Unchecking this data can be a quick way to model virtual partitions as standard partitions.
Calculated Natural Ventilation

Wind Factor
See Natural ventilation in HVAC model data.
Discharge Coefficient For Open Windows And Holes

In DesignBuilder v3.3 and later it is possible define the discharge coefficient used by DesignBuilder for open
windows and holes. In earlier versions a value of 0.65 was hard-set.
Theory explaining the discharge coefficient
From the IEA Annexe 20 document Air flow Through Large Openings in Buildings
The EnergyPlus Airflow Network model is based on the following empirical powerlaw relationship between the
flow and the pressure difference across a crack or opening in the building envelope:
- 741 -
The volumetric flow rate, Q [m3/s], is a simple function of the pressure drop, P [Pa], across the opening. A
common variation of the powerlaw equation is:
where the mass flow rate, F [kg/s], is a simple function of the pressure drop. A third variation is related to the
orifice equation:
where:
Cd = discharge coefficient, and
A = orifice opening area.
Theoretically, the value of the flow exponent, n, should lie between 0.5 and 1.0. Large openings are
characterized by values very close to 0.5, while values near 0.65 have been found for small crack-like
openings.
Suggested values for discharge coefficient
The literature suggests a large range of different values for discharge coefficient (symbol C d often used in
orifice equations). For example IEA Annexe 20 Air flow Through Large Openings in Buildings indicates that
discharge coefficients reported in the literature vary between 0.3 and 0.8 and that it is not understood what
causes the differences.
Other sources recommend a value close to 0.6. For example the CONTAMW 2.0 User Manual states that the
discharge coefficient, is related to the dynamic effects and is typically close to 0.6 for an orifice and slightly
higher for other openings in buildings.
ASHRAE propose the following correlation based on interzone temperature differences:
Cd = 0.4 + 0.0045 T
for the range T 0.5 to 40.
Given other uncertainties in natural ventilation calculations (wind pressure coefficients, effective areas of realworld openings and crack flows etc), using a discharge coefficient between 0.60 and 0.65 should provide
sufficient accuracy.
Modulation Of Openings
See Natural ventilation in HVAC model data.
Scheduled Natural Ventilation

Airflow Through Internal Openings
When using Scheduled natural ventilation, windows, vents, doors and holes in internal partitions can be
modelled by mixing a predefined amount of air from one zone with the adjacent zone by checking the Airflow
- 742 -
through internal openings checkbox and entering the Airflow rate per opening area. This inter-zone
airflow is transferred equally in both directions and is modelled using the EnergyPlus ZoneMixing option.
Lighting
Daylighting Method
The options for calculating daylighting in EnergyPlus are:
1-Detailed where the zone daylighting illuminance levels are calculated and then used to determine
how much the electric lighting can be reduced. The daylight illuminance level in a zone depends on
many factors, including sky condition; sun position; calculation point; location, size, and glass
transmittance of windows; window shading devices; and reflectance of interior surfaces. Reduction of
electric lighting depends on daylight illuminance level, illuminance set point, fraction of zone controlled
and type of lighting control. This is the default method implementing the EnergyPlus
Daylighting:Controls object.
2-DElight. The DElight method of analysing daylighting in buildings is very similar to that used in the
Detailed method. For each point in time, DElight calculates the interior daylighting illuminance at
specified reference points and then determines how much the electric lighting can be reduced while still
achieving a combined daylighting and electric lighting illuminance target. The daylight illuminance level
in a zone depends on many factors, including exterior light sources; location, size, and visible light
transmittance of simple and complex fenestration systems; reflectance of interior surfaces; and location
of calculation reference points. The subsequent reduction of electric lighting depends on daylight
illuminance level, illuminance set point, fraction of zone controlled, and type of lighting control. There
are two primary differences between the Detailed and DElight methods of calculating interior
illuminance levels. The first is that DElight includes the capability of analysing complex fenestration
systems that include geometrically complicated shading systems (e.g., roof monitors) and/or optically
complicated glazings (e.g., prismatic or holographic glass). The second key difference is that DElight
uses a radiosity method to calculate the effects of light reflection inside a zone. These methods are
discussed in more detail in the engineering documentation. There are other important differences
between the two methods. One is the inability of DElight to perform the type of dynamic shading
controls possible using the Detailed method at each point in time during the thermal simulation (e.g.,
changes in electrochromic glazing transmittances and blind slat angles). Another is the DElight ability to
include more than two reference points in its interior illuminance and electric lighting reduction
calculations. A third is the current lack of visual quality (e.g., glare) calculations performed by DElight.
Fourth, the modeling of interior obstructions is different in the two methods. In the DElight method
interior obstructions block inter-reflections but do not block the intial direct illuminance. In the Detailed
method, interior obstructions block the initial direct illuminance but do not block inter-reflections. Input
for invoking the DElight method involves three object types: Daylighting:DELight:Controls,
Daylighting:DELight:ReferencePoint, and Daylighting:DELight:ComplexFenestration.
DesignBuilder uses the first 2 of these.
Warning: We understand from EnergyPlus that the 2-DElight option is not implemented in EnergyPlus v8.2.
Because of this, because of the above-mentioned limitations and because generally we believe that the 1Detailed method is much more widely used and better tested, we strongly recommend that you avoid using
the DElight option unless you have very good reason to do otherwise.
Filters
- 743 -
Exclude Surface Elements Smaller Than

You can also filter out very small surfaces from the simulations (and from the Navigator panel) by defining a
minimum area.
Experience suggests that a value of 0.05 is a good default. If you set the limit much lower than this you will run
the risk of including very small surface slivers in the calculations. These can cause problems with EnergyPlus.
Component Blocks - Model Options

Fraction Two Largest Areas

A component block is considered 'flat' when its' 2 largest surfaces make up most of the total surface area of
the component block. The Fraction two largest areas data defines the meaning of 'most'. The default value
of 0.8 means that when the two largest equal areas make up 80% or more of the total surface area of the
component block then the block is considered to be 'flat' and only one of the 2 surfaces will be modelled.
Which of these surfaces is used in the calculations defined by Flat component block surface selection.
Note: If you need all component block surfaces to be written out then enter 0.99 here.
Flat Component Block Surface Selection

For flat component blocks DesignBuilder uses the selection made here to decide which of the 2 largest
surfaces of the component block is used in the simulation as a shading surface. Choose from:
1-Highest - the upper of the 2 largest surfaces is used.

2-Lowest - the lower of the 2 largest surfaces is used.
Heating Design Calculation options (Building)

Heating Design tab on Model Options dialog.
Data on this tab allows you to control the Heating Design calculations.
Winter Design Day

Calculation Options
Heating system sizing
Advanced Calculation Options
Output Options
This data is also shown before Heating Design Calculations.
Winter Design Day

Schedule Types For Compact HVAC Autosizing (Compact And Typical
Workday Schedules)
This series of options allows you control which 7/12 Schedules are switched on during Compact HVAC
heating autosizing. 7/12 Schedules are categorised using the following categories when using the End-use
defaults option:
- 744 -
General - include general purpose schedules in Compact HVAC heating autosizing calculations - on by
default.
Occupancy - include occupancy schedules - off by default
Lighting - include lighting schedules - off by default.
Equipment - include equipment schedules - off by default.
Heating demand - include heating demand schedules - on by default.
Cooling demand - include cooling demand schedules - on by default.
HVAC - HVAC schedules - on by default.
Natural ventilation demand - natural ventilation schedules - off by default.
DHW - DHW schedules - on by default.
For example, occupancy gains should normally be excluded when sizing heating plant to ensure that the
design heating plant meets all heating loads itself. So leave the Occupancy check box unchecked. Heating
and cooling demand schedules must be included to ensure the system operates so the Heating demand and
Cooling demand options should normally left selected.
These options are also used for Typical workday schedules.
Note: Some users find this system of categories confusing and so generally you are advised to use either the
2-Profiles option where the schedule operation during heating and cooling are defined explicitly using a profile
or use compact schedules where again heating and cooling design operation is defined explicitly.
Calculation Options
Heating Design, Cooling Design and Simulation tabs on Model Options dialog and Options tab on
Simulation Options dialog.
Calculation Description
Enter some text to identify the calculation. This will be used in reports and in the filename for automatically
generated ESO files.
Number Of Time Steps Per Hour ( Simulation Only )

The Timestep object specifies the "basic" timestep for the simulation. The value entered here is also known as
the Zone Timestep. This is used in the Zone Heat Balance Model calculation as the driving timestep for heat
transfer and load calculations. The value entered here is the number of timesteps to use within an hour.
Longer length timesteps have lower values for Number of timesteps per hour. For example a value of 6
entered here directs the program to use a zone timestep of 10 minutes and a value of 60 means a 1 minute
timestep.
The users choice for Number of timesteps per hour must be evenly divisible into 60 and the allowable choices
are 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 30, and 60.
The choice made for this field has important implications for modelling accuracy and the overall time it takes to
run a simulation. Here are some considerations when choosing a value:
The solution technique used in EnergyPlus has been designed to be stable with zone timesteps of up
to sixty minutes (Number Timesteps in Hour = 1). However, 60 minutes is considered a long timestep
and it should only be used in rare occasions where there is no HVAC system, accuracy is not a
concern, and short run times are critical. Such long timesteps are not recommended to use because
simulation results are more accurate for shorter timesteps, of say 10 minutes or less (Number of
timesteps per hour of 6 or more). Shorter zone timesteps improve the numerical solution of the Zone
Heat Balance Model because they improve how models for surface temperature and zone air
temperature are coupled together. Longer timesteps introduce more lag and lead to more a dampened
dynamic response.
- 745 -
Simulation run time increases with shorter timesteps or larger values for Number of timesteps per hour.
The effect varies with the nature of the model. The user can test out different values on their particular
model to understand the implications for his or her particular case. Sometimes large models with
multizone HVAC and Plant systems execute nearly as fast with 15 minute timesteps as with 60 minute
timesteps because fewer iterations are required in the system modelling since the prior timesteps
results are close to the final outcome of next timestep.
The weather data files usually have 60-minute (or hourly) data. However, it does not follow that this
should be used as the basis for choosing the zone timestep because:
o EnergyPlus carefully interpolates the weather data between data points for use at shorter
timesteps.
o Many aspects of a model have time scales that differ from the that of the weather data. A goal of
the modelling is to predict how the building will respond to the weather. However, the buildings
response is not governed by the time scale that the weather data are available at, but rather the
time scales of the dynamic performance of the thermal envelope as well as schedules for
internal gains, thermostats, and equipment availability.
If the model will also be used to calculate the cost of electricity then you should be aware that many
electric utility tariffs base charges on demand windows of a specified length of time. If the choice of
Number of timesteps per hour is not consistent with the demand window, then unexpected results may
be obtained. For reasonable prediction of the maximum rates for electricity use for in calculating
demand charges, the length of the zone timestep needs to be consistent with the tariffs demand
window. The following table lists what values are consistent with various demand windows.
Demand Window Applicable

Quarter Hour
Half Hour
Full Hour, Day, Week
Number of timesteps per hour

4, 12, or 60
2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 30, or 60
Any
There is also second type of timestep inside EnergyPlus that is known as the System or HVAC timestep. This
is a variable-length timestep that governs the driving timestep for HVAC and Plant system modelling. The user
cannot directly control the system timestep (except by use of the Convergence limits data). When the HVAC
portion of the simulation begins its solution for the current zone timestep, it uses the zone timestep as its
maximum length but then can reduce the timestep, as necessary, to improve the solution. The technical
details of the approach are explained in the Engineering Documentation under "Integrated Solution Manager".
Advanced EnergyPlus users can obtain and view data at intervals of the HVAC time step used if they select
the 'detailed' option on an HVAC report variable when working directly with IDF data.
Though many buildings can be successfully simulated with 1 or 2 time steps per hour, EnergyPlus
suggest a minimum of 4 for non-HVAC simulations and 6 for simulations with HVAC.
20 Timesteps per hour is the minimum when using the Finite difference solution method.
Green roof simulations may also require more timesteps.
Note 1: In general, increasing the number of time steps improves accuracy but slows the simulation (and
generates more data if output is requested at the 'sub-hourly' interval).
Note 2: When using 1 time steps per hour you will not be able to access Temperature distribution results
Temperature Control
Heating and cooling systems control internal temperatures to meet the setpoint temperatures specified on the
Activity tab. These setpoint temperatures can be interpreted as air, operative or some other radiant fraction
and DesignBuilder provides corresponding options to allow HVAC systems to be controlled by:
1-Air temperature - control the zone mean air temperatures to the heating and cooling setpoint
temperatures specified on the Activity tab.
2-Operative temperature - control the room temperature using 0.5 radiant fraction. See notes of
operative temperature control below if you plan to use this option.
3-Other- you can enter the radiant temperature control fraction.
- 746 -
4-Fanger comfort - this option is only available when using Detailed HVAC. It allows you to control
zone comfort conditions using Fanger PMV heating and cooling comfort setpoints instead of the usual
temperature setpoints. The PMV setpoint values are defined under the Environmental control header
on the Activity tab when using the default 1-Simple HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data option.
Alternatively, when using the 2-Detailed HVAC Detailed HVAC Activity data option, time-varying PMV
setpoints for heating and cooling are defined by Fanger PMV comfort schedules selected on the HVAC
zone dialog .
When using the 3-Other option the radiant fraction should be less than 0.9 and the minimum is 0.0. A value of
0.0 is the same as controlling on only zone air temperature. If air velocities are higher than 0.2 m/s, then lower
values for radiative fraction might apply. Niu and Burnett (1998) cite International Standard ISO 77300 in
recommending the values for this fraction listed in the following table.
Radiative Fraction vs Air Velocity
Air Velocity (m/s)
<0.2
Radiant fraction
0.5
0.2 - 0.6
0.4
0.6 - 1.0
0.3
Reference: J. Niu and J. Burnett. 1998. Integrating Radiant/Operative Temperature Controls into Building
Energy Simulations. ASHRAE Transactions Vol. 104. Part 2. page 210. ASHRAE. Atlanta, GA.
You can think of the Temperature control option as:
The radiant fraction sensed by the room thermostat, or,

Given a room thermostat that mainly senses air temperature, the extent of automatic modification of the
setpoint temperature to ensure occupant comfort.
Note: This option is overridden when using radiant heating systems by the radiant heating system control
setting.
Note: This option does not affect natural and mechanical ventilation setpoints - these always use air
temperature set points.
Operative Vs Air Temperature Control - Advanced Discussion

There has been much debate amongst simulation experts over the years on the extent to which radiant effects
should be included on the simulated thermostat. Most real-world thermostats probably don't actually sense
more than about 20% radiant heat transfer - mostly the temperature sensor will be sensitive to the
temperature of room air nearby. So one would think that air temperature (or 20% radiant) control is the best
choice. But Operative control (radiant fraction = 0.5) can be useful for calculating realistic heating and cooling
energy based on published summer and winter temperature requirements for the activities in each zone. This
is because HVAC systems controlled using the operative temperature continue to condition the building until
comfort conditions are met (just like they are in the real building where occupants may adjust thermostats until
they are comfortable). Also, the default temperature set points from the Activity templates are generally
derived from sources quoting operative temperatures. With Air temperature control the room air temperature is
controlled to the set point temperature, which (depending on internal radiant temperatures) may not
necessarily be comfortable.
The disadvantage of Operative temperature control is that start up loads can be unrealistically high due to the
lag in thermal response of the walls, floor, ceilings. The slow temperature response of the building fabric part
governs the output of the operative thermostat and hence the operation of the heating/cooling equipment. If
this effect dominates it can lead to an overestimate of the required design cooling load. You should be familiar
with this issue before using operative temperature control to size heating and cooling equipment. In our
experience using Operative temperature control usually leads to higher peak loads in Heating and Cooling
design calculations and higher heating and cooling energy consumption in Simulations.
Caution: Operative temperature control can cause EnergyPlus Error 3 when using Simple HVAC, or Cooling
design calculations with Operative control in zones with strong radiant heat gains causing high radiant
temperatures (e.g. uninsulated roof or zone is highly glazed). The error is caused by the fixed supply air
temperature being higher than the zone air temperature required to give the operative setpoint (.e.g. 24C).
The solution may be to use Air temperature control and to manage the high radiant temperatures using solar
shading/insulation as appropriate.
- 747 -
Air temperature control is easier to use as none of the aforementioned problems apply, but it can lead to
inadequate equipment sizes peak loads in Heating and Cooling design calculations when not used with a
design safety factor. This is especially true when radiant temperatures are very different from air temperatures
for example in poorly insulated buildings, buildings with large unshaded glazing areas or high ventilation rates.
Generally using air temperature control in Simulations of such buildings will underestimate energy
consumption.
Autosizing simple HVAC convective systems with operative temperature control
Another issue to bear in mind with operative temperature control is that in simple HVAC convective systems,
autosized cooling systems use a different algorithm to calculate the maximum supply airflow rate used in the
EnergyPlus Ideal Loads system. In convective systems the equation used is:
DeltaT = ZoneCoolingSetPointTemperature - HVACCoolingCoilSetpointTemp (difference in
temperature between zone air and supply air)
DesignSupplyAirFlowM3PerS = DesignMaxCoolingLoad / (Cp * DeltaT * AirDensity)
This equation works because the temperature of the air in the zone can safely be assumed to be the zone
cooling set point and so there is fixed difference in temperature between zone air and supply air. Calculating
the design supply cooling airflow rate in this way does not work for operative temperature control because the
air temperatures in the space are often much lower than the zone cooling setpoint temperature and
sometimes in zones having very high radiant temperatures, the air temperature in the zone approaches the
supply air temperature. In other words the difference in temperature between zone air and supply air in the
simulated system becomes very low and therefore very large airflow rates are required to meet cooling loads.
So in order to account for this DesignBuilder assumes a Delta T of 1K in the above calculation when operative
temperature control is in use.
Tip: As a general rule you should prioritise checking building comfort levels when using Air temperature
control and realistic plant operation (oversized equipment, supply temperatures very low) when using
Operative temperature control.
Exclude All Zone Mechanical Ventilation

Select this option if you wish to exclude the zone mechanical ventilation load from the heating/cooling loads in
all zones. The option is useful in cases where the AHU is to meet mechanical ventilation loads and these
loads are to be calculated separately when sizing the AHU coil capacity.
Note that in Heating design calculations, when this option is deselected, mechanical ventilation will be applied
without regard for schedule or mechanical ventilation setpoint temperature settings.
Exclude All Zone Natural Ventilation

This option should be selected when natural ventilation is to be excluded from the Heating/Cooling
calculations in all zones. Note that infiltration is always included regardless of this setting.
Note that in Heating design calculations, when this option is deselected, natural ventilation will be applied
without regard for schedule or natural ventilation setpoint temperature settings.
Heating System Sizing

Heating Design tab on Model Options dialog.
- 748 -
Design Margin
The Heating Design margin is used to multiply calculated steady state heating loads in each zone to give a
recommended heating plant size. It accounts for the additional heat required to bring the building up to
temperature in a reasonably short preheat period and allows you to be confident that comfort conditions will
be maintained in all but the most extreme winter conditions.
The default design margin is 1.25 which results in heating systems being oversized by 25%.

Include Unoccupied Zones In Block And Building Totals And Averages
By default data for unoccupied zones is excluded from block and building totals and averages. Check this
A zone is defined as unoccupied if it has:
No occupancy and,
No cooling and,
No heating and,
No mechanical ventilation
Note: if you uncheck this option and all zones in the model are unoccupied then you will get a 'Zero floor area
error' message

Heating Design, Cooling Design and Simulation tabs on Model Options dialog, Options tab on
Simulation Options dialog and General tab on the Heating and Cooling Design Calculation options
dialogs.
General Solution
Solution Algorithm
Select from:
1-CTF - The default method used in EnergyPlus for CTF calculations is known as the state space
method (Ceylan and Myers 1980; Seem 1987; Ouyang and Haghighat 1991). CTF is a sensible heat
only solution not taking into account moisture storage or diffusion in the construction elements.
2-Finite difference - This solution technique uses a 1-D finite difference solution in the construction
elements . It is a sensible heat only solution and does not take into account moisture storage or
diffusion in the construction elements. This option is required for PCM simulations and may improve
accuracy for sheet metal material layers in constructions and for chilled ceilings.
Allow Individual Constructions To Override Solution Method

Check this option to allow Simulation solution algorithm settings made for Constructions to override the
general setting above.
- 749 -
Finite Difference Settings

The settings below are required when the general Solution algorithm is set to 2-Finite Difference or if any
constructions used in the simulation override the general setting to use the finite difference algorithm.
Difference Scheme
This field determines the solution scheme used by the Conduction Finite Difference model. There are two
options:
1-Fully implicit first order scheme which is first order in time and is more stable over time. But it may
be slower than option 2.
2-Crank Nicholson 2nd order which is second order in time and may be faster than option 1 but it can
be unstable over time when boundary conditions change abruptly and severely.
Space Discretisation Constant

The Space discretisation constant controls the how the model determines the number of nodes used to
represent each material layer in the construction. The model calculates the nominal distance associated with a
node, x , using:
x = (Ct)0.5
Where:
is the thermal diffusivity of the material layer, in m2/s

t is the length of the timestep in seconds.
C is a constant set by this field.
The default is 3. Typical values are from 1 to 3. Lower values for this constant lead to more nodes and finergrained space discretisation.
Relaxation Factor
The finite difference solver includes under-relaxation for improved stability for interactions with the other
surfaces. This input field can optionally be used to modify the starting value for the relaxation factor. Larger
numbers may solve faster, while smaller numbers may be more stable. The default is 1.0. If the program
detects numerical instability, it may reduce the value entered here to something lower and more stable.
Inside Face Surface Temperature Convergence Criteria

The surface heat balance model at the inside face has a numerical solver that uses a convergence parameter
for a maximum allowable differences in surface temperature. This field can optionally be used to modify this
convergence criteria. The default value is 0.002 and was selected for stability. Lower values may further
increase stability at the expense of longer runtimes, while higher values may decrease runtimes but lead to
possible instabilities. The units are C or F.
- 750 -
Airflow Network
Relative Airflow Convergence Tolerance
The calculated natural ventilation solution is assumed to have converged when the absolute value of the sum
of the mass flow rates divided by the sum of the absolute value of the mass flow rates is less than this
tolerance value. The mass flow rates described here refer to the mass flow rates at all nodes in the airflow
network model. The solution converges when both this tolerance and the tolerance in the Absolute airflow
-4
convergence tolerance are satisfied. The default value is 1x10 .
Note: In cases where a large opening exists (in particular horizontal openings) this value and the absolute
airflow convergence below may need to be increased by a factor of 10 or more to allow convergence to take
place.
Absolute Airflow Convergence Tolerance

The solution is assumed to have converged when the summation of the absolute value of all network airflows
-6
is less than the value specified for this input field. The default value is 1x10 .
Convection
Inside And Outside Convection Algorithms
You can select from a range of EnergyPlus inside convection algorithms for calculating the convection
between internal zone surfaces and the rest of the zone air in the simulation calculations. More details on this
and external convection can be found under Constructions Model Data > Surface Convection header.
Warmup
Warmup or pre-conditioning is the process of repeatedly simulating the first day before the simulation proper
starts to ensure that the temperatures in the building fabric are realistic. Warmup continues until temperatures
and heat flows in each zone have converged. If convergence does not occur then simulation continues for the
maximum number of days as specified in the calculation option below.
Warmup and starting simulations on a weekend
Preconditioning of the building by repeated simulation of the first day until convergence is an important part of
the simulation but it can cause issues if the first day in the simulation is extreme in any way. For example if the
first day in the simulation is a Sunday and the building is not heated or cooled at all on that day and extreme
overheating occurs then the fabric of the will be "charged" up with heat as if those conditions had been
occurring repeatedly for many days (or even weeks in some heavyweight buildings). This can mean that on
the next day, the Monday the building model is far more liable to overheat than would have been the case if
the simulation had started on a different day. In cases where this may be an issue, it may be worth starting
simulations on the first occupied day rather than on a weekend day.
Maximum Number Of Warmup Days ( Not Heating/cooling Design )

The maximum number of "warmup" or pre-conditioning days that can be used in the simulation before the
simulation proper starts. A warning message will occur when the warmup simulation does not converge in the
allowed maximum number of warmup days:
Loads Initialization did not Converge (CheckWarmupConvergence)
- 751 -
This error is usually caused by using very thick constructions (e.g. ground floors). You may need to increase
the Maximum number of warmup days to get convergence, but some anomalous buildings may still not
converge.
See also Temperature and loads convergence below.
Minimum Number Of Warmup Days ( Not Heating/cooling Design )

This data specifies the minimum number of warmup days before EnergyPlus will check if it has achieved
convergence and can thus start running the simulation proper.
Value to use
Research into the minimum number of warmup days indicates that 6 warmup days is generally enough on the
minimum end of the spectrum to avoid false predictions of convergence and thus to produce enough
temperature and flux history to start EnergyPlus simulation. This was based on a study that used a set of
benchmark reference buildings. It also was observed that convergence performance improved when the
number of warmup days increased. As a result, the default value for the minimum warmup days has been set
to 6. You should decrease this number only if you have knowledge that a specific model converges more
quickly than 6 days. You may wish to increase the value in certain situations when, based on review of
simulation outputs, it is determined that EnergyPlus has not converged. While this parameter should be less
than the previous parameter, a value greater than the value entered in the field Maximum number of
warmup days above may be used when users wish to increase warmup days more than the previous
maximum number of days. In this particular case, the maximum value will be automatically reset to the value
entered here and EnergyPlus will run exactly the number of warmup days specified here.
Temperature And Loads Convergence

The temperature and loads convergence values represent the maximum allowable difference in zone
temperature and loads between successive daily iterations before convergence is considered to have been
reached during warmup.
Convergence of the simultaneous heat balance/HVAC solution is reached when both the loads and
temperature criteria are satisfied. Both tolerances work the same way, one looks at temperatures and one
looks at heating and cooling loads. After the second warm-up day, the program compares the maximum
temperature experienced in a space with the maximum temperature from the previous day. If those two
temperatures are within the tolerance, then it has passed the first warm-up check. It does a similar
comparison with lowest temperatures experience within all the zones. If the current simulation day and the
previous day values are within the tolerance, then it has passed the second warm-up check. A similar
comparison is carried out with the loads tolerance and the maximum heating and cooling loads that are
experienced within the spaces. Those are compared individually to the values for the previous day. If they are
both in tolerance, then the simulation has passed the third and fourth warm-up check. The simulation stays in
the warm-up period until ALL FOUR checks have been passed.
Note: The maximum number of warmup days will override the above convergence criteria, i.e. the simulation
proper will start even if convergence has not occurred after the maximum number of warmup days.
Shading
Maximum Number Of Shadow Overlaps ( Not Heating Design )
Enter the maximum number of figures per shadow overlap. The shadow overlaps is a measure of the amount
of complexity in the shading calculation and this maximum value allows you to limit the amount of time spent
in the solar initialisation calculations.
- 752 -
Note: entering a small value here can speed up simulations in complex buildings. If you plan to use Maximum
shadow overlaps below the default value of 15000 you should check accuracy of solar gains relative to
results using default value
Polygon Clipping Algorithm

This is an advanced feature. Prior to V7, the internal polygon clipping method was a special case of the
Weiler-Atherton method. Now, two options are available:
1-Sutherland Hodgman (default)

2-Convex Weiler Atherton
Theoretically, Sutherland-Hodgman is a simpler algorithm but it works well in cases where receiving surfaces
(of shadows) are non-convex. The Weiler-Atherton implementation is only accurate where both casting and
receiving surfaces are convex. Warnings/severe errors are displayed when necessary. More details on
polygon clipping are contained in the Engineering Reference.
Compact HVAC simulation autosizing options

The following 2 data items are used when autosizing Compact HVAC systems before simulations.
Sizing Factor ( Not Heating/cooling Design )

This ratio is applied at the zone level to all of the zone heating and cooling loads and air flow rates. These
new loads and air flow rates are then used to calculate the system level flow rates and capacities and are
used in all of the component sizing calculations.
Default value is 1.2.
You must set this to 1.0 to achieve a full fresh air system when using Compact HVAC CAV/VAV.
Design Averaging Window Period ( Not Heating/cooling Design )

The time in the zone design flow sequence averaging window during EnergyPlus Compact HVAC autosizing
calculations. The default is 1 hour, in which case the calculated zone design flow rates are averaged over an
hour. The autosizing zone design air flow rate calculation is performed assuming a potentially infinite supply of
heating or cooling air at a fixed temperature. Thus the calculated design air flow rate will always be able to
meet any load or change in load no matter how large or abrupt. In reality air flow rates are limited by duct
sizes and fan capacities. The idealized zone design flow calculation may result in unrealistically large flow
rates, especially if the user is performing the sizing calculations using thermostat schedules with night setup or
setback. The calculated zone design flow rates are always averaged over the load timestep. You may want to
perform a broader average to mitigate the effect of thermostat setup and setback and prevent the warm up or
cool down flow rates from dominating the design flow rate calculation. Specifying the width of the averaging
window allows the user to do this.
Include IDF Data (not heating/cooling design)

You can include up to 2 custom IDF data in your EnergyPlus simulations by checking the IDF File 1 or IDF
File 2 check boxes and entering the name of the IDF data source file. The contents of any files specified are
copied to the end of the IDF data generated by DesignBuilder before simulation. This can be a useful way to
add in extra output reports, simulation objects etc, that do not interfere with the main IDF data.
For example if you needed to access output reports data not normally provided by DesignBuilder such as
"Time Heating Setpoint Not Met While Occupied" then you might save a small IDF file in the DesignBuilder
EnergyPlus folder called Reports Variables Database.idf containing this data:
Output:Variable, *, Time Heating Setpoint Not Met While Occupied, monthly;
Output:Variable, *, Time Cooling Setpoint Not Met While Occupied, monthly;
- 753 -
The file must be selected on this dialog as shown below.
After the simulation is finished the above setpoint not met monthly data would be included in the eso file which
can be viewed outside DesignBuilder to obtain the extra outputs.
Note: Included IDF files must be located in the EnergyPlus folder.
Other
Surfaces Within Zone Treated As Adiabatic
EnergyPlus support recommend modelling surfaces wholly contained within a zone as adiabatic and this
option allows you to follow this advice. We have found that in practice this option does not make much
difference in results or in simulation speed so for most cases you can leave it in its default state.
See also EnergyPlus Errors and Warnings
Note: 'surfaces contained within a zone' are frequently generated when one of the zone merging options is
used where a partition or floor which would have separated two zones actually sits within the merged zone.
These surfaces do not refer to hanging partitions which are modelled using Internal thermal mass.
Air Velocity For Comfort Calculations

The thermal comfort calculations carried out by EnergyPlus to obtain the comfort outputs require the velocity
of the air close to the occupants . Enter this air velocity here (in m/s or ft/min). The default air velocity is 0.137
m/s, but higher values might be appropriate for rooms with mixing fans or high volumes of HVAC air delivery,
for example.
Cooling Design Calculation Options (Building)

Cooling Design tab on Model Options dialog.
Data on this tab allows you to control the Cooling Design calculations:
Summer Design Day

Calculation Options
Cooling system sizing
Solar Options
Output Options
This data can also be accessed before Cooling Design Calculations.
- 754 -
Summer Design Day

Day
Select the day of the month for the design day
Month
Select the month for the design day
Day Of Week
Select the day of week. This is used to identify the appropriate daily profile.
Calculation Options

timestep.
are 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 30, and 60.
dynamic response.
- 755 -
timesteps.

Quarter Hour
Half Hour

4, 12, or 60
2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 30, or 60
Any
Temperature Control
- 756 -
zone dialog .
Air Velocity (m/s)
<0.2
Radiant fraction
0.5
0.2 - 0.6
0.4
0.6 - 1.0
0.3

setting.

- 757 -
consumption.



Cooling Design tab on Model Options dialog.
Design Margin
The Cooling Design margin is a 'safety factor' used to multiply calculated cooling loads in each zone to give a
recommended maximum cooling equipment capacity. It accounts for the additional cooling which might be
required to cool the building down in a reasonably short pre-cool period and allows you to be confident that
- 758 -
comfort conditions will be maintained in all but the most extreme summer conditions. The risk depends on the
Summer Design Weather Data options selected at site level.
The default design margin is 1.15 which means that the cooling system will be oversized by 15%. This is value
comes from ASHRAE recommendations.
Sizing Method
Sizing methods available are:
1-ASHRAE - standard 'Heat Balance' method implemented in EnergyPlus.

2-Unitary DX - calculations are made through a detailed EnergyPlus simulation using Unitary DX
equipment.
Note: you do not need to have the Compact HVAC model option set to use the detailed cooling load sizing
option 2-Unitary DX above.
Airflow Calculation Method

When calculating the design airflow rate from the cooling load DesignBuilder can use one of 2 methods:
1-Sensible only the default option where the airflow rate is simply calculated from the cooling load, the
supply air temperature and the zone air temperature setpoint. This method is widely used in the
industry to calculate the airflow rate in cases where the latent load is a relatively low proportion of the
total.
Design flow rate = SizingFactor . DesignCoolingLoad / (T zoneairdb - Tsupplyair) . CPair . Densityair
where:
CPair is the specific heat capacity of air
Tzoneairdb is the zone dry bulb temperature
Tsupplyair is the supply air dry-bulb temperature
2-Sensible + latent where a similar enthalpy calculation is used. This method may be adopted in some
cases where latent loads predominate:
Design flow rate = SizingFactor . DesignCoolingLoad / (Ezoneair - Esupplyair) . Densityair
where:
Ezoneair is the zone air enthalpy
Esupplyair is the supply air enthalpy
ASHRAE Cooling Sizing

In the ASHRAE cooling sizing method the cooling design load calculations are carried out using the standard
ASHRAE Heat Balance method implemented in EnergyPlus using the 'ZoneHVAC:IdealLoadsAirSystem'
system type. You can define the conditions of the supply air delivered to cooled zones using Design supply
temperature and Supply air humidity ratio. The total (sensible + latent) load is calculated as the enthalpy
change between the zone return air and the specified supply air condition for the current load.
The ASHRAE system is modelled assuming:
No economiser,
No heat recovery,
No heating,
Zero pressure rise fan,
- 759 -
No humidification/dehumidification,
Zone plenums will not be used if specified,
Outside airflow rate and operation schedule defined by the data under the Mechanical Ventilation and
Natural ventilation headers on the HVAC tab at the zone level,
Cooling coil availability defined by the schedule under the Cooling header on the HVAC tab at the zone
level,
Zone design cooling temperature setpoints are defined by the data under Environmental Control on the
Activity tab.
Supply Air Conditions

In DesignBuilder v3.1 and later the supply air conditions used in Cooling design come from the HVAC tab of
model data.
Unitary DX Cooling Sizing

When using the Unitary DX cooling sizing method the Cooling design calculation is made through a detailed
EnergyPlus simulation using Compact HVAC Single zone Unitary DX equipment. A diagram of the system
layout used is shown in the Unitary Single Zone topic.
Each zone has it's own Unitary system with a fan (generating no pickup), a DX cooling coil, an outside air
controller and a damper to reduce supply air flow. More specifically:
No economiser,
No heat recovery,
No heating coil,
Zero pressure rise fan,
No humidification/dehumidification,
Zone plenums will be used if specified,
Outside airflow rate and operation schedule defined by the data under the Mechanical Ventilation and
Natural ventilation headers on the HVAC tab at the zone level,
Cooling coil availability defined by the schedule under the Cooling header on the HVAC tab at the zone
level,
Zone design cooling temperature setpoints are defined by the data under Environmental Control on the
Activity tab.
Note: Unitary DX will tend to calculate higher latent loads than the other 3 cooling sizing methods and the
zone air humidity will generally be lower. This is because DX coils run colder than water-cooled coils and will
condense out more water from the supply air. Unitary DX can often be used to provide a conservative
calculation for the latent cooling loads.

By default data for unoccupied zones is excluded from block and building totals and averages. Check this
No occupancy and,
No cooling and,
No heating and,
- 760 -
error' message.

dialogs.
General Solution
Solution Algorithm
Select from:


Difference Scheme
options:

node, x , using:
x = (Ct)0.5
Where:

- 761 -

Relaxation Factor

Airflow Network
-4
place.

-6
Convection
Warmup
- 762 -

converge.

Value to use

- 763 -
Shading




- 764 -


Other
- 765 -

for example.
Simulation Calculation Options (Building)

Simulation tab on Model Options dialog.
Data on this tab allows you to control the simulations:
Simulation Period
Calculation options
Solar options
Detailed HVAC Autosizing
Output options
This data is also shown before simulations in the Simulation Calculation Options dialog.
Simulation Period
Simulation tab on Model Options dialog and General tab on Simulation Options dialog.
Simulation Period
Select the start and end days for the simulation, or select a typical period using the links on the Info panel:
Annual simulation - all 365 days of the year.

Summer design week - a week identified by the weather data translator as being the hottest of the
year.
Summer typical week - a week identified by the weather data translator as being typical of the
summer.
All summer - simulate the whole summer (as identified by the weather data translator).
Winter design week - a week identified by the weather data translator as being the coldest of the year.
Winter typical week - a week identified by the weather data translator as being typical of the winter.
All winter - simulate the whole winter (as identified by the weather data translator).
The above typical simulation periods are derived from the Statistics data from the currently selected Hourly
weather data.
Calculation Options
- 766 -

timestep.
are 1, 2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 30, and 60.
dynamic response.
timesteps.

Quarter Hour
Half Hour

4, 12, or 60
2, 4, 6, 10, 12, 30, or 60
Any
- 767 -
Temperature Control
zone dialog .
Air Velocity (m/s)
<0.2
Radiant fraction
0.5
0.2 - 0.6
0.4
0.6 - 1.0
0.3

setting.

- 768 -
consumption.
- 769 -


Solar Options
Cooling Design and Simulation tabs on Model Options dialog and Options tab on Simulation Options
dialog.
Solar Options allow you to control aspects of the model related to solar gains.
Include All Buildings In Shading Calcs

The standard wall,floor, roof surfaces defining the current building provide shading but by default the other
buildings on the site are excluded from the analysis. Use this option to include other buildings on the site as
shading obstructions.
Cooling Design Calculations and Simulations both use this option but have separate Model option data.
Note: there is no way to simulate more than 1 building at a time. All external surfaces in buildings other than
the current one are modelled as shading surfaces. If you need to model the adjacency of another building in
contact with the current one, you can use the adiabatic adjacency option to model the touching surfaces.
Note: if one or more 'other buildings' are large/complex then you could generate a large number of shading
elements and the simulation could be slow (even if the current building being simulated is simple).
Model Reflections And Shading Of Ground Reflected Solar

When this option is selected, the program calculates the beam and sky solar radiation that is reflected from
exterior surfaces and then strikes the building. These reflecting surfaces fall into 3 categories:
1. Shadowing surfaces. These are surfaces like overhangs or neighboring buildings (see below). These
surfaces can have diffuse and specular (beam-to-beam) reflectance values derived from the material
properties of the wall/windows.
- 770 -
Solar reflection from shadowing surfaces. Solid arrows are beam solar radiation; dashed arrows are diffuse
solar radiation. (a) Diffuse reflection of beam solar radiation from the top of an overhang. (b) Diffuse reflection
of sky solar radiation from the top of an overhang. (c) Beam-to-beam (specular) reflection from the faade of
an adjacent highly-glazed building represented by a vertical shadowing surface.
2. Exterior building surfaces. In this case one section of the building reflects solar radiation onto another
section (and vice-versa). See below. The building surfaces are assumed to be diffusely reflecting if they are
opaque (walls, for example) and specularly reflecting if they are windows or glass doors. The reflectance
values for opaque surfaces are calculated by the program from the Solar Absorptance and Visible
Absorptance of the outer material layer of the surfaces construction. The reflectance values for windows and
glass doors are calculated by the program from the reflectance properties of the individual glass layers that
make up surfaces construction assuming no shading device is present and taking into account interreflections among the layers.
Solar reflection from building surfaces onto other building surfaces. In this example beam solar reflects from a
vertical section of the building onto a roof section. The reflection from the window is specular. The reflection
from the wall is diffuse.
3. The ground surface. Reflection from the ground is calculated even if theModel reflections and shading
of ground reflected solar option is not used. But when it is used the ground plane is considered
unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of the ground by the building itself or by obstructions such as neighbouring
buildings is ignored. This shadowing is taken into account if the reflections option is used. This is shown in
diagrammatically below.
- 771 -
Shadowing from building affects beam solar reflection from the ground. Beam-to-diffuse reflection from the
ground onto the building occurs only for sunlit areas, A and C, not from shaded area, B.
Solar Distribution
This option determines how EnergyPlus treats beam solar radiation and reflectance from exterior surfaces that
strike the building and, ultimately, enter the zone. There are 3 choices:
1-Minimal shadowing - In this case, there is no exterior shadowing except from window and door reveals. All
beam solar radiation entering the zone is assumed to fall on the floor, where it is absorbed according to the
floor's solar absorptance. Any reflected by the floor is added to the transmitted diffuse radiation, which is
assumed to be uniformly distributed on all interior surfaces. If no floor is present in the zone, the incident
beam solar radiation is absorbed on all interior surfaces according to their absorptances. The zone heat
balance is then applied at each surface and on the zone's air with the absorbed radiation being treated as a
flux on the surface.
2-Full Exterior - in this case, shadow patterns on exterior surfaces caused by detached shading, wings,
overhangs, and exterior surfaces of all zones are computed. As for Minimal shadowing, shadowing by window
and door reveals is also calculated. Beam solar radiation entering the zone is treated as for 'Minimal
shadowing' - all beam solar radiation entering the zone is assumed to fall on the floor, where it is absorbed
according to the floor's solar absorptance. Any reflected by the floor is added to the transmitted diffuse
radiation, which is distributed among interior surfaces according to view factors. If no floor is present in the
zone, the incident beam solar radiation is absorbed on all interior surfaces according to their absorptance.
Note: If you use 2-Full Exterior you should make sure that all of your zones have a floor. If your building
model has any zones of unusual shape without floors then the EnergyPlus simulation may not work because it
will not have a surface to apportion solar gains to.
3-Full interior and exterior - this is the same as Full exterior except that instead of assuming all transmitted
beam solar falls on the floor the program calculates the amount of beam radiation falling on each surface in
the zone, including floor, walls and windows, by projecting the sun's rays through the exterior windows, taking
into account the effect of exterior shadowing surfaces and window shading devices. If this option is used, you
should be sure that the surfaces of the zone totally enclose a space. This can be determined by viewing the
eplusout.dxf file with an external DXF viewer program.
You should also be sure that the zone is convex. Examples of convex and non-convex zones are shown
below. The most common non-convex zone is an L-shaped zone. A formal definition of convex is that any
straight line passing through the zone intercepts at most two surfaces. Another definition is that a zone is
convex if every surface in a zone can 'see' every other surface - no surfaces a 'round the corner' from each
other. If the zones surfaces do not fully enclose a space or if the zone is not convex you should use Full
exterior instead.
If you use 3-Full Interior and exterior the program will also calculate how much beam radiation falling on the
inside of an exterior window (from other windows in the zone) is absorbed by the window, how much is
reflected back into the zone, and how much is transmitted to the outside. In this calculation the effect of a
shading device, if present, is accounted for.
- 772 -
Note: You must use 3-Full Interior and exterior to account for direct solar and light transmission through
internal windows.
Check For Non-convex Zones

When the solar distribution selection is 3-Full interior and exterior (above) you can choose whether
DesignBuilder is to check for non-convex zones. The DesignBuilder check for non-convex zones is very strict
whereas the EnergyPlus check is less so. Generally EnergyPlus will tolerate a small degree of non-convex
geometry. By default this option is switched on and the strict internal DesignBuilder convex check is carried
out, but if the zones are only slightly non-convex you can switch off this check and allow EnergyPlus to
continue calculations. You will probably receive error message 2 if you switch this option off and have nonconvex zones.
One common reason for the strict DesignBuilder check to flag a zone as being non-convex even when at first
sight it is convex is the use of block connection geometry. In the above example of a double skin facade
(DSF) cavity zone, you can see when zooming right in on the corner of a set of block connection surfaces that
these surfaces cause obtuse angles to the zone geometry resulting in very slight non-convex geometry. These
are exactly the sort of small deviations from convex that the DesignBuilder checker will fail and the
EnergyPlus checks will pass. In this case it is perfectly safe to switch off this check to allow EnergyPlus
calculations to proceed.
Shadowing Interval (Simulation Only)

Enter the number of days (1-365) covered by each shadowing calculation.
Enter 1 if you want shadowing to be calculated every day (for greater detail but slower calculations).
Detailed HVAC Autosizing Settings

Simulation tab on Model Options dialog and Options tab on Simulation Options dialog.
This data allows you to specify global heating and cooling sizing ratio default settings. These ratios will be
applied at the zone level to all of the zone heating and cooling loads and air flow rates. These adjusted loads
and air flow rates are used to calculate the system level flow rates and capacities and are used in all
component sizing calculations.
Note: In theory the zone heating and cooling sizing factors are applied where not overridden in HVAC zones,
however there is no way in DesignBuilder HVAC to not override these values so in practice these settings will
have no effect on the simulation. The Design averaging window period does have an effect though.
- 773 -
You can also specify the width of a moving average window which can be used to smooth the calculated zone
design flow sequences.
See also Autosizing HVAC Components for more detailed information on how autosizing works in
DesignBuilder EnergyPlus.
Heating Sizing Factor

The global heating sizing ratio applied to all zone design heating loads and air flow rates.
Cooling Sizing Factor

The global cooling sizing ratio applied to all zone design cooling loads and air flow rates.
Design Averaging Window Period

The number window period which is used to calculate the load timesteps in the zone design flow sequence
averaging window. The
default is 1, in which case the calculated zone design flow rates are averaged over the hour.
The zone design air flow rate calculation is performed assuming a potentially infinite supply of heating or
cooling air at a fixed temperature. Thus the calculated design air flow rate will always be able to meet any load
or change in load no matter how large or abrupt. In reality air flow rates are limited by duct sizes and fan
capacities. The idealized zone design flow calculation may result in unrealistically large flow rates, especially if
the user is performing the sizing calculations using thermostat schedules with night setup or setback. The
calculated zone design flow rates are always averaged over the load timestep. The user may want to perform
a broader average to mitigate the effect of thermostat setup and setback and prevent the warm up or cool
down flow rates from dominating the design flow rate calculation. Specifying the width of the averaging
window allows you to do this.
For example, if the Design averaging window period is to be 1 hour and the number of timesteps per hour is 4,
then the zone design air flows will be averaged over a time period of 1 hour or 4 timesteps. Specifying 2 would
result in averaging over a 2 hour period and 8 timesteps.

dialogs.
General Solution
Solution Algorithm
Select from:
- 774 -


Difference Scheme
options:

node, x , using:
x = (Ct)0.5
Where:

Relaxation Factor

- 775 -
Airflow Network
-4
place.

-6
Convection
Warmup

- 776 -
converge.

Value to use

Shading
- 777 -






- 778 -
Other

for example.
Output Options
Simulation tab on Model Options dialog and Output tab on Simulation Options dialog.
You can control the data generated from simulations by making selections on the Simulation tab of the Model
options dialog and on the Advanced tab of the Simulation calculation options dialog.
Output Data
Zone Environmental And Comfort Reports
You can restrict the simulation comfort output to just occupied periods by selecting 2-Just occupied periods.
Options are:
1-All periods - comfort data is generated for all periods including times when the zone is unoccupied.
2-Just occupied periods - comfort data is only output during times when the zone is occupied so daily
and monthly comfort statistics become more meaningful.
Default is 1-All periods.

- 779 -
Building And Block Output Of Zone Data

This option causes average and total zone data to be generated for building and blocks. For example average
temperatures, comfort conditions, total solar radiation, internal gains, fabric transmission losses etc. It does
not affect the generation of energy consumption and CO2 data at the building level.

No occupancy and,
No cooling and,
No heating and,
The way building and block averages are calculated is described in the Comfort Analysis section.
error' message
Graphable Outputs
Surface Heat Transfer Incl. Solar
Select this option to generate heat flow at surface boundaries. Note that selecting this option results in large
amounts of data being generated as EnergyPlus must generate output for every surface and window in the
zone and you should only select it if you need to look at the zone heat balance.The following EnergyPlus
reports are generated:
Opaque Surface Inside Face Conduction

Window Heat Gain
Window Heat Loss
Window Transmitted Solar
Environmental
This option generates temperatures and humidity data. The following EnergyPlus reports are generated:
Zone Mean Air Temperature

Zone Mean Radiant Temperature
Zone Air Relative Humidity
Outdoor Dry Bulb
Comfort
Select this option to generate Comfort output. The following EnergyPlus reports are generated:
FangerPMV
- 780 -
PiercePMVET
PiercePMVSET
PierceDISC
PierceTSENS
KsuTSV
Time Not Comfortable Summer Clothes
Time Not Comfortable Winter Clothes
Time Not Comfortable Summer or Winter Clothes
Internal Gains And Associated Energy Consumption

Select this option to generate internal gains-related output and any associated energy consumption. The
following EnergyPlus reports are generated:
Zone Lights Total Heat Gain

Zone Task Lights Total Heat Gain
Zone People Sensible Heat Gain
Zone Electric Equipment Cat02 Electric Consumption
Zone Transmitted Solar
Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Loss
Zone Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain
Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Loss
Zone Ventilation Sensible Heat Gain
HVAC Energy
Select this option to generate energy consumption data for the HVAC system.
Latent Loads
Select this option to include output of latent gains from occupants and other internals gains.
Fresh Air Supply

Select this option to include total infiltration, natural ventilation plus mechanical fresh air supply outputs.
Temperature Distribution
Select this option to generate Temperature distribution data for each zone (distribution data for Blocks and
Buildings not available).
- 781 -
Miscellaneous Outputs
HVAC System Temperatures
Check this option if you would like DesignBuilder to generate temperature output for each air and water node
in the HVAC system. This output data cannot be displayed directly in DesignBuilder but can be viewed in the
separate Results processor application.
HVAC System Mass Flow Rates

Check this option if you would like DesignBuilder to generate mass flow output for each air and water node in
the HVAC system. This output data cannot be displayed directly in DesignBuilder but can be viewed in the
HVAC System Humidity Ratios

Check this option if you would like DesignBuilder to generate humidity ratio output for each air node in the
HVAC system. This output data cannot be displayed directly in DesignBuilder but can be viewed in the
SQLite Output
Output from EnergyPlus can be written to SQLite files for manipulation outside of DesignBuilder using
standard spreadsheet tools and/or ResultsViewer. When this option is selected all of the predefined database
tables as well as time series related data is included in the SQLite output. The description for SQLite outputs
is described fully in the EnergyPlus Output Details document.
DXF Model Output

This option causes EnergyPlus to generate a DXF file summarising the building model. The file is called
eplusout.dxf and it is stored in the EnergyPlus folder. This option can be useful for checking that the correct
geometry has been generated.
Construction And Surface Details

This option causes EnergyPlus to generate a comma separated value file summarising the building model.
The file is called eplusout.eio and it is stored in the EnergyPlus folder.
RDD File
Select this option is you would like an RDD file to be generated. The RDD file includes a list of all EnergyPlus
output reports that could be selected for the simulation.
Time Setpoints not Met Tolerances

This section of input allows more control over the reporting of Time setpoint not met hours.
- 782 -
Tolerance For Time Heating Setpoint Not Met

This data defines the maximum difference from the heating setpoint when reporting the time heating setpoints
are not met. If the zone temperature is below the heating setpoint by more than this value, the following report
variables will increment as appropriate:
Time Heating Setpoint Not Met

Time Heating Setpoint Not Met While Occupied
It also impacts table report "Annual Building Utility Performance Summary" sub-table "Comfort and Setpoint
Not Met Summary".
Tolerance For Time Cooling Setpoint Not Met

This data defines the maximum difference from the cooling setpoint when reporting the time cooling setpoints
are not met. If the zone temperature is above the cooling setpoint by more than this value, the following report
variables will increment as appropriate:
Time Cooling Setpoint Not Met

Time Cooling Setpoint Not Met While Occupied
It also impacts table report "Annual Building Utility Performance Summary" sub-table "Comfort and Setpoint
Not Met Summary".
Display (Site)
Display tab on Model Options dialog.
Options related to the display of data:
Show Data for Calculations

Edit Screen
Visualisation Display
Show Data for Calculations

Analysis Type
DesignBuilder user interface adapts to the currently selected Analysis type as set under Show Data for
Calculations. This ensures that the Model data displayed in the UI is relevant to the calculation results. You
can change the Analysis type at any time to carry out different calculations.
The list of Analysis type options available will depend on the Location of the site. For example when the site is
located in the UK, it possible to set the Analysis type to SBEM Part-L Compliance Checking mode.
New Analysis type options will be available in future versions.
Edit Screen
- 783 -
Show Zone Labels

Select this option to display the name of each zone in the Edit screen while at block level. Zone labels are
shown by default.
Fit Includes Imported Drawing

Select this option to get the imported drawing included in the calculation of the model extent at site and
building levels when the Fit view command is run and when the screen is refreshed internally within
DesignBuilder.
Show Imported Drawing At Zone And Surface Levels

Select this option to show the imported drawing at zone and surface levels. The option is switched off by
default for the sake of clarity but you may wish to switch it on when drawing openings at surface level to help
position windows, doors etc.
Show Shading Devices

Select this option to display shading devices while in the Edit screen. Shading devices are shown by default.
Show Windows
You can speed up display in the edit screen by switching off window display. Windows are shown by default.
Zone Floor Shading At Block Level

Zone floors can be shaded by:
1-Activity Template, where zone floors are shaded according to the Activity Template selection
allowing different areas of the block to be easily identified.
2-HVAC Template, where zone floors are shaded according to the HVAC Template selection to show
the distribution of HVAC systems in the block.
3-None
The image below illustrates shading by Activity Template.
- 784 -
Visualisation Display
Dynamics
This option affects the display of the model when orbiting and zooming in the Edit and Visualisation Screens:
1-Rendered - the default setting where the whole building image is retained during the operation. For
a large models/slow graphic adapters, this can result in a jerky motion in which case you should use...
2-Wire-frame - where the building is represented using a wire frame which moves smoothly even for
large models/slow graphic adapters.
Show Shadows
Use this option to display shadows in the Visualisation screen.
Show North Arrow

You can use this control to display/hide the North arrow in the Visualisation screen. The North arrow is always
displayed on the Layout tab of the Edit screen.
Show Ground Plane

You can choose to show/hide the plane used to represent the ground in the Visualisation screen. You may
wish to hide the ground plane if you have used component blocks to represent the ground.
- 785 -
Note: when displayed, the ground plane extends just beyond the x-y size of the model and hides any other
building object situated at or below z=0.
Antialiasing
Antialiasing is the process used to remove 'jaggy' edges of lines which are not horizontal or vertical. Most
modern medium-high-end graphics adapters allow effective antialiasing to be automatically applied to
OpenGL screens using hardware acceleration. If you have one of these cards you should be getting sharp
lines already and you can switch the DesignBuilder software antialiasing off. See hardware requirements for
more on this.
If you switch on software antialiasing you can select a quality setting from 1-4 where 4 gives the smoothest
edges and takes longest time to generate.
Note: some low-end graphics adapters are not suited to software antialiasing because they lack hardware
acceleration for this feature.
Drawing tools (Site)

Drawing Tools tab on Model Options dialog.
Options for:
Draw Block
Direction Snaps
Point Snaps
Drawing Guides
Object Rotation
Protractor
Miscellaneous Edit
BIM Surfaces
To learn more about Drawing Tools go to the Block Creation Options and Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor
sections.
Draw Block
Auto Complete Block

See Auto-complete block entry under Block Creation Options.
Direction Snaps
See Direction Snaps entry under Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor.
Point snaps
- 786 -
See Point Snaps entry under Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor.
Drawing guides
See Drawing Guides entry under Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor.
Object Rotation
You can change the rotation increment to control the angular increments for the object rotation process.
See Rotation entry under General Operations.
Protractor Tool
See Protractor entry under Snaps, Drawing Guides & Protractor.
Miscellaneous Edit
Drawing tools tab on Model Options dialog.
Automatic Block Zoning

By default DesignBuilder automatically generates zones as partitions are drawn. You can change this
behaviour by unchecking the Automatic block zoning option. In this case partitions are shown in blue as
they are drawn and are referred to as outline partitions. Outline partitions do not create new zones and are
modelled in the same way in simulations as hanging partitions. To convert any outline partitions to standard
partitions and to rezone the block use the Rezone block command accessed from the Tools menu. Note that
outline partitions that do not connect at both ends (known in DesignBuilder as hanging partitions) will remain
in blue even after the Rezone block command.
Alternatively, to convert all outline partitions in the building to standard partitions and hence rezone the whole
building you can use the Rebuild command. This will take longer to process than the Rezone block command
as it recalculates the surface and adjacency geometry as well rezoning.
Note: switching Automatic block zoning off also prevents rezoning following other partition edit commands
such as delete, copy and undo/redo.
Automatically Include Voids From Lower Blocks

Select this option if you would like DesignBuilder to automatically punch voids through new blocks drawn on
top of existing blocks having voids. If you leave this option switched off (default state) you can still draw voids
at the block level using the ghosted outline of adjacent voids in a block below as a guide.
- 787 -
Edit Block Model Data

Use this option to allow editing of block level model data.
Note: If you disable block editing you will no longer be able to edit Model Data at the block level in the current
building and so will not be able to set different defaults for different blocks.
Clip Surface Openings

By default if any part of an opening lies outside the valid surface area when drawn at surface level or when
copied or moved at surface or building level, it is discarded entirely. Checking this option allows the opening to
be retained but clipped so that it lies entirely on the parent surfaces.
This option also applies to cases where a block cut operation splits an existing custom opening. When this
option is checked DesignBuilder will attempt to retain the 2 halves of the opening following the cut. Otherwise
any such split custom openings will be lost. Default windows, vents and doors generated by the faade
mechanism are unaffected by this option.
Surface Opening Clip Tolerance

If the Clip surface openings option (above) is selected then you can edit the tolerance used in the clipping
process. If the clipped opening polygon is smaller than this value as a fraction of the total area of the original
unclipped opening then it will be discarded. The default is 0.05, i.e. if the clipped opening has area less than
5% of the original unclipped area then it is deleted.
BIM Surfaces
You can select which of the various categories of gbXML surface objects should be applied to the model.
Selected surface types will be listed in the Navigator, displayed on the Edit screen as planes of various
colours, rendered on the Visualisation screen and included in Radiance daylighting and EnergyPlus
simulations as shading surfaces.
Surface types that are not selected are not removed from the model entirely and can be displayed again by
changing selections on this dialog.
The default surface selection were set on the Import BIM/gbXML Model dialog when initially importing the
model.
Note: The Component block shades and reflects option on the Constructions tab can be unchecked to
prevent particular planes from being included in the EnergyPlus simulations.
Edit Block Options (Block)

Block tab on Model Options dialog.
- 788 -
Data on the Block tab of the Model options dialog allows you to edit the form, display and other related
properties of the current block:
Block geometry
Roof-wall transition
Block Display
See also Edit Block Geometry Dialog.

Note: This tab is only enabled when at Block level in the model
Block geometry
Block tab on Model Options dialog under Block Geometry header.
Block Form
Once a block has been created it's form can usually be changed to one of:
1-Extruded,
2-Sloped walls or
3-Pitched roof
If the block has 5-General block form due to a previous block edit operation, then only these block form
options are available:
2-Sloped walls or
3-Pitched roof
5-General
Depending on the selected block form the full range of block geometry options is available as described under
block forms.
Roof-Wall Transition
Block tab on Model Options dialog under Pitched Roof/Wall Construction Transition header.
- 789 -
Allow Pitched Roof Construction

If you wish to allow pitched roofs to be defined for the current block then leave this option in its default
checked state. Alternatively, you can force all non-horizontal surfaces to be walls by unchecking this option.
Roof-wall Transition Angle

When the Allow pitched roof construction option is checked you can enter the angle which defines the
surface slope below which a wall becomes a roof. For example if the roof-wall transition angle for a particular
block is 45, a surface in this block having slope 40 is modelled as being a roof (using pitched roof
constructions, roof glazing layout etc). And a surface having slope 50 is modelled as being a wall (using wall
constructions, glazing layout etc).
Block Display
Block tab on Model Options dialog under Block Display header.
Display External Walls

You can choose to switch on/off display of external walls for each block. Generally for standard extruded
blocks it is best to show external walls to help reference locations within the block with respect to existing
openings etc.
For Pitched roof blocks and General block forms the external walls can obscure the internal space and so the
default for these block types is to hide the external walls when at block level in the modeller. You can override
this default behaviour using this option.
Note: It can be useful to switch off external wall display when drawing partitions in roof blocks.
Notes (and Project Details)

Use the Notes tab to record General information about the building model:
Project Details
Owner Details
Analyst Details
Notes
The Project, Owner and Analyst Details data is used as a header in UK Part-L2 Compliance Check reports.
Project Details
Enter the building Sector, Project name and address.
Owner Details
Enter the name and contact details for the building owner/client.
Analyst Details
Enter your own name and contact details.
- 790 -
Notes
You can enter any information about the building model in free text format.
Note: If you want to add hard carriage returns in the text you should hold the CTRL key down while pressing
ENTER. Pressing ENTER on its own will save and close the dialog.
- 791 -
Components
Components
Components represent individual building elements and can be referenced from other components, templates
or model data. The following components are available:
Constructions
Glazing
Materials
Panes
Schedules
"Simulation Hourly Weather Data" on page 838
Profiles
Textures
Window gas
"Metabolic Rates" on page 851
Local shading
Window blinds
Vents
Holidays
"Ground Domain" on page 864
Library components are loaded into the model at the time the file is created and from then on they are
associated specifically with the model and so are known as Model components. Any later change made to
the Library components does not affect existing building models because they reference their own set of
Model components.
Managing component data

You can edit and move component data around in various ways:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Add, Edit, Delete, Import and Export Component library data from the Opening Screen - Component
Library tab.
If a model file is loaded you can edit Model components from the Components tab in the Navigator
panel (Learning mode switched off) or by using the Data management panel on the right of the screen
(Learning mode switched on).
In either case, to add a component open up the component type you wish to define by clicking on the
+ to the left of the component icon, then click on the category of component you wish to define. Now
click on the Green '+' to add a component of the selected category.
Import/export Model component using the File > Export > Library data menu command to create a
.ddf file with the .dsb model file open.
To import the previously exported Model component data to the Component library close the .dsb file
and import the .ddf file to the library.
Load the latest library components into your model using the Import library components and
templates to model command from the Tools menu when a model is loaded. Any new data that has
been added to the library since the model file was created will be imported to the model. Also if there
have been any changes to library component data, this new data will overwrite the original data.
Important Note: any component you add while a model is open will be added to Model components and not
to the Component library. It will only be added to the library and hence to new models if you export the new
component model data in .ddf form and import the .ddf file to the library before creating the new model.
Note: As well as importing DDF files created directly by DesignBuilder more advanced users can also create
their own component and template data sets (outside DesignBuilder) for importing. See the Importing Custom
Templates and Components topic for more information on the process involved.
Colour codes
Components are coded by colour in all selection lists as follows:
- 793 -
Red shows user data, i.e. data that was not supplied by DesignBuilder.
Green indicates that the data is derived from a reputable national or international source (e.g.
ASHRAE, CIBSE).
Blue indicates that the data is generated internally by DesignBuilder.
Black is used for all other data.
See also Model Data Colour.
CONSTRUCTION COMPONENTS
The thermal properties of the construction are calculated based on layers, each layer having a material
reference and thickness. The combination of thickness and material gives the thermal characteristics of the
layer. Layers can include repeating thermal bridges.
Construction components also store derived data on the thermal properties of the overall layered construction
for example U-value, convective heat transfer coefficients etc.
There are 6 tabs on the Constructions dialog:
Layers
Surface Properties
Image
Calculated
Internal Source
Condensation Analysis
Construction component data can be accessed:
from the Components tab on the opening screen (to view/edit library components if no file is open),
from the Components tab in the Navigator panel (to view/edit model components if a file is open),
by double-clicking on the construction icon in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting constructions from a list.
Construction layer data

Layers tab on Constructions Dialog.
Definition
You can select the way you would like to define the construction. The options depend on whether you are
using EnergyPlus or SBEM Analysis type and whether it is a construction from the Floor (ground) or Below
grade wall categories.
For EnergyPlus the allowable definition methods are:
1-Layers where the construction is defined by specifying layers each having a material and thickness.
5-C-factor when the category is Below grade wall
6-F-factor when the category is Floor (ground)
Calculation Settings
Simulation solution algorithm
Some constructions may need a particular solution algorithm to obtain most realistic results. For example
PCMs require a finite difference solution. However simulations may run slowly if all surfaces are simulated
- 794 -
Components
using the finite difference solution method. This option allows you to override the overall simulation solution
algorithm for any surfaces using this construction.
Options are:
1-Default where surfaces using this construction receives no special treatment and is simulated using
the default solution algorithm.
2-CTF where surfaces using this construction are simulated using the CTF algorithm regardless of the
general solution method selected.
3-Finite difference where surfaces using this construction are simulated using the finite difference
algorithm regardless of the general solution method selected.
You may wish to use this option to select the 2-Finite difference option for constructions which have one or
more of:
Phase change materials (PCMs) - these can be simulated with the CTF option but the phase change
characteristics will be ignored so any construction using PCMs would normally have the 3-Finite
difference option set.
We understand that Detailed HVAC Chilled ceilings may benefit from use of the finite difference
algorithm.
Constructions using thin sheets of metal may not be treated accurately by the default CTF algorithm
and for most accurate treatment you may wish to use finite difference for such constructions.
Bear in mind that the simulation times will increase when using the finite difference option even for just a few
surfaces. If you are in doubt, you may find it worthwhile experimenting with the 2 solution methods, comparing
hourly results, to see the effect of changes. Depending on the case, it may or may not be worth the extra
simulation time required by the finite difference option.
Note 1: Any settings made here will only take effect if the Allow individual constructions to override solution
method model option is checked.
Note 2: This setting only applies to simulations. Heating and Cooling design calculations use the CTF
algorithm for all surfaces.
Includes metal cladding

If the construction can be defined as a metal cladding system then you should check this option. This option
affects linear thermal bridging at junctions involving surfaces made up of this construction.
Definition of Metal cladding
Constructions involving metal cladding are roof or wall systems where metal forms an integral part of the
construction, such as metal twin skin systems where the insulation is located between the metal skins and
where the metal skins are typically in the range 0.4 mm to 1.2 mm. Cladding with z-spacers would come into
this category as would composite metal panel systems.
If the metal is simply used as an external shield against weather, such as a rainscreen, this is not classed, for
the purposes of calculations as "metal cladding".
Metal cladding systems are divided into two broad categories, these being:
a.
b.
built up metal cladding systems involving rail and bracket or z-spacer systems with insulation within the
panels
composite panel metal cladding systems with insulation inside the panels
Layers
Set the number of layers first, then select the material and thickness for each layer. Use the Controls in the
Info Panel to insert and delete layers. For example to delete a layer, first click on the material for the layer to
identify which layer you want to delete, then click on Delete layer.
- 795 -
You can create constructions with up to 10 layers.

You should define the layers in the same order they appear in the actual construction starting with the
outermost layer and finishing with the innermost. The outermost layer will be positioned adjacent to outside (or
in the case of Semi-exposed walls) adjacent to the Semi-exterior unconditioned zone.
For interior surfaces (partitions, internal floors etc) the order of the layers is determined through a series of
checks to see which zone is relatively more external. For example, if one zone is unconditioned and the other
not then the partition layers are ordered so that the outermost layer is next to the unconditioned zone. When
both zones are occupied, a similar check is made using heating and cooling setpoint temperatures. If after all
these checks the zones are still both equally internal then the direction of the layers will be set up in an
arbitrary way.
Note: You should not include surface resistance (film coefficient) layers to represent the resistance of
the air films adjacent to the inner and outer surfaces. These are included automatically by
DesignBuilder.
Thickness
This field characterizes the thickness of the material layer. This is the dimension of the layer in the direction
perpendicular to the main path of heat conduction.
Note: Modelling layers thinner (less) than 0.003 m is not normally recommended; rather, add those properties
to one of the adjacent layers.
If the material referenced is defined as a simple R-value then the layer thickness does not affect the thermal
performance of the construction.
If the material is defined as having a fixed thickness then the layer thickness is loaded automatically when the
material is selected and the thickness does not have to be entered and cannot be edited.
Bridging
You can add repeating thermal bridging to any layer to model the effect of a relatively more conductive
material bridging a less conductive material. For example wooden joists bridging an insulation layer.
Note: bridging effects are not yet used directly in EnergyPlus, but are used in energy code compliance checks
requiring U-values to be calculated according to BS EN ISO 6946. However see below for a workaround to
this limitation.
Method for approximating repeating bridging effects in simulations
Although EnergyPlus cannot allow repeating bridging directly in simulations it is possible to approximate the
effect of bridging by adjusting the thickness of the insulation to a value that gives the same U-value as the
bridged construction calculated using BS EN ISO 6946. This is easily achieved by following these steps:
1.
Define the construction including bridging data as in the screenshot below.
- 796 -
Components
2.
Note the construction bridged U-value on the Calculated tab, see below.
- 797 -
3.
Going back to the layers tab, switch off all bridging and set the U-value to the bridged U-value by
clicking on the Set U-value link in the Info panel.
- 798 -
Components
4.
Enter the recorded bridged U-value (0.397 W/m2-K in this case) on the dialog and press OK.
5.
6.
Confirm the reduced insulation thickness when prompted.

Check the new insulation thickness and U-value of the construction. The insulation thickness should be
reduced as per the pop up message and the U-value should be the same as the bridged value you
recorded earlier. The construction should now behave in a very similar way to the bridged construction
in heating and cooling design calculations and in simulations.
Surface Properties
Surface properties tab on Constructions Dialog.
Data on this tab allows the inside and outside surface convection properties of the construction to be set to
fixed values. This may be useful where specific known convection properties are to be used or for validation
exercises where DesignBuilder outputs are to be compared with those for other software in which particular
convection coefficients have been used.
In most cases you should leave the check boxes on this tab unchecked.
To fix the outside convection heat transfer coefficient for all surfaces using this construction, check the Fix
convective heat transfer coefficient check box under the Outside Surface header and enter the coefficient.
Likewise for inside properties.
Note that if the SimpleCombined Outside convection option has been selected at building level on the
Constructions tab under Surface Convection or on the Calculation options or Model options dialogs the
outside convective heat transfer coefficients set will actually be used as a combined convective plus radiation
coefficient.
Construction image
Image tab on Constructions Dialog.
This tab shows the construction to scale (except for very thin layers) using material textures as specified.
- 799 -
Note: Bridging elements are not displayed on this image.
Construction calculated data

Calculated tab on Constructions Dialog.
This tab provides further information on the heat transmission properties of the construction.
- 800 -
Components
U-values and R-Values are shown including and excluding the effect of surface resistance and are calculated
with and without bridging effects.
Note that when working with library constructions, the outer surface resistance is calculated assuming a
'typical' exposure to wind. When working with model constructions the outer surface resistance is calculated
using the wind exposure as defined on the Location tab at site level.
Convective heat transfer coefficients

The calculated convective heat transfer coefficients are used in EnergyPlus when the 'CIBSE' Inside/Outside
convection algorithm is selected. Otherwise EnergyPlus uses its' own convection algorithm as set in the
simulation options and the transmission data displayed here is not used.
Internal Source
Internal Source tab on Constructions Dialog.
The internal source tab is visible only when the model is set to use Detailed HVAC. It allows data on the
position and nature of any heating or cooling pipes included within the construction. The internal source is
associated with either Heated floors or Chilled ceiling components by virtue of the construction being selected
as the floor/ceiling in a zone with heated floor or chilled ceiling defined. For example in the case of a heated
floor the heated floor component must be added to the appropriate HVAC zones, but also a floor construction
with an internal source must be associated with at least one floor surface in that building zone. If you set up a
model with a heated floor added to an HVAC zone whose equivalent building zone has any floor surfaces with
a floor construction selected not having an internal source then an error will be generated.
Internal source
Check this option if the construction includes a heating or cooling source.
Layer after which the internal source is positioned

Enter a number between 1 and 1-the number of layers. Entering 1 means that the source is positioned
between the outermost layer and the next layer. If you are defining a heated floor construction then you will
normally enter 1-the number of layers. The easiest way to do this is to use the Set source position below
innermost layer tool described below. When defining a chilled ceiling as a floor construction you should enter
a value of 1 here.
Dimensions
This field refers to the detail level of the calculation. Select from the 2 options below for a 1-D or 2-D solution:
1-D is the default choice for a one-dimensional calculation. This is appropriate for hydronic
heating/cooling when water heater/cooler performance is relatively unaffected by return and supply
water temperatures.
2-D triggers a two-dimensional solution. With 2-D solutions, the calculation of the conduction transfer
functions (CTF) is fairly intensive and requires extra simulation time. Note that with the 2-D option the
solution regime is two-dimensional internally but it has a one-dimensional boundary condition imposed
at the inside and outside surface (i.e., surface temperatures are isothermal).
Note: Because the 1-D solution method does not allow the return water temperature to be accurately
calculated it is not recommended for when accurate plant energy consumption outputs are required. In this
case choose the 2-D option.
The 2-D solution method generally takes about 20% longer to run a simulation relative to the 1-D option.
Tube spacing
This field defines how far apart (in m or in) the hydronic tubing are spaced in the direction perpendicular to the
main direction of heat transfer. This parameter is only used when the 2-D solution is selected (above).
- 801 -
Set source position below innermost layer

A tool is provided in the info panel when using learning mode which calculates which is the innermost layer
and adds the source between this and the next layer. For example in a chilled ceiling construction you might
have 0.5 mm steel ceiling panel as the innermost layer with 3 other layers. In this case when clicking on the
Set source position below innermost layer link, the innermost layer value would be set to 3.
Condensation Analysis
Condensation analysis tab on Constructions Dialog.
DesignBuilder Condensation Analysis allows you to generate reports on the occurrence of interstitial and
surface condensation based on the ISO 13788 standard.
The analysis is accessed from the Condensation analysis tab on the Constructions dialog. Controls are
provided under the Options header to control the outputs generated and there are also tools to allow you to
set internal and external boundary conditions for the condensation calculations.
The moisture vapour resistance properties for each material used in the construction layers must be entered
on the materials dialog for accurate condensation analysis results.
Options
Data under the Options header allows you to set various calculation and display options for the condensation
analysis.
Show Glaser diagram

Check this option if you would like to view a Glaser diagram showing a graphical section through the
construction with temperature, partial vapour pressure and saturated vapour pressure data plotted.
Month
When viewing a Glaser diagram select the month from the drop list. The default option is 13-Worst
case month where DesignBuilder displays results for the month with the worst case of moisture build
up.
Show interstitial condensation details

If you would like to view details of the monthly and cumulative condensation build up for each interface with
condensation then check this option. In this case, if condensation is present you will see output similar to:
- 802 -
Components
Interface
If you requested interstitial condensation details then you should enter the interface number here. The
definition of each interface with condensation is given under the Condensation Interfaces heading in
the report.
Surface condensation calculation

To see surface condensation details check this box. In this case you should enter further details to define the
boundary conditions as explained below.
Environment source
Select from:
1-Maintained internal environment, where you can enter fixed values for internal air and RH
2-Maintained internal air temperature,
3-Boundary data,
In all cases monthly external conditions are defined in the Boundary data.
Fixed internal air temperature

Fixed internal RH
Humidity class
Show surface condensation details
Example Output
An example report generated by the Condensation analysis tool is shown below.
- 803 -
Condensation Analysis Report

Interstitial Condensation
Interstitial condensation occurs at one or more interfaces but all condensate is predicted to evaporate
during the summer months.
The risk of degradation of building materials and deterioration of thermal performance as a
consequence of the calculated maximum amount of moisture shall be considered according to
regulatory requirements and other guidance in product standards.
Condensation Interfaces
Number of condensation interfaces: 2
Distance of condensation interface 1 from the external surface: 100mm
Distance of condensation interface 2 from the external surface: 108.333333333333mm
Surface Condensation
Thermal quality Good. Mould growth unlikely.
Boundary Data
The Boundary data dialog can be accessed from the link on the info panel of the Condensation analysis tab.
- 804 -
Components
GLAZING COMPONENTS
There are 2 ways to enter Glazing component data depending on the Definition method setting:
1. Simple - the glazing properties for the overall glazing system are defined using basic U-value, Solar
Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) and Visible transmittance (VT) data. This approach is recommended
when only manufacturers summary performance data is available.
2.
Layers - where the properties of the glazing component is defined in much more detail through
selection of a series of glazing layers (Panes) separated from each other by window gas layers. In this
case there are two tabs on the Glazing data dialog:
Layers where the glazing panes and window gas layers are entered
Calculated where derived calculated data on the glazing system is displayed
Glazing component data can be accessed:
by double-clicking on the glazing icon on the Openings tab in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting glazing components from a list.
Glazing layer data

Layer tab on Glazing Dialog.
Set the number of glazing layers first (2 = double glazing), then select the pane and window gas material for
each layer. The DesignBuilder glazing data consists of layers of panes interspersed with layers of window
gases. Summary derived data for the overall glazing system such as internal and external surface heat
transfer coefficients, U-values etc can be found on the Calculated tab.
Note: Low emissivity glazing systems can be defined by specifying an appropriate 'LoE' Pane type for the
Innermost Pane. You can find some typical low emissivity panes under the 'Clear ' Panes category.
- 805 -
Glazing calculated data

Calculated tab on Glazing Dialog.
The Calculated data on the Glazing tab has been calculated by EnergyPlus using the Layer data on the
previous tab. You can refresh the Calculated data by clicking on the Update link in the Info panel on the right
of the dialog.
The data can be useful for setting up glazing model descriptions in cases where global glazing system data is
known rather than data on individual panes and window gases.
Two different U-values are provided, one using standard ISO 10292 / EN 673 and the other using the
ASHRAE method.
For the ASHRAE calculation, the U-value is determined by EnergyPlus through a heat balance calculation on
the glazing layers for the following standard ASHRAE winter conditions which are based on the values used in
the WINDOW program:
Inside air temperature = 21C (69.8F)

Outside air temperature = -18C (-0.4F)
Wind speed = 5.5 m/s (12.3 mph)
Outside convective air film conductance = 26 W/m2-K (4.58 Btu/h-ft2-F)
Inside convective air film conductance: calculated by EnergyPlus
No solar radiation
The 'Total solar transmission (SHGC)' (Solar Heat Gain Coefficient) is the fraction of incident beam solar
radiation that enters the zone. This includes the transmitted solar radiation and the inward flowing heat from
the solar radiation that is absorbed by the glazing. SHGC applies only to the centre of the glazed part of a
window construction; it does not include the effect of beam solar radiation absorbed by a window frame or
divider. SHGC is calculated for the following standard summer condition:
Inside air temperature = 24C (75.2F)

Outside air temperature = 32C (89.6F)
- 806 -
Components
Wind speed = 2.8 m/s (6.2 mph)

Incident beam solar radiation normal to glazing = 783 W/m2 (248 Btu/h-ft2)
Simple Glazing Definition

If only basic manufacturers data on the glazing system is available then you may need to use the more
approximate Simple glazing definition method. In this case the glazing properties for the overall glazing
system are defined using the three parameters:
U-value,
Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC) and
Visible transmittance (VT) data.
You can read details of the method used behind the scenes in EnergyPlus to represent the simple glazing
definitions in the report Modeling Windows in Energy Plus with Simple Performance Indices by Dariush
Arasteh, Christian Kohler and Brent Griffith.
U-Value
This field describes the value for window system U-Factor, or overall heat transfer coefficient. Units are in
W/m2K. This is the rated (NFRC) value for U-factor under winter heating conditions. The U-factor is assumed
to be for vertically mounted products.
Note: The maximum U-value is 5.8 W/m2K because this is the most conductive glazing system possible given
the above standard conditions that can realistically be achieved. If you need to model a glazing system with a
very high U-value (above 5.8 W/m2K) the published rating probably contains the frame, in which case you
should add a frame to obtain the required overall glazing + frame U-value.
Tip: You can find some detailed information about the U-value to use and how the NFRC and EU format Uvalues differ on the DesignBuilder b.i.g. website
Solar heat gain coefficient (SHGC)

Enter the value for solar heat gain coefficient for the combined glazing system, a fractional value from 0 to 1
without units. This is the rated (NFRC) value for SHGC under summer cooling conditions and represents
SHGC for normal incidence and vertical orientation.
Background information on solar transmission
g-value is the coefficient commonly used in Europe to measure the solar energy transmittance of glass
- called a Solar Factor on some window literature (%) i.e. 53% = 0.53;
Solar Heat Gain Coefficient (SHGC) is used in the United States and most commonly refers to the
solar energy transmittance of a window or door as a whole, factoring in the glass, frame material
(wood, aluminium, etc.), sash (if present), divided lite bars (if present) and screens (if present). SHGC
may also refer to the solar energy transmittance of the glass alone (sometimes more specifically
termed center-of-glass SHGC), in which case it is analogous to g-value.
Shading Coefficient was succeeded by SHGC in the United States, but older windows and doors may
still refer to their SC value. The relationship between SHGC and SC may be approximated as: SHGC =
SC 0.87;
g-values and SHGC values ranges from 0 to 1, a lower value representing less solar gain. Shading coefficient
values are calculated using the sum of the primary solar transmittance (T-value) and the secondary
transmittance. Primary transmittance is the fraction of solar radiation that directly enters a building through a
window compared to the total solar insolation, the amount of radiation that the window receives. The
secondary transmittance is the fraction of inwardly flowing solar energy absorbed in the window again
compared to the total solar insolation.
Source Wiki Solar Gain
Visible transmittance
Enter the visible transmittance for the glazing coefficient, a fractional value from 0 to 1. It is the rated (NFRC)
value for visible transmittance at normal incidence.
- 807 -
Frame
Simple glazing data can either include or exclude the effect of the frame. If the glazing data includes the frame
then you should make sure to switch off frames in the openings model data to ensure that they are not
double-counted.
Note: When using the simple glazing definition it is important to understand that there may be significant
differences in performance between the simple window system and the usual more detailed model. This
option should therefore only be used when layered data is not available.
MATERIALS
Material data contains data accessed from these tabs:
Thermophysical data on building material.

Surface Properties - data on the surface characteristics of the material.
Green Roof - if the material is a green roof enter the data on the corresponding here.
Embodied Carbon - data on embodied carbon contained the material.
Phase Change - dynamic thermo-physical properties for Phase Change Materials (PCM).
Material component data can be accessed:
by double-clicking on the material icon in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting a material from a list.
Material Thermophysical Properties

General tab on Materials Dialog.
Materials are used to define the properties of construction layers. There are 2 types of material:
1.
2.
Detailed properties including the thermophysical properties, surface properties and visual appearance
for the material.
Simple resistive material with no thermal mass. This option will typically be used to model air gaps.
Extremely thin and/or highly conductive layers - technical note on applicability

When a Material is used for the Construction of a building surface, care should be taken to not attempt to
model assemblies that were not included in the intended scope of applicability for the underlying heat transfer
models. The building surface models are for normal applications to building energy efficiency where the main
focus is on assemblies with some thermal resistance. Extremely thin and/or highly conductive material layers
should be neglected from the Construction rather than included because they will not contribute to the
assemblys overall thermal resistance or heat capacity. For some cases, thin and/or highly conductive
materials are a serious problem for the heat transfer modelling and the values for thickness, conductivity,
density and specific heat are checked for appropriateness. This check calculates the Materials thermal
diffusivity from the inputs for conductivity, density, and specific heat and compares it to a maximum threshold
of 1.E-5 (m2/s). If the diffusivity is above this threshold, then the program checks if the layer is sufficiently thick
and may issue a warning if it is too thin and highly conductive.
Material Thickness
Force thickness
If the material should only be used in layers of a particular thickness then check this box and enter the
material thickness that applies below. When materials having this option set are selected on the Constructions
dialog the layer thickness will be fixed with the material thickness described below.
- 808 -
Components
This option may be useful for materials such as bricks, tiles, insulation and PCMs which are usually supplied
with a particular thickness.
Material thickness
The fixed layer thickness of the material (in m or in) when selected.
This should be the dimension of the layer in the direction perpendicular to the main path of heat conduction.
Modelling layers thinner (less) than 0.003 m is not normally recommended; rather, add those properties to one
of the adjacent layers.
Detailed properties
Thermal bulk properties
Thermal conductivity
This field is used to enter the thermal conductivity of the material layer. Thermal conductivity must be greater
than zero.
This field is used to enter the thermal conductivity of the material layer (in W/m-K or Btu-in/h-ft2-F). Thermal
conductivity must be greater than zero. Modelling layers with conductivity higher than 5.0 W/(m-K) is not
normally recommended.
Specific heat
This field represents the specific heat of the material layer (in J/kg-K or Btu/lb-F).
Note: EnergyPlus uses scientific SI units but data reported in textbooks and references will often use kJ/kg-K
or J/g-K instead. Take care!
Only values of specific heat of 100 or larger are allowed. Typical ranges are from 800 to 2000 J/kg-K.
Density
This field is used to enter the density of the material layer in (kg/m3 or lb/ft3). Density must be a
positive quantity.
Note: Some textbooks and references may use units of g/m3. Take care!
Simple resistance
Thermal resistance
This field is used to enter the thermal resistance (R-value) of the material layer (in m2-K/W or ft2-F-hr/Btu).
Note: Materials defined using an R-value do not contribute to construction (and hence building) thermal mass
in the calculations and so should be used with care, especially if you plan to use the model for dynamic
thermal simulations. You are especially advised not to use R-value materials on the innermost layer of
constructions and you should not generally use them for representing materials that have mass. They are best
used for modelling air gaps and insulation layers.
Vapour Resistance
You can enter vapour diffusion properties here if the material is to be used within a construction which is have
a condensation analysis carried out. Otherwise this data does not have to be entered for general simulations.
- 809 -
Note: The moisture diffusion data provided in the literature tends to be very approximate, much more so than
for thermal properties. This is due to large variations in these properties that have been measured in lab tests.
Vapour resistance definition

There are 3 ways to define the vapour diffusion properties of the material:
1-Factor, in which case the Vapour factor is entered below.

2-Resistivity, in which case the Vapour resistivity is entered below.
3-Non-permeable, defines the material is not permeable to moisture vapour and no further data is
required. Use this option for vapour barriers and plastic materials which do not transmit water vapour.
Vapour factor
Enter the vapour factor for the material. There are no units.
Vapour resistivity
Enter the vapour resistivity (in MNs/g).
Surface Properties
Surface properties tab on Materials Dialog
Surface properties are only used in simulations when the material is located on an inner or outer surface of
the construction.
Note: The absorptance values in this object impart surface properties to the construction and should be
applied to the thermally significant inner and outer layers in the overall assembly. Attempting to trick the
program by modelling thin paint layers to apply surface properties is not a good idea; the models were not
intended to support such strategies.
Thermal absorptance (emissivity)

The thermal absorptance represents the fraction of incident long wavelength radiation that is absorbed by the
material. This parameter is used when calculating the long wavelength radiant exchange between various
surfaces and affects the surface heat balances (both inside and outside as appropriate). Values for this field
must be between 0.0 and 1.0 (with 1.0 representing black body conditions).
Solar absorptance
The solar absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident solar radiation that
is absorbed by the material. Solar radiation includes the visible spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet
wavelengths. This parameter is used when calculating the amount of incident solar radiation absorbed by
various surfaces and affects the surface heat balances (both inside and outside as appropriate). Values for
this field must be between 0.0 and 1.0.
Visible absorptance
The visible absorptance field in the Material input syntax represents the fraction of incident visible wavelength
radiation that is absorbed by the material. Visible wavelength radiation is slightly different than solar radiation
in that the visible band of wavelengths is much more narrow while solar radiation includes the visible spectrum
as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths.
In EnergyPlus, this parameter is used when calculating the amount of incident visible radiation absorbed by
various surfaces and affects the surface heat balances (both inside and outside as appropriate) as well as the
daylighting calculations.
In Radiance daylighting simulations the surface reflectance is calculated as 1 - Visible absorptance.
Values for this field must
be between 0.0 and 1.0.
- 810 -
Components
Roughness
This field is a character string that defines the relative roughness of a particular material layer. This parameter
only influences the the calculated exterior convection coefficient. A special keyword is expected in this field
with the options being VeryRough, MediumRough, Rough, Smooth, MediumSmooth, and
VerySmooth in order of roughest to smoothest options.
Colour
The colour data is used for display purposes when the texture is not available for any reason. It is not used in
any of the calculations.
Texture
The texture is used to represent this material when it is specified as either the inside or outside material of a
construction which is selected in the building model. It is also used to represent the material in diagrams of
any construction using this material.
Green Roof
Green roof tab Materials Dialog
To create a green roof in DesignBuilder, follow these steps:
1.
2.
3.
Create a green roof material using data on the Green roof tab of the material dialog.
Create a roof construction using the green roof material as the outermost layer.
Specify the green roof construction on roof surfaces as appropriate.
The green roof can receive water during the simulation from an irrigation system and/or from site precipitation
(defined separately from the hourly weather data). The initial properties of the soil layer (day 0 of the
simulation) are defined on the Green roof tab of the Materials dialog.
EnergyPlus documentation states: "This model was developed for low-sloped exterior surfaces (roofs). It is
not recommended for high-sloped exterior surfaces (e.g., walls)." However it may be possible to
approximately model green walls, though we are not yet aware of any validation of the underlying EnergyPlus
model and certainly the irrigation would have to be treated differently to roofs as walls will not naturally trap
much precipitation.
Tip: EnergyPlus documentation suggests that green roofs may require "more timesteps" than normal
simulations.
Note: Specifying a green roof material as the material for a component block will not work - these only use
materials for their reflective properties.
Background
From A green roof model for building energy simulation programs, D.J. Sailor, Portland State
University:
A green roof (aka ecoroof or vegetated roof) is a roof that contains a soil (growing media) and vegetation layer
as its outermost surface. The construction between the growing media and the roof structure varies, but
typically includes a drainage layer, a root barrier, and a waterproof membrane. Green roof growing media
depth is typically between 10 and 30 cm, although some implementations (referred to as intensive green
roofs) have deeper soils capable of sustaining large shrubs and even trees. The thinner implementations
(typically < 20 cm), known as extensive green roofs, are more common, but can only sustain smaller plants
and ground cover.
While green roofs have been in use for centuries, there recently has been a surge in interest in installing
green roofs in both retrofit and new construction applications. Potential benefits of green roofs include
aesthetic appeal, habitat, storm water reduction, and energy savings."
- 811 -
There is widespread recognition and a growing literature of measured data that suggest green roofs can
reduce building energy consumption. The EnergyPlus Green Roof capability can assist developers and
architects in assessing the likely magnitude of energy savings associated with various implementation options
(e.g., soil type/depth, irrigation options, plant type). It provides a quantitative and physically-based building
energy simulation tool that represents the effects of green roof constructions and facilitates more rapid spread
of green roof technologies and make it possible to account for green roof benefits in state energy codes and
related energy efficiency standards such as LEED.
The green roof model accounts for:
Long wave and short wave radiative exchange within the plant canopy,
Plant canopy effects on convective heat transfer,
Evapotranspiration from the soil and plants, and
Heat conduction (and storage) in the soil layer
The ability to track moisture-dependent thermal properties is not implemented yet due to stability issues in the
CTF scheme, but is under development for use with the finite difference solution scheme made available in
EnergyPlus starting in version 2. As implemented in EnergyPlus the green roof module allows the user to
specify ecoroof as the outer layer of a rooftop construction. The user can then specify various aspects of the
green roof construction including growing media depth, thermal properties, plant canopy density, plant height,
stomatal conductance (ability to transpire moisture), and soil moisture conditions (including irrigation). The
model formulation includes the following:
Simplified moisture balance that allows precipitation, irrigation, and moisture transport between two soil
layers (top and root zone).
Soil and plant canopy energy balance based on the Army Corps of Engineers FASST vegetation
models (Frankenstein and Koenig), drawing heavily from BATS (Dickenson et al.) and SiB (Sellers et
al.).
Soil surface (Tg) and foliage (Tf) temperature equations are solved simultaneously each time step,
inverting the CTF to extract heat flux information for the energy balance calculation. The detailed
energy balance analysis and resulting equations, being rather complicated, are summarized here. The
interested reader is referred to the FASST documentation cited herein for the complete development.
The end result is a set of two simultaneous equations for temperatureone for the soil surface and the
other for the foliage.
Green Roof Model Description

As with a traditional roof, the energy balance of an green roof is dominated by radiative forcing from the sun.
This solar radiation is balanced by sensible (convection) and latent (evaporative) heat flux from soil and plant
surfaces combined with conduction of heat into the soil substrate. This energy balance is illustrated in the
diagram below. The variables introduced in this figure are defined in the EnergyPlus Engineering Document.
- 812 -
Components
The energy balance for a green roof.

The energy budget analysis follows the Fast All Season Soil Strength (FASST) model developed by
Frankenstein and Koenig for the US Army Corps of Engineers. FASST was developed, in part, to determine
the ability of soils to support manned and unmanned vehicles and personnel movement. In order to
accomplish this, however, FASST tracks the energy and moisture balance (including ice and snow) within a
vegetated soil. It is a one-dimensional model that draws heavily from other plant canopy models including
BATS (Dickinson et al.) and SiB (Sellers et al.). FASST is implemented in EnergyPlus with only a few
modifications to adapt it for use with a relatively thin soil layer.
Green roof data

Height of Plants
The average height of plants in the green roof.
Leaf Area Index (LAI)

This is the projected leaf area per unit area of soil surface. It is a dimensionless number between 0.001 and
5.0. The tables below gives some typical values for LAI.
The table below is reproduced from Global Leaf Area Index Data from Field Measurements, 1932-2000
- 813 -
The table below is reproduced from the PhD Thesis of Chen Yu entitled The intervention of plants in the
conflicts between buildings and climate - A case study in Singapore
Mean Leaf
Plant description
Area Index Picture
(LAI)
- 814 -
Components
Plant description
Mean Leaf
Area Index Picture
(LAI)
"White flowers, spider lily" 3.07
"Pink flowers"
4.95
- 815 -
Plant description
Mean Leaf
Area Index Picture
(LAI)
"Yellow green leaves"
3.75
"Dark green long blades of

5.82
leaves/grass"
"Pinkish red flowers"
2.44
- 816 -
Components
Plant description
Mean Leaf
Area Index Picture
(LAI)
"Fern-like"
6.59
"Palm tree-like"
4.41
"White flowers with yellow

3.21
center"
- 817 -
Plant description
Mean Leaf
Area Index Picture
(LAI)
"Small yellow green

leaves"
4.08
"Long big leaves"
5.28
"Orange stems and leaves

2.15
for those which are taller"
- 818 -
Components
Plant description
Mean Leaf
Area Index Picture
(LAI)
"No special features"
3.32
"Light green edges with

dark green center leave
blades"
5.83
"Red yellow tulip like

flowers"
3.04
- 819 -
Plant description
Mean Leaf
Area Index Picture
(LAI)
"Large red leaves"
2.33
"Dark green leaf blades"
~0
Tree
1.69
- 820 -
Components
Plant description
Mean Leaf
Area Index Picture
(LAI)
Palm tree
2.37
Leaf Reflectivity
The fraction of incident solar radiation that is reflected by the individual leaf surfaces. Solar radiation includes
the visible spectrum as well as infrared and ultraviolet wavelengths. Values for this field must be between 0.1
and 0.4.
Leaf Emissivity
This field is the ratio of thermal radiation emitted from leaf surfaces to that emitted by an ideal black body at
the same temperature. This parameter is used when calculating the long wavelength radiant exchange at the
leaf surfaces. Values for this field must be between 0.8 and 1.0 (with 1.0 representing black body
conditions).
Minimum Stomatal Resistance

This field represents the resistance of the plants to moisture transport. It has units of s/m. Plants with low
values of stomatal resistance will result in higher evapotranspiration rates than plants with high resistance.
Values for this field must be in the range of 50.0 to 300.0.
Max volumetric moisture content of the soil layer (saturation)

Maximum volumetric moisture content of the soil depends on the properties of the soil and in particular the
porosity.
Min (residual) volumetric moisture content of the soil layer

The minimum possible volumetric moisture content of the soil layer.
Initial volumetric moisture content of the soil layer

The volumetric moisture content of the soil layer at the start of the simulation. The moisture content will be
updated during the course of the simulation based on surface evaporation, irrigation and precipitation.
Embodied Carbon
Embodied Carbon tab on Materials Dialog.
You can enter data on the embodied carbon that is associated with the material. This definition for embodied
energy is provided on the Bath ICE website:
- 821 -
Embodied energy may be taken as the total primary energy consumed during resource extraction,
transportation, manufacturing and fabrication of a product... to separate it from operational impacts.
Likewise embodied carbon is the carbon released in the above processes. It has become common practice
to specify the embodied carbon as Cradle to Gate, which includes all carbon until the product leaves the
factory gate. The final boundary condition is Cradle to Site, which includes all of the carbon emitted until the
product has reached the point of use (i.e. the building site).
Embodied carbon available

If embodied carbon data is available for the material then this check box should to ticked.
Embodied carbon
Enter the amount of embodied carbon associated with the material. When using SI units, the units are
kgCO2/kg.
Conversion factor name

Enter the name of the conversion factor as defined in the source documentation. This can be used to help you
to trace the conversion factor back within the source database.
Source
The source of the data in text form. Much of the data provided by DesignBuilder is derived from the Bath ICE
database.
Assumption / factor boundary

Typically embodied energy is defined as the carbon emitted into the atmosphere in order to mine, process and
produce the material. Some common definitions are:
Cradle to Gate - the carbon emitted to bring the material to the factory gate (but not to transport it to
the building site)
Cradle to Site - as above but additionally includes consideration of transport from factory to the
building site.
Equivalent carbon available

If data on equivalent carbon is available then check this box.
Equivalent carbon
Equivalent carbon is similar to Embodied carbon (above) but also includes the effects of other greenhouse
gases so as to provide an equivalent amount of CO2 that would cause the same amount of global warming as
the actual greenhouse gases (which may include sulphur dioxide, methane etc) emitted by the processes
involved in production of the material.
Embodied Carbon Report

Material, construction and glazing inventories and embodied carbon reports are included on the Cost and
Carbon screen and in the CSV report file.
Phase Change Materials

Phase Change tab on Materials Dialog.
Phase Change Materials (PCMs) are often impregnated into gypsum board, plaster, concrete or other
materials in order to increase the thermal storage capacity of ceilings, walls and floors. Some PCM
manufactures also provide mats of pure PCM "pockets" which can be included as layers within constructions.
- 822 -
Components
Example of PCM Mat

By completing a transition between solid and liquid phases PCMs can absorb large quantities of latent heat.
The high latent heat storage capacity of these materials works to effectively increase thermal mass which
tends to moderate interior temperatures and improve comfort conditions. PCMs are frequently used to reduce
the need for mechanical cooling, peak load shifting and improving solar energy utilisation.
DesignBuilder allows you to enter manufacturers phase change properties in the form of a temperature enthalpy curve on the Phase change tab of the Materials dialog. Some default PCMs are provided with the
materials database that comes with DesignBuilder.
Phase Change Properties

Phase change material
When the Phase change material check box is selected, this material is simulated as having the following
temperature dependent material properties.
Temperature coefficient for thermal conductivity

This field is used to enter the temperature dependent coefficient for thermal conductivity of the material. Units
for this parameter are W/m-K2. This is the thermal conductivity change per unit temperature excursion from
20C. The conductivity value at 20C is the one specified with the basic material properties of the regular
material specified in the name field. The thermal conductivity is obtained from:
k = ko + k1(Ti 20)
where:
ko is the 20C value of Thermal conductivity entered on the Material properties tab of the Materials dialog.
k1 is the change in conductivity per degree temperature difference from 20C (this field).
Temperature-Enthalpy Curves
The temperature enthalpy set of inputs specify a two column tabular temperature-enthalpy function for the
basic material. Sixteen pairs can be specified. Specify only the number of pairs necessary. The tabular
- 823 -
function must cover the entire temperature range that will be seen by the material in the simulation. It is
suggested that the function start at a low temperature (-20C is typical), and extend to 100C. Note that the
function has no negative slopes and the lowest slope that will occur is the base material specific heat.
Enthalpy contributions of the phase change are always added to the enthalpy that would result from a
constant specific heat base material. Examples of simple generic enthalpy temperature function and also
manufacturers data is shown below.
Generic Data from EnergyPlus
- 824 -
Components
Example of Manufacturers PCM Data
Number of points on the curve

Select a number from 1 to 16. The number of points selected here will determine the number of points
available for data entry below.
Temperature x
This field is used to specify the temperature of the temperature-enthalpy function for the material. Units are C
or F.
Enthalpy x
This field specifies the enthalpy that corresponds to the previous temperature of the temperature-enthalpy
function. Units are J/kg or Btu/lb.
Solution Algorithm
Important note: The Finite Difference solution algorithm must be used to include the effect of material phase
change properties in simulations. If you instead use the CTF algorithm the material will behave as if its PCM
option were not selected. Note also that the CTF solution algorithm is the only option available for Heating and
Cooling design so the phase change effect of the material will not be seen in these calculations. An error
message to this effect will be generated for PCM simulations where the CTF solution method is selected.
Tip: With Learning mode active, the Info panel for the Phase change tab includes a link to load a set of default
simulation properties recommended for PCM analyses.
Recommended simulation parameters for PCM
12 (higher values should increase accuracy at the expense of
Timestep
longer simulation times)
Solution algorithm
2-Finite difference
Difference scheme
1-Fully implicit first order
Space discretisation constant
3
Relaxation factor
1
Inside face surface temperature
0.01 (lower values should increase accuracy at the expense of
convergence criteria
longer simulation times)
- 825 -
PANE COMPONENTS
Pane components holds data on the thermal, solar, visible and infrared properties of individual window panes.
Note that the Info Panel on the right of the Dialog contains information on the naming convention is used with
EnergyPlus glazing data.
There are five tabs on the Pane dialog:
General
Thermal
Solar
Visible
Infra-red
Spectral data
Note: DesignBuilder provides an option to load Glass data directly from WINDOW6 mdb files through a link on
the Info panel.
Pane component data can be accessed:
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting panes from a list.
Panes - General
General tab on Panes Dialog.
Enter the name, description and category of the pane. Also enter the source of the data.
Data type
The Data type allows you to define whether the glazing pane has solar transmission and reflectance data in
spectral or broadband form. The options are:
1-Broadband - where transmission and reflection data is averaged across all wavelengths,
2-Spectral - the more accurate option where solar transmission and reflectance data is defined for a
range of wavelengths between 0.1 and 4 microns on the Spectral data tab of the dialog.
Note: Where possible you should use glazing panes which have Spectral data defined because the
calculations in EnergyPlus are more accurate accounting for the way solar transmission varies with
wavelength. In particular, the results for glazing systems using spectral data can be significantly more
accurate relative to the equivalent broadband data for panes with selective coatings e.g. low-e glass.
International Glazing Database (IGDB)

The IGDB is a comprehensive international glazing layer database compiled by NFRC and provided through
the specialist WINDOW and OPTICS fenestration analysis software provided by LBNL. The IGDB contains,
amongst other things, detailed spectral data for around 2500 manufacturers glazing pane products from
around the world.
DesignBuilder is kept up to date with the latest version of the IGDB.
Panes - Thermal data

Thermal Data tab on Panes Dialog.
- 826 -
Components
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the pane.
Thermal conductivity
This field is used to enter the thermal conductivity of the material layer. Thermal conductivity must be greater
than zero.
Panes - Solar data

This data is not used in simulations when the Data type is 2-Spectral but is still displayed as it gives a
spectral-average overview of the solar transmission and reflectance.
For uncoated glass, when alternative optical properties are availablesuch as thickness, solar index of
refraction, and solar extinction coefficientthey can be converted to equivalent solar transmittance and
reflectance values using the equations given in Glass Optical Properties Conversion.
Solar transmittance
The solar transmittance for the pane at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum.
Solar reflectance
The inside (back-side) and outside (front-side) solar reflectance properties of the pane at normal incidence
averaged over the solar spectrum.
Note, For uncoated glass, when alternative optical properties (thickness, solar index of refraction, and solar
extinction coefficient) are available, they can be converted to equivalent solar transmittance and reflectance
values using the equations given in 'Conversion from Alternative Specification of Glass Optical Properties' in
the EnergyPlus documentation).
Panes - Visible data

Visible Data tab on Panes Dialog.
For uncoated glass, when alternative optical properties are availablesuch as thickness, solar index of
refraction, and solar extinction coefficientthey can be converted to equivalent solar transmittance and
reflectance values using the equations given in Glass Optical Properties Conversion.
The visible transmittance for the pane at normal incidence averaged over the solar spectrum, and weighted by
the response of the human eye.
Visible reflectance
The inside (back-side) and outside (front-side) visible reflectance properties of the pane at normal incidence
averaged over the solar spectrum, and weighted by the response of the human eye.
Panes - Long-wave (Infra-red) Properties

Infra-red tab on Panes Dialog.
Long-wave transmittance
The long wave transmittance at normal incidence.
Note that although EnergyPlus data input allows a range of inputs between 0 and 1 the only value that is
allowed in the calculations is zero so this value is now fixed at zero.
Emissivity
Enter the inside (back-side) and outside (front-side) hemispherical emissivity properties of the pane. Note that
emissivity is 1 minus the infra red reflectance value.
- 827 -
Spectral Data
Spectral data tab on Panes Dialog.
Solar transmission and reflectance data is entered for a range of wavelengths between 0.1 and 4 microns.
This data will generally have been extracted from the IGDB (International Glazing Database) and supplied by
DesignBuilder.
The data is arranged in comma-separated table form with a single line per wavelength, each line having 4
columns:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Wavelength (microns)
Solar transmittance (Tsol)
Solar reflectance, front (Rsol1)
Solar reflectance, back (Rsol2)
An example is shown in the screenshot below.
In cases where the pane layer has been flipped in the Glazing dialog then the last 2 columns (front and back
reflectance) will be reversed in the data supplied to EnergyPlus for the pane layer.
Note: DesignBuilder v3.1 and later allow spectral data to be edited either at library level or within the model.
- 828 -
Components
Glass Optical Properties Conversion

Conversion from Glass Optical Properties Specified as Index of Refraction and Transmittance at
Normal Incidence
The optical properties of uncoated glass are sometimes specified by index of refraction, n, and transmittance
at normal incidence, T. The following equations show how to convert from this set of values to the
transmittance and reflectance values required by DesignBuilder and EnergyPlus. These equations apply only
to uncoated glass, and can be used to convert either spectral-average solar properties or spectral-average
visible properties (in general, n and T are different for the solar and visible). Note that since the glass is
uncoated, the front and back reflectances are the same and equal to the R that is solved for in the following
equations.
Given n and T, find R:
Load Glass Data from WINDOW6

Accessed from the Panes Dialog
DesignBuilder provides an option to load Glass data directly from a WINDOW6 mdb file into the current Pane
dataset. The option is accessed either from the Import button at the bottom of the Panes dialog , or when
using Learning mode, from a link on the Info panel. When selecting the Import option you will be prompted for
the name of the mdb file containing the data to be loaded. Having selected the mdb filename a list of the
Glass types is presented as shown in the screenshot below.
- 829 -
Select the Glass type to be imported by clicking on the appropriate row of data and pressing the OK button. All
Glass data supported by DesignBuilder, including spectral data, will be loaded from the database into the
currently open Pane dialog.
Data is grouped by Manufacturer by default but other column headers can be selected as the grouping
category instead by dragging the existing group header back to the column header row and dragging the new
grouping column category header to the group box. The screenshot below shows the data grouped by the
IGDB version number (when the product was introduced) instead.
Buttons are provided to the right of the screen to allow you to expand or collapse all of the group headings.
- 830 -
Components
You can sort the data by any column by clicking on the appropriate column header. Click again to toggle
between ascending and descending sort order.
Importing New IGDB Data

DesignBuilder is supplied with the latest IGDB (International Glazing Database) data, but sometimes new
IGDB data not yet provided in DesignBuilder is made available. The most up to date IGDB data can be
downloaded in the form of a database. This database can be imported to a WINDOW6 mdb file where it can
be accessed from DesignBuilder as described above.
Note: There is no direct way to import data directly the IGDB database. The data must be imported as a 2stage process: IGDB to WINDOW6 then WINDOW6 to DesignBuilder.
SCHEDULES
Schedules are used in DesignBuilder to define:
Occupancy times
Equipment, lighting HVAC operation
Heating and Cooling temperature setpoints
Transparency of component blocks (usually seasonal)
Apart from their use for defining Transparency of component blocks, Schedules are only used in simulations
when the Timing model option is set to 'Schedules'
You can define schedules in one of 2 ways:
7/12 Schedules - where each day of the week and each month of the year has a unique daily variation
defined using profiles.
Compact Schedules - more flexible definition using EnergyPlus Schedule:Compact text-based data
format.
Day schedules - special type of schedule defining the profile for a single day. Used for defining Cooling
design day range multipliers.
Use the Schedule type drop list on the Schedules dialog to make the selection.
Click here for information on temperature setpoint schedule definition.
Schedule data can be accessed:
by double-clicking on the schedules icon in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting schedules from a list.
7/12 Schedules - Defined Using Profiles

General tab on Schedules Dialog.
7/12 Schedules reference Profiles of daily variation, one Profile for each day of the week and for each month
of the year (hence 7/12).
- 831 -
You can select multiple rows (months) or columns (days) and edit the data by clicking on the Edit selected
cells link in the Info Panel. Likewise, you can select individual profiles by clicking on the appropriate cell and
clicking Edit selected cells.
Design days
Winter and summer design day simulations are carried out when required for autosizing heating and cooling
equipment prior to a Compact HVAC simulation.
Design day definition method

With 7/12 Schedules there are 2 ways to define the schedule during these winter design day simulations, 1End-use defaults or 2-Profiles:
1. End-use Defaults
When the End use defaults option is selected you should define the intended use for the schedule
using the options below and DesignBuilder controls whether the schedule is active during heating
design using the options set on the Heating Design tab of the model options dialog:
General - include general purpose schedules in Compact HVAC heating autosizing calculations
.
Occupancy - defines occupancy
Lighting - Schedule to be used for lighting
Equipment - defines operation of equipment.
Heating demand - defines operation of heating equipment
Cooling demand - defines operation of cooling equipment
HVAC - defines operation of general HVAC equipment
Natural ventilation demand - defines operation of window opening and/or natural ventilation
airflow operation
DHW - defines operation of hot water equipment
It is also necessary to apply the behaviour for each category as defined on the Heating design tab of
the Model options dialog.
Behaviour of the schedule during the Summer design day when autosizing cooling systems is simply
taken from the profile for Wednesday, i.e. for any particular month, the schedule has the same
behaviour during the cooling design day as it has for Wednesdays.
Note that if the schedule is to used for heating or cooling operation then it is especially important to
select the appropriate setting.
Warning: This system of categories can be confusing and has been underlying cause of many queries
on the DesignBuilder support desk related to undersized HVAC systems. We therefore now
recommend that you to use either the 2-Profiles option where the schedule operation during heating
and cooling are defined explicitly using a profile or use Compact schedules where again heating and
cooling design operation is defined explicitly.
2. Profiles
In this option both heating and cooling design day operation are defined explicitly as a Profile. This is
more flexible and clearer than End-use defaults and is the preferred choice.
Heating design day profile - the profile defining the schedule output during the heating
autosizing design day.
Cooling design day profile - the profile defining the schedule output during the cooling
autosizing design day.
- 832 -
Components
Important Note: When setting up schedules that will be used in Compact or Detailed HVAC
simulations it is important to consider whether the schedule will be active or inactive during the heating
and cooling sizing simulations used for autosizing equipment. Generally internal gains must be
excluded from heating sizing. So you should make sure to select the "Off" schedule for the Heating
design day profile if the schedule is to be applied to internal gains, occupancy, lighting etc.
Weekly and monthly variations

Other tools are available for rapid selection/de-selection and setting of schedule data:
Select all weekdays

Select all weekends
Set all weekends 'Off'
Select all
Deselect all
See also EnergyPlus Compact Schedules
Compact Schedules
Compact Schedules are defined using a slightly modified version of the standard EnergyPlus
Schedule:Compact format documented below.
- 833 -
Using the Compact Schedule definition all the features of the schedule components are accessed in a single
command.
Name
This field is for your own use and is replaced by DesignBuilder with the name of the Schedule when
generating data for EnergyPlus.
ScheduleType
ScheduleType should generally be Fraction even for schedules to be used for temperature setpoint definition.
You can enter Any Number to enter values greater than 1 but please bear in mind:
The maximum gains values (e.g. people/m2) are multiplied by the values in the schedule to obtain the
actual value to use at each time step in the simulation. So if you enter large schedule values the actual
maximum value in the simulation will be higher than the 'maximum' value entered in DesignBuilder.
There is no problem with this, just a possible concern that if the DesignBuilder interface indicates that
the maximum occupancy density is say 0.1 people/m2 but the schedule has values > 1 then the
simulation results will, at first sight, appear incorrect. If you come back to the model 6 months later you
may not remember the reason.
Temperature set-point schedules should only have values 0, 0.5 or 1.0.
So generally we recommend using Fraction Compact schedules for clarity.
Field-Set (Through, For, Interpolate, Until, Value)

Each Compact Schedule must contain the elements Through (date), For (days), Interpolate (optional), Until
(time of day) and Value.
Through
This field starts with 'Through:' and contains the ending date for the schedule period. You may define multiple
schedule periods in this way, for example to define seasonal variations. If there are no seasonal variations
then enter: Through: 31 Dec, to indicate that the data that follows applies to the whole year.
Note 1: each Compact Schedule must cover all the days for a year and it must have values for all 24 hours
and all values for all day types.
Note 2: The dates in the Through fields must be provided consecutively, starting at the beginning of the year
and finishing at the end of the year.
Note 3 only Month-Day combinations are allowed for this field.
For
This field starts with 'For: ' and contains the applicable days. Multiple choices may be combined on the line.
Choices are:
Weekdays,
Weekends,
Holidays,
Alldays,
SummerDesignDay,
WinterDesignDay,
Sunday,
Monday,
Tuesday,
Wednesday,
Thursday,
Friday,
Saturday,
CustomDay1,
- 834 -
Components
CustomDay2.
In fields after the first 'For', 'AllOtherDays' may also be used.

Note: EnergyPlus has limit of line length of about 60 characters so lines like:
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay WinterDesignDay Weekends Holidays AllOtherDays,
should be changed to:
For: AllDays,
Interpolate (optional)
Schedule values are input to the simulation at the zone time step, so there is also a possibility of 'interpolation'
from the entries used in this object to the value used in the simulation. This field, if used, starts with
'Interpolate:' and contains the word 'Yes' or 'No'.
Until
This field contains the ending time for the current days and day schedule being defined. The data should
represent clock time (standard) in the format HH:MM. 24 hour clock format (i.e. 1pm is 13:00). Note that 'Until:
7:00' includes all times up through 07:00 (7am). The time is followed by a comma and the value the schedule
takes until the given time. See note above on usual values. Generally you should enter values between zero
and 1.
Value
Finally, the value field is the schedule value for the specified time interval.
Note: you can use 0 for Temperature type Compact Schedules to indicate that the heating/cooling system is
switched off during the specified period. See Example 2 below.
Example 1 - Operation Schedule

SCHEDULE:COMPACT,
Office_CellOff_Light,
Fraction,
Through: 31 Dec,
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay,
Until: 07:00, 0,
Until: 19:00, 1,
Until: 24:00, 0,
For: Weekends,
Until: 24:00, 0,
For: Holidays WinterDesignDay AllOtherDays,
Until: 24:00, 0;
This schedule is intended to be used to describe the lighting operation in an office. It indicates:
Schedule is a fraction (0-1).

No seasonal variation.
Weekdays and SummerDesignDays the schedule is 1 (i.e. 'on') between 7am and 7pm and 0 (i.e. 'off')
other times.
Weekends, holidays, WinterDesignDays and all other days the schedule is 'off'.
Important Note on SummerDesignDays and WinterDesignDays. A common mistake is to inadvertently

include internal gains from occupancy, computer gains or lighting in heating sizing simulations. This leads to
heating systems to being undersized. The general rule is to avoid including any internal gains in heating sizing
- 835 -
simulations. This is done as shown in Example 1 above, by using a value of 0 for WinterDesignDay for any
schedule to be used to control internal gains.
Example 2 - Temperature Setpoint Schedule

SCHEDULE:COMPACT,
Bedroom_Cool,
Temperature,
Through: 31 Dec,
For: Weekdays SummerDesignDay,
Until: 05:00, 0.5,
Until: 09:00, 1,
Until: 17:00, 0.5,
Until: 24:00, 1,
For: Weekends,
Until: 05:00, 0.5,
Until: 24:00, 1,
For: Holidays WinterDesignDay AllOtherDays,
Until: 24:00, 0;
This schedule is intended to be used to describe the cooling temperature setpoint and setback in a bedroom.
It indicates:
Schedule is a temperature (in degC).

No seasonal variation.
Weekdays and SummerDesignDays the main temperature setpoint data (Activity tab) is used between
5am and 9am and also between 5pm and midnight. Cooling operates at setback temperature setpoint
data at all other times on these days.
Weekends the cooling setpoint is main temperature setpoint between 5am and midnight. Cooling
operates at setback temperature setpoint data at all other times on these days.
Holidays, WinterDesignDays and all other days the cooling is off.
IMPORTANT NOTE: even if you are using IP units for the main interface you must use SI units for compact
schedule values as these are passed directly to EnergyPlus.
More on Temperature setpoint schedules.
Day Schedule
Day schedules are a special type of schedule covering only a single day. They have format similar to that of
Compact schedules but because they only cover one day they don't include Through: and For: statements as
shown below.
Schedule:Day:Interval,
Daily range multipliers for Design Days,
Any Number,
Yes
Until: 1:00, 0.88 ,
Until: 2:00, 0.92,
Until: 3:00, 0.95,
Until: 4:00, 0.98,
Until: 5:00, 1.00,
Until: 6:00, 0.98,
Until: 7:00, 0.91,
- 836 -
Components
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
Until:
8:00, 0.74,
9:00, 0.55,
10:00, 0.38,
11:00, 0.23,
12:00, 0.13,
13:00, 0.05,
14:00, 0.00,
15:00, 0.00,
16:00, 0.06,
17:00, 0.14,
18:00, 0.24,
19:00, 0.39,
20:00, 0.50,
21:00, 0.59,
22:00, 0.68,
23:00, 0.75,
24:00, 0.82;
The syntax of Day schedule data is not checked by DesignBuilder in the same way as it is for Compact
schedules, so it is important to check the data carefully before pressing OK on the Schedules dialog.
Day schedules are only used for defining Range multipliers in cooling design data.
Defining setpoint temperature and RH schedules

Schedules Timing Model Option
Operation of heating and cooling equipment is defined by selecting a Schedule under the Heating, Cooling
and Operation headers on the HVAC tab. These schedules are used to generate both the heating/cooling
availability schedule and the temperature setpoint schedules used in the simulations. Schedule values greater
than 0.5 indicate the system is in full operation controlling temperature to the main heating/cooling setpoint,
values between 0 and 0.5 indicate the equipment in setback mode and values of 0 indicate that the equipment
is switched off. See Table below.
Value
0
> 0.5
0 < Value <= 0.5
Heating/Cooling Equipment Operation

Equipment is off
Equipment is controlled using the main temperature
setpoint data (Activity tab)
Equipment is controlled using the setback
temperature setpoint data (Activity tab)
Notes
1.
2.
3.
When using 7/12 Schedules, for 0.5 read 50% etc.

When using 2-Single period profiles with 7/12 Schedules to generate temperature setpoints the 'Off'
periods are modelled using setback temperatures, i.e. the system is not switched off. If you wish the
system to switch off outside main heating/cooling hours use the 3-Custom profile type.
If the setback temperature set does not appear to affect results, this may be because the
heating/cooling operation schedule selected uses only 0 and 1, not the 0.5 required to access setback
temperature (see table above).
Typical Workday Timing Model Option

You can define the operation of heating and cooling equipment by entering Typical workday start and end
times and seasonal operation under the Heating and Operation headers on the HVAC tab.
This data is used to generate both the heating/cooling availability schedule and the temperature setpoint
schedule used in the simulations.
The equipment is switched on between the On and Off times (8am and 6pm in the example below). During
this time the equipment is controlled using the main temperature setpoint (Activity tab). At other times and
- 837 -
during weekends the equipment is controlled using the setback temperature setpoint. Weekends are defined
on the Activity tab at the building level under Occupancy by setting the number of working days per week.
The Seasonal control data allows you to set times when the equipment is switched off altogether. For
example the heating system data shown below indicates that the heating system will be switched on during
the winter only and switched off in the summer.
Schedules and Design and Sizing Simulations

It is important to differentiate between the heating and cooling sizing calculations which are accessed from the
Heating design and Cooling design screens and the HVAC autosizing simulations that are automatically
carried out before EnergyPlus simulations when using the Compact or Detailed HVAC options and items of
HVAC equipment are to be autosized.
Heating and Cooling Design Calculation

Schedules are not used for Heating design calculations which are based on a steady state analysis that does
not account for timing. In cases where for example a maximum mechanical ventilation rate is defined and
modified by a schedule for simulation purposes, for the steady-state Heating design calculations the same
maximum mechanical ventilation rate is used continuously.
Cooling design calculations are of course dynamic and so schedules are required for these. It is possible to
select the day type to be used for Cooling design calculations on the Calculation options dialog. By default the
Compact schedule day type is SummerDesignDay for Cooling design calculations. For cooling sizing
calculations carried out before Compact and Detailed HVAC simulations the SummerDesignDay day type is
always used.
HVAC Autosizing Simulations

EnergyPlus provides WinterDesignDay and SummerDesignDay day types in Compact schedules to cover the
behaviour of schedules during autosizing simulations. When setting up schedules that will be used in Compact
or Detailed HVAC simulations it is important to consider whether the schedule will be active or inactive during
the heating and cooling sizing simulations used for autosizing equipment. In particular internal gains must be
excluded from heating sizing simulations to avoid undersizing the heating equipment.
More specific advise on this can be found in the 7/12 schedules and Compact schedules sections.
More general advise on HVAC autosizing can be found in the Autosizing HVAC Components section.
SIMULATION HOURLY WEATHER DATA

DesignBuilder uses EnergyPlus format hourly weather data to define external conditions during simulations.
Each location has a separate file describing the external temperature, solar radiation, atmospheric conditions
etc. for every hour of the year at that location. These hourly weather data sets are often 'typical' data derived
from hourly observations at a specific location by the National weather service or methodological office.
Examples of these typical data include TMY2 and WYEC2 in the United States and Canada and TRY (CEC
1985) in Europe. See EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data for more on the hourly weather data itself.
Because hourly weather data is not always available for every location, it is often necessary to use weather
data for a nearby location which represents the weather of the actual site.
- 838 -
Components
The DesignBuilder hourly weather data has been obtained from the Weather section of the EnergyPlus
website and processed using the DesignBuilder weather data translator, but you can use any weather data
provided it is in the correct format.
EnergyPlus format hourly weather data has extension 'epw' by convention.
Hourly weather data video tutorial
See also:
Add new hourly weather data

Edit/Translate hourly weather data
EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data
Downloading Hourly Weather Data

DesignBuilder comes with a database of hourly weather data but the EnergyPlus epw files are not loaded onto
your computer until you actually need them. This keeps the size of the DesignBuilder setup program small.
The first time you require an hourly weather data file it is automatically downloaded from the DesignBuilder
Website into the Weather data folder on your computer where it can be accessed by EnergyPlus for any
subsequent simulations. You must be connected to the Internet to download weather data in this way.
Selecting hourly weather data

When you select an hourly weather data set on the Location tab at Site level, you do not select the file
directly, but rather an hourly weather data component, which in turn references the actual file. It works this
way so that we can supply you with a database of hourly weather data locations without needing to include
hundreds of large hourly weather files.
When editing an hourly weather data component there are two tabs on the Hourly Weather Data dialog:
General
Statistics
Template data can be accessed:
from the Templates tab on the opening screen (if no file is open),
from the Templates tab in the Navigator panel (if a file is open),
by double-clicking on the template icon in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting templates from a list.
Hourly Weather Data - General

General tab on Hourly Weather data Dialog.
Select the Hourly weather data filename and the rest of the data is loaded directly from the .epw and .stat
files.
Each file is named using the ISO standard three-letter country abbreviation (i.e. CUB for Cuba), followed by
the location name, and the source format (CityUHK, CSWD, CTYW, CTZ2, CWEC, ISHRAE, IWEC, IGDG,
INETI, KISR, SWEC, SWERA, TMY2, or TMY).
Thus, CUB_Havana_IWEC.epw is the EnergyPlus weather file (epw) from the ASHRAE International
Weather for Energy Calculations (IWEC) data for Havana, Cuba (CUB).
There are three files associated with each location:
epw - EnergyPlus weather files
- 839 -
stat - a summary report on the data. Data from this file is loaded into the Statistics tab when an hourly
weather data file is selected.
ddy - design conditions.
Note: the above hourly weather data and associated statistics files are located in the Weather data folder.
Hourly Weather Data - Statistics

Statistics tab on Hourly Weather data Dialog.
The statistics displayed are generated by the EnergyPlus weather data translation utility.
The statistics data is used to identify useful simulation periods:
Summer start month, Summer end month define the summer simulation period in mmm format.
Winter start month, Winter end month define the winter simulation period in mmm format.
Extreme hot week, starting defines the first day of the hottest week of the year.
Typical hot week, starting defines the first day of a typical summer week.
Extreme cold week, starting defines the first day of the coldest week of the year.
Typical cold week, starting defines the first day of a typical winter week.
Note: week starting dates must be in the format mmm dd - any other format will generate an error when
clicking on the links in the Simulation Options dialog.
This data can be accessed from the Simulation Calculation options dialog to set up typical simulation periods
(screenshot right) .
Add New hourly weather data

The processes described on this page are also covered in a Video tutorial.
Add Hourly Weather Data to the LIBRARY

If you have hourly weather you wish to use in simulation you can add it to the library by following the steps
below:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Copy the EnergyPlus format hourly weather data .epw file to the weather data folder (File > Folders >
Weather data). If you have it, copy the .stat file there too.
From the Opening screen click on the Component libraries tab.
Click on the + to the left of Hourly weather data to open up the list of countries.
Select the country of the location (or a location within the country).
Add a new Hourly weather data set by clicking on the green + icon in the Toolbar.
Select the epw file and enter any extra information in the dialog as described below. Note that the
location and other statistics are automatically loaded from the .stat and .epw files when you select the
file.
Click OK to save the new Hourly weather data.
See further below for the alternative steps to follow if you have a file open and wish to create a new hourly
weather data set just for that model.
Note 1: Any custom hourly weather epw file you select in your model will be saved with the dsb file so that
the model can be used on other computers without the need to copy weather files manually.
- 840 -
Components
Note 2: Although DesignBuilder can been used with any valid epw data sets, you are strongly advised to
process the data first to ensure that each hourly record has year 2002. This ensures that daily, hourly and
sub-hourly data generated by EnergyPlus is correctly synchronised with the DesignBuilder graphics display. If
you do not set the year to 2002 it will not affect the results but it will affect the day of the week display in
DesignBuilder graphic output. In particular, daily, hourly and sub-hourly data will not necessarily show the
correct day of the week in the results display graphics.
The steps are shown in the screenshots below.
In the Hourly weather data, enter the details of the location and select the EnergyPlus epw filename as shown
below.
- 841 -
Once the epw has been selected, DesignBuilder loads the Latitude, Longitude and WMO station identifier.
It also searches for the equivalent .stat file and if it is found (in the weather data folder) the data on the
Statistics tab is also loaded (below).
- 842 -
Components
Note: If a stat is not available you should enter the information on the Statistics tab by hand in the format
shown above. The stat file is automatically generated by the Hourly weather data translation process.
When you click on the OK button you will be able to select this new Hourly weather data from:
1.
2.
Location tab at site level.

Add New site dialog.
Add Hourly Weather Data to the MODEL

The above process creates a library Hourly weather data component. If you have a dsb file open, you can
follow an equivalent process to create a model Hourly weather data component. In this case the process is:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Copy the EnergyPlus format hourly weather data epw file to the weather data folder (File > Folders >
Weather data). If you have it, copy the .stat file there too.
Go to site level, Location tab, open the Simulation Weather Data header and click on the currently
selected Hourly weather data selection.
In Learning mode, select the country of the location (or a location within the country) in the Info, data
panel on the right of the screen.
Add a new Hourly weather data set by clicking on the green + icon in the Toolbar.
Select the epw file and enter any extra information in the dialog as described above.
Click OK to save the new Hour weather data.
In this case you will need to export the hourly weather data you have just created from this model and reload
the ddf file to the library if you wish to use the weather data in other models.
If you don't have the data in epw format yet then it can be translated from a range of formats using the inbuilt
DesignBuilder weather data translation tool or if the format is not supported then you can use the EnergyPlus
translation tool that supports all weather formats. Obtain this from the EnergyPlus website. The documentation
can be found in the Auxiliary Programs document. It can be worth contacting EnergyPlus support about
obtaining weather data for particular locations as they have a lot of contacts and sometimes can provide data
that is not on the main website.
Weather file requirements

While EnergyPlus is quite flexible in the format of the data used in simulations, DesignBuilder requires:
- 843 -
Each line to represent one hour - shorter time intervals are not supported.
Each file must have exactly 8760 records, one for each hour of the year, starting on Jan 1 and ending
Dec 31. The years do not have to be consecutive but should ideally be set to 2002.
Simulating periods longer than a year

In some cases you may need to simulate a period longer than a year, possibly using custom weather data.
Because DesignBuilder simulations can run for a maximum of a year, you would need to run 2 separate
simulations to achieve this. Each simulation would use the appropriate weather file. For example to simulate
the period September 2008 to December 2009 you could create 2 weather files, one for 2008 and the other
for 2009 and run simulations for the 2 years separately. Results for the 2 simulations could be combined
afterwards outside DesignBuilder (e.g. in a spreadsheet).
Edit / translate hourly weather data

The Edit/Translate Hourly Weather Data dialog can be accessed from the Tools menu and can be used to
process hourly weather data. You may wish to do this for various reasons:
Convert EnergyPlus epw data to be compatible with DesignBuilder day of week results for daily, hourly
and sub-hourly output (set the year to 2002).
Translate weather data in other formats to the epw format so that it can be used in DesignBuilder.
Generating modified weather data sets for investigating climate change scenarios.
Note: The Rocky Mountain Institute now provides a free .epw hourly weather data editing and translation tool
called Elements. Users may find this to be a more convenient way to edit epw files than the processor built
into DesignBuilder. It provides a spreadsheet environment and allows individual values to be edited or ranges
of data can be pasted in from an external spreadsheet program. For more information see the Big Ladder
downloads page
Translation Overview
Use this dialog to convert weather data to and from a range of file formats.
To edit/convert a file or files:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Select the folder containing the file(s) using the browse box at the top of the left-hand side of the
screen. All relevant weather data files are then loaded into the table on the left.
Check the check box next to each file that is to be converted.
Ensure that the correct options have been set on the Options tab.
Press the Convert button to start the process.
Converted files are stored in the Weather data folder. You can access these files by clicking on the
Edit/Review tab.
Input Data
On Input data tab you can select the name(s) of the source file (s) to be converted by checking in the
checkboxes.
Use the Select all and Select none buttons for widespread changes.
Click on the Convert button to start the conversion.
Options
On the Options tab you can select various options to be used during the conversion.
Output file format

Supported formats are:
- 844 -
Components
EnergyPlus data files (.epw)

EnergyPlus 'comma separated values' files (.csv)
TMY2 data files (.tmy2 or tm2)
TMY data files (.tmy)
IWEC data files (.iwec or iwc)
Samson data files (.samson or dat)
WYEC2 data files (.wyec2 or wy2)
DOE-2 formatted data files (.fmt or txt)
ESP-r formatted data files (.esp-r or clm)
BLAST ASCII formatted data files (.blast or asc)
Required extensions are shown in brackets.
Error Correction - Fix out of range data

You can automatically correct any values that are outside the typical range for the EnergyPlus converter by
checking the Fix out of range data checkbox.
Error reporting
Change filename
You can apply the standard convention used by DesignBuilder to rename the output file. If you select this
option the output file will be named using the Country_Location_Source convention.
Modify
You can make some changes in the weather data as follows.
Fix year
You can fix the year to 2002. This is a recommended step for cases where you would like to view daily, hourly
or sub-hourly EnergyPlus results within DesignBuilder or within the Results Viewer. The reasons for this are
explained on the Add new hourly weather data page.
Modify climate
You can set the number of heating and/or cooling degree days or add a fixed delta to the dry-bulb outdoor air
temperature values in the weather data. If you select the degree day option DesignBuilder adds or subtracts
the same temperature difference to/from all dry-bulb outdoor air temperature values in the weather data so as
to give the requested heating and cooling degree day values based on the supplied base temperature. The
algorithm used is as follows:
For Each Hour in the weather file:
If Tdb < TDDBaseHeat Then
Tdb = Tdb - HeatAdj
Else If Tdb > TDDBaseCool Then
Tdb = Tdb - CoolAdj
where:
Tdb is the Outdoor air dry bulb temperature
TDDBaseHeat is Heating base degree day temperature
TDDBaseCool is Cooling base degree day temperature
HeatAdj is the delta T required to be subtracted to give the correct overall number of heating degree days
CoolAdj is the delta T required to be subtracted to give the correct overall number of cooling degree days
HeatAdj = 24 * (HeatDD - OldHeatDD) / HeatDDCount
CoolAdj = 24 * (CoolDD - OldCoolDD) / CoolDDCount
HeatDDCount is the number of hours in the year where Tdb < TDDBaseHeat
HeatDD is the user defined required heating degree days
OldHeatDD is the number of heating degree days in the source data
- 845 -
CoolDDCount is the number of hours in the year where Tdb > TDDBaseCool
CoolDD is the user defined required cooling degree days
OldCoolDD is the number of cooling degree days in the source data
Edit/Review
You can view all files in the current hourly weather data folder on this tab. You can open any of the files for
viewing/editing by clicking on the Open selected file link on the info panel or by double-clicking on it.
Converting from Other Formats

If you have data in a format that is not supported by the DesignBuilder weather data translator there are 2
ways this can be used to generate an equivalent weather file in epw format.
1.
Use the EnergyPlus custom weather data translation tool. Detailed descriptions on its use are provided
in the Auxiliary Programs Guide (which is an essential guide for all epw weather data
conversion/analysis. The EnergyPlus weather converter tool can be obtained by downloading the
EnergyPlus software and is not supported by DesignBuilder support desk. However if you run into
problems with it, you should be able to get help from the EnergyPlus support desk or forum.
2.
The second option is to use an existing epw file as a template and copy columns of data across from
your weather data source file using the csv spreadsheet format.
The rest of this section provides details on the second of these methods.
To translate weather data from any format follow these instructions. Note that as a starting point you will need
to have the main data required by EnergyPlus stored in a csv format file or spreadsheet. The data required is:
Air temperature
Dew point temperature
Relative Humidity
Atmospheric pressure
Global horizontal solar radiation
Diffuse Horizontal solar radiation
Direct normal radiation
Wind Speed
Wind Direction
Cloud cover
If any of the above parameters are missing and you are unsure about how to derive them, you may wish to
consider using the EnergyPlus custom weather translator instead which has built-functions to derive some
missing parameters based on other equivalent data. e.g. Direct normal radiation can be derived based on
known solar position and global and diffuse horizontal radiation.
If you do have all the required data in columns of a csv file then you are ready. The process is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
To start the process, generate a template for a similar location in csv format. To do this use the weather
data translation tool, selecting the 'EnergyPlus 'comma separated values' files' output option on the
Options tab.
Load the csv file created in step 1 into a spreadsheet to use as the template.
In a separate spreadsheet load the new data.
Copy and paste the data column by column from the new data spreadsheet into the equivalent columns
in template spreadsheet. A 'missing value indicator' value can be entered in any of the places
EnergyPlus doesn't use the data. The 'missing value indicator' value is different for each field and
details can be found in the Auxiliary Programs Guide.
Check that the header data at the top of the template spreadsheet is correct.
Ensure the year is set to 2002 in all rows.
Save the template as a csv file.
- 846 -
Components
8.
9.
10.
11.
Use the weather file translator to translate the template csv file to epw format.
Rename the epw file as required.
Check that the data has been copied correctly by loading the file into DesignBuilder and clicking on the
Simulation tab when at site level. You'll need to set up a new Hourly weather data component
referencing the new epw file and select this first.
Check carefully that data output from simulations that use the new weather file makes sense. Pay
particular attention to solar radiation. To do this you could check hourly incident solar radiation on a few
surfaces in a model.
Note 1: If your regional settings aren't like UK/US, you could run into a couple of problems, such as the
spreadsheet program changing the DataPeriods line from 1/1, 12/31 to 01-Jan -- you'd need to hand edit that
before step 7
Note 2: Be aware that specific year data is not usually deemed appropriate for Energy Analysis. See this
document for more information on selecting weather data:
Drury B. Crawley. 1998. "Which Weather Data Should You Use for Energy Simulations of Commercial
Buildings?" in ASHRAE Transactions, pp. 498-515, Vol. 104, Pt. 2. Atlanta: ASHRAE. (PDF 197 KB) PDF:
http://energyplus.gov/pdfs/bibliography/whichweatherdatashouldyouuseforenergysimulations.pdf
EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data

All of the hourly weather data that comes with DesignBuilder is supplied by DOE from:
www.eere.energy.gov/buildings/energyplus/cfm/weather_data.cfm
But with the year changed to 2002 as described in Add new hourly weather data.
Many of these weather files are composite files from multiple years. Each month has been selected to be
representative of that month for the period of record. Representative of the normal patterns for that month not
the average. The selection of months is usually based on a weighting of temperature, humidity, wind, and
solar. There are some variations among the weighting, most are similar to the TMY2 done in the US in the
1990s:
http://rredc.nrel.gov/solar/pubs/tmy2/
You can find the details of the file format in the AuxiliaryPrograms EnergyPlus document.
Sources of EnergyPlus Hourly Weather Data

Other sources of hourly weather data and associated tools are listed below.
International sources
Meteonorm - a software application that can generate synthetic hourly weather data in epw format for
a wide range of locations. See http://meteonorm.com/
Weather analytics can provide weather data in epw format for a very wide range of locations on a very
fine grid. They use algorithms to interpolate between measured data sets held taking into account local
height above sea level and other factors. See: http://weatheranalytics.com/.
Climate.OneBuilding - service established in 2015 as an unfunded project by Linda Lawrie and Dru
Crawley. See: http://climate.onebuilding.org/
EnergyPlus support are sometimes willing to provide weather data. They have a large stock of
locations and can run Meteonorm to generate data. See: http://energyplus.helpserve.com/
National sources
UK - CIBSE, TRY, DSY and future climate hourly weather data for . See:
http://www.cibse.org/Knowledge/CIBSE-other-publications/CIBSE-Weather-Data-Current,-Future,Combined-DSYs
Germany - DWD, TRY 2010 weather data for Germany can be downloaded free of charge from the
Europe page on the http://climate.onebuilding.org website.
- 847 -
Australia and new Zealand - NATHers, Latest hourly weather data for Australia and New Zealand can
be downloaded from NATHers at no cost. The link depends on your browser. Copy the links below into
the address bar of your browser.
Internet Explorer: ftp://rNatHERS:MDkflWeZ@ftp.niwa.co.nz/ftp/NatHERS
Chrome/Firefox: ftp://rNatHERS:MDkflWeZ@ftp.niwa.co.nz
Portugal - LNEG, Download a free spreadsheet which can generate hourly weather data for the
various Portuguese regions. See: http://www.lneg.pt/servicos/328/2263/.
Weather data editor/translator
Elements is a free, open-source, cross-platform software tool for creating and editing custom weather
files for building energy modelling. See: http://bigladdersoftware.com/projects/elements/
PROFILES
Profiles define the variation in occupancy, equipment usage or temperature over the course of a single day.
They are used as building blocks in the definition of Schedules.
There are 3 types of profile:

1.
2.
3.
Constant - has the same value all day. Enter the constant value for the profile
Single period - define the 'on' period by setting the start and end times for the profile using the mouse.
The operation is assumed to be 'off' for the rest of the day
Custom - the profile is defined by a number of intervals, each of which can have a different value.
There are two ways to set interval values:
a. To change the value for a single interval (single histogram bar) select the top of the histogram
bar and drag up/down using the LEFT mouse button.
b. To apply a constant value over a range of intervals select the top of the histogram bar which has
the required value and drag left/right over the range of intervals to be set using the RIGHT
mouse button.
The figure above shows an example custom profile.
Profile data can be accessed:
- 848 -
Components
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting profiles from a list in the Schedules dialog.
TEXTURES
Textures are used to represent the external surface of building constructions in the rendered views in the
Visualisation Screen.
Select the texture file and the real-world width and height represented by the texture. Textures are associated
with materials and used to render the model in the Visualisation Screen.
Note: If an image does not appear under the Image header this means that the selected file is not installed.
Adding your own textures

DesignBuilder comes with a library of textures but you can also add your own to the library. To add a texture
to a model you should first get a list of textures and then click on the Add new icon. Then in the texture dialog,
enter a name, the width and height represented by the texture and click on the browse button to bring up the
list of texture files. In the texture file list click on the Add button to add a new texture file. Then select the
texture file you've just added.
The texture file you've just added will be stored with the dsb file so that it will be available if you copy the
model to another computer.
Texture data can be accessed:
by double-clicking on the texture icon in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting textures from a list.
WINDOW GAS
Window Gas component data is used to define the thermal properties of the cavity fill gas between window
Panes in Glazing components.
The gas which fills the inter-glazing cavity affects the heat transfer through the assembly but has almost no
effect on the solar heat gain or the visible light transmission. Air, of course, is the most common cavity fill gas,
but the use of an inert gas (typically argon or krypton) can significantly reduce window heat transfer. Krypton
and argon are colourless, odourless and non-toxic. Argon is the most commonly-used fill gas because it offers
good thermal performance at low cost. Krypton is more effective at reducing heat loss, but is roughly 200
times more expensive than argon per unit volume. Because krypton works best at smaller pane spacings (8
mm), it is often used in triple and quadruple-glazed windows to minimize the overall thickness of the unit.
Other types of gases are used (e.g. sulphur hexafluoride (SF6) and carbon dioxide (CO2)) to reduce sound
transmission, but these gases do not offer the improved thermal performance of the inert gases.
Category
This is the gas type. Select from:
Air
Argon
CO2
- 849 -
Krypton
Other
SF6
Xenon
The window gas you are defining does not fit with the available options select Other. Select Air for an air gap.
Thickness
Enter the thickness of the inter-glazing cavity.
Custom material properties

The window gas properties of the gases Air, Argon, Krypton, Xenon are known by EnergyPlus and so no
further data is required for these gases.
For CO2, Other and SF6 you must enter custom properties.
Custom Gases Only

If you elect to enter custom material properties then you must enter the details. The A and B coefficients are
those in the following expression that gives a property value as a function of temperature in degrees K:
Property = Coefficient_A + Coefficient_B * Gas_Temperature (K)
Conductivity Coefficient A
The A coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K).
Conductivity Coefficient B
The B coefficient for gas conductivity (W/m-K2).
Viscosity Coefficient A
The A coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s).
Viscosity Coefficient B
The B coefficient for gas viscosity (kg/m-s-K).
Specific Heat Coefficient A

The A coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K).
Specific Heat Coefficient B

The B coefficient for gas specific heat (J/kg-K2).
Molecular Weight
The molecular weight (mass) of the gas (Kg/kmol).
Window gas component data can be accessed:
- 850 -
Components
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting window gases from a list.
METABOLIC RATES
Metabolic rate data defines a category of human metabolic output. The metabolic rate can be selected in
Model data on the Activity tab by choosing a Metabolic rate component.
The metabolic rate per person data is supplied to EnergyPlus which multiplies it by the number of people in
the zone as the starting point for occupancy heat emission calculations.
Metabolic rate data can be found in the ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Chapter 8, Table 5.
DesignBuilder data is derived from this data and is for adult males having typical surface area of 1.8m2. For
women multiply the adult male value by 0.85 and for children multiply by 0.75.
Component data can be accessed:
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting window gases from a list.
Background
Heat is generated in the human body by oxidation at a rate called the metabolic rate. This heat is dissipated
from the body surface and respiratory tract by a combination of radiation, convection and evaporation. The
relative proportions of sensible and latent heat from people is a complex function of the metabolic rate and the
environmental conditions.
EnergyPlus uses a polynomial function to divide the heat gain into sensible and latent portions.
More details can be found in the EnergyPlus EngineeringDoc.pdf documentation.
See also the section on metabolic activity data.
LOCAL SHADING COMPONENTS

General tab on Local Shading Dialog.
Local Shading Components are used to define simple generic shading devices to apply to the Windows in the
model.
Enter the name and category for the local shading data set.
Overhangs, louvres and sidefins can be specified either individually (e.g. just overhangs) or in combination
(e.g. sidefins combined with louvres).
- 851 -
Local Shading component data can be selected from the Openings tab in Model Data and is applied to all
windows on the surface, including custom windows.
The data applies only to external glazing - roof and internal glazing do not use local shading data.
Overhang, louvre and sidefin blades are all assumed to be 100% opaque and made of the material specified
on this tab.
Note: the DesignBuilder Local shading devices allow a range of different overhangs, side fins and louvres to
be defined, but if you need to model a shading device not covered by the standard mechanism, you can draw
custom shading devices using Component blocks.
There are four tabs on the Local Shading dialog:
General
Louvres
Sidefins
Overhangs
Local shading data can be accessed:
by double-clicking on the local shading icon on the Openings tab in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting local shading devices from a list.
Local Shading - General

General tab on Local Shading Dialog.
Enter the name, category and source for this Local shading data set.
Local shading - Louvres

Louvres tab on Local Shading Dialog.
Enter details on the louvres, if fitted.
- 852 -
Components
The number of louvres is a maximum value and if the window is not high enough to accommodate the
requested number of louvres blades, any louvres blades which would be positioned below the window are not
added.
Local shading - Sidefins

Sidefins tab on Local Shading Dialog.
Enter details on the sidefins, if fitted.
- 853 -
Local shading - Overhangs

Overhangs tab on Local Shading Dialog.
Enter details on the overhangs if fitted.
- 854 -
Components
WINDOW BLINDS
Window blind components can be selected for external glazing, roof glazing and interior glazing from the
Openings tab in the Model Data.
There are four types of window blinds, as selected in the Category data on the General tab:
Slat - slatted blinds which have different transmission properties with solar position.
Shade - assumed perfectly diffusing.
Transparent insulation - transparent insulation material to be positioned on the outer surface of an
external wall.
Electrochromic switching - switchable visible and solar properties based on solar gain.
Note: In the case where a Window blind is applied mid-pane, any dividers that may have been specified for
Window blind component data can be selected from the window shading data on the Openings tab in Model
Data and is applied to all windows on the surface, including custom windows.
The data applies only to external and roof glazing, internal windows cannot have window blinds.
Window blinds component data can be accessed:
by double-clicking on the window blinds icon on the Openings tab in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting window blinds from a list.
Window Blinds - General

General tab on Window Blinds Dialog.
Enter the name, category and source for this Window blinds data set.
Window blinds - Slat data

Slat data tab on Window Blinds Dialog.
- 855 -
This object specifies the properties of a window blind consisting of flat, equally-spaced slats. Unlike window
shades, which are modelled as perfect diffusers, window blinds have solar and visible transmission and
reflection properties that strongly depend on slat angle and angle of incidence of solar radiation. When in
place, the blind is assumed to cover all of the glazed part of the window, including dividers; it does not cover
any of the window frame, if present. The plane of the blind is assumed to be parallel to the glazing. When the
blind is retracted it is assumed to cover none of the window. The solar and thermal effects of the blinds
support strings, tapes or rods are ignored. Slat curvature, if present, is ignored.
Side Elevation
The slat angle is the angle between the glazing outward normal to the slat outward normal. A slat angle of 0
sets slats to be vertical and an angle of 90 sets them to be horizontal.
A slatted blind can be applied 1-Inside, 2-Outside or 3-Mid-pane by selecting the appropriate Position on the
Openings tab.
Slat Properties
Blind to Glass Distance
For interior and exterior blinds, the distance from the mid-plane of the blind to the adjacent glass (m). See
schematic above. Not used for between-glass blinds. As for window shades this distance is used in
calculating the natural convective air flow between glass and blind that is produced by buoyancy effects.
Slat Orientation
The choices are Horizontal and Vertical. Horizontal means the slats are parallel to the bottom of the window;
this is the same as saying that the slats are parallel to the X-axis of the window. Vertical means the slats are
parallel to Y-axis of the window.
Slat Width
The width of the slat measured from edge to edge.
Note: If the Blind is to be applied mid-pane then the gap between the inner pane and the second pane must
be at least large enough to accommodate the slat width. The gap thickness is defined by the Window gas
selected in the Glazing component.
- 856 -
Components
Slat Separation
The distance between the front of a slat and the back of the adjacent slat.
Slat Thickness
The distance between the faces of a slat.
Slat Angle
The angle (degrees) between the glazing outward normal and the slat outward normal, where the outward
normal points away from the front face of the slat (degrees).
Minimum Slat Angle

The minimum allowed slat angle (degrees). Used only if WindowProperty:ShadingControl (for the window that
incorporates this blind) varies the slat angle (i.e., the WindowProperty:ShadingControl has Type of Slat Angle
Control for Blinds =ScheduledSlatAngle or BlockBeamSolar). In this case, if the program tries to select a slat
angle less than Minimum Slat Angle it will be reset to Minimum Slat Angle. (Note that if the Minimum Slat
Angle itself is less than the minimum allowed by Slat Width, Slat Separation and Slat Thickness, it will be reset
to that minimum.)
Maximum Slat Angle

The maximum allowed slat angle (degrees). Used only if WindowProperty:ShadingControl (for the window that
incorporates this blind) varies the slat angle (i.e., the WindowProperty:ShadingControl has Type of Slat Angle
Control for Blinds = ScheduledSlatAngle or BlockBeamSolar). In this case, if the program tries to select a slat
angle greater than Maximum Slat Angle the slat angle will be reset to Maximum Slat Angle. (Note that if the
Maximum Slat Angle itself is greater than the maximum allowed by Slat Width, Slat Separation and Slat
Thickness, it will be reset to that maximum.)
Slat Conductivity
The thermal conductivity of the slat.
Slat Beam Solar Properties

Slat Beam Solar Transmittance
The beam solar transmittance of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence on the slat. Any
transmitted beam radiation is assumed to be 100% diffuse (i.e., slats are translucent).
Front Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance

The beam solar reflectance of the front side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence
(matte finish). This means that slats with a large specularly-reflective component (shiny slats) are not well
modelled.
Back Side Slat Beam Solar Reflectance

The beam solar reflectance of the back side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence
modelled.
Slat Diffuse Solar Properties

Slat Diffuse Solar Transmittance
The slat transmittance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This value should equal Slat Beam Solar
Transmittance.
Front Side Slat Diffuse Solar Reflectance

The front-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This value should equal Front Side
Slat Beam Solar Reflectance.
- 857 -
Back Side Slat Diffuse Solar Reflectance

The back-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse solar radiation. This value should equal Back Side
Slat Beam Solar Reflectance.
Slat Beam Visible Properties

Slat Beam Visible Transmittance
The beam visible transmittance of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence on the slat. Any
transmitted visible radiation is assumed to be 100% diffuse (i.e., slats are translucent).
Front Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance

The beam visible reflectance on the front side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence
modeled.
Back Side Slat Beam Visible Reflectance

The beam visible reflectance on the front side of the slat, assumed to be independent of angle of incidence
modeled.
Slat Diffuse Visible Properties

Slat Diffuse Visible Transmittance
The slat transmittance for hemispherically diffuse visible radiation. This value should equal
Slat Beam Visible Transmittance.
Front Side Slat Diffuse Visible Reflectance

The front-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse visible radiation. This value should equal Front Side
Slat Beam Visible Reflectance.
Back Side Slat Diffuse Visible Reflectance

The back-side slat reflectance for hemispherically diffuse visible radiation. This value should equal Back Side
Slat Beam Visible Reflectance..
Slat Infra Red Properties

Slat Infrared Hemispherical Transmittance
The slat Infrared transmittance. It is zero for solid metallic, wooden or glass slats, but may be non-zero in
some cases (e.g., thin plastic slats).
Front Side Slat Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Front-side hemispherical emissivity of the slat. Approximately 0.9 for most materials. The most common
exception is bare (unpainted) metal slats or slats finished with a metallic paint.
Back Side Slat Infrared Hemispherical Emissivity

Back-side hemispherical emissivity of the slat. Approximately 0.9 for most materials. The most common
exception is bare (unpainted) metal slats or slats finished with a metallic paint.
Openings
The openings data allows you to define the distance between the blind and the window and also define the
fraction of the blind surface that is open to air flow on each side of the blind. The following opening multipliers
are defined in the same way as for window shades. Note that, unlike window shades, there is no input for AirFlow Permeability; this is automatically calculated by the program from slat angle, width and separation.
- 858 -
Components
Blind Top Opening Multiplier

Defined as for Shades.
Blind Bottom Opening Multiplier

Blind Left-Side Opening Multiplier

Blind Right-Side Opening Multiplier

Window blinds - Shade data

Shade data tab on Window Blinds Dialog.
Shade blinds can be used for diffusing materials such as drapery and translucent roller shades. For slat-type
shading devices, like Venetian blinds, that have a strong angular dependence of transmission, absorption and
reflection, it is better to use the Slat option.
You can specify the properties of window shade materials. Reflectance and emissivity properties are assumed
to be the same on both sides of the shade. Shades are considered to be perfect diffusers (all transmitted and
reflected radiation is hemispherically-diffuse) with transmittance and reflectance independent of angle of
incidence. When in place, the shade is assumed to cover all of the glazed part of the window, including
dividers; it does not cover any of the window frame, if present. The plane of the shade is assumed to be
parallel to the glazing.
Transmittance and reflectance values for drapery material with different colour and openness of weave can be
obtained from manufacturers or determined from 2001 ASHRAE Fundamentals, Chapter 30, Fig. 31.
A diffusing blind can be applied 1-Inside, 2-Outside or 3-Mid-pane by selecting the appropriate Position on
the Openings tab.
Shade properties
Thickness
Thickness of the shade material (in m or in). If the shade is not flat, such as for pleated pull-down shades or
folded drapery, the average thickness normal to the plane of the shade should be used.
Tip: If you plan to apply the shade mid-pane then you should enter a very low thickness value such as
0.0001m. In this case, if the shade performs an important insulation function (as well as shading) then you
should adjust the conductivity accordingly. For example, in the case where the shade to be modelled is
actually 0.025m thick and has conductivity 0.040 W/m-K you should enter the thickness as 0.0001m and the
conductivity as 0.04 x (0.001 / 0.025) = 0.00016 W/m-K.
Conductivity
Shade material conductivity (in W/m-K or BTU-in/h-ft2-F).
Solar transmittance
Transmittance averaged over the solar spectrum. Assumed independent of incidence angle.
Solar reflectance
Reflectance averaged over the solar spectrum. Assumed same on both sides of shade and independent of
incidence angle.
- 859 -
Transmittance averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the human eye. Assumed
independent of incidence angle.
Visible reflectance
Reflectance averaged over the solar spectrum and weighted by the response of the human eye. Assumed
same on both side of shade and independent of incidence angle.
Thermal hemispherical emissivity

Effective long-wave emissivity. Assumed same on both sides of shade. We can approximate this effective
emissivity, eff, as follows. Let be the openness the shade, i.e., the ratio of
the area of openings in the shade to the overall shade area (see Air-Flow Permeability, below). Let the
emissivity of the shade material be . Then
eff .(1 )
For most non-metallic materials is about 0.9.
Thermal transmittance
Effective long-wave transmittance. Assumed independent of incidence angle. We can approximate this
effective long-wave transmittance, eff, as follows. Let be the openness the shade, i.e., the ratio of the
area of openings in the shade to the overall shade area. Let the long-wave transmittance of the shade
material be . Then
Teff +T.(1 )
For most materials is very close to zero, which gives
Teff
Openings
Shade to glass distance
Distance from shade to adjacent glass (in m or in). This is denoted by s in Figures below. If the shade is not
flat, such as for pleated pull-down shades or folded drapery, the average shade-to-glass distance should be
used. (The shade-to-glass distance is used in calculating the natural convective air flow between glass and
shade produced by buoyancy effects.). Note used for between-glass shades. In the following, H is the glazing
height and W is the glazing width.
Shade top opening multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the top of the shade divided by sW, the horizontal area between glass and shade
(see Figures below).
Shade bottom opening multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the bottom of the shade divided by sW, the horizontal area between glass and
shade (see Figures below).
Shade left-side opening multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the left side of the shade divided by sH, the vertical area between glass and
Shade right-side opening multiplier

Effective area for air flow at the right side of the shade divided by sH, the vertical area between glass and
Shade air-flow permeability

The fraction of the shade surface that is open to air flow, i.e., the total area of openings (holes) in the shade
surface divided by the shade area, HW. If air cannot pass through the shade material, Air-Flow Permeability =
0. For drapery fabric and screens the Air-Flow Permeability can be taken as the openness of the fabric (see
2001 ASHRAE Fundamentals, Chapter 30, Fig. 31), which is 0.0 to 0.07 for closed weave, 0.07 to 0.25 for
semi-open weave, and 0.25 and higher for open weave.
- 860 -
Components
Vertical section (a) and perspective view (b) of glass and interior shade layers showing variables used in the
gap air flow analysis. In (b), the air-flow opening areas Abot, Atop, Al, Ar and Ah are shown schematically.
See Engineering Manual for definition of thermal variables.
- 861 -
Examples of air-flow openings for an interior shade covering glass of height H and width W. Not to scale.
(a) Horizontal section through shade with openings on the left and right sides (top view).
(b) Vertical section through shade with openings at the top and bottom (side view).
In (a) Left-Side Opening Multiplier = Al /sH = min(l/s,1) and Right-Side Opening Multiplier = Ar /sH =
min(r/s,1). In (b) Top Opening
Multiplier = Atop /sW = t/s and Bottom Opening Multiplier = Abot /sW = b/s.
Window blinds - Electrochromic Switching

Electrochromic tab on Window Blinds Dialog.
Enter the electrochromic switchable pane material.
This pane will be used in place of the standard outer glazing pane according to the control data in the Model
Data.
More information on Electrochromic glazing.
Note: that the blind position in Openings Model Data must be 'Switchable' to use electrochromic switchable
shading
VENT COMPONENTS
Vent Components have a coefficient of discharge and a texture (used to represent a vent in the rendered
view). They can be selected from the Openings tab when the Calculated natural ventilation model option is
selected.
- 862 -
Components
More information about vents.

There are two tabs on the Vents dialog:
General
Airflow
Vent component data can be accessed:
by double-clicking on the vent icon on the Openings tab in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting vents from a list.
Vents - General
General tab on Vents Dialog.
Enter the name and category for this vent component.
The Zone Exhaust Fans category is a special category used with a corresponding Zone exhaust fan when
using Detailed HVAC with Calculated natural ventilation.
Note: Zone exhaust fan vents must be placed on external surfaces.
The texture is used to represent the vent in rendered views.
Vents - Airflow
Airflow tab on Vents Dialog.
Enter the discharge coefficient for this vent component. The velocity of the air moving through the vent is
given by the standard orifice equation:
Where:
v: Velocity
Cd: Discharge coefficient
P: Pressure either side of the vent
density of the air going through the opening
You can select this vent from the Openings model data.
Note: The discharge coefficient is only used in thermal simulations when the Natural ventilation Model option
is set to Calculated.
HOLIDAY SCHEDULE
A 'Holiday schedule' is a list of intervals of one or more day which identify the days the building may be
unoccupied. The holiday intervals are listed in order, with holidays most likely to be taken at the top of the list.
The Holidays per year Model data on the Activities tab at building level defines how many holidays are taken
and this 'Holiday schedule' defines which days are holidays. Days are selected from the top of the list working
downwards. The data is used to specify EnergyPlus 'SpecialDayPeriods'.
There are two tabs on the Holidays dialog:
- 863 -
General
List
Holiday data can be accessed:
by double-clicking on the holidays icon on the Activity tab in the model data,
by clicking on the Edit button when selecting holidays from a list.
Holiday Schedule - General

General tab on Holidays Dialog.
Enter the Region and Category for the Holiday Schedule.
Holiday Schedule - List

List tab on Holidays Dialog.
Holidays are selected from the top of the list, so holidays which are most likely to be taken should be defined
first (so they are positioned at the top of the list).
Use the controls in the Info panel to add, edit and delete holidays.
Valid holiday date formats are defined in Compact Schedules: EnergyPlus Date Definition
GROUND DOMAIN
Ground domain objects are defined at site level under the Site Details > Ground > Ground Domain headers.
They are selected at surface level on the Construction tab under the Ground Domain header.
Tabs on the dialog are:
"Ground Domain - General Tab" below

"Ground Domain - Soil" on page 867
"Ground Domain - Ground Surface Temperature" on page 868
"Ground Domain - Insulation" on page 868
Ground Domain - General Tab

General tab on Ground Domain Dialog
Name
Enter a unique name for the ground domain component.
Category
You can select 2 types of ground domain objects:
Slab is a horizontal slab sitting either on or just below ground level. Two types of the slabs can be
defined as shown below. Slabs are used to simulate ground coupled heat transfer with horizontal
building surfaces within EnergyPlus. Horizontal ground surfaces within EnergyPlus interact with the
slab ground domain objects by through connections made at surface level on the Construction tab. By
utilizing this object, multiple horizontal surfaces can be coupled to the same ground domain object.
Each horizontal surface may also have its unique ground domain, however, runtime will be adversely
affected in this case.
- 864 -
Components
Slab ground domain objects are equipped to model 2 different scenarios: in-grade slabs, and on-grade
slabs. This selection is made below under Slab.
In Grade Slab
- 865 -
On Grade Slab
Basement - underground wall and floor objects adjacent to the ground. Horizontal and vertical ground
insulation are simulated by the ground domain, and therefore should not be included in the wall and
floor construction objects.
Ground domain depth

Depth of the simulation domain (in m or ft).
Aspect ratio
For slab domains - The height to width ratio of the slab.
For basement domains - this is the of ratio basement length to width, used to determine the aspect ratio of
the basement. This field along with the total basement floor area, which is taken as the combination of all
surfaces connected to the floor of the basement, are used to determine the size and shape of the basement
domain. Aspect ratios and the inverse of aspect ratios should produce identical results. i.e. AR = 2 equals AR
= 0.5.
Perimeter offset
The distance from the slab/basement perimeter to the domain perimeter (in m or ft).
Evapo-transpiration ground cover parameter

Numeric field specifies the ground cover effects used in the evapo-transpiration model at the ground surface
heat balance. The values range from 0 (solid, non-permeable ground surface) to 1.5 (wild growth).
Simulation timestep
Selection indicating whether the domain will update temperatures at each zone timestep, or at hourly intervals.
Options are:
1-Hourly
- 866 -
Components
2-Timestep
Slab
Slab location
Alpha field indicates whether the slab is in-grade (top surface level with ground surface) or on-grade (bottoms
surface level with ground surface). Options include:
1-On grade which is used to simulate situations where the lower slab surface is near the ground
surface level. In this situation, the entire floor must be included within the floor construction object.
Vertical insulation is modelled by the Ground domain in this scenario. Horizontal insulation can only be
modelled as covering the full horizontal surface.
2-In grade which is used to simulate situations when the upper slab surface is near the ground surface
level. For this situation, slabs upper surface must interact with the zone via a boundary which is
specified at surface level. Because of this, the Floor construction object for the zone floor surface must
include a thin layer of the upper floor material. Horizontal and vertical insulation are modelled by the
Ground domain in this scenario. Horizontal insulation can be modelled as covering the full horizontal
surface, or it can be limited to the perimeter regions only. In the latter case, the perimeter insulation
width must be specified.
Slab material
Select the material component representing the slab material thermal properties. Only required for in-grade
situations.
Thickness
Thickness of the slab (in m or ft). Only required for in-grade situations.
Basement
Basement depth
Depth of basement floor surface referenced from the ground surface (in m or ft). This domain should be the
distance from the ground surface down to the basement floor surface. In cases where the ground surface is
below the main above-ground building level, a separate wall surface should be employed between the
basement walls and the main level walls.
Mesh density parameter

Integer field indicating the density of the finite difference ground domain cells between the basement and the
far field boundaries. Default value is 4. Total number of ground domain cells, insulation cells, and ground
surface cells are indicated as outputs to the eio file.
Ground Domain - Soil

Soil tab on Ground Domain Dialog
Soil Thermal Properties

Soil material
Select the material used to define the soil thermal properties.
Soil Moisture Content

Moisture and freezing effects are accounted for within EnergyPlus during the simulation by varying the specific
heat value.
- 867 -
Soil moisture content volume fraction

A nominal value of soil moisture content to be used when evaluating soil thermal properties.
Soil moisture content volume fraction at saturation

A nominal value of soil moisture content when the soil is saturated, this is used in evaluating thermal
properties of freezing soil.
Ground Domain - Ground Surface Temperature

Ground Surface Temperature tab on Ground Domain Dialog.
Kusuda-Achebach Correlation
Use Kusuda-Achebach correlation
Check this option if the Kusuda-Achebach correlation is to be used. If this option is not selected then data
from the Ground shallow temperatures are used.
Kusuda-Achebach average surface temperature

The annual average surface temperature to be applied to the Kusuda-Achenbach farfield boundary
temperature correlation (in C or F)
Kusuda-Achebach average amplitude of surface temperature

The annual mean surface temperature variation from average used in determining the farfield boundary
condition (in DeltaC or DeltaF)
Kusuda-Achenbach phase shift of minimum surface temperature

The phase shift of minimum surface temperature, or the day of the year when the minimum surface
temperature occurs (in days).
Ground Domain - Insulation

Insulation tab on Ground Domain Dialog.
Horizontal Insulation
Horizontal insulation is only applicable to in-grade situations.
Include horizontal insulation

Checkbox indicates whether horizontal insulation is present.
Horizontal insulation material

Where horizontal insulation is present, select the material representing the horizontal slab insulation thermal
properties.
Horizontal insulation extents

Droplist selection indicating whether the horizontal slab insulation extends to cover the full horizontal area of
the slab, or only covers the slab perimeter. Optional argument only required if horizontal insulation is present.
Options are:
1-Full and
2- Perimeter
Perimeter insulation width

Numeric field indicating the width of the perimeter insulation measured from the slab edge (in m or ft). Valid
range is from > 0 to < 0.5 x smallest slab width.
- 868 -
Components
Vertical Insulation
Include horizontal insulation
Checkbox indicates whether vertical insulation is present.
Vertical insulation
Material representing the vertical slab insulation. Only required if vertical insulation is present.
Vertical insulation depth

The depth measured (in m or ft) from the ground surface to which the vertical perimeter insulation extends.
Valid range is from > Slab thickness to < Domain depth.
- 869 -
Templates
Templates
DesignBuilder templates allow you to quickly load data into your model in bulk. If you often work with similar
types of buildings you may find it useful to create your own templates. This will allow you to load the same
data into any models you work with in the future.
DesignBuilder Templates are databases of typical generic data. The following templates are available:
Activity templates
Construction templates
Glazing templates
Facade templates
HVAC templates
Location Templates
Hourly weather data
Pressure coefficients
Metabolic rates
Cracks
Legislative regions
Energy codes
Sectors
World time zones (predefined, not editable)
Library Templates are loaded into the model at the time the dsb file is created and from then on, they are
associated specifically with this model and so are known as Model Templates. Any changes made to the
Library Templates do not affect existing building models because they reference their own set of Model
Templates. The latest set of library templates can be loaded into a model using the Import library components
and templates to model command.
Also templates are used for loading data into models, so a change to a template will not affect the model
until the data is loaded.
Note: Templates are loaded to the model in the same way that components are so that any edit to Model
template data will be associated with that model only.
Managing template data

You can edit and move template data around in various ways:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Add, Edit, Delete, Import and Export Template library data from the Opening Screen - Template
Libraries tab.
If a model file is loaded you can edit Model templates from the Templates tab in the Navigator panel
(Learning mode switched off) or by using the Data management panel on the right of the screen
(Learning mode switched on).
In either case, to add a template, open up the template type you wish to define by clicking on the + to
the left of the template icon, then click on the category of template you wish to define. Now click on the
Green '+' to add a template of the selected category.
Import/export Model template using the File > Export > Library data menu command to create a .ddf
file with the .dsb model file open.
To import the previously exported Model template data to the Template library close the .dsb file and
import the .ddf file to the library.
Load the latest library templates into your model using the Import library components and templates
to model command from the Tools menu when a model is loaded. Any new data that has been added
to the library since the model file was created will be imported to the model. Also if there have been any
changes to library template data, this new data will overwrite the original data.
- 871 -
Note: Any template you add while a model is open will be added to Model templates and not to the Template
library. It will only be added to the library and hence to new models if you export the new component model
data in .ddf form and import the .ddf file to the library before creating the new model.
Note: As well as importing DDF files created directly by DesignBuilder more advanced users can also create
their own component and template data sets (outside DesignBuilder) for importing. See the Importing Custom
Loading to Model Data

Each tab in the Model data has the name of the template last used to load the data at the top (shown in bold).
At the top of the HVAC tab is the HVAC Template, at the top of the Lighting tab is the Lighting Template etc.
This is the template that was previously used to load the default data, but you can load different data from a
different template by clicking on the template data, then clicking again on the '... to the right of the template
data and making a new selection. When you make the selection, the appropriate data is loaded from the
template into the model.
Note 1: It is important to understand that the template data itself does not contribute to the model until it is
loaded in.
Note 2: Changes to the model data relative to the data in the template last loaded are highlighted in bold to
show that it overrides the template data previously loaded.
Note 3: Another way to load data to a model from templates is to use the Load Data From Template tool.
Colour codes
Templates are coded by colour in all selection lists as follows:
Red shows user data, i.e. data that was not supplied by DesignBuilder.
Green indicates that the data is derived from a reputable national or international source (e.g.
ASHRAE, CIBSE).
Blue indicates that the data is generated internally by DesignBuilder.
Black is used for all other data.
See also Model Data Colour.
ACTIVITY TEMPLATES
Activity templates are used as a source of default activity (building usage) data for building models.
The data covers occupancy, equipment usage and suitable design internal temperatures, illuminance levels
and ventilation rates per person.
There are five tabs on the Activity Template dialog:
General
All gains
Occupancy
- 872 -
Templates
Other gains
Environmental
Activity Templates - General

General tab on Activity Templates Dialog.
Enter the name, category, sector and region for this activity template.
Enter the region as 'General' if you want the data to be generally available (i.e. not restricted to a particular
region).
The floor shade colour is used to shade the floor of the model at block and zone levels to give a quick
indication of the usage of the building in various areas.
Activity Templates - All Gains

All Gains tab on Activity Templates Dialog.
The lumped gains into the space from people, equipment, lights etc.
Data on this tab is only used when the Gains option is set to 'Lumped'.
Activity Templates - Occupancy

Occupancy tab on Activity Templates Dialog.
Occupancy levels and times, metabolic activity on this tab is used when the 'Gains' option is set to 'Early' or
'Detailed'.
Set the metabolic rate according to the level of activity within the space. The metabolic factor accounts for
people of various sizes. Enter 1.00 for men, 0.85 for women, 0.75 for children, or you can use an average
value if there is a mix of sizes.
The Workday profile is used when the 'Timing' option is set to 'Typical workday' and the Schedule data is used
when the Timing option is set to '7/12 Schedules'.
Activity Templates - Other Gains

Other Gains tab on Activity Templates Dialog.
Data on this tab is used when the 'Gains' option is set to 'Early'. DHW Data is always used.
The default gains into the space from computers, office equipment, catering, process and miscellaneous
equipment for this activity.
Also hot water consumption rate per person per day and the operation schedules are defined here.
Activity Templates - DHW

Enter the Domestic Hot Water (DHW) volumetric consumption per unit of floor area per day and the operation
schedule.
In DesignBuilder the amount of DHW consumed is considered to be a function of the activity. For example,
there is a demand assumed to arise from the occupants of an office for activities such as washing hands and
washing up cups. This demand is associated with the office rather than the toilet or tea room. Thus the
- 873 -
demand from each space needs to be assigned to a DHW system even if the system itself is not present in
the space.
Activity Templates - Environmental/Comfort

Environmental tab on Activity Templates Dialog.
Enter the data related to the environmental and comfort requirements of this activity:
Heating set-point temperature (if the space is heated).

Cooling set-point temperature (if the spaces cooled).
Ventilation set-point temperature
Illuminance levels required.
Fresh air levels required per person - defines mechanical ventilation air change rates.
If there is never any heating or cooling, you can leave these set-points.
See Environmental Control under Activity Model Data for more details.
CONSTRUCTION TEMPLATES
Construction templates are used as a source of generic construction data for loading into building models.
The template provides data on the construction of external walls, roofs, floors, partitions, roofs etc and airtightness data.
There are four tabs on the Construction template dialog:
General
Simple
Standard
Airtightness
Construction Templates - General

General tab on Construction Templates Dialog.
Enter the name, source, category and region for this construction template.
Construction Templates - Simple

Simple tab on Construction Templates Dialog.
Data on this tab is used when the Construction model detail is set to Pre-design.
Enter default levels of insulation and thermal mass for this construction type.
Construction Templates - Walls

Walls tab on Construction Templates Dialog.
Data on this tab is used when the Construction model detail is set to Pre-design or General (i.e. it is always
used).
- 874 -
Templates
Select default walls, partitions for exposed and semi-exposed surfaces for this Constructions template.
You can also select the external and internal wall sub-surface constructions here.
Construction Templates - Roofs/Floors/Slabs/Ceilings

Roofs/Floors/Slabs/Ceilings tab on Construction Templates Dialog.
used).
Select default constructions for roofs, floors, slabs and ceiling surfaces for this Constructions template.
You can also select the roof sub-surface construction here.
Construction Templates - Doors

Doors tab on Construction Templates Dialog.
used).
Select default door constructions for internal and external doors for this Constructions template.
You can also select the external and internal wall sub-surface constructions here.
Construction Templates - Airtightness

Airtightness tab on Construction Templates Dialog.
Cracks template
The Cracks template setting indicates the Cracks data template to use as a source for crack data when the
Calculated Natural ventilation model option is selected.
Infiltration
The default infiltration rate used when the 'Natural ventilation' model detail level is 'Simple'.
Construction Templates - Thermal mass

Thermal mass tab on Construction Templates Dialog.
used).
Enter the default thermal mass construction for this construction template.
See Internal Thermal Mass for more information on defining thermal mass in a model.
GLAZING TEMPLATES
Glazing templates are used as a source of default glazing, frame and shading construction data for building
models.
There are three tabs on the Glazing Template dialog:
General
Glazing
Shading
- 875 -
Glazing Templates - General

General tab on Glazing Templates Dialog.
Enter the name, category and region for this glazing template.
region). Glazing templates with category '<System>' have their data set up at the time a file is created or when
the Legislative region is changed.
Glazing Templates - Glazing

Glazing tab on Glazing Templates Dialog.
Enter data on the glazing construction, frame and opening area for external glazing, internal glazing and roof
glazing.
Glazing Templates - Shading

Shading tab on Glazing Templates Dialog.
Select any shading devices to be applied when this glazing templates is loaded to the model.
FACADE TEMPLATES (TYPES)

Facade templates are used to provide a choice of typical simple facade layouts and frame definitions which
can be easily loaded into a building model.
There are two tabs on the Facade Template dialog:
General
Openings
Facade Templates - General

General tab on Facade Templates Dialog.
Enter the name and category for this Facade Template.
Facade Templates - Openings

Openings tab on Facade Templates Dialog.
Enter the glazing and frame data for the facade. There are a number of standard facade types:
- 876 -
Templates
None - there is no glazing.

Continuous horizontal - glazing is generated in a continuous horizontal strip using sill height and %
glazing.
Fixed height - glazing is generated with a fixed height at the specified sill height, and width is calculated
based on the % glazing. This option uses % glazing but prioritises window height.
Preferred height - glazing is generated using the window height data and the % glazing, but the window
height may be adjusted to achieve the required % glazing. This option uses window and sill height but
prioritises % glazing.
Fixed width and height - windows have fixed width and height. This option uses % glazing but
prioritises window width and height.
Fill surface (100%) - the entire surface is filled with glazing and there is no frame.
If the glazing does not have a frame, uncheck the 'Has a frame?' box.
LIGHTING TEMPLATES
Lighting templates data sets are used as a source of generic lighting systems for loading into the building
data.
There are three tabs on the Lighting Template dialog:
General
Output
Control
Lighting Templates - General

General tab on Lighting Templates Dialog.
Enter the name, category and region for this Lighting Template.
region).
See also Building Model Lighting Data for more information on the use of this template data in the model.
Lighting Templates - Output

Output tab on Lighting Templates Dialog.
Enter the lighting energy for task and general lighting in W/m2/100 lux (W/ft2/100 lux). This data is used for
setting up the actual Lighting energy W/m2 data in each zone using:
Lighting energy (W/m2) = Lighting (W/m2/100 lux) x Design lux level (Activity tab) / 100
Substitute ft2 for m2 for equation in IP units.
The 'Output' data is used for generating default lighting loads based on lighting type and required illuminance
levels as set in Activity data.
- 877 -
See General Lighting under Building Model Lighting Data for more information on the use of this template data
in the model.
Lighting Templates - Control

Control tab on Lighting Templates Dialog.
If the lighting is to be controlled by the availability of natural daylight, check the 'control' option box and select
the type of control.
Continuous Control
For 'continuous' control, the overhead lights dim continuously and linearly from maximum electric power,
maximum light output to minimum electric power, minimum light output as the daylight illuminance increases.
The lights stay at the minimum point with further increase in the daylight illuminance.
The minimum input power fraction for 'continuous' control type is the lowest power the lighting system can dim
down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum input power. For 'continuous/off' lighting control, this is the
power fraction reached just before the light switch off completely.
The minimum output fraction for 'continuous' control type, is the lowest lighting output the lighting system can
dim down to, expressed as a fraction of maximum light output. This is the fractional light output that the
system produces at minimum input power. For 'continuous/off' lighting control, this is the power fraction
reached just before the light switch off completely.
Continuous/Off Control
'Continuous/off' control is the same as continuous control except that the lights switch off completely when the
minimum dimming point is reached.
Stepped Control
For 'stepped' control, the electric power input and light output vary in discreet, equally spaced steps. The
number of steps can be set.
- 878 -
Templates
HVAC TEMPLATES
HVAC templates data sets are used as a source of generic heating/cooling and ventilation systems for loading
into the building data.
There are four tabs on the HVAC Template dialog:
General
Ventilation
System
Air temperature distribution
HVAC Templates - General

General tab on HVAC Templates Dialog.
Enter the name, category, sector and region for this HVAC template.
region).
The floor shade colour is used to shade the floor of the model at block and zone levels to give a quick
indication of the system type fitted in various areas.
HVAC Templates - Ventilation

Ventilation tab on HVAC Templates Dialog.
Enter the maximum natural/mechanical ventilation rates as appropriate.
HVAC Templates - System Heating/Cooling

System tab on HVAC Templates Dialog.
The data on this tab is divided into 'System' (i.e. whole system data), 'Heating' and 'Cooling'.
- 879 -
Auxiliary energy - defines the energy consumption of fans, pumps and other auxiliary equipment when using
the 'Simple' HVAC model option. This energy is assumed to be consumed during periods when either heating
or cooling systems are operating.
Type - defines the EnergyPlus compact system type when the 'Compact' HVAC model option is set. Select
from:
Unitary single zone - for modelling 'window' air conditioning units and any other system which does not
use ducted air
Unitary multizone - for modelling constant volume air conditioning systems.
VAV - for modelling variable air volume air conditioning systems.
When using the VAV compact system type you can define the system in more detail using:
Outside air control type - select either 'Fixed' or 'Proportional'. 'Fixed means that the minimum outside
air flow rate is fixed no matter what the actual system flow rate is. Proportional means the minimum
outside air flow rate varies in proportion to the total system air flow rate.
Supply air min flow fraction - is the fraction that the zone VAV box can reduce to based on the supply
air maximum flow rate.
Heating/cooling system CoP is the whole system seasonal coefficient of performance including distribution
losses when using the 'Simple' HVAC model option.
Boiler/chiller CoP is the seasonal coefficient of performance of the boiler/chiller, excluding any energy
consumption by fans, pumps etc and excluding distribution losses..
HVAC Templates - Air Temperature Distribution

Air temperature distribution tab on HVAC Templates Dialog.
By default EnergyPlus assumes that air temperature within a zone is completely uniform (i.e. the air is fully
mixed). The data on this tab allows you to set up a temperature gradient which varies dynamically depending
on:
Outside temperature.
Inside temperature.
Inside-outside temperature difference.
Heating load.
Cooling load.
See Air Temperature Distribution for more information on defining vertical zone temperature profiles
(temperature gradients).
LOCATION TEMPLATES
Location Templates are a database of locations from around the world based on ASHRAE design weather
data including daylight savings.
Each Location data set is located within a 'Legislative Region'. Most Regions in Europe include some basic
data on the energy codes which apply.
There are four tabs on the Location Template dialog:
Location
Winter design weather
Summer design weather
Simulation weather
- 880 -
Templates
Location Templates - Location

Location tab on Location Templates Dialog.
DesignBuilder Location Templates are located within 'Legislative Regions'. Most regions in Europe include
some basic data on the energy codes which apply.
Location Templates - Winter Design Weather

Winter design weather tab on Location Templates Dialog.
The weather data used in winter design calculations is:
Minimum outside dry-bulb temperature

Co-incident wind speed and direction.
There are options for 99.6 or 99% confidence (i.e. 0.4 or 1% chance of more extreme winter weather
occurring).
Location Templates - Summer Design Weather

Summer design weather tab on Location Templates Dialog.
The weather data used in summer design calculations is:
Maximum outside dry-bulb temperature

Minimum outside dry-bulb temperature
Wet-bulb temperature at the time of the maximum dry-bulb temperature.
Risk can be specified based on dry or wet-bulb temperatures, for 99.6, 99 and 98% confidence (i.e. 0.4, 1 or
2% chance of more extreme weather occurring).
Location Templates - Simulation Weather

Simulation weather tab on Location Templates Dialog.
DesignBuilder will only use hourly weather data for simulations (winter and summer design calculations use
design weather data).
You can add your own Hourly Weather data.
CRACK TEMPLATES
Crack data is used when the 'Calculated' natural ventilation option is set. In this case every surface in the
model has a crack and its size (characterised by flow coefficient and exponent) is determined by Airtightness
as set on the Constructions tab in the Model Data. The value of Airtightness is used as a key to look up
corresponding crack sizes in the Cracks database.
The cracks database has been set up empirically to give typical air change rates for each of the five
Airtightness categories in a range of building types.
There are five tabs on the Crack Template data dialog:
General
Openings
- 881 -
Walls
Floors/ceilings
Roofs
A source of information on crack data from AIVC is Numerical Data for Air Infiltration & Natural Ventilation
Calculations.
Crack Templates - General

General tab on Crack Templates Dialog.
Tab contains the name and category of the crack template.
Crack Templates - Openings

Openings tab on Crack Templates Dialog.
Enter the characteristics of the cracks around internal and external windows, vents and doors.
Note that the opening crack characteristics are normalised by opening perimeter lengths.
Crack Templates - Walls

Walls tab on Crack Templates Dialog.
In reality the porosity of walls is caused by a very large number of small cracks and holes.
DesignBuilder models this porosity using a single equivalent crack. Enter the characteristics this equivalent
single crack for internal and external walls.
Note that the crack characteristics are normalised by surface area.
Crack Templates - Floors/Ceilings

Floors/Ceilings tab on Crack Templates Dialog.
In reality the porosity of floors is caused by a very large number of small cracks and holes.
single crack for internal and external floors.
Crack Templates - Roofs

Roofs tab on Crack Templates Dialog.
In reality the porosity of roofs is caused by a very large number of small cracks and holes.
single crack for roofs.
LEGISLATIVE REGION TEMPLATES

A Legislative region in DesignBuilder is typically a whole country or a region, province or state within a country
which has its own building control powers.
In current versions of the software a Legislative Region contains information on:
Local energy codes/building regulations.

Carbon dioxide emission factors are provided for a range of fuels.
- 882 -
Templates
The current regions database is only sparsely populated with useful data (most of that is from countries within
Europe). But we expect to expand this in time.
There are three tabs on the Legislative Region Template dialog:
General
Standard insulation
Emissions
Legislative Region Templates - General

General tab on Legislative Region Templates Dialog.
Enter the name of the Legislative region, the category (country) and a description of the Region.
Legislative Region Templates - Standard Insulation

Standard insulation tab on Legislative Region Templates Dialog.
Data on this type specifies 4 standard insulation levels which apply to this region:
Uninsulated - typical U-values for buildings in the region which are not insulated
Stock average - Average (estimated) insulation standards for real buildings in the region. This data is
used in some asset rating calculations.
Mandatory energy code - Defines the maximum U-values allowed in the energy code/building
regulations in force in the region.
Best practice - Defines the U-values to be expected in a state-of-the-art building in the region.
The data on this tab indicates the required maximum U-values.
Legislative Region Templates - Emissions

Emissions tab on Legislative Region Templates Dialog.
The factors on this tab define the amount of carbon dioxide emitted per unit of energy consumed for each of
the major fuel types in the region. The CO2 emission factors depend on the mix of technology used to
generated the electricity, the quality of the fuel and other factors such as production carbon cost.
CO2 emissions are calculated in DesignBuilder by multiplying fuel consumption by the kg CO2 per kWh
conversion factor for that fuel. Conversion factors can be made specific to the region by going to the site level
and Region tab and changing the data for the region. Youll need to copy the default region first, edit the copy
and select the copy as DesignBuilder library data cannot be edited. Recent CO2 conversion factors are
provided with the installation for some European countries but you should check values used and if necessary
enter specific values as described above.
Carbon emission factors are provided for the following fuel types. Default values provided in the DesignBuilder
database for most locations are also included.
Fuel
Electricity
Gas
Oil
Solid
Bottled gas
Other (typically biomass)
Default kg CO2 / kWh factor

0.685
0.195
0.273
0.34
0.195
0.025
- 883 -
ENERGY CODE TEMPLATES

Energy code data is used within DesignBuilder to indicate the mandatory energy performance of building
components and/or the whole building.
There are three types of heat transmission code:
1. Envelope component performance
2. Whole building envelope performance
3. Whole building energy performance
You can define the type of energy code by making selections on the next 3 tabs.
If this energy code requires for example that minimum component perforance and whole building energy
performance then check both these options.
Energy Code Templates - General

General tab on Energy Code Templates Dialog.
Enter a name and description of this Energy code.
Energy Code Templates - Envelope (component)

Envelope (component) tab on Energy Code Templates Dialog.
Specifies mandatory maximum U-values through the individual components (walls, windows, roofs etc.).
The data on this tab indicates the required maximum U-values.
Energy Code Templates - Envelope (building)

Envelope (building) tab on Energy Code Templates Dialog.
Sets a limit on the rate of heat transfer through the overall building envelope. The limit is typically set as an
average U-value for the overall building envelope.
Energy Code Templates - Energy Performance

Energy performance tab on Energy Code Templates Dialog.
Sets a limit on the rate of heat transfer through the overall building envelope. The limit is typically set as an
average U-value for the overall building envelope.
SECTOR TEMPLATES
Sectors are used to categorise buildings according to their use/activity.
A sector is located within a legislative region and can only be accessed if the building is situated within the
region containing the sector.
The 'General' sector is an exception to this rule as it can be accessed from all regions if the 'List region data'
Program Options setting is 'All or 'General+Local'.
You can also associate a holiday schedule with the sector.
- 884 -
Templates
TIMES ZONE TEMPLATES

DesignBuilder comes with a database of all of the world's time zones including information on daylight
savings. This data is sourced from ASHRAE.
If the time zone does not have daylight saving then the text N/A is entered in the Daylight saving from field.
The time zone is selected in model data under Time and Daylight Saving on the Location tab at site level.
Note: you can override daylight savings to be off in the model data by unchecking the Use daylight saving.
WIND PRESSURE COEFFICIENT TEMPLATES

Wind pressure coefficients are used when Natural ventilation model option is set to 'Calculated'. The
EnergyPlus Airflow Network calculations use pressure coefficients when calculating wind-induced pressure on
each surface during simulations when the Calculated Natural ventilation option is selected.
DesignBuilder is supplied with a database of wind pressure coefficients based on data from Martin Liddament,
Air Infiltration Calculation Techniques, An Applications Guide, AIVC. The Cp data is buildings of 3 storeys or
less, with square surfaces and for 3 levels of site exposure. The data is given in 45 increments.
Another source of information on wind pressure coefficients from AIVC is Numerical Data for Air Infiltration &
Natural Ventilation Calculations.
Note: The AIVC wind pressure coefficient data provides a good first level of approximation for basic design
purposes. However, ideally you would override this default data with pressure coefficient data specific to your
application. This data might be calculated from CFD simulations or measured from wind tunnel studies using
physical models.
- 885 -
Visualisation
Visualisation
The Visualisation screen allows you to view the model in full 3-D rendered mode. This section describes the
process of creating and controlling rendered images.
From the Visualisation screen you can export rendered images in various formats and also generate AVI
movies of the scene.
To render a model, click on the Visualisation tab:
which takes you to the Visualisation screen:
- 887 -
VISUALISATION CONTROLS
The following controls are available to customise the view:
View Rotation
Orbit
Zoom
Fit view
Pan view
Zoom window
Controls are also provided to customise the rendered image:
Show shadows
Antialiasing
Show north arrow
Dynamics
These controls are accessed from the Display Options panel on the Visualisation screen:
Show shadows, Time, Day, Month

Display options on Visualisation screen
You can incorporate solar shading within the rendered model view by switching the Show shadows check
box on and then clicking on the Apply button:
- 888 -
Visualisation
After clicking on the Apply button, a progress control appears to inform of shadow generation and then the
view is updated:
- 889 -
If you want to look at more detailed shading, you can include the window frame dividers in the shading
calculations by checking the Show window frame shadows check box and clicking the Apply button:
- 890 -
Visualisation
Period
The month, day and time-of-day can be controlled using the controls under the Period header. Note that the
time specified here is local mean time excluding any daylight saving. You can account for daylight saving time
by adding 1 hour to the local mean time during summer months to see shading for clock time.
Note: Time is defined in decimal hours, e.g. '10.5' is the same as 10:30 a.m..
In the screenshot below the time has been changed to 10:00 and the shadows adjust accordingly.
- 891 -
Show north arrow

Use this control to switch the display of the North direction arrow on or off.
Sunpath
You can display a Sunpath diagram for the building at its current location by checking the Show Sunpath
diagram Display option and pressing the Apply button. This will display a Sunpath diagram similar to that
shown below.
- 892 -
Visualisation
The Sunpath diagram provided in DesignBuilder can be a very useful way to view the paths taken by the sun
as it moves through the sky at all times of the year.
Sunpath diagram scale factor

There is an option to override the default scale factor applied to the Sunpath diagram. With a scale factor of 1
the Sunpath diagram fits snugly round the building. The default scale factor is 1.5.
Sunpath day of month

By default DesignBuilder uses the first day of the month when generating the sunpath lines for each month of
the year. This option allows you to use any other day of the month from 1 to 28.
Change solar position tool
When both the Show Sunpath diagram and Show shadows Display options are set, the Change solar
position tool becomes available. This allows you to move the sun around the diagram. To do this first click on
the Change solar position toolbar icon (above). When this tool is active the cursor become a cross and you
can use it to click on a junction of time/month sunpath lines to set the new solar position. You can continue to
move the sun around the sky by clicking on the diagram in the same way. An alternative way to use this tool is
to drag the sun around the sky. You will notice that the Time of day and Month data in the Display options
panel are updated along with shadows as the sun moves through the sky.
When you have finished press the <Escape> key to return to Select mode.
Tip: You can use the Sunpath diagram with the Create movie tool to show the sun moving through the sky for
the current design month. To do this select the 2-Shading for design day option on the Movie options data
dialog box
Antialiasing
- 893 -
The antialiasing option can be used to improve image quality. You may need to experiment with antialiasing to
confirm whether or not the graphics card fitted to your computer will facilitate this feature - with some earlier
cards, antialiasing can be very slow.
Tip: more advanced graphics cards can provide hardware antialiasing and in this case this software
antialiasing option may only provide marginal benefit.
To enable antialiasing, switch the Antialiasing check box on and click on the Apply button:
You can improve the quality of the image using the Increasing Quality slider control:
- 894 -
Visualisation
Bear in mind that as you increase image quality, the display speed will decrease.
Dynamics
Display option on Visualisation screen
With larger and more complex models, orbit and zoom control speed can be increased very significantly by
selecting 'Wireframe' from the 'Dynamics' control drop list.
Visualisation Limitations
Visualisations are based on the same model as that used for the calculations but you may notice some slight
differences in the way the model is displayed vis-a-vis the floor constructions and Zone volume calculation
options.
1.
2.
3.
DesignBuilder uses a single floor 'slab' for each block even when some floors in the block may
have different constructions. This is done for simplicity and also to ensure the most realistic images
are produced without step changes in the floor level throughout the block. So there is only limited
scope for adjusting the height of floor level in the visualisation.
Where there is external floor and internal floor in the same block you will notice that the internal
floor slab used to represent the floor in the rendered view is the same no matter what settings are
used in the Zone volume options. You will also notice that the floor slab takes on the texture of the
internal floor even for areas of the floor that are actually external floor and may have a different
texture.
Where the Ground floor construction is below ground and is not subtracted from zone
volume option is selected, the top of the ground floor will be shown in the visualisation screen as
being at ground level - this is consistent with the data. However you will not be able to see the
ground construction below the ground if you adjust the camera level to be below ground.
CREATING MOVIES
- 895 -
When on the Visualisation or CFD screens you can create AVI movies of your model. To create a video file
from a rendered view, click on the Generate AVI movie tool which opens the Movie options data dialog box:
Use the Type drop list to select either:
1-Orbit - 360 orbit movie. This option generates a series of images, one for each angular Orbit
increment and then allows you stitch them together to create an AVI file.
2-Shading for design day - fixed camera position, varying the solar position over the design day as
specified on the Visualisation Display options panel.
Tip: The 2-Shading for design day option works particularly well with the Sunpath diagram displayed
Click on the OK button to generate the movie. After the movie generation has completed, a file save dialogue
will be displayed to allow you to save the movie file to any required location.
Note: smaller Shading time increments and Orbit increments can generate a lot of data and take a long
time to complete movie generation, especially for large models when software antialiasing is switched on.
- 896 -
Calculations
Calculations
There are four types of energy simulation:
Heating design simulation

Cooling design simulation
Simulation using hourly weather data (simply referred to as 'simulation' in DesignBuilder
documentation)
Calculate - for SBEM and Portuguese IEE calculations.
CFD
Daylighting
Cost and Carbon
Display Options in the Panel in the bottom left of the screen allow you to change the data displayed and the
presentation style.
Results can be exported in a variety of file formats or they can added as a Report topic.
HEATING DESIGN CALCULATION

Heating design calculations are carried out to determine the size of heating equipment required to meet the
coldest winter design weather conditions likely to be encountered at the site location. These design
calculations are traditionally carried out using steady-state methods such as those offered by ASHRAE and
CIBSE. You can use DesignBuilder to carry out effectively the same calculation using the EnergyPlus
dynamic thermal simulation engine.
Click on the Heating design Screen tab to view Heating Design data. If the necessary data has not yet been
generated, a Heating Design calculation is automatically started to generate the data.
See also the Heating Design Calculations Tutorial
Heating design simulations using EnergyPlus have the following characteristics:
Constant (Steady-state) external temperature set to the winter design external temperature.
Wind speed and direction set to design values.
No solar gain.
No internal gains (lighting, equipment, occupancy etc).
Heated zones are heated constantly to achieve the heating temperature set point using a simple
convective heating system.
Includes consideration of heat conduction and convection between zones of different temperatures.
Schedules are not used for Heating design calculations which are based on a steady state analysis
which does not account for timing.
Simulation continues until temperatures/heat flows in each zone have converged. If convergence does not
occur then simulation continues for the maximum number of days as specified in the calculation options.
The simulation calculates heating capacities required to maintain the temperature set points in each zone and
displays the total heat loss broken down as:
Glazing
Walls
Partitions
Solid floors
Roofs
- 897 -
External infiltration
Internal natural ventilation (i.e. heat lost to other cooler adjacent spaces through windows, vents, doors,
holes)
The total heat loss in each zone is multiplied by a Safety factor (1.5 by default) to give a recommended
heating Design Capacity. This heating capacity can be written directly into the Heating capacity model data
depending on the setting of the Plant sizing model option on the Data tab under HVAC.
Customise the data displayed and display style using the Display Options panel.
Note: heating design calculations do not use any Natural ventilation data.
EnergyPlus IDF data

You can view the EnergyPlus IDF data used to carry out the calculation by clicking on the 'View the input data'
link in the info panel (Learning mode only) or from the Tools menu.
Heating Design Calculation options

These calculation options can be accessed from the Heating design calculation options tab of the Model
Options dialog and from the Heating design calculation options dialog.
Calculation Options
Heating system sizing
Calculation description
Click on the OK button to start the Heating design calculation.
Reviewing Heating Design Output

You can review heating design output in 2 ways:
Heat loss breakdown - on the Steady State tab.

Summary table - heating capacity data for each zone on the Summary tab.
To update the data using different calculation options, click Update (Ctrl-U).
The General tab on the Display Options panel provides options for controlling the data displayed in the
Heating design data display screen. General Display Options are grouped under three headers:
Data - control the data displayed.

Y-axis - for customising the layout of the Y-axis.
Appearance - for customising the style and appearance of the graphics.
The Detailed tab on the Display Options panel provides controls which allow you to select exactly the data
items you wish to display.
Data Options
Data
Select an option to indicate the data you wish to display:
- 898 -
Calculations
1-All - fabric and ventilation heat gains/losses, internal gains (not Heating Design), temperatures and
outside dry-bulb air temperature.
2-Site data - all site data.
3-Comfort - inside air, the radiant and comfort temperatures.
4-Internal gains - internal gains including equipment, lighting, occupancy, solar and HVAC
heating/cooling delivery.
5-Fabric and ventilation - heat gains to the space from the surface element (walls, floors, ceilings etc.)
and ventilation. Negative values indicate heat loss from the space.
Tip: to update the data using different calculation options, click Update (Ctrl-U).
Show as
You can display the data in one of four ways:
Graph
Grid
Graph and table
Table
Note: you must select the Grid option to export data in spreadsheet format.
Normalise by floor area

Check this option if you wish data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2. You can select the area to
use as the denominator from:
1-All areas - Total area is used,

2-Occupied area - just occupied areas are used.
Note: you can only select 1-All areas if the building and block data includes occupied areas as set in Include
unoccupied zones in block and building totals and averages option in Heating design Output options,
Likewise you can only select 2-Occupied area if the building and block data excludes occupied areas.
Y-Axis Options
These options give you control over how the Y-axis is displayed.
Lock min/max
This option locks the extent of the Y-axes so that they keep their current maximum and minimum values. This
allows consistent comparison with the future results display.
The Y-axis keeps its current settings until you unlock it again.
You can achieve the same effect by clicking on the 'Lock Y-axis min/max values' toolbar command
.
When you lock the Y-axis the current settings are stored and displayed for each of the available Y-axes. You
can edit any of these to get a more precise setting. Remember to click on the Apply button when you are
ready to register a change to any numeric display option data.
Overlap multiple axes

Option allows you to save space on the Y-axis allowing different axes to overlap.
Separate axes
Check this option to add a vertical space between each of the displayed axes.
- 899 -

Check this option if you wish data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2.
Appearance
You can control the details of the presentation of the graphical output by making selections on the Display
Options panel under the Appearance header.
EnergyPlus Script
You can view the input data script used to calculate these results by selecting the 'Tools | Display simulation
input script' menu option. If you do not have the EnergyPlus IDF editor installed, then you should associate
the .idf file extension with a text editor to make this option work.
Note: this shows the script stored with the model just before the simulation not the _Ref-600109359in.idf file
stored in the EnergyPlus folder.
Heating Design Summary Table

The Summary screen shows Comfort temperature, Steady state heat loss and Design heating capacity:
Comfort temperature - The mean of the internal air and radiant temperatures (also known as the
'operational' temperature)
Steady-state heat loss - same as 'Heating delivered' on the Steady State tab - heat delivered to
maintain the internal heating design temperature.
Design capacity - is the Steady-state heat loss multiplied by the Design margin to give the design
heating capacity of the equipment.
Tip: Use the Export command to export this data in spreadsheet format.
Heat Loss Breakdown Results

The 'Steady-State' tab has detailed heating design results (displayed as a histogram and table by default).
- 900 -
Calculations
For more on how the output is calculated see: Calculation of DesignBuilder Output from EnergyPlus Report
Variables.
Air Temperature - the calculated average temperature of the air.

Radiant Temperature - the (area * emissivity) weighted average of the zone inside surface
temperatures.
Operative Temperature - The mean of the internal air and radiant temperatures.
Outside Dry-Bulb Temperature.
Glazing - heat loss through all glazing.
Walls - heat loss through all external walls.
Ceilings (int) - heat loss through internal ceilings (e.g. zone above is colder).
Floors (int) - heat loss through internal floors (e.g. zone below is colder).
Floors (ext) - heat loss through external floors (not ground floor, e.g. floor in cantilevered space, roof
eaves etc).
Ground Floors - heat loss through ground floors.
Doors and Vents - conduction heat loss through doors and vents.
Partitions (int) - heat loss through all internal partitions (e.g. adjacent zone is colder).
External Infiltration - heat loss through air infiltration (non-unintentional air entry through cracks and
holes in building fabric).
External Mechanical Ventilation - is the heat loss due to the entry of outside air through the air
distribution system. View can exclude mechanical ventilation from the heating design calculations by
unchecking the 'Mechanical ventilation On' Model Data.
Internal Natural Ventilation - heat loss due to air exchange through open internal windows, doors,
vents, holes and virtual partitions to adjacent spaces.
Zone Sensible Heating - heat delivered to maintain the internal heating design temperature.
Note: The Heating delivered is the sum of the component heat loss values.
Surface heat loss data (walls, ceilings, floors etc) refers to heat transfer from the zone to the inside surface of
the building elements.
You can also customise the data displayed and display style using the Display Options panel.
- 901 -
COOLING DESIGN CALCULATION

Cooling design calculations are carried out to determine the capacity of mechanical cooling equipment
required to meet the hottest summer design weather conditions likely to be encountered at the site location. In
zones which are not mechanically cooled free-floating temperatures are calculated including the effects of
natural or mechanical ventilation if these options are selected on the zone HVAC tab. These design
calculations are traditionally carried out using periodic steady-state methods such as the admittance and
- 902 -
Calculations
response factor methods provided by CIBSE and ASHRAE. You can use DesignBuilder to carry out effectively
the same calculation using the EnergyPlus dynamic thermal simulation engine.
Click on the Cooling design Screen tab to view Cooling Design data. If the necessary data has not yet been
generated, a Cooling Design calculation is automatically started to generate the data.
See also the Cooling Design Calculations Tutorial
Cooling design simulations using EnergyPlus have the following characteristics:
Periodic steady-state external temperatures calculated using maximum and minimum design summer
weather conditions.
No wind.
Includes solar gains through windows and scheduled natural ventilation.
includes internal gains from occupants, lighting and other equipment.
For buildings situated in the Northern Hemisphere, Cooling Design calculations are made for the month of July
and for buildings in the Southern Hemisphere they are made for the month of January.
Simulation continues until temperatures/heat flows in each zone have converged. If convergence does not
The simulation calculates half-hourly temperatures and heat flows for each zone and determines cooling
capacities required to maintain any cooling temperature set points in each zone.
The maximum cooling load in each zone is multiplied by a Safety factor (1.3 by default) to give a Design
Cooling Capacity. This design cooling capacity can be written directly into the Cooling capacity model data
depending on the setting of the Plant sizing model option on the Data tab under HVAC.
Customise the data displayed and display style using the Display Options panel.
Note: Cooling Design calculations use Scheduled Natural ventilation model data set on the HVAC tab even
when the Calculated natural ventilation option is set. This is to help you to document the input data for your
Cooling Design calculations. Calculated natural ventilation data input is too complex to be adequately
summarised.
Cooling Design Calculation Options

These calculation options can also be accessed from the Cooling design calculation options tab of the Model
Options dialog.
Calculation Options
Summer design day
Solar Options
Click on the OK button to start the Cooling design calculation.
Cooling Design Detailed Results

The 'Analysis' tab has detailed half-hourly cooling design results (displayed as a line graph by default).
- 903 -
Variables.
Air Temperature - the calculated average temperature of the air.

temperatures.
Operative Temperature - The mean of the mean internal air and mean radiant temperatures.
Glazing - the total heat flow to the zone from the glazing, frame and divider of exterior glazing
excluding transmitted short-wave solar radiation (which is accounted for in Solar Gains Exterior
Windows below).
For windows without an interior shading device this heat flow is equal to:
+ [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]
+ [Net IR heat flow to the zone from zone side of the glazing]
[Short-wave radiation from zone transmitted back out the window]
+ [Conduction to zone from window frame and divider, if present]
Here, short-wave radiation is that from lights and diffuse interior solar radiation.
For windows with an interior shading device this heat flow is equal to:
[Convective heat flow to the zone from the air flowing through the gap between glazing and shading
device]
+ [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device]
+ [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]
+ [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device]
Walls - heat gain due to conduction through all external walls, including the effect of solar radiation and
longwave radiation to the sky.
Roofs - heat gain due to conduction through all external roofs, including the effect of solar radiation
and longwave radiation to the sky.
Ceilings (int) - heat conduction gain through internal ceilings (e.g. zone above is colder).
Floors (int) - heat conduction gain through internal floors (e.g. zone below is colder).
Floors (ext) - heat conduction gain through external floors (not ground floor, e.g. floor in cantilevered
space, roof eaves etc).
Ground floors - heat conduction gain through ground floors.
Partitions (int) - heat conduction gain due to heat conduction through all internal partitions from
adjacent zones at different temperatures.
Doors and vents - conduction heat gain through doors and vents.
External Infiltration - heat gain through air infiltration (non-unintentional air entry through cracks and
holes in building fabric).
External Vent - heat gain due to the entry of outside air through natural and mechanical ventilation (as
defined on the HVAC tab). You can exclude mechanical ventilation from the cooling design calculations
by unchecking the 'Mechanical ventilation On' Model data.
Internal Natural Ventilation - heat gain from other zones due to air exchange through open internal
windows, doors, vents, holes and virtual partitions.
Task Lighting - heat gain due to task lighting.
General Lighting - heat gain due to general lighting.
Miscellaneous - heat gain due to miscellaneous equipment.
Process - heat gain due to process equipment.
Catering - heat gain due to cooking.
Computer and Equipment - heat gain due to computer and other IT-related equipment.
- 904 -
Calculations
Occupancy - sensible gain due to occupants. Please note that this can vary depending on the internal
conditions. With very high temperatures the sensible gain can drop to zero with all cooling effects
taking place through latent heat transfer.
Solar Gains Exterior Windows - (used to be called 'Transmitted solar gains'). Short-wave solar
radiation transmission through external windows. For a bare window, this transmitted radiation consists
of solar radiation passing through the glass and diffuse radiation from solar reflected from the outside
window reveal, if present. For windows with a shade, this transmitted radiation is totally diffuse (shades
are assumed to be perfect diffusers). For windows with a blind, this transmitted radiation consists of
beam + diffuse radiation that passes between the slats and diffuse radiation from beam-to-diffuse
reflection from the slats. Solar re-reflected back out of the external window and transmitted through
interior windows is not subtracted.
Solar Gains Interior Windows - Total beam + diffuse solar radiation transmission through interior
windows. Requires the 3-Full interior and exterior solar model option to be set.
Zone Sensible Cooling - is the sensible cooling effect on the zone of any air introduced into the zone
through the HVAC system. It includes any 'free cooling' due to introduction of relatively cool outside air.
Cooling always shows as a negative heat gain in the results. It is best thought of as part of the zone
heat balance.
Airflow
Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration - The sum of outside air (in ac/h) flowing into the zone through:
The HVAC air distribution system +
Infiltration +
Natural ventilation
System Heat Flows

These heat flows are plotted on the System Energy axes:
Zone Heating - energy supplied by local room heaters and reheat coils to maintain room internal
heating temperature setpoint temperature when using Compact HVAC data.
Total Cooling - depending on the Sizing method:
for the default ASHRAE sizing method Total Cooling is the rate at which total energy (sensible
and latent) is removed from the mixed outside and return air stream in order to bring the mixed
air stream to the specified temperature and humidity ratio of the supply air stream.
for Compact HVAC sizing method - at building level: sensible + latent cooling transfer to the
supply air from the AHU cooling coil + any single zone unitary and fan coil units in the building.
At zone level: sensible + latent cooling transfer to the supply air from a single zone unitary or fan
coil unit.
Sensible Cooling - depending on the Sizing method:
for ASHRAE sizing method Sensible Cooling is the rate at which sensible energy is removed
from the mixed outside and return air stream in order to lower its temperature to the specified
temperature of the supply air stream. Any energy needed for moisture addition or removal is
ignored.
for Compact HVAC sizing method Sensible Cooling is sensible only cooling heat transfer from
the cooling coil to the supply air. Latent coil heat can be calculated as the difference: Total
Cooling - Sensible Cooling.
Surface heat gain data refers to heat transfer from the inside surface of the building elements to the zone.
You can also customise the data and the way it is displayed using the Display Options panel.
- 905 -
Reviewing Cooling Design Output

You can review Cooling design output in 2 ways:
Detailed results - half-hourly heat balance and inside conditions displayed on 'Analysis' tab.
Summary table - cooling capacity data for each zone on the Summary tab.
- 906 -
Calculations
To update the data using different calculation options, click Update (Ctrl-U).Data Options
The General tab on the Cooling design Display options panel provides options for controlling the data
displayed in the Simulation data display screen. General Display options are grouped under three headers:

Data Options
Data
3-Comfort - inside air, the radiant and comfort temperatures, relative humidity, ASHRAE 55 and
various comfort indices.
Show as
Graph
Grid
Graph and table
Table

Check this option if you wish data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2. You can select the area to
use as the denominator from:
1-All areas - Total area is used,

2-Occupied area - just occupied areas are used.
unoccupied zones in block and building totals and averages option in Cooling design Output options,
Y-Axis Options
- 907 -
Lock min/max
allows consistent comparison with the future results display. The Y-axis keeps its current settings until you
unlock it again.
You can achieve the same effect by clicking on the 'Lock Y-axis min/max values' toolbar command.

Separate axes

Check this option if you wish data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2.
Appearance
EnergyPlus Script
You can view the input data script used to calculate these results by selecting the 'Tools | Display simulation
input script' menu option. If you do not have the EnergyPlus IDF editor installed, then you should associate
Note: this shows the script stored with the model just before the simulation not the _Ref-600109359in.idf file
stored in the EnergyPlus folder.
Summary Cooling Design Table

The Summary tab on the Cooling design screen shows a summary of maximum loads with some display
options.
Summary Display Options

Data
Summary results can be displayed either for the time and month of the overall maximum building cooling load
or for the individual zone.
1-Non-coincident - Summary results are for the time and month of maximum cooling load for each
zone.
2-Coincident - All summary results are for the time and month of the maximum building total cooling
load.
Totals calculation method

You can sum total loads in 2 different ways
1-Building - loads are summed for the whole building.
- 908 -
Calculations
2-Cooling system - loads are summed for each Cooling system type allowing you to calculate
system/block loads for sizing AHUs.
Summary Results
The Summary screen, 1-Zones display option shows design cooling loads and flow rates for each zone plus
other related data.
Design Capacity, shown in bold, is the maximum value of Total Cooling Load and Sensible
multiplied by the Design margin to give the design cooling capacity of the equipment. This value is
written into the Cooling capacity Model data on the HVAC tab if the appropriate Plant sizing Model
Option is set.
Design Flow Rate, shown in bold, is the flow rate required to deliver the Sensible cooling load using
the Design supply temperature and the zone air temperature at the time of the maximum load
multiplied by the Design margin.
Total Cooling Load is the total maximum Sensible + Latent loads for the zone at the time of
maximum Sensible Cooling load. If latent load is negative then it is ignored here and the Total Cooling
Load is the same as the Sensible load.
Sensible is the maximum Sensible Cooling load for the zone in the Design day.
Latent is the latent load for the zone at the time of maximum Sensible load, calculated as Total Cooling
- Sensible Cooling.
Air Temperature is the Air temperature in the zone at the time of maximum Sensible load.
Humidity is the humidity (%) in the zone at the time of maximum Sensible load.
Time of Max Cooling - the time at which the maximum sensible cooling occurs.
Max Op Temp in Day is the maximum operative temperature in the zone (using radiant fraction = 0.5)
over the design day including periods when the zone may be unconditioned.
Floor area is the floor area of the zone.
Volume is the volume of the zone.
Flow/Floor area (MBH/ft2 in IP units) is the Design Flow Rate divided by the Floor area of the zone.
It provides a useful check for the flow rates calculated.
Tip: Use the Export command to export summary data to spreadsheet format.
Parametric Analysis (Cooling Design)

For more information on Cooling design parametric analysis see the equivalent topic for simulation.
SIMULATION USING REAL WEATHER DATA

You can generate detailed building energy performance data based on simulations using real weather data.
Click on the Simulation Screen tab to view simulation data. If the necessary data has not yet been generated,
a simulation is automatically started to generate the data.
Simulations using EnergyPlus have the following characteristics:
Weather data comes from Hourly weather data file.

Includes solar gain through windows.
Simulation of HVAC equipment (options)
Includes one or more 'warmup' (or pre-conditioning) days to ensure correct distribution of heat in
building thermal mass at the start of the simulation. Warmup continues until temperatures/heat flows in
- 909 -
each zone have converged. If convergence does not occur then simulation continues for the maximum
number of days as specified in the calculation options.
You can customise the data displayed and display style using the Display Options panel.
Calculation Options
Display Options
Detailed Results
Comfort Analysis
Summary Output
Parametric Analysis
EnergyPlus Daylight Map Output
Optimisation
See also the Setting Up and Running Simulations Tutorial
Simulation Calculation Options

These options control the simulation and the output produced.
Click on the OK button to start the Simulation.
General
Simulation Period
The simulation period is described in the help for the Model options.
Interval
Selecting Monthly is required to obtain annual output. Monthly, daily, hourly and sub-hourly data can selected
by checking the appropriate boxes.
Note: selecting output at hourly or sub-hourly intervals can produce large amounts of data which slows
processing and results in large file sizes. If you want to generate hourly or sub-hourly data you may wish to
consider switching off some of the Output options to ensure you are only generating the data you require.
Auto-Update
This dialog is always shown when you select 'Update' and will also be shown before all simulations if 'Don't
show this dialog' at the bottom is cleared.
Options
See help for Simulation calculation options tab on the Model Options dialog.
Output
See help for the Output Options tab on the Model Options dialog.
Simulation Manager
See separate help for Simulation Manager
- 910 -
Calculations
Simulation Manager
The DesignBuilder Simulation Manager allows you to run and control multiple simulations and view their
results. Simulations can be run in parallel and over the network.
Use Simulation Manager

To run an EnergyPlus simulation using the Simulation Manager go to the Simulation Manager tab on the
Simulation Calculation options dialog and check the Use Simulation Manager checkbox. This exposes 2
further data items described below.
Server
By default the localhost server is selected, which is the option to use the Simulation Manager installed on the
local machine. Choosing this allows you to run and control simulations from DesignBuilder, continue to work
on the model or another model or even close DesignBuilder down and the simulations will continue to run
unaffected. If the local machine is put into hibernate or sleep then the simulations will be suspended too and
will resume when the machine is switched on again. If the machine is shut down while simulations are running
then those simulations will be lost but should start again (from the beginning) when the machine is started up
again.
Another option is to select a server on a different machine on the network from the drop down list. To enable
other servers to appear on the list for selection you should follow the steps on the Install Simulation Server
page. When running simulations on a server, as well as the advantages already mentioned above for the
localhost, you can also close your machine down and the simulations will continue to run unaffected. You
must of course be connected to the server over the network to start the simulation and to retrieve results.
Tip: With a good internet connection at both ends and a VPN service you can run simulations on your server
from your client machine when away from the office. Note that in this case there will be a transmission
overhead as input files are uploaded to the server and results are downloaded. This is of course more of an
issue for larger models, especially when large datasets are generated.
Dedicated Simulation Servers
Some advantages of using a dedicated simulation server for your EnergyPlus simulations are:
You can close the computer running DesignBuilder down once the job is submitted and the
simulation(s) will continue to run. This can be especially useful for long simulations. Results can be
retrieved later by opening the Simulation Manager dialog.
If you choose a powerful multi-core server with plenty of memory you can run many simulations more
quickly and simultaneously.
The processor of the computer running DesignBuilder doesn't get overloaded while you are working on
the model.
Tip: You can obtain a high-performance EnergyPlus simulation server configured and ready to run from
EnSimS
- 911 -
EnergyPlus server method

There are 2 options:
EnergyPlus - the default option where the Simulation Manager runs EnergyPlus directly.
JEPlus - select this option if you have an account on the JESS online service and would like the
Simulation Manager to run simulations via JEPlus and the JESS server.
Simulation Manager Client

The Simulation Manager client is a standalone application which provides access to simulation as they
proceed and also to results previously generated. You can use it load results either to the standalone Results
Viewer or to the inbuilt DesignBuilder results display system.
The SM client can be accessed from within DesignBuilder using the
toolbar icon or from outside
DesignBuilder from the Start button > All programs > DesignBuilder > Simulation Manager. When
opening the Simulation Manager client you will see something like the screenshot below.
Behaviour is different depending on whether the application is loaded from within DesignBuilder and if so
whether you are at building level or below. In this case only the simulation results for your building are
displayed. Alternatively if you start the SM client from outside DesignBuilder or from site level with a model
open or when no model is open from the Opening screen then all simulations (sometimes referred to as
"jobs") are displayed.
Load Results To DesignBuilder

If you opened the SM client from DesignBuilder and you are at building level or below in the model then the
Load results to DesignBuilder icon will be available. Pressing this icon causes the results for the currently
selected simulation to be loaded to the DesignBuilder Simulation screen. You must go this screen before to
actually view the results.
- 912 -
Calculations
View Results In DesignBuilder Results Viewer

Selecting this command opens the available results for the selected simulation to the Results Viewer
application including both the tabular summary html and eso results.
View Files Associated With Current Simulation

Selecting this command opens a list of all of the files associated with the simulation currently selected
including both input and outputs files.
From here you can save a file to disk or open it using the application currently associated with the file
extension.
Stop Current Simulation

If the currently selected simulation is still running then it can be terminated using this command. In this case
you will of course not obtain any simulation results.
- 913 -
Delete Selected Simulations

Use the check boxes to the left of the simulation names to select simulations for deletion and press the Delete
selected simulations toolbar icon to remove all trace of the simulation including any input and output files.
Settings
The Settings command provides access to the settings for the servers used in the Simulation Manager on the
local machine.
You can see the status of each of the servers with a connection as well as the maximum number of parallel
simulations that can be run on each. For the localhost server (i.e. the server running on the local machine)
you can edit the number of simulations from within this dialog. Depending on what else the machine is being
used for you should be careful not to allow the simulations to use all of the processing capacity of the
machine. The maximum value allowed is 1 less than the number of processors on the machine. For powerful
machines the number of processors will be equal to the number of physical cores x 2, so for a 4 core machine
with 8 virtual processors you cannot enter a value here greater than 7. If the machine is being used for other
applications as well as DesignBuilder you should leave at least 2 processors. For quad core machines with 8
virtual processors a good upper limit will be between 4 and 6.
You can also use this dialog to stop and restart the localhost server.
Installing the Simulation Manager on a Server

As well as running on the local DesignBuilder client machine (as it does by default) the Simulation Manager
can also run on a separate Windows server machine on the network. This page explains how to set up a
simulation server and how to connect to it from DesignBuilder.
You can read about some of the advantages of using a dedicated simulation server this on the main
Simulation Manager page.
Install the Simulation Manager Server

1. Download JobServer.zip from the Downloads > Software > Server Software area of the website.
2. Copy JobServer.zip to the machine where the server is to be installed,
- 914 -
Calculations
3. Expand the zip file.

4. The maximum number of parallel simulations allowed is included in installservice.bat. To change from the
default value of 6, open installservice.bat in a text editor and change the 6 at the end of the first line to the
new value. For a server dedicated to running DesignBuilder simulations you can enter the maximum value of
the number of processors minus 1. For example on a dedicated simulation server with 32 processors you can
enter 31 here. Note that entering too high a number could cause other applications on the server to slow down
and potentially overload the processor.
DBJobServer install . 27042 6
5. Run installservice.bat.
The Simulation Manager service should now be running. You can ensure that the DBJobServer service is
running using the Control Panel\All Control Panel Items\Administrative Tools > Services. You are looking for
Status = "Started" as shown below.
If it isn't running for any reason you may need to open a command prompt window (with admin rights) and use
the cd command to move to the folder into which you have the installservice.bat file and then run the
installation service from within the command prompt window.
6. Ensure incoming connections to the server are allowed and not blocked by a firewall. To do this you should
create an exception for the executable, DBJobServer.exe (not a particular port).
Note: The .NET Framework v3.5 or later must be installed on the server for the service to run correctly.
Connect the Simulation Manager on the client machine running

DesignBuilder
The Simulation Manager Server can be selected from the Server list on the Simulation Manager tab of the
Simulation Options dialog:
- 915 -
This list can be changed by editing the contents of JobServers.txt on the DesignBuilder client machine which
can be found at C:\Users\<USERNAME>\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder\JobServer. The above list was
generated by the following contents in JobServers.txt:
localhost,27042,User,123456
192.168.1.41,27042,User,123456
Each line in JobServers.txt represents a server that can be accessed from the client machine. The format of
each line is:
host (or IP address),Port,Username,Password
DesignBuilder comes with a pre-installed pre-defined host called localhost.which is the first line in the above
file. The second line points to a simulation server running on the network at IP address 192.168.1.41 on port
27042 with username "User" and password "123456".
Note: In current versions you must only change the server IP address and port and keep the default
username and password ("User and 123456 respectively).
If you edit JobServers.txt you must reopen the Simulation Calculation Options dialog to see the effects.
Although JobServers.txt is provided in the distribution for installing on a server it is not used in this case and
should be left in its default state.
Clearing Cached Versions of EnergyPlus

The Simulation Manager Server automatically downloads the version of EnergyPlus requested for the
simulation into the folder:
C:\Users\<USERNAME>\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder\JobServer\Jobs\EnergyPlus\versions
If you have been informed by the Support Desk about an update or if there was some problem with the
download initially then you can ensure that the programs will downloaded again by clearing out all files from
the above folder before running new simulations using the Simulation Manager.
You may notice that simulations take a little longer to carry out the first time as EnergyPlus needs to be
downloaded. After this EnergyPlus is cached and the download is not necessary.
The first time you request a simulation in the Simulation Manager for a particular version of EnergyPlus (or
after clearing the cache) you must have an Internet connection to allow EnergyPlus to be downloaded.
Simulation Display Options

The General tab on the Simulation Display Options Panel provides options for controlling the data displayed in
the Simulation data display screen. General Display Options are grouped under three headers:

- 916 -
Calculations
Data Options
Interval
Select an interval from the list:
1-Annual - show data for the entire simulation.

2-Monthly - show data broken down by month.
3-Daily - show data broken down by day.
4-Hourly - show hourly data. Useful for checking operation of equipment and comfort conditions for
particular design periods.
5-Sub-hourly - show data recorded at time step intervals (2 and 6 intervals per hour depending on the
'Time steps per hour' calculation option). Useful for detailed checking of building performance.
6-Distribution - temperature distribution curves showing 'hours at', 'hours below' and 'hours above'
temperature levels in 1C temperature intervals during the occupied period. Note that 'Data' (below)
should be set to 3-Comfort to get temperature distribution curves.
Note: be aware that requesting Hourly and Sub-hourly results in large buildings and/or long simulation periods
can result in very large data sets which take a long time to read in after the simulation.
Data
3-Comfort - inside air, the radiant and comfort temperatures, relative humidity, ASHRAE 55 and
various comfort indices. If you set Interval to 6-Distribution you get temperature distribution curves.
6-Fuel breakdown - fuel consumption broken down by system category (building level only).
7-Fuel totals - fuel consumption broken down by fuel (building level only)
8-CO2 production - CO2 production by weight (building level only)
Click here for information on the meaning of the data.

Show as
Graph
Grid
Graph and table
Table
- 917 -
Days per Page (Simulation only)

DesignBuilder displays all simulation results together, but you can select how many days are displayed at any
one time using The 'Days displayed per page' option. A value of 365 means you will show all simulation data
on the same screen and a value of 1 means you see each day on a separate screen.
Note: you can use the horizontal scroll bar at the bottom of the graph to see simulation results not currently
displayed.

Check this option if you wish building, block and zone data to be displayed 'per floor area' i.e. /m2 or /ft2 and
surface and opening data to be displayed 'per surface or opening area'. At building, block or zone level you
can select the floor area to use as the denominator from the options:
1-All areas - Total floor area is used,

2-Occupied area - just occupied floor areas are used.
unoccupied zones in block and building totals and averages option in Simulation Output options,
Y-Axis Options
Lock min/max
allows consistent comparison with the future results display. The Y-axis keeps its current settings until you
unlock it again.
You can achieve the same effect by clicking on the 'Lock Y-axis min/max values' toolbar command.

Separate axes
Appearance
Simulation Detailed Results

The main Display options are in the bottom left of the screen. They allow you to control the content of the
Detailed data and also the Display style.
The 'Analysis' tab has detailed simulation results (displayed as a line graph by default).
- 918 -
Calculations
See also the Analysing Simulation Results Tutorial

Variables.
Environmental/Comfort Output
Air Temperature - the calculated average temperature of the zone air.

temperatures.
Operative Temperature - the mean of the zone air and radiant temperatures.
Relative Humidity - the calculated average relative humidity of the air.
Fanger PMV - Fanger Predicted Mean Vote calculated according to ISO 7730.
Pierce PMV ET - the Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the effective temperature and the
Pierce two-node thermal comfort model.
Pierce PMV SET - the Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the 'Standard' effective
temperature and the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model.
Pierce Discomfort Index (DISC) - the Discomfort index calculated using the Pierce two-node thermal
comfort model.
Pierce Thermal Sens. Index (TSENS) - the Thermal Sensation Index (PMV) calculated using the
Kansas Uni TSV - the Thermal Sensation Vote (TSV) calculated using the KSU two-node thermal
comfort model.
Discomfort hrs (summer clothing) - the time when the zone is occupied that the combination of
humidity ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer clothes region.
Discomfort hrs (winter clothing) - the time when the zone is occupied that the combination of
humidity ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 winter clothes region.
Discomfort hrs (all clothing) - the time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity
ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer or winter clothes region.
More on Comfort Analysis...
Fabric and ventilation
Glazing - the total heat flow to the zone from the glazing, frame and divider of exterior glazing
excluding transmitted short-wave solar radiation (which is accounted for in Solar Gains Exterior
Windows below).
For windows without an interior shading device this heat flow is equal to:
+ [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]
+ [Net IR heat flow to the zone from zone side of the glazing]
Here, short-wave radiation is that from lights and diffuse interior solar radiation.
For windows with an interior shading device this heat flow is equal to:
[Convective heat flow to the zone from the air flowing through the gap between glazing and shading
device]
+ [Convective heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device]
+ [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the glazing]
+ [Net IR heat flow to the zone from the zone side of the shading device]
Walls - Sum of heat gains to the zone from external wall inner surfaces.
Roofs - Sum of heat gains to the zone from external roof inner surfaces.
- 919 -
Ceilings - Sum of heat gains to the zone from ceiling inner surfaces.
Floors - Sum of heat gains to the zone from internal floor inner surfaces.
Floors (ext) - Sum of heat gains to the zone from external floor inner surfaces (e.g. floor in cantilevered
space, roof eaves etc, not ground floors).
Ground floors - Sum of heat gains to the zone from ground floor inner surfaces.
Partitions - Sum of heat gains to the zone from internal partition inner surfaces.
Doors and Vents - Sum of heat gains to the zone from door and vent inner surfaces.
External Infiltration - heat gain through air infiltration (non-unintentional air entry through cracks and
holes in building fabric) when using Scheduled natural ventilation option.
External Natural Ventilation - heat gain due to the entry of outside air through natural ventilation, as
defined on the HVAC tab, when using Simple natural ventilation option.
Internal Natural Ventilation - heat gain from other zones due to air exchange through open internal
windows, doors, vents, holes and virtual partitions.
External Mechanical Ventilation - heat gain due to the entry of outside air through the air distribution
system. You can exclude mechanical ventilation from the cooling design calculations by unchecking
the 'Air Distribution On' Model Data.
External Air - heat gain due to the entry of outside air through external windows, vents, doors, holes
and cracks when using Calculated natural ventilation option.
Mixing Air - heat gain due to the entry of inside mixing air through internal windows, vents, doors and
holes when using Scheduled natural ventilation option.
Note: Surface conduction data for Walls, Roofs, Ceilings, Floors, Partitions and Doors and Vents represents
the heat conduction flow just below the surface of the construction and so includes all surface heat transfer
mechanisms (convection, long and short-wave radiation).
Airflow
Infiltration +
Natural ventilation +
Airflow through earth tubes (mechanically or naturally driven)
Note: You will usually see a small difference in air changes per hour (ac/h) between the sum of
mechanical and natural ventilation and infiltration values you entered on in model data and the values
reported in simulation results. This is caused by the method used to calculate and report ac/h in
EnergyPlus. ac/h is reported including consideration of the air density and the exact values displayed
will depend on the density of the outside air being introduced into the building relative to the density of
the zone air. Cooler air is of course more dense than warmer air. More specifically, the design volume
flow rate entered in ac/h is converted to mass flow (kg/s) during the simulation using the current
outdoor air density. The simulated mass flow rate is then reported back out in indoor air density (for
infiltration and natural ventilation) or EnergyPlus standard air density for HVAC system outside air,
neither of which will ever (or extremely rarely) match the outdoor air density. So, the ac/h outputs will
never exactly match the inputs. The difference between input and reported ac/h will normally be less
than +/- 10%. At times when the outside air is cooler than inside there will be an underestimate of ac/h
and when it is warmer there will be an overestimate. The difference between input and output values is
in proportion to the difference in inside and outside air temperature.
Internal Gains
Task Lighting - heat gain due to task lighting.

General Lighting - heat gain due to general lighting.
Miscellaneous - heat gain due to miscellaneous equipment.
Process - heat gain due to process equipment.
Catering - heat gain due to cooking.
Computer and Equipment - heat gain due to computer and other IT-related equipment.
- 920 -
Calculations
Occupancy - sensible gain due to occupants. Please note that this can vary depending on the internal
conditions. With very high temperatures the sensible gain can drop to zero with all cooling effects
taking place through latent heat transfer.
Solar Gains Exterior Windows - (used to be called 'Transmitted solar gains'). Short-wave solar
radiation transmission through all external windows. For a bare window, this transmitted radiation
consists of solar radiation passing through the glass and diffuse radiation from solar reflected from the
outside window reveal, if present. For windows with a shade, this transmitted radiation is totally diffuse
(shades are assumed to be perfect diffusers). For windows with a blind, this transmitted radiation
consists of beam + diffuse short-wave radiation that passes between the slats and diffuse radiation
from beam-to-diffuse reflection from the slats. The heating effect of solar radiation on opaque roofs and
walls is accounted for in the Roofs and Walls fabric heat conduction data. Solar re-reflected back out of
the external window and transmitted through interior windows is not subtracted.
Solar Gains Interior Windows - Total beam + diffuse solar radiation transmission through interior
windows. Requires the 3-Full interior and exterior solar model option to be set.
Zone Sensible Cooling - is the overall sensible cooling effect on the zone of any air introduced into
the zone through the HVAC system. It includes any 'free cooling' due to introduction of relatively cool
outside air and the heating effect of any fans present. Cooling always shows as a negative heat gain in
the results. It is therefore not the same as a cooling coil energy delivery when mechanical ventilation is
involved. It is best thought of as the overall HVAC cooling contribution to the zone heat balance.
More on this below.
Zone Sensible Heating - is the overall sensible heating effect of any air introduced into the zone
through the HVAC system including any 'free heating' due to introduction of relatively warm outside air
and the heating effects of fans. It is therefore not the same as a heating coil energy delivery when
mechanical ventilation is involved. It is best thought of as the overall HVAC heating contribution to
the zone heat balance. More on this below.
Surface heat gain data refers to heat transfer from the inside surface of the building elements to the zone.
Note: taken together the Internal gains and the Fabric and ventilation data above give an approximate
Zone Heat Balance, i.e. the data represents all of the heat flows into and out of the zone.
Technical Note
It is important to understand when looking at the Zone heat balance data that the values do not necessarily
add to exactly to zero. Factors which have a bearing on this are:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Solar radiation values reported by EnergyPlus are gross values and do not account for the radiation rereflected back out of internal and external windows. EnergyPlus tracks solar radiation in full detail but
does not report all of the calculated values. It is not currently possible to generate net solar radiation
gains from EnergyPlus.
Also bear in mind that solar and some internal gains are mostly radiative gains and find their way into
the fabric whereas the cooling is to the air. In thermal modelling terms it is not possible to make a
simple heat balance of heat which is added to different parts of the thermal network.More specifically,
heat transfer gains between the zone and the surfaces cannot be added directly to ventilation gains
because they are to different 'points' in the zone heat balance (surface heat transfer is to the 'rad-air'
point and ventilation is to the 'air' point).
Minor EnergyPlus inaccuracy in reporting of conduction through window frames causes a minor error
(~1%) in Glazing heat gain reported values. This does not affect the rest of the simulation, it is just in
the Glazing heat gain report.
There are issues such as heat conduction through walls, floors, roofs etc and diurnal storage of heat in
thermal mass, especially in thermally massive buildings to take into account. When doing heat
balances make sure to view data over a reasonable period (> week) to avoid such thermal storage
issues.
System Heat Flows

These heat flows are plotted on the System Energy axes:
heating temperature setpoint temperature when using Detailed HVAC data.
- 921 -
Radiant + Convective Heating - energy provided by heated floors to the floor construction. Check the
Ground Floors and Internal Floors zone heat balance outputs to see the heat transfer from the floor
to the zone itself.
Total Cooling is the rate at which total energy (sensible and latent) is removed from the mixed outside
and return air stream in order to bring the mixed air stream to the specified temperature and humidity
ratio of the supply air stream. Total Cooling also includes any cooling energy provided by radiant
cooling systems.
Sensible Cooling is the rate at which sensible energy is removed from the mixed outside and return
air stream in order to lower its temperature to the specified temperature of the supply air stream. Any
energy needed for moisture addition or removal is ignored.
A Common Question From New Users

"What is the difference between Zone Sensible Heating/Cooling (on the Heat Balance graph) and Zone
Heating, Sensible/Total Cooling (on the System Energy graph)?" The Zone Sensible Heating is the
heating effect of the HVAC system action on the zone heat balance, or in other words, the heating effect of
introducing air that is warmer than the zone air. Likewise Zone Sensible Cooling is the cooling effect of the
HVAC system on the zone. Note that these are not always directly related to heating and cooling coil energy
delivery, especially because of the effect of free cooling from outside air. So for example even if there is no
cooling coil operational at a particular time, the Zone Sensible Cooling output on the Heat Balance graph can
be high due to introduction of relatively cooler outside air into the space through mechanical ventilation. These
Zone Sensible Heating/Cooling outputs will also include a component due to fans (if operational) which will
tend to warm air that moves through it. The Zone Heating data in the System energy graph is the energy
provided by zone heating equipment such as reheat coils and radiators/baseboard units. Likewise Sensible
and Total Cooling report the sensible and total energy transferred by cooling coils to the air stream.
heating temperature setpoint temperature when using Detailed HVAC data.
Preheat - energy supplied by preheat coils to temper the outside air before it enters the outside air
mixing box when using Detailed HVAC data.
AHU Heating - energy supplied by the AHU heating coil when using Detailed HVAC data.
Total Cooling - at building level: sensible + latent cooling transfer to the supply air from the AHU
cooling coil + any single zone unitary and fan coil units in the building. At zone level: sensible + latent
cooling transfer to the supply air from a single zone unitary or fan coil unit.
Sensible Cooling - sensible only cooling transfer from the cooling coil to the supply air. Latent coil heat
can be calculated as the difference: Total Cooling - Sensible Cooling.
Heat Recovery Sensible Cooling - the sensible cooling rate of the supply air by the heat exchanger.
This rate is determined using the supply air mass flow rate through the heat exchanger unit, the supply
air inlet and outlet conditions, and the specific heat of the inlet supply air. A positive value is reported if
the supply air is cooled by the heat exchanger, else the rate is set to zero.
Heat Recovery Total Cooling - the total cooling rate of the supply air by the heat exchanger. This rate
is determined using the supply air mass flow rate through the heat exchanger unit, and the enthalpy of
the supply air entering and leaving the unit. A positive value is reported if the enthalpy of the supply air
is decreased by the heat exchanger, else the rate is set to zero.
Heat Recovery Sensible Heating - the sensible heating rate of the supply air by the heat exchanger.
This rate is determined using the supply air mass flow rate through the heat exchanger unit, the supply
air inlet and outlet conditions, and the specific heat of the inlet supply air. A positive value is reported if
the supply air is heated by the heat exchanger, else the rate is set to zero.
Heat Recovery Total Heating - the total heating energy added to the supply air by the heat exchanger.
Building Level Only

Fuel breakdown
The data for fuel consumption for building level broken down by end-use:
- 922 -
Calculations
Heating - total fuel consumption due to operation of heat generators such as boilers and heat pumps.
Cooling- total chiller fuel consumption plus any fuel consumption due to DX cooling coils, air-cooled
chiller condenser fans and evaporative coolers.
Heat rejection - cooling tower fan electric consumption.
Fans - total electrical energy consumed by HVAC fans (only available in Simple HVAC when using the
Separate fans and pumps model option).
Pumps - total electrical energy consumed by HVAC pumps (only available in Simple HVAC when using
the Separate fans and pumps model option).
Auxiliary Energy - total electrical energy consumed by HVAC fans and pumps (Simple HVAC only and
only when using the NCM model option).
Preheat - heating energy transferred from main plant preheat coils to HVAC system air when using
Detailed HVAC data.
Lighting - electricity consumed by general and task/display lights.
Room Electricity - electricity consumed by room equipment other than lights (computers, equipment,
process etc).
Room Gas - gas consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and catering)
Room Oil - oil consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and catering)
Room Solid - solid fuel (such as coal) consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and
catering)
Room Bottled gas - bottled gas (propane) consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and
catering)
Room Other - other fuel consumed by room equipment (miscellaneous, process and catering)
Fuel totals
Total fuel consumption for building, data available at building level only:
Electricity - total building electricity consumption.

Gas - fuel consumption total building gas consumption.
Oil - total building or oil consumption.
Solid - total building solid fuel consumption.
Bottled gas - total building gas consumption.
Other fuel consumption - total consumption of all other fuels.
CO2 production
Total carbon dioxide emission for building, data available at building level only:
CO2 - total CO2 emissions mass.
Site Weather data

Weather data stored at the site level and derived from the hourly weather file:
Outside Dry-Bulb Temperature

Outside Dew-Point Temperature
Direct Normal Solar
Diffuse Horizontal Solar
Wind Speed
Wind Direction
Atmospheric Pressure
Solar Altitude
Solar Azimuth
Note: Although Site weather data is stored at the Site level, it can be displayed at Building, Block, Zone,
Surface and Opening levels too.
Comfort Analysis
DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulations can generate extensive data on environmental conditions within the
building and resultant occupant comfort levels. The following comfort-related output is available:
- 923 -
Internal air temperature - the calculated average temperature of the air.

Internal radiant temperature - the average Mean Radiant Temperature (MRT) of the zone, calculated
assuming that the person is in the centre of the zone, with no weighting for any particular surface.
Internal operative temperature - The mean of the internal air and radiant temperatures.
Outside dry-bulb temperature - site data.
Relative Humidity - the calculated average relative humidity of the air.
Fanger PMV - Fanger Predicted Mean Vote calculated according to ISO 7730.
Pierce PMV ET - the Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the effective temperature and the
Pierce PMV SET - the Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the 'Standard' effective
Pierce Discomfort Index (DISC) - the Discomfort index calculated using the Pierce two-node thermal
comfort model.
Pierce Thermal Sens. Index (TSENS) - the Thermal Sensation Index (PMV) calculated using the
Kansas Uni TSV - the Thermal Sensation Vote (TSV) calculated using the KSU two-node thermal
comfort model.
Discomfort hrs (summer clothing) - the time when the combination of zone humidity ratio and
operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer clothes region.
Discomfort hrs (winter clothing) - the time when the combination of zone humidity ratio and operative
temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 winter clothes region.
Discomfort hrs (all clothing) - the time when the combination of zone humidity ratio and operative
temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer or winter clothes region.
Infiltration +
Natural ventilation
The above data can be displayed at all time increments. In addition, air, radiant and operative temperatures
can be displayed as distribution curves (below).
You can find more detailed information about Fanger, Pierce and Kansas State University Thermal comfort
prediction algorithms in the EnergyPlus Background Section.
The Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration data is the sum of fresh air delivered through the HVAC system,
infiltration and natural ventilation outside airflow in air changes per hour (ac/h). When used together with the
other environmental output it can be very useful in checking for occupant discomfort.
Note 1: It is possible to display comfort data for occupied periods only by selecting 2-Just occupied periods
as Zone environmental and comfort reports on the Output tab of the simulation options dialog. This option
applies to all data described in this Comfort Analysis help section.
Note 2: Comfort data are not generated when the Gains data model option is set to Lumped. This is because
in EnergyPlus the request for comfort calculations is made in the 'PEOPLE' statement and this is not used
with Lumped gains.
Block and Building comfort level data

The comfort data listed above is calculated for blocks using floor area weighted averages of the zones in the
block. For example:
Block average Air temperature (Ta) = (A1 x Taz1 + A1 x Taz2 + A3 x Taz3 + ...) / (A1 + A2 + A3 + ...)
Where:
An is floor area of zone n,
Tazn is the air temperature of zone n
- 924 -
Calculations
There is one exception, Mech Vent + Nat Vent + Infiltration, which is calculated in a similar way but using
volume-weighted averages, i.e. using zone volumes instead of floor areas in the above equation.
Building data is calculated in the same way but including all blocks.
if the Include unoccupied zones in block and building totals and averages option is not set then
unoccupied zones are not included in the above equation.
Note: if all zones in the block/building are unoccupied and the option is not set the denominator is zero and an
error message is shown and results are deleted.
Temperature distribution
Summary description
To view temperature distribution graphs follow this procedure:
1.
Select the Temperature distribution option on the Output tab of the Simulation options dialog before
running the simulation.
2. If, as is common, you need temperature distribution data for occupied periods only, then you should
select the 2-Just occupied periods option for Zone environmental and comfort reports on the Output
tab of the Simulation options dialog, again before the simulation. Note that if you do this and the zone is
always unoccupied then you won't see any output.
3. Run the simulation for the period of interest. There is no need to select sub-hourly, hourly, daily or
monthly output data if temperature distribution data is all you require.
4. Navigate to the zone of interest (you must be at zone level to view temperature distribution data).
5. Set the Interval option in the Display Options panel to Distribution and the Data option to Comfort
6. View the temperature distribution chart.
Detailed description
If you requested Temperature distribution data prior to the simulation, you can generate temperature
distribution curves showing 'hours at', 'hours below' and 'hours above' temperature levels in 1C temperature
intervals during the occupied period. Bins include data for the labelled temperature through to that
temperature + 1C, so for example, the bin labelled '12C' holds data for all temperatures in the range 12C
<= T < 13C.
The temperature distribution result set is calculated using sub-hourly data generated during the simulation
regardless of whether sub-hourly or hourly results were requested for output. You should therefore expect to
see slightly different distribution results between runs if you change the timesteps per hour setting.
To view temperature distribution data set the Interval option in the Display Options panel to Distribution and
the Data option to Comfort. This data can be useful for getting an overview of the levels of comfort (or
otherwise) provided by the building over time. The results can be compared with benchmark comfort criteria.
For example, CIBSE provides recommended benchmark summertime peak temperatures and overheating
criteria as follows:
Offices, schools, dwellings (living areas) should have no more than 1% of the annual occupied hours over
operative temperature of 28C. Bedrooms in dwellings should have no more than 1% of the annual occupied
hours over operative temperature of 26C.
UK DfES Building Bulletin BB87 recommends an allowable overheating criteria of 80 occupied hours in a year
over and air temperature of 28C.
Note 1: Temperature distribution data is only available at zone level.
Note 2: This data is not available when using Lumped gains model option as the data is tied in with the
EnergyPlus 'People' data set and this is not generated for Lumped gains.
Note 3: This data is not available if the 1 time step per hour option is selected
- 925 -
Example Temperature Distribution Output
Simplified ASHRAE 55-2004 Graph Related Outputs

The Discomfort hours data is based on whether the humidity ratio and the operative temperature is within the
region shown in ASHRAE Standard 55-2004 in Figure 5.2.1.1. For these outputs the operative temperature is
simplified to be the average of the air temperature and the mean radiant temperature. For summer, the 0.5
Clo level is used and, for winter, the 1.0 Clo level is used. The graphs below are based on the following tables
which extend the ASHRAE values to zero humidity ratio.
In some cases you may find a large number of discomfort hours for a particular zone even though the air
temperature in the space is within normal ranges. If this happens you should check:
1.
2.
Operative temperatures which can be very different in highly glazed spaces in the summer or poorly
insulated spaces in the winter.
Humidity levels are within range - you may find very high or very low humidity caused by inadequate
ventilation. Note that the minimum comfort temperature with winter clothes when the air is very dry is
21.7C / 71F which may be lower than some heating temperature setpoints. Likewise in the summer
when the air is very humid operative temperatures above 26.8C / 80.2F are considered too hot with
summer clothes.
- 926 -
Calculations
Winter Clothes
Summer Clothes
Note: in ASHRAE 55 comfort assessments the criteria can be exceeded, regardless of the temperature, if the
relative humidity is too high.
You can also determine distributed comfort levels using CFD Comfort Calculations.
Note on discomfort hours calculations
The Discomfort hrs data displayed by DesignBuilder is similar to the "Time Not Comfortable Based on
Simple ASHRAE 55-2004" data displayed in the Summary report, but EnergyPlus uses a different method to
- 927 -
DesignBuilder for calculating building level discomfort hours. "Time not comfortable Based on Simple
ASHRAE 55-2004" is the summation of the number of hours over the year when one or more zones in the
building fail the ASHRAE 55 comfort criteria. DesignBuilder on the other hand calculates discomfort hours at
building level in the same way as other building average values as the floor area-weighted average of all
zones.
CIBSE TM52 Overheating Assessments

To generate CIBSE TM52 overheating reports use the corresponding selection on the Output tab of the
Simulation options dialog. When this option is selected DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus EMS system to
provides custom TM52 outputs in the eso file. You must use the Results Viewer to access these results.
Criterion 1: The first criterion sets a limit for the number of hours that the operative temperature can
exceed the threshold comfort temperature (upper limit of the range of comfort temperature) by 1 K or
more during the occupied hours of a typical non-heating season (1 May to 30 September).
Criterion 2: The second criterion deals with the severity of overheating within any one day, which can
be as important as its frequency, the level of which is a function of both temperature rise and its
duration. This criterion sets a daily limit for acceptability.
Criterion 3: The third criterion sets an absolute maximum daily temperature for a room, beyond which
the level of overheating is unacceptable.
A room or building that fails any two of the three criteria is classed as overheating.
Note: TM52 outputs are only generated for zones without active cooling.
DesignBuilder automatically excludes results from unoccupied periods and from periods in the heating season
(October - March).
Procedure:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Select the CIBSE TM52 output option.

Run the simulation for at least the period 1 April - 30 September.
Open either the .eso or .drb output file using the Results Viewer
Access Criteria 1 and 3 on the RunPeriod tab
Access Criteria 2 on the Daily tab.
For example:
Criterion 1 is passed in Block1:Zone1 if RunPeriod output Block1:Zone1 Criterion 1 CIBSE_TM52 has a
value of 0.03 or less.
Criterion 2 is passed in Block1:Zone1 if no Daily output Block1:Zone1 Criterion 2 CIBSE_TM52 has a value
of greater than 6.
Criterion 3 is passed in Block1:Zone1 if RunPeriod output Block1:Zone1 Criterion 3 CIBSE_TM52 has a
value of 0. A value of zero indicates that the Delta T does not exceed 4K.
2 out of the 3 criteria must be passed.
Simulation Summary Output

You can display a summary of results generated by EnergyPlus in tabular form on the Summary tab.
Parametric Analysis
DesignBuilder can automatically run multiple simulations automatically adjusting up to 2 variables to create
design curves. Design curves can be very useful at conceptual stages of the design process to understand
how building performance is affected by variations. DesignBuilder allows you to generate curves to show how
performance parameters like carbon emissions and comfort vary as key elements of the building design vary.
You can select up to 2 design variables. For example you might want to plot the cooling energy consumption
- 928 -
Calculations
for the base design with a range of window to wall % and glazing types variations. The selection of the design
variables is done using the Variables tab of the Optimisation and Parametric Analysis Settings dialog. Click on
the Parametric tab to carry out parametric simulations.
The design curves are generated by automatically running multiple simulations of the base design (i.e. the
model defined on the edit screen) with variations applied at the building level.It is important to take into
account how this data will be inherited to down to blocks, zones etc to ensure you are testing the design
variants you think you are. For example if the Window to wall % was hard set at block level then changes in
this data at building level would not influence the surfaces of the design variants and the results will indicate
that the Window to wall % does not influence results (see Troubleshooting below).
Because there is no visual check on the state of the design variants the parametric function would normally be
carried out on:
Well structured and checked models that have been set up to be compatible with parametric analysis,
that is allowing the appropriate data to inherit from the building level parametric changes, or,
Smaller models where it is easy to see how data inherits.
Parametric simulation results are stored with a record of the change made to the base case to create it and
this allows new variants to be added to the study without invalidating previous results.
The number of design variants that are tested for 2 variable tests is the number of variants for the first variable
multiplied by the number for the second variable. The variations in the above example would be different
combinations of Glazing type and Window to wall %. In all, 6 x 5 = 30 simulations would be required to
generate the design curves in this example.
Tip: Parametric simulations can take a long time to complete and DesignBuilder can keep grabbing focus
away from the window you are working in as it refreshes the progress bar. To avoid this you can minimise the
main DesignBuilder window. If you have a dual core processor, you should now be able to continue working
while the simulations continue.
- 929 -
The graph above shows the diminishing returns with extra louvre projection from 0.5m to 1.5m.
- 930 -
Calculations
The image above shows a parametric analysis of total annual carbon emissions where glazing percentage is
varied in a building with lighting control, heating and cooling for 4 different glazing types. It illustrates how
optimum configurations can be identified using this approach.
Typical uses for parametric simulation are:
Generating design curves to assist with decision making at early design stages.
As a teaching aid to help students understand the impact of variations in the design.
To help communicate concepts with non-experts in building simulation, clients, architects etc.
Architects often particularly appreciate the visual nature of the parametric data.
Design optimisation
Available KPIs
The following Key Performance Indicator (KPI) outputs are available for selection on the Data setting in the
Display options panel:
1-Air temperature - average air temperature.

2-Radiant temperature - average mean radiant temperature.
3-Operative temperature - average operative temperature.
4-Fanger PMV - average predicted mean vote.
- 931 -
5-Pierce PMV ET - average Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the effective temperature
and the Pierce two-node thermal comfort model.
6-Pierce PMV SET - average Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) calculated using the 'Standard' effective
7-Pierce DISC - the average Discomfort index calculated using the Pierce two-node thermal comfort
model.
8-Pierce TSENS - the average Thermal Sensation Index (PMV) calculated using the Pierce two-node
thermal comfort model.
9-KsuTSV - the average Thermal Sensation Vote (TSV) calculated using the KSU two-node thermal
comfort model.
10-Transmitted Solar Gains - total solar gains transmitted
11-Discomfort (all clo) - the total time when the zone is occupied that the combination of humidity
ratio and operative temperature is not in the ASHRAE 55-2004 summer or winter clothes region. At
building level this is the zone area weighted average of the zone discomfort hours.
12-Heating load - sensible heating load (in most cases = total heating load)
13-Cooling load - total cooling load (sensible + latent)
14-Total energy consumption - sum of all onsite fuel consumption energy, available for the whole
building only.
15-Total CO2 - sum of operational carbon emissions for the building due to all building fuel
consumption, available for the whole building only.
For detailed definitions of the above outputs see Detailed Results. The outputs either refer to averages or
totals over the analysis period (i.e. the period set on the Simulation options dialog). The results cover the
whole building, when viewing results at building level or just the currently selected zone, when viewing results
at zone level. Note that outputs 14 and 15 are available only at building level.
Also note that the comfort-based outputs (PMV etc) are only available if Comfort outputs were requested on
the Output tab of the Simulation options dialog.
Troubleshooting
A common question from beginners with the parametric simulations goes something like this:
Q: "Why do I get a flat line variation of energy consumption/CO2/max temperature when running parametric
analyses"
A: The usual reason for parametric analysis generating a flat line variation is that there is no clear data
inheritance path from the building level (where the parametric changes are applied) down to the individual
zones/surfaces. For example, when using Window to wall% as a variable, you should make sure that:
The Window to wall% value is not hard set at block, zone or surface level in positions in the building
where you wish the parametric changes to be applied.
Likewise, you are not using custom openings, whose opening areas cannot be modified as part of the
parametric variation.
You have one of the Facade types set that can accurately calculate window areas based on % glazing
(Preferred height and Continuous horizontal) and that this data is inherited from building down to
surface level.
Q: "Is it possible to change the intervals for variables? For example is it possible to change "Window operation
%" range from 20, 40, 60... to 10, 20, 30, 40..."
A: In the current version of the software there is no way to modify the intervals but this will be allowed in future
versions.
See also Optimisation.
Optimisation
Optimisation is a technique for efficient searching for and identifying design options that best meet key design
performance objectives. it is similar in many ways to Parametric analysis, a more well-known technique for
analysing how design performance varies with changes in the building configuration through use of design
- 932 -
Calculations
curves. A parametric analysis would usually consist of 1, 2 or 3 design variables being adjusted in a
systematic way to illustrate trends and find designs with the most favourable characteristics (e.g. low energy
consumption, best comfort etc). With parametric analysis, a maximum of 3 variables is normally used because
a) the results of more than 3 dimensions to a design problem are difficult to visualize and b) the large number
of simulations required with 4 or more design variables would take too long to complete. For example a
designer might want to investigate the impact on carbon emissions of variable levels and types of glazing. The
results would be displayed as a series of parametric design curves. This can be a very useful way to visualise
simple comparisons over a limited range of design options, but is of less use for wider studies and for
optimisation as only a few variables and one key performance indicator can practically be included per
analysis.
In DesignBuilder Optimisation, Genetic Algorithms (GA) (aka Evolutionary Algorithms or EA) are used to
search for optimal design solutions, much more efficiently than is possible with parametric analysis when more
variables are involved. In DesignBuilder, up to 10 design variables can be included in the analysis in
combination with up to 2 objectives, such as "minimise carbon emissions" and "minimising construction costs".
Cost and carbon are a frequently used pair of objectives in building design optimisation analyses because
they allow a study of the trade off between cost and carbon impacts for a large range of designs. For example,
an optimisation study might involve a base design which is to be optimised for cost and carbon emissions with
building orientation, wall and roof construction, glazing amount and type, degrees of shading and HVAC
system type being allowed to vary. The results might be displayed graphically with operational carbon
emissions on one axis and investment cost on the other and the performance of each design option that is
tested as part of the procedure plotted on the graph. The designs with lowest combinations of cost and carbon
form a "Pareto front" of optimal designs along the bottom-left edge of the data point "cloud".
Likewise "minimise carbon emissions" and "minimise discomfort" are often used to analyse the trade off
between carbon emissions and the degree of comfort provided by the design. In the example output below the
control parameters of a changeover mixed mode natural ventilation model is being optimised based on carbon
emissions and discomfort. The outputs indicate the control options resulting in minimal discomfort hours while
at the same having the lowest environmental impact.
- 933 -
Tip: A good starting point to learn more about design optimisation is follow through the Optimisation Basic
Tutorial.
To get started with an optimisation analysis go to the Simulation screen and click on the Optimisation tab.
From the Simulation Optimisation screen you can:
Edit the Optimisation Analysis Settings (objectives, constraints and variables). This is a required first
step before running the first analysis.
Update the Optimisation Analysis which opens the Optimisation Calculation Options Dialog.
View Optimisation results.
Optimisation Contents
Optimisation and Parametric Analysis Settings

Optimisation Calculation Options Dialog
Optimisation Outputs
Optimisation Limitations
Optimisation Tips and Tricks
Optimisation Background
Optimisation Basic Tutorial
Optimisation and Parametric Analysis Settings

The Optimisation and Parametric Analysis Settings dialog can be accessed from the Tools menu and also
from the Simulation screen on the Parametric and Optimisation tabs. The data entered here can be used for
both Optimisation and Parametric Analyses as follows:
Optimisation
By entering data on 3 tabs you can use this dialog to set up the optimisation problem:
Objectives - define the objectives of the analysis - what constitutes a "good design".
Constraints - any limits on performance to be imposed.
Design Variables - the elements of the model that are to be allowed to vary during the optimisation
analysis and the new values that these elements may take.
On each of these 3 tabs are tables of objectives, constraints and design variables.
Parametric Analysis
Only 1 tab is used for parametric analysis:
Design Variables - the elements of the model that are to be allowed to vary during the parametric
analysis and the new values that these elements may take. When used for Parametric Analysis only
the top 2 variables on the list are used as parametric analysis only supports a maximum of 2 variables.
Objectives
The Objectives tab allows you to define how the "success" of a particular design is be measured. This is done
by defining either 1 or 2 objectives for the analysis. Typical settings here might include 2 objectives: "Minimise
discomfort hours" and "Minimise carbon emissions" or alternatively "Minimise construction cost" and "Minimise
carbon emissions". See screenshot below.
- 934 -
Calculations
To add a new Objective click on the Add new link on the info panel. This opens the Objective dialog which
allows you enter information on that objective. Other options are to Edit the currently selected objective or to
Delete the currently selected objective. It is only possible to have 1 or 2 objectives.
The number of objectives (1 or 2) radically affects the nature of the analysis. With a single objective
optimisation there is no trade off between 2 objectives, but simply a requirement to select designs that give
highest or lowest values of the objective KPI.
Constraints
The Constraints tab allows you to define limits on the performance of the building. Examples of constraints
that might be applied to an optimisation analysis are "Discomfort hours must be less than 200" or "Daylight
availability must be greater than 50%".
To add a new Constraint click on the Add new link on the info panel. This opens the Constraint dialog which
allows you enter information on that constraint. Other options are to Edit the currently selected constraint or to
Delete the currently selected constraint.
- 935 -
Variables
The variables tab allows you to define the elements of the building design that can be allowed to vary as well
as the allowed values that the variable can take on during the analysis. You can select from a wide range of
variables such as Window to wall %, Heating setpoint temperature, HVAC Template, External wall
construction etc.
List data types such as constructions, glazing or templates require a set of options to be selected to define the
allowed variable options.
To add a new Design Variable click on the Add new link on the info panel. This opens the Variable dialog
which allows you enter information on that variable. Other options are to Edit the currently selected variable or
to Delete the currently selected variable.
Optimisation Objective
Accessed from Optimisation Analysis Settings dialog
Name
Your name for the objective, e.g. "Minimise ASHRAE 55 discomfort hours"
Objective KPI
Select the Objective Key Performance Indicator (KPI) from the list:
1-Cost - total construction cost as reported on the Cost and Carbon tab.
2-Operational carbon - annual operational carbon emissions due to fuel consumption in the building.
Fuel consumption is calculated through an EnergyPlus simulation. Carbon emissions are calculated
from fuel consumption using the Carbon emission factors on the Legislative regions dialog.
3-Discomfort hours - number of discomfort hours based on ASHRAE 55 method. Area-weighted
average values for individual zones are used for the building level assessment. Note that this objective
is not the same as the building level aggregation method used by EnergyPlus in the Summary output
html data which adds up hours in which any zone in the building is uncomfortable. If you would like to
only consider occupied hours in your comfort analysis then make sure this option is set in the main
Simulation options dialog.
4-Daylight availability - % of the building working plane having natural daylight levels higher than the
threshold defined on the Daylight screen (2% daylight factor by default).
Note: The 4-Daylight availability objective is not available in current versions.
- 936 -
Calculations
Minimise or Maximise
Select whether you wish to maximise or minimise the selected objective.
Optimisation Constraint
Accessed from Optimisation Analysis Settings dialog
Optimisation Constraints allow you to impose upper or lower limits on a building Key Performance Indicator
(KPI) such as Cost or Discomfort. Examples of constraints that might be applied to an optimisation analysis
are "Discomfort hours must be less than 200", "Daylight availability must be greater than 50%" or
"Construction cost must be less than $6m".
Note: The constraint KPI can be the same as a KPI used for an Optimisation Objective.
When viewing optimisation results with constraints applied you will find that some of the results generated
don't respect the constraints. This is normal, however you should also see that many more new points are
generated that do meet constraints because the optimiser favours such design variants when creating new
generations.
When using constraints you will sometimes find that the solution will appear not to converge to as clean a
Pareto front as occurs without constraints applied. This is likely to be due to the way constraints are modelled
as modified objectives in DesignBuilder. In a problem with 2 objectives and 1 constraint there are effectively 3
objective functions which will give rise to a 3-D Pareto front. This cannot be adequately visualised on a 2-D
scatter graph, but it is likely that the Pareto Front would be cleaner were it being viewed in 3-D with the
constraint as the 3rd dimension.
Name
Your name for the constraint (e.g. "ASHRAE 55 discomfort hours < 200")
Constraint KPI
Select the Constraint Key Performance Indicator (KPI) from the list:
1-Cost - total construction cost as reported on the Cost and Carbon tab.
2-Operational carbon - annual operational carbon emissions due to fuel consumption in the building.
Fuel consumption is calculated through an EnergyPlus simulation. Carbon emissions are calculated
from fuel consumption using the Carbon emission factors on the Legislative regions dialog.
3-Discomfort hours - number of discomfort hours based on ASHRAE 55 method. Area-weighted
average values for individual zones are used for the building level assessment. Note that this objective
is not the same as the building level aggregation method used by EnergyPlus in the Summary output
html data which adds up hours in which any zone in the building is uncomfortable. If you would like to
only consider occupied hours in your comfort analysis then make sure this option is set in the main
Simulation options dialog.
4-Daylight availability - % of the building working plane having natural daylight levels higher than the
threshold defined on the Daylight screen (2% daylight factor by default).
Note: The 4-Daylight availability constraint is not available in current versions.
Less than or Greater than

Select whether the criterion refers to an upper or lower limit.
1-Less than - the KPI must have a value less than that entered in the next text box.
2-Greater than - the KPI must have a value greater than that entered in the next text box.
Value
Enter the upper or lower limit value for the KPI.
- 937 -
Units
Enter text to define the units of the value. This text does not affect the calculations.
Optimisation Design Variable

Accessed from Optimisation and Parametric Analysis Settings dialog
Design Variable
Variable type
Select the variable type from the list.
Note: In DesignBuilder v4 all variables are listed for selection regardless of the state of the model and care
must be taken to select variables that are appropriate. For example, if the Scheduled natural ventilation model
option is used then changes in the % External window opens variable (which only applies to Calculated
natural ventilation) won't affect results.
Min value
The lowest value that this numeric design variable can take on. This option is only visible when a numeric
variable type has been selected (above).
Max value
The highest value that this numeric design variable can take on. This option is only visible when a numeric
variable type has been selected (above).
Step
Not used yet. This option is only visible when a numeric variable type has been selected (above).
Values
Click on the browse button to open a list of components or templates for selection. Items can be selected by
checking the appropriate checkboxes.
When a template is selected as the variable type, one of the selected templates from the list are loaded in
each iteration of the optimisation analysis.
This option is only visible when a list variable type has been selected (above).
Target
Target objects
This option allows you to select one or more object(s) to which the variations are to be applied.
Note: In the current v3 software this option is not selectable and all variations are applied at the building level.
While this can be limiting, it is still possible to achieve some control through appropriate use of hard and
default settings at block, zone, surface and opening levels in the model.
- 938 -
Calculations
Optimisation Calculation Options Dialog

To start an optimisation analysis go to the Simulation screen and click on the Optimisation tab. Calculations
are updated using the Update toolbar icon in the usual way. The data on the Optimisation Calculation Dialog
is used to provide options to control the optimisation analysis as well as outputs to help you to understand the
progress being made as the calculations continue.
Note: It is necessary to run the base simulation with monthly/annual outputs before opening the optimisation
tab. The optimisation simulations will all be run using the base calculation and model options.
There are 2 tabs on the Dialog:
Optimisation Calculation Options Dialog - General

Optimisation Calculation Options Dialog - Simulation Manager
You can learn about the outputs generated on the graph on this dialog during the optimisation:
Optimisation Calculation Options Dialog - General

The genetic algorithms (GA) used by DesignBuilder require a number of options to control the way that the
solutions evolve.
Enter a description for the calculation. This text will be used to identify the results on the graph and any other
related outputs.
Optimisation Options
Maximum generations
The maximum number of generations to be used will determine the time/computing resources required to
complete the analysis. The value entered here will usually reflect the complexity of the analysis. The default
value for maximum generations is 200 and typical values are in the range 50-500. You can of course set a
larger number at the beginning, and then manually terminate the search process when sufficient good
solutions have been found.
Maximum population size

Each generation will include at most this number of designs. The bigger the population size, the more different
solutions may exist within the same generation. Larger population sizes may be required for problems
containing 5 or more design variables. The default maximum population size is 15.
Apply constraints to Pareto front

This option allows you to only display feasible solutions on the Pareto Front. Solutions failing one or constraint
requirement are not included on the Pareto Front. This option applies to the graphic display of the Pareto
Front only and does not affect the solution itself. The option can be changed during the simulation.
Apply constraints to all graph points

Checking this option shows on feasible solutions and hides all other solutions failing one or more constraint
requirement.
- 939 -
Advanced Options
Encoding length for floats
The number of bits used to define each float (numeric) design variable value. The number of options this gives
rise to can be calculated as 2n, where n is the encoding length. This value should normally be between 6 and
14. An encoding length of 10 for a float gives 1024 equally spaced samples within the specified range of the
design variable. This in most cases will be adequate. The default is 6.
Encoding length for lists

The number of bits used to define each list design variable value. The maximum number of options that this
option can accommodate can be calculated as 2n,where n is the encoding length. For example a value of 6
allows up to 26 = 64 items per list. If you have less than 64 items in each variable list then a value of 6 should
be a good choice here. The default is 4.
Tournament size
The Tournament operator is used in this implementation of Genetic Algorithm for selecting better solutions
from the current generation. Tournament size means the size of a random sample taken in the current
generation. From this random sample, the best solution will be selected for reproduction. Default value is 2.
Crossover rate
This rate is in fact a relative probability (compared to individual mutation probability) of a new solution being
created by crossover. For example, if the crossover rate is 1.0 and individual mutation probability is 0.5, there
are 67% (1.0/1.5) chance that the new solution will be created by crossover, and 33% (0.5/1.5) chance it will
be created by mutation. The default value is 1.0. Typical range is 0.6-1.0
Individual mutation probability

It is important to avoid "premature convergence" where the optimisation settles on a Pareto front which is
incomplete or inaccurate. The Individual mutation probability helps to maintain diversity in the population to
ensure that the parameter space is fully explored which in turn helps to avoid premature convergence and
missing the full set of optimal solutions.
Low values of Individual mutation probability (e.g. 0.2) can help to avoid wasting time exploring non-optimal
parts of the parameter space which leads to fast convergence; however the results may not be as accurate as
when using higher values. DesignBuilder uses a balanced default of 0.5.
See also Crossover rate.
Override default bitwise mutation probability

Check this option if you wish to override the default value of bitwise mutation probability. The defaults value is
1/nbits where nbits is the total of the number of bits in the chromosome calculated by summing the number of
bits for each variable. For numeric variables the number of bits is the Encoding length for floats and for list
variables the number of bits is the Encoding length for lists. The maximum default value is 0.1 and the
minimum is 0.01.
Bitwise mutation probability

If you choose to override the automatic calculation then the value can be entered here.
Constraints
Lower and upper constraint margins
The lower and upper constraint margins are used as part of the constraint handling method used by
DesignBuilder, which is based on a generic penalty function approach. During a constrained optimisation each
design alternative is tested against any constraints applied and a penalty is generated based on whether the
- 940 -
Calculations
design is feasible or not, i.e. whether it meets constraint requirements. If the function value is within the
feasible range then no penalty is applied and conversely if it is outside the feasible range then a penalty is
applied. There is a margin between the feasible and the unfeasible regions where a linearly ramped penalty is
applied. The upper and lower margins set on the Calculation options dialog are used to define these regions
as shown on the graph below.
Scoring For Invalid Designs

Some designs are considered invalid. For example in a controls analysis it is not normally allowed for heating
setpoint temperature to be higher than cooling setpoint temperature. If a particular design variant has an
invalid configuration then it is assigned a penalty using the maximum objective score (assuming objectives are
being minimised). This applies evolutionary pressure to discourage similar invalid design variants from
appearing in future generations.
Multi-Objective Pareto Scatter Graph

When 2 objective functions are defined, the trade off for the range of design variables considered is displayed
graphically on the scatter graph. The Pareto optimal solutions are displayed in red, current generation are
shown in blue and previous generations are shown in dark grey.
- 941 -
Single Objective Graph

When a single objective is used the graphical output shows the evolution of the objective function for each
iteration. Because there is no trade off with single objective optimisation, only the single most optimal solution
is highlighted in green in the grid.
Grid Output
Optimisation Calculation Options - Simulation Manager
Simulation Manager tab of the Optimisation Calculation Options Dialog
Optimisation studies require many hundreds or even thousands of simulations to be carried out in order to
achieve accurate results. DesignBuilder is provided with a Simulation Manager to help run these simulations
as quickly and efficiently as possible. To use the Simulation Manager tick the Use Simulation Manager
checkbox on the Simulation Manager tab and select the appropriate options below. If you don't choose this
option then simulations will be carried out sequentially, which will generally take a lot longer.
Server
Select the server from the drop list. DesignBuilder comes with a server called "localhost"and if you don't add a
new server then this will be the only option to choose.
Contact DesignBuilder support for information on how to connect to a server running on a Local Area Network.
EnergyPlus server method

Two EnergyPlus server method options are available :
EnergyPlus - the normal option to choose which runs the standard version of EnergyPlus per your
select on the EnergyPlus tab of the Program options dialog.
JEPlus - if you have an account on the De Montfort University supercomputer then select this option
which will allow you to run your simulation using JEPlus. The first time you attempt to run JEPlus
through this option you will be prompted for your account details.
Number of jobs per batch

Enter the number of jobs to be simulated before results are passed back from the Simulation Manager to
DesignBuilder.
Enter a low value (e.g. 2) to see results displayed as they are generated and a large number (e.g. Maximum
population size) if you would like to avoid having the graph updating very frequently. You may find that
entering a large value will allow the optimisation to complete slightly more quickly.
In v4.0.0 entering 1 here will cause the internal version of EnergyPlus to be used and you should therefore
enter a value of 2 or more to ensure that the Simulation Manager is used.
The screenshot below illustrates some of the main outputs of the Optimisation analysis.
- 942 -
Calculations
Optimisation Limitations
DesignBuilder v4 has these limitations related to Optimisation:
1.
2.
3.
You must run a simulation with monthly/annual output for the model (on the Analysis tab) before
clicking on the optimisation tab. If you dont have any monthly/annual results on this tab then you must
re-run the base simulation before updating the optimisation analysis.
The Daylight availability KPI is not yet enabled but we hope to have this working soon.
It isn't possible to store multiple optimisation results sets within the DesignBuilder model.
See also Optimisation Tips and Tricks
Optimisation Tips and Tricks

Speeding up optimisation
Optimisation studies require hundreds or even thousands of simulations to be carried out and so can be
extremely time/calculation intensive. To help speed simulations, you could consider using one or more of
these techniques:
1.
2.
3.
Analyse a single representative zone in the building and apply findings to whole building.
Use a representative simulation period instead of the whole annual simulation. For example, in many
climates using the first or second 6 months of the year would be a good approximation to use of the full
12 month simulation. Alternatively if the analysis is mainly related to summer overheating then you
might choose a shorter representative summer period for the simulations.
In most cases, the more variables that are defined in the analysis, the more data points that will be
required before convergence of the solution is achieved. Instead of trying to include all possible
optimisation variables in one analysis, you might consider splitting the problem into 2 or more sub
problems. For example it can be easiest to carry out HVAC controls optimisation studies independently
of component selection. Start with the most fundamental design decisions (e.g. window size and
- 943 -
4.
position) and as the design solidifies and study details such optimal selection of system types and
control options later in separate analyses.
Use JEPlus or a network simulation server to maximise the number of simulations that are run in
parallel at one time. If you have a simulation server with many cores at your disposal then you might
consider increasing both the population size and Number of job per batch which allows more cases to
be analysed at once.
See also Working with Large Models.
Ensure inheritance path

It is important to ensure that the variations defined by the optimisation Design Variables will have the intended
effect. Optimisation works by applying variations to a copy of the base model and these changes are applied
to the object defined in the Variable. It is important to take into account how this data will be inherited to down
to any child blocks, zones etc to ensure you are testing the design variants you think you are. For example if
the Window to wall % was hard set at block level then changes in this data at building level would not
influence the surfaces of the design variants in that block and the results will indicate that the Window to wall
% does not influence results.
Optimisation Technical Background

How It Works
DesignBuilder uses a Genetic Algorithm (GA) based on the NSGA-II method, which is widely used as a "fast
and elitist multi-objective" method providing a good trade off between a well converged and a well distributed
solution set. It works as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
First, the population is randomly initialised.

Chromosomes (design variants) are sorted and put into fronts based on Pareto non-dominated sets.
Within a Pareto front, the chromosomes are ranked based on Euclidean distances between solutions or
I-dist (term used in NSGA-II) . Generally, solutions which are far away (not crowded) from other
solutions are given a higher preference in the selection process to help create a diverse solution set
and avoid crowding.
The best designs are picked from the current population and put into a mating pool.
In the mating pool, tournament selection, crossover and mating is carried out.
The mating pool and current population is combined. The resulting set is sorted, and the best
chromosomes are passed into the new population.
Go to step 2, unless maximum number of generations have been reached.
The solution set is the highest ranked Pareto non-dominated set from all populations.
Bibliography
1.
Introduction to Genetic Algorithms:
2.
3.
4.
5.
http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Genetic_algorithm
http://www.obitko.com/tutorials/genetic-algorithms/
Hitch-Hiker's Guide to Evolutionary Computation http://www.aip.de/~ast/EvolCompFAQ/

Sean Luke, 2009, Essentials of Metaheuristics, Lulu, available for free at
http://cs.gmu.edu/~sean/book/metaheuristics/
A.E. Eiben and J.E. Smith, Introduction to Evolutionary Computing, Springer, Natural Computing
Series, Corr. 2nd printing, 2007, ISBN: 978-3-540-40184-1 http://www.cs.vu.nl/~gusz/ecbook/EibenSmith-Intro2EC-Ch2.pdf
Deb, K., Pratap. A, Agarwal, S., and Meyarivan, T. (2002). A fast and elitist multi-objective genetic
algorithm: NSGA-II. IEEE Transaction on Evolutionary Computation, 6(2), 181-197.
Optimisation Basic Tutorial

This tutorial will help you to learn the basic information needed to run an optimisation study in DesignBuilder in
a few easy steps.
- 944 -
Calculations
Step 1 - Create A Base Model

Create a new file located in London Gatwick and add a building to the site with a simple rectangular block
having dimensions 30m x 20m as shown below. Use default Model options and template settings.
DesignBuilder as supplied will use a Fan Coil Unit HVAC system as the default. For this example you should
make sure that you have heating and cooling selected and no natural ventilation (this will be the case for a
new model with a FCU HVAC system selected).
Step 2 - Run A Standard Simulation

Click on the Simulation tab and run a base annual simulation. Because it is a simple model you can select
hourly results. Make sure to also choose Monthly results which are required by the Optimisation. Check the
hourly results for the simulation period and make sure that the model is behaving as expected, including
temperatures within the building, operations periods etc. If not fix the model and repeat this step until you are
happy with the base model hourly results. Monthly results should something like the screenshot below.
- 945 -
Step 3 - Define Optimisation Problem On Optimisation Analysis Settings

Dialog
You are now ready to start the optimisation stage. To do this click on the Optimisation tab on the Simulation
screen. Because you don't have any results yet the Optimisation Analysis Settings dialog is displayed. This
allows you to define the optimisation problem, i.e. what it is that you want to achieve from the optimisation
study. Use the default settings for this simple example which request an optimum set of solutions to minimise
both operational construction emissions and occupant discomfort allowing for variations in window to wall ratio
and heating and cooling setpoint temperatures.
Objectives:
1. Minimise operational carbon emissions
2. Minimise discomfort (ASHRAE 55)
Constraints:
None
Design variables:
Allow WWR and cooling and heating setpoints to vary as shown in the screenshot below. Variations are made
at building level for all variables in this case as shown by the Target objects column.
- 946 -
Calculations
Step 4 - Open Optimisation Calculation Options Dialog

Having confirmed the Optimisation analysis options the next dialog to open will be the Optimisation calculation
options. Use all default settings (which are generally suitable for small analyses like this).
Step 5 - Start Optimisation Analysis

Once you have completed your review of the options press the Start button in the bottom right of the screen.
The optimisation process will involve running a lot of simulations. If you kept default settings there will be 200
generations with a population size of 10 in each. That means 200 x 10 = 2000 simulations! For our simple
model and when using the Simulation manager to run these in parallel this shouldn't take too long. However if
time is an issue it is usually worth keeping an eye on the solutions as they come in to check whether
convergence has been achieved.
While preparing this tutorial we made the judgement that the solution was effectively converged after about
100 generations and pressed the Stop button at that point. If the optimisation had been left to continue the red
Pareto front line would have been filled in further however this would not provide much extra information for
the purposes of our example test. After pressing Stop the current generation continues to simulate and once
that is finished....
Step 6 - Analyse Results
- 947 -
Try using some of DesignBuilder's analysis tools to investigate the best settings in this case.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Drag the Status header into the dark grey area above the grid where it says "Drag a column header
here to group by that column"
Sort the grid data by Discomfort by clicking on the "Discomfort" header.
Scroll down to the bottom of the grid where you will find the optimal "Pareto Front" options coloured
green. These are the design configurations which most successfully achieve the design objectives
(minimise carbon and discomfort in this case). Because you sorted by discomfort you will see results
either in ascending or descending order depending on how many times you clicked on the header. You
will notice that when the discomfort results are in ascending order the carbon emission results in the
next column are in descending order and vice-versa.
All points on the Pareto front have 20% (or a little more) glazing . This is because it was the lowest
allowed value in the analysis and higher values increase both discomfort and cooling loads (hence
carbon emissions).
Heating setpoint temperatures range from 18C (lowest carbon emissions) to 23C (lowest discomfort).
Cooling setpoint temperatures range from 24C (lowest discomfort) to 27C (lowest carbon emissions).
The easiest way to identify a balanced result is to click on a point on the Pareto Front which gives to
right degree of emphasis to the 2 objectives. The corresponding item is highlighted in the grid giving the
corresponding design settings.
Next steps to learning. Try adding more design variables. Glazing type, shading systems etc. Try using
construction cost as a variable instead of discomfort.
COMPUTATIONAL FLUID DYNAMICS (CFD)

Click on the CFD screen tab to start CFD calculations.
The rest of this section covers the processes involved in running CFD calculations in DesignBuilder.
What is CFD?
Computational Fluid Dynamics (CFD) is the term used to describe a family of numerical methods used to
calculate the temperature, velocity and various other fluid properties throughout a region of space.
CFD when applied to buildings can provide the designer with information on probable air velocities, pressures
and temperatures that will occur at any point through a predefined air volume in and around building spaces.
Boundary conditions are specified which may include the effects of climate, internal heat gains and HVAC
systems. DesignBuilder CFD can be used for both external and internal analyses.
See also the Introduction to CFD and External CFD Tutorial
External CFD analysis

External CFD analysis provides the distribution of air velocity and pressure around building structures due to
the wind effect and this information can be used to assess pedestrian comfort, determine local pressures for
positioning HVAC supply and extract grilles and to calculate more accurate pressure coefficients for
EnergyPlus calculated natural ventilation simulations.
- 948 -
Calculations
Example External CFD Analysis Output - Wind Pressure Study
Internal CFD analysis

Internal CFD analysis provides information on the distribution of air velocity, pressure and temperature (and
several other calculated parameters) throughout the inside of building spaces. Also calculated is 'age of air' to
indicate the relative 'freshness' of the air through the domain and also a comfort index. This information can
be used to assess the effectiveness of various HVAC and natural ventilation system designs and to evaluate
consequent interior comfort conditions.
- 949 -
Example Internal CFD Analysis Output - Occupant Comfort
CFD Calculations Topics Contents
Creating Model Geometry for CFD

Finite Volume Grid and Geometric Modelling Considerations
Building Levels and CFD Analyses
CFD Boundary Conditions
Component Blocks and Assemblies as CFD Boundaries
Setting Up a New External CFD Analysis
Setting Up a New Internal CFD Analysis
Editing the CFD Grid
CFD Grid Information
Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points
CFD Calculation Options
Residuals and Cell Monitor Graphs
Convergence Difficulties and Troubleshooting
Displaying Results
Conducting CFD Comfort Calculations
CFD Results Manager
Appendix - CFD Calculations and Convergence
- 950 -
Calculations
Creating Model Geometry for CFD

If you have already created a model for the purpose of an additional analysis (e.g. thermal simulation or
SBEM calculation), you can use exactly the same model for CFD, although you should first read the Finite
volume grid and geometric considerations section.
On the other hand, if you intend to conduct a CFD analysis from scratch, you should refer to the Building
Models section for information on creating models.
Finite Volume Grid and Geometric Modelling Considerations

The calculation method requires that the geometric space across which the calculations are to be conducted
is first divided into a number of non-overlapping adjoining cells which are collectively known as the finite
volume grid.
When a CFD project is created, a grid is automatically generated for the required model domain by identifying
all contained model object vertices and then generating key coordinates from these vertices along the major
grid axes. These key coordinates, extended from the X, Y and Z-axes across the width, depth and height of
the domain respectively are known as grid lines. The distance between grid lines along each axis is known
as a grid region and these regions are initially spaced employing user-defined default grid spacing in order to
complete the grid generation. The grid used by DesignBuilder CFD is a non-uniform rectilinear Cartesian grid,
which means that the grid lines are parallel with the major axes and the spacing between the grid lines
enables non-uniformity.
For example, looking at a simple building block with a single component assembly representing a table:
The resulting grid, generated with 0.3m default grid spacing would be as follows:
- 951 -
By default, grid regions are spaced uniformly using a spacing that is calculated to be as close to the userdefined default grid spacing as possible. Notice the narrow regions created between key coordinates
associated with the tabletop and table legs. In this case, the distance between these key coordinates is of an
acceptable value. However, very narrow regions resulting in long narrow grid cells or cells having a high
aspect ratio should be avoided, as they tend to result in unstable solutions that can fail to converge. Highly
detailed component assemblies can result in very large numbers of closely spaced key coordinates resulting
in cells having high aspect ratios. Large numbers of key coordinates can also lead to overly complex grids and
correspondingly high calculation run times and excessive memory usage which can be avoided by replacing
very detailed assemblies with cruder representations for the purpose of the CFD calculation. However, where
very narrow grid regions are unavoidable, adjacent grid lines formed from key coordinates can be merged
together using the merge tolerance setting which is accessed through the new CFD analysis dialogs (see the
Setting Up a New External CFD Analysis and Setting Up a New Internal CFD Analysis sections). For
instance, in the above example, if the table assembly had been located closer to the edge of the adjacent
window, this could result in unacceptably close grid lines:
- 952 -
Calculations
These closely spaced grid lines can be merged by creating a new analysis and increasing the grid line merge
tolerance setting to say 0.025m:
- 953 -
Due to the strict rectilinear nature of the grid, grid cells that lie in regions outside of the domain required for
calculation are blocked-off in order to cater for irregular geometries. It is important to take this into account
when creating a model in order to maximise the efficiency of grid generation and/or to ensure that surface
CFD boundaries will lie in the plane of a major grid axis to achieve accuracy of boundary representation. In
some cases, the model may be rotated in order to ensure that most of the wall surfaces are orthogonal with
respect to the grid axes. To take an extreme example, if a simple rectangular space has been drawn at a
45 angle to the Z-axis:
- 954 -
Calculations
The resulting grid, generated using 0.3m default grid spacing, contains a great deal of redundancy in the form
of blocked-off regions and inaccuracy of surface representation:
If the block is first rotated, to be aligned with the X-axis:
- 955 -
The resulting grid exhibits no redundancy and there is no inaccuracy in surface representation:
The accuracy of the representation of non-orthogonal surfaces can be improved by using smaller default grid
spacing and in some cases specific grid regions can be modified to increase accuracy in a more localised
fashion as illustrated by the following example:
- 956 -
Calculations
Grid generated using default 0.3m grid spacing:
Using the Edit CFD Grid tool, the grid spacing within just the regions spanning the angled section is reduced
to 0.2m to improve the representation:
- 957 -
Grid regions between key coordinates can also be spaced using non-uniform spacing options and additional
key coordinate regions can be added. Further information is provided on grid modification in the Editing the
CFD Grid section.
Building Levels and CFD Analyses

Internal CFD analyses can be conducted at zone, building block and building levels. Calculations can also be
conducted for single zones that span several blocks by connecting them with holes and using the Merge
zones connected by holes model option setting.
External analyses can only be conducted at the site level.
The level you are at when you create the CFD Analysis defines both the type of the CFD analysis (internal or
external) and also the extent of the CFD domain. If you are at building level then the domain is the whole
building, if you are at block level the domain will be the block and if you are at zone level the domain is the
current zone.
CFD Boundary Conditions

An important initial concept for CFD analyses is that of boundary conditions. Each of the dependent variable
equations requires meaningful values at the boundary of the calculation domain in order for the calculations to
generate meaningful values throughout the domain. These values are known as boundary conditions and can
be specified in a number of ways.
The specification of boundary conditions for external analyses is relatively straightforward because it is an
isothermal calculation and so it only requires the building exposure, wind velocity and wind direction to be set
and this is done in the New CFD Analysis dialog box.
Internal analysis boundary conditions tend to be more involved and can require the addition of zone surface
boundaries such as supply diffusers, extract grilles, temperature and heat flux patches and also the
- 958 -
Calculations
incorporation of model assemblies representing occupants, radiators, fan-coil units, etc. DesignBuilder
provides default wall and window boundary temperatures automatically but it is important that you check that
these defaults are appropriate and that you correctly specify any additional boundary conditions required for
your project.
You can also calculate the internal surface temperature for each surface in the domain using EnergyPlus
simulation by switching on the appropriate options. You can also calculate airflow rates through open
windows, vents, doors and holes using the Calculated natural ventilation option.
See also:

CFD Model Data
Component Blocks Assemblies as CFD Boundaries

Internal boundary conditions can be defined in three ways:
1.
2.
3.
Surface temperatures can be defined for all zone surfaces including windows and other openings.
Zone surface boundary conditions including supply diffusers, extract grilles, temperatures and heat
fluxes can be added in the form of surface patches using a similar method to that used for adding
windows and doors.
Component blocks and component assemblies can be defined as temperature or heat flux boundaries
or they can also have boundary condition patches added as described above for Zone surfaces.
In all cases the CFD boundary conditions can be edited on the CFD Model data tab.
Default Wall and Window Temperatures

All zone surfaces within a model have default wall and window boundary temperatures. These boundary
temperatures are inherited from the building level down to the zone surface level and may be set at any
intermediate level. This mechanism provides a convenient method for defining wall and window temperature
boundary conditions throughout a building model in the absence of imported EnergyPlus boundary data.
Default inside and outside wall and window boundary temperatures can be accessed under the CFD
Boundary header on the CFD tab.
Zone and Component Block Surface Boundaries

Supply diffusers, extract grilles, temperature and heat flux patches can be added to zone and component
block surfaces using the Add CFD boundary tool.
To add a surface boundary, move down to the surface on which you want to locate the boundary, either by
selecting it from the model navigator or by navigating to it in the Edit screen. At the surface level, you can then
select the Add CFD boundary tool from the toolbar.
Component Blocks & Assemblies as CFD Boundaries

Component blocks and assemblies can be used for CFD analyses to simply allow for the effect of obstructions
on the airflow. However, they also allow the definition of CFD boundary attributes to enable them to act as
constant temperature surfaces or heat flux sources and can also be modified to behave as non-solids to allow
air to pass through them.
Note: Component blocks and assemblies defined at block level do not affect EnergyPlus simulations
- 959 -
Component Blocks
CFD attributes for component blocks are inherited down from the building level to component blocks located
at both building and building block levels. CFD attributes for component blocks are accessed on the CFD
model data tab.
Assemblies
The CFD assembly library that is provided with DesignBuilder contains a number of pre-defined assemblies
that can be used to add items such as occupants, radiators and furniture. Some of these pre-defined
assemblies already have CFD boundary attributes associated with them, e.g. standing occupant assemblies
have a defined convective heat flux of 56W. You can also define your own assemblies for use in CFD
analyses and you will find details of how to do this in the Assemblies Help section.
CFD attributes for component assemblies are inherited from the parent assembly to instances of the assembly
at the building and building block levels. CFD attributes for assemblies are accessed from the CFD tab after
moving down to an assembly instance level by clicking on it in the navigator or double-clicking on it in the Edit
screen. It is important to understand that if you change an attribute for a specific instance of an assembly, the
attributes will be changed for all other instances of the same assembly.
The following CFD boundary settings are available for both component blocks and component assemblies:
Thermal boundary type: The thermal boundary type can be set to one of the following:
1None - component block does not act as a CFD boundary condition.

2Temperature - component block acts as a fixed temperature CFD boundary condition (enter
temperature below)
3Flux - component block supplies a fixed heat flux to the surroundings (enter the convective flux
below).
Temperature
If the thermal boundary type has been set to 2-Temperature, enter the temperature of the block.
Heat flux (convective fraction only)

If the thermal boundary type has been set to 3-Flux, enter the convective only portion of the heat emission of
the block. If you know the total heat flux then you can calculate the convective part by multiplying by (1-radiant
fraction). For modelling building occupants you can assume a radiant fraction of 0.5. You can search the
DesignBuilder help using "radiant fraction" as the search term to find more example radiant fractions for
different types of equipment.
- 960 -
Calculations
Important Note: In the case of assemblies used to apply a heat flux boundary condition, the heat flux data on
the CFD tab of the component blocks can be treated in one of 2 ways depending on whether or not it inherits
this data from the assembly above:
a) When inheriting from the assembly above the same heat flux data as for the parent assembly appears in
blue on the CFD tab, but DesignBuilder doesn't use this directly. Instead the data is applied as if it is the total
for the whole assembly and the actual value for this component block is reduced by a proportion equal to the
ratio of the component volume to the volume of the whole assembly.
b) When hard set heat flux data is entered (data shown in red on the CFD tab) this is used directly in CFD
calculations and spread evenly around the component block surfaces.
Mass (air cannot move through block if checked)

Determines whether or not the block will act as a physical obstruction to the surrounding flow. In some cases,
it may be desirable to fix the temperature or flux of the component but allow air to pass through the block, e.g.
to represent an occupancy flux throughout a large volume without needing to locate individual occupants.
Setting Up a New External CFD Analysis

To create a new external CFD analysis, first make sure that you have selected the Site object in the model
navigator and then click on the CFD tab:
The New CFD Analysis Data dialog is displayed which allows you to name the analysis, define grid
generation variables, wind data and the extents of the domain to be included in the analysis:
- 961 -
Grid type
With External CFD analyses you can select from 2 grid types:
1-Non uniform - where the grid is set up using a simple grid with fixed cubic cells using the Default
grid spacing as the cell size. This is the default option. This is the same setting as used for internal
CFD simulations, for which there is no option for a uniform grid.
2-Uniform - where DesignBuilder tries to set up a uniform grid but creates exceptions in order to
ensure that corners are located at the intersections of the grid. To achieve this, variations must be
created in the grid using the Grid line merge tolerance data.
Tip: Uniform grids are preferred for large and or very complex external CFD analyses to encourage
convergence.
Default Grid Spacing

On entry to the CFD screen after completing and closing the new CFD analysis dialog, the CFD grid is
automatically generated throughout the overall external domain extents. The grid is created by first
determining key points obtained from constituent model blocks along the major axes, the distance between
each of these key points being known as regions. Each CFD grid region along each major axis is
automatically spaced using the default grid spacing dimension.
Grid Line Merge Tolerance

A potential problem when generating the grid is the creation of cells with a high aspect ratio that can lead to
instability in the equation solver. In order to avoid such cells, grid lines that are very close together can be
merged. The grid line merge tolerance is the maximum dimension that will be used in determining whether or
not to automatically merge grid lines.
- 962 -
Calculations
Wind
Wind Velocity
Enter the required free stream wind velocity in m/s (measured at 10m above ground).
Wind Direction
The wind direction is defined clockwise from North. The default direction is 270, i.e. Westerly.
Wind Exposure
The free stream wind velocity is corrected for height above ground and surrounding terrain using an empirical
relationship. The following exposures can be selected:
1-Urban,
2-Suburban and
3-Open country .
Wind speed profile used by DesignBuilder (obtained from ASHRAE Fundamentals Airflow around buildings)
Where:
U(h) = wind speed (m/s) at height h (m)
Umet = wind speed (m/s) measured at 10m above ground level
met = meteorological site air layer thickness (270m Country exposure)
amet = exponent for meteorological site (0.14 Country exposure)
hmet = measurement height for meteorological (10m)
h = height above ground level (m)
Exposure
a
Country
0.14
Urban
0.22
City
0.33
Air layer thickness and exponent values for various exposures
(m)
270
370
460
Site Domain Factors

The length, width and height site domain factors are multipliers that are applied to the overall dimensions of
the building model in order to arrive at an external volume or domain across which the analysis is carried out.
The default factors are 3.0 applied to the length and width and a factor of 2.0 that is applied to the model
height.
After clicking on the OK button, the CFD screen is displayed showing the model in conjunction with the site
domain object:
- 963 -
Setting Up a New Internal CFD Analysis

To create a new internal CFD analysis, first make sure that you have selected the appropriate level object
(building, block or zone) in the model navigator and then click on the CFD tab:
New CFD analysis dialog

The New CFD Analysis dialog is displayed which allows you to name the analysis and define grid generation
variables:
- 964 -
Calculations
Default Grid Spacing

On entry to the CFD screen after completing and closing the new CFD analysis dialog, the CFD grid is
automatically generated throughout the overall external domain extents. The grid is created by first
determining key points obtained from constituent model blocks along the major axes, the distance between
each of these key points being known as grid regions. Each CFD grid region along each major axis is
automatically spaced using the default grid spacing dimension.
Grid Line Merge Tolerance

A potential problem when generating the grid is the creation of cells with a high aspect ratio that can lead to
instability in the equation solver. In order to avoid such cells, grid lines that are very close together can be
merged. The grid line merge tolerance is the maximum dimension that will be used in determining whether or
not to automatically merge grid lines.
As soon as a new analysis data set has been created, a default CFD grid is generated using the default grid
spacing defined as part of the data set. The default grid may be edited using the Edit CFD Grid tool which
allows you to change the spacing used for default regions, insert additional regions or remove previously
inserted regions.
When you select the Edit CFD Grid tool, the grid is displayed with the building outline overlaid as a ghosted
wire frame. Grid regions are displayed along the major axes bounded by dark grey lines, the auto-generated
grid region spacing lines being displayed in a lighter grey. The currently selected grid region is selected in
cyan or yellow if the region is a non-default inserted region. To select regions on one of the other major axes,
you can change the axis by clicking on the required axis of the axis selector displayed at the top right of the
screen:
- 965 -
To edit a grid region, move the mouse cursor across the grid to the required region that will highlight to
indicate that it has been selected and then click the mouse button. The selected region will then highlight in
red and the Edit CFD Grid data panel will be displayed at the bottom left of the screen:
The following settings are available on the Edit CFD Grid data panel:
- 966 -
Calculations
Operation
1Edit Region - change the spacing of the currently selected region.

2Insert Region- insert a new custom key coordinate at a defined point in the current region to form
an additional region.
3Remove Region - this option is only available if the current region has been previously inserted and
allows you to remove it.
New coordinate (m)

If the Insert Region operation has been selected, this setting is displayed allowing you to define a custom
coordinate within the current region. Note that the coordinate must lie in the range defined by the displayed
start and end coordinates.
Spacing Type
The spacing type can be set to one of the following:
1-None - the region is not sub-divided.
2-Uniform - the region is sub-divided into a number of equal sub-divisions, the dimension of which is
calculated to be as close to the specified Spacing dimension as possible.
3-Increasing power-law - the location of each sub-division grid line within the region increases as the
power of the spacing number, which starts at the beginning of the region. So that if i represents the
index number of the grid line counted from the start of the region, the coordinate of the i th sub-division
grid line is calculated using the following relationship: x i=(region dimension)(i/n)power+xs
4-Decreasing power-law - the location of each sub-division grid line within the region decreases as
the power of the spacing number, which starts at the end of the region. So that if i represents the index
number of the grid line counted from the start of the region, the coordinate of the ith sub-division grid
line is calculated using the following relationship: x i=(region dimension)[1-(i/n)power]+xs
5-Symmetric power-law - the coordinate of the ith sub-division grid line is calculated using both
increasing and decreasing power-law relationships that meet at the middle of the region:
For i <= n/2: xi=[(region dimension)/2](2i/n)power+xs
For i >= n/2: xi=[(region dimension)/2][2-(2i/n))power]+xs
Spacing Dimension (m)

If the uniform spacing type has been selected, this setting is displayed and allows you to enter the dimension
used for sub-dividing the region.
Spacing power
If the Increasing/Decreasing/Symmetric power law spacing type has been selected, this setting is displayed
and allows you to enter the power used in the associated power-law spacing relationship.
Number of divisions
If the Increasing/Decreasing/Symmetric power law spacing type has been selected, this setting is displayed
and allows you to enter the number of divisions used in the associated power-law spacing relationship.
After selecting an operation and adjusting the required settings, you then need to click on the Apply changes
button to update the selected grid region with the current settings.
- 967 -
CFD Grid Information
Information about the CFD grid can be obtained using the Show CFD grid statistics tool, which displays the
CFD grid statistics dialog:
If the maximum cell aspect ratio exceeds the allowable limit of 50 or the required memory exceeds the
physical memory available, the Check will indicate a failure:
- 968 -
Calculations
Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points
The CFD calculation process is iterative and is considered to have completed once convergence has been
achieved. The main indicator for convergence is the point at which the finite difference equations for all cells
are satisfied by the current values of the appropriate dependent variables. However, it can be very useful in
many cases to monitor the variation of the dependent variables at specific locations throughout the calculation
domain in order to observe the point at which they stabilise. It may be acceptable, in many cases, to terminate
a calculation as soon as the dependent variables have achieved adequate stability but before the residuals
have arrived at their defined termination values
When a project is first created, a default central cell monitor point is automatically added to the domain. The
Define CFD monitor points tool enables you to identify up to ten cells throughout the calculation domain at
which you want to monitor the variation of the calculated variables.
After selecting the Define CFD monitor points tool, the cell monitor screen is displayed which includes the
model view together with a cell selection frame, perpendicular to the currently selected axis. You can select a
plane along the current axis by moving the mouse cursor across the model in the direction of the axis. To
change the axis, click on the required axis on the axis selector tool, which is located at the top right of the
screen:
After selecting the required axis, move the cell selection frame along the axis, and then click the mouse button
to select a plane at the required distance along the axis. A cell selection grid is then displayed in the selected
plane allowing you to move the mouse cursor to the required cell in that plane:
- 969 -
After moving the mouse cursor to the required cell, click the mouse button to display the cell monitor data
panel at the bottom left of the screen.
The following settings are available on the cell monitor data panel:
Operation
This control is only active if you have selected a cell for which a monitor point has already been defined. The
following options are available:
1Update cell - add a monitor point or edit the name of a previously defined point.
2Remove cell - remove a previously defined monitor point.
Monitor Location Name

Enter a name for monitor point - this is used later when selecting data for the monitor point to be displayed on
the CFD Calculation Options dialog.
After changing the required settings, click on the Apply changes button to update the selected cell. You can
cancel the Define CFD monitor points command by pressing the <Esc> key or by selecting another tool.
CFD Calculation Options
To run the calculations, click on the Update calculated data tool. If a problem is found with the grid generation,
the CFD Grid Statistics dialog is displayed showing the error. There are three possible error conditions:
1.
2.
Maximum cell aspect ratio exceeds the limit - you will need to delete the existing project and create
a new one either reducing the default grid spacing dimension or increasing the grid line merge
tolerance by a suitable amount (see the CFD Results Manager section).
Required memory exceeds the available memory - you will need to delete the existing project and
create a new project with larger default grid spacing or consider simplifying the problem definition in
terms of complexity of assemblies, etc.
- 970 -
Calculations
3.
Flow imbalance the total flow rate specified for supply diffusers does not balance with the total flow
rate specified for extract grilles. You will need to add supply diffusers or extract grilles or edit the
existing flow rates to establish the correct balance
If no problem is encountered in creating the grid, the Edit Calculation Options dialog will be displayed:
The Edit Calculation Options dialog is divided into two main sections, the Residuals and Cell Monitor graphs
and the Calculation Options Data panel.
Buttons
There are also a group of buttons at the bottom of the dialog, which allow you to control the calculations:
Start
Start, or if the calculations have been paused, re-start the calculations.
Pause
Interrupt or pause the calculations. Once the calculations have been paused, the calculation dialog can be
temporarily closed in order to review the results.
Reset
After pausing the calculations, the calculations may then be re-initialised to start from scratch. If the solution is
found to diverge and you pause the calculations to decrease the velocity false time steps, you will then need
to reset the calculations before re-starting.
The calculation settings panel incorporates the following settings:
Turbulence Model
The following turbulence model options are available:
1Constant effective viscosity: The constant effective viscosity model is a very simple approach
involving the replacement of the molecular viscosity in the Navier-Stokes equations with a constant
effective viscosity (typically in the order of 100-1000). Although this model is incapable of modelling
local turbulence or the transport of turbulence, it is computationally much less expensive than the k-e
model and can be numerically much more stable.
- 971 -
2k-e: This model is one of the most widely used and tested of all turbulence models, belonging to the
so-called RANS (Reynolds Averaged Navier-Stokes) family of models. These models involve replacing
the instantaneous velocity in the Navier-Stokes and energy equations with a mean and fluctuating
component. The resulting equations give rise to additional terms known as Reynolds stresses and
turbulent heat flux components. Reynolds stresses are replaced with terms involving instantaneous
velocities where molecular viscosities are substituted for effective viscosities and a similar substitution
is conducted for the energy equation. The effective viscosity is the sum of the molecular viscosity and a
turbulent viscosity, which is derived from the turbulence kinetic energy and the dissipation rate of
turbulence kinetic energy:
where k= turbulence kinetic energy and e = dissipation rate of turbulence kinetic energy
k and e are both derived from partial differential equations which are in turn derived from a
manipulation of the Navier-Stokes equations.
Discretisation scheme
The following discretisation schemes are available:
1-Upwind - The calculation process involves replacing the defining set of partial differential equations
with a set of finite difference equations. The conventional approach to this is to use a Taylors series
formulation, which leads to a set of central difference equations. However, although this approach is
physically realistic for diffusion, it is not found to be realistic for convection because of its one-way
nature, i.e. upwind conditions affect downwind conditions but not the reverse. The upwind scheme
allows the convective term to be calculated assuming that the value of the dependent variable at a cell
interface is equal to the value at the cell on the upwind side of the interface.
2Hybrid a more computationally expensive approach than the upwind scheme but it reduces
numerical diffusion at high values of Pe number.
3Power-Law - The power-law scheme is arguably more accurate than the hybrid scheme but is more
computationally expensive.
Iterations
This is the maximum number of iterations conducted by the outer iterative calculation loop (see CFD
Calculations and Convergence section). The calculations will terminate when the number of iterations
reaches this value regardless of whether or not the solution has converged.
Isothermal
Temperature is assumed to be constant throughout the calculation domain and the energy equation is
removed from the calculations.
Surface heat transfer

The following surface heat transfer options are available:
1Calculated - Surface heat transfer coefficients are calculated by the CFD calculation scheme if the
k-e turbulence model has been selected.
2User-defined - Surface heat transfer coefficients can be defined for ceilings, wall and floors.
Initial conditions
In some cases, a faster solution can be achieved by setting the initial conditions closer to the final expected
conditions.
- 972 -
Calculations
Cell monitor
Select any defined cell monitor point and associated dependent variable to be displayed on the cell monitor
(see Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points section).
Residual Display
Residuals give an indication of the extent to which the calculations have converged to the final solution. They
are a measure of the total 'error' still left on the solution. You can select the dependent variables and/or mass
for which residuals are to be displayed in the residuals monitor. The mass residual is similar to the dependent
variable residuals but is extracted from a continuity equation mass balance for each cell and is the most
significant residual in terms of indicating a successfully converged solution.
The residuals have no units and are normalised by scaling to enable similar termination residual magnitudes
for each variable.
See also the Termination residual section below.
It is also important to use monitor points (above) in conjunction with termination residuals because they can
provide a more meaningful indication of convergence (i.e. when the values of the dependent variables at the
monitor points level out).
Dependent Variable Control Settings

Some CFD models may not converge with default control options and may require some adjustment of
settings under the Dependent Variable Control Settings header.
The calculations involve a nested iterative scheme whereby dependent variable equations are solved
iteratively within an overall outer iterative loop (see CFD Calculations and Convergence section). The
dependent variable control settings enable control inner iterative dependent variable calculations.
Inner iteration
The number of iterations used for the calculation of the dependent variable.
False time step

The finite difference equation set is formulated in the form of a transient equation set although the calculations
are essentially a snap-shot in time. The reason for this formulation is that the transient term behaves as a
very effective relaxation method, which can slow the change in dependent variables in order to arrive at a
more stable solution. The false time step is the time step used in the pseudo-transient term of the dependent
variable equation. For forced convection flows, a best-guess optimal false time step is automatically
calculated for velocities, however for buoyancy driven flows, a default value of 0.2 is used. Reducing the false
time step has the effect of slowing down the change in the dependent variable and can be a helpful remedy
for unstable solutions.
Relaxation factor
This is used in the text book relaxation method, which can be used to allow only a proportion of the
calculated value of the current iteration dependent variable to be assigned to the variable. However, the false
time step is normally the preferred method of achieving under-relaxation.
Termination residual
The outer iterative calculation loop is repeated until the finite difference equations for all cells are satisfied by
the current values of the appropriate dependent variables, at which point the scheme is said to have
converged. The dependent variable residual is the maximum residual quantity for the equation balance
across all cells in the domain. The solution is deemed to have converged for each dependent variable when
the residual is less than the termination residual.
The CFD Calculations and Convergence section gives an overview of the calculation methodology that will
help in understanding the concepts used to initialise, control and monitor the calculations.
- 973 -
Residuals and Cell Monitor Graphs

During the CFD simulation, you can monitor the progress of calculations by keeping an eye on residual and
cell monitor graphs. The value of each selected dependent variable residual together with the mass residual is
plotted on the residuals graph, at the end of each outer iteration of the calculation. You can use the residuals
plot to monitor the overall convergence of the solution and to determine whether or not any remedial action is
required.
When considering the residual plots, you should bear in mind that the residuals can fluctuate quite markedly
throughout the period of the calculations and in some cases rise appreciably before falling and so you need to
get an idea of the overall trend after several hundred iterations. The following screenshot shows a plot of
residuals and a default centrally located monitor cell plot for the internal analysis illustrated in the Displaying
Results section. Notice that the monitored velocity has reached a steady final value.
If you notice that the residuals are fluctuating wildly or steadily increasing over several hundred iterations, you
should pause the calculations and take remedial action (see Convergence Difficulties and Troubleshooting
section).
The cell monitor graph displays the variation in the selected dependent variable for the currently selected
monitor cell (see Setting Up CFD Cell Monitor Points section and Cell Monitor setting in the CFD Calculation
Options section). The variation of monitored cell point variables provides a good indication of solution
convergence, i.e. when the variation of the variable stabilises.
Convergence Difficulties and Troubleshooting

The default CFD settings and grid provided in DesignBuilder should enable a converged solution in most
cases, but occasionally, adjustments to the false time steps may be required and/or modifications to the
problem specification (e.g. location of boundaries, grid size, etc.).
Tip: If the plotted residuals are found to diverge or fluctuate significantly, in many cases the situation can be
improved by reducing the false time steps for the velocity components. The recommended procedure is to
continuously half the time steps until a more stable solution is found.
- 974 -
Calculations
Turbulence models
In some cases a solution can be very difficult, if not impossible, to achieve using the standard k-e turbulence
model. Particularly difficult problems involve very low velocity buoyancy-driven flows where diffusion is
dominated by convection and this can cause velocities to fluctuate around a mean value. In these cases,
reducing false time steps may not improve the situation. In order to force a solution, you may consider
introducing additional boundary conditions such as occupants, which can change the flow sufficiently to obtain
a solution without the problem necessarily becoming unrealistic.
Alternatively, you may consider using the constant effective viscosity turbulence model with a relatively high
turbulent viscosity or turbulent viscosity multiplier but bear in mind that this will introduce an artificially high
level of diffusion into the flow and also, the constant effective viscosity model is incapable of modelling the
transport of turbulence.
Use of residual data

If the residuals have dropped to very low levels and the monitored variables are fairly constant (they don't
have to be absolutely constant), then you can be confident that you have a good solution even though the lack
of convergence message is displayed. The message is always displayed even if the residuals are very slightly
above the termination values. These are conservative values and don't need to be strictly adhered to.
Velocity false time steps

You should only need to reduce the velocity false time steps if you experience a very unstable solution which
exhibits diverging residuals or high amplitude oscillations. The time steps have a 'damping' effect on the
solution which can increase stability but increases the overall simulation time. Generally, if you experience a
solution that doesn't converge easily where the residuals appear to remain constant, it's better to re-structure
the model definition by removing unnecessary obstructions and aligning any repeating component/assemblies
with each other in order to reduce the number of grid lines.
Displaying Results
After completing or pausing the calculations, the CFD Display Options data panel is shown in the bottom left
of the screen and the Select CFD slice tool becomes enabled (above). This is the main mechanism for
displaying results. It allows you to select a slice along one of the main grid axes and perpendicular to it, within
which any of the selected results can be displayed.
After selecting the Select CFD slice tool, the CFD results screen is displayed which includes the model view
together with a slice selection frame, perpendicular to the currently selected axis. You can select a slice along
the current axis by moving the mouse cursor across the model in the direction of the axis. To change the axis,
click on the required axis on the axis selector tool, which is located at the top right of the screen:
- 975 -
After selecting the required axis and moving the slice selector frame to the required position along the axis,
click the mouse button to add the slice to the display. Notice that as you move the slice selection frame to a
slice that was previously added to the display, the frame colour changes from green to red and if you click the
mouse button, the slice is removed from the display:
Slice variable plots are selected under the Slice Settings header on the Display Options data panel and
controlled under the Variable Settings header:
- 976 -
Calculations
Note that any modifications made to items on the Display Options data panel will only come into effect after
clicking on the Apply changes button.
The Variable Settings group contains groups of variable banding data for velocity, temperature and pressure
variables. Also, under the variable settings Velocity header, there are two velocity vector settings, Maximum
vector length and Velocity scale factor. Velocity vectors are displayed as arrows, the length of which
corresponds to the magnitude of the velocity and with the default vector scale factor of 1.0, a length of 1.0m
corresponds to a magnitude of 1.0m/s. The maximum vector length is the maximum length of a vector that will
be displayed to prevent the display from becoming cluttered with excessively large vectors. Any vector, which
has a magnitude greater than this maximum, will be displayed translucently to distinguish it from vectors with
lengths that do represent magnitude.
The variable banding data comprises the defined band range, followed by twelve contour band values within
the defined range. The band range defines the minimum and maximum variable values between which data
will be displayed and the band values are the actual values within that range that are displayed in the form of
contours or in the case of velocity vectors, vector colours. The default minimum and maximum variable display
values are extracted from the calculated values and this range is then divided into twelve equal increments in
order to arrive at the dependent variable contour bands. Each contour band can be edited or switched off
altogether. When the band range values are modified, the individual band values are automatically recalculated.
The Slice Settings group is used to select the plots required to be included in subsequently added slices.
The last item on the Display Options data panel is the 3-D contours group that allows you to select any of the
available variables for which a 3-D contour plot is required:
- 977 -
CFD Comfort Calculations
DesignBuilder CFD comfort calculations allow you to carry out a distributed analysis of the comfort conditions
in the domain. The comfort calculations are carried out for each cell in the grid and include consideration of
the local air temperature and velocity. Radiant temperatures of the surrounding surfaces are also considered.
Note that solar radiation through windows or from zone equipment is not considered in DesignBuilder CFD.
After completing or pausing the CFD calculations the Update CFD comfort tool will become enabled. Clicking
on this tool opens the comfort Calculation options dialog.
Comfort Calculation Options

Before the comfort calculations are run the comfort Calculation options dialog is displayed prompting for
information on the values for metabolic rate, clothing and Relative humidity to be assumed in the comfort
calculations (which use the Fanger comfort model).
Metabolic rate
Enter the metabolic rate to be used in the CFD comfort analysis. You should choose a value depending on the
activity, age and sex of the occupants. If you are aiming to reproduce conditions in a previous EnergyPlus
simulation then you should enter the same value used in that simulation. The default value for simulation is
0.90 met (the average of the recommended values for men and women). The default metabolic rate on this
dialog is also 0.9.
Clothing level
Enter the clothing level for the CFD comfort calculations. The default is 1.0 which represents typical winter
clothing.
If you are aiming to match comfort calculations with those in EnergyPlus you should ensure that you use the
appropriate value. Note that EnergyPlus clothing levels are provided for summer and winter separately so you
should make sure to choose the right value depending on the season for this CFD simulation.
- 978 -
Calculations
Relative humidity
DesignBuilder CFD does not calculate relative humidity (RH) so this value must be defined manually by the
user when calculating comfort. Again if you are aiming to reproduce the same values from a simulation you
should copy the appropriate RH from the EnergyPlus results to this dialog. The default value is 50%.
Comfort results
After pressing OK on the Calculation options dialog, a progress bar will be displayed indicating that mean
radiant temperature (MRT) calculations are in progress, followed by another progress bar for the comfort
calculations themselves.
After the comfort calculations have completed additional comfort data will become available and
corresponding comfort slice display variables are available on the Display options data panel:
PMV - Predicted Mean Vote calculated using Fanger equations according to ISO 7730
PPD - Predicted Percentage Dissatisfied calculated using Fanger equations according to ISO 7730
Mean Radiant Temperature
Operative Temperature
You can find out more about Fanger comfort calculations in the EnergyPlus Thermal Comfort section.
Age of Air and Air Change Effectiveness

Age of air (LMA)
The age of air at a particular location is the average time elapsed since molecules of air at that location
entered the building. You can request age of air to be calculated on the CFD tab after the main CFD
simulation has completed as a separate operation. To do this click on the Calculate LMA tool.
Air change effectiveness (ACE)

After completing the Local Mean Age of Air (LMA) calculation the Air Change Effectiveness (ACE) tool is
available. The air change effectiveness (ACE), is defined as the age of air that would occur throughout the
room if the air was perfectly mixed, divided by the average age of air where occupants breathe. Because the
average age of air exiting the room is identical to the age of air that would occur throughout the room if the
indoor air were perfectly mixed, the ACE is also the exhaust-air age divided by the average age of air where
occupants breathe. In practical terms, the ACE equals the effective ventilation rate at the breathing zone
divided by the ventilation rate that would occur throughout the building with perfect mixing and at the same
- 979 -
outdoor air supply. A short-circuiting flow pattern between the fresh air supply and return outlets, increases the
room-air age and causes ACE to be less than unity. Perfect mixing results in an ACE of unity. Preferentially
ventilating the breathing zone with outside air will cause the ACE to be greater than unity.
To calculate air change effectiveness use the ACE tool.
Page under development
CFD Results Manager
The CFD results manager tool allows you to create new CFD projects, open existing projects or remove
existing projects. For example, considering the internal analysis example illustrated in the Displaying Results
section, you may want to conduct another analysis after moving the position of a radiator in order to look at
the effect on air distribution. You would first go to the Edit screen and modify the radiator layout:
After returning to the CFD screen, you can then click on the CFD results manager tool to open the CFD
Results Manager dialog:
- 980 -
Calculations
The CFD Results Manger dialog incorporates a list of all available projects together with buttons that allow you
to create a new project, open a project or delete a project. For each project entry in the list, the first column
indicates the project name, the second column the model domain object used for the calculations (site,
building, building block, zone) and the third column indicates whether or not the model geometry contained
within the results is up-to-date. In this case, you would click on the New button to create a new project:
See the Setting Up a New Internal CFD Analysis section for details of creating a new internal analysis.
After creating the new analysis, you can then conduct the calculations:
- 981 -
You can then use the CFD Results Manager to open the previous project in order to compare results:
Example - CFD External Analysis

This CFD example will go through the steps required for a typical external CFD analysis:
Create model for external analysis.

Switch to the CFD screen and create a new CFD analysis.
Perform the CFD calculation.
Review the results.
External analyses are simpler than internal analyses in that you do not need to define any internal boundary
conditions. Also they are isothermal and take account principally of only velocity and pressure.
It is possible to edit the grid and select monitor cells with external CFD as well as with internal CFD.
Creating the Model

The model comprises a simple rectangular block with dimensions 30.0m x 20.0m x 30.0m.
- 982 -
Calculations
Click on the Add new block tool and change the Block type to Building block and the Height to 30.0m. To
place the origin of the building at the site origin, type in 0 0 and press the <Return> key. To then create the
block with a 30.0m x 20.0m perimeter, type in 30 20 and press the <Return> key. A block will be created with
the required dimensions. Alternatively create the block by drawing the base perimeter in the normal way.
Creating a New CFD External Analysis

Each DesignBuilder project can have one or more CFD analyses. Each CFD Analysis can be a different set of
results for a different variation on the model. Unlike simulation data, CFD Analyses are not deleted
automatically when the model is modified on the Edit screen.
1. Click on the site in the navigator to move to the site level.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
External CFD analyses can only be conducted at the site level.

Click on the CFD tab to set up an external CFD analysis.
After clicking on the CFD tab, the New CFD analysis dialog is displayed. Enter Wind analysis in the
Name field and leave the grid spacing and grid line merge tolerance in their default settings.
Default grid spacing and grid line merge tolerance settings are covered later.
Under the Wind header, change the free-stream velocity to 12.0m/s, the Direction to 45 and the
Exposure to Urban. The wind direction is defined clockwise from North, so the default of
270 represents a westerly and a setting of 45 a North-easterly.
The Site Domain Factors are multipliers that are applied to the overall model extent in the X (length), Y
(width) and Z (height) dimensions to derive a site domain across which the calculations will be carried
out. Keep the defaults of 3, 3 and 2.
After clicking on OK to create the analysis data set, the CFD screen displays the model in wire-frame
together with the site domain, which is outlined in dotted lines.
- 983 -
Notice the rotation of the domain with respect to the building to account for the wind direction.
Setting Up Monitor Cells

It is usually a good idea to display the state of one or more monitor cells in the domain so that you can
monitor the extent to which the calculations have settled down to a final converged solution. DesignBuilder
automatically sets up a single monitor cell at the centre of the domain. You can add new monitor points at any
time as follows.
Click on the Define CFD monitor points tool and select the Z grid axis using the grid axis selector tool. Move
the cursor along the axis to select a plane a couple of grid cells above the building and then move the cursor
across the selected plane and select a cell roughly above the centre of the building. The Cell monitor data
panel is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. Enter the name Roof into the Monitor location name field
and click on the green tick Apply changes button.
- 984 -
Calculations
Press <Esc> to cancel the Define CFD monitor points tool.
Running the CFD Calculations

To set up calculation data and run the CFD calculations, click on the Update calculated data button, which will
bring up the CFD Calculation options dialog. The left hand side of the calculation dialog contains various
calculation options.
Keep the default options except for Iterations which should be set to 5000 and under the Residual Display
header, switch on the X, Y and Z-axis velocity residuals.
Click on the Start button to begin the calculations. Wait until the calculation is fully converged when the
residuals have reached the specified minimum and the Finished (Converged) indicator is displayed at the
bottom left of the dialog. Notice that the displayed velocity for the supply monitor point becomes constant.
Press the Cancel button to close the calculation dialog.
Displaying CFD Results

1.
Go to the Display Options panel and open the Velocity header under the Variable Settings header and
set the Vector scale factor to 2.0 and the Maximum vector length to 5m.
2.
Under the Slice Settings header, make sure that only Velocity vectors is switched on.
3.
Click on the green tick Apply changes button.
4.
Click on the Select CFD slice tool. Use the grid axis selector to change the current axis to the Z-axis
and then move the mouse across one of the side surfaces of the site domain along the Z-axis until the
slice selection frame is located 25m above the ground plane. Click on the mouse to add the currently
selected slice to the display.
- 985 -
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Clear the current slice from the display using the Clear all slices tool.
Switch off Velocity vectors under the Slice Settings header on the Display Options panel and switch on
the Velocity contours and Filled Velocity contours.
Click on the green tick Apply changes button.
Select the Y-axis from the grid axis selector and move the cursor over the top surface of the site
domain along the Y-axis until the slice selection frame is 50.68m from the origin and click the mouse to
add the slice to the display.
To add a horizontal slice 5m from the ground, select the Z-axis from the grid axis selector and move the
cursor over one of the side surfaces of the site domain along the Z-axis until the slice selection frame is
5.0m above the ground plane and click the mouse to add the slice to the display.
- 986 -
Calculations
Display 3-D Contours

3-D contours can be displayed to show the values of a variable throughout the domain. 3-D contours can
display a lot of data:
1. Clear the current slice from the display using the Tools > Clear all slices menu option.
2. Under the 3-D Contours header on the Display Options data panel, switch on Pressure. Click on the
green tick Apply changes button.
- 987 -
Example - CFD Internal Analysis Basics

This internal CFD example will guide you through the basic minimum steps required for an internal CFD
analysis:
Create a simple single zone model.

Add CFD surface boundaries to the model including a simple sidewall supply diffuser and ceiling
mounted extract grille.
Switch to the CFD screen and create a new CFD analysis.
Perform a CFD calculation using default calculation options and grid.
Review the results.
Creating the Model

The model comprises a simple rectangular block housing a zone with dimensions 6.0m x 4.0m x 3.5m.
Create a new site and add a new building using default settings. From the building level Click on the Add new
block tool and change the Block type to Building block, the Height to 3.5m and set the wall thickness to
0.25m.
- 988 -
Calculations
Default wall and window boundary temperatures

Default wall and window boundary temperatures can be defined from the building level down to the surface
level. As with other DesignBuilder attribute data, these attributes are inherited from the level above unless
deliberately overwritten.
The default wall and window boundary temperatures can be accessed under the CFD Boundary header on
the CFD tab of the model data.
At the building level, change the default window temperature to 20C.
Go down to the zone surface facing North and change the default wall temperature to 18C and the default
window temperature to 10C. Go through the same procedure for the west facing zone surface.
Adding surface supply diffuser and extract grille

Supply Grille
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the zone in the navigator and select the North-facing surface in the Edit screen. Double-click to
drop down to the surface level.
Click on the Normal view button to obtain a normal view of the surface.
Click on the Add CFD boundary tool. The CFD boundary data panel is displayed at the bottom left of
the screen.
Select Supply from the Boundary type drop list. Keep all of the remaining boundary defaults but change
the Y discharge angle to 45 in order that the supply jet will be projected upwards at an angle of
45 from the horizontal.
The supply diffuser is to be 1.0m x 0.2m and is to be located midway between the North and South
surface edges, 0.4m from the top edge of the surface. With the Increment snap switched on, move the
cursor to the top left corner of the surface and press <SHIFT> to lock the origin to the surface corner,
move the cursor away from the corner until the cursor is snapped 0.4m from the top edge and 1.5m
from the left edge and click the mouse button to place the top left corner of the boundary. Move the
cursor to place the bottom right corner of the boundary 1.0m to the right and 0.2m below the top left
corner and click the mouse to place the supply.
- 989 -
Extract Grille
A 0.5m x 0.5m extract grille is to be located in the corner of the ceiling 0.5 m from the North and east surface
edges.
1.
2.
3.
Click on the zone roof surface in the navigator and again click on the Normal view button to obtain a
normal view.
Click on the Add CFD boundary tool and select Extract from the Boundary type drop list. Keep the
default flow rate of 200 l/s to match the supply flow rate.
Move the cursor until it is snapped 0.5m from the top edge of the surface and 0.5m from the right edge
and click the mouse to place the top right corner of the extract, move the mouse 0.5m to the left and
0.5m below the top right corner of the extract and click the mouse to place it.
Creating a New CFD Internal Analysis

Click on the building in the navigator to move to the building level and click on the CFD tab to set up an
internal CFD analysis. An internal analysis can be set up for any level from a single zone up to the whole
building. In this case, because we are dealing with a single zone building, the analyses for each level would
be identical. After clicking on the CFD tab, the New CFD analysis dialog is displayed. Enter Basic Vent in the
- 990 -
Calculations
Name field and leave the grid spacing and grid line merge tolerance at their default settings. More on grids in
the next exercise.
Click OK to create the analysis data set.
You will see the model in wire-frame mode by default and at this stage the CFD analysis has been created
including the default grid and the model is ready for calculations. If you were going to edit the grid now is the
time before starting the calculations, but for now we will use the default grid.

To set up calculation data and run the CFD calculations, click on the Update calculated data button, which
will bring up the CFD Calculation options dialog. The left hand side of the calculation dialog contains various
calculation options. Keep the default options except under the Residual Display header, switch on the X, Y
and Z-axis velocity residuals.
residuals have reached the specified minimum (1x10-5 is the default for all variables) and the Finished
(Converged) indicator is displayed at the bottom left of the dialog. Notice that the displayed velocity for the
default Centre monitor point becomes constant (bottom graph).
Press the Cancel button to close the calculation dialog.
Displaying CFD Results

After the calculations have been completed, the CFD results display options data panel is enabled allowing
you to set various results display options. Use default Display options.
Click on the Select CFD slice tool. Click on the Y-axis of the grid axis selector (top right of screen) and then
move the cursor over the ceiling surface along the Y-axis to move the slice selection frame midway between
the North and South-facing walls, 2.0m from each wall and click the mouse button to add the currently
selected slice to the display.
- 991 -
Notice that as you move the slice selection frame to a slice that was previously added to the display, the frame
colour changes from green to red and if you click the mouse button, the slice is removed from the display.
Try adding more slices in other planes to see the key characteristics of temperature and velocity distribution in
the zone.
Press the ESC key to cancel Select CFD slice tool.
Example - CFD Internal Analysis Including Assemblies

In this second internal CFD exercise, the model is modified to include radiators as well as the supply and
extract vents entered in the first tutorial. Also some more advanced features of the CFD calculations and
display are explored. You will learn how to:
Create a component representing a constant temperature radiator, convert the component to an

assembly, assign CFD boundary conditions to the assembly and add the assembly to the model
assembly library.
Place the previously created radiator assembly within the zone.
Edit the CFD grid.
Add cell monitor points for calculation monitoring purposes.
Edit the CFD Calculation options.
Deal with common errors and non-convergence.
Perform comfort calculations.
Creating the Radiator Assembly

Assemblies consist of 1 or more component blocks combined and are used to create boundary conditions
inside or outside blocks. They can be used to create furniture, heat generating equipment, airflow supply and
extract etc.
In this exercise a radiator assembly is to be created from a single component block, which is to be drawn
using a rectangular extrusion.
- 992 -
Calculations
1.
2.
3.
Click on the Add new block tool and change the Block type on the Drawing Options panel to
Component block and the Height to 1.0m.
To place the origin of the radiator component block at the site origin, type in 0 0 and press the return
key.
Now to create the radiator component with a length of 1.0m and say a thickness of 60mm to represent
a single panel convector type radiator, type in 1.0 0.06. The component block will then appear with the
specified dimensions. Alternatively use the mouse to define the component block dimensions in the
usual way.
To convert the component block to an assembly and add the resulting assembly to the model assembly
library:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
First select the component block and then click on the Add assembly to library tool. The selected
component block will be displayed with a wire frame bounding-box and the Add assembly to library
data panel is displayed at the bottom left of the screen.
Set the Assembly creation mode to Delete because the original component block will not be needed
after the conversion and type the name Radiator into the Name field.
Set the Thermal boundary type to Temperature in order to create a constant temperature radiator and
set the Temperature to 75.0C.
Make sure that the Mass check box is checked to ensure that the assembly will represent a solid
boundary and that air will not be able to pass through it.
The next stage is to select the attachment plane for the assembly, which is the surface plane of the
assembly that will be used when attaching the assembly to a model surface during the assembly
placement process. In this case, the base (bottom) surface of the radiator should be selected as the
attachment plane. To select the attachment plane, move the cursor over the radiator assembly and as
you do so, each surface of the assembly bounding-box will highlight in yellow, move the cursor to the
base surface of the bounding-box and click the mouse. The assembly will then be automatically added
to the model assembly library and because the Delete creation mode has been selected, the original
component will be deleted.
- 993 -
Positioning Radiators Within the Block

Assemblies inside the building must be placed at Block level (not zone level) so to place a radiator assembly
first click on the block in the navigator to move down to the block level.
To position assemblies accurately you must use construction lines.
To do this, orbit the model to get a clear view of the west-facing end wall from the inside of the block and then
click on the Place construction line tool.
To position the construction line accurately, switch on the Increment snap under Point Snaps on the Drawing
Options data panel. Move the cursor to snap to the lower surface edge at the bottom of the North-facing wall
and move the cursor to obtain an edge snap 0.3m from the end nearest the west-facing wall. Click the mouse
to start the construction line and move the mouse to the opposite edge at the bottom of the South-facing wall,
snapped to the Y-axis and click the mouse once the edge snap is established on the opposite edge to place
the construction line.
Click on the Place assembly tool and as you move the cursor back across the Edit screen, you will see that a
copy of the previously created radiator assembly is attached to the cursor and the Place assembly data panel
- 994 -
Calculations
is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. Set the Offset to 0.1m to offset the base of the radiator 0.1m
above the floor level, set the Width to 2.0m, the height to 0.6m and leave the Depth at 0.06m. Move the cursor
to establish a snap on the construction line and click the mouse to place the radiator origin. Once the radiator
has been placed, a protractor is displayed at the assembly origin enabling you to define the rotation. Rotate
the radiator assembly until it is parallel with the nearest wall and then click the mouse to set the rotation.
Repeat this procedure to place a 3.0m radiator adjacent to the North-facing wall.
Creating a New CFD Internal Analysis

We are now ready to start a new CFD calculation so again click on the building in the navigator to move to the
building level and click on the CFD tab. If you have just finished the first CFD exercise, the analysis results for
- 995 -
these calculations will be displayed. You should now create a new analysis because the model has changed
with the addition of the radiators. To do this click on the CFD Results Manager toolbar icon. This displays the
dialog below.
Note that the first Basic Vent analysis is flagged as not up-to-date. This is because the model has been edited
since the last calculation was made.
Click on the New button to create a new analysis using the model in its current state. The New CFD analysis
dialog is displayed. Enter Radiators and Vent in the Name field and leave the default grid spacing and grid line
merge tolerance at their default settings. The default grid spacing and grid line merge tolerance are used in
generating the CFD grid. During the process of creating a new CFD analysis data set, a 3-D CFD grid is
automatically generated by extracting key points from the model geometry along each of the major axes. The
spaces between the key points are known as grid regions and are automatically divided into sub-regions using
the default grid spacing entered on the Calculation options dialog. The grid line merge tolerance enables key
point grid lines that are very close together to be merged in order to prevent very high aspect ratio cells from
being created which can lead to calculation instability.
Click OK to create the analysis data set.
You will see the model in wire-frame mode by default and at this stage the CFD analysis has been created
including the default grid and the model is ready for calculations.

But before starting the calculations we will explore the edit grid capability. First click on the Edit CFD grid tool.
Move the cursor across the displayed CFD grid to select grid regions along the current grid axis. Selected grid
regions are highlighted in cyan.
- 996 -
Calculations
To change the current grid axis, click on one of the major axes in the grid axis selector tool that is displayed at
the top right of the CFD screen. To edit a selected region, click the mouse on the currently selected region.
The selected region will turn red and the Edit CFD grid region data panel will be displayed at the bottom left of
the screen. You can select Edit region from the Operation drop list to change the default spacing of the region
or Insert region to create a new region and in the case of a previously inserted region, you can select Remove
region to remove it.
- 997 -
To cancel the Edit CFD grid tool press the <Esc> key.
After editing the default grid, you can reset it to the default by clicking on the Reset CFD grid tool. Also, to
obtain information about the grid, you can click on the Show CFD grid statistics tool which brings up a dialog
indicating the number of cells, required memory, available memory and maximum cell aspect ratio.
For the purpose of this tutorial, the default grid will be used.
Setting up Monitor Cells

In order to monitor the convergence of the solution, it can be useful to set up a number of monitor points
throughout the calculation domain. During the calculation it is then possible to enable a plot of the variation of
the various dependent variables for each of the defined monitor points in order to see if the variables have
reached a constant value as the CFD calculation proceed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
To set up a monitor point, click on the Define CFD monitor points tool.
Move the cursor along the current grid axis to select the plane in which the monitor cell is to be
selected. You can change the current grid axis using the grid axis selector tool as before.
Once the plane has been selected, you can the move the cursor to select the required cell in that
plane. With the current grid axis set to the default X axis, move the cursor along the axis to select a
plane about 1.0m from the supply diffuser and then move the cursor across the selected plane and
select a cell directly in front of the diffuser.
The Cell monitor data panel is displayed at the bottom left of the screen. Enter the name Supply in the
Monitor location name field and click on the green tick Apply changes button
When a monitor cell has been added, a cell marker is displayed together with the cell name.
- 998 -
Calculations
You can press <Esc> to cancel the Define CFD monitor points tool.

To set up calculation data and run the CFD calculations, click on the Update calculated data button, which will
bring up the CFD Calculation options dialog. The left hand side of the calculation dialog contains various
calculation options. Keep the default options except under the Residual Display header, switch on the X, Y
and Z-axis velocity residuals.
residuals have reached the specified minimum and the Finished (Converged) indicator is displayed at the
bottom left of the dialog. Notice that the displayed velocity for the default Centre monitor point becomes
constant (bottom graph).
CFD Display Options

In the CFD results slices, velocity vectors are displayed as arrows, the length of which corresponds to the
magnitude of the velocity and with the default vector scale factor of 1.0, a length of 1.0m corresponds to a
magnitude of 1.0m/s. The maximum vector length is the maximum length of a vector that will be displayed to
prevent the display from becoming cluttered with excessively large vectors. Any vector, which has a
magnitude greater than this maximum, will be displayed translucently to distinguish it from vectors with lengths
that do represent magnitude.
The default minimum and maximum dependent variable values are extracted from the minimum and
maximum values found in the domain and this range is then divided into twelve equal increments in order to
arrive at the dependent variable contour bands. Each contour band can be edited or switched off altogether.
In this tutorial the maximum temperature will be 75.0C (the temperature of the radiators), which is well above
the mean temperature of the space, and consequently the default contour bands would be far from the mean
- 999 -
and the resulting display would not be very informative. So in order to compress the contour bands to be
within the likely temperature range throughout the domain DesignBuilder automatically sets the Maximum
Temperature under temperature bands range to 24.0C and the minimum value to 18C.
You can manually change these maximum and minimum values in the Display options panel. Note that you
need to click on the green tick Apply changes button in order for the display attributes to take effect. Notice
also that the temperature contour bands are updated using the new temperature range.
You can revert to the absolute minimum and maximum values in the model by using the Tools > Reset CFD
display variables menu command.
Comfort Calculations
Click on the Update CFD comfort tool to carry out comfort calculations. After the calculations have been
completed, various comfort variables are available for display, PMV, PPD, operative temperature and mean
radiant temperature. Clear all slices from the display using the Clear all slices tool. Switch off Velocity vectors
and Filled temperature contours under the Slice Settings header on the Display options panel and switch on
the PMV contours and Filled PMV contours. Click on the green tick Apply changes button.
Click on the Select CFD slice tool and click on the Y-axis of the grid axis selector. Move the cursor over the
ceiling surface along the Y-axis to move the slice selection frame again to be midway between the North and
South-facing walls and click the mouse button to add the slice to the display.
Change CFD Analysis

You can now switch between the 2 CFD analyses you have carried out using the CFD Result Manager dialog.
Select the analysis you wish to switch to and use the Open button to load results. Any slices associated with
the analysis will be restored. These 2 analyses will be stored in the dsb file by default and are not deleted
when changes are made to the model.
- 1000 -
Calculations
Appendix - CFD Calculations and Convergence

The numerical method used by DesignBuilder CFD is known as a primitive variable method, which involves
the solution of a set of equations that describe the conservation of heat, mass and momentum. The equation
set includes the three velocity component momentum equations (known as the Navier-Stokes equations), the
temperature equation and where the k-e turbulence model is used, equations for turbulence kinetic energy
and the dissipation rate of turbulence kinetic energy. The equations comprise a set of coupled non-linear
second-order partial differential equations having the following general form, in which f represents the
dependent variables:
Term 1 represents the rate of change, term 2 represents convection, term 3 represents diffusion and S is a
source term.
Due to its non-linearity, the equation set cannot be solved using analytical techniques, which necessitates the
requirement for a numerical method. The numerical method employed by DesignBuilder involves re-casting
the differential equations into the form of a set of finite difference equations by sub-dividing the required
building space (or calculation domain) into a set of non-overlapping adjoining rectilinear volumes or cells,
which is collectively known as a finite volume grid. The equation set is then expressed in the form of a set of
linear algebraic equations for each cell within the grid and the overall set of equations is solved using an
iterative scheme. The non-linearity of the equation set is accounted for by the use of a nested iterative
scheme whereby each dependent variable equation set (velocity components, temperature, etc.) are
themselves solved iteratively within an overall outer iterative loop and at the termination of each outer
iteration, the most recent values of the dependent variables are fed back into the dependent variable
coefficients. The outer iterative loop is repeated until the finite difference equations for all cells are satisfied by
the current values of the appropriate dependent variables, at which point the scheme is said to have
converged. An appreciation of the requirement for convergence and the nested iterative procedure used to
achieve it will help in understanding the meaning of the various calculation options that are described in the
Conducting CFD Calculations section.
The Iterative Nature of the Procedure

The calculation procedure has been developed to ensure that the iterative solution of the equation set would
be guaranteed to converge if the equation coefficients were constant. However, the equation set is non-linear
and the coefficients actually contain the dependent variables themselves, and consequently convergence
cannot be guaranteed in all cases. Although in the majority of cases, as long as the dependent variables and
particularly the velocities only change slowly, a converged solution is normally achieved.
The main mechanism to ensure that the variables change slowly is that of false time steps. The finite
difference equation set is formulated in the form of a transient equation set although the calculations are
steady state, i.e. essentially a snap-shot in time. The reason for this formulation is that the transient term
behaves as a very effective relaxation method, which can slow the change in dependent variables in order to
arrive at a more stable solution. The false time step is the time step used in the pseudo-transient term of the
dependent variable equation.
You can find more details on the calculation method used in the CFD Technical online document.
DAYLIGHTING CALCULATIONS
DesignBuilder provides 2 types of daylighting calculations:
1.
Daylight illuminance contour plots and average daylight factor and uniformity are generated for each
zone calculated using the Radiance ray-tracing simulation engine. Standard reports detailing eligibility
for LEED EQ8.1, BREEAM HW1 and Green Star IEQ4 daylighting credits are provided. Click on the
- 1001 -
Daylighting screen tab to view these daylighting results.

2.
Daylighting integrated within EnergyPlus simulations allowing savings in electric lighting to be

calculated based hour-by-hour on daylight availability throughout the year.
The rest of this section covers the detailed Radiance ray-tracing calculation of daylight.
Radiance Daylight Simulation

The DesignBuilder Radiance simulation provides a detailed multi-zone physics-based calculation of
illumination levels on the working plane of a building. The calculations allow light to be transmitted through
exterior and interior windows and the shading and reflective effect of local shading devices and
component/assembly blocks is included. Window shading options such as slatted and diffusing blinds are not
included in Radiance calculations.
More information on Radiance daylighting calculations can be found in the Introduction to Daylighting
Tutorial
Model Data Used

You can use DesignBuilder to generate data on distribution of illuminance levels and daylight factors within
each zone for one or more zones in the building. To do this, DesignBuilder uses the following data provided in
the model:
Surface visible reflectance of the material on the innermost layer of constructions.

Window glazing transmittance.
Detailed geometry description including the 3-D surfaces as seen on the Visualisation screen.
Daylighting calculation options.
Site ground reflectance
You can select which zones are regularly occupied with regard to daylighting calculations using the
Include zone in daylighting calculations option on the Activity tab.
The above data is passed to the Radiance simulation engine which calculates the distribution of illuminance
and daylight factors on the working plane using a ray-tracing method.
When the calculations have been carried out, the daylight data can be displayed.
Daylighting Calculation Options

Radiance daylighting calculations are controlled using a set of options on the Daylighting calculation options
dialog which is displayed before the calculations are started. It is important to make a selection here that is
appropriate to the building you are analysing.
General Calculation Options

Report type
Select the report type (if any) that you will require after the calculations have finished. Options are:
1-Map - a daylight distribution contour map on the working plane of the current object is displayed.
2-Grid - a table of summary daylight statistics for each zone is displayed, including average, min and
max daylight factors and uniformity factor data.
3-LEED v2 Credit EQ8.1 Report - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining LEED
v2 IEQ 8.1 credits.
4-LEED v3 Credit IEQ 8.1 Report - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining
LEED v3 IEQ 8.1 credits.
5-BREEAM Credit HW1 Report, - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining
BREEAM HW1 credits.
- 1002 -
Calculations
6-Green Star Credit IEQ4 Report, generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining
Green Star IEQ4 credits.
If you do not require any particular report then select either 1-Map or 2-Grid.
Detail template
Select a detail template from the drop list to load a set of ambient parameters to the dialog as shown in the
table below.
You do not necessarily need to have an in-depth understanding of the meaning of each of these parameters
to carry out an accurate assessment in DesignBuilder. However knowing a little bit about the way the
calculations work and how the options affect the calculations will help you to understand how to get the best
trade-off between accuracy and simulation times.
It is important to understand that Radiance works using a statistical Monte Carlo approach and this means
that you will not get exactly the same results if you repeat a calculation using exactly the same model and
options. You can reduce this effect by using higher detail settings but you cannot completely eliminate it. This
is discussed in more detail under Advanced options below.
Detail template
Ambient
bounces
Radiance code -ab

1-Fast
1
Not recommended for project work
2-Standard
Default setting, but will underestimate 2
illuminance
3-Good (no interpolation)
4
4-Good
4
5-Accurate
Best setting for highest practical
5
accuracy
6-High quality
Use when highest quality is required
7
and a long wait for results is
acceptable
Ambient
accuracy
Ambient
resolution
Ambient
divisions
-aa
-ar
-ad
Ambient
supersamples
-as
0.3
128
256
128
0.25
256
512
256
0.00
0.22
512
512
1024
1024
512
512
0.20
512
2048
1024
0.18
1024
4096
2048
For a discussion on the relative merits of using some of the above settings for daylight credit calculations see
below.
Working plane height

Enter the height of the working plane above floor level for each zone in the daylight simulation (in m or ft). The
default value will depend on the Report type selected. A typical value will be in the range 0.7-0.8m.
The working plane height is normally set at the average height of the top surface of the desks above the floor.
Note: The working plane height used in Radiance calculations is measured from the base of the block, which
in most cases will be the same as measuring from the top of the floor surface level. However if you have
entered a value for the Floor void depth or if the floor surface thickness is for any reason set to a non-zero
value then you should add the floor surface thickness plus any floor void depth to the working plane height
above the top of floor surface level.
Margin
Enter the margin (in m or ft) around the zone boundaries where illuminance data is not to be calculated or
included in summary results. This option can be used to help avoid inclusion of potentially misleading
- 1003 -
illuminance data close to walls and windows. A typical margin recommended by CIBSE is 0.5m. DesignBuilder
sets the margin to 0 by default as a margin is not required for most daylight credit calculations.
Sky model
Select the sky model to be used for the daylighting calculations. Select from:
1-CIE sunny clear day, the sky distribution corresponds to the standard CIE clear sky condition with
additional direct illumination from the sun included. Expect very bright patches due to direct illumination
from the sun with relatively dark areas where direct sunlight does not fall.
2-CIE clear day, the standard CIE clear sky distribution without direct illumination from the sun.
3-CIE sunny intermediate day, sky with intermediate conditions between the overcast and clear skies
(see graph below) with direct illuminance from the sun included.
4-CIE intermediate day, the CIE standard intermediate sky with illuminance distribution conditions
between the overcast and clear skies (see graph below). Direct illuminance from the sun is not
included.
5-CIE overcast day, The CIE Standard Overcast Sky, originally known as the Moon and Spencer Sky,
was devised to represent the luminance distribution observed for overcast skies. Adopted as a
standard by the CIE in 1955, this description is the one most frequently used for illuminance modelling.
In this model, the sky brightness increases gradually with altitude from the horizon to the zenith, but it
does not vary with azimuth.
6-CIE overcast day (scaled) This option is similar to 5-CIE overcast day described above but is
scaled using a standard sky illuminance at the zenith. By default the zenith illuminance is set to 10,000
lux so that daylight factors can be calculated simply as working plane illuminance values divided by
100. This option is frequently used for daylight factor calculations. Other zenith illuminance values can
be entered though.
7-Uniform cloudy sky where the sky illumination is completely uniform.
Sky luminance profiles for 3 sky models (Source Rendering with Radiance: A Practical Tool for Global
Illumination)
- 1004 -
Calculations
Zenith illuminance
When the Sky model (above) is set to 6-CIE overcast day (scaled) you can define the scaling illuminance at
the Zenith (in lux or fc). The default is 10,000 lux which allows daylight factors to be calculated simply as
working plane illuminance values divided by 100.
Grid Size
Maximum grid size
The main grid size that can be used to divide up the working plane when calculating illuminance. Larger
values will speed up calculations but give lower resolution in daylighting outputs.
You should consider the size and number of zones in the building when selecting the grid size. A very fine grid
will of course cause Radiance calculations to take a lot longer to complete. On the other hand a very coarse
grid in a small zone may not give a good enough distribution.
You should use a maximum grid size no greater than 5ft or 1.5m for LEED EQ8.1 calculations.
Minimum grid size

This is the smallest grid size that can be used to fill in gaps in the working plane in cases where the maximum
grid size is too large, especially at the edges of the plane. Use smaller values (e.g. 0.01m) to fill in most gaps
between the main grid cells and the borders of the working plane for a more continuous output. It is common
to use a Minimum grid size that is a factor of between 0.5 and 0.1 times the Maximum grid size.
To maintain a uniform grid across the working plane set the Minimum grid size the same value as the
Maximum grid size.
Guidance for Calculating Daylighting Credits for LEED, BREEAM, Green

Star etc
DesignBuilder Radiance is ideal for calculating daylighting credits for certification schemes such as LEED,
BREEAM and Green Star. In these cases there is often pressure to provide highest possible illuminance
reports and, because some settings can cause illuminance values to be lower than expected, this section
provides advice on the most appropriate settings to use.
LEED, BREEAM and Green Star daylighting credit calculations all revolve around a "% of floor area having
illuminance over a threshold" report for each zone and for the whole building. The table below describes how
to get the most accurate results from these calculations.
Recommended
Advice
Setting
You should use the most detailed setting you can afford to wait for. The 1-Fast
setting is not intended for project output and should be avoided for all credit
calculations as it tends to lead to severe underestimates of illuminance levels.
Detail
5-Accurate
The accuracy increases as the level of detail in the calculation increases up to
template
and including the 5-Accurate setting. The 6-High quality setting is not
recommended for these sort of calculations either as it does not add much in
terms of accuracy but takes a lot longer than the 5-Accurate setting.
The 5 built in templates are ideal for simple daylight scenes that have shallow
spaces with relatively large window openings. However in deep plan models or
models with small windows or greater external/internal complexity of the model
you may want to increase the number of bounces from the default set by the
Ambient
3-8
Detail template. Models which have complex exterior geometry may require up
Bounces
to 8 bounces to ensure that the light reflection from exterior building surfaces is
correctly treated. Likewise to obtain the correct impact of variations in the floor
reflectance you will need to use 5 or more bounces.
Setting
- 1005 -
Tip: If you aren't sure try experimenting with different values for this setting to
test sensitivity and learn impact on results.
Grid size
Max: 0.2m
Min: 0.05m
Margin
Of course, the finer the overall grid the more accurate the results. Perhaps less
obvious however is that using lower values for Minimum grid size can lead to
more accurate and higher illuminance results. This is because the small grid
cells generated with the low minimum grid size can fill in around the edges of the
working plane where often the highest levels of daylight are to be found.
Use a zero margin if you need the entire working plane to be included in the
results. This will often lead to higher % areas over daylight thresholds because
the edges of the working plane are usually closest to where many of the
windows are located.
Advanced Options
Ambient bounces (-ab)
The number of ambient bounces is the maximum number of diffuse bounces computed by the indirect
calculation. The number of ambient bounces that Radiance should apply varies depending on the type of
building and daylighting system you are analysing. It can be set based on the number of reflections typically
required by the light to reach the task plus one or two extra for inter reflection within the space.
The number of bounces should normally be set to 3 for most accurate calculations or 2 if some trade-off is
acceptable. 4 does not usually add much accuracy over and above 3 and 1 and 0 are inadequate for most
daylighting calculations.
When the number of ambient bounces is set to 0 the ambient lighting calculations are switched off, so only
direct sun/sky light patches are considered.
Tip: It is possible to calculate the fraction of the working plane which receives direct sunlight by setting the
Ambient bounces calculation option to 0 and the Illuminance threshold display option to 0, then viewing the
Floor Area above Threshold data in the Grid output.
If the number of ambient bounces is set to 1, light is considered to reach the interior surfaces from the sun's
direct rays, from the diffuse sky, and from first bounce reflections of direct sunlight rays from both interior and
exterior surfaces. Reflections of sky light off interior or exterior surfaces to other interior surfaces will not be
considered. Additional bounces can be added to consider additional flux paths.
Note that a value of 1 for the number of ambient bounces is often enough for daylight factor calculations.
However, if the daylight factor plot is "lumpy", setting a higher value alone will not fix it.
Doubling ambient bounces can double rendering time.
Ambient accuracy (-aa)

Ambient accuracy (-aa) is the maximum error (expressed as a fraction) permitted in the indirect irradiance
interpolation.
You should normally use a value between 1 and 0.1, with lower values giving the best accuracy. A value of
zero gives no interpolation.
Halving Ambient accuracy approximately quadruples rendering time.
Ambient resolution (-ar)

The Ambient resolution sets the distance between ambient calculations by determining the maximum density
of ambient values used in interpolation. Factors that influence the scale over which interpolation may occur
are:
- 1006 -
Calculations
The ambient accuracy.

The ambient resolution.
The maximum scene dimension.
The minimum possible spacing between hemispherical indirect irradiance sampling points is the maximum
scene dimension multiplied by the ambient accuracy divided by the ambient resolution. In other words, for
distances less than this minimum, the calculation will always resort to interpolation, rather than initiate more
sampling, regardless of the error estimate associated with that interpolation. This prevents the calculation from
spending unnecessary time resolving irradiance gradients over negligible scales. This distance gives the scale
at which the interpolation accuracy begins to deteriorate from the ambient accuracy setting. The minimum
separation for calculated irradiances, Smin, is:
Smin= Dmax Ambient accuracy / Ambient resolution
Where the scene dimension, Dmax, is a measure of the maximum dimension of the zone being treated.
The effect of increasing Ambient resolution depends on the scene but it can quadruple calculation times for
double the value.
Ambient divisions (-ad)

Ambient divisions sets the number of initial sampling rays sent from each ambient point into the hemisphere to
determine the indirect incident light. The error in the Monte Carlo calculation of indirect illuminance will be
inversely proportional to the square root of this number. A value of zero implies no indirect calculation.
The Ambient divisions and super-samples parameters can be used to help reduce "noise" in a calculation. By
setting these options higher more rays will be tested when calculating an ambient value for a point.
High values of this parameter (4096 is perhaps the highest value that would be used under normal
circumstances) will minimise "patchiness" of daylighting outputs but slow calculations. Doubling Ambient
divisions will approximately quadruple calculation time.
Ambient super-samples (-as)

The number of extra rays that will be used to sample areas in the divided hemisphere that appear to have
high variance. Ambient super sampling should usually be set to about one half or one quarter of the Ambient
divisions parameter. Super-samples are applied only to the ambient divisions which show a significant
change.
The effect of increasing Ambient super-samples is to reduce "patchiness" in regions where indirect
illuminance is changing rapidly, but adding to the Ambient divisions and calculation times.
Setting Ambient Parameters

1.
2.
3.
Set Ambient divisions high enough to capture the visible luminous features at the first bounce.
Give sufficient ambient bounces to redistribute the light.
Set the remaining ambient parameters to sufficiently high resolution to deliver acceptably smooth
results.
Very high solar altitudes

The whole sky distribution is normalized to the zenith value, so having the sun too near to the zenith could be
a problem and therefore Radiance limits the solar position a maximum altitude of 87 degrees. If the calculated
solar altitude is higher than this limit then Radiance uses the maximum allowed value of 87 degrees in the
calculations. A warning message will be displayed informing this change. Generally this restriction should not
impact the daylighting results.
Technical discussion on hemispherical sampling
- 1007 -
Hemispherical sampling at the first level will always be initiated from the first point supplied to rtrace. From
these hemispherical sampling rays, the ambient calculation will predict the way the indirect irradiance is
changing about that point (the indirect irradiance gradient). The calculation also evaluates an estimation of
error associated with the prediction for the irradiance gradient. These quantities, together with the Ambient
accuracy parameter, are used to determine a radius of validity for the gradient estimate. If the next point
supplied to rtrace is within this radius, the indirect irradiance is evaluated from the gradient estimate and not
from further hemispherical sampling. In other words, the value is obtained by a form of interpolation rather
than by actual sampling.
Irradiance interpolation can occur across the points supplied to rtrace, so hemispherical sampling at the first
level will not necessarily be initiated from every point in the working plane supplied to rtrace.
It is important to appreciate the element of chance at work whenever hemispherical sampling is used. If the
number of initial sampling rays were set too small, the calculation might, for example, miss a bright patch even
though it was visible from the point at which the rays were spawned. Likewise, an unrepresentative chance
hit of a small bright patch by one of the sampling rays can produce a gross overestimate for indirect
irradiance. In a rendering, the artefacts associated with ambient undersampling can cause bright and dark
blotches.
To minimise blotches we need to set a sufficiently high value for the number of initial sampling rays, Ambient
divisions. Hemispherical sampling is generally too expensive to initiate at every surface visible from the eye
point. The calculation needs good indirect irradiance estimates from sampling at a limited number of locations.
We then rely on the irradiance interpolation algorithm to estimate missing values. To generate a fairly smooth
rendering for a daylight calculation accounting for the first level of inter-reflection, we would need to set
moderately high resolution values for the ambient parameters.
Daylighting Display Options

This section describes the Display options that are available for showing different reports on the Daylighting
results. The main selection to be made is the Report type and the following options are available:
1-Map - a daylight distribution contour map on the working plane of the current object is displayed.
2-Grid - a table of summary daylight statistics for each zone is displayed, including average, min and
max daylight factors and uniformity factor data.
3-LEED v2 Credit EQ8.1 Report - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining LEED
v2 IEQ 8.1 credits.
4-LEED v3 Credit IEQ 8.1 Report - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining
LEED v3 IEQ 8.1 credits.
5-BREEAM Credit HEA1 Report, - generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining
BREEAM HW1 credits.
6-Green Star Credit IEQ4 Report, generates documentation that can be used towards obtaining
Green Star IEQ4 credits
These options together with their associated Display options are described in more detail below.
1-Map - Daylight Illuminance Distribution

When the Report type Display option is set to 1-Map a contour map showing the daylight distribution across a
slice along the working plane of the object is displayed. When at zone level, the map is the only option and it
is a daylight distribution map for the zone is displayed if available. An example daylight map for a single zone
is shown below.
- 1008 -
Calculations
You can see that the zone boundary has a 0.5m margin around it where data is not calculated avoiding use of
potentially misleading data close to walls and windows. To calculate the daylight illuminance right up to zone
boundaries set the Margin calculation option to 0.
When at building and block levels maps of daylight distribution across the working plane of the current object
can be displayed. An example daylight distribution map displayed across multiple zones is shown below.
- 1009 -
You can see that each zone boundary has a margin around it.
Clear sky time

If you carried out a LEED v3 calculation then 2 sets of illuminance maps will be calculated and stored, one for
9am and the other for 3pm. You can select which of these to display using the Clear sky time display option.
Scale source
The scale of the daylight illuminance maps can be defined using data from the building, block or zone level or
it can be entered manually. It is a way to define the minimum and maximum values on the scale. Select from
one of these options.
1-Building, where all of the illuminance values calculated for the whole building are scanned and the
lowest and highest values are used. This allows illuminance plots to be generated using a consistent
scale even when displaying data at block or zone level.
2-Block, where all of the illuminance values calculated for the current block are scanned and the
lowest and highest values for are used. This allows illuminance plots to be generated using a
consistent scale even when displayed data at zone level.
3-Zone, where the scale is tailored to the current zone allowing in many cases a more even distribution
of colours through the map. When using this option images generated for each zone will use a different
scale and so will not be so easily comparable as if the 1-Building had been used.
4-User defined, where you can enter the minimum and maximum values on the scale manually. This
has the advantage of allowing a specific lower and upper scale value to be used. For example for many
calculations, daylight factors lower than 2% are considered to be inadequately daylit and entering .
These areas can be highlighted in a special colour to help provide a clear visual indication of the
success or otherwise of the daylighting of a building.
Low DF (%)
When using the 4-User defined Scale source you can enter the minimum daylight factor scale value to be
displayed.
- 1010 -
Calculations
High DF (%)
When using the 4-User defined Scale source you can enter the maximum daylight factor scale value to be
displayed.
Apply scale "too dark" colour

If you wish to draw attention to areas of the working plane that have daylight factor below the entered Low DF
(%) value then check this box and define the colour in the colour selector below.
Scale "too dark" colour

Select the colour to be used to represent areas of the working plane that are below the entered Low DF (%)
value. Typically a dark grey or black colour might be used. For example the dark grey areas of the images
above were generated using this option. They represent areas where the daylight factor is less than 2%.
Apply scale "too bright" colour

If you wish to draw attention to areas of the working plane that have daylight factor above the entered High DF
(%) value then check this box and define the colour in the colour selector below.
Scale "too bright" colour

Select the colour to be used to represent areas of the working plane that are above the entered High DF (%)
value.
Working plane
When viewing data for a block or building there can be multiple zones and these can have working planes at
various heights. DesignBuilder therefore provides a drop list to allow you select which zones zones are to be
displayed based on all relevant working planes identified in the current building or block.
Working plane margin

When DesignBuilder calculates which zones to include in the display for a particular working plane selection, it
applies a margin which is a sort of tolerance. Any zones having a working plane height above ground within
the band of the selected Working plane height +/- Working plane margin will be included in the display. This
allows zones that are required to be included with a particular floor illuminance plot but which have slight
differences in working plane height, to be displayed together with other zones of similar working plane height.
2-Grid
Available at building and block levels, the 2-Grid Report type displays information on average daylight factors,
daylight uniformity and illuminance values for each zone together with a total for the building. The following
data is calculated for each zone:
Floor Area (m2)

Floor Area above Threshold (m2)
Floor Area above Threshold (%)
Reference Illuminance (Lux)
Average Daylight Factor (%)
Minimum Daylight Factor (%)
Maximum Daylight Factor (%)
Uniformity ratio (Min / Avg)
Uniformity ratio (Min / Max)
Min Illuminance
Max Illuminance
This option might be useful if the built-in daylight reports don't cover the particular calculation you need to
make. In this case you can export the summary data for each zone for further analysis in a spreadsheet.
An example grid output is shown below.
- 1011 -
Note all floor areas reported on the Daylighting screen are sum of the grid point areas which will usually be
slightly less than the
LEED v2 Credit EQ8.1 Report

A report is generated detailing eligibility for the LEED v2 daylighting credit EQ8.1 based on % area of the
occupied part of the building that has better than the minimum daylight factor. The CIE overcast sky (10000
lux) sky model is used. An example LEED daylight report is shown below.
- 1012 -
Calculations
LEED v3 Credit EQ8.1 Report

A report is generated detailing eligibility for the LEED v3 daylighting credit EQ8.1 based on % area of the
occupied part of the building that has better than the minimum daylight factor. LEED v3 EQ8.1 requires 2
calculations using CIE clear day conditions at 9am and 3pm on 21 September. When the LEED v3 calculation
option is selected these calculations are carried out automatically.
Note that this report will only be available if the LEED v3 EQ8.1 calculation option was selected, otherwise the
calculations will have to be re done using this option.
An example LEED v3 daylight report is shown below.
- 1013 -
BREEAM Credit HEA1

A report detailing eligibility for the BREEAM daylighting credit based on % area of the occupied part of the
building that has better than minimum daylight factors plus better than minimum uniformity ratios.
Note that if you request the BREEAM HEA1 report you must also select the building type. At the moment the
only option is 1-Office.
- 1014 -
Calculations
- 1015 -
Green Star IEQ4

A report detailing the number of Green Star daylighting credit achieved (a maximum of 3 credits are possible).
The calculations are based on % area of the occupied part of the building that has better than minimum
daylight factors.
COST AND CARBON

The Cost and Carbon screen allows you to review the projected construction cost of the building design and
the embodied carbon in the building fabric.
Construction Cost
Embodied and Equivalent Carbon
Cost
To be completed - the cost model is still under development.
The outputs of the Cost calculation can be included automatically within the Construction cost data to be fed
to EnergyPlus for economic analysis.
Embodied Carbon Results

The embodied carbon and equivalent carbon data for the building are shown on the Cost and Carbon screen.
The carbon data covers only bulk construction and glazing materials and not lighting, HVAC and other
building services.
The materials and constructions inventories are equivalent ways of showing the same data, but broken down
in different ways. The total for the building is shown at the bottom.
An example Embodied carbon report is shown below.
- 1016 -
Calculations
- 1017 -
Reporting
Reporting
You can use DesignBuilder to generate reports using the Compile Reports and Report topic mechanism or
you can Export individual report content to file, clipboard (for pasting into word processors) or directly to the
printer.
Export Data
Report Topics
Compile Reports
Export CSV
EXPORT DATA
You can export data from DesignBuilder screens:
Edit Screen - exports a non-rendered 3-D image of the building. Alternatively a 3-D DXF file can be
exported.
Visualisation Screen - exports a rendered 3-D image of the building optionally including shading and
antialiasing..
Heating and Cooling Design Screens - exports design data (graphical, tabular, spreadsheet).
Simulation Screen - exports simulation data (graphical, tabular, spreadsheet).
You can export to a range of destinations (depending on the nature of the data):
File - store output in a file which can be imported into your documents/e-mails.
Printer - sends output directly to the printer.
Clipboard - for pasting directly into word processors etc.
Report topic - for generating reports using the Compile Reports feature.
Export format options depend on the nature of the data. The full range of options is:
Bitmap - best bitmap based output quality but very large file sizes.
PNG - better quality compression than JPEG but sometimes have larger file sizes.
TIFF - best bitmap based output quality but very large file sizes.
GIF - good compression but black and white only.
JPEG - recommended for 3-D images of the model because of its good quality combined with small file
sizes.
DXF - generate 3-D DXF data of the model - only available from Edit and Visualisation Screens. The 3D DXF file generated by DesignBuilder is suitable for reading into other CAD software. Two options are
available:
1-Whole model with details which includes all of the details of the model as seen on the
Visualisation tab, and,
2-Zones which generates the internal surfaces as used in simulations and other energy
calculations.
Windows metafile - results graphs only - scalable so graphs can be resized without losing quality.
CSV spreadsheet - grid results and library data only.
Text - reports only.
See also the Exporting Data and Compiling Results Tutorial
- 1019 -
REPORT TOPICS
Report topics are used to store snapshots of model data including model descriptions, graphic images of the
model and results.
You can export to a report topic by selecting 'Report topic' from the 'Export to' option on the Export Data
dialog. When Report topic is selected, a second tab becomes available called Report on which you can enter
a title and caption for the topic. You can also choose to include a model description with the topic. This allows
a building description to be included alongside the data when the report is compiled using the Compile Report
dialog.
Report topics are retained within the dsb file and are available for compiling into a report if the file is saved
and reloaded.
COMPILE REPORTS
The Compile Reports dialog allows you to control the generation of a report based on previously created
Report topics. Available report topics are listed and can be previewed by clicking on them.
The Title entered on this dialog is displayed in a table at the top of the report.
Check the checkbox to the left of the report topics to be included in the report and click on OK.
See also the Exporting Data and Compiling Results Tutorial
- 1020 -
Reporting
EXPORT CSV REPORT

The CSV report includes an inventory of all the materials, constructions and glazing systems used in the
model as well as a summary of each zone with walls, floors, roofs etc, glazing, airflow paths, heating and
cooling setpoint temperatures.
The report also includes the same cost and embodied carbon data that can be obtained from the Cost and
Carbon tab.
To generate the CSV report use the File > Export > Export CSV report file menu command. This opens the
Report Options dialog with 2 options.
Description
The description to be included within the report.
Report type
The options are:
1-Basic - The basic report.

2-ISO 13970 - Same as the basic report but with additional heat flow items included with each line of
surface heat transfer data to help with an ISO 13790 analysis.
- 1021 -
Program Options
Program Options
The Program options dialog is accessed from the Tools menu.
The Program options apply to the overall application no matter which file is loaded. There are six tabs:
User interface
Dialogs
Files
EnergyPlus
Limits
International
PROGRAM OPTIONS - USER INTERFACE

User Interface tab of the Program options dialog
Learning
You should generally select Learning mode while you gain experience with DesignBuilder. In Learning mode,
the Info panel is shown to the right of the main screen, providing additional information and commonly used
tools relevant to each screen. Model data is accessed from tabs along the top of the screen.
With Learning mode switched off, the Info window is not shown and Model data is shown on the right of the
screen alongside the Model edit screen. This allows you to see the effects of updates to data as they are
made.
See the New Project and Learning Mode Tutorial
Help system
Select one of:
1-Web-help - the default option where the latest help is displayed from the DesignBuilder servers using
the Web Help system. This option has the advantage of providing the most up-to-date help but it
requires an Internet connection and is slower than...
2-Local help - a chm format help file called Manual.chm is downloaded. Once the help file is
downloaded no Internet connection is required for help.
Technical details on the 2-Local help option

When using 2-Local help, the help file is called Manual.chm and is downloaded and stored on the local hard
disk as described below.
Windows XP:
C:\Local settings\Application data\DesignBuilder\Help
Windows Vista, 7, 8:
C:\Users\<Username>\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder\Help\V3.2
You can download the help file once while you have an Internet connection and manually copy it to other
computers as required when on or off-line, remembering to select the 2-Local help Program option on the
other computers.
- 1023 -
Use Slider controls

Some significant data items are (by default) controlled using a 'slider' which allows rapid selection of typical
values. If however you need to enter precise values (for example when modelling an existing building) or if
you need to enter values outside the slider range you may prefer to type this data in a text box. In this case
uncheck the 'Use slider controls' data. Common reasons for this are to enter Computer gain densities for IT
suites or dealing rooms.
Note: when using DesignBuilder with IP units, slider controls are always switched off regardless of this
setting.
Sort lists
By default DesignBuilder automatically sorts navigator and other data lists alphabetically. This can make it
easier to find the data you are looking for but also increases the time taken to generate lists and so slows
some program operations requiring lists to be generated. You can request unsorted lists by unchecking this
option.
Line smoothing in the display

DesignBuilder can optionally smooth lines in the Edit screen to provide a crisp clear view of the model without
'jaggies'. On some computer displays however, (notably those with Intel onboard graphics systems) some line
types in the model edit screen can be hard to see with this option selected. You should ensure that this option
is unchecked if you have this problem on your computer. The default setting is off.
If you have a good quality graphics card you may prefer to leave this option unchecked and switch on
hardware antialiasing on the control panel provided by the software that comes with the graphics card. This
will improve image quality without the need to change DesignBuilder settings.
Automatically refresh site navigator lists

By default DesignBuilder automatically refreshes the contents of the site navigator list on the left of the screen
as the building is modified. In large models frequent rebuilding of the navigator list can slow progress
especially when drawing partitions. Uncheck this option to avoid this problem.
Warning: You should be careful when using this option as the Navigator list can quickly become out of date
when you are editing a model. You should be especially wary of clicking on objects in the Navigator which no
longer exist in the model as this can cause DesignBuilder to crash. For this reason we can only recommend
unchecking this option for advanced and "careful" users!
You can manually refresh the navigator lists by clicking on the refresh list icon above the Navigator panel
(below).
Double-click to navigate site hierarchy

By default you can navigate to an object in the site hierarchy (building, block, zone etc) by single-clicking in
the Navigator. You can change this behaviour by checking Double-click to navigate site hierarchy. In this
case you must double-click to go to objects in the Navigator and a single click highlights the object in the Edit
view (if you are already at the level above). For example if you are at block level and you single click on one of
the zones in the block the zone is highlighted in red in the Edit view.
- 1024 -
Program Options
Tip: Disabling this option can be useful for identifying blocks, zones, surfaces by single-clicking in the
Navigator. It can also save time when renaming many zones at once from block level as it becomes possible
to click on the zone Navigator entries to rename them without navigating down to each zone and then having
to navigate back up again to block level.
Show 'Load data from template' dialog when template selected

When you select a new template by clicking on the browse button in the Model data, by default the data in the
template is loaded directly to the current object. However if this option the 'Load data from template' dialog is
opened giving you the opportunity to select various options and load other templates. This option is switched
off by default.
Show model data departures from template in bold

Select this option to show any differences in model data relative to the selected template in bold. This option is
switched on by default.
Default surface normal view

When working at surface level it can be useful to get a normal view of the surface by clicking on the Normal
button in the top right of the screen. By default this will show a normal view of the surface as viewed from
outside. You can use the Default surface normal view program option to instead view from the inside.
Maximum characters shown in data display lists

You can control the number of characters displayed in data lists on the right hand panel. This provides a
workaround to a problem with the list component used in DesignBuilder which always scroll to the right when
an item with a long name is selected. This scrolling can be inconvenient so we have implemented the option
to control the amount of text displayed. By default this is set to 35 characters but you can use a larger value if
you prefer.
Show tooltips in Model data

With small window sizes or when Learning mode is switched off there is not always enough space to display
the caption for each Model data item so DesignBuilder provides the option for tooltips to appear when the
mouse hovers over a truncated caption. See screenshot below.
PROGRAM OPTIONS - DIALOGS

Dialogs tab of the Program options dialog
- 1025 -
Calculation dialogs
These options control whether a calculation option dialog appears by default before every calculation. Note
that a dialog always appears when you press Update.
New object dialogs

When you create a new site or building, a dialog box appears by default allowing you to enter basic data on
the new object. If you prefer not to see these dialogs and just use default data, uncheck these two check
boxes.
EN ISO 6946 Glazing U-value Calculations

There are some options for the calculation of the U-value ISO 6946.
Fixed mean gas temperature (10C)

You can choose to fix the mean gas temperature to 10C which is the requirement for strict adherence to ISO
6946. Unchecking this option allows the gas temperature for each gas layer to be calculated individually for a
more accurate estimate of gas conduction (and hence the glazing U-value) to be calculated.
Outside air temperature

You can define the outside air temperature to be used as boundary conditions in the calculation of glazing Uvalue. The outside air temperature should be 0C for strict adherence to ISO 6946 .
Inside air temperature

You can define the inside air temperature to be used as boundary conditions in the calculation of glazing Uvalue. The inside temperature should be 20C for strict adherence to ISO 6946 .
Detailed HVAC
Target all HVAC zones in group by default
By default in Detailed HVAC when you edit an HVAC zone equipment object, such as an HVAC zone, a FCU
a chilled ceiling or a sub-component within zone equipment such as a zone heating coil, any changes made
on the dialog apply only to that object, that is only the current HVAC zone equipment is ticked on the Target
tab of the dialog. However if you check this program option then the equivalent item for all zones in the current
HVAC zone group are ticked by default so any changes made will be saved to the equivalent component in all
HVAC zones in the group.
This option is switched off by default.
Show HVAC zone default data on the HVAC zone group dialog
When an HVAC zone is added to an HVAC zone group, default values are taken from the HVAC zone group.
This default HVAC zone group data is normally hidden because it can confuse new users who expect
changes made to HVAC zone default settings on the HVAC zone group dialog to be inherited by child HVAC
zones.
This option allows more experienced users who understand that the HVAC zone group defaults are only used
at the point when the HVAC zone is added to the group to control defaults. It is switched off by default.
Tip: The most important application of HVAC zone group default data is when saving HVAC templates where
specific HVAC zone settings are required. Any HVAC zone settings made in the source model are not saved
with an HVAC template, but the settings on the HVAC zone group are saved and applied to zones added to
the HVAC zone group when the template is subsequently loaded in the destination model.
- 1026 -
Program Options
PROGRAM OPTIONS - FILES

Files tab of the Program options dialog
Backup
DesignBuilder will by default make automatic backups of your current working file. Check the Automatic
backup option box and select a backup interval to enable this option.
DesignBuilder copies the auto backup file to the Backup folder below DesignBuilder Data folder.
See also Data recovery.
Note: DesignBuilder keeps files in the Backup folder for up to 30 days and removes old backups each time
the program is run.
Default folders
DesignBuilder stores the most recently used folders for:
Data file storage

Picture file export
AVI file export
Report file export
DXF file import/export
You can edit these default folders on this tab.
PROGRAM OPTIONS - ENERGYPLUS

EnergyPlus tab of the Program options dialog
EnergyPlus
You can select the version of EnergyPlus to use in your simulations. This can be useful to target a specific
DOE version you may wish to use or when a new version becomes available which might provide new
functionality or address previous problems.
You should generally select the recommended DLL option as it is more tightly integrated within
DesignBuilder and provides progress feedback.
DesignBuilder comes with 2 internal versions of EnergyPlus:
DLL - the default option, runs the internal version of EnergyPlus supplied with the program
asynchronously giving visual feedback of progress and allowing interaction with the computer during
the simulation.
Executable - an executable version of the program running in a command window.
Alternatively you can select an executable version of EnergyPlus supplied by DOE. If you are exporting IDF
data for use outside DesignBuilder you should select the appropriate DOE version to avoid incompatibilities.
Note: the EnergyPlus version selected here is used for simulations within DesignBuilder but also as the target
version when exporting IDF data for use outside DesignBuilder.
- 1027 -
Mode
If you select an executable version (internal or DOE) there are four options available to control the way
EnergyPlus is executed when simulating within DesignBuilder:
1-Executable (minimised) - runs the executable invisibly - you will just see a minimised window on the
Task bar but not the EnergyPlus command window.
2-Executable (visible) - runs the executable showing EnergyPlus screen output in a command
window.
3-Executable (debug) - runs the executable showing EnergyPlus screen output in a command window
and pauses after simulation - intended for advanced EnergyPlus users who may want to see the stack
dump following a crash.
4-Executable (EP-Launch) - runs the DOE-supplied EP-Launch program, waiting until this is closed
before loading results. This option is only possible if you have selected a DOE-supplied version of the
EnergyPlus executable. This option can be useful for making quick minor changes to the IDF data prior
to simulation. Any changes made to the IDF data from within EP-Launch will be included in the
simulation but will not be retained for future simulations. Info on the EP-Launch option.
The screenshot below shows EP-Launch being used to control EnergyPlus simulations from
DesignBuilder.
- 1028 -
Program Options
Note 1: If you use this method you must make sure to set the correct weather file manually.
Note 2: Any changes you make to the IDF data, either in the IDF Editor or using a text editor, will be
saved in a file called ip.inp in the EnergyPlus folder. This file will be overwritten the next time a
simulation is requested so if you wish to save the any changes you make to IDF data you should use
the File > Export option and edit the data and make simulations outside DesignBuilder.
Note 3: If you want to run EnergyPlus without DesignBuilder then use the File > Export > Export
EnergyPlus IDf file > Simulation option to generate the idf file and load this using EP-Launch outside
DesignBuilder.
- 1029 -
EnergyPlus export folder

When using a DOE EnergyPlus executable version you must also select the folder where the selected version
is installed. You can scan the disk for DOE installations by clicking on the link in the Info help panel..
When you select any option other than the default DLL option, the necessary EnergyPlus files are
downloaded seamlessly prior to the first simulation following the change.
Note: If you wish to install a different DLL version of EnergyPlus to that which is recommended, you must
have administrative rights on the computer.
DesignBuilder are licensed distributors of EnergyPlus. All versions of EnergyPlus supplied by
DesignBuilder have been compiled by the DOE.
Program control
Maximum number of threads
You can control the number of threads to be used per EnergyPlus simulation. The default is 1 thread. In cases
where a larger number of threads is entered, you may find that the computer becomes less response when
EnergyPlus simulations are running. If this becomes a problem you should enter a lower value here.
Output file
Save ESO simulation output
You can generate ESO output files containing Heating design, Cooling design and Simulation results. The
files can be loaded later using the File > Load results file menu option, provided the model hasn't changed too
much.
Rules:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
The DesignBuilder model must still have same zones and surfaces it had at the time the simulation
data was generated
If you have modified these files and carried out further simulations in EnergyPlus you should find that
the results will read in OK provided you haven't changed zone or surface names in the IDF data.
You cannot read in ESO files generated from IDF data which was entered by hand (or by other
software) because the zone and surface references will be different.
Results must be loaded to the correct screen - you can't for example read Heating design results into
the Simulation screen.
Simulation only: the results to be read in must have been generated using the same simulation period
and number of timesteps currently set in the Simulation options.
If you choose to Save ESO simulation output then you can also select options to Prompt for filename and
Auto load ESO described below.
Prompt for filename

Tell DesignBuilder whether you wish to be prompted for a filename after each simulation. If you choose not to
be prompted then DesignBuilder will automatically generate output filenames based on the name of the dsb
file, the calculation type, the calculation description and the date. It places the file in the EnergyPlus folder. If
you choose to be prompted the file can be stored anywhere on your computer system.
Auto load ESO

Check this option to automatically load the ESO results file after simulations. If you have been warned that
there will be a lot of data and the program may crash on reading results you may wish to switch this option off
- 1030 -
Program Options
and reload the results later. It is often possible to read in very large ESO files after DesignBuilder has
restarted following a simulation and this can be a useful for avoiding a crash due to too much data. You may
also wish to switch the option off to avoid waiting for the results to read in when carrying out parametric
simulations.
This option only refers to Simulation results no Heating/Cooling Design results.
IDF Options
Display extra warnings
Requesting Display extra warnings causes the statement:
Diagnostics,DisplayExtraWarnings;
to be included in the IDF data. This option is for experienced EnergyPlus users who understand the
significance of the extra warning messages generated.
IDF Formatting
The IDF data can be formatted using the options:
1-Full - indentation and comments are included in the IDF data

2-Basic - just indentation and comments required to reference the IDF objects with data in the
DesignBuilder model.
3-Compressed - the IDF data is fully compressed. Choose this option if your model is very large and
you wish to reduce the amount of IDF text being processed. When the IDF data uses more than about
10MB of disk space DesignBuilder is unable to process the quantity of text involved and if this happens
when the 1-Full or 2-Basic options are set it will attempt to regenerate the IDF data using the 3Compressed option to reduce the memory requirement. If IDF data is being generated twice before
your simulations you can speed the process by selecting this option from the start ensuring that IDF
data is only generated once.
Using custom versions of EnergyPlus

If you have compiled a special version of EnergyPlus you can use it to run simulations from within
DesignBuilder by following the instructions below. Note that the custom version must be based on one of the
versions supported by DesignBuilder and ideally the default version. The instructions are easiest if the version
number of your custom compilation is the exactly the same as that of a version that is supported by
DesignBuilder.
When the custom version has the same version number as a supported
version
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Recompile your new version of EnergyPlus into EXE form (not DLL)
Select the EXE option from the EnergyPlus program options corresponding to the custom version.
This downloads and installs the appropriate standard version of EnergyPlus from the DesignBuilder
servers to the DesignBuilder EnergyPlus folder (if it hasn't already been downloaded).
Copy your custom EnergyPlus.exe (and Eplus+.idd if this has changed) to the DesignBuilder
EnergyPlus folder overwriting the standard the files downloaded by DesignBuilder.
Test by running simulations from within DesignBuilder to ensure that your custom version is being run.
When the custom version has a new version number

1.
Follow instructions 1-3 above selecting the standard version most similar to your custom version. This
ensures that all standard files are installed ready to be overwritten with custom files.
- 1031 -
2.
Create a new version component from the EnergyPlus tab on the Program options dialog and enter the
custom version on the dialog. See below.
3.
Copy all of the EnergyPlus files which have changed typically EnergyPlus.exe and Energy+.idd to the
DesignBuilder EnergyPlus folder.
Test by running simulations from within DesignBuilder to ensure that your custom version is being run.
4.
PROGRAM OPTIONS - LIMITS

Limits tab of the Program options dialog
You can enter the maximum number of arc and circle segments if you have a special requirement.
PROGRAM OPTIONS - INTERNATIONAL

International tab of the Program options dialog
Language
DesignBuilder currently supports 5 languages:
English - native language of DesignBuilder

Italian
French
Spanish - available only from our Spanish speaking representatives Aurea Consulting (Spain), Sol Arq
(Mexico) and Energy Arq (Chile)
German
When you change the language you must restart DesignBuilder for all screens and dialogs to be refreshed.
Units
Two options for units are available:
1-Metric (SI) units and,

2-Inch-Pound (IP) units.
Because the program uses SI units internally, and because the databases which come with the program have
mainly been built up using SI units, US users may find some limitations with the user interface when in IP
mode. For example the sliders used on some dialogs are replaced by text boxes.
- 1032 -
Program Options
Region filter
The region filter allows you to see only the data relevant to your particular region. Note that if you have a file
loaded then DesignBuilder will use the region associated with the location of the site. The region in this
dialogue is only used when no file is loaded. Data tables which can be filtered in this way are:
Constructions
Glazing
Materials
Metabolic rates
Schedules
Holidays
Activity templates
Construction templates
Glazing templates
Lighting templates
HVAC templates
DHW templates
Sectors
Show other region data

Use this option to display/hide component and template data from other regions.
Show 'General' data

Use this option to display/hide component and template data from the 'General' region. Options are:
1-Never - never show General data
2-Always - always show General data
3-When no region specific data - only show General data when the is no region specific data available.
Show program 'Early' data

Use this option to display/hide special 'Early' and other 'broad-brush' typical system component and template
data. Options are:
1-Never - never show 'Early' data
2-Always - always show 'Early' data
3-When no region specific data - only show 'Early' data when the is no region specific data available.
Note: When categories of data are hidden using the program options described above this does not mean
they are deleted from the database - the data is still there but it does not appear on lists.
- 1033 -
Library Management
Library Management
DesignBuilder is supplied with libraries of Templates and Components and these can be managed from the
opening screen (i.e. when no dsb file is loaded).
Click on Component Libraries or Templates tabs (above) to manage library data.

Tip: you can load the latest library components and templates into your model using the Import library data
to model command from the Tools menu when a model is loaded. Any new data that has been added to the
library since the model file was created will be imported to the model. Also if there have been any changes to
library component and template data, this new data will overwrite the original data.
Keeping Templates and Component Libraries

You may build up a large database of your own templates and components and to avoid losing this data
between version upgrades, DesignBuilder backs up your library data in a series of .dat files which you can
access from the File > Folders > Library data menu command. These files are retained when the software is
uninstalled. When you install a new version of DesignBuilder and run it for the first time, any data you entered
in the old libraries is merged with the new libraries. This ensures that you keep any data you created, while
receiving the latest DesignBuilder system template and component data.
Note: DesignBuilder keeps separate program options and template and component libraries for each user on
the computer system.
OPENING SCREEN - COMPONENT LIBRARIES

From the Component Library screen you can add, clone (copy), delete, view, edit, import, export, backup,
restore components as shown below. You can also save the libraries by clicking on the Save toolbar icon
(libraries are also saved when the program exits).
Library Components are automatically loaded into the model at the time the file is created and from then on,
they are associated specifically with this model and so are known as 'Model Components'. Any change made
to the Library Components does not affect existing building models because they reference their own set of
Model Components.
- 1035 -
Add New Component

To add a component:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the + to the left of the component type (Glazing in the above screen shot).
Click on the category (folder icon) or on a component within a category.
Click on the green + on the toolbar to create a new component of the selected category.
Fill in the details on the dialog and press OK.
The component has been added.
Clone (Copy) Component

Cloning a component creates an exact copy of the selected component gives the copy name 'Copy of ...'
followed by the name of the original component.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the + to the left of the component type (Glazing in the above screen shot).
Click on the component you wish to copy.
Click on the clone icon on the toolbar to create a new component identical to the selected one. This
creates the copy and selects it,
To edit the new component click on the Edit toolbar button
- 1036 -
Library Management
View Component
You can view the details of a component in the Info | Data panel on the right of the screen as shown in the
diagram above. Note that icons in the View panel indicate that you can click on the component to see its'
details. You can also use the Previous and Next Navigation buttons above the Info panel to navigate through
previously viewed components and templates.
TEMPLATE LIBRARY MANAGEMENT

Use the opening screen to work with template libraries. The whole screen is dedicated to the job and you get
access to the Info Data panel which allows you to review the data for the currently selected template (screen
shot below).
You can add, clone (copy), delete, view, edit, import, export, backup, restore library templates as shown
below. You can also save the libraries by clicking on the Save toolbar icon (libraries are also saved when the
program exits)
Add New Template

To add a template:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Click on the + to the left of the template type (Activity templates in the above screen shot).
Click on the category (folder icon) or on a template within a category.
Click on the green + on the toolbar to create a new template of the selected category.
- 1037 -
The template has been added.
Clone (Copy) Template

Cloning a template creates an exact copy of the selected template gives the copy name 'Copy of ...' followed
by the name of the original template.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Click on the + to the left of the template type (Activity templates in the above screen shot).
Click on the template you wish to copy.
Click on the clone icon on the toolbar to create a new template identical to the selected one. This
creates the copy and selects it,
To edit the new template click on the Edit toolbar button
View Template
You can view the details of a template in the Info | Data panel on the right of the screen as shown in the
diagram above. Note that icons in the View panel indicate that you can click on the template to see its' details.
You can also use the Previous and Next Navigation buttons above the Info panel to navigate through
previously viewed components and templates.
Note: You can work with templates with a file open from the Templates tab on the Navigator panel but in this
case you're working with Model Templates, i.e. templates specifically associated with a particular model not
the library.
IMPORT COMPONENTS/TEMPLATES
Import component/template .DDF files previously exported using the File > Import > Library data menu
command:
Import the data to the model by selecting the Import menu command with a file open.
Import to libraries by working from the Opening screen.
This command imports all components/templates in the DDF file.

Note: As well as importing DDF files created directly by DesignBuilder you can also create your own
component and template data sets (outside DesignBuilder) for importing. See the Importing Custom
EXPORT COMPONENTS/TEMPLATES
You can export your user DesignBuilder Component/Template libraries by selecting the File > Export >
Library data menu command to create a .DDF file. This file can be shared with other users, imported on other
computers in your office or simply used as a backup.
- 1038 -
Library Management
When exporting a complex set of data, DesignBuilder will check that where user data references other user
components, these referenced components are also selected. For example, if you select a construction for
export which uses your own materials, you must make sure that all materials used in this construction are also
selected. If any required user components are not selected DesignBuilder displays a dialog showing the
missing components. See below.
Press the OK button to continue with the export automatically including the missing data.
- 1039 -
Note: if there is any data that is referenced but does not exist it is flagged with a red '!' icon (above). In this
case you should press the Cancel button and make the necessary edits to ensure that all referenced data
exists. DesignBuilder will not prevent you from continuing so it is possible to create DDF files with missing
data.
When you use the library data Export command with a model data file open, the data exported will be user
Model components/templates, not Library components/templates.
From the Opening screen you can also export entire data tables as csv-spreadsheet files suitable for
viewing in a spreadsheet. This data cannot be read back into DesignBuilder.
BACKUP COMPONENT/TEMPLATE LIBRARIES
Back up your Component and Template libraries by clicking on the Backup toolbar icon. Backups created in
this way are stored in the 'Backup\Manual' folder beneath the rest of the library data.
As well as backing up the compiled .dbt files, DesignBuilder also exports the files in .dat format and packages
the whole backup into a zip file. If you have problems with your libraries you may find it helpful to send this zip
file to DesignBuilder Support for analysis.
You can use this data as a backup of your library data and can restore it at a later date using the Restore
libraries command.
RESTORE COMPONENT/TEMPLATE LIBRARIES
Click on the Restore icon to open the Restore Data dialog which allows you to Restore previously backed up
Component/Template libraries. Select the source of the restore - you can either restore the libraries to their
state when you first installed DesignBuilder or you can restore library data from a previous backup (if one
exists). In the screenshot below, no backup had been made so the Previous backup option is not available.
If you choose to restore libraries supplied with installation you can use the Restore custom data (clear to
delete all custom data) option to either:
1.
2.
Restore the custom data which existed on the computer at the time the software was installed, or,
Clear all custom data to keep only the data supplied by DesignBuilder.
Note to restore the libraries supplied with the installation and clear any custom data select Restore libraries
supplied with installation and uncheck the Restore custom data (clear to delete all custom data) option.
- 1040 -
Menu
Menu
The DesignBuilder menu is located at the top of the screen and provides a full reference of all the currently
available commands.
The following sub-menus are available:
File - access file operations

Edit - options for editing the model
Go - options for navigating and obtaining data
View - options for adjusting the view of the model
Tools - miscellaneous tools
Help - documentation and other support resources on use of the program.
FILE MENU
The File menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen. The following
options are available when a file is open:
General
New project (Ctrl+N) - create a new DesignBuilder dsb file.

Open project (Ctrl+O) - Open an existing DesignBuilder dsb file.
Close (Ctrl+F4) - close the currently open DesignBuilder dsb file and returned to the opening screen.
Print - Print current view
Load results file - load a previously generated ESO file.
Save
Save (Ctrl+S) - Save currently open DesignBuilder dsb file. If no file is currently loaded then this
command saves the libraries.
Save without output results - save the current DesignBuilder dsb file without output results reducing
the file size. Use this option if you plan to send the dsb file by e-mail or to the support forums.
Save as (F12) - save the DesignBuilder dsb file using a different name/location.
Save as template - save the DesignBuilder dsb file as a template so it can be used as a starting point
for subsequent new projects.
Import
Import 2-D DXF floorplan - import a 2-D DXF floorplan into the model for tracing over.
Import detailed survey data - import a survey data file into the model (advanced option - contact
DesignBuilder support for more information on this)
Import building from external file - import a building into the current model from an external file. The
option assumes that there is only one building in the external file and requires that there is at least one
building in the destination file.
Import assembly library - imports an assembly library from an external asl file previously created
using the Export assembly library command.
Import library data - import library data from an existing DDF file.
- 1041 -
Export
Export EnergyPlus Heating design IDF file - export an IDF file using options for heating design
calculations.
Export EnergyPlus Cooling design IDF file - export an IDF file using options for cooling design
calculations.
Export EnergyPlus Simulation design IDF file - export an IDF file using options for simulation using
hourly weather data.
Export model image - export the currently displayed image of the model.
Export 3-D DXF model - export the model in 3-D DXF format.
Export assembly library - exports the current assembly library to an asl file for importing into another
model.
Export CSV report file - export a summary of the model in spreadsheet format.
Export library data - export library data in DDF format.
Folder
EnergyPlus folder - opens a Windows Explorer window in the folder used by DesignBuilder for storing
temporary EnergyPlus files.
Weather data folder - opens a Windows Explorer window in the folder where the hourly weather files
are stored.
Library data folder - opens a Windows Explorer window in the folder where library data files are
stored.
Template projects folder - opens a Windows Explorer window in the folder where dsb file templates
are stored. File templates are available for selection on the second tab of the Add new project dialog.
EDIT MENU
The Edit menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen.
General
Undo (Ctrl+Z) - undo last operation

Redo (Ctrl+R) - redo last operation
End stream (Enter) - end the partition stream creating a floating partition
Cancel current operation (Escape) - cancel the current operation returning to select mode
Undo last point (Escape) - undo the last point drawn when creating a block or when drawing partitions
Clear to default - clear model data to defaults
Load data from template (Ctrl+L) - loads data from template
Reload templates - reloads data from template throughout model where the template is non-default
Transfer blocks - transfers blocks from one building to another
Convert selected outlines to blocks - convert any selected outlines to component or building blocks
Drag block face -start the drag face operation on the currently selected block
Divide block - divide the currently selected block using the cutting tool
Measure (Ctrl+M) - measure length, angles or areas in the model
Draw
Draw block add a new block (building level only)

Draw internal perimeter- draw a void/courtyard (block level only)
Draw partition - draw partition streams (block level only)
Draw window - draw windows (surface level only)
Draw sub-surface - draw sub-surface (surface level only)
Draw door - draw doors (surface level only)
Draw hole - draw holes (surface level only)
Draw vent - draw vents (surface level only)
Draw construction line - draw one or more construction lines
- 1042 -
Menu
Remove
Remove DXF data - remove all current DXF data

Remove all construction lines - remove all construction lines
Remove all outlines - remove all outline blocks
General
Select - returned to select mode

Select all - select all objects in current view
Equipment (zone level, Equipment tab when Detailed gains model option
selected)
Add - at an item of equipment

Edit - edit currently selected equipment
Delete - delete currently selected equipment
Opening screen component and template edit
Add - add a new component/template as per currently selected item

Edit - edit currently selected component/template
Delete - delete currently selected component/template
Edit currently selected model objects
Move (Ctrl+V) - move selected objects

Clone (Ctrl+C) - clone (copy) selected objects
Rotate (Ctrl+T) - rotate selected objects
Stretch (Ctrl+J) - stretch selected objects
Delete (DEL) - delete selected objects
General
Building model options (F11) - open Model options dialog

Add building (Ctrl+A) - add a new building (site level only)
GO MENU
The Go menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen.
VIEW MENU
The View menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen.
TOOLS MENU
The Tools menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen.
General
Program options - open program options dialog.

Rebuild - recalculate the zone, surface and adjacency geometry from the base building elements.
Merge zones - control the way zones are combined.
- 1043 -
Rezone block - refresh the zoning in the current block.

Import library components to model - import current component and template libraries to the
model replacing existing ones.
Export data - export results/graphics results from the current screen.
Compile report - generation of a report based on previously created Report topics.
Hourly weather data - open the hourly weather data dialog.
Thermal comfort calculator - calculate PMV and PPD from air and radiant temperatures, RH, clothing
and air speed.
Show log file - show a log file containing information on your computer and all significant actions taken
during the current DesignBuilder session.
Results screens
Update calculated data - refreshes the results first opening the Calculation options dialog allowing you
to enter new options.
Lock Y-axis min/max values - locks the extent of the Y-axes so that they keep their current maximum
and minimum values allowing consistent comparison with the future results display.
Optimisation Analysis Settings - access optimisation settings.
Libraries (opening screen)
Backup libraries - backup component and template libraries

Restore libraries - restore previous component and template library backups
HELP MENU
The Help menu can be accessed from the horizontal top bar menu at the top of the screen.
Index - access program help using the Index.

Search - access program help using the Search facility.
Contents - access program help using the hierarchical Contents.
Licence - enter serial number and licence keys
Tutorials - access DesignBuilder web tutorials
About - DesignBuilder version number
- 1044 -
Modelling Advice
Modelling Advice
Modelling advice topics:
Working with large models

ASHRAE 90.1 Modelling
Natural ventilation modelling
DCV Modelling
Ground modelling
Adjacent Buildings
Electrochromic Glazing
Trombe Walls
Double Skin Facades
Autosizing Heating and Cooling Equipment
Daylight Saving and Local Time
Solar Radiation Distribution
Warehouse with Office
Startup and Pre-conditioning
WORKING WITH LARGE MODELS

It is possible to create very large, complex building models using DesignBuilder but you should consider what
you're trying to achieve by your modelling exercise before diving in and including every detail of the building
design. Otherwise you may find you have created a beautiful model which is impractical to simulate because it
takes too long or causes the simulation engine to fail. You should consider the following points.
EnergyPlus simulations are slowed down by:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Larger numbers of windows

Zones with many windows and other surfaces (large number
of surfaces / zone)
Radiant heating systems
Calculated natural ventilation using the Airflow Network
Calculating solar reflections
Reading hourly or sub-hourly results for extended simulation
periods
Not enough computer memory (RAM)
Large volumes of output data
Large values of timesteps per hour
Tip 1: You can speed up modelling, and in particular the drawing and deleting of partitions in large models, by
switching off Automatic block zoning option. After having manually rezoned the block you can also save time
when renaming the new zones by a) switching off the Double-click to navigate site hierarchy Program option
and b) switching off the Automatically refresh site navigator lists Program option.
Tip 2: Another way to speed up modelling in large models is to zoom into the area of the building or block
where you wish to work. This eliminates consideration of objects that are not visible on the screen and allows
the screen to refresh much more quickly.
You can speed up simulations by using these techniques:
1.
Reduce the number of windows in the model by increasing the Window spacing. Shading issues aside,
modelling a small number of large Windows has the same effect as a large number of small Windows
provided you get the frame area right.
- 1045 -
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
Reduce the number of surfaces by avoiding unnecessary "wiggles" and indents in block perimeters and
partitions - keep it as simple as possible. The larger the model the more important it is to follow this
advice. Where an indent in the perimeter gives shading then you could instead model this using a
single flat surface without indent and use local shading devices with sidefins to model local window
shading.
Avoid very large zones with many surfaces and windows. Contrary to intuition, from the simulation time
point of view, it is best to split such zones into more zones with fewer surfaces each.
Use the Lump similar windows on surface option to speed up simulations with many similar windows
per surface. Note that switching this option on has no effect for zones using Daylight lighting control or
if the Full interior and exterior solar distribution option is selected.
Wherever possible lump similar adjacent zones together. Only create zones to model areas of the
building with specific environmental conditions, and HVAC systems or internal gains schedules. A
common mistake made by the beginners is to model each room as a separate zone. This is often not
necessary for building energy simulations because many rooms will have reasonably similar operating
conditions. In this case you can use one of the DesignBuilder Merging features to reduce the number
of zones.
If there are multiple identical zones then you can use the Zone multiplier to reduce the number of zones
processed.
Try to use the smallest number of blocks possible to avoid the need for block connection surfaces and
keeping the number of surfaces down.
Use Simple HVAC descriptions.
Use the Scheduled Natural ventilation option.
If you need to use Calculated natural ventilation in your simulations then you should aim to minimise
the number of cracks and openings involved in the airflow calculations. One way to do this is to switch
off infiltration calculations. Normally DesignBuilder includes a single crack in each surface in the
simulation to simulate infiltration. If you have other openings such as vents, windows, doors etc in a
particular block/zone you can switch off infiltration. This approach can be used in roof blocks or
calculations such as cooling design in well sealed buildings where infiltration is relatively insignificant.
Switching off calculation of solar reflections in the Model options dialog
If you are interested in analysing a single zone within a much larger model, you could consider using
the single zone option to carry out simulations just on the zone, excluding consideration of the rest of
the building.
Alternatively if you want to model a only a group of zones then you can exclude unnecessary zones by
unchecking the Include zone model option.
Fit as much memory (RAM) to your computer as possible (8 GB or more ideally). Paging memory to
disk during simulations of large models can cause EnergyPlus to grind to a halt.
Only request the output you really need. This will speed up simulation initialisation and reading of
output (especially hourly and sub-hourly) at the end. If you are only looking at hourly results then you
can get noticeably faster initialisation and simulations by switching off monthly and daily results. For
example, simulation times for a test winter week simulation on a real model were:
1. - With hourly, daily, monthly outputs: 39 min
2. - Only hourly outputs: 14 min
3. - Only hourly outputs and checking 'Internal surface as adiabatic': 12 min
If you don't need surface data (Walls, Windows etc. heat transfer) switch the Surface heat transfer incl
solar output option off.
Restricting hourly and sub-hourly results to short simulations for investigation of detailed building
operation. Note that if you request large volumes of hourly or sub-hourly data this can result is a
program crash when results are being loaded into DesignBuilder. To avoid this you should switch off
automatic loading of EnergyPlus results to DesignBuilder and view results instead using the Results
Viewer.
It is sometimes possible to use less timesteps per hour to speed up simulations. Some models can give
reliable results using 2 timesteps per hour, however when complex Detailed HVAC systems are being
modelled, 6, 10 or more timesteps may be required. If you aren't sure, compare the hourly results you
obtain when using a range of timesteps per hour values and choose the minimum value that gives
results equivalent to the 10 timesteps case.
If all else fails then you can model very large buildings by splitting them into smaller units and summing
results outside DesignBuilder.
- 1046 -
Modelling Advice
ASHRAE 90.1 MODELLING

This section outlines the procedures involved in setting up proposed and baseline building models in
accordance with ASHRAE 90.1 Appendix G PRM. In the text below "Appendix G" refers to ASHRAE 90.1
Standard Appendix G.
Note: you will need the DesignBuilder LEED / ASHRAE 90.1 module to access this functionality.
Add new site
To access ASHRAE 90.1 functionality the Mandatory energy code must be set to ASHRAE 90.1 2007
or 2010 . This can be done manually for existing models from the Regions tab at site level, or for new
models, follow the instructions in the next step.
When creating a new ASHRAE 90.1 project check the ASHRAE 90.1 App G PRM checkbox on the
Add new site dialog and choose one of the 1-ASHRAE 90.1-2007 or 2-ASHRAE 90.1-2010 options.
DesignBuilder uses the ASHRAE climate zone site level setting to identify the climate zone for
generating baseline constructions and glazing according to ASHRAE 90.1 building envelope
requirements. The default climate zone loaded will have been loaded from the Locations template and
that value was originally derived from the value shown on the Hourly weather data dialog which in turn
was derived by analysing the .epw hourly weather data. In some cases the climate zone may not be the
same as defined in ASHRAE 90.1 Standard Appendix D for the model location. In this case simply
select the correct ASHRAE climate zone at site level and the baseline constructions and glazing will be
automatically updated to reflect the new climate zone.
Add new building
When the Mandatory energy code is ASHRAE 90.1 2007 or 2010 then on the Add new building dialog
the Model type template shows ASHRAE 90.1. This loads some appropriate model data settings such
as Detailed HVAC and 6 timesteps per hour to the building model.
On the Add new building dialog you can select either 1-Proposed or 2-Baseline for the ASHRAE 90.1
building type. DesignBuilder does not currently generate different settings based on this selection,
however it always generates baseline constructions and construction templates in accordance to
building envelope requirements defined in 90.1 Constructions from Standard chapter 5 (detailed in
Tables 5.5-1 through 5.5-8) can be selected as required for both proposed and baseline buildings.
For your proposed design you can improve the baseline construction (by copying and editing) or simply
replacing them with definitions shown on architectural drawings or as built for existing building
envelopes.
Following formal ASHRAE 90.1 PRM modelling procedure, you are strongly advised to create the
proposed building first and to create the baseline building from that. Tools will be provided in future v4
releases to generate baseline building automatically from the proposed building so that both proposed
and baseline buildings are stored in the same dsb file for an easy comparison of simulation inputs and
outputs.
Constructions and Glazing
When a site is created or when the climate zone is changed, baseline constructions and glazing
systems as well as construction templates are generated for the selected ASHRAE climate zone ready
for assigning to the building.
- 1047 -
Opaque construction templates
Glazing templates
Two special opaque construction types required by the ASHRAE 90.1 Standard, are F-factor ground
floors and C-factor below-grade walls. These are different from conventional layered construction in
that they don't use layers of materials but instead the overall thermal properties are defined as an Ffactor (for slab on grade floors) or a C-factor (for below grade walls). EnergyPlus uses these factors to
generate equivalent layered constructions behind the scenes. During the simulation these surfaces
exchange heat with the FCFactor ground temperatures only.
When running Heating or Cooling design calculations, if the FCfactorMethod ground temperatures
source data at site level has 1-Hourly weather file selected, a weather file containing ground
temperatures in the header should be selected and will be downloaded (if not yet in your weather file
folder on your computer) prior to the calculations. If 2-User defined is selected, the Heating and
Cooling design calculations do not require the weather file.
Terminology used in the ASHRAE 90.1 constructions list gives the climate zone, a description of the
construction, surface resistances in IP units and the U-value in IP units and in brackets the U-value in
SI units. For example construction CZ4 Non-Res, Wall, Steel-Framed, R-13.1+R-7.4 (2.3+1.3), U-.064
(.365) is a non-residential steel framed wall for Climate zone 4 with internal and external surface
resistances of 13.1 and 7.4 btu/hr-ft2-F respectively and a U-value of 0.064 btu/hr-ft2-F (0.365 W/m2)
.
Create 3-D building model
The proposed building model geometry should be set up with reference to ASHRAE 90.1 Standard
Appendix G Table G3.1-1.
Define different thermal zone types using the Zone type option on the Activity tab. For ASHRAE 90.1
models additional Zone types can be selected per 90.1 requirements including:
1.
2.
5-Semiheated, for zones that are heated but not to normal comfort levels.
When the 2-Unconditioned Zone type is selected choose whether the unconditioned zone is
ventilated or unventilated using the Unconditioned zone ventilation setting below the Zone type
setting.
- 1048 -
Modelling Advice
Define each zone type as the model requires (checking with rules from Appendix G Table G3.1-7,8,9),
and then assign relevant construction/fenestration templates according to their Space-Conditioning
Categories (construction default is Non-Residential). Activity, lighting templates for each block/zone
should be updated with relevant templates as well.
Geometry convention
It is important for ASHRAE 90.1 based-work that the proposed and baselines buildings have identical floor
areas and zone volumes. The easiest way to ensure this is to use the Simple geometry convention for both
buildings. With the Simple template the block geometry drawn gives the exact surface geometry and zone
volumes to be used in the simulation. This means that when you copy the proposed building to create the
baseline building the zone geometry will be correct even after loading the baseline constructions.
If instead you used the External measurements template for example you would find that the baseline
building surface areas, floor area and zone volumes would be different after loading the baseline
constructions because these generally have a different thickness to those selected for the proposed building.
Lighting
Lighting settings shall be either building area method or space-by-space method, but shall not the mix
these two schemes. The Building Area Method is generally used for early stage analysis where the
exact function of every zone in the building has not yet been determined. The Space-by-Space Method
is used more often as it is more flexible, allowing the user to use more detail/specific lighting settings.
Note: When loading an activity template, it will update the lighting schedule.
HVAC
A set of Appendix G HVAC systems for loading to baseline building models is provided in the Detailed
HVAC templates list. The proposed building HVAC system should meet the requirements shown in
Appendix G Table G3.1-10. A modified copy of a baseline HVAC system can be used for the proposed
building.
For the proposed building design, where no heating or cooling systems exist or have been specified,
the heating or cooling systems shall be identical to the systems modelled in the baseline building
design.
Define the DHW system based on Appendix G Table G3.1-11.
Utility costs
Define the utility costs for the model to generate energy cost outputs based on purchased energy rates
using settings on the Tariff analysis dialog on the Economics tab at building level. LEED/ASHRAE 90.1
App G PRM method may only require tariffs object to calculate operational costs.
Outputs
EnergyPlus provides a "LEED Summary" report which is displayed on the Summary tab after the simulation if
the appropriate option is checked on the Output tab of the Simulation options dialog under the Summary
Tables header.
Convert an Existing Simulation Model to an ASHRAE 90.1 Model

To convert a standard EnergyPlus model to be treated as a proposed building go to the Regions tab at site
level and set the Mandatory energy code to one of the ASHRAE 90.1 energy codes. You will be warned to
check that the ASHRAE climate zone is correctly set. The default climate zone can be overridden at site level
under the Location header.
- 1049 -
Unmet hours
"Unmet hours" of a building are the summation of the number of hours when the heating or the cooling set
point temperature of a zone is not met either by the HVAC system or by the plant. The data is provided in the
Summary report as:
Time Setpoint Not Met During Occupied Heating

Time Setpoint Not Met During Occupied Cooling
Understanding/Interpreting/Calculating the number of unmet hours:
There will be an "unmet hour" for "Time Setpoint Not Met During Occupied Cooling" in a particular zone
when the zone indoor temperature is higher than the cooling set point specified for that hour. Likewise
for heating when the zone heating setpoint temperature is not met.
The number or the percentage of unmet hours in a building is usually given as one of the outputs of the
simulation.
Zone wise, unmet hours can be read from the EnergyPlus: Output Variable, Time Cooling Set point
Not met. When two zones are unmet at the same hour, this will count to one unmet hour for the
building.
When two zones have unmet hours during different non overlapping times of a day, the total number of
unmet hours in that day is the summation of these unmet hours of each zone. This total for the year
should be considered as the total unmet hours of the building.
Example
When each zone is unmet in the specified hours as beside
Zone 1 unmet during hours: 6 8 14 16
Total number of unmet hours of the building: 7 hrs and not 12 hrs.
6 7 8 12 13 14 16
When percentage of unmet is specified, then this is the percentage of total number of hours (1 year8760 hours) for which the simulation is performed (not just the occupied hours).
As per ASHRAE 90.1-2004, the unmet load hours of the total building should be less than or equal to
300 hours and unmet load hours for the proposed design shall not exceed the number of load hours for
the baseline building design by more than 50.
If unmet load hours in the proposed building exceed the unmet load hours in the baseline building by
more than 50, then the size of equipment in the baseline building shall be reduced incrementally, until
the condition is satisfied.
ASHRAE and USGBC say that it is OK if the baseline unmet load hours exceed the proposed unmet
load hours by more than 50, provided they are both below 300.
The above information on Unmet hours is sourced from a post by Ashu Gupta (and subsequent posts) on the
bldg-sim mailing list
NATURAL VENTILATION MODELLING

There are two general approaches to natural ventilation and infiltration modelling in DesignBuilder depending
on the setting of the Natural ventilation model option:
Scheduled in which the natural ventilation change rate is explicitly defined for each zone in terms of a
maximum ACH value and a schedule and infiltration air change rate is defined by a constant ACH
value. A range of control options is provided.
- 1050 -
Modelling Advice
Calculated where natural ventilation and infiltration are calculated based on window openings, cracks,
buoyancy and wind driven pressure differences crack dimensions etc. Control options are provided.
You can choose Scheduled natural ventilation if you are able to make a reasonable estimate of the natural
ventilation rates and infiltration rates in the building. Other airflow scenarios are more difficult to estimate and
in this case it may be necessary to calculate airflows.
Scheduled Natural ventilation and infiltration

Scheduled Natural Ventilation flow rate and schedule data is accessed on the HVAC tab. The flow is switched
off if the zone air temperature falls below the Ventilation setpoint temperature set under Environmental Control
on the Activity tab.
Infiltration is defined by a constant ACH value under Airtightness on the Construction tab.
Airflow through Exterior Windows, Vents and Doors is considered to be included in the Natural ventilation
outside air ac/h value set on the HVAC tab.
Airflow through Interior Windows, Vents and Doors is modelled using the concept of mixing where equal
amounts of air are transferred from one zone to another and vice-versa. The flow rate is directly proportional
to the opening area using Airflow rate per opening area data accessed from the Model Options dialog.
There is currently no way to set uni-directional airflow from one zone to another using Scheduled Natural
ventilation.
Calculated natural ventilation and infiltration
By default Calculated natural ventilation is controlled by timer (window and vent data on the Operation header
on the Openings tab) and by Ventilation setpoint temperature on the Activity tab.
The Crack data under Airtightness on the Constructions tab is used in the EnergyPlus Airflow Network to
calculate infiltration.
- 1051 -
Note 1: Using the Calculated option increases the complexity of the model and slows simulations down. You
should aim to simplify the model as appropriate to the requirements of the calculations. For example if you are
carrying out a summertime simulation of a naturally ventilated building you could consider switching off
infiltration modelling if infiltration heat flow is only a very small part of summertime heat balance.
Note 2: In Version 1 the calculated airflows through external windows, vents, doors, holes and cracks are all
lumped into 'External air' data on the Simulation results screen.
Calculations
The ventilation rate (q) through each opening and crack in the model is calculated based on the pressure
difference using wind and stack pressure effects:
q = C.(DP)
Where:
q is the volumetric flow through the opening.
DP is the pressure difference across the opening/crack.
n is the flow exponent varying between 0.5 for fully turbulent flow and 1.0 for fully laminar flow.
C is the flow coefficient, related to the size of the opening/crack.
Wind-Driven Ventilation
When wind impinges on the surface of a rectangular building, a positive pressure is induced on the upwind
face. The flow separates at the corners resulting in negative pressure regions on the side of the building and
a negative pressure distribution on the leeward facade. The pressure distribution on the roof varies according
to pitch - the pressure on the upwind face being negative for roof pitches of 30 and positive for steeper
pitches.
The pressure on any point on the surface of a building facade can be represented by:
2
Pw = 0.5 .rho. Cp . vz
Where:
Pw is the surface pressure due to wind,

rho is the density of air,
Cp is the wind pressure coefficient at a given position on the surface and
vz is the mean wind velocity at height z.
The wind pressure coefficient, Cp, is a function of wind direction, position on the building surface and side
exposure. Some typical approximate values for buildings subjected to varying degrees of shelter and wind
directions is given in an AIVC publication A guide to energy-efficient ventilation. This data is also quoted in the
CIBSE A Guide. DesignBuilder uses this data to populate the Pressure Coefficients templates and provide
default pressure coefficients suitable for use in basic design calculations for buildings having no more than
three stories.
For more detailed analysis, or for buildings having 4 or more stories you should obtain specific pressure
coefficient data from CFD analysis of from wind tunnel measurements and enter it for each surface under the
Pressure Coefficients header on the Openings tab.
Excluding Wind-Effects
When carrying out conservative design calculations you may prefer to exclude (or reduce) the effects of wind
from Calculated natural ventilation. To exclude wind-driven airflow from the analysis altogether set the Wind
factor to 0. For full treatment of wind effects set it to 1 and for intermediate treatment of wind set to a number
between 0 and 1.
- 1052 -
Modelling Advice
Limitations
DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus Airflow Network method to calculate air flow rates. You should be aware
Airflow Network simulations can take considerably longer than the equivalent simulations with Scheduled
Modulation
You can modulate the opening sizes to reduce the large temperature swings that can occur if the
windows/doors are too far open when they are venting, especially when there is a large inside-outside
temperature difference. Use the Modulation settings on the Advanced tab of the Model Options dialog to
control this. By default modulation is on and opening sizes are reduced to 5% of full values when the outside
is 15C or more colder than inside. This models the fact that occupants are unlikely to throw the windows wide
open when it is very cold outside (for manual control systems).
Modelling Infiltration
Normally when Calculated natural ventilation is set DesignBuilder includes a single crack in each surface in
the simulation to account for infiltration. The size and properties of this crack depend on the setting of the
Airtightness slider.
Tip: The effects of infiltration in some areas of the building and in some calculation types can be minor and so
in order to reduce simulation time for calculated natural ventilation models infiltration can be switched off. This
can be done by unchecking the Model infiltration checkbox for the areas of the building where infiltration in
not to be modelled. For example you may wish to switch off infiltration in roof blocks (and include the
roofspace ventilation using a smaller number of vents or holes instead) or you could switch it off in the whole
building for Summertime simulations where the effects of infiltration would be minimal relative to the much
larger flow rates due to open windows, vents, holes and doors.
Airtightness slider
The setting of the Airtightness slider indicates the Crack template applied when setting crack properties:
Very poor
Poor
Medium
Good
Excellent
See also Mixed mode.
Technical details
You can find more technical details of the Airflow network used in EnergyPlus including background,
algorithms, limitations and validation results in a paper by Lixing Gu at:
http://www.ibpsa.org/proceedings/BS2007/p398_final.pdf
DCV MODELLING
Background
Demand control ventilation (DCV) is a ventilation system capability that provides automatic reduction of
outdoor air intake below design rates when the actual occupancy of spaces served by the system is less than
design occupancy. In most commercial buildings ventilation is provided to deal with two types of indoor
pollution: odours from people, and off-gassing from building components and furniture. When a space is
vacant, it has no people pollution so the people-related ventilation rate is not needed. Many types of high-
- 1053 -
occupancy spaces, such as classrooms, multi-purpose rooms, theatres, conference rooms, or lobbies have
ventilation designed for a high peak occupancy that rarely occurs.
Demand-controlled ventilation has the potential to provide significant HVAC energy savings by conditioning
only the amount of ventilation air necessary to maintain good indoor air quality. It can be particularly effective
in buildings or zones that have widely varying occupancy.
DCV is most successful when reducing ventilation rates and so reducing fan energy use when meeting the
demands of indoor air quality (IAQ). It is not necessarily so successful, in energy terms, for high design
cooling loads, since airflows will increase above the required IAQ minimum to meet space cooling loads.
Practically, this is likely to mean that IAQ-driven DCV is most effective in ASHRAE climate zones 4 and
above.
Schematic of a typical DCV system from Demand-Controlled Ventilation and Sustainability with
permission from author Tom Lawrence and ASHRAE.
Summary of Steps to Model DCV in DesignBuilder

This section provides a summary of the steps required to model an air system with DCV outdoor air control in
DesignBuilder.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make sure you are using Detailed HVAC.

On the Outdoor air system tab of the AHU dialog under the Demand Controlled Ventilation header,
switch on Demand controlled ventilation. Recirculation must be selected on the AHU dialog to enable
this setting.
Select the System outdoor air method (VRP, IAQP etc)
If one of the IAQP methods are selected then the CO2 and contaminant control option must be set on
the HVAC Zone dialog for at least one zone connected to the AHU. CO2 setpoints must also be set.
This is done on the Activity tab under the CO2/Contaminant Setpoints header if the Simple HVAC
- 1054 -
Modelling Advice
5.
activity data option is being used or on the HVAC zone dialog if using the Detailed HVAC activity data
option.
You can check the success of the DCV control in various ways, for example:
1. Use the ac/h data for zones and for the building within DesignBuilder:
2.
Check CO2 levels within selected zones using the Results Viewer. You should find that the
Zone Air CO2 Concentration report is automatically included in the .eso output file when DCV
control has been specified.
GROUND MODELLING
How it works
In EnergyPlus, heat is transferred between zones and the ground through one-dimensional ground floor
surface elements. The 2-D and 3-D effects in the ground heat conduction that occur in reality are not treated
by default. EnergyPlus uses ground construction data to model the storage of heat in the ground and it can
accurately model heat transfer processes over several days (so it can model the effect of say a warm week
followed by a cool week) but it cannot directly model long-term ground thermal storage effects (periods
measured in months). For more on advanced ground modelling see bottom of this topic.
EnergyPlus applies a constant temperature boundary condition for each month on the lower surfaces of
ground adjacent elements.
There are 3 ways to create an adjacency to ground in DesignBuilder:
- 1055 -
1.
2.
3.
Using DesignBuilder's Auto adjacency detection where ground adjacency is set for all surfaces at or
below ground level. By default, all external surfaces which are at or below ground level are considered
to be adjacent to ground. Surfaces that are partly above ground (z=0) and partly below, are modelled
as entirely adjacent to outside (if the Adjacency setting is 1-Auto - see below).
Using Ground component blocks - any surfaces (or part of surfaces) touching a ground component
block are considered to be adjacent to ground.
Using the Adjacency model data on the Construction tab at block, zone and surface levels where
external surfaces can be defined as being adjacent to ground by changing the Adjacency model data
on the Construction tab from 1-Auto to 3-Adjacent to Ground. If a surface is below ground level but is
not adjacent to ground you can select 2-Not adjacent to ground.
When using Separate constructions, and when the Add ground construction layers to surfaces in contact with
ground option is selected, DesignBuilder automatically combines the site ground construction (0.5m of earth
by default) with the main construction (typically ground floor or wall) set on the Constructions tab. With
Combined constructions the earth layers must be explicitly included in the ground floor/wall constructions if
you wish to define ground temperatures within the earth.
Ground temperatures
Monthly ground temperatures are defined at the site level under Site details.
Note: You should not use the ground temperatures in the EnergyPlus weather file header because these are
for undisturbed sites. The temperature beneath buildings is significantly affected by the building itself - the
EnergyPlus documentation recommends using ground temperatures of 2C below average internal
temperatures for large commercial buildings (where perimeter heat loss is relatively less important). Note that
this temperature should be applied directly below the slab and should not include ground material - so if you
use this approach to ground temperature definition, you should switch off use of the ground construction at the
site level.
EnergyPlus cannot model very thick constructions so it is necessary to use less thick constructions (2m or
smaller) combined with some assumptions about temperatures at about half a metre below the floor.
Many modellers prefer to define the ground temperature just below the slab and exclude the earth layers from
the model. This has the advantage of simplicity and clarity and is the approach recommended by EnergyPlus
developers.
Note: the default ground temperatures provided in DesignBuilder assume that an earth layer is included in the
constructions adjacent to ground. If an earth layer is not included then you should increase the default site
ground temperatures to values closer to those typically found just below the ground slab (as described in note
above).
Example Application - Basement or Cellar under inclined ground slope

This example illustrates how to create a simple 3 storey rectangular building model with:
Basement which is fully below ground and

Ground floor is partially buried under an inclined ground plane.
- 1056 -
Modelling Advice
Step 1
Draw 3 blocks on the z=0 ground plane. The lowest block will be the basement (completely buried), the middle
block will be the ground level block, partially buried and the top block will be the second level. So far only the
bottom surface is adjacent to ground because it sits on the z=0 plane.
Step 2
Draw 2 ground component blocks around the basement building block to give it's surfaces ground adjacency.
Note this step could be avoided by moving the whole building down so that the basement is fully below
ground. To do this go to building level, select all the blocks, select the move command, click on one of the
bottom corners of the middle block to create a reference point then click on a blank part of the screen to move
the reference point down to z=0.
Step 3
- 1057 -
Draw three new ground component blocks to create the sloping ground and the upper ground levels.
Step 4
The zone of the middle block is shown above. Notice how 3 of the surfaces have been split into external and
ground adjacencies (ground adjacencies are flagged by green ground symbols). Note also that the portions of
the surfaces touching the ground component block cannot have windows but DesignBuilder attempts to set up
the correct % glazing for the remaining external parts of the surface.
Step 5
The ground component blocks probably do not need to shade this model as they are mainly below all surfaces
that can receive solar radiation/light, but if you are modelling reflections you will probably need to include the
reflection of solar radiation and light from the ground blocks during simulations. In other cases you may prefer
to switch off the generation of the component blocks shading/reflection surfaces to speed simulations. Do this
on the Constructions model data tab under Component Block.
- 1058 -
Modelling Advice
Step 6
The finished model. The texture of Ground component blocks is defined by the material set under Component
blocks on the Constructions tab.
3-D Modelling Using the EnergyPlus Slab Preprocessor (Advanced)

To accurately model long-term ground thermal storage you may wish to consider using an external 2 or 3-D
conduction tool such as the Slab utility supplied with EnergyPlus. This can be used to calculate the
temperatures applied to the underside of the ground floor surface elements.
The EnergyPlus slab program produces temperature profiles for the outside surface at the core and at the
perimeter of the slab. It also produces the average based on the perimeter and core areas used in the
calculation. EnergyPlus has a single GroundTemperatures object that is used for twelve monthly average
ground temperature values - see the Input Output Reference document. Because of this, there are two
options for dealing with the ground temperatures:
1.
2.
Use the average temperatures produced by the slab program for the GroundTemperatures object. This
will provide an average ground temperature at the outside face of any heat transfer surface whose
OutsideFaceEnvironment field is 'ground'.
If two or more ground temperature conditions are desired, it is necessary to utilize the ground
temperature modification feature of other side coefficients (OtherSideCoef field in
OutsideFaceEnvironment). Then, for example, if core and perimeter temperatures are wanted, the
perimeter temperatures from the slab program should be specified in the GroundTemperatures object,
and the surface associated with that condition is treated as in Option 1 above. The surface that is to be
exposed to the core temperature should be given the OtherSideCoef designation, and the
OtherSideCoefficients object should be used to specify the temperatures. To do this, all of the
numerical fields in this object should be zero except field N5. This field should contain the ratio of the
average annual core temperatures and average annual perimeter temperatures. In other words, the
resulting core profile values will be N5 times the perimeter values. This same procedure can be used to
generate as many profiles as needed. However, it should be noted that they will all have the same
profile as the GroundTemperatures object values.
Detailed ground modelling may only give a marginal difference in results and you might want to carry out a
sensitivity study to check the influence of ground temperatures on simulation results before deciding on the
most appropriate level of detail.
DesignBuilder version 2 does not account for 2-D and 3-D thermal bridging effects but future versions may.
- 1059 -
ADJACENT BUILDINGS
Adjacent buildings (i.e. other buildings that are touching the modelled building) usually modify the boundary
conditions relative to external and also provide shade.
There is no explicit way in DesignBuilder to model temperatures and heat flows in 2 buildings simultaneously
and account for energy transfer between them. Future versions may allow this, but in the meantime there are
two options:
1.
2.
Model the adjacent building using component blocks (for shading/reflection) and adiabatic surfaces
between the buildings. This is the usual way to treat an adjacent building not requiring full simulation
and is accurate if the temperature of the adjacent and actual buildings are similar or if there is insulation
between the two buildings.
If the adjacent building does require simulation then model it as part of the actual building and separate
simulation results at the end.
You can set adiabatic adjacent condition data under Constructions on the Constructions tab at surface level.
Merging buildings
Where two separate buildings have been created inadvertently, the blocks of one building can be transferred
to the other building using the Transfer blocks command from the Edit menu.
Airflow
If there is airflow between the two buildings and the adjacent building is at the same temperature as the
modelled building then you could probably ignore its effect. To model the effect of the airflow through an
opening between buildings in detail you should model both buildings as one DB building using the Calculated
natural ventilation model option. If you do it this way and the adjacent building uses energy you must separate
results for the two buildings at the end. You can use different boiler and chiller fuels to differentiate fuel
consumption between the two buildings.
If you use the Simple natural ventilation instead of Calculated, DesignBuilder uses an assumed mixing of air
between the two buildings based on 'flow per opening area' as set on the Model options dialog on the
Advanced tab under Natural Ventilation.
ELECTROCHROMIC GLAZING
Electrochromic windows are part of a new generation of technologies called switchable glazing-or 'smart'
windows. Switchable glazing can change the light transmittance, transparency, or shading of windows in
response to an environmental signal such as sunlight, temperature or an electrical control. Electrochromic
windows change from transparent to tinted by applying an electrical current. Potential uses for electrochromic
technology include daylighting control, glare control, solar heat control, and fading protection in windows and
skylights. By automatically controlling the amount of light and solar energy that can pass through the window,
electrochromic windows can help save energy in buildings.
A variety of electrochromic technologies and media have been developed. One type is darkened by applying a
small electrical voltage to the windows and lightened by reversing the voltage. Light transmittance during
operation varies from five to 80 percent. Once the change in tint has been initiated, the electrochromic glazing
has 'memory' and does not need constant voltage to maintain the tinting. Further, the film can be tuned to
block certain wavelengths, such as infrared (heat) energy.
Another switchable technology, the liquid crystal suspended particle device (SPD), contains molecular
particles suspended in a solution between plates of glass. In their natural state, the particles move randomly
and collide, blocking the direct passage of light. When energized, the particles align rapidly and the glazing
becomes transparent. This type of switchable glazing can block up to about 90 percent of light.
You can easily model electrochromic glazing in DesignBuilder using the Window shading data and defining
the properties of the outer Window Pane to be used when the shading is active. The procedure is:
- 1060 -
Modelling Advice
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Specify the glazing type to be used when the electrochromic glazing system is clear (bleached) in the
standard way on the Openings tab under External glazing.
Under External Glazing and Shading headers, check the 'Window shading' option.
Select the Type as 'Electrochromic absorptive 6mm' (for example).
Select the Position as 4-Switchable.
The Shading Type defines the properties of the pane which is to be used in place of the standard outer
glazing pane according to the control data in the Control type.
Set the Control type together with any supplementary setpoint data.
A model using the data in the above screenshot would enter its' darkened state whenever the solar radiation
incident on the outside of the window is greater than 200 W/m2..
TROMBE WALLS
Trombe walls are passive solar devices designed for thermal storage and delivery. A Trombe wall consists of
a thick wall (150mm to 300mm) [8" to 16"] faced with a selective surface solar absorber, air gap, and high
transmissivity glass pane. Trombe walls are usually South facing (in the Northern Hemisphere) for maximum
sun exposure. An overhang above the wall is used to decrease exposure in the summer when the sun is high
in the sky and heating is not required, yet still allows for full exposure in the winter when the sun is low in the
sky and heating is desirable. In DesignBuilder, there is no Trombe wall object per se; rather, it is composed of
other standard building components. This approach provides flexibility in specifying the various wall
parameters and allows the freedom to explore unusual configurations.
To simulate the Trombe wall, a narrow zone is coupled to the desired surface via an interzone partition. The
depth of the zone corresponds to the size of the air space usually 18mm to 150mm (" to 6"). In most cases
the Trombe zone will be a sealed zone with no ventilation. The exterior wall of the Trombe zone contains a
single or double-pane window. Optimally, the window covers nearly all of the wall area and has a very high
transmissivity to allow the maximum amount of solar flux into the Trombe zone. Frames and dividers can be
defined as usual for the window. The interior wall is usually constructed of very thick masonry materials with a
solar absorber surface as the innermost layer of the wall. The absorber is a selective surface material with
very high absorptivity and very low emissivity, e.g. copper with a special black surface treatment. It is
important to make sure the Solar Distribution is set to 3-Full Interior and Exterior so that the majority of the
solar flux is directed on the absorber surface and not just on the very small area of the Trombe zone floor.
The Zone type on the Activity tab should be set to 3-Cavity at zone level in the Trombe wall cavity zone and
this causes the following further changes to be made to the model:
Suspended floors and ceilings are switched off when using Separate constructions.
The 5-Cavity Internal convection algorithm is set for Cooling design, Heating design and simulation
calculations to correctly model the air space.
The 3-Full interior and exterior Solar distribution algorithm is set for Cooling design and simulation
calculations because it allows solar radiation to be accurately distributed onto zone internal surfaces.
The default option 2-Full exterior assumes all solar radiation falls on floor which is not good for
modelling solar absorption by a Trombe wall.
Finally, an overhang should be attached to the Trombe zone to control the amount of seasonal sun exposure.
There is considerable freedom to experiment with different materials, sizes, and configurations.
- 1061 -
Passive Trombe wall

Passive Trombe walls perform without the assistance of any additional mechanical equipment. Most Trombe
walls are passive Trombe walls. They can be either sealed or naturally ventilated. For a sealed or unvented
Trombe wall, the Zone Inside Convection Algorithm should be set to 5-Cavity. This algorithm correctly
calculates the convection coefficients for a narrow sealed vertical cavity based on the ISO 15099 standard.
The EnergyPlus modeling approach for the sealed passive Trombe wall has been validated with experimental
data (Ellis 2003). For a naturally ventilated Trombe wall, there is no built-in algorithm for calculating the correct
convection coefficients on the inside of the cavity walls. One option is to use the 1-Detailed Inside convection
algorithm. This algorithm takes into account some natural convection effects but is intended for a normal sized
room.
You can define holes and vents through the Trombe wall by drawing them on at surface level. Vent openings
can be scheduled and controlled by internal temperature.
Mechanically ventilated Trombe wall

You can also model mechanically ventilated Trombe walls by using Compact HVAC and specifying the
Trombe wall cavity zone as a plenum zone.
Trombe wall example

A Trombe wall example model is provided with DesignBuilder. This is a simple 2 zone building, one occupied
zone, the other zone representing the cavity. The screen shot below of the example building shows the 2
zones and the high mass partition between them.
- 1062 -
Modelling Advice
The screenshot below shows the configuration of vents in the partition between the 2 zones allowing warm air
to move into the occupied space. The calculated natural ventilation model option has been used to allow
detailed calculation of air movement between the 2 zones.
The hourly results below are for the occupied zone and illustrate the delayed heating effect of the Trombe wall
mass on the occupied zone during the evening and also the lesser but more instantaneous heating effect of
the warm air entering through the vents during the daytime.
- 1063 -
DOUBLE SKIN FACADES

Background
A ventilated Double Skin Facade (DSF) can be defined as a traditional single facade doubled inside or outside
by a second, essentially glazed facade. Each of these two facades is commonly called a skin . A ventilated
cavity - having a width which can range from several centimetres at the narrowest to several metres for the
widest accessible cavities - is located between these two skins. In some DSF designs the ventilation of the
cavity is controllable by fans and/or openings, and other concepts where this ventilation is not controllable .
The indoor and outdoor skins are not necessarily airtight (see, for example, the "louvre" type facades).
Automated equipment, such as shading devices, motorised openings or fans, are most often integrated into
the facade. The main difference between a ventilated double facade and an airtight multiple glazing, whether
or not integrating a shading device in the cavity separating the panes, lies in the intentional and possibly
controlled ventilation of the cavity of the double facade.
The standard prEN 13119, specifies the terminology associated with curtain walls and of a double-skin
facade. These are defined as:
Curtain
walling
Double-
External building facade produced with framing made mainly of

metal, timber or PVC-U, usually consisting of vertical and
horizontal structural members, connected together and anchored
to the supporting structure of the building, which provides, by
itself or in conjunction with the building construction, all the
normal functions of an external wall, but does not contribute to
the load bearing characteristics of the building structure.
A curtain wall construction comprising an outer skin of glass and
- 1064 -
Modelling Advice
Skin
Facade
an inner wall constructed as a curtain wall that together with the

outer skin provide the full function of a wall.
This definition includes only references to the constructive and structural aspects of the facade. No reference
is made to the ventilation of the cavity. Thus formally, the term "double-skin facade" does not designate a
ventilated double facade. It is for this reason that the term Ventilated Double-Skin Facade has been
proposed as the generic term to designate these facades.
DSFs can be categorised according to the type of ventilation.
Type of
ventilation
Natural
Mechanical
Hybrid
Name of the
facade concept
Passive facade
Active facade
Interactive
facade
This table contains the commonly used names referring (only) to the type of ventilation and thus giving no
indication about the partitioning of the facade or the ventilation modes. In the literature, the double facades
adopting the air supply ventilation mode are called airflow window or also ventilated window. The facades
adopting the air exhaust ventilation mode are also called extract air or exhaust airflow.
Double Skin Facade Example

A simple example DSF model is provided with DesignBuilder (Double Skin Facade Example.dsb). A
screenshot of the model at block level is shown below.
The model was created using a single block with a partition to divide it into 2 zones, one zone to represent the
occupied space and the other for the ventilated cavity. The glazing for the partition was set up at surface level.
- 1065 -
Modelling Considerations
There are some important considerations when using DesignBuilder to model double facades. Firstly, the
Zone type on the Activity tab should be set to 3-Cavity at zone level in the cavity zone and this causes the
following further changes to be made to the model:
The 5-CavityInternal convection algorithm is set for Cooling design, Heating design and simulation
calculations to correctly model the air space.
The 3-Full interior and exterior Solar distribution algorithm is set for Cooling design and Simulation
because it allows solar radiation to be accurately transmitted through the interior glazing in the partition.
In the example model a simple ventilation control system has been defined in the cavity zone to provide 10
ac/h of outside air into the cavity when the air temperature in the cavity is greater than 24C. This helps to
ensure that the cavity does not overheat, reducing cooling loads in the occupied zone. The schedule and
setpoint could be adjusted to fine-tune the ventilation. The model assumes no transfer of cavity air into the
occupied space. This could be modified using an approach similar to that in the Trombe wall example model
where vents in the partition between occupied and cavity zones are used to transfer air between the 2 zones.
Finally, an overhang has been added to control the amount of summer sun exposure.
1.
2.
Because the model uses a zone to model the cavity in the double facade, the inner glazing is 'interior'
and so requires the Full interior and exterior solar distribution option to allow solar radiation to pass
through exterior and then through interior windows. You should read the information about the
restrictions associated with this option before using it.
Take care when comparing the exterior solar radiation transmitted into the double facade zone with the
interior solar radiation transmitted into the occupied zone. These do not include the re-reflection of solar
back out of the external windows. Read the definitions for the output data.
Source of background information on DSF:

http://www.bbri.be/activefacades/new/content/1_home/en.html
AUTOSIZING HEATING AND COOLING EQUIPMENT

The Heating Capacity and Cooling Capacity Model Data is found on the HVAC tab at zone level.
If the Plant sizing building model option is set to 4-Autosize when not set these heating and cooling
capacities can be automatically calculated by the software.
Note: if you change heating or cooling capacities by hand you should be aware that the data will be
overwritten if Model Options change.
To keep the heating and cooling capacities fixed, change the Plant sizing model option to 2-Manual. You may
choose to use this option if you are already satisfied with the autosized capacities and wish to keep them as
they are regardless of future changes to the model.
Compact HVAC Autosizing

Winter and summer design day simulations are automatically carried out as required for autosizing heating
and cooling equipment prior to a Compact HVAC simulation. There are some considerations you should be
aware of regarding autosizing.
1.
2.
3.
4.
Internal gains should normally be excluded from Winter design day calculations.
You therefore shouldn't use the same schedule for equipment, occupancy and HVAC operation
because equipment and occupancy should be off for heating autosizing and HVAC should be on.
Typical workday gives the easiest route to defining autosizing operation - the appropriate Winter Design
Day schedule data settings are used.
Summer design day schedules are normally the same as the general ones so are easier to deal with.
- 1066 -
Modelling Advice
5.
6.
7.
If you are using Compact schedules then you should ensure that a specific line of WinterDesignDay
data is included for all schedule periods.
If you are using 7/12 Schedules then there are 2 options: End-use defaults and Profiles.
You can include intermittent operation by using a time-varying Heating demand or HVAC schedule.
This would normally provide heating equipment sizes with higher capacity than a steady-state
calculation where the heating is on all day.
DAYLIGHT SAVING AND LOCAL TIME

DesignBuilder allows you to model the effect of daylight saving time where the clocks are moved forward one
hour in the summer months in most non-equatorial countries. The timing of this is handled automatically using
DesignBuilders' time zones database when you load data from one of the Location templates supplied with
the program.
You can set the Time zone at the Site level on the Location tab:
There are however some factors you should be aware of:
Simulation results are displayed in 'local mean time'. This means that during the summer, occupancy
will appear to start 1 hour earlier in the day than it does in the winter. To help you pinpoint this,
DesignBuilder prints the times when daylight saving starts and ends on the graph.
Visualisations use local mean time when setting the position of the sun for site shading analysis. Again
you should add 1 hour to the time to see shading for local time.
SOLAR RADIATION DISTRIBUTION

This topic summarises the methods used in calculation of solar radiation in EnergyPlus.
Sky Radiance Model

In EnergyPlus the calculation of diffuse solar radiation from the sky incident on an exterior surface takes into
account the anisotropic (non-uniform) radiance distribution of the sky. For this distribution, the diffuse sky
irradiance on a surface is given by:
AnisoSkyMult * DifSolarRad
where:
DifSolarRad is the diffuse solar irradiance from the sky on the ground and AnisoSkyMult is determined by
surface orientation and sky radiance distribution, and accounts for the effects of shading of sky diffuse
radiation by shadowing surfaces such as overhangs. It does not account for reflection of sky diffuse radiation
from shadowing surfaces.
The sky radiance distribution is based on an empirical model based on radiance measurements of real skies,
as described in Perez et al., 1990. In this model the radiance of the sky is determined by three distributions
that are superimposed (see Figure 33)
1.
2.
3.
An isotropic distribution that covers the entire sky dome;

A circumsolar brightening centered at the position of the sun;
A horizon brightening.
- 1067 -
Schematic view of sky showing solar radiance distribution as a superposition of three components: dome with
isotropic radiance, circumsolar brightening represented as a point source at the sun, and horizon brightening
represented as a line source at the horizon.
The proportions of these distributions depend on the sky condition, which is characterized by two quantities,
clearness factor and brightness factor, defined below, which are determined from sun position and solar
quantities from the weather file.
The circumsolar brightening is assumed to be concentrated at a point source at the center of the sun
although this region actually begins at the periphery of the solar disk and falls off in intensity with increasing
angular distance from the periphery.
The horizon brightening is assumed to be a linear source at the horizon and to be independent of azimuth.
In reality, for clear skies, the horizon brightening is highest at the horizon and decreases in intensity away
from the horizon. For overcast skies the horizon brightening has a negative value since for such skies the sky
radiance increases rather than decreases away from the horizon.
Shadowing of Sky Long-Wave Radiation

EnergyPlus calculates the sky long-wave radiation incident on exterior surfaces assuming that the sky longwave radiance distribution is isotropic. If obstructions such as overhangs are present the sky long-wave
incident on a surface is multiplied by an isotropic shading factor. The long-wave radiation from these
obstructions is added to the long-wave radiation from the ground; in this calculation both obstructions and
ground are assumed to be at the outside air temperature and to have an emissivity of 0.9.
Solar Gains
The total solar gain on any exterior surface is a combination of the absorption of direct and diffuse solar
radiation given by
where:
a =solar absorptance of the surface
A =angle of incidence of the sun's rays
S =area of the surface
Ss = sunlit area
Ib =intensity of beam (direct) radiation
Is =intensity of sky diffuse radiation
Ig =intensity of ground reflected diffuse radiation
Fss = angle factor between the surface and the sky
Fsg = angle factor between the surface and the ground
If the surface is shaded the program modifies Fss by a correction factor that takes into account the radiance
distribution of the sky (see Shadowing of Sky Diffuse Solar Radiation). Shading of ground diffuse solar
- 1068 -
Modelling Advice
radiation is not calculated by the program. It is up to the user to estimate the effect of this shading and modify
the input value of Fsg accordingly.
Solar Distribution
As discussed in the Solar Model options section, the Solar Distribution determines how EnergyPlus will treat
beam solar radiation entering a zone through exterior windows. The three choices: 1-Minimal shadowing, 2Full exterior and
3-Full Interior and exterior are discussed in the Solar options topic.
EnergyPlus calculates the distribution of short-wave radiation in the interior of each thermal zone. This
radiation consists of beam solar radiation, diffuse solar radiation, and short-wave radiation from electric lights.
The program determines the amount of this radiation that is (1) absorbed on the inside face of opaque
surfaces, (2) absorbed in the glass and shading device layers of the zones exterior and interior windows, (3)
transmitted through the zones interior windows to adjacent zones, and (4) transmitted back out of the exterior
windows. The effects of movable shading devices on the exterior windows are taken into account.
Initial Distribution of Diffuse Solar Transmitted through Exterior and

Interior Windows
The treatment of diffuse solar transmitted first through exterior windows and subsequently through interior
windows has been improved. Diffuse solar (from sky and ground sources) transmitted through exterior
windows is first distributed to the interior heat transfer surfaces in the zone containing the exterior windows.
This initial distribution apportions the transmitted diffuse solar to interior surfaces using the approximate view
factors described above in LW Radiation Exchange Among Zone Surfaces. The amount of this initially
distributed diffuse solar absorbed by each interior surface, and each window material layer, is calculated and
later added to the short-wave radiation absorbed values described below. The amount of this initially
distributed diffuse solar that is reflected is accumulated for each zone and redistributed uniformly to the other
surfaces. The amount of this initially distributed diffuse solar that is transmitted by interior windows to adjacent
zones is initially distributed to the interior heat transfer surfaces in the adjacent zone in the same manner as
just described.
This new treatment of diffuse solar is intended to more accurately account for the initial absorption,
transmittance, and reflection of short-wave radiation prior to the uniform distribution as described in the
Engineering reference.
Ground surface reflectance

Ground reflectance values are used to calculate the ground reflected solar amount. This fractional amount
(entered monthly) is used in the following equation:
GroundReflectedSolar = (BeamSolar x COS(SunZenithAngle) + DiffuseSolar) x GroundReflectance
The Ground Reflected Solar is never allowed to be negative. The Snow Ground Reflectance Modifier can
further modify the ground reflectance when snow is on the ground. If the user enters 0.0 for each month, no
ground reflected solar is used.
Ground Reflectances (Snow)

When snow is on the ground, ground reflectances may change. The user can specify two values, Snow
reflected solar modifier and Snow reflected daylight modifier.
Snow reflected solar modifier

on the ground. Note that the value of GroundReflectanceUsed (below) must be <=1.
GroundReflectanceUsed = GroundReflectance x ModifierSnow
- 1069 -
Snow reflected daylight modifier

on the ground. Note that the value of DaylightingGroundReflectance Used (below) must be <=1.
DaylightingGroundReflectanceUsed = GroundReflectance x ModifierSnow
Beam distribution
If the Solar Distribution option is Minimal shadowing or Full exterior, it is assumed that all beam solar from
exterior windows falls on the floor. If Solar Distribution is Full Interior and Exterior the program tracks where
beam solar from exterior windows falls inside the zone, and wall as well as floor surfaces can receive beam
radiation.
Diffuse distribution
Diffuse solar transmitted through exterior and interior windows is distributed according to the approximate
view factors between the transmitting window and all other heat transfer surfaces in the zone. This variable is
the amount of transmitted diffuse solar that is initially absorbed on the inside of each heat transfer surface.
The portion of this diffuse solar that is reflected by all surfaces in the zone is subsequently redistributed
uniformly to all heat transfer surfaces in the zone, along with interior reflected beam solar and shortwave
radiation from lights. The total absorbed shortwave radiation is given by the next variable.
Solar radiation reflected from exterior surfaces

EnergyPlus has an option to calculate beam and sky solar radiation that is reflected from exterior surfaces and
then strikes the building. For zones with detailed daylighting, these reflections are also considered in the
daylight illuminance calculations. The reflecting surfaces fall into three categories:
1.
2.
3.
Shadowing surfaces. These are surfaces like overhangs, component blocks or surfaces of the
building Examples are shown in Solar Options. These surfaces can have diffuse and/or specular
(beam-to-beam) reflectance values that are specified with the based on the material surface properties.
Exterior building surfaces. In this case one section of the building reflects solar radiation onto
another section (and vice-versa). See Figure 47. Opaque building surfaces (walls, for example) are
assumed to be diffusely reflecting. Windows and glass doors are assumed to be specularly reflecting.
The reflectance values for opaque surfaces are calculated by the program from the Absorptance:Solar
and Absorptance:Visible values of the outer material layer of the surfaces construction. The reflectance
values for windows and glass doors are calculated by the program from the reflectance properties of
the individual glass layers that make up surfaces construction assuming no shading device is present
and taking into account interreflections among the layers.
The ground surface. Beam solar and sky solar reflection from the ground is calculated even if the
Reflections option is not used (the default). But in this case the ground plane is considered
- 1070 -
Modelling Advice
unobstructed, i.e., the shadowing of the ground by the building itself or by obstructions such as
component blocks is ignored. This shadowing is taken into account only if the Reflections option is
used. In this case the ground view factor calculated by DesignBuilder is not used.
See Solar Options,
Diffuse reflection of beam solar and sky solar radiation

A ray-tracing method is used to calculate beam solar and sky solar radiation that is diffusely reflected onto
each of a buildings exterior surfaces (walls, roofs, windows and doors), called here "receiving surfaces". The
calculation begins by generating a set of rays proceeding into the outward hemisphere at each receiving point
on a receiving surface. Then it determines whether each ray hits the sky, ground or an obstruction. The
radiance at the hit point from reflection of incident beam or sky solar is determined and the contribution of this
radiance to the receiving surface is calculated, added to the contribution from other hit points, and averaged
over the receiving points. Separate calculations are done for beam-to-diffuse and sky solar reflection from all
obstructions and beam-to-diffuse and sky solar reflection from the ground. (For beam-to-beam reflection see
Beam solar radiation specularly reflected from obstructions below.)
Rays
A total of 90 rays are sent out into the exterior hemisphere surrounding each receiving point. An upgoing ray
may hit an obstruction or the sky. A downgoing ray may hit an obstruction or the ground. See diagram below.
Two-dimensional schematic showing rays going outward from a point on a receiving surface. Rays 1-6 hit the
ground, rays 7-11 hit an obstruction, and rays 12-15 hit the sky.
Sky Solar Radiation Diffusely Reflected from the Ground

If a downgoing ray from a receiving point hits the ground (for example, rays 1-6 in diagram below), the
program calculates the radiance at the ground hit point due to sky diffuse solar reaching that point. To do this,
rays are sent upward from the ground hit point and it is determined which of these rays are unobstructed and
so go to the sky (for example, rays 6-10 below). For this calculation it is assumed that the radiance of the sky
is uniform.
- 1071 -
Two-dimensional schematic showing rays going upward from a ground hit point.
Beam Solar Radiation Specularly Reflected from Obstructions

The diagram below shows schematically how specular (beam-to-beam) reflection from an obstruction is
calculated.
Two-dimensional schematic showing specular reflection from an obstruction such as the glazed faade of a
neighboring building. The receiving point receives specularly reflected beam solar radiation if (1) DB passes
through specularly reflecting surface EF, (2) CD does not hit any obstructions (such as RS), and (3) AC does
not hit any obstructions (such as PQ).
More detailed information on can be found in the EnergyPlus EngineeringReference.pdf document.
- 1072 -
Modelling Advice
WAREHOUSE WITH OFFICE

Sometimes it is necessary to create a smaller zone such as an office within a larger zone (e.g. a large
warehouse space). This tutorial explains how to set up a simple 2 zone model such as that illustrated in the
screenshots below where a small office is located in bottom corner of a larger warehouse space.
- 1073 -
The process described below is also illustrated in the Office in Warehouse Tutorial
- 1074 -
Modelling Advice
The steps involved are:

1. Draw the ground floor block including both office and warehouse. The block should be the height of the
office space as the top of the block will form the ceiling of the office.
2. Draw the 1st floor block representing the high-level warehouse space.
3. Draw a hole in the floor of the 1st floor block to connect the upper and lower warehouse zones together.
The upper warehouse zone should look something like the screenshot below. The green line shows the
perimeter of the hole.
4. Select the Merge zones connected by holes model option to merge the upper and lower parts of the
warehouse into a single zone.
- 1075 -
5. The 'floor' on top of the office zone is not usable floor area so go to this floor surface and select the
Exclude this surface from total zone floor area option. This indicates that the surface is not part of the
building useable floor area. This step ensures that this floor area is not counted in the floor area provided to
certification tools such as SBEM. This step is not currently required for EnergyPlus simulations.
Note: if the excluded floor surface contains some external adjacencies as well as internal ones these external
areas will not be subtracted from the zone floor area.
So the building now consists of 2 zones - an Office and a Warehouse zone. This model is available as one of
the DesignBuilder example templates.
START UP AND PRE-CONDITIONING

Start up (Warmup in EnergyPlus terminology or pre-conditioning) is the process of repeatedly simulating the
first day before the simulation proper starts to ensure that the temperatures in the building fabric are realistic.
Warmup continues until temperatures and heat flows in each zone have converged. If convergence does not

the simulation had started on a different day. In cases where this may be an issue, it may be worth making
sure that simulations start on an occupied day rather than over a weekend or holiday.
Energy Management System (EMS)

Beta test feature
Although EnergyPlus provides an encyclopaedic range of modelling capabilities, every project is different and
some may require special simulation functionality not provided in the standard engine. The EMS provides
custom control and modelling routines to override selected aspects of EnergyPlus behaviour. A simple
- 1076 -
programming language called EnergyPlus Runtime Language (Erl) is used to describe the control algorithms.
EnergyPlus interprets and executes the Erl program as the model is being run. Thus the EMS provides a
powerful way to extend the capability of EnergyPlus without the need to become an expert in programming
the EnergyPlus source code.
This help on the DesignBuilder EMS is intended to be read together with the main EnergyPlus EMS
application guide which provides most of the information required to understand how to use EMS with
detailed descriptions and examples.
Introduction
The Energy Management System (EMS) is one of the high-level control methods available in EnergyPlus. An
EMS is able to access a wide variety of sensor data and use this data to direct various types of control
actions. The original concept was to emulate, inside EnergyPlus, the types of controls possible with the digital
energy management systems used in real buildings. However there are many other application for the EMS
including:
Obtain more precise control over simulated behaviour for HVAC systems, glazing, lighting etc (e.g.
override default EnergyPlus control linkage between economisers and heat recovery).
Linking one system with another (e.g. link earth tube to HVAC inlet).
Provide special outputs not provided natively by EnergyPlus (e.g. generate CIBSE TM52 outputs).
Researching new building systems.
The EMS allows the functionality of many of the existing high-level control objects to be overriden. For
example the EMS can:
Turn on and off pumps and fans and adjust their performance characteristics.
Turn on and off lights and electric equipment,
Change the set points on zone thermostats,
Dispatch on-site generation.
Change the set points on system nodes.
Turn on and off supply-side heating, cooling, and heat rejection equipment such as boilers, chillers,
cooling towers.
Turn on and off on-site generation equipment.
The EMS uses the concept of sensors to obtain information from elsewhere in the model for use in control
calculations. Actuators are the mechanism for influencing changes on the model and code is written to tell
the Erl processor how to apply the control laws.
Sensor objects are used to declare Erl variables which are linked to EnergyPlus output variables or meters.
Actuators map Erl variables to control actuators elsewhere in EnergyPlus. The EMS then initiates control
actions by changing the value of this variable inside an Erl program.
- 1077 -
The way it works is probably best understood by studying working EMS scripts such as those provided by
DesignBuilder alongside this documentation and that in the EnergyPlus EMS application guide.
Note: EMS is an advanced feature of EnergyPlus and is not for beginners. To use it you will need to be
comfortable writing your own custom code and have a thorough understanding of how you want your models
to behave. If you are intimidated by the idea of writing programs to adjust the fine details of how an
EnergyPlus model runs then EMS is probably not for you. However, if you relish the idea of being able to write
code to override default behaviour, you will find that EMS can help you model many features to your exact
specification, significantly extending EnergyPlus' normal range of capabilities.
DesignBuilder Extensions
DesignBuilder includes some important extensions to the standard EnergyPlus EMS and Erl system allowing
DB EMS programs to reused and shared:
Portable Erl scripts

Zone loops mean that zones don't have to be referenced by name in Erl scripts.
All available actuators, sensors, internal variables and program entry points can be selected from lists.
Connection between the script and the model, e.g. attribute settings from the model can be inserted in
the script or used to control whether the script is written or not.
Using EMS
The DesignBuilder EMS functionality can be accessed from the Tools > EMS and FMU menu option which
opens the External Interface Program Manager dialog.
Previously created EMS programs are listed on the data panel to the right. These can be selected, copied,
deleted and edited:
Two steps are required to enable an EMS program:

1.
The Use EMS checkbox on the External Interface Program dialog must be checked.
- 1078 -
2.
The Enable program checkbox on the Edit EMS Program dialog must be checked.
Note: Selecting an EMS program on the External Interface Program dialog is not enough to ensure its script
is included in the simulation - the Enable program checkbox is the important setting.
DB Erl scripts are defined on the EMS Program edit dialog which provides utilities for quickly adding template
script for new sensors, actuators, internal variables and programs.
Support
It is possible to write quite complex EMS programs and there is plenty of scope for making mistakes, which
can take time to track down and fix.
Please be aware that the DesignBuilder Support Desk is not generally able to offer a service for debugging or
advising on the possible cause of errors in EMS programs.
The EnergyPlus EMS application guide provides a section on debugging EMS programs which is a good
starting point for tracking down problems.
EMS PROGRAM DIALOG

Beta test feature
The EMS Program dialog is where an individual EMS program is edited and the DB Erl code written.
Erl syntax is described in the main EMS application guide.

DesignBuilder provides utilities to make it easy to add Erl code for sensors, variables, internal variables and
programs. The sections below explain how to do this.
Add New Program

To add a new program click on the Add EMS program link in the info panel. This causes the EMS Utility
dialog to be opened allowing you to select from a list of predefined program entry points.
- 1079 -
When you press the OK button Program code is inserted into the script at the cursor.
Add New Sensor

To add code for a new sensor click on the Add Sensor, Actuator or Internal Variable, link in the info panel.
This causes the EMS Utility dialog to be opened allowing you to select from a list of sensors based on the
actual model.
At the point the dialog is opened DesignBuilder asks you if you would like to update the list of available
sensors by automatically running a preliminary simulation to generate an edd file with a list of all available
sensors for the current model.
Select the Sensor Variable type and the choose one of the sensors listed in the right hand data panel.
When you press the OK button Erl code for the sensor is inserted into the script at the cursor position.
- 1080 -
Add New Actuator

This causes the EMS Utility dialog to be opened allowing you to select from a list of actuators based on the
actual model.
Select the Actuator Variable type and the choose one of the actuators listed in the right hand data panel.
When you press the OK button Erl code for the actuator is inserted into the script at the cursor position.
Add New Internal Variable

This causes the EMS Utility dialog to be opened allowing you to select from a list of internal variables based
on the actual model.
- 1081 -
Select the Internal variable Variable type and choose one of the built-in variables listed in the right-hand data
panel.
When you press the OK button Erl code for the internal variable is inserted into the script at the cursor
position.
DESIGNBUILDER ERL
Beta test feature
DesignBuilder provides access to the full EnergyPlus Runtime Language (Erl) which is described in detail in
the EMS application guide. You can enter Erl script to modify your simulations on the EMS Program dialog.
This page describes a powerful set of extensions to Erl which allow code to be made portable between
models. Zone loops, if blocks and site, building and zone attributes offer ways to reference the model data
without referring to zones by name in the Erl scripts.
The combined Erl plus DB extensions language is referred to as DB Erl in the documentation.
Note: Erl is case sensitive.
Zone loops
In models having more than one zone it is usually more convenient to write code using Zone loop statements.
These have the general format:
<ForAllZones>,
IF <LoopZoneVariableName>_DeltaT < 0 ,
SET <LoopZoneVariableName>_DeltaT = 0,
ENDIF,
<LoopNextZone>,
- 1082 -
When code is written in this way it becomes easier to manage, especially in models having more than a
handful of zones or where the code is to made portable for use in any model.
A summary of all the zone loop-related statements is given in the table below.
DB Erl statement
<ForAllZones>
<ForAllOccupiedZones>
<ForAllUnoccupiedZones>
Description
Loop through all zones in the current building.
Loop through all occupied zones in the current building.
Loop through all unoccupied zones in the current building.
Loop through all zones in the current building that do not have the
<ForAllOccupiedNonCooledZones>
Cooled checkbox on the HVAC tab checked.
Loop through all occupied zones in the current building that have the
<ForAllOccupiedCooledZones>
Cooled checkbox on the HVAC tab checked.
Loop through all occupied zones in the current building that have the
<ForAllOccupiedHeatedZones>
Heated checkbox on the HVAC tab checked.
Loop through all occupied zones in the current building that do not
<ForAllOccupiedNonHeatedZones>
have the Heated checkbox on the HVAC tab checked.
<LoopNextZone>
End of the zone loop.
Replace <LoopZoneIDFName> with the IDF zone name of the current
<LoopZoneIDFName>
zone in the loop.
Replace <LoopZoneVariableName> with the IDF zone name of the
current zone in the loop modified to be a legal Erl variable name.
<LoopZoneVariableName>
LoopZoneVariableName are the same as LoopZoneIDFName but with
characters ":" and "." replaced by "_".
Replace <Any_Occupied_ZoneIDFName> with the IDF zone name
<Any_Occupied_ZoneIDFName>
of any occupied zone in the model.
Look up and replace with current loop zone attribute. E.g.
<LoopZoneAttribute
<LoopZoneAttribute OccupancySchedule> might be replaced with
AttributeName>
Office_Open_off. See full list of valid attribute names below.
Occupied zones are the zones where number of occupants are > 0 and Zone type is 1-Standard.
Include/exclude blocks of code

When the DB Erl pre-processor encounters an <If...> directive, followed eventually by an <Endif> directive, it
will include the code between the <If...> and the <Endif> only if the boolean expression following <If ...
evaluates to True. Otherwise the block of code is not passed through to EnergyPlus.
DB Erl statement
Description
Where Boolean expression is an expression evaluating to True or False. E.g.
<If BuildingAttribute HourlyOutput = 1 Then>
Erl statements for hourly output
<Endif>
Boolean expression must be in the form:
<If Boolean expression

Then>
SiteAttribute, BuildingAttribute or LoopZoneAttribute followed by,

Attribute name followed by,
an operator which must be one of "=, <>, >, <, >=, <=, followed by,
Test value. Note for numbered list items, only the number part of should
be tested for. e.g.:
This is correct:
<If LoopZoneAttribute MechanicalVentilationRateType = 2 Then>,
This is incorrect:
<If LoopZoneAttribute MechanicalVentilationRateType = 2-Min Fresh Air (Per
Person)
- 1083 -
<Endif>
marks the end of the block of text to be included/excluded.
List of Valid Attribute Names

Full list of available site, building and zone attribute names
TariffIncluded
TariffCount
TariffId1
TariffId2
TariffId3
TariffId4
TariffId5
ComponentCostIncluded
ComponentCostSettings
LifeCycleCostIncluded
LifeCycleCostSettings
ConstructionTemplateId
Insulation
ThermalMass
Title
WallConstr
WallBelowGradeConstr
CombinedFlatRoofConstr
FlatRoofConstr
PitchedRoofConstr
UnoccupiedPitchedRoofConstr
InternalWallConstr
SemiExposedWallConstr
CombinedSemiExposedRoofConstr
CombinedSemiExposedFloorConstr
CeilingsOn
CeilingSuspension
CeilingConstr
CombinedGroundFloorConstr
BasementGroundFloorConstr
CombinedExternalFloorConstr
CombinedInternalFloorConstr
ExternalFloorConstr
GroundSlabConstr
FloorSlabConstr
FloorsOn
FloorSuspension
FloorConstr
RoofspaceFloorConstr
RTPontThermIntermediaire
RTTIntRefendTrav
RTPTIntPsiRefendTrav
RTPTIntLongRefendTrav
RTTIntRefendBas
RTPTIntPsiRefendBas
RTPTIntLongRefendBas
RTTIntRefendHaut
RTPTIntPsiRefendHaut
RTPTIntLongRefendHaut
RTTIntPoutre
RTPTIntPsiPoutre
RTPTIntLongPoutre
SubSurfaceConstr
- 1084 -
InternalSubSurfaceConstr
RoofSubSurfaceConstr
ExternalDoorConstr
InternalDoorConstr
HasSolarCollector
SBEMSolarCollector
SBEMSolarCollectorArea
SBEMSolarCollectorPerc
ThermalMassConstr
ThermalMassArea
ZoneCapacitanceMultiplier
RTTypeInertie
RTTypeInertieSeq
RTCmsSurf
ComponentBlockType
SolarCollectorType
SolarCollectorCost
PVPerformanceType
PVPerformanceModelSimple
PVPerformanceModelOneDiode
PVHeatTeansferIntegrationMode
PVModulesInSeries
PVStringsInParallel
ComponentBlockShades
ComponentMaterial
ComponentMaxTransmittance
ComponentTransmittanceSchedule
SBEMPVSOn
SBEMPVSMultiplier
SBEMPVSUseAreaType
SBEMPVSArea
SBEMPVSWattPeakType
SBEMPVSUseKWPeak
SBEMPVSKWPeak
SBEMPVSOrientation
SBEMPVSInclination
SBEMPVSOvershadeType
SBEMPVSVentStrategy
RTVegetationSurMasque
RTUsageVegetation
RTDebutVegetation
RTDebutVegetationJour
RTDebutVegetationMois
RTFinVegetation
RTFinVegetationJour
RTFinVegetationMois
CFDInternalSurfaceTemperature
CFDExternalSurfaceTemperature
CFDExternalWindowTemperature
CFDAverageZoneAirTemperature
CFDOpeningAdjacentTemperature
CFDOpeningFlowIn
CFDOpeningFlowOut
CFDOpeningAperturePosition
CFDOpeningPercAperture
CFDBoundaryType
CFDBoundaryTemperature
CFDBoundaryFlowRate
CFDBoundaryXDirectionDischargeAngle
CFDBoundaryYDirectionDischargeAngle
- 1085 -
CFDBoundaryMultiWayDiffuserDischargeAngle
CFDBoundaryTwoWayDiffuserDischargeDirection
CFDBoundaryMinimumDischargeVelocity
CFDBoundaryActualVelocity
CFDBoundaryFlux
CFDBoundaryH2OMassFraction
CFDBoundaryCO2MassFraction
CFDVentElementDimensionOrthoSurfaces
CFDVentElementDimensionNonOrthoSurfaces
CFDComponentBlockFlowRate
CFDComponentBlockFlowDirection
CFDComponentBlockThermalBoundary
CFDComponentBlockTemperature
CFDComponentBlockFlux
CFDComponentBlockMass
CFDSolidCellOverlapTolerance
HLIncludeUnoccupiedZones
HLSaveSurfaceOP
HLSaveOpeningOP
HGIncludeUnoccupiedZones
HGSaveSurfaceOP
HGSaveOpeningOP
IDFName
SSEPObjectNameInOP
SSEPObjectAreaInOP
SSEPObjectIDCInOP
SSIncludeUnoccupiedZones
SSBuildingStoreyPerimeterBlockOP
SSSurfaceOP
SSTemperatureOP
SSGainsOP
SSEnergyOP
SSLatentOP
SSFreshAirOP
SSTemperatureDistributionOP
SSSaveSurfaceOP
SSSaveOpeningOP
SSIntSurfaceTempOP
SSExtSurfaceTempOP
SSIntConvectionCoeffOP
SSExtConvectionCoeffOP
SSSurfaceGainOP
SSSolarIncidentOP
SSSolarTransOP
SSExtSunlitFractionOP
SSAirflowInOP
SSAirflowOutOP
SSComfortHead
SSFangerComfortOP
SSPierceComfortOP
SSKSUComfortOP
SSAdaptiveASH55ComfortOP
SSAdaptiveCEN15251ComfortOP
SSCIBSETM52ComfortOP
SSSimpleASH55ComfortOP
OutputSummaryHeadSS
SSSummaryOutputUnits
AllSummary
AllSummaryAndMonthly
LEEDSummary
- 1086 -
AnnualBuildingUtilityPerformanceSummary
DemandEndUseComponentsSummary
SensibleHeatGainSummary
InputVerificationandResultsSummary
ClimaticDataSummary
EquipmentSummary
EnvelopeSummary
SurfaceShadowingSummary
ShadingSummary
LightingSummary
HVACSizingSummary
SystemSummary
ComponentSizingSummary
OutdoorAirSummary
ObjectCountSummary
ComponentCostEconomicsSummary
OutputMonthlyHeadSS
AllMonthly
ZoneCoolingSummaryMonthly
ZoneHeatingSummaryMonthly
ZoneElectricSummaryMonthly
SpaceGainsMonthly
PeakSpaceGainsMonthly
SpaceGainComponentsAtCoolingPeakMonthly
EnergyConsumptionElectricityNaturalGasMonthly
EnergyConsumptionElectricityGeneratedPropaneMonthly
EnergyConsumptionDieselFuelOilMonthly
EnergyConsumptionDistrictHeatingCoolingMonthly
EnergyConsumptionCoalGasolineMonthly
EndUseEnergyConsumptionElectricityMonthly
EndUseEnergyConsumptionNaturalGasMonthly
EndUseEnergyConsumptionDieselMonthly
EndUseEnergyConsumptionFuelOilMonthly
EndUseEnergyConsumptionCoalMonthly
EndUseEnergyConsumptionPropaneMonthly
EndUseEnergyConsumptionGasolineMonthly
PeakEnergyEndUseElectricityPart1Monthly
PeakEnergyEndUseElectricityPart2Monthly
ElectricComponentsOfPeakDemandMonthly
PeakEnergyEndUseNaturalGasMonthly
PeakEnergyEndUseDieselMonthly
PeakEnergyEndUseFuelOilMonthly
PeakEnergyEndUseCoalMonthly
PeakEnergyEndUsePropaneMonthly
PeakEnergyEndUseGasolineMonthly
SetpointsNotMetWithTemperaturesMonthly
ComfortReportSimple55Monthly
UnglazedTranspiredSolarCollectorSummaryMonthly
OccupantComfortDataSummaryMonthly
ChillerReportMonthly
TowerReportMonthly
BoilerReportMonthly
DXReportMonthly
WindowReportMonthly
WindowEnergyReportMonthly
WindowZoneSummaryMonthly
WindowEnergyZoneSummaryMonthly
AverageOutdoorConditionsMonthly
OutdoorConditionsMaximumDryBulbMonthly
OutdoorConditionsMinimumDryBulbMonthly
- 1087 -
OutdoorConditionsMaximumWetBulbMonthly
OutdoorConditionsMaximumDewPointMonthly
OutdoorGroundConditionsMonthly
WindowACReportMonthly
WaterHeaterReportMonthly
GeneratorReportMonthly
DaylightingReportMonthly
CoilReportMonthly
PlantLoopDemandReportMonthly
FanReportMonthly
PumpReportMonthly
CondLoopDemandReportMonthly
ZoneTemperatureOscillationReportMonthly
AirLoopSystemEnergyAndWaterUseMonthly
AirLoopSystemComponentLoadsMonthly
AirLoopSystemComponentEnergyUseMonthly
MechanicalVentilationLoadsMonthly
OutputDaylightHeadSS
SSDaylightingMapOP
SSDaylightingMapOPGridPoints
SSDaylightReferencePointsOP
SSSystemTemperatures
SSSystemMassFlowRates
SSSystemHumidityRatios
SSSQLiteOP
SSDXFOP
SSConstructionsOP
SSRDDOP
AdjacentCondition
SBEMIsStronglyVentilated
IsExcludedFromZoneFloorArea
GeometryConventionTemplateId
ZoneSurfaceAreaCalculationMethod
ZoneVolumeCalculationMethod
ZoneFloorAreaCalculationMethod
FixedExternalWallThickness
ExternalWallThickness
FixedExternalWallBelowGradeThickness
ExternalWallBelowGradeThickness
FixedPartitionThickness
PartitionThickness
FixedGroundFloorThickness
GroundFloorThickness
FixedBasementGroundFloorThickness
BasementGroundFloorThickness
FixedExternalFloorThickness
ExternalFloorThickness
FixedInternalFloorThickness
InternalFloorThickness
FixedSemiExposedWallThickness
SemiExposedWallThickness
FixedSemiExposedFloorThickness
SemiExposedFloorThickness
FixedCeilingThickness
CeilingThickness
FixedSemiExposedRoofThickness
SemiExposedRoofThickness
FixedFlatRoofThickness
FlatRoofThickness
FixedPitchedRoofThickness
- 1088 -
PitchedRoofThickness
CeilingVoidDepth
FloorVoidDepth
HLEPInsideConvectionAlgo
HLEPOutsideConvectionAlgo
HGEPInsideConvectionAlgo
HGEPOutsideConvectionAlgo
SSEPInsideConvectionAlgo
SSEPOutsideConvectionAlgo
SBEMSpecifyPsi
JunctRoofWallMC
JunctWallGrndMC
JunctWallWallMC
JunctWallFlrMC
JunctLintelMC
JunctSillMC
JunctJambMC
JunctRoofWall
JunctWallGrnd
JunctWallWall
JunctWallFlr
JunctLintel
JunctSill
JunctJamb
L5PsiAcc
L5SpecifyPsi
L5JunctRoofWallMC
L5JunctWallGrndMC
L5JunctWallWallMC
L5JunctWallFlrMC
L5JunctLintelMC
L5JunctSillMC
L5JunctJambMC
L5JunctRoofWall
L5JunctWallGrnd
L5JunctWallWall
L5JunctWallFlr
L5JunctLintel
L5JunctSill
L5JunctJamb
RTIsDetailCalcul
RTJustifArt19b
RTJunctRoofWall
RTPTLongueurRoofWall
RTPTSflCRoofWall
RTPTSflERoofWall
RTJunctWallGrnd
RTPTLongueurWallGrnd
RTPTSflCWallGrnd
RTPTSflEWallGrnd
RTJunctPbEntMur
RTPTLongueurPbEntMur
RTPTSflCPbEntMur
RTPTSflEPbEntMur
RTJunctWallWall
RTPTLongueurWallWall
RTPTSflCWallWall
RTPTSflEWallWall
RTJunctWallFlr
RTPTLongueurWallFlr
- 1089 -
RTPTSflCWallFlr
RTPTSflEWallFlr
RTJunctWallPartition
RTPTLongueurWallPartition
RTPTSflCWallPartition
RTPTSflEWallPartition
RTJunctFloorPartition
RTPTLongueurFloorPartition
RTPTSflCFloorPartition
RTPTSflEFloorPartition
RTJunctRoofPartition
RTPTLongueurRoofPartition
RTPTSflCRoofPartition
RTPTSflERoofPartition
RTJunctMurDebord
RTPTLongueurMurDebord
RTPTSflCMurDebord
RTPTSflEMurDebord
RTJunctLintel
RTPTLongueurLintel
RTPTSflCLintel
RTPTSflELintel
RTJunctSill
RTPTLongueurSill
RTPTSflCSill
RTPTSflESill
RTJunctJamb
RTPTLongueurJamb
RTPTSflCJamb
RTPTSflEJamb
InfiltrationOn
InfiltrationValue
UKNCMQ50INF
RTStatutQ4PaSurf
InfiltrationValueI4
InfiltrationValuen50
InfiltrationSchedule
InfiltrationConstantTermCoef
InfiltrationTempTermCoef
InfiltrationVelocityTermCoef
InfiltrationVelocitySquareTermCoef
SealingQuality
CrackTemplate
SubStructureCostPerFloorArea
FrameType
CostInternalWallSurfaceFinish
CostFloorFinish
CostCeilingFinish
GlazingTemplateId
RTGestionOuvertureFenetre
RTDebitVentNat
RTQvBase
RTQvPointe
RTQvInocc
RTQvOcc
RTVentNatDepuisET
RTIdEtAeration
RTGestOuvertureFenetre
RTModeGestionHiver
RTModeGestionMiSaison
- 1090 -
RTModeGestionEte
RTModeGestionEteClimatise
RTModeGestionCalculTic
RTValeurDeclareeDefaut
RTDeltaThetaOp1Aut
RTSaisonChauffeDeltaThetaOp1
RTMiSaisonDeltaThetaOp1
RTSaisonRefroidDeltaThetaOp1
RTCalculTicDeltaThetaOp1
RTDeltaThetaOp2Aut
RTSaisonChauffeDeltaThetaOp2
RTMiSaisonDeltaThetaOp2
RTSaisonRefroidDeltaThetaOp2
RTCalculTicDeltaThetaOp2
RTDeltaThetaAut
RTSaisonChauffeDif
RTMiSaisonDif
RTSaisonRefroidDif
RTCalculTicDif
RTThetaEiSeuilAut
RTSaisonChauffeMin
RTMiSaisonMin
RTSaisonRefroidMin
RTCalculTicMin
RTThetaEiSeuilHautAut
RTSaisonChauffeMax
RTMiSaisonMax
RTSaisonRefroidMax
RTCalculTicMax
RTThetaOpBaseAut
RTSaisonChauffeOp
RTMiSaisonOp
RTSaisonRefroidOp
RTCalculTicOp
RTSurventilation
RTDeltaTravSurv
RTVentNatET
RTHttfet
RTDefQvETbase
RTQvETbase
SBEMDISPWIND
GlazingType
EarlyFacadeType
FacadeTemplateId
RTExpBR
Layout
PercGlazing
PreferredFrameWidth
PreferredFrameHeight
WindowSpacing
SillHeight
SurfaceAreaRatio
RevealOutsideProjection
RevealInsideProjection
InsideSillDepth
HasFrame
WindowFrameType
DividerType
FrameInnerWidth
HorizontalDividers
- 1091 -
VerticalDividers
DividerOutsideProjection
DividerInsideProjection
DividerConductanceRatio
FrameOuterWidth
FrameInsideProjection
FrameOutsideProjection
FrameConductanceRatio
SBEMSHADINGSYSTEM
SBEMSHADINGPOSITION
SBEMSHADINGCOLOUR
SBEMSHADINGTX
ShadingCoeff
SBEMBRISESOLEIL
InternalBlinds
InternalBlind
InternalBlindPosition
InternalBlindControl
InternalBlindControlSolar
InternalBlindControlOutsideAirTemp
InternalBlindControlInsideAirTemp
InternalBlindControlSchedule
InternalBlindControlEP
InternalBlindControlControl
LouvresOn
LouvreType
AirflowControlWindowsOn
AirflowControlWindowsSource
AirflowControlWindowsDestination
AirflowControlWindowsMaxFlowRate
AirflowControlWindowsSchedule
RTValeurSaisieDefautRouvmax
RTTypeOuvrant
ExtWinOpeningPosition
ExtWinNaturalVentilationPercOpeningValue
ExtWinCOMISSchedule
ExtWinNaturalVentilationEP
ExtWinNaturalVentilationControl
InternalGlazingType
InternalEarlyFacadeType
InternalFacadeTemplateId
InternalLayout
InternalPercGlazing
InternalPreferredFrameWidth
InternalPreferredFrameHeight
InternalWindowSpacing
InternalSillHeight
InternalHasFrame
InternalWindowFrameType
InternalHorizontalDividers
InternalVerticalDividers
InternalFrameOuterWidth
InternalFrameInnerWidth
IntWinNaturalVentilationPercOpeningValue
IntWinCOMISSchedule
IntWinNaturalVentilationEP
IntWinNaturalVentilationControl
RoofGlazingType
RoofEarlyFacadeType
RoofFacadeTemplateId
- 1092 -
SBEMRoofLightCover
RoofLayout
RoofPreferredFrameWidth
RoofPreferredFrameHeight
RoofWindowSpacing
RoofSillHeight
RoofSurfaceAreaRatio
RoofHasFrame
RoofWindowFrameType
RoofHorizontalDividers
RoofVerticalDividers
RoofFrameOuterWidth
RoofFrameInnerWidth
RoofSBEMSHADINGSYSTEM
RoofShadingCoeff
RoofInternalBlinds
RoofInternalBlind
RoofInternalBlindPosition
RoofInternalBlindControl
RoofInternalBlindControlSolar
RoofInternalBlindControlOutsideAirTemp
RoofInternalBlindControlInsideAirTemp
RoofInternalBlindControlSchedule
RoofInternalBlindControlEP
RoofInternalBlindControlControl
RTValeurSaisieDefautRouvmaxRoof
RTTypeOuvrantRoof
ExtRoofNaturalVentilationPercOpeningValue
ExtRoofCOMISSchedule
ExtRoofNaturalVentilationEP
ExtRoofNaturalVentilationControl
SBEMDoorType
DoorsOn
DoorPreferredWidth
DoorPreferredHeight
ExtDoorOpenPerc
ExtDoorPercTimeOpen
ExtDoorCOMISSchedule
ExtDoorNaturalVentilationEP
ExtDoorNaturalVentilationControl
InternalDoorsOn
InternalDoorPreferredWidth
InternalDoorPreferredHeight
IntDoorOpenPerc
IntDoorPercTimeOpen
IntDoorCOMISSchedule
IntDoorNaturalVentilationEP
IntDoorNaturalVentilationControl
VentType
VentsOn
VentArea
VentSpacing
VentHeightAboveFloor
ExtVentCOMISSchedule
ExtVentNaturalVentilationEP
ExtVentNaturalVentilationControl
InternalVentType
InternalVentsOn
InternalVentArea
InternalVentSpacing
- 1093 -
InternalVentHeightAboveFloor
IntVentCOMISSchedule
IntVentNaturalVentilationEP
IntVentNaturalVentilationControl
RoofVentType
RoofVentsOn
RoofVentArea
RoofVentSpacing
RoofVentHeightAboveFloor
RTEntreAir
RTPresenceEntreAir
RTTypeEntreeAir
RTModule
RTModule1
RTModule2
RTDeltaP1
RTDeltaP2
RTAttARegul
AllGainsValue
AllGainsSchedule
AllGainsEP
EquipmentList
ASHRAE901Type
IEEZoneType
ActivityTemplateId
SectorId
SubBuildingId
FloorArea
ZoneType
ZoneUnconditionedVentilated
IEEUnoccupiedZoneType
ZoneMultiplier
FavouredOrientation
IncludeZone
IncludeZoneDaylighting
SetZoneHeight
ZoneHeightIs
FitOutArea
NullZone
RTEstGroupe
RTZoneRTduGroupe
RTLocalAvecEclairageSpecifique
RTUsageEntete
RTUsage
RTLocauxResidentielCollectif
RTLocauxBureau
RTLocauxCommerceMagasinZI
RTLocauxCrecheGarderiePouponieres
RTLocauxEnseignementPrimaire
RTLocauxEtabSanitaireAvecHeberg
RTLocauxEtabSportifMunicipalPrive
RTLocauxEtablissementSportifScolaire
RTLocauxHebergementOccContinue
RTLocauxHebergementResidenceEtudiante
RTLocauxHopitalpartiejour
RTLocauxHopitalpartienuit
RTLocauxHotel1ou2etoilesJour
RTLocauxHotel1etoileNuit
RTLocauxHotel3ou4etoilesJour
- 1094 -
RTLocauxIndustrie38
RTLocauxIndustrie8h18
RTLocauxRestaurant1Repas57
RTLocauxRestaurant2Repasjour67
RTLocauxRestaurationContinue
RTLocauxSecondaireJour
RTLocauxSecondaireNuit
RTLocauxTransportAerogare
RTLocauxTribunal
RTLocauxUniversite
RTUvueMI
RTUvueLC
RTUvueTer
RTRSETEnteteActivite
RTNatureLNC
RTOccupationPassagere
RTEstLocalSommeil
RTNBlogement
RTTransfertAir
RTIsHall
RTIsTraversant
RTSurfacesRegl
RTSHONRT
RTSHONRTDelta
RTSURT
RTSURTDelta
RTSHAB
RTSHABDelta
RTisRatl
RTRatl
RTCategorieEntete
RTCategorieCe1Ce2
OccupiedFloorArea
UnoccupiedFloorArea
OccupancyValue
OccupancySchedule
OccupancyEP
OccupancyDaysWeek
OccupancyLatentFraction
MetabolicRateId
MetabolicFactor
CarbonDioxideGenerationRate
WinterClo
SummerClo
IncludeContaminant
ContaminantSimulationMethod
ConstantContaminantMaxGenerationRate
CutoffContaminantDesignGenerationRate
DecaySourceContaminantInitialGenerationRate
ContaminantGenerationSchedule
CutoffContaminantCutoffConcentration
DecaySourceContaminantDecayTimeConstant
ConstantContaminantDesignRemovalCoefficient
DepositionRateSinkContaminantDepositionRate
ContaminantRemovalSchedule
UseHolidays
- 1095 -
DaysHolidays
HolidaysId
DHWValue
HeatingDesignSetPointTemperature
HeatingSetBackSetPointTemperature
ActiveCoolingDesignSetPointTemperature
CoolingSetBackSetPointTemperature
HeatingPMVSetPoint
HeatingPMVSetBack
CoolingPMVSetPoint
CoolingPMVSetBack
HumidificationSP
DehumidificationSP
IncludeNatVentIndoorMinTemp
NatVentIndoorMinTempDefinition
NatVentSetPointTemperature
NatVentIndoorMinTempSchedule
IncludeNatVentIndoorMaxTemp
NatVentIndoorMaxTempDefinition
NatVentIndoorMaxTempValue
NatVentIndoorMaxTempSchedule
MechVentSetPointTemperature
MechVentTemperatureDifference
MinFreshAir
MinFreshAirPerArea
CO2SetPoint
CO2MinConcentration
ContaminantSetPoint
ContaminantMinConcentration
RTMinFreshAirInocc
RTMinFreshAirPerAreaInocc
TargetIlluminance1
LIGHTINGDISPLAY
ComputersOn
ComputersValue
ComputersEP
ComputersSchedule
ComputersRadiantFraction
EquipmentOn
EquipmentValue
EquipmentEP
EquipmentSchedule
EquipmentRadiantFraction
MiscellaneousOn
MiscellaneousValue
MiscellaneousEP
MiscellaneousSchedule
MiscellaneousFuel
MiscellaneousFractionLost
MiscellaneousLatentFraction
MiscellaneousRadiantFraction
MiscellaneousCO2GenRate
CateringOn
CateringValue
CateringEP
CateringSchedule
CateringFuel
CateringFractionLost
CateringLatentFraction
CateringRadiantFraction
- 1096 -
CateringCO2GenRate
ProcessOn
ProcessValue
ProcessSchedule
ProcessEP
ProcessFuel
ProcessFractionLost
ProcessLatentFraction
ProcessRadiantFraction
ProcessCO2GenRate
LightingTemplateId
FluorescentLightingOn
SBEMLIGHTCASE
FluorescentLightingValue
FluorescentLightingWattsPerM2Per100Lux
RTEffEclImmoProjet
RTEffiLampe
RTRatLocal
RTControleEcl
RTGestEcl
RTGradEcl
RTPeclAux
RTRatioEclNat
RTFrGradEcl
NCMTargetIlluminance
NCMDesignIlluminance
SBEMLAMPBALLASTEFF
SBEMLIGHTOUTPUTRATIO
SBEMLIGHTTYPE
SBEMDesignIlluminanceKnown
NCMDesignIlluminance2
SBEMAIREXTRACTINGLUMINAIRES
FluorescentLightingSchedule
FluorescentLightingEP
LuminaireType
LightingReturnAirFraction
LightingRadiantFraction
LightingVisibleFraction
LightingConvectiveFraction
SBEMCONSTANTILLUMINANCE
SBEMLIGHTCONTROLMANUAL
SBEMLIGHTCONTROLPHOTO
SBEMLIGHTPHBACK
SBEMLIGHTPHOTOTYPE
SBEMPHOTOTYPE
SBEMPARASITICPOWER
SBEMLIGHTPARASPW
SBEMAUTOSUBDIVIDE
SBEMMANUALSUBDIVIDE
SBEMMANUALSUBDIVIDEPERC
LightingControlOn
LightingControlType
LightingControlSteps
LightingControlContinuousMinOPFrac
LightingControlContinuousMinIPPowerFrac
LightingControlContinuousOffMinOPFrac
LightingControlContinuousOffMinIPPowerFrac
MaxGlareIndex
ViewAzAngle
LightingZone1Perc
- 1097 -
LightingZone2On
TargetIlluminance2
LightingZone2Perc
SBEMLIGHTOCCSENS
SBEMLIGHTOCCSENST
SBEMLIGHTOCCSENSParasiticPower
TungstenLightingOn
SBEMLIGHTTIMESWITCH
LightTimeSwitchSBEM4
SBEMLIGHTDISPHOFF
SBEMLIGHTDISPF
SBEMDISPLAYEFF
SBEMLAMPBALLASTEFFDL
TungstenLightingValue
TungstenLightingEP
TungstenLightingSchedule
ExteriorLightingOn
ExteriorLightingValue
ExteriorLightingEP
ExteriorLightingSchedule
ExteriorLightingControlOption
NCMLightingMandT
NCMLightingMandTWithAlarmForOutOfRangeValues
NCMLightingVoltageReduction
LENICalc2
LightingCostPerFloorArea
RTExigenceMoyEclEnteteHab
RTArt27
RTArt28
RTExigenceMoyEclEnteteNonHab
RTArt37
RTArt38
RTArt39Entete
RTArt39a
RTArt39b
RTArt40Entete
RTArt40
RTArt41
HVACTemplateId
SBEMZoneHasHVAC
SBEMUsesDefault
SBEMDefaultHVAC
SBEMDefaultHVACFuelType
SBEMKnownHVAC
SBEMHVACSystemId
NCMDestratificationFans
EarlyHVACType
HVACAvailabilitySchedule
HVACAvailabilityEP
HVACAvailabilityControl
HVACAvailabilityDaysWeek
NightCycleControl
IsControlZone
IsMixedModeControlZone
IsHumidificationControlZone
IsDehumidificationControlZone
MechanicalVentilationOn
MechanicalVentilationRateType
MechanicalVentilationValue
MaxSupplyAirFlowRate
- 1098 -
MinOutsideAirFlowRate
RTQvPointeCVC
RTQvBaseCVC
MechanicalVentilationSchedule
MechanicalVentilationEP
MechanicalVentilationControl
MechanicalVentilationDaysWeek
OutsideAirMixingHead
FreshAirType
OutsideAirControlType
FanHead
FanType
FanMode
FanPressureRise
FanEff
FanInAir
FanPlacement
FanPartLoadPowerCoefficients
Economiser
EconomiserType
EconomiserMaxACH
EconomiserLockout
EconomiserUpperTemperature
EconomiserLowerTemperature
EconomiserUpperEnthalpy
HeatRecoveryHead
HeatRecoveryOn
HeatRecoveryType
SensibleHeatRecoveryEffectiveness
LatentHeatRecoveryEffectiveness
HeatRecoveryHeatingSP
HeatRecoverySchedule
HasSupplyPlenumZone
SupplyPlenumLocation
SupplyPlenumZone
HasReturnPlenumZone
ReturnPlenumLocation
ReturnPlenumZone
VAVHead
SupplyAirMinFlowFraction
VAVType
ParallelFanOnFlowFraction
VAVFanHead
VAVFanPressureRise
VAVFanEff
NCMLocalMechanicalSupply
NCMSpecificSupplyFanPowerUnknown
NCMDefaultSpecificSupplyFanPower
NCMSpecificSupplyFanPowerKnown
NCMSpecificSupplyFanPower
NCMDemandCtrlVentilation
NCMDemandCtrlVentFlowCtrl
NCMZonalSupplyHeatRecoveryOn
NCMZonalSupplyHeatRecoveryType
NCMZonalHeatRecoverySEFFVariable
NCMZonalHeatRecoveryUnknown
NCMZonalHeatRecoveryDefaultSEFF
NCMZonalHeatRecoveryKnown
NCMZonalHeatRecoverySEFF
NCMUnKnownSpecificFanPowerTU
- 1099 -
NCMDefaultSpecificFanPowerTU
NCMKnowSpecificFanPowerTU
NCMSpecificFanPowerTU
NCMLocalMechanicalExhaust
NCMLocalMechanicalExhaustScope
NCMLocalMechanicalExhaustFlow
NCMUnKnownSpecificExtractFanPower
NCMDefaultSpecificExtractFanPower
NCMKnowSpecificExtractFanPower
NCMSpecificExtractFanPower
NCMUnKnownHEPA
NCMKnowHEPA
HEPADEF
NCMAirConInstalled
NCMAirConInspected
NCMAirConRatedOutputUnknown
NCMEstimatedtAirConRatedOutput
NCMAirConRatedOutputKnown
NCMAirConRatedOutput
NCMNightCooling
NCMNightCoolingMaxFlow
NCMNightCoolingMaxHours
NCMNightCoolingSFP
tAEnergy
PumpEtcEnergy
PumpEtcSchedule
PumpEtcEP
PumpEtcControl
PumpEtcDaysWeek
HeatingOn
NCMHeatSource
NCMECA
RTTypePgrmCh
HeatingMaxLoad
HeatingMaxLoadOP
Boiler
BoilerFuel
BoilerCoP
HeatingDistributionLoss
SCoPFrac
NCMBoilerDate
PreheatType
PreheatCoilSetpointTemp
CentralHeatingCoilType
HeatingCoilSetpointResetType
HeatingCoilSetpointTemp
HeatingCoilMinOutdoorTemp
HeatingCoilSetpointTempAtMaxOutdoorTemp
HeatingCoilMaxOutdoorTemp
AHUHeatingCoilsSchedule
AHUHeatingCoilsEP
AHUHeatingCoilsPreheat
AHUHeatingCoilsControl
AHUHeatingCoilsDaysWeek
ReheatType
ZoneDamperHeatingAction
HeatingType
HeatingRF
RadiantDistribution
HeatingPASupplyAirTemperature
- 1100 -
HeatingPASupplyAirHumidityRatio
IdealLoadsHeatingLimitType
BaseboardOn
BaseboardType
BaseboardMode
BaseboardMaxLoad
BaseboardRadiantFraction
BoilerSchedule
BoilerEP
Preheat
BoilerControl
BoilerDaysWeek
ActiveCoolingOn
CoolingSystemId
CoolingMaxLoad
CoolingMaxLoadOP
HGCoolingMaxLoadMonth
RTTypePgrmFr
Chiller
ChilledWaterSetpointTemp
CondenserWaterSetpointTemp
CoolingTowerType
ChillerFuel
SSEERFrac
CoolingPASupplyAirTemperature
CoolingPASupplyAirHumidityRatio
IdealLoadsCoolingLimitType
ChillerCoP
CoolingType
CoolingRF
NCMPackChillerType
NCMPackChillerkW
CondenserType
CoolingDistributionLoss
CentralCoolingCoilType
CoolingCoilSetpointResetType
CoolingCoilSetpointTemp
CoolingCoilMaxOutdoorTemp
CoolingCoilSetpointTempAtMinOutdoorTemp
CoolingCoilMinOutdoorTemp
AHUCoolingCoilsSchedule
AHUCoolingCoilsEP
AHUCoolingCoilsPrecool
AHUCoolingCoilsControl
AHUCoolingCoilsDaysWeek
ChillerEP
ChillerSchedule
Precool
ChillerControl
ChillerDaysWeek
EIFDistrictHeatingEfficiency
EIFDisctrictCoolingCOP
EIFSteamConversionEfficiency
EIFTotalCarbonEquivalentEmissionFactorFromN2O
EIFTotalCarbonEquivalentEmissionFactorFromCH4
EIFTotalCarbonEquivalentEmissionFactorFromCO2
HumidificationOn
HumidificationAvailabilitySchedule
HumidificationElectricPower
HumidificationCapacity
- 1101 -
SimpleHVACHumidificationControlType
DehumidificationOn
DehumidificationControlType
SimpleHVACDehumidificationControlType
SimpleHVACCoolingSensibleHeatRatio
DHWOn
DHWTemplateId
DHWDeadlegLength
DHWType
DHWCoP
DHWFuelType
DHWIsPost98
DHWStorageOn
DHWStorageVolume
DHWStorageLoss
DHWSecondaryCirculationOn
DHWSecondaryCirculationLoopLength
DHWSecondaryCirculationLoss
DHWSecondaryCirculationPumpPower
DHWOutputTemperature
DHWInputTemperature
DHWSchedule
DHWEP
NaturalVentilationOn
NaturalVentilationRateType
NaturalVentilationValue
NaturalVentilationSchedule
NaturalVentilationEP
NaturalVentilationDaysWeek
IncludeNatVentOutdoorMinTemp
NatVentOutdoorMinTempDefinition
NatVentOutdoorMinTempValue
NatVentOutdoorMinTempSchedule
IncludeNatVentOutdoorMaxTemp
NatVentOutdoorMaxTempDefinition
NatVentOutdoorMaxTempValue
NatVentOutdoorMaxTempSchedule
IncludeNatVentDeltaTemp
NatVentDeltaTempDefinition
NatVentTemperatureDifference
NatVentDeltaTempSchedule
NatVentConstantTermCoef
NatVentTempTermCoef
NatVentVelocityTermCoef
NatVentVelocitySquareTermCoef
COMISWindFactor
NatVentControlMode
COMISModulationOn
COMISModulationMinDT
COMISModulationMaxDT
COMISModulationMaxDTFact
NatVentMixedModeOn
NatVentMixedModeOpeningFactorFunctionWindSpeedCurveId
NatVentMixedModeSwitchOffWhenRaining
NatVentMixedModeMaxWindSpeed
NatVentMixedModeMinTemperature
NatVentMixedModeMaxTemperature
NatVentMixedModeMinEnthalpy
NatVentMixedModeMaxEnthalpy
NatVentMixedModeMinDewPointTemperature
- 1102 -
NatVentMixedModeMaxDewPointTemperature
NatVentMixedModeControlModeScheduleId
NatVentMixedModeMinOutdoorVentilationAirScheduleId
NatVentMixedModeAirflowNetworkControlTypeScheduleId
NatVentMixedModeSimpleAirflowControlTypeScheduleId
EarthTubeYesNo
EarthTubeRateType
EarthTubeValue
EarthTubeDesignFlowRate
EarthTubeSchedule
EarthTubeMinZoneTemp
EarthTubeMaxZoneTemp
EarthTubeDeltaTemp
EarthTubeType
EarthTubeFanPressureRise
EarthTubeFanTotalEfficiency
EarthTubePipeRadius
EarthTubePipeThickness
EarthTubePipeLength
EarthTubePipeThermalConduct
EarthTubePipeDepthUnderGroundSurface
EarthTubeSoilCondition
EarthTubeAverageSoilSurfTemp
EarthTubeAmplitudeSoilSurfTemp
EarthTubePhaseConstantSoilSurfTemp
EarthTubeConstantTermFlowCoef
EarthTubeTempTermFlowCoef
EarthTubeVelocityTermFlowCoef
EarthTubeVelocitySquareTermFlowCoef
SurfaceForm
WindAngle0
WindAngle45
WindAngle90
WindAngle135
WindAngle180
WindAngle225
WindAngle270
WindAngle315
AirDistributionMode
AirDistributionInterpolationMode
AirDistributionCouplingStrategy
AirDistributionDesignTemperature
AirDistributionDesignHeatRate
AirDistributionDesignTemperatureGradient
AirDistributionReferenceTemperature
AirDistributionReferenceHeatRate
AirDistributionReferenceTemperatureGradient
AirDistributionSchedule
AirDistributionEP
AirDistributionControl
AirDistributionThermometerHeight
AirDistributionReturnHeight
AirDistributionRASGainDistributionSchedule
AirDistributionRASPlumesPerOccupant
AirDistributionRASNumberOfDiffusers
AirDistributionRASPowerPerPlume
AirDistributionRASDesignAreaOfDiffuser
AirDistributionRASDiffuserSlotAngle
AirDistributionRASDiffuserType
AirDistributionRASCoefficientA
- 1103 -
AirDistributionRASCoefficientB
AirDistributionRASCoefficientC
AirDistributionRASCoefficientD
AirDistributionRASCoefficientE
AirDistributionRASThermostatHeight
AirDistributionRASComfortHeight
AirDistributionRASSetTransitionHeight
AirDistributionRASTransitionHeight
AirDistributionRASReportingThreshold
SBEMCHPOn
SBEMCHPHEATSSEER
SBEMCHPSHEAT
SBEMCHPDHEAT
SBEMCHPHEATPOWERRATIO
SBEMCHPPQAQI
SBEMCHPFUELTYPE
SBEMCHPTrigeneration
SBEMCHPSCOOL
SBEMCHPCOOLSEER
SBEMWINDGENERATOROn
SBEMWINDGENERATORMultiplier
SBEMWINDGENERATORArea
SBEMWINDGENERATORHubHeight
SBEMWINDGENERATORPower
SBEMWINDGENERATORTerrainType
HVACCostPerFloorArea
OtherServicesCostPerFloorArea
GeneratorsYesNo
DistributionCount
DistributionId1
DistributionId2
DistributionId3
DistributionId4
DistributionId5
RTExigenceMoyEnteteHab
RTArt23
RTArt24
RTArt25
RTArt26
RTArt29
RTExigenceMoyEnteteNonHab
RTArt31Entete
RTArt31Chaud
RTArt31Froid
RTArt31ECS
RTArt31Eclairage
RTArt31Reseau
RTArt31Vent
RTArt3180Am
RTArtVentEntete
RTArt32
RTArt33
RTArt42
RTArtChauEntete
RTArt34
RTArt35
RTArtDistChaudFroidEntete
RTArt36
RTArtFroidEntete
RTArt43
- 1104 -
RTArt44
RTArt45
TopologyType
DrawingObject
CuttingMode
IsGable
IsOccupied
RoofOverlap
RoofSlope
WallSlope
Height
AutoHeightRipple
lvwSelectionIndex
Length
LengthA
LengthB
Width
WidthA
WidthB
Depth
NumberStories
StoreyHeight
PercPartyWalls
PitchedRoof
LocationTemplateId
RTDepartement
SBEMLocation
TitleSite
Latitude
Longitude
ClimaticRegion
Elevation
IEESeaDistance
IEEConcelhos
Exposure
SiteOrientation
RTZoneEteIntLit
RTMasqueLointainEntete
RTMasqueLointain
RTHauteurHorizonAzimutal
RTgamma1
RTgamma2
RTgamma3
RTgamma4
RTgamma5
RTgamma6
RTgamma7
RTgamma8
RTgamma9
RTgamma10
RTgamma11
RTgamma12
RTgamma13
RTgamma14
RTgamma15
RTgamma16
RTgamma17
RTgamma18
RTgamma19
RTgamma20
- 1105 -
RTgamma21
RTgamma22
RTgamma23
RTgamma24
RTgamma25
RTgamma26
RTgamma27
RTgamma28
RTgamma29
RTgamma30
RTgamma31
RTgamma32
RTgamma33
RTgamma34
RTgamma35
RTgamma36
RTConductiviteSol
UseGroundConstr
GroundConstr
GroundTexture
GroundReflectance
GroundSnowReflectedSolarModifier
GroundSnowReflectedDaylightModifier
JanGroundTemperature
FebGroundTemperature
MarGroundTemperature
AprGroundTemperature
MayGroundTemperature
JunGroundTemperature
JulGroundTemperature
AugGroundTemperature
SepGroundTemperature
OctGroundTemperature
NovGroundTemperature
DecGroundTemperature
JanDeepGroundTemperature
FebDeepGroundTemperature
MarDeepGroundTemperature
AprDeepGroundTemperature
MayDeepGroundTemperature
JunDeepGroundTemperature
JulDeepGroundTemperature
AugDeepGroundTemperature
SepDeepGroundTemperature
OctDeepGroundTemperature
NovDeepGroundTemperature
DecDeepGroundTemperature
JanShallowGroundTemperature
FebShallowGroundTemperature
MarShallowGroundTemperature
AprShallowGroundTemperature
MayShallowGroundTemperature
JunShallowGroundTemperature
JulShallowGroundTemperature
AugShallowGroundTemperature
SepShallowGroundTemperature
OctShallowGroundTemperature
NovShallowGroundTemperature
DecShallowGroundTemperature
FCfactorMethodUseWeatherDataControl
- 1106 -
JanFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
FebFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
MarFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
AprFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
MayFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
JunFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
JulFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
AugFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
SepFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
OctFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
NovFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
DecFCfactorMethodGroundTemperature
SiteWaterMainsCalculationMethod
SiteWaterMainsSchedule
SiteWaterMainsAnnualAverageOutdoorAirTemperature
SiteWaterMainsMaxDiffInMonthlyAverageOutdoorTemperatures
DesignAnnualPrecipitation
NominalAnnualPrecipitation
PrecipitationSchedule
IrrigationType
MaxIrrigationRate
IrrigationSchedule
CO2Concentration
CO2Schedule
ContaminantConcentration
ContaminantSchedule
TimeZoneId
UseDaylightSaving
WinterFrom
WinterTo
SummerFrom
SummerTo
HourlyWeatherData
DayOfWeekForStartDay
WeatherWinterDB996
WinterToaDB996
WinterWSDB996
WinterWDDB996
WeatherWinterDB99
WinterToaDB99
WinterWSDB99
WinterWDDB99
SummerToaLag
SummerTwbLag
SummerDBTempRangeModifierType
SummerDBTempRangeModifierSchedule
SummerTemperatureDefinition
SummerDB04
SummerToaMaxDB04
SummerTwbMaxDB04
SummerToaMinDB04
SummerDB1
SummerToaMaxDB1
SummerTwbMaxDB1
SummerToaMinDB1
SummerDB2
SummerToaMaxDB2
SummerTwbMaxDB2
SummerToaMinDB2
SummerWB04
- 1107 -
SummerToaMaxWB04
SummerTwbMaxWB04
SummerToaMinWB04
SummerWB1
SummerToaMaxWB1
SummerTwbMaxWB1
SummerToaMinWB1
SummerWB2
SummerToaMaxWB2
SummerTwbMaxWB2
SummerToaMinWB2
SummerDP04
SummerToaMaxDP04
SummerTwbMaxDP04
SummerToaMinDP04
SummerDP1
SummerToaMaxDP1
SummerTwbMaxDP1
SummerToaMinDP1
SummerDP2
SummerToaMaxDP2
SummerTwbMaxDP2
SummerToaMinDP2
DesDBCoincWB04
DryBulb04Jan
DryBulb04Feb
DryBulb04Mar
DryBulb04Apr
DryBulb04May
DryBulb04Jun
DryBulb04Jul
DryBulb04Aug
DryBulb04Sep
DryBulb04Oct
DryBulb04Nov
DryBulb04Dec
WetBulbDryBulb04Jan
WetBulbDryBulb04Feb
WetBulbDryBulb04Mar
WetBulbDryBulb04Apr
WetBulbDryBulb04May
WetBulbDryBulb04Jun
WetBulbDryBulb04Jul
WetBulbDryBulb04Aug
WetBulbDryBulb04Sep
WetBulbDryBulb04Oct
WetBulbDryBulb04Nov
WetBulbDryBulb04Dec
DryMin04Jan
DryMin04Feb
DryMin04Mar
DryMin04Apr
DryMin04May
DryMin04Jun
DryMin04Jul
DryMin04Aug
DryMin04Sep
DryMin04Oct
DryMin04Nov
DryMin04Dec
- 1108 -
DesDBCoincWB2
DryBulb2Jan
DryBulb2Feb
DryBulb2Mar
DryBulb2Apr
DryBulb2May
DryBulb2Jun
DryBulb2Jul
DryBulb2Aug
DryBulb2Sep
DryBulb2Oct
DryBulb2Nov
DryBulb2Dec
WetBulbDryBulb2Jan
WetBulbDryBulb2Feb
WetBulbDryBulb2Mar
WetBulbDryBulb2Apr
WetBulbDryBulb2May
WetBulbDryBulb2Jun
WetBulbDryBulb2Jul
WetBulbDryBulb2Aug
WetBulbDryBulb2Sep
WetBulbDryBulb2Oct
WetBulbDryBulb2Nov
WetBulbDryBulb2Dec
DryMin2Jan
DryMin2Feb
DryMin2Mar
DryMin2Apr
DryMin2May
DryMin2Jun
DryMin2Jul
DryMin2Aug
DryMin2Sep
DryMin2Oct
DryMin2Nov
DryMin2Dec
DesDBCoincWB5
DryBulb5Jan
DryBulb5Feb
DryBulb5Mar
DryBulb5Apr
DryBulb5May
DryBulb5Jun
DryBulb5Jul
DryBulb5Aug
DryBulb5Sep
DryBulb5Oct
DryBulb5Nov
DryBulb5Dec
WetBulbDryBulb5Jan
WetBulbDryBulb5Feb
WetBulbDryBulb5Mar
WetBulbDryBulb5Apr
WetBulbDryBulb5May
WetBulbDryBulb5Jun
WetBulbDryBulb5Jul
WetBulbDryBulb5Aug
WetBulbDryBulb5Sep
WetBulbDryBulb5Oct
- 1109 -
WetBulbDryBulb5Nov
WetBulbDryBulb5Dec
DryMin5Jan
DryMin5Feb
DryMin5Mar
DryMin5Apr
DryMin5May
DryMin5Jun
DryMin5Jul
DryMin5Aug
DryMin5Sep
DryMin5Oct
DryMin5Nov
DryMin5Dec
DesDBCoincWB10
DryBulb10Jan
DryBulb10Feb
DryBulb10Mar
DryBulb10Apr
DryBulb10May
DryBulb10Jun
DryBulb10Jul
DryBulb10Aug
DryBulb10Sep
DryBulb10Oct
DryBulb10Nov
DryBulb10Dec
WetBulbDryBulb10Jan
WetBulbDryBulb10Feb
WetBulbDryBulb10Mar
WetBulbDryBulb10Apr
WetBulbDryBulb10May
WetBulbDryBulb10Jun
WetBulbDryBulb10Jul
WetBulbDryBulb10Aug
WetBulbDryBulb10Sep
WetBulbDryBulb10Oct
WetBulbDryBulb10Nov
WetBulbDryBulb10Dec
DryMin10Jan
DryMin10Feb
DryMin10Mar
DryMin10Apr
DryMin10May
DryMin10Jun
DryMin10Jul
DryMin10Aug
DryMin10Sep
DryMin10Oct
DryMin10Nov
DryMin10Dec
DesWBCoincDB04
WetBulb04Jan
WetBulb04Feb
WetBulb04Mar
WetBulb04Apr
WetBulb04May
WetBulb04Jun
WetBulb04Jul
WetBulb04Aug
- 1110 -
WetBulb04Sep
WetBulb04Oct
WetBulb04Nov
WetBulb04Dec
DryBulbWetBulb04Jan
DryBulbWetBulb04Feb
DryBulbWetBulb04Mar
DryBulbWetBulb04Apr
DryBulbWetBulb04May
DryBulbWetBulb04Jun
DryBulbWetBulb04Jul
DryBulbWetBulb04Aug
DryBulbWetBulb04Sep
DryBulbWetBulb04Oct
DryBulbWetBulb04Nov
DryBulbWetBulb04Dec
WetMin04Jan
WetMin04Feb
WetMin04Mar
WetMin04Apr
WetMin04May
WetMin04Jun
WetMin04Jul
WetMin04Aug
WetMin04Sep
WetMin04Oct
WetMin04Nov
WetMin04Dec
DesWBCoincDB2
WetBulb2Jan
WetBulb2Feb
WetBulb2Mar
WetBulb2Apr
WetBulb2May
WetBulb2Jun
WetBulb2Jul
WetBulb2Aug
WetBulb2Sep
WetBulb2Oct
WetBulb2Nov
WetBulb2Dec
DryBulbWetBulb2Jan
DryBulbWetBulb2Feb
DryBulbWetBulb2Mar
DryBulbWetBulb2Apr
DryBulbWetBulb2May
DryBulbWetBulb2Jun
DryBulbWetBulb2Jul
DryBulbWetBulb2Aug
DryBulbWetBulb2Sep
DryBulbWetBulb2Oct
DryBulbWetBulb2Nov
DryBulbWetBulb2Dec
WetMin2Jan
WetMin2Feb
WetMin2Mar
WetMin2Apr
WetMin2May
WetMin2Jun
WetMin2Jul
- 1111 -
WetMin2Aug
WetMin2Sep
WetMin2Oct
WetMin2Nov
WetMin2Dec
DesWBCoincDB5
WetBulb5Jan
WetBulb5Feb
WetBulb5Mar
WetBulb5Apr
WetBulb5May
WetBulb5Jun
WetBulb5Jul
WetBulb5Aug
WetBulb5Sep
WetBulb5Oct
WetBulb5Nov
WetBulb5Dec
DryBulbWetBulb5Jan
DryBulbWetBulb5Feb
DryBulbWetBulb5Mar
DryBulbWetBulb5Apr
DryBulbWetBulb5May
DryBulbWetBulb5Jun
DryBulbWetBulb5Jul
DryBulbWetBulb5Aug
DryBulbWetBulb5Sep
DryBulbWetBulb5Oct
DryBulbWetBulb5Nov
DryBulbWetBulb5Dec
WetMin5Jan
WetMin5Feb
WetMin5Mar
WetMin5Apr
WetMin5May
WetMin5Jun
WetMin5Jul
WetMin5Aug
WetMin5Sep
WetMin5Oct
WetMin5Nov
WetMin5Dec
DesWBCoincDB10
WetBulb10Jan
WetBulb10Feb
WetBulb10Mar
WetBulb10Apr
WetBulb10May
WetBulb10Jun
WetBulb10Jul
WetBulb10Aug
WetBulb10Sep
WetBulb10Oct
WetBulb10Nov
WetBulb10Dec
DryBulbWetBulb10Jan
DryBulbWetBulb10Feb
DryBulbWetBulb10Mar
DryBulbWetBulb10Apr
DryBulbWetBulb10May
- 1112 -
DryBulbWetBulb10Jun
DryBulbWetBulb10Jul
DryBulbWetBulb10Aug
DryBulbWetBulb10Sep
DryBulbWetBulb10Oct
DryBulbWetBulb10Nov
DryBulbWetBulb10Dec
WetMin10Jan
WetMin10Feb
WetMin10Mar
WetMin10Apr
WetMin10May
WetMin10Jun
WetMin10Jul
WetMin10Aug
WetMin10Sep
WetMin10Oct
WetMin10Nov
WetMin10Dec
RegionId
IncludeElectricity
IncludeNaturalGas
IncludeFuelOil1
IncludeFuelOil2
IncludeCoal
IncludeGasoline
IncludePropane
IncludeDiesel
IncludeOtherFuel1
IncludeOtherFuel2
StdECMinimal
StdECNormal
StdECMandatory
StdECBest
OccupancyHVACTiming
OccupancyGainsTiming
FloorCeilingRepresentation
RValueToOutside
ExcludeSemiExteriorUnconditionedZones
IncludeCeilingVoidsInVentVolume
IncludeFloorVoidsInVentVolume
IncludeFloorConstructionInVentVolume
IncludeGroundFloorConstructionInVentVolume
IncludeExternalFloorConstructionInVentVolume
SSComfortVelocity
OccupancyLatentGainMethod
InfiltrationDataLevel
GainsDataLevel
CostDataLevel
CFDDataLevel
GeometryDataLevel
NatVentDataLevel
ScopeDataLevel
ConstructionDataLevel
MechVentDataLevel
ShadingDataLevel
SimulationDataLevelDBS
SimulationDataLevel
HVACDataLevel
SimpleHVACAutosizeMethod
- 1113 -
SimpleHVACAux
SimpleHVACSpec
SimpleHVACMechVent
DetailedHVACSetpointDefinitionMethod
CalcNatVentAirtightnessMethod
TimingDataLevel
SimReducedWeather
PlantAdequate
PlantSized
BuildingRegs
WinterDesign
WinterDesignIntermittent
NatVentUserDefined
NatVentCalculated
SSControlRF
HLTemperatureControlType
HGTemperatureControlType
SSTemperatureControlType
HGAirflowCalcMethod
HLFast3TC
HGFast3TC
SSFast3TC
HLUseHeatingRadiantFraction
ExcludeNatVentHL
ExcludeMechVentHL
ExcludeNatVentHG
ExcludeMechVentHG
ExcludeHeatRecoveryHL
ExcludeHeatRecoveryHG
SSComfortRF
OCUDIFSS
OCUScheduleDef
ThermalOcuOps
ThermalScheduleDef
ForceUpdateShadingSS
ForceUpdateShadingHG
IncludeAllBuildingsSS
IncludeAllBuildingsHG
ModelReflectionsHG
ModelReflectionsSS
AutosizeSS
LightingUnits
PlantSizing
HGControlRF
HGComfortRF
HLControlRF
HLComfortRF
SSCalcDescription
HLCalcDescription
HGCalcDescription
ReportDescription
ReportType
OPTCalcDescription
CFDCalcDescription
CFDSimulationTurbulenceModel
CFDSimulationState
CFDSimulationViscosityOption
CFDSimulationMolecularViscosityMultiplier
CFDSimulationTurbulentViscosityValue
CFDSimulationDiscretisationScheme
- 1114 -
CFDSimulationOuterIterations
CFDSimulationIsothermal
CFDSimulationSurfaceHeatTransferOption
CFDSimulationCeilingHTCoefficient
CFDSimulationWallHTCoefficient
CFDSimulationFloorHTCoefficient
CFDSimulationInitialUComponent
CFDSimulationInitialVComponent
CFDSimulationInitialWComponent
CFDSimulationInitialTemperature
CFDSimulationUComponentInnerIterations
CFDSimulationUComponentFalseTimeStep
CFDSimulationUComponentRelaxationFactor
CFDSimulationUComponentTerminationResidual
CFDSimulationVComponentInnerIterations
CFDSimulationVComponentFalseTimeStep
CFDSimulationVComponentRelaxationFactor
CFDSimulationVComponentTerminationResidual
CFDSimulationWComponentInnerIterations
CFDSimulationWComponentFalseTimeStep
CFDSimulationWComponentRelaxationFactor
CFDSimulationWComponentTerminationResidual
CFDSimulationPressureInnerIterations
CFDSimulationTemperatureInnerIterations
CFDSimulationTemperatureFalseTimeStep
CFDSimulationTemperatureRelaxationFactor
CFDSimulationTemperatureTerminationResidual
CFDSimulationTurbulenceKEInnerIterations
CFDSimulationTurbulenceKEFalseTimeStep
CFDSimulationTurbulenceKERelaxationFactor
CFDSimulationTurbulenceKETerminationResidual
CFDSimulationTurbulenceDissipationRateInnerIterations
CFDSimulationTurbulenceDissipationRateFalseTimeStep
CFDSimulationTurbulenceDissipationRateRelaxationFactor
CFDSimulationTurbulenceDissipationRateTerminationResidual
CFDSimulationViscosityRelaxationFactor
CFDSimulationContinuityTerminationResidual
CFDSimulationXAxisVelocity
CFDSimulationYAxisVelocity
CFDSimulationZAxisVelocity
CFDSimulationTemperature
CFDSimulationPressure
CFDSimulationMass
CFDSimulationTurbulenceKE
CFDSimulationDissipationRateOfTurbulenceKE
CFDSimulationViscosity
CFDAuxiliaryCalculationIterations
CFDAuxiliaryCalculationTerminationError
CFDAirChangeEffectiveness
SimD1
SimM1
SimY1
SimD2
SimM2
SimY2
HeatGainD1
HeatGainM1
HeatGainM2
HGStartMonth
HGEndMonth
- 1115 -
MonthlyOutput
DailyOutput
HourlyOutput
TimesteplyOutput
SurfacesOutput
SiteRecordSimStart
AllowCondConv
AllowLighting
AllowOccupancy
AllowProcess
AllowComputers
AllowCatering
AllowMiscellaneous
AllowEquipment
AllowLumped
HLOverDesign
HLUseSteadyState
HLUseIntermittent
HGOverDesign
HGMaxCoolingTime
SingleZonePBIndex
SingleZoneZoneIndex
OccupancyScheduleScratch
HGDataAvailable
HLDataAvailable
SSDataAvailable
HGSimMethod
HLSimMethod
SSSimMethod
EnergyRatingSimMethod
SSEPSolarDistribution
SSEPSolutionAlgo
SSAllowConstructionSolutionOverride
SSEPDifferenceScheme
SSEPSpaceDiscretizationConstant
SSEPRelaxationFactor
SSEPInsideFaceSurfaceTemperatureConvergenceCriteria
SSEPDifferenceScheme
SSEPSpaceDiscretizationConstant
SSEPRelaxationFactor
SSEPInsideFaceSurfaceTemperatureConvergenceCriteria
SSEPTemperatureConv
SSEPLoadsConv
AirflowNetworkMaxIterations
AirflowNetworkAbsoluteConvTol
AirflowNetworkRelativeConvTol
SSEPShadowingInterval
SSEPMaxWarmupDays
SSEPMinWarmupDays
SSEPCalculateExternalSolarShading
SSEPDesignAveragingWindow
LumpZonesBySelection
LumpZonesByActivity
LumpSBEMSurfaces
IEEPonderado
LumpSimilarSBEMParitions
LumpSBEMZones
LumpZonesWhenConnected
LumpElements
LumpOpenings
- 1116 -
LumpCracks
LumpGains
WindowMultiplier
Triangulate
ScheduledMixingFlowPerSqMetre
ScheduledMixingOn
ModelHoles
WindowHoleDischargeCoefficient
FilterElementArea
AllowPitchedRoof
RoofWallTransitionAngle
LumpElementsNumberOrientations
HGEPSolarDistribution
HGEPSolutionAlgo
HGEPDifferenceScheme
HGEPSpaceDiscretizationConstant
HGEPRelaxationFactor
HGEPInsideFaceSurfaceTemperatureConvergenceCriteria
HGEPTemperatureConv
HGEPLoadsConv
HLEPTemperatureConv
HLEPLoadsConv
YearJan1
IsBookmark
Handle
EditPerimeterAttributes
AutomaticVoidInclusion
EditConnectingFaces
ShowConnectingFacesInNavigator
HGEnergyPlusData
HLEnergyPlusData
SSEnergyPlusData
HLReport
HGReport
SSEPTimestep
SS3TCTimestep
SSDBSTimestep
SaveBuildingTitle
Version
SSControlRFDBS
SSComfortRFDBS
OCUDIFSSDBS
SimIModeDBS
HGSimIModeDBS
HGDBSTimestep
HGComfortRFDBS
HGControlRFDBS
HLSimIModeDBS
HLComfortRFDBS
HLControlRFDBS
ZoneColourShadingMode
EnergyCodeId
RatingAssessmentType
RatingAssessmentTypeIT
IEEConfirmConstructionsConform
IEEKitchenPercElectric
IEERenDHW
IEERenDHWOther
IEERenDHWFuel
IEERenCooling
- 1117 -
IEERenCoolingOther
IEERenCoolingFuel
IEERenHeating
IEERenHeatingOther
IEERenHeatingFuel
IEERenElectricity
IEESimLighting
IEELighting
IEESimElectricEquipment
IEEElectricEquipment
IEESimDHW
IEESimDHWElec
IEEDHW
IEEDHWElec
IEESimAux
IEEAux
IEESimPumps
IEEPumps
IEEAuxPercHeating
IEEAuxPercCooling
IEEAuxPercOther
IEESimHeating
IEESimHeatingElec
IEEHeating
IEEHeatingElec
IEESimCooling
IEESimCoolingElec
IEECooling
IEECoolingElec
IEESimExtLighting
IEEExtLightingPower
IEEExtLightingHours
IEEOtherElec
IEEFactorDeForma
IEEConfirmConstructionsConform
IEEOverrideFactorDeForma
RTModeSimu
RTBatEnCours
RTTousBat
RTOptionSensibilite
RTGenererFicheXML
RTCalculAvecMP
RTDistOrthogonaleMaxMP
RTDistLateraleMaxMP
RTRatioMinOmbrageMP
SBEMProduceEPCXML
SBEMXMLInputData
XMLExportFolder
CodeAssessmentType
SuggestECMs
CalculateECMs
LineType
PartitionOffset
InternalPartitionType
BlockWallThickness
BlockRoofThickness
AutoCalculatePitchedRoofThickness
UseGetRoofOverhang
PartitionThickness
IncrementSnap
- 1118 -
ParallelSnap
NormalSnap
SnapIncrement
SnapIncrementIP
SnapToLowerAdjacentPerimeters
ObjectRotationAngle
ArcSweepAngle
ArcNumberSegments
AutoCompleteBlock
AutomaticInterBlockPartitionConnection
ProtractorIncrAngle
UseProtractor
PerimeterDrawMode
OpeningDrawMode
CircleNumberSegments
KeepDefaultOpenings
MidPointSnap
EndPointSnap
DXFSnap
OffsetSnap
OffsetSnapDistance
NearestPointSnap
XDrawingGuides
YDrawingGuides
HVACZoneAirDistributionUnitType
HVACLoopTemplateType
HVACZoneForcedAirUnitType
HVACZoneBaseboardType
BooleanOperation
BooleanDifferenceToggle
XAxisLock
YAxisLock
ZAxisLock
SwitchSnapDirection
OutlineBlockConversionType
QuantityMeasured
TimeOfDay
DayOfMonth
MonthOfYear
SunpathDiagram
SunpathDiagramScaleFactor
SunpathfDayOfMonth
RenderViewShadows
SolarAltitude
SolarAzimuth
IncludeWindowFramesInShadowCreation
FullSceneAntialiasingIndex
FieldOfViewAngle
FullSceneAntialiasing
TextureRenderMode
ShowNorthArrowInRenderedView
ShowGroundPlane
EditDynamics
VisualisationDynamics
ShowWindows
DisplayZoneLabels
FitToIncludeDrawingFile
ShowDrawingDownToSurfaceLevel
DisplayShadingDevicesInEditView
MeasureQuantity
- 1119 -
BuildingBlockSnapMode
AssemblyName
AssemblyCreationMode
pbEditUI
AssemblyDatumOffset
AssemblyXScaleFactor
AssemblyYScaleFactor
AssemblyZScaleFactor
AssemblyWidth
AssemblyHeight
AssemblyDepth
MovieOutput
MovieType
MovieOrbitIncrement
MovieShadingTimeIncrement
GenGeometryData
GenPercGlazing
RepresentativeFloorArea
GenWallToFloorAreaRatio
GenPartitionToFloorAreaRatio
GenGroundToFloorAreaRatio
GenRoofToFloorAreaRatio
GenCeilingToFloorAreaRatio
GenFloorToFloorAreaRatio
GenFloorArea
GenVolume
ZoneLumpedVolume
AnyNonDefaultData
ZoneHandle
SiteStartUpOptions
LockPassword
BuildingAddress0
BuildingAddress1
BuildingAddress2
BuildingAddress3
BuildingCity
BuildingCounty
BuildingPostcode
AnalystDetailsHead
AnalystName
AnalystTelephone
AnalystAddress
AnalystCity
AnalystPostcode
SBEMWelshLanguage
SBEMAlsoDoRegs
SBEMRunEWEnergyRating
SBEMEWEnergyRating
BuildingLocationDescription
BuildingUPRN
BuildingMPRN
BuildingInspectionDate
BuildingConstructionDate
BuildingConservation
RTNumPermisConstruire
RTDateDepotPermisConstruire
RTAvancement
RTTypeTravaux
NCMMaxStoreys
IsShellAndCore
- 1120 -
GasAvailable
RenewableMain
IsModular
MoreThan2Years
MoreThan70Percent
NoTERAvail
DateOfSubAssemblies
DateOfSubAssemblies2013
DistressPurchase
TransactionType
AnalystNumber
EAActivationCode
UseProxyServer
ProxyServerURL
ProxyServerPort
ProxyServerPassword
ProxyServerUsername
AnalystAccreditedScheme
AnalystQualifications
NOSLevel
RelatedPartyDisclosureFromList
AnalystEmployerName
AnalystEmployerAddress
AnalystEmployerTradingNumber
AnalystInsuranceHead
AnalystInsurerCompany
AnalystInsurancePolicyNo
AnalystInsuranceEffectiveDate
AnalystInsuranceExpiryDate
AnalystInsurancePILimit
OwnerDetailsHead
OwnerName
OwnerTelephone
OwnerAddress
OwnerCity
OwnerPostcode
RTMOENom
RTMOETelephone
RTMOEAdresse
RTMOEVille
RTMOECodePostal
RTBurCtrlNom
RTBurCtrlTelephone
RTBurCtrlAdresse
RTBurCtrlVille
RTBurCtrlCodePostal
Notes
CFDWindVelocity
CFDWindDirection
CFDWindExposureIndex
CFDSiteDomainLengthFactor
CFDSiteDomainWidthFactor
CFDSiteDomainHeightFactor
CFDResults
GroupBC
AnalysisType
CommandLine
ProgramPath
WorkingPlaneHeight
DaylightingMethod
- 1121 -
SBEMBRSTAGE
SBEMBERSTAGE
SBEMBRS6BTYPE
SBEMScotlandRatingImprov
SBEMSEPCCase
SBEMBRS6ACCREDCONST
SBEMBRS6NVCREDIT
SBEMDataReflectionReports
SBEMELECPOWERFACTOR
SBEMDistrictHeatingIsDefault
SBEMDistrictHeatingDefaultCO2Factor
SBEMDistrictHeatingIsUser
SBEMDistrictHeatingUserCO2Factor
SBEMDistrictHeatingPEIsDefault
SBEMDistrictHeatingDefaultPEFactor
SBEMDistrictHeatingPEIsUser
SBEMDistrictHeatingUserPEFactor
SSEPShadowOverlap
HGEPShadowOverlap
SSEPPolygonClippingAlgorithm
HGEPPolygonClippingAlgorithm
AutomaticBlockZoning
SSIDFIncludeFile1
SSIDFIncludeFilename1
SSIDFIncludeFile2
SSIDFIncludeFilename2
FlatCBSelectionMethod
FlatCBFraction2LargestAreas
SSEPAutosizingFactorHeating
SSEPAutosizingFactorCooling
HGEPCompactHVACType
HGDesignOffCoilTemp
HGDesignSupplyAirHumidityRatio
HLModelInterzoneToSameZoneAsAdiabatic
HGModelInterzoneToSameZoneAsAdiabatic
SSModelInterzoneToSameZoneAsAdiabatic
HGSupplyAirMinFlowFraction
WaterOutletFlowRateData
HLDateFormatFlag
HGDateFormatFlag
SSDateFormatFlag
WinterDesignDayGeneral
WinterDesignDayOccupancy
WinterDesignDayLighting
WinterDesignDayEquipment
WinterDesignDayHeating
WinterDesignDayCooling
WinterDesignDayHVAC
WinterDesignDayNatVent
WinterDesignDayDHW
WinterDesignDay
SummerDesignDay
SSCheckConvex
HGCheckConvex
AssemblyCreationMode
CFDViewType
CFDDisplayShowKey
CFDDisplayMaximumVectorLength
CFDDisplayVectorScaleFactor
CFDDisplayMinimumVelocity
- 1122 -
CFDDisplayMaximumVelocity
CFDDisplayVelocityContourBandValue1
CFDDisplayVelocityContourBandActive1
CFDDisplayMinimumTemperature
CFDDisplayMaximumTemperature
CFDDisplayTemperatureContourBandValue1
CFDDisplayTemperatureContourBandActive1
CFDDisplayMinimumPressure
CFDDisplayMaximumPressure
CFDDisplayPressureContourBandValue1
- 1123 -
CFDDisplayPressureContourBandActive1
CFDDisplayMinimumH2OMassFraction
CFDDisplayMaximumH2OMassFraction
CFDDisplayH2OMassFractionContourBandValue1
CFDDisplayH2OMassFractionContourBandActive1
CFDDisplayMinimumCO2MassFraction
CFDDisplayMaximumCO2MassFraction
CFDDisplayCO2MassFractionContourBandValue1
CFDDisplayCO2MassFractionContourBandActive1
- 1124 -
CFDDisplayMinimumAgeOfAir
CFDDisplayMaximumAgeOfAir
CFDDisplayAgeOfAirContourBandValue1
CFDDisplayAgeOfAirContourBandActive1
CFDDisplayMinimumPPD
CFDDisplayMaximumPPD
CFDDisplayPPDContourBandValue1
CFDDisplayPPDContourBandActive1
- 1125 -
CFDDisplayMinimumPMV
CFDDisplayMaximumPMV
CFDDisplayPMVContourBandValue1
CFDDisplayPMVContourBandActive1
CFDDisplayMinimumMeanRadiantTemperature
CFDDisplayMaximumMeanRadiantTemperature
CFDDisplayMeanRadiantTemperatureContourBandValue1
CFDDisplayMeanRadiantTemperatureContourBandActive1
CFDDisplayMinimumOperativeTemperature
CFDDisplayMaximumOperativeTemperature
CFDDisplayOperativeTemperatureContourBandValue1
- 1126 -
CFDDisplayOperativeTemperatureContourBandActive1
CFDDisplayVariableVelocityVectors
CFDDisplayVariableVelocityContours
CFDDisplayVariableTemperatureContours
CFDDisplayVariablePressureContours
CFDDisplayVariableH2OMassFractionContours
CFDDisplayVariableCO2MassFractionContours
CFDDisplayVariableAgeOfAirContours
CFDDisplayVariablePMVContours
CFDDisplayVariablePPDContours
CFDDisplayVariableComfortContours
CFDDisplayVariableMeanRadiantTemperatureContours
CFDDisplayVariableOperativeTemperatureContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledVelocityContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledTemperatureContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledPressureContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledH2OMassFractionContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledCO2MassFractionContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledAgeOfAirContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledPMVContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledPPDContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledComfortContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledMeanRadiantTemperatureContours
CFDDisplayVariableFilledOperativeTemperatureContours
CFDDisplay3DContourNone
CFDDisplay3DContourVelocity
CFDDisplay3DContourTemperature
CFDDisplay3DContourPressure
CFDDisplay3DContourH2OMassFraction
CFDDisplay3DContourCO2MassFraction
CFDDisplay3DContourAgeOfAir
CFDDisplay3DContourPMV
CFDDisplay3DContourPPD
CFDDisplay3DContourComfort
CFDDisplay3DContourMeanRadiantTemperature
CFDDisplay3DContourOperativeTemperature
CFDGridRegionOperation
CFDGridRegionStartCoordinate
CFDGridRegionEndCoordiNate
CFDGridRegionNewCoordinate
CFDGridRegionSpacingType
CFDGridRegionSpacingDimension
- 1127 -
CFDGridRegionSpacingPower
CFDGridRegionNumberOfDivisions
CFDGridRegionLocked
CFDMonitorCellIncluded
CFDMonitorCellName
CFDMonitorCellXCoordinate
CFDMonitorCellYCoordinate
CFDMonitorCellZCoordinate
CFDMonitorCellOperation
CFDSimulationMonitorCellName
CFDSimulationMonitorCellIndex
CFDSimulationMonitorCellVariable
CFDSimulationResultsCurrentIndex
CFDNewResultsSetOption
CFDCalcDescription
CFDExistingResultsSetOption
CFDExistingResultsSet
CFDSimulationInternalDefaultGridSpacing
CFDSimulationInternalGridLineMergeTolerance
CFDSimulationExternalDefaultGridSpacing
CFDSimulationExternalGridLineMergeTolerance
CFDSimulationExternalGridScheme
CFDSiteDomainDisplay
CFDDisplayWireFramePartitions
CFDDisplayWireFrameComponentBlocks
CFDDisplayWireFrameFloorSlabs
ShadingPlaneIndex
ObjectKey
PAYGStatus
iDBImportStatus
MergeCoPlanarGBXMLShadeSurfaces
ImportGBXMLBlockMode
ImportGBXMLThermalProperties
ImportGBXMLShadeSurfaces
AdjacencySeparationTolerance
AdjacencyAngularTolerance
StandardComponentBlockAdjacencies
3DCADView
3DCADFileType
3DCADFilename
OPTMaxGenerations
OPTMaxPopulationSize
OPTCalcDescription
OPTObjFuncCO2
OPTObjFuncCost
OPTObjFuncComfort
OPTObjFuncDaylight
OPTMinCO2
OPTMaxCO2
OPTMinCost
OPTMaxCost
OPTMinDaylight
OPTMaxDaylight
OPTMinComfort
OPTMaxComfort
OPTMinMaxType
OPTFloatEncodingLength
OPTListEncodingLength
OPTCrossoverRate
OPTOverrideBitwiseMutationProbability
- 1128 -
OPTBitwiseMutationProbability
OPTIndividualMutationProbability
OPTTournamentSize
ConstraintLowerMargin
ConstraintUpperMargin
RetainBatchResults
RMCalcDescription
RMTraceType
RMParameters
RMAmbientDivisions
RMAmbientBounces
RMAmbientAccuracy
RMAmbientResolution
RMAmbientSuperSamples
RMMinGridSize
RMMaxGridSize
RMMargin
RMSky
RMIncludeOtherBuildings
RICalcDescription
RITraceType
RIParameters
RISky
RMWorkingPlaneHeight
RMReportType
RMAMPM
RMScaleSource
RMScaleLow
RMScaleHigh
RMApplyScaleLowColour
RMApplyScaleHighColour
RMScaleLowColour
RMScaleHighColour
RMApplyScaleLowColour
RMApplyScaleHighColour
RMScaleLowColour
RMScaleHighColour
RMDFThreshold
RMLuxThreshold
RMMaxLuxThreshold
RMDaylightThresholdType
RMSkyDay
RMSkyMonth
RMSkyHour
RMWorkingPlane
RMWorkingPlaneMargin
HVACZoneLTDeviceRadiantSurfaceList
HVACZoneChilledCeilingRadiantSurfaceList
HVACZoneHeatedFloorRadiantSurfaceList
CFDComfortActivityMetabolicRate
CFDComfortClothingLevel
CFDComfortRelativeHumidity
RMZoneLabelFontSize
RMZoneLabelColour
RMApplyZoneLabels
HVACCoolingCoilType
HVACComponentType
BuildingGUID
EEUseDirectLodgement
EESurveyorId
- 1129 -
EESurveyorPassword
EEReferenceNumber
HVACZoneLTDeviceRadiantSurfaceList
HVACZoneChilledCeilingRadiantSurfaceList
HVACZoneHeatedFloorRadiantSurfaceList
CFDComfortActivityMetabolicRate
CFDComfortClothingLevel
CFDComfortRelativeHumidity
RMZoneLabelFontSize
RMZoneLabelColour
RMApplyZoneLabels
HVACCoolingCoilType
BatchProcessing
UseJobServer
UseJobServerOPT
OPTJobs
JobServerList
JobServer
JobServerTag
ToleranceTimeHeatingSetpointNotMet
ToleranceTimeCoolingSetpointNotMet
IDFDuplicateNameDelimiter
OptimisationObjectives
OptimisationConstraints
OptimisationVariables
AnalystEmail
AnalystAccreditedSchemeWeb
XMLRestricted
EPBDAsk1
EPBDAsk2
EPBDAskRenewable
EPBDAskCHP
EPBDAskDH
EPBDAskHP
DataOptionTemplateId
ASHRAE901Type
GridSnap
GridXSpacing
GridYSpacing
ClippingPlaneHeight
DisplayZoneInnerSurfaces
DisplayFilledExternalWalls
DisplayZoneInnerVolumeFloors
DisplayZoneInnerFloorPerimeters
DisplayGBXMLExternalWallSurface
DisplayGBXMLInternalWallSurface
DisplayGBXMLShadeSurface
DisplayGBXMLRoofSurface
DisplayGBXMLAirSurface
DisplayGBXMLUnderGroundWallSurface
DisplayGBXMLSlabOnGradeSurface
DisplayGBXMLRaisedFloorSurface
DisplayGBXMLUndergroundSlabSurface
DisplayGBXMLInteriorFloorSurface
DisplayGBXMLUndergroundCeilingSurface
DisplayGBXMLCeilingSurface
DisplayGBXMLOtherSurface
ClippingPlaneOrientationSwitchingMode
ZoneVolumeCalculationMethod
ZoneSurfaceAreaCalculationMethod
- 1130 -
ZoneFloorAreaCalculationMethod
ReflectionAxis
JobTypeList
JobType
SBEMYear
IDFNameType
IDFCompression
gbXMLConstructionName
gbXMLWindowTypeName
ClipSurfaceOpenings
SurfaceOpeningClipTolerance
EMSOn
FMUOn
EMSId
FMUId
- 1131 -
DESIGNBUILDER FILES, LOCATION AND EXTENSIONS

Filename/Extension Folder
Any local
folder(DesignBuilder Data
folder is default)
.dsb
.ddf
.dat
Description
DesignBuilder model description file. Note that dsb files are

Important: dsb files should already compressed so don't need to be 'zipped' before
only be loaded from folders sending in emails.
on the local machine as
loading/saving on network
drives can cause problems.
Library folder
.lic
Any (DesignBuilder Data

folder is default)
.idf
EnergyPlus folder
.stat
Weather data folder
.epw
Weather data folder
Compact.idf
EnergyPlus folder
Expanded.idf
EnergyPlus folder
ip.idf
EnergyPlus folder
in.idf
EnergyPlus folder
Energy+.idd
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.err
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.eso
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.eio
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.rdd
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.bnd
EnergyPlus folder
DesignBuilder exported component/template data

Construction and Template exported files.
DesignBuilder Licence file for extended evaluation,
activating licences when Internet access is not available or
for training.
EnergyPlus input script file.
EnergyPlus hourly weather data statistics file used by
DesignBuilder to automatically load location and weather
statistics to the Hourly weather data dialog when the epw
file is selected. stat files are supplied with DesignBuilder and
are automatically generated by the Hourly weather data
translation process when creating custom weather data.
EnergyPlus hourly weather data. a database of hourly
weather data is supplied by automatic download or you can
create your own hourly weather data.
Compact.idf is generated when using Compact HVAC. It is
the full input data with HVAC in compact form, i.e. prior to
being expanded into detailed form.
Expanded.idf is generated when using Compact HVAC. It is
the full input data with HVAC in expanded form, i.e. after
being expanded into detailed form. It is copied
The EnergyPlus input file when using DOE version in EPLaunch - it is necessary because EP-Launch cannot accept
in.idf as an input filename. You can make minor changes to
ip.idf in EP-Launch and see the effects in the DB results.
Temporary file generated by DesignBuilder used as input to
EnergyPlus - this file is overwritten before each simulation.
Note when using DOE version in EP-Launch, in.idf is
generated by EP-Launch.
EnergyPlus data definition dictionary (see EnergyPlus
documentation for information on this).
EnergyPlus error message file.
Standard eso Output File - contains detailed results to be
read in by DesignBuilder.
EnergyPlus model summary configuration output file. Note
there is a free utility called xESOView that can be used to
quickly view EnergyPlus eso output files. Download it from:
http://sourceforge.net/projects/xesoview.
Report Variable Data Dictionary - list all possible
EnergyPlus output reports for a particular idf input file.
HVAC layout summary file - shows details about the
branches, nodes, and other elements of the flow
connections. It is intended for use in debugging potential
problems and supports the EnergyPlus diagramming tool.
- 1133 -
Eplusout.dxf
Eplusout.mtr
EnergyPlus folder
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.end
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.dbg
EnergyPlus folder
EPlusmap.csv
EnergyPlus folder
Eplusout.csv
EnergyPlus folder
DXF file (from Report,Surfaces,DXF;)

Similar to .eso but only has Report Meter outputs.
A one line summary of success or failure used by
DesignBuilder to indicate whether the simulation was
successful or not.
From Debug Output object may be useful to support to
help track down problems.
For zones simulated with daylighting controls, an
illuminance map will be generated with a user defined grid
(max 10 x 10) of daylighting reference points. The resulting
map is output as a comma delimited text file that can be
imported into a spreadsheet program for rapid visualization
of the daylighting illuminance patterns in a zone.
Not directly from EnergyPlus - produced by EnergyPlus
utility program that reads the .eso file and produces output
files for spreadsheet programs.
Compact HVAC file translation process

When using Compact HVAC, the EnergyPlus input file generation process is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
DesignBuilder first creates in.idf using Compact HVAC notation.

in.idf is copied to Compact.idf as a backup/record - this file is not used in the
simulation process
in.idf is processed by ExpandObjects.exe to generate expanded.idf - the full HVAC
data set that can be read by EnergyPlus.
expanded.idf is copied to in.idf as a backup/record and plays no further part.
in.idf is used as input to EnergyPlus simulation.
All above files are stored in the EnergyPlus folder.
Folders
Folder
DesignBuilder
Data
DesignBuilder
Data\Backup
Typical Location*
XP: My Documents\DesignBuilder Data
Vista/7/8: Documents\DesignBuilder Data
XP: My Documents\DesignBuilder Data\Backup
Vista/7/8: Documents\DesignBuilder Data
XP: C:\Documents and Settings\User\LocalSettings\Application
Data\DesignBuilder\EnergyPlus
EnergyPlus
Radiance
Library data
Vista/7/8:
C:\Users\User\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder\EnergyPlus
Data\DesignBuilder\Radiance
Vista/7/8: C:\Users\User\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder\Radiance
Data\DesignBuilder\Data
- 1134 -
Use
Default location for
storing DesignBuilder
dsb data files.
Default location for
DesignBuilder
automatic backup files
and file copies made
when opening existing
files.
Storing files related to
EnergyPlus
simulations.
Storing files related to

Radiance simulations.
Library data and .dat
files currently being
Diagnostic
files folder
Template
projects
Vista/7/8 C:\Users\User\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder
Data\DesignBuilder
Diagnostic files
Vista/7/8: C:\Users\User\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder
XP: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application

Data\DesignBuilder\Templates
Vista/7/8:
Vista/7/8: C:\ProgramData\DesignBuilder\Templates
Weather data
used by
DesignBuilder

Data\DesignBuilder\Weather Data
Vista/7/8: C:\ProgramData\DesignBuilder\Weather Data
DesignBuilder dsb
files stored in this
folder can be used as
templates for future
models. Click on the
Templates tab on the
Create New Site
dialog for a list of
available template
files.
EnergyPlus hourly
weather data is stored
in this folder. The data
may have been
automatically
downloaded from the
DesignBuilder website
or it can be added
manually.
* The actual names of the folders on a particular computer will depend on the language setting and on your
Windows user name. The above locations assume English as the language and are given for Windows XP
operating system (XP) and for Windows Vista and Windows (Vista/7/8). The Windows user name 'User' is
used as an example.
Tip: the above folders can most easily be accessed from the File > Folders menu group of commands.
HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
DesignBuilder is a professional graphics application and requires a high standard of computer hardware for
successful use. This page contains information on the minimum system requirements and also the
recommended specification. The main areas you should pay attention to if you are buying or upgrading your
computer system to run DesignBuilder are:
Graphics adapter - a good 100% OpenGL compatible graphics adapter is required to run
DesignBuilder. The mid-range and better NVIDIA cards seem to be the most reliable. Some graphics
adapters integrated with the motherboard we have tested are unable to run DesignBuilder. See also
note below.
Memory - DesignBuilder will use all the memory you can throw at it - at least 2 GB is recommended for
serious modelling or more if you are running under Windows Vista which itself uses 1 GB.
CPU speed - get as fast as you can afford.
Cores - having more than one processor core does not necessarily speed up simulations in
DesignBuilder version 1 but it does allow you to continue using your computer while simulations are
running. Dual core processors also make the software more responsive in use.
Minimum Requirements
Windows 8, 7, Vista or XP running on

1000 MHz processor
800 x 600 pixel screen
2 GB RAM
- 1135 -
200 MB free disk space

Pointing device
100% OpenGL compatible 3D graphics adapter with hardware acceleration running in 32-bit color
mode
The above specification will allow you to successfully model small buildings using DesignBuilder but we
recommend a more powerful computer for best results especially when working with larger building models.
Recommended
Windows 7
2.4 GHz dual core processor or faster. Dual Core processors are recommended as they allow you to
continue using your computer while simulations are carried out.
4 GB (or more) RAM.
5 GB free disk space
Pointing device
100% OpenGL compatible 3-D graphics adapter with hardware acceleration running in 32-bit color
mode
1280x1024 pixels or larger screens for efficiency during the modelling process and for displaying highquality visualisation images and walk-throughs of DesignBuilder models and CFD results.
DesignBuilder works well with wide screens, including iMac 27" screens.
Windows 7
DesignBuilder works under Windows 7, but you must ensure that you follow the advice on the support
knowledgebase to switch off desktop composition and set XP-compatibility mode.
Graphics Card Settings

If you plan to purchase a computer we recommend choosing an NVIDIA graphics adapter as these have more
reliable drivers for use with OpenGL. AMD graphics cards are generally not recommended for use with
DesignBuilder as they often have bugs in their OpenGL driver software, especially new releases.
Many graphics cards allow you to customise driver settings. The example screenshot below is for an NVIDIA
card showing recommended settings. Note antialiasing, anisotropic filtering and unified back/depth buffer
have been changed from default settings to provide hardware accelerated optimal visualisations. The
antialiasing option provides sharp lines without slowing program operation and unified back/depth buffer gives
best results for dragging selection rectangles on some graphics cards allowing double buffering to be used for
cursor dynamics.
- 1136 -
RESULTS VIEWER
Standalone DesignBuilder Results Viewer
The Results Viewer is a separate application which can be used to view EnergyPlus results stored in one or
more .eso files. It can be downloaded from the main Downloads > Software area of the DesignBuilder
website. When installed the application allows you to view any results contained within EnergyPlus .eso and
.htm results files. There are 3 ways to open .eso results files:
1.
2.
3.
Double-click on an .eso file when in Windows Explorer.

From within the Results Viewer use the File > Open eso/data set menu command
By making the appropriate selection on the Program options DesignBuilder will offer to open the .eso
file at the end of the simulation.
Multiple .eso and .htm files can be opened at a time. Use the combo box below the toolbar to select the
current results set for plotting.
With an .eso file open the first view will be something like that shown below.
- 1137 -
Display Results
To show results for a particular interval use the Frequency drop list to select the interval.
Sorting the Reports can be a useful way to help find particular data and can be achieved by clicking on the
column headers. For example to see data sorted by "Area" click on the Area header. This will collect together
all data for each zone, HVAC component, Environment etc. in the list.
To plot a report on a graph use one of these methods:
1.
2.
3.
Select one of the toolbar options Add selected row to current graph or Add selected row to new
graph.
Right-click on the item in the grid and select the Add selected row to new graph menu option to add
the report to a new graph.
Double-clicking on the report in the grid will add it to the current graph (or if no graph exists it creates a
new graph and adds it).
Selecting a graph
If you have more than 1 graph set up you can select the current graph simply by clicking on it. You will see the
graph heating highlight in a different blue when selected as shown below.
- 1138 -
Menu Commands
You can access a range of options from the top bar menu, toolbar and right-click context menus. These are as
follows:
Add selected variable(s) to current graph

Selecting this option causes the variables currently selected in the grid to be plotted on the current graph. The
current graph can be identified by the different blue colour (see Selecting a graph). Single variables can also
be added to the current graph by double clicking on the variable in the grid.
Add selected variable(s) to new graph

The same as Add selected variable(s) to current graph above but creates a new graph and plots the
variable there.
Delete selected variable(s) from current graph

Click this option to remove the selected variable(s) from the current graph. Single variables can also be
removed from the current graph by double clicking on the variable in the grid.
- 1139 -
Add selected variable(s) to current graph for all datasets

The same as Add selected variable(s) to current graph above but plots equivalent variables for all datasets
on the current graph. This option is only available when more than one dataset is loaded.
Add selected variable(s) to new graph for all datasets

The same as Add selected variable(s) to current graph for all datasets above but creates a new graph
and plots the variable there.
Display graph
Display the data as a graph instead of a grid.
Display grid
Display the data as a grid instead of a graph.
Save grid to CSV file

Allows you to save the data as a comma separated values (CSV) file for loading into a spreadsheet for further
analysis.
Add new graph

Adds a new empty graph.
Delete selected graph

Removes the currently selected graph along with any variables that were plotted on it. Note that the
underlying data is not deleted, just the graph.
Rename selected graph

Allows you to change the title for the currently selected graph. To change the name of the current graph rightclick on the graph and from the DesignBuilder Options, select the Rename graph title option. Enter the title
for the graph in the dialog and press OK.
Copy graphs to another frequency

If you have generated similar data for multiple frequencies then use this tool to use settings for the current
frequency and display the same reports using a different frequency.
Change main title

Change the text to be used for the main title for all graphs
Undo zoom
Undo any zoom settings previously made.
- 1140 -
Change axis range

Styling
When you create graphs with Results Viewer, they are styled (e.g. Title Font, Background colour, etc) using a
default styling template. You can change the styling defaults to your own preferences by using the right-hand
context menu on the graph pane. The following options are currently available:
Border Style
Font Size
Grid Options
Customise Dialog (more detailed Font and Colour changes)
If you make some changes and want to revert back to the default styling at any time, select the Tools >
Restore Graph Styling menu option.
Any styling changes made to the currently open session will be made permanent once the session has been
saved.
Loading multiple Data sets

You can load as many data sets as required to a single Results Viewer session by using the Open
eso/Dataset menu or toolbar option. A list is maintained of all data sets currently opened in the drop list at the
top of the window.
When you have more than one data set open it usually helps to Include the dataset name in the legend. This
is set by default and can be controlled from the Options dialog.
Options Dialog
The Options dialog is accessed either from the toolbar
or from the Tools top menu option.
Autosave session
Select this option if you would like the session to be saved automatically when closing the Results Viewer.
Display a title for each graph

Selecting this option causes the title of each graph to be displayed for each graph as shown in highlighted
areas in the graph below.
- 1141 -
To change the name of the current graph right-click on the graph and from the DesignBuilder Options, select
the Rename graph title option. Enter the title for the graph in the dialog and press OK.
Include dataset name in legend

If you have more than one data set loaded then you should usually select this option to ensure that the data
set name is included in the legend. This can help when comparing results for different simulations.
- 1142 -
The output above shows how the dataset name is added to each legend.
Include folder name in dataset name

If you include the dataset name in the legend then do you want the folder name included too? If so check this
option. This option is only usually used when the result sets are stored in files with the same name but in
different folders.
Zooming
In some cases you may find that too much data is displayed on the X-axis at one time and you need to focus
on a section (time period) of the results graph. You can use the mouse to do this simply by dragging a time
region of interest. This allows you to zoom in on data for particular days.
To return back to the original "un-zoomed" state, use the Undo zoom toolbar option.
Crosshair
When you move the mouse over a point on a plot, a floating tooltip window appears with data for that point
only. Left clicking with the mouse causes the value at that point to be plotted on the right hand side of the
graph legend block and a cross hair is displayed with a vertical and horizontal line centred on the point of
- 1143 -
interest. The crosshairs can be useful for checking simultaneous values for a range of reports. The value for
all other reports currently plotted will also be plotted for the current time indicated by the crosshair.
Sessions
It can take some time to load.eso files and to select results so DesignBuilder provides methods to save preprocessed results files and session files to speed loading and setting up reports the next time.
.drb results files

When the Results Viewer loads an .eso file it automatically generates a .drb file with exactly the same data but
in a form that can be loaded much more quickly. If you need to view the results again in future you can open
the drb file instead of the .eso file. The .drb file will have the same filename as the original .eso file (apart from
the extension). It does not contain any display settings - just the data.
.drs results files

You can also save a session file which stores all of your display settings for a graphing session as well as the
corresponding .drb file(s). Opening the session file will take you back to where you were before saving the
session file. Session files provide a very useful way to package up all data and settings for a Results Viewer
session in a small file size. They can be sent to colleagues for viewing.
DesignBuilder Program option settings

You can configure DesignBuilder to save .eso files in various ways as described for the EnergyPlus tab of the
Program options. If you plan to use the Results Viewer in favour of the inbuilt DesignBuilder results display
then you might use one of the settings configurations below:
The default option where the .eso file is automatically generated
and named as eplusout.eso in the DesignBuilder EnergyPlus
folder. This .eso file will be overwritten each time a simulation or
design calculation is run. The eplusout.eso file is automatically
loaded to DesignBuilder after the simulation. You may wish to avoid
this option if you have generated very large hourly or sub-hourly
data sets which could cause long delays or a program crash if
loaded.
The .eso file is automatically generated and named and an option
provided to open it in the Results viewer. The results data is not
automatically loaded to DesignBuilder, which might be a usual
option to avoid very large hourly or sub-hourly data sets from being
loaded.
The .eso file is automatically generated and you are prompted for a
filename for the .eso file and asked if you would like to open it in
the Results viewer. The results data is not automatically loaded to
DesignBuilder, which might be a usual option to avoid very large
hourly or sub-hourly data sets from being loaded.
- 1144 -
The .eso file is automatically generated and you are prompted for a
filename for the .eso file and asked if you would like to open it in
the Results viewer. The results data is also loaded to DesignBuilder
for your convenience. You may wish to avoid this option if you have
generated very large hourly or sub-hourly data sets which could
cause long delays or a program crash if loaded.
DIAGNOSTICS
DesignBuilder creates two types of diagnostics files on startup, "diagnostic log" files and "installation
diagnostics log files":
1.
Diagnostics_dd_mm_yyyy_hh_mm_ss.log - files contain information about the operating system

settings, hardware configuration and settings within the program. It also contains internal program
information written out as the program runs which can help DesignBuilder support to track down
problems.
2.
Installation Diagnostics_dd_mm_yyyy_hh_mm_ss.log - files contain information on the steps

carried out during the final stage of software installation and any errors that may have occurred.
The "dd_mm_yyyy_hh_mm_ss" part of the filename is the date and time the file was originally created. For
example the file "Diagnostics_01_08_2010_09_26_53.log" was created at 1 August 2010 at 9:26:53 am.
You may be asked to supply these files to DesignBuilder Support if you have problems with program operation
on your computer. One typical request from the Support desk is to supply the diagnostics file from a particular
program run and this will usually be the most recent one. To find the most recently created diagnostics file,
simply sort the files in Windows Explorer by using the "Details" view and clicking on the "Date modified"
column to carry out the sort. Alternatively you can scan the files by eye to find the most recently created file
using the "dd_mm_yyyy_hh_mm_ss" part of the filenames.
Finding the diagnostics files

The diagnostics files are generated in the Diagnostic files folder which can be accessed from DesignBuilder
the File > Folders > Diagnostic files folder menu command. When you select this menu option a Windows
Explorer window opens and you will see the diagnostics and installation diagnostic log files.
If for any reason you are unable to start DesignBuilder then the diagnostics files can usually be found the
folder:
(Windows Vista/7/8 machines) : C:\Users\User\AppData\Local\DesignBuilder

(Windows XP machines): C:\Documents and Settings\User\LocalSettings\Application
Data\DesignBuilder
Where User is your username on the computer.
SURFACE TYPES
The meaning of most surface types listed in the Navigator should be obvious. This section provides further
information on the meaning of 3 less obvious surface types:
Inter-block partition
Wall (with hole)
Link body edge surfaces
These special surfaces are required because DesignBuilder uses 3-D surface slabs to represent building
fabric. Using 3-D surface slabs allows accurate calculation of zone volumes, definition of blocks using external
dimensions and realistic rendered images. Zones for EnergyPlus simulations and other calculations provided
by DesignBuilder are generated from the interior faces of the block geometry.
- 1145 -
Cutaway of DesignBuilder Zone showing 3D-slabs
Inter-block partition
An Inter-block partition surface is the shared partition wall between 2 zones in different blocks. Inter-block
partition surfaces are generated whenever 2 blocks touch along a plane. They are listed in the Navigator
twice, once in each of the 2 zones in which they appear. They are however a single partition object within
DesignBuilder and in the thermal calculations. So if, for example, you change the Partition construction model
data for an inter-block partition (or draw windows) the change will also be reflected in the equivalent interblock partition surface in the adjacent zone.
- 1146 -
Wall (with hole)

Surfaces marked Wall (with hole) in the navigator are external surfaces on the same block face as an interblock partition surface (see above). The 'hole' is where the inter-block partition goes. So 'Wall (with hole)' is
the part of the block face that is adjacent to outside. The partition with the adjacent block is in a separate
surface called inter-block partition (it is separated from the rest of the wall because it has a different
adjacency). So the sum of the inter-block partition(s) and the wall with the hole make up the actual surface.
The figures below illustrate.
- 1147 -
At building level
At surface level
Note that at surface level you can only draw openings on the grey areas of the surface. The white 'hole' is
actually where the inter-block partition is located (above).
Wall (with hole) representation in EnergyPlus

Because EnergyPlus does not allow surfaces to be defined with holes (i.e. surfaces are defined using a single
set of vertices) DesignBuilder generates 2 or more valid sub-polygons to represent the surface in EnergyPlus.
The diagram below illustrates the procedure used for a typical Wall (with hole) surface.
The surface is split into 2 (often equal area) polygons that, together, enclose the 'hole' left by the interblock
partition. You should bear this in mind when looking at EnergyPlus IDF data.
- 1148 -
Link body edge surfaces

Link body edge surfaces are used to connect the Wall (with hole) and the Inter-block partition surfaces to
ensure that zones are fully enclosed. They are required because zones in adjacent blocks are separated from
each other due to the thickness of the walls of the 2 blocks. The link body edge surfaces bridge the gap
between the (internal) zone shell and the (external) block shell. The link body is the volume between the link
edge surfaces and the inter-block partition.
Link body edge surfaces are included by default, but you can exclude them by unchecking the Generate
fully enclosed zones Advanced model option. When included, these surfaces are modelled using very high
resistance zero mass elements. The purpose of Link body edge surfaces is to:
Allow EnergyPlus to calculate zone volumes avoiding warning messages about volume mismatches.
This does not actually affect the results because EnergyPlus uses the accurately calculated zone
volumes supplied by DesignBuilder.
Provide a slightly more accurate picture of the actual internal zone surface area and so potentially
provide a more accurate convective/radiant calculation.
The pictures below show how the link body edge surfaces are used to connect the 2 blocks and ensure that
zones are enclosed.
- 1149 -
EnergyPlus Model with link body edge surfaces - zones are enclosed and the zone volume
includes the volume enclosed by the link surfaces and the inter-block partition. This volume is
the thickness of the block wall x inter-block partition area).
Equivalent EnergyPlus Model without Link body edge surfaces - zones are not enclosed and
the zone volume excludes the link body (volume enclosed by the link surfaces and the inter-block partition).
- 1150 -
CALCULATION OF AIR DENSITY

The air density is used for calculating the air volumetric flow rate from air mass flows as part of the loads
calculation procedure.
The method used in DesignBuilder is the same as that in EnergyPlus for consistency. Air is assumed to be dry
and at 20C. The site elevation is used to calculate standard atmospheric pressure using the equation for
'standard atmospheric' pressure on p 6.1 of the ASHRAE 1997 HOF.
Density = P / (R * T)
Where:
R is the Gas constant = 287.05 J/kg-K
T is the temperature in K. Air is assumed to be at 20C so, T = (20 + 273.15)
P is standard pressure:
P = 101325 x (1.0 Z x 0.0000225577)5.2559
where:
Z = Elevation above sea level (m)
PITCHED ROOF GEOMETRY - TECHNICAL DESCRIPTION

This page describes DesignBuilder pitched roof geometry generation with reference an example roof created
by drawing a rectangular perimeter with an offset of 0.3m and an external wall thickness of 0.25m:
Roof perimeter blocks are created behind the scenes by first generating a conventional plan extrusion using
the current external wall thickness and then generating the roof inner profile topology from the resulting block
outer perimeter:
- 1151 -
The roof geometry is created as if a stub wall existed from the original extrusion, cut to fit within the roof space
and on top of which the roof assembly sits:
The resulting roof block is composed of a polyhedron representing the inner zone, which is created from the
original inner block perimeter and is cut to fit within the roof space and a number of slabs that represent the
actual roof construction. The roof slabs are generated from the inner roof profile and an outer profile created
using the roof construction thickness.
- 1152 -
EnergyPlus model
DesignBuilder automatically generates overhangs for Pitched roof block types using EnergyPlus shading
devices. The diagram below shows EnergyPlus DXF output of the building model generated using the above
data. It shows the overhangs in grey.
- 1153 -
CALCULATION OF HVAC ENERGY CONSUMPTION FROM ENERGYPLUS LOADS

DesignBuilder calculates boiler, chiller, DHW fuel consumption from the loads calculated by EnergyPlus using
the CoP data at the building level on the HVAC tab as follows:
Simple HVAC
Boiler energy = EnergyPlus heating loads / Heating system CoP
Chiller energy = EnergyPlus cooling loads / Cooling system CoP
Compact HVAC
Boiler energy = (EnergyPlus heating loads x Heating distribution loss factor) / Boiler CoP
Chiller energy = (EnergyPlus cooling loads x Cooling distribution loss factor) / Chiller CoP
Where:
Heating distribution loss factor = 1 + (Heating Distribution Loss) / 100
Cooling distribution loss factor = 1 + (Cooling Distribution Loss) / 100
DHW (Simple and Compact HVAC)

DHW energy (kWh) = DHW CoP x 1000 (kg/m3) x 4.187 (KJ/kg-K) x (EnergyPlus DHW m3 loads) x (Delivery
water temperature - Mains water temperature)
Where:
DHW CoP is Heating system CoP when using '1-Central heating boiler' DHW type
Data shown in blue is HVAC model data.
Data shown in italics is read from the EnergyPlus results eso file .
- 1154 -
LIMITATIONS
This page summarises the known limitations in DesignBuilder simulations together with workarounds were
they exist.
1.
2.
In Simple HVAC it is not possible to use radiant heating together with cooling in any particular zone. If
you need to use radiant heating with cooling then you should consider using Compact HVAC single
zone unitary systems.
In Compact HVAC there are only limited options for defining heating and cooling sizes manually. These
limitations are due to EnergyPlus generally requiring all HVAC data to be either autosized or manually
defined. DesignBuilder Compact HVAC does not provide access to all of the data required to do this.
One example of a known related issue is that it is not possible to manually define sizes of
radiant/baseboard heating systems in unitary single zone Compact HVAC systems using the "2Replaces main heating" option. Possible workarounds to this problem are to not use autosizing or to
use Simple HVAC instead.
COMPONENT BLOCKS USED FOR LOCAL SHADING

Component blocks are a flexible way to apply shading to any part of the building and can be used to model
more complex window shading systems not catered for by the in-built local shading systems that can be
selected on the Openings tab. The issues to consider when using component blocks in this way are discussed
below.
Positioning
When using the zone inner geometry option for surface geometry, component blocks placed close to the
window at building level may not be as close to the window in the simulation as might be expected from the
view in the model. For example, in the simple model shown below a component block has been placed
directly in front of a window, which cannot be seen as it is hidden by the component block. It is placed so that
it touches the outer surface of the block. So one would think that it is touching the window in the simulation
model and therefore no solar gain and light could pass round or through the component block shade.
- 1155 -
However results from simulations will show quite a lot solar gain entering the window. This is because the
window is actually placed on the zone surface which is on the inner surface of the block, the difference
between the inner zone surface and the block outer surface being due to the External wall thickness. In this
model the wall thickness is 0.23m so there will be a gap of 0.23m between the component block shade and
the window in the simulation model. This can be seen in the example DXF output shown below which
corresponds to the model above.
- 1156 -
The DXF output above shows the gap between the window and the component block shade caused by the
External wall thickness.
The solution in this case was simply to use either one of the External measurement Geometry conventions
or a zero External wall thickness which removes the gap between window and shade.
Reflection from ground

As discussed elsewhere, shading of the ground by component blocks is only taken into account if the Model
reflections and shading of ground reflected solar option is used. So if you use component blocks to model a
local shading device and forget to include reflections in the simulations you will obtain higher than expected
solar gains due to unobstructed ground-reflected solar gain.
DATA RECOVERY
There can be times when data is lost due to a program crash or a power failure at a time before you had a
chance to save the model. DesignBuilder keeps track of the model in its various stages using 3 different
mechanisms:
1.
2.
3.
An optional incremental backup system where the current working file is automatically saved to the
Backup folder every 10 minutes (by default). These files have names such as My File Autosave
18_01_2012_14_05_50.dsb. In this example the original file was called My File.dsb and the backup
was made at 14:05:50 on 18 January 2012.
When opening an existing file the original file is copied to the backup folder. In this case the file is
called something like My File Archive 18_01_2012_13_49_01.dsb. In this example the original file
was called My File.dsb and the file was opened and copied at 13:49:01 on 18 January 2012.
If for any reason DesignBuilder does not close down cleanly and is unable to save data, a skh backup
file will remain in the same folder as the dsb file and DesignBuilder will ask whether you want to recover
- 1157 -
this data the next time you open the dsb file. The skh file will have the same name as the original dsb
file but will have a ~ character prepended. e.g. ~My File.skh.
Files in the Backup folder are stored for up to 30 days before being automatically deleted.
To recover data you should check the files in the Backup folder and find possible candidates based on the
filename and time of saving. Then copy the files you would like to check up to the DesignBuilder Data folder
and open them in DesignBuilder to find the most complete data set.
See also Program options, Backups
STANDARDS USED IN DESIGNBUILDER

DesignBuilder and it's underlying calculation engines reference a range of different standards.
Standard
ISO EN 12831
ASHRAE 140 /
BESTEST
ISO EN 13790
ISO EN 15193
CIBSE TM33
How used in
DesignBuilder
Description
Heating systems in buildings. Method for calculation of the design heat

load
Validation test indicating agreement of temperatures and energy flow
Download a report.
with other simulation software. DesignBuilder passes this test.
O THERMAL COMFORT CALCULATOR

Accessed from the Tools menu
DesignBuilder provides a dialog which allows you calculate thermal comfort based on the Fanger comfort
indicators PPD (% people dissatisfied) and PMV (predicted mean vote). These inputs are required:
Air temperature (C or F)
Radiant temperature (C or F)
Clothing (Clo)
Activity level method - choose from one of:
Activity (MET) or
Activity (W/person or Btu/hr-person)
Air speed (m/s or ft/min)
Relative humidity (%)
Outputs are:
Operative temperature
Predicted mean vote (PMV)
% people dissatisfied (PPD)
A curve illustrating the relationship between PMV and PPD is displayed to the right on the dialog.
- 1158 -
- 1159 -
To use the tool, enter the environmental conditions and press the Update button at the bottom of the dialog.
This causes the graph and PPD/PMV outputs to be updated. If the PMV value is within the comfort region (0.5 to +0.5) then the outputs and the line between the PPD axis and the curve are displayed in green,
otherwise they are displayed in red as shown in the example outputs above.
You can read more about Fanger comfort calculations on the EnergyPlus Thermal Comfort page.
EPC PROCESS IN SCOTLAND

DesignBuilder v3.2 includes SBEM 4.1.e and is approved for use in generating Scottish EPCs and Section 6
Building Regulations Compliance reports. It is not yet approved in England and Wales, Northern Ireland and
Republic of Ireland.
The following existing inputs are now required for Scottish assessments (project details):
UPRN: Unique Property Reference Number-extended for Scottish use (10 digits as oppose to 12 digits
for rest of UK)
Building Inspection Date
Transaction Type
Primary Energy conversion factor for District heating Systems (only available once a district heating
system has been specified)
The following are new parameters introduced in SBEM v4.1.e:
- 1160 -
1. Project details
a. Your email address
b. Accreditation scheme web address
c. Restriction status of xml
d. EPBD Recast (new buildings only)
2. On calculation dialogue (EPC)
England and Wales Asset Rating
Guidance on providing the E & W Asset Rating for Scottish EPCs

When you have completed the building specification and QA checking ready to do final EPC calculations then
you will be ready to produce a comparative E + W Asset Rating. You may be wise to backup your dsb file
before doing this.
Simplified Process
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Temporarily change the UPRN to a 12 digit number as required for E&W assessments, for example
you could add 00 to the beginning of the correct UPRN. This is set in Model Options on the Project
Details tab.
Click on the Calculate tab and Update. Select Assessment Type EPC England or EPC Wales
When calculation complete note down the numerical Rating from the EPC or Summary Report. Check
on the summary report that the Weather is set to GLA. If not then use the more detailed instructions
below
Reset UPRN
Enter E & W Asset Rating on Calculate dialogue, check that calculation type is set the EPC Scotland
Detailed Process
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Temporarily change the UPRN to a 12 digit number as required for E&W assessments
At site level, set the location to Glasgow.
Click on the Calculate tab and Update. Select Assessment Type 'EPC England' or 'EPC Wales'
When calculation complete note down the numerical Rating from the EPC or Summary Report.
Reset UPRN
Reset location to Scotland and enter E & W Asset Rating on Calculate dialogue, checking that
calculation type is now set the EPC Scotland.
CALCULATING FAN PRESSURE RISE

If the fan pressure rise is not known it can be calculated approximately from Specific Fan Power (SFP) data
using:
Delta P = 1000 * SFP * Fan total efficiency
Annex E of ISO 5801 shows that by rearranging the formula it can be derived that the SFP is a function of fan
pressure divided by the efficiency of the fan system. Therefore the SFP will increase or decrease with a
respective increase or decrease in the system pressure.
The SFP is a function of the volume flow of the fan and the electrical power input and is quoted for a particular
flow rate;
SFP = Pe/ V
Where:
V is volume flow (l/s)
Peis electrical power input (W) to the fan system or complete air movement installation
[Reference FMA, UK, 2006]
- 1161 -
Typical values for various system types are shown in the table below.
System Type
Central mechanical ventilation
including heating, cooling and
heat recovery
Central mechanical ventilation
including heating and cooling
All other systems
Local ventilation units within the
local area, such as
window/wall/roof units, serving
one room/area
Local ventilation units remote from
the local area, such as ceiling void
or roof mounted units, serving one
room/area
Fan coil units (rating weighted
average)
Specific Fan
Power
(W/l-s)
2.5
2.0
1.8
0.5
1.2
0.8
Source ESTA: http://www.esta.org.uk/

Note: In reality the pressure rise across the fan has to meet the pressure drop across the index circuit of the
actual system (i.e. the circuit with highest resistance to airflow). A more accurate estimate of fan pressure can
be obtained by estimating the overall length of the ducting index circuit, assuming its sized on 1 Pa/m, adding
approximately 20% for fittings and pressure drops for specific items such as diffusers, HEPA filters, etc.
IMPORTING CUSTOM TEMPLATES AND COMPONENTS

It can be useful to be able to import components and templates set up outside DesignBuilder to models. This
page explains how to do it. The process is not fully documented and requires a willingness to experiment, but
in most cases it is fairly straightforward. The recommended process is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Export a .ddf file containing similar model data to that which you would like to import.
Rename it to have extension .zip so it can be opened in WinZip, WinRAR or similar zip file editor.
Open the .zip file to see a series of .cdt (compressed .dat files).
Extract the .cdt files and open them in a text editor.
Study the format - there is no documentation to explain the format, but it is usually fairly easy to work
out by reference to the corresponding DesignBuilder dialogs and the headers. Each .cdt file consists of
a line of category ids, followed by a header line which indicates the meaning of the fields below. Each
further line is a record with fields separated using the "#" character. See below for an example of
ActivityTempates.cdt.
If you need to make more widespread edits then it is usually easiest to import the .cdt file into a
spreadsheet. Here the data can be edited and exported again using tab delimiters and replacing tabs
with "#" in a text editor. Note you must avoid including adjacent "#" characters in the .cdt and the
easiest way to ensure this is to search for "##" and replace with "# #". Note the first column starts with
"#".
To create a .ddf file for importing to DesignBuilder use the reverse process. Create the .cdt files (by
modifying equivalent existing files) paying careful attention to all fields. Then create the .ddf by zipping
the .cdt files to be imported and renaming to use the .ddf file extension.
Import the .ddf file to the DesignBuilder model.
- 1162 -
LOCK/UNLOCK MODEL
Accessed from the Tools menu
You can lock the model to ensure that no further changes are possible. This may useful in cases when you
wish to send a model on to colleagues or clients to allow them to view inputs and run calculations but not to
make any changes to the model itself.
To lock the model you must first enter a password which can be used to later to unlock it again. Please make
sure to keep a note of the password when locking the model to ensure that you can unlock it again if
necessary.
- 1163 -
EnergyPlus Background Information

EnergyPlus is the U.S. DOE building energy simulation program for modelling building heating, cooling,
lighting, ventilating, and other energy flows. It builds on the most popular features and capabilities of BLAST
and DOE-2 but also includes many innovative simulation capabilities such as time steps of less than an hour,
modular systems and plant integrated with heat balance-based zone simulation, multizone air flow, thermal
comfort, and photovoltaic systems.
EnergyPlus is a stand-alone simulation program without a 'user friendly' graphical interface which is where
DesignBuilder comes in. We have integrated EnergyPlus tightly within the DesignBuilder environment to allow
you to carry out simulations without any fuss just define your building model, request data and let the
EnergyPlus simulation engine take care of the details.
DesignBuilder has been specifically developed around EnergyPlus allowing most of the EnergyPlus fabric and
glazing data to be input. Databases of building materials, constructions, window panes, window gas, glazing
units and blinds are provided.
HVAC is modelled using the Compact HVAC descriptions. A range of commonly used HVAC system types
can be defined parametrically without the need for complex system layouts. These compact descriptions are
automatically expanded behind-the-scenes into full HVAC simulation data sets prior to simulation.
You can use DesignBuilder to generate IDF files and work with these outside DesignBuilder to access
system functionality not provided by DesignBuilder.
There is a range of EnergyPlus simulators to choose from including the current DOE executable release, the
current DLL release and any interim releases made available by DOE. You can carry out DesignBuilder
simulations via EP-Launch.
See also:
EnergyPlus Documentation
Exporting EnergyPlus IDF Files
EnergyPlus Version Compatibility
EnergyPlus IDF Window Dimensions
Calculation of DesignBuilder Output from EnergyPlus Report Variables
EnergyPlus Errors and Warnings
EnergyPlus Daylight Calculations
EnergyPlus Thermal Comfort
EnergyPlus Date Definition
When DesignBuilder output is different from unprocessed EnergyPlus Output
Custom EnergyPlus Reports
EnergyPlus Daylight Map Output
Results Viewer
ENERGYPLUS DOCUMENTATION
You can download the EnergyPlus user guides at no cost from:
http://apps1.eere.energy.gov/buildings/energyplus/energyplus_documentation.cfm
EXPORTING IDF FILES

You can use DesignBuilder to generate EnergyPlus idf files for use in external simulation environments such
as EP-Launch. There are 4 alternative procedures for doing this:
1.
2.
From the File | Export menu option (preferred method).

By copying the intermediate in.idf file in the EnergyPlus folder.
- 1165 -
3.
4.
Tools | Display simulation input script from Simulation or Heating/Cooling design screens.
Using the DOE executable EnergyPlus simulation option to open the EP-launch application before
simulation.
Note that DesignBuilder will automatically generate compatible IDF files with the target version of EnergyPlus
as set on the Program options dialog.
It is important to set the EnergyPlus version you intend to use before exporting the IDF data.
1. File > Export menu option (recommended)

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Open your DesignBuilder dsb model file.

In the Program options dialog on the EnergyPlus tab, ensure that the recommended executable DOE
version of the most current version of EnergyPlus available on the list is selected (e.g. "Version
7.0.0.036 (Recommended DOE)").
Make sure that you have that version of EnergyPlus downloaded and installed from the DOE website.
Make sure you are at building level or below.
Click on the File > Export > Export EnergyPlus or DBSim input file > Simulation menu option.
2. Copy in.idf in the EnergyPlus folder

An alternative way to generate IDF files is to use the intermediate file in.idf in the EnergyPlus folder which is
generated prior to each DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulation. You should copy this file to a different
filename/location before using it.
Important: You should not generally make any changes to in.idf itself because this file will get overwritten
before the next DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulation and your changes will then be lost.
3. Tools > Display menu option

You can view the input data script used to calculate these results by selecting the Tools > Display simulation
input script menu option. If you do not have the EnergyPlus IDF editor installed, then you should associate
Note: this shows the script stored with the model just before the simulation not the in.idf file stored in the
EnergyPlus folder.
4. DOE executable EnergyPlus simulation option

In the Program options dialog you can select an executable EnergyPlus option and set the execution mode to
4-Executable (EP-Launch). This gives you some control over the IDF data before the simulation. Any
changes made to the IDF data from within EP-Launch will be included in the simulation but will not be retained
for future simulations. See Program options > EnergyPlus for more info on this.
Reading ESO results files back into DesignBuilder

Provided you haven't changed the zone and surface names in the IDF data you can read ESO results files
generated from your modified data back into DesignBuilder for display and analysis.
Tip: If you are already familiar with the EnergyPlus data structure you may find it most convenient to edit
DesignBuilder IDF data using a text editor as it shows more clearly the comments included to help reference
IDF data back to the DesignBuilder model.
ENERGYPLUS VERSION COMPATIBILITY

You should ensure that you have the correct version of EnergyPlus set before exporting IDF data for
use outside DesignBuilder.
- 1166 -
DesignBuilder will automatically generate compatible IDF files with the target version of EnergyPlus as set on
the EnergyPlus tab Program options dialog. If you are generating IDF files for simulation outside
DesignBuilder you should note that, by default, DesignBuilder targets an internal version of EnergyPlus which
has an extended IDD data definition file to allow:
1.
2.
3.
Surfaces of up to 330 vertices.

Shading surfaces of up to 33 vertices.
Up to 400 zones in compact HVAC systems.
So if you attempt to use IDF files generated for internal versions of EnergyPlus in a version of EnergyPlus
supplied by DOE, you may find some surface or HVAC data errors related to the above changes. To avoid this
situation you should either:
1.
2.
Explicitly target your DOE EnergyPlus installation by making the appropriate setting on the Program
options dialog (preferred option), or
Carry the DesignBuilder IDD extensions over to your standalone version of EnergyPlus by copying
Energy+.idd from the DesignBuilder EnergyPlus folder (use the File > Folder > EnergyPlus folder menu
command) to your standalone EnergyPlus folder (e.g. C:\EnergyPlusV2-0-0).
ENERGYPLUS IDF WINDOW DIMENSIONS

The window dimensions supplied to EnergyPlus are the total opening size (window size including the frame),
but deflated by an amount equal to the width of the window frame. The deflation is required because
EnergyPlus expects window dimensions excluding the frame whereas DesignBuilder openings include the
frame. DesignBuilder takes this approach because it is usually more convenient to enter the size of the
opening in the fabric.
The default window areas generated by DB should correspond with the Window to wall % (WWR) setting on
the Openings tab , provided you are using either Continuous horizontal or Preferred height facade types.
Tip: switching off frames on the Openings tab causes EnergyPlus windows of the expected dimensions to be
generated given the simplistic 'window area divided by total wall area' calculation.
CALCULATION OF DESIGNBUILDER OUTPUT FROM ENERGYPLUS REPORT

VARIABLES
At the end of an EnergyPlus simulation DesignBuilder reads the EnergyPlus output file eplusout.eso. The
format of this file is described in EnergyPlus documentation. The table below explains how the raw
EnergyPlus output is processed to create DesignBuilder output. The Environmental/Comfort Output column
refers to the data shown in DesignBuilder output screens. EnergyPlus Report variable column data shows
report variable names with the units in square brackets. The units should be omitted when using the report
variables in IDF data. The Area column indicates the zone, surface, component etc.
Environmental/C
omfort Output
Internal air temperature
Internal radiant
temperature
EnergyPlus Report
Variable
Zone Mean Air Temperature
[C]
Zone Mean Radiant
Temperature [C]
Internal operative
temperature
Relative Humidity
Area
ZoneId
ZoneId
ZoneId
Zone Air Relative Humidity
- 1167 -
Notes*
ZoneId
0.5 x (Zone Mean Air

Temperature + Zone
Mean Radiant
Temperature)
[%]
Fanger PMV
FangerPMV
PEOPLE ZoneId
Pierce PMV ET
PiercePMVET
PEOPLE ZoneId
Pierce PMV SET

Pierce Discomfort Index
(DISC)
Pierce Thermal Sens.
Index (TSENS)
Kansas Uni TSV
Discomfort hrs (summer
clothing)
Discomfort hrs (winter
clothing)
PiercePMVSET
PEOPLE ZoneId
PierceDISC
PEOPLE ZoneId
PierceTSENS
PEOPLE ZoneId
KsuTSV
Time Not Comfortable
Summer Clothes [hr]
Time Not Comfortable Winter
Clothes [hr]
Time Not Comfortable
Summer or Winter Clothes
[hr]
PEOPLE ZoneId
Discomfort hrs (all

clothing)
PEOPLE ZoneId
PEOPLE ZoneId
PEOPLE ZoneId
Fabric and ventilation
Glazing heat gain
Window Heat Gain [W] Window Heat Loss [W] Window Transmitted Solar
[W]
SurfaceId
Window Transmitted
Solar is subtracted so
that Glazing heat gain
represents the transfer
of all heat through the
window excluding beam
and diffuse short-wave
solar heat effects. This
makes it more
comparable with the
opaque surface
conduction results.
NB The subtraction of
solar from glazing heat
gain is done as a post
process on the output
results and does not
affect the simulation
itself.
Walls, Roofs, Ceilings

(int), Floors (int), Floors
(ext), Ground floors,
Partitions (int), Doors
and vents
External infiltration
External natural
ventilation
External mechanical
ventilation
Opaque Surface Inside Face

Conduction [W]
Zone Infiltration Sensible
Heat Loss [J] + Zone
Infiltration Sensible Heat Gain
[J]
Zone Ventilation Sensible
Heat Gain [J] + Zone
Ventilation Sensible Heat
Loss [J]
Zone Ventilation Sensible
Heat Gain [J] + Zone
Ventilation Sensible Heat
Loss [J]
- 1168 -
SurfaceId
ZoneId
Scheduled Natural
ventilation only
ZoneId
Scheduled Natural
ventilation only
ZoneId
Scheduled Natural
ventilation only and only
when the Mechanical
ventilation method model
option is set to 1-Room

ventilation
Internal Air
External Air
AirflowNetwork Mixing
Sensible Loss Rate [W] +
AirflowNetwork Mixing
Sensible Gain Rate [W]
AirflowNetwork Infiltration
Sensible Loss Rate [W]+
AirflowNetwork Infiltration
Sensible Gain Rate [W]
ZoneId
Calculated Natural
ventilation only
ZoneId
Calculated Natural
ventilation only
Airflow
Zone Mechanical Ventilation
Air Change Rate [ach]
ZoneId
Zone Ventilation Air Change

Rate [ach]
ZoneId
Zone Infiltration Air Change

Rate [ach]
ZoneId
ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT#ZoneId#TaskLi
ghts* [J]
Mech Vent + Nat Vent +

Infiltration
Calculated as the sum of
the 3 EnergyPlus reports
in the next column
Summed across blocks

and building using
volume-weighted
average
and building using
volume-weighted
average
and building using
volume-weighted
average
Internal Gains
Task lighting gains
General lighting gains
ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT#ZoneId#Gener
alLights* [J]
Miscellaneous gains
ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT#ZoneId#02:Inte
riorEquipment* [J]
Process gains
ELECTRIC
- 1169 -
The 'GeneralLights'
ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT
EnergyPlus output is a
lighting fuel consumption
and is summed to give
the Lighting fuel
consumption (below).
The gain to the zone is
calculated from this in
each zone by multiplying
by (1 - Return air
fraction).
The '02' ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT
EnergyPlus output is the
miscellaneous internal
gains fuel consumption
and is summed to give
the Room fuel
consumption (below).
The gain to the zone is
calculated from this in
each zone by multiplying
by (1 - Fraction lost).
The '03' ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT
riorEquipment* [J]
Catering gains
Computer and equipment

gains
Occupancy gains
ELECTRIC
riorEquipment* [J]
ELECTRIC
riorEquipment* [J]
Zone People Sensible Heat
Gain [J]

process internal gains
fuel consumption and is
summed to give the
Room fuel consumption
(below). The gain to the
zone is calculated from
this in each zone by
multiplying by (1 Fraction lost).
The '04' ELECTRIC
EQUIPMENT
catering internal gains
fuel consumption and is
summed to give the
Room fuel consumption
(below). The gain to the
zone is calculated from
this in each zone by
multiplying by (1 Fraction lost).
ZoneId
Solar Gains Exterior

Windows
Zone Transmitted Solar [W]
ZoneId
Solar Gains Interior

Windows
Zone Diff Solar from Interior

Windows [W] + Zone Beam
Solar from Interior Windows
[W]
ZoneId
Zone Sensible Cooling
Zone/Sys Sensible Cooling

Rate [W]
ZoneId
Zone Sensible Heating
Zone/Sys Sensible Heating

Rate [W]
ZoneId
Overall sensible cooling

energy to the zone from
the HVAC system (not
energy consumption)
Overall sensible heating
energy to the zone from
the HVAC system (not
energy consumption)
System Heat Flows

Zone Heating
Zone Heating
Ideal Loads Sensible Heating

Rate [W]
Total Water Heating Coil Rate
[W]
Zone Heating
Heating Coil Rate [W]
Zone Heating
Zone Heating

[W]
Preheat
AHU Heating

[W]
- 1170 -
ZoneId Ideal
Loads Air
ZoneId REHEAT
COIL
ZoneId REHEAT
COIL
ZoneId AHU
HEATING COIL
ZoneId HEATING
COIL
AHU PREHEAT
COIL
AHU HEATING
COIL
Simple HVAC convective

VAV/CAV Hot water
reheat coils
VAV/CAV Electric reheat
coils
Unitary single zone
Fan coil
VAV/CAV Gas/Electric
preheat coils
VAV/CAV Hot water
coils
AHU Heating
AHU HEATING
COIL
Total Cooling
Ideal Loads Total Cooling

Rate [W]
ZoneId Ideal
Loads Air
Total Water Cooling Coil Rate

[W]
DX Coil Total Cooling Rate
[W]
DX Coil Total Cooling Rate
[W]
Total Water Cooling Coil Rate
[W]
AHU COOLING
COIL
AHU COOLING
COIL
ZoneId AHU
COOLING COIL
ZoneId COOLING
COIL
Ideal Loads Sensible Cooling

Rate [W]
ZoneId Ideal
Loads Air
Sensible Water Cooling Coil

Rate [W]
DX Coil Sensible Cooling
Rate [W]
DX Coil Sensible Cooling
Rate [W]
Sensible Water Cooling Coil
Rate [W]
AHU COOLING
COIL
AHU COOLING
COIL
ZoneId AHU
COOLING COIL
ZoneId COOLING
COIL
Total Cooling
Total Cooling
Total Cooling
Total Cooling
Sensible Cooling
Sensible Cooling
Sensible Cooling
Sensible Cooling
Sensible Cooling
VAV/CAV with
Gas/Electric AHU
heating coils and Unitary
multizone
and ASHRAE Cooling
design
VAV/CAV with Chilled
water coils
Unitary Multizone
Unitary single zone
Fan coil
and ASHRAE Cooling
design
VAV/CAV with Chiller
water
Unitary multizone
Unitary single zone
Fan coil
Fuel breakdown (building level)
Heat Generator
Boiler {Electric/Gas etc}

Consumption Rate +
BaseBoard Electric
Consumption +
DX Heating Coil Electric
Consumption +
DX Heating Coil Electric
Defrost Consumption +
DX Heating Coil Crankcase
Heater Consumption +
Heating Coil Electric
Consumption +
Heating Coil Gas
Consumption +
Heating Coil Rate (electric)
Compact and
Detailed HVAC
Note: CoP for direct gas

coils is assumed to be
0.8 and direct electric
coils 1.0.
Heat generator fuel =

Heating load / Heating
system CoP
Heat Generator
Simple HVAC
- 1171 -
Note: the Heating

system CoP is defined
separately for each
zone.
Chiller
Chiller Electric Power +

DX Cooling Coil Electric
Consumption +
Chiller Cond Fan Electric
Consumption +
Evap Cooler Electric Power
Compact and
Detailed HVAC
Chiller fuel = Cooling

load / Cooling system
CoP
Chiller
Simple HVAC
AHU SUPPLY
FAN
ZoneId AHU
SUPPLY FAN
ZoneId SUPPLY
FAN
HOT WATER
LOOP HW
SUPPLY PUMP +
CHILLED WATER
LOOP CHW
SUPPLY PUMP +
CHILLED WATER
LOOP CNDW
SUPPLY PUMP
Simple HVAC with
2-Separate fans
and pumps
Auxiliary option
System Fans
System Fans
System Fans
System Pumps
Pump Electric Consumption

[J]
System Fans
System Pumps
ELECTRIC
riorEquipment
Simple HVAC with

2-Separate fans
and pumps
Auxiliary option
Auxiliary Energy
ELECTRIC
riorEquipment
Simple HVAC with

1-NCM Auxiliary
option
DHW
Domestic Hot Water

Consumption [m3]
ZoneId DHW 1
Note: the Cooling

system CoP is defined
separately for each
zone.
VAV/CAV with Chiller
water, Unitary multizone
Unitary single zone
Fan coil
Auxiliary Energy =
Auxiliary energy
(kWh/m2) x Floor area
(m2)
DHW energy (kWh) =
1000 (kg/m3) x 4.187
(KJ/kg-K) x (Domestic
Hot Water Consumption
[m3]) x (Delivery water
temperature - Mains
water temperature) /
DHW CoP
Where:
DHW CoP is Heat
- 1172 -
generator CoP when

using 1-Central heating
boiler DHW type.
(Preheat Heating Coil

Rate + Distr loss if
appropriate) / Preheat
CoP
Preheat Energy
Lighting
Room Electricity
Room Gas
Room Oil
Room Solid
Room Bottled gas
Room Other
Fuel totals (building level)

Electricity
Gas
2-Natural gas
Oil
3-Oil
4-Coal + 7-Anthracite +
8-Smokeless fuel
(including coke)
5-LPG + 6-Biogas
9-Dual fuel appliances
(mineral + wood) + 10Biomass + 11-Waste
heat
Solid
Bottled gas
Other fuel consumption
CO2 production (building level)

Calculated from Fuel
totals above using locally
published CO2 emission
factors from the
Emissions tab on the
Legislative regions
dialog accessed from the
Site level on the Regions
model data tab.
CO2
Site Weather data
Outside dry-bulb
temperature
Simulation: Direct
from EPW - spot
value,
Outdoor Dry Bulb
Cooling design:
Outdoor Dry Bulb
- spot value.
- 1173 -
For Cooling design,

value is initialised from
user input before
calculation is run but is
updated with E+ value
after the calculation.
Simulation: Direct
from EPW - spot
value,
Outside dew-point
temperature
Outdoor Dew Point
Direct normal solar
Direct Solar
Cooling design:
Outdoor Dew
Point - spot value.
Simulation:
Direct from EPW preceding hour,
Cooling design:
Direct Solar preceding hour.
Simulation: Direct
from EPW preceding hour,
Diffuse horizontal solar
Diffuse Solar
Cooling design:
Diffuse Solar preceding hour.
Simulation: Direct
from EPW - spot
value,
Wind speed
Wind Speed
Cooling design:
Wind Speed preceding hour.
Simulation: Direct
from EPW - spot
value,
Wind direction
Wind Direction
Cooling design:
Assumed wind is
from North.
Simulation: Direct
from EPW - spot
value,
Atmospheric pressure
Outdoor Barometric Pressure
Solar altitude
Solar Altitude Angle
Solar azimuth
Solar Azimuth Angle
Cooling
design:Outdoor
Barometric
Pressure preceding hour.
Simulation:
Calculated - spot
value,
Cooling
design:Solar
Altitude Angle preceding hour.
Simulation:
Calculated - spot
value,
Cooling
design:Solar
Azimuth Angle -
- 1174 -
Estimated from elevation

before cooling design
calc is run but E+ value
used after calculation.
For Cooling design, solar

positions are initialised
with calculated values
before calculation is run
but are updated with E+
values after the
calculation.
Calculated simulation
data is based on 'spot
values' on the hour so in
this case the value for
12:00 is the value
exactly at midday.
preceding hour.
* Variables shown in green represent EnergyPlus output.
'Direct from EPW' means that the values in the hourly weather file itself are displayed.
EnergyPlus hourly output always represents totals and averages over the preceding hour so data for 12:00 is
for the period 11:01 to 12:00.
See also: When DesignBuilder output is different from unprocessed EnergyPlus Output
ENERGYPLUS ERRORS AND WARNINGS

A file eplusout.err is generated following each EnergyPlus simulation in the EnergyPlus folder. It may contain
three levels of errors (Warning, Severe, Fatal) as well as the possibility of just message lines. These errors
may be duplicated in other files (such as the standard output file) and are described more completely in the
EnergyPlus Output Details and Examples documents.
Errors
1
** Severe
** Did not find "Until:
22:00" in list of Objects
You may have entered a semi-colon character (;) at the end of one of the lines in a Compact schedule
when you meant to enter a comma (,).
** Severe ** Problem in interior solar distribution calculation (CHKBKS)

**
~~~
**
Solar Distribution = FullInteriorExterior will not work in
Zone=78474
**
~~~
**
because vertex 3 of back surface=W_73536_2_0_0 is in front
of receiving surface=W_78474_3_0_0
**
~~~
**
(Dot Product indicator=1.4966)
**
~~~
**
Check surface geometry; if OK, use Solar Distribution =
FullExterior instead.
The 3-Full interior and exterior solar distribution option is selected but one or more zone in the model is
non-convex. Note that DesignBuilder is configured by default to check for this condition and provides
more friendly error messages.
- 1175 -
** Severe ** For Ideal Loads ZONE 21438 Ideal Loads serving Zone 21438
** ~~~ ** ..the supply air temperature for cooling [10.00] is greater than
the zone cooling setpoint [8.99].
This severe error can occur when using Simple HVAC, or Cooling design calculations with Operative
control in zones with strong radiant heat gains causing high radiant temperatures (e.g. un-insulated roof
or zone is highly glazed). The supply air temperature is fixed (to 10C in the above example) but the
zone air temperature must be cooled lower than this (8.99C in the above example) to give the required
operative setpoint (.e.g. 24 C). Operative temperature, Top, is calculated as:
Top= 0.5 x (Ta + Tr)
where:
Top is the operative temperature.
Ts is the air supply temperature.
Ta is the zone air temperature (T a must be > Ts).
Tr is the zone radiant temperature.
So there is a requirement:
Tr
max
<= 2 Top - Ts
If the zone radiant temperature is higher than Tr max and Operative temperature control is used then this severe error will occur.
The solution may be to use Air temperature control and to reduce the radiant temperatures using solar shading/insulation as appropriate.
See the discussion on Operative temperature control under Calculation options for more on this.
** Severe ** Problem in interior solar distribution calculation (CHKBKS)

**
~~~
**
Solar Distribution = FullInteriorExterior will not work
in Zone=42272
**
~~~
**
because vertex 6 of back surface=F_42272_10106_0_10277 is
in front of receiving surface=W_42272_9_0_0
**
~~~
**
(Dot Product indicator=7.3314)
**
~~~
**
Check surface geometry; if OK, use Solar Distribution =
FullExterior instead.
One or more zones is non-convex which makes the model incompatible with the 3-Full interior and
exterior solar distribution algorithm. This error can also lead to temperature out of bounds errors.
** Severe ** Temperature out of bounds (637.89) for surface=W_43311_4_0_0

**
~~~
** in Zone=43276
**
~~~
** Occurrence info=BRUSSELS - BEL IWEC DATA WMO#=064510, 01/04
13:30 - 13:32
**
~~~
** A temperature out of bounds problem can be caused by several
things. The user
**
~~~
** should check the weather environment, the level of internal
gains with respect
**
~~~
** to the zone, and the thermal properties of their materials
among other things.
**
~~~
** A common cause is a building with no thermal mass -- all
materials with
**
~~~
** Regular-R definitions.
The temperature of a surface has become too high/low, during the simulation. This error can be caused
by highly glazed zones with holes taking up all or most of the floor. Some examples are double facade
cavities, solar chimneys and atria-type zones. In some cases EnergyPlus isn't able to deal with such
zones. The issue often isn't really overheating so much as instability in the solution - very low
temperatures can result from the same situation. Here are some actions which have helped get round
this problem in the past:
- 1176 -
1.
2.
3.
4.
Make holes in the floor smaller. Bear in mind that with the default "Full exterior" solar distribution
option, all solar gain is received by the floor, but if there is no floor due to a full-sized hole then a
very large gain could be absorbed by a very small area of floor surface.
Avoid R-value (or other very low mass materials) on the inside surface of constructions.
It may be possible to use zone merging to combine zones which are being modelled individually
separated by large holes. This can sometimes help to avoid the error.
Try switching off the Generate fully enclosed zones Advanced model option. This has helped in a
few cases because the construction applied to surfaces used to fill in the gaps in zone geometry is
low mass and has very high R-value which could cause a build-up of heat.
- 1177 -
Warnings
** Warning ** GetHTSubSurfaceData: A Multiplier > 1.0 for window/glass door

W_67_4_0_0_0_0
**
~~~
** in conjunction with SolarDistribution = FullExterior or
FullInteriorExterior
**
~~~
** can cause inaccurate shadowing on the window and/or
**
~~~
** inaccurate interior solar distribution from the window.
The Lump similar windows on surface model option has been selected which causes DesignBuilder to
use the EnergyPlus Window Multiplier option to speed up simulations. The message is warning that the
Window Multiplier option, when used in conjunction with the Full exterior or Full interior and exterior
calculation options can lead to inaccurate distributions of solar radiation around the room.
** Warning ** GetSurfaceData:The total number of floors, walls, roofs and

internal mass surfaces in Zone 59
**
~~~
** is < 6. This may cause an inaccurate zone heat balance
calculation.
This warning is often generated for pitched roofs and for interior zones separated by virtual partitions and
can safely be ignored.
** Warning ** GetGroundTemps: Some values for "GroundTemperatures" fall

outside the range of 15-25C.
**
~~~
** These values may be inappropriate. Please consult the Input
Output Reference for more details.
The default ground temperatures used in DesignBuilder is 14degC. This may be inappropriate in some
cases and EnergyPlus is warning about this. You should take care to enter realistic ground temperatures
bearing in mind the advice given in the Ground Modelling section.
** Warning ** DXFOut: Could not triangulate surface="W_7469_0_0_1",

type="Wall", check surface vertex order(entry)
Caused by a minor bug in EnergyPlus when creating a DXF representation of the model - it is not always
able to fully triangulate all surfaces and generate a full set of surfaces. You can ignore the message for
the purposes of simulation results.
** Warning ** Base surface does not surround subsurface (CHKSBS), Overlap

Status=No-Overlap
**
~~~
**
The base surround errors occurred 3 times.
**
~~~
** Surface "W_7376_3_0_0" misses SubSurface "W_7376_3_0_0_0_0"
These warnings are usually a reporting bug in EnergyPlus v2.0 and earlier.
** Warning ** Calculated design cooling/heating load for zone=78474 is zero.

**
~~~
** Check ZONE SIZING and ZONE CONTROL:THERMOSTATIC inputs.
Cooling/heating may have been switched off in this zone or there is no cooling/heating load (i.e. the zone
does not require any cooling/heating).
For a zone sizing run, there must be at least 1 Zone Sizing object input.
Can usually be ignored.
- 1178 -
** Severe ** CAUTION -- Interzone surfaces are usually in different zones

**
~~~
** Surface=F_59604_10071_0_10046, Zone=59604
**
~~~
** Surface=C_72917_1_0_0, Zone=59604
This warning can be safely ignored. These messages can be prevented by switching on the Surfaces
within zone treated as adiabatic option in Simulation Advanced Calculation Options
** Warning ** CAUTION -- Interzone surfaces are usually in different zones
This warning will occur for partitions between 2 merged zones. Because of the merging, the zone is the
same on both sides of the partition and EnergyPlus flags this as a potential mistake. To avoid this message,
you can select the 'Surfaces within zone treated as adiabatic model option for Heating design, Cooling
design and Simulation calculation options. In this case such partitions will instead be modelled using an
adiabatic formulation where the Outside face environment surface is the same as the actual surface and
the warning is not generated. The warning can in any case be safely ignored.
ENERGYPLUS DAYLIGHT CALCULATIONS

The EnergyPlus daylighting model, in conjunction with the thermal analysis, determines the energy impact of
daylighting strategies based on analysis of daylight availability, site conditions, window management in
response to solar gain and glare, and various lighting control strategies.
The daylighting calculations are carried out during the simulation in 3 main steps:
1.
2.
Daylight factors, which are ratios of interior illuminance or luminance to exterior horizontal illuminance,
are calculated and stored. The user specifies the coordinates of one or two reference points in each
daylit zone. EnergyPlus then integrates over the area of each exterior window in the zone to obtain the
contribution of direct light from the window to the illuminance at the reference points, and the
contribution of light that reflects from the walls, floor and ceiling before reaching the reference points.
Window luminance and window background luminance, which are used to determine glare, are also
calculated. Taken into account are such factors as sky luminance distribution, window size and
orientation, glazing transmittance, inside surface reflectances, sun control devices such as movable
window shades, and external obstructions. Dividing daylight illuminance or luminance by exterior
illuminance yields daylight factors. These factors are calculated for the hourly sun positions on sunpaths for representative days of the run period.
A daylighting calculation is performed each heat-balance time step when the sun is up. In this
calculation the illuminance at the reference points in each zone is found by interpolating the stored
daylight factors using the current time steps sun position and sky condition, then multiplying by the
exterior horizontal illuminance. If glare control has been specified, the program will automatically deploy
- 1179 -
3.
window shading, if available, to decrease glare below a specified comfort level. A similar option uses
window shades to automatically control solar gain.
The electric lighting control system is simulated to determine the lighting energy needed to make up the
difference between the daylighting illuminance level and the design illuminance. Finally, the zone
lighting electric reduction factor is passed to the thermal calculation, which uses this factor to reduce
the heat gain from lights. The EnergyPlus daylighting calculation is derived from the daylighting
calculation in DOE-2.1E, which is described in [Winkelmann, 1983] and [Winkelmann and Selkowitz,
1985]. There are two major differences between the two implementations: (1) In EnergyPlus daylight
factors are calculated for four different sky typesclear, clear turbid, intermediate, and overcast; in
DOE-2 only two sky types are usedclear and overcast. (2) In EnergyPlus the clear-sky daylight
factors are calculated for hourly sun-path sun positions several times a year whereas in DOE-2 these
daylight factors are calculated for a set of 20 sun positions that span the annual range of sun positions
for a given geographical location.
ENERGYPLUS THERMAL COMFORT

EnergyPlus includes a sophisticated building thermal analysis tool allowing you to determine whether the
environmental control strategy will be sufficient for the occupants to be thermally comfortable. This section
provides background on thermal comfort and gives an overview of state of the art thermal comfort models.
Background on Thermal Comfort Models

Throughout the last few decades, researchers have been exploring the thermal, physiological and
psychological response of people in their environment in order to develop mathematical models to predict
these responses. Researchers have empirically debated building occupants' thermal responses to the
combined thermal effect of the personal, environmental and physiological variables that influence the
condition of thermal comfort.
There are two personal variables that influence the condition of thermal comfort: the thermal resistance of the
clothing (Icl), and the metabolic rate (H/ADu). The thermal resistance of the clothing (Icl) is measured in units
of "clo." The 1985 ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals (3) suggests multiplying the summation of the
individual clothing items clo value by a factor of 0.82 for clothing ensembles.
The environmental variables that influence the conditions of thermal comfort include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
Air Temperature (Ta),

Mean Radiant Temperature (Tr),
Relative air velocity (v),
Water vapor pressure in ambient air (Pa)
The Air Temperature (Ta), a direct environmental index, is the dry-bulb temperature of the environment. The
Mean Radiant Temperature (Tr) is a rationally derived environmental index defined as the uniform black-body
temperature that would result in the same radiant energy exchange as in the actual environment. The Relative
air velocity (v) a direct environmental index is a measure of the air motion obtainable via a hot wire or vane
anemometers. The Water vapor pressure in ambient air (Pa) is a direct environmental index.
The physiological variables that influence the conditions of thermal comfort include:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Skin Temperature (Tsk),

Core or Internal Temperature (Tcr),
Sweat Rate,
Skin Wettedness (w),
Thermal Conductance (K) between the core and skin.
Where the Skin Temperature (Tsk), the Core Temperature (Tcr) and the Sweat Rate are physiological indices.
The Skin Wettedness (w) is a rationally derived physiological index defined as the ratio of the actual sweating
rate to the maximum rate of sweating that would occur if the skin were completely wet. One more
consideration is important in dealing with thermal comfort - the effect of asymmetrical heating or cooling. This
could occur when there is a draft or when there is a radiant flux incident on a person (which is what is of
primary interest to us here). Fanger (5) noted that the human regulatory system is quite tolerant of
- 1180 -
asymmetrical radiant flux. A reasonable upper limit on the difference in mean radiant temperature (Tr) from
one direction to the opposing direction is 15_ (1). This limit is lower if there is a high air velocity in the
zone.
DesignBuilder Thermal Comfort Calculator

You can use the DesignBuilder Thermal Comfort Calculator to evaluate
Mathematical Models for Predicting Thermal Comfort

Many researchers have been exploring ways to predict the thermal sensation of people in their environment
based on the personal, environmental and physiological variables that influence thermal comfort. From the
research done, some mathematical models that simulate occupants' thermal response to their environment
have been developed. Most thermal comfort prediction models use a seven or nine point thermal sensation
scale, as in the following tables.
Seven point Thermal Sensation Scale:
3 hot
2 warm
1 slightly warm
0 neutral
-1 slightly cool
-2 cool
-3 cold
Nine point Thermal Sensation Scale:
4 very hot
3 hot
2 warm
1 slightly warm
0 neutral
-1 slightly cool
-2 cool
-3 cold
-4 very cold
The most notable models have been developed by P.O. Fanger (the Fanger Comfort Model), the J. B. Pierce
Foundation (the Pierce Two-Node Model), and researchers at Kansas State University (the KSU Two-Node
Model). Berglund (6) presents a detailed description of the theory behind these three models.
Note: for all Thermal Comfort reporting: Though the published values for thermal comfort vote have a
discrete scale (e.g. 3 to +3 or 4 to +4), the calculations in EnergyPlus are carried out on a continuous scale
and, thus, reporting may be off the scale with specific conditions encountered in the space. This is not
necessarily an error in EnergyPlus rather a different approach that does not take the limits of the discrete
scale values into account.
The main similarity of the three models is that all three apply an energy balance to a person and use the
energy exchange mechanisms along with experimentally derived physiological parameters to predict the
thermal sensation and the physiological response of a person due to their environment. The models differ
somewhat in the physiological models that represent the human passive system (heat transfer through and
from the body) and the human control system (the neural control of shivering, sweating and skin blood flow).
The models also differ in the criteria used to predict thermal sensation.
Fanger comfort Model

Fanger's Comfort model was the first one developed. It was published first in 1967 (7) and then in 1972 (2),
and helped set the stage for the other two models. The mathematical model developed by P.O. Fanger is
probably the most well known of the three models and is the easiest to use because it has been put in both
chart and graph form.
- 1181 -
Predicted Mean Vote (PMV) and Predicted Percentage Dissatisfied (PPD)

Fanger developed the model based on the research he performed at Kansas State University and the
Technical University of Denmark. Fanger used the seven-point form of a thermal sensation scale along with
numerous experiments involving human subjects in various environments. He related the subjects in response
to the variables, which influence the condition of thermal comfort. Fanger's model is based upon an energy
analysis that takes into account all the modes of energy loss (L) from the body, including: the convection and
radiant heat loss from the outer surface of the clothing, the heat loss by water vapour diffusion through the
skin, the heat loss by evaporation of sweat from the skin surface, the latent and dry respiration heat loss and
the heat transfer from the skin to the outer surface of the clothing. The model assumes that the person is
thermally at steady state with his environment. By determining the skin temperature and evaporative sweat
rate that a thermally comfortable person would have in a given set of conditions, the model calculates the
energy loss (L). Then, using the thermal sensation votes from subjects at KSU and Denmark, a Predicted
Mean Vote (PMV) thermal sensation scale is based on how the energy loss (L) deviates from the metabolic
rate (M).
Fanger proposed that the condition for thermal comfort is that the skin temperature and sweat secretion lies
within narrow limits. Fanger obtained data from climate chamber experiments, in which sweat rate and skin
temperature were measured on people who considered themselves comfortable at various metabolic rates.
Fanger proposed that optimal conditions for thermal comfort were expressed by the regression line of skin
temperature and sweat rate on metabolic rate in data from these experiments. In this way an expression for
optimal thermal comfort can be deduced from the metabolic rate, clothing insulation and environmental
conditions.
The final equation for optimal thermal comfort is fairly complex and need not concern us here. Fanger has
solved the equations by computer and presented the results in the form of diagrams from which optimal
comfort conditions can be read given a knowledge of metabolic rate and clothing insulation.
Fanger extended the usefulness of his work by proposing a method by which the actual thermal sensation
could be predicted. His assumption for this was that the sensation experienced by a person was a function of
the physiological strain imposed on him by the environment. This he defined as "the difference between the
internal heat production and the heat loss to the actual environment for a man kept at the comfort values for
skin temperature and sweat production at the actual activity level" (Fanger 1970). He calculated this extra load
for people involved in climate chamber experiments and plotted their comfort vote against it. Thus he was able
to predict what comfort vote would arise from a given set of environmental conditions for a given clothing
insulation and metabolic rate. Tables of PMV are available for different environments for given clothing and
metabolic rates. Such tables form the basis of ISO standard 7730 (see summary comfort categories below).
Note however that his method for PMV is inconsistent with the basic assumptions of his equation (Humphreys
and Nicol 1995).
Fanger realised that the vote predicted was only the mean value to be expected from a group of people, and
he extended the PMV to predict the proportion of any population who will be dissatisfied with the environment.
A person's dissatisfaction was defined in terms of their comfort vote. Those who vote outside the central three
scaling points on the ASHRAE scale were counted as dissatisfied. PPD is defined in terms of the PMV, and
adds no information to that already available in PMV. The distribution of PPD is based on observations from
climate chamber experiments and not from field measurements.
From ISO 7730:2005 Annex A
Comfort categories:
A: PPD < 6%
B: PPD < 10%
C: PPD < 15%
Pierce Two-Node Model

The Pierce Two-Node model was developed at the John B. Pierce Foundation at Yale University. The model
has been continually expanding since its first publication in 1970 (8). The most recent version on the model
appears in the 1986 ASHRAE Transactions (9).
- 1182 -
The Pierce model thermally lumps the human body as two isothermal, concentric compartments, one
representing the internal section or core (where all the metabolic heat is assumed to be generated and the
skin comprising the other compartment). This allows the passive heat conduction from the core compartment
to the skin to be accounted for. The boundary line between two compartments changes with respect to skin
blood flow rate per unit skin surface area (SKBF in L/hm2) and is described by alpha the fraction of total
body mass attributed to the skin compartment (13).
Furthermore, the model takes into account the deviations of the core, skin, and mean body temperature
weighted by alpha from their respective set points. Thermoregulatory effector mechanisms (Regulatory
sweating, skin blood flow, and shivering) are defined in terms of thermal signals from the core, skin and body
(13).
The model for Standard Effective Temperature (SET) also uses skin temperature as part of it's limiting
conditions, but uses skin wettedness (w) rather than sweat rate for the other limiting condition. The values for
Tsk and w are derived from the Pierce `two-node' model of human physiology (see Nevins & Gagge (1972)).
SET relates the real conditions to the (effective) temperature in standard clothing and metabolic rate and 50%
RH which would give the same physiological response. Effective temperature can then be related to
subjective response.
The latest version of the Pierce model (15) uses the concepts of SET* and ET*. The Pierce model converts
the actual environment into a "standard environment" at a Standard Effective Temperature, SET*. SET* is the
dry-bulb temperature of a hypothetical environment at 50% relative humidity for subjects wearing clothing that
would be standard for the given activity in the real environment. Furthermore, in this standard environment,
the same physiological strain, i.e. the same skin temperature and skin wettedness and heat loss to the
environment, would exist as in the real environment. The Pierce model also converts the
actual environment into a environment at an Effective Temperature, ET*, that is the dry-bulb temperature of a
hypothetical environment at 50% relative humidity and uniform temperature (Ta = MRT) where the subjects
would experience the same physiological strain as in the real environment.
In the latest version of the model it is suggested that the classical Fanged PMV be modified by using ET* or
SET* instead of the operative temperature. This gives a new index PMV* which is proposed for dry or humid
environments. It is also suggested that PMV* is very responsive to the changes in vapor permeation efficiency
of the occupants clothing.
Besides PMV*, the Pierce Two Node Model uses the indices TSENS and DISC as predictors of thermal
comfort. Where TSENS is the classical index used by the Pierce foundation, and is a function of the mean
body temperature. DISC is defined as the relative thermoregulatory strain that is needed to bring about a state
of comfort and thermal equilibrium. DISC is a function of the heat stress and heat strain in hot environments
and equal to TSENS in cold environments. In summary, the Pierce Model, for our purposes, uses four thermal
comfort indices; PMVET-a function of ET*, PMVSET- a function of SET*, TSENS and DISC.
KSU Two-Node Model

The KSU two-node model, developed at Kansas State University, was published in 1977 (10). The KSU model
is quite similar to that of the Pierce Foundation. The main difference between the two models is that the KSU
model predicts thermal sensation (TSV) differently for warm and cold environment.
The KSU two-node model is based on the changes that occur in the thermal conductance between the core
and the skin temperature in cold environments, and in warm environments it is based on changes in the skin
wettedness. In this model metabolic heat production is generated in the core which exchanges energy with
the environment by respiration and the skin exchanges energy by convection and radiation. In addition, body
heat is dissipated through evaporation of sweat and/or water vapor diffusion through the skin. These
principles are used in following passive system equations.
Here, control signals, based on set point temperatures in the skin and core, are introduced into passive
system equations and these equations are integrated numerically for small time increments or small
increments in core and skin temperature. The control signals modulate the thermoregulatory mechanism and
regulate the peripheral blood flow, the sweat rate, and the increase of metabolic heat by active muscle
shivering. The development of the controlling functions of skin conductance (KS), sweat rate (Esw), and
shivering (Mshiv) is based on their correlation with the deviations in skin and core temperatures from their set
points.
- 1183 -
The KSU model's TSV was developed from experimental conditions in all temperature ranges and from clo
levels between .05 clo to 0.7 clo and from activities levels of 1 to 6 mets (6).
References
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
ASHRAE, High Intensity Infrared Radiant Heating, 1984 system Handbook, American Society of
Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Atlanta, GA, Chapter 18, 1984.
Fanger, P.O., Thermal Comfort-Analysis and Applications in Environmental Engineering, Danish
Technical Press, Copenhagen, 1970.
ASHRAE, Physiological Principles for Comfort and Health, 1985 Fundamental Handbook, American
Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Atlanta, GA, Chapter 8, 1985.
Du Bois, D. and E.F., A Formula to Estimate Approximate Surface Area, if Height and Weight are
Known, Archives of internal Medicine, Vol.17, 1916.
Fanger, P.O., Radiation and Discomfort, ASHRAE Journal. February 1986.
Berglund, Larry, Mathematical Models for Predicting the Thermal Comfort Response of Building
Occupants, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.84, 1978.
Fanger P.O., Calculation of Thermal Comfort: Introduction of a Basic Comfort Equation, ASHRE
Trans., Vol.73, Pt 2, 1967.
Gagge, A.P., Stolwijk, J. A. J., Nishi, Y., An Effective Temperature Scale Based on a Simple Model of
Human Physiological Regulatory Response, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.70, Pt 1, 1970.
Gagge, A.P., Fobelets, A.P., Berglund, L. G., A Standard Predictive Index of Human Response to the
Thermal Environment, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.92, Pt 2, 1986.
Azer, N.Z., Hsu, S., The prediction of Thermal Sensation from Simple model of Human Physiological
Regulatory Response, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.83, Pt 1, 1977.
Hsu, S., A Thermoregulatory Model for Heat Acclimation and Some of its Application, Ph. D.
Dissertation, Kansas State University, 1977.
ISO., Determination of the PMV and PPD Indices and Specification of the Conditions for Thermal
Comfort, DIS 7730, Moderate Thermal Environment, 1983.
Doherty, T.J., Arens, E., Evaluation of the Physiological Bases of Thermal Comfort Models, ASHRAE
Trans., Vol.94, Pt 1, 1988.
ASHRAE, Physiological Principles and Thermal Comfort, 1993 ASHRAE Handbook- Fundamentals,
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers, Atlanta, GA, Chapter 8,
1993.
Fountain, Marc.E., Huizenga, Charlie, A Thermal Sensation Prediction Tool for Use by the Profession,
ASHRAE Trans., Vol.103, Pt 2, 1997.
Int-Hout, D., Thermal Comfort Calculation / A Computer Model, ASHRAE Trans., Vol.96, Pt
ENERGYPLUS DATE DEFINITION

Field Contents
<Number> / <Number>
<Number> / Month
Month / <Number>
<Number> Weekday in Month
Last Weekday in Month
Interpretation
Month / Day
Day and Month
Month and day
Numbered weekday of month
Last weekday of month
Notes
Month can be one of:
January,
February,
March,
April,
May,
June,
July,
August,
- 1184 -
Example
12 / 31
31 Dec
Dec 31
1st Saturday in April
Last Sunday in October
September,
October,
November,
December.
Abbreviations of the first three characters are also valid.

Weekday can be one of:
Sunday,
Monday,
Tuesday,
Wednesday,
Thursday,
Friday,
Saturday.
Abbreviations of the first three characters are also valid.
WHEN DESIGNBUILDER OUTPUT IS DIFFERENT FROM UNPROCESSED ENERGYPLUS

OUTPUT
At the end of an EnergyPlus simulation DesignBuilder reads the EnergyPlus output file eplusout.eso. Much of
the data is stored and displayed without further processing but in some cases the outputs are processed to
ensure that they are consistent with the DesignBuilder model data. DesignBuilder output data will differ from
the data that can be found in the Simulation Summary tab in these cases:
Simple HVAC Heating and Cooling Fuel

DesignBuilder applies a fuel type and a CoP to the idealised heating and cooling systems used in Simple
HVAC, whereas EnergyPlus displays the unprocessed loads under 'District heating'. This is because the
idealised systems in EnergyPlus are considered to be met directly without use of HVAC equipment through a
district heating/cooling type system.
Simple and Compact HVAC DHW Fuel

Like the heating and cooling in Simple HVAC, the Simple and Compact HVAC DHW system is modelled as a
simple water heater which does not need a heat source so it is considered to be provided by district heating
and loads are displayed directly in EnergyPlus output. In DesignBuilder the DHW loads reported by
EnergyPlus are multiplied by the DHW CoP value at building level (when the DHW type is the Same as
HVAC) or the DHW CoP at zone level for all other DHW type settings.
Compact HVAC VAV/CAV Gas AHU/Preheat coil Fuel

Preheat and AHU heating coils of fuel type 'Gas' will report different fuel consumption values in DesignBuilder
compared with EnergyPlus. This is because DesignBuilder calculates fuel consumption of gas heating coils in
a simple way by multiplying the heating load by a the simple gas heating coil CoP entered on the HVAC tab.
EnergyPlus performs a more complex calculation using the same CoP value but also incorporating
performance curves during the simulation.
Compact HVAC Unitary Cooling Fuel

Unitary cooling coils will report different fuel consumption values in DesignBuilder compared with EnergyPlus.
This is because DesignBuilder calculates unitary cooling fuel consumption a simple way by multiplying the
cooling load by a the simple CoP entered on the HVAC tab. EnergyPlus performs a more complex calculation
using the same CoP value but also incorporating performance curves during the simulation.
- 1185 -
Compact HVAC Unitary Heating and Cooling Fuel

If a distribution loss has been applied then this is added outside of EnergyPlus and won't be included in
EnergyPlus results which do not account for distribution losses.
See also: Calculation of DesignBuilder Output from EnergyPlus Report Variables
CUSTOM ENERGYPLUS REPORTS

EnergyPlus supports literally thousands of different output reports and DesignBuilder v3.2 supports only the
most generally useful of these.
DesignBuilder developers are working on a much more flexible reporting mechanism which will provide
access to all of the EnergyPlus output reports in a future version. In the meantime, if you need to view specific
reports not provided by DesignBuilder, you can follow a process which gives access to any of the EnergyPlus
reports while continuing to run your EnergyPlus simulations from within DesignBuilder. In summary the
process is as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
For HVAC system node temperature, mass flow and humidity ratio outputs make the appropriate
selections under the Miscellaneous Outputs on the Outputs tab of the Simulation Calculation options
dialog.
Any other extra reports required can be added to an IDF file stored in the DesignBuilder EnergyPlus
folder.
Include this IDF file by making a selection in DesignBuilder Simulation Calculation Options.
Run the simulation as normal from DesignBuilder.
Locate the EnergyPlus eso output file generated by the simulation.
View the eso output file using the 3rd party xEsoView utility.
The sections below describe each of the these stages in more detail.
1. Selecting Additional Reports

The purpose of this stage is to create a text file in EnergyPlus IDF format which contains a description of the
extra reports required. The text in this file will be added to the end of the main EnergyPlus IDF input file before
it is read by EnergyPlus.
You should refer to the main EnergyPlus help file InputOutputReference.pdf for descriptions of all of the
EnergyPlus reports and for a detailed description of the required text format. If you are not familiar with the
IDF text formats then you can use the EnergyPlus IDF editor instead to create the file.
Note: The DesignBuilder Support Desk isn't able to respond to questions relating to EnergyPlus use outside
DesignBuilder. DesignBuilder users wishing to use EnergyPlus outside DesignBuilder should direct their
EnergyPlus questions to the EnergyPlus Support Desk.
Nevertheless here is a brief description which should help you to get started with adding reports to an IDF file.
There are 2 ways to edit IDF data:
In any text editor such as Notepad (which comes with Windows) or UltraEdit (an excellent commercial
text editor which includes an IDF keyword highlight option).
Using the IDF Editor supplied with EnergyPlus.
The text editor method is described below.

Create a file having extension .IDF and add IDF text to it in the format described below.
IDF Report Variable Format

The format used by EnergyPlus to define the "reports" (output data) required is described below.
- 1186 -
A single "report" can be thought of as a single set of output data or alternatively as a line of data on a graph
and is defined using a single line of text using this syntax:
Output:Variable, <Object name>, <Report Name>, <Interval>
Output:Variable is an IDF keyword which indicates that what follows is a request for output data.
<Object name> is the name of the object for which data is required, e.g. the zone or the HVAC
component name. In some cases it is possible to enter "*" to indicate that the data is required for all
relevant objects (e.g. all zones).
<Report Name> is the name of the report (output data) required. Thousands of reports are available in
all and you should refer to the EnergyPlus help file for details on what is available.
<Interval> should be one of the following keywords:
o
o
o
o
o
Monthly
Daily
Hourly
Timestep - corresponds to the sub-hourly interval in DesignBuilder terminology.
Detailed - a special interval provided by EnergyPlus where detail down to the level of the HVAC
timesteps can be provided. the actual intervals reported will often vary during the simulation, but
it can at times provide useful debugging information.
For example to generate a new hourly data set for the "Time Heating Setpoint Not Met While Occupied" report
for the zone having IDF name "Block1:Zone1" add this line of text to the IDF file:
Output:Variable, Block1:Zone1, Time Heating Setpoint Not Met While Occupied, hourly;
To generate sub-hourly data on the activity of the ideal loads economiser for all zones use:
Output:Variable, *, Ideal Loads Time Economizer Active, timestep;
Note the use of the "*" character to mean all objects and the semi-colon at the end of the line. For further
clarification on how to specify requests for EnergyPlus outputs you can refer to the Output:Variable data
provided by DesignBuilder in previously generated IDF files.
The above is just one way of obtaining outputs. Once familiar with EnergyPlus reports you can be creative
with use of additional IDF to request further outputs. For example consider using these options.
System node conditions

To view all system node temperatures, mass flow rates and humidity conditions in a model simply add these 3
lines to the IDF file:
Output:Variable, *, System Node Temp, hourly;
Output:Variable, *, System Node MassFlowRate, hourly;
Output:Variable, *, System Node Humidity Ratio, hourly;
This data can be very useful when checking operation of the HVAC system.
Tariff Analysis
These reports can be used to run very sophisticated tariff analyses in EnergyPlus:
UtilityCost:Tariff
UtilityCost:Qualify
UtilityCost:Charge:Simple
UtilityCost:Charge:Block
UtilityCost:Ratchet
UtilityCost:Variable
UtilityCost:Computation
- 1187 -
This example from the EnergyPlus manual shows how to specify a basic utility cost (e.g. cost of kWh of
electricity). The data indicates that Electricity costs a flat 0.08 (currency e.g. - $ or ) per kWh.
TariffExample1,
Electricity:Facility,
kWh;
UtilityCost:Charge:Simple,
ChargeExample1,
TariffExample1,
totalEnergy,
Annual,
EnergyCharges,
0.08;
Life-cycle cost analysis

By adding IDF text you can specify data for construction cost estimating and life cycle cost data for a full lifecycle cost analysis. The relevant reports are as follows:
ComponentCost:Adjustments
ComponentCost:Reference
ComponentCost:LineItem
LifeCycleCost:Parameters
LifeCycleCost:RecurringCosts
LifeCycleCost:NonrecurringCost
LifeCycleCost:UsePriceEscalation
LifeCycleCost:UseAdjustment
Many more examples are provided in the EnergyPlus documentation.
RDD file
You can obtain a full list of available report types for a particular DesignBuilder model by running a quick
simulation and viewing the eplusout.rdd file generated by EnergyPlus.
Note: for each zone, surface and opening in the DesignBuilder model, the IDF name for the object used the
last simulation is displayed on the Options tab.
2. Include the IDF file

Select the IDF file using the controls on the Simulation tab of the Model options dialog under the Advanced
header.
Note: The file must be located in the EnergyPlus folder.
3. Run the simulation

Run the simulation as usual from DesignBuilder.
4. Locate the EnergyPlus eso file

The eplusout.eso output file generated by EnergyPlus can be found in the EnergyPlus folder. If you wish to
keep the output file for future analysis then you should make a copy and rename the copy for future reference
because eplusout.eso will be overwritten during the next simulation.
5. View the eso file

The recommended way to view EnergyPlus results in eso files is through the Results Processor.
- 1188 -
Alternatively you can xESOView, which is a free basic software 3rd party utility. It is not a perfect tool and
outputs are not presentation quality but the software can be very useful for quickly checking results.
xESOView can be downloaded from:
http://xesoview.sourceforge.net/
Once the program is installed, double-clicking on the eso file in Windows Explorer opens the file and loads it
into xEsoView.
The screenshot above shows an example of how to use xEsoView to display the supply air mass flow rate into
a zone.
Note: The DesignBuilder Support Desk cannot provide support for use of xEsoView
ENERGYPLUS DAYLIGHT MAP OUTPUT

EnergyPlus generates a file called eplusmap.csv when one or more zones have daylight control and the
Daylight map simulation output option has been selected for those zones. This file contains a series of grids
for each zone with daylight controls and having daylight map output requested and for each hour of the day in
the simulation. The example output below shows some graphical output for 3 hours for a zone using a
spreadsheet with cells shaded based on illuminance values. This is done using a macro as described in a
forum article by Jean Marais.
- 1189 -
More sophisticated daylight analysis tools using Radiance are also available on the Daylighting screen.
- 1190 -
Support - Getting Help
Support - Getting Help

If you need information that you could not find in this help file you should first check the FAQ and Support
Forum on the Website:
http://www.designbuilder.co.uk/support
If this does not give you the information you need you can send us a support request using a Support Request
Form and DesignBuilder team will endeavour to answer your question by email.
Tutorials
Frequently Asked Questions
TUTORIALS
These video tutorials are provided on demand to all registered DesignBuilder users free of charge. They
mostly last about 10-20 minutes.
Tip: You will probably learn most effectively by "doing" rather than "watching" so make sure to try out the
techniques shown in the tutorials while they are fresh in your mind before moving on to the next tutorial.
Getting Started
The Getting Started tutorials provide an overview of how to create DesignBuilder models and run simulations.
Basics of creating a building model

Basics of running simulations
Basic Geometry
The Basic Geometry series of tutorials explain how to create and modify the blocks used to define building
geometry in DesignBuilder.
Introduction to the DesignBuilder user interface

Creating a model - adding buildings and blocks, drawing guides and snaps
Adding, moving and cloning blocks, deleting objects, increment snap, check dimensions of existing
objects
Rotate, stretch, drag face and construction line tools
Adding roofs basics: roof angle conventions, pitched and extruded roofs
Cut block, use of protractor tool and outline blocks
Zoning blocks by drawing partitions, zone types and zoning protocols
Drawing holes, merging zones and creating an atrium
Adding shading and adjacency modification using component blocks
Drawing arcs, circular shapes and domes
Importing 2-D floor plans from DXF and bitmaps to help draw blocks and partitions
How to create a room in roof
How to draw dormer windows
How to model a smaller zone within a larger zone (e.g. an office in a warehouse)
Basic Model Data

The Basic Model Data tutorials show how to set up data on the Activity, Constructions, Openings, Lighting and
HVAC model data tabs for EnergyPlus simulations.
Overview of the model data tabs and of data inheritance

Starting a new project, adding a building and use of learning mode
Activity data
- 1191 -
Constructions data 1
Constructions data 2
Drawing windows, doors and sub-surfaces, editing openings at building level
Openings model data
Shading data
Lighting and daylight control data
HVAC data (heating, cooling, ventilation, DHW)
Timing, schedules, profiles and holidays
Hourly weather data
Calculations
The Calculations tutorials explain how to set up DesignBuilder EnergyPlus simulations and analyse results.
Heating design calculations for sizing heating systems

Cooling design calculations for sizing cooling systems
Setting up and running simulations
Analysing simulation results
Exporting data and compiling reports
Natural Ventilation
Scheduled natural ventilation and infiltration

Calculated natural ventilation
Daylighting
Introduction to Daylighting
Detailed HVAC
Introduction to Detailed HVAC

Activity setpoints, fresh air settings and HVAC Zone groups
Adding zone equipment
Introduction to HVAC loops
Hot water and plant loops, Boilers
Generic air loops, AHUs
Refrigeration cycle
Chilled water loops, Chillers and Fan Coil Units
Condenser loop, Cooling towers
Heated floors
CFD
Introduction to External CFD analysis
Other Video Learning Resources
Demo of DesignBuilder Simulation capabilities

Getting started tutorials
DesignBuilder Webinars
Note: These Tutorials and Webinars are also available on the Learn section of the DesignBuilder website and
on the DesignBuilder YouTube Channel
FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

An up-to-date Knowledgebase is available in the Support section of the DesignBuilder web site.
- 1192 -

DesignBuilderPrintableManualv4 5A4

Uploaded by

Document Informationclick to expand document informationDesign builder para calculos en edificios

Document Informationclick to expand document information

Copyright:

Available Formats

DesignBuilderPrintableManualv4 5A4

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

DesignBuilderPrintableManualv4 5A4

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

DesignBuilder EnergyPlus Simulation

DesignBuilder No part of the manual is to be copied or reproduced in any form without

Operation ............................................................................................................... 243

VAV Systems ......................................................................................................... 308

Tariff ....................................................................................................................... 375

General .................................................................................................................. 495

Operation ............................................................................................................... 531

Flow Settings.......................................................................................................... 695

Ground Domain ...................................................................................................... 864

Double Skin Facades ........................................................................................... 1064

Welcome to DesignBuilder v4.5

Calculating building energy consumption.

DesignBuilder uses the EnergyPlus dynamic simulation engine to

Learn About DesignBuilder

Watch the Getting Started Tutorials.

RECENT FILES (OPENING SCREEN)

You can also:

Create a new file (site) from this screen.

Opening Screen - Recent Files

See also the Introducing DesignBuilder User Interface Tutorial

Learning Mode Off

LICENSING & ACTIVATION

For details on how to licence the software please read on.

Here select the Activation code option and press Next.

Select the Licence file option and press Next.

Press the Finish button to complete the action.

Select the Site network licence option and press Next.

On the second page enter:

Either the name of the server or its IP address.

The port number which will usually be 5303.

More Detailed Information on Licensing

Setting up a Licence Server for Site network licenses

Single User Licences

Setting up a Licence Server for Site Network Licenses

The above steps are detailed below.

If your server cannot access the Internet

Obtain your server hostid by running the command rlmutil rlmhostid -q 32

Running the RLM Server

Running RLM as a Service

More on this in the License Manager FAQs at http://www.reprisesoftware.com/support/faq.php

RLM Server Admin Interface

Adding a lic file for extra seats

Setting up Client Machines

Model data hierarchy and data inheritance

MODEL DATA HIERARCHY & DATA INHERITANCE

Partition data inheritance

TEMPLATES AND COMPONENTS

Templates are databases of typical generic data.

You can model an entire building as a single block:

And then cut the block into storeys:

NAVIGATING BUILDING MODELS

There are various ways of navigating (moving around) DesignBuilder models:

See also HVAC Component Hierarchy and Navigation.

CUSTOMISING MODEL OPTIONS

Create new site.

CREATE NEW SITE

Create new site - Location